http://manuals.info.apple.com/da_DK/iphone_brugerhandbog.pdf

Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :

Apple-Power-Macintosh-User-s-Guide-8500-series-computers

Apple-MacBook_Pro_17inch_Early2011_F

Apple-nikeipod_guide_benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_fr

Apple-ipad_2_manual_do_usuario-Para-o-Software-iOS-4-3

Apple-iPhone_Deux_doigts_d_astuces

Apple-MacBook_13inch_UsersGuide

Apple-iPodshuffledelutilisateur

Apple-Guide_de_l_utilisateur_des_formules_et_des_fonctions

Apple-iPhone-User-Guide-For-iOS-6-Software

Apple-iPhone-Manual-del-usuario-Para-el-software-iOS-5-1

Apple-iPhone-Benutzerhandbuch-Fur-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Enterprise_Deployment_Guide_CH

Apple-iphone_manuali_i_perdoruesit

Apple-iphone_user_guide_bg

Apple-iphone_manual_do_usuario

Apple-iPhone_Anvandarhandbok

Apple-iphone_user_guide_ta

Apple-iphone_4s_il_mondo_tra_le_dita

Apple-iPhone-OS-Enterprise-Deployment-Guide-Second-Edition-for-Version-3-2-or-later

Apple-iPhone_Bluetooth_Headset_Manual_del_usuario

Apple-iPhone_3G_Important_Product_Information_Guide_en_US

Apple-iphone_4s_informations_importantes_sur_le_produit

Apple-Case-Design-Guidelines

Apple-ipad_brugerhandbog

Apple-ipod_touch_user_guide_ta

Apple-macbook_air-13-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-iphone_4s_podstawy

Apple-ipad_user_guide_ch

Apple-ipod_touch_user_guide_cn

Apple-Manuel_de_l'utilisateur_de_Final_Cut_Server

Apple-iMac_G5_de_lutilisateur

Apple-Cinema_Tools_4.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-Personal-LaserWriter300-User-s-Guide

Apple-QuickTake-100-User-s-Guide-for-Macintosh

Apple-User-s-Guide-Macintosh-LC-630-DOS-Compatible

Apple-iPhone_iOS3.1_User_Guide

Apple-iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide

Apple-iPod_shuffle_Features_Guide_F

Liste-documentation-apple

Apple-Premiers_contacts_avec_iMovie_08

Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br

Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info

Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage

Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F

Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F

Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2

Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide

Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner

Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur

Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide

Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement

Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f

Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok

Manuale Utente PowerBookG4

Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e

Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch

Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug

Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion

Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier

AppleTV_Setup-Guide

Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f

Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive

Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur

Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD

Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide

Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites

Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software

Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration

Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE

Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID

Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1

PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE

Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3

Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération

Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE

Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7  Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000

Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010

Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE

Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS

Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE

Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4

Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation

User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software

iPhone Brugerhåndbog Til iOS 5.1-softwareIndholdsfortegnelse 9 Kapitel 1: iPhone i grundtræk 9 Oversigt over iPhone 9 Tilbehør 10 Knapper 12 Symboler for status 14 Kapitel 2: Introduktion 14 Se brugerhåndbogen på iPhone 14 Hvad du behøver 14 Installere SIM-kortet 15 Indstilling og aktivering 15 Slutte iPhone til computeren 16 Oprette forbindelse til internettet 16 Indstille e-post- og andre konti 16 Administrere indhold på iOS-enheder 16 iCloud 18 Synkronisere med iTunes 19 Kapitel 3: Alt det grundlæggende 19 Bruge programmer 22 Tilpasse hjemmeskærmen 24 Skrive 27 Diktering 28 Udskrive 29 Søge 30 Stemmekontrol 31 Meddelelser 32 Twitter 33 Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon 33 AirPlay 34 Bluetooth-enheder 35 Batteri 36 Sikkerhedsfunktioner 38 Rengøre iPhone 38 Genstarte og nulstille iPhone 39 Kapitel 4: Siri 39 Hvad er Siri? 40 Bruge Siri 43 Rette Siri 44 Siri og programmer 55 Diktering 257 Kapitel 5: Telefon 57 Telefonopkald 61 FaceTime 62 Visuel telefonsvarer 63 Kontakter 63 Favoritter 64 Viderestil opkald, Opkald venter og Nummer 65 Ringetoner, kontakten Ring/stille og vibration 65 Internationale opkald 66 Vælge indstillinger til Telefon 67 Kapitel 6: Mail 67 Se efter og læse e-post 68 Arbejde med flere konti 68 Sende e-post 69 Bruge henvisninger og registrerede data 69 Se bilag 69 Udskrive beskeder og bilag 70 Organisere e-post 70 Søge i e-post 71 E-post-konti og -indstillinger 73 Kapitel 7: Safari 73 Se websider 74 Henvisninger 74 Læseliste 74 Læser 75 Skrive tekst og udfylde formularer 75 Søge 75 Bogmærker og historie 75 Udskrive websider, PDF-dokumenter og andre dokumenter 75 Webklip 77 Kapitel 8: Musik 77 Tilføje musik og lyd 77 Afspille sange og anden lyd 79 Ekstra betjeningsmuligheder til lyd 79 Betjeningsmuligheder til podcasts og lydbøger 80 Bruge Siri eller stemmekontrol med Musik 80 Gennemse albumbilleder i Cover Flow 80 Vise spor i et album 81 Søge i lydindhold 81 iTunes Match 81 Genius 82 Spillelister 82 Deling i hjemmet 84 Kapitel 9: Beskeder 84 Sende og modtage beskeder 85 Sende beskeder til en gruppe 86 Sende musik, videoer m.m. 86 Redigere samtaler 86 Søge i beskeder Indholdsfortegnelse 387 Kapitel 10: Kalender 87 Om Kalender 87 Vise dine kalendere 88 Tilføje begivenheder 88 Besvare invitationer 88 Søge i kalendere 89 Abonnere på kalendere 89 Importere kalenderbegivenheder fra Mail 89 Kalenderkonti og -indstillinger 91 Kapitel 11: Fotografier 91 Se fotografier og videoer 92 Vise lysbilledshow 92 Organisere fotografier og videoer 92 Dele fotografier og videoer 93 Udskrive fotografier 94 Kapitel 12: Kamera 94 Om Kamera 95 Tage fotografier og videoer 95 HDR-fotografier 95 Vise, dele og udskrive 96 Redigere fotografier 96 Tilpasse videoer 97 Overføre fotografier og videoer til din computer 97 Fotostream 98 Kapitel 13: YouTube 98 Om YouTube 98 Gennemse og søge efter videoer 99 Afspille videoer 99 Holde styr på de videoer, du kan lide 100 Dele videoer, kommentarer og vurderinger 100 Se oplysninger om en video 100 Sende videoer til YouTube 101 Kapitel 14: Værdipapirer 101 Se kurser 102 Få flere oplysninger 103 Kapitel 15: Kort 103 Finde lokaliteter 104 Få vejvisning 105 Få og dele oplysninger om en lokalitet 105 Vise trafikforhold 106 Kortoversigter 107 Kapitel 16: Vejr 107 Få oplysninger om vejret 108 Kapitel 17: Noter 108 Om Noter 4 Indholdsfortegnelse108 Skrive noter 109 Læse og redigere noter 109 Søge i noter 109 Udskrive og sende noter med e-post 110 Kapitel 18: Ur 110 Om Ur 110 Indstille verdensure 110 Indstille alarmer 111 Bruge stopuret 111 Indstille tidtagning 112 Kapitel 19: Påmindelser 112 Om Påmindelser 112 Indstille en påmindelse 113 Administrere påmindelser i listeoversigt 114 Administrere påmindelser i datooversigt 114 Om lokalitetspåmindelser 114 Administrere udførte påmindelser 114 Søge i påmindelser 116 Kapitel 20: Game Center 116 Om Game Center 116 Logge ind i Game Center 117 Købe og hente spil 117 Spille spil 117 Spille med venner 118 Indstillinger til Game Center 119 Kapitel 21: iTunes Store 119 Om iTunes Store 119 Finde musik, videoer m.m. 120 Købe musik, lydbøger og toner 120 Købe eller leje videoer 120 Følge kunstnere og venner 121 Streame eller hente podcasts 121 Kontrollere status for overførsel 122 Ændre knapperne nederst på skærmen 122 Vise kontooplysninger 122 Kontrollere overførsler 123 Kapitel 22: Bladkiosk 123 Om Bladkiosk 123 Læse de nyeste numre 125 Kapitel 23: App Store 125 Om App Store 125 Søge efter og hente programmer 126 Slette programmer 127 Butiksindstillinger Indholdsfortegnelse 5128 Kapitel 24: Kontakter 128 Om Kontakter 128 Synkronisere kontakter 129 Søge efter kontakter 129 Tilføje og redigere kontakter 130 Samlede kontakter 130 Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger 131 Kapitel 25: Videoer 131 Om videoer 131 Afspille videoer 132 Søge efter videoer 132 Se lejede film 132 Se videoer på et fjernsyn 133 Slette videoer fra iPhone 133 Bruge Deling i hjemmet 133 Indstille et interval for vågeblus 134 Konvertere videoer til iPhone 135 Kapitel 26: Lommeregner 135 Bruge Lommeregner 135 Videnskabelig lommeregner 136 Kapitel 27: Kompas 136 Om Kompas 136 Kalibrere kompasset 136 Finde retningen 137 Bruge Kompas med Kort 138 Kapitel 28: Memoer 138 Om memoer 138 Optage 139 Lytte til en optagelse 139 Administrere og dele optagelser 139 Dele memoer med computeren 140 Kapitel 29: Nike + iPod 140 Om Nike + iPod 140 Aktivere Nike + iPod 140 Oprette forbindelse til en sensor 141 Træne med Nike + iPod 141 Kalibrere Nike + iPod 141 Sende træningsdata til nikeplus.com 142 Kapitel 30: iBooks 142 Om iBooks 142 Bruge iBookstore 142 Synkronisere bøger og PDF-dokumenter 143 Læse bøger 144 Ændre en bogs udseende 145 Udskrive eller sende et PDF-dokument via e-post 145 Organisere bogreolen 6 Indholdsfortegnelse147 Kapitel 31: Tilgængelighed 147 Funktioner til universel adgang 147 VoiceOver 157 Dirigere lyden i indkommende opkald 158 Siri 158 Tredobbelt klik Hjem 158 Zoom 159 Stor tekst 159 Hvid på sort 159 Læs det valgte op 159 Oplæs auto-tekst 159 Monolyd 159 Kompatibilitet med høreapparater 160 Specielle vibrationer 160 LED-flash for advarsler 160 AssistiveTouch 161 Universel adgang i OS X 161 TTY-understøttelse 161 Minimumsskriftstørrelse til e-post-beskeder 162 Ringetoner, der kan tildeles 162 Visuel telefonsvarer 162 Tastaturer i bredt format 162 Stor numerisk blok på telefon 162 Stemmekontrol 162 Closed captioning 163 Kapitel 32: Indstillinger 163 Flyfunktion 163 Wi-Fi 164 Meddelelser 165 Lokalitetstjenester 165 VPN 166 Internetdeling 166 Operatør 166 Lyde og kontakten Ring/stille 167 Lysstyrke 167 Baggrund 167 Generelt 173 Indstillinger til programmer 174 Appendiks A: Internationale tastaturer 174 Tilføje og fjerne tastaturer 174 Skifte tastaturer 174 Kinesisk 176 Japansk 176 Skrive emoji-tegn 176 Bruge kandidatlisten 176 Bruge genveje: 176 Vietnamesisk Indholdsfortegnelse 7178 Appendiks B: Support og andre oplysninger 178 Websted med support til iPhone 178 Genstarte og nulstille iPhone 178 Sikkerhedskopiere iPhone 180 Opdatere og gendanne software til iPhone 180 Arkivdeling 181 Oplysninger om sikkerhed, software og service 182 Bruge iPhone i et virksomhedsmiljø 182 Bruge iPhone med andre operatører 182 Oplysninger om bortskaffelse og genbrug 183 Apple og miljøet 183 iPhones driftstemperatur 8 IndholdsfortegnelseiPhone i grundtræk 1 Oversigt over iPhone Stik til hovedsæt Modtager Kontakten Ring/stille Mikrofon øverst Knapper til justering af lydstyrke Apple Retinaskærm Højttaler Knappen Hjem Kamera på forsiden Kamera på bagsiden LED-blitz Bakke til SIM-kort Dock-stik Knappen Til/fra Mikrofon nederst Programsymboler Statuslinje iPhone Funktionerne på iPhone og hjemmeskærmen kan se anderledes ud, afhængigt af hvilken model af iPhone du har, og om du har flyttet rundt på symbolerne på hjemmeskærmen. Tilbehør Følgende tilbehør følger med iPhone: Dockstik til USB-kabel Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon USB-strømforsyning SIM-værktøj 9Emne Hvad du kan gøre med det Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon Lyt til musik, videoer og telefonsamtaler. Se “Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon” på side 33. Dock-stik til USB-kabel Brug dette kabel til at slutte iPhone til computeren for at synkronisere og oplade. Kablet kan bruges med en dock (ekstraudstyr) eller sluttes direkte til iPhone. USB-strømforsyning Slut strømforsyningen til iPhone vha. det medfølgende kabel, og slut den derefter til en stikkontakt for at oplade iPhone. SIM-værktøj (medfølger ikke i alle lande og områder). Skub SIM-bakken ud. Knapper Knappen Til/fra Når du ikke bruger iPhone, kan du låse den for at slukke for skærmen, så du sparer på batteriet. Låse iPhone Tryk på knappen Til/fra. Når iPhone er låst, sker der ikke noget, hvis du rører skærmen. iPhone kan stadig modtage opkald, sms'er og andre opdateringer. Du kan også:  Lytte til musik.  Justere lydstyrken vha. knapperne på siden af iPhone (eller på øretelefonerne til iPhone), mens du fører en telefonsamtale eller lytter til musik.  Bruge knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone til at besvare eller afbryde opkald og til at styre afspilning af lyd (se “Afspille sange og anden lyd” på side 77). Knappen Til/fra Låse iPhone op Tryk på knappen Hjem eller Til/fra, og træk mærket. Åbne Kamera, når iPhone er låst Tryk på knappen Hjem eller Til/fra, og træk derefter opad. Få adgang til betjeningspanelet til lyd, når iPhone er låst Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem . Slukke for iPhone Tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra nede i et par sekunder, indtil det røde mærke vises, og træk mærket. Tænde iPhone Tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra nede, indtil Apple-logoet vises. Hvis du ikke rører skærmen i et minut, låses iPhone automatisk. Hvis du vil slå automatisk lås fra eller ændre den tid, der skal gå, før iPhone låses, skal du læse “Automatisk lås” på side 170. Hvis du vil indstille, at der skal kræves en adgangskode til at låse iPhone op, skal du se “Lås med kode” på side 170. Knappen Hjem Med knappen Hjem kan du altid vende tilbage til hjemmeskærmen. Den indeholder også nogle andre praktiske genveje. Gå til hjemmeskærmen: Tryk på knappen Hjem . 10 Kapitel 1 iPhone i grundtrækDu kan åbne et program på hjemmeskærmen med et enkelt tryk. Se “Åbne og skifte mellem programmer” på side 19. Vise multitaskinglinjen med de sidst brugte programmer Klik to gange på knappen Hjem , når iPhone er låst op. Vise betjeningspanelet til afspilning Når iPhone er låst: Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem . Se “Afspille sange og anden lyd” på side 77. Ved brug af et andet program: Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem , og svirp derefter programskifteren fra venstre mod højre. Starte Siri (iPhone 4S) eller Stemmekontrol Tryk på og hold knappen Hjem nede. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39 og “Stemmekontrol” på side 30. Knapper til justering af lydstyrke Når du taler i telefon eller lytter til musik, film eller andre medier, kan du justere lydstyrken vha. knapperne på siden af iPhone. Ellers bruges lydstyrkeknapperne til ringetonen, påmindelser og andre lydeffekter. ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du undgår høretab, i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Skru op Skru ned Du begrænser lydstyrken på musik og videoer ved at gå til Indstillinger > Musik. Du kan også bruge knappen skru op til at tage et billede eller optage en video. Se “Tage fotografier og videoer” på side 95. Kontakten Ring/stille Skub kontakten Ring/stille for at skifte funktion på iPhone mellem ringelyd og stille funktion . Ring Stille Når iPhone er indstillet til ringelyd, afspiller den alle lyde. Når iPhone er indstillet til stille funktion, ringer den ikke, og den afspiller ingen lyd eller andre lydeffekter. Vigtigt: Urets alarmer, lydprogrammer som f.eks. Musik og mange spil afspiller stadig lyd gennem den indbyggede højttaler, når iPhone er indstillet til stille funktion. Der findes oplysninger om ændring af lyd- og vibrationsindstillingerne i “Lyde og kontakten Ring/ stille” på side 166. Kapitel 1 iPhone i grundtræk 11Symboler for status Symbolerne på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen viser oplysninger om iPhone: Symbol for status Hvad det betyder Signalstyrke på mobilnet* Viser, om du er inden for rækkevidde af mobilnetværket, så du kan foretage og modtage opkald. Jo flere streger, jo bedre er signalet. Hvis der ikke er noget signal, erstattes stregerne af ordene “Ingen tjeneste”. Flyfunktion Viser, at flyfunktion er slået til – dvs. at du ikke kan bruge telefonen, få adgang til internettet eller bruge Bluetooth®- enheder. De funktioner, som ikke bruger trådløs teknologi, kan bruges. Se “Flyfunktion” på side 163. UMTS Viser, at operatørens 4G UMTS-netværk (GSM) er tilgængeligt, og at iPhone kan oprette forbindelse til internettet via netværket. (Kun iPhone 4S. Ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder.) Se “Netværk” på side 168. UMTS/EV-DO Viser, at operatørens 3G UMTS- (GSM) eller EV-DOnetværk (CDMA) er tilgængeligt, og at iPhone kan oprette forbindelse til internettet via det netværk. Se “Netværk” på side 168. EDGE Viser, at operatørens EDGE-netværk (GSM) er tilgængeligt, og at iPhone kan oprette forbindelse til internettet via netværket. Se “Netværk” på side 168. GPRS/1xRTT Viser, at operatørens GPRS- (GSM) eller 1xRTT-netværk (CDMA) er tilgængeligt, og at iPhone kan oprette forbindelse til internettet via det netværk. Se “Netværk” på side 168. Wi-Fi* Viser, at iPhone har forbindelse til internettet via et WiFi-netværk. Jo flere streger, jo bedre er forbindelsen. Se “Wi-Fi” på side 163. Internetdeling Viser, at iPhone er forbundet med en anden iPhone, der leverer internetdeling. Se “Internetdeling” på side 166. Synkroniserer Viser, at iPhone synkroniseres med iTunes. Netværksaktivitet Viser netværksaktiviteten. Nogle programmer fra tredjeparter bruger evt. også symbolet til at vise en aktiv proces. Viderestil opkald Viser, at Viderestil opkald er indstillet på iPhone. Se “Viderestille opkald” på side 64. VPN Viser at du har forbindelse til et netværk vha. VPN. Se “Netværk” på side 168. Lås Viser, at iPhone er låst. Se “Knappen Til/fra” på side 10. TTY Viser, at iPhone er indstillet til at arbejde med en TTYenhed. Se “TTY-understøttelse” på side 161. 12 Kapitel 1 iPhone i grundtrækSymbol for status Hvad det betyder Afspil Viser, at en sang, lydbog eller podcast afspilles. Se “Afspille sange og anden lyd” på side 77. Låst i stående format Viser, at skærmen på iPhone er låst i stående format. Se “Bruge stående eller liggende format” på side 21. Alarm Viser, at der er indstillet en alarm. Se “Indstille alarmer” på side 110. Lokalitetstjenester Viser, at et emne bruger lokalitetstjenester. Se “Lokalitetstjenester” på side 165. Bluetooth* Blåt eller hvidt symbol: Bluetooth er slået til og parret med en enhed. Gråt symbol: Bluetooth er slået til og parret med en enhed, men enheden er uden for rækkevidde eller slukket. Intet symbol: Bluetooth er slået fra eller ikke parret med en enhed. Se “Bluetooth-enheder” på side 34. Bluetooth-batteri Viser batteriniveauet på en understøttet parret Bluetoothenhed. Batteri Viser batteriets spændingsniveau eller status for opladning. Se “Batteri” på side 35. *Brug af visse tilbehør med iPhone kan påvirke den trådløse forbindelse. Kapitel 1 iPhone i grundtræk 13Introduktion 2 ADVARSEL: For at undgå skader skal du læse hele betjeningsvejledningen i denne håndbog og oplysningerne om sikkerhed i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger til iPhone på www.apple. com/dk/support/manuals/iphone, før du bruger iPhone. · Se brugerhåndbogen på iPhone Brugerhåndbogen til iPhone kan ses på iPhone i Safari og i det gratis program iBooks. Se brugerhåndbogen i Safari: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på bogmærket til brugerhåndbogen til iPhone. Du kan anbringe et symbol for håndbogen på hjemmeskærmen ved at trykke på og derefter trykke på “Føj til hjemmeskærm”. Du ser håndbogen på et andet sprog ved at trykke på “Skift sprog” på indholdssiden. Se brugerhåndbogen i iBooks: Hvis du ikke har installeret iBooks, skal du åbne App Store og søge efter og installere “iBooks”. Åbn iBooks, og tryk på Butik. Søg efter “Brugerhåndbog til iPhone”, og vælg og hent derefter håndbogen. Du kan få flere oplysninger om iBooks i Kapitel 30,“iBooks,” på side 142. Hvad du behøver Før du kan bruge iPhone, skal du have følgende:  Et abonnement på trådløse tjenester hos en operatør, der tilbyder tjenester til iPhone i dit område  En Apple-id (til nogle funktioner), som kan oprettes under indstilling  En Mac eller pc med en USB 2.0-port og et af følgende operativsystemer:  Mac OS X v10.5.8 eller en nyere version  Windows 7, Windows Vista eller Windows XP Home eller Professional (SP3)  En internetforbindelse til computeren (bredbånd anbefales)  iTunes 10.5 eller en nyere version (til nogle funktioner) fra www.apple.com/dk/itunes/download Installere SIM-kortet Hvis du har modtaget et SIM-kort, skal du installere det, før du indstiller iPhone. 14Vigtigt: Du skal bruge et SIM-kort for at kunne bruge mobiltjenester, når du opretter forbindelse til GSM-netværk og nogle CDMA-netværk. En iPhone 4S, som er aktiveret på et trådløst CDMAnetværk, bruger muligvis også et SIM-kort til at oprette forbindelse til et GSM-netværk, især til international roaming. iPhone er underlagt de betingelser, som udbyderen af den trådløse tjeneste har fastsat, hvilket kan medføre begrænsninger i skift af tjenesteudbydere og roaming, selv efter ophør af en tvungen bindingsperiode. Kontakt udbyderen af den trådløse tjeneste for at få flere oplysninger. Tilgængelige mobilfunktioner afhænger af det trådløse netværk. Installere SIM-kortet i iPhone 4S Micro SIM-kort Bakke til Micro SIM-kort Papirklips eller SIM-værktøj Installere SIM-kortet: Sæt enden af en lille papirklips eller SIM-værktøjet i hullet på bakken til SIM-kortet. Træk bakken til SIM-kortet ud, og læg SIM-kortet i bakken som vist. Når bakken er justeret, og SIM-kortet sidder øverst, skal du forsigtigt skubbe bakken på plads. Indstilling og aktivering Du indstiller og aktiverer iPhone ved at tænde iPhone og følge vejledningen i indstillingsassistenten. Indstillingsassistenten fører dig gennem indstillingen, inkl. oprettelse af forbindelse til et Wi-Fi-netværk, oprettelse af en gratis Apple-id eller log ind på en iCloud-konto, indstilling af iCloud, aktivering af anbefalede funktioner som Lokalitetstjenester og Find min iPhone, og aktiverer iPhone hos operatøren. Du kan også gendanne fra en iCloud- eller iTunessikkerhedskopi under indstillingen. Aktivering kan foretages via et Wi-Fi-netværk eller med iPhone 4S via operatørens mobilnetværk (ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder). Hvis ingen af dem er tilgængelige, skal du slutte iPhone til computeren for at aktivere den. Slutte iPhone til computeren Hvis du ikke har Wi-Fi-adgang eller mobil adgang, kan det være nødvendigt at slutte iPhone til computeren for at færdiggøre aktiveringen. Når du slutter iPhone til computeren, kan du også synkronisere oplysninger, musik og andet indhold med iTunes. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Slutte iPhone til computeren: Brug Dock-stik til USB-kablet, der fulgte med iPhone. Kapitel 2 Introduktion 15Oprette forbindelse til internettet iPhone opretter forbindelse til internettet, når det er nødvendigt, vha. en Wi-Fi-forbindelse (hvis den findes) eller operatørens mobilnetværk. Der findes oplysninger om, hvordan du opretter forbindelse til et Wi-Fi-netværk, i “Wi-Fi” på side 163. Bemærk: Hvis der ikke er en Wi-Fi-forbindelse til internettet, kan visse funktioner og tjenester i iPhone overføre data via operatørens mobilnetværk, hvilket kan medføre ekstra omkostninger. Kontakt operatøren for at få oplysninger om priser på abonnement på mobildata. Der er oplysninger om, hvordan du administrerer brug af mobildata, i “Netværk” på side 168. Indstille e-post- og andre konti iPhone fungerer med iCloud, Microsoft Exchange og mange af de mest populære internetbaserede e-post-, kontakt- og kalendertjenester. Hvis du ikke har en e-post-konto, kan du indstille en gratis iCloud-konto, når du indstiller iPhone, men du kan også gøre det senere i Indstillinger > iCloud. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Indstille en iCloud-konto: Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud. Indstille en anden konto: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere. Du kan tilføje kontakter vha. en LDAP- eller CardDAV-konto, hvis dit firma understøtter det. Se “Synkronisere kontakter” på side 128. Du kan tilføje en CalDAV-kalenderkonto, og du kan abonnere på iCal-kalendere (.ics) eller importere dem fra Mail. Se “Abonnere på kalendere” på side 89. Administrere indhold på iOS-enheder Du kan overføre oplysninger og arkiver mellem iOS-enheder og computere vha. iCloud eller iTunes.  iCloud opbevarer indhold som musik, fotografier m.m. og overfører dem trådløst med pushfunktion til dine andre iOS-enheder og computere, så alt automatisk forbliver ajour. Se “iCloud” nedenfor.  iTunes synkroniserer musik, video, fotografier m.m. mellem en computer og iPhone. De ændringer, du foretager på en enhed, kopieres til den anden, når du synkroniserer. Du kan også bruge iTunes til at kopiere et arkiv til iPhone til brug med et program eller til at kopiere et dokument oprettet på iPhone til din computer. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Du kan bruge iCloud eller iTunes, eller begge, afhængigt af dine behov. Du kan f.eks. bruge iCloud Fotostream til automatisk at overføre fotografier, du tager med iPhone, til dine enheder, og du kan bruge iTunes til at synkronisere fotoalbum fra din computer til iPhone. Bemærk: Du bør ikke synkronisere emner i infovinduet i iTunes (f.eks. kontakter, kalendere og noter) og samtidig bruge iCloud til at holde disse oplysninger ajour på dine enheder. Ellers kan det resultere i dublerede data. iCloud iCloud opbevarer dit indhold, inkl. musik, fotografier, kontakter, kalendere og understøttede dokumenter. Indhold lagret i iCloud overføres trådløst til dine andre iOS-enheder og computere, der er indstillet med den samme iCloud-konto. 16 Kapitel 2 IntroduktioniCloud kan bruges med iOS 5-enheder, med Mac-computere, der bruger OS X Lion v10.7.2 eller en nyere version og med pc'er med iCloud-kontrolpanelet til Windows (Windows Vista Service Pack 2 eller Windows 7 kræves). iClouds funktioner omfatter:  iTunes i netskyen – hent tidligere købt iTunes-musik og tv-udsendelser til iPhone gratis, når du vil.  Programmer og bøger – hent tidligere køb i App Store og iBookstore til iPhone gratis, når du vil.  Fotostream – fotografier taget på en enhed vises automatisk på alle dine enheder. Se “Fotostream” på side 97.  Dokumenter i netskyen – til programmer, der kan arbejde med iCloud – hold dokumenter og programdata ajour på alle dine enheder.  Mail, kontakter, kalendere – hold dine kontakter, kalendere, noter og påmindelser ajour på alle dine enheder.  Sikkerhedskopiering – sikkerhedskopier automatisk iPhone til iCloud, når den er sluttet til en oplader og har Wi-Fi-forbindelse. Se “Sikkerhedskopiere iPhone” på side 178.  Find min iPhone – find din iPhone på et kort, vis en besked, afspil en lyd, lås skærmen eller slet dataene eksternt. Se “Find min iPhone” på side 37.  Find mine venner – del din position med dem, der er vigtige for dig. Hent det gratis program fra App Store.  iTunes Match – med et abonnement på iTunes Match vises al din musik, inkl. musik importeret fra cd'er eller købt andre steder end i iTunes, på alle dine enheder og kan hentes og afspilles, når du har lyst. Se “iTunes Match” på side 81. Med iCloud får du en gratis e-post-konto og 5 GB lagringsplads til din e-post, dine dokumenter og sikkerhedskopier. Den musik og de programmer, tv-udsendelser og bøger, du har købt, samt din Fotostream tæller ikke med i den gratis plads. Hvis du har et MobileMe-abonnement, kan du flytte det til iCloud fra en Mac eller pc på www.me.com/move indtil 30. juni 2012. Bemærk: iCloud findes ikke i alle områder, og funktioner i iCloud kan variere efter områder. Logge ind på eller oprette en iCloud-konto: Tryk på iCloud i Indstillinger. Slå iCloud-tjenester til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud. Slå iCloud-sikkerhedskopiering til Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk. Finde din iPhone Besøg www.icloud.com, log ind med dit Apple-id, og vælg derefter Find min iPhone. Vigtigt: Find min iPhone skal slås til på iPhone i Indstillinger > iCloud, før man kan finde iPhone. Købe ekstra lagringsplads i iCloud Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og tryk på Lagringsplads. Du kan finde oplysninger om køb af lagringsplads på iCloud i help.apple.com/dk/icloud. Se og hente tidligere indkøb i iTunes Store Gå til iTunes, og tryk på Purchased. Se og hente tidligere indkøb i App Store Gå til App Store, tryk på Opdateringer og derefter på Purchased. Se og hente tidligere indkøb i iBookstore Gå til iBooks, tryk på Butik og derefter på Purchased. Slå automatisk overførsler til for musik, programmer eller bøger Gå til Indstillinger > Butik. Kapitel 2 Introduktion 17Der findes flere oplysninger om iCloud på www.apple.com/dk/icloud. Du kan få supportoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/icloud. Synkronisere med iTunes Når du synkroniserer med iTunes, kopieres oplysninger fra computeren til iPhone og vice versa. Du kan synkronisere ved at slutte iPhone til computeren vha. Dock-stik til USB-kablet, eller du kan indstille iTunes til at synkronisere trådløst vha. Wi-Fi. Du kan indstille iTunes til at synkronisere musik, fotografier, video, podcasts, programmer m.m. Du kan få oplysninger om, hvordan iPhone synkroniseres med en computer, hvis du åbner iTunes og vælger iTunes-hjælp på Hjælpemenuen. Indstille trådløs iTunes-synkronisering: Slut iPhone til computeren med Dock-stik til USB-kablet. I iTunes skal du slå “Synkroniser med Wi-Fi” til i enhedens Resumevindue. Når Wi-Fi-synkronisering er slået til, synkroniserer iPhone automatisk hver dag. iPhone skal være sluttet til en stikkontakt, og iPhone og computeren skal være sluttet til det samme trådløse netværk, og iTunes skal være åbent på computeren. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “iTunes Wi-Fisynkronisering” på side 169. Gode råd til synkronisering med iTunes  Hvis du bruger iCloud til at opbevare kontakter, kalendere, bogmærker og noter, skal du ikke også synkronisere dem til din enhed vha. iTunes.  Indkøb, som du foretager på iPhone i iTunes Store eller App Store, synkroniseres tilbage til iTunes-biblioteket. Du kan også købe eller hente indhold og programmer fra iTunes Store til computeren og derefter synkronisere det til iPhone.  I vinduet Resume til enheden kan du indstille iTunes til automatisk at synkronisere enheden, når den sluttes til computeren. Du kan midlertidigt tilsidesætte denne indstilling ved at holde Kommando og Alternativ (Mac) eller Skift og Ctrl (pc) nede, indtil iPhone vises på oversigten.  Vælg “Krypter iPhone-sikkerhedskopi” i vinduet Resume til enheden, hvis du vil kryptere de oplysninger, der opbevares på computeren, når iTunes fremstiller en sikkerhedskopi. Krypterede sikkerhedskopier vises med et symbol for en lås , og der kræves en adgangskode for at gendanne sikkerhedskopien. Hvis du ikke vælger denne mulighed, inkluderes adgangskoder (til f.eks. e-post-konti) ikke i sikkerhedskopien, og du vil derfor skulle indtaste dem igen, hvis du bruger sikkerhedskopien til gendannelse af enheden.  I enhedens infovindue vises kun de indstillinger, der overføres fra computeren til iPhone, når du synkroniserer e-post-konti. De ændringer, du foretager i en e-post-konto på iPhone, får ingen betydning for kontoen på computeren.  I enhedens infovindue skal du klikke på Avanceret for at vælge indstillinger, så du kan erstatte oplysningerne på iPhone med oplysningerne på din computer under næste synkronisering.  Hvis du lytter til en del af en podcast eller lydbog, bliver oplysninger om det sted, du er nået til, også synkroniseret, når du synkroniserer indhold med iTunes. Hvis du er begyndt at lytte til historien på iPhone, kan du fortsætte fra det sted, du er nået til, vha. iTunes på computeren – eller omvendt.  I vinduet Fotografier til enheden kan du synkronisere fotografier og videoer fra en mappe på computeren. 18 Kapitel 2 IntroduktionAlt det grundlæggende 3 Bruge programmer Multi-Touch-skærmen med høj opløsning og enkle fingerbevægelser gør det nemt at bruge programmer på iPhone. Åbne og skifte mellem programmer Tryk på knappen Hjem for at gå til hjemmeskærmen og se dine programmer. Åbne et program: Tryk på det. Du vender tilbage til hjemmeskærmen ved at trykke på knappen Hjem igen. Svirp til venstre eller højre for at se andre hjemmeskærme. Svirp til venstre eller højre for at skifte til en anden hjemmeskærm. Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem for at se multitaskinglinjen, som viser de senest brugte programmer. Tryk på et program for at åbne det igen, eller svirp for at se flere programmer. Nyligt brugte programmer 19Fjerne et program fra multitaskinglinjen Hold en finger på programsymbolet, indtil det begynder at vrikke, og tryk derefter på . Når du fjerner et program fra multitaskinglinjen, afbrydes programmet også. Rulle Træk op eller ned for at rulle. Nogle steder, f.eks. på websider, kan du også rulle sidelæns. Når du ruller ved at føre en finger over skærmen, bliver der ikke valgt eller aktiveret nogen emner på skærmen. Svirp for at rulle hurtigt. Du kan vente, til rulningen holder op, eller røre skærmen for at stoppe rulningen med det samme. Når du rører ved skærmen for at stoppe rulning, vælger eller aktiverer du ikke noget. Du ruller hurtigt til toppen af en side ved at trykke på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen. Træk fingeren langs indekset for at rulle hurtigt. Tryk på et bogstav for at hoppe til en sektion. 20 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeTryk på et emne på en liste for at vælge det. Når du trykker på et emne, kan der ske forskellige ting, afhængigt af hvilken liste det er – måske åbnes der en ny liste, afspilles en sang, åbnes en e-post-besked, eller en bestemt persons kontaktoplysninger vises, så du kan ringe til vedkommende. Zoome ind og ud Når du ser fotografier, websider, e-post eller kort, kan du zoome ind og ud. Knib ind eller ud med fingrene. Ved fotografier og websider kan du trykke to gange hurtigt efter hinanden for at zoome ind og derefter trykke to gange igen for at zoome ud. Med kort kan du trykke to gange for at zoome ind og trykke en gang med to fingre for at zoome ud. Zoom er også en speciel funktion til handicappede, som sikrer, at du kan forstørre skærmen med alle de programmer, du bruger, så du bedre kan se, hvad der er på skærmen. Se “Zoom” på side 158. Bruge stående eller liggende format Med mange iPhone-programmer kan du bruge skærmen i liggende eller stående format. Vend iPhone om på siden, hvorefter skærmen også vendes og automatisk justeres, så den passer til den nye skærmretning. Du foretrækker måske liggende format, f.eks. når du ser websider i Safari eller skriver tekst. Websider skaleres til den bredere skærm i liggende format, hvilket gør teksten og billederne større. Tastaturet på skærmen er også større. Film, der vises i Videoer og YouTube, vises kun i liggende format. Gadeoversigter i Kort vises også kun i liggende format. Låse skærmen i stående format: Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem , svirp hen over bunden af skærmen fra venstre mod højre, og tryk derefter på . Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 21Symbolet for låsen til stående format vises på statuslinjen, når skærmens retning er låst. Tilpasse hjemmeskærmen Flytte rundt på programmer Du kan ændre placeringen af programsymboler på hjemmeskærmen, inklusive programmerne i Dock langs bunden af skærmen. Hvis du vil, kan du anbringe dem på flere hjemmeskærme. Du kan også organisere programmer ved at samle dem i mapper. Ændre rækkefølge på symboler: 1 Hold fingeren på et symbol på hjemmeskærmen, indtil det begynder at vrikke. 2 Skift rækkefølge på programmerne ved at trække dem. 3 Tryk på knappen Hjem for at arkivere. Flytte et symbol til en anden skærm Når du ændrer rækkefølge på symbolerne, kan du trække et program til siden af skærmen. Oprette flere hjemmeskærme Når du ændrer rækkefølge på programmerne, kan du svirpe til hjemmeskærmen længst til højre og trække et program til højre side af skærmen. Du kan oprette op til 11 hjemmeskærme. Nulstille din hjemmeskærm til standardlayoutet Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil hjemmeskærmens layout. Hvis du nulstiller hjemmeskærmen, fjernes alle de mapper, du har oprettet, og standardbaggrunden anvendes på hjemmeskærmen. Du kan føje symboler til hjemmeskærmen til åbning af dine yndlingswebsider. Se “Webklip” på side 75. Når iPhone er sluttet fysisk til computeren (med Dock-stik til USB-kablet), kan du tilpasse dine hjemmeskærme vha. iTunes. I iTunes skal du vælge iPhone på enhedslisten og klikke på fanen Programmer øverst på skærmen. Organisere med mapper Med mapper kan du organisere programmer på hjemmeskærmen. Du kan anbringe op til 12 programmer i en mappe. iPhone navngiver automatisk en mappe, når du opretter den, baseret på den kategori programmer, du bruger til oprettelse af mappen. Du kan altid ændre navnet. I lighed med programmer kan du flytte mapper ved at trække dem på hjemmeskærmen eller til Dock. 22 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeOprette en mappe: Hold fingeren på et program på hjemmeskærmen, indtil det begynder at vrikke, og træk derefter programmet til et andet program. iPhone opretter en ny mappe, som indeholder de to programmer, og viser mappens navn. Du kan trykke på navnefeltet og skrive et andet navn. Tryk på en mappe for at åbne den, og tryk derefter for at åbne et program i mappen. Du lukker en mappe ved at trykke uden for mappen eller trykke på knappen Hjem . Ved organisering af programmer: Føje et program til en mappe Træk programmet til mappen Fjerne et program fra en mappe Tryk for at åbne mappen, og træk derefter programmet ud af mappen. Slette en mappe Flyt alle programmer ud af mappen. Mappen slettes automatisk. Omdøbe en mappe Tryk for at åbne mappen, og tryk derefter på navnet for oven, og brug tastaturet til at indtaste et nyt navn. Når du er færdig med at organisere hjemmeskærmen, skal du trykke på knappen Hjem for at arkivere ændringerne. Tilføje baggrund Du kan indstille et billede eller fotografi som baggrund på låseskærmen. Du kan også indstille en baggrund til hjemmeskærmen. Du kan vælge et billede, som fulgte med iPhone, et fotografi fra kamerarullen eller et andet album på iPhone. Indstille baggrund: 1 I Indstillinger skal du vælge Baggrund, trykke på billedet af låse- og hjemmeskærmen og derefter trykke på Baggrund eller et album. 2 Tryk for at vælge et billede eller fotografi. Hvis du vælger et fotografi, skal du placere det ved at trække og zoome ind eller ud ved at knibe, indtil det har det ønskede udseende. 3 Tryk på Indstil, og vælg, om du vil bruge fotografiet som baggrund på låseskærmen, hjemmeskærmen eller begge dele. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 23Skrive Tastaturet på skærmen vises, når du skal skrive. Skrive tekst Brug tastaturet til at indtaste tekst. Tastaturet retter stavefejl, forudser, hvad du vil skrive, og lærer af det, du skriver. Afhængigt af det program du bruger, kan det intelligente tastatur foreslå rettelser, når du skriver, så du slipper for stave- og slåfejl. Skrive tekst: Tryk på et tekstfelt for at vise tastaturet, og tryk derefter på tastaturet. Når du skriver, vises hvert bogstav over din tommel- eller pegefinger. Hvis du rører ved den forkerte tast, kan du lade fingeren glide hen til den rigtige tast. Bogstavet bliver ikke skrevet, før du løfter fingeren fra tasten. Slette det forrige tegn: Tryk på . Skrive store bogstaver Tryk på Skift , før du skriver et bogstav. Eller rør ved og hold på Skiftetasten, og skub derefter til et bogstav. Skrive punktum og mellemrum hurtigt Tryk to gange på mellemrumstasten. Du kan slå denne funktion til og fra i Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur. Brug automatisk rettelse til at skrive “’ll” Skriv “lll”. Skriv f.eks. “indstilllinger” for at få “indstillinger”. Slå skiftelås til Tryk to gange på Skiftetasten . Tryk på Skiftetasten igen for at slå skiftelås fra. Du kan slå denne funktion til og fra i Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur. Indtaste tal, skilletegn og symboler Tryk på taltasten . Tryk på symboltasten for at se flere skilletegn og symboler. Definere indtastningsindstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur. Du skriver et andet tegn ved at holde fingeren på en tast og skubbe for at vælge en af mulighederne. Automatiske rettelser og stavekontrol iPhone retter på mange sprog automatisk stavefejl eller viser forslag løbende, mens du skriver. Når iPhone foreslår et ord, kan du acceptere forslaget uden at afbryde indtastningen. 24 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeBemærk: Du kan se en liste over understøttede sprog på www.apple.com/dk/iphone/specs.html. Foreslået ord Acceptere forslaget: Skriv et mellemrum, et skilletegn eller et returtegn. Afvise et forslag: Tryk på “x”. Hver gang du afviser et forslag til det samme ord, bliver det mere sandsynligt, at iPhone vil acceptere det ord, du har skrevet. iPhone understreger muligvis også ord, som du allerede har skrevet og måske har stavet forkert. Erstatte et forkert stavet ord Tryk på ordet, og tryk på en af de foreslåede rettelser. Hvis det ønskede ord ikke vises, skal du bare skrive det igen. Slå automatisk rettelse og stavekontrol til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur. Genveje og din personlige ordbog Med genveje kan du nøjes med at skrive et par tegn i stedet for et længere ord eller udtryk. Hele teksten vises, når du skriver genvejen. Genvejen “epv” bliver f.eks. til “Er på vej!” Oprette en genvej: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur, og tryk på Tilføj ny genvej. Føje et ord eller udtryk til din personlige ordbog, så iPhone ikke prøver at rette eller erstatte det: Opret genvejen, men lad feltet Genvej være tomt. Redigere en genvej Gå til Indstillinger > Tastatur, og tryk på genvejen. Redigere tekst Den berøringsfølsomme skærm gør det nemt at ændre tekst, du har skrevet. Et forstørrelsesglas på skærmen hjælper dig med at anbringe indsætningsmærket, hvor det skal være. Gribepunkter gør det hurtigt at vælge mere eller mindre tekst. Du kan også klippe, kopiere og indsætte tekst og fotografier i et program eller på tværs af programmer. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 25Anbringe indsætningsmærket: Rør ved og hold fingeren på forstørrelsesglasset, indtil det vises, og træk derefter for at anbringe indsætningsmærket. Vælge tekst: Tryk på indsætningsmærket for at vise vælgeknapperne. Du kan også trykke to gange for at vælge et ord. I skrivebeskyttede dokumenter, f.eks. websider, eller e-post, du har modtaget, kan du holde en finger på ordet for at vælge det. Træk håndtagene for at vælge mere eller mindre tekst. Klippe eller kopiere tekst Vælg tekst, og vælg derefter Klip eller Kopier. Indsætte tekst Tryk på indsætningsmærket, og tryk på Sæt ind. Den sidste tekst, du klippede eller kopierede, bliver sat ind. Eller vælg tekst, og tryk på Sæt ind for at erstatte teksten. Fortryde den sidste redigering Ryst iPhone, og tryk på Fortryd. Gør tekst fed, kursiv eller understreget Tryk på (hvis den findes), og tryk derefter på B/I/U. Slå definitionen af et ord op Tryk på (hvis den findes), og tryk derefter på Definer. Få forslag til andre ord Tryk på Foreslå (hvis den findes), og tryk derefter på et af ordene. Tastaturlayout Du kan bruge Indstillinger til at vælge tastaturlayout til software- og hardwaretastaturer. De tilgængelige layout afhænger af tastatursproget. Vælge et tastaturlayout: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur > Internationale tastaturer, og vælg et tastatur. Til hvert sprog kan du foretage separate valg til softwaretastaturer på skærmen og eksterne hardwaretastaturer. Softwaretastaturets layout bestemmer layoutet på tastaturet på iPhoneskærmen. Hardwaretastaturets layout bestemmer layoutet på et Apple Wireless Keyboard, som er tilsluttet iPhone. 26 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeBruge et Apple Wireless Keyboard Du kan bruge et Apple Wireless Keyboard (købes separat) til at skrive på iPhone. Apple Wireless Keyboard forbindes via Bluetooth. Se “Parre en Bluetooth-enhed med iPhone” på side 34. Når tastaturet et parret med iPhone, opretter det forbindelse, hver gang tastaturet er inden for rækkevidde (op til ca. 9 meter). Du kan se, at tastaturet er tilsluttet, hvis tastaturet på skærmen ikke vises, når du trykker i et tekstfelt. Du sparer på batteriet ved at slukke for eller ophæve pardannelsen med tastaturet, når du ikke bruger det. Diktering Med diktering kan du oprette og redigere tekst ved at tale i stedet for at skrive. Du kan f.eks. diktere e-post-beskeder, sms'er og noter. Diktering virker endda med programmer fra tredjeparter, så du kan f.eks. opdatere din Facebook-status, publicere en Twitter-besked eller skrive instagrammer. Du kan diktere, hver gang tastaturet på skærmen vises med tasten . Bemærk: Slå Siri til i Indstillinger > Generelt > Siri. Diktering findes kun på iPhone 4S og kræver internetadgang via en mobil eller Wi-Fi-forbindelse. Diktering er muligvis ikke tilgængelig på alle sprog og i alle områder, og funktioner kan variere efter område. Du skal evt. betale for mobildata. Diktere tekst: Tryk på på tastaturet. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig. Tryk for at starte diktering. De vises, mens Siri skriver den tekst, du har dikteret. Du tilføjer tekst ved at trykke på igen og fortsætte med at diktere. Du kan bruge diktering til at indsætte et ord eller erstatte valgt tekst. Anbring indsætningsmærket på det sted, hvor der skal være mere tekst, eller vælg den tekst, der skal erstattes, og tryk derefter på , og dikter. Du ændrer et ord ved at trykke to gange på det for at vælge det, trykke på og derefter sige det ønskede ord. Du kan starte diktering ved at tage iPhone op til øret i stedet for at trykke på på tastaturet. Du slutter ved at tage iPhone ned foran kroppen igen. Tilføje skilletegnet: Sig skilletegnet. For eksempel: “Kære Mary komma checken kommer med posten udråbstegn” bliver til “Kære Mary, checken kommer med posten!” Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 27Udskrive AirPrint AirPrint gør det muligt at udskrive trådløst til AirPrint-kompatible printere. Du kan udskrive fra:  Mail – e-post-beskeder og bilag, som kan åbnes i funktionen Vis  Fotos og Kamera – fotografier  Safari – websider, PDF-dokumenter og andre bilag, som kan åbnes i funktionen Vis  iBooks – PDF-dokumenter  Kort – oversigt over det kort, der vises på skærmen  Noter – den note, der vises på skærmen Andre programmer fra App Store understøtter måske også AirPrint. En AirPrint-kompatibel printer kræver ingen installering; den skal bare tilsluttes det samme Wi-Fi-netværk som iPhone. Du kan få flere oplysninger på support.apple.com/kb/ HT4356?viewlocale=da_DK. Udskrive et dokument AirPrint bruger dit Wi-Fi-netværk til trådløst at sende udskriftsjob til printeren. iPhone og printeren skal være tilsluttet det samme Wi-Fi-netværk. Udskrive et dokument: Tryk på , eller (afhængigt af det program, du bruger), og tryk derefter på Udskriv. Vælg en printer og udskriftsindstillinger, og tryk på Udskriv. Se status for et udskriftsjob Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem , og tryk derefter på Printercentral. Programmet Printercentral vises som det seneste program, når et dokument udskrives. Et skilt på programsymbolet viser, hvor mange dokumenter der er i udskriftskøen. Hvis du udskriver mere end et dokument, skal du vælge et udskriftsjob for at se statusoversigten for det. Annullere et udskriftsjob Tryk to gange på knappen Hjem , tryk på Printercentral, vælg udskriftsjobbet (hvis du udskriver mere end et dokument), og tryk på Annuller udskrivning. 28 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeSøge Du kan søge i mange programmer på iPhone, inklusive Kontakter, Mail, Kalender, Musik, Beskeder, Noter og Påmindelser. Du kan søge i individuelle programmer eller søge i alle programmer på en gang. Søge i iPhone: Gå til hjemmeskærmen. (Svirp fra venstre til højre på den første hjemmeskærm, eller tryk på knappen Hjem .) Skriv teksten i søgefeltet. Søgeresultater vises, mens du skriver. Tryk på et emne på listen for at åbne det. Tryk på Søg for at skjule tastaturet og se flere resultater. Symboler ved siden af søgeresultaterne viser, hvilke programmer resultaterne kommer fra. iPhone viser måske et tophit baseret på dine tidligere søgninger. Safari-søgeresultaterne inkluderer muligheder for at søge på internettet eller i Wikipedia. Program Hvad søges der i Kontakter Fornavn, efternavn og firmanavne Mail Felterne Til, Fra og Emne samt beskederne fra alle konti Kalender Titler på begivenheder, inviterede, lokaliteter og noter Musik Musik (navne på sange, kunstnere og album) og titlerne på podcasts, videoer og lydbøger Beskeder Navne og tekst i beskeder Noter Tekst i noter Påmindelser Titler Søg søger også i navne på originale og installerede programmer på iPhone, så hvis du har mange programmer, kan du bruge Søg til at finde og åbne programmer. Åbne programmer fra Søg Skriv programnavnet, og tryk derefter for at åbne programmet direkte fra søgeresultaterne. Brug indstillingen Spotlight-søgning til at vælge, hvilket indhold der skal søges i og i hvilken rækkefølge resultaterne skal vises. Se “Spotlight-søgning” på side 170. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 29Stemmekontrol Med stemmekontrol kan du foretage telefonopkald og kontrollere afspilning af musik vha. stemmekommandoer. På iPhone 4S kan du også bruge Siri til at kontrollere iPhone med stemmen. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39. Bemærk: Stemmekontrol findes måske ikke på alle sprog. Stemmekontrol er ikke tilgængelig på iPhone 4S, når Siri er slået til. Bruge stemmekontrol: Tryk på og hold knappen Hjem nede, indtil skærmen med stemmekontrol vises, og du hører en biplyd. Du kan også trykke på knappen midt på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Du opnår de bedste resultater, hvis du:  Taler ind i iPhone-mikrofonen, som når du foretager et telefonopkald. Du kan også bruge mikrofonen på Bluetooth-hovedsættet eller et kompatibelt Bluetooth-bilsæt.  Taler klart og naturligt.  Kun siger iPhone-kommandoer og navne og tal. Holder en kort pause mellem kommandoer.  Bruger fulde navne. Du kan få flere oplysninger om brug af Stemmekontrol, inklusive oplysninger om brug af Stemmekontrol på forskellige sprog, hvis du går til support.apple.com/kb/ HT3597?viewlocale=da_DK. Som standard forventer Stemmekontrol, at du siger stemmekommandoer på det sprog, der er indstillet til iPhone (gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Sprog). Indstillingerne i Stemmekontrol gør det muligt at ændre sproget til stemmekommandoer. Nogle sprog er tilgængelige på forskellige dialekter eller med forskellige accenter. Skifte sprog eller land: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Stemmekontrol, og tryk på sproget eller landet. Stemmekontrol til programmet Musik er altid slået til, men af sikkerhedshensyn kan du forhindre stemmeopkald, når iPhone er låst. Forhindre stemmeopkald, når iPhone er låst: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, og slå Stemmeopkald fra. Lås iPhone op for at bruge stemmeopkald. Se “Stemmeopkald” på side 58 og “Bruge Siri eller stemmekontrol med Musik” på side 80. 30 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeMeddelelser Meddelelsescenter viser alle dine advarsler på et sted, inkl. advarsler om:  Ubesvarede telefonopkald og indtalte beskeder  Ny e-post  Nye sms'er  Påmindelser  Kalenderbegivenheder  Venneanmodninger (Game Center)  Vejr  Værdipapirer Vise Meddelelsescenter: Træk ned fra toppen af skærmen. Rul gennem listen for at se flere advarsler Advarsler vises også på låseskærmen eller kortvarigt øverst på skærmen, når du bruger iPhone. Du kan se alle aktuelle advarsler i Meddelelsescenter. Mange programmer, f.eks. Telefon, Beskeder, Mail, og App Store, har på deres symbol på hjemmeskærmen en etiket med et tal (viser antallet af modtagne emner) eller et udråbstegn (viser et problem). Hvis disse programmer ligger i en mappe, vises etiketten på mappen. En etiket med et tal viser det antal emner, du ikke har set, f.eks. indgående telefonopkald, e-post-beskeder, tekstbeskeder og programopdateringer, der kan hentes. En etiket med et udråbstegn viser, at der er et problem med programmet. Besvare en advarsel i Meddelelsescenter Tryk på advarslen. Besvare en advarsel på låseskærmen Skub symbolet i advarslen til højre. Fjerne advarsler fra Meddelelsescenter Tryk på , og tryk på Slet. Definere indstillinger til meddelelser Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 31Twitter Log ind på din Twitter-konto (eller opret en ny konto) i Indstillinger for at slå tweet-meddelelser med bilag til for følgende programmer:  Kamera eller Fotos – med et fotografi  Safari – med en webside  Kort – med en lokalitet  YouTube – med en video Logge ind på eller oprette en Twitterkonto: Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter. Skriv brugernavn og adgangskode til en eksisterende konto, eller tryk på Opret ny konto. Tryk på knappen Handling i Kamera eller Fotos for at sende et fotografi i en tweet-meddelelse. Send et fotografi i en tweet-meddelelse. Vis et fotografi, en video eller en webside i en tweet-meddelelse Vis emnet, tryk på , og tryk derefter på Tweet. Hvis ikke vises, skal du trykke på skærmen. Du inkluderer din lokalitet ved at trykke på Tilføj lokalitet. Lokalitetstjenester skal være slået til i Indstillinger > Lokalitetstjenester. Vis en lokalitet i Kort i en tweetmeddelelse Tryk på lokalitetsnålen, tryk på , tryk på Del lokalitet, og tryk på Tweet. Føje din aktuelle lokalitet til en tweet-meddelelse Tryk på . Lokalitetstjenester skal være slået til i Indstillinger > Lokalitetstjenester. Føje Twitter-brugernavne og -fotografier til dine kontakter Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter, og tryk på Opdater kontakter. Slå Twitter til og fra til Fotos eller Safari Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter. Når du skriver en tweet-meddelelse, viser tallet i det nederste højre hjørne af Tweet-skærmen, hvor mange tegn du stadig kan indtaste. Bilag bruger nogle af de 140 tegn. Du kan også installere og bruge programmet Twitter til at sende en tweet-meddelelse, se din tidslinje, søge efter emner m.m. Installere programmet Twitter: Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter, og tryk på Installer. Du kan få oplysninger om, hvordan du bruger programmet Twitter, ved at åbne programmet, trykke på knappen Mere (…), trykke på “Konti & indstillinger”, trykke på Indstillinger og derefter trykke på Håndbog. 32 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeApple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon, der følger med iPhone, er udstyret med mikrofon, lydstyrkeknapper og en integreret knap, som du kan bruge til nemt at besvare og afbryde opkald eller styre afspilning af lyd og video. Knap i midten Tilslut øretelefonerne for at lytte til musik eller foretage et telefonopkald. Tryk på knappen i midten for at styre afspilning af musik og besvare eller afbryde opkald, selvom iPhone er låst. Sætte en sang eller video på pause Tryk på knappen i midten. Tryk en gang til for at genoptage afspilning. Hoppe til den næste sang Tryk to gange hurtigt efter hinanden på knappen i midten. Vende tilbage til forrige sang Tryk tre gange hurtigt efter hinanden på knappen i midten. Spole frem Tryk to gange hurtigt efter hinanden på knappen i midten, og hold den nede. Spole tilbage Tryk tre gange hurtigt efter hinanden på knappen i midten, og hold den nede. Justere lydstyrken Tryk på knappen + eller –. Besvare et indgående opkald Tryk på knappen i midten. Afbryde igangværende opkald Tryk på knappen i midten. Afvise et indgående opkald Tryk på og hold knappen i midten nede i omkring to sekunder, og slip den. To lave biplyde bekræfter, at du har afvist opkaldet. Skifte til et indgående eller ventende opkald og sætte det aktuelle opkald i venteposition Tryk på knappen i midten. Tryk en gang til for at skifte tilbage til det første opkald. Skifte til et indgående eller ventende opkald og afbryde det aktuelle opkald Tryk på og hold knappen i midten nede i omkring to sekunder, og slip den. To lave biplyde bekræfter, at du har afsluttet det første opkald. Bruge Siri eller Stemmekontrol Tryk på og hold knappen i midten nede. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39 eller “Stemmekontrol” på side 30. Hvis du modtager et opkald, mens øretelefonerne er tilsluttet, kan du både høre ringetonen via højttaleren i iPhone og øretelefonerne. AirPlay Du kan også streame musik, fotografier, og videoer trådløst til dit HD-fjernsyn vha. AirPlay og Apple TV. Du kan også bruge AirPlay til at streame lyd til en AirPort Express-base. Du kan få andre AirPlay-kompatible modtagere fra tredjeparter. Besøg Apple Store på internettet for at få flere oplysninger. Streame indhold til en AirPlay-kompatibel enhed: Start videoen, lysbilledshowet eller musikken, tryk på , og vælg AirPlay-enheden. Når streamingen starter, kan du afslutte det program, der afspiller indholdet. iPhone og den AirPlay-kompatible enhed skal være tilsluttet det samme Wi-Fi-netværk. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 33Få hurtig adgang til betjeningspanelet til AirPlay Når skærmen er tændt, skal du trykke på gange på knappen Hjem og rulle til den venstre side af multitaskinglinjen. Skifte fra AirPlay tilbage til iPhone Tryk på , og vælg iPhone. På iPhone 4S kan du dublere skærmen på iPhone på et fjernsyn med Apple TV. Alt på iPhoneskærmen vises på fjernsynet. Dublere iPhone-skærmen på et fjernsyn: Tryk på i venstre side af multitaskinglinjen, vælg en Apple TV-enhed, og tryk på knappen Skærmdublering, som vises. Der vises en blå linje over toppen af skærmen på iPhone 4S, når AirPlay-skærmdublering er slået til. Du kan også dublere skærmen på iPhone på et fjernsyn vha. et kabel. Se “Se videoer på et fjernsyn” på side 132. Bluetooth-enheder Du kan bruge iPhone med Apple Wireless Keyboard og andre Bluetooth-enheder, f.eks. hovedsæt, bilsæt og stereohovedtelefoner. Bluetooth-hovedtelefoner fra tredjeparter understøtter evt. justering af lydstyrke og betjeningsmuligheder til afspilning. Se den dokumentation, der fulgte med Bluetooth-enheden. Du kan finde understøttede Bluetooth-beskrivelser på support.apple. com/kb/HT3647?viewlocale=da_DK. Parre en Bluetooth-enhed med iPhone ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du undgår høretab og kører sikkert i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Før du kan bruge en Bluetooth-enhed med iPhone, skal du parre dem. Parre et Bluetooth-hovedsæt, -bilsæt eller en anden -enhed med iPhone: 1 Følg de instruktioner, der fulgte med enheden, for at gøre den synlig eller indstille den til at søge efter andre Bluetooth-enheder. 2 Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth, og slå Bluetooth til. 3 Vælg enheden på iPhone, og skriv adgangskoden eller PIN-koden. Se oplysningerne om adgangskoden eller PIN-koden i det materiale, der fulgte med enheden. Når du har parret en Bluetooth-enhed, så den kan arbejde med iPhone, skal du oprette en forbindelse, før iPhone kan bruge enheden til opkald. Se den dokumentation, der fulgte med enheden. Når iPhone er forbundet med et Bluetooth-hovedsæt eller -bilsæt, dirigeres alle udgående opkald gennem enheden. Indgående opkald dirigeres gennem enheden, hvis du besvarer dem med den, og gennem iPhone, hvis du besvarer dem med iPhone. Parre et Apple Wireless Keyboard med iPhone: 1 Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth, og slå Bluetooth til. 2 Tryk på afbryderknappen på Apple Wireless Keyboard for at tænde det. 3 På iPhone skal du vælge tastaturet på listen over enheder. 4 Skriv koden på tastaturet, og tryk på Retur. Bemærk: Du kan kun parre et Apple Wireless Keyboard med iPhone ad gangen. Hvis du vil parre et andet tastatur, skal du først annullere pardannelsen med det aktuelle. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Bruge et Apple Wireless Keyboard” på side 27. 34 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeBluetooth-status Symbolet for Bluetooth vises på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen på iPhone:  eller : Bluetooth er slået til og parret med en enhed. (Farven afhænger af den aktuelle farve på statuslinjen.)  : Bluetooth er slået til og parret med en enhed, men enheden er uden for rækkevidde eller slukket.  Intet Bluetooth-symbol: Bluetooth er slået fra eller ikke parret med en enhed. Annullere pardannelsen mellem en Bluetooth-enhed og iPhone Du kan annullere pardannelsen med en Bluetooth-enhed, hvis du ikke vil bruge den med iPhone længere. Annullere pardannelsen med en Bluetooth-enhed: 1 Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth, og slå Bluetooth til. 2 Tryk på ved siden af navnet på enheden, og tryk derefter på “Glem denne enhed”. Batteri iPhone er udstyret med et indbygget genopladeligt batteri. Oplade batteriet ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om opladning af iPhone i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Batterisymbolet i øverste højre hjørne af skærmen viser spændingsniveauet eller status for batteriets opladning. Du kan også vise batteriets spænding i procent. Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug, og slå indstillingen til under Batteribrug. Oplader Opladt Oplade batteriet: Slut iPhone til en stikkontakt vha. det medfølgende Dock-stik til USB-kabel og USB-strømforsyningen. Bemærk: Hvis du slutter iPhone til en stikkontakt, kan det starte iCloud-sikkerhedskopiering eller trådløs iTunes-synkronisering. Se “Sikkerhedskopiere iPhone” på side 178 og “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Oplade batteriet og synkronisere iPhone: Slut iPhone til computeren med det medfølgende Dock-stik til USB-kabel. Eller slut iPhone til computeren vha. det medfølgende kabel og dokken, som skal købes separat. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 35Medmindre der er en USB 2.0-port med stor kapacitet på tastaturet, skal du slutte iPhone til en USB 2.0-port på computeren. Vigtigt: Batteriet i iPhone kan blive afladt i stedet for opladt, hvis iPhone er sluttet til en computer, der er slukket, på vågeblus eller på standby. Hvis du oplader batteriet, mens du synkroniserer eller bruger iPhone, kan opladningen vare længere. Vigtigt: Hvis der ikke er ret megen spænding tilbage på iPhone, viser den måske et af følgende billeder, som betyder, at iPhone skal oplades i op til 10 minutter, før du kan bruge den. Hvis der næsten ikke er mere spænding tilbage på iPhone, kan skærmen være helt tom i op til to minutter, før et af billederne om lavt spændingsniveau vises. eller Maksimere batteritiden iPhone bruger litiumionbatterier. Du kan få flere oplysninger om, hvordan du maksimerer batteriets leve- og driftstid i iPhone, hvis du går til www.apple.com/dk/batteries. Udskifte batteriet Genopladelige batterier kan kun oplades et vist antal gange, og på et tidspunkt bliver det evt. nødvendigt at udskifte batteriet. Batteriet i iPhone kan ikke udskiftes af brugeren; det må kun udskiftes af en autoriseret servicetekniker. Du kan læse mere på www.apple.com/dk/batteries/ replacements.html. Sikkerhedsfunktioner Sikkerhedsfunktioner hjælper med at forhindre, at andre kan få adgang til oplysningerne på iPhone. 36 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeKoder og databeskyttelse Du kan indstille en kode, som du skal skrive, hver gang du tænder for eller afbryder vågeblus på iPhone. Indstille en adgangskode: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, indtast en kode på 4 cifre, og indtast derefter koden igen for at bekræfte den. iPhone beder dig derefter om at indtaste koden for at låse den op eller vise indstillingerne til kodelås. Når du indstiller en kode, bliver databeskyttelse slået til. Databeskyttelse bruger koden som nøgle til kryptering af Mail-beskeder og deres bilag på iPhone. (Databeskyttelse benyttes evt. også af nogle programmer, som findes i App Store.) Nederst på skærmen Lås med kode i Indstillinger kan du se, om databeskyttelse er slået til. Du kan øge sikkerheden på iPhone ved at slå Enkel adgangskode fra og bruge en længere kode med en kombination af tal, bogstaver, skilletegn og specialtegn. Se “Lås med kode” på side 170. Vigtigt: På en iPhone 3GS, som ikke blev leveret med iOS 4 eller en nyere version, skal du også gendanne iOS-softwaren for at slå databeskyttelse til. Se “Opdatere og gendanne software til iPhone” på side 180. Forhindre stemmeopkald, når iPhone er låst: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, og slå Stemmeopkald fra. Lås iPhone op for at bruge stemmeopkald. Find min iPhone Find min iPhone hjælper dig med at finde og beskytte din iPhone vha. det gratis program Find min iPhone på en anden iPhone, iPad eller iPod touch eller vha. en Mac eller pc med en webbrowser, der er logget ind på http://www.icloud.com eller http://www.me.com. Find min iPhone inkluderer:  Finde på et kort: Se den omtrentlige placering af din iPhone på et kort på fuld skærm  Sende en besked eller afspille en lyd: Giver dig mulighed for at skrive en besked, der vises på skærmen på din iPhone, eller vælge en lyd, der afspilles ved fuld lydstyrke i to minutter, selvom Ring/stille er indstillet til stille funktion.  Låse med ekstern adgangskode: Giver dig mulighed for at låse din iPhone eksternt og indstille en 4-cifret kode, hvis du ikke har indstillet en i forvejen.  Ekstern sletning: Giver dig mulighed for at beskytte dit privatliv ved at slette alle medier og data på iPhone og gendanne fabriksindstillingerne. Vigtigt: Find min iPhone skal være slået til i indstillingerne til iCloud eller MobileMe på iPhone, før du kan bruge det. Find min iPhone kan kun slås til i en konto. Slå Find min iPhone til vha. iCloud Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå Find min iPhone til. Slå Find min iPhone til vha. MobileMe Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, tryk på din MobileMekonto, og slå Find min iPhone til. Se “iCloud” på side 16 eller “Indstille e-post- og andre konti” på side 16. Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggende 37Rengøre iPhone Rengør straks iPhone, hvis den bliver plettet af f.eks. blæk, farve, makeup, snavs, fødevarer, olie eller cremer. Når du vil rengøre iPhone, skal du afmontere alle kabler og slukke iPhone (tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra nede, og skub mærket på skærmen). Brug derefter en blød, let fugtig, fnugfri klud. Sørg for, at der ikke kommer fugt i nogen åbninger. Brug ikke vinduesrens, rengøringsmidler, trykluft, aerosolspraydåser, opløsningsmidler, sprit, salmiakspiritus eller slibemidler til rengøring af iPhone. Forsiden på iPhone 3GS og for- og bagsiden på iPhone 4S og iPhone 4 er fremstillet af glas og har en fedtafvisende belægning. Du rengør disse overflader ved at tørre dem af med en blød, fnugfri klud. Belægningens evne til at afvise fedt og olie aftager med tiden ved normal brug, og hvis du gnider på skærmen med et slibemiddel, vil effekten aftage yderligere, og der kan komme ridser i glasset. Du kan finde flere oplysninger om håndtering af iPhone i “iPhone” Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Genstarte og nulstille iPhone Hvis der er noget, der ikke virker korrekt, kan du prøve at starte iPhone igen, tvinge et program til at slutte eller nulstille iPhone. Genstarte iPhone: Tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra nede, indtil det røde mærke vises. Flyt fingeren hen over mærket for at slukke iPhone. Du tænder iPhone igen ved at trykke på og holde knappen Til/fra nede, indtil Apple-logoet vises. Hvis du ikke kan slukke for iPhone, eller hvis problemet fortsætter, skal du evt. nulstille iPhone. Du bør kun nulstille, hvis det ikke hjælper at slukke og tænde for iPhone. Tvinge et program til at slutte: Tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra nede i nogle få sekunder, indtil der vises et rødt mærke, og tryk på og hold derefter knappen Hjem nede, indtil programmet slutter. Du kan også afbryde et program ved at fjerne det fra multitaskinglinjen. Se “Åbne og skifte mellem programmer” på side 19. Nulstille iPhone: Tryk på og hold knappen Til/fra og knappen Hjem nede i mindst 10 sekunder, indtil Apple-logoet vises. Der findes flere forslag til fejlfinding i Appendiks B,“Support og andre oplysninger,” på side 178. 38 Kapitel 3 Alt det grundlæggendeSiri 4 Hvad er Siri? Siri er den intelligente personlige assistent, der hjælper dig med at få tingene gjort bare ved at tale. Siri forstår naturlig tale, så du behøver ikke at lære specielle kommandoer eller huske nøgleord. Du kan spørge om ting på forskellige måder: Du kan f.eks. sige “Set the alarm for 6:30 a.m.” eller “Wake me at 6:30 in the morning”. Siri forstår begge udtryk. Med Siri kan du skrive og sende beskeder, planlægge møder, foretage telefonopkald, få vejvisning, indstille en påmindelse, søge på internettet – og meget mere – ved blot at tale naturligt. Siri forstår, hvad du siger, og ved, hvad du mener. Siri taler også til dig for at fortælle dig, hvad det hørte dig sige og stille et spørgsmål, hvis det har brug for flere oplysninger. Det svarer nogenlunde til at tale med et menneske. Du kan f.eks. sige “Any good burger joints around here?”, hvorefter Siri måske svarer “I found a number of burger restaurants near you”. Hvis du siger “Hmm. How about tacos”, husker Siri, at du lige har spurgt om restauranter og søger derefter efter mexikanske restauranter i nærheden. Siri bruger – ud over den interne processorkraft i iPhone – Apples datacentre til at forstå, hvad du siger og hurtigt give dig et svar. Siri bruger også oplysninger fra dine kontakter, musikbiblioteket, kalendere, påmindelser osv. for at finde ud af, hvad du taler om. Siri virker med de fleste indbyggede programmer på iPhone 4S, og det er smart nok til at finde ud af, hvilket program det skal bruge til en anmodning. Siri bruger også funktionerne Søg og Lokalitetstjenester til at hjælpe dig med dine anmodninger. Der er så mange ting, du kan sige til Siri! Her er blot nogle få eksempler:  Call Joe  Set the timer for 30 minutes  How far to the nearest Apple store?  Is it going to rain tomorrow? Bemærk: Siri findes kun på iPhone 4S og kræver internetadgang via en mobil eller Wi-Fiforbindelse. Siri er muligvis ikke tilgængelig på alle sprog og i alle områder, og visse funktioner er evt. ikke tilgængelige i alle områder. Du skal evt. betale for mobildata. 39Bruge Siri Starte Siri Siri bringes til live med et tryk på en knap. Starte Siri: Tryk på knappen Hjem , indtil Siri vises. Du hører to hurtige bip, og der står “What can I help you with?” på skærmen. Bare begynd at tale. Mikrofonen lyser op, så du ved, at Siri hører dig tale. Når du har startet en dialog med Siri, kan du trykke på symbolet for mikrofonen for at tale igen. Siri venter på, at du bliver færdig med at tale, men du kan også trykke på symbolet for mikrofonen for at fortælle Siri, at du er færdig. Det er nyttigt, hvis der er en masse baggrundsstøj. Det kan også gøre samtalen med Siri hurtigere, fordi Siri ikke behøver at vente på, at du holder pause. Når du er færdig med at tale, viser Siri, hvad det hørte og giver dig et svar. Siri inkluderer ofte ekstra relevante oplysninger, der kan være nyttige. Hvis oplysningerne vedrører et program – f.eks. en sms, du har skrevet, eller en lokalitet, du har bedt om – skal du bare trykke på skærmen for at åbne programmet og få flere oplysninger og yderligere handling. Det, Siri hører, at du siger Tryk for at tale til Siri. Siris svar Beslægtede oplysninger – tryk for at åbne programmet. Siri kan spørge dig, om du har brug for flere oplysninger for at færdiggøre en anmodning. Du kan f.eks. bede Siri om at “Remind me to call mom”, og Siri kan spørge “What time would you like me to remind you?” Du behøver ikke fortælle Siri det hele med det samme. Siri spørger dig, hvis det har brug for flere oplysninger. Du kan begynde at tale til Siri ved at tage iPhone op til øret, ligesom når du foretager et telefonopkald. Hvis skærmen ikke er tændt, skal du første trykke på knappen Til/fra eller Hjem. Du hører to hurtige bip, der betyder, at Siri lytter. Begynd derefter at tale. 40 Kapitel 4 SiriHvis Siri ikke reagerer, når du tager iPhone op til øret, skal du starte med skærmen vendt mod dig, så din hånd roterer på vej op til øret. Annullere en forespørgsel Sig “cancel”, tryk på , eller tryk på knappen Hjem . Stoppe en telefonsamtale, som du startede med Siri Tryk på knappen Hjem , før Telefon åbnes. Tryk på Slut, hvis Telefon allerede er åben. Fortælle Siri om dig selv Jo bedre Siri kender dig, jo mere kan det bruge oplysninger til at hjælpe dig. Siri får oplysninger om dig fra dit personlige infokort (“Min info”) i Kontakter. Fortælle Siri, hvem du er: Gå til Indstillinger > Siri > Min info, og tryk derefter på Navn. Skriv din private adresse og arbejdsadresse, så du kan sige f.eks.:“How do I get home?” og “Remind me to call Bob when I get to work”. Siri vil også gerne vide noget om de vigtige personer i dit liv, så du bør anføre disse forhold på din personlige infokort. Siri kan indstille det for dig. Første gang du f.eks. beder Siri om at ringe til din søster, spørger Siri, hvem din søster er (hvis du ikke allerede har disse oplysninger på skærmen). Siri føjer oplysningerne om forholdet til dit personlige infokort, så det ikke behøver at spørge dig næste gang. Opret kort i Kontakter på alle dine vigtige personlige forhold, og inkluder oplysninger som telefonnumre, e-post-adresser, privat- og arbejdsadresser og evt. kælenavne, du bruger. Kapitel 4 Siri 41Vejledning på skærmen Siri giver dig eksempler på de ting, du kan sige, direkte på skærmen. Spørg Siri “what can you do”, eller tryk på , første gang Siri vises. Håndfri brug af Siri Du kan bruge Siri med de Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon, der fulgte med iPhone eller med andre understøttede hovedtelefoner og Bluetooth-hovedsæt. Tale til Siri vha. hovedtelefoner: Tryk på og hold knappen i midten nede. Tale til Siri vha. et Bluetooth-hovedsæt: Tryk på og hold opkaldsknappen nede. Du fortsætter en samtale med Siri ved at holde knappen nede, hver gang du vil tale. Når du bruger hovedtelefoner eller et hovedsæt, svarer Siri ved at tale til dig. Siri læser de sms'er og e-post-beskeder, du har dikteret, op, før de sendes. På den måde får du en chance for at ændre beskeden, hvis du vil det. Siri læser også emnet for påmindelser op, før de oprettes. Sammenhæng Siri holder øje med, hvor du er, og hvad du foretager dig, så det forstår sammenhængen. Hvis du lige har modtaget en sms fra Bob, skal du bare sige “Reply”. og så ved Siri, at der skal sendes en sms til Bob. Sig “Call him”, og så ved Siri, at det skal ringe op til Bob i stedet for. Siri fortæller dig altid, hvad det er ved at gøre. Vælge indstillinger til Siri Slå Siri til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Siri. Bemærk: Når du slår Siri fra, nulstilles Siri, og Siri glemmer, hvad det har lært om din stemme. Vælge indstillinger til Siri: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Siri. Sprog: Indstille det sprog, du vil bruge med Siri Stemmefeedback: Som standard siger Siri kun sine svar højt, når du holder iPhone ved øret eller bruger Siri med hovedtelefoner eller et hovedsæt. Hvis Siri altid skal sige sine svar højt, skal du indstille denne mulighed til Altid. Min info: Fortæl Siri, hvilket kort i Kontakter der indeholder dine personlige oplysninger. Se “Fortælle Siri om dig selv” på side 41. Hold ved øret for at tale: Tal til Siri ved at holde iPhone op ved øret, når skærmen er tændt. Tillade eller forhindre adgang til Siri, når iPhone er låst med en kode: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode. Du kan også slå Siri fra ved at slå begrænsninger til. Se “Begrænsninger” på side 171. 42 Kapitel 4 SiriLokalitetstjenester Da Siri kender lokaliteter som “current”, “home” og “work”, kan det minde dig om at udføre en bestemt opgave, når du forlader en lokalitet eller ankommer til en. Sig “Remind me to call my wife when I leave the office” til Siri, og det cl ske. Lokalitetsoplysninger spores eller lagres ikke uden for telefonen. Du kan stadig bruge Siri, hvis du slår lokalitetstjenester fra, men Siri vil ikke gøre noget, der kræver lokalitetsoplysninger. Slå lokalitetstjenester fra for Siri: Gå til Indstillinger > Lokalitetstjenester. Tilgængelighed Siri kan bruges af blinde og synshæmmede vha. VoiceOver, den indbyggede skærmlæser i iOS. VoiceOver fortæller, hvad der sker på skærmen, inkl. evt. tekst i Siris svar, så du kan bruge iPhone uden at se den. Slå VoiceOver til: Gå til Indstillinger > Tilgængelighed. Når du slår VoiceOver til, bliver selv dine meddelelser læst højt for dig. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “VoiceOver” på side 147. Rette Siri Hvis Siri har problemer Siri kan sommetider have svært ved at forstå dig. Støjende omgivelser kan f.eks. gøre det svært for Siri at høre, hvad du siger. Hvis du taler med accent, kan det tage Siri nogen tid at lære din stemme at kende. Hvis Siri ikke hører det, du siger, helt korrekt, kan du rette det. Siri viser, hvad det hører dig sige, sammen med dets svar. Rette det, som Siri hører, at du siger: Tryk på den boble, der viser, hvad Siri hørte dig sige. Rediger din anmodning ved at skrive, eller tryk på på tastaturet for at diktere. Du kan få flere oplysninger om brug af diktering i “Diktering” på side 55. Hvis noget af teksten er understreget med blåt, skal du trykke på den, hvorefter Siri foreslår nogle alternativer. Tryk på et af forslagene, eller erstat teksten ved at skrive eller diktere. Rette Siri med stemmen: Tryk på , og gentag eller tydeliggør din anmodning. F.eks. “I meant Boston”. Når du retter Siri, skal du ikke sige, hvad du ikke vil have – du skal kun fortælle Siri, hvad du vil have. Rette en e-post-besked eller en sms: Når Siri spørger, om beskeden skal sendes, kan du f.eks. sige: “Change it to: Call me tomorrow.” “Add: See you there question mark.” “No, send it to Bob”. “No”. (for at bevare beskeden uden at sende den) “Cancel”. Hvis Siri skal læse beskeden op for dig, skal du sige “Read it back to me” eller “Read me the message”. Hvis beskeden er korrekt, kan du f.eks. sige “Yes, send it”. Se “Mail” på side 50 og “Beskeder” på side 46. Kapitel 4 Siri 43Hvordan Siri lærer Siri virker lige fra starten uden at skulle indstilles og bliver hele tiden bedre. Siri lærer din accent og andre karakteristika ved din stemme at kende og kategoriserer din stemme i en af de dialekter eller accenter, det forstår. Efterhånden som flere og flere bruger Siri, og det udsættes for mange sproglige variationer, vil genkendelsen forbedres, og Siri vil virke endnu bedre. Støjende omgivelser I støjende omgivelser skal du holde iPhone tæt op til munden, men tal ikke direkte ind i den nederste kant. Fortsæt med at tale klart og naturligt. Tryk på , når du er færdig med at tale. Du kan også prøve at holde iPhone op til øret, når du taler til Siri. Netværksforbindelse Siri kan fortælle dig, at det har problemer med at oprette forbindelse til netværket. Da Siri benytter Apples servere til stemmegenkendelse og andre tjenester, skal du have en god 3G- eller 4G-mobilforbindelse eller Wi-Fi-forbindelse til internettet. Siri og programmer Siri virker med de fleste indbyggede programmer på iPhone 4S og benytter de programmer, det skal bruge for at kunne hjælpe dig med dine anmodninger. Siri ved, hvilket program du bruger, så du kan henvise til det, der vises på skærmen. Når du læser en besked i Mail, kan du f.eks. sige “Reply, I like it”. Telefon Brug Siri til at foretage et telefonopkald eller starte et FaceTime-opkald. Du kan henvise til din familie, dine venner og forbindelser i Kontakter eller sige, hvilket telefonnummer der skal bruges. F.eks.:  Call Jennifer Wright mobile  Call Susan on her work phone  Call 408 555 1212  Call home  FaceTime Lisa 44 Kapitel 4 SiriHvis du siger både for- og efternavnet, bliver det helt klart, hvem du vi ringe op til, men du kan sige det ene eller det andet og lade Siri finde ud af det. Siri søger først i dine favoritter, og hvis det finder et svar, ringes der op til det nummer. Derefter søger Siri i alle kontakter. Hvis der er flere personer med det samme navn, spørger Siri, hvem af dem du vil ringe til. Siri spørger også, hvilket telefonnumre der skal bruges, hvis der er opført flere. Du kan også bede Siri om at ringe til et firma i dine kontakter. Det er vigtigt, at du introducerer dig selv til Siri, så det ved, hvem du taler om, når du beder det om at foretage et opkald. Se “Fortælle Siri om dig selv” på side 41. Stoppe en telefonsamtale, som du startede med Siri Tryk på knappen Hjem , før Telefon åbnes. Hvis telefonopkaldet er i gang, skal du trykke på Afslut. Musik Bed Siri om at spille en sang, et album eller en spilleliste. Sæt afspilning på pause, og genoptag. Juster stemningen ved at bede om en bestemt type musik. Eller sig bare “Play”, og lad Siri vælge for dig. Hvis du ikke genkender sangen, kan du spørge Siri: “What’s playing?” Her er nogle måde, du kan spille musik på med Siri:  Play The Light of the Sun  Play Trouble  Play Taking Back Sunday shuffled  Play Alicia Keys  Play some blues  Play my party mix  Shuffle my roadtrip playlist  Play  Pause  Resume  Skip Sig “Genius”, hvis du vil højre sange som dem, du lytter til. (Siri opretter en midlertidig Geniusspilleliste, men den arkiveres ikke.) Kapitel 4 Siri 45Beskeder Du kan sende sms'er, få Siri til at læse nye beskeder op for dig, og besvare de beskeder, du modtager. Inkluder navnet på den person, du vil sende en sms til, eller vent på, at Siri spørger dig, hvem den skal sendes til. Du kan sende en sms til et telefonnummer, og du kan sende en sms til flere personer på en gang. Du sender en sms ved f.eks. at sige:  Tell Susan I’ll be right there  Send a message to Jason Russell  Send a message to Lisa saying how about tomorrow?  Send a message to Susan on her mobile saying I’ll be late  Send a message to 408 555 1212  Text Jason and Lisa where are you? Hvis du vil se eller høre beskeder, som du har modtaget, kan du sige:  Read me my messages  Show my new texts  Read it again Hvis du lige har modtaget en sms, eller hvis du læser en, som du har modtaget tidligere, kan du bare sige:  Reply that’s great news  Tell him I’ll be there in 10 minutes  Call her Siri forstår sammenhængen og ved, hvem svaret skal sendes til. Før du sender en besked, du har oprettet, viser Siri den eller læser den op for dig for at sikre, at den er rigtig. Når Siri spørger, om beskeden skal sendes, kan du f.eks. sige:  Change it to: Call me tomorrow  Add: See you there question mark  No, send it to Bob  No (for at bevare beskeden uden at sende den)  Cancel 46 Kapitel 4 SiriVil du inkludere en smiley i beskeden? Sig “smiley face”. :-) Redigere beskeder Hvis du opretter en sms med Siri, men den ikke blev helt, som du ville have den, kan du bede Siri om at ændre den. Hvis den næste er ok, kan du evt. redigere den i stedet. Når Siri viser beskeden til dig, kan du trykke på beskedboblen for at åbne den i programmet Beskeder. Du kan derefter ændre beskeden ved at skrive eller diktere. Se “Diktering” på side 55. Kalender Føj nye begivenheder til din kalender, rediger eksisterende begivenheder eller find ud, hvad dine planer er. Når du opretter en begivenhed, kan du anføre et tidspunkt, et sted, en titel og de personer, du vil invitere. Oprette en begivenhed:  Set up a meeting at 9  Set up a meeting with Michael at 9  Meet with Lisa at noon  Set up a meeting about hiring tomorrow at 9 a.m.  New appointment with Susan Park Friday at 3  Schedule a planning meeting at 8:30 today in the boardroom Ændre eller annullere en begivenhed:  Move my 3 p.m. meeting to 4:30  Reschedule my appointment with Dr. Manning to next Monday at 9 a.m.  Add Lisa to my meeting with Jason  Cancel the budget review meeting Spørge Siri om begivenheder:  What does the rest of my day look like?  What’s on my calendar for Friday?  When is my next appointment?  When am I meeting with Michael?  Where is my next event? Når du opretter, ændrer eller stiller spørgsmål om en begivenhed, viser Siri oplysninger om begivenheden. Tryk på begivenheden for at få flere oplysninger. Kapitel 4 Siri 47Påmindelser Siri er fantastisk til at oprette en hurtig påmindelse. Du sender en påmindelse ved f.eks. at sige:  Remind me to call mom  Remember to take an umbrella  Remind me take my medicine at 6 a.m. tomorrow  Remind me when I leave to call Jason  Remind me to finish the report by 6 Siri beder om de oplysninger, det skal bruge for kunne oprette påmindelsen, inkl. dato, tid og sted. Når du inkluderer lokalitetsoplysninger, kan Siri minde dig om emnet, når du nærmer dig eller forlader et bestemt sted. En lokalitet kan være din aktuelle lokalitet (“here”) eller en adresse i Kontakter. Se “Fortælle Siri om dig selv” på side 41, hvis du vil fortælle Siri om, hvor du arbejder og bor.  Remind me to call my mom when I get home  Remind me when I get to the office to call my wife  Remind me to pick up flowers when I leave here  Remind me to check the time when I get back here Påmindelser føjes til standardlisten over påmindelser. Indstille en standardliste til påmindelser: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Standardliste. Oprette en liste uden at indstille et bestemt tid eller sted for påmindelsen:  Remember to buy milk  Add eggs to my groceries list Hvis Siri spørger, hvornår du skal påmindes, kan du sige “never”. Hvis du har en synlig liste i Påmindelser kan du føje emner til den ved blot at sige “Add”:  Add eggs Når du opretter en påmindelse med Siri, viser Siri den til dig, så du kan bekræfte den. 48 Kapitel 4 SiriDu kan bekræfte, annullere eller fortælle Siri, at du vil ændre noget:  Change the time to 7  Make it Tuesday instead  Change that to: Get the car washed and waxed  Move it to my Work list  Move it to my Personal list Når du har bekræftet påmindelsen, kan du trykke på den for at åbne programmet Påmindelse og se påmindelsen og oplysningerne om den. Kort Brug Siri til at finde en lokalitet, få vejvisning og se trafikforhold. F.eks.:  How do I get home?  Show 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino California  Directions to my dad’s work  What’s the traffic like getting home?  Find coffee near me  Find some burger joints in Baltimore  Find a gas station within walking distance  Good Mexican restaurants around here Hvis du spørger om en lokalitet, viser Siri den på et kort. Sommetider går Siri direkte til Kort, men du kan trykke på kortet for at åbne programmet Kort, hvis Siri ikke åbner det. Kapitel 4 Siri 49Siri svarer muligvis med en liste over muligheder. Hvis du f.eks. beder om burgerbarer, søger Siri efter hamburgerrestauranter i nærheden og sorterer listen efter afstand. Hvis du søger efter det bedste burgersted, sorterer Siri listen efter rang. Du kan sortere listen på en anden måde ved at sige “which is the best?” eller “which is the closest?” Mail Med Siri kan du sende e-post, tjekke din e-post og bevare e-post, som du har modtaget. En e-post-besked kræver mindst en modtager, et emnelinje (sig “about”) og en beskedtekst. Men du skal ikke bekymre dig om at få det hele færdig på en gang – Siri vil bede om det, der kræves til at færdiggøre e-post-beskeden. Sende en e-post til en person:  Email Lisa about the trip  New email to Susan Park  Mail Dad about the rent check  Email Dr. Manning and say I got the forms, thanks  Mail Lisa and Jason about the party and say I had a great time Kontrollere din e-post:  Check email  Any new email from Michael today?  Show new mail about the lease  Show the email from Lisa yesterday 50 Kapitel 4 SiriBesvare e-post:  Reply Dear Susan sorry about the late payment  Call him at work Før du sender en besked, viser Siri den eller læser den op for dig for at sikre, at den er rigtig. Når Siri spørger, om beskeden skal sendes, kan du f.eks. sige:  Change it to say: Check’s in the mail  Add John (for at inkludere en anden modtager)  Change subject to: This weekend Redigere e-post Hvis du opretter en e-post-besked med Siri, men den ikke blev helt, som du ville have den, kan du bede Siri om at ændre den. Hvis den næsten er ok, kan du evt. redigere den i stedet. Tryk på beskeden for at åbne den i programmet Mail, og rediger den derefter ved at skrive eller diktere. Se “Diktering” på side 55. Vejr Brug Siri til at få vejroplysninger. Hvis du ikke angiver en lokalitet, antager Siri, at du mener din aktuelle lokalitet. Hvis du ikke anfører et tidspunkt, viser Siri udsigten for i dag, men du kan bede om at få vist vejret på alle tidspunkter i den kommende uge.  What’s the weather for today?  What’s the weather for tomorrow?  Will it rain in Cupertino this week?  What’s the forecast for this evening?  How’s the weather in Tampa right now?  How hot will it be in Palm Springs this weekend?  What’s the high for Anchorage on Thursday?  What’s the temperature outside?  How windy is it out there?  When is sunrise in Paris? Værdipapirer Brug Siri til hurtigt at få kurserne på dine yndlingspapirer. Få markedskapitalisering eller P/Eforhold. Spørg om bestemt indekser og den generelle situation. F.eks.:  What’s Apple’s stock price? Kapitel 4 Siri 51 What’s Apple’s P/E ratio?  What did Yahoo close at today?  How’s the Nikkei doing?  How are the markets doing?  What’s the temperature outside? Ur Brug Siri til hurtigt at indstille en alarm til næste morgen, tage tid på kagen i ovnen eller finde ud, hvad tid det er på den oversøiske destination. Indstille eller ændre alarmer:  Wake me up tomorrow at 7 a.m.  Set an alarm for 6:30 a.m.  Wake me up in 8 hours  Change my 6:30 alarm to 6:45  Turn off my 6:30 alarm  Delete my 7:30 alarm Når du indstiller en alarm, viser Siri alarmen, så du kan se, at den er rigtig. Du kan trykke på kontakten for at slå alarmen til eller fra. Tryk på alarmen for at åbne den i programmet Ur. Spørge om dato og tid:  What time is it? 52 Kapitel 4 Siri What time is it in Berlin?  What is today’s date?  What’s the date this Saturday? Siri viser et ur. Tryk på det for at åbne programmet Ur. Bruge tidtagningen:  Set the timer for ten minutes  Show the timer  Pause the timer  Resume  Reset the timer  Stop it Siri viser en tidtager. Tryk på den for at åbne programmet Ur. Kontakter Siri bruger optegnelserne i Kontakter til at finde adresser, slå telefonnumre og andre oplysninger op eller til at fortælle dig om personers fødselsdage. Siri ved endda ved at se på dit personlige kontaktkort, hvem du er i familie med . Se “Fortælle Siri om dig selv” på side 41. Hvis du vil spørge om kontakter, kan du sige:  What’s Michael’s address?  What is Susan Park’s phone number? Kapitel 4 Siri 53 When is my wife’s birthday?  Show Jennifer’s home email address  What’s my brother’s work address? Finde kontakter:  Show Jason Russell  Find people named Park  Who is Michael Manning? Hvis du er usikker på, hvilket telefonnummer du skal bruge til en kontakt, skal du bede Siri vises dig personens kontaktoplysninger. Du skal bare trykke på et nummer for at ringe op. Der er også andre aktive emner – tryk på en e-post-adresse for at oprette en ny e-post-besked, eller tryk på knappen FaceTime for at tale ansigt til ansigt med en anden. “Find John” kan være med til at indsnævre listen over muligheder, hvis du ved, han hedder John, men ikke kan huske hans efternavn. Noter Brug Siri til at oprette noter verbalt eller til at finde noter, du allerede har oprettet. Sig f.eks.:  Note that I spent $12 on lunch  Note: check out that new Alicia Keys album  Find my restaurant note  Create a reading list note  Add Tom Sawyer to my reading list note Siri viser noten, så du kan gennemse den. Tryk på noten for at redigere den. Siri åbner programmer Noter for dig, og du kan redigere noten ved at skrive eller diktere. Se “Diktering” på side 55. Safari Du kan søge på internettet med Siri – vælge, hvilket søgeprogram der skal bruges eller søge på et sted som Wikipedia. F.eks.:  Search the web for Bora Bora  Search for vegetarian pasta recipes  Search the web for best cable plans  Google the war of 1812  Search Wikipedia for Abraham Lincoln 54 Kapitel 4 Siri Search for news about the World Cup  Bing Alicia Keys Siri åbner Safari og udfører den ønskede søgning. Hvis du ikke vælger søgeprogram, bruger Siri det, der er valgt i Safaris indstillinger. Gå til Indstillinger > Safari. WolframAlpha Bed Siri om nogle oplysninger eller om at udføre en beregning, hvorefter Siri muligvis vil henvise til WolframAlpha (www.wolframalpha.com). Svar indeholder ofte beslægtede oplysninger. Nogle eksempler på spørgsmål og anmodninger:  How many calories in a bagel?  What is an 18% tip on $86.74 for four people?  Who’s buried in Grant’s tomb?  How long do dogs live?  What is the Gossamer Condor?  What’s the square root of 28?  How many dollars is 45 euros?  What was the Best Picture of 1983?  How many days until Christmas?  How far away is the sun?  When is the next solar eclipse?  Show me the Orion constellation  What’s the population of Jamaica?  How high is Mt. Everest?  How deep is the Atlantic Ocean?  What’s the price of gasoline in Chicago? Diktering Når Siri er slået til, kan du også diktere tekst. Se “Diktering” på side 27. Selvom du kan oprette e-post-beskeder, sms'er og anden tekst ved at tale direkte til Siri, foretrækker du måske at diktere. Med diktering kan du redigere en besked i stedet for at udskifte hele teksten. Diktering giver dig også mere tid til at tænke, mens du skriver beskeden. Kapitel 4 Siri 55Siri opfatter pauser som en midlertidig afslutning på din tale og bruger lejligheden til at svare dig. Selvom det betyder, at du kan have en naturlig samtale med Siri, kan Siri finde på at afbryde dig, før du er helt færdig, fordi du holdt en tænkepause. Med diktering kan du holde pause lige så tit, du vil, og fortsætte med at tale, når du er klar. Du kan også starte med at skrive tekst vha. Siri og fortsætte vha. diktering. Du kan f.eks. oprette en e-post-besked med Siri og derefter trykke på udkastet for at åbne beskeden i Mail. I Mail kan du gøre beskeden færdig eller redigere den og foretage andre ændringer, f.eks. tilføje eller fjerne modtagere, revidere emnet eller ændre den konto, du sender e-post-beskeden fra. 56 Kapitel 4 SiriTelefon 5 Telefonopkald Foretage et opkald Du kan foretage opkald med iPhone ved blot at trykke på et navn eller et nummer blandt dine kontakter, bruge Siri til at sige “call bob” (iPhone 4S), trykke på en favorit eller trykke på et af de seneste opkald for at ringe tilbage. Knapperne nederst på skærmen Telefon giver dig nem adgang til favoritter, seneste opkald, kontakter og en numerisk blok til manuelle opkald. ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du kører sikkert, i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Antallet af ubesvarede opkald Ring op til en favorit med et enkelt tryk. Se seneste indgående og udgående opkald for at returnere et opkald eller få flere oplysninger. Ring til, send e-post eller sms til en person på din kontaktliste. Ring op manuelt Se en liste over dine Telefonbeskeder. Antal beskeder, du ikke har aflyttet Returnere et ubesvaret opkald Gør et af følgende:  Telefon: Tryk på Seneste, og tryk på et navn eller et nummer.  Låst skærm: Skub symbolet i advarslen til højre.  Meddelelsescenter: Tryk på det ubesvarede opkald. Ringe op manuelt Du kan bruge den numeriske blok til at ringe op manuelt. Ringe op til et nummer: Tryk på Num. blok, indtast nummeret, og tryk på Ring. 57Indsætte et nummer i den numeriske blok Tryk på skærmen over tastaturet, og tryk derefter på Sæt ind. Indtaste en pause på 2 sekunder Hold tasten “*” nede, indtil der vises et komma. Indtast en hård pause (der ringes først op når du trykker på knappen Ring) Hold tasten “#” nede, indtil der vises et komma. Ringe til det sidste nummer, du har ringet til Tryk på Num. blok, tryk på Ring, og tryk på Ring igen. Stemmeopkald Du kan bruge Siri (iPhone 4S) eller Stemmekontrol til at ringe til en person i dine kontakter eller til at ringe til et bestemt nummer. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39 og “Stemmekontrol” på side 30. Foretage et stemmeopkald: Aktiver Siri eller Stemmekontrol, sig “call” eller “dial”, og sig navnet eller nummeret. Siri: Hvis skærmen ikke er tændt skal du trykke på Til/fra eller knappen Hjem og holde iPhone op til øret. Stemmekontrol eller Siri: Hold knappen Hjem nede, indtil du hører tonen. Du kan også trykke på knappen midt på øretelefonerne til iPhone. F.eks.:  Ring til Jan Andersen  Ring til Jan Andersen hjemme  Ring til Jan Andersen, mobil Du opnår de bedste resultater, hvis du siger det fulde navn på den person, du ringer til. Når du foretager et telefonopkald med stemmeopkald, skal du sige hvert tal for sig – sig f.eks. “fire et, fem fem, et to et to”. Bemærk: Det er kun ved områdekoden “800” i USA, at du kan sige “eight hundred”. Modtage opkald Tryk på Svar, når du modtager et opkald. Hvis iPhone er låst, skal du trække mærket. Du kan også trykke på knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Gøre et opkald stille Tryk på knappen Til/fra eller en af lydstyrkeknapperne. Du kan stadig besvare opkaldet, når du har gjort det stille, inden det viderestilles til telefonsvareren. Afvise et opkald og sende det direkte til telefonsvareren Gør et af følgende:  Tryk hurtigt to gange på knappen Til/fra.  Tryk på og hold knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone nede i omkring to sekunder. To lave biplyde bekræfter, at opkaldet er afvist.  Tryk på Afslå (hvis iPhone ikke er på vågeblus, når du modtager et opkald). Blokere for opkald og bevare Wi-Fiforbindelsen til internettet Gå til Indstillinger, og slå Flyfunktion til, og tryk derefter på Wi-Fi for at slå det til. Når iPhone er slukket, eller Flyfunktion er slået til, viderestilles indgående opkald direkte til telefonsvareren. 58 Kapitel 5 TelefonUnder en samtale Under en samtale viser skærmen muligheder til samtaler. Gør linjen lydløs. iPhone 4 eller nyere modeller: Hold en finger nede for at sætte opkaldet i venteposition. Ring til et nummer eller indtast det. Brug højttalertelefonen eller en Bluetooth-enhed. Få kontaktoplysninger. iPhone 4 eller nyere modeller: Foretag et FaceTime-opkald. iPhone 3GS (knappen Tænd/sluk): Sæt et opkald i venteposition. Foretag endnu et opkald. Valg til opkald kan variere, afhængigt af hvilken iPhone du bruger. Bruge et andet program under et opkald Tryk på knappen Hjem , og tryk på et programsymbol. Du vender tilbage til ved at trykke på den grønne linje øverst på skærmen. Afbryde et opkald Tryk på Slut opkald. Eller tryk på knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Ekstra opkald Under et opkald kan du foretage eller modtage endnu et opkald. Hvis du modtager endnu et opkald, bipper iPhone og viser oplysninger om den person, der ringer, samt en liste over muligheder. Bemærk: At foretage og modtage yderligere opkald kan være en ekstratjeneste i nogle områder. Du kan få flere oplysninger hos operatøren. Besvare et ekstra indgående opkald:  Ignorere opkaldet og sende det til telefonsvareren: Tryk på Ignorer.  Sætte det første opkald i venteposition og besvare det nye: Tryk på Udsæt opkald + Svar.  Afslutte det første opkald og besvare det nye: Hvis du bruger et GSM-netværk, skal du trykke på Slut opkald + Svar. På et CDMA-netværk skal du trykke på Slut opkald og derefter på Svar, når det andet opkald ringer tilbage, eller trække mærket, hvis telefonen er låst. Hvis du er i gang med et videoopkald med FaceTime, kan du enten afslutte videoopkaldet for at besvare det indgående opkald eller afvise det indgående opkald. Foretage et ekstra opkald Tryk på Tilføj opkald. Det første opkald sættes i venteposition. Skifte mellem opkald Tryk på Ombyt. Det aktive opkald sættes i venteposition. Med CDMA kan du ikke skifte mellem opkald, hvis det andet opkald var udgående, men du kan kombinere opkaldene. Hvis du slutter det andet opkald eller det kombinerede opkald, sluttes begge opkald. Kombinere opkald Tryk på Komb. opkald. Med CDMA kan du ikke kombinere opkald, hvis det andet opkald var indgående. Kapitel 5 Telefon 59Telefonkonferencer Med GSM kan du indstille et telefonmøde og tale med op til 5 personer samtidig, afhængigt af operatøren. Bemærk: Telefonkonferencer kan være en ekstratjeneste i nogle områder. Du kan få oplysninger hos operatøren. Starte en telefonkonference: 1 Foretag et opkald. 2 Tryk på Tilføj person, og foretag endnu et opkald. Det første opkald sættes i venteposition. 3 Tryk på Komb. opkald. Opkaldene samles på en linje, og alle deltagerne kan høre hinanden. 4 Gentag trin to og tre for at tilføje flere opkald. Udelukke en person Tryk på Konference, og tryk på ved siden af et opkald. Tryk derefter på Slut opkald. Tale privat med en af personerne Tryk på Konference, og tryk på Privat ved siden af et opkald. Tryk på Komb. opkald for at genoptage konferencen. Tilføje et indgående opkald Tryk på Udsæt opkald + Svar, og tryk på Komb. opkald. Hvis din tjeneste inkluderer telefonkonferencer, har iPhone altid en ekstra tilgængelig linje ud over telefonkonferencen. Bemærk: Du kan ikke foretage et videoopkald med FaceTime, når du afholder en telefonkonference. Bruge en Bluetooth-enhed til opkald Du kan foretage og modtage opkald med en Bluetooth-enhed, der er parret med iPhone. Se “Parre en Bluetooth-enhed med iPhone” på side 34. Der findes oplysninger om brug af Bluetooth-enheden i den dokumentation, der fulgte med enheden. Springe Bluetooth-enheden over:  Besvar et opkald ved at trykke på skærmen på iPhone.  Tryk på Lyd under et opkald, og vælg iPhone eller Medhør.  Slå Bluetooth fra i Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth.  Slå Bluetooth-enheden fra, eller flyt den uden for rækkevidde. Du skal være inden for en rækkevidde på 10 meter fra en Bluetooth-enhed, før den kan forbindes med iPhone. Nødopkald Selvom iPhone er låst med en adgangskode, kan du måske alligevel foretage nødopkald. Foretage nødopkald, når iPhone er låst: På skærmen Skriv kode skal du trykke på Nødopkald, indtaste nummeret og trykke på den grønne knap. I USA får udbydere af nødtjenester lokalitetsoplysninger (hvis de findes), når du ringer til 911. Når et nødopkald slutter på en CDMA-model, skifter iPhone til Nødopkaldsfunktion, så vagtcentralen kan ringe tilbage. I denne funktion er der blokeret for dataoverførsel og tekstbeskeder. Slutte Nødopkaldsfunktion (CDMA): Gør et af følgende:  Tryk på knappen tilbage. 60 Kapitel 5 Telefon Tryk på knappen Til/fra eller knappen Hjem .  Brug den numeriske blok til at ringe til et nummer, der ikke er til nødopkald. Nødopkaldsfunktion slutter automatisk efter nogle få minutter, afhængigt af operatøren. Vigtigt: Du bør ikke være afhængig af trådløse enheder til vigtig kommunikation, f.eks. i medicinske nødstilfælde. Du kan måske ikke bruge iPhone til nødopkald alle steder eller under alle driftsforhold. Numre og tjenester til nødopkald kan variere fra land til land, og nogle gange er det ikke muligt at foretage nødopkald, fordi der ikke er nogen netværksdækning eller pga. forstyrrelser. Nogle mobilnetværk accepterer måske ikke et nødopkald fra iPhone, hvis den ikke er aktiveret, hvis iPhone ikke er kompatibel med eller konfigureret til at bruge et bestemt mobilnetværk (hvor relevant), hvis der ikke er et SIM-kort i iPhone, eller hvis SIM-kortet er låst med en PIN-kode. Hvis du er i gang med et videoopkald med FaceTime, skal du afslutte opkaldet, før du kan foretage et nødopkald. FaceTime Med videoopkald med FaceTime (iPhone 4 eller nyere modeller) kan du se og høre den person, du taler med. Du kan foretage et videoopkald til personer med en Mac eller iOS-enhed, der understøtter FaceTime. Der kræves ingen indstilling, men du skal have en Wi-Fi-forbindelse til internettet. FaceTime bruger som standard kameraet på forsiden, så den person, du taler med, kan se dit ansigt, men du kan skifte til kameraet på bagsiden og dele, hvad du ser omkring dig. Bemærk: FaceTime er måske ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder. Foretage et FaceTime-opkald: I Kontakter skal du vælge et navn, trykke på FaceTime og på den e-post-adresse eller det telefonnummer, den pågældende person bruger til FaceTime. Hvis du vil ringe til en person, der har en iPhone 4 eller nyere modeller, kan du begynde med en telefonsamtale og derefter trykke på FaceTime. Når der er forbindelse, vises den andens persons billede på din skærm. Et indsat billede viser, hvad den anden person ser. Vend iPhone om på siden for at bruge FaceTime i liggende format. Skift kameraer Træk billedet til et tilfældigt hjørne. Lydløs (du kan høre og se; personen, der ringer op, kan se, men ikke høre). Hvis Wi-Fi-netværket er utilgængeligt (f.eks. hvis du er uden for dækningsområdet), får du mulighed for at ringe op til nummeret igen vha. et almindeligt stemmeopkald. Bemærk: Når du foretager et videoopkald med FaceTime, vises dit telefonnummer, selvom du har valgt ikke at vise dit nummer. Kapitel 5 Telefon 61Foretage et FaceTime-opkald vha. Siri eller Stemmekontrol: Hold knappen Hjem nede, indtil du hører tonen. Med Siri (iPhone 4S) kan du også bare holde iPhone op til øret, mens skærmen er tændt. Sig “FaceTime”, efterfulgt af navnet på den person, du vil ringe til. Blokere FaceTime-opkald Gå til Indstillinger > FaceTime, og slå FaceTime fra. Du kan også slå FaceTime fra i Begrænsninger. Se “Begrænsninger” på side 171. Bruge din Apple-id eller en e-postadresse til FaceTime Gå til Indstillinger > FaceTime, og tryk på “Brug din Apple-id til FaceTime” eller Tilføj en e-post. Se “FaceTime” på side 61. Visuel telefonsvarer Indstille telefonsvareren På iPhone kan du med visuel telefonsvarer se en liste over dine beskeder og vælge dem, du vil lytte til eller slette, uden at du først skal høre instruktionerne eller alle de foregående beskeder. Bemærk: Visuel telefonsvarer findes muligvis ikke i alle områder eller kan være en ekstratjeneste. Du kan få flere oplysninger hos operatøren. Hvis visuel telefonsvarer ikke er tilgængelig, skal du trykke på Besked og følge instruktionerne for at høre dine beskeder. Antallet af ubesvarede opkald og beskeder, der ikke er aflyttet. Første gang du trykker på Besked, beder iPhone dig om at oprette en adgangskode til telefonsvareren og optage din hilsen på telefonsvareren. Ændre din hilsen: Tryk på Besked, tryk på Hilsen, og tryk på Speciel. Tryk på Optag, og sig hilsenen. Klik på Stop, når du er færdig. Tryk på Afspil for at høre et eksempel. Du starter en ny optagelse ved at trykke på Optag igen. Klik på Arkiver, når du er færdig. Bruge operatørens standardhilsen Tryk på Besked, tryk på Hilsen, og tryk på Standard. Indstille en lyd til nye telefonbeskeder Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde, og slå Ny besked til. Lyden afspilles en gang for hver ny telefonbesked. Hvis kontakten Ring/stille er slået fra, afspiller iPhone ingen påmindelser. Ændre adgangskode til telefonsvareren Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon > Skift adgangskode til telefonsvarer. Kontrollere telefonbeskeder Når du trykker på Telefon, viser iPhone antallet af ubesvarede opkald og nye telefonbeskeder. 62 Kapitel 5 TelefonTryk på Besked for at se en liste over dine telefonbeskeder. Træk afspilningsmærket for at hoppe til et sted i en besked. Beskeder, der ikke er aflyttet Afspil/pause Kontaktinfo Spillelinje Højttalertelefon (Lyd, når en Bluetooth-enhed er tilsluttet. Tryk for at vælge udgående lyd.) Returner opkaldet. Lytte til en besked i telefonsvareren Tryk på Telefonsvarer, og tryk derefter på en besked. Hvis du allerede har hørt beskeden, kan du afspille den igen ved at trykke en gang til på den. Brug og til at afbryde og genoptage afspilning. Når du har hørt en besked, arkiveres den, indtil operatøren sletter den. Kontrollere telefonbeskeder fra en anden telefon Ring til dit eget nummer eller til operatørens nummer til ekstern adgang. Slette beskeder Slette en besked: Skub til eller tryk på beskeden, og tryk på Slet. Bemærk: I nogle områder bliver slettede visuelle telefonbeskeder muligvis fjernet permanent af operatøren. Høre en slettet besked Tryk på Slettede beskeder (sidst på listen), og tryk på beskeden. Fortryde sletning af en besked Tryk på Slettede beskeder (sidst på listen), tryk på beskeden, og tryk på Fortryd slet. Slette beskeder Tryk på Slettede beskeder (sidst på listen), og tryk derefter på Slet alt. Kontakter Fra en kontakts infoskærm kan du med et hurtigt tryk foretage et telefonopkald, oprette en ny e-post-besked, finde lokaliteten på et kort m.m. Se “Søge efter kontakter” på side 129. Favoritter Favoritter giver dig nem adgang til de telefonnumre, du bruger mest. Føje en kontakts telefonnummer til favoritlisten: Tryk på Kontakter, og vælg en kontakt. Tryk på “Føj til Favoritter”. Vælg et telefonnummer eller en e-post-adresse (til FaceTime-opkald). På iPhone 4 og nyere modeller skal du vælge, om det skal arkiveres som et stemmeopkald eller FaceTime-opkald. Kapitel 5 Telefon 63Du ringer til en favorit ved at trykke på Favoritter og vælge en kontakt. Hvis vises ud for et navn, foretager iPhone et FaceTime-opkald. Føje en kontakt til favoritlisten fra listen over seneste kontakter Tryk på Seneste, tryk på ved siden af navnet på kontakten, og tryk derefter på “Føj til favoritter”. Slette en kontakt fra listen over favoritter Tryk på Favoritter, og tryk på Rediger. Tryk derefter på ved siden af en kontakt eller et nummer, og tryk på Fjern. Ændre emners rækkefølge på favoritlisten Tryk på Favoritter, og tryk på Rediger. Træk derefter ved siden af en kontakt til en ny placering på listen. Viderestil opkald, Opkald venter og Nummer Viderestille opkald Du kan indstille iPhone, så den viderestiller alle opkald til et andet nummer. Bemærk: FaceTime-opkald viderestilles ikke. Slå Viderestil opkald til (GSM): Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon > Viderestil opkald, og slå Viderestil opkald til. På skærmen “Viderestil til” skal du skrive det telefonnummer, opkaldene skal viderestilles til. Slå Viderestil opkald til (CDMA): Tast *72 på den numeriske blok efterfulgt af det nummer, du viderestiller opkald til, og tryk på Ring. Du slår viderestil opkald fra (CDMA) ved at indtaste *73 og trykke på Ring. Med GSM vises symbolet for viderestil opkald ( ) på statuslinjen, når viderestil opkald er slået til. Du skal være inden for rækkevidde af mobilnetværket, når du indstiller iPhone til at viderestille opkald – ellers kan opkald ikke viderestilles. Opkald venter Opkald venter giver dig mulighed for at besvare et indgående opkald, mens du taler med en anden. Du kan:  Ignorere det indgående opkald  Sætte det aktuelle opkald i venteposition og besvare det indgående opkald  Afslutte det aktuelle opkald og besvare det indgående opkald Hvis du taler med nogen, og opkald venter er slået fra, går indgående opkald direkte til telefonsvareren. Se “Ekstra opkald” på side 59. Slå Opkald venter til (GSM): Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon > Opkald venter. Med CDMA er opkald venter slået til som standard, men det kan slås fra for et enkelt opkald. Slå Opkald venter fra til et opkald (CDMA): Tast *70, og ring op til nummeret. Nummer Nummer viser dit navn eller nummer til den person, du ringer til, hvis modtagerens udstyr understøtter den funktion, og du ikke har slået funktionen fra eller blokeret den hos operatøren. Bemærk: Når du foretager et videoopkald med FaceTime, vises dit telefonnummer, selvom du har slået det fra eller valgt ikke at vise dit nummer. Slå Nummer til eller fra (GSM): Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon > Vis mit nummer. Med CDMA er nummer slået til som standard, men det kan slås fra for et enkelt opkald. 64 Kapitel 5 TelefonSlå Nummer fra til et opkald (CDMA): Tast *67, og ring op til nummeret. Ringetoner, kontakten Ring/stille og vibration iPhone leveres med ringetoner, som du kan bruge til indgående opkald samt til alarmer og tidtagning i Ur. Du kan også købe ringetoner fra sange i iTunes. Brug kontakten Ring/stille til at slå ringetonen til og fra, og brug lydindstillingerne til at indstille muligheder til vibration. Som standard er iPhone indstillet, så den vibrerer, hvad enten den er indstillet til at ringe eller til stille funktion. Indstille standardringetonen: Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde > Ringetone. Slå ringetoner til og fra: Skub kontakten på siden af iPhone. Se “Kontakten Ring/stille” på side 11. Vigtigt: Alarmer i Ur afspilles, selvom du indstiller kontakten Ring/stille til stille. Indstille iPhone til at vibrere: Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde. De separate kontrolmuligheder gør det muligt at indstille vibration til både ringe- og stille funktion. Tildele en ringetone til en kontakt I Kontakter skal du vælge en kontakt, trykke på Rediger, trykke på Ringetone og vælge en ringetone. Købe en ringetone fra iTunes Store Se “Købe musik, lydbøger og toner” på side 120. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Lyde og kontakten Ring/stille” på side 166. Internationale opkald Foretage internationale opkald fra dit hjemmeområde Hvis du vil have oplysninger om internationale opkald fra dit hjemmeområde, inklusive takster og andre gebyrer, skal du kontakte operatøren eller gå ind på operatørens websted. Bruge iPhone i udlandet Når du rejser i udlandet kan du muligvis bruge iPhone til at foretage opkald, sende og modtage sms'er og bruge programmer, der opretter forbindelse til internettet, afhængigt af tilgængelige netværk. Slå international roaming til: Kontakt operatøren for at få oplysninger om tilgængelighed og gebyrer. Vigtigt: Samtale-, sms- og data-roaming kræver evt. ekstra betaling. For at undgå at betale for telefonopkald og data leveret via mobilnetværket (inkl. visuel telefonsvarer), når du bruger roaming uden for operatørens netværk, kan du slå Samtaleroaming og Data-roaming fra. Hvis du har en iPhone 4S, der er blevet aktiveret til et CDMA-netværk, kan du muligvis bruge roaming på GSM-netværk, hvis der er installeret et SIM-kort i telefonen. Se “Installere SIMkortet” på side 14. Når du bruger roaming på et GSM-netværk, har iPhone adgang til funktionerne i et GSM-netværk. Evt. mod betaling. Du kan få flere oplysninger hos operatøren. Kapitel 5 Telefon 65Slå samtaleroaming fra på et CDMA-netværk Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Når du slår Samtaleroaming fra, slår du telefonopkald fra, når du er uden for operatørens netværk. Slå Data-roaming fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Når du slår Data-roaming fra, slås dataoverførsler via mobilnetværket fra. Programmer, der bruger internettet, slås fra, medmindre iPhone har adgang til internettet via en Wi-Fi-forbindelse. Levering af visuelle telefonsvar slås fra, medmindre operatøren ikke kræver betaling for det. Indstille iPhone til at tilføje det korrekte præfiks ved opkald fra et andet land: Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon og slå International hjælp til (findes ikke i alle områder). På den måde kan du bruge kontakter og favoritter til at foretage opkald i USA uden at skulle tilføje et præfiks eller en landekode. Vælge den operatør, der skal bruges Gå til Indstillinger > Operatør. Denne mulighed findes kun, når du er uden for operatørens netværk, og med operatører, der har roaming-aftaler med din tjenesteudbyder. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Operatør” på side 166. Bruge GSM-netværk i udlandet med en CDMA-aktiveret iPhone Gå til Indstillinger > Netvæk > Roaming, og slå International CDMA fra. Få telefonbeskeder, når visuel telefonsvarer ikke er tilgængelig Ring op til dit eget nummer (på en CDMA-model skal du taste dit eget nummer efterfulgt af #), eller hold tasten “1” nede på den numeriske blok. Slå Mobildata til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Slå Mobildata fra Gå til Indstillinger, tryk på Flyfunktion for at slå den til, og slå Wi-Fi til. Indgående telefonopkald sendes videre til telefonsvareren. Du foretager og modtager opkald igen og lytter til dine telefonbeskeder ved at slå flyfunktion fra. Vælge indstillinger til Telefon I Indstillinger skal du vælge Telefon for at:  Se telefonnummeret på din iPhone  Slå viderestil opkald, opkald venter og nummer til og fra (GSM)  Slå TTY til og fra  Ændre adgangskode til telefonsvareren (GMS)  Slå international hjælp til og fra – når du ringer fra udlandet kan du med international hjælp ringe til kontakter og favoritter i USA uden at skulle tilføje et præfiks eller en landekode (GSM)  Låse dit SIM-kort, så der kræves en PIN-kode, når du tænder iPhone (kræves af nogle operatører) I Indstillinger skal du vælge FaceTime for at:  Slå FaceTime til og fra  Bruge din Apple-id til FaceTime  Tilføje en e-post-adresse til brug for FaceTime Hvis du vil indstille ringetoner, vibration og lyden til nye beskeder, skal du gå til Indstillinger > Lyde. Se også “Lyde og kontakten Ring/stille” på side 166. 66 Kapitel 5 TelefonMail 6 Mail fungerer med iCloud, MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange og mange af de mest populære e-postsystemer, inkl. Yahoo!, Google, Hotmail og AOL – samt andre POP3- og IMAP-standardsystemer til e-post. Du kan sende og modtage fotografier, videoer og grafik og se PDF-dokumenter og andre bilag. Du kan også udskrive beskeder og bilag, som kan åbnes i funktionen Vis. Se efter og læse e-post I Mail giver skærmen Postkasser dig hurtig adgang til alle dine indbakker og andre postkasser. Når du åbner en postkasse, henter og viser Mail de nyeste beskeder. Du kan indstille det antal beskeder, der skal hentes, i indstillinger til Mail. Se “E-post-konti og -indstillinger” på side 71. Ulæste beskeder Antal beskeder i tråd Organisere beskeder efter tråd Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og slå Organiser efter tråd til eller fra. Hvis du organiserer beskeder efter tråd, vises beslægtede beskeder som en enkelt optegnelse i postkassen. Se “E-post-konti og -indstillinger” på side 71. Se efter nye beskeder Vælg en postkasse, eller tryk på når som helst. Indlæse flere beskeder Rul til bunden af listen med beskeder, og tryk på Indlæs flere beskeder. Zoome ind på en del af en besked Tryk to gange på det område, du vil zoome ind på. Tryk to gange igen for at zoome ud. Du kan også knibe ud eller ind med fingrene for at zoome ind eller ud. 67Skifte størrelse på en tekstspalte, så den tilpasses til skærmen Tryk to gange på teksten. Se alle modtagerne af en besked Tryk på Flere oplysninger. Tryk på et navn eller en e-post-adresse for at se modtagerens kontaktoplysninger, og tryk derefter på et telefonnummer eller en e-post-adresse for at kontakte personen. Føje en e-postmodtager til din liste over kontaktpersoner Tryk på beskeden, og tryk evt. på Flere oplysninger for at se modtagerne. Tryk derefter på et navn eller en e-post-adresse, og tryk på Opret ny kontakt eller "Føj til eksisterende kontakt". Markere en besked med et flag eller som ulæst Åbn beskeden, og tryk evt. på Flere oplysninger. Tryk derefter på Marker. Se “Organisere e-post” på side 70, hvis du vil markere flere beskeder som ulæste. Åbne en invitation til et møde Tryk på invitationen. Se “Besvare invitationer” på side 88. Arbejde med flere konti Hvis du har indstillet mere end en konto, får du under afsnittet Konti på skærmen Postkasser adgang til dine konti. Du kan også trykke på Alle indbakker for at se alle dine indkommende beskeder på en enkelt liste. Der findes oplysninger om indstilling af ekstra e-post-konti i “E-postkonti og -indstillinger” på side 71. Når du skriver en ny besked, skal du trykke på feltet Fra for at vælge den konto, som beskeden skal sendes fra. Sende e-post Du kan sende en e-post-besked til alle, som har en e-post-adresse. Oprette en besked: Tryk på Tilføje en modtager fra Kontakter Skriv et navn eller en e-post-adresse i feltet Til, eller tryk på . Flytte rundt på modtagere Du flytter en modtager fra et felt til et anden, f.eks. fra Til til Cc, ved at trække modtagerens navn til den nye placering. Gøre tekst fed, kursiv eller understreget Tryk på indsætningsmærket for at vise vælgeknapperne, og tryk derefter på Vælg. Træk punkterne for at vælge den tekst, du vil formatere. Tryk på , og tryk derefter på B/I/U. Tryk på Fed, Kursiv eller Understreget for at anvende formatet. Sende et fotografi eller en video i en e-post-besked I Fotos skal du vælge et fotografi eller en video, trykke på og derefter trykke på Send foto med e-post eller Send video med e-post. Du kan også kopiere og indsætte fotografier og videoer. Hvis du vil sende flere fotografier eller videoer, skal du trykke på , når du ser miniaturerne i et album. Tryk for at vælge fotografierne og videoerne, tryk på Del, og tryk på E-post. Arkivere en besked som et udkast, så du kan skrive videre på den senere Tryk på Annuller, og tryk derefter på Arkiver. Beskeden arkiveres i postkassen Udkast. Hold nede for hurtigt at få adgang til den. Svare på en besked Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Svar. Arkiver eller billeder, som var vedlagt den oprindelige besked, sendes ikke tilbage. Hvis du vil inkludere bilagene, skal du videresende beskeden i stedet for at svare på den. Citere en del af den besked, du svarer på eller videresender Rør ved og hold fingeren for at vælge tekst. Træk gribepunkterne for at vælge den tekst, du vil inkludere i dit svar, og tryk derefter på . Du ændrer indrykningen af citeret tekst ved at røre ved og holde fingeren nede for at vælge tekst og derefter trykke på . Tryk på Citatniveau, og tryk derefter på Forøg og Formindsk. 68 Kapitel 6 MailVideresende en besked Åbn en besked, tryk på , og tryk derefter på Frem. Dele kontaktoplysninger I Kontakter skal du vælge en kontakt, trykke på Del kontakt nederst på Infoskærmen. Bruge henvisninger og registrerede data iPhone genkender webhenvisninger, telefonnumre, e-post-adresser, datoer og andre typer oplysninger, som du kan bruge til at åbne en webside, oprette en adresseret e-post-besked, oprette eller føje oplysninger til en kontakt eller udføre andre nyttige handlinger. Registrerede data vises med understreget blå tekst. Tryk på dataene for at bruge standardhandlingen, eller hold fingeren på den for at se andre handlinger. Med en adresse kan du f.eks. vise dens lokalitet i Kort eller føje den til Kontakter. Se bilag iPhone viser billedbilag i mange almindelige formater (JPEG, GIF og TIFF) integreret med teksten i e-post beskeder. iPhone kan afspille mange typer lydbilag, f.eks. MP3, AAC, WAV og AIFF. Du kan overføre og se arkiver, f.eks. PDF-, webside-, tekst-, Pages-, Keynote-, Numbers- og Microsoft Word-, Excel- og PowerPoint-dokumenter, der er vedlagt de beskeder, du modtager. Se et vedlagt arkiv: Tryk på bilaget for at åbne det i funktionen Vis. (Du skal muligvis vente, indtil arkivet er hentet, før du kan se det.) Åbne et vedlagt arkiv Hold fingeren på bilaget, og vælg derefter et program at åbne det i. Hvis ingen af dine programmer understøtter arkivet, og funktionen Vis heller ikke kan vise det, kan du se navnet på arkivet, men ikke åbne det. Arkivere et vedlagt fotografi eller en vedlagt video Tryk på og hold fingeren på fotografiet eller videoen, og tryk derefter på Arkiver billede eller video. Emnet arkiveres i albummet Kamerarulle i programmet Fotos. Funktionen Vis understøtter følgende dokumenttyper: .doc, .docx Microsoft Word .htm, .html webside .key Keynote .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf Billedfremviser, Adobe Acrobat .ppt, .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint .rtf Rich Text Format .txt tekst .vcf kontaktoplysninger .xls, .xlsx Microsoft Excel Udskrive beskeder og bilag Du kan udskrive e-post-beskeder og bilag, som kan åbnes i funktionen Vis. Udskrive en e-post-besked: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Udskriv. Kapitel 6 Mail 69Udskrive et integreret billede Hold fingeren på billedet, og tryk derefter på Arkiver billede. Åbn derefter Fotos, og udskriv billedet fra albummet Kamerarulle. Udskrive et bilag Tryk på bilaget for at se det i funktionen Vis, tryk på , og tryk på Udskriv. Du kan få flere oplysninger om udskrivning og udskriftsmuligheder i “Udskrive” på side 28. Organisere e-post Du kan organisere beskeder i en postkasse, mappe eller et vindue med søgeresultater. Du kan slette eller markere beskeder som læst. Du kan også flytte beskeder fra en postkasse eller mappe til en anden i den samme konto eller mellem forskellige konti. Du kan tilføje, slette eller omdøbe postkasser og mapper. Slette en besked: Åbn beskeden, og tryk på . Du kan også slette en besked direkte fra postkassen ved at skubbe til venstre eller højre over beskedens titel og derefter trykke på Slet. Nogle e-post-konti understøtter arkivering af beskeder i stedet for sletning. Når du arkiverer en besked, flyttes den fra indbakken til Alle e-post-beskeder. Slå arkivering til og fra i Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere. Gendanne en besked Slettede beskeder flyttes til postkassen Papirkurv. Du kan ændre, hvor længe beskeden skal ligge i papirkurven, før den slettes helt, ved at gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere. Tryk derefter på Avanceret. Slette eller flytte flere beskeder Tryk på Rediger, mens du ser en liste med beskeder, vælg de beskeder, du vil slette, og tryk på Flyt eller Slet. Flytte en besked til en anden postkasse eller mappe Mens du ser en besked, skal du trykke på og derefter vælge en postkasse eller mappe. Tilføje en postkasse Gå til listen postkasser, tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på Ny postkasse. Slette eller omdøbe en postkasse Gå til listen postkasser, tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på en postkasse. Skriv et nyt navn og en placering til postkassen. Tryk på Slet postkasse for at slette den og alt indholdet i den. Marker flere beskeder med flag og som læste Tryk på Rediger, mens du ser en liste med beskeder, vælg de ønskede beskeder, og tryk derefter på Marker. Vælg Sæt flag ved eller Marker som læst. Søge i e-post Du kan søge i felterne Til, Fra og Emne og i selve brødteksten i e-post beskeder. Mail søger i hentede beskeder i den aktuelle postkasse. Med iCloud-, Exchange- og nogle IMAP-konti til e-post kan du også søge i beskeder på serveren. Søge efter e-post-beskeder: Åbn en postkasse, rul til toppen og skriv teksten i søgefeltet. Tryk på Fra, Til, Emne eller Alle for at vælge, hvilke felter du vil søge i. Hvis din e-post-konto understøtter det, kan du også søge i beskeder på serveren. E-post-beskeder kan også inkluderes i søgninger fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. 70 Kapitel 6 MailE-post-konti og -indstillinger Konti Med Mail- og e-post-konti skal du gå til Indstillinger, > E-post, kontakter, kalendere. Du kan indstille:  Microsoft Exchange  iCloud  MobileMe  Google  Yahoo!  AOL  Microsoft Hotmail  Andre POP- og IMAP-postsystemer De indstillinger, der vises, afhænger af den type konto, du indstiller. Din tjenesteudbyder eller systemadministrator kan give dig de oplysninger, du skal indtaste. Ændre indstillinger til en konto: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og foretag de ønskede ændringer. De ændringer, du foretager i en kontos indstillinger på iPhone, synkroniseres ikke til computeren, så du kan konfigurere dine konti til iPhone, uden at det får indflydelse på kontoindstillingerne på computeren. Holde op med at bruge en konto Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og slå derefter en kontotjeneste (f.eks. E-post, Kalendere eller Noter) fra. Hvis en kontotjeneste er slået fra, viser eller synkroniserer iPhone ikke oplysninger med den kontotjeneste, før du slår den til igen. Det er en god måde at undgå at modtage arbejdspost, f.eks. når du er på ferie. Opbevare udkast, sendte beskeder og slettede beskeder på iPhone Til IMAP-konti kan du ændre placeringen af postkasserne Udkast, Sendt og Slettet. Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og tryk derefter på Avanceret. Indstille, hvornår beskeder skal fjernes permanent fra Mail Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og tryk derefter på Avanceret. Tryk på Fjern, og vælg et tidspunkt: Aldrig eller efter en dag, en uge eller en måned. Justere indstillinger til e-postserveren Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og vælg derefter en konto. Spørg netværksadministratoren eller internetudbyderen om de korrekte indstillinger. Justere indstillinger til SSL og adgangskoder Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og tryk derefter på Avanceret. Spørg netværksadministratoren eller internetudbyderen om de korrekte indstillinger. Slå arkivering af beskeder til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og slå Arkiver beskeder til og fra. Se “Organisere e-post” på side 70. Slette en konto Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, rul ned, og tryk på Slet konto. Alle de e-post-, kontakt-, kalender- og bogmærkeoplysninger, der synkroniseres med kontoen, fjernes fra iPhone. Kapitel 6 Mail 71Sende signerede og krypterede beskeder Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, vælg en konto, og tryk derefter på Avanceret. Slå S/MIME til, og vælg derefter certifikater til signering og kryptering af udgående beskeder. Hvis du vil installere certifikater, skal du have en konfigurationsbeskrivelse fra systemadministratoren, hente certifikaterne fra udstederens websted vha. Safari eller modtage dem i Mail som bilag. Vælge push-indstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Hent nye data. Push leverer nye oplysninger, når iPhone er forbundet til et Wi-Fi-netværk. Du kan evt. slå Push fra, hvis du vil ophæve levering af e-post og andre oplysninger eller vil spare på batteriet. Brug indstillingen Hent nye data til at bestemme, hvor ofte der skal anmodes om data. Du opnår længst batteritid, hvis du ikke henter for ofte. Definere andre indstillinger til e-post Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere for at foretage indstillinger til alle dine konti. E-post-indstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere for at foretage indstillinger til alle dine konti. Ændre de toner, der afspilles, når du sender eller modtager e-post: Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde. Hente nye data Med denne indstilling kan du slå Push-teknologien til og fra for iCloud-, Microsoft Exchange-, Yahoo!- og andre push-konti på iPhone. Push-konti overfører nye oplysninger til iPhone, når der er nye oplysninger på serveren (forsinkelser kan forekomme), og internetforbindelsen er aktiv. Du kan evt. slå Push fra, hvis du vil ophæve levering af e-post og andre oplysninger eller vil spare på batteriet. Når Push er slået fra og ved konti, der ikke understøtter push, kan data stadig hentes, dvs. iPhone kan kontrollere serveren og se, om der er nye oplysninger. Brug indstillingen Hent nye data til at bestemme hvor ofte, der skal anmodes om data. Du opnår længst batteritid, hvis du ikke henter for ofte. Hvis du slår Push fra eller indstiller Hent til Manuelt på skærmen Hent nye data, tilsidesætter den indstilling individuelle kontoindstillinger. Vælge push-indstillinger: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Hent nye data. 72 Kapitel 6 MailSafari 7 Safari giver dig mulighed for at surfe på internettet og se websider. Opret bogmærker på iPhone, og synkroniser dem med computeren. Føj webklip til hjemmeskærmen for at få hurtig adgang til dine yndlingswebsteder. Udskriv websider, PDF-dokumenter og andre dokumenter. Brug læselisten til at samle websteder til senere læsning. Se websider Søg på internettet og den aktuelle side. Svirp gennem åbne websider, eller åbn en ny side. Tryk to gange på et emne, eller knib for at zoome ind eller ud. Indtast en webadresse (URL). Tilføj et bogmærke, føj til læselisten, føj et symbol til hjemmeskærmen, eller del eller udskriv siden. Tryk på statuslinjen for hurtigt at rulle til toppen. Se dine bogmærker eller læseliste. Vise en webside: Tryk på adressefeltet (i titellinjen) for at få tastaturet frem. Skriv webadressen, og tryk på Gå. Hvis adressefeltet ikke vises, skal du trykke på statuslinjen for hurtigt at rulle til toppen. Du kan se websider i stående eller liggende format. Slette teksten i adressefeltet Tryk på . Rulle på en webside Træk op, ned eller sidelæns. Rulle inden for en ramme på en webside Rul med to fingre inden for rammen. 73Åbne en ny side Tryk på , og tryk på Ny side. Du kan have op til 8 åbne sider samtidig. Et tal inden i angiver antallet af åbne sider. Gå til en anden side Tryk på , svirp til venstre eller højre, og tryk derefter på siden. Stoppe indlæsning af en webside Tryk på . Genindlæse en webside Tryk på i adressefeltet. Lukke en side Tryk på , tryk derefter på ved siden. Beskytte private oplysninger og blokere visse websteders mulighed for at spore din adfærd Gå til Indstillinger > Safari, og slå Privat browser til. Definere indstillinger til Safari Gå til Indstillinger > Safari. Henvisninger Følge en henvisning på en webside: Tryk på henvisningen. Se den adresse, en henvisning peger på Hold fingeren på henvisningen. Registrerede data – f.eks. telefonnumre og e-post-adresser – kan også vises som henvisninger på websider. Hold en finger på en henvisning for at se de tilgængelige muligheder. Se “Bruge henvisninger og registrerede data” på side 69. Læseliste Med læselister kan du samle henvisninger til websider, som du kan læse senere. Føje en henvisning til den aktuelle side til din læseliste: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på “Føj til læseliste”. Føje en henvisning til din læseliste: Hold en finger på henvisningen, og vælg derefter “Føj til læseliste”. Se læselisten Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Læseliste. Brug iCloud til at holde din læseliste ajour på dine iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå bogmærker til. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Læser Læser viser webartikler uden reklamer og rod, så du kan læse uden at blive distraheret. På en webside med en artikel kan du bruge Læser til kun at se artiklen. Se en artikel i Læser: Tryk på knappen Læser, hvis den vises i adressefeltet. Justere skriftstørrelsen Tryk på . Oprette bogmærke til, føje til læseliste eller hjemmeskærm, dele eller udskrive artiklen Tryk på . Vende tilbage til normal oversigt Tryk på OK. 74 Kapitel 7 SafariSkrive tekst og udfylde formularer Skrive tekst: Tryk på et tekstfelt for at få tastaturet frem på skærmen. Flytte til et andet tekstfelt Tryk på tekstfeltet, eller tryk på Næste eller Forrige. Sende en formular Tryk på Gå eller Søg eller på henvisningen til siden for at sende formularen, hvis de findes. Du slår Auto-udfyld til, så du får hjælp til at udfylde formularen, ved at gå til Indstillinger > Safari > Auto-udfyld. Søge Du kan bruge søgefeltet i øverste højre hjørne til at søge på internettet, den aktuelle side eller i PDF-dokumenter. Søge på internettet, den aktuelle side eller i PDF-dokumenter, der kan søges i: Skriv teksten i søgefeltet.  Søge på internettet: Tryk på et af de viste forslag, eller tryk på Søg.  Finde søgeteksten på den aktuelle side eller i et PDF-dokument: Rul til bunden af skærmen, og tryk på optegnelsen under På denne side. Den første forekomst fremhæves. Du finder efterfølgende forekomster ved at trykke på . Ændre søgeprogram Gå til Indstillinger > Safari > Søgeprogram. Bogmærker og historie Oprette et bogmærke til en webside: Åbn siden, tryk på , og tryk på Tilføj bogmærke. Når du arkiverer et bogmærke, kan du redigere dets titel. Som standard arkiveres bogmærket på øverste niveau i Bogmærker. Tryk på Bogmærker for at vælge en anden mappe. Se tidligere websider (historie): Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Historie. Du sletter historien ved at trykke på Ryd. Åbne en webside med et bogmærke Tryk på . Redigere et bogmærke eller en bogmærkemappe Tryk på , vælg den mappe, som indeholder det bogmærke eller den mappe, du vil redigere, og tryk på Rediger. Brug iCloud til at holde bogmærker ajour på dine iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå bogmærker til. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Synkronisere bogmærker med webbrowseren på computeren Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Udskrive websider, PDF-dokumenter og andre dokumenter Udskrive en webside, et PDF-dokument eller et dokument i funktionen Vis: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Udskriv. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Udskrive” på side 28. Webklip Du kan oprette webklip, som vises som symboler på hjemmeskærmen. Kapitel 7 Safari 75Tilføje et webklip: Åbn websiden, og tryk på . Tryk derefter på “Føj til hjemmeskærm”. Når du åbner et webklip, zoomer Safari automatisk og ruller til den del af websiden, der blev vist, da du arkiverede webklippet. Medmindre websiden har et specielt symbol, bruges det billede også som symbol for webklippet på hjemmeskærmen. Webklip sikkerhedskopieres af iCloud og iTunes, men de synkroniseres ikke af iTunes eller MobileMe. De overføres heller ikke til andre enheder med push-funktion af iCloud. 76 Kapitel 7 SafariMusik 8 Tilføje musik og lyd Hente musik og andet lydindhold til iPhone:  Købe og hente indhold fra iTunes Store på iPhone. Se Kapitel 21,“iTunes Store,” på side 119. (Du kan også gå til iTunes Store fra Musik ved at trykke på knappen Butik, når du gennemser.)  Brug Automatiske overførsler til automatisk at hente ny musik købt på dine andre iOS-enheder og computere. Se “iCloud” på side 16.  Synkroniser med iTunes på computeren. Du kan synkronisere alle dine medier, eller du kan vælge bestemte sange eller andre emner. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18.  Brug iTunes Match til at lagre dit musikbibliotek i iCloud og få adgang til det fra alle dine iOSenheder og computere. Se “iTunes Match” på side 81. Afspille sange og anden lyd ADVARSEL: Der findes vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du undgår at beskadige hørelsen, i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Du kan med knapperne langs bunden af skærmen gennemse indhold i iPhone efter spillelister, kunstnere, sange og andre kategorier. Afspille en sang eller et andet emne: Tryk på emnet. Brug knapperne på skærmen til at styre afspilningen. Du kan også bruge knapperne på øretelefonerne. Se “Apple-øretelefoner med fjernbetjening og mikrofon” på side 33. 77Se skærmen Spiller nu: Tryk på Spiller nu. Næste/spol frem Afspil/pause Liste over spor Tilbage Forrige/ Lydstyrke spol tilbage AirPlay Tilpasse knapperne nederst på skærmen Tryk på Mere, tryk på Rediger, og træk et symbol over den knap, du vil udskifte. Hente flere podcastepisoder Tryk på Podcasts (tryk først på Mere, hvis Podcasts ikke vises), og tryk derefter på en podcast for at se tilgængelige episoder. Ryste for at blande Ryst iPhone for at slå blanding til og skifte sang. Ryst igen for at skifte til en anden sang. Du slår Ryst for at blande til og fra ved at gå til Indstillinger > Musik. Afspille musik på AirPlay-højttalere eller Apple TV Tryk på . Se “AirPlay” på side 33. Vise teksten til en sang Tryk på albumbilledet, mens du spiller en sang. (Tekster vises, hvis du har føjet dem til sangen i sangens Infovindue i iTunes og synkroniseret iPhone med iTunes.) Definere indstillinger til musik Gå til Indstillinger > Musik. Når du bruger et andet program, kan du vise betjeningspanelet til afspilning af lyd ved at trykke to gange på knappen Hjem og derefter svirpe fra venstre til højre langs bunden af skærmen. Knapperne virker i det aktive program – eller hvis musikken er sat på pause – i det sidste program, der spillede. Symbolet for programmet vises til højre. Tryk på symbolet for at åbne programmet. Svirp til højre igen for at vise et lydstyrkemærke og knappen AirPlay (når enheden er inden for rækkevide af Apple TV eller AirPlay-højttalere). Hvis du trykker to gange på knappen Hjem , vises knapperne til afspilning af lyd også, selvom skærmen er låst. 78 Kapitel 8 MusikEkstra betjeningsmuligheder til lyd Du kan se flere betjeningsmuligheder, hvis du trykker på albumbilledet på skærmen Spiller nu. Du kan se den forløbne tid, resterende tid og sangens nummer. Sangens tekst vises også, hvis du har føjet den til sangen i iTunes. Gentag Ping – god Spillelinje Bland Genius Ping-besked Afspilningsmærke Gentage sange Tryk på . = gentag alle sange på albummet eller listen = gentag kun den aktuelle sang = gentag ikke Blande sange Tryk på . = bland sange = afspil sange i rækkefølge. Hoppe til et sted i en sang Træk afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen. Før fingeren nedad for at nedsætte afspilningshastigheden. Oprette en Genius-spilleliste Tryk på . Se “Genius” på side 81. Bruge Ping Se “Følge kunstnere og venner” på side 120. Betjeningsmuligheder til podcasts og lydbøger Betjeningsmuligheder og oplysninger til podcasts og lydbøger vises på skærmen Spiller nu, når du starter afspilningen. Spillelinje Afspilningsmærke Afspilningshastighed E-post 30 sekunders gentagelse Indstille afspilningshastigheden Tryk på . Tryk igen for at ændre hastigheden. = Afspil med dobbelt hastighed. = Afspil med halv hastighed. = Afspil med normal hastighed. Hoppe til et sted på tidslinjen Træk afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen. Før fingeren nedad for at nedsætte afspilningshastigheden. Vise eller skjule betjeningspanelet Tryk på midten af skærmen. Skjule podcastoplysninger Gå til Indstillinger > Musik. Kapitel 8 Musik 79Bruge Siri eller stemmekontrol med Musik Du kan bruge Siri (iPhone 4S) eller stemmekontrol til at kontrollere afspilning af musik på iPhone. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39 og “Stemmekontrol” på side 30. Kontrollere musikafspilning Sig “afspil” eller “afspil musik”. Du sætter musikken på pause ved at sige “pause” eller “sæt musik på pause”. Du kan også sige “næste sang” eller “tidligere sang”. Afspille et album, en kunstner eller spilleliste Sig “afspil”, og sig derefter “album”, “kunstner” eller “spilleliste” og navnet. Blande den aktuelle spilleliste Sig “bland”. Få flere oplysninger om den sang, der afspilles Sig “hvad spiller”, “hvad sang er dette” eller “hvem synger denne sang”. Bruge Genius til at afspille lignende sange Sig “Genius”, “afspil mere af denne slags” eller “afspil flere sange som denne”. Annullere stemmekontrol Sig “annuller” eller “stop”. Gennemse albumbilleder i Cover Flow Når du gennemser musik, kan du vende iPhone om på siden for at se iTunes-indholdet med Cover Flow og gennemse musikken efter albumbilleder. Gennemse albumbilleder: Træk til venstre eller højre. Se sporene på et album Tryk på albumbillederne eller . Træk op eller ned for at rulle; tryk på et spor for at afspille det. Vende tilbage til albumbilledet Tryk på titellinjen. Eller tryk igen på . Vise spor i et album Se alle sporene på det album, som indeholder den aktuelle sang: Tryk på på skærmen Spiller nu. Tryk på et spor for at afspille det. Tryk på miniaturebilledet for at vende tilbage til skærmen Spiller nu. Vurderingslinje Tilbage til skærmen Spiller nu. Albumspor I sporlisteoversigt kan du angive vurderinger af sangene. Du kan bruge vurderinger, når du opretter smarte spillelister i iTunes. 80 Kapitel 8 MusikSøge i lydindhold Du kan søge i titler, kunstnere, album og komponister, podcasts og andet lydindhold på iPhone. Søge i musik: Skriv teksten i søgefeltet øverst på en liste over sange, spilleliste, kunstnerliste eller en anden oversigt over dit musikindhold. Du kan også søge i lydindhold fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. iTunes Match iTunes Match opbevarer dit musikbibliotek i iCloud – endda sange importeret fra cd'er – og giver dig når som helst og hvor som helst mulighed for at nyde din samling på iPhone og andre iOSenheder og computere. iTunes Match findes som et betalt abonnement. Bemærk: iTunes Match er ikke tilgængelig i alle områder. Du kan blive pålagt gebyrer for mobildata, hvis Indstillinger > Musik > Brug mobildata er slået til. Abonnere på iTunes Match: I iTunes på computeren skal du vælge Butik > Slå iTunes Match til og klikke på knappen Abonner. Når du abonnerer, føjer iTunes din musik, dine spillelister og Genius-miks til iCloud. Alle de sange, der allerede findes i iTunes Store, er automatisk tilgængelige i dit iCloud-bibliotek. Evt. resterende sange overføres. Du kan hente og afspille fundne sange i iTunes Plus-kvalitet (256 kbps AAC uden kopibeskyttelse), selvom originalen havde en dårligere kvalitet. Der er flere oplysninger på www. apple.com/dk/icloud/features. Slå iTunes Match til Gå til Indstillinger > Musik. Når du slår iTunes Match til, fjernes synkroniseret musik fra iPhone, og Genius-miks og Genius-spillelister slås fra. Genius En Genius-spilleliste er en samling sange i dit bibliotek, der passer godt sammen Du kan oprette Genius-spillelister i iTunes og synkronisere dem til iPhone. Du kan også oprette og arkivere Genius-spillelister direkte på iPhone. Et Genius-miks er et udvalg af sange af samme type, der gendannes fra dit bibliotek, hver gang du lytter til mikset. Hvis du vil bruge Genius på iPhone, skal du først slå Genius til i iTunes og derefter synkronisere iPhone med iTunes. Genius-miks synkroniseres automatisk, medmindre du administrerer din musik manuelt og vælger, hvilke miks du vil synkronisere til iTunes. Genius er en gratis tjeneste, men den kræver, at du har en Apple-id. Når du synkroniserer et Genius-miks, kan iTunes vælge og synkronisere sange fra dit bibliotek, som du ikke har valgt at synkronisere. Gennemse Genius-miks: Tryk på Genius (tryk først på Mere, hvis Genius ikke vises). Svirp til venstre eller højre for at se andre miks. Tryk på for at afspille et miks. Oprette en Genius-spilleliste: Vis Spillelister, tryk på Genius-spilleliste, og vælg en sang på listen. Du opretter en Genius-spilleliste fra skærmen Spiller nu ved at trykke for at vise knapperne til betjening og derefter trykke på . Kapitel 8 Musik 81Arkivere en Genius-spilleliste Tryk på Arkiver i spillelisten. Spillelisten arkiveres i Spillelister med titlen på den valgte sang. Opdatere en Genius-spilleliste Tryk på Opdater i spillelisten. Oprette en Genius-spilleliste med en anden sang Tryk på Genius-spilleliste, og tryk derefter på Ny og vælg en ny sang. Slette en arkiveret Genius-spilleliste Tryk på Genius-spillelisten og derefter på Slet. Genius-spillelister oprettet på iPhone kopieres til computeren, når du synkroniserer med iTunes. Bemærk: Når en Genius-spilleliste er synkroniseret til iTunes, kan du ikke længere slette den direkte fra iPhone. Brug iTunes til at redigere navnet på spillelisten, stoppe synkronisering og slette spillelisten. Spillelister Du kan oprette og redigere dine egne spillelister på iPhone eller redigere spillelister synkroniseret fra iTunes på computeren. Oprette en spilleliste: Vis Spillelister, og tryk på “Tilføj spillelisten” nær toppen af listen. Indtast en titel, tryk på for at vælge de sange og videoer, du vil inkludere, og tryk derefter på OK. Når du opretter en spilleliste og derefter synkroniserer iPhone til computeren, synkroniseres spillelisten til iTunes-biblioteket. Redigere en spilleliste: Vis Spillelister, og vælg den spilleliste, du vil redigere. Tryk på Rediger, og:  Tilføje flere sange: Tryk på .  Slette en sang: Tryk på . Når du sletter en sang fra en spilleliste, slettes den ikke fra iPhone.  Hvis du vil flytte en sang op eller ned på listen: Træk . Dine ændringer kopieres til spillelisten i dit iTunes-bibliotek, enten næste gang du synkroniserer iPhone med computeren, eller trådløst via iCloud, hvis du abonnerer på iTunes Match. Slette en spilleliste I Spillelister skal du trykke på den spilleliste, du vil slette, og derefter trykke på Slet. Fjerne en spilleliste I Spillelister skal du trykke på den spilleliste, du vil slette, og derefter trykke på Ryd. Slette en sang fra iPhone I Sange skal du skubbe sangen og trykke på Slet. Sangen slettes fra iPhone, men ikke fra iTunes-biblioteket på din Mac eller pc. Deling i hjemmet Med Deling i hjemmet kan du afspille musik, film og tv-udsendelser på iPhone fra iTunesbiblioteket på din Mac eller pc. iPhone og computeren skal være på det samme Wi-Fi-netværk. På computeren skal iTunes være åbent, og Deling i hjemmet skal være slået til, og der skal være logget ind med den samme Apple-id som Deling i hjemmet på iPhone. Bemærk: Deling i hjemmet kræver iTunes 10.2 eller en nyere version fra www.apple.com/dk/ itunes/download Bonusindhold som f.eks. digitale hæfter og iTunes Extras kan ikke deles. Afspille musik eller video på iPhone fra iTunes-biblioteket: 1 I iTunes på computeren skal du vælge Avanceret > Slå Deling i hjemmet til. 2 Log ind, og klik på Opret Deling i hjemmet. 82 Kapitel 8 Musik3 På iPhone skal du gå til Indstilinger > Musik og derefter logge ind på Deling i hjemmet med den samme Apple-id og adgangskode. 4 Tryk på Mere i Musik, tryk på Fælles, og vælg computerens bibliotek. Vende tilbage til indholdet på iPhone Tryk på Fælles, og vælg Min iPhone. Kapitel 8 Musik 83Beskeder 9 Sende og modtage beskeder ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du kører sikkert, i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Beskeder understøtter tekstbeskeder med andre sms- og mms-enheder og med andre iOSenheder, der bruger iMessage. Med mms og iMessage kan du også inkludere fotografier, videoer og andre oplysninger. Brug iMessage til at sende beskeder via Wi-Fi eller mobilforbindelser til andre brugere af iOS 5. Du kan se, når den anden person skriver, og vælge, at andre skal underrettes, når du har læst deres beskeder. Da iMessages vises på alle dine iOS 5-enheder, der er logget ind på den samme konto, kan du starte en samtale på en af enhederne og fortsætte den på en anden. iMessages krypterer også beskeder. Bemærk: Sms og mms kræver en mobilforbindelse, som muligvis ikke er tilgængelig i alle områder. Der kan være mobildataafgifter og andre afgifter. Sende en tekstbesked: Tryk på , tryk derefter på og vælg en kontakt, søg i dine kontakter ved at skrive et navn eller indtast et telefonnummer eller en e-post-adresse manuelt. Skriv beskeden, og tryk på Send. Bemærk: Der vises en advarsel , hvis en besked ikke kan sendes. Tryk på advarslen i en samtale for at prøve at sende beskeden igen. 84Samtaler arkiveres på listen Beskeder. En blå prik betyder, at der er ulæste beskeder. Tryk på en samtale for at se eller fortsætte den. I en iMessage-samtale vises dine udgående beskeder med blåt. Tryk på knappen vedlæg medier for at inkludere et fotografi eller en video. Tryk for at indtaste tekst. Bruge emoji-tegn Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur > Internationale tastaturer > Tilføj nyt tastatur, og tryk derefter på Emoji for at gøre tastaturet tilgængeligt. Du indtaster emoji-tegn i en besked ved at trykke på for at få emojitastaturet frem. Se “Skifte tastaturer” på side 174. Genoptage en tidligere samtale Tryk på samtalen på listen Beskeder, og skriv derefter en besked, og tryk på Send. Vise tidligere beskeder i samtalen Rul til toppen (tryk på statuslinjen), og tryk på Indlæs tidligere beskeder. Modtage iMessages-beskeder vha. en anden e-post-adresse Gå til Indstillinger > Beskeder > Modtag på > Tilføj en anden e-post. Anfør det telefonnummer eller en e-post-adresse til Apple-id'et, som vises i feltet “fra”, når du starter en ny samtale Gå til Indstillinger > Beskeder > Modtag på > Nummer. Det betyder ikke noget for eksisterende samtaler, at du ændrer denne indstilling. Følge en henvisning i en besked Tryk på henvisningen. En henvisning kan f.eks. åbne en webside i Safari eller ringe op til et telefonnummer. Videresende en samtale Vælg en samtale, og tryk derefter på Rediger. Vælg de dele, der skal inkluderes, og tryk derefter på Videresend. Føje en person til din liste over kontaktpersoner Tryk på et telefonnummer på listen Beskeder, og tryk på “Føj til kontakter”. Underrette andre, når du læser deres beskeder Gå til Indstillinger > Beskeder, og slå Send Læst kvitteringer til. Definere andre indstillinger til beskeder Gå til Indstillinger > Beskeder. Administrere meddelelser til beskeder Se “Meddelelser” på side 164. Indstille advarselslyde til indgående beskeder Se “Lyde og kontakten Ring/stille” på side 166. Sende beskeder til en gruppe Gruppebeskeder gør det muligt at sende en besked til flere modtagere. Gruppebeskeder virker med iMessage og Mms (ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder). Sende beskeder til en gruppe: Tryk på , og tilføj derefter flere modtagere. Kapitel 9 Beskeder 85Bemærk: Med mms skal gruppebeskeder også slås til i Indstillinger > Beskeder, og svar sendes kun til dig – de kopieres ikke til de andre personer i gruppen. Sende musik, videoer m.m. Med iMessage og Mms kan du sende fotografier, videoer, lokaliteter, kontaktoplysninger og memoer. Sende et fotografi eller en video: Tryk på . Størrelsen på bilag bestemmes af din tjenesteudbyder. iPhone kan, om nødvendigt, komprimere foto- og videobilag. Sende en lokalitet I Kort skal du trykke på for at få en lokalitet, trykke på Del lokalitet (nederst på skærmen) og derefter trykke på Besked. Sende kontaktoplysninger I Kontakter skal du vælge en kontakt, trykke på Del kontakt nederst på Infoskærmen og derefter trykke på Besked. Sende et memo I Memoer skal du trykke på , trykke på memoet, trykke på Del og derefter trykke på Besked. Arkivere et fotografi eller en video, som du modtager, i albummet Kamerarulle Tryk på fotografiet eller videoen, og tryk på . Kopiere et fotografi eller en video Tryk på og hold fingeren på bilaget, og tryk derefter på Kopier. Arkivere modtagede kontaktoplysninger Tryk på kontaktboblen, og tryk på Opret ny kontakt eller “Føj til eksisterende kontakt”. Redigere samtaler Hvis du kun vil beholde en del af en samtale, kan du slette de dele, du ikke vil beholde. Du kan også slette hele samtaler fra listen Beskeder. Redigere en samtale: Tryk på Rediger, vælg de dele, der skal slettes, og tryk på Slet. Slette al tekst og alle bilag uden at slette samtalen Tryk på Rediger, og tryk på Slet alt. Slette en samtale Skub til samtalen, og tryk på Slet. Søge i beskeder Du kan søge i indholdet af samtaler på listen Beskeder. Søge i en samtale: Tryk øverst på skærmen for at vise søgefeltet, og skriv den tekst, du søger efter. Du kan også søge i samtaler fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. 86 Kapitel 9 BeskederKalender 10 Om Kalender Kalender gør det nemt at overholde aftaler. Du kan se individuelle kalendere eller flere kalendere samtidig. Du kan se dine kalenderbegivenheder på en liste sorteret efter dag eller måned. Du kan søge i titler, inviterede, lokaliteter og noter til begivenheder. Hvis du har indtastet dine kontakters fødselsdage, kan du se dem i Kalender. Du kan også oprette, redigere eller annullere begivenheder på iPhone, og synkronisere dem tilbage til din computer. Du kan abonnere på Google, Yahoo!- eller iCal-kalendere. Hvis du har en Microsoft Exchange- eller iCloud-konto, kan du modtage og besvare mødeinvitationer. Vise dine kalendere Du kan se kalendere individuelt eller som en kombineret kalender. Det gør det nemt at administrere kalendere til arbejde og familie samtidig. Tilføj en begivenhed. Dage med prikker har planlagte begivenheder. Gå til i dag. Skift oversigter. Svare på en kalenderinvitation. Begivenheder til den valgte dag Ændre oversigter: Tryk på Liste, Dag eller Måned. Du viser efter uge ved at vende iPhone om på siden. I dagsoversigt skal du skubbe til venstre eller højre for at flytte mellem datoer. 87Vise fødselsdagskalenderen Tryk på Kalendere, og tryk derefter på Fødselsdage for at inkludere fødselsdage fra dine kontakter i dine begivenheder. Se oplysninger om en begivenhed Tryk på begivenheden. Du kan trykke på oplysninger om begivenheden for at få mere at vide. Hvis der f.eks. er angivet en adresse eller en lokalitet, kan du trykke på den for at åbne Kort. Flytte eller slette en kalender Tryk på Kalendere, og tryk derefter på Rediger. Vælge de kalendere, der skal vises Tryk på Kalendere, og tryk derefter for at vælge de kalendere, du vil se. Begivenhederne i alle de valgte kalendere vises i en enkelt kalender på iPhone. Tilføje begivenheder Du kan oprette og opdatere kalenderbegivenheder direkte på iPhone. Tilføje en begivenhed: Tryk på , skriv oplysninger om begivenheden, og tryk på OK. Du kan også holde fingeren på et tomt sted på en kalender for at oprette en ny begivenhed. Træk gribepunkterne for at justere begivenhedens varighed. Indstille et varsel Tryk på Varsel, og indstil derefter et varsel – fra fem minutter til to dage før begivenheden. Indstille et standardvarsel til begivenheder Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Standard varselstid Opdatere en begivenhed Tryk på Rediger, og rediger oplysninger om begivenheden. Du kan hurtigt justere tidspunkt for eller varighed af en begivenhed ved at holde en finger på begivenheden for at vælge den og derefter trække til et nyt tidspunkt eller bruge gribepunkterne til at ændre dens varighed. Slette en begivenhed Tryk på begivenheden, tryk på Rediger, rul ned, og tryk på Slet begivenhed. Invitere andre til en begivenhed Tryk på Gæster for at vælge personer fra Kontakter. Det kræver en iCloud-, Microsoft Exchange- eller CalDAV-konto. Besvare invitationer Hvis du har en iCloud-, Microsoft Exchange- eller en understøttet CalDAV-konto, kan du modtage og svare på mødeinvitationer fra andre personer i dit firma. Når du modtager en invitation, vises mødet i din kalender med en stiplet linje omkring. vises i nederste højre hjørne af skærmen. Besvare en invitation: Tryk på en invitation i kalenderen. Eller tryk på for at vise skærmen Begivenhed, og tryk derefter på en invitation. Se oplysninger om planlæggeren Tryk på “invitation fra”. Se andre gæster Tryk på Gæster Tryk på et navn for at se personens kontaktoplysninger. Tilføje kommentarer i svar Tryk på Tilføj kommentarer. Dine kommentarer vil være synlige for planlæggeren, men ikke for de andre deltagere. Kommentarer er ikke tilgængelige i alle kalendertjenester. Indstille din tilgængelighed Tryk på Tilgængelighed, og vælg “optaget” eller “ledig”. Søge i kalendere I listeoversigt kan du søge i felterne Titler, Inviterede, Lokaliteter og Noter til begivenhederne i dine kalendere. Kalender søger kun i begivenheder i de kalendere, der vises. 88 Kapitel 10 KalenderSøge efter begivenheder: Tryk på Liste, og skriv derefter tekst i søgefeltet. Kalenderbegivenheder kan også inkluderes i søgninger fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. Abonnere på kalendere Du kan abonnere på kalendere, der bruger iCalendar-formatet (.ics). Mange kalenderbaserede tjenester understøtter kalenderabonnementer, inkl. iCloud, Yahoo!, Google og OS X-programmet iCal. Abonnementskalendere er skrivebeskyttede. Du kan læse begivenheder fra kalendere, du abonnerer på, på iPhone, men du kan ikke redigere dem eller oprette nye begivenheder. Abonnere på en kalender: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og tryk derefter på Tilføj konto. Tryk på Anden, og tryk derefter på Tilføj abonnementskalender. Du kan også abonnere på en iCal-kalender (eller en anden .ics-kalender) publiceret på internettet ved at trykke på en henvisning til kalenderen. Importere kalenderbegivenheder fra Mail Du kan føje begivenheder til en kalender ved at importere et kalenderarkiv fra en e-post-besked. Du kan importere alle .ics-standardarkiver til kalendere. Importere begivenheder fra et kalenderarkiv: Åbn beskeden i Mail, og tryk på kalenderarkivet. Kalenderkonti og -indstillinger Der er flere indstillinger i Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalender, der har indflydelse på Kalender og dine kalenderkonti. Kalenderkonti bruges også til at synkronisere opgaver til Påmindelser. Tilføj en CalDAV-konto: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, tryk på Tilføj en konto og tryk derefter på Anden. Under Kalendere skal du trykke på Tilføj CalDAV-konto. Disse muligheder gælder alle dine kalendere: Indstille toner til kalenderpåmindelser Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde > Kalenderpåmindelser. Synkronisere tidligere begivenheder Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Synkronisering, og vælg derefter tidsperioden. Fremtidigere begivenheder synkroniseres altid. Indstille varsler, der afspilles, når du modtager en mødeinvitation Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og slå Nye invitationsvarsler til. Slå Understøt tidszone til i Kalender: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Understøt tidszone. Indstille en standardkalender: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Standardkalender. Brug iCloud til at holde Kalender ajour på dine iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå Kalender til. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Kapitel 10 Kalender 89Vigtigt: Når Understøt tidszone er slået til, viser kalenderen datoer og tidspunkter for begivenheder i den valgte bys tidszone. Når Understøt tidszone er slået fra, viser kalenderen begivenheder i tidszonen på din aktuelle placering vha. netværkstiden. Nogle operatører understøtter ikke netværkstid i alle områder. Når du er på rejse, viser og afspiller iPhone måske ikke begivenheder og påmindelser på det korrekte lokale tidspunkt. Se “Dato & tid” på side 171 for at få oplysninger om, hvordan du indstiller den korrekte tid. 90 Kapitel 10 KalenderFotografier 11 Se fotografier og videoer Med Fotos kan du se fotografier og videoer på iPhone i:  Albummet Kamerarulle – fotografier og videoer optaget med det indbyggede kamera eller arkiveret fra en e-post-besked, sms eller webside  Albummet Fotostream – fotografier streamet fra iCloud (se “Fotostream” på side 97)  Fotobibliotek og andre album synkroniseret fra din computer (se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18) Rediger fotografiet. Slet fotografiet. Tryk på skærmen for at vise betjeningspanelet. Del fotografiet, tildel det til en kontakt, brug det som baggrund eller udskriv det. Afspille et lysbilledshow. Stream fotografier vha. AirPlay. Se fotografier og videoer: Tryk på et album, og tryk på en miniature for at se fotografiet eller videoen på fuld skærm. De album, du synkroniserer med iPhoto 8.0 (iLife ’09) eller nyere versioner eller Aperture v3.0.2 eller nyere versioner, kan vises efter begivenheder eller ansigter. Du kan også se fotografier efter lokalitet, hvis de blev taget med et kamera, der understøtter geokodning. Vise eller skjule betjeningspanelet Tryk på fotografiet eller videoen på fuld skærm. Se næste eller forrige fotografi eller video Svirp til venstre eller højre. Zoome ind og ud Tryk to gange eller knib. 91Panorere i et fotografi Træk fotografiet. Afspille en video Tryk på i midten af skærmen. Se en video på fuld skærm eller tilpasse en video til skærmen Tryk to gange på videoen. Streame en video til et HD-fjernsyn Se “AirPlay” på side 33. Redigere fotografier og tilpasse videoer Se “Redigere fotografier” eller “Tilpasse videoer” på side 96. Vise lysbilledshow Vise et lysbilledshow: Tryk på et album for at åbne det, tryk på et fotografi, og tryk på . Vælg indstillinger til lysbilledshowet, og tryk derefter på Start lysbilledshow. Streame et lysbilledshow til et HDfjernsyn Se “AirPlay” på side 33. Stoppe et lysbilledshow Tryk på skærmen. Vælge flere indstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Fotos. Organisere fotografier og videoer Du kan oprette, omdøbe og slette album på iPhone, så du kan organisere dine fotografier og videoer. Oprette et album: Tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på Tilføj, mens du ser album. Vælg de fotografier, der skal føjes til det nye album, og tryk på OK. Bemærk: Album oprettet på iPhone synkroniseres ikke tilbage til computeren. Omdøbe et album Tryk på Rediger, og vælg et album. Flytte rundt på album Tryk på Rediger, og træk derefter op eller ned. Slette et album Tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på . Dele fotografier og videoer Sende et fotografi eller en video i en e-post- eller tekstbesked (iMessage eller Mms) eller en tweet-meddelelse: Tryk på et fotografi eller en video, og tryk på . Hvis ikke vises, skal du trykke på skærmen for at vise betjeningspanelet. Bemærk: Du skal være logget ind på din Twitter-konto for at sende en tweet-meddelelse. Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter. Størrelsen på bilag bestemmes af din tjenesteudbyder. iPhone kan, om nødvendigt, komprimere foto- og videobilag. Kopiere flere fotografier eller videoer Når du viser miniaturer, skal du trykke på , vælge fotografierne eller videoerne og derefter trykke på Del. Kopiere et fotografi eller en video Hold fingeren på fotografiet eller videoen, og tryk derefter på Kopier. Kopiere flere fotografier eller videoer Tryk på øverst til højre på skærmen. Vælg fotografierne og videoerne, og tryk på Kopier. 92 Kapitel 11 FotografierIndsætte et fotografi eller en video i en e-post- eller tekstbesked (iMessage eller mms) Hold fingeren på det sted, hvor du vil anbringe fotografiet eller videoen, og tryk på Sæt ind. Arkivere et fotografi eller en video fra en e-post-besked Tryk evt. for at hente emne, tryk på fotografiet, eller hold en finger nede på videoen, og tryk derefter på Arkiver. Arkivere et fotografi eller en video fra en sms Tryk på billedet i samtalen, tryk på , og tryk på Arkiver. Arkiver et fotografi fra en webside Tryk på og hold fingeren på fotografiet, og tryk derefter på Arkiver billede. Dele en video på YouTube Mens du ser en video, skal du trykke på og derefter på “Send til YouTube.” Fotografier og videoer, som du modtager, eller som du arkiverer fra en webside, arkiveres til kamerarullen. Udskrive fotografier Udskrive et fotografi: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Udskriv. Udskrive flere fotografier: Tryk på , mens du ser et fotoalbum. Vælg de fotografier, der skal udskrives, og tryk på Udskriv. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Udskrive” på side 28. Kapitel 11 Fotografier 93Kamera 12 Om Kamera Du kan tage stillbilleder og videoer med de indbyggede kameraer. iPhone 4 og iPhone 4S indeholder et kamera på forsiden til FaceTime og selvportrætter (ud over hovedkameraet på bagsiden) og en LED-blitz. Tryk på en person eller et objekt for at fokusere og indstille eksponering. Skift mellem kameraer. Tag et fotografi. Kontakten Kamera/video Se de fotografier og videoer, du har taget. Indstil LED-blitzfunktion Slå net eller HDR til. Hvis lokalitetstjenester er slået til, markeres fotografier og videoer med lokalitetsdata, som kan bruges af nogle programmer og websteder til deling af fotografier. Se “Lokalitetstjenester” på side 165. Bemærk: Hvis lokalitetstjenester er slået fra, når du åbner Kamera, bliver du måske bedt om at slå dem til. Du kan bruge Kamera uden lokalitetstjenester. 94Tage fotografier og videoer Du åbner hurtigt Kamera, når iPhone er låst, ved at trykke på knappen Hjem eller Til/fra og derefter trække opad. Tage et fotografi: Sørg for, at kontakten Kamera/video er indstillet til , sigt derefter med iPhone, og tryk på . Du kan også tage et billede ved at trykke på knappen skru op. Optage en video: Skub kontakten Kamera/video til , tryk derefter på for at starte eller stoppe optagelsen, eller tryk på knappen skru op. Når du tager et foto eller starter en videooptagelse, siger iPhone som en lukker. Du kan kontrollere lydstyrken med knapperne til lydstyrke eller kontakten Ring/stille. Bemærk: I nogle områder afbrydes lukkerlyden ikke af kontakten Ring/stille. Et rektangel viser kort det område, som kameraet fokuserer på, og indstiller eksponeringen. Når du fotograferer mennesker, bruger iPhone 4S ansigtsgenkendelse til automatisk at fokusere og afbalancere eksponeringen på op til 10 ansigter. Der vises et rektangel for hvert registreret ansigt. Zoome ind og ud Knib på skærmen (kamera på bagsiden, kun i kamerafunktion). Slå nettet til Tryk på Indstillinger. Indstille fokus og eksponering Tryk på personen eller objektet på skærmen. (Ansigtsgenkendelse er midlertidigt slået fra.) Låse fokus og eksponering Hold en finger på skærmen, indtil rektanglet pulserer. AE/AF-lås vises på skærmen, og fokus og eksponering forbliver låst, indtil du trykker på skærmen igen. Tage et skærmbillede Tryk på knapperne Til/fra og Hjem på samme tid, og slip dem igen. Skærmbilledet føjes til albummet Kamerarulle. HDR-fotografier HDR (iPhone 4 og nyere modeller) blander de bedste dele af tre separate eksponeringer til et enkelt fotografi med “højt dynamisk udsnit”. Du opnår de bedste resultater, hvis iPhone og motivet står stille. Slå HDR til: Tryk på Indstillinger, og indstil derefter HDR. Når HDR er slået til, er blitzen slået fra. Hvis du vil bevare både den normale version og HDR-versionen, skal du gå til Indstillinger > Fotos. Når begge versioner bevares, vises i det øverste venstre hjørne af HDR-fotoet (når det vises i albummet Kamerarulle, og betjeningsmulighederne er synlige). Vise, dele og udskrive De fotografier og videoer, du tager med Kamera, arkiveres i albummet Kamerarulle. Kapitel 12 Kamera 95Se albummet Kamerarulle: Svirp fra venstre mod højre, eller tryk på miniaturebilledet i det nederste venstre hjørne af skærmen. Du kan også se albummet Kamerarulle i programmet Fotos. Du tager flere fotografier eller optager mere video ved at trykke på . Hvis iCloud Fotostream er slået til i Indstillinger > iCloud, vises nye fotografier også i albummet Fotostream og streames til dine andre iOS-enheder og computere. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Du kan få flere oplysninger om at vise og dele fotografier og videoer i “Dele fotografier og videoer” på side 92 og “Overføre fotografier og videoer til din computer” på side 97. Vise og skjule betjeningspanelet, når der vises et fotografi eller en video på fuld skærm Tryk på skærmen. Sende et fotografi eller en video med e-post eller sms Tryk på . Vise et fotografi i en tweetmeddelelse Vis fotografiet på skærmen, tryk på , og tryk derefter på Tweet. Du skal være logget ind på din Twitter-konto. Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter. Du inkluderer din lokalitet ved at trykke på Tilføj lokalitet. Udskrive et fotografi Tryk på . Se “Udskrive” på side 28. Slette et fotografi eller en video Tryk på . Redigere fotografier Du kan rotere, forbedre, fjerne røde øjne og beskære fotografier. Forbedring gør et fotografis mørke og lyse områder, farvemætningen og andre kvaliteter bedre. Roter Automatisk forbedring Beskær Redigere et fotografi: Når fotografiet vises på fuld skærm, skal du trykke på Rediger og vælge et værktøj. Med værktøjet til røde øjne skal du trykke på hvert øje for at fjerne det røde skær. Du beskærer ved at trække hjørnerne af nettet, trække fotografiet for at anbringe det anderledes og derefter trykke på Beskær. Du kan også trykke på Fast format, når du beskærer, hvis du vil definere et specielt forhold. Tilpasse videoer Du kan tilpasse billeder fra begyndelsen og slutningen af en video, som du lige har optaget, eller fra en anden video i albummet Kamerarulle. Du kan erstatte originalvideoen eller arkivere den tilpassede version som et nyt klip. Tilpasse en video: Mens du ser en video, skal du trykke på skærmen for at vise betjeningspanelet. Træk i en af enderne i billedfremviseren øverst i videoen, og tryk derefter på Tilpas. Vigtigt: Hvis du vælger Tilpas original, slettes de billeder, du fjerner, permanent fra den originale video. Hvis du vælger “Arkiver som nyt klip”, arkiveres et nyt, tilpasset videoklip i albummet Kamerarulle, og den originale video ændres ikke. 96 Kapitel 12 KameraOverføre fotografier og videoer til din computer Du kan overføre de fotografier og videoer, du tager med Kamera, til fotoprogrammer på computeren, f.eks. iPhoto på en Mac. Overføre fotografier og videoer til din computer: Slut iPhone til computeren med Dock-stik til USB-kablet.  Mac: Vælg de ønskede fotografier og videoer, og klik på knappen Importer eller Overfør i iPhoto eller et andet understøttet fotoprogram på computeren.  Pc: Følg den vejledning, der fulgte med fotoprogrammet. Hvis du sletter fotografierne og videoerne fra iPhone, når du overfører dem til din computer, bliver de fjernet fra albummet Kamerarulle. Du kan bruge vinduet Fotografier i iTunes til at synkronisere fotografier og videoer til programmet Fotos på iPhone (videoer kan kun synkroniseres med en Mac). Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Fotostream Med Fotostream – en funktion i iCloud – overføres de fotografier, du tager på iPhone, automatisk til iCloud og sendes videre til alle dine enheder, hvor Fotostream er slået til. Fotografier overført til iCloud fra dine andre enheder og computere overføres til albummet Fotostream på iPhone med push-funktion. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Slå Fotostream til: Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Fotostream. Nye fotografier overføres til din fotostream, når du forlader programmet Kamera, og iPhone sluttes til internettet via Wi-Fi. Evt. andre fotografier føjet til din kamerarulle – inkl. fotografier hentet fra e-post-beskeder og sms'er, billeder arkiveret fra websider og skærmbilleder – overføres også til din fotostream og overføres til dine andre enheder vha. push. Fotostream kan dele op til 1000 af dine seneste fotografier på dine iOS-enheder. Dine computere kan opbevare alle dine fotografier i Fotostream til evig tid. Arkivere fotografier til iPhone fra Fotostream I dit album Fotostream skal du trykke på , vælge de fotografier, der skal arkiveres og derefter trykke på Arkiver. Slette et fotografi fra iCloud I dit album Fotostream skal du vælge fotografiet og derefter trykke på . Slette flere fotografier fra iCloud I dit album Fotostream skal du trykke på , vælge de fotografier, der skal slettes, og derefter trykke på Slet. Bemærk: Hvis du skal slette fotografier fra Fotostream, skal du bruge iOS 5.1 eller en nyere version på iPhone og alle dine andre iOS-enheder. Se support.apple.com/kb/HT4486?viewlocale=da_DK. Selvom slettede fotografier fjernes fra fotostreamen på dine enheder, forbliver originalerne i albummet Kamerarulle på den enhed, som fotografierne stammer fra. Kapitel 12 Kamera 97YouTube 13 Om YouTube På YouTube kan du se korte videoer, som er indsendt af brugere fra hele verden. Nogle YouTubefunktioner kræver en YouTube-konto. Du indstiller en YouTube-konto ved at gå til www.youtube.com. Bemærk: YouTube findes måske ikke på alle sprog og i alle områder. Gennemse og søge efter videoer Gennemse videoer: Tryk på en browserknap nederst på skærmen, eller tryk på Mere for at se flere browserknapper. Hvis du ser en video, kan du trykke på OK for at se browserknapperne. Se beslægtede videoer, eller arkiver eller del denne video. Se flere browserknapper, eller flyt rundt på knapperne. Tryk på en video for at afspille den. Tryk på browserknappen for at se en liste over videoer. Ændre browserknapperne Tryk på Mere, og tryk derefter på Rediger. Træk en knap til bunden af skærmen, og anbring den på den knap, du vil erstatte. Træk en knap til venstre eller højre for at flytte den. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig. Gennemse lignende videoer Tryk på ud for en video på listen. Søge efter en video Tryk på Søg nederst på skærmen, og tryk derefter på søgefeltet. Se flere videoer indsendt af den samme konto Tryk på ved siden af den aktuelle video på skærmen med videooplysninger, og tryk derefter på Flere videoer. 98Afspille videoer Afspille en video: Tryk på en video, mens du gennemser. Afspilningen starter, når tilstrækkeligt meget af videoen er hentet til iPhone. Den skyggelagte del af spillelinjen viser status for overførslen. Tryk på videoen for at vise eller skjule betjeningspanelet. Se på et fjernsyn med Apple TV. Træk for at hoppe frem eller tilbage. Overførselsstatus Føj videoen til dine YouTube-favoritter. Træk for at justere  lydstyrken. Genoptage eller sætte afspilning på pause Tryk på eller . Du kan også trykke på knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Starte forfra fra begyndelsen Tryk på , mens videoen afspilles. Hvis du har set mindre end fem sekunder af videoen, springes der i stedet til den forrige video på listen. Søge frem og tilbage Hold eller nede. Hoppe til et hvilket som helst punkt Træk afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen. Hoppe til den næste eller forrige video på en liste Tryk på for at hoppe til den næste video. Tryk på to gange for at hoppe til den forrige video. Hvis du har set mindre end fem sekunder af videoen, skal du kun trykke en gang. Skifte mellem udfyld skærm og tilpas til skærm Tryk to gange på videoen. Du kan også trykke på for at få videoen til at udfylde skærmen eller på for at tilpasse den til skærmen. Se YouTube på et fjernsyn Slut iPhone til fjernsynet eller en AV-modtager vha. AirPlay eller et kabel. Se “Se videoer på et fjernsyn” på side 132. Holde op med at se en video Tryk på OK. Holde styr på de videoer, du kan lide Føje en video til Favoritter eller en spilleliste Tryk på ved siden af videoen for at se knapper, som du kan bruge til at føje videoen til en liste. Føje en video til Favoritter Tryk på “Føj til Favoritter”. Hvis du ser videoen, skal du trykke på . Føje en video til en spilleliste Tryk på “Føj til spilleliste” på skærmen med videooplysninger, og tryk derefter på en eksisterende spilleliste, eller tryk på for at oprette en ny spilleliste. Slette en favorit Tryk på Favoritter, tryk på Rediger og derefter på ud for videoen. Slette en video fra en spilleliste Tryk på en spilleliste i Spillelister, tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på . Slette en spilleliste Tryk på Spillelister, og tryk derefter på . Abonnere på en konto Tryk på ved siden af den aktuelle video (over listen Beslægtede videoer). Tryk derefter på Flere videoer, rul til bunden af listen, og tryk på “Abonner på konto.” Afmelde abonnement på en konto Tryk på Abonnementer (tryk først på Mere, hvis du ikke kan se det), tryk på en konto på listen, og tryk derefter på Afmeld abonnement. Kapitel 13 YouTube 99Dele videoer, kommentarer og vurderinger Vise betjeningspanelet til deling, kommentarer og vurdering: Tryk på ved siden af videoen. Sende en henvisning til en video med e-post Tryk på ved siden af en video, og tryk på Del video. Hvis du ser videoen, skal du bare trykke på . Vurdere eller kommentere en video På skærmen Mere info skal du trykke på “Vurder, kommenter eller marker med flag” og derefter vælge “Vurder eller kommenter”. Sende en video til YouTube Åbn programmet Fotos, vælg videoen, og tryk på . Se oplysninger om en video Se en beskrivelse og kommentarer fra seere Tryk på ved siden af videoen på en listen, tryk derefter på igen, når den vises øverst på skærmen. Sende videoer til YouTube Hvis du har en YouTube-konto, kan du sende videoer direkte til YouTube. Se “Dele fotografier og videoer” på side 92. 100 Kapitel 13 YouTubeVærdipapirer 14 Se kurser Med Værdipapirer kan du se de seneste kurser for de valgte værdipapirer, obligationer og aktieindeks. Kurser kan være forsinket med op til 20 minutter eller mere afhængigt af rapporteringstjenesten. Føje et værdipapir, en obligation eller et aktieindeks til kurslæseren: Tryk på , og tryk på . Indtast et symbol, firmanavn, et obligationsnavn eller aktieindeks, og tryk på Søg. Vise ændringen i værdien af et værdipapir, en obligation eller et aktieindeks i et tidsrum: Tryk på værdipapiret, obligationen eller aktieindekset på din liste, og tryk derefter på 1d, 1u, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1å eller 2å. Når du viser et diagram i liggende format, kan du røre ved diagrammet for at vise værdien på et bestemt tidspunkt. Brug to fingre til at se værdiændringen for et bestemt tidsrum. Du kan også se kurser på værdipapirer i Meddelelsescenter. Se “Meddelelser” på side 31. 101Slette et værdipapir Tryk på , og tryk på ved siden af et værdipapir. Tryk derefter på Slet. Ændre rækkefølgen af listen Tryk på . Træk derefter ved siden af et værdipapir eller et aktieindeks til en ny placering på listen. Ændre oversigten, så den viser den procentvise ændring, prisændring eller markedskapitalisering Tryk på en værdi langs højre side af skærmen. Tryk igen for at skifte til en anden oversigt. Brug iCloud til at holde din liste over værdipapirer ajour på dine iOS-enheder Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Dokumenter og data, og slå Dokumenter og data til (til som standard). Se “iCloud” på side 16. Få flere oplysninger Se et resume, diagram eller en nyhedsside til et værdipapir, en obligation eller et aktieindeks: Vælg værdipapiret, obligationen eller aktieindekset på din liste, og blad i siderne nedenunder kurslæseren for at se et resume, diagram eller nyhedssiden. På nyhedssiden kan du rulle op og ned for at læse overskrifter eller trykke på en overskrift for at vise artiklen i Safari. Der er flere oplysninger om værdipapirer på Yahoo.com: Vælg værdipapiret, obligationen eller aktieindekset på din liste, og tryk derefter på . 102 Kapitel 14 VærdipapirerKort 15 Finde lokaliteter ADVARSEL: Du kan finde vigtige oplysninger om, hvordan du kører og finder vej sikkert, i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Vis en virksomheds eller en kontaktpersons lokalitet. Vælg indstillinger, f.eks. vis trafik eller satellitoversigt. Flere oplysninger Tryk to gange for at zoome ind, tryk med to fingre for at zoome ud. Eller knib ud eller ind for at zoome ind eller ud. Aktuel lokalitet Indtast en søgetekst. Vis din aktuelle lokalitet. Få vejvisning med bil, offentlig transport eller gang. Finde en lokalitet: Tryk på søgefeltet for at få tastaturet frem. Skriv en adresse eller andre oplysninger, og tryk på Søg. Du kan søge efter oplysninger som:  Vejkryds (“8th og market”)  Område (“greenwich village”)  Seværdighed (“guggenheim”)  Postnummer  Virksomhed (“film”, “restauranter København” “apple inc new york”) Du kan også trykke på for at finde en kontaktpersons lokalitet. 103Se navn på eller beskrivelse af en lokalitet Tryk på knappenålen. Se en liste over de virksomheder, der bliver fundet ved søgningen Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Liste. Tryk på en virksomhed for at se dens placering. Finde din lokalitet Tryk på . Din aktuelle lokalitet vises med et blåt mærke. Hvis din lokalitet ikke kan bestemmes nøjagtigt, vises der en blå cirkel rundt om mærket. Jo mindre cirklen er, jo mere præcist er det. Vise, hvilken retning du står i Tryk på igen.knappen sporing. Symbolet ændres til , og kortet vendes, så det viser den retning, du står i. Markere en lokalitet Hold en finger på kortet, indstil knappenålen vises. Vigtigt: Kort, vejvisning og lokalitetsbaserede programmer kræver datatjenester. Disse datatjenester kan ændres og er måske ikke tilgængelige i alle områder, hvilket kan medføre, at kort, kompasoverskrifter, rutevejledninger og lokalitetsbaserede oplysninger måske ikke er tilgængelige, præcise eller komplette. Sammenlign oplysningerne på iPhone med omgivelserne, og hold øje med evt. skilte, hvis der opstår tvivl. Hvis lokalitetstjenester er slået fra, når du åbner Kort, bliver du måske bedt om at slå dem til. Du kan bruge Kort uden at slå lokalitetstjenester til. Se “Lokalitetstjenester” på side 165. Få vejvisning Få vejledning: 1 Tryk på Vis vej. 2 Indtast start- og slutlokalitet. Tryk på i et af felterne for at vælge en lokalitet i Bogmærker (inklusive din aktuelle position eller den anbragte knappenål), din seneste lokalitet eller en kontakt. Hvis ikke er synlig, skal du trykke på for at slette indholdet af feltet. 3 Tryk på Rute, og vælg derefter vejvisning i bil ( ), med offentlige transportmidler ( ) eller til gående ( ). 4 Gør et af følgende:  Du kan få trinvis vejvisning ved at trykke på Start og derefter trykke på for at se næste del af ruten.  Hvis du vil se alle vejvisningerne på en liste, skal du trykke på og derefter trykke på Liste. 104 Kapitel 15 KortTryk på et emne på listen for at se et kort, som viser den pågældende del af ruten. Tryk på Ruteoversigt for at vende tilbage til oversigtsskærmen. 5 Hvis der vises flere ruter, skal du trykke på den, du vil bruge. Hvis du bruger offentlig transport, skal du trykke på for at indstille afgangs- og ankomsttid og for at vælge en tidsplan til rejsen. Tryk på symbolet for at se afgangstiden for den pågældende bus eller det pågældende tog og for få en henvisning til rejseudbyderens websted eller kontaktoplysninger. Få vejvisning fra en lokalitet på kortet Tryk på knappenålen, tryk på , tryk derefter på Vis vej hertil eller Vis vej herfra. Oprette et bogmærke til et sted Tryk på “Føj til Bogmærker”. Få og dele oplysninger om en lokalitet Få vejvisning. Besøg webstedet. Tryk på for at vise kontaktoplysninger. Foretag et opkald. Få eller dele oplysninger om en lokalitet: Tryk på knappenålen, og tryk på . Føje en virksomhed til dine kontakter Tryk på “Føj til kontakter”. Sende din lokalitet med tweet, e-post eller sms Tryk på Del lokalitet. Bemærk: Du skal være logget ind på din Twitter-konto for at sende en tweet-meddelelse. Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter. Vise trafikforhold Du kan vise trafikforholdene for større veje og hovedveje på kortet. Vise eller skjule trafikforhold: Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Vis trafik eller Skjul trafik. Gader og hovedveje vises med forskellige farver, afhængigt af hvordan trafikken flyder:  Grå – ingen data  Grøn – hastighedsbegrænsning  Gul – langsommere end hastighedsbegrænsningen  Rød – køkørsel Bemærk: Oplysninger om trafik er ikke tilgængelige i alle områder. Kapitel 15 Kort 105Kortoversigter Se en satellit- eller hybridoversigt: Tryk på , og vælg derefter den ønskede oversigt. Se Googles gadeoversigt over en lokalitet: Tryk på . Svirp til venstre eller højre for at panorere gennem oversigten på 360° (det indsatte kort viser den aktuelle oversigt). Tryk på en pil for at flytte ned ad gaden. Du vender tilbage til kortoversigt ved at trykke på kortbilledet i det nederste højre hjørne. Tryk for at vende tilbage til kortoversigt Bemærk: Gadeoversigt findes måske ikke i alle områder. 106 Kapitel 15 KortVejr 16 Få oplysninger om vejret Tryk på Vejr på hjemmeskærmen for at vise den aktuelle temperatur og en seks dages vejrudsigt for en eller flere byer i hele verden. Aktuelle forhold Tilføj eller slet byer. Aktuel temperatur Seksdages udsigt Se udsigter pr. time Antal lagrede byer Hvis urskiven er lyseblå, er det dag i den pågældende by. Hvis urskiven er mørkelilla, er det nat. Tilføje en by: Tryk på , og tryk på . Skriv navnet på en by eller et postnummer, og tryk på Søg. Skifte til en anden by Svirp til venstre eller højre. Skifte rækkefølge på byer Tryk på , og træk derefter op eller ned. Slette en by Tryk på , tryk på og tryk derefter på Slet. Vise temperaturen i fahrenheit eller celsius Tryk på , og tryk derefter på °F eller °C. Bruge iCloud til at overføre listen over byer til andre iOS-enheder med push-funktion Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Dokumenter og data, og slå Dokumenter og data til (til som standard). Se “iCloud” på side 16. Se oplysninger om en by på Yahoo.com Tryk på . 107Noter 17 Om Noter Skriv noter på iPhone, hvorefter iCloud gør dem tilgængelige på dine andre iOS-enheder og Maccomputere. Du kan også læse og oprette noter i andre konti som f.eks. Gmail eller Yahoo. Tryk på noten for at redigere den. Slet noten. Send noten med e-post, eller udskriv den. Tilføj en ny note. Se listen over noter. Se den forrige eller næste note. Skrive noter Tilføje en note: Tryk på , skriv noten, og tryk på OK. Brug iCloud til at holde dine noter ajour på dine iOS-enheder og Maccomputere Hvis du har en e-post-adresse fra me.com eller mac.com til iCloud, skal du gå til Indstillinger > iCloud og slå Noter til. Hvis du bruger en Gmail- eller en anden IMAP-konto til iCloud, skal du gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere og slå Noter til for den pågældende konto. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Oprette en note i en bestemt konto Tryk på Konti, og vælg kontoen, før du trykker på for at oprette noten. Indstille standardkontoen til nye noter Hvis du trykker på , mens du ser Alle noter, oprettes noten i den standardkonto, du vælger i Indstillinger > Noter. 108Læse og redigere noter Noter vises efter dato for sidste ændring med den nyeste note øverst. Hvis du bruger flere iOSenheder eller computere med din iCloud-konto, vises noter fra alle enheder. Hvis du deler noter med et program på computeren eller med andre internetkonti som Yahoo eller Gmail, organiseres disse noter efter konti. Læse en note: Vælg enheden på listen. Du viser næste eller forrige note ved at trykke på eller . Ændre skriften Gå til Indstillinger > Noter. Se noter i en bestemt konto Tryk på Konti, og vælg kontoen. Se noter i alle konti Tryk på Konti, og vælg Alle noter. Redigere en note Tryk hvor som helst på noten for at få tastaturet frem. Slette en note Skub til venstre eller højre over noten, mens du ser på listen over noter. Tryk på , mens du læser en note. Søge i noter Du kan søge i tekst til noter. Søge efter noter: Når du viser en liste med noter, skal du svirpe nedad for at rulle til toppen af listen og vise søgefeltet og derefter trykke i feltet og skrive det, du leder efter. Du kan også søge i noter fra hjemmeskærmen på iPhone. Se “Søge” på side 29. Udskrive og sende noter med e-post Før du kan sende en note via e-post, skal iPhone indstilles til e-post). Se “Indstille e-post- og andre konti” på side 16. Udskrive og sende en note med e-post: Tryk på , mens du læser en note. Kapitel 17 Noter 109Ur 18 Om Ur Du kan bruge Ur til at kontrollere tidspunktet overalt i verden, indstille en alarm, starte et stopur og tage tid. Tilføj et ur. Se ure, indstil en alarm, stopur eller tidtagning. Slet ure, eller skift rækkefølge på dem. Indstille verdensure Du kan tilføje flere ure for at vise tiden i andre større byer og forskellige tidszoner i verden. Tilføje et ur: Tryk på , og skriv derefter navnet på en by. Hvis du ikke kan se den by, du leder efter, kan du prøve en anden større by i den samme tidszone. Ændre rækkefølge på ure Tryk på Rediger, og træk derefter . Slette et ur Tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på . Indstille alarmer Du kan indstille flere alarmer. Indstil hver alarm, så den gentages på bestemte dage, som du vælger, eller som kun afspilles en gang. Indstille en alarm: Tryk på Alarm, og tryk på . Skifte indstillinger til en alarm Tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på . Slette en alarm Tryk på Rediger, og tryk derefter på . 110Hvis mindst en alarm er indstillet og slået til, vises på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen på iPhone. Hvis en alarm er indstillet til kun at afspilles en gang, bliver den automatisk slået fra bagefter. Du kan slå alarmen til igen. Vigtigt: Nogle operatører understøtter ikke netværkstid i alle områder. Hvis du er på rejse, aktiveres iPhone-alarmer muligvis ikke på det korrekte lokale tidspunkt. Se “Dato & tid” på side 171. Bruge stopuret Tage tid på en begivenhed: Tryk på Stopur, og tryk derefter på Start. Stopur registrerer tiden, selvom du skifter til et andet program. Indstille tidtagning Du kan tage tid, selvom du bruger andre programmer. Indstille en tidtagning: Tryk på Tidtagning, svirp for at indstille varigheden, og tryk på Start. Vælge advarselslyden Tryk på Når tidt. slutter. Indstille et interval til vågeblus for iPhone Indstil varigheden, tryk på Når tidt. slutter, og vælg Stop afspilning. iPhone holder op med at afspille musik eller video, når tidtagningen slutter. Kapitel 18 Ur 111Påmindelser 19 Om Påmindelser Med Påmindelser kan du organisere dit liv med lister – komplet med forfaldstidspunkter og lokaliteter. Du kan blive påmindet om et emne på en bestemt dag eller dato, eller når du nærmer dig eller forlader en lokalitet, f.eks. dit hjem eller kontor. Påmindelser virker med dine kalenderkonti, så de ændringer, du foretager, opdateres automatisk på dine andre iOS-enheder og computere. Skift oversigter. Marker som udført. Tilføj en påmindelse. Se og rediger lister. Skifte mellem liste- og datooversigt: Tryk på Liste eller Dato øverst på skærmen. Indstille en påmindelse Du kan indstille en påmindelse til en bestemt dag eller et bestemt tidspunkt, til en lokalitet eller til begge. Tilføje en påmindelse: I Påmindelser skal du trykke på , indtaste en beskrivelse og trykke på OK. Når du har tilføjet en påmindelse, kan du finjustere dens indstillinger: 112Indstille en lokalitet til en påmindelse Tryk på påmindelsen, og tryk derefter på Påmind mig. Slå “På et sted” til, og vælg Når jeg går eller Når jeg ankommer eller begge. Du ændrer lokaliteten til et andet sted end der, hvor du er, ved at trykke på Aktuel lokalitet, trykke på Vælg adresse og vælge en lokalitet fra Kontakter. Se “Om lokalitetspåmindelser” på side 114. Indstille en forfaldsdato til en påmindelse Tryk på påmindelsen, og tryk derefter på Påmind mig. Slå “På en dag” til, og indstil derefter den dato og det tidspunkt, hvor du vil have en påmindelse. Påmindelser, der er forfaldne og ikke udført, vises i Meddelelsescenter. Føje noter til en påmindelse Tryk på påmindelsen, og tryk derefter på Vis mere. Tryk på Noter. Flytte en påmindelse til en anden liste Tryk på påmindelsen, og tryk derefter på Vis mere. Tryk på Liste, og vælg en ny liste. Hvis du vil oprette eller redigere dine lister, skal du læse “Administrere påmindelser i listeoversigt” på side 113. Slette en påmindelse Tryk på påmindelsen, tryk på Vis mere, og tryk derefter på Slet. Redigere en påmindelse Tryk på påmindelsen, og tryk derefter på dens navn. Markere en påmindelse som udført Tryk på feltet ud for emnet, så der vises et hak. Udførte emner vises på listen Udførte. Se “Administrere udførte påmindelser” på side 114. Indstille den tone, der afspilles til påmindelser Gå til Indstillinger > Lyd. Brug iCloud til at holde påmindelser ajour på dine iOSenheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå Påmindelser til. Se “iCloud” på side 16. Administrere påmindelser i listeoversigt Du kan organisere påmindelser på lister, så det bliver let at skelne dine arbejdsopgaver, private opgaver og andre opgaver fra hinanden. Påmindelser indeholder en liste til aktive påmindelser plus en indbygget liste over udførte emner. Du kan tilføje dine egne lister. Oprette en liste: Tryk på Liste øverst på skærmen, og tryk derefter på . Tryk på Rediger. Skifte hurtigt mellem lister Skub til venstre eller højre over skærmen. Du kan også hoppe til en bestemt liste. Tryk på , og tryk derefter på en listes navn. Se udførte emner Skub over skærmen mod venstre, indtil du ser listen Udførte. Ændre rækkefølge på lister Tryk på i listeoversigt, og tryk på Rediger. Træk ved siden af en liste for at ændre rækkefølgen. Du kan ikke flytte en liste til en anden konto, og du kan ikke ændre rækkefølge på påmindelser på en liste. Slette en liste Tryk på i listeoversigt, og tryk på Rediger. Tryk for hver liste, som du vil slette. Når du sletter en liste, slettes emnerne på listen også. Ændre navnet på en liste Tryk på i listeoversigt, og tryk på Rediger. Tryk på det navn, du vil ændre, og skriv et nyt navn. Tryk på OK. Indstille en standardliste til nye påmindelser Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og tryk på Standardliste under overskriften Påmindelser. Du kan også oprette en påmindelse vha. tale. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39. Kapitel 19 Påmindelser 113Administrere påmindelser i datooversigt Du bruger datooversigt til at administrere påmindelser med en forfaldsdato. Se påmindelser efter en dato: Øverst på skærmen skal du trykke på Dato for at se dagens påmindelser og ufærdige emner fra tidligere dage. Se en nylig dato Træk tidsmærket under listen til en ny dag. Se en bestemt dag Tryk på , og vælg en dato, du vil se. Om lokalitetspåmindelser Lokalitetspåmindelser findes kun på iPhone 4 og iPhone 4S og er muligvis ikke tilgængelige i alle områder. Du kan ikke indstille lokaliteter til påmindelser i Microsoft Exchange- og Outlook-konti. Du kan indstille en lokalitetspåmindelse for at få Påmindelser til at underrette dig, når du nærmer dig lokaliteten, eller når du ikke længere er i nærheden af området. Du opnår de bedste resultater ved at angive en veldefineret lokalitet, f.eks. en adresse i stedet for en by, og huske, at nøjagtigheden kan variere. iPhone kontrollerer muligvis sin lokalitet mindre hyppigt, afhængigt af modellen af iPhone, og om den er låst, så der kan gå et stykke tid, før påmindelsen udløses. Når du opretter en påmindelse kan du bruge din aktuelle lokalitet eller lokaliteten fra din liste over kontakter. Føj lokaliteter, som du bruger med Påmindelser, f.eks. supermarkedet eller skolen, til Kontakter. Du bør også føje personlige lokaliteter som din hjem- og arbejdsadresse til dit kontaktkort i Kontakter. Påmindelser viser lokaliteterne fra dit kontaktkort. Du finder oplysninger om, hvordan du indstiller dit kontaktkort i Kontakter, i “Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger” på side 130. Administrere udførte påmindelser Påmindelser holder styr på de emner, du markerer som udført. Du kan se dem i liste- eller datooversigt, eller du kan bruge oversigten Udførte. Se udførte emner: Tryk på knappen Liste øverst på skærmen, og skub fra venstre mod højre, indtil listen Udførte vises. Se antallet af udførte emner I liste- eller datooversigt skal du rulle til toppen af listen med påmindelser og derefter trække ned på listen, indtil listen Udførte vises. Tryk på Udførte for at se alle de udførte emner Markere et udført emne som ikke udført Tryk for at fjerne hakket. Emnet flyttes automatisk tilbage til dets oprindelige liste. Synkronisere tidligere påmindelser Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og tryk på Synk. under overskriften Påmindelser. Denne indstilling anvendes på alle dine konti med påmindelser. Du opnår den bedste ydeevne, hvis du ikke synkroniserer flere tidligere emner, end du har brug for. Søge i påmindelser Du kan hurtigt finde ventende eller udførte påmindelser. Der søges også i navne på påmindelser. Søge i påmindelser i datooversigt: Tryk på , tryk derefter på Søg i påmindelser, og skriv et søgeudtryk. Søge i påmindelser i listeoversigt: Tryk på , tryk derefter på Søg i påmindelser, og skriv et søgeudtryk. 114 Kapitel 19 PåmindelserDu kan også søge i påmindelser fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Spotlight-søgning” på side 170. Og du kan bede Siri om at finde påmindelser efter titel. Se Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39. Kapitel 19 Påmindelser 115Game Center 20 Om Game Center Du kan finde nye spil og dele dine spiloplevelser med venner i hele verden i Game Center. Inviter venner til at spille, eller brug den automatiske søgefunktion til at finde værdige modstandere. Optjen bonuspoint ved at opnå bestemte niveauer i et spil, se, hvad dine venner har opnået, og tjek resultattavler for at se, hvem der er de bedste spillere. Bemærk: Game Center er muligvis ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder og antallet af tilgængelige spil kan variere. Du skal have en internetforbindelse og en Apple-id for at kunne bruge Game Center. Hvis du ikke har en Apple-id, kan du oprette en ny i Game Center som beskrevet nedenfor. Se, hvem der er den bedste. Svar på venneanmodninger. Se en liste over spilresultater. Spil spillet. Find en, du kan spille mod. Vælg et spil. Inviter venner til at spille. Vis din status, rediger dit foto, eller log ud. Logge ind i Game Center Logge ind: Åbn Game Center Hvis du kan se dit kaldenavn og fotografi øverst på skærmen, er du allerede logget ind. Ellers skal du skrive din Apple-id og adgangskode og trykke på Log ind. Eller tryk på Opret ny konto for at oprette en ny Apple-id. 116Tilføje et fotografi Tryk på fotografiet ud for dit navn. Annoncere din status Tryk på Mig, tryk på statuslinjen, og indtast din status. Se dine kontooplysninger Tryk på Mig, tryk på kontobanneret, og tryk på Vis konto. Logge ud Tryk på Mig, tryk på kontobanneret, og tryk derefter på Log ud. Du behøver ikke logge ud, hver gang du slutter Game Center. Købe og hente spil Spil til Game Center er tilgængelige i App Store. Købe og hente et spil: Tryk på Spil, tryk derefter på et anbefalet spil eller tryk på Find Game Center-spil. Købe et spil, som din ven har Tryk på Venner, og tryk på navnet på din ven. Tryk på et spil på din vens liste over spil, og tryk derefter på prisen på spillet under dets navn øverst på skærmen. Spille spil Spille et spil: Tryk på Spil, vælg et spil, og tryk på Spil. Se en liste over de bedste resultater Tryk på Spil, vælg spillet, og tryk på Resultattavle. Se de bedrifter, du kan prøve at overgå Tryk på Spil, vælg et spil, og tryk på Bedrifter. Vende tilbage til Game Center efter et spil Tryk en gang på knappen Hjem, og tryk på Game Center på hjemmeskærmen. Spille med venner Game Center kan sætte dig i forbindelse med spillere i hele verden. Du føjer venner til Game Center ved at sende en anmodning eller acceptere en anmodning fra en anden spiller. Invitere venner til et spil med flere deltagere: Tryk på Venner, vælg en ven, vælg et spil, og tryk på Spil nu. Hvis spillet tillader eller kræver flere spillere, kan du vælge flere spillere, som du vil invitere, og derefter trykke på Næste. Send din invitation, og vent, til andre accepterer den. Start spillet, når alle er klar. Hvis en ven ikke er tilgængelig eller ikke svarer på din invitation, kan du trykke på Auto-Match for at få Game Center til at finde en anden spiller eller trykke på Inviter ven for at prøve at invitere en anden ven. Sende en venneanmodning Tryk på Venner eller Anmodninger, tryk på , og skriv en vens e-postadresse eller kaldenavn i Game Center. Tryk på for at gennemse dine kontakter. Du tilføjer flere venner i en anmodning ved at trykke på Retur efter hver adresse. Svare på en venneanmodning Tryk på Anmodninger, tryk på anmodningen, og tryk derefter på Bekræft eller Ignorer. Du sender en rapport om et problem med anmodningen ved at svirpe opad og trykke på “Rapporter et problem”. Se de spil, en ven spiller, og tjek din vens resultater Tryk på Venner, tryk på vennens navn, og tryk på Spil eller Point. Søge efter en person på din liste over venner Tryk på statuslinjen for hurtigt at rulle til toppen af skærmen, tryk i søgefeltet, og begynd at skrive. Kapitel 20 Game Center 117Forhindre invitationer til spil fra andre Slå invitationer til spil fra i dine kontoindstillinger til Game Center. Se “Indstillinger til Game Center” på side 118. Skjule din e-post-adresse Slå Find mig via e-post fra i dine kontoindstillinger til Game Center. Se “Indstillinger til Game Center” på side 118. Slå alle aktiviteter med flere deltagere fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Begrænsninger > Game Center, og slå Spil med flere spillere fra. Forhindre venneanmodninger Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Begrænsninger > Game Center, og slå Tilføje venner fra. Se en liste over en vens venner Tryk på Venner, tryk på vennens navn, og tryk derefter på Venner lige under deres billede. Fjerne en ven Tryk på Venner, tryk på et navn, tryk på Fjern ven. Rapportere om stødende eller upassende adfærd Tryk på Venner, tryk på vennens navn, og tryk på “Rapporter et problem”. Indstillinger til Game Center Nogle indstillinger til Game Center hører sammen med den Apple-id, du bruger, når du logger ind. Andre findes i programmet Indstillinger på iPhone. Indstille oplysninger om Game Center i din Apple-id: Log ind med din Apple-id, tryk på Mig, tryk på kontobanneret, og vælg derefter Vis konto. Vælg, hvilke beskeder du vil modtage om Game Center: Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser > Game Center. Hvis Game Center ikke vises, skal du slå Beskeder til. Ændre begrænsninger i Game Center: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Begrænsninger > Game Center. 118 Kapitel 20 Game CenteriTunes Store 21 Om iTunes Store Brug iTunes Store til at føje indhold til iPhone. Du kan gennemse og købe musik, tv-udsendelser, lydbøger, advarselstoner og ringetoner. Du kan også købe og leje film eller hente og afspille podcasts eller iTunes U-samlinger. Du skal have et Apple-id for at kunne købe indhold. Se “Butiksindstillinger” på side 127. Bemærk: iTunes Store er muligvis ikke tilgængelig i alle områder, og indholdet af iTunes Store kan variere fra område til område. Funktioner kan ændres. Før du kan bruge iTunes Store, skal iPhone have en internetforbindelse. Se “Netværk” på side 168. Finde musik, videoer m.m. Vælg en kategori. Hent indkøb igen. Gennemse indhold: Tryk på en af indholdstyperne, f.eks. Musik eller Videoer. Eller tryk på Mere for at gennemse andet indhold. Søge efter indhold Tryk på Søg (tryk først på Mere, hvis Søg ikke vises), tryk i søgefeltet og skriv et eller flere ord, og tryk derefter på Søg. Købe, anmelde eller fortælle en ven om et emne Tryk på et emne på en liste for at se flere oplysninger på Infoskærmen. Udforske anbefalinger fra kunstnere og venner Tryk på Ping (tryk først på Mere, hvis Ping ikke vises) for at finde nyt fra dine yndlingskunstnere eller for at se, hvilken musik dine venner anbefaler. Der findes oplysninger i “Følge kunstnere og venner” på side 120. 119Købe musik, lydbøger og toner Når du finder en sang, et album, en advarselstone, ringetone eller en lydbog, du godt kan lide, i iTunes Store, kan du købe og hente emnet. Du kan høre et eksempel på et emne, før du køber det, så du er sikker på, at det er det, du vil have. Høre eksempel på en sang, ringetone eller lydbog: Tryk på emnet, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen. Indløse et gavekort eller en -kode Tryk på Musik (tryk først på Mere, hvis Musik ikke vises), tryk derefter på Indløs nederst på skærmen, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen. Når du har logget ind, vises din restsaldo i butikken med oplysningerne om din Appleid nederst på de fleste skærme i iTunes Store. Gøre et album komplet Når du ser et album, skal du trykke på den nedsatte pris for de resterende sange under Complete My Album (findes ikke i alle områder). Hvis du vil se tilbud om at gøre andre album komplette, skal du trykke på Musik og derefter på Complete My Album Offers. Hente et tidligere køb Tryk på Purchased. Du kan også hente et emne, mens du gennemser. Tryk bare på Download der, hvor prisen normalt vises. Automatisk hente køb foretaget på andre iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå de typer køb fra, som du vil hente automatisk. Købe eller leje videoer I iTunes Store (findes muligvis ikke i alle områder) kan du købe og hente film, tv-udsendelser og musikvideoer. Nogle film kan også lejes i en begrænset periode. Videoindhold kan være i SDformat (standard definition eller 480p), HD-format (high definition eller 720p) eller begge. Købe eller leje en video: Tryk på Køb eller Lej. Når du køber et emne, starter overførslen, og emnet vises på skærmen Overførsler. Se “Kontrollere status for overførsel” på side 121. Se et eksempel på en video Tryk på Eksempel. Se eksemplet på et fjernsyn vha. AirPlay og Apple TV Når eksemplet starter, skal du trykke på og vælge Apple TV. Se “AirPlay” på side 33. Bemærk: Hvis du køber HD-video på iPhone 3GS, overføres videoen i SD-format. Følge kunstnere og venner Brug Ping til få forbindelse med verdens mest passionerede musikfans. Følg dine yndlingskunstnere for at høre om nye udgivelser, kommende koncerter og turneer, få indblik i deres verden gennem deres fotografier og videoer, og hør om deres musikalske inspirationskilder. Læs vennernes kommentarer til den musik, de hører, og se, hvad de køber, og hvilke koncerter de har tænkt sig at gå til. Giv udtryk for din musiksmag, og publicer også kommentarer til dem, der følger dig. Før du kan oprette og udforske musikalske forbindelser, skal du oprette en profil. Oprette en Ping-profil: Åbn programmet iTunes på din Mac eller pc, klik på Ping, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen. Tryk på Ping (tryk først på Mere, hvis Ping ikke er synlig), og udforsk derefter Ping. Du kan gøre følgende: 120 Kapitel 21 iTunes StoreFølge en kunstner Tryk på Follow på deres profilside. Følge en ven Når du følger en person, følger den pågældende person ikke automatisk dig. I din profil kan du vælge at godkende eller afslå følgeanmodninger, når de kommer, eller bare acceptere alle nye anmodninger uden at gennemgå dem. Dele dine tanker Når du gennemser album og sange, kan du trykke på Publicer for at kommentere musikken eller på God for at vise, at du synes om musikken. Dine venner kan se dine kommentarer under Activity i iTunes Ping. Dele koncertplaner Tryk på Concerts på din profilside for at se kommende koncerter med kunstnere, som du følger, og hvem af dine venner der tager til koncert. Tryk på Tickets for at købe en billet, eller tryk på I’m Going for at fortælle andre, at du også kommer. (Ikke tilgængelig i alle områder.) Streame eller hente podcasts Du kan lytte til lydpodcasts eller se videopodcasts streamet via internettet fra iTunes Store. Du kan også hente lyd- og videopodcasts. Streame en podcast: Tryk på Podcasts (tryk først på Mere, hvis Podcasts ikke vises), og gennemse derefter podcasts i iTunes Store. Videopodcasts vises med et videosymbol . Hente en podcast: Tryk på knappen Gratis og derefter på Hent. Overførte podcasts vises på spillelisten Podcasts. Lytte til eller se en podcast, du har hentet I Musik skal du trykke på Podcasts (tryk først på Mere, hvis Podcasts ikke vises) og derefter trykke på en podcast. Videopodcasts vises også på din liste med videoer. Få flere episoder af den podcast, du har hentet På podcastlisten i Musik skal du trykke på podcasten og derefter trykke på Hent flere episoder. Slette en podcast På podcastlisten i Musik skal du skubbe til venstre eller højre over podcasten og derefter trykke på Slet. Kontrollere status for overførsel Du kan kontrollere overførselsskærmen for at se status for igangværende og planlagte overførsler, inklusive forudbestilte emner. Se status for emner, der overføres: Tryk på Overførsler (tryk først på Mere, hvis Overførsler ikke vises). Forudbestilte emner hentes ikke automatisk, når de udgives. Vend tilbage til overførselsskærmen for at starte overførslen. Overføre et forudbestilt emne Tryk på emnet, og tryk på . Hvis en overførsel afbrydes, genoptages den, næste gang der er forbindelse til internettet. Eller hvis du åbner iTunes på din computer, færdiggør iTunes overførslen til dit iTunes-bibliotek (hvis computeren har forbindelse til internettet, og du har logget ind med den samme Apple-id). Kapitel 21 iTunes Store 121Ændre knapperne nederst på skærmen Du kan erstatte knapperne Musik, Podcasts, Videoer og Søg nederst på skærmen med andre knapper, som du bruger oftere. Hvis du f.eks. tit henter lydbøger men sjældent ser videoer, kan du erstatte knappen Videoer med Lydbøger. Ændre browserknapperne: Tryk på Mere, og tryk på Rediger. Træk derefter en knap til bunden af skærmen, og anbring den på den knap, du vil erstatte. Du kan trække knapperne nederst på skærmen til venstre eller højre for at ændre deres rækkefølge. Klik på OK, når du er færdig. Mens du leder efter emner, skal du trykke på Mere for at få adgang til de knapper, der ikke vises. Vise kontooplysninger Hvis du vil se iTunes Store-oplysninger om din Apple-id på iPhone, skal du trykke på din Apple-id (nederst på de fleste skærme i iTunes Store). Eller gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og tryk på Se Apple-id. Du skal være logget ind, før du kan se dine kontooplysninger. Se “Butiksindstillinger” på side 127. Kontrollere overførsler Du kan bruge iTunes på computeren til at kontrollere, at musik, videoer, programmer og andre emner, som du har købt fra iTunes Store eller App Store, findes i dit iTunes-bibliotek. Det kan du evt. kontrollere, hvis en overførsel er blevet afbrudt. Kontrollere dine indkøb: I iTunes på computeren skal du vælge Butik > Søg efter tilgængelige overførsler. Hvis du vil se alle dine indkøb, skal du logge ind med din Apple-id, vælge Butik > Vis min konto og klikke på Purchase History. 122 Kapitel 21 iTunes StoreBladkiosk 22 Om Bladkiosk I Bladkiosk organiseres dine abonnementer på tidsskrifter og aviser vha. reoler, hvor du hurtigt og let kan få adgang til dine publikationer. Programmet Bladkiosk vises på reolen, og efterhånden som der kommer nye numre, vises det med et skilt, at de er klar til at blive læst. De leveres automatisk til iPhone. Hold fingeren på en publikation for at flytte den. Finde Bladkiosk-programmer: Tryk på Bladkiosk for at vise reolen, og tryk derefter på Butik Når du køber et bladkiosk-program, føjes det til reolen, så du let har adgang til det. Når programmet er hentet, kan du åbne det for at se indstillingerne til nye numre og abonnementer. Abonnementer købt fra programmer debiteres din konti i butikken. Se “Butiksindstillinger” på side 127. Priser kan variere, og Bladkiosk findes muligvis ikke i alle områder. Læse de nyeste numre Når der udkommer en ny udgave eller et nyt nummer af en avis eller et tidsskrift, henter Bladkiosk den nye udgave, når der er forbindelse til Wi-Fi, og underretter dig ved at vise et skilt på publikationens symbol. Du kommer i gang med at læse ved at åbne Bladkiosk og trykke på programmer med banneret “Ny”. 123Hvert program administrerer udgaver forskelligt. Du kan finde oplysninger om, hvordan du sletter, finder eller arbejder med de enkelte udgaver i programmets hjælp eller under programmets oplysninger i App Store. Du kan ikke fjerne et Bladkiosk-program fra reolen eller anbringe andre typer programmer på reolen. Slå automatiske overførsler fra Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå automatiske overførsler af publikationen fra. 124 Kapitel 22 BladkioskApp Store 23 Om App Store Du kan søge efter, gennemse, anmelde, købe og hente programmer fra App Store direkte til iPhone. Før du kan udforske App Store, skal iPhone have forbindelse til internettet. Se “Netværk” på side 168. Før du kan købe programmer, skal du også have en Apple-id (findes måske ikke i alle områder). Se “Butiksindstillinger” på side 127. Bemærk: App Store er muligvis ikke tilgængelig i alle områder, og indholdet af iTunes Store kan variere fra område til område. Funktioner kan ændres. Se Genius-anbefalinger. Søg efter opdateringer. Søge efter og hente programmer Gennemse de udvalgte emner for at se nye, specielle eller anbefalede programmer, eller gennemse Top 25 for at se de mest populære programmer. Brug Søg, hvis du leder efter et bestemt program. Gennemse App Store: Tryk på Udvalgt, Kategorier eller Top 25. 125Gennemse vha. Genius Tryk på Genius for at se en liste over anbefalede programmer baseret på det, du allerede har i din programsamling. Du slår Genius til ved at følge instruktionerne på skærmen. Genius er en gratis tjeneste, men den kræver, at du har en Apple-id. Søge efter programmer Tryk på Søg, tryk i søgefeltet, skriv et eller flere ord, og tryk på Søg. Se vurderinger og læs anmeldelser Tryk på Ratings nederst på programmets Infoskærm. Du kan vurdere og anmelde de programmer, du henter. Sende en henvisning til programmets infoside i iTunes med e-post Tryk på “Tip en ven” nederst på programmets Infoskærm. Sende programmet til andre som en gave Tryk på “Gift This App” nederst på programmets Infoskærm, og følg derefter instruktionerne på skærmen. Rapportere et problem Tryk på “Rapporter et problem” nederst på programmets Infoskærm. Vælg et problem på listen, eller skriv evt. kommentarer, og tryk derefter på Rapporter. Købe og hente et program Tryk på prisen (eller tryk på Free), og tryk på Buy Now. Hvis du allerede har købt programmet, står der “Install” på infoskærmen i stedet for prisen. Du skal ikke betale, hvis du henter det igen. Indløse et gavekort eller en -kode Tryk på Redeem tæt ved bunden af skærmen Udvalgt, og følg derefter instruktionerne på skærmen. Se status for overførsler Når programmet hentes, vises dets symbol på hjemmeskærmen sammen med en statusindikator. Hente et tidligere køb Tryk på Purchased. Du kan også hente et emne, mens du gennemser; du skal bare trykke på Download der, hvor du normalt ser prisen. Automatisk hente køb foretaget på andre enheder: Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå de typer køb til, som du vil hente automatisk. Opdatere et program Tryk på Opdateringer nederst på programmets Infoskærm, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen. Slette programmer Du kan slette programmer, som du installerer fra App Store. Hvis du sletter et program, slette de tilhørende data også. Slette et App Store-program: Hold fingeren på et programsymbol på hjemmeskærmen, indtil det begynder at vrikke, og tryk derefter på . Tryk på knappen Hjem , når du er færdig med at slette programmer. Du kan få oplysninger om, hvordan du sletter alle programmer og alle dine data og indstillinger i “Slet alt indhold og alle indstillinger” på side 172. Du kan gratis hente alle slettede programmer, som du har købt fra App Store, igen. Hente et slettet program I App Store skal du trykke på Opdateringer og derefter på Purchased. Tryk på programmet, og tryk derefter på Install. 126 Kapitel 23 App StoreButiksindstillinger Brug indstillingerne under Butik til at logge ind på en Apple-id, oprette en ny Apple-id eller redigere en eksisterende. Hvis du har flere Apple-id'er, kan du bruge indstillingerne under Butik til at logge ud fra en konto og ind på en anden. Den Apple-id, som du er logget ind på, når du synkroniserer iPhone med din computer, vises som standard i indstillingerne til Butik. Du finder betingelserne for iTunes Store på www.apple.com/dk/legal/itunes/ww/. Logge ind på en Apple-id: Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, tryk på Log ind, tryk på Brug eksisterende Apple-id, og skriv din Apple-id og adgangskode. Se og redigere dine kontooplysninger Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, tryk på din Apple-id, og tryk på Se Apple-id. Tryk på et emne for at redigere det. Du ændrer adgangskode til kontoen ved at trykke i feltet Apple-id. Logge ind med en anden Apple-id Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, tryk på dit kontonavn og tryk på Log ud. Oprette en ny Apple-id Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, tryk på Log ind, tryk på Opret ny Apple-id, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen. Hente køb automatisk Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå de typer køb til, f.eks. Musik eller Bøger, som du vil hente automatisk til iPhone. Du kan også slå automatisk opdatering af programmet Bladkiosk fra. Hente køb vha. mobilnetværket Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå Brug mobildata til eller fra. Operatøren kan kræve betaling for køb, der hentes via mobilnetværket. Bladkioskprogrammer opdateres kun, når iPhone er forbundet til et Wi-Fi-netværk. Se Kapitel 22,“Bladkiosk,” på side 123. Kapitel 23 App Store 127Kontakter 24 Om Kontakter Med Kontakter kan du nemt få adgang til og redigere dine kontaktlister fra private konti, arbejdskonti og organisationskonti. Du kan søge i alle dine grupper, og oplysningerne i Kontakter åbnes automatisk, hvilket gør det hurtigt og nemt at adressere e-post. Ring Send en e-post. Send en sms. Foretag et videoopkald med FaceTime. Se et kort og få vejvisning. Synkronisere kontakter Du kan tilføje kontakter på følgende måder:  I iTunes kan du synkronisere kontakter fra Google eller Yahoo! eller synkronisere med programmer på computeren. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18.  Brug dine iCloud-kontakter. Se “iCloud” på side 16.  Indstille en Microsoft Exchange-konto på iPhone, når Kontakter er slået til. Se “Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger” på side 130.  Indstil en LDAP- eller CardDAV-konto for at åbne erhvervs- eller skoleadresselister. Se “Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger” på side 130.  Indtaste kontakter direkte på iPhone. Se “Tilføje og redigere kontakter” på side 129.  Importere kontakter fra et SIM-kort (GSM-model). Se “Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger” på side 130. 128Søge efter kontakter Du kan søge efter titler, for-, efter- og firmanavne i dine kontakter på iPhone. Hvis du har en Microsoft Exchange-konto, en LDAP-konto eller en CardDAV-konto, kan du også søge efter disse kontakter. Søge efter kontakter: I Kontakter skal du trykke på søgefeltet øverst på en liste med kontakter og indtaste din søgning. Søge på en global adresseliste Tryk på Grupper, tryk på Biblioteker nederst på listen, og skriv derefter det, der skal søges efter. Søge på en LDAP-server Tryk på Grupper, tryk på LDAP-servernavnet og skriv derefter din søgning. Søge på en CardDAV-server Tryk på Grupper, tryk på CardDAV-gruppen nederst på listen, og skriv derefter det, der skal søges efter. Arkivere kontaktoplysninger fra en GAL-, LDAP- eller CardDAV-server Søg efter den kontakt, du vil tilføje, og tryk derefter på Tilføj kontakt. Du kan også finde kontakter via søgninger fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. Tilføje og redigere kontakter Tilføje en kontakt på iPhone: Tryk på Kontakter, og tryk på . Hvis ikke er synlig, skal du sikre dig, at du viser en LDAP-, CalDAV- eller GAL-kontaktliste. Slette en kontakt I Kontakter skal du vælge en kontakt og derefter trykke på Rediger. Rul ned, og tryk på Slet kontakt. Tilføje en kontakt fra det numeriske tastatur Tryk på Num. blok, indtast et tal, og tryk på . Tryk på Opret ny kontakt, eller tryk på “Føj til eksisterende kontakt”, og vælg en kontakt. Indtaste en blød pause (på to sekunder) i et nummer Tryk på , og tryk på Pause. Et telefonsystem kan kræve en eller flere pauser, f.eks. før et lokalnummer. Hver pause vises som et komma, når nummeret arkiveres. Indtaste en hård pause i et nummer Tryk på , og tryk på Vent. En hård pause vises som et semikolon, når nummeret arkiveres. Ved opkald holder iPhone en pause, når den kommer til semikolonet, og venter, indtil du trykker på knappen Ring for at fortsætte. Føje et af de seneste telefonnumre til dine kontakter Tryk på Seneste, og tryk på ved siden af nummeret. Tryk derefter på Opret ny kontakt, eller tryk på “Føj til eksisterende kontakt”, og vælg en kontakt. Redigere kontaktoplysninger: Vælg en kontakt og tryk på Rediger. Tilføje et nyt felt Tryk på Tilføj felt. Tilføje en kontakts Twitterbrugernavn Tryk på , Tilføj felt, og tryk derefter på Twitter. Ændre et felts mærke Tryk på mærket, og vælg et andet. Du tilføjer et nyt mærke ved at rulle til bunden af listen og trykke på Tilføj specielt mærke. Ændre kontaktens ringetone eller beskedtone Tryk på feltet ringetone eller beskedtone, og vælg en ny lyd. Standardtonen angives i Indstillinger > Lyde. Slette et emne Tryk på , og tryk på Slet. Tildele et fotografi til en kontakt Tryk på Tilføj foto, eller tryk på det eksisterende fotografi. Du kan tage et fotografi med kameraet eller bruge et eksisterende fotografi. Gå til Indstillinger > Twitter for at importere fotografier fra dine kontakters Twitter-profiler. Log ind på din Twitter-konto, og tryk derefter på Opdater kontakter. Kapitel 24 Kontakter 129Samlede kontakter Når du synkroniserer kontakter med flere konti, har du måske optegnelser om den samme person i mere end en konto. For at forhindre, at der vises overflødige kontakter på listen Alle kontakter, bliver kontakter fra forskellige konti med samme navn forbundet og vist som en enkelt samlet kontakt. Når du ser en samlet kontakt, vises titlen Samlet info øverst på skærmen. Oprette en kontaktforbindelse: Tryk på Rediger, tryk derefter på , og vælg en kontakt. Hvis du forbinder kontakter med forskellige for- og efternavne, ændres navnene på de individuelle kontakter ikke, men der vises kun et navn på det samlede kort. Du vælger de navne, der skal vises på det samlede kort, ved at trykke på det forbundne kort med det navn, du foretrækker, og derefter trykke på Brug dette navn til et samlet kort. Se kontaktoplysninger fra en kildekonto Tryk på en af kildekontiene. Ophæve en kontaktforbindelse Tryk på Rediger, tryk på , og tryk derefter på Afbryd forbindelse. Forbundne kontakter kombineres ikke. Hvis du ændrer eller tilføjer oplysninger om en samlet kontakt, kopieres ændringerne til alle de kildekonti, hvor oplysningerne allerede findes. Kontaktkonti og -indstillinger Du kan tilføje kontaktkonti og justere den måde, kontaktnavne sorteres og vises på. Tilføje en CalDAV-konto: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere, og tryk derefter på Tilføj konto. Du ændrer kontaktindstillinger ved at gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere og foretage disse indstillinger: Indstille, hvordan kontakter sorteres Tryk på Rækkefølge for at sortere efter fornavn eller efternavn. Indstille, hvordan kontakter vises Tryk på Vis rækkefølge, og vælg, om der skal sorteres efter fornavn eller efternavn. Importere kontakter fra et SIM-kort Tryk på Importer SIM-kontakter. Indstille kortet Min info Tryk på Min info, og vælg kontaktkortet med dit navn og dine oplysninger på listen. Kortet Min info bruges af Siri og andre programmer. Brug felterne til beslægtede personer til at definere forhold, som Siri skal kende, så du f.eks. kan sige: “call my sister”. Indstille standardkontoen til kontakter Tryk på Standardkonto, og vælg en konto. Når du opretter nye kontakter uden at anføre en anden konto, lagres de her. Brug iCloud til at holde Kontakter ajour på dine iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og slå Kontakter til. Se “iCloud” på side 16. 130 Kapitel 24 KontakterVideoer 25 Om videoer Du kan bruge iPhone til at se videoindhold som film, musikvideoer og videopodcasts samt tvudsendelser, hvis de er tilgængelige i dit land. Afspille videoer Afspille en video: Tryk på videoen. Tryk på videoen for at vise eller skjule betjeningspanelet. Se videoen på et fjernsyn med Apple TV Træk for at hoppe frem eller tilbage. Vælg et kapitel. Træk for at justere lydstyrken. Cars 2 fås i iTunes. Cars 2 © Disney/Pixar. Vise eller skjule betjeningspanelet til video Tryk på skærmen, mens du ser en video. Justere lydstyrken Træk mærket til lydstyrke, eller brug lydstyrkeknapperne på siden af iPhone eller lydstyrkeknapperne på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Skalere en video, så den udfylder skærmen eller tilpasses til skærmen Tryk på eller . Eller tryk to gange på videoen. Genoptage eller sætte afspilning på pause Tryk på eller , eller tryk på knappen i midten på kablet til øretelefonerne til iPhone. Starte forfra fra begyndelsen Hvis videoen indeholder kapitler, skal du trække afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen hele vejen til venstre. Hvis der ikke er nogen kapitler, skal du trykke på . Hvis du er kommet mindre end 5 sekunder ind i videoen, åbnes den forrige video i biblioteket. Hoppe til et bestemt kapitel (hvis der er kapitler) Tryk på , og vælg derefter et kapitel. Hoppe til det næste kapitel (hvis der er kapitler) Tryk på , eller tryk hurtigt to gange på knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone. 131Hoppe til det forrige kapitel (hvis der er kapitler) Tryk på , eller tryk hurtigt tre gange på knappen i midten på øretelefonerne til iPhone. Hvis du er kommet mindre end 5 sekunder ind i videoen, åbnes den forrige video i biblioteket. Spole tilbage eller frem Hold eller nede. Holde op med at se en video Tryk på OK. Vælge et andet sprog (hvis det findes) Tryk på , og vælg et sprog på listen Lyd. Vise eller skjule undertekster (hvis de findes) Tryk på , og vælg et sprog, eller vælg Fra, på listen Undertekster. Vise eller skjule “closed captioning” (hvis de findes) Gå til Indstillinger > Video. Søge efter videoer Du kan søge i titler på film, tv-udsendelser og videopodcasts på iPhone. Søge i dine videoer: Tryk på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen for at vise søgefeltet, tryk i feltet og indtast teksten. Du kan også søge i videoer fra hjemmeskærmen. Se “Søge” på side 29. Se lejede film Du kan leje film fra iTunes Store, og se dem på iPhone. Du kan hente lejede film direkte til iPhone eller overføre dem fra iTunes på computeren til iPhone. (Der er måske ikke muligt at leje film i alle områder.) Lejeperioden på lejede film udløber, og når du er begyndt at se dem, har du begrænset tid til at afslutte dem. Den resterende tid vises nær titlen. Lejede emner slettes automatisk, når lejeperioden udløber. I iTunes Store kan du se, hvor lang lejeperioden er, før du lejer en film. Der findes oplysninger i “Købe eller leje videoer” på side 120. Vise en lejet film: Tryk på den video, du vil se. Hvis du ikke kan se videoen på listen, er den stadig ved at blive hentet. Overføre lejede film til iPhone: Slut iPhone til computeren. Vælg derefter iPhone på indholdsoversigten i iTunes, klik på Film, og vælg de lejede film, du vil overføre. Computeren skal være forbundet med internettet. Film lejet på iPhone kan ikke overføres til en computer. På iPhone 3GS kan du overføre lejede film mellem iPhone og computeren. På iPhone 4 kan du kun overføre lejede film mellem iPhone og computeren, hvis de blev lejet i iTunes på din computer. Se videoer på et fjernsyn Du kan streame videoer trådløst til dit fjernsyn vha. AirPlay og Apple TV eller slutte iPhone til dit fjernsyn vha. et af følgende kabler:  Apple Digital AV-mellemstik og et HDMI-kabel (iPhone 4 og nyere modeller)  Apple Component AV-kabel  Apple Composite AV-kabel  Apple VGA-mellemstik og et VGA-kabel 132 Kapitel 25 VideoerApples kabler, mellemstik og dockenheder kan købes separat i mange områder. Gå til www.apple.com/dk/store, eller spørg din lokale Apple-forhandler Streame videoer vha. AirPlay: Start videoafspilningen, tryk på , og vælg Apple TV på listen over AirPlay-enheder. Hvis ikke vises, eller hvis du ikke kan se Apple TV på listen over AirPlayenheder, skal du kontrollere, at enheden findes på det samme trådløse netværk som iPhone. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “AirPlay” på side 33. Mens videoen afspilles, kan du slutte Video og bruge andre programmer. Du skifter afspilning tilbage til iPhone ved at trykke på og vælge iPhone. Streame videoer vha. et kabel: Brug kablet til at slutte iPhone til dit fjernsyn eller din AVmodtager, og vælg den tilsvarende indgang. Tilslutte vha. et AV-kabel Brug et Apple Component AV-kabel, Apple Composite AV-kabel eller et andet godkendt kabel, der er kompatibelt med iPhone. Du kan også bruge disse kabler med Apple Universal Dock til at slutte iPhone til dit fjernsyn. Du kan bruge dockens fjernbetjening til at styre afspilning. Tilslutte vha. et Apple Digital AVmellemstik (iPhone 4 eller nyere modeller) Sæt Apple Digital AV-mellemstikket i iPhones dock-stik. Brug et HDMIkabel til at forbinde HDMI-porten på mellemstikket med fjernsynet eller modtageren. Du kan sikre, at iPhone oplades, mens du ser videoer, ved at bruge et Apple Dock-stik til USB-kabel til at forbinde porten med 30 ben på mellemstikket med computeren, eller vha. en USB-strømforsyning, som er sluttet til en stikkontakt. Tilslutte vha. et VGA-mellemstik Sæt VGA-mellemstikket i iPhones dock-stik. Brug et VGA-kabel til at forbinde VGA-mellemstikket med et kompatibelt fjernsyn, en projektor eller en VGA-skærm. Digital AV-mellemstik understøtter video med høj opløsning på op til 720p med lyd. Når du slutter iPhone 4S til et fjernsyn eller en projektor vha. et Apple Digital AV-mellemstik eller et VGA-mellemstik, dubleres skærmbilledet fra iPhone automatisk på den eksterne skærm med en opløsning på op til 1080p, og videoer afspilles med en opløsning på op til 720p. Du kan også dublere skærmen på iPhone 4S på et fjernsyn, trådløst vha. AirPlay-skærmdublering og Apple TV. Se “AirPlay” på side 33. Slette videoer fra iPhone Du kan slette videoer fra iPhone for at spare plads. Når du sletter en video fra iPhone (ikke en lejet film), slettes videoen ikke fra iTunes-biblioteket. Den vises måske på iPhone igen, hvis du stadig har indstillet videoen til synkronisering i iTunes. Vigtigt: Hvis du sletter en lejet film fra iPhone, slettes den permanent og kan ikke overføres tilbage til computeren. Slette en video: Skub til venstre eller højre over videoen på videolisten, og tryk på Slet. Bruge Deling i hjemmet Med Deling i hjemmet kan du afspille musik, film og tv-udsendelser på iPhone fra iTunesbiblioteket på din Mac eller pc. Se “Deling i hjemmet” på side 82. Indstille et interval for vågeblus Du kan indstille iPhone til at holde op med at afspille musik eller videoer efter et vist interval. Kapitel 25 Videoer 133Indstille et interval for vågeblus: Tryk på Tidtagning i programmet Ur, og svirp for at indstille antallet af timer og minutter. Tryk på Når tidt. slutter, og vælg Vågeblus. Tryk på Indstil og derefter på Start for at starte tidtagningen. Når tidtagningen er slut, holder iPhone op med at spille musik eller video, lukker åbne programmer og låser derefter sig selv. Konvertere videoer til iPhone Du kan føje videoer, som ikke er købt i iTunes Store, til iPhone, f.eks. videoer oprettet i iMovie på en Mac eller videoer, som du har hentet fra internettet og derefter føjet til iTunes. Hvis du prøver at føje en video fra iTunes til iPhone, og der vises en meddelelse om, at videoen ikke kan afspilles på iPhone, kan du konvertere videoen. Konvertere en video, så den kan bruges på iPhone: Vælg videoen i dit iTunes-bibliotek, og vælg Avanceret > “Opret iPod- eller iPhone-version”. Føj derefter den konverterede video til iPhone. 134 Kapitel 25 VideoerLommeregner 26 Bruge Lommeregner Tryk på tal og funktioner i Lommeregner på samme måde, som du ville bruge en almindelig lommeregner. Når du trykker på additions-, subtraktions-, multiplikations- eller divisionsknappen, vises der en hvid ring omkring knappen, så du kan se, hvilken regnefunktion der udføres. Føj et tal til hukommelsen. Ryd hukommelsen. Ryd skærmen. Træk et tal fra hukommelsen. Få et tal fra hukommelsen (en hvid ring betyder, at tallet er lagret i hukommelsen). Videnskabelig lommeregner Vend iPhone om på siden for at vise den videnskabelige lommeregner. 135Kompas 27 Om Kompas Det indbyggede kompas viser, i hvilken retning iPhone vender, sammen med de geografiske koordinater for din aktuelle lokalitet. Du kan få kompasset til at pege mod magnetisk nord eller sand nord. Vigtigt: Magnetiske eller miljømæssige forstyrrelser kan have indflydelse på kompassets nøjagtighed; magneterne i ørepropperne til iPhone kan også forårsage afvigelser. Brug kun det digitale kompas som en vejledende retningsangiver og forlad dig ikke på, at det kan bestemme din præcise lokalitet, nærhed, afstand eller retning. Hvis lokalitetstjenester er slået fra, når du åbner Kompas, bliver du måske bedt om at slå dem til. Du kan bruge Kompas uden at slå lokalitetstjenester til. Se “Lokalitetstjenester” på side 165. Vælg magnetisk eller sand retning. Aktuel lokalitet Den retning, som iPhone peger i Vis din aktuelle lokalitet i Kort. Kalibrere kompasset Du skal kalibrere kompasset, første gang du bruger det og jævnligt herefter. iPhone advarer dig, hvis det er nødvendigt at kalibrere. Kalibrere det interne kompas: Bevæg iPhone i en ottetalsfigur. Finde retningen Finde den retning, som iPhone peger i: Hold iPhone fladt i hånden og parallelt med jorden. Dens retning vises øverst på skærmen, og lokaliteten vises nederst. 136Skifte mellem sand nord og magnetisk nord Tryk på . Bruge Kompas med Kort Programmet Kompas kan også vise din aktuelle lokalitet og retning i Kort. Der findes oplysninger i “Finde lokaliteter” på side 103. Se din aktuelle lokalitet i Kort: Tryk på nederst på skærmen Kompas. Kort åbner og viser din aktuelle lokalitet med et blåt mærke. Vise, hvilken retning du står i Tryk to gange på i Kort. Symbolet ændres til . Vinklen viser nøjagtigheden af kompaslæsningen – jo mindre vinklen er, jo mere nøjagtig er læsningen. Kapitel 27 Kompas 137Memoer 28 Om memoer Med Memoer kan du bruge iPhone som en bærbar optageenhed vha. den indbyggede mikrofon i iPhone, et Bluetooth-hovedsæt eller en understøttet ekstern mikrofon. Optagelser, der bruger den indbyggede mikrofon er i mono, men du kan optage i stereo med en ekstern stereomikrofon. Bemærk: Eksterne mikrofoner skal være designet til at virke med Dock-stikket eller stikket til hovedsættet på iPhone. Disse inkluderer øretelefoner fra Apple eller autoriseret tilbehør fra tredjeparter med Apple-logoet “Made for iPhone” eller “Works with iPhone”. Start, sæt på pause eller stop optagelse. Optageniveau Se listen over optagelser. Optage Foretage en optagelse: Tryk på , eller tryk på knappen i midten på kablet til øretelefonerne til iPhone. Tryk på for at sætte optagelsen på pause eller stoppe den, eller tryk på knappen i midten på kablet til øretelefonerne til iPhone. Justere optageniveau Flyt mikrofonen tættere på eller længere væk fra det, du optager. Du opnår den bedste optagekvalitet, hvis det højeste niveau på lydstyrkemåleren er mellem –3 dB og 0 dB. Afspille eller gøre start-stoptonen lydløs Brug kontakten Ring/stille på iPhone. (I nogle områder afspilles lydeffekterne til Memoer, selv om kontakten Ring/stille er indstillet til Stille.) Bruge et andet program under optagelse Tryk på knappen Hjem , og åbn et program. Du vender tilbage til Memoer ved at trykke på den røde linje øverst på skærmen. 138Lytte til en optagelse Afspille en optagelse: Tryk på , tryk på et memo, og tryk på . Tryk på for at holde pause. Tilpas eller giv optagelsen en ny etiket. Lyt til optagelsen. Vedlæg optagelsen til en e-post eller sms. Træk for at hoppe til et andet sted. Skift mellem højttaleren og modtageren. Hoppe til et sted i en optagelse Træk afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen. Lytte gennem den indbyggede iPhone-højttaler i stedet for gennem modtageren Tryk på Højttaler. Tilpasse en optagelse Tryk på ved siden af optagelsen, og tryk derefter på Tilpas memo. Træk kanterne af lydområdet, og tryk derefter på for at se et eksempel. Juster om nødvendigt, og tryk derefter på Tilpas memo for at arkivere. De dele, du tilpasser, kan ikke gendannes. Administrere og dele optagelser En optagelse markeres med tidspunktet for optagelsen. Sætte en etiket på en optagelse: Tryk på ud for optagelsen, tryk på på infoskærmen, vælg en etiket, og vælg Speciel. Slette en optagelse Tryk på en optagelse på listen, og tryk derefter på Slet. Se optagelsesoplysninger Tryk på ved siden af optagelsen. Sende en optagelse via e-post eller i en besked Tryk på en optagelse på listen, og tryk derefter på Del. Dele memoer med computeren iTunes kan synkronisere memoer til dit iTunes-bibliotek, når du slutter iPhone til computeren. Når du synkroniserer memoer til iTunes, forbliver de i programmet Memoer, indtil du sletter dem. Hvis du sletter et memo på iPhone, bliver det ikke slettet fra spillelisten Memoer i iTunes. Men hvis du sletter et memo fra iTunes, slettes det fra iPhone, næste gang du synkroniserer med iTunes. Synkronisere memoer med iTunes: Slut iPhone til computeren, og vælg iPhone på listen over enheder i iTunes. Vælg Musik øverst på skærmen (mellem Programmer og Film), vælg Synkroniser musik, vælg “Inkluder indtalte memoer” og klik på Anvend. Memoerne fra iPhone vises på spillelisten Indtalte memoer i iTunes. Kapitel 28 Memoer 139Nike + iPod 29 Om Nike + iPod Med en Nike + iPod-sensor (sælges separat) giver Nike + iPod-programmet talt feedback på din hastighed, distance, brugt tid og antal kalorier, der er forbrændt på en løbe- eller gåtur. Du kan sende dine træningsoplysninger til http://www.nikeplus.com, hvor du kan se din status, sætte dig mål og deltage i udfordringer. Gennemgå din træningshistorie. Kalibrer på baggrund af din sidste træning. Vælg en træningstype. Vælg en standardtræning. Vælg eller opret en speciel træning. Aktivere Nike + iPod Programmet Nike + iPod vises først på hjemmeskærmen, når du slår det til. Du kan få hjælp til at indstille Nike + iPod i dokumentationen til Nike + iPod. Slå Nike + iPod til: Gå til Indstillinger > Nike + iPod. Oprette forbindelse til en sensor Nike + iPod baserer træningsdataene på et signal fra en sensor (sælges separat), som du anbringer i din sko. Første gang du starter en træning, bliver du bedt om at aktivere sensoren, hvorefter den automatisk forbindes med iPhone. Du kan også bruge Nike + iPod-indstillinger til at forbinde en sensor med iPhone. Nike + iPod kan kun forbindes med en sensor ad gangen. Hvis du vil bruge en anden sensor, skal du bruge Nike + iPod-indstillinger til at forbinde den nye sensor . 140Forbinde sensoren med iPhone: Anbring sensoren i skoen, og gå derefter til Indstillinger > Nike + iPod > Sensor. Forbinde iPhone med en anden sensor Gå til Indstillinger > Nike + iPod > Sensor og tryk på Forbind ny. Træne med Nike + iPod Når du har aktiveret Nike + iPod og lagt Nike + iPod-sensoren i Nike+-skoen, er du klar til at indsamle træningsdata. Vigtigt: Før du begynder at træne, bør du få foretaget en helbredsundersøgelse hos lægen. Du skal varme op og strække ud, før du begynder at træne. Du skal altid være forsigtig og have din fulde opmærksomhed rettet mod træningen. Sæt om nødvendigt tempoet ned, før du justerer enheden, når du løber. Hold med det samme op med at træne, hvis du føler smerte, bliver svimmel, udmattet eller får åndenød. Når du træner, accepterer du de risici, der er forbundet med fysisk træning, inkl. skader, der kan opstå på basis af sådanne aktiviteter. Træne med Nike + iPod: Åbn Nike + iPod, tryk på Træninger, og vælg en træningsmetode. Dataindsamling fortsætter, mens iPhone er på vågeblus. Sætte træningen på pause eller genoptage den Hvis træningen afbrydes, skal du afbryde vågeblus på iPhone og trykke på på låseskærmen. Tryk på , når du er klar til at begynde. Afslutte træningen Afbryd vågeblus på iPhone, tryk på , og tryk på Slut træning. Ændre træningsindstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Nike + iPod. Kalibrere Nike + iPod Du sikrer præcise træningsdata ved at kalibrere Nike + iPod til længden på din løbe- eller gåtur. Kalibrere Nike + iPod Optag en løbe- eller gåtur over en kendt distance på mindst 400 m. Når du har trykket på Slut træning, skal du trykke på Kalibrer på resumeskærmen til træningen og indtaste turens faktiske distance. Nulstille standardkalibreringen Gå til Indstillinger > Nike + iPod. Sende træningsdata til nikeplus.com På nikeplus.com kan du holde styr på dine fremskridt, se en oversigt over tidligere træninger, indstille og overvåge træningsmål og sammenligne dine resultater med andres. Du kan endda konkurrere med andre Nike + iPod-brugere i træningsudfordringer via internettet. Sende træningsdata trådløst til nikeplus.com fra iPhone: Når iPhone har forbindelse til internettet, skal du åbne Nike + iPod, trykke på Historie og derefter trykke på “Send til Nike+”. Se dine træninger på nikeplus.com For at se dine træninger på nikeplus.com skal du i Safari logge ind på kontoen og følge instruktionerne på skærmen. Kapitel 29 Nike + iPod 141iBooks 30 Om iBooks iBooks er en fantastisk måde at læse og købe bøger på. Hent det gratis program iBooks fra App Store, og hent derefter alt fra klassikere til bestsellers i den indbyggede iBookstore. Når du har hentet en bog, vises den i din bogreol. Computeren skal have forbindelse til internettet, og du skal have en Apple-id, før du kan hente programmet iBooks og bruge iBookstore. Hvis du ikke har en Apple-id, eller hvis du vil købe ind med en anden Apple-id, skal du gå til Indstillinger > Butik. Se “Butiksindstillinger” på side 127. Bemærk: Programmet iBooks og iBookstore er ikke tilgængelige på alle sprog og i alle områder. Bruge iBookstore I programmet iBooks skal du trykke på Butik for at åbne iBookstore. Derfra kan du gennemse udvalgte bøger eller bestsellere og gennemse bøger efter forfatter eller emne. Når du finder en bog, du kan lide, kan du købe og hente den. Bemærk: Nogle funktioner i iBookstore er måske ikke tilgængelige i alle områder. Købe en bog: Find en bog, du vil have, tryk på prisen, og tryk derefter på Køb bog eller Hent bog, hvis den er gratis. Få oplysninger om en bog Du kan læse et resume af bogen, læse anmeldelser og hente et eksempel på bogen, før du køber den. Når du har købt en bog, kan du skrive din egen anmeldelse. Hente et tidligere køb Tryk på Purchased. Du kan også hente et emne, mens du gennemser; du skal bare trykke på Download der, hvor du normalt ser prisen. Automatisk hente køb foretaget på andre iOS-enheder og computere Gå til Indstillinger > Butik, og slå de typer køb til, som du vil hente automatisk. Synkronisere bøger og PDF-dokumenter Brug iTunes til at synkronisere dine bøger og PDF-dokumenter mellem iPhone og din computer og til at købe bøger i iTunes Store. Når iPhone er sluttet til computeren, kan du vælge de emner, du vil synkronisere, i vinduet Bøger. Du kan også føje ePub-bøger uden kopibeskyttelse og PDFdokumenter, som ikke er beskyttet med en adgangskode, til dit iTunes-bibliotek. Bøger i PDF- og ePub-format er tilgængelige på internettet. 142Synkronisere en ePub-bog eller et PDF-dokument til iPhone: I iTunes på computeren skal du derefter vælge Arkiv > Føj til bibliotek og vælge arkivet. Vælg bogen eller PDF-dokumentet i vinduet Bøger i iTunes, og synkroniser derefter. Du kan føje en bog eller et PDF-dokument til iBooks uden at synkronisere ved at sende arkivet til dig selv via e-post fra computeren. Åbn e-post-beskeden på iPhone, hold derefter en finger på bilaget, og vælg “Åbn i iBooks” på den viste menu. Læse bøger Det er nemt at læse en bog. Gå til bogreolen, og tryk på den bog, du vil læse. Hvis du ikke kan se den bog, du leder efter, skal du trykke på navnet på den aktuelle Samling øverst på skærmen for at gå til andre samlinger. Tryk for at spille. Gå til en anden side. Tilføj et bogmærke. Læse en bog, mens du ligger ned: Brug liggende format til at forhindre iPhone i at rotere skærmen, når du vender iPhone om på siden. Se “Bruge stående eller liggende format” på side 21. Hver bog indeholder et bestemt sæt funktioner på basis af dens indhold og format. Nogle af funktionerne beskrevet nedenfor er muligvis ikke tilgængelige i den bog, du læser. For eksempel er det kun muligt at udskrive PDF-dokumenter, og hvis en bog ikke indeholder en indtalt fortælling, kan du ikke se symbolet for oplæsning. Vise betjeningspanelet Tryk i nærheden af midten af siden. Vende siden Tryk nær den højre eller venstre margen på siden, eller svirp til venstre eller højre. Du ændrer den retning, siden vendes i, når du trykker på den venstre margen, ved at gå til Indstillinger > iBooks > Tryk på venstre margen. Se indholdsfortegnelsen Tryk på . I nogle bøger kan du også knibe for at se indholdsfortegnelsen. Tilføje eller fjerne et bogmærke Tryk på . Du kan have flere bogmærker. Du fjerner et bogmærke ved at trykke på det. Du behøver ikke at tilføje et bogmærke, når du lukker en bog, da iBook husker, hvor du slap. Kapitel 30 iBooks 143Tilføje eller fjerne en markering Tryk to gange på et ord, brug gribepunkterne til at justere det valgte, tryk derefter på Marker, og vælg en farve. Du fjerner en markering ved at trykke på den markerede tekst og derefter trykke på . Du understreger ord ved at trykke på . Du ændrer farven ved at trykke på den markerede tekst, trykke på den aktuelle farve og derefter vælge en ny farve på menuen. Tilføje, fjerne eller redigere en note Tryk to gange på et ord, tryk på Marker, og vælg på den viste menu. Du ser en note ved at trykke på mærket nær den markerede tekst. Du fjerner en note ved at slette teksten i den. Du fjerner en note og dens markering ved at trykke på den markerede tekst og derefter trykke på . Du ændrer farven ved at trykke på den markerede tekst og derefter vælge en farve på menuen. Du føjer en note til en markering ved at trykke på den markerede tekst og derefter trykke på . Se alle dine bogmærker Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Bogmærker. Se alle dine noter Tryk på , og tryk derefter på Noter. Forstørre et billede Tryk to gange på billedet for at zoome ind. Gå til en bestemt side Tryk på knapperne til sidenavigation nederst på skærmen. Eller tryk på , og indtast et sidetal, tryk derefter på sidetallet i søgeresultaterne. Søge i en bog Tryk på . Du søger på internettet ved at trykke på Søg på internettet eller Søg i Wikipedia. Safari åbner og viser resultaterne. Søge efter andre forekomster af et ord eller udtryk Tryk to gange på et ord, brug gribepunkterne til at justere det valgte, tryk derefter på Søg på den viste menu. Slå et ord op Tryk to gange på et ord, brug gribepunkterne til at justere det valgte, tryk derefter på Definer på den viste menu. Definitioner er ikke tilgængelige på alle sprog. Lytte til en bog Tryk på . Denne funktion er ikke tilgængelig i alle bøger. Hvis du er synshandicappet, kan du også bruge VoiceOver til at få teksten i næsten alle bøger læst op. Se “VoiceOver” på side 147. iBooks lagrer dine samlinger, bogmærker, noter og aktuelle sideoplysninger vha. dit Apple-id, så du kan læse bøger på alle dine iOS-enheder. iBooks arkiverer oplysninger om alle dine bøger, når du åbner og slutter programmet. Oplysninger om individuelle bøger arkiveres også, når du åbner eller lukker bogen. Slå synkronisering til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > iBooks. Nogle bøger bruger evt. video eller lyd, der lagres på internettet. Slå adgang til video og lyd på internettet til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > iBooks > Online lyd og video. Bemærk: Hvis iPhone har en mobildataforbindelse, skal du muligvis betale operatørafgifter, hvis du afspiller disse arkiver. Ændre en bogs udseende I nogle bøger kan du ændre skriftstørrelse, skrift og farve på sider. Ændre lysstyrken: Tryk på midten af den aktuelle side for at vise betjeningspanelet, og tryk derefter på . Hvis du ikke kan se , skal du trykke på først. 144 Kapitel 30 iBooksÆndre skrift eller skriftstørrelse Tryk på midten af den aktuelle side for at vise betjeningspanelet, og tryk derefter på . Tryk på Skrifter for at vælge et skriftsnit. Det er ikke alle bøger, der understøtter ændring af skrift. I nogle bøger kan du kun ændre skriftstørrelsen, når iPhone er i stående format. Ændre farven på siden og teksten Tryk på midten af den aktuelle side for at vise betjeningspanelet, tryk på , og tryk derefter på Tema. Denne indstilling gælder for alle bøger, der understøtter den. Slå justering og orddeling til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > iBooks. I nogle bøger og PDF-dokumenter kan der ikke bruges justering eller orddeling. Udskrive eller sende et PDF-dokument via e-post Du kan bruge iBooks til at sende en kopi af et PDF-dokument via e-post og til at udskrive et helt eller en del af et PDF-dokument til en understøttet printer. Du kan sende PDF-dokumenter via e-post og udskrive dem, men ikke bøger. Sende et PDF-dokument via e-post: Åbn PDF-dokumentet, tryk på , og vælg Send dokument med e-post. Der vises en ny besked med PDF-dokumentet som bilag. Tryk på Send, når du har adresseret og skrevet beskeden. Udskrive et PDF-dokument Åbn PDF-dokumentet, tryk på , og vælg Udskriv. Vælg en printer, et sideudsnit og antal kopier, og tryk på Udskriv. Du kan få flere oplysninger i “Udskrive” på side 28. Organisere bogreolen Brug bogreolen til at gennemse dine bøger og PDF-dokumenter. Du kan også organisere emner i samlinger. Hold fingeren på en bog for at flytte den. Se samlinger. Flytte en bog eller et PDF-dokument til en samling: Gå til bogreolen, og tryk på Rediger. Vælg de emner, du vil flytte, tryk på Flyt, og vælg en samling. Når du føjer en bog eller et PDF-dokument til bogreolen, vises emnet i samlingen Bøger eller PDF'er. Derfra kan du flytte emnet til en anden samling. Du kan f.eks. oprette samlinger til arbejde og skole eller til opslag og lystlæsning. Kapitel 30 iBooks 145Se en samling Tryk på navnet på den aktuelle samling øverst på skærmen, og vælg en ny på den viste liste. Administrere samlinger Tryk på navnet på den samling, du ser, f.eks. Bøger eller PDF'er, for at vise listen over samlinger. Du kan ikke redigere eller fjerne de indbyggede samlinger Bøger og PDF'er. Sortere bogreolen Tryk på statuslinjen for at rulle til toppen af skærmen, tryk derefter på , og vælg en sorteringsmetode blandt mulighederne nederst på skærmen. Slette et emne fra bogreolen Tryk på Rediger, og tryk på de bøger og PDF-dokumenter, du vil slette, så der vises et hak ud for dem. Tryk på Slet. Tryk på OK, når du er færdig. Hvis du sletter en bog, du har købt, kan du hente den igen fra fanen Purchases i iBookstore. Søge efter en bog Gå til bogreolen. Tryk på statuslinjen for at rulle til toppen af skærmen, og tryk derefter på . Søgninger undersøger titlen og forfatterens navn. 146 Kapitel 30 iBooksTilgængelighed 31 Funktioner til universel adgang iPhone Indeholder mange tilgængelighedsfunktioner, inkl.:  VoiceOver  Mulighed for at omdirigere lyd fra opkald  Siri  Zoom  Stor tekst  Hvid på sort  Læs det valgte op  Oplæs auto-tekst  Monolyd og balance  Høreapparatsfunktion (iPhone 4 GSM)  Specielle vibrationer  LED-flash for advarsler  AssistiveTouch  Understøttelse af brailleskærme  Afspilning af closed-captioned-indhold Med undtagelse af VoiceOver virker disse funktioner til handicappede med de fleste programmer til iPhone, inkl. tredjepartsprogrammer, som du henter fra App Store. VoiceOver fungerer med alle programmer, der leveres præinstalleret på iPhone, og med mange programmer fra tredjeparter. Du kan få flere oplysninger om tilgængelighedsfunktioner på iPhone på www.apple.com/dk/ accessibility. Du kan slå individuelle funktioner til handicappede til og fra i indstillinger til Tilgængelighed på iPhone. Du kan også slå nogle funktioner til og fra i iTunes, når iPhone er sluttet til din computer. Slå tilgængelighedsfunktioner til vha. iPhone: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed. Slå tilgængelighedsfunktioner til vha. iTunes: Slut iPhone til computeren, og vælg iPhone på listen over enheder i iTunes. Klik på Resume, og klik derefter på Konfigurer Universel adgang nederst på skærmen. Stor tekst kan kun slås til og fra i indstillingerne på iPhone. Se “Stor tekst” på side 159. VoiceOver VoiceOver læser det op, der sker på skærmen, så du kan bruge iPhone uden at se den. 147VoiceOver fortæller dig om hvert element på skærmen, når du vælger det. Når du vælger et element, omgives det af en sort firkant (VoiceOver-markøren), og VoiceOver læser navnet på emnet op eller beskriver det. Rør ved skærmen, eller træk fingrene for at høre forskellige emner på skærmen. Når du vælger tekst, læser VoiceOver teksten op. Hvis du slår Læs info op til, vil VoiceOver evt. fortælle dig navnet på emnet eller give dig instruktioner, f.eks. “tryk to gange for at åbne”. Du interagerer med emnerne på skærmen, f.eks. knapper og henvisninger, ved at bruge de bevægelser, der er beskrevet i “Lære at bruge VoiceOver-bevægelser” på side 150. Når du går til en ny skærm, afspiller VoiceOver en lyd og vælger og læser det første element (normalt emnet i øverste venstre hjørne) på skærmen op automatisk. VoiceOver fortæller dig også, når skærmen ændres til liggende eller stående retning, og når skærmen er låst eller låst op. Bemærk: VoiceOver taler på det sprog, der er valgt i de internationale indstillinger, hvilket kan være influeret af indstillingen af områdeformat (Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Områdeformat). VoiceOver findes på mange sprog, men ikke alle. Indstille VoiceOver Vigtigt: VoiceOver ændrer de bevægelser, du bruger til betjening af iPhone. Når VoiceOver er slået til, skal du bruge VoiceOver-bevægelser til at betjene iPhone – selv for at slå VoiceOver fra igen for at genoptage normal brug. Bemærk: Du kan ikke bruge VoiceOver og Zoom på samme tid. Slå VoiceOver til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver. Du kan også indstille Tredobbelt klik Hjem til at slå VoiceOver til eller fra. Se “Tredobbelt klik Hjem” på side 158. Slå Læs info op til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver. Når Læs info op er slået til, vil VoiceOver evt. fortælle dig om emnets handling eller give dig instruktioner, f.eks. “tryk to gange for at åbne”. Du kan også føje info til rotoren og derefter skubbe op eller ned for at justere. Se “Bruge VoiceOverrotorbetjeningen” på side 152. Indstille VoiceOvers talehastighed Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver, og træk mærket Talehastighed. Du kan også føje talehastighed til rotoren og derefter skubbe op eller ned for at justere. Se “Bruge VoiceOverrotorbetjeningen” på side 152. Ændre skrevet feedback Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Skriver feedback. Bruge fonetik i skrevet feedback Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Brug fonetik. Tekst læses op tegn for tegn. VoiceOver læser først tegnet op, derefter dets fonetiske navn, f.eks. “f”, og derefter “foxtrot”. Brug stemmeforandring Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Brug stemmeforandring. VoiceOver bruger et højere toneleje ved indtastning af et bogstav og et lavere ved sletning af et bogstav. VoiceOver bruger også et højere toneleje ved oplæsning af det første emne i en gruppe (f.eks. en liste eller tabel) og et lavere toneleje ved oplæsning af det sidste emne i en gruppe. Vælge rotorindstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Rotor. Tryk for at vælge eller fravælge muligheder, eller træk opad for at flytte et emne. Ændre VoiceOvers udtale Indstil rotoren til Sprog, og skub derefter op eller ned. Sprogrotoren er altid tilgængelig, når du har valgt mere end en udtale. Vælge de tilgængelige udtaler i sprogrotoren Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Sprogrotor. Du ændrer et sprogs placering på listen ved at trække op eller ned. 148 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedÆndre sproget til iPhone Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Sprog. Nogle sprog kan være influeret af indstillingen af områdeformat (Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Områdeformat). Springe billeder over under navigation Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Naviger i billeder. Du kan vælge at springe alle billeder over eller kun dem uden beskrivelser. Læse meddelelser op, når du låser iPhone op Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Læs meddelelser op. Hvis funktionen er slået fra, læser iPhone kun tidspunktet op, når du låser den op. Bruge VoiceOver Vælge emner på skærmen: Træk fingeren over skærmen. VoiceOver identificerer hvert element, når du rører ved det. Du kan flytte systematisk fra et element til det næste ved at svirpe til venstre eller højre med en finger. Elementer vælges fra venstre mod højre og fra top til bund. Svirp til højre for at gå til næste element, og svirp til venstre for at gå til forrige element. Slå lodret navigation til Føj Lodret navigation til rotoren, brug rotoren til at vælge den, og skub derefter op eller ned for at flytte til emnet derover eller derunder. Se “Bruge VoiceOver-rotorbetjeningen” på side 152. Vælge det første eller sidste element på skærmen Svirp opad eller nedad med fire fingre. Låse iPhone op Vælg knappen Lås op, og tryk derefter to gange på skærmen. Vælge et emne efter navn Tryk tre gange med to fingre et tilfældigt sted på skærmen for at åbne Emnevælger. Skriv derefter et navn i søgefeltet, eller svirp til højre eller venstre for at flytte gennem listen alfabetisk, eller tryk på tabelindekset til højre for listen, og svirp op eller ned for at flytte hurtigt gennem listen over emner. Ændre navnet på et skærmemne, så det bliver lettere at finde Tryk og hold to fingre nede et tilfældigt sted på skærmen. Læse teksten på det valgte element op: Svirp ned eller op med en finger for at læse det næste eller forrige ord eller tegn (drej rotoren for at vælge tegn eller ord). Du kan inkludere den fonetiske stavemåde. Se “Indstille VoiceOver” på side 148. Stoppe oplæsning af et emne Tryk en gang med to fingre. Tryk igen med to fingre for at genoptage oplæsning. Oplæsning genoptages automatisk, når du vælger er andet emne. Juster lydstyrken på tale Brug lydstyrkeknapperne på iPhone, eller føj lydstyrke til rotoren, og skub og og ned for at justere. Se “Bruge VoiceOver-rotorbetjeningen” på side 152. Slå lyd i VoiceOver fra Tryk to gange med tre fingre. Tryk to gange med tre fingre for at slå oplæsning til igen. Hvis du kun vil slå VoiceOver-lyde fra, skal du indstille kontakten Ring/stille til Stille. Hvis der er tilsluttet et eksternt tastatur, kan du også trykke på ctrl-tasten på tastaturet for at slå lyd i VoiceOver fra eller til. Ændre den stemme, der læser op Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Brug kompakt stemme. Læse hele skærmen op fra toppen Svirp opad med to fingre. Læse op fra det aktuelle emne til bunden af skærmen Svirp nedad med to fingre. Læs statusoplysninger om iPhone op Hvis du vil høre oplysninger om tid, batteritid, Wi-Fi-signalstyrke m.m., skal du trykke på toppen af skærmen. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 149“Trykke på” et valgt emne, når VoiceOver er slået til: Tryk to gange et hvilket som helst sted på skærmen. “Trykke to gange på” det valgte emne, når VoiceOver er slået til Tryk tre gange et hvilket som helst sted på skærmen. Justere et mærke Svirp opad med en enkelt finger for at øge indstillingen og nedad for at formindske indstillingen. VoiceOver annoncerer indstillingen, mens du justerer den. Rulle i en liste eller et område på skærmen Svirp opad eller nedad med tre fingre. Svirp nedad for at flytte en side ned gennem listen eller skærmen, eller svirp opad for at flytte en side op gennem listen. Når VoiceOver flytter gennem en liste, læser den udsnittet af de viste emner op (f.eks. “viser række 5 til 10”). Du kan også rulle fortløbende gennem en liste i stedet for at flytte side for side. Tryk to gange og hold nede. Når du hører en række toner, kan du flytte din finger op eller ned for at rulle gennem listen. Fortsat rulning stopper, når du løfter fingeren. Bruge et register til en liste Nogle lister indeholder et alfabetisk register langs den højre side. Du kan ikke vælge registeret ved at svirpe mellem elementer, men skal røre registeret direkte for at vælge det. Når registeret er valgt, kan du svirpe op eller ned for at flytte i registeret. Du kan også trykke to gange og derefter skubbe din finger op eller ned. Ændre rækkefølge på en liste På nogle lister, f.eks. Favoritter på iPhone og Rotor og Sprogrotor i Tilgængelighed, kan du ændre emnernes rækkefølge. Vælg i højre side af et emne, tryk to gange, og hold fingeren på det, indtil du hører en lyd, og træk derefter opad eller nedad. VoiceOver oplæser emnet over eller under det emne, du flytter, afhængigt af hvilken retning du trækker. Flytte rundt på emnerne på hjemmeskærmen På hjemmeskærmen skal du vælge det symbol, du vil flytte. Tryk to gange og hold en finger på symbolet, og træk det. VoiceOver læser række- og kolonnepositionen op, når du trækker symbolet. Slip symbolet, når det er på den ønskede plads. Du kan trække flere symboler. Træk et emne til den venstre eller højre kant af skærmen for at flytte det til en anden side på hjemmeskærmen. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på knappen Hjem . Slå skærmtæppet til og fra Tryk tre gange med tre fingre. Når skærmtæppet er slået til, er skærmens indhold aktivt, selvom skærmen er slukket. Låse iPhone op Vælg kontakten Lås op, og tryk derefter to gange på skærmen. Lære at bruge VoiceOver-bevægelser Når VoiceOver er slået til, virker de almindelige bevægelser på den berøringsfølsomme skærm på en anden måde. Med disse og nogle flere bevægelser kan du flytte rundt på skærmen og kontrollere de enkelte elementer, når de er valgt. VoiceOvers bevægelser inkluderer brug af to og tre fingre til at trykke og svirpe. Du opnår de bedste resultater, når du bruger bevægelser med to eller tre fingre, ved at slappe af og røre skærmen med en vis afstand mellem fingrene. Du kan bruge standardbevægelser, når VoiceOver er slået til, ved at trykke to gange og holde din finger på skærmen. En række toner angiver, at normale bevægelser er slået til. De er slået til, indtil du løfter din finger. Derefter genoptages VoiceOver-bevægelser. Du kan bruge forskellige teknikker til betjening af VoiceOver. Du kan f.eks. trykke med to fingre ved at bruge to fingre på den ene hånd eller en finger på hver hånd. Du kan også bruge dine tommelfingre. Der er mange, der finder det mere effektivt at bruge “splittryk”: I stedet for at vælge et emne og trykke to gange kan du holde en finger på et emne og trykke på skærmen med en anden finger. Prøv forskellige metoder, indtil du finder ud af, hvad der passer bedst til dig. 150 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedHvis dine bevægelser ikke virker, kan du prøve at udføre bevægelserne hurtigere, især når du trykker to gange og svirper. Du svirper ved hurtigt at børste skærmen med en eller flere fingre. Når VoiceOver er slået til, vises knappen Brug af VoiceOver, så du får en chance for at øve dig i VoiceOver-bevægelserne, før du fortsætter. Udføre bevægelser: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver og tryk derefter på Brug af VoiceOver. Klik på OK, når du er færdig. Hvis du ikke kan se knappen Brug af VoiceOver, skal du sørge for, at VoiceOver er slået til. Her følger et resume over de vigtigste VoiceOver-bevægelser: Navigere og læse  Tryk: Læs emne op.  Svirp til venstre eller højre: Vælg det næste eller forrige emne.  Svirp opad eller nedad.: Afhænger af indstillingen af rotoren. Se “Bruge VoiceOverrotorbetjeningen” på side 152.  Tryk med to fingre: Stop oplæsning af det aktuelle emne.  Svirp opad med to fingre: Læs alt fra toppen af skærmen.  Svirp nedad med to fingre: Læs alt fra den aktuelle placering.  “Zigzag” med to fingre: Flyt hurtigt to fingre frem og tilbage tre gange (som et “z” ) for at fjerne en advarsel eller gå tilbage til den foregående skærm.  Tryk tre gange med to fingre: Åbn Emnevælger.  Svirp opad eller nedad med tre fingre: Rul en side ad gangen.  Svirp til venstre eller højre med tre fingre: Gå til den næste eller forrige side (f.eks. hjemmeskærmen, Værdipapirer eller Safari).  Tryk med tre fingre: Sig flere oplysninger, f.eks. positionen på en liste, eller om der er valgt tekst.  Tryk øverst på skærmen med fire fingre: Vælg det første emne på siden.  Tryk nederst på skærmen med fire fingre: Vælg det sidste emne på siden. Aktivere  Tryk to gange: Aktiver det valgte emne.  Tryk tre gange: Tryk to gange på et emne.  Splittryk: I stedet for at vælge et emne og trykke to gange kan du holde en finger på et emne og derefter trykke på skærmen med en anden finger for at aktivere et emne.  Rør ved et emne med en finger, tryk på skærmen med en anden finger (“splittet tryk”): Aktiver emnet.  Tryk to gange, og hold fingeren nede (1 sekund) + standardbevægelse: Brug en standardbevægelse. Når du trykker to gange og holder fingeren nede, fortæller du iPhone, at den skal fortolke den følgende bevægelse som en standardbevægelse. Du kan f.eks. trykke to gange og holde fingeren nede og derefter – uden at løfte fingeren – trække fingeren for at skubbe til en kontakt.  Tryk to gange med to fingre: Besvar eller afslut et opkald. Afspil eller sæt på pause i Musik, Videoer, YouTube, Memoer eller Fotos. Tag et billede (kamera). Start eller sæt optagelse på pause i Kamera eller Memoer. Start eller stop stopuret.  Tryk to gange med to fingre og hold: Åbn funktion til mærkning af elementer  Tryk tre gange med to fingre: Åbn Emnevælger.  Tryk to gange med tre fingre: Slå lyden i VoiceOver til eller fra. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 151 Tryk tre gange med tre fingre: Slå skærmtæppet til og fra. Bruge VoiceOver-rotorbetjeningen Rotorbetjeningen er en virtuel drejeskive, som du kan bruge til at ændre resultaterne af op- og nedadgående svirpebevægelser, når VoiceOver er slået til. Betjene rotoren: Roter to fingre på skærmen på iPhone omkring et punkt mellem fingrene. Ændre de indbyggede indstillinger i rotoren: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Rotor, og vælg de indstillinger, der skal være tilgængelige, når du bruger rotoren. Effekten af rotorindstillingen afhænger af, hvad du gør. Hvis du læser en e-post, som du har modtaget, kan du bruge rotoren til at skifte mellem at lytte til oplæst tekst ord for ord eller tegn for tegn, når du svirper opad. Hvis du gennemser en webside, kan du bruge rotorindstillingen til at få læst hele teksten op (enten ord for ord eller tegn for tegn) eller til at hoppe fra et element til et andet element af en bestemt type, f.eks. overskrifter eller henvisninger. Læse tekst Vælg og hør tekst efter:  Tegn, ord eller linje Tale Juster VoiceOver-tale efter:  Lydstyrke eller hastighed  Brug af indtastnings-ekko, stemmeforandring eller fonetik (vha. Apple Wireless Keyboard) Se “Betjene VoiceOver vha. et Apple Wireless Keyboard” på side 155. Navigere Vælge og høre emner efter:  Tegn, ord eller linje  Overskrift  Henvisning, besøgt henvisning, ikke besøgt henvisning eller henvisning på side  Kontrolelement på formular  Tabel eller række (ved navigation i en tabel)  Liste  Landmærke  Billede  Statisk tekst  Emner af samme type  Knapper  Tekstfelter  Søgefelter  Beholdere (skærmområder som Dock) Zoom ind eller ud 152 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedSkrive tekst Flyt indsættelsespunktet, og hør tekst efter:  Tegn, ord eller linje Vælg redigeringsfunktion Vælg sprog Bruge en betjeningsmulighed Vælg og hør værdier efter:  Tegn, ord eller linje Juster værdien i kontrolobjektet Indtaste og redigere tekst med VoiceOver Når du vælger et tekstfelt med VoiceOver, kan du bruge tastaturet på skærmen eller et eksternt tastatur, som er tilsluttet iPhone, til at skrive tekst. Du kan indtaste tekst på to måder i VoiceOver – ved at skrive som normalt og ved at “røre”. Når du skriver som normalt, vælger du en tast og trykker derefter to gange på skærmen for at indtaste tegnet. Når du skriver ved at røre, skal du vælge en tast ved at røre den, hvorefter tegnet indtastes automatisk, når du løfter fingeren. Det kan være hurtigere at skrive ved at røre, men det kræver måske mere øvelse end at skrive som normalt. VoiceOver giver dig også mulighed for at bruge redigeringsfunktionerne på iPhone til at klippe, kopiere og indsætte i et tekstfelt. Skrive tekst: Vælg et tekstfelt, der kan redigeres, tryk to gange for at vise indsættelsespunktet og tastaturet på skærmen, og skriv tegn.  Normal skrivning: Vælg en tast på tastaturet ved at svirpe til venstre eller højre og derefter trykke to gange for at skrive tegnet. Eller flyt en finger rundt på tastaturet for at vælge en tast, og hold fingeren på tasten, mens du trykker på skærmen med en anden finger. VoiceOver læser tasten op, når den er valgt, og igen, når tegnet er indtastet.  Punktskrift: Rør en tast på tastaturet for at vælge den, og løft derefter fingeren for at indtaste tegnet. Hvis du rører den forkerte tast, skal du flytte fingeren på tastaturet, indtil den ønskede tast er valgt. VoiceOver læser tegnet på hver tast op, når du rører den, men indtaster ikke tegnet, før du løfter fingeren. Bemærk: Punktskrift virker kun med de taster, som indtaster tekst. Brug normal skrivning med andre taster som Skift, Slet og Retur. Flytte indsættelsespunktet: Svirp opad og nedad for at flytte indsættelsespunktet fremad eller tilbage i teksten. Brug rotoren til at vælge, om du vil flytte indsættelsespunktet tegn for tegn, ord for ord eller linje for linje. VoiceOver spiller en lyd, når indsættelsespunktet flyttes, og læser det tegn, ord eller den linje op, som indsættelsespunktet flyttes hen over. Når du flytter fremad ord for ord, anbringes indsættelsespunktet efter hvert ord og før mellemrummet eller tegnet efter ordet. Når du flytter tilbage, anbringes indsættelsespunktet efter det foregående ord og før mellemrummet eller tegnet efter ordet. Du flytter indsættelsespunktet forbi tegnet efter et ord eller en sætning ved at skifte tilbage til tegnfunktion vha. rotoren. Når indsætningsmærket flyttes linje for linje, læser VoiceOver linjerne op, når du flytter hen over dem. Når du flytter fremad, anbringes indsætningsmærket i begyndelsen af den næste linje (undtagen når du er nået til sidste linje i et afsnit, hvor indsætningsmærket flyttes til slutningen af den linje, der lige er læst op). Når du flytter tilbage, anbringes indsætningsmærket i begyndelsen af den linje, der læses op. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 153Vælge at skrive som normalt eller punktskrift: Når VoiceOver er slået til, og der er valgt en tast på tastaturet, kan du bruge rotoren til at vælge Indtastningsfunktion og derefter svirpe op eller ned. Slette et tegn Vælg , og tryk to gange eller brug splittryk. Det skal du også gøre, når du skriver ved at røre. Du sletter flere tegn ved at holde en finger på Slettetasten og derefter trykke på skærmen med en anden finger en gang for hvert tegn, der skal slettes. VoiceOver læser tegnet op, når det slettes. Hvis Brug stemmeforandring er slået til, læser VoiceOver slettede tegn op i et lavere toneleje. Vælge tekst Indstil rotoren til redigering, og svirp op eller ned for at vælge Vælg eller Vælg alt, og tryk to gange. Hvis du vælger Vælg, vælges det ord, der er tættest på indsætningsmærket, når du trykker to gange. Hvis du vælger Vælg alt, vælges hele teksten. Knib udad eller indad for at udvide eller formindske det valgte udsnit. Klippe, kopiere eller indsætte Sørg for, at rotoren er indstillet til redigering. Når tekst er valgt, skal du svirpe op eller ned for at vælge Klip, Kopier eller Sæt ind og derefter trykke to gange. Fortryde Ryst iPhone, svirp til venstre eller højre for at vælge den handling, der skal fortrydes, og tryk derefter to gange. Indtaste et tegn med accent Når du skriver som normalt, skal du vælge det almindelige tegn og derefter trykke to gange og holde fingeren på det, indtil du hører en lyd, som betyder, at der vises alternative tegn. Træk til venstre eller højre for at vælge og høre valgmulighederne. Løft fingeren for at skrive det valgte. Ændre det sprog, du skriver på Indstil rotoren til Sprog, og svirp op eller ned. Vælg “standardsprog” for at vælge det sprog, der er valgt i de internationale indstillinger. Sprogrotoren vises kun, hvis du vælger mere end et sprog i VoiceOver-indstillingen Sprogrotor. Se “Indstille VoiceOver” på side 148. Foretage telefonopkald med VoiceOver Tryk to gange på skærmen med to fingre for at besvare eller afslutte et opkald. Når du foretager et telefonopkald, og VoiceOver er slået til, viser skærmen som standard den numeriske blok i stedet for opkaldsmulighederne. På den måde er det nemmere at bruge den numeriske blok til at vælge på en menu med muligheder, hvis du har ringet til et automatisk system. Vise opkaldsmuligheder: Vælg knappen Skjul taster i nederste højre hjørne og tryk to gange. Vise den numeriske blok igen: Vælg knappen Nummerblok midt på skærmen, og tryk to gange. Bruge VoiceOver med Safari Når du søger på internettet i Safari, og VoiceOver er slået til, kan du med rotoremnerne Søgeresultater høre listen over forslag til søgeudtryk. Søge på internettet: Vælg søgefeltet, indtast din søgning, og vælg derefter Søgeresultater vha. rotoren. Svirp til højre eller venstre for at flytte ned eller op på listen, og tryk derefter to gange på skærmen for at søge på internettet med det aktuelle søgeudtryk. Bruge VoiceOver med Kort Du kan bruge VoiceOver til at zoome ind eller ud, vælge knappenåle og få oplysninger om lokaliteter. Zoome ind og ud: Vælg kortet, brug rotoren til at vælge zoomfunktion, og svirp derefter op eller ned for at zoome ind eller ud. Vælge en knappenål: Rør ved en knappenål, eller svirp til venstre eller højre for at flytte fra et emne til et andet. 154 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedFå oplysninger om en lokalitet: Når en knappenål er valgt, skal du trykke to gange for at se oplysningsflaget. Svirp til venstre eller højre for at vælge knappen Mere info, og tryk derefter to gange for at vise siden med oplysninger. Redigere videoer og memoer med VoiceOver Du kan bruge VoiceOver-bevægelser til at tilpasse optagelser af kameravideoer og memoer. Tilpasse et memo: På skærmen Memoer skal du vælge knappen til højre for det memo, du vil tilpasse, og derefter trykke to gange. Vælg derefter Tilpas memo, og tryk to gange. Vælg begyndelsen eller slutningen af tilpasningsværktøjet. Svirp opad for at trække til højre, eller svirp nedad for at trække til venstre. VoiceOver fortæller, med hvor lang tid den aktuelle position tilpasses i optagelsen. Du udfører tilpasningen ved at vælge Tilpas indtalt memo og trykke to gange. Tilpasse en video: Når du ser en video i Fotos, skal du trykke to gange på skærmen for at vise betjeningspanelet til videoen og derefter vælge starten eller slutningen på tilpasningsværktøjet. Svirp derefter opad for at trække til højre, eller svirp nedad for at trække til venstre. VoiceOver fortæller, med hvor lang tid den aktuelle position tilpasses i optagelsen. Du udfører tilpasningen ved at vælge Tilpas og trykke to gange. Betjene VoiceOver vha. et Apple Wireless Keyboard Du kan betjene VoiceOver på iPhone vha. et Apple Wireless Keyboard. Se “Bruge et Apple Wireless Keyboard” på side 27. Du kan bruge VoiceOver-tastaturkommandoerne til at navigere på skærmen, vælge emner, læse skærmens indhold, justere rotoren og udføre andre VoiceOver-handlinger. Alle tastaturkommandoerne (undtagen en) inkluderer VoiceOver-tastkombinationen ctrl-Alternativ, der forkortes som “VO” i nedenstående tabel. VoiceOver-hjælp læser taster og tastaturkommandoer op, når du bruger dem. Du kan bruge VoiceOver-hjælp til at lære at bruge et tastaturlayout og de handlinger, der udføres, når du trykker på tastkombinationerne. VoiceOver-tastaturkommandoer VO = ctrl-Alternativ Læse alt fra den aktuelle placering VO–A Læse fra toppen VO–B Flytte til statuslinjen VO–M Trykke på knappen Hjem VO–H Se det næste eller forrige emne VO–højrepil eller VO–venstrepil Trykke på et emne VO–mellemrumstast Trykke to gange med to fingre VO–”-” Vælge det næste eller forrige rotoremne VO–pil op eller VO–pil ned Vælge det næste eller forrige talerotoremne VO–Kommando–venstrepil eller VO–Kommando–højrepil Justere talerotoremne VO–Kommando–pil op eller VO–Kommando–pil ned Slå lyden på VoiceOver fra eller til VO–S Slå skærmtæppet til og fra VO–Skift-S Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 155Slå VoiceOver-hjælp til VO–K Vende tilbage til den forrige skærm eller slå VoiceOver-hjælp fra Esc Hurtig navigation Slå Hurtig navigation til for at betjene VoiceOver vha. piletasterne. Hurtig navigation er som standard slået fra. Slå Hurtig navigation til og fra Venstrepil–højrepil Se det næste eller forrige emne Højrepil eller venstrepil Vælge det næste eller forrige emne som anført af rotorindstillingen Pil op eller pil ned Vælge det første eller sidste emne Ctrl–pil op eller ctrl–pil ned “Trykke på” et emne Pil op–pil ned Rulle op, ned, til venstre eller til højre Alternativ–pil op, Alternativ–pil ned, Alternativ–venstrepil eller Alternativ–højrepil Ændre rotoren Pil op–venstrepil eller pil op–højrepil Du kan også bruge taltasterne på et Apple Wireless Keyboard til at indtaste et telefonnummer i Telefon eller til at indtaste tal i Lommeregner. Hurtig navigation med et bogstav til internettet Når du viser en webside, når hurtig navigation er slået til, kan du bruge følgende taster på tastaturet til hurtigt at navigere rundt på siden. Når du trykker på tasten, flyttes der til det næste emne af den angivne type. Hvis du holder Skiftetasten nede, når du trykker på bogstaver, flyttes der til det forrige emne. H Overskrift L Henvisning R Tekstfelt B Knap C Kontrolelement på formular I Billede T Tabel S Statisk tekst W ARIA-landmærke X Liste M Emner af samme type 1 Overskrift på niveau 1 2 Overskrift på niveau 2 3 Overskrift på niveau 3 4 Overskrift på niveau 4 5 Overskrift på niveau 5 6 Overskrift på niveau 6 156 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedBruge en brailleskærm med VoiceOver Du kan bruge en Bluetooth-brailleskærm, der kan opdateres, til at læse VoiceOver-resultater i braille, og du kan bruge en braille-skærm med indtastningstaster og andre betjeningsmuligheder til at styre iPhone, når VoiceOver er slået fra. iPhone kan bruges med mange trådløse brailleskærme. Der findes en liste over understøttede skærme på www.apple.com/dk/accessibility/ iphone/braille-display.html. Indstille en brailleskærm: Tænd for skærmen, gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth, og slå Bluetooth til. Gå derefter til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Braille, og vælg skærmen. Slå forkortet braille til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Braille. Slå braille med otte punkter til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Braille. Du finder oplysninger om almindelige braillekommandoer til VoiceOver-navigation samt oplysninger om visse skærme på support.apple.com/kb/HT4400?viewlocale=da_DK. Brailleskærmen bruger som standard det sprog, som Stemmekontrol er indstillet til. Det er som standard det sprog, som er indstillet til iPhone, i Indstillinger > International > Sprog. Du kan bruge sprogindstillingen i VoiceOver til at vælge et andet sprog til VoiceOver og brailleskærme. Indstille sproget til VoiceOver: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Stemmekontrol, og vælg sproget. Hvis du skifter sprog på iPhone, skal du måske indstille sproget til VoiceOver og brailleskærmen igen. Du kan indstille cellen længst til venstre og længst til højre til at give oplysninger om systemstatus og andre oplysninger:  Meddelelseshistorie indeholder en ulæst besked  Den aktuelle besked i Meddelelseshistorie er ikke læst  VoiceOver-tale er gjort lydløs  Spændingen på batteriet i iPhone er lav (under 20 % opladt)  iPhone er vendt om på siden  Skærmen er slået fra  Den aktuelle linje indeholder mere tekst til venstre  Den aktuelle linje indeholder mere tekst til højre Indstille cellen længst til venstre eller længst til højre til at vise statusoplysninger: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > VoiceOver > Braille > Statuscelle og tryk derefter på Venstre eller Højre. Se en udvidet beskrivelse af statuscellen: Tryk på statuscellens markørknap på brailleskærmen. Dirigere lyden i indkommende opkald Du kan få lyden i indkommende opkald dirigeret til et hovedsæt eller en højttalertelefon i stedet for til modtageren i iPhone. Omdirigere lyd i opkald: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Indk. opkald, og vælg, hvor du vil høre opkaldene. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 157Siri Med Siri kan du udføre ting med iPhone ved bare at spørge den, og VoiceOver kan læse Siris svar til dig op. Der findes oplysninger i Kapitel 4,“Siri,” på side 39. Tredobbelt klik Hjem Tredobbelt klik Hjem er en enkel måde at slå nogle tilgængelighedsfunktioner til eller fra på, når du trykker hurtigt på knappen Hjem tre gange. Du kan indstille Tredobbelt klik Hjem til at:  Slå VoiceOver til og fra  Slå Hvid på sort til eller fra  Slå Zoom til og fra  Slå AssistiveTouch til og fra Du kan også indstille Tredobbelt klik Hjem til at vise muligheden for at slå VoiceOver, Hvid på sort eller Zoom til og fra. Tredobbelt klik Hjem er som standard slået fra. Indstille funktionen Tredobbelt klik Hjem: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Tredobbelt klik Hjem. Zoom Med mange programmer på iPhone kan du zoome ind eller ud på bestemte elementer. Du kan f.eks. trykke to gange eller knibe for at udvide kolonner på websider i Safari. Zoom er også en speciel funktion til handicappede, som sikrer, at du kan forstørre hele skærmen til et program, du bruger, så du bedre kan se, hvad der er på skærmen. Når du bruger Zoom med et Apple Wireless Keyboard (se “” på side 27), følger skærmbilledet indsætningsmærket og sørger for, at det er i midten af skærmen. Slå Zoom til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Zoom. Eller brug Tredobbelt klik Hjem. Se “Tredobbelt klik Hjem” på side 158. Bemærk: Du kan ikke bruge VoiceOver og Zoom på samme tid. Zoome ind og ud Tryk to gange på skærmen med tre fingre. Som standard forstørres skærmen 200 procent. Hvis du ændrer forstørrelsen manuelt (ved at bruge bevægelsen tryk-og-træk som beskrevet nedenfor), vender iPhone automatisk tilbage til den forstørrelse, når du zoomer ind ved at trykke to gange med tre fingre. Øge forstørrelsen Tryk og træk med tre fingre mod toppen af skærmen (for at øge forstørrelsen) eller mod bunden af skærmen (for at formindske forstørrelsen). Tryk og træk-bevægelsen svarer til at trykke to gange, blot med den forskel, at du ikke løfter fingrene ved det andet tryk – i stedet trækker du fingrene på skærmen. Når du er færdig med at trække, kan du trække med en enkelt finger. Flytte rundt på skærmen Når du har zoomet ind, skal du trække eller svirpe på skærmen med tre fingre. Når du begynder at trække, kan du trække med en finger, så du kan se mere af skærmen. Hold en enkelt finger nær kanten af skærmen for at panorere til den pågældende side af skærmbilledet. Flyt din finger tættere til kanten for at panorere hurtigere. Når du åbner en ny skærm, går zoomfunktionen altid til midten øverst på skærmen. 158 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedStor tekst Stor tekst giver dig mulighed for at forstørre teksten i advarsler og i Kalender, Kontakter, Mail, Beskeder og Noter. Indstille tekststørrelse: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Stor tekst. Hvid på sort Brug Hvid på sort for at bytte om på farverne på skærmen på iPhone. Det kan gøre det nemmere at læse på skærmen. Når Hvid på sort et slået til, ser skærmen ud som et negativ. Bytte om på skærmens farver: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Hvid på sort. Læs det valgte op Selvom VoiceOver er slået fra, kan du få iPhone til at læse al den tekst op, som du kan vælge. Slå Læs det valgte op til, og juster talehastigheden: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Læs det valgte op. Få tekst læst op Vælg teksten, og tryk på Læs op. Oplæs auto-tekst Oplæs auto-tekst læser de tekstrettelser og ændringer op, som iPhone foreslår, når du skriver. Slå Oplæs auto-tekst til eller fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Oplæs autotekst. Oplæs auto-tekst virker også med VoiceOver eller Zoom. Monolyd Monolyd kombinerer venstre og højre stereokanaler til et monosignal, der afspilles i begge sider. Du kan justere balancen på monosignalet for at få en bedre lydstyrke i højre og venstre side. Slå Monolyd til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Monolyd. Kompatibilitet med høreapparater FCC har besluttet at følge reglerne for kompatibilitet med høreapparater (HAC, dvs. hearing aid compatibility) til digitale trådløse telefoner. Disse regler kræver, at visse telefoner testes og vurderes i henhold til standarderne for høreapparaters kompatibilitet fra American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007. ANSI-standarden for kompatibilitet med høreapparater har to typer vurderinger: Vurderingen “M” står for mindsket radiofrekvensforstyrrelse, der gør det muligt at arbejde med akustisk kobling med høreapparater, som ikke bruger teleslynge, og vurderingen “T” står for induktiv kobling med høreapparater, der bruger teleslynge. Disse vurderinger gives på en skala fra 1 til 4, hvor 4 er mest kompatibel. En telefon betragtes som kompatibel med høreapparater i henhold til FCC-reglerne, hvis den får vurderingen M3 eller M4 for akustisk kobling og T3 eller T4 for induktiv kobling. Du kan se de aktuelle vurderinger af kompatibilitet mellem høreapparater og iPhone på www.apple.com/dk/support/hac. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 159Vurderinger af kompatibilitet med høreapparater udgør ingen garanti for, at et bestemt høreapparat fungerer med en bestemt telefon. Nogle høreapparater fungerer måske godt med telefoner, der ikke opfylder kravene til bestemte vurderinger. Hvis du vil være sikker på, at et høreapparat og en telefon fungerer sammen, skal du prøve dem, inden du køber. Høreapparatsfunktion iPhone 4 GSM har en høreapparatsfunktion, som, når den er aktiveret, kan formindske forstyrrelser med nogle modeller af høreapparater. Høreapparatsfunktion nedsætter sendestyrken i mobilradioen i GSM 1900 MHz-båndet og kan føre til nedsat 2G-mobildækning. Aktivere Høreapparatsfunktion (iPhone 4, kun GSM): Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed. Specielle vibrationer Du kan tildele specielle vibrationsmønstre til telefon- eller FaceTime-opkald fra vigtige kontakter. Vælg fra eksisterende mønstre, eller opret et nyt. Slå specielle vibrationer til: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Specielle vibrationer. Vælg vibrationsmønster til en kontakt I Kontakter skal du vælge en kontakt og derefter trykke på “vibration”. Hvis du ikke kan se vibration i kontaktoplysningerne, skal du trykke på Rediger og tilføje det. Oprette et nyt vibrationsmønster Hvis du er ved at redigere en kontakt, skal du trykke på “vibration” og derefter trykke på Opret ny vibration. Du kan også gå til Indstillinger > Lyde > Vibration > Opret ny vibration. Indstille et specielt mønster som standardmønster Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde > Vibration, og vælg et mønster. LED-flash for advarsler Hvis du ikke kan høre de lyde, der annoncerer indgående opkald og andre advarsler, kan du få iPhone til at bruge LED-blitzen (ved siden af kameralinsen på bagsiden af iPhone). Det virker kun, når iPhone er låst eller på vågeblus. Findes til iPhone 4 og nyere modeller. Slå LED-flash for advarsler til: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > LED-flash for advarsler. AssistiveTouch AssistiveTouch hjælper dig med at bruge iPhone, hvis du har svært ved at røre skærmen eller trykke på knapper. Du kan bruge et kompatibelt tilpasset tilbehør, f.eks. en joystick, sammen med AssistiveTouch til betjening af iPhone. Du kan også bruge AssistiveTouch uden et tilbehør til at udføre bevægelser, der falder dig vanskelige. Slå AssistiveTouch til: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > AssistiveTouch. Du kan også indstille Tredobbelt klik Hjem til at slå AssistiveTouch til og fra ved at gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Tredobbelt klik Hjem. 160 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedJustere markørhastighed Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > AssistiveTouch > Berøringshastighed. Vise eller skjule menuen AssistiveTouch Klik på den sekundære knap på tilbehøret. Skjule menuknappen Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > AssistiveTouch > Vis altid menu. Svirp eller træk med to, tre, fire eller fem fingre Tryk på menuknappen, tryk på Bevægelser, tryk på det antal cifre, der kræves til bevægelsen. Når de tilsvarende cirkler vises på skærmen, skal du svirpe eller trække i den retning, som bevægelsen kræver. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på menuknappen. Knibebevægelse Tryk på menuknappen, tryk på Favoritter, og tryk derefter på Knib. Når knibecirklerne vises, skal du trykke et tilfældigt sted på skærmen for at flytte dem og derefter trække cirklerne ind eller ud for at udføre en knibebevægelse. Når du er færdig, skal du trykke på menuknappen. Oprette din egen bevægelse Tryk på menuknappen, tryk på Favoritter, og tryk derefter på et tomt bevægelseseksempel. Du kan også gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > AssistiveTouch > “Opret speciel bevægelse”. Låse eller rotere skærmen, justere lydstyrken, skifte mellem ring/stille eller lade, som om du ryster iPhone Tryk på menuknappen og derefter på Enhed. Lade, som om du trykker på knappen Hjem Tryk på menuknappen og derefter på Hjem. Flytte menuknappen Træk den til en tilfældig placering på skærmen. Afslutte en menu uden at udføre en bevægelse Tryk et tilfældigt sted uden for menuen. Universel adgang i OS X Benyt funktionerne i Universel adgang i OS X, når du bruger iTunes til at synkronisere oplysninger og indhold fra iTunes-biblioteket til iPhone. Vælg Hjælp > Hjælpcenter i Finder, og søg efter “universel adgang”. Du kan få flere oplysninger om tilgængelighedsfunktioner på iPhone og i OS X på www.apple.com/dk/accessibility. TTY-understøttelse Du kan bruge iPhone TTY Adapter-kablet (sælges separat i mange områder) til at slutte iPhone til en TTY-enhed. Gå til www.apple.com/dk/store (måske ikke tilgængelig i alle områder), eller kontakt en lokal Apple-forhandler. Slutte iPhone til en TTY-enhed: Gå til Indstillinger > Telefon, og slå TTY til, og slut derefter iPhone til TTY-enheden med iPhone TTY Adapter. Når TTY er slået til på iPhone, vises TTY-symbolet på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen. Der findes oplysninger om brug af TTY-enheden i den dokumentation, der fulgte med enheden. Minimumsskriftstørrelse til e-post-beskeder For at gøre det nemmere at læse beskeder kan du indstille minimumsskriftstørrelsen til e-postbeskeder til Stor, Ekstra stor eller Kæmpe. Kapitel 31 Tilgængelighed 161Indstille minimumsskriftstørrelse til e-post-beskeder: Gå til Indstillinger > E-post, kontakter, kalendere > Min. skriftstørrelse. Indstillingen Stor tekst tilsidesætter denne minimumsskriftstørrelse. Ringetoner, der kan tildeles Du kan tildele bestemte ringetoner til personer på din kontaktliste, så du kan høre, hvem der ringer. Du kan købe ringetoner fra iTunes Store på iPhone. Se “Købe musik, lydbøger og toner” på side 120. Visuel telefonsvarer Knapperne til afspilning og pause i den visuelle telefonsvarer gør det muligt at styre afspilning af beskeder. Træk afspilningsmærket på spillelinjen for at gentage en del af en besked, som er svær at høre. Se “Kontrollere telefonbeskeder” på side 62. Tastaturer i bredt format Med mange programmer, inkl. Mail, Safari, Beskeder, Noter og Kontakter, kan du vende iPhone om på siden, når du skriver, så du kan bruge et større tastatur. Stor numerisk blok på telefon Foretag telefonopkald ved blot at trykke på optegnelser på din kontakt- eller favoritliste. Når du skal taste et nummer, er det nemt at gøre på den store numeriske blok på iPhone. Se “Telefonopkald” på side 57. Stemmekontrol Med stemmekontrol kan du foretage telefonopkald og kontrollere afspilning af musik vha. stemmekommandoer. Se “Stemmeopkald” på side 58 og “Bruge Siri eller stemmekontrol med Musik” på side 80. Closed captioning Slå closed captioning til for videoer: Gå til Indstillinger > Video > Closed Captioning. Det er ikke alt videomateriale, der er kodet til closed captions. 162 Kapitel 31 TilgængelighedIndstillinger 32 Med Indstillinger kan du konfigurere iPhone, vælge muligheder til programmer, tilføje konti og vælge andre indstillinger. Flyfunktion Flyfunktion slår de trådløse funktioner fra for at mindske risikoen for forstyrrelse af navigationssystemer og andet elektrisk udstyr i fly. Slå flyfunktion til: Gå til Indstillinger, og slå Flyfunktion til. Når flyfunktion er slået til, vises på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen. Der sendes ingen telefon-, Wi-Fi-, eller Bluetooth-signaler fra iPhone, og GPS-modtagelse er slået fra. Du vil ikke kunne bruge programmer eller funktioner, der kræver disse signaler, f.eks. oprette forbindelse til internettet, foretage eller modtage telefonopkald eller beskeder, få visuelle telefonbeskeder osv. Hvis det tillades af luftfartsselskabet og gældende lov, kan du fortsætte med at lytte til musik, se videoer, læse e-post, gennemse kalendere og andre data, som du tidligere har modtaget, samt bruge programmer, der ikke kræver en internetforbindelse. Hvis Wi-Fi er tilgængeligt, og luftfartselskabet og gældende lov tillader det, kan du gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi, og slå det til. Du kan slå Bluetooth til i Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth. Wi-Fi Oprette forbindelse til Wi-Fi-netværk Wi-Fi-indstillinger bestemmer, om iPhone bruger lokale Wi-Fi-netværk til at oprette forbindelse til internettet. Når iPhone er forbundet med et Wi-Fi-netværk, viser Wi-Fi-symbolet på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen signalstyrken. Jo flere streger der vises, jo kraftigere er signalet. Hvis der ikke er nogen tilgængelige Wi-Fi-netværk, eller du har slået Wi-Fi fra, opretter iPhone forbindelse til internettet via mobildatanetværket, hvis det er tilgængeligt. Når du har oprettet forbindelse til et Wi-Fi-netværk, vil iPhone automatisk oprette forbindelse til det, hver gang det er inden for rækkevidde. Hvis der er mere end et netværk, som du tidligere har brugt, inden for rækkevidde, opretter iPhone forbindelse til det, du sidst har brugt. Du kan også bruge iPhone til at indstille en ny AirPort-base til levering af Wi-Fi-tjenester hjemme eller på kontoret. Se “Indstille en AirPort-base” på side 164. Slå Wi-Fi til eller fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi. 163Indstil , så den spørger, om du vil oprette forbindelse til et nyt netværk Gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi, og slå muligheden “Spørg før tilslutning” til eller fra. Hvis “Spørg før tilslutning” er slået fra, skal du selv oprette forbindelse til et netværk for at komme på internettet, hvis et tidligere brugt netværk ikke er tilgængeligt. Glemme et netværk, så iPhone ikke opretter forbindelse til det: Gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi, og tryk på ved siden af et netværk, som du har oprettet forbindelse til før. Tryk derefter på “Glem dette netværk”. Opret forbindelse til et lukket WiFi-netværk Du opretter forbindelse til et Wi-Fi-netværk, som ikke vises på listen over scannede netværk, ved at gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi > Andet og derefter skrive navnet på netværket. Du skal kende navnet på netværket, adgangskoden og sikkerhedstypen, før du kan oprette forbindelse til et lukket netværk. Justere indstillingerne til oprettelse af forbindelse til et Wi-Fi-netværk Gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi, og tryk på ved siden af et netværk. Du kan indstille en HTTP-proxy, definere statiske netværksindstillinger, slå BootP til eller forny de indstillinger, der leveres af en DHCP-server. Indstille en AirPort-base En AirPort-base forsyner netværket i dit hjem, kontor, din skole eller mindre virksomhed med en Wi-Fi-forbindelse. Du kan bruge iPhone til at indstille en ny AirPort Express-, AirPort Extreme- eller Time Capsule-base. Bruge AirPort-indstillingsassistent: Gå til Indstillinger > Wi-Fi. Under “Indstil en AirPort-base” skal du trykke på navnet på den base, du vil indstille. Følg derefter vejledningen på skærmen. Nogle ældre AirPort-baser kan ikke indstilles vha. en iOS-enhed. Dokumentationen til basen indeholder oplysninger om indstilling. Hvis den base, du vil indstille, ikke vises, skal du sikre dig, at den er tændt, at du er inden for rækkevide, og at den ikke allerede er konfigureret. Du kan kun indstille baser, som er nye eller er blevet nulstillet. Hvis din AirPort-base er konfigureret, kan du med programmet AirPort-værktøj fra App Store ændre dens indstillinger og overvåge dens status på iPhone. Meddelelser Push-meddelelser vises i Meddelelsescenter og bruges til at gøre dig opmærksom på nye oplysninger, også selvom et program ikke er aktivt. Indholdet af meddelelserne afhænger af programmet, men kan indeholde tekst- eller lydadvarsler og en nummereret etiket på programsymbolet på hjemmeskærmen. Du kan slå meddelelser fra, hvis du ikke vil underrettes, og du kan ændre den rækkefølge, som meddelelser vises i. Slå meddelelser til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser. Tryk på et emne på listen, og slå derefter meddelelser til og fra for det pågældende emne. Programmer, hvor meddelelser er slået fra, vises på listen “Ikke i Meddelelsescenter”. 164 Kapitel 32 IndstillingerÆndre antallet af meddelelser Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser, og vælg et emne på listen I Meddelelsescenter. Tryk på Vis for at indstille, hvor mange meddelelser af denne type der skal vises i Meddelelsescenter. Ændre advarselsformaterne Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser, og vælg et emne på listen I Meddelelsescenter. Vælg en varselstype, eller vælg Ingen for at slå varsler og bannere fra. Meddelelser vises stadig i Meddelelsescenter. Ændre rækkefølgen på meddelelser Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser, og tryk på Rediger. Træk meddelelserne til den ønskede rækkefølge. Du slår en meddelelse fra ved at trække den til listen Ikke i Meddelelsescenter. Vise nummererede etiketter på programmer med meddelelser Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser, vælg et emne på listen I Meddelelsescenter, og slå Etiket på programsymbol til. Skjule advarsler, når iPhone er låst Gå til Indstillinger > Meddelelser, og vælg et program på listen I Meddelelsescenter. Slå “Se på skærmlås” fra for at skjule advarsler fra programmet, når iPhone er låst. Nogle programmer kan have ekstra muligheder. I programmet Beskeder kan du f.eks. angive, hvor mange gange advarselslyden skal gentages, og om eksempler på beskeder skal inkluderes i meddelelsen. Lokalitetstjenester Med lokalitetstjenester kan programmer som Påmindelser, Kort, Kamera og lokalitetsbaserede programmer fra tredjeparter indsamle og bruge data om din lokalitet. De lokalitetsdata, der indsamles af Apple, har ikke et format, der kan identificere dig personligt. Din omtrentlige placering bestemmes vha. tilgængelige oplysninger fra mobilnetværket, lokale Wi-Fi-netværk (hvis Wi-Fi er slået til) og GPS (måske ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder). Du kan spare på batteriet ved at slå lokalitetstjenester fra, når du ikke bruger det. Når et program bruger lokalitetstjenester, vises på menulinjen. Alle programmer og systemtjenester, der bruger lokalitetstjenester, vises på skærmen med indstillinger til Lokalitetstjenester, hvor du kan se, om Lokalitetstjenester er slået til eller fra for de enkelte programmer og tjenester. Hvis du ikke vil bruge lokalitetstjenester, kan du slå funktionen fra for nogle eller alle programmer eller tjenester. Hvis du slår lokalitetstjenester fra, bliver du bedt om at slå dem til igen, næste gang et program eller en tjeneste prøver at bruge funktionen. Hvis du på iPhone har tredjepartsprogrammer, der bruger lokalitetstjenester, skal du læse den pågældende tredjeparts vilkår og politik med hensyn til beskyttelse af kunders identitet for at finde ud af, hvordan programmerne bruger dine lokalitetsdata. Slå lokalitetstjenester til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Lokalitetstjenester. VPN VPN-forbindelser bruges i firmaer til sikker kommunikation via et netværk, der ikke er privat. Du skal muligvis konfigurere VPN, hvis du f.eks. skal have adgang til e-post på dit arbejde. Denne indstilling vises, når VPN er konfigureret på iPhone, og du kan slå VPN til og fra. Se “Netværk” på side 168. Kapitel 32 Indstillinger 165Internetdeling Du kan bruge Internetdeling (iPhone 4 og nyere modeller) til at dele en internetforbindelse med en computer eller en anden enhed – f.eks. en iPod touch, iPad eller en anden iPhone – der er forbundet med din iPhone via Wi-Fi. Du kan også bruge Internetdeling til at dele en internetforbindelse med en computer, der er forbundet med din iPhone via Bluetooth eller USB. Internetdeling virker kun, hvis iPhone har forbindelse til internettet via mobilnetværket. Bemærk: Denne funktion findes måske ikke i alle områder. Kræver evt. ekstra betaling. Du kan få flere oplysninger hos operatøren. Dele en internetforbindelse: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk, og tryk på Indstil Internetdeling – hvis den vises – for at indstille tjenesten med din operatør. Når du har slået Internetdeling til, kan andre enheder oprette forbindelse på følgende måder:  Wi-Fi: På enheden skal du vælge iPhone på listen over tilgængelige Wi-Fi-netværk.  USB: Slut computeren til iPhone vha. Dock-stik til USB-kabel. I vinduet Netværk på computeren skal du vælge iPhone og konfigurere netværksindstillingerne.  Bluetooth: På iPhone skal du gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth og slå Bluetooth til. Læs den dokumentation, der fulgte med computeren, for at finde ud af, hvordan du slutter iPhone til enheden og parrer dem. Når der er forbindelse, vises der et blåt bånd øverst på skærmen på iPhone. Internetdeling forbliver slået til, når du opretter forbindelse via USB, også selv om du ikke bruger internetforbindelsen aktivt. Bemærk: Symbolet for Internetdeling vises på statuslinjen på iOS-enheder, der bruger internetdeling. Ændre Wi-Fi-adgangskoden til iPhone Gå til Indstillinger > Internetdeling > Wi-Fi-adgangskode, og skriv derefter en adgangskode på mindst 8 tegn. Overvåge dit brug af mobildatanetværk Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug > Mobilbrug. Operatør Denne indstilling vises på GSM-netværk, når du er uden for rækkevidde af din operatørs netværk, og andre lokale operatørers datanetværk er tilgængelige til telefonopkald, visuel telefonsvarer og internetforbindelser via mobilnetværk. Du kan kun foretage opkald via operatører, som har en roaming-aftale med din operatør. Kræver evt. ekstra betaling. Prisen for roaming faktureres måske af den anden operatør via din operatør. Vælge en operatør: Gå til Indstillinger > Operatør, og vælg det netværk, du vil bruge. Når du har valgt et netværk, bruger iPhone kun det valgte netværk. Hvis netværket ikke er tilgængeligt, vises meddelelsen “Ingen tjeneste” på iPhone. Lyde og kontakten Ring/stille Du kan indstille iPhone til at afspille en lyd, når du får en ny besked, e-post, tweet-meddelelse, telefonbesked eller påmindelse. Der kan også afspilles lyde til aftaler, ved afsendelse af e-post, tastaturklik, og når du låser iPhone. Når iPhone er indstillet til stille funktion, afspiller den ingen ringetoner, påmindelser eller lydeffekter. Den afspiller dog alarmer fra Ur og andre lyde. 166 Kapitel 32 IndstillingerSkifte mellem ringefunktion og stille funktion: Skub kontakten Ring/stille på siden af iPhone. Bemærk: I nogle områder afspilles lydeffekterne til Kamera og Memoer, selv om kontakten Ring/ stille er indstillet til Stille. Indstille, om iPhone skal vibrere, når du modtager et opkald Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde. Justere lydstyrken på ringetone og advarsler Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde, og træk mærket. Hvis “Skift med knapper” er slået til, kan du bruge lydstyrkeknapperne på siden af iPhone. Ændre lydstyrken på andre lyde Brug lydstyrkeknapperne på siden af iPhone. Indstille ringetonen Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde > Ringetone. Justere ringetoner og advarselslyde Gå til Indstillinger > Lyde, og vælg toner til emnerne på listen. Lysstyrke Skærmens lysstyrke har betydning for strømforbruget og dermed for batteriets levetid. Gør skærmen mørk for at forlænge intervallet, før iPhone skal oplades igen, eller brug Automatisk lysstyrke. Justere skærmens lysstyrke: Gå til Indstillinger > Lysstyrke, og træk mærket. Indstille, om iPhone skal justere skærmens lysstyrke automatisk Gå til Indstillinger > Lysstyrke, og slå Automatisk lysstyrke til eller fra. Hvis Automatisk lysstyrke er slået til, justerer iPhone skærmens lysstyrke i forhold til det omgivende lys vha. den indbyggede sensor. Baggrund Med indstillingerne til Baggrund kan du indstille et billede eller fotografi som baggrund på låseskærmen eller hjemmeskærmen. Se “Tilføje baggrund” på side 23. Generelt De generelle indstillinger inkluderer netværk, deling, sikkerhed og andre iOS-indstillinger. Du kan også finde oplysninger om iPhone og nulstille forskellige iPhone-indstillinger. Om Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Om for at få oplysninger om iPhone, inkl. ledig lagringsplads, serienumre, netværksadresser, IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) og ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier eller Smart Card) (GSM), MEID (Mobile Equipment Identifier) (CDMA), samt oplysninger om gældende lovgivning. Ændre enhedens navn: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Om, og tryk på Navn. Enhedens navn vises i oversigten, når den er sluttet til iTunes og bruges af iCloud. Softwareopdatering Med Softwareopdatering kan du hente og installere iOS-opdateringer fra Apple. Opdatere til den nyeste iOS-version: Gå til Indstilinger > Generelt > Softwareopdatering. Hvis der findes en nyere version af iOS, skal du følge instruktionerne på skærmen for at hente og installere opdateringen. Bemærk: Sørg for, at iPhone er sluttet til en strømkilde, så installeringen, som kan tage flere minutter, kan afsluttes uden problemer. Kapitel 32 Indstillinger 167Brug I Brug kan du se mobilbrug, batteristatus og tilgængelig plads. Du kan også se og administrere lagringsplads i iCloud. Se brug af mobilnetværk, batteristatus og tilgængelig plads: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug. Se mobilbrug Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug > Mobilbrug. Administrere lagringsplads i iCloud Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug > Lagringsplads. Du kan se og slette sikkerhedskopier, og slå sikkerhedskopiering af kamerarullen fra. Du kan også købe ekstra lagringsplads i iCloud. Der findes flere oplysninger i “iCloud” på side 16. Se programmers lagringsplads Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug. Lagringspladsen for hvert installeret program vises. Tryk på programmets navn for at få flere oplysninger. Nulstille din brugsstatistik Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug > Mobilbrug, og tryk på Nulstil statistik for at slette statistikken for data og samlet tid. Vise spænding på batteriet i procent Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Brug, og slå Batteri i procent til. Siri Slå Siri til: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Siri. Der findes oplysninger om brugen af Siri og ændring af Siris indstillingerne i “Vælge indstillinger til Siri” på side 42. Netværk Brug indstillingerne i Netværk til at konfigurere en VPN-forbindelse (virtuelt privat netværk), bruge Wi-Fi-indstillinger eller slå Data-roaming til eller fra. Når et program skal bruge internettet, gør iPhone følgende i rækkefølge, indtil der er forbindelse:  Opretter forbindelse via det senest brugte tilgængelige Wi-Fi-netværk .  Viser en liste over Wi-Fi-netværk inden for rækkevidde og opretter forbindelse til det, du vælger.  Opretter forbindelse via mobilnetværket (hvis der er et). Hvis iPhone har forbindelse til internettet via mobilnetværket, vises symbolet , , eller på statuslinjen. 4G og 3G GSM-mobilnetværkene understøtter samtidig stemme- og datakommunikation. Ved alle andre mobilforbindelser kan du ikke bruge internettjenester, mens du taler i telefon, medmindre iPhone også har en Wi-Fi-forbindelse til internettet. Afhængigt af din netværksforbindelse kan du måske ikke modtage opkald, mens iPhone overfører data via mobilnetværket – f.eks. fra en webside. GSM-netværk: Med en EDGE- eller GPRS-forbindelse kan indgående opkald gå direkte til telefonsvareren under dataoverførsler. Hvis du besvarer indgående opkald, sættes dataoverførsler på pause. CDMA: Med EV-DO-forbindelser sættes dataoverførsler på pause, når du besvarer indgående opkald. På 1xRTT-forbindelser kan indgående opkald gå direkte til telefonsvareren under dataoverførsler. Hvis du besvarer indgående opkald, sættes dataoverførsler på pause. Dataoverførslen genoptages, når du afslutter opkaldet. Slå Mobildata til og fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk, og slå Mobildata til eller fra. 168 Kapitel 32 IndstillingerHvis Mobildata er slået fra, bruger alle datatjenester kun Wi-Fi, inkl. e-post, webbrowsing, pushmeddelelser og andre tjenester. Hvis Mobildata er slået til, skal der evt. betales til operatøren. Visse funktioner og tjenester, f.eks. Siri og Beskeder, overfører f.eks. data, og hvis du bruger disse funktioner og tjenester, kan det medføre yderligere betaling på dit dataabonnement. Slå Samtaleroaming til eller fra (CDMA) Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Slå Samtaleroaming fra for ikke at betale, når du bruger andre operatørers netværk. Når operatørens netværk ikke er tilgængeligt, er der ingen tilgængelige mobiltjenester (data eller stemme) på iPhone. Slå Data-roaming til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Data-roaming gør det muligt at bruge internettet via et mobilt datanetværk, når du er i et område, som ikke er dækket af din operatørs netværk. Når du rejser, kan du f.eks. slå data-roaming fra for at undgå at skulle betale for roaming. Se “Operatør” på side 166. Slå 3G til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk. Denne mulighed er ikke tilgængelig i alle områder. Med 3G indlæses data fra internettet nogle gange hurtigere, men det bruger måske mere strøm fra batteriet. Hvis du foretager mange telefonopkald, er det en god ide at slå 3G fra for at forlænge batteritiden. Slå Internetdeling til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk > Internetdeling. Se “Internetdeling” på side 166. Tilføje en ny VPN-konfiguration Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Netværk > VPN > Tilføj VPN-konfiguration. Spørg netværksadministratoren, hvilke indstillinger du skal bruge. Hvis VPN er indstillet på din computer, kan du i de fleste tilfælde bruge de samme VPN-indstillinger til iPhone. Se “VPN” på side 165. Bluetooth iPhone kan oprette trådløs forbindelse til Bluetooth-enheder, f.eks. hovedsæt, hovedtelefoner og bilsæt, så du kan lytte til musik og tale, uden at du skal bruge hænderne. Du kan også tilslutte Apple Wireless Keyboard med Bluetooth. Se “Bruge et Apple Wireless Keyboard” på side 27. Slå Bluetooth til eller fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Bluetooth, og slå Bluetooth til eller fra. Oprette forbindelse til en Bluetooth-enhed Tryk på enheden på listen Enheder, og følg instruktionerne på skærmen for at oprette forbindelse til den. Der findes flere oplysninger om Bluetoothparring i den dokumentation, der fulgte med enheden. iTunes Wi-Fi-synkronisering Du kan synkronisere iPhone med iTunes på en computer, der er sluttet til det samme Wi-Finetværk. Slå iTunes Wi-Fi-synkronisering til: Første gang du indstiller Wi-Fi-synkronisering, skal du slutte iPhone til den computer, som du vil synkronisere med. Du finder instruktioner i “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Når du har konfigureret Wi-Fi-synkronisering, synkroniseres iPhone automatisk med iTunes en gang om dagen, når den er sluttet til en strømkilde og:  iPhone og computeren er tilsluttet det samme Wi-Fi-netværk.  iTunes er åbent på computeren. Kapitel 32 Indstillinger 169Se datoen og tidspunktet for den sidste synkronisering Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > iTunes Wi-Fi-synk. Synkronisere med iTunes med det samme Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > iTunes Wi-Fi-synk., og tryk på Synkroniser nu. Spotlight-søgning Indstillingen Spotlight-søgning sikrer, at du kan anføre, hvilke indholdsområder funktionen Søg skal søge i, og ændre rækkefølgen af resultaterne. Indstille, hvilke indholdsområder der skal søges i af Søg: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Spotlight-søgning, og vælg de emner, du vil søge i. Indstille rækkefølgen af kategorier til søgeresultater Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Spotlight-søgning. Hold ved siden af et emne nede, og træk opad eller nedad. Automatisk lås Når du låser iPhone, bliver skærmen slukket, så du sparer på batteriet og forhindrer, at uvedkommende bruger iPhone. Du kan stadig modtage opkald og sms'er, og du kan justere lydstyrken og bruge mikrofonknappen på øretelefonerne til iPhone, når du lytter til musik eller taler i telefon. Indstille intervallet, før iPhone låses: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Automatisk lås, og vælg derefter et tidspunkt. Lås med kode iPhone kræver som standard ikke, at du skal indtaste en adgangskode for at låse den op. Indstille en adgangskode: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, og skriv en kode på 4 cifre. Hvis du glemmer koden, skal du gendanne software på iPhone. Se “Opdatere og gendanne software til iPhone” på side 180. Slå lås med kode fra eller ændre din kode Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode. Vælge, hvor længe der skal gå, før der kræves en kode Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, og skriv din kode. Tryk på Kræv kode, og vælg, hvor længe iPhone vil vente, efter at den er blevet låst, før den beder om en kode for at kunne blive låst op igen. Slå Enkel adgangskode til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode. En enkel adgangskode består af fire cifre. Du kan øge sikkerheden ved at slå Enkel adgangskode fra og bruge en længere kode med en kombination af tal, bogstaver, skilletegn og specialtegn. Undgå adgang til Siri, når iPhone er låst Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode > Siri. Se “Vælge indstillinger til Siri” på side 42. Slå Stemmeopkald til eller fra Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode. Når du slår stemmeopkald fra, forhindrer du andre i at foretage et opkald, når iPhone er låst. Denne indstilling er kun tilgængelig, hvis Siri er slået fra. Du kan få flere oplysninger om opkald vha. Siri i “Telefon” på side 44. Slette data efter ti mislykkede forsøg på at skrive en korrekt adgangskode Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Lås med kode, og tryk på Slet data. Efter ti mislykkede forsøg på at skrive en adgangskode nulstilles alle indstillingerne, og alle oplysninger og medier slettes, fordi krypteringsnøglen til dataene (som er krypteret med 256 bit AESkryptering) fjernes. 170 Kapitel 32 IndstillingerBegrænsninger Du kan indstille begrænsninger for nogle programmer og købt indhold. F.eks. kan forældre begrænse forekomsten af anstødelig musik på spillelister eller helt slå adgang til YouTube fra. Slå begrænsninger til: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Begrænsninger, og tryk på Slå begrænsninger til. Vigtigt: Hvis du glemmer koden, skal du gendanne software på iPhone. Se “Opdatere og gendanne software til iPhone” på side 180. Du kan foretage følgende begrænsninger: Safari Safari er slået fra, og dets symbol er fjernet fra hjemmeskærmen. Du kan ikke bruge Safari til at gennemse internettet eller få adgang til webklip. YouTube YouTube er slået fra, og dets symbol er fjernet fra hjemmeskærmen. Kamera Kamera er slået fra, og dets symbol er fjernet fra hjemmeskærmen. Du kan ikke tage billeder. FaceTime Du kan ikke foretage eller modtage videoopkald med FaceTime. iTunes iTunes Store er slået fra, og dets symbol er fjernet fra hjemmeskærmen. Du kan ikke se eksempler på, købe eller hente indhold. Ping Du kan ikke få adgang til Ping eller nogen af dets funktioner. Installere programmer App Store er slået fra, og dets symbol er fjernet fra hjemmeskærmen. Du kan ikke installere programmer på iPhone. Slette programmer Du kan ikke slette programmer på iPhone. vises ikke på programsymboler, når du tilpasser hjemmeskærmen. Siri Du kan ikke bruge Siri. Stemmekommandoer og diktering er slået fra. Anstødeligt sprog Siri forsøger at erstatte de anstødelige ord, du siger, med stjerner og biplyde. Lokalitet Slå lokalitetstjenester fra for enkelte programmer. Du kan også låse lokalitetstjenester, så der ikke kan foretages ændringer i indstillingerne, inkl. godkende ekstra programmer til at bruge tjenesterne. Konti De aktuelle indstillinger i E-post, kontakter, kalender er låst. Du kan ikke tilføje, ændre eller slette konti. Du kan heller ikke ændre iCloud-indstillinger. Indkøb i programmer Slå Indkøb i programmer fra. Når denne funktion er slået til, kan du købe ekstra indhold eller funktionalitet fra programmer, der er hentet fra App Store. Kræv adgangskode Kræver, at du indtaster din Apple-id til indkøb i programmer efter den tidsperiode, du angiver. Indstille begrænsninger på indhold Tryk på Vurderinger til, og vælg derefter et land på listen. Du kan indstille begrænsninger vha. et lands vurderingssystem til musik, podcasts, film, tv-udsendelser og programmer. Indhold, der ikke opfylder kravene i den valgte vurdering, vises ikke på iPhone. Spil med flere spillere Når Spil med flere spillere er slået fra, kan du ikke anmode om et spil, sende og modtage invitationer til at spille eller tilføje venner i Game Center. Tilføje venner Når Tilføje venner er slået fra, kan du ikke sende eller modtage venneanmodninger i Game Center. Hvis Spil med flere deltagere er slået til, kan du fortsætte med at spille med de eksisterende venner. Dato & tid Disse indstillinger har betydning for klokkeslættet, der vises på statuslinjen øverst på skærmen, for verdensure og kalendere. Vælge, om iPhone skal vise klokkeslæt i 24 eller 12 timers format: Vælg Indstillinger > Generelt > Dato & tid, og slå 24 timers ur til eller fra. (24 timers ur er måske ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder.) Kapitel 32 Indstillinger 171Vælge, om iPhone skal opdatere dato og tid automatisk: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Dato & tid, og slå Indstil automatisk til eller fra. Hvis iPhone er indstillet til at opdatere tiden automatisk, hentes det korrekte klokkeslæt via mobilnetværket og opdateres til den tidszone, du befinder dig i. Nogle operatører understøtter ikke netværkstid i alle områder. Når du er ude at rejse, kan iPhone måske ikke indstille den lokale tid automatisk. Indstille dato og tid manuelt Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Dato & Tid, og slå Indstil automatisk fra. Tryk på Tidszone for at indstille din tidszone. Tryk på knappen “Dato & tid”, og tryk derefter på Indstil dato & tid, og skriv datoen og tiden. Tastatur Du kan slå tastaturet til forskellige sprog til, og du kan slå funktioner som stavekontrol til og fra. Du kan få flere oplysninger om brug af tastaturet i “Skrive” på side 24. Du kan få flere oplysninger om brug af internationale tastaturer i Appendiks A,“Internationale tastaturer,” på side 174. International Brug indstillingerne i International til at indstille sproget på iPhone, slå tastaturer til forskellige sprog til og fra og indstille dato, tid og formater til telefonnumre i dit område. Indstille sproget på iPhone: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Sprog. Indstille kalenderformatet Gå til Generelt > International > Kalender, og vælg formatet. Indstille sproget til Siri og stemmekontrol Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Stemmekontrol, og vælg et sprog. Indstille dato, tid og formater til telefonnumre Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Områdeformat, og vælg dit område. Områdeformatet bestemmer også det sprog, der bruges til de datoer og måneder, der vises i programmer. Tilgængelighed Du slår tilgængelighedsfunktioner til ved at vælge Tilgængelighed og vælge de ønskede funktioner. Se Kapitel 31,“Tilgængelighed,” på side 147. Beskrivelser Denne indstilling vises, når du installerer en eller flere beskrivelser på iPhone. Tryk på Beskrivelser for at se oplysninger om de installerede beskrivelser. Nulstille Du kan nulstille ordbogen, netværksindstillingerne, layoutet af hjemmeskærmen og lokalitetsadvarsler. Du kan også slette alt indhold og alle indstillinger. Slette alt indhold og alle indstillinger: Gå til Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Slet alt indhold og alle indstillinger. Når du har bekræftet, at du vil nulstille iPhone, fjernes alt indhold, dine oplysninger og indstillinger. iPhone kan ikke bruges, før den er indstillet igen. 172 Kapitel 32 IndstillingerNulstille alle indstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil alle indstillinger. Alle indstillinger nulstilles. Nulstille netværksindstillinger Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil netværksindstillinger. Når du nulstiller netværksindstillinger, fjernes din liste over tidligere brugte netværk og VPN-indstillinger, der ikke er installeret af en konfigurationsbeskrivelse. Wi-Fi bliver slået fra og derefter slået til igen, så en evt. netværksforbindelse afbrydes. Indstillingerne Wi-Fi og “Spørg før tilslutning” vil stadig være slået til. Du fjerner VPN-indstillinger, der er installeret af en konfigurationsbeskrivelse ved at gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Beskrivelse og derefter vælge beskrivelsen og trykke på Fjern. Det vil også fjerne andre indstillinger eller konti i beskrivelsen. Nulstille tastaturordbogen Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil tastaturordbog. Du føjer ord til tastaturordbogen ved at afvise de ord, som iPhone foreslår, når du skriver. Tryk på et ord for at afvise rettelsen og føje ordet til tastaturordbogen. Når du nulstiller tastaturordbogen, slettes alle de ord, du har tilføjet. Nulstille hjemmeskærmens layout Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil hjemmeskærmens layout. Nulstille lokalitetsadvarsler Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Nulstil, og tryk på Nulstil lokalitetsadvarsler. Lokalitetsadvarsler er forespørgsler, der kommer fra programmer, om brug af lokalitetstjenester. iPhone viser en lokalitetsadvarsel for et program, første gang programmet beder om tilladelse til at bruge lokalitetstjenester. Hvis du trykker på Annuller som svar på forespørgslen, vises den ikke igen. Du nulstiller lokalitetsadvarsler, så der vises en forespørgsel for hvert program igen, ved at trykke på Nulstil lokalitetsadvarsler. Indstillinger til programmer Se andre kapitler for at få oplysninger om indstillinger til programmer. Se f.eks. Kapitel 7,“Safari,”på side 73 for at få oplysninger om indstillinger til Safari. Kapitel 32 Indstillinger 173Internationale tastaturer A Appendiks Internationale tastaturer sikrer, at du kan skrive tekst på mange forskellige sprog, inklusive asiatiske sprog og sprog, der skrives fra højre mod venstre. Tilføje og fjerne tastaturer Hvis du vil skrive tekst på andre sprog på iPhone, skal du bruge forskellige tastaturer. Som standard er det kun tastaturet til det valgte sprog, der er tilgængeligt. Du kan gøre tastaturer til andre sprog tilgængelige vha. indstillingerne i Tastatur. Du kan finde en liste over understøttede tastaturer på iPhone ved at gå til www.apple.com/dk/iphone/specs.html. Tilføje et tastatur: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International, tryk på Tastaturer, og vælg derefter et tastatur på listen. Gentag dette for at tilføje flere tastaturer. Fjerne et tastatur: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > International > Tastaturer, og tryk på Rediger. Tryk på ved siden af det tastatur, du vil fjerne, og tryk derefter på Slet. Redigere tastaturlisten: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tilgængelighed > Tastaturer. Tryk på Rediger, og træk derefter ved siden af et tastatur til et nyt sted på listen. Skifte tastaturer Hvis du vil skrive tekst på et andet sprog, skal du skifte tastatur. Skifte tastatur, mens du skriver: Hold fingeren på globustasten for at vise alle aktive tastaturer. Du vælger at tastatur ved at lade fingeren glide til navnet på tastaturet og derefter slippe. Globustasten vises, når du har slået mere end et tastatur til. Du kan også trykke på . Når du trykker på tasten , vises navnet på det aktive tastatur kortvarigt. Fortsæt med at trykke for at bruge andre aktive tastaturer. Mange tastaturer gør det muligt at skrive bogstaver, tal og symboler, som ikke vises på tastaturet. Skrive accenttegn og andre alternative tegn: Hold fingeren på det beslægtede bogstav, tal eller symbol, og skub derefter for at vælge en variant. På et thailandsk tastatur kan du f.eks. vælge thailandske tal ved at holde en finger på de tilsvarende arabertal. Kinesisk Du kan bruge tastaturer til at skrive kinesisk på flere forskellige måder, inklusive pinyin, cangjie, wubihua og zhuyin. Du kan også bruge en finger til at skrive kinesiske tegn på skærmen. Skrive vha. pinyin Brug QWERTY-tastaturet til at skrive forenklet og traditionelt pinyin. Når du skriver, bliver der foreslået tegn. Tryk på et forslag for at vælge det, eller fortsæt med at skrive for at se flere muligheder. Hvis du bliver ved med at skrive pinyin uden mellemrum, vises der forslag til sætninger. 174Skrive vha. cangjie Byg kinesiske tegn fra cangjie-komponenttasterne. Når du skriver, bliver der foreslået tegn. Tryk på et tegn for at vælge det, eller fortsæt med at skrive op til fem komponenter for at se flere tegnmuligheder. Skrive vha. streg (wubihua) Brug tastaturet til at opbygge kinesiske tegn vha. op til fem streger i den korrekte skriverækkefølge: Vandret, lodret, faldende mod venstre, faldende mod højre og krog. Det kinesiske tegn ? (cirkel) skal f.eks. begynde med den lodrette streg ?. Når du skriver, bliver der foreslået tegn (de mest almindelige tegn vises først). Tryk på et tegn for at vælge det. Hvis du ikke er sikker på den korrekte streg, skal du indtaste en stjerne (*). Hvis du vil se flere tegnmuligheder, skal du skrive en streg til eller rulle gennem tegnlisten. Tryk på tasten (??) for kun at vise tegn, som svarer nøjagtigt til det, du har skrevet. Skrive vha. zhuyin Brug tastaturet til at skrive zhuyin-bogstaver. Når du skriver, bliver der foreslået kinesiske tegn. Tryk på et forslag for at vælge det, eller fortsæt med at skrive zhuyin for at se flere muligheder. Når du har skrevet det første bogstav, ændres tastaturet, så det viser flere bogstaver. Hvis du bliver ved med at skrive zhuyin uden mellemrum, vises der forslag til sætninger. Tegne kinesiske tegn Når forenklede og traditionelle kinesiske håndskriftsformater er slået til, kan du tegne eller skrive kinesiske tegn direkte på skærmen med fingeren. Når du skriver streger til tegn, genkender iPhone dem og viser de mulige tegn på en liste med det mest sandsynlige tegn øverst. Når du vælger et tegn, vises de sandsynlige følgetegn på listen som ekstra muligheder. Berøringsfølsomt pegefelt Nogle komplekse tegn som f.eks.? (en del af navnet på Hong Kong International Airport), ?? (elevator) og ? (partikel, der bruges på kantonesisk) indtastes ved at skrive to eller flere komponenttegn efter hinanden. Tryk på tegnet for at erstatte det indtastede tegn. Latinske tegn genkendes også. Konvertere mellem forenklet og traditionelt kinesisk Vælg det eller de tegn, du vil konvertere, og tryk derefter på Erstat. Se “Redigere tekst” på side 25. Du kan skrive et helt udtryk eller en hel sætning, før du konverterer. Appendiks A Internationale tastaturer 175Japansk Du kan skrive japansk med romaji- eller kana-tastaturerne. Du kan også indtaste ansigtssymboler. Skrive japansk kana Brug kana-paletten til at vælge stavelser. Du kan se flere stavelsesmuligheder, hvis du trykker på pilen og vælger en anden stavelse eller et andet ord i vinduet. Skrive japansk romaji Brug romaji-tastaturet til at indtaste stavelser. Alternative muligheder vises langs toppen af tastaturet; tryk på en for at indtaste den. Du kan se flere stavelsesmuligheder, hvis du trykker på pilen og vælger en anden stavelse eller et andet ord i vinduet. Skrive ansigtssymboler eller humørsymboler Tryk på tasten ^_^ på det japanske kana-tastatur. På det japanske romaji-tastatur (japansk QWERTY-layout) skal du trykke på taltasten og derefter på tasten ^_^. På det kinesiske pinyin-tastatur (forenklet eller traditionelt) eller zhuyin-tastatur (traditionelt) skal du trykke på tasten Symboler og derefter på tasten ^_^. Skrive emoji-tegn Brug emoji-tastaturet til at skrive billedtegn. Du kan også skrive emoji-tegn med et japansk tastatur. Skriv f.eks. ??? for at få ?. Bruge kandidatlisten Når du skriver på kinesiske, japanske eller arabiske tastaturer, vises forslag til tegn eller kandidater øverst på tastaturet. Tryk på en kandidat for at indtaste den, eller svirp til venstre for at se flere kandidater. Bruge den udvidede kandidatliste: Tryk på pil op til højre for at se den komplette kandidatliste. Svirp op eller ned for at rulle gennem listen. Tryk på pil ned for at vende tilbage til den korte liste. Bruge genveje: Med visse kinesiske eller japanske tastaturer kan du oprette en genvej til ord og indtastningspar. Genvejen føjes til din personlige ordbog. Når du skriver en genvej med et understøttet tastatur, erstattes genvejen med det tilhørende ord eller indtastningsemne. Genveje findes til følgende tastaturer:  Kinesisk – forenklet (pinyin)  Kinesisk – traditionelt (pinyin)  Kinesisk – traditionelt (zhuyin)  Japansk (romaji)  Japansk (kana) Slå genveje til eller fra: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Tastatur > Genveje. Vietnamesisk Hold fingeren på et tegn for at se de tilgængelige accenter, og lad fingeren glide til det ønskede tegn. 176 Appendiks A Internationale tastaturerDu kan også bruge følgende tastsekvenser til at skrive tegn med accenter:  aa—â (a cirkumfleks)  aw—a (a hácek)  as—á (a aigu)  af—à (a grave)  ar—? (a spørgsmålstegn)  ax—ã (a stigende accent)  aj—? (a lav tone)  dd—d (d streg)  ee—ê (e cirkumfleks)  oo—ô (o cirkumfleks)  ow—o (o krog)  w—u (u krog) Appendiks A Internationale tastaturer 177Support og andre oplysninger B Appendiks Websted med support til iPhone Omfattende supportoplysninger findes på internettet på www.apple.com/dk/support/iphone. Du kan også bruge Express Lane til personlig support (findes ikke i alle lande). Gå til expresslane. apple.com. Genstarte og nulstille iPhone Hvis der er noget, der ikke virker korrekt, kan du prøve at starte iPhone igen, tvinge et program til at slutte eller nulstille iPhone. Genstarte iPhone: Hold knappen Til/fra nede, indtil det røde mærke vises. Flyt fingeren hen over mærket for at slukke iPhone. Du tænder iPhone igen ved at holde knappen Til/fra nede, indtil Apple-logoet vises. Tvinge et program til at slutte: Hold knappen Til/fra nede i nogle få sekunder, indtil der vises et rødt mærke, og hold derefter knappen Hjem nede, indtil programmet slutter. Du kan også fjerne et program fra listen over de seneste programmer. Se “Åbne og skifte mellem programmer” på side 19. Hvis du ikke kan slukke for iPhone, eller hvis problemet fortsætter, skal du evt. nulstille iPhone. Du bør kun nulstille, hvis det ikke hjælper at slukke og tænde for iPhone. Nulstille iPhone: Hold knappen Til/fra og knappen Hjem nede samtidig i mindst 10 sekunder, indtil Apple-logoet vises. Sikkerhedskopiere iPhone Du kan bruge iCloud eller iTunes til automatisk at sikkerhedskopiere iPhone. Hvis du vælger automatisk sikkerhedskopiering vha. iCloud, kan du ikke også bruge iTunes til at sikkerhedskopiere automatisk til computeren, men du kan bruge iTunes til at sikkerhedskopiere manuelt til computeren. Sikkerhedskopiere med iCloud iCloud sikkerhedskopierer automatisk til iPhone dagligt via Wi-Fi, når den er sluttet til en strømkilde, og er låst. Datoen og tidspunktet for den sidste sikkerhedskopiering vises nederst på skærmen Lagring & sikkerhedsk. iCloud sikkerhedskopierer:  Købt musik, købte tv-udsendelser, programmer og bøger  Fotografier og videoer i albummet Kamerarulle  iPhone-indstillinger  Programdata  Hjemmeskærmen og organiseringen af programmer  Beskeder (iMessage, Sms og Mms)  Ringetoner 178Bemærk: Købt musik sikkerhedskopieres ikke i alle områder, og tv-udsendelser er ikke tilgængelige i alle områder. Hvis du ikke slog iCloud-sikkerhedskopiering til, da du indstillede iPhone, kan du slå det til i iClouds indstillinger. Slå iCloud-sikkerhedskopiering til Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud, og log om nødvendigt ind med din Apple-id og adgangskode. Gå til Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og slå iCloud-sikkerhedskopi til. Sikkerhedskopiere med det samme Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og tryk på Sikkerhedskopier nu. Administrere dine sikkerhedskopier Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og tryk på Lagringsplads Tryk på navnet på iPhone. Slå sikkerhedskopiering af kamerarullen til og fra Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og tryk på Lagringsplads. Tryk på navnet på din iPhone, og slå sikkerhedskopiering af kamerarullen til eller fra. Se de enheder, der sikkerhedskopieres Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk. > Lagringsplads Stoppe automatiske iCloudsikkerhedskopieringer Gå til Indstillinger > iCloud > Lagring & sikkerhedsk., og slå iCloudsikkerhedskopi fra. Musik, der ikke er købt i iTunes, sikkerhedskopieres ikke i iCloud. Du skal bruge iTunes til at sikkerhedskopiere og gendanne den type indhold. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Vigtigt: Sikkerhedskopiering af musik og tv-udsendelser er ikke tilgængeligt i alle områder. Tidligere indkøb er måske ikke tilgængelige, hvis de ikke længere findes i iTunes Store, App Store eller iBookstore. Købt indhold samt fotostream-indhold har ingen indflydelse på de 5 GB gratis lagringsplads i iCloud. Sikkerhedskopiere med iTunes iTunes opretter en sikkerhedskopi af fotografier i albummet Kamerarulle eller Arkiverede fotos, i sms'er, noter, opkaldshistorie, kontaktfavoritter, lydindstillinger m.m. Mediearkiver som sange og nogle fotografier sikkerhedskopieres ikke, men kan gendannes ved synkronisering med iTunes. Når du slutter iPhone til den computer, du normalt synkroniserer med, opretter iTunes en sikkerhedskopi, hver gang du:  Synkroniserer med iTunes iTunes synkroniserer iPhone, hver gang du slutter iPhone til computeren. iTunes sikkerhedskopierer ikke automatisk en iPhone, der ikke er konfigureret til at blive synkroniseret med den pågældende computer. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18.  Opdaterer eller gendanner iPhone: iTunes sikkerhedskopierer automatisk iPhone før opdatering og gendannelse. iTunes kan også kryptere sikkerhedskopier af iPhone for at sikre dine data. Kryptere iPhone-sikkerhedskopier: Vælg “Krypter iPhone-sikkerhedskopi” i resumevinduet i iTunes. Gendanne arkiver og indstillinger på iPhone: Slut iPhone til den computer du normalt synkroniserer med, vælg iPhone i iTunes-vinduet, og klik på Gendan i resumevinduet. Du kan få flere oplysninger om sikkerhedskopier, inklusive de indstillinger og oplysninger, der ligger i en sikkerhedskopi, hvis du går til support.apple.com/kb/HT1766?viewlocale=da_DK. Appendiks B Support og andre oplysninger 179Fjerne en iTunes-sikkerhedskopi Du kan fjerne en sikkerhedskopi af iPhone fra listen over sikkerhedskopier i iTunes. Det kan du f.eks. gøre, hvis en sikkerhedskopi er oprettet på en anden persons computer. Fjerne en sikkerhedskopi: 1 Åbn Indstillinger i iTunes.  Mac: Vælg iTunes > Indstillinger.  Windows: Vælg Rediger > Indstillinger. 2 Klik på Enheder (iPhone behøver ikke at være tilsluttet). 3 Vælg den sikkerhedskopi, du vil fjerne, og klik derefter på Slet sikkerhedskopi. 4 Klik på Slet for at bekræfte, at du vil fjerne den valgte sikkerhedskopi, og klik derefter på OK. Opdatere og gendanne software til iPhone Du kan opdatere software på iPhone i Indstillinger eller ved at bruge iTunes. Du kan også slette eller gendanne iPhone og derefter bruge iCloud eller iTunes til at gendanne fra en sikkerhedskopi. Slettede data er ikke længere tilgængelige via brugergrænsefladen på iPhone, men de er ikke slettet fra iPhone. Der findes oplysninger om sletning af alt indhold og alle indstillinger i “Nulstille” på side 172. Opdatere iPhone Du kan opdatere software på iPhone i Indstillinger eller ved at bruge iTunes. Opdatere trådløst på iPhone: Gå til Indstillinger > Generelt > Softwareopdatering. iPhone søger efter tilgængelige softwareopdateringer. Opdatere software i iTunes: iTunes søger efter tilgængelige softwareopdateringer, hver gang du synkroniserer iPhone vha. iTunes. Se “Synkronisere med iTunes” på side 18. Du kan få flere oplysninger om opdatering og gendannelse af iPhone-software, hvis du går til support.apple.com/kb/HT4623?viewlocale=da_DK. Gendanne iPhone Du kan bruge iCloud eller iTunes til at gendanne iPhone fra en sikkerhedskopi. Gendanne fra en iCloud-sikkerhedskopi: Nulstil iPhone for at slette alle indstillinger og oplysninger. Log ind på iCloud, og vælg Gendan fra en sikkerhedskopi i indstillingsassistenten. Se “Nulstille” på side 172. Gendanne fra en iTunes-sikkerhedskopi: Slut iPhone til den computer du normalt synkroniserer med, vælg iPhone i iTunes-vinduet, og klik på Gendan i resumevinduet. Når softwaren på iPhone er gendannet, kan du enten indstille den som en ny iPhone eller gendanne musik, videoer, programdata og andet indhold fra en sikkerhedskopi. Du kan få flere oplysninger om opdatering og gendannelse af iPhone-software, hvis du går til support.apple.com/kb/HT1414?viewlocale=da_DK. Arkivdeling Med Arkivdeling kan du vha. iTunes overføre arkiver via USB mellem iPhone og computeren. Du kan dele arkiver, der er oprettet med et kompatibelt program og arkiveret i et understøttet format. 180 Appendiks B Support og andre oplysningerProgrammer, der understøtter arkivdeling, vises på listen over arkivdelingsprogrammer i iTunes. Arkivlisten viser de dokumenter, der er på iPhone, for hvert program. Se i dokumentationen til programmet, hvordan det deler arkiver; det er ikke alle programmer, der understøtter denne funktion. Overfør et arkiv fra iPhone til computeren: I iTunes skal du gå til enhedens programvindue. I afsnittet Arkivdeling skal du vælge et program på listen. Til højre skal du vælge det arkiv, du vil overføre, og derefter klikke på “Arkiver til”. Overføre et arkiv fra computeren til iPhone: I iTunes skal du gå til enhedens programvindue. I afsnittet Arkivdeling skal du vælge et program og derefter klikke på Tilføj. Arkivet overføres med det samme til din enhed til brug med det valgte program. Slette et arkiv fra iPhone: I iTunes skal du gå til enhedens programvindue. I afsnittet Arkivdeling skal du vælge arkivet og trykke på tasten Slet. Oplysninger om sikkerhed, software og service Denne tabel beskriver, hvor du kan få flere oplysninger om sikkerhed, software og service til iPhone. Hvis du vil læse om Skal du Sikker brug af iPhone Se de nyeste oplysninger om sikkerhed og lovkrav i Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/manuals/iphone. Service og -support til iPhone, gode råd, fora og Apple-softwareoverførsler Gå til www.apple.com/dk/support/iphone. Service og support fra operatøren Kontakte operatøren eller gå til operatørens websted. De nyeste oplysninger om iPhone Gå til www.apple.com/dk/iphone. Oprettelse af en Apple-id Gå til appleid.apple.com/dk. Bruge iCloud Gå til www.apple.com/dk/support/icloud. Brug af iTunes Åbne iTunes og vælge Hjælp > iTunes-hjælp. Der findes en iTunes-øvelse på internettet (måske ikke tilgængelig i alle områder) på www.apple.com/dk/support/itunes. Brug af iPhoto med OS X Åbne iPhoto og vælge Hjælp > iPhoto-hjælp. Brug af Adressebog i OS X Åbne Adressebog, og vælg Hjælp > Hjælp til Adressebog. Brug af iCal med OS X Åbne iCal og vælge Hjælp > iCal-hjælp. Microsoft Outlook, Windows Adressebog eller Adobe Photoshop Elements Se den dokumentation, der fulgte med disse programmer. Finde serienummeret, IMEI-, ICCID- eller MEIDnummeret på iPhone Du kan finde serienummeret, IMEI-nummeret (International Mobile Equipment Identity), ICCD- eller MEID-nummeret (Mobile Equipment Identifier) på iPhone på æsken med iPhone Eller vælg Indstillinger > Generelt > Om på iPhone. Du kan få flere oplysninger på support.apple.com/kb/ht1267?viewlocale=da_DK. Hvordan du får service i henhold til garanti Først følge alle råd og anvisninger i denne vejledning og i ressourcerne på internettet. Gå derefter til www. apple.com/dk/support, eller se Vejledning med vigtige produktoplysninger på www.apple.com/dk/support/ manuals/iphone. Udskiftning af batteri Gå til www.apple.com/dk/batteries/replacements.html. Appendiks B Support og andre oplysninger 181Bruge iPhone i et virksomhedsmiljø Gå til www.apple.com/dk/iphone/business for at læse mere om virksomhedsfunktionerne i iPhone, inkl. Microsoft Exchange, IMAP, CalDAV, CardDAV, VPN m.m. Bruge iPhone med andre operatører Nogle operatører lader dig låse iPhone op til brug med deres netværk. Du kan finde ud af, om din operatør tilbyder denne mulighed, på support.apple.com/kb/HT1937?viewlocale=da_DK. Kontakt din operatør for at få oplysninger om godkendelse og indstilling. Du skal forbinde iPhone til iTunes for at gennemføre processen. Kræver evt. ekstra betaling. Du kan finde oplysninger om fejlfinding på support.apple.com/kb/TS3198?viewlocale=da_DK. Oplysninger om bortskaffelse og genbrug Apples genbrugsprogram (tilgængeligt i nogle lande): Du kan få oplysninger om gratis genbrug af din gamle mobiltelefon og få en forudbetalt adressemærkat og instruktioner på: www.apple.com/ dk/recycling Bortskaffelse og genbrug af iPhone: Du skal bortskaffe iPhone korrekt i henhold til lokale love og regulativer. Da iPhone indeholder elektroniske komponenter og et batteri, skal iPhone bortskaffes adskilt fra husholdningsaffald. Når iPhone skal bortskaffes, skal du kontakte de lokale myndigheder for at få oplysninger om mulighederne for bortskaffelse og genbrug, aflevere den i din lokale Apple-butik eller returnere den til Apple. Batteriet bliver fjernet og genbrugt på en miljøvenlig måde. Der findes flere oplysninger i: www.apple.com/dk/recycling EU – oplysninger om bortskaffelse af elektronik og batterier: Dette symbol betyder, at dit produkt og dets batteri bør genbruges adskilt fra husholdningsaffald i henhold til nationale love og regulativer. Når produktet skal bortskaffes, skal du aflevere det på en genbrugsplads, som er godkendt af de lokale myndigheder til genbrug af elektronisk udstyr. Forkert bortskaffelse af elektronisk udstyr kan resultere i en bøde. Den indsamling og genbrug af produktet og dets batteri, som sker i forbindelse med bortskaffelsen, hjælper med at bevare naturens ressourcer og sikrer, at produktet genbruges på en måde, som beskytter vores sundhed og miljø. Du finder oplysninger om indsamlings- og genbrugsservice til iPhone på: www.apple.com/dk/ recycling/nationalservices/europe.html Udskiftning af batteri i iPhone: Det udskiftelige batteri i iPhone må kun udskiftes af Apple eller en Apple Authorized Service Provider. Du kan få flere oplysninger om udskiftning af batterier på adressen: www.apple.com/dk/batteries/replacements.html Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. 182 Appendiks B Support og andre oplysningerTürkiye: EEE yönetmelig?ine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Es¸yalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur. Brasil: Informac¸o~es sobre descarte e reciclagem O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. Apple og miljøet Apple erkender sit ansvar for at medvirke til at mindske produkternes indvirkning på miljøet. Du kan få flere oplysninger på adressen: www.apple.com/dk/environment iPhones driftstemperatur Hvis den indre temperatur i iPhone overstiger den normale driftstemperatur, kan der ske følgende for at regulere temperaturen:  iPhone holder op med at oplade.  Skærmen bliver utydelig.  Mobilsignalet er svagt.  En temperaturadvarsel vises på skærmen. Vigtigt: Du kan ikke bruge iPhone, mens temperaturadvarslen vises – kun til nødopkald. Hvis iPhone ikke kan regulere den interne temperatur, går den på vågeblus, indtil den er kølet af. Du kan ikke foretage nødopkald med iPhone, hvis det sker. Flyt iPhone til et koldere sted, og vent nogle få minutter, før du prøver at bruge iPhone igen. Appendiks B Support og andre oplysninger 183K ? Apple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. Alle rettigheder forbeholdes. Apple, Apple-logoet, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, AirPlay, Aperture, Apple TV, Cover Flow, FaceTime, Finder, iBooks, iCal, iLife, iMovie, iPad, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, iTunes Extras, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers, OS X, Pages, Safari, Siri, Spotlight og logoet Works with iPhone er varemærker tilhørende Apple Inc. og registreret i USA og andre lande. AirPrint, iMessage, logoet Made for iPhone, Multi-Touch og Retina er varemærker tilhørende Apple Inc. Apple Store, Genius, iCloud, iTunes Plus, iTunes Store og MobileMe er servicemærker tilhørende Apple Inc. og registreret i USA og andre lande. App Store, iBookstore og iTunes Match er servicemærker tilhørende Apple Inc. IOS er et varemærke eller et registreret varemærke tilhørende Cisco i USA og andre lande og bruges i henhold til en licensaftale. Ping er et registreret varemærke tilhørende Karsten Manufacturing Corporation og bruges i USA i henhold til en licensaftale. NIKE og Swoosh Design er varemærker tilhørende NIKE, Inc. og dets datterselskaber og bruges i henhold til en licensaftale. Bluetooth®-mærket og -logoerne er registrerede varemærker ejet af Bluetooth SIG, Inc. og bruges af Apple Inc. i henhold til en licensaftale. Adobe og Photoshop er varemærker eller registrerede varemærker tilhørende Adobe Systems Incorporated i USA og/ eller andre lande. Andre firma- og produktnavne kan være varemærker tilhørende deres respektive ejere. Kortdata © 2010 Google. Omtale af tredjeparters produkter har kun oplysende karakter og skal ikke opfattes som en anbefaling. Apple påtager sig ikke noget ansvar for produkternes funktionsdygtighed. Alle evt. aftaler og garantier er indgået direkte mellem leverandørerne og brugerne. Alle oplysningerne i denne håndbog var korrekte på udgivelsestidspunktet. Apple påtager sig intet ansvar for evt. oversættelses- eller trykfejl. DK019-2267/2012-03 iPod shuffle User GuideContents 3 Chapter 1:  About iPod shuffle 3 What’s New in iPod shuffle 4 Chapter 2:  iPod shuffle Basics 4 iPod shuffle at a Glance 5 Using the iPod shuffle Controls 6 Connecting and Disconnecting iPod shuffle 7 About the iPod shuffle Battery 9 Chapter 3:  Setting Up iPod shuffle 9 About iTunes 10 Setting Up Your iTunes Library 11 Organizing Your Music 11 Connecting iPod shuffle to a Computer for the First Time 12 Adding Music to iPod shuffle 17 Chapter 4:  Listening to Music 17 Playing Music 18 Using VoiceOver 20 Setting Tracks to Play at the Same Volume 20 Setting a Volume Limit 21 Locking and Unlocking the iPod shuffle Buttons 22 Chapter 5:  Storing Files on iPod shuffle 22 Using iPod shuffle as an External Disk 24 Chapter 6:  Tips and Troubleshooting 26 Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software 27 Chapter 7:  Safety and Handling 27 Important Safety Information 28 Important Handling Information 30 Chapter 8:  Learning More, Service, and Support 31 Regulatory Compliance Information     21 3 Congratulations on purchasing iPod shuffle. WARNING: To avoid injury, read Chapter 7, Safety and Handling, on page 27 before using iPod shuffle. To use iPod shuffle, you put songs and other audio files on your computer and then sync them with iPod shuffle. Use iPod shuffle to: • Sync songs and playlists for listening on the go • Listen to podcasts, downloadable radio-style shows, delivered over the Internet • Listen to audiobooks purchased from the iTunes Store or audible.com • Store or back up files and other data, using iPod shuffle as an external disk What’s New in iPod shuffle • A VoiceOver button that announces track titles and artist names, lets you switch playlists, and reports battery status • Easy and intuitive controls • Support for syncing Genius Mixes • Support for syncing iTunes U collections About iPod shuffle2 4 Read this chapter to learn about the features of iPod shuffle, how to use its controls, and more. Your iPod shuffle package includes iPod shuffle, the Apple Earphones, and a USB 2.0 cable to connect iPod shuffle to your computer. iPod shuffle at a Glance Status light Earphone port Previous/Rewind Play/Pause Volume Down VoiceOver button Three-way switch Volume Up Clip Next/Fast-forward To use the Apple Earphones: m Plug the earphones into the earphone port on iPod shuffle. Then place the earbuds in your ears as shown. The earphone cord is adjustable. WARNING: Read all safety instructions about avoiding hearing damage in Important Safety Information on page 27 before using iPod shuffle. You can purchase other accessories, such as the Apple EarPods with Remote and Mic or the Apple In-Ear Headphones with Remote and Mic, at www.apple.com/ipodstore. The microphone isn’t supported on iPod shuffle. iPod shuffle BasicsChapter  2    iPod shuffle Basics 5 Using the iPod shuffle Controls The front controls, the VoiceOver button, and the three-way switch make it easy to play songs, audiobooks, audio podcasts, and iTunes U collections on iPod shuffle. To Do this Turn iPod shuffle on or off Slide the three-way switch (green shading on the switch indicates iPod shuffle is on). Play or pause Press Play/Pause (’). Increase or decrease the volume Press Volume Up (?) or Volume Down (D). Press and hold the buttons to quickly increase or decrease the volume. Set the play order Slide the three-way switch to play in order (/) or shuffle (¡). Go to the next track Press Next/Fast-forward (‘). Go to the previous track Press Previous/Rewind (]) within 6 seconds of the track starting. After 6 seconds, pressing Previous/Rewind (]) restarts the current track. Fast-forward Press and hold Next/Fast-forward (‘). Rewind Press and hold Previous/Rewind (]). Hear the track title and artist name Press the VoiceOver ( ) button. Hear a menu of playlists to choose from Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button. Press Next/Fast-forward (‘) or Previous/Rewind (]) to move through the playlist menu. Press the VoiceOver ( ) button or Play/Pause (’) to select a playlist. Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button again to exit without making a selection. Lock the iPod shuffle buttons (so nothing happens if you press them accidentally) Press and hold Play/Pause (’) until the status light blinks orange three times. Repeat to unlock the buttons. Reset iPod shuffle (if iPod shuffle isn’t responding or the status light is solid red) Turn iPod shuffle off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn it back on again. Find the iPod shuffle serial number Look under the clip on iPod shuffle. Or, in iTunes (with iPod shuffle connected to your computer), select iPod shuffle in the list of devices and click the Summary tab.Chapter  2    iPod shuffle Basics 6 Connecting and Disconnecting iPod shuffle Connect iPod shuffle to your computer to sync songs and other audio files, and to charge the battery. Disconnect iPod shuffle when you’re done. Important: To connect iPod shuffle to your computer, use only the USB 2.0 cable that came with iPod shuffle. Connecting iPod shuffle To connect iPod shuffle to your computer: m Plug one end of the included USB cable into the earphone port of iPod shuffle, and the other end into a high-power USB 2.0 port on your computer. Note: Don’t connect iPod shuffle to a USB port on your keyboard for charging. A longer USB cable is available separately at www.apple.com/ipodstore. The first time you connect iPod shuffle to your computer, iTunes helps you set up iPod shuffle and sync it with your iTunes library. By default, iTunes automatically syncs songs on iPod shuffle when you connect it to your computer. You can sync songs while your battery is charging. If you connect iPod shuffle to a different computer and iPod shuffle is set to sync music automatically, iTunes prompts you before syncing any music. If you click Yes, the songs and other audio files already on iPod shuffle are erased and replaced with songs and other audio files from the new computer iPod shuffle is connected to. For information about adding music to iPod shuffle or using iPod shuffle with more than one computer, see Chapter 4, Listening to Music, on page 17. Disconnecting iPod shuffle It’s important not to disconnect iPod shuffle from your computer while audio files are syncing or when iPod shuffle is being used as an external disk. It’s OK to disconnect iPod shuffle if the status light isn’t blinking orange, or if you see the “OK to disconnect” message at the top of the iTunes window. Important: If you see the “Do not disconnect” message in iTunes or if the status light on iPod shuffle is blinking orange, you must first eject iPod shuffle before disconnecting it. Failing to do so may damage files on iPod shuffle and require you to restore iPod shuffle in iTunes. For information about restoring, see Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software on page 26. If you enable iPod shuffle for disk use (see Using iPod shuffle as an External Disk on page 22), you must always eject iPod shuffle before disconnecting it.Chapter  2    iPod shuffle Basics 7 To eject iPod shuffle: m In iTunes, click the Eject (C) button next to iPod shuffle in the list of devices. If you’re using a Mac, you can also eject iPod shuffle by dragging the iPod shuffle icon on the desktop to the Trash. If you’re using a Windows PC, you can also eject iPod shuffle in My Computer or by clicking the Safely Remove Hardware icon in the Windows system tray and selecting iPod shuffle. To disconnect iPod shuffle: m Disconnect the USB cable from iPod shuffle and from your computer. About the iPod shuffle Battery iPod shuffle has a rechargeable internal battery that should be replaced only by an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For best results, the first time you use iPod shuffle, let it fully charge for about three hours. The battery is 80-percent charged in about two hours and fully charged in about three hours. If iPod shuffle isn’t used for a while, the battery might need to be recharged. You can sync music while the battery is charging. You can disconnect and use iPod shuffle before it’s fully charged. Charging the iPod shuffle Battery You can charge the iPod shuffle battery in two ways: • Connect iPod shuffle to your computer • Use the Apple USB Power Adapter, available separately. To charge the battery using your computer: m Connect iPod shuffle to a high-power USB 2.0 port on your computer using the included iPod shuffle USB cable. The computer must be turned on and not in sleep mode (some Mac models can charge iPod shuffle while in sleep). When the battery is charging, the status light on iPod shuffle is solid orange. When the battery is fully charged, the status light is green. In iTunes, the battery icon next to the name of your iPod shuffle also shows the battery status. The icon displays a lightning bolt when the battery is charging, and a plug when the battery is fully charged. If iPod shuffle is being used as an external disk or is syncing with iTunes, the status light blinks orange to let you know that you must eject iPod shuffle before disconnecting it. In this case, your battery may either be still charging or fully charged. If you don’t see the status light, iPod shuffle might not be connected to a high-power USB 2.0 port. Try another USB 2.0 port on your computer.Chapter  2    iPod shuffle Basics 8 If you want to charge the battery when you’re away from your computer, you can connect iPod shuffle to an Apple USB Power Adapter, available separately. To purchase iPod shuffle accessories, go to www.apple.com/ipodstore. To charge the battery using the Apple USB Power Adapter: 1 Connect the included iPod shuffle USB cable to the power adapter, and plug the other end into iPod shuffle. 2 Plug the power adapter into a working power outlet. Apple USB Power Adapter (your adapter may look different) iPod shuffle USB cable WARNING: Make sure the power adapter is fully assembled before plugging it into a power outlet. Read all safety instructions about using the Apple USB Power Adapter in Chapter 7, Safety and Handling, on page 27 before use. Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles. Battery life and number of charge cycles vary by use and settings. For information, go to www.apple.com/batteries. Checking the Battery Status You can check the battery status of iPod shuffle when it’s connected to your computer or disconnected. The status light tells you approximately how much charge is in the battery. If iPod shuffle is on and not connected to a computer, you can use VoiceOver to hear the battery status by pressing the VoiceOver button twice. Status light when disconnected VoiceOver message Solid green Good charge “Battery full” or “Battery 75%” or “Battery 50%” Solid orange Low charge “Battery 25%” Solid red Very low charge “Battery low” Status light when connected to computer Solid green Fully charged Solid orange Charging Blinking orange Do not disconnect (iTunes is syncing, or iPod shuffle is enabled for disk use); may be still charging or may be fully charged3 9 Use iTunes on your computer to set up iPod shuffle to play music and other audio content. Then connect iPod shuffle to your computer and sync it to your iTunes library. Read on to learn more about getting started with iPod shuffle, including: • Getting music from your CD collection, hard disk, or the iTunes Store (part of iTunes and available in some countries only) into the iTunes application on your computer • Organizing your music and other audio into playlists • Syncing songs, audiobooks, podcasts, and iTunes U collections in your iTunes library with iPod shuffle • Listening to music or other audio on the go About iTunes iTunes is the free software application you use to set up, organize, and manage your content on iPod shuffle. iTunes can sync music, audiobooks, and audio podcasts with iPod shuffle. If you haven’t already installed iTunes 10.7 or later (required for iPod shuffle) on your computer, you can download it at www.itunes.com/download. After you install iTunes, it opens automatically when you connect iPod shuffle to your computer. You can use iTunes to import music from CDs and the Internet, buy songs and other audio from the iTunes Store, create personal compilations of your favorite songs (called playlists), sync iPod shuffle, and adjust iPod shuffle settings. iTunes also has a feature called Genius, which creates instant playlists and mixes of songs from your iTunes library that go great together. You can sync Genius mixes and playlists from iTunes to iPod shuffle. To use Genius, you need an iTunes account. To learn how to set up Genius, see Using Genius in iTunes on page 11. iTunes has many other features. You can burn your own CDs that play in standard CD players (if your computer has a recordable CD drive); listen to streaming Internet radio; watch videos and TV shows; rate songs according to preference; and much more. For information about using these features, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. If you already have iTunes 10.7 or later installed on your computer and you’ve set up your iTunes library, you can skip to the next section, Connecting iPod shuffle to a Computer for the First Time on page 11. Setting Up iPod shuffleChapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 10 Setting Up Your iTunes Library To listen to music on iPod shuffle, you first need to get that music into your iTunes library on your computer. There are three ways to get music and other audio into your iTunes library: • Purchase music and audiobooks or download podcasts online from the iTunes Store. • Import music and other audio from audio CDs. • Add music and other audio that’s already on your computer to your iTunes library. Purchasing Songs and Download Podcasts Using the iTunes Store If you have an Internet connection, you can easily purchase and download songs, albums, and audiobooks online using the iTunes Store (available in selected countries). You can also subscribe to and download audio podcasts, and you can download free educational content from iTunes U. Video podcasts can’t be synced to iPod shuffle. To purchase music online using the iTunes Store, you set up a free iTunes account in iTunes, find the songs you want, and then buy them. If you already have an iTunes account, you can use that account to sign in to the iTunes Store and buy songs. You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts or iTunes U classes. To enter the iTunes Store, open iTunes and click iTunes Store (under Store) on the left side of the iTunes window. Adding Songs Already on Your Computer to Your iTunes Library If you have songs on your computer encoded in file formats that iTunes supports, you can easily add the songs to iTunes. To learn how to get songs from your computer into iTunes, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Importing Music from Your Audio CDs Into iTunes iTunes can import music and other audio from your audio CDs. If you have an Internet connection, iTunes gets the names of the songs on the CD from the Internet (if available) and lists them in the window. When you add the songs to iPod shuffle, the song information is included. To learn how to import music from your CDs into iTunes, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Entering Song Names and Other Information If you don’t have an Internet connection, if song information isn’t available for music you import, or if you want to include additional information (such as composer names), you can enter the information manually. To learn how to enter song information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 11 Organizing Your Music In iTunes, you can organize songs and other items into lists, called playlists, in any way you want. For example, you can create playlists with songs to listen to while exercising, or playlists with songs for a particular mood. You can also create Smart Playlists that update automatically based on rules you define. When you add songs to iTunes that match the rules, they automatically get added to the Smart Playlist. You can turn on Genius in iTunes and create playlists of songs that go great together, based on a song you select. Genius can also organize your iTunes library automatically by sorting and grouping songs into collections called Genius Mixes. You can create as many playlists as you like, using any of the songs in your iTunes library. You can’t create a playlist on iPod shuffle when it’s disconnected from iTunes. Adding a song to a playlist or later removing it doesn’t remove it from your iTunes library. When you listen to playlists on iPod shuffle, all playlists created in iTunes behave the same way. You can choose them by name on your iPod shuffle. To learn how to set up playlists in iTunes, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Using Genius in iTunes Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together and uses them to create Genius playlists and Genius Mixes. Genius is a free service, but you need an iTunes Store account to use it. If you don’t have an account, you can set one up when you turn on Genius. A Genius playlist is based on a song that you select. iTunes then compiles a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the one you selected. Genius Mixes are preselected compilations of songs that go great together. They’re created for you by iTunes, using songs from your iTunes library. Each Genius Mix is designed to provide a different listening experience each time you play it. iTunes creates up to 12 Genius Mixes, based on the variety of music in your iTunes library. To create Genius playlists and Genius Mixes, you first need to turn on Genius in iTunes. For information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Genius playlists and Genius Mixes created in iTunes can be synced to iPod shuffle like any other iTunes playlist. You can’t add Genius Mixes to iPod shuffle manually. Connecting iPod shuffle to a Computer for the First Time The first time you connect iPod shuffle to your computer after installing iTunes, iTunes opens and the Setup Assistant appears. If iTunes doesn’t open automatically, open it yourself. To use the iPod shuffle Setup Assistant: 1 Enter a name for iPod shuffle. This name will appear in the device list on the left side of the iTunes window. 2 Select your settings. Automatic syncing is selected by default. If you keep this option selected and Genius is turned on, iTunes syncs Genius Mixes from your iTunes library to iPod shuffle. If Genius isn’t turned on, iTunes fills iPod shuffle with songs from your iTunes library and places them in the “All Songs” playlist. For more information about automatic and manual syncing, see the next section.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 12 VoiceOver is also selected by default. Keep this option selected to hear track titles and artist names, change your playlists, and hear battery status while you listen to iPod shuffle. For more information, see Using VoiceOver on page 18. 3 Click Done. You can change the device name and settings any time you connect iPod shuffle to your computer. After you click Done, the Summary pane appears. If you selected automatic syncing, iPod shuffle begins syncing. Adding Music to iPod shuffle After your music is imported and organized in iTunes, you can easily add it to iPod shuffle. To manage how songs and other audio content are added to iPod shuffle from your computer, you connect iPod shuffle to your computer, and then use iTunes preferences to choose iPod shuffle settings. Adding Content Automatically or Manually You can set iTunes to add music to iPod shuffle in two ways: • Automatically syncing: When you connect iPod shuffle to your computer, iPod shuffle is automatically updated to match the songs and other items in your iTunes library. If Genius is turned on the first time you sync iPod shuffle, iTunes uses up to four Genius Mixes created from your iTunes library to fill iPod shuffle. If any free space remains, iTunes syncs additional songs from your iTunes library. If Genius isn’t turned on, iTunes syncs songs and playlists from your iTunes library to fill iPod shuffle. Later, you can modify automatic syncing options to include selected playlists, artists, albums, and genres. You can also automatically sync other audio, including podcasts, audiobooks, and iTunes U collections. See the following sections for more information. • Manually managing music: When you connect iPod shuffle, you can drag individual songs and playlists to iPod shuffle, and delete individual songs and playlists from iPod shuffle. Using this option, you can add songs from more than one computer without erasing songs from iPod shuffle. When you manage music manually, you must always eject iPod shuffle from iTunes before you can disconnect it. See Managing iPod shuffle Manually on page 15. Syncing Music Automatically By default, iPod shuffle is set to sync all songs and playlists when you connect it to your computer. This is the simplest way to add audio content to iPod shuffle—you just connect iPod shuffle to your computer, let it add songs, audiobooks, audio podcasts, and iTunes U collections automatically, and then disconnect it and go. If you added any songs to iTunes since the last time you connected iPod shuffle, they’re synced with iPod shuffle as space allows. If you deleted songs from iTunes, they’re removed from iPod shuffle.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 13 To sync music with iPod shuffle: m Simply connect iPod shuffle to your computer. If iPod shuffle is set to sync automatically, the update begins. Important: If you connect iPod shuffle to a computer that it hasn’t synced with, a message asks if you want to sync songs automatically. If you accept, all songs and other audio content are erased from iPod shuffle and replaced with songs and other items from that computer. If you don’t accept, you can still add songs to iPod shuffle manually without erasing any of the songs already on iPod shuffle. While music is being synced from your computer to iPod shuffle, the iTunes status window shows progress, and you see a sync icon next to iPod shuffle in the list of devices. When the update is done, you see the “iPod sync is complete” message in iTunes. A bar at the bottom of the iTunes window displays how much disk space is used by different types of content. If you don’t choose to automatically sync music to iPod shuffle during setup, you can do it later. If there isn’t enough space on iPod shuffle for all your music, you can set iTunes to sync only selected playlists, artists, albums, and genres. To set iTunes to sync music from selected playlists, artists, genres, and albums to iPod shuffle: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Music tab. 3 Select “Sync music,” and then choose “Selected playlists, artists, genres, and albums.” 4 Select the playlists, artists, genres, and albums you want. 5 To set iTunes to automatically fill any remaining space on iPod shuffle, select “Automatically fill free space with songs.” If you have Genius Mixes, iTunes uses them to fill the space first. If there’s no room for another Genius Mix, iTunes fills the remaining space on iPod shuffle with other songs. 6 Click Apply. The update begins automatically. If you select “Sync only checked songs” in the Summary pane, iTunes syncs only items that are checked. Syncing Genius Mixes to iPod shuffle You can set iTunes to sync Genius Mixes to iPod shuffle. Genius Mixes can only be synced automatically, so you can’t add Genius Mixes to iPod shuffle if you manage your content manually. If your Genius Mixes don’t fill the available space and you select the “Automatically fill free space with songs” option, iTunes selects and syncs additional songs from your iTunes library. To set iTunes to sync selected Genius Mixes to iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Music tab. 2 Select “Sync music,” and then choose “Selected playlists, artists, genres, and albums.” 3 Under Playlists, select the Genius Mixes you want. 4 Click Apply. If “Sync only checked songs” is selected in the Summary pane, iTunes syncs only items that are checked.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 14 Syncing Podcasts Automatically The settings for adding podcasts to iPod shuffle are unrelated to the settings for adding songs. Podcast settings don’t affect song settings, and vice versa. You can set iTunes to automatically sync all or selected podcasts, or you can add podcasts to iPod shuffle manually. To set iTunes to update the podcasts on iPod shuffle automatically: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Podcasts tab. 2 In the Podcasts pane, select “Sync Podcasts.” 3 Select the podcasts, episodes, and playlists you want, and set your sync options. 4 Click Apply. When you set iTunes to sync podcasts automatically, iPod shuffle is updated each time you connect it to your computer. If “Sync only checked songs” is selected in the Summary pane, iTunes syncs only items that are checked. Adding iTunes U Collections to iPod shuffle iTunes U is a part of the iTunes Store that features free lectures, language lessons, audiobooks, and more, which you can download and sync to iPod shuffle. The settings for adding iTunes U collections to iPod shuffle are unrelated to the settings for adding other content. iTunes U settings don’t affect other settings, and vice versa. You can set iTunes to automatically sync all or selected iTunes U collections, or you can add iTunes U content to iPod shuffle manually. To set iTunes to sync iTunes U content automatically: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the iTunes U tab. 2 In the iTunes U pane, select “Sync iTunes U.” 3 Select the collections and items you want, and set your sync options. 4 Click Apply. When you set iTunes to sync iTunes U content automatically, iPod shuffle is updated each time you connect it to your computer. If “Sync only checked songs” is selected in the Summary pane, iTunes syncs only items that are checked. Adding Audiobooks to iPod shuffle You can purchase and download audiobooks from the iTunes Store or audible.com, or import audiobooks from CDs, and listen to them on iPod shuffle. Use iTunes to add audiobooks to iPod shuffle. If you sync iPod shuffle automatically, each audiobook in your iTunes library is synced as a separate playlist, which you can select using VoiceOver. If you manage your content on iPod shuffle manually, you can add audiobooks one at a time. To sync audiobooks to iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Books tab. 2 Select Sync Audiobooks, and then do one of the following: • Select “All audiobooks.” • Select “Selected audiobooks,” and then specify the books you want. 3 Click Apply. The update begins automatically.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 15 Managing iPod shuffle Manually If you manage iPod shuffle manually, you can add and remove individual songs, playlists, podcasts, and audiobooks. You can add music and other audio content from multiple computers to iPod shuffle without erasing items already on iPod shuffle. You can add Genius playlists, but not Genius Mixes, to iPod shuffle manually. Setting iPod shuffle to manually manage music turns off automatic sync options in the Music, Podcasts, and iTunes U panes in iTunes. You can’t manually manage some content and automatically sync other content at the same time. If you set iTunes to manage content manually, you can set it later to sync automatically. To manually manage audio content on iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 2 In the Options section, select “Manually manage music.” 3 Click Apply. When you manage iPod shuffle manually, you must always eject iPod shuffle from iTunes before you disconnect it. To add a song or other item to iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, click Music or another item in the Library list. 2 Drag a song or other item to iPod shuffle in the list of devices. You can also drag entire playlists to sync them with iPod shuffle, or select multiple items and drag them all at once to iPod shuffle. To remove a song or other item from iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices. 2 Select Music, Audiobooks, or Podcasts under iPod shuffle. 3 Select a song or other item, and then press the Delete or Backspace key on your keyboard. If you manually remove a song or other item from iPod shuffle, it isn’t deleted from your iTunes library. To use iTunes to create a new playlist on iPod shuffle: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Add (?) button or choose File > New Playlist. 2 Type a name for the playlist. 3 Click Music or another item in the Library list, and then drag songs or other items to the playlist. If you make changes to any of your iTunes playlists, remember to drag the changed playlist to iPod shuffle when it’s connected to iTunes. To add songs to or remove songs from a playlist on iPod shuffle: m Drag a song to a playlist on iPod shuffle to add the song. Select a song in a playlist and press the Delete key on your keyboard to delete the song.Chapter  3    Setting Up iPod shuffle 16 To set iTunes to sync music and other audio content automatically: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 2 Deselect “Manually manage music.” 3 Click Apply. The update begins automatically. Fitting More Songs on iPod shuffle If your iTunes library contains songs in higher bit-rate formats, such as iTunes Plus, Apple Lossless, or WAV, you can set iTunes to convert songs to 128 kbps AAC format as they’re synced with iPod shuffle. This doesn’t affect the quality or size of the songs stored in iTunes. To convert higher bit-rate songs to AAC format: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices. 3 Click the Summary tab. 4 Select “Convert higher bit rate songs to 128 kbps AAC.” 5 Click Apply. Note: Songs in formats not supported by iPod shuffle must be converted if you want to sync them with iPod shuffle. For more information about formats supported by iPod shuffle, see If you can’t sync a song or other item to iPod shuffle on page 25.4 17 Read this chapter to learn about listening to iPod shuffle on the go. When you disconnect iPod shuffle from your computer, you can clip on iPod shuffle and listen to music, audiobooks, podcasts, and iTunes U content. VoiceOver lets you hear the name of the track (song or chapter in an audiobook or podcast) you’re playing, choose a different playlist, or hear battery status. Playing Music After you sync iPod shuffle with music and other audio content, you can listen to it. WARNING: Before using iPod shuffle, read all safety instructions, especially the section on hearing damage, in Chapter 7, Safety and Handling, on page 27. To listen to songs and other items on iPod shuffle: 1 Plug the earphones into iPod shuffle and place the earbuds in your ears. 2 Slide the three-way switch on iPod shuffle from OFF to play in order (/) or shuffle (¡). Playback begins. To conserve battery life when you aren’t using iPod shuffle, slide the three-way switch to OFF. To Do this Play or pause Press Play/Pause (’). Increase or decrease the volume Press Volume Up (?) or Volume Down (D). You hear a tone if you change the volume while iPod shuffle is paused. Go to the next track Press Next/Fast-forward (‘). Go to the previous track Press Previous/Rewind (]) within 6 seconds of the track starting. After 6 seconds, pressing Previous/Rewind (]) restarts the current track. Fast-forward Press and hold Next/Fast-forward (‘). Rewind Press and hold Previous/Rewind (]). Hear the track title and artist name Press the VoiceOver ( ) button. Hear the playlist menu Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button. When you hear the name of the playlist you want, press the VoiceOver ( ) button or Play/Pause (’) to select it. You can press Next/Fast-forward (‘) or Previous/Rewind (]) to cycle quickly through your playlists. Exit the playlist menu Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button. Listening to MusicChapter  4    Listening to Music 18 The status light blinks green once in response to most of your actions (playing, rewinding, fastforwarding, using VoiceOver, changing the volume, and so on). If you pause iPod shuffle, the status light blinks green steadily for 30 seconds. If you reach the upper or lower volume limit, the status light blinks orange three times. The battery status lights are described in Checking the Battery Status on page 8. Setting iPod shuffle to Play Songs in Order or Shuffle Songs You can set iPod shuffle to shuffle songs or play them in the order in which they’re organized in iTunes. When you turn on shuffle, books, podcasts, and Genius Mixes aren’t shuffled; they play in their iTunes order. To set iPod shuffle to play songs in order: m Slide the three-way switch to play in order (/). After the last song plays, iPod shuffle starts playing the first song again. To set iPod shuffle to shuffle: m Slide the three-way switch to shuffle (¡). To reshuffle songs, slide the three-way switch from shuffle (¡) to play in order (/) and back to shuffle again. Using VoiceOver iPod shuffle can help provide more control over your playback options by speaking track titles and artist names, and announcing playlists for you to choose from. VoiceOver also tells you battery status and speaks other messages. To hear these announcements, enable VoiceOver in iTunes. You can enable VoiceOver when you first set up iPod shuffle, or do it later. VoiceOver is available in selected languages. You set VoiceOver options on the Summary tab in iTunes. The following sections describe how to turn on and customize VoiceOver. To enable VoiceOver when you set up iPod shuffle: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes. The Enable VoiceOver option is selected by default. 3 Click Continue. 4 In the Summary tab, under Voice Feedback, choose the language you want from the Language pop-up menu. This sets the language for your spoken system messages and playlist names, as well as many of the song titles and artist names. Note: To pick a different language for specific tracks, select them in iTunes, choose File > Get Info, choose a VoiceOver language from the pop-up menu on the Options tab, and then click OK. 5 Click Apply. When setup is complete, VoiceOver is enabled on iPod shuffle.Chapter  4    Listening to Music 19 To enable VoiceOver at any time: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 3 Under Voice Feedback, select Enable VoiceOver. 4 Click Apply. 5 Choose the language you want from the pop-up menu under Voice Feedback. 6 Click Apply. When syncing is finished, VoiceOver is enabled. To disable VoiceOver: 1 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 2 Under Voice Feedback, deselect Enable VoiceOver. 3 Click Apply. When syncing is finished, VoiceOver is disabled. You’ll still hear some system announcements in English on iPod shuffle, such as battery status, error messages, and a generic menu of numbered playlists. You won’t hear track titles and artist names. Hearing Track Info VoiceOver can speak the current track title and artist name while you’re listening to iPod shuffle. To hear info for the current track: m Press the VoiceOver ( ) button during playback. You hear the current track title and artist name. You can use VoiceOver to navigate to another title. To navigate using track info: • If iPod shuffle is playing, press the VoiceOver ( ) button to hear info for the current track; press Next/Fast-forward (‘) to skip to the next track and hear its info; press Previous/Rewind (]) to move to the previous track and hear its info. • If iPod shuffle is paused, press the VoiceOver ( ) button to hear info for the current track; press Next/Fast-forward (‘) to hear info for the next track; press Previous/Rewind (]) to hear info for the previous track. Press the VoiceOver button or Play/Pause (’) to play the track. Changing Playlists When VoiceOver is enabled, you can hear the playlist names and choose any playlist you’ve synced to iPod shuffle. If audiobooks or audio podcasts are synced to iPod shuffle, their titles are also read as part of the playlist menu. If VoiceOver is disabled in iTunes, playlists are identified by numerical order (for example, “Playlist 1, Playlist 2,” and so on), rather than by name. The playlist menu announces items in this order: • The current playlist (if applicable) • “All Songs” (playlist of all the songs on iPod shuffle) • All playlists, including Genius playlists, in alphabetical order • All Genius Mixes, in alphabetical order • All podcasts, in alphabetical order • All iTunes U collections, in alphabetical order • All audiobooks, in alphabetical orderChapter  4    Listening to Music 20 To choose an item from the playlist menu: 1 Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button. You hear the names of your playlists. 2 When you hear the name of the playlist you want, press the VoiceOver ( ) button or Play/Pause (’) to select it. The first item in your playlist plays. When you’re listening to the playlist menu, you can press Next/Fast-forward (‘) or Previous/Rewind (]) to move forward or backward in the playlist menu. To restart a playlist, follow the steps above to select the playlist you want. To exit from the playlist menu: m Press and hold the VoiceOver ( ) button. Setting Tracks to Play at the Same Volume The loudness of songs and other audio may vary depending on how the tracks were recorded or encoded. You can set iTunes to automatically adjust the volume of tracks so they play at the same relative volume, and you can set iPod shuffle to use that iTunes volume setting. Sound Check is on by default in iTunes, but not on iPod shuffle. To set iTunes to play tracks at the same volume: 1 In iTunes, choose iTunes > Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or choose Edit > Preferences if you’re using a Windows PC. 2 Click Playback and select Sound Check. To set iPod shuffle to use the iTunes volume setting: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices. 3 Click the Summary tab. 4 In the Options section, select Enable Sound Check. 5 Click Apply. If you haven’t turned on Sound Check in iTunes, setting it on iPod shuffle has no effect. Setting a Volume Limit You can set a volume limit for iPod shuffle. You can also set a password in iTunes to prevent anyone else from changing this setting. If you set a volume limit for iPod shuffle, the status light blinks orange three times if you try to increase the volume beyond the limit. To set a volume limit for iPod shuffle: 1 Set iPod shuffle to the desired maximum volume. 2 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 3 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 4 In the Options section, select “Limit maximum volume.” 5 Drag the slider to the desired maximum volume.Chapter  4    Listening to Music 21 The initial slider setting shows the volume iPod shuffle was set to when you connected it to your computer. WARNING: The volume level may vary if you use different earphones or headphones. To remove the volume limit: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 3 In the Options section, deselect “Limit maximum volume.” Locking and Unlocking the iPod shuffle Buttons You can lock the buttons on iPod shuffle so that nothing happens if you press them accidentally. This feature requires software version 1.0.1 or later (connect iPod shuffle to iTunes to update the software). To lock the iPod shuffle buttons: m Press and hold Play/Pause (’) for three seconds. The status light blinks orange three times when the buttons become locked. If you press a button when the buttons are locked, the status light blinks orange once. To unlock the buttons: m Press and hold Play/Pause (’) again for three seconds. The status light blinks orange three times when the buttons become unlocked. If you’re wearing earphones, you hear a tone when you lock or unlock the buttons.5 22 Use iPod shuffle to carry your data as well as your music. Read this chapter to find out how to use iPod shuffle as an external disk. Using iPod shuffle as an External Disk You can use iPod shuffle as an external disk to store data files. To sync iPod shuffle with music and other audio that you want to listen to, you must use iTunes. You can’t play audio files that you copy to iPod shuffle using the Macintosh Finder or Windows Explorer. To use iPod shuffle as an external disk: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 3 In the Options section, select “Enable disk use.” You may need to scroll down to see the disk settings. 4 Click Apply. When you use iPod shuffle as an external disk, the iPod shuffle disk icon appears on the desktop on a Mac, or as the next available drive letter in Windows Explorer on a Windows PC. When iPod shuffle is enabled as a hard disk and you connect it to your computer, the status light blinks orange continuously. Be sure to eject iPod shuffle in iTunes before you disconnect it from your computer. Copying Files Between Computers When you enable disk use on iPod shuffle, you can copy files from one computer to another. iPod shuffle is formatted as a FAT-32 volume, which is supported by both Macs and PCs. This allows you to use iPod shuffle to copy files between computers with different operating systems. To copy files between computers: 1 After enabling disk use on iPod shuffle, connect it to the computer you want to copy the files from. Important: If iPod shuffle is set to sync automatically, when you connect iPod shuffle to a different computer or user account, a message asks if you want to erase iPod shuffle and sync with the new iTunes library. Click Cancel if you don’t want to erase what’s on iPod shuffle. 2 Using the computer’s file system (the Finder on a Mac, or Windows Explorer on a PC), drag the files to your iPod shuffle. 3 Disconnect iPod shuffle, and then connect it to the other computer. Again, click Cancel if you don’t want to erase what’s on iPod shuffle. 4 Drag the files from iPod shuffle to a location on the other computer. Storing Files on iPod shuffleChapter  5    Storing Files on iPod shuffle 23 Preventing iTunes from Opening Automatically You can keep iTunes from opening automatically when you connect iPod shuffle to your computer. To prevent iTunes from opening automatically: 1 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 2 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. 3 In the Options section, deselect “Open iTunes when this iPod is connected.” 4 Click Apply.6 24 Most problems with iPod shuffle can be solved quickly by following the advice in this chapter. The 5 Rs: Reset, Retry, Restart, Reinstall, Restore Remember these five basic suggestions if you have a problem with iPod shuffle. Try these steps one at a time until the problem is resolved. If one of the following doesn’t help, read on for solutions to specific problems. • Reset iPod shuffle by turning it off, waiting 10 seconds, and then turning it back on again. • Retry with a different USB 2.0 port if you cannot see iPod shuffle in iTunes. • Restart your computer, and make sure you have the latest software updates installed. • Reinstall iTunes software from the latest version on the web. • Restore iPod shuffle. See Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software on page 26. If the status light glows red persistently or you hear the error message “Please use iTunes to restore” Connect iPod shuffle to your computer and restore it in iTunes. See Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software on page 26. If iPod shuffle won’t turn on or respond • Connect iPod shuffle to a high-power USB 2.0 port on your computer. Your iPod shuffle battery may need to be recharged. • Turn iPod shuffle off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn it on again. • You may need to restore iPod shuffle software. See Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software on page 26. If iPod shuffle isn’t playing music • iPod shuffle might not have any music on it. If you hear the message “Please use iTunes to sync music,” connect iPod shuffle to your computer to sync music to it. • Slide the three-way switch off and then on again. • Make sure the earphone or headphone connector is pushed in all the way. • Make sure the volume is adjusted properly. A volume limit might be set. See Setting a Volume Limit on page 20. • iPod shuffle might be paused. Try pressing Play/Pause (’). Tips and TroubleshootingChapter  6    Tips and Troubleshooting 25 If you connect iPod shuffle to your computer and nothing happens • Connect iPod shuffle to a high-power USB 2.0 port on your computer. Your iPod shuffle battery may need to be recharged. • Make sure you’ve installed the latest iTunes software from http://www.itunes.com/download. • Try connecting the USB cable to a different USB 2.0 port on your computer. Make sure the USB cable is firmly connected to iPod shuffle and to the computer. Make sure the USB connector is oriented correctly. It can be inserted only one way. • iPod shuffle might need to be reset. Turn iPod shuffle off, wait 10 seconds, and then turn it back on again. • If iPod shuffle doesn’t appear in iTunes or the Finder, the battery may be completely discharged. Let iPod shuffle charge for several minutes to see if it comes back on. • Make sure you have the required computer and software. See If you want to double-check the system requirements on page 26. • Try restarting your computer. • You might need to restore iPod software. See Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software on page 26. • iPod shuffle may need to be repaired. You can arrange for service on the iPod shuffle Service & Support website at www.apple.com/support/ipodshuffle/service. If you can’t sync a song or other item to iPod shuffle The song might have been encoded in a format that iPod shuffle doesn’t support. The following audio file formats are supported by iPod shuffle. These include formats for audiobooks and podcasts: • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (8 to 320 kbps) • Protected AAC (from the iTunes Store) • Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format) • MP3 (8 to 320 kbps) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • Audible (formats 2, 3, 4, Audible Enhanced Audio, AAX, and AAX+) • WAV • AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4) • AIFF A song encoded in Apple Lossless format has near CD-quality sound, but takes up only about half as much space as a song encoded in AIFF or WAV format. The same song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default. You can have iPod shuffle automatically convert files encoded at higher bit rates to 128 kbps AAC files as they’re synced with iPod shuffle. See Fitting More Songs on iPod shuffle on page 16. Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert unprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3 format. This can be useful if you have a collection of music encoded in WMA format. iPod shuffle doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible.com format 1. If you have a song in iTunes that isn’t supported by iPod shuffle, you can convert it to a format iPod shuffle supports. For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.Chapter  6    Tips and Troubleshooting 26 If you want to double-check the system requirements To use iPod shuffle, you must have: • One of the following computer configurations: • A Macintosh with a USB 2.0 port • A Windows PC with a USB 2.0 port or a USB 2.0 card installed • One of the following operating systems: Mac OS X v10.5.8 or later, Windows Vista, or Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later • Internet access (a broadband connection is recommended) • iTunes 10.7 or later (you can download iTunes from www.itunes.com/download) If your Windows PC doesn’t have a high-power USB 2.0 port, you can purchase and install a USB 2.0 card. High-power USB 2.0 port If you want to use iPod shuffle with a Mac and a Windows PC If your iPod shuffle is set to manually manage music, you can add content to it from more than one iTunes library, regardless of the operating system on the computer. If your iPod shuffle is set to sync automatically, when you connect iPod shuffle to a different computer or user account, a message asks if you want to erase iPod shuffle and sync with the new iTunes library. Click Cancel if you want to keep the contents of iPod shuffle as is. You can use iPod shuffle as an external disk with both Macintosh computers and PCs, allowing you to copy files from one operating system to the other. See Chapter 5, Storing Files on iPod shuffle, on page 22. Updating and Restoring iPod shuffle Software You can use iTunes to update or restore the iPod shuffle software. It’s recommended that you update iPod shuffle to use the latest software. You can also restore the software, which returns iPod shuffle to its original state. • If you update, the software is updated but your settings, songs, and other data aren’t affected. • If you restore, all data is erased from iPod shuffle, including songs and any other data. All iPod shuffle settings are restored to their original state. To update or restore iPod shuffle: 1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download. 2 Connect iPod shuffle to your computer. 3 In iTunes, select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. The Version section tells you whether iPod shuffle is up to date or needs a newer version of the software. 4 Do one of the following: • To install the latest version of the software, click Update. • To restore iPod shuffle to its original settings, click Restore. Restoring erases all data from iPod shuffle. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process.7 27 This chapter contains important safety and handling information for iPod shuffle. WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire, electric shock, or other injuries, or damage to iPod shuffle or other property. Read all safety information below before using iPod shuffle. Keep this user guide for your iPod shuffle handy for future reference. Important Safety Information Proper handling  Do not drop, disassemble, open, crush, bend, deform, puncture, shred, microwave, incinerate, paint, or insert foreign objects into iPod shuffle. Water and wet locations  Do not use iPod shuffle in rain, or near washbasins or other wet locations. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on iPod shuffle. In case iPod shuffle gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPod shuffle (slide the three-way switch to OFF) before cleaning, and allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt to dry iPod shuffle with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven or hair dryer. iPod shuffle repairs  Never attempt to repair or modify iPod shuffle yourself. If iPod shuffle has been submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. iPod shuffle doesn’t contain any user-serviceable parts. Disassembling iPod shuffle, including the removal of the back cover, may cause damage that is not covered under warranty. For service information, choose iPod Help from the Help menu in iTunes or go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service. The rechargeable battery in iPod shuffle should be replaced only by an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information about batteries, go to www.apple.com/support/ipod/service/battery. Apple USB Power Adapter  If you use the Apple USB Power Adapter (available separately at www.apple.com/ipodstore) to charge iPod shuffle, make sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power Adapter with wet hands. Do not use any power adapter other than the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge your iPod shuffle. The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use. Always allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter and use care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any of the following conditions exist: • The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged. • The adapter is exposed to rain, liquids, or excessive moisture. • The adapter case has become damaged. Safety and HandlingChapter  7    Safety and Handling 28 • You suspect the adapter needs service or repair. • You want to clean the adapter. Hearing damage  Permanent hearing loss may occur if earbuds or headphones are used at high volume. Set the volume to a safe level. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing: • Limit the amount of time you use earbuds or headphones at high volume. • Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings • Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you. For information about how to set a volume limit on iPod shuffle, see Setting a Volume Limit on page 20. Headphones safety  Use of earphones (even if used in only one ear) while driving a vehicle or riding a bicycle is not recommended and is illegal in some areas. Check and obey the applicable laws and regulations on the use of earphones and devices such as iPod shuffle in the areas where you drive or ride. Be careful and attentive while driving. Stop using iPod shuffle if you find it disruptive or distracting while operating any type of vehicle, or performing any other activity that requires your full attention. Important Handling Information NOTICE: Failure to follow these handling instructions could result in damage to iPod shuffle or other property. Carrying iPod shuffle  iPod shuffle contains sensitive components. Do not bend, drop, or crush iPod shuffle. Using connectors and ports  Never force a connector into a port. Check for obstructions on the port. If the connector and port don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port. Keeping iPod shuffle within acceptable temperatures  Operate iPod shuffle in a place where the temperature is always between 32º and 95º F (0º and 35º C). iPod shuffle play time might temporarily shorten in low-temperature conditions. Store iPod shuffle in a place where the temperature is always between -4º and 113º F (-20º and 45º C). Don’t leave iPod shuffle in your car, because temperatures in parked cars can exceed this range. When you’re using iPod shuffle or charging the battery, it’s normal for iPod shuffle to get warm. The exterior of iPod shuffle functions as a cooling surface that transfers heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside. Keeping the outside of iPod shuffle clean  To clean iPod shuffle, unplug all cables, turn it off (slide the three-way switch to OFF), and use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPod shuffle.Chapter  7    Safety and Handling 29 Disposing of iPod shuffle properly  For information about the proper disposal of iPod shuffle, including other important regulatory compliance information, see Disposal and Recycling Information on page 32. Compliance Information For compliance information about your iPod shuffle, see Regulatory Compliance Information on page 31. 8 30 You can find more information about using iPod shuffle in onscreen help and on the web. The following table describes where to get iPod-related software and service information. To learn about Do this Service and support, discussions, tutorials, and Apple software downloads Go to: www.apple.com/support/ipodshuffle Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas only), go to: www.apple.com/itunes/tutorials The latest information about iPod shuffle Go to: www.apple.com/ipodshuffle Registering iPod shuffle Install iTunes on your computer and connect iPod shuffle. Finding the iPod shuffle serial number Look under the clip on iPod shuffle. Or, in iTunes (with iPod shuffle connected to your computer), select iPod shuffle in the list of devices, and then click the Summary tab. Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this booklet, the onscreen help, and online resources, and then go to: www.apple.com/support/ipodshuffle/service Learning More, Service, and SupportFCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and TV Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance 1 Infinite Loop, MS 91-1EMC Cupertino, CA 95014 Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. VCCI Class B Statement Korea Class B Statement European Community This device complies with the LVD and EMC Directives. Battery Replacement The rechargeable battery in iPod shuffle should be replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services, go to: www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html Regulatory Compliance Information 31Disposal and Recycling Information Your iPod must be disposed of properly according to local laws and regulations. Because this product contains a battery, the product must be disposed of separately from household waste. When your iPod reaches its end of life, contact Apple or your local authorities to learn about recycling options. For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to: www.apple.com/recycling China Battery Statement Battery Charger Efficiency European Union—Disposal Information The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product and/or its battery shall be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. The separate collection and recycling of your product and/or its battery at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. Union Européenne—informations sur l’élimination Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que, conformément aux lois et réglementations locales, vous devez jeter votre produit et/ou sa batterie séparément des ordures ménagères. Lorsque ce produit arrive en fin de vie, apportez-le à un point de collecte désigné par les autorités locales. La collecte séparée et le recyclage de votre produit et/ou de sa batterie lors de sa mise au rebut aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à s’assurer qu’il est recyclé de manière à protéger la santé humaine et l’environnement. Europäische Union—Informationen zur Entsorgung Das oben aufgeführte Symbol weist darauf hin, dass dieses Produkt und/oder die damit verwendete Batterie den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend und vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden muss. Geben Sie dieses Produkt zur Entsorgung bei einer offiziellen Sammelstelle ab. Durch getrenntes Sammeln und Recycling werden die Rohstoffreserven geschont und es ist sichergestellt, dass beim Recycling des Produkts und/ oder der Batterie alle Bestimmungen zum Schutz von Gesundheit und Umwelt eingehalten werden. Unione Europea—informazioni per lo smaltimento Il simbolo qui sopra significa che, in base alle leggi e alle normative locali, il prodotto e/o la sua batteria dovrebbero essere riciclati separatamente dai rifiuti domestici. Quando il prodotto diventa inutilizzabile, portalo nel punto di raccolta stabilito dalle autorità locali. La raccolta separata e il riciclaggio del prodotto e/o della sua batteria al momento dello smaltimento aiutano a conservare le risorse naturali e assicurano che il riciclaggio avvenga nel rispetto della salute umana e dell’ambiente. Europeiska unionen—Information om kassering Symbolen ovan betyder att produkten och/eller dess batteri enligt lokala lagar och bestämmelser inte får kastas tillsammans med hushållsavfallet. När produkten har tjänat ut måste den tas till en återvinningsstation som utsetts av lokala myndigheter. Genom att låta den uttjänta produkten och/eller dess batteri tas om hand för återvinning hjälper du till att spara naturresurser och skydda hälsa och miljö. Tu¨rkiye Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeligine Uygundur Brasil—Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. Apple and the Environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impacts of our operations and products. For more information, go to: www.apple.com/environment 32KApple Inc. © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, Finder, iPod, iPod shuffle, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS X, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple Store, Genius, iTunes Plus, and iTunes Store are service marks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Other company and product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. 019-2359/2012-09 Compressor 4 User ManualCopyright © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of Compressor software may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Shift-Option-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Note: Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates to its system software, applications, and Internet sites, images shown in this manual may be slightly different from what you see on your screen. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, the Apple logo, AppleScript, Apple TV, Bonjour, DVD Studio Pro, Final Cut, Final Cut Pro, Finder, FireWire, iPhone, iPod, iTunes, Mac, Mac OS, QuickTime, Shake, and Xsan are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad and NetInfo are trademarks of Apple Inc. AppleCare is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works, © 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. The YouTube logo is a trademark of Google Inc. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. Production stills from the film “Koffee House Mayhem” provided courtesy of Jean-Paul Bonjour. “Koffee House Mayhem” © 2004 Jean-Paul Bonjour. All rights reserved. http://www.jeanpaulbonjour.com Production stills from the film “A Sus Ordenes” provided courtesy of Eric Escobar. “A Sus Ordenes” © 2004 Eric Escobar. All rights reserved. http://www.kontentfilms.comPreface 9 Welcome to Compressor 9 About Compressor 10 About the Compressor Documentation 10 Additional Resources Chapter 1 11 Getting Started Quickly 11 Terms Used by Compressor 12 Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method 17 Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method 24 Optional Tasks You Can Perform Before Submitting a Batch Chapter 2 27 Ways to Use Compressor 28 Typical Compressor Scenarios 29 Compressor Features Chapter 3 31 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 31 Compressor Concepts and Terms 34 Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings 36 Choosing an Output Format 37 Creating a Compressor Batch 39 Viewing Transcoding Status 39 Optional Compressor Shortcuts Chapter 4 41 The Compressor Interface 42 Compressor Windows and the Transcoding Workflow 43 Creating and Managing Compressor Layouts 46 Working with the Compressor Windows 49 Batch Window 52 Settings Tab 53 Destinations Tab 53 Inspector Window 62 History Window 63 Preview Window 65 Apple Qmaster Sharing Window 3 Contents66 Share Monitor 67 Droplet Windows 67 About Changing Values and Timecode Entries 69 Keyboard Shortcuts Chapter 5 71 Setting Compressor Preferences 71 About Compressor Preferences 74 Using Compressor Preferences Chapter 6 77 Importing Source Media Files 77 About the Batch Window 81 Adding Source Media Files to a Batch to Create Jobs 89 Using the Inspector with Source Media Files 92 Tips on Importing Source Media Files Chapter 7 95 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 96 About the Settings Tab 99 Using the Inspector with Settings 100 Duplicating Settings 102 Creating a Setting from Scratch 103 Searching for a Setting 103 Previewing a Setting 105 Deleting Settings 106 Creating Groups of Settings 107 Distributing and Sharing Settings 108 Example: Creating Custom Groups and Settings for DVD Chapter 8 111 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 111 Assigning Settings 116 Assigning Destinations 118 General Job and Target Information 120 General Batch Information 127 Using Final Cut Pro and Motion with Compressor 129 Using Distributed Processing with Compressor Chapter 9 131 Creating AIFF Files 131 Creating AIFF Output Files 132 About the AIFF Encoder Pane 132 About the Sound Settings Dialog 133 QuickTime Audio Sample Sizes and Rates 134 Choosing an Audio Codec for Distribution 134 Configuring AIFF Settings 4 ContentsChapter 10 135 Creating Common Audio Format Files 135 Creating Common Audio Format Files 136 About the Common Audio Formats Pane 136 Configuring Common Audio Formats Settings Chapter 11 139 Creating DV Stream Output Files 139 About the DV Stream Encoder Pane 140 DV Transcoding Workflow Chapter 12 141 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 142 About the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder Pane 148 General Information About Creating Dolby Digital Professional Files 149 Converting Stereo Audio Files to Dolby Digital Professional Format 150 Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) 153 Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Methods) 155 Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels with Droplets 155 Options for Spatial Mixing Chapter 13 157 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files 158 About the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder Pane 161 Chapter and Podcast Markers for Apple Devices 162 Aspect Ratios for Apple Devices 162 H.264 Workflows for Apple Devices 163 Configuring Settings for H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files Chapter 14 165 Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc 166 About the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc Encoder Pane 168 H.264 Workflows for Optical Disc Chapter 15 169 Creating Image Sequence Files 169 Creating Image Sequence Output Files 170 About the Image Sequence Encoder Pane 171 Configuring Image Sequence Settings Chapter 16 175 Creating MP3 Output Files 175 Common Uses for MP3 176 About the MP3 Encoder Pane 177 MP3 Transcoding Workflow Chapter 17 179 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 179 Common Uses for MPEG-1 180 MPEG-1 Specifications 181 About the MPEG-1 Encoder Pane Contents 5182 About the MPEG-1 Video Tab 183 About the MPEG-1 Audio Tab 184 About System and Elementary Streams 184 MPEG-1 Transcoding Workflow 185 Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for Web Use 187 Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for DVD Use 187 Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting 189 Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting 191 Optional—Creating an MPEG-1 for DVD Group and Destination Chapter 18 193 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 193 About Standard Definition MPEG-2 194 About High Definition Sources and MPEG-2 194 About Elementary, Transport, and Program Streams 195 About the MPEG-2 Encoder Pane 206 MPEG-2 Reference Information 210 MPEG-2 Transcoding Workflow 216 Example MPEG-2 Settings Chapter 19 217 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 217 About MPEG-4 Part 2 218 About the MPEG-4 Part 2 Encoder Pane 222 Using Default MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings 223 Customizing MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings 225 Audio Podcasting Workflow 228 Adding Additional Settings and Presets Chapter 20 229 Creating QuickTime Export Component Files 229 Creating QuickTime Export Component Output Files 230 Installing QuickTime Export Component Plug-ins 230 About the iPod Plug-in 231 About the QuickTime Export Components Encoder Pane 231 Configuring Export Components Settings Chapter 21 233 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 233 Creating QuickTime Output Files 234 About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane 240 QuickTime Transcoding Workflow 244 Understanding Codecs 244 QuickTime Video Codecs 245 QuickTime Audio Codecs Chapter 22 247 Adding Filters to a Setting 247 Working with Filters 6 Contents249 About the Filters Pane 250 Video Filters Tab 257 Audio Filters Tab 259 Color Tab 260 Adding Filters to a Setting Chapter 23 263 Working with Frame Controls 263 About the Frame Controls Pane 268 Adding Frame Controls to a Setting 269 About Deinterlacing 270 About Reverse Telecine 273 Using the Retiming Controls Chapter 24 277 Adding Geometry Settings 277 Working with Cropping, Scaling, and Padding 279 About the Geometry Pane 283 Making Geometry Adjustments to a Setting Chapter 25 287 Adding Actions 287 Working with Post-Transcoding Actions 287 Adding Setting Actions 289 Adding Job Actions Chapter 26 305 Using the Preview Window 305 About the Preview Window 311 Previewing a Clip 316 Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window 317 Working with Markers and Poster Frames 324 About the Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts Chapter 27 325 Creating and Changing Destinations 326 About the Destinations Tab 327 Using the Inspector with Destinations 327 Creating a Destination 329 Warning Triangles 330 Deleting and Duplicating a Destination Chapter 28 333 Using Droplets 334 Creating Droplets 336 About the Droplet Window 338 Checking Droplet Settings 340 Using a Droplet to Transcode Source Media Files 342 Using Droplets to Create Jobs and Settings in Compressor 343 Droplet Tips Contents 7Chapter 29 345 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 345 Distributed Processing Basics 347 Basic Components of the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System 354 Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus 356 Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters 359 The Interfaces in the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System 366 Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor 370 General Information About Clusters 381 Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator 384 Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake Appendix A 387 Keyboard Shortcuts 387 General Compressor Keyboard Shortcuts 388 Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts Appendix B 391 Solving Problems 391 Resources for Solving Problems 391 Solutions to Common Problems 393 Contacting AppleCare Support Appendix C 395 Using the Command Line 395 Shell Commands for Submitting Compressor Jobs 8 ContentsCompressor is an essential part of the video compression process. It makes compression fast, efficient, and convenient, giving you more options in your choices of compression settings and output formats. This preface covers the following: • About Compressor (p. 9) • About the Compressor Documentation (p. 10) • Additional Resources (p. 10) About Compressor Compressor is targeted at video postproduction professionals and compressionists who require high performance and maximum control over the final digital content for DVD authoring, streaming media servers, and wireless devices. Compressor gives you resizing, cropping, image processing, encoding, and delivery options, and offers batch processing, VBR options, and H.264 encoding. You can also use Droplets and AppleScript, specify and save transcode settings, use filters, specify destinations, and more. Compressor also provides a variety of output formats for Apple devices, DVD, web, CD, and kiosk. Important: Compressor 4 is designed to work closely with Final Cut Pro X and later and Motion 5 and later and is required for the Send to Compressor feature. All mentions of Final Cut Pro and Motion in this document refer to these versions. 9 Welcome to Compressor PrefaceAbout the Compressor Documentation Compressor comes with various documents that will help you get started as well as provide detailed information about the application. (To access onscreen help for Compressor, open Compressor and choose Help > Compressor Help.) • Compressor User Manual: This comprehensive document describes the Compressor interface, commands, and menus and gives step-by-step instructions for using Compressor and accomplishing specific tasks. It also contains information for configuring an Apple Qmaster distributed processing system for more efficient transcoding and rendering. It is written for users of all levels of experience. • Apple Qadministrator User Manual: This document explains how to manually set up and manage clusters for use in an Apple Qmaster distributed processing system. • Apple Qmaster User Manual: This document explains how to use Apple Qmaster as a client for submitting rendering jobs from Shake, Maya, and other applications, to a distributed processing system. • Share Monitor User Manual: This brief document describes how to use Share Monitor to monitor the transcoding progress of batches and jobs. Additional Resources Along with the documentation that comes with Compressor, there are a variety of other resources you can use to find out more about Compressor. Compressor Website For general information and updates, as well as the latest news on Compressor, go to: • http://www.apple.com/finalcutpro/compressor Apple Service and Support Websites For software updates and answers to the most frequently asked questions for all Apple products, go to the general Apple Support web page. You’ll also have access to product specifications, reference documentation, and Apple and third-party product technical articles. • http://www.apple.com/support For software updates, documentation, discussion forums, and answers to the most frequently asked questions for Compressor, go to: • http://www.apple.com/support/compressor 10 Preface Welcome to CompressorCompressor contains a number of predefined settings that allow you to start transcoding immediately. You can begin transcoding media files as soon as you install Compressor if you have one or more source media files and the preexisting Compressor batch templates or settings and destinations suit your transcoding needs. This chapter covers the following: • Terms Used by Compressor (p. 11) • Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method (p. 12) • Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method (p. 17) • Optional Tasks You Can Perform Before Submitting a Batch (p. 24) Terms Used by Compressor There are a few terms used by Compressor that you should feel comfortable with before you begin using it. A batch is the heart of the transcode process. It contains one or more source media files, which are the files you want to convert, or transcode, to another format. Each source media file creates its own job. This means that a batch can contain multiple jobs, with each job based on its own source media file. Each job also has at least one target. The targets define what sort of output file should be created by the transcoding process and where it should be placed. You can have multiple targets assigned to a job, which means that you can easily create multiple output files, each with a different format. Each target has three parts. • The setting: The setting part of a target defines the transcoding process, including the encoder format that is used as well as a variety of filters and geometry attributes. • The destination: The destination part of a target defines where the output file is saved. It also defines the rules that are used to create the output filename. Compressor includes a preference setting that allows you to specify a default destination. 11 Getting Started Quickly 1• The output filename: You can edit the output filename part of the target if for some reason you do not want to use the name generated based on the destination. Note: You can transcode a job only after it has at least one setting assigned to it. If you need to create your own settings, or modify those that come with Compressor, see The Basic Transcoding Workflow and Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings. Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method Batch templates simplify and accelerate your transcoding workflow. The following workflow shows you a quick and easy way to use Compressor with batch templates. • Stage 1: Choosing a Batch Template • Stage 2: Adding a Source Media File • Stage 3: Submitting the Batch • Stage 4: Using Post-Transcoding Actions • Stage 5: Saving Custom Batch Templates—Optional Stage 1: Choosing a Batch Template To use Compressor with this workflow, you must choose a batch template. To open Compressor and choose a batch template 1 Double-click the Compressor icon in the Applications folder. Compressor opens with the Batch Template Chooser and an empty untitled batch with a placeholder job. 12 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyNote: The Batch Template Chooser does not appear if you have previously selected the “Don’t show this dialog again” checkbox, or, in Compressor preferences, selected Use Blank Template. Select Show Template Chooser in Compressor preferences to have the Batch Template Chooser appear when you are creating new batches. Alternatively, you can choose File > New Batch From Template to create a new batch and have the Batch Template Chooser appear. The Batch Template Chooser contains options for the standard Apple batch templates (described in step 2). You can also add custom batch templates. For more information, see Creating a Custom Batch Template. Note: To see the Compressor interface configured similarly to what is shown in this document, choose a Standard layout from the Layouts submenu of the Window menu. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 132 Click one of the options in the Batch Template Chooser to select it. The standard Apple batch templates are listed below. • Create Audio Podcast: Use this template to create an AAC audio file suitable for podcasting and add it to the iTunes library. • Create Blu-ray disc: Use this template to create BD H.264 video and Dolby Digital Professional (.ac3) audio files and automatically burn them to a Blu-ray disc or an AVCHD disc (AVCHD discs can be played in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format). • Create DVD: Use this template to create a standard definition DVD using MPEG-2 (.m2v) video and Dolby Digital Professional (.ac3) audio and automatically burn it to a disc. • HTTP Live Streaming: Use this template to create a set of files you can use to stream a movie to iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac, using an ordinary server. • Publish to Apple TV: Use this template to create a video file suitable for viewing on Apple TV and add it to the iTunes library. • Publish to YouTube: Use this template to create a video file suitable for viewing on YouTube and upload it to a YouTube account. Note: Your choice of a template should be based on the intended use of the output media file you are creating. If there is no obvious template for your intended workflow, you may want to try the manual method. For more information, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method. For information about creating custom templates, see Creating a Custom Batch Template. 3 Click Choose. 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyCompressor applies a target to the placeholder job. The target contains the appropriate transcoding setting (based on the template you chose), the default destination (Source), and a suggested output filename, based on the source filename and the name of the applied setting. By default, the batch templates use Source (the same folder as the source media files originated from) as the destination for the encoded files. For information about choosing other destinations, see Creating and Changing Destinations. Stage 2: Adding a Source Media File Drag a source file from the Finder or the desktop to the placeholder job in the Batch window. Note: You can drag in only one source file because batch templates contain only one job. If you drag multiple files to the job, only the last file is added to this job and all other files are ignored. Stage 3: Submitting the Batch Once the job includes a source media file, a setting, a destination, and an output filename, it is ready for processing. To submit the batch for processing µ Click the Submit button to submit the batch containing your job. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 15A dialog appears where you can name this submission, choose whether to use distributed processing, and set the priority of this submission. In most cases you can leave the settings as they are and just click Submit. For more details about this Submit dialog, see Submitting a Batch. After you submit a batch, you can open the Compressor History window or the Share Monitor application so you can monitor the transcoding progress of your batch. You can also set Compressor preferences to open Share Monitor automatically. Stage 4: Using Post-Transcoding Actions Almost every batch template includes an automatic post-transcoding action. When Compressor has completed transcoding one of these batch template jobs to an output media file, it will execute a corresponding automatic action, such as uploading the file to a YouTube account, running an Automator workflow, or burning a DVD. For more information about job actions such as these, see Job Action Tab and Adding Actions. The following list indicates the default post-transcoding job action for each Compressor batch template. • Create Audio Podcast: Add to iTunes Library. • Create Blu-ray disc: Create Blu-ray disc. • Create DVD: Create DVD. • HTTP Live Streaming: Prepare for HTTP Live Streaming. • Publish to Apple TV: Add to iTunes Library. • Publish to YouTube: Publish to YouTube. Stage 5: Saving Custom Batch Templates—Optional For information about the optional step of creating custom templates, see Creating a Custom Batch Template. 16 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyQuick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method The following workflow shows you an easy way to manually build and process a batch in Compressor. • Stage 1: Adding Source Media Files • Stage 2: Assigning Settings and Destinations • Stage 3: Submitting the Batch Stage 1: Adding Source Media Files To use Compressor, you must first add source media files to the Batch window. To open Compressor and add source media files to the Batch window 1 Double-click the Compressor icon in the Applications folder. Compressor opens with the Batch Template Chooser and an empty untitled batch with a placeholder job. 2 Since this workflow is focused on the manual method rather than the batch template method, click Cancel in the Batch Template Chooser to close it. To prevent the Batch Template Chooser from opening in the future, select “Don’t show this dialog again,” or, in Compressor preferences, select Use Blank Template. For information about the batch template method, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 17The figure below shows the remaining windows in the Compressor interface. Note: To see the Compressor interface configured similarly to what is shown above, choose a Standard layout from the Layouts submenu of the Window menu. 3 Drag one or more source files from the Finder or the desktop to an empty area in the Batch window (in this example, just below the empty job). Note: If you drag multiple files to the empty job, only the last file is added to this job and all other files are ignored. 18 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyNew jobs are created for each source file you dragged to the batch. Each source file creates a job in the batch. Target area (empty in this case) of a job See About the Batch Window for more information about the controls in the Batch window. Stage 2: Assigning Settings and Destinations You need to assign at least one setting to each source media file job before you can submit the batch for processing, but you can also add multiple settings to the same job to transcode multiple versions of the media file. Each setting-destination pair is known in Compressor as a target. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 19To assign a setting and a destination to a job 1 Choose a setting for your source media file jobs in any of the following ways. • To assign different settings to different jobs: Drag settings from the Settings tab to individual jobs in the Batch window. Select one or more (two in this case) settings to apply to the job. A job with a source media file in the Batch window • To assign a single setting to multiple selected jobs: Select the jobs (source media files) in the Batch window and choose Target > New Target With Setting. This opens a settings selection dialog over the Batch window. 20 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyClick Add to assign the settings to the selected jobs. Select the settings to apply to the selected jobs. Select the jobs in the Batch window. Choose one or more settings, using the disclosure triangles to reveal individual settings, and click Add. The chosen settings are assigned to all the selected jobs. New targets are added for each setting you drag to the job. You can also choose Edit > Select All to select all the jobs before applying the settings. See Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings for more information on settings, and Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches for more information about working with jobs and targets. The next step is to set the destination. By default, the destination is set to Source, which writes the output files to the same folder as the source files originated from. You can change the destination for organization purposes or to take advantage of larger and faster hard disks. Note: You can choose a default destination from the Compressor Preferences window. See Setting Compressor Preferences for more information. You can set the destination for each individual target or for a selected group of targets. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 212 Choose a destination for your job’s targets in one of the following ways. • Do nothing: Accept the default destination Source (the same folder as the source media files originated from) specified in the Destination column. • Use the target’s shortcut menu to change one setting at a time: Control-click the target you want to change and then choose any of the preexisting destinations available to you from the Destination submenu. Use the target’s shortcut menu to change the destination for the selected targets. You can also choose Other from the shortcut menu to open a dialog to choose any location available to your computer as the destination. Note: Choosing Other allows you to choose any location currently accessible from your desktop, including a mounted open volume. However, this volume must remain open until the batch has been transcoded. You can select multiple targets and change all their destinations at once using the same method. You can also use the Destination submenu of the target’s shortcut menu to choose a destination, or drag a destination from the Destinations tab to the target. See Creating and Changing Destinations for more information on destinations. 3 You can name the batch, and save it, by choosing File > Save. Stage 3: Submitting the Batch Once each media file has at least one setting and destination associated with it, it becomes a job, and your batch is ready to be submitted. To submit a batch for processing µ Click Submit. 22 Chapter 1 Getting Started QuicklyA dialog appears where you can name this submission, choose whether to use distributed processing, and set the priority of this submission. In most cases you can leave the settings as they are and just click Submit. For more details about this Submit dialog, see Submitting a Batch. After you submit a batch, you can open Share Monitor so you can monitor the transcoding progress of your batch. You can also set Share Monitor to automatically open in the Compressor Preferences window. Note: You can always open Share Monitor by double-clicking the Share Monitor icon in the Dock or by clicking its icon in the Batch window. Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 23You can also monitor the encoding progress in the History window. See Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches for more information on jobs and batches. Optional Tasks You Can Perform Before Submitting a Batch The three stages described in the previous section show you the fastest way to transcode media files. Although you can modify your preexisting settings using this method, you can’t preview your files or fine-tune any settings. The following chapters describe additional steps that can be performed on the setting of any job before it is submitted: • Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings • Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches • Adding Filters to a Setting • Working with Frame Controls • Adding Geometry Settings • Adding Actions • Using the Preview Window • Creating and Changing Destinations The following chapters give a more detailed look at output format settings and various transcoding options: • Creating AIFF Files • Creating Common Audio Format Files • Creating DV Stream Output Files • Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files • Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files • Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc • Creating Image Sequence Files • Creating MP3 Output Files • Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 24 Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly• Creating MPEG-2 Output Files • Creating MPEG-4 Output Files • Creating QuickTime Export Component Files • Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files Chapter 1 Getting Started Quickly 25Compressor is a powerful and flexible tool that can be used in many different ways to achieve the results you want. This chapter covers the following: • Typical Compressor Scenarios (p. 28) • Compressor Features (p. 29) 27 Ways to Use Compressor 2Typical Compressor Scenarios The following are typical Compressor scenarios. • Converting source media to one or more different output formats: You can use Compressor to convert one or more media files to one or more different media file output formats. See Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method for more information. Apple TV DVD video CD-ROM iPhone iPad iPod iTunes H.264 MP3 AC-3 MP3 MPEG-1 MPEG-4 QuickTime AC-3 AIFF H.264 MPEG-1 MPEG-2 AIFF MP3 QuickTime Blu-ray Disc H.264 AC-3 Source media or Final Cut Pro project To web QuickTime movie (for broadband and lowband) • Exporting sequences or clips to one or more formats directly from other applications: You can use Compressor to convert sequences or clips to one or more file formats from within other applications, such as Final Cut Pro. This workflow is the same as described in detail in Submitting a Project for Transcoding. This integration with Final Cut Pro and Motion makes transcoding (the process of converting files from their original format into output files ready for distribution in another format) faster and more convenient. Integration also saves hard disk space by eliminating the need to export intermediate media files before processing them. It also leverages the video processing technology of the other applications to do much of the work (therefore maximizing the quality of images that are encoded), and avoids degradation that can occur from multiple compression and decompression steps. 28 Chapter 2 Ways to Use Compressor• Creating DVD compliant files: Before you can convert your existing media files into a DVD project, you must convert the video into MPEG-1 (SD projects only), MPEG-2 (SD and HD projects), or H.264 (HD projects only) files. Compressor can encode audio in the Dolby Digital Professional format (also known as AC-3). Dolby Digital Professional is a very common compressed audio format for DVD-Video discs. Compressor also supports two specialized situations: • For those situations in which you are editing high definition (HD) sources in Final Cut Pro and want to create a standard definition (SD) DVD from them, Compressor includes a high-quality down conversion capability. HD sources using 1080i or 720p resolutions use a high-quality transcoding process to create SD MPEG-2 video output files. • For those situations in which you must fit the maximum video onto a DVD and do not require broadcast quality, Compressor includes the ability to export DVD-Video-compatible MPEG-1 format files. Compressor Features Compressor can work as a standalone application or be integrated into the workflow of other applications, such as Final Cut Pro. To this end, Compressor accepts the same full range of source media file types that Final Cut Pro accepts. Compressor offers the following features. • Batch processing: This streamlined process allows you to create multiple output files from single source media files. • VBR options: Using the MPEG-2 encoder, you can set either a single- or dual-pass variable bit rate (VBR) for your output files, a setting that affects the video file image quality. • H.264 encoding: H.264 produces higher quality video at lower data rates for everything from mobile phones to High Definition (HD). H.264 works especially well with the Apple QuickTime media player. Compressor includes H.264 formats that specifically target Blu-ray discs, iTunes, iPhone, iPad, iPod, and Apple TV. • Droplets: These standalone applications can be used for drag-and-drop transcoding operations straight from your desktop. Once created, Droplets simplify and automate the transcoding process and can be used even without opening Compressor. • Settings: Settings contain all necessary file format, filter, and geometry settings needed for transcoding. You can customize and modify the Apple-supplied settings or create new ones, making it possible to create a library of specialized settings that can be reused. Chapter 2 Ways to Use Compressor 29• Filters: The selection of available Compressor filters gives you dynamic artistic control while you convert your source media to other formats and allows you to create a final product to your precise specifications. A selection of the available filters includes fade in/fade out, timecode overlays, gamma correction, noise removal, letterbox, watermark, color adjustment, and others. Additionally, there are audio filters for controlling dynamic range, peak levels, equalization, and fade in/fade out. • Previewing: You can preview your filter settings in real time using the Preview window as you adjust them in the Inspector window. This lets you tweak the settings to your satisfaction, before transcoding the source media file. • Destinations: You can create and save destinations for your output files, which can then be assigned to each output file’s target. You can even include FTP and iDisk locations. A destination can also specify the filenaming convention to use. • Geometry: You can adjust your frame size using the geometry Inspector window controls and graphical controls in the Preview window. These features allow you to crop unwanted image areas of your source media file and reduce file size. Compressor also allows you to resize your image to other aspect ratios such as 4:3, 16:9, and 2.35:1 for delivery onto other platforms, such as DVD or iPod. • Publishing: You can use Compressor to upload output files to a QuickTime Streaming Server or other locations for DVD authoring. • AppleScript usage: You can add specialized AppleScript information to any output file, which gives you the flexibility to automate and customize any post-encoding operations. • Interoperability: Compressor is an integral component of other Apple professional video applications such as Final Cut Pro and Motion. For example, you can export sequences directly from Final Cut Pro into Compressor for transcoding. • Transcoding activity in the background: Compressor lets you begin transcoding a batch and then continues processing in the background, allowing you to perform other tasks at the same time. • Email notification: You can set up Compressor to send an email notification to any location to notify you when the batch transcode is complete. • Distributed processing: Compressor offers distributed processing, distributing the work to multiple computers that have been chosen to provide more processing power. The distributed processing feature is limited to computers that have Compressor installed. For more details, see Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing. • Command-Line Features: Compressor has a number of command-line options for submitting jobs, enabling and disabling service node and cluster-controlling services, and monitoring batches. For more information, see Using the Command Line. 30 Chapter 2 Ways to Use CompressorCompressor makes it easy to transcode media into multiple formats. In addition, Compressor is integrated into Final Cut Pro and Motion. For simple or repetitive workflows, you can also use the Share feature in Final Cut Pro and Motion. The Share feature is an easy “one-click” way to send your work to clients, friends, and other audiences without any advanced knowledge of transcoding, delivery file formats, or FTP protocols. From the Share window in Final Cut Pro and Motion, you can quickly create and deliver output media files in iPhone, iPad, iPod, Apple TV, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and YouTube formats without having to open any additional applications. For more information about the Share feature, see the Final Cut Pro User Manual and the Motion User Manual. This chapter covers the following: • Compressor Concepts and Terms (p. 31) • Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings (p. 34) • Choosing an Output Format (p. 36) • Creating a Compressor Batch (p. 37) • Viewing Transcoding Status (p. 39) • Optional Compressor Shortcuts (p. 39) Compressor Concepts and Terms This section covers some common terms that you may encounter as you use Compressor. The following diagram illustrates how the standard Compressor transcoding process works. The largest transcoding component is a batch. The batch represents all the components needed to transcode your current media. It must contain one or more jobs. A job consists of at least one source media file with one or more targets, each with a setting and a destination associated with it. After the transcoding process, the resulting file is known as the output media file. One output media file is created for each setting assigned to a source media file. 31 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 3In the illustration below, the batch contains two source media files, each of which is a job containing two targets (sets of a setting and destination). The total number of output files created by transcoding this batch will be four: Job 1 will create two output media files, as will Job 2. Job 2 Job1 Output media file (Job 1, Target 1) Output media file (Job 1, Target 2) Output media file (Job 2, Target 1) Output media file (Job 2, Target 2) Source media file 1 Source media file 2 Target 1 Setting Destination Target 2 Setting Destination Target 1 Setting Destination Target 2 Setting Destination Batch You should familiarize yourself with the following common terms: • Codec: Short for COmpression/DECompression. A mathematical model for reducing the data of a source media file. • File Format: The output format you use to transcode your source media file. • Group: Contains designated settings placed into a folder in the Settings tab. Groups help you organize your settings and can simplify the job creation process. • Transcoding: The process of converting files from their original format into output files ready for distribution in another format. Closely related terms include compression, which specifically refers to data reduction, and encoding, a term that is essentially synonymous with transcoding, but does not emphasize the conversion aspect. • Source media file: The transcoding process always starts with a source media file, which is the file intended for transcoding in its original form. Source media files are always one of the following. • Movies: Containing video, audio, and other data (such as markers) • Stills: Used as part of a sequence of still images for certain video productions 32 Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow• QuickTime: QuickTime is cross-platform multimedia technology which allows Mac OS and Windows applications to capture and play back video, audio, and still-image files. QuickTime files can contain many different kinds of media and codecs. Codecs give instructions to QuickTime on how to play back the media. A typical Compressor transcoding process consists of the following components. • Setting: Once you have imported your source media file, you must assign one or more settings to it. A setting is a combination of transcode attributes, such as output format, filter, and geometry settings, that are applied to the source media file during the transcoding process. • Output (file) format: The encoder you choose to convert your source media file. Choose one of the following output formats based on the intended playback method and environment of your transcoded media files: AIFF, Dolby Digital Professional, DV Stream, H.264 for Apple Devices (which contains settings for use with an iPhone, iPad, iPod, or Apple TV), Image Sequence (which supports TIFF and TARGA images), MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, QuickTime Movie, or QuickTime Export Components. • Filters: Allow you to adjust different characteristics of your video such as color, brightness, and sharpness, to maximize your video quality as the file is compressed. • Geometry settings: Allow you to crop the image and adjust its frame size. • Actions settings: Allow you to create automatic post-transcoding actions and apply them to jobs and settings. Easily create and deliver output media files, send email notifications, and execute post-transcoding tasks using Automator. Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 33• Destination: A destination also needs to be assigned to the source media file. This is the location where your transcoded media file is stored. You can either use the default destination called Source (the same folder the source media file is in), or you can designate any location to which you have full access. You can also change the default destination in Compressor preferences. The destination also controls how the transcoded media file is named. • Target: A blueprint for creating an output media file containing a setting, a destination, and an output filename. • Job: Once you assign one or more targets to the source media file, it becomes a job, and is ready to be transcoded. • Batch: A batch consists of one or more jobs that are processed at one time. All jobs contained within the batch are submitted collectively when you click the Submit button. • Output media file: The transcoded media files created after the batch is submitted and processed are called output media files. An output media file is the result of a successfully transcoded source media file (containing one setting and destination). You can create as many output media files as there are different settings applied to the various source media files in the batch. Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings Compressor contains a number of preconfigured settings that allow you to start transcoding immediately. If you want to transcode your source media files immediately and don’t need to create your own settings, you can follow the steps described in Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method instead. Or if your workflow is not covered by any of the batch templates and you want to start transcoding immediately, you can also try the steps in Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method. However, if you want to create your own settings and destinations, and customize other attributes such as filters, cropping, frame resizing, and actions settings, you need to follow the steps outlined below. If the custom settings you create here can be used for all your transcoding needs, you won’t need to go through these steps again. However, if you need to create new settings and destinations for each transcoding project, you’ll need to repeat these steps each time. Stage 1: Creating a Setting Unless you are using a preexisting setting or a batch template supplied with Compressor, you will need to create your own settings. This is done using the Settings tab and begins with choosing an output format from the File Format menu that opens when you click the Add (+) button. See Choosing an Output Format for more information. In addition, you also have the option of adding filters, geometry settings, and post-transcoding actions and then previewing your setting to ensure satisfaction. See Creating a Setting from Scratch for more information. 34 Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding WorkflowYou can also streamline your workflow by putting your settings into groups. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. After you have created a setting, you can further customize it with additional adjustments such as filters (to adjust image quality or add effects such as letterboxing), pixel size (geometry values), and post-transcoding actions. These additional adjustments are all managed in the Inspector window. See Adding Filters to a Setting, Working with Frame Controls, Adding Geometry Settings, and Adding Actions for more information. Stage 2: Previewing the Setting It’s a good time-saving measure to preview your setting before submitting the batch. This can be done using the Preview window and ensures that the quality of the output media file is acceptable. The Preview window consists of a split screen displaying the content of your source media file in its original form in one half, and the content of your output media file in the other half. From the Preview window, you can do any of the following: • Play the media file. • Dynamically preview effects (in real time). • Modify the effects of the filters and geometry settings of your setting. • Compare source or output versions. • Crop the output file frame size. • Change the aspect ratio. • Add various markers (compression, chapter, or podcast). Note: Frame Controls settings cannot be previewed in the Preview window. To preview Frame Controls settings, do a test transcode of a small section of your source media file. (See Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window for more information.) See Previewing a Setting or Using the Preview Window for more information. Stage 3: Creating a Destination By default, your transcoded file is saved in the same folder as your source media file (Source). However, if you want to store your transcoded files in a different location, you can create a new destination in the Destinations tab. Using this tab, you can choose any folder, volume, or remote server for which you have permissions and access to be a destination, and add useful file identifiers for your transcoded output file. Once you have created sufficient destinations, you won’t need to open the Destinations tab again. See Creating and Changing Destinations for more information. Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 35Choosing an Output Format Selecting the relevant playback platform (Apple devices, DVD, web, CD, and kiosk) is the first choice you need to make before you compress a source media file into a different output format. Once you have decided on the platform, you can choose the appropriate output format for that platform. Whatever the digital video format of your source media file, you can transcode it using one of the many encoders supplied with Compressor, including the following industry-standard formats, all of which have their own particular attributes: • AIFF: Intended for audio use (including DVD or CD authoring) where you need customized settings. For more details on the AIFF format, see Creating AIFF Files. • Common Audio Formats: Intended to provide easy access to the most common audio formats, including AIFF, Apple CAF files, and WAVE. For more details, see Creating Common Audio Format Files. • DV Stream: Common format used for SD projects. See Creating DV Stream Output Files for more information. • Dolby Digital Professional: Also known as AC-3. Usually intended for DVD authoring. For more details on the AC-3 format, see Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files. • H.264 for Apple Devices: Intended for creating video files suitable for playback using iTunes, an iPhone, an iPad, an iPod, and Apple TV. For more details on the H.264 for Apple Devices format, see Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files. • H.264 for Blu-ray: Intended for creating H.264 settings specifically configured for Blu-ray Disc. For more details on the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc format, see Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc. • Image Sequence: Compatible with a wide range of compositing and image processing applications. For more details see Creating Image Sequence Files. • MP3: Intended for audio compression. The MP3 format creates audio files that are compatible with a wide variety of playback devices. For more details on the MP3 format, see Creating MP3 Output Files. • MPEG-1: Intended for Internet, CD-ROM, and specialized DVD use. For more details on the MPEG-1 format, see Creating MPEG-1 Output Files. • MPEG-2: Intended for standard and high definition DVD use. For more details on the MPEG-2 format, see Creating MPEG-2 Output Files. • MPEG-4, Part-2: Intended for a variety of uses including the web or wireless devices. For more details on the MPEG-4 format, see Creating MPEG-4 Output Files. 36 Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow• QuickTime Export Components: Leveraging the component plug-in architecture of QuickTime, Compressor can output a variety of additional codec options and third-party formats such as Windows Media, RealPlayer, 3G, and AVI. The QuickTime Export Components feature allows you to control the third-party encoding engine without having to open another application. For more details on QuickTime Export Components, see Creating QuickTime Export Component Output Files. • QuickTime Movie: Intended for use with QuickTime in a variety of playback environments. Because QuickTime is cross-platform multimedia technology, it allows Mac OS and Windows applications to capture and play back video, audio, and still-image files. For more details on the QuickTime format, see Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files. Creating a Compressor Batch This section describes the steps in manually creating and submitting a complete Compressor batch. For a quicker and easier but more limited method, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method. Once you have the necessary settings and destinations available, you can begin to create your batch for transcoding. A batch contains one or more jobs. A job consists of one source media file with one or more targets, which contain the settings and destinations. You can submit a batch for transcoding only after you have assigned at least one target (setting and destination) to each job (source media file) in the batch. All jobs in the batch are submitted together. Think of batches as documents that can be saved, closed, and opened again. And much like a Final Cut Pro project, a separate tab (that can be torn off) contains each Compressor batch. Stage 1: Importing Source Media Files into Compressor You import source media files into a batch either by using the File Selection dialog or by dragging the files from the Finder to the Compressor Batch window. You can import source media files from any folder that you have access to. See Importing Source Media Files for more information. Stage 2: Assigning a Setting Once you have imported your source media file into the Batch window, you need to assign one or more settings to it. This makes it a job. A source media file can be transcoded only after it has at least one setting assigned to it, and you can add a setting to a source media file only after you have either selected a preexisting setting or created one. Your setting must have an output file format associated with it. • If you choose a preexisting setting: The output file format has already been assigned. • If you create your own setting: You must choose an output file format from the file format menu that opens when you click the Add (+) button in the Settings tab. Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 37You can add one setting to multiple jobs in one step by selecting the jobs in the Batch window and choosing a setting from the dialog that appears when you choose Target > New Target With Setting, or by Control-clicking one of the selected jobs and choosing a setting from the New Target With Setting submenu of the shortcut menu that appears. If you have a favorite setting (preexisting or customized), you can streamline your workflow by creating a standalone application called a Droplet containing multiple settings, and use the Droplet to submit batches without opening Compressor. See Creating a Droplet from the Settings Tab for more information. Note: You can also create groups of settings, which is a quick and convenient way to assign multiple settings to a source media file. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. Stage 3: Previewing the Setting Using the Preview Window You can either preview a source media file or the source media file with its assigned setting. From the Preview window, you can dynamically preview (in real time) and modify the effects of the filters and geometry adjustments of your setting, play back the media file, view source or output views, crop the output file frame size, change the aspect ratio, and add various markers relevant to the MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and H.264 for Apple Devices formats. See Previewing a Setting or Previewing a Clip for more information. Stage 4: Assigning a Destination You can choose the location to place your output media files by assigning a destination to each target. The destination also defines various aspects of how the output media file is named. There are several supplied destinations in the Destinations tab you can choose from, or you can create your own custom destinations. In addition to assigning a destination by dragging one from the Destinations tab to a job’s target, you can also use the Target > Destination menu or the shortcut menu that appears when you Control-click a target to assign an existing destination to a job. You also have the option of choosing a location that has not been defined as a destination by choosing Other in the above two menus. See Assigning Destinations to Source Media Files for more information. Stage 5: Submitting the Batch for Transcoding Once you have created all the jobs you want in the batch and are satisfied with the settings and quality of your output files (having previewed them), you are ready to submit the batch. You do this by clicking the Submit button in the Batch window. Note: If you are transcoding a large batch, you should turn off the screen saver application on your computer. This will improve the speed of your transcode because resources are not being diverted to the screen saver. 38 Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding WorkflowSee Submitting a Batch for more information. Viewing Transcoding Status You use Share Monitor and the History window to see the current status of a submitted batch and all the jobs contained within it. Share Monitor is a standalone application, so that it can work with both Compressor and Droplets, whether or not Compressor is open, and regardless of whether you have submitted anything. See Creating a Droplet from the Settings Tab for more information about Droplets. Stage 1: Viewing the Batch Transcoding Status After you submit a batch, then you can open Share Monitor so you can view the transcoding status of your batch. This is a good way to monitor when your batch has finished transcoding and if any problems occurred during the transcode process. You can set Compressor Preferences to open Share Monitor automatically. See Setting Compressor Preferences and the Share Monitor User Manual for more details. Alternatively, you can look at the History window in Compressor. It contains a progress bar and, like Share Monitor, it can tell you if a submission was successfully transcoded. Stage 2: Confirming Transcode Completion It’s a good idea to open the transcoded media file’s destination folder to ensure that the media file was transcoded successfully and saved to that location. Optional Compressor Shortcuts Compressor was designed with workflow in mind. Depending on your needs, there are a number of ways to speed up the Compressor transcoding workflow. Using Preexisting Settings Compressor contains a number of preexisting settings that allow you to start transcoding immediately. If these preexisting settings suit your needs, you can transcode your source media files immediately. See Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method for more information. Even if you need to create custom settings, you can group them so that they can be easily applied to targets. See Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settingsfor more information. Using Default Settings and Destinations If you find that you are applying the same settings and destinations to each source media file, you can configure Compressor preferences to automatically apply those settings and destinations. See Setting Compressor Preferences for more information. Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding Workflow 39Working with Droplets Droplets provide a fast and convenient way to transcode material without even opening Compressor. You create a Droplet by saving a setting or a group of settings and destinations as an active icon. When you drag one or more source media files to it, the Droplet begins the transcoding process automatically. See Creating a Droplet from the Settings Tab for more information. 40 Chapter 3 The Basic Transcoding WorkflowThe Compressor interface consists of a number of core windows in which you do most of your transcoding preparation work. This chapter covers the following: • Compressor Windows and the Transcoding Workflow (p. 42) • Creating and Managing Compressor Layouts (p. 43) • Working with the Compressor Windows (p. 46) • Batch Window (p. 49) • Settings Tab (p. 52) • Destinations Tab (p. 53) • Inspector Window (p. 53) • History Window (p. 62) • Preview Window (p. 63) • Apple Qmaster Sharing Window (p. 65) • Share Monitor (p. 66) • Droplet Windows (p. 67) • About Changing Values and Timecode Entries (p. 67) • Keyboard Shortcuts (p. 69) 41 The Compressor Interface 4Compressor Windows and the Transcoding Workflow Each Compressor window represents a part of the transcoding workflow. Settings and Destinations tabs Batch window Preview window History window Inspector window • Batch window: Allows you to import source media files, add settings and destinations, and name the batch. • Settings and Destinations tabs: The Settings tab allows you to centrally manage Apple and custom settings. The Destinations tab allows you to create, modify, or remove destination settings, set a default destination, and add file identifiers to your output media filename. • Inspector window: Allows you easy access to common transcoding controls, and a full summary table containing all the details of each setting. You can also use the Inspector window to gather information on source clips, and to make dynamic changes interactively with the Preview window. • Preview window: Allows you to play your source media file in its original format, or preview your source media file with settings that have been assigned to it. You can see the effects of settings—such as filters and frame resizing—and make adjustments to these attributes while previewing the media file in real time. You can also use the Preview window to add and view various kinds of markers. • History window: The History window allows you to view a full log of all batches submitted from your computer, including progress bars of those still being transcoded, and pause or resubmit any batches listed in the log. • Droplet window (not pictured): Allows you to save one or more settings or groups of settings into a Droplet, a standalone preset, packaged into a drag-and-drop application and saved as an icon. 42 Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface• Share Monitor (not pictured): Allows you to view the status of all batches being processed. (See the Share Monitor User Manual for more information.) Creating and Managing Compressor Layouts As you use Compressor you will find that, depending on the particular encoding task you are configuring, how the various Compressor windows are laid out can affect how easy Compressor is to use. To help with this, Compressor includes the ability to configure and save layouts. Layouts define which windows are visible, their size, their position, and which icons are in the Batch window’s toolbar. Compressor includes two layouts that you can use to get a starting point for creating your own custom layouts. Note: Each layout is available in several sizes, allowing you to choose the size that best fits your monitor. You can modify any of these layouts and save them as your own custom layouts. Standard Layout The standard layout shows all the Compressor windows, with the Settings and Destinations tabs sharing a window. This layout is optimized for those times when you are transcoding a single source media file. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 43Batch Layout The batch layout places the emphasis on the Batch window. This layout is optimized for those times when you are transcoding a number of similar source media files. Choosing, Saving, and Managing Layouts Compressor makes it easy to choose a layout. To choose a layout µ Choose Window > Layouts, and choose a layout from the list that appears. Once you choose a layout, the Compressor interface changes to match it. You can also create and save your own custom layouts. To save a layout 1 Configure the Compressor interface the way you want it to be saved. See Working with the Compressor Windows for information on the ways you can work with the various windows. 2 Choose Window > Save Layout. 3 In the dialog that appears, enter a name for the layout and click Save. The layout is saved and appears in the Window > Layouts list. You can manage the layouts list by removing or renaming existing layouts. To manage your layouts 1 Choose Window > Manage Layouts. 44 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceThe layout manager dialog appears. 2 Do any of the following: • To rename a layout: Double-click it and type the new name. • To remove a layout: Select it and click the Delete (–) button. • To save the current interface configuration as a new layout: Click the Add (+) button and enter a name for the layout. • To choose a layout and apply it to the current Compressor interface: Choose the layout and click the Apply button. 3 Click Done when you have finished managing your layouts. The layout manager closes and the Compressor interface changes to match the chosen layout setting. Note: The layouts list is actually divided into two sections—the ones supplied by Apple and the ones that you create. You cannot rename or delete the Apple-supplied layouts. The ones that you create are listed in alphabetical order. Use care when naming your layouts to ensure you can easily locate them in the list. About the Layout Files If you have several workstations using Compressor, you might find that you want to be able to have the same layouts available on all of them. You can accomplish this by copying the layout files from one system to another, ensuring you put them in the correct location. The layouts are stored in the following path: Users/username/Library/Application Support/Compressor/Layouts. The layouts all have a .moduleLayout extension. Important: Do not manually add or remove the layout files while Compressor is open. Compressor checks this location for available layouts as part of its startup process. You must restart Compressor to have it recognize any changes you have made to these files. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 45Working with the Compressor Windows While the standard and batch workflow layouts present the Compressor interface as a single large element, it is actually composed of a number of individual windows that can be positioned and sized to best suit your needs. Why Are Some Windows Covered Up? Because the Compressor interface is made up of individual windows, you may find that when you switch from Compressor to another application and then switch back to Compressor by clicking one of its windows, only that window appears, with the others remaining covered by other windows you might have open. To bring all Compressor windows to the front Do one of the following: µ When switching between applications, take advantage of the built-in application switching feature of Mac OS X. Press Command-Tab to have an application selection dialog appear. As you hold down the Command key, you can press the Tab key to cycle through the currently running applications, releasing the Command key once the Compressor icon is selected. This ensures that all the Compressor windows are visible. µ Choose Window > Bring All to Front. µ Click the Compressor application icon in the Dock. Note: The Compressor toolbar, located along the top of the Batch window, makes it easy to navigate to the main Compressor windows and to Share Monitor. Resizing the Compressor Windows All the Compressor windows can be resized with the exception of the Inspector window, which has a fixed size. Each window has a minimum size limit, both horizontally and vertically, that affects how small you can make the window. To resize a window µ Drag the window’s lower-right corner to stretch or compress the window horizontally or vertically. Drag this corner to resize the window. Note: As you reposition or resize a window, it will snap to a nearby window once you get close to it. This makes it easy to create a neat layout without gaps or overlaps. 46 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceAbout the Tabs The Batch window and the Settings and Destinations window can have multiple tabs. • The Batch window: When you are working with a large monitor and have several batches open, you might want to be able to see each of them in its own window. • The Settings and Destinations tabs: By default, the Settings tab and the Destinations tab are located in the same window. You can choose to have each in its own window or to close one of the tabs. You can even choose to add any of the other windows (except the Batch window) as an additional tab to the window. In both cases, you can also control the order of the tabs. To move a tab to its own window by dragging 1 Drag the tab out of its current location. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 472 Release the tab to have it appear in its own window. To move a tab to its own window using a shortcut menu µ Control-click the tab and choose Tear Off Tab from the shortcut menu. The tab opens in its own window. To add a tab from one window to another window by dragging 1 Drag the tab to the tab area of the window you want to add it to. A highlight appears around the tab area. 2 Release the tab. 48 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceIt snaps to the tab area and its original window closes. To add a tab from one window to another window by using a shortcut menu µ Control-click the tab area where you want the window to appear, and choose the tab from the list that appears in the shortcut menu. Note: This is the only method that allows you to add the History, Preview, or Inspector tabs to the window. To change the order of the tabs in their current window µ Drag the tab left or right to its new position. The other tabs move to make room for it. Once you have the Compressor interface configured as you like it, you can save it as a layout. That makes it easy to restore the layout or to switch between it and other layouts. See Creating and Managing Compressor Layouts for more information. Batch Window When you first open Compressor, the Batch window appears. The Batch window allows you to import source media files for compressing, add settings and destinations, name the batch, and choose where you want to save it. The Batch window is where you place all source media files in preparation for transcoding. Note: Generally the Batch window is always showing. If you close it, it will reopen when you create a new batch (File > New Batch) or open an existing batch (File > Open). You can use the Compressor menu bar or the toolbar at the top of the Batch window to open all other windows. (If the toolbar isn’t visible when you open Compressor, click the button in the upper-right corner of the Batch window to open it.) Job area Toolbar Batch tabs Batch status Show/hide toolbar button Batch submission button Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 49In addition to the Compressor toolbar and the Submit button, the Batch window contains the tabs for the open batches and an area for showing and configuring a batch’s jobs. For information about adding source media files to a batch, see Adding Source Media Files to a Batch to Create Jobs. For information on working with jobs and targets, see Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches. Customizing the Toolbar The Batch window contains a toolbar that you can customize to better fit your needs. Note: If the toolbar isn’t visible when you open Compressor, click the button in the upper-right corner of the Batch window to open it. To customize the Batch window toolbar 1 Do one of the following to open the toolbar customization palette: • Choose View > Customize Toolbar. • Control-click in the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar from the shortcut menu. • Click the Customize icon in the toolbar (if present). The toolbar palette opens. 2 To customize the toolbar, do any of the following: • To remove items currently in the toolbar: Drag them off. • To add items to the toolbar: Drag them from the toolbar palette to the toolbar, placing them where you want them to appear. • To rearrange items in the toolbar: Drag them from their current location to a new location. • To restore the toolbar to its default configuration: Drag the default set (located on the bottom of the palette) to the toolbar. • To configure how items show in the toolbar: Choose a setting from the Show pop-up menu. 50 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceYou can choose to show the icon and text, the icon only, or the text only. 3 Click Done when you have finished. Note: The toolbar configuration is saved as part of a layout. See Creating and Managing Compressor Layouts for more information about layouts. It is possible to add more items to the toolbar than there is room for. When that happens, the right edge of the toolbar shows a double arrow that you can click to get access to the icons that do not fit. Click these arrows to see items that did not fit in the toolbar. About the Toolbar Items Most of the items you can add to the toolbar can be added only once. There are a few that can be added multiple times, such as the separator, the space, and the flexible space. • New Batch: Creates a new untitled batch. • Open Batch: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select a saved batch to open. • Close: Closes the currently selected batch. Note: You cannot close a batch if it is the only one open. • Add File: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select one or more source media files to import into the current batch. • Add Surround Sound: Opens the audio file assignment dialog that you can use to manually assign files to each audio channel in a surround sound configuration. • Add Image Sequence: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select the folder containing the source media image sequence files. • Submit with Previous Settings: Submitsthe batch by using the settings used by previous batch submissions, bypassing the submission dialog. • History: Opens the History window. • Inspector: Opens the Inspector window. • Settings: Opens the Settings tab. • Destinations: Opens the Destinations tab. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 51• Preview: Opens the Preview window. • Share Monitor: Opens the Share Monitor application. • Create Droplet: Opens a settings selection dialog for you to select the settings for this Droplet. • Separator: Adds a vertical line to the toolbar, allowing you to group items together. • Space: Adds a fixed-width space to the toolbar. • Flexible Space: Adds a flexible-width space to the toolbar. The space makes it possible to force items to the left and right edges of the toolbar, with it expanding to fill any unused area. • Customize: Opens the toolbar customization palette. Settings Tab The Settings tab allows you to centrally manage Apple and custom settings. You use the Settings tab together with the Inspector window to create and modify settings, decide exactly which settings you want to use to transcode your source media file, and choose which output format you want the transcoded file converted to. To open the Settings tab Do one of the following: µ Choose Window > Settings (or press Command-3). µ Click the Settings icon in the Batch window toolbar (if present). µ Click the Settings tab (if present). The Settings tab contains a list of the existing settings and the necessary buttons to add, remove, or duplicate a setting and to create groups and Droplets. 52 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceSee Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings for details on using the Settings tab to create, manage, and choose settings. Destinations Tab The Destinations tab allows you to create, modify, or remove destination settings, set a default destination, and add file identifiers to your output media filename. To open the Destinations tab Do one of the following: µ Choose Window > Destinations (or press Command-4). µ Click the Destinations icon in the Batch window toolbar (if present). µ Click the Destinations tab (if present). See Creating and Changing Destinations for details on how to configure destinations to simplify your Compressor workflow. Inspector Window The Inspector window has easy access to common transcoding controls (for creating and modifying settings and destinations); a full summary table containing all the details of each setting; and information about source media files, including A/V attributes, closed caption data, annotations, and job actions. To open the Inspector window Do one of the following: µ Choose Window > Show Inspector. µ Click the Inspector icon in the Batch window toolbar. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 53Note: Unlike the other Compressor windows, the Inspector window cannot be resized. About the Automatic Settings Several items in the settings panes have an optional automatic mode. When the automatic mode is enabled, Compressor determines the optimal value for the setting. The Automatic button is dark when active, and its item is dimmed. The Automatic button is dimmed when inactive, and its item is selectable. In general, when the automatic mode is active, its item is dimmed and cannot be changed. • If the setting has not been assigned to a source media file: The item says “Automatic.” An exception is in the Frame Controls pane of the Inspector window, whose state is undetermined until you have applied the setting to a source media file. • If the setting has been assigned to a source media file: The item remains dimmed but shows the value that will be used. When the automatic mode is inactive, its button is dimmed and you can choose values for an item as usual. You can turn the Automatic button on or off to change from on (the button darkens) to off (the button lightens). Tip: It is a good idea to verify the values in the Inspectors for those settings that are set to automatic. Compressor can usually correctly determine the appropriate values; however, there may be instances where there is not enough information in the source media file to determine the correct value. For example, some QuickTime clips might not have proper metadata or the metadata might be incorrect. Additionally, if the source media file uses nonstandard settings (such as the video frame size or frame rate), Compressor chooses the nearest standard value to use. 54 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceMedia Source Files and the Inspector Window When you select a job in the Batch window, the Inspector window shows you information about the job’s source media file and allows you to add annotations, closed caption files, and job actions. The Inspector window contains three tabs: A/V Attributes, Additional Information, and Job Action. A/V Attributes Tab The A/V Attributes tab contains general information about the source media file and is divided into three sections. • File information: This section shows the filename, location, and type of file. • Video information: This section, when applicable, shows all video-related information about the file. This includes its frame size, frame rate, and timecode information. • Audio information: This section, when applicable, shows all audio-related information about the file. This includes its sample size and sample rate. Additional Information Tab The Additional Information tab allows you to see and modify a variety of metadata items that might have been added in other applications such as Final Cut Pro or QuickTime. You can also add metadata items to the output media file. It also includes the ability to associate a closed caption file with the file. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 55See Additional Information Tab for more information on managing the closed caption files and annotations. • Closed Caption file field: Displays the name of the closed caption file currently associated with the source media file. • Choose (closed caption) button: Use this button to open a dialog and navigate to the the closed caption file you want to associate with the source media file. • Clear button: Use this button to remove the associated closed caption file. • Annotations table: Displays the current annotation types and the corresponding annotation text. • Add Annotation pop-up menu: Use this menu to choose the type of annotation you want to add to the source media file. • Remove (annotation) button: Use this button to remove the selected annotation. 56 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceJob Action Tab The Job Action tab allows you to apply and adjust post-transcoding actions to entire jobs. See Adding Actions for more information. • When job completes pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to select and apply a post-transcoding action for a job selected in the Batch window. About the Settings Panes When you select a setting in the Settings tab or a target in a batch’s job, the Inspector shows one of six panes. Summary Pane The Summary pane contains the Summary table, which describes all the settings (video and audio settings, geometry, and filter settings) associated with the setting selected in the Settings tab. Information in the Summary table is updated automatically whenever any setting is modified. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 57The Summary table includes the following details. • Name: The name of the setting selected in the Settings tab. • Description: A description of the setting selected in the Settings tab. • File Extension: The extension assigned to the transcoded media file. This identifies which format your source media file is being converted to. • Estimated file size: When assigned to a source media file, this shows the estimated total file size. When not assigned to a source media file, this shows an estimated size per hour of source media. Note: The estimated total file size is not available for all output formats. • Audio Encoder: Details of the audio output file format and other transcoding settings, such as sample rate, channels, bits per sample, and codec type. • Video Encoder: Details of the video output file format and other transcoding settings such as frame width and height, crop amount (in pixels), frame rate, aspect ratio, codec type, pixel depth, spatial quality, minimum spatial quality, key frame interval, temporal quality, minimum temporal quality, and data rate (in bits per second). • Filter: Details of all, some, or none (depending on how many filters you selected in the Filters pane) of the available Compressor filters. Encoder Pane You use the Encoder pane to select and configure the output file format and other settings. The file format options and attributes are different for each format. • File Format: Use this pop-up menu to choose an output file format. See Choosing an Output Format for more information on the available output formats. 58 Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface• File Extension field: The following file extensions automatically appear in this field based on the format you choose from the File Format pop-up menu, and if video and audio tracks are enabled. Don’t alter this field without good reason, because your file may not be recognized if you do. • aiff: Represents AIFF. • ac3: Represents Dolby Digital Professional. • caf: Represents Apple CAF files. • dv: Represents Digital Video (DV) format video. • mpg: Represents MPEG-1 multiplexed (video and audio) stream. • m1v: Represents MPEG-1 video elementary stream. • m1a: Represents MPEG-1 audio elementary stream. • m2v: Represents MPEG-2 video elementary stream. • m2t: Represents MPEG-2 transport stream. • mpeg: Represents MPEG-2 program stream. • m4v: Represents H.264 for Apple Devices. • mp4: Represents MPEG-4. • mov: Represents QuickTime. • tga: Represents TARGA. • tiff: Represents TIFF. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with two–pass or multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 59Frame Controls Pane This pane of the Inspector offers automatic and customized settings for advanced image analysis in frame resizing and frame retiming. Frame resizing would be necessary when transcoding between a high definition format such as 1080i and a standard definition format such as DV-NTSC. An example of frame retiming would be when transcoding between video formats with different frame rates such as NTSC (29.97 frames per second) and PAL (25 frames per second). For more information about the Frame Controls pane, see About the Frame Controls Pane. Filters Pane You use the Filters pane to add filters to your setting. You can perform tasks such as gamma correction and noise removal from here. 60 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceSelect the checkbox next to any of the filters you want to include in a particular setting. Use each filter’s sliders or arrow controls to adjust your filter settings as necessary. Filters are applied to the source media file in the order you organize them in the Filters list. You can reorder filters by dragging them up or down in this list. For more information about the Filters pane, see About the Filters Pane. Geometry Pane You use the options in the Geometry pane to crop and size the media file being compressed and set its aspect ratio. The Geometry pane has three sections: • Source inset (Cropping): Use any of the four fields to enter the number of pixels by which you want to reduce the source media file size, or choose a setting from the “Crop to” pop-up menu to have Compressor enter crop values based on the source media file video content. • Dimensions (encoded pixels): Use the Frame Size pop-up menu or these fields to create an appropriate output frame size and aspect ratio for your output media file. Use the Pixel Aspect pop-up menu to set width and height values to conform to a designated pixel aspect ratio. • Output image inset (Padding): Use the Padding pop-up menu to calculate the output height or width values. With Custom selected, you can enter values in the fields. For more information about the Geometry pane, see Adding Geometry Settings. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 61Actions Pane You use the Actions pane to activate transcode-completion notification emails and assign a default destination to this setting. • Email Notification to checkbox and field: Use to enter the address to which you want an email notification sent after the media file has been transcoded, or in the event of an error. • Default Destination: Choose a destination from the pop-up menu that you want this setting to use as its default. For more information about the Actions pane, see Adding Actions. History Window The History window gives you quick access to and some information about previously submitted batches. You can use this window to pause a transcoding operation, resubmit batches by dragging them to the Batch window, or view submission details about particular batches. You can also use it to locate the output media files from previously submitted batches. The History window also contains a progress bar that you can use to monitor the status of previously submitted batches. To open and close the History window Do one of the following: µ Choose Window > History (or press Command-1). 62 Chapter 4 The Compressor Interfaceµ Click the History button in the Batch window toolbar. Note: The History window automatically opens if it is closed when you submit a batch for transcoding. The History window contains entries that display information about the batch name and the date and time it was originally transcoded. The entries are ordered by date, with the oldest first. When you drag a batch into the Batch window for resubmission, a new untitled batch is created for it (any existing batches are unaffected). For more information about the controls and settings in the History window, see About the History Window. Preview Window The Preview window consists of a split screen that displays your selected source media file in its original form on the left side, and what your output media file will look like on the right side. This allows you to make a comparison between the original and transcoded versions and adjust your settings as necessary. Using the options in this window, you can crop the frame, add key frames, and change the aspect ratio. To open the Preview window Do one of the following: µ Choose Window > Preview (or press Command-2). Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 63µ Click the Preview button in the Batch window toolbar. Marker pop-up menu button The Preview window has additional features, including a Marker pop-up menu. The Marker pop-up menu allows you to import chapter lists or manually add chapter (and podcast) markers and compression markers (to improve the compression quality of your media file). For more information about the controls and settings in the Preview window, see About the Preview Window. 64 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceApple Qmaster Sharing Window Compressor includes a distributed processing feature that you can use to speed up your transcoding jobs. It allows you to harness the power of multiple computers on your local network to spread out the work. The Apple Qmaster Sharing window, opened by choosing Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer, provides most of the controls needed to configure a distributed processing system. For details on setting it up, see Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 65Share Monitor You use Share Monitor to monitor the progress of all transcoding batch activity, including estimates for the transcoding time remaining for all jobs. Share Monitor is a separate application that can be opened without opening Compressor. For more details on Share Monitor, see the Share Monitor User Manual. To open Share Monitor µ Click the Share Monitor button in the Batch window toolbar. You can also set Compressor preferences so that Share Monitor opens automatically when you submit a batch. See Setting Compressor Preferences for more information. Share Monitor displays the status of all your submitted batches, including each batch’s name and other details. You can view reports for both successful and failed jobs in Share Monitor as well as the History window. For more information about the controls and settings in Share Monitor, see the Share Monitor User Manual. 66 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceDroplet Windows You can save one or more settings or groups of settings into a Droplet, a standalone preset, packaged into a drag-and-drop application and saved as an icon. Then you can transcode source media files (without even opening Compressor) by simply dragging them to a Droplet icon. See Using Dropletsfor information on creating and using Droplets. Drag selected source media files to a Droplet to transcode them. You can open any Droplet and view its window for full details about the Droplet. To open a Droplet window µ Double-click a Droplet icon. For more information about the controls and settings in the Droplet window, see About the Droplet Window. About Changing Values and Timecode Entries Compressor includes several types of value entry methods. Most of them have features that can make changing the values or timecode fields much easier. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 67Using Value Sliders There are two methods used to enter general numeric values: traditional sliders with separate numeric entry fields and value sliders that combine the slider with the numeric entry field. Value slider with combined slider and numeric entry field Separate slider and numeric entry field Value sliders allow you to enter a specific number in the value field or to drag in the value field to set a value. When using the value sliders, you can use a modifier key to make normal, small, or large value adjustments. Dragging in the middle area (where the number is) works the same as an ordinary slider; dragging to the right increases the value and dragging to the left decreases the value. Additionally, you can click the right or left arrow to change the value one step at a time. You can also double-click the number itself and type a new number to enter a specific number in the value field. To change values in normal increments Do one of the following: µ Drag left or right in the value field. µ Click the left arrow to decrease a value, or click the right arrow to increase a value. µ If you have a three-button mouse with a scroll wheel, click in the value field and use the scroll wheel on the mouse. To change values in fine increments Do one of the following: µ Option-drag in the value field. µ Option-click the left arrow to decrease a value, or Option-click the right arrow to increase a value. µ If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, Option-scroll in the value field. To change values in coarse increments Do one of the following: µ Shift-drag in the value field. µ Shift-click the left arrow to decrease a value, or Shift-click the right arrow to increase a value. µ If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, Shift-scroll in the value field. When a value slider or value field is active (highlighted), press Tab to move to the next field. 68 Chapter 4 The Compressor InterfaceUsing Timecode Value Sliders Compressor uses timecode value sliders for all timecode entry fields. In addition to being able to enter timecode values directly, you can “scrub” the timecode value by dragging. If you place the pointer over a segment of the timecode, small arrows appear above and below that segment. You can drag up or to the right to increase the value in that segment (values in segments to the left will also increment if your dragging causes the selected segment to roll over). Dragging to the left or down decreases the value. You can hold down the Option key to make the value changes slower, or the Shift key to make them faster. Alternatively, you can click the up and down arrows on each side of the timecode value or press the keyboard’s Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to increase or decrease the timecode value. You can control which segment is affected by the up and down arrows by selecting a segment so that a caret appears below the segment. You can also use the keyboard’s Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys to select other segments. Keyboard Shortcuts For complete lists of Compressor keyboard shortcuts, see General Compressor Keyboard Shortcuts and Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts. Chapter 4 The Compressor Interface 69You can use Compressor preferences to configure many aspects of Compressor. This chapter covers the following: • About Compressor Preferences (p. 71) • Using Compressor Preferences (p. 74) About Compressor Preferences Use the Compressor Preferences window to configure a variety of Compressor controls. The Compressor Preferences window contains the following controls. Compressor Preferences Details • Email Address: Use this field to enter the default email address for email notification. 71 Setting Compressor Preferences 5• Outgoing Mail Server: For more information about email notification, see Working with Post-Transcoding Actions. • Automatically launch Share Monitor: Use this checkbox to control whether Share Monitor automatically opens when you submit a batch. • Display job thumbnails: Use this checkbox to control whether thumbnail images are displayed for jobs in a batch. • Cluster Options: Choose one of the following to control cluster options (for distributed processing scratch storage settings). • Copy source to cluster as needed: Instructs Compressor to copy source files to a cluster’s scratch storage location as needed. • Always copy source to cluster: Requires Compressor to always copy source files to a cluster’s scratch storage location. • Never copy source to cluster: Prevents Compressor from copying source files. • Never copy files to/from cluster: Prevents Compressor from copying any files. Either all the files are in the correct locations, or the batch fails. • Copy at submission (high priority): Use this checkbox to control whether Compressor transfers Source files to the processing cluster immediately. • Default Setting: Use the Default Setting pop-up menu to choose from the list of existing settings. • Default Destination: Use the Default Destination pop-up menu to choose from the list of existing destinations. • For New Batches: Choose one of the following options for setting the Compressor startup screen. • Show Template Chooser: Compressor opens with the Batch Template Chooser on startup. • Use Blank Template: Compressor opens with an empty untitled batch with a placeholder job. • Allow connections from other computers: Use this checkbox to control whether remote computers running Share Monitor can view this computer’s job status. Share Monitor on the remote computer only needs to know the IP address or hostname. (There is no password to enter.) • Enter IP addresses or ranges for manually selected computers: This table displays information about remote host computers. • Add/Remove button: Use this button to add or remove information about remote host computers. 72 Chapter 5 Setting Compressor PreferencesRemote Computer Address Dialog The remote computer address dialog is displayed when you click the Add/Remove button in the main Compressor Preferences window. Use this window to enter IP addresses or ranges for manually selected computers. This dialog contains the following controls: • Host/Host IP address range buttons: These buttons control whether this dialog is in IP Address mode (in which you enter a specific address) or IP Address Range mode (in which you enter a range of addresses). • Host: Use this mode to enter a host name and IP address for a specific remote computer. • Host IP address range: Use this mode to enter a name and set of range numbers (Range From, Range To) for a range of remote IP addresses. Chapter 5 Setting Compressor Preferences 73Using Compressor Preferences Follow the instructions below to set Compressor preferences. To open Compressor preferences µ Choose Compressor > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Preferences window appears. To configure the email notification preference 1 Enter the default email address to use when email notification is activated. You can change this address in the Actions pane of the Inspector window. 2 Enter the mail server used by this computer for outgoing email. For more information about email notification, see Working with Post-Transcoding Actions. To set whether or not Share Monitor automatically opens Do one of the following: µ Select the “Automatically launch Share Monitor” checkbox to have Share Monitor automatically open when you submit a batch. µ Deselect the “Automatically launch Share Monitor” checkbox to prevent Share Monitor from automatically opening. You can still manually open Share Monitor from the Batch window. To control whether thumbnail images are displayed for each job in a batch µ Select “Display job thumbnails” to have Compressor display the images. 74 Chapter 5 Setting Compressor Preferencesµ Deselect “Display job thumbnails” to have Compressor not display the images. To control cluster options (for distributed processing scratch storage settings) µ Choose an option from the Cluster Options pop-up menu: • Copy source to cluster as needed: Instructs Compressor to copy source files to a cluster’s scratch storage location as needed. • Always copy source to cluster: Requires Compressor to always copy source files to a cluster’s scratch storage location. • Never copy source to cluster: Prevents Compressor from copying source files. • Never copy files to/from cluster: Prevents Compressor from copying any files. Either all the files are in the correct locations, or the batch fails. To control whether Compressor transfers Source files to the processing cluster immediately Do one of the following: µ Select “Copy at submission (high priority)” to have Compressor transfer source files immediately. µ Deselect “Copy at submission (high priority)” to prevent Compressor from transferring source files immediately. To control the default setting µ Use the Default Setting pop-up menu to choose from the list of existing settings. The setting you choose appears as the default setting when you import a new source file in the Batch window. To change the default destination µ Use the Default Destination pop-up menu to choose from the list of existing destinations. The destination you choose appears as the default destination when you import a new source file in the Batch window. To control whether Compressor displays the Batch Template Chooser on startup µ Select Show Template Chooser to display the Batch Template Chooser on startup. µ Select Use Blank Template to not display the Batch Template Chooser on startup. To control whether other computers with Share Monitor can view this computer’s job status µ Select “Allow connections from other computers” to allow remote computers running Share Monitor to monitor this computer’s job status. The remote computer needs to know this computer’s IP address or hostname. (There is no password.) Chapter 5 Setting Compressor Preferences 75To enter IP addresses or ranges for remote host computers 1 Click Add (+) at the bottom of the Compressor Preferences window. The host address dialog appears. 2 In the host address dialog, do one of the following: • Select Host, complete the Host Name and IP Address fields, and click Add Host. Note: You can also enter only the host name or the IP address and press the Tab key. If a corresponding host name or IP address is found, the match is entered in the field automatically. • Select “Host IP address range,” complete the Range fields, and click Add Range. The hosts or host ranges appear in the Host table in the main Preferences dialog. Important: Any changes you make to the Compressor preference settings take effect only when you click OK. If you make changes but decide not to use them, click Cancel. 76 Chapter 5 Setting Compressor PreferencesThe first step in the traditional Compressor transcoding process is to import at least one source media file into the Batch window. Note: If you are using the batch template workflow, the first step would be to choose a batch template. For more information about the simple batch template workflow, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method. This chapter covers the following: • About the Batch Window (p. 77) • Adding Source Media Files to a Batch to Create Jobs (p. 81) • Using the Inspector with Source Media Files (p. 89) • Tips on Importing Source Media Files (p. 92) About the Batch Window The Batch window provides a central location for organizing your transcoding tasks and quickly assigning settings. When you first open Compressor, an untitled Batch window appears. Think of batches as documents that can be saved, closed, and opened again. You use the toolbar at the top of the Batch window to open all other task windows. Job area Toolbar Batch tabs Batch status Show/hide toolbar button Batch submission button 77 Importing Source Media Files 6General Batch Window Information Batches are the heart of your Compressor workflow, and the Batch window is where you work with the batches. The Batch window supports having multiple batches open at once, showing them as separate tabs. To create a new batch µ Choose File > New Batch (or press Command-N). A new untitled batch is added to the Batch window. Depending on how For New Batches is configured in Compressor preferences, the Batch Template Chooser may appear. Note: To create a new batch and make sure the Batch Template Chooser appears, choose File > New Batch from Template (or press Command-Shift-N). Each tab is for a different batch. The new batch’s tab See Saving and Opening a Batch File for more information about batch files. See About the Batch Template Chooser for more information about the Batch Template Chooser. You can even have multiple Batch windows open, with each containing a different batch, by dragging a batch’s tab to a new location. See About the Tabs for information on dragging tabs to open or close additional Batch windows. The Batch window has a Submit button, located in the lower-right corner, that you can use to begin transcoding the currently selected batch. The lower-left corner shows the status of the current batch (how many jobs it contains and whether it has been submitted). About the Batch Template Chooser To simplify common workflows, Compressor includes a Batch Template Chooser that can appear anytime you create a new batch. The For New Batches setting in Compressor Preferences controls whether the Batch Template Chooser appears. See About Compressor Preferences for details on this setting. 78 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesThe Batch Template Chooser contains a variety of options you can choose from to configure a new batch. Choosing a template adds one or more settings to the batch, as well as a job action to be executed once the batch output is finished. The standard Apple batch templates are listed below. • Create Audio Podcast: Use this template to create an AAC audio file suitable for podcasting and add it to the iTunes library. • Create Blu-ray disc: Use this template to create BD H.264 video and Dolby Digital Professional (.ac3) audio files and automatically burn them to a Blu-ray disc or an AVCHD disc (AVCHD discs can be played in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format). • Create DVD: Use this template to create a standard definition DVD using MPEG-2 (.m2v) video and Dolby Digital Professional (.ac3) audio and automatically burn it to a disc. • HTTP Live Streaming: Use this template to create a set of files you can use to stream a movie to iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac, using an ordinary server. • Publish to Apple TV: Use this template to create a video file suitable for viewing on Apple TV and add it to the iTunes library. • Publish to YouTube: Use this template to create a video file suitable for viewing on YouTube and upload it to a YouTube account. Note: Your choice of a template should be based on the intended use of the output media file you are creating. If there is no obvious template for your intended workflow, you may want to try the manual method. For more information, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Manual Method. For information about creating custom templates, see Creating a Custom Batch Template. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 79Creating a Custom Batch Template You can save any batch as a custom batch template. Custom batch templates appear as options in the Batch Template Chooser, alongside the default Apple batch templates. Custom batch templates can save you time, particularly with workflows that you repeat often. To create a custom batch template 1 In the Batch window, do one of the following to open a batch with the characteristics (jobs, settings, destinations, job actions, and so on) that you want in the batch template: • Create a new batch and make the needed adjustments. For more information, see The Basic Transcoding Workflow, Assigning Settings, Assigning Destinations, and Adding Actions. • Open a saved batch with the characteristics that you want in the batch template. For more information, see Saving and Opening a Batch File. 2 Choose File > Save as Template. 3 In the dialog that appears, enter a name and description, then click OK. The custom batch template is saved. Optionally, choose File > New Batch from Template to open the Batch Template Chooser and confirm or use your new custom batch template. About the Batch Window Toolbar The Batch window has a customizable toolbar along its top. You can choose whether to show or hide the toolbar by clicking the button in the window’s upper-right corner. Show/hide toolbar button (with the toolbar hidden in this example) You can choose to have a variety of items in the toolbar, such as items to open, save, or close a batch. See Customizing the Toolbar for details on the items you can add and how to add them. 80 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesAdding Source Media Files to a Batch to Create Jobs You need to import the source media files into the batch in the Batch window before you can add any transcoding settings to them. Once they are imported into the batch, the source media files create a job, which is the first step to getting the files transcoded. There are special methods to use when importing surround sound source media files. Adding Standard Source Media Files to Batches Following are the details for adding standard (non–surround sound or image sequence) source media files to a batch. To add source media files to a batch 1 Open Compressor. The Batch window opens with an empty batch tab named Untitled. Untitled batch tab Empty batch area with a placeholder job Note: If the Batch Template Chooser opens automatically, click Cancel to close the Batch Template Chooser. To prevent the Batch Template Chooser from opening when you open Compressor, select the “Don’t show this dialog again” checkbox, or, in Compressor preferences, select For New Batches: Use Blank Template. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Job > New Job With File (or press Command-I), navigate to the relevant media file folder, select one or more source media files, and then click Open. • Click the Add File button (in the Batch window toolbar, if visible), navigate to the relevant media file folder, select one or more source media files, and then click Open. • Control-click a job and choose Source > File from the shortcut menu. • Control-click an empty area of the batch and choose New Job With File from the shortcut menu. You can then navigate to the relevant media file folder, select one or more source media files, and then click Open. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 81• Open your source media file folder and drag one or more source media files into the batch. Note: You can combine the above steps by selecting all the source media files you want to transcode before opening Compressor and then dragging them to the Compressor application icon. This opens Compressor and adds the media files to the default untitled batch at the same time. 3 Save the batch by choosing File > Save As (or pressing Command-Shift-S). 4 Enter a name for the batch and choose the location where you want to save it in the dialog that appears. 5 Click Save when done. The tab in the Batch window changes to match the name of the file. Note: If your Finder preferences are set to show the extensions, the extension .compressor appears in the tab along with the name. You are not actually required to name and save your batches, and for quick jobs you might decide not to. However, naming and saving a batch makes it easy to go back and resubmit it later if you find that the output files were not as expected or if your needs change. It also makes it easier to figure out what is in the History window and in Share Monitor if you submit multiple batches in a short period of time. 82 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesThe batch now contains your selected media files, each in its own job. Source media files with video content also include a thumbnail image and a scroller that you can use to scroll through the video. Drag the slider to scroll through video files. Click anywhere in the job to see this file’s attributes in the Inspector window. Each source media file creates a job. The targets for this job will appear in this area. You can change the source media file assigned to a job. To change the source media file assigned to a job 1 Select the job for which you want to change the source media file. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Job > Source > File, navigate to the relevant media file folder, select one or more source media files, and then click Open. • Control-click the job and choose Source from the shortcut menu. You can then navigate to the relevant media file folder, select one or more source media files, and then click Open. • Drag a new source media file to the job. Any targets you had already configured remain and are now applied to the new source media file. You can also remove a source media file from a job if needed. To remove a source media file from a job µ Control-click the job and choose Clear Source from the shortcut menu. To remove a job from a batch Do one of the following: µ Select the job and press Delete. µ Control-click in an empty part of the batch and choose Remove All Jobs from the shortcut menu. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 83These jobs are now ready to have a target added to them. Adding Surround Sound Source Media Files to Batches There are two methods you can use to add audio files to a batch to create a surround sound job: an automatic method that relies on file naming to map the audio files to the proper channels and a manual method that allows you to manually assign the audio files to the channels. Each method results in a job to which you can add a setting that supports surround sound audio outputs, such as Dolby Digital Professional, AIFF, and several audio codecs in the QuickTime Movie output format. Important: Some of the output formats have multiple configurations for the surround sound audio channels. Be sure you know which configuration your intended playback device requires. For example, the AIFF output format provides four different configurations for 5.1 (six-channel) audio outputs, with the difference being the order of the channels. Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Method) Compressor offers some streamlined channel assignment techniques that can save you time. To assign files to surround channels with channel identifier codes 1 Append the channel identifier code of the target surround channel to the filename of each source audio file. (See the list below for the appropriate channel identifier codes.) • -L: Left front channel • -R: Right front channel • -C: Center front channel • -Ls: Left surround channel • -Rs: Right surround channel • -S: Center surround channel • -LFE: Low frequency channel (Subwoofer, LFE) For example, to assign an AIFF file to the left surround channel, rename the file as filename-Ls.aiff (where filename is the name of your file). (The channel identifier codes must include the hyphen, as shown.) Note: Mac OS X may add a file extension like .aiff. This will not interfere with this channel assignment method. This procedure works only when you drag and drop files into the Batch window. If you drag the files onto the Compressor application icon, they will appear as separate source files, each in its own job. 84 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesNote: If you are creating Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) surround sound streams, you will not use all the channels listed in the table at once. See Audio Tab Settings for a diagram of the Dolby audio coding modes. 2 Drag the renamed source audio files to the Batch window. If the following conditions are met, Compressor automatically collapses the entire group of files into what appears as a single surround source media file in the Batch window: • The files in the group must be named correctly. (See the list in the previous step.) • The total number of files in the group must be fewer than seven. Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) Follow these steps to use the manual method for assigning individual audio files to surround sound channels. Additionally, you can add a video file to the surround sound job. To manually assign source audio files to channels of a surround sound stream 1 Do one of the following to import the source audio files: • Choose Job > New Job With Surround Sound Group (or press Command-Control-I). • Click the Add Surround Sound button in the Batch window. • Control-click in the batch and choose New Job With Surround Sound Group from the shortcut menu. The channel assignment interface opens. 2 Do one of the following to assign a source audio file to a particular channel: • Drag the source audio file from the Finder to the icon for a specific channel (for example, “L”). • Click the icon for a specific channel (for example, “L”) and use the Open dialog to locate the source audio file intended for that channel. The file is now assigned to the “L” (Left Front) channel. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 853 Repeat step 2 for each of the source audio files that you intend to include in the surround stream. Note: If you are creating Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) surround sound streams, you will not use all the channels listed in the table at once. See Audio Tab Settings for a diagram of the Dolby audio coding modes. 4 Optionally, click the Add Video button to select a video file to include with the surround sound job. 5 When you have finished adding source audio and video files to the channel assignment interface, click OK. The group of surround files appears as a single surround source media file job in the Batch window. About Surround Sound Jobs Once you have created a surround sound job, the Batch window shows the surround sound icon in the source media file thumbnail (unless a video file was added to the job) and the Inspector window shows the channels and their assigned files. Click a channel’s icon to change the file assigned to that channel. You can change any of the file assignments in the Inspector window. To change a surround sound file assignment 1 Click the speaker icon of the channel you want to change. A file selection dialog opens. 86 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files2 Locate the file to assign to that channel and click Open. 3 Optionally, you can either click Add Video to add a video file to the job, or delete the video file already assigned and then click Add Video to choose a different video file. See Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files for information on creating Dolby Digital Professional output files. Adding Image Sequences to Batches You can import a sequence of still images into Compressor as a single image sequence job and then apply an output frame rate and an audio file to the job. From that point, you treat the job as you do any other Compressor source media file, adding settings, destinations, filters, and post-transcoding actions to create an output media file with the desired video and audio formats and characteristics. To add a still image sequence job to a batch 1 Open Compressor. The Batch window opens with an empty batch tab named Untitled. Untitled batch tab Empty batch area with a placeholder job Note: If the Batch Template Chooser opens automatically, click Cancel to close the Batch Template Chooser. To prevent the Batch Template Chooser from opening when you open Compressor, select the “Don’t show this dialog again” checkbox, or, in Compressor preferences, select For New Batches: Use Blank Template. 2 Do one the following: • Click the Add Image Sequence button and navigate to the folder containing the image sequence files you want to import. • Choose Job > New Job With Image Sequence (or press Command-Option-I) and navigate to the folder containing the image sequence files you want to import. 3 Select the folder containing the image sequence files you want to import. 4 Click Open. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 87The new job appears in the Batch window. 5 Select the job in the Batch window. The Inspector window displays the A/V Attributes tab containing information and controls for the new image sequence job. 6 Do any of the following: • Confirm the selected image sequence files. (Click the Info (i) button for the complete list of files.) • Confirm the video format information in the Video section. • Use the Native Field Dominance pop-up menu to adjust the field dominance for the source files. (The choices are Progressive, Top First, and Bottom First.) • Use the Frame Rate pop-up menu to adjust the frame rate for the source files by choosing from a list of standard frame rates. • Click Choose Audio to locate, select, and add an audio file to the image sequence job. Note: Compressor supports the following audio file types for image sequences: AIFF, MP3, MPEG-4 audio-only (.m4a), and QuickTime movie (.mov). 88 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesNote: You can also use Compressor to output an image sequence. For more information, see Creating Image Sequence Output Files. Using the Inspector with Source Media Files When you select a batch’s job, the Inspector window shows you information about the job’s source media file. The Inspector window contains three tabs: A/V Attributes, Additional Information, and Job Action. A/V Attributes Tab The A/V Attributes tab contains general information about the source media file and is divided into three sections. • File information: This section shows the filename, location, and type of file. • Video information: This section, when applicable, shows all video-related information about the file. This includes its frame size, frame rate, and timecode information. • Audio information: This section, when applicable, shows all audio-related information about the file. This includes its sample size and sample rate. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 89Additional Information Tab The Additional Information tab allows you to see and modify a variety of metadata items that might have been added in other applications such as Final Cut Pro or QuickTime. It also includes the ability to associate a closed caption file with the file. To associate a closed caption file with a job’s source media file 1 Click the job to show the source media file’s attributes in the Inspector window. 2 Click the Additional Information tab. 3 Click Choose, locate the closed caption file (must be a Scenarist closed caption format file, usually with an .scc file extension), and click Open. Note: Closed caption data is supported by the H.264 for Apple Devices, MPEG-2, and QuickTime Movie output formats. Depending on the output format of the job’s target, Compressor applies the closed caption file to the output media files. • For QuickTime outputs: Compressor adds the closed caption file as a closed caption track to the QuickTime output file. You can view the closed captions using QuickTime Player (version 7.2 or later). • For MPEG-2 elementary stream outputs: Compressor embeds the closed caption data in an elementary MPEG-2 video stream so that it can be used for DVD authoring. • For MPEG-2 program and transport stream outputs: Compressor embeds the closed caption data in program and transport MPEG-2 streams using the EIA-708 ATSC protocol. Important: The timecode values in the closed caption file must directly relate to the timecode of the source media file. You can open a closed caption file in TextEdit to see the timecode values it contains (the actual text is encoded and cannot be read this way). 90 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesTo add an annotation 1 Click the job to show the source media file’s attributes in the Inspector window. 2 Click the Additional Information tab. 3 Use the Add Annotation pop-up menu to choose the type of annotation. 4 Double-click the corresponding Value field and enter the annotation text. 5 Click Save. Note: This Add Annotation feature is supported by the H.264 for Apple Devices, MP3, and QuickTime Movie output formats. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 91Job Action Tab The Job Action tab allows you to apply and adjust post-transcoding actions to entire jobs. For complete details on using the Job Action tab, see Adding Job Actions. Tips on Importing Source Media Files Here are some additional tips on importing source media files. Highly Compressed Source Files It is strongly recommended that you do not use highly compressed source files, such as MPEG files, as your source files, because they can cause undesirable artifacts in the encoded video. QuickTime Reference Movies If you submit a reference movie for distributed processing, the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system will automatically copy the appropriate media files to the processing cluster. For the best performance, you can avoid this file transfer step by making sure that the media files specified in the reference movie are available to each node of the Apple Qmaster cluster. For more information, see How the Apple Qmaster System Distributes Batches. Importing MPEG-2 Files When you import an MPEG-2 file, Compressor must parse the file before you can play it in the Preview window. Parsing the file involves determining its frame structure and other necessary information about the file. Since the frame structure can change throughout the file, Compressor must scan through the entire file, which can take several minutes for longer files. 92 Chapter 6 Importing Source Media FilesThis does not happen with MPEG-2 elementary files encoded using Compressor that had the “Add DVD Studio Pro metadata” checkbox selected. See Extras Tab for more information. About Dolby Digital Professional Source Media Files You can use Dolby Digital Professional AC-3 audio files as source media files for your jobs. There are two common reasons to want to do this. • To test a file you just encoded: Since you cannot preview the Dolby Digital Professional output settings, importing an encoded file into a job allows you to play it and verify the settings. • To convert a Dolby Digital audio file to another format: Since not all media players include Dolby Digital decoders, you may find that you need to transcode the file into another format. Compressor includes a Dolby Digital decoder that it uses whenever you play or transcode Dolby Digital audio files. This makes it possible to verify the Dolby Digital Professional output settings of a previously encoded file on your system without requiring you to have an external Dolby Digital decoder. To hear surround sound you must have an external surround sound device connected to your computer’s USB or FireWire output. The audio is mixed down to two channels if you play the audio using your system’s stereo speakers. Important: Since the audio output is already decoded and not in the Dolby Digital format, the optical output cannot be used when playing Dolby Digital files from Compressor. Tip: Add an .ac3 extension to the filename if Compressor does not allow you to add it to a job. Automatic Values and Nonstandard QuickTime Files Compressor uses a variety of tactics to determine the proper values for any settings that are set to Automatic. In most cases, QuickTime files contain metadata that specify the various attributes of the file, such as frame rate and frame size. In some cases, this metadata is not present, forcing Compressor to try to determine this information, or it is incorrect, causing Compressor to generate incorrect values for the Automatic settings. Additionally, some QuickTime files use nonstandard settings that require Compressor to choose an automatic value that may not be suitable. For these reasons, it is a good idea to verify the values in the Inspectors for those settings that are set to automatic. See About the Automatic Settings for more information. Chapter 6 Importing Source Media Files 93A setting is a combination of transcode attributes, such as output format, filter, and geometry settings, that you apply to the source media file as a part of the transcoding process. You need to assign at least one setting to a source media file before you can transcode it. Once you have a source media file in the current batch in the Batch window, you can either select a preexisting setting or create a customized one using the Settings tab. Once you have all the settings that you think you need, you won’t have to open the Settings tab again because you can select the settings directly from the Batch window. Note: A setting is just one kind of Compressor preset. You can also create, modify, save, or remove Destination presets. For more information on destinations, see Creating and Changing Destinations. This chapter covers the following: • About the Settings Tab (p. 96) • Using the Inspector with Settings (p. 99) • Duplicating Settings (p. 100) • Creating a Setting from Scratch (p. 102) • Searching for a Setting (p. 103) • Previewing a Setting (p. 103) • Deleting Settings (p. 105) • Creating Groups of Settings (p. 106) • Distributing and Sharing Settings (p. 107) • Example: Creating Custom Groups and Settings for DVD (p. 108) 95 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 7About the Settings Tab The Settings tab allows you to manage your settings. In conjunction with the Inspector window, the Settings tab also provides details of all the settings and provides easy access to common transcoding controls. You use the Settings tab (together with the Inspector window) to create, modify, or delete settings, as well as create group folders for multiple settings. You can also create Droplets from the Settings tab. The Settings tab contains a list of the existing settings and the necessary buttons to add, remove, or duplicate a setting and create groups and Droplets. Duplicate Selected Setting button Settings list “Create a New Setting Group” button An example setting Click the disclosure triangles to show or hide a setting group’s contents. “Save Selection as Droplet” button Delete Selected Settings button “Create a New Setting” button Settings Tab Buttons The following buttons are located along the top of the Settings tab. • Create a New Setting Group: Click to create a folder where you can group existing settings. Use this button as a way to organize your settings into some sort of logical order, keeping the Settings tab easy to navigate. Once settings have been created, you can assign a whole group of settings to a source media file (by dragging it onto the source file in the Batch window) or you can create a Droplet containing multiple settings. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. 96 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings• Save Selection as Droplet: Click to create a Droplet from an existing setting or group of settings. Droplets allow you to transcode a media file by simply dragging one or more source media files over the Droplet icon. Once you have selected your setting or group and clicked the “Save Selection as Droplet” button, the Save dialog asks you to name your Droplet, choose a location for it, and choose a destination folder for the relevant output media files. Once you complete this dialog, your Droplet is ready and you can drag as many files as you want to its icon. See Using Droplets for more information about Droplets. • Duplicate Selected Setting: Click to duplicate a selected setting in the Settings tab. The Duplicate button copies the exact settings of the setting currently selected in the Settings tab. Using the Duplicate button allows you to create a new setting from a preexisting one; you can then adjust that setting according to your needs, rather than creating a new setting from scratch. • Search field: Enter text to search the settings for specific attributes. For example, you can type “iPod” to see a list of settings specifically designed for an iPod. • Create a New Setting (+): Click to add a new setting to the Settings tab. A dialog appears for you to choose an output file format (H.264 for Apple Devices, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, and so on) when you click this button. • Delete Selected Settings (-): Click to remove a setting from the Settings tab. You are not asked for a confirmation, so be sure you want to remove the setting before clicking this button. Note: You cannot delete the Apple settings. Settings List When you first open the Settings tab it contains a set of preexisting (Apple) settings supplied with Compressor. The Settings tab displays name and description details of all existing settings and groups stored on your computer. The Apple setting group with subgroups New “Untitled” setting Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 97New settings appear in the Custom group folder with the default name “Untitled [File Format]” with “[File Format]” being the file format you chose from the (+) pop-up menu. It’s a good idea to change the setting name to something meaningful, such as details of the settings or distribution method associated with the setting. Click the setting in the Settings tab to open it in the Inspector window. Click a setting to see it in the Inspector window. Enter the selected setting’s name and description in the Inspector window. Use the Name field in the Inspector window to enter a name. Use the Description field to enter more information about each setting. This information only appears within the Settings tab and can help you keep track of your files when you have many settings. You can also organize your settings by putting them in group folders. Once you have created and named a group folder, you can drag any existing custom setting into it. When you drag a setting to a group, you remove it from its current location. You can also drag individual settings from a group to a source media file. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. 98 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying SettingsSelecting a Target Whenever you select a batch’s target, its setting immediately appears in the Inspector window with Selected Target in the Name field. This is a temporary copy of the setting and not the setting itself, so you can make temporary modifications to the setting for just that one batch submission. Select a target in the Batch window to see its settings in the Inspector window. The setting’s name shows as “Selected Target.” Click the Save As button to save this as a new setting with any changes you make. When you modify the target’s setting, the Save As button at the bottom of the Inspector window becomes active. Click Save As to save the modified setting with a new name. The saved copy appears in the Settings tab as Setting Name-Copy, and immediately becomes the selected setting in the Settings tab. Using the Inspector with Settings The Inspector window contains the panes that let you create and modify all the settings related to your output media file, such as filters, geometry, and output format. The Inspector window is also where you name your settings, as well as add descriptions to make it easier to remember later what you customized. • Summary pane: Provides a detailed summary of a selected setting. See Summary Pane for more information about this pane. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 99• Encoder pane: Allows you to select an output file format and other related video and audio settings. See the following specific sections for more information about the different encoder panes. • About the AIFF Encoder Pane • Creating Common Audio Format Files • About the DV Stream Encoder Pane • About the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder Pane • About the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder Pane • Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc • About the Image Sequence Encoder Pane • Creating MP3 Output Files • About the MPEG-1 Encoder Pane • About the MPEG-2 Encoder Pane • About the MPEG-4 Part 2 Encoder Pane • About the QuickTime Export Components Encoder Pane • About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane • Frame Controls pane: Allows you to customize changes to the frame size, frame rate, or field dominance. (See Working with Frame Controls for more information.) • Filters pane: Allows you to add filters to your setting to enhance the quality of the output files. (See About the Filters Pane for more information.) • Geometry pane: Allows you to crop and set the frame size for your output media file. (See Adding Geometry Settings for more information.) • Actions pane: Allows you to send email notifications and assign a default destination to the setting. (See Adding Actions for more information.) Duplicating Settings If there is a setting that contains some attributes that you want to use in another setting, you can duplicate the existing setting and make the necessary modifications to the duplicated one, rather than creating a new setting from scratch. Duplicating a stock Apple setting and then adjusting the duplicate to suit your needs is the most convenient way to create custom settings. To duplicate a setting 1 Select the setting that you want to duplicate in the Settings tab. 100 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings2 Click the Duplicate Selected Setting button. Select the setting to be duplicated. Click the Duplicate Selected Setting button to duplicate the selected setting. A new setting appears in the Custom folder with the word Untitled appended before the original name. 3 Select the new setting in the Custom folder. 4 Open the following Inspector panes to modify the following items: • The setting name and description: Change the name and description to make it easy to remember why you created this custom setting. • Encoder pane: Change the output format and video and audio codecs and their associated attributes here. • Frame Controls pane: Change any attribute in the Frame Controls pane. • Filters pane: Change any filter attributes here. Click the checkbox next to a filter to add it to the setting, or deselect it to remove it from the setting. • Geometry pane: Change any attribute in the Geometry pane. • Actions pane: Change any attribute in the Actions pane. 5 If you have modified the setting in any way, you can do either of the following to save the changes: • Click the Save button at the bottom of the Inspector window to save the changes. • Attempt to select any other setting. A dialog asks if you want to save the changed attributes. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 1016 Click OK to save the changes, or click Revert to cancel the changes and return to the Inspector. See Assigning Settings to Source Media Files for information about assigning settings. Creating a Setting from Scratch If the preexisting settings are not sufficient for your transcoding needs or if you simply want additional settings, you can create your own. Note: The recommended procedure for creating custom settings is to duplicate a stock Apple setting and then adjust the copy to suit your needs. For information on duplicating settings, see Duplicating Settings. To create a setting 1 Click the Add (+) button in the Settings tab and choose an output format from the pop-up menu. Choose an output format for the new setting A new setting called Untitled appears in the Custom folder of the Settings tab, appended with the selected output file format (for example, Untitled MPEG-2). The new Untitled setting The Inspector window also changes to show this setting’s parameters. Note: You can always change the output file format for that setting in the Encoder pane of the Inspector, but be sure to change the setting name to reflect its output file format. 102 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings2 Open the following Inspector panes to modify the following items: • The setting name and description: Change the name and description to make it easy to remember why you created this custom setting. • Encoder pane: Change the output format and video and audio codecs and their associated attributes here. • Frame Controls pane: Change any attribute in the Frame Controls pane. • Filters pane: Change any filter attributes here. Click the checkbox next to a filter to add it to the setting, or deselect it to remove it from the setting. • Geometry pane: Change any attribute in the Geometry pane. • Actions pane: Change any attribute in the Actions pane. 3 Click Save to Save the setting. See Assigning Settings to Source Media Files for information about assigning settings. Note: You can create groups of settings that can then be applied to a media file in one step. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. Searching for a Setting The Settings tab includes a search field that you can use to quickly locate the setting you need. For example, you can type “iPhone” to see a list of settings that mention iPhone. To search for a setting µ Click the search field and enter the text to search for. Both the name and descriptions of the settings are searched to determine if any contain the text you entered. Click the “X” at the right of the search field to clear the text entry and return to a normal settings display. Previewing a Setting The Compressor Preview window lets you see the effects of your setting—such as filters and frame resizing—and make adjustments to these attributes while previewing the media file in real time. Note: You cannot preview a setting on its own—it must be assigned to a job with a source media file first. In addition, Encoder and Frame Controls pane settings cannot be previewed. If you want to see the effects of settings you make in these two panes, you can use the Preview window to select a small portion of the source media file to transcode and then view the output file to see the results. See Test Transcode Tip for more information. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 103To view your setting in the Preview window 1 Apply the setting to a job in a batch. See Assigning Settings to Source Media Files for more information. 2 Select the target with the setting that you want to preview in the Batch window. Note: You may have to click the Batch window’s Preview button (or press Command-2) for the Preview window to appear. The opening frame of the selected source media file appears in the Preview window, and the title of the selected setting appears in the Batch Item pop-up menu. The left half of the screen displays the source media file in its original form (Source view) and the right half displays what the output image will look like with selected filters and other setting attributes applied to it (Output view). Output view Batch Item selection buttons Source view Batch Item pop-up menu 104 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings3 Make any necessary adjustments to your setting while previewing the media file in the Preview window. This half of the Preview window shows the effects of the Inspector window changes. Make adjustments while previewing the media file in the Preview window. Select the item you want to change. Note: To preview the effect of the filters on your media file, you need to make sure that the checkbox for that particular filter is selected in the Filters list. Otherwise, the Preview window won’t recognize that filter, and it will not be part of the transcoding settings for that job. See Using the Preview Window for more information about previewing your settings and About the Filters Pane for more information on filters. Deleting Settings Use the Delete Selected Settings button to delete custom settings. Note: You cannot delete Apple settings. To delete a setting 1 Select the setting that you want to delete. 2 Click the Delete Selected Settings (–) button, or press the Delete key on your keyboard. Warning: There is no warning when you delete a setting, and you cannot undo the deletion to restore the setting. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 105Creating Groups of Settings Creating a group of settings allows you to quickly assign multiple settings to a source media file. To create a group of settings 1 Click the Group button in the Settings tab. A folder called Untitled appears in the Settings tab with 0 Settings in the Description column. You cannot modify this field. It displays the number of settings the group contains. A new untitled group with 0 settings is created. Enter a name for the new group. Click the Group button. 2 Enter a suitable group name in the Inspector Name field. 3 In the Settings tab, drag the relevant settings into the group folder. 106 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying SettingsNote: You can also create hierarchies of groups (groups within groups). Just drag a group folder into another group folder. This custom group contains three other custom groups, each with its own settings. The Description field displays the number of settings your group contains. Once you have at least one setting inside the group folder, you can click the disclosure triangle next to the group folder to show or hide the setting group details. You can also see full details of the settings in any group by selecting the group and then looking at the Summary pane in the Inspector window. Note: You can also drag settings from one group to another group. To add the same setting to more than one group 1 Select the setting. 2 Click the Duplicate button to create a copy. 3 Drag the duplicated setting to another group folder. You can choose to rename the setting, for example, removing the word “copy” from it. Distributing and Sharing Settings Newly created settings are stored in the home folder at /Users/username/Library/Application Support/Compressor/Settings as XML files, with the file extension .setting. You can distribute and share any of your custom settings by placing them into the same location within the home folder of whatever computer you distributed the settings to. You can also transfer these files the same way that you would distribute any other file, by emailing them as an attachment or placing them on a server. Note: Settings created using Compressor 4 or later are not compatible with earlier versions of Compressor. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 107A quick and easy way to copy a settings file is to simply drag the setting from the Settings tab to your desktop or a Finder window. From there, you can attach it to an email or copy it to another folder or volume. To copy a setting directly from Compressor µ Drag one or more settings from the Settings tab to the Finder (to the desktop, for example). Conversely, you can add a setting to Compressor by simply dragging its file from the Finder. To apply or add a setting to Compressor from the Finder Do one of the following: µ Drag one or more settings from the Finder to the Custom group in the Settings tab. The settings appear in the Custom group in the Settings tab. µ Drag one or more settings from the Finder to an empty space in the Batch window. A new job appears with one or more target rows populated with the settings. µ Drag one or more settings from the Finder to an empty space on a job tile in the Batch window. One or more new target rows appear on the job, populated with the settings. You can also add settings to Compressor using Droplets. For more information, see Using Droplets to Create Jobs and Settings in Compressor. Example: Creating Custom Groups and Settings for DVD For this example, you are working on an HD project that will eventually end up on both an HD and an SD DVD. Before that happens, though, you also need to supply SD DVDs of the dailies. An easy way to handle this is to create two groups of settings. • Settings for the dailies: These settings would include an AIFF audio encoder (since you want it done fast and disc space will not likely be an issue) and an MPEG-2 encoder with an SD frame size using the fastest settings (since quality is not the highest concern). This could also be an HD encoder if you have an easy way to play an HD DVD. • Settings for the final disc: These settings would include an AC-3 audio encode, an H.264 HD for DVD video encode, and an MPEG-2 encode using the Frame Controls to ensure a high-quality SD output video. You would most likely create a third settings group that would be named after this project and would contain the above two groups. To create the groups for dailies and final outputs 1 In the Settings tab, click the Group button three times to create three new untitled groups. 108 Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings2 Select the first of the new groups and, using the Inspector window, name it after the project. 3 Select the second of the new groups and name it Dailies. 4 Select the third of the new groups and name it Final Discs. 5 In the Settings tab, drag the Dailies and Final Discs groups up until a black box surrounds the group named after the project, and then release them. Note: You can select multiple groups or settings by holding down Shift while selecting them. 6 Locate settings in the Apple settings that come closest to matching what you need each setting to do in these new groups. 7 Make a copy of each setting by clicking the Duplicate Selected Setting button. 8 Select each copied setting, rename it, and then drag it to the proper folder. This custom group contains the settings used to create the dailies. This custom group contains the settings used to create the final disc. This custom group contains the other custom groups, each with its own settings. You can then select each setting and make any necessary changes to it. When you have imported the source media files and created their jobs, you can just assign the appropriate group (Dailies or Final Disc) and all the proper settings are applied to the targets. Chapter 7 Creating, Previewing, and Modifying Settings 109A job consists of a source media file with at least one target, composed of a setting and a destination, assigned to it. You created the jobs by importing the source media files. For a job to be complete, and thus ready to be submitted for transcoding, you need to add one or more targets to it. Each target contains a setting, which defines everything about what the file is to be transcoded into, and a destination, which defines where the transcoded file is saved and how its name is generated. Each target also allows you to manually enter the name for the output file. Compressor gives you a number of different options for assigning settings and destinations to your targets and submitting and resubmitting batches. Note: See About the Settings Tab and About the Destinations Tab for more information about creating presets in these windows. This chapter covers the following: • Assigning Settings (p. 111) • Assigning Destinations (p. 116) • General Job and Target Information (p. 118) • General Batch Information (p. 120) • Using Final Cut Pro and Motion with Compressor (p. 127) • Using Distributed Processing with Compressor (p. 129) Assigning Settings This section describes how you can assign settings to source media files and replace or modify assigned settings. 111 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 8Assigning Settings to Source Media Files You can use a variety of methods to assign settings to a job. Some methods, such as dragging the setting from the Settings tab, are better suited to working with one job. Other methods, such as using the shortcut menu, are better for assigning the same settings to a group of jobs. You can even assign settings by dragging (settings or Droplets) from the Finder. Note: The following steps assume you have already added source media files to a batch, creating the jobs to which you are adding the settings. See Importing Source Media Files for details on importing source media files. Tip: You can Option-click a setting group’s disclosure triangle to expand that group (and all subgroups) and show all the settings it contains. To assign a setting to a job by dragging 1 Select one or more settings or groups of settings in the Settings tab. 2 Drag the settings to the job in the Batch window. Select one or more (two in this case) settings to apply to the job. A job with a source media file in the Batch window 112 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesA new target is created for each setting that you added to the batch’s job. New targets are added for each setting you drag to the job. Note: You can only apply the settings to a single job when you assign them by dragging. To assign a setting to a job using the Target menu 1 Select one or more jobs in the Batch window’s current batch. 2 Choose Target > Add Target With Setting. The settings selection dialog appears over the Batch window. Click Add to assign the settings to the selected jobs. Select the settings to apply to the selected jobs. Select the jobs in the Batch window. 3 Choose one or more settings or groups of settings to assign to the jobs, and click Add. The settings are assigned to each selected job. To assign a setting to a job using the shortcut menu 1 Select one or more jobs in the Batch window’s current batch. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 1132 Control-click one of the selected jobs and choose New Target With Setting from the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu lists the settings based on their groups. You cannot directly choose a group to be assigned, but each group contains an “All” item that selects all the group’s settings. Note: You cannot select multiple individual settings with this method. 3 Choose a setting or All to choose all settings in a group. The settings are applied to all selected jobs. To assign a setting from the Finder Do one of the following: µ Drag one or more settings from the Finder to an empty space in the Batch window. A new job appears with one or more target rows populated with the settings. µ Drag one or more settings from the Finder to an empty space on a job tile in the Batch window. One or more new target rows appear on the job, populated with the settings. For more information, see Distributing and Sharing Settings You can also add settings to Compressor using Droplets. For more information, see Using Droplets to Create Jobs and Settings in Compressor. Replacing an Assigned Setting with a Different Setting After you have assigned a setting to a job, you might find a more suitable setting and decide to change the target’s setting to the new one. You can use several methods to change a target’s setting. All of these methods leave the destination and output filename settings as they are. To replace a setting already assigned to a target with a different setting Do one of the following: µ Choose Target > Change Setting. This opens the setting selection dialog where you can choose a new setting and click Add to assign it to the selected target. µ Control-click the target and choose Change Setting from the shortcut menu. This opens the setting selection dialog where you can choose a new setting and click Add to assign it to the selected target. µ Select the new setting in the Settings tab and drag it to the target. Note: With all the above methods, if you select multiple settings, only the top one is assigned to the target. 114 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesModifying an Assigned Setting You can edit or change any component of a setting that has already been assigned to a source media file in the Batch window (identified as Selected Target in the Inspector window). To modify a setting already assigned to a source media file in the Batch window 1 Select the target in the batch with the setting that you want to change. The setting appears in the Inspector window with Selected Target in the Name field. This is a temporary copy of the setting and not the setting itself, so you can make temporary modifications to the setting for just that one batch submission. Select a target in the Batch window to see its settings in the Inspector window. The setting’s name shows as “Selected Target.” Click the Save As button to save this as a new setting with any changes you make. 2 Make the changes to the setting. When you modify the setting, the Save As button at the bottom of the Inspector window becomes active. 3 Click Save As to save the modified setting with a new name. The saved copy appears in the Settings tab as Setting Name-Copy and immediately becomes the selected setting in the Settings tab. Note: You do not have to save the modified setting, but it is a good idea to save it in case you need to use it again later. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 115Assigning Destinations This section describes how you can set output destinations and output filenames. Assigning Destinations to Source Media Files When you assign settings to your targets, the default destination is automatically also assigned. You can set the default destination with Compressor preferences. (Choose Compressor > Preferences.) This can be one of those supplied with Compressor or a custom destination you have created. See Creating a Destination for details on working with destinations. You can replace the default destination with any other destination, or even manually choose a location to save the output file to. There are a number of different ways to assign a destination to a source file. As with assigning settings, different methods have different advantages. To assign a destination by dragging 1 Select a destination in the Destinations tab. 2 Drag the destination to the target in the Batch window. Drag the destination to a job with a target in the Batch window. Select a destination to apply to the target. The destination part of the target updates to the new destination. Note: You can only apply the destination to a single job when you assign it by dragging. Additionally, you cannot create a temporary destination using this method. 116 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesUsing this dragging method, you can also create a new target (with an empty setting) by dragging the destination to an empty part of the job. To assign a destination using the Target or shortcut menu 1 Select all targets that you want to set the destination on. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Target > Destination > [Destination]. • Control-click one of the targets and choose Destination > [Destination] from the shortcut menu. Use the target’s shortcut menu to change the destination for the selected targets. Once you have selected a destination, it appears in each target’s destination section. Note: You can also assign a temporary destination by choosing Other. This opens the File Selection dialog and allows you to create a new destination for just that batch submission. This destination is not saved and applies only to the submitted batch. Setting the Output Filename In addition to defining where to save the output file, destinations also define how the output filename is created. Once you have assigned a destination, the output filename is complete. You can choose to use it as is or you can manually modify it or enter a new name. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 117To modify or enter a new output filename µ Click in the output filename area and edit the existing name, or triple-click the existing name to enter a new name. The output filename General Job and Target Information This section provides general information about jobs and targets. About Targets Targets contain three items: • The setting • The destination • The output filename The setting The destination The output filename Drag the dividers to expand a target’s section and make it easier to see the entry. The target Add and Delete buttons You can use a variety of methods to add targets to a job. The most common is to add a setting or destination to the job. You can also use any of the following methods. 118 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesTo add an empty target to a job Do one of the following: µ Select one or more jobs and choose Target > Add Target. This adds an empty target to the jobs. µ Select one or more jobs and Control-click in an empty area of one of them, then choose Target > Add Target. This adds an empty target to the jobs. µ Click the Add (+) button of an existing target. You can also copy one or more targets from one job to another. To copy targets to another job by dragging 1 Select the targets to copy. 2 Press the Option key and then drag the targets to the new job. To delete targets Do one of the following: µ Select one or more targets and press Delete. µ Click the Delete (–) button in a target. About Adding and Copying Jobs Jobs are most often created by adding source media files to a batch. You can use several other methods to add jobs to a batch. Additionally, you can chain jobs in a batch to set the order in which the files are transcoded once they are submitted. To add an empty job to a batch µ Choose Jobs > New Job. To delete a job from a batch µ Select the job and press the Delete key. To copy jobs from one batch to another Do one of the following: µ Open each batch in its own window and drag the jobs from one window to the other. µ Select the jobs to be copied, press Command-C, select the batch to copy them to, and then press Command-V. About Chaining Jobs Chaining jobs is useful when you need to apply multiple settings to a source media file, but need to have each setting applied after the previous one has finished. This makes it possible to control the order in which the settings are able to modify the source media file. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 119To chain selected targets to new jobs 1 Select the targets whose outputs you want to chain to new jobs. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Jobs > New Job With Target Output. • Control-click one of the targets and choose New Job With Target Output from the shortcut menu. New jobs are added to the batch with the chain thumbnail and the name of the output file of the targets they are chained to. The chained job’s source name is the output filename of the target it is chained to. The chained job’s thumbnail is this chain link logo. You can chain multiple jobs if needed. See Other Reverse Telecine Issues for an example of chaining two jobs together. General Batch Information This section provides general information about submitting, saving, and opening batches. Submitting a Batch Once you have configured the jobs and their targets within a batch, you are ready to submit the batch for processing. To submit a batch 1 Make sure the batch to be submitted is selected in the Batch window. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose File > Submit. • Click the Batch window’s Submit button. 120 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesThe submit dialog appears. 3 Check the Name field to confirm the batch name. You can change this name to something more meaningful about this batch. This is the name that is used for this submission in both Share Monitor and the History window. 4 Use the Cluster pop-up menu to do one of the following: Use the Cluster pop-up menu to choose which computer or cluster will process the batch. • Choose This Computer: Compressor will not involve any other computers in completing the batch unless you select This Computer Plus, which creates an ad hoc cluster including This Computer and any available service nodes. See About This Computer Plus and Unmanaged Services for more information. • Choose a cluster: Compressor submits the batch to the cluster for processing (This Computer Plus is not available). You may need to authenticate yourself depending on the choice you make. See Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing for more details. 5 Use the Priority pop-up menu to choose priority level for the batch. 6 Click Submit or press Enter to submit the batch for processing. The History window shows the batch progress. See About the History Window for more information. Note: The History window automatically opens if it is not already open. You can also monitor the transcoding progress with Share Monitor by clicking its icon in the Batch window. For more information on Share Monitor, see the Share Monitor User Manual, available from the Share Monitor Help menu. You can set Compressor preferences to automatically open Share Monitor. See Setting Compressor Preferences for more details. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 121Note: When submitting larger batches (for example, nine source media files with three settings assigned to each), there is about a 10-second delay after submitting the batch when nothing happens. Be patient. Compressor is preparing the large batch before it can be properly submitted for processing. If you are transcoding a large batch, you should turn off the screen saver application on your computer. This will improve the speed of your transcode because resources are not being diverted to the screen saver. Once the batch has been submitted, a yellow triangle with an exclamation point appears in the batch. Click the warning symbol to see an explanation about why it is there. These warning symbols are used by Compressor whenever an issue exists with a batch. You can place the pointer over the symbol to see a tooltip defining why it is there, or you can click the symbol to open a dialog about it. In the above case, since the batch has been submitted, this warning is to let you know that a file with that name now exists at that destination, and that if you submit again, that file will be overwritten. You can bypass the submit dialog when submitting a batch. The submitted batch automatically uses the settings from the previously submitted batch. To submit a batch using previous settings Do one of the following: µ Choose File > Submit with Previous Settings. µ Click the “Submit with Previous Settings” item in the Batch window toolbar (if present). See About the Batch Window for more information about using the Batch window. 122 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesTest Transcode Tip Before committing to a long transcoding session, do a quick test with a small section of the source media file. If there is a problem (such as an incorrect setting or a reference file that can’t find the files it is referencing), you can make the correction without losing a lot of time. Such tests also allow you to preview Encoder pane and Frame Controls results that are not visible in the Preview window. For a quick way to select a small section of the source media file, see Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window. Make sure the test section is specific to the type of settings you applied. For example, pick a high motion section if you’re doing frame rate or field order conversions with Frame Controls. About the History Window The History window provides quick access to all previously submitted batches, allowing you to conveniently resubmit batches by dragging them to the Batch window and view submission details about when particular job batches were submitted from your computer. Click the disclosure triangle to see the details of that day’s submissions. The History window organizes its contents by the submission date. You can change the order in which the contents are sorted by clicking the Reverse Sort Order button along the bottom of the History window. You can also clear the contents of the History window by clicking the Clear button or remove selected items by selecting them and pressing the Delete key. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 123The History window can also show you the progress of a batch currently being transcoded. Click the disclosure triangle to see the details of each target of this submission. Click the Pause button to temporarily pause the transcode process. Click it again to resume transcoding. The name of this submission Click the Cancel button to end the transcode process. Note: If it is closed, the History window automatically opens when you submit a batch. Once the transcode finishes, the History window adds a button to make finding the encoded files easy. A target from the submitted batch Click the “Reveal in Finder” button to show the encoded file in a Finder window. Clicking this disclosure triangle shows the submission details. Resubmitting a Batch All batch submission information is stored in the History window. This information includes the details about all of the batch’s jobs and targets, including which source media files were assigned to them. You can use this information to resubmit a batch simply by dragging a particular entry from the History window back to the Batch window. To resubmit a batch submission from the History window 1 Use the disclosure triangles to locate the batch submission to resubmit. Note: This is where giving the submission a recognizable name can help. 2 Drag the submission from the History window to the Batch window. 124 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesWhen you drag a batch from the History window to the Batch window, Compressor creates a new untitled tab in the Batch window for that batch. The batch appears in the new tab with all its original details (source media files, targets, assigned settings, destinations, output format, and batch name). You can now make any changes to the batch and resubmit it. Saving and Opening a Batch File There may be times when you configure a batch but are not able to submit it right away. In those cases, you may find it useful to save the batch settings for later reference. To save a batch file 1 Choose File > Save As (or press Command-Shift-S). A dialog opens to name the file and choose its destination. 2 Enter a name for the file if you do not want to use the default name. 3 Choose the destination for the file. 4 Click Save. Batch filenames have a .compressor extension added to them. Note: The .compressor extension appears in the Batch window tabs if Finder preferences are set to show all file extensions. To open a batch file within Compressor 1 Choose File > Open (or press Command-O). A dialog opens to select the batch file to open. 2 Locate and select the batch file to open. 3 Click Open. You can also open a batch file by double-clicking it in the Finder, or by dragging the batch file to the Compressor application icon. Note: An error message appears if Compressor cannot locate any of the source files listed in the batch file, and only those sources it finds will appear. Transcoding Different Clips from One Source Media File If you have a large source media file and you want to transcode only a few different sections of it, you can do this in one batch submission. To transcode different clips from one source media file 1 Open the Batch window. 2 Import the source media file into a batch as many times as the number of clips you want to make. A new job is created each time you import the source media file. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 1253 Add settings to each job. A unique identifier is applied to the output filename, so that you can easily identify each clip after it is transcoded. Unique file identifiers are automatically applied to each job. 4 Do one of the following to open the Preview window: • Choose Window > Preview (or press Command-2). • Click the Preview button in the Batch window. The Preview window opens. 5 Use the Batch Item selection buttons or pop-up menu to navigate to each media file you want to transcode. 6 Drag the In and Out points to the first relevant section of the media file, and repeat for the next media file by dragging its In and Out points to the next relevant section of the media file. You can also use the I (In) and O (Out) keys to move the markers to the current location of the playhead. The In point The Out point 7 Return to the Batch window and click Submit. 126 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesSee About the Preview Window for more information. Using Final Cut Pro and Motion with Compressor Final Cut Pro and Motion contain a Share menu with many commonly used transcoding options already configured. However, if you need a transcoding option not covered by the preconfigured Share items, or you need to customize one of the options, you can use the Send to Compressor options to open the project in Compressor where you can configure it as needed. Important: Compressor 4 must be installed on the same computer as Final Cut Pro X and Motion 5 for these options to work. Submitting a Project for Transcoding You can send a Final Cut Pro or Motion project to Compressor either with a setting already in place or with no setting applied. In either case, the project appears in a batch that you can configure as you would any other batch. To transcode a Final Cut Pro or Motion project 1 Open and select the project you want to transcode in Final Cut Pro or Motion. 2 In the Final Cut Pro or Motion Share menu, choose and configure an output option. See Final Cut Pro Help or Motion Help for information on the available options and their configurations. 3 Do one of the following: • If you chose the Send to Compressor Share menu option, Compressor opens and the project appears as a job in a new batch with no settings. • If you chose any of the other options, click Advanced and choose Send to Compressor. Compressor opens and the project appears as a job in a new batch configured with the Share menu option you chose. The Final Cut Pro project name is used as the new job’s name. 4 Assign settings and destinations to the job as necessary. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 127See the following sections for more information: • Assigning Settings to Source Media Files • Assigning Destinations to Source Media Files 5 Click the Submit button in the Batch window. Compressor begins transcoding the Final Cut Pro project. Note: Once the Final Cut Pro or Motion project opens in Compressor, you can continue working in Final Cut Pro or Motion on that project or a different project. Resubmitting a Project You can use the History window to resubmit a Final Cut Pro or Motion project, the same way as you resubmit any other batch. Compressor resubmits the project as it was when originally submitted; any changes that have been made to the project since the original submission are ignored. See Resubmitting a Batch for details about the steps in this process. Optimizing Distributed Processing for Final Cut Pro and Motion There are two common situations that affect how distributed processing works with your Final Cut Pro and Motion media: • Media is on the Final Cut Pro or Motion boot disk: This is the default way the media is handled. In this case, the only distributed processing option you have is This Computer Plus, and Apple Qmaster has to first copy the source media to the distributed processing service computers, slowing down the distributed processing process. • Media is on a mountable non-boot disk: Storing your Final Cut Pro and Motion media on a disk other than the computer’s boot disk means that all the distributed processing service computers can directly access the source media, saving Apple Qmaster from having to copy it to the service computers, and allowing you to choose to submit the project to any clusters that are available. This disk can be a second internal disk in the computer, an external disk, or a disk on a local network computer. To optimize distributed processing for Final Cut Pro and Motion 1 Make sure all Events used in your Final Cut Pro project are stored on a mountable disk that is configured for file sharing. For details on storing your Final Cut Pro and Motion media on non-default disks, see Final Cut Pro Help and Motion Help. 2 On each of the Apple Qmaster cluster’s computers, mount the hard disk where the Final Cut Pro events and other media files are located. 3 In Compressor preferences, choose “Never Copy Source to Cluster” from the Cluster Options pop-up menu. 128 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesFinal Cut Pro and Motion projects that either use an Apple Qmaster cluster directly or use Send to Compressor and choose a cluster there will no longer need to spend time copying the source files to the cluster’s computers, providing a more efficient transcoding process. Using Distributed Processing with Compressor You can increase speed and productivity by distributing processing across multiple computers. The Apple Qmaster features of Compressor subdivide the work for speed, route the work to the computers with the most available computing power, and direct the processing across designated computers. For complete instructions on setting up and managing an Apple Qmaster distributed processing network, see Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing. This section covers two specific topics that you should be aware of when you are using the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system with Compressor. Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding If you choose the two-pass or the multi-pass mode, and you have distributed processing enabled, you may have to make a choice between speedier processing and ensuring the highest possible quality. The Apple Qmaster distributed processing system speeds up processing by distributing work to multiple processing nodes (computers). One way it does this is by dividing up the total number of frames in a job into smaller segments. Each of the processing computers then works on a different segment. Since the nodes are working in parallel, the job is finished sooner than it would have been on a single computer. But with two-pass VBR and multi-pass encoding, each segment is treated individually so the bit-rate allocation generated in the first pass for any one segment does not include information from the segments processed on other computers. First, evaluate the encoding difficulty (complexity) of your source media. Then, decide whether or not to allow job segmenting (with the Allow Job Segmenting checkbox at the top of the Encoder pane). If the distribution of simple and complex areas of the media is similar throughout the whole source media file, then you can get the same quality whether segmenting is turned on or not. In that case, it makes sense to allow segmenting to speed up the processing time. Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches 129However, you may have a source media file with an uneven distribution of complex scenes. For example, suppose you have a 2-hour sports program in which the first hour is the pregame show with relatively static talking heads, and the second hour is high-action sports footage. If this source media were evenly split into two segments, the bit-rate allocation plan for the first segment would not be able to “donate” some of its bits to the second segment because the segments would be processed on separate computers. The quality of the more complex action footage in the second segment would suffer. In this case, if your goal were ensuring the highest possible quality over the entire 2-hour program, it would make sense to not allow job segmenting by deselecting the checkbox at the top of the Encoder pane. This forces the job (and, therefore, the bit-rate allocation) to be processed on a single computer. Note: The Allow Job Segmenting checkbox affects only the segmenting of individual jobs (source files). If you are submitting batches with multiple jobs, the distributed processing system will continue to speed up processing by distributing (unsegmented) jobs, even with job segmenting turned off. For more information on variable bit-rate encoding (VBR), see Quality Tab. For more information on the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system, see Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing. About This Computer Plus and Unmanaged Services Compressor includes a This Computer Plus feature that makes it easy to take advantage of the distributed processing capabilities offered by Apple Qmaster, without requiring a lot of knowledge about how clusters are configured, setting up file sharing, and so on. Using This Computer Plus is a two-step process: • Installing Compressor, configured to provide distributed processing services, on each computer to be included in the This Computer Plus cluster. • Selecting the This Computer Plus checkbox when you submit a Compressor batch for processing. Note: You may need to authenticate yourself. See Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing for more details. These two steps let you harness the processing power of any number of computers on your network without any additional effort or knowledge on your part. For additional information, see Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus. 130 Chapter 8 Finalizing Jobs and Submitting BatchesYou can use Compressor to output audio in the AIFF format. This chapter covers the following: • Creating AIFF Output Files (p. 131) • About the AIFF Encoder Pane (p. 132) • About the Sound Settings Dialog (p. 132) • QuickTime Audio Sample Sizes and Rates (p. 133) • Choosing an Audio Codec for Distribution (p. 134) • Configuring AIFF Settings (p. 134) Creating AIFF Output Files The AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format) file format was developed by Apple for storing high-quality audio. The format was intended for DVD or CD authoring and is now one of the most commonly used audio file formats for the Mac OS. Note: Choose the AIFF option from the File Format pop-up menu only if you need to create a specialized AIFF file. If you are creating a standard AIFF file, choose the Common Audio Formats option. 131 Creating AIFF Files 9About the AIFF Encoder Pane The following options appear when you choose the AIFF output format from the File Format pop-up menu in the Encoder pane of the Inspector window. File Extension field QuickTime AIFF Summary table Click to open the Sound Settings dialog. Choose AIFF. • File Extension: This field displays the AIFF file extension (.aiff) automatically after the AIFF output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. Don’t alter this field. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. Since job segmenting is not used for audio-only encodes, this checkbox is not active with the AIFF file format. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Settings: This button opens the QuickTime Sound Settings dialog. Use this dialog to select suitable audio codecs and change other audio compression settings. See About the Sound Settings Dialog for more information. • QuickTime AIFF Summary: This table displays full details for this setting. About the Sound Settings Dialog You use the Sound Settings dialog to change your audio compression settings for both the QuickTime and AIFF output formats. To open this dialog, click the Audio Settings button in the AIFF or QuickTime Movie Encoder pane. 132 Chapter 9 Creating AIFF FilesIf a particular audio setting cannot be changed, it remains dimmed. Some audio codecs allow you to configure additional settings, which appear in the lower half of the Sound Settings dialog. In some cases, an Options button becomes available. Click it to configure additional settings. Choose the number of channels (the selection varies based on the codec). Choose a rate that provides the quality and file size required. Choose an audio codec. Format-specific settings based on the codec The Sound Settings dialog contains the following items, with various choices for each, depending on the audio codec you choose in the Format pop-up menu. • Format: Choose the audio codec you want to add to your setting. • Channels: Choose the type of channel output, such as mono, stereo, or some type of multichannel output, depending on the codec. • Rate: Choose the sample rate you want to use for your media file. The higher the sample rate, the higher the audio quality, but the larger the file. Downloading a larger file takes longer and requires more bandwidth. • Show Advanced Settings: This button remains dimmed unless the codec you selected from the Format pop-up menu offers options. Contact the manufacturers of these codecs directly for more information about the additional options they offer. QuickTime Audio Sample Sizes and Rates If you have the disk space and bandwidth, it is best to leave your audio uncompressed. Uncompressed audio normally uses 8-bit (phone quality) or 16-bit (CD quality) samples. Compressor supports up to 64 bits per sample floating point and a maximum sample rate of 192 kHz. Chapter 9 Creating AIFF Files 133Choosing an Audio Codec for Distribution MPEG-4 Audio (AAC) is a good general-purpose audio delivery codec and is compatible with a wide variety of playback devices. For slower computers, less-compressed formats, such as IMA, or completely uncompressed formats, such as AIFF, may be better choices, because they are less processor intensive, thus allowing the computer to focus on the more challenging video stream. Configuring AIFF Settings When you choose the AIFF output file format as your output format, you can only create audio settings (because it is an audio-only format). If you want to add an audio codec to your AIFF preset, you need to open the Sound Settings dialog and choose your audio codec settings from there. To create an AIFF audio codec setting 1 In the Settings tab, do one of the following: • Make sure that the correct setting is selected. • Create a new setting by choosing AIFF from the “Create a new setting” (+) pop-up menu. 2 Click the Settings button in the AIFF Encoder pane. The Sound Settings dialog opens. Choose an audio codec from the Format pop-up menu. 3 Choose an audio codec from the Format pop-up menu and either accept its defaults or customize the other audio codec settings (Format, Channels, Rate, and Options, if available). See About the Sound Settings Dialog for more details. Note: You can see full details of the current contents of your preset by viewing the QuickTime AIFF Summary table in the Encoder pane. 4 Click OK to save your settings and close this dialog. 134 Chapter 9 Creating AIFF FilesYou can use this setting to easily output audio in several common audio formats. This chapter covers the following: • Creating Common Audio Format Files (p. 135) • About the Common Audio Formats Pane (p. 136) • Configuring Common Audio Formats Settings (p. 136) Creating Common Audio Format Files The Common Audio Format setting makes it easy to create audio files in the following formats: • AIFF: The AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format) file format was developed by Apple for storing high-quality audio. The format was intended for DVD or CD authoring and is now one of the most commonly used audio file formats for the Mac OS. Note: Use this to create standard AIFF format files. Choose the AIFF option from the File Format pop-up menu if you need to create specialized AIFF format files. • Apple CAF File: The Apple CAF (Core Audio Format), developed by Apple, provides high performance and flexibility and is scalable to future ultra-high resolution audio recording, editing, and playback. It has an unrestricted file size and supports a wide variety of metadata. • WAVE: The WAVE (WAVEform audio file format) is primarily used on Windows computers. 135 Creating Common Audio Format Files 10About the Common Audio Formats Pane The following options appear when you choose the Common Audio Formats output format from the File Format pop-up menu in the Encoder pane of the Inspector window. The Automatic button • Extension: This field displays the file extension after you select an audio format from the “File type” pop-up menu. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. Since job segmenting is not used for audio-only encodes, this checkbox is not active with the Common Audio Formats file format. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • File type: Choose the type of audio file to create. • Automatic: When Automatic is on, Compressor determines the number of channels, the sample rate, and sample size based on the source file, and the “Channel layout,” “Sample rate,” and “Sample size” pop-up menus are disabled. When the Automatic button is off, you manually configure these settings. • Channel layout: Choose the number of channels (Mono, Stereo, or 5.1). • Sample rate: Choose from the available sample rates (32000, 44100, 48000, or 96000). • Sample size: Choose from the available sample sizes (16, 24, or 32). Configuring Common Audio Formats Settings When you choose the Common Audio Formats output file format as your output format, you can only create audio settings (because it is an audio-only format). To create a Common Audio Formats setting 1 In the Settings tab, do one of the following: • Make sure that the correct setting is selected. 136 Chapter 10 Creating Common Audio Format Files• Create a new setting by choosing Common Audio Formats from the “Create a new setting” (+) pop-up menu. 2 Choose an audio format from the “File type” pop-up menu in the Common Audio Formats Encoder pane. 3 Do one of the following: • Click to turn on the Automatic button and let Compressor configure the “Channel layout,” “Sample rate,” and “Sample size” pop-up menu settings. • Click to turn off the Automatic button and manually configure the “Channel layout,” “Sample rate,” and “Sample size” pop-up menu settings. Chapter 10 Creating Common Audio Format Files 137Compressor provides the tools you need to create DV files. Due to its low cost and wide availability, the DV video format is extremely popular for standard definition (SD) video capture and delivery. This chapter covers the following: • About the DV Stream Encoder Pane (p. 139) • DV Transcoding Workflow (p. 140) About the DV Stream Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the various settings within the DV Stream Encoder pane of the Inspector window. You make your DV settings by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. The Automatic buttons for the Format, Aspect Ratio, and Field Order values The DV Stream Encoder pane contains the following settings. • Extension: This field displays the DV file extension (.dv) automatically after the DV Stream output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. 139 Creating DV Stream Output Files 11• Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Format: Choose either NTSC or PAL as the output video format. • Aspect Ratio: Choose either 16:9 or 4:3 as the output video aspect ratio. Note: The 16:9 aspect ratio uses anamorphic video. • Field Order: Choose Bottom field first (required for interlaced DV video) with interlaced sources or Progressive with progressive sources. DV Transcoding Workflow How you use Compressor to transcode your video into DV Stream format files depends on how you intend them to be used. The basic steps are listed below. Stage 1: Creating a Batch As with any transcode, you need to start by creating a batch. See Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings for more information. Stage 2: Creating Jobs with the Source Video Files Import the source video files either by dragging them from the Finder to the batch or by choosing Job > New Job With File. Stage 3: Adding Targets with a DV Setting to Each Job Each of the jobs requires at least one target—in this case the jobs need targets with a DV Stream setting. If there is more than one job, it is easiest to select all the jobs by choosing Edit > Select All and then choose Target > New Target With Setting to apply the same setting to all the jobs. Stage 4: Submitting the Batch for Transcoding Click the Submit button to start the transcode process. See Submitting a Batch for more information. 140 Chapter 11 Creating DV Stream Output FilesCompressor provides the tools you need to encode, and batch-encode, Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) audio files. Dolby Digital Professional format (also known as AC-3) is a very common compressed audio format for DVD-Video discs. Compressor accepts multichannel sound files in a variety of formats and gives you complete control over the AC-3 encoding process. Dolby Digital programs can deliver 5.1-channel surround sound with five discrete full-range channels (left, center, right, left surround, and right surround) plus a sixth channel for low-frequency effects (LFE), sometimes known as “the subwoofer.” Another surround option is Dolby Surround, with four channels (left, center, right, surround). But not all AC-3 audio is 5.1 surround sound. Dolby Digital Professional is commonly used to encode stereo files to greatly reduce their file size. See Adding Surround Sound Source Media Files to Batches for more information about creating surround sound audio files using other output formats. Note: It’s important to understand that Compressor cannot take stereo audio files and create 5.1 surround sound from them. If you want to create a 5.1 surround sound AC-3 audio file, you must first create the six channels of audio it requires. This must be done using other applications outside Compressor. This chapter covers the following: • About the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder Pane (p. 142) • General Information About Creating Dolby Digital Professional Files (p. 148) • Converting Stereo Audio Files to Dolby Digital Professional Format (p. 149) • Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) (p. 150) • Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Methods) (p. 153) • Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels with Droplets (p. 155) • Options for Spatial Mixing (p. 155) 141 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 12About the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the various tabs within the Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) Encoder pane of the Inspector window. You make your Dolby Digital Professional settings using the tabs described below, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. The Dolby Digital Professional pane opens with the default Audio tab on top. The Dolby Digital Professional pane contains the following items: basic settings, Audio tab settings, Bitstream tab settings, and Preprocessing tab settings. Basic Settings Use the following basic settings to set up a Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) job or batch. • File Extension: This field displays the Dolby Digital Professional file extension (.ac3) automatically after the Dolby Digital Professional output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. Since job segmenting is not used for audio-only encodes, this checkbox is not active with the Dolby Digital Professional file format. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Audio, Bitstream, and Preprocessing: These buttons open the Audio, Bitstream, and Preprocessing tabs described next. 142 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesAudio Tab Settings All the most important Dolby Digital Professional settings are accessible in the Audio tab. • Target System: Compressor limits available settings to those appropriate for the target system. If you’re encoding for use with DVD Studio Pro, choose DVD Video. Choose DVD Audio only if you are encoding for use in a DVD Audio authoring application. Choose Generic AC-3 to remove the setting limits. • Audio Coding Mode: Specifies the audio channels of the encoded stream. This setting also has an Automatic button. The Audio Coding Mode Automatic button Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 143For example, “3/2 (L, C, R, Ls, Rs)” means three front channels (left, center, right), and two rear channels (surround). “2/0 (L, R)” is essentially a standard stereo file. The audio coding mode affects settings such as the available bandwidth and surround channel preprocessing. If you click the Automatic button (next to the Audio Coding Mode pop-up menu), Compressor makes its best guess at the intended audio coding mode, based on available source audio files. 3/1 channels 3/0 channels 2/2 channels 2/1 channels 2/0 channels 1/0 channels (LFE option not available) (LFE option not available) 3/2 channels L C LFE LFE LFE LFE LFE LFE LFE R Ls Rs L R Ls Rs L R L R S L C R S L C C R Note: In the Audio Coding Mode pop-up menu, “S” stands for a single rear “Surround” channel, and in this illustration, “LFE” stands for Low Frequency Effects (also known as “subwoofer”). For more information, see Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) and Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Methods). • Enable Low Frequency Effects: Select this checkbox to include the LFE channel in the encoded stream (not available for 1/0 mono or 2/0 stereo). • Sample Rate: Specifies the sample rate. All files intended for video and audio DVD authoring must have a 48 kHz sample rate as per the DVD specification. The 32 kHz and 44.1 kHz sample rates are available only when Generic AC-3 is the target system. • Data Rate: The choices depend on the coding mode and target system. The higher the rate, the better the quality. AC-3 streams have a constant data rate. At 448 kbps, which is the default for 5.1 encoding, one minute of AC-3 audio takes about 3.3 MB of storage space. For stereo encoding, rates of 192 kbps and 224 kbps are typical and will produce good results. • Bit Stream Mode: Defines the purpose of the encoded audio material. The information is included in the finished stream and can be read by some decoding systems. 144 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files• Dialog Normalization: Specifies the average volume of the dialogue, using decibels of full scale (dBFS), in your sound files relative to full modulation. The playback device uses this information to maintain similar volume among different AC-3 streams. The goal is to make all AC-3 encoded audio files have the same listening level, regardless of the source file. It is especially important to properly use the Dialog Normalization feature if you have different audio files (with different volume levels) going on to a DVD. If you know the average level for each file, enter that number in the Dialog Normalization field for each file. For example, if the dialogue in your Final Cut Pro sequence averages around –12 dB on the audio meter, enter –12 in the Dialog Normalization field. Note: This normalization is between the audio streams on the DVD, not within an individual audio stream itself. For that type of normalization, use an audio editing tool. You can enter values from –1 dBFS to –31 dBFS. The difference between the value you enter and 31 dBFS (which represents the normal dialogue listening level) is the amount that the source audio will be attenuated. • If you enter –31 dBFS: The attenuation is 0 dB (31 dBFS–31 dBFS), and the source audio levels are not affected at all. • If you enter –27 dBFS: The attenuation will be 4 dB (31 dBFS–27 dBFS). • If you enter –12 dBFS: The attenuation is 19 dB (31 dBFS–12 dBFS). The louder the source file, the smaller the value you enter, and the more the audio in the encoded file is attenuated during playback. If you do not know the sound level of the source file or for some other reason want to ensure the Dolby Digital Professional encoder does not affect your sound levels, enter –31 for the Dialog Normalization and choose None in the Compression Preset pop-up menu (located in the Preprocessing tab). Important: It is critical that you set Dialog Normalization correctly if you intend to use any of the Compression Preset settings. The Compression Preset settings assume that the audio, after the dialogue has been normalized, is at the normal listening level of 31 dBFS. Levels that are consistently louder than that result in distorted sound and erratic levels. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 145Bitstream Tab Settings These settings are stored in the finished stream for use by the playback device. Leave them at their default values unless you have a specific technical reason for changing them. • Center Downmix, Surround Downmix: If your encoded audio has these channels, but the player does not, the channels are mixed into the stereo output at the specified level. • Dolby Surround Mode: When encoding in 2/0 (stereo) mode, specifies whether the signal uses Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). • Copyright Exists: Select this checkbox to specify that a copyright exists for this audio. • Content is Original: Select this checkbox to specify that this audio is from the original source and not a copy. • Audio Production Information: Select this checkbox and fill in the fields below to specify how the encoded audio content was mixed. Playback devices may use this information to adjust output settings. • Peak Mixing Level: Specifies peak sound pressure level (SPL) (between 80 dB and 111 dB) in the production environment when this mix was mastered. • Room Type: Specifies information about the mixing studio. 146 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesPreprocessing Tab Settings Preprocessing options are applied to the audio data before encoding. With the exception of the Compression Preset setting, leave these settings at their default values unless you have a specific technical reason for changing them. Compression Preset • Compression Preset: Specifies one of the dynamic range processing modes built in to the AC-3 format. The default of Film Standard Compression should only be used when you are encoding an original mix intended for cinema. In almost all cases, you should choose None. Important: It is critical that you set the Audio tab’s Dialog Normalization correctly if you intend to use any of these Compression Preset settings. The Compression Preset settings assume that the audio, after the dialogue has been normalized, is at the normal listening level of 31 dBFS. Levels that are consistently louder than that result in distorted sound and erratic levels. Note: If you are building a Dolby Digital Professional 5.1-channel surround sound DVD, you will use Film Standard Compression. General • Digital Deemphasis: Specifies whether input audio data is preemphasized and needs to be deemphasized before encoding. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 147LFE Channel • Low-Pass Filter: Select this checkbox to apply a 120 Hz low-pass filter to the Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel. Turn off this filter if the digital signal fed to the LFE’s input does not contain information above 120 Hz. Full Bandwidth Chan. • Low-Pass Filter: Select this checkbox to turn on a low-pass filter with a cutoff near the available audio bandwidth that is applied to the main input channels. If the digital signal fed to the main input channels does not contain information above the available audio bandwidth, you can turn off this filter. Compressor will automatically determine the available bandwidth. • DC Filter: Select this checkbox to turn on a DC high-pass filter for all input channels as a simple way to remove DC offsets. Most mixed audio material is already free of DC offsets. Surround Channels • 90º Phase Shift: Select this checkbox to generate multichannel AC-3 streams that can be downmixed in an external two–channel decoder to create true Dolby Surround-compatible output. • 3 dB Attenuation: Select this checkbox to apply a 3 dB cut to the surround channels of a multichannel film soundtrack being transferred to a consumer home theater format. Cinema surround channels are mixed 3 dB “hot” (higher) relative to the front channels to account for cinema amplifier gains. General Information About Creating Dolby Digital Professional Files Following are some things to keep in mind as you configure and encode Dolby Digital Professional AC-3 files. About the Source Media Files There are a few guidelines to be aware of when encoding Dolby Digital Professional output files from your source media files. Depending on the format, a file can contain a single channel (mono), dual channels (stereo), or multiple channels. Compressor supports Dolby Digital Professional in all these configurations. Sound files intended for Dolby Digital Professional encoding must conform to the following rules: • All source files should be the same length. (If they are not, Compressor sets the length of the AC-3 stream to match the length of the longest file.) • All files must have a 48 kHz sample rate (as required for DVD). 148 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files• AC-3 streams must have a multiple of 1536 samples. If the selected input files do not, Compressor adds digital silence to the end of the files. Note: Compressor can support any kind of source files that contain surround sound and high resolution audio up to 64 bits per sample (floating point) and sample rates up to 192 kHz. About Previewing the Encoder Settings The settings made in the Dolby Digital Professional encoder pane cannot be previewed. If you have an external surround sound device connected to the USB, FireWire, or other output from the computer, you will be able to hear the audio assigned to the different channels, but it will not include any settings, such as the Dialog Normalization or Compression Preset settings. Important: Since the audio output is not Dolby Digital, the optical output cannot be used to verify the audio assigned to each channel. The only way to verify the settings is to submit the batch and listen to the results. If you are unsure of the settings, use the Preview window to encode a short portion of the source as a test. You can import an AC-3 file as a source media file into a Compressor batch. Compressor includes a built-in Dolby Digital decoder that it uses to decode the AC-3 files. This decoder will properly apply any settings you made in the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder pane, allowing you to hear their effects without requiring you to have an external Dolby Digital decoder. You can also transcode the AC-3 files to a different format. Note: Surround sound AC-3 files are downmixed to stereo if you do not have an external surround sound system connected to the computer. Converting Stereo Audio Files to Dolby Digital Professional Format Follow these steps to encode a stereo (2/0 L,R) Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) stream from a stereo source media file. To encode an AC-3 stream 1 Add source audio files to the Batch window (see Importing Source Media Filesfor details). 2 Save the batch by choosing File > Save As (or pressing Command-Shift-S), then entering a name for the batch, selecting a location, and clicking Save. 3 Do one of the following to apply the appropriate Apple setting from the Dolby Digital Professional category to the source audio file: • Choose Target > New Target With Setting, choose a setting, and click Add. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 149• In the Batch window, Control-click in an empty part of the job, choose New Target With Setting from the shortcut menu, choose a setting, and click Add. • Drag a setting from the Settings tab to the source audio file’s job in the Batch window. 4 If you want, make any adjustments to the setting in the Encoder pane of the Inspector window (see About the Dolby Digital Professional Encoder Pane for more information). Note: Compressor will map channels intelligently. Here are some examples: • If you import a stereo source file and apply a mono 1/0 (C) audio coding mode to it: The file will be downmixed. • If you apply a surround audio coding mode to the stereo file: The left and right channels will be mapped to the left front (L) and right front (R) channels, leaving the other channels of the coding mode silent. • If you assign a stereo file to the left front or left (rear) surround channel: Compressor will pick the left channel and ignore the right channel. 5 Click Submit. For information about encoding surround sound files, see Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) and Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Methods). Also see About Previewing the Encoder Settings for information on playing your AC-3 audio files with Compressor. Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Manual Method) Follow these steps to use the manual method for assigning individual audio files to surround sound channels. To manually assign source audio files to channels of a surround sound stream 1 Do one of the following to import the source audio files: • Choose Job > New Job With Surround Group (or press Command-Control-I). • Click the Add Surround Sound button in the Batch window. • Control-click in the batch and choose New Job With Surround Group from the shortcut menu. The channel assignment interface opens. 2 Do one of the following to assign a source audio file to a particular channel. • Drag the source audio file from the Finder to the icon for a specific channel (for example, “L”). • Click the icon for a specific channel (for example, “L”) and use the Open dialog to locate the source audio file intended for that channel. 150 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesThe file is now assigned to the “L” (Left Front) Channel. 3 Repeat step 2 for each of the source audio files that you intend to include in the surround stream. Note: If you are creating Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) surround sound streams, you will not use all the channels listed in the table at once. See Audio Tab Settings for a diagram of the Dolby audio coding modes. 4 When you have finished adding source audio files to the channel assignment interface, click OK. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 151The group of surround files appears as a single surround source media file job in the Batch window and the icons are also shown in the Inspector window. Click a channel’s icon to change the file assigned to that channel. Note: You can click a channel icon in the Inspector window to change the file assigned to it. 5 Do one of the following to apply the appropriate Apple setting from the Dolby Digital Professional category to the source audio file: • Choose Target > New Target With Setting, choose a setting, and click Add. • In the Batch window, Control-click in an empty part of the job, choose New Target With Setting from the pop-up menu, choose a setting, and click Add. • Drag a setting from the Settings tab to the source audio file’s job in the Batch window. 6 Make any necessary adjustments in the Inspector window and click Submit. Compressor creates an AC-3 surround audio stream. See About Previewing the Encoder Settings for information on playing your AC-3 audio files with Compressor. You can also combine surround audio source files with a video file to make a single Compressor job. This is useful in audio post-production workflows in which surround audio stems (submixes) are created separately from the final picture edit. Compressor will treat the video and up to six audio files as a virtual single asset. For example, this would allow you to apply the Create DVD job action to make a DVD with 5.1-channel surround sound. 152 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesTo combine a video file with surround audio files to make a single source media file 1 Follow steps 1-5 above to manually assign source audio files to channels of a surround sound stream. 2 Click the Add Video button and use the resulting Open window to choose the video file. Note: This feature supports QuickTime source media files only. Image sequences are not supported. 3 Make any necessary adjustments in the Inspector window and click Submit. Assigning Files to Surround Sound Channels (Automatic Methods) Compressor offers some streamlined channel assignment techniques that can save you time. To assign files to surround channels with channel identifier codes 1 Append the channel identifier code of the target surround channel to the filename of each source audio file. (See the list below for a list of the appropriate channel identifier codes.) • -L: Left front channel • -R: Right front channel • -C: Center front channel • -Ls: Left surround channel • -Rs: Right surround channel • -S: Center surround channel • -LFE: Low frequency channel (Subwoofer, LFE) For example, to assign an AIFF file to the left surround channel, rename the file as filename-Ls.aiff (where filename is the name of your file). Note: Mac OS X may add a file extension like .aiff. This will not interfere with this channel assignment method. This procedure only works when you drag and drop files into the Batch window. If you drag the files onto the Compressor application icon, they will appear as separate source files, each in its own job. Note: If you are creating Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) surround sound streams, you will not use all the channels listed in the table at once. See Audio Tab Settings for a diagram of the Dolby audio coding modes. 2 Drag the renamed source audio files to the Batch window. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 153If the following conditions are met, Compressor automatically collapses the entire group of files into what appears as a single surround source media file in the Batch window: • The files in the group must be named correctly. (See the channel identifier codes listed above.) • The total number of files in the group must be fewer than seven. The Inspector window shows the audio files assigned to each channel. Click a channel’s icon to change the file assigned to that channel. Note: You can click a channel icon in the Inspector window to change the file assigned to it. 3 Do one of the following to apply the appropriate Apple setting from the Dolby Digital Professional category to the source audio file’s job: • Choose Target > New Target With Setting, choose a setting, and click Add. • In the Batch window, Control-click in an empty part of the job, choose New Target With Setting from the shortcut menu, choose a setting, and click Add. • Drag a setting from the Settings tab to the source audio file’s job in the Batch window. 4 Make any necessary adjustments in the Inspector window and click Submit. Compressor creates an AC-3 surround audio stream. See About Previewing the Encoder Settings for information on playing your AC-3 audio files with Compressor. 154 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesAssigning Files to Surround Sound Channels with Droplets You can further streamline the channel assignment process by encapsulating the “automatic” method described above in a Droplet. For more information about Droplets, see Using Droplets. Options for Spatial Mixing This section offers additional insights and suggestions for using the channels in a Dolby Digital Professional program. Using the Center Channel In a multichannel system, there are three ways to achieve a centrally placed sound image. • Create a “phantom center” (mix sound to the left and right equally, as with stereo): Commonly used, but assumes the listener is seated exactly between the speakers (which is not possible in automobiles and not always the case in homes). The timbre of sound is not the same as from a direct speaker because of cross-cancelation effects. • Use the center channel alone: This creates a stable center image for listeners in any location. (To prevent the audio from sounding too focused or narrow, its reverb can be spread to the left and right channels.) • Use all three front channels equally or in various proportions: This method allows for greater control of the range of spatial depth and width. The phantom center can be reinforced by additional signals in the center channel, which can be enhanced by signals spread into the left/right pair. The disadvantage is that sound from all three speakers may not blend well or may not arrive at the listener at the same time, causing side effects such as comb filtering, shifts in tone color, or smearing. To counteract these side effects, you can first process the additional signals to change their spatial character, timbre, or prominence relative to the main center signal. Using Surround Channels Subtle surround effects can greatly enhance the listener’s sense of depth compared to conventional stereo. Popular music often benefits from creative use of surround. But don’t overdo it. The film industry guideline—don’t use surround effects to distract the listeners from the story—also works well for music. Limitations of the LFE Channel The Low Frequency Effects (LFE) channel is a separate signal with a limited frequency range and is created by the mixing engineer and delivered alongside the main channels in the mix. A “brick wall” filter at 120 Hz in the Dolby Digital Professional encoder limits use of the LFE channel to the bottom two audible octaves. Dolby recommends limiting the signal to 80 Hz when mixing your sound. Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output Files 155In most music productions (with such exceptions as the famous cannon shots in Tchaikovsky’s “1812 Overture”), the LFE channel is not necessary. The LFE signal is also discarded in the Dolby Digital Professional downmix process, so intense bass signals do not stress small stereo systems. Be sure not to include vital information in the LFE channel that would be missed in mono, stereo, or Pro Logic playback. Because LFE is separate from other channels, its ability to blend with higher frequencies can be affected by filters used to generate the LFE signal. To ensure a cohesive audio signal, keep the entire signal together in the main channel or channels. Avoid creating an LFE channel for material originally produced without one. Dolby Digital Professional’s five main channels are all full-range, and the LFE channel does not increase the frequency response. Dolby Digital Professional decoders offer bass management, directing low frequencies to a subwoofer or other suitable speakers. An LFE track may interfere with bass management. Accommodating Stereo Playback Even with the popularity of 5.1 systems, you should always address stereo reproduction. There are three basic ways to do this: • Prepare a new stereo mix from the original multitrack elements (using conventional stereo-mixing sessions). • Prepare a studio-adjusted downmix from the multichannel mix. This method takes advantage of the work that has gone into mixing the 5.1 version. It retains flexibility in the exact proportions of each channel represented in the final stereo mix. • Let the decoder derive a stereo downmix, based on preset formulas in the decoder. Downmix options and dynamic range control effects can be previewed and adjusted in the production studio, and a range of adjustments is possible. Always check the mix on an inexpensive surround system to evaluate how well it sounds on modest playback systems. Note: For more information about Dolby Digital Professional, see “Frequently Asked Questions about Dolby Digital Professional,” available at the Dolby Laboratories Inc. website at http://www.dolby.com. 156 Chapter 12 Creating Dolby Digital Professional Output FilesUsing Compressor, you can create iTunes-compliant H.264 files. These can be played in iTunes, on an iPhone, iPad, or iPod, or with Apple TV. The efficiency of the H.264 encoder makes it well suited to create media to use with iTunes and its related Apple devices. Compressor includes preconfigured settings that use the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder pane to make it easy for you to create suitable media files. For information on creating H.264 files for other uses (such as web video), see Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files. This chapter covers the following: • About the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder Pane (p. 158) • Chapter and Podcast Markers for Apple Devices (p. 161) • Aspect Ratios for Apple Devices (p. 162) • H.264 Workflows for Apple Devices (p. 162) • Configuring Settings for H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files (p. 163) 157 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files 13About the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the elements of the H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder pane in the Inspector window. You make your H.264 settings using this pane, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. You make your H.264 for Apple Devices settings using the controls described below, either by duplicating an existing setting and modifying it or by creating a new setting in the Settings tab of the Settings window. The H.264 for Apple Devices Encoder pane contains the following items. • Extension: This field displays the H.264 for Apple Devices file extension (.m4v) automatically after the H.264 for Apple Devices output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab of the Settings window. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Device: Select one of the following device options from the pop-up menu: • iPod/iPhone (VGA): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 640 pixels. • iPod/iPhone (Anamorphic): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 640 (anamorphic) pixels. • iPod/iPhone (QVGA): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 320 pixels. • Apple TV SD: This option creates video output files with a frame width of 640 pixels with a higher bit rate range than the iPod/iPhone 640 (VGA) option. 158 Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files• Apple TV SD (Anamorphic): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 720 (anamorphic) pixels. • Apple TV HD: This option creates video output files with a frame width of 1280 pixels, except when the aspect ratio is set to 4:3. In that case, the video output files have frame dimensions of 960 x 720 (anamorphic) pixels for frame rates above 24 fps and 1280 x 720 (square) pixels for lower frame rates. • Apple TV 3rd Generation: This option, intended for the third-generation Apple TV and iPad models, creates video output files with a frame width of 1080 pixels. • iPhone (Local/WiFi): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 480 pixels. • iPhone (Cellular): This option creates video output files with a frame width of 176 pixels. • iPad/iPhone with Retina display: This option creates video output files with a frame width of 1280 pixels. • Aspect Ratio: Use the Aspect Ratio pop-up menu to choose the exact pixel dimensions of the output media file. The available options depend on which device option you selected. See Aspect Ratios for Apple Devices for more information. The Aspect Ratio setting also has an Automatic button. Clicking the Automatic button causes the encoder to choose the aspect ratio that matches the source video file. Important: The automatic mode for the Aspect Ratio setting is able to choose from a wider variety of values to better match the source video (with the values determined and displayed when this output format is applied to a source media file). For the best results, it is recommended that you use the automatic mode for the Aspect Ratio setting. The Aspect Ratio Automatic button Note: By default, the Frame Controls feature is set to Automatic. The Frame Controls Retiming Control will be engaged only if the source file is interlaced. • Frame Rate: Use this pop-up menu to choose from the options listed below. Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files 159The Frame Rate setting also has an Automatic button. Clicking the Automatic button causes the encoder to choose the frame rate that matches the source video file. The Frame Rate Automatic button • 29.97: Used for NTSC-based video • 25: Used for PAL-based video • 24: Used for PAL-based video • 23.98: Used for NTSC-based video • 15: Used for web-based video • Bit Rate: Use this slider to choose the bit rate to use for the output video, or enter a number in the text field. The available ranges depend on the Device setting. The setting you should choose depends on how the output is to be used. Higher bit rates produce better picture quality, but they also produce larger output files. • Audio: Use this pop-up menu to choose from the four audio bit-rate options listed below. • None: Use this option to exclude audio from the output media file. • 24 Kbps: Creates an audio bitstream at 24 Kbps for the iPhone (Cellular) device option. • 128 Kbps: Creates an audio bitstream at 128 Kbps. • 256 Kbps: Creates an audio bitstream at 256 Kbps. • Frame Sync: Also known as the key frame interval, the Frame Sync value represents how often a key frame is inserted in the H.264 stream. The lower the number, the more smoothly the video can be manipulated (scrubbed) during playback (more frequent key frames). The higher the number, the more efficient the compression (less frequent key frames). The available range is from 2 to 10 seconds; the default is 5 seconds. 160 Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output FilesThe Frame Sync setting also has an Automatic checkbox. Selecting the Automatic checkbox causes the encoder to choose a frame sync rate that matches the source video file. • Multi-pass: Similar to two-pass MPEG-2 encoding, multi-pass offers the best possible quality. For faster (single-pass) encoding, turn this feature off by deselecting the checkbox. Note: If you are also using distributed processing, you may want to turn off job segmenting. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Include Dolby 5.1: Use this checkbox to add a Dolby Digital Professional 5.1 surround sound audio track, in addition to the standard AAC audio track, to the output movie. This feature is intended to be used when creating output files from source files that include surround sound audio. The Dolby Digital Professional audio track is played by Apple TV only when connected to a system with a suitable Dolby Digital decoder. The AAC audio track plays in all other cases. Note: Selecting the Include Dolby 5.1 checkbox creates a true Dolby Digital Professional 5.1 surround sound audio track only if your source audio includes 5.1 surround sound audio. If your source audio includes only stereo audio, the Dolby Digital Professional 5.1 surround sound audio track has only two channels of actual audio. Chapter and Podcast Markers for Apple Devices Chapter markers created in Final Cut Pro are passed through (transferred) to other output files that can be recognized by QuickTime Player, iTunes (.m4v files), and Final Cut Pro. You can also add podcast markers to the output file. Podcast markers are similar to chapter markers (they can have a URL and artwork assigned to them); however, they cannot be navigated to directly by the viewer. They are intended to provide a slideshow function to audio podcasts. For information about adding chapter and podcast markers, see Working with Markers and Poster Frames. Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files 161Aspect Ratios for Apple Devices The choice you make with the Device pop-up menu defines the width of the encoded file. The choice you make in the Aspect Ratio pop-up menu defines the height of the encoded file. Compressor scales the source video vertically to make it fit the height. This means that the source video must be anamorphic (things look tall and skinny) in anticipation of being scaled to fit the intended aspect ratio. Non-anamorphic video set to an aspect ratio other than its native aspect ratio will appear distorted in the encoded file. Important: If your source video is letterboxed, use the aspect ratio that matches the whole video frame, including the black bars, or else you will end up with distorted output files. You can use the automatic crop feature to crop off the letterbox bars. See Adding Geometry Settings for more information. The following choices are available in the Aspect Ratio pop-up menu for each Device option: • 4:3 • 16:9 • 1.85:1 • 2.35:1 Each choice will result in a different height for the output media file. For example, with the iPod/iPhone (VGA) setting, the 4:3 option results in a 640 x 480 file, whereas the 16:9 option results in a 640 x 360 file. If the source media file is either DV NTSC or HDV, but you are unsure of your source media file’s aspect ratio, click the Automatic button. This option analyzes the source media file’s aspect ratio to determine the appropriate pixel dimensions. H.264 Workflows for Apple Devices The efficiency and quality of H.264 creates a number of options for iPhone, iPad, iPod, and Apple TV video producers. When choosing a Device option, you can choose to create a file that plays on a wide variety of devices or to create a file targeted to a specific device, such as an iPhone 4. • Options that are compatible with all devices do not produce optimal results when played on higher resolution devices, such as an Apple TV. However, these options produce smaller files, which can be an advantage. • Options that are targeted at higher resolution devices produce great results on those devices; however, they result in larger files. 162 Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output FilesYou need to choose options that take into account the devices on which you want to play the video, the video content, and how you intend to deliver the file. Additionally, you can assign a clip’s poster frame using the Preview window. See Setting the Poster Frame for more information. You can change the poster frame in iTunes if necessary. See iTunes help for more information. Configuring Settings for H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files To ensure that your output media files are iPhone, iPad, iPod, and Apple TV compatible, it is recommended that you use the standard settings provided in the Apple Devices group in the Settings tab. For more information on applying settings, see Assigning Settings to Source Media Files. You can also create iPhone, iPad, iPod, and Apple TV compatible media files with batch templates. For more information, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method. Note: Files created using iPhone and iPod settings can also play on Apple TV. Chapter 13 Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files 163Compressor includes the ability to easily create H.264 settings specifically configured for Blu-ray and AVCHD discs. Blu-ray, also known as Blu-ray Disc (BD), is a format that was developed to enable recording, rewriting, and playback of high definition (HD) video. The format offers more than five times the storage capacity of traditional DVDs and can hold up to 25 GB on a single-layer disc and 50 GB on a dual-layer disc. An AVCHD disc can be thought of as a simpler HD disc that is burned to red laser media. The resulting disc plays in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format. This chapter covers the following: • About the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc Encoder Pane (p. 166) • H.264 Workflows for Optical Disc (p. 168) 165 Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc 14About the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the elements of the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc Encoder pane in the Inspector window. You make your H.264 for Blu-ray Disc settings using this pane, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. The H.264 for Blu-ray Disc pane contains the following items. • File Extension field: Displays the H.264 for Blu-ray file extension (.264) automatically after the H.264 for Blu-ray output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Stream Usage: Use the Stream Usage pop-up menu to choose how you intend to use the H.264 stream. Compressor modifies the bit-rate range settings based on the usage you choose with this pop-up menu. • Blu-ray: Choose this if you intend to use the stream to create a standard Blu-ray disc. • AVCHD: Choose this if you intend to use the stream and the Create Blu-ray Disc job action to burn an AVCHD disc using a standard DVD burner. This disc can be played in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format. AVCHD discs can have up to a maximum of 50 chapter markers. • Video Format: Use the Video Format pop-up menu to choose from the four options listed below. All of them are HD progressive formats. 166 Chapter 14 Creating H.264 for Blu-ray DiscThe Video Format setting also has an Automatic button. Clicking the Automatic button causes the encoder to choose the video format that matches the source video file. The Video Format Automatic button • NTSC: This format is referred to as 480p. It uses a 720 x 480 frame size with an anamorphic 16 x 9 format at 59.94 fps. • PAL: This format is referred to as 576p. It uses a 720 x 576 frame size with an anamorphic 16 x 9 format at 50 fps. • 720p: This format uses a 1280 x 720 frame size with a 16 x 9 format at either 59.94 fps for NTSC or 50 fps for PAL. • 1920x1080: This format is referred to as 1080p. It uses a 1920 x 1080 frame size with a 16 x 9 format at either 59.94 fps for NTSC or 50 fps for PAL. • Frame Rate: Use this pop-up menu to choose a frame rate for the output media file. The Frame Rate setting also has an Automatic button. Clicking the Automatic button causes the encoder to choose the frame rate that matches the source video file. The Frame Rate Automatic button Note: If you choose a format in the Video Format menu, the Frame Rate menu will be filled in automatically. Use the Frame Rate pop-up menu to choose from the following options: • 23.98: Used for NTSC-based video • 25: Used for PAL-based video • 29.97: Used for NTSC-based video • 50: Used for PAL-based video • 59.94: Used for NTSC-based video Chapter 14 Creating H.264 for Blu-ray Disc 167• Average Bit Rate slider and field: Choose an average bit rate to use for the output video with the slider, or enter a value directly. While the available range for a Blu-ray disc is between 5 Mbps and 30 Mbps, typical video bit rates with H.264 might range from 7 Mbps to 15 Mbps, depending on your DVD bit budget and the nature of your source media files. The available range for AVCHD discs is 5 Mbps to 15 Mbps. • Maximum Bit Rate slider and field: Choose a maximum bit rate between 6 Mbps and 35 Mbps for a Blu-ray disc, or between 6 Mbps and 17 Mbps for an AVCHD disc. You can also enter any number within these ranges into the accompanying field. The Maximum Bit Rate setting cannot be lower than the Average Bit Rate setting. As a general rule, set your maximum bit rate at least 1 Mbps higher than your average bit rate, to allow for bit-rate variability in achieving the goal of constant quality. • Multi-pass: Use this checkbox to turn on multi-pass encoding. Similar to two-pass MPEG-2 encoding, multi-pass offers the best possible quality. For faster (single-pass) encodes, turn this feature off by deselecting the checkbox. See Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding for more information. H.264 Workflows for Optical Disc The efficiency and quality of H.264 creates a number of options for optical disc producers: • Video resolutions supported by SD DVDs are also supported by Blu-ray Disc. This means that a Blu-ray disc can use an HD video resolution file for its main content, such as a feature film, and then use SD video resolution files for additional features like trailers and a “making of” documentary. • The Create Blu-ray Disc job action includes the ability to burn an AVCHD disc using red laser media. An AVCHD disc provides a way to play H.264 video in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format. See Create Blu-ray Disc for more information. • Because H.264 can deliver high definition (HD) video at standard definition (SD) bit rates, you can get more HD content on a regular DVD-5 disc than you might expect for an AVCHD disc. 168 Chapter 14 Creating H.264 for Blu-ray DiscYou can use Compressor to output an image sequence for use by compositing applications. This chapter discusses the image sequences that Compressor can output from your source media files. This chapter covers the following: • Creating Image Sequence Output Files (p. 169) • About the Image Sequence Encoder Pane (p. 170) • Configuring Image Sequence Settings (p. 171) Creating Image Sequence Output Files The Image Sequence output format creates a set of still-image files representing the source video frames. Use this encoder to convert a video clip to an image sequence for use with compositing applications that aren’t compatible with QuickTime. Note: You can also use Compressor to import an image sequence. For more information, see Adding Image Sequences to Batches. The Image Sequence output format supports the following still image formats. • TIFF (Tagged Image File Format): TIFF is one of the most common and flexible still-image formats and was developed to create a standard file format for storing and exchanging digital graphics used in desktop publishing. It is compatible with a wide range of compositing and image processing applications. • TARGA (Truevision Advanced Raster Graphics Adapter): TARGA, also commonly referred to as TGA, is a raster graphics format commonly used by animation and video applications. • DPX: DPX is a common file format for digital intermediate and visual effects work and is an ANSI/SMPTE standard (268M-2003). • IFF (Interchange File Format): IFF is a generic file format originally introduced by the Electronic Arts company in 1985 (in cooperation with Commodore-Amiga) in order to ease transfer of data between software products produced by different companies. • JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group): JPEG is a common still-image format. 169 Creating Image Sequence Files 15• OpenEXR: OpenEXR is a high dynamic-range (HDR) image file format developed by Industrial Light & Magic for use in computer imaging applications. About the Image Sequence Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the elements of the Image Sequence Encoder pane in the Inspector window. You make your image sequence settings using this pane, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. Choose Image Sequence. Choose an image type. Choose a frame rate from the Frame Rate pop-up menu or click the Automatic button. The Image Sequence Encoder pane contains the following items to help you create your image sequence output files: • File Extension: This field displays the TIFF file extension (.tiff) automatically after the Image Sequence output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. Don’t alter this field. You can change the output format with the Image Type pop-up menu. This field will update automatically with your choice of output format. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Image Type: Use this pop-up menu to choose one of the six image sequence types for the output media. For descriptions of these output types, see Creating Image Sequence Output Files. 170 Chapter 15 Creating Image Sequence Files• Frame Rate (fps): Use this field and pop-up menu to enter the frame rate at which you want the still images to be created. The higher the frame rate, the greater the number of still images created and the larger the output file. For example, if you choose 30 fps, Compressor creates 30 still images for every second of the video clip you are transcoding. If you choose 8 fps, Compressor creates only 8 still images per second. • Create unique output directory: Select this checkbox to create a folder for the resulting output files. The folder is given the same name as that of the media file, and the files are stored inside the folder and named frame-nnn. For example, if the output filename is test, the directory path is destination/test/frame-nnn. If you don’t select this box, the output files are stored at the top level of your destination folder and named filename-nnn rather than frame-nnn. Be aware that even at the slow rate of 8 fps, a large number of files are created when you transcode to this output format, so creating an output directory is a good way to keep your files organized. • Add leading zeros to frame numbers: Select this checkbox to add leading zeros to the frame number. When choosing this method, all the output files consist of multidigit filenames, such as frame-000001 (or filename-000001 if these files aren’t being saved in a unique output directory). If you don’t select this checkbox, each file uses a regular filename, such as frame-1 (or filename-1 if these files aren’t being saved in a unique output directory). • Scale image to preserve aspect ratio: Affects only video media using non-square pixels, such as NTSC and PAL formats, and only when you are not intentionally changing the video frame size. Select this checkbox to scale the output files to use square pixels and maintain the original aspect ratio (which results in an increase or decrease in the number of horizontal and vertical pixels). If the checkbox is not selected (the default setting), the output files use the same pixel aspect ratio and have the same number of horizontal and vertical pixels as the original video. Configuring Image Sequence Settings You use the Image Sequence output format if you want to transcode a video clip into a series of still images. To create an Image Sequence setting 1 In the Settings tab, do one of the following: • Make sure that the correct setting is selected. • Create a new setting by choosing Image Sequence from the “Create a new setting” (+) pop-up menu. 2 Apply the setting to a job in the Batch window. 3 Make sure the resulting image sequence target is selected. Chapter 15 Creating Image Sequence Files 1714 In the Inspector, click the Encoder tab, then choose Image Sequence from the File Format pop-up menu. The Image Sequence Encoder pane appears. 5 Use the Image Type pop-up menu to choose one of the following image sequence types for the output media. For descriptions of these output types, see Creating Image Sequence Output Files. • TIFF • TARGA • DPX • IFF • JPEG • openEXR 6 Enter a number in the Frame Rate (fps) field, choose a frame rate from the pop-up menu, or click the Automatic button. 7 Select the “Create unique output directory” checkbox if you want your image sequence files stored in their own folder in the destination folder. 8 Select the “Add leading zeros to frame numbers” checkbox if you want your output image sequence files numbered with the format 0000nn. Important: Use FTP software to upload the image sequence to remote servers. Since all still image types require square pixels (a pixel aspect of 1.0), Compressor may have to alter the pixel dimensions of an image sequence job. To view or adjust these parameters, select the target in the Batch window and click the Geometry tab in the Inspector. If you will be using the image sequence in an application that can be set to a specific size and pixel aspect ratio (such as Motion), make the appropriate changes in the Geometry pane before encoding. To adjust the pixel aspect ratio of an image sequence job before transcoding 1 In the Batch window, select the image sequence target. 2 In the Geometry pane in the Inspector window, use the Frame Size pop-up menu to choose the appropriate output dimensions (such as 720x480, 1920x1080, and so on) for the image sequence. The Pixel Aspect pop-up menu becomes active. 3 In the Pixel Aspect pop-up menu in the Geometry pane, choose the appropriate pixel aspect ratio for your image sequence. See About the Image Sequence Encoder Pane for more information about the Image Sequence Encoder pane. See About the Geometry Pane for more information about the Geometry pane. 172 Chapter 15 Creating Image Sequence FilesNote: You can see the current contents of your setting by viewing the Summary pane of the Inspector window. Chapter 15 Creating Image Sequence Files 173Compressor provides the tools you need to create exceptional MP3 files. MP3 is a specific type of MPEG encoding known formally as MPEG audio layer 3. MP3 uses perceptual audio coding and psychoacoustic compression to remove all superfluous information (specifically the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn’t hear anyway). The result is that MP3 encoding shrinks the original sound data from a CD (with a data rate of 1411.2 kilobits per one second of stereo music) by a factor of 12 (down to 112–128 kbps) without sacrificing very much sound quality. Proponents of MP3 actually claim there is no sacrifice in sound quality, but audio professionals can usually hear the difference on good equipment. This chapter covers the following: • Common Uses for MP3 (p. 175) • About the MP3 Encoder Pane (p. 176) • MP3 Transcoding Workflow (p. 177) Common Uses for MP3 MP3 is a widely adopted standard for compressed audio files, so it can be used in many different ways, including music and podcasts. Music Almost every portable digital music player supports the MP3 audio format. By using the higher bit rates, for example 256 kbps, you can create an excellent quality audio file using a much smaller file size than with uncompressed audio. You can also add metadata to the file so that when the output media file opens in many players (including iTunes) the common information, such as artist, album, and so on, appears. 175 Creating MP3 Output Files 16Podcasts The MP3 format’s wide range of supported bit rates makes it ideal for delivering podcasts at a variety of quality levels, making it possible for users to choose a file size and quality level they are comfortable with. Note: For the most options when creating enhanced audio podcasts, use the MPEG-4 output format. You are able to add chapter and podcast markers with URLs and artwork to the output file. See Creating MPEG-4 Output Files for more information. About the MP3 Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the various settings within the MP3 Encoder pane of the Inspector window. You make your MP3 settings by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. The MP3 Encoder pane contains the following settings. • Extension: This field displays the MP3 file extension (.mp3) automatically after the MP3 output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Stereo Bit Rate pop-up menu: The higher the Mono or Stereo kilobits per second (kbps), the higher the audio quality and the larger the file size. The most common bit rate for stereo MP3 files is between 128 kbps and 192 kbps. Lower bit rates are more appropriate for sound files containing voice recordings (as opposed to music). 176 Chapter 16 Creating MP3 Output FilesSome example settings and uses include: • 32 kbps: AM radio quality, suitable for medium-quality speech • 96 kbps: FM radio quality, suitable for high-quality speech or medium-quality music • 128 kbps: Suitable for good-quality music • 256 kbps and 320 kbps: Suitable for music that is near CD quality • Use Variable Bit Rate Encoding (VBR): This setting varies the number of bits used to store the music depending on the complexity of the music. This can help keep file size to a minimum. • Sample Rate pop-up menu: The number of times per second that the music waveforms are captured digitally. The higher the sample rate, the higher the quality and the larger the file size. Don’t choose a sample rate higher than the rate used originally to store the music or you’ll waste space. CD quality, for example, is 44.100 kHz, so choosing a higher rate when you’re encoding from a CD is unnecessary. • Channels pop-up menu: If you don’t have stereo speakers or if your audio files are monaural, choose Mono (mono files are about half the size of stereo files). If you’ll be listening to your MP3 files using your stereo system, choose Stereo. • Joint Stereo: When this checkbox is deselected, your MP3 files contain one track for the right stereo channel and one track for the left. In many cases, the two channels contain related information. When the Joint Stereo checkbox is selected, one channel carries the information that’s identical on both channels, and the other channel carries the unique information. At bit rates of 160 Kbps and below, this can improve the sound quality of your converted audio. • Smart Encoding Adjustments: Select this to have Compressor analyze your encoding settings and music source, and then adjust settings to maximize quality. • Filter Frequencies Below 10 Hz: Filtering inaudible frequencies results in smaller, more efficient files without perceptible loss of quality. MP3 Transcoding Workflow How you use Compressor to transcode your audio into MP3 format files depends on how you intend them to be used. The basic steps are described below. Stage 1: Creating a Batch As with any transcode, you need to start by creating a batch. See Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings for more information. Stage 2: Creating Jobs with the Source Audio Files Import the source audio files either by dragging them from Finder to the batch or by choosing Job > New Job With File. Chapter 16 Creating MP3 Output Files 177Stage 3: Adding Annotations (If Needed) If you intend to play the MP3 files with a device or application, such as iTunes, you can add a variety of annotations, such as artist, album, title, and so on, that can be read and displayed. See Additional Information Tab for more information. Stage 4: Adding Targets with an MP3 Setting to Each of the Jobs Each of the jobs requires at least one target—in this case the jobs need targets with an MP3 setting. If there is more than one job, it is easiest to select all the jobs by choosing Edit > Select All and then choose Target > New Target With Setting to apply the same setting to all the jobs. Stage 5: Submitting the Batch for Transcoding Click the Submit button to start the transcode process. See Submitting a Batch for more information. 178 Chapter 16 Creating MP3 Output FilesCompressor provides the tools you need to create exceptional MPEG-1 transcoded files. MPEG-1 is an internationally accepted compression standard developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group (MPEG). MPEG-1 allows you to create VHS-quality video files and was designed to support SIF (Standard Interface Format) resolution noninterlaced (progressive) video using relatively low bit rates (Compressor supports 0.5 Mbps to 2 Mbps). It also allows you to create compressed one-channel and two-channel audio. This chapter covers the following: • Common Uses for MPEG-1 (p. 179) • MPEG-1 Specifications (p. 180) • About the MPEG-1 Encoder Pane (p. 181) • About the MPEG-1 Video Tab (p. 182) • About the MPEG-1 Audio Tab (p. 183) • About System and Elementary Streams (p. 184) • MPEG-1 Transcoding Workflow (p. 184) • Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for Web Use (p. 185) • Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for DVD Use (p. 187) • Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting (p. 187) • Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting (p. 189) • Optional—Creating an MPEG-1 for DVD Group and Destination (p. 191) Common Uses for MPEG-1 MPEG-1 is a widely adopted standard, so it can be used in many distribution methods including optical discs, the web, and audio-only files. 179 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 17DVD, VCD, and CD-ROM MPEG-1 is the video compression format used for video CD (VCD) titles and is compatible for use on DVD titles since all DVD players contain the hardware required for MPEG-1 playback. MPEG-1 is commonly used in videos distributed on CD-ROM. Its low bit rate and small file sizes are useful when you must fit multiple hours of video onto a DVD and do not require the broadcast quality of MPEG-2 encoding. A DVD can contain a mix of MPEG-2 and MPEG-1 video. On the Web Since MPEG-1 was one of the first widely adopted compression standards, it has an advantage of being compatible with most media players. This makes MPEG-1 attractive for use on the web when you need maximum compatibility with relatively high quality. Audio-Only You can use MPEG-1 Layer 2 audio compression as an alternative to Dolby Digital Professional or DTS compression. While there is no Apple setting for MPEG-1 audio-only files in this release of Compressor, you can easily create a setting yourself. See Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for DVD Use for details. MPEG-1 Specifications Compressor supports all the MPEG-1 specifications for frame sizes, frame rates, video encoding, and audio encoding. MPEG-1 Frame Sizes and Frame Rates Compressor can produce full frame rate video (25 fps and 29.97 fps for DVD and 23.976 fps, 25 fps, and 29.97 fps for the web) with SIF resolutions dependent on the use. • Web: 320 x 240 • NTSC: 352 x 240 • PAL: 352 x 288 While the NTSC and PAL resolutions are roughly half the full resolution of MPEG-2 video, when played on a DVD player they automatically expand to fill the entire screen. MPEG-1 File Format Specifications MPEG-1 video encoding uses a process very similar to that used in MPEG2 encoding—many of the same terms and settings apply. In Compressor, the encoding settings are set as follows. • Encoding mode: One pass • GOP structure: Open • GOP pattern: BBIBBP 180 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files• GOP length: 15 frames for NTSC; 12 frames for PAL These settings are fixed and apply to all Compressor MPEG-1 video output files. See GOP Tab for information about Group of Pictures (GOP) settings. See Quality Tab for information on the encoding mode. The MPEG-1 output files can have I-frames forced on specific frames by placing compression markers on them. These markers can be added to the source media file using Final Cut Pro or can be added manually in the Preview window. See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for more information. The MPEG-1 format does not support named chapter markers. About the MPEG-1 Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the various tabs within the MPEG-1 Encoder pane of the Inspector window. You make your MPEG-1 settings using these tabs, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. The MPEG-1 Encoder pane opens with the default Video tab on top and contains the following items. • Extension: This field displays the MPEG-1 file extension (.mpg) automatically after the MPEG-1 output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. The extension changes to the video-only extension (.m1v) if the Audio tab is disabled or the audio-only extension (.m1a) if the Video tab is disabled. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 181• Video and Audio tabs: These buttons open the Video and Audio tabs described next. About the MPEG-1 Video Tab You use the Video tab to make settings related to the video format. The Automatic button • Enabled checkbox: Make sure this checkbox is selected if you want the MPEG-1 output format to include the Video tab settings. • Frame Rate pop-up menu: Choose the frame rate of the video you are encoding. • With Purpose set to Web: The choices are 23.976, 25 (PAL frame rate), 29.97 (NTSC frame rate), and Automatic. • With Purpose set to DVD: The choices are 25 (PAL frame rate), 29.97 (NTSC frame rate), and Automatic. • Automatic button: Clicking the Automatic button forces the encoder to determine the proper frame rate by choosing the rate that most closely matches the source frame rate. Note: Using the Automatic setting with nonstandard source frame rates may result in output frame rates that do not match the intended video frame rate. For example, a source frame rate of 15 fps with the Purpose set to DVD results in an automatic selection of 25 (PAL). If you are intending to use the output on an NTSC DVD, you must choose 29.97 as the frame rate. • Purpose buttons: Choose the intended purpose for the output files. • Web: Forces the resolution to 320 x 240 regardless of the Frame Rate selection. • DVD: Allows the Frame Rate selection to set the resolution. With the 29.97 frame rate, the resolution is 352 x 240. With the 25 frame rate, the resolution is 352 x 288. 182 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files• Bit Rate: Use this slider to choose the bit rate to use for the output video, or enter a number directly in the text field. While the available range is from 0.5 Mbps to 2.0 Mbps, the actual setting you should use depends on how the output is to be used. Higher bit rates produce better picture quality, but they also produce larger output files. • For web projects: Choose a bit rate that best balances the picture quality with file size and download expectations. • For VCD projects: The recommended video bit rate is 1.15 Mbps, with a system stream (multiplexed video and audio in the same file) bit rate of under 1.3944 Mbps. • For DVD projects: The typical video bit rate is 1.15 Mbps, with 1.856 Mbps being the maximum allowed. About the MPEG-1 Audio Tab You use the Audio tab to make settings related to the audio format. • Enabled checkbox: Make sure this checkbox is selected if you want the MPEG-1 output format to include the Audio tab settings. • Sample Rate pop-up menu: Choose the sample rate of the output audio. • 48 kHz: Required for use on DVDs. • 44.1 kHz: Used on audio CDs. This is the most commonly supported sample rate. • Channels buttons: Select the channel valence (stereo or mono) for the output media file. • Stereo: Select this button to create a stereo output audio file. • Mono: Select this button to create a mono output audio file. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 183• Bit Rate pop-up menu: Choose the bit rate to use for the output audio. Choices are 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, and 384 kbps. Higher bit rates produce higher quality audio, but they also produce larger output files. Note: The 224 kbps and 384 kbps settings are not available when Channels is set to Mono. About System and Elementary Streams You can use Compressor to create system or elementary MPEG-1 streams. System Streams System streams, also known as multiplexed streams, combine the video and audio components into the same file. This type of stream is most often used in web applications. Compressor automatically creates a system stream when you enable both the Video and Audio tabs in the same setting. Elementary Streams With elementary streams, there are separate files for the video and audio components. Elementary streams are required by some applications. Compressor automatically creates an elementary stream when only the Video or Audio tab is enabled, but not both. To create elementary streams of both the video and the audio, you must use two settings—one with the Video tab enabled using the file extension of .m1v and a second with the Audio tab enabled using the file extension of .m1a. MPEG-1 Transcoding Workflow This section gives step-by-step instructions for setting your MPEG-1 attributes prior to creating MPEG-1 output files with Compressor. Make your MPEG-1 settings from the MPEG1 Encoder pane by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting. See the following for common settings with the MPEG-1 output file format. Encoding for the Web Use the following settings when encoding MPEG-1 system streams for the web. Video tab: • Frame rate: Automatic • Purpose: Web • Bit rate: As low as you can set it and get acceptable picture quality Audio tab: • Sample rate: 44.1 kHz 184 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files• Channels: Stereo with two-channel sources; Mono with one-channel sources • Bit rate: As low as you can set it and get acceptable audio quality; use higher bit rates when encoding stereo audio Encoding for DVD Use the following settings to configure two settings when encoding MPEG-1 elementary streams for DVD authoring. Video elementary stream setting (Video tab): • Frame rate: 29.97 for NTSC or 25 for PAL • Purpose: DVD • Bit rate: 1.15 Mbps Video elementary stream setting (Audio tab): • Enabled checkbox: Deselected Audio elementary stream setting (Video tab): • Enabled checkbox: Deselected Audio elementary stream setting (Audio tab): • Sample rate: 48 kHz • Channels: Stereo with two-channel sources; Mono with one-channel sources • Bit rate: 192 kbps or 224 kbps Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for Web Use The following sections guide you through configuring the MPEG-1 output file format for web use. This process creates a single MPEG-1 system stream. • Stage 1: Choosing Video Settings • Stage 2: Choosing Audio Settings Stage 1: Choosing Video Settings This section describes creating MPEG-1 video settings for web use. To open the MPEG-1 Encoder pane and choose video settings 1 Open the Settings tab, then choose MPEG-1 from the “Create a New Setting” (+) pop-up menu. The MPEG-1 Encoder pane opens in the Inspector with the default Video tab displayed. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 1852 Name the new setting “MPEG-1 for Web.” Click the Automatic button or choose a frame rate. Select Web to set the resolution to 320 x 240. Choose the bit rate. Select to enable the Video tab. 3 Select the Enabled checkbox. 4 Click the Automatic button next to the Frame Rate pop-up menu. You can also choose 23.976, 29.97, or 25 from the Frame Rate pop-up menu if you know the frame rate of the source video. 5 Select the Web button. This sets the resolution of the output to 320 x 240. 6 Choose the bit rate to use from the Bit Rate slider, or enter a value directly. Stage 2: Choosing Audio Settings This section describes creating MPEG-1 audio settings for web use. To open the Audio tab and choose audio settings 1 Click the Audio button in the MPEG-1 Encoder pane to open the Audio tab. Select to enable the Audio tab. Choose the sample rate. Select the number of audio channels. Choose the bit rate. 186 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files2 Select the Enabled checkbox. 3 Choose 44.1 kHz from the Sample Rate pop-up menu. 4 Select Stereo when using two-channel audio sources, or Mono when using one-channel audio sources. 5 Choose the bit rate to use from the Bit Rate pop-up menu. 6 Click the Save button (in the lower-right corner of the Inspector) to save this setting. Configuring the MPEG-1 File Format for DVD Use The following sections guide you through configuring the MPEG-1 output file format for DVD use. This process creates two settings, one for video and another for audio, creating elementary streams. Stage 1: Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting Create the setting for an MPEG-1 elementary video output file suitable for DVD. See Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting for more information. Stage 2: Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting Create the setting for an MPEG-1 elementary audio output file suitable for DVD. See Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting for more information. Stage 3: (Optional) Creating an “MPEG-1 for DVD” Group and Destination Optionally, you can “package” your newly-made settings in a custom “MPEG-1 for DVD” group and destination. See Optional—Creating an MPEG-1 for DVD Group and Destination for more information. Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting The following sections create the setting for an MPEG-1 elementary video output file suitable for DVD. • Stage 1: Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting • Stage 2: Configuring the Video Settings • Stage 3: Making an Elementary Video Stream Stage 1: Creating the MPEG-1 Video for DVD Setting This section describes creating MPEG-1 video settings for DVD use. To open the Settings tab and create a new setting 1 Open the Settings tab, and choose MPEG-1 from the “Create a New Setting” (+) pop-up menu. This adds a new setting to the existing list. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 1872 Name the new setting “MPEG-1 Video for DVD.” See Creating a Setting from Scratch for more information. Stage 2: Configuring the Video Settings This section describes configuring MPEG-1 video settings for DVD use. To open the MPEG-1 Encoder pane and configure the Video settings for DVD 1 Click the Encoder tab and choose MPEG-1 from the File Format pop-up menu. 2 Click the Video button in the MPEG-1 Encoder pane to open the Video tab. Select to enable the Video tab. Choose the frame rate. The file extension changes to .m1v once the Audio tab is disabled. Choose the bit rate. Select DVD to set the resolution to match the frame rate. 3 Select the Enabled checkbox. 4 Choose the frame rate that matches your source video, either 29.97 or 25, from the Frame Rate pop-up menu. 5 Select the DVD button. This sets the resolution of the output to match the selected frame rate. 6 Choose the bit rate to use with the Bit Rate slider, or enter a value directly. The typical value used for DVD projects is 1.15 Mbps, with 1.856 Mbps being the maximum allowed. Stage 3: Making an Elementary Video Stream In order for the output media file to be an elementary video stream, you must turn off the audio setting. To turn off the audio for the video setting 1 Click the Audio button in the MPEG-1 Encoder pane to open the Audio tab. 2 Deselect the Enabled checkbox. 188 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output FilesThis ensures that this setting (preset) will only create an elementary video stream and sets the file extension to .m1v. Deselect to disable the Audio tab. 3 Click the Save button (in the lower-right corner of the Inspector) to save this setting. This saves the “MPEG-1 Video for DVD” setting. Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting The following sections create the setting for an MPEG-1 elementary audio output file suitable for DVD. • Stage 1: Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting • Stage 2: Making an Elementary Audio Stream • Stage 3: Configuring the Audio Settings Stage 1: Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting This section describes creating MPEG-1 audio settings for DVD use. To open the Settings tab and create a new setting 1 Open the Settings tab and click the Add (+) button. This adds a new setting to the existing list. 2 Name the new setting “MPEG-1 Audio for DVD.” See Creating a Setting from Scratch for more information. Stage 2: Making an Elementary Audio Stream In order for the output media file to be an elementary audio stream, you must turn off the video setting. To turn off the video setting 1 Click the Encoder tab and choose MPEG-1 from the File Format pop-up menu. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 1892 Click the Video button in the MPEG-1 Encoder pane to open the Video tab. Deselect to disable the Video tab. The file extension changes to .m1a once the Video tab is disabled. 3 Deselect the Enabled checkbox. This ensures that this preset will only create an elementary audio stream and sets the file extension to .m1a. Stage 3: Configuring the Audio Settings Use the following settings to create an MPEG-1 audio file for DVD. To open the Audio tab and configure the Audio settings for DVD 1 Click the Audio button in the MPEG-1 Encoder pane to open the Audio tab. 2 Select the Enabled checkbox. Choose the 48 kHz sample rate. Choose the bit rate. Select to enable the Audio tab. Select either Stereo or Mono. 3 Choose 48 kHz from the Sample Rate pop-up menu. 4 Select Stereo when using two-channel audio sources or Mono when using one-channel audio sources. 5 Choose the bit rate to use from the Bit Rate pop-up menu. 190 Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output FilesThe typical values used for DVD projects are 192 kbps and 224 kbps. 6 Click the Save button (in the lower-right corner of the Inspector) to save this setting. This saves the “MPEG-1 Audio for DVD” preset. Optional—Creating an MPEG-1 for DVD Group and Destination To make it easy to use these two MPEG-1 presets with a source, you can create an “MPEG-1 for DVD” preset group using them. See Creating Groups of Settings for more information. Chapter 17 Creating MPEG-1 Output Files 191Compressor provides the tools you need to create exceptional MPEG-2 transcoded files. MPEG-2 is an internationally accepted compression standard developed by the Motion Picture Experts Group (MPEG). MPEG-2 allows you to create broadcast-quality video files and was designed to support high-resolution, high bit-rate video. It is the video compression format used for high-quality video titles on DVD, HD broadcast, and home satellite dish systems. All DVD players contain the hardware required for MPEG-2 playback. This chapter covers the following: • About Standard Definition MPEG-2 (p. 193) • About High Definition Sources and MPEG-2 (p. 194) • About Elementary, Transport, and Program Streams (p. 194) • About the MPEG-2 Encoder Pane (p. 195) • MPEG-2 Reference Information (p. 206) • MPEG-2 Transcoding Workflow (p. 210) • Example MPEG-2 Settings (p. 216) About Standard Definition MPEG-2 Standard MPEG-2 is full frame rate (23.98–29.97 fps) and full-screen resolution (720 x 480 for NTSC and 720 x 576 for PAL). MPEG-2 has the following characteristics. • Support for interlaced video: MPEG-2 can support either interlaced or progressive video. Because MPEG-2 streams are generally played from a local DVD drive, rather than over a network with variable bandwidth, video frame rate usually stays constant, and the video normally looks completely smooth. • No streaming support: MPEG-2 is not suitable for streaming video files over the web because it requires a high bit rate (2 to 9 Mbps) to maintain acceptable image quality. 193 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 18The Compressor MPEG-2 encoder can create MPEG-2 video streams for the DVD-Video format. To create DVD-Video discs, you can use a DVD authoring application in conjunction with Compressor, or you can use the Create DVD job action, which is part of the Create DVD template. See About Job Actions and About the Batch Template Chooser for more information. About High Definition Sources and MPEG-2 Compressor has several different options and workflows for transcoding high definition (HD) video source files into MPEG-2 files. HD on Blu-ray Compressor can output MPEG-2 files for creating HD-resolution Blu-ray discs from either HD or standard definition (SD) source media. Compressor can retain the various frame sizes and frame rates of high definition video when transcoding to MPEG-2. And Compressor supports the higher bit rates required by the Blu-ray format. For more information on creating output for Blu-ray discs, see Stream Usage. Also see About Job Actions for information on adding the Blu-ray job action to a job. Note: The other output file format option for Blu-ray discs is H.264, also known as MPEG-4 Part 10. HD to SD Downconversion For those situations in which you are editing high definition (HD) sources in Final Cut Pro and want to create a standard definition (SD) DVD from them, Compressor provides high-quality downconversion. Compressor retains as much detail as possible during scaling and correctly preserves progressive or interlaced formats when encoding to MPEG-2 for DVD. To see the source media resolution and frame rate 1 Import the source media file into the Batch window. 2 Click the source’s name in the Batch window. The source media file’s resolution and frame rate, along with its duration, appear in the lower-left corner of the Preview window. About Elementary, Transport, and Program Streams There are three common MPEG-2 stream types that are used to deliver MPEG-2 encoded video. • Elementary streams: These streams contain only one MPEG-2 content channel and no audio. 194 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files• Transport streams: These streams can contain several MPEG-2 content channels and associated audio. All the channels are multiplexed together, allowing the receiver to choose which to play back. Compressor supports creating single-channel transport streams that can optionally include associated audio. Transport streams can also recover from interruptions during playback, making them ideally suited for broadcast and streaming applications where noise or network congestion can lead to interruptions. • Program streams: These streams contain only one MPEG-2 content channel and its associated audio. Program streams require an error-free delivery method and are primarily used for storage or processing within a computer. By default, the Compressor MPEG-2 encoder creates elementary MPEG-2 steams. You can configure the MPEG-2 encoder to create transport or program streams and choose whether they should include audio in the Extras tab. See Extras Tab for more information. Note: The SD DVD and Blu-ray options from the Stream Usage pop-up menu output only elementary streams. If you select either of these and then configure the output to be either a transport or program stream, the Stream Usage changes to Generic. See Stream Usage for more information. About the MPEG-2 Encoder Pane This section contains detailed information about the various tabs within the MPEG-2 Encoder pane in the Inspector window. You make your MPEG-2 settings using these tabs, by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new setting in the Settings tab. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 195MPEG-2 Encoder Pane Basic Settings The MPEG-2 pane opens with the default Video Format tab on top and contains the following items. • Extension field: Displays the MPEG-2 file extension (.m2v) automatically after the MPEG-2 output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Stream Usage: This pop-up menu allows you to choose how you intend to use the MPEG-2 stream. Compressor modifies the options available and bit rate ranges based on the usage you choose with this pop-up menu. See Stream Usage for more information. • Video Format, Quality, GOP, and Extras: These buttons open the Video Format, Quality, GOP, and Extras tabs. Their settings are explained in the following sections. Stream Usage Choosing a setting from the Stream Usage pop-up menu ensures the encoded MPEG-2 stream will be suitable for how you intend to use it. The options in the Stream Usage pop-up menu include the following: • Generic: The Generic option allows you complete access to all the MPEG-2 settings. This is the only option that supports the MPEG-2 640 x 480 video format in addition to the SD and HD video formats. It is also the only option that supports creating transport and program streams. It supports the complete bit-rate range of 2.0 Mbps to 40.0 Mbps. • SD DVD: The SD DVD option restricts the encoding options to those allowed by the SD DVD specification. These include the NTSC and PAL video formats and a bit-rate range of 2.0 Mbps to 9.0 Mbps. • Blu-ray: The Blu-ray option restricts the encoding options to those allowed by Blu-ray video discs. These include the SD and HD video formats and a bit-rate range of 10.0 Mbps to 40.0 Mbps. 196 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesVideo Format Tab You use the Video Format tab to make settings related to video formats, frame rates, aspect ratio, field dominance, and timecode. All of these, except the timecode setting, can be set to automatically configure themselves based on the video being encoded. The Video Format tab contains the following controls. • Video Format pop-up menu: Choose your output video file format as NTSC, PAL, 720p, HD 1440x1080, HD 1920x1080, or a variety of versions of 640 width formats. The Stream Usage setting determines which of these formats are actually available. When you choose a Video Format setting, the other settings in this tab will be filled in with default values, or they will be dimmed, indicating that there are no options for that setting. The NTSC and PAL items refer to standard definition settings for the NTSC and PAL TV standards. Of the major-market DVD regions, NTSC is used in North America and Japan, and PAL is used throughout Europe. Generally, the output video format should match the source video format. For interlaced video originating from traditional NTSC or PAL camcorders, choose NTSC or PAL from this pop-up menu. If you are unsure of what your source media file’s video format is, you can choose Automatic. This setting analyzes your source media clip’s frame rate to determine the correct video format. If you click the video format Automatic button, the GOP size is limited to 12 or 15 (based on whether the video is PAL or NTSC), with a closed IBBP pattern. With Automatic selected, you cannot change the frame rate setting in this tab, or the GOP settings in the GOP tab. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types for more information about GOPs. Video Format Automatic button Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 197Note: Since MPEG-2 uses fixed video frame sizes (see MPEG-2 Video Frame Sizes and Formats), Compressor enters the output frame size in the fields in the Geometry pane based on your video format selection. The video format you choose determines the options for the associated characteristics such as frame size and rate, aspect ratio, and field dominance. Note: The normal frame dimensions of standard definition (SD) NTSC digital video are 720 x 486. If you want to transcode a source file using the NTSC setting, Compressor crops the file to achieve the required MPEG-2 frame size of 720 x 480, unless you have already specified cropping attributes for your setting. If not, Compressor crops two rows of pixels from the top and four from the bottom. This crop attribute is only temporary and is not saved in the setting. You can see the effects of the crop by double-clicking the setting in the job to open the Preview window. • Frame Rate pop-up menu: Choose the intended frame rate for the MPEG-2 output file. Film and some video camcorders create progressive material at 24 fps (or the NTSC variant 23.98 fps). Although the term “24p” implies video with a frame rate of 24 fps, the frame rate is usually 23.976 fps (rounded to 23.98) fps. To transcode these sources for DVD playback on NTSC-related TVs, choose the 23.98 setting. See About 24p (23.98p) for more information. Note: The NTSC frame rate is frequently mentioned as 29.97 fps. Similarly, the “NTSC version” of 24 fps is mentioned as 23.98 fps. Both these numbers are actually approximations to the true values 30/1.001 and 24/1.001, or 29.97003 and 23.97602 shown to more decimal places. These numbers show that 29.97 is a pretty good approximation to 30/1.001 (only 3 frames drift in 100,000 seconds), but that 23.976 would be much better than 23.98. In fact, even though 23.98 is used as shorthand in the Compressor Help and in the Compressor user interface, accuracy of 23.976 or better is maintained internally in Compressor, and generally within QuickTime as well. See About 24p (23.98p) for more information on this topic. • Aspect Ratio pop-up menu: Choose the aspect ratio of your video file. The default is 4:3. The other option of 16:9 is used for anamorphic DVD. The aspect ratio determines how the picture fills the television screen. A 16:9 (widescreen) DVD viewed on a typical 4:3 television displays in letterbox format (black bars at the top and bottom of the screen). However, a widescreen DVD displayed on a 16:9 (widescreen) TV fills the screen. 198 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files• Field Dominance pop-up menu: Choose whether the top field or the bottom field of your interlaced source media file will be the dominant (first) field in the output MPEG-2 video file. If you choose Automatic (the default), Compressor analyzes the source video and attempts to determine field dominance automatically. The bottom field is dominant for DV source video. This setting does not pertain to the 720p video format, since that format must be progressive. Note: For interlaced video, the top field is also known as the upper or odd field, and the bottom field is also known as the lower or even field. • Choose start timecode checkbox and field: If you leave the checkbox deselected (the default), Compressor embeds the source media file’s existing timecode into the output media file. Selecting this checkbox allows you to override the source media file’s existing timecode and enter a new timecode in the timecode field. This field remains dimmed unless the checkbox is selected, and if it is left blank, the output media file uses the default timecode of 00:00:00:00. • Drop frame checkbox: If you have already selected the “Choose start timecode” checkbox, and you want your timecode to be drop frame (rather than non-drop frame), you must also select this checkbox. Timecode is a numbering system for labeling the frames in a video sequence. The type of timecode designed for 30 fps video has a frame counter that counts from 0 to 29 and then increments the seconds counter and returns to 0. This type of timecode, also known as non-drop frame timecode, maintains an accurate measure of elapsed time for true 30 fps video. However, the NTSC frame rate is 29.97 fps, and so drop frame timecode was defined to provide a more accurate measure of elapsed time for NTSC. Drop frame timecode skips frame numbers 0 and 1 once a minute on the minute, except for every 10 minutes. For example, drop frame timecode 01:08:59;29 is followed by 01:09:00;02, skipping timecodes 01:09:00;00 and 01:09:00;01. Note: Drop frame timecode applies only if you are using interlaced NTSC video. Quality Tab The Quality tab allows you to set the bit rate for your video so that it can be transcoded to a suitable data size and quality. In addition to the controls, the lower-right corner shows an estimate of how many minutes of video would fit on a 4.7 GB DVD using the current settings. This time assumes a single AIFF audio stream to be used with the MPEG-2 stream. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 199The Quality tab contains the following controls: Mode pop-up menu Time estimate for a 4.7 GB disc with a stereo AIFF audio stream Motion Estimation pop-up menu • Mode pop-up menu: Allows you to choose one of the following MPEG-2 encoding modes. High Definition (HD) quality modes will be “One pass VBR Best” or “Two pass VBR Best.” • One pass CBR: Using this mode, the output MPEG-2 video stream’s bit rate is held approximately constant from one GOP to the next. This is the fastest Compressor MPEG-2 encoding mode, and it provides good to very good quality, especially at bit rates between 5 and 9 Mbps. • One pass VBR: This VBR (variable bit rate) encoding mode aims to maintain constant quality (at the expense of constant bit rate) for the transcoded video file. This means that in scenes with much detail or fast motion, Compressor allows a higher bit rate than it allows in less detailed or still parts of the stream. In spite of this bit-rate variability, Compressor ensures your specified average bit rate is achieved accurately and that the maximum bit rate is not exceeded. Unlike the two-pass modes, one-pass VBR doesn’t have a “bird’s eye” view of the source media prior to encoding, so its bit allocation is less optimized than two-pass VBR. Nonetheless, for most standard definition (SD) media files at bit rates of 3.5 Mbps and above, this mode provides good to excellent quality and transcodes quickly. 200 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files• One pass VBR Best: This is similar to one-pass VBR, but with this mode, Compressor applies greater effort to its internal decision-making processes. Although one-pass VBR Best transcodes slower than one-pass VBR, it provides excellent to outstanding SD video quality at bit rates of 3 to 3.5 Mbps and above. Bit rates for HD MPEG-2 can range from 10–29 Mbps average, 12–29 Mbps maximum. Compared to one-pass VBR, one-pass VBR Best provides higher quality, especially for difficult material at low bit rates. For short streams of 1 to 2 minutes or less, if you are using one-pass VBR or one-pass VBR Best, the average bit-rate accuracy may be compromised by as much as 10 to 30 percent. • Two pass VBR: In this mode, Compressor reads through the entire source video file twice. In the first of these passes, Compressor analyzes the entire source video stream prior to transcoding it to determine the degree of encoding difficulty of each scene. It then creates a bit-rate allocation plan that gives the higher bit rate to complex scenes and a lower bit rate to easy scenes, so as to average out to the specified average bit rate while ensuring that the specified maximum bit rate is not exceeded. In the second pass, Compressor does the actual compression, creating the MPEG-2 output video file according to its bit-rate allocation plan. As with one-pass VBR, the goal of two-pass VBR is constant quality rather than constant bit rate. Unlike one-pass VBR, two-pass VBR is able to establish an overview of where best to spend its bits across the entire source media file, before beginning the actual encoding. The result of this process is that transcoding time is almost twice that of one-pass VBR. Although the benefit is not twice the quality, two-pass VBR provides more consistent overall quality than one-pass VBR, especially in source media files where the difference between the most and the least complex scenes is substantial. • Two pass VBR Best: This mode devotes more effort to its internal decision-making process than does two-pass VBR. Encoding time for “Two pass VBR Best” is slower than it is for “Two pass VBR,” but it provides the best possible quality that the Compressor MPEG-2 encoder has to offer. This mode provides outstanding quality at bit rates of 3–3.5 Mbps and above for standard definition (SD) video. See Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding for information about using the two-pass modes with job segmenting. • Average Bit Rate slider and field: Choose the average bit rate by dragging the slider or entering a number into the accompanying field. The range available to you depends on the Stream Usage setting. See Stream Usage for more information. There is also an Automatic button you can use to have Compressor determine the appropriate average and maximum bit rates. Note: The average bit-rate setting directly controls the size of the encoded file. The maximum bit-rate setting does not affect the encoded file’s size. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 201• Maximum Bit Rate slider and field: Choose the maximum bit rate by dragging the slider or entering a number into the accompanying field. See About Choosing the Bit Rates for more information. The range available to you depends on the Stream Usage setting. See Stream Usage for more information. Note: This slider is only available with the VBR modes and cannot be set lower than the average bit rate. It is also not available if the Automatic button is active. • Motion Estimation pop-up menu: This menu is another trade-off between image quality and processing time, especially if there is a lot of motion in the source file. The three options in this menu are described below. • Good: The fastest motion estimation setting. This mode does well even with significant amounts of motion between frames, if the motion has minimal interfield motion within frames. For example, footage that has been exposed to frame-rate conversion or other effects processes tends to have little interfield motion. In general, use Good with the one-pass encoding mode. • Better: A good general-purpose motion estimation setting. The Better mode provides good results even with complex interlaced motion. Better works well for almost all types of interlaced video sources, even shaky footage from hand-held consumer camcorders. In general, use Better with “One pass VBR” and “Two pass VBR.” If you are using a progressive video format, the Better mode will do only frame-based motion estimation, and not field-based motion-vector searching, which is not relevant for progressive source. In this case the Better mode will run somewhat faster. • Best: This is the highest-quality motion estimation setting and should be used for the most demanding and complex motion for interlaced sources. It is slower than the Better mode. In general, use the Best mode to maximize quality when using “One pass VBR Best” or “Two pass VBR Best.” GOP Tab You use the GOP (group of pictures) tab to select a GOP format, structure, and size. It contains the following controls. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types for more information. 202 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesNote: If you choose any of the HD video formats in the Video Format tab, the settings in the GOP tab cannot be changed and default to a closed IBBP GOP structure with a size of 12 (for PAL) or 15 (for NTSC). • GOP Structure pop-up menu: Choose an option from this pop-up menu to specify whether there will be two, one, or no B-frames between the reference frames within a GOP. GOP structure, along with GOP size, determines the number of I-frames, P-frames, and B-frames that are used within a GOP during encoding. Choose from one of the following: Note: For most MPEG-2 encoding situations intended for use on a DVD, choose IBBP as the GOP structure setting, and GOP size 15 for NTSC, or GOP size 12 for PAL. These selections will give the best results in most situations. See GOP Structure for more information. • IP: No B-frames are used with this setting. Choose IP only if your media contains fast motion that does not encode with sufficient quality using an IBBP or IBP structure. • IBP: One B-frame is used between reference frames (I-frames and P-frames) with IBP. Choose this setting only if your media contains fast motion that does not encode with sufficient quality using an IBBP structure. • IBBP: Use IBBP for the majority of MPEG-2 encoding situations, along with a GOP size of 15 for NTSC, or 12 for PAL. Two B-frames are used between reference frames with this setting. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 203• Open and Closed buttons: Closed GOPs do not contain any frame that refers to a frame in the previous or next GOP, while open GOPs begin with one or more B-frames that reference the last P-frame of the previous GOP. Closed GOPs created by the Compressor MPEG-2 encoder begin with an I-frame. Select your GOP type (open or closed) based on whether and how you create chapter markers for DVD authoring and whether you intend to use multiple video angles in your title. See Open and Closed GOPs for more information. • Open: Select this button to create open GOPs. • Closed: Select this button to create closed GOPs. • GOP Size pop-up menu: Choose how many frames are contained within your GOP, following the format of the chosen GOP structure. The maximum GOP size you can choose within Compressor is 15 frames (NTSC) or 12 frames (PAL and 720p). The minimum GOP size for all video formats is 6 frames (closed GOP) or 7 frames (open GOP). The relationship between GOP structure and GOP size gives you GOP patterns. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types and GOP Size for more information. • Pattern field: This field cannot be edited but displays the actual GOP pattern based on your chosen GOP structure and size. 204 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesExtras Tab You use the Extras tab to control the inclusion or exclusion of specific MPEG-2 authoring information. The Extras tab contains the following controls. • Add DVD Studio Pro metadata: Selecting this checkbox allows Compressor to parse specific MPEG-2 authoring information during the transcoding process to accelerate the import process into DVD Studio Pro. However, these MPEG-2 files will be incompatible with versions of DVD Studio Pro 1.5 or earlier. Leaving the checkbox unselected means the information will be parsed later in DVD Studio Pro. Note: MPEG-2 streams with additional DVD Studio Pro metadata are only compatible with DVD Studio Pro 2 (or later) versions. MPEG-2 streams with this checkbox selected will not be compatible with versions prior to DVD Studio Pro 2 or with other DVD authoring tools. All Apple settings have this box checked by default. To make your MPEG-2 files compatible with other DVD authoring tools, deselect this checkbox, and then save the setting. • Include Chapter Markers only: Selecting this checkbox excludes unnamed compression markers from the stream but still retains the chapter markers. Leaving the checkbox unselected allows all markers to be recognized in the output media file. See Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip for more information about chapter markers. • YUV 4:2:2 Color encoding (Not for DVD use): Select this checkbox to enable 4:2:2 color encoding. This option is supported in the creation of MPEG-2 elementary, program, and transport streams, but it is only available when the Stream Usage pop-up menu is set to Generic. • Multiplexed MPEG-1/Layer 2 Audio: Use this checkbox to create a multiplexed stream (rather than an elementary stream). You can make the output file either a transport stream or a program stream. See About Elementary, Transport, and Program Streams for information on the differences between the different stream types. The audio in this stream is MPEG-1 Layer 2, with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz (depending on the source) and a bit rate of 384 kbps. To create an audio-only (MPEG-1/Layer 2 Audio) elementary stream, see Creating the MPEG-1 Audio for DVD Setting. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 205Important: Generic is the only Stream Usage setting that supports transport and program streams. Selecting the Multiplexed MPEG-1/Layer 2 Audio checkbox sets your stream usage to Generic if it is currently anything else. MPEG-2 Reference Information The following sections contain useful information for creating MPEG-2 output media files. About Choosing the Bit Rates When determining average and maximum bit rates for standard DVD playback, remember to consider the bit rate of your audio track as well as the MPEG-2 bit rate. You must keep the total of both average and maximum audio and video bit rates under 10.08 Mbps, the maximum guaranteed transfer rate from standard DVD players. Because DVD-compatible audio formats are constant bit rate (CBR), there is no maximum audio bit rate to worry about. For example, if you are using AIFF audio at 1.5 Mbps, you should keep both the average and maximum video bit rates under 8.5 Mbps. Typically, your average bit rate will be lower than this (for example, 3.5 Mbps for 2 hours of footage on your DVD). However, your maximum bit rate must also stay below this number. A maximum bit rate of 8.0 Mbps is recommended to provide an extra margin for error (for example, to accommodate subtitle streams). If you are using one of the DVD-compatible compressed audio formats such as Dolby Digital or MPEG-1/Layer-2, your audio bit rate may be as low as 0.2 to 0.4 Mbps, in which case you can set your maximum bit rate about 1 Mbps higher. Also, as a general rule, set your maximum bit rate at least 1 Mbps higher than your average bit rate, to allow for bit-rate variability in achieving the goal of constant quality. MPEG-2 Video Frame Sizes and Formats Since MPEG-2 uses fixed video frame sizes, Compressor enters the output frame size in the fields in the Geometry pane based on your video format selection. The video format you choose in the Video Format pop-up menu determines the options for the associated characteristics such as frame size and rate, aspect ratio, and field dominance. For more information, see Video Format Tab. Frame rate (fps) Aspect ratio Scanning method Frame size Video format (pixels) Interlaced, progressive 23.98 (progressive 4:3 or 16:9 only), 29.97 NTSC 720 x 480 Interlaced, progressive PAL 720 x 576 25 4:3 or 16:9 23.98, 25, 29.97, 16:9 Progressive 50, 59.94 720p 1280 x 720 206 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesFrame rate (fps) Aspect ratio Scanning method Frame size Video format (pixels) Interlaced, progressive 23.98 (progressive 16:9 only), 25, 29.97 HD 1440 x 1080 1440 x 1080 Interlaced, progressive 23.98 (progressive 16:9 only), 25, 29.97 HD 1920 x 1080 1920 x 1080 Interlaced, progressive 640 x 480 (1.33) 640 x 480 23.98, 25, 29.97 4:3 or 16:9 Interlaced, progressive 640 x 360 (1.78) 640 x 360 23.98, 25, 29.97 4:3 or 16:9 Interlaced, progressive 640 x 352 (1.82) 640 x 352 23.98, 25, 29.97 4:3 or 16:9 Interlaced, progressive 640 x 384 (1.67) 640 x 384 23.98, 25, 29.97 4:3 or 16:9 Interlaced, progressive 640 x 320 (2.00) 640 x 320 23.98, 25, 29.97 4:3 or 16:9 Understanding GOPs and Frame Types A major feature of MPEG-2 encoding is its ability to remove redundancy, not only within a frame, but also among a group of frames. MPEG-2 uses three frame types (I, P, and B) to represent the video. A group of pictures (GOP) setting defines the pattern of the three frame types used. These three picture types are defined in the following ways. • Intra (I): Also known as the key frame. Every GOP contains one I-frame. The I-frame is the only MPEG-2 frame type which can be fully decompressed without any reference to frames that precede or follow it. It is also the most data-heavy, requiring the most disk space. If you want to place an I-frame at a scene change or some other specific frame location, you need to manually set it using the Preview window. This is known as a forced I-frame. See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for more information. • Predicted (P): Encoded from a “predicted” picture based on the closest preceding I- or P-frame. P-frames typically require much less disk space than do I-frames because they reference a preceding I- or P-frame in the GOP. Note: Both I-frames and P-frames are also known asreference frames, because a B-frame may refer to either one or both frame types. • Bi-directional (B): Encoded from an interpolation of succeeding and preceding reference frames, either I-frame or P-frame. B-frames are the most storage-efficient MPEG-2 frame type, requiring the least amount of disk space. The use of B- and P-frames is what allows MPEG-2 to remove temporal redundancy, contributing to its ability to compress video efficiently. Things to Consider When Choosing a GOP Setting You need to consider the following factors when choosing a GOP setting. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 207GOP Structure This setting specifies whether there will be two, one, or no B-frames between the reference frames within a GOP. GOP structure, along with GOP size, determines the number of I-, P-, and B-frames that will be used during transcoding. The GOP structure you choose depends on how far apart P-frames should be spaced. Since a P-frame is predicted from the previous reference frame (either an I-frame or a P-frame), if there are one or two B-frames in between, the prediction must cover the distance objects can move over the duration of two to three frames. In principle, the less average motion there is from one frame to the next, the farther apart P-frames can be spaced, and the greater the compression can be. For most video material, the IBBP structure is a good choice. Material with unusually fast motion throughout the entire sequence may benefit from an IBP or IP structure, but in such cases a relatively high bit rate (6 to 8 Mbps for SD video) may be required for good quality. GOP Size This setting specifies the number of frames within a GOP. Because exactly one I-frame exists per GOP, longer GOP sizes generally provide greater compression, because B- and P-frames are smaller than I-frames. For most media, spacing I-frames about 1/2 second apart gives good results. This equates to a GOP size of 15 frames for NTSC and 12 frames for PAL. The DVD-Video specification prohibits GOP lengths from being much longer than this. Generally, only material with scene changes occurring less than 1/2 second apart frequently throughout the video will benefit from shorter GOP sizes. Open and Closed GOPs Open GOPs are most efficient because they allow an extra B-frame in the GOP pattern. Open GOPs start with a B-frame that is able to look at the last P-frame from the preceding GOP as well as the first I-frame of its own GOP. :06 :07 :08 :09 :09 :04 :05 :10 :11 :12 :13 :14 :15 :16 :17 :18 :19 :20 :21 Open GOP (IBBP, 15 frames) P B B I B B P B B P B B P B B P B B I :03 :04 :05 :06 :07 :08 :10 :11 :12 :13 :14 :15 :16 :17 :18 Closed GOP (IBBP, 15 frames) I B B P B B P B B P B B P B P 208 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesBy definition, closed GOPs cannot contain any frame that refers to a frame in the previous or next GOP. In contrast, open GOPs begin with one or more B-frames that reference the last P-frame of the previous GOP. Closed GOPs created by Compressor always begin with an I-frame. Open GOPs generally provide slightly better compression than do closed GOPs of the same structure and size. The illustration above shows that a closed GOP contains one more P-frame than does an open GOP of the same length. Since P-frames generally require more bits than do B-frames, the open GOP achieves slightly better compression. There are limitations to using open GOPs for DVD-Video discs that are created using a DVD authoring application. One limitation is that only closed GOPs are permitted within MPEG-2 streams that will be used for mixed-angle or multi-angle DVDs. The other limitation is that DVD chapter markers can only be set at the beginning of a closed GOP. The best time to define chapter markers is before doing MPEG-2 transcoding. For example, if you specify your chapter markers in Final Cut Pro, you can set Compressor to do MPEG-2 transcoding with open GOPs. Compressor will then force a closed GOP to begin only at the specified chapter markers and will make all other GOPs open. You can also accomplish this by specifying “forced I-frames” in the Compressor Preview window and giving them a chapter name to be used by a DVD authoring application. However, if you want to specify chapter markers at any GOP boundary after your video has been transcoded in the MPEG-2 format, you should use only closed GOPs. This freedom is limited, as it allows you to set chapter markers only at GOP boundaries, rather than at any video frame. About 24p (23.98p) For DVD authoring and encoding, 24p refers to a video sequence that contains 24 progressive (non-interlaced) frames per second, with NTSC-related standard definition frame dimensions (720 x 480 for MPEG-2). Film-based movies have a native frame rate of 24 fps, and because the MPEG-2 format is able to represent 24 fps video internally, many commercial movie DVDs are encoded in this way. But any time you use NTSC video in your project, the frame rate of film-transferred material will be slowed down from 24 fps to 23.976 fps (rounded to 23.98) and a 2:3:2:3 pull-down is added. So, the more accurate term is actually 23.98p. Compressor can also do this for 24p source video files. For such material, the 23.98 frame rate option (in the Video Format tab) compresses each source frame one-for-one, without compressing repeated frames or fields in order to achieve a 29.97 fps display rate. This results in higher quality at a lower compressed bit rate than would be possible if the 24p material were converted to 29.97 fps prior to transcoding. Compressor also sets internal MPEG-2 frame flags correctly, so DVD players will properly apply the 3:2 pull-down process for display on 29.97 fps interlaced NTSC TV sets. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 209Note: If your source video has a frame rate of 24.00 fps rather than 23.98 fps, Compressor skips one out of every 1000 source frames. If the 24p source video is 23.98 fps, Compressor transcodes all source frames, without skipping (or repeating) any of them. MPEG-2 Transcoding Workflow This section includes step-by-step instructions for setting your MPEG-2 attributes prior to creating MPEG-2 output files with Compressor. Make your MPEG-2 settings from the MPEG-2 Encoder pane by either modifying an existing setting or creating a new one in the Settings tab. See the following steps for working with the MPEG-2 output file format. For example values for each of these settings, see Example MPEG-2 Settings. • Stage 1: Choosing Video Format Settings • Stage 2: Choosing Quality Settings • Stage 3: Choosing GOP Settings • Stage 4: Choosing Extras Settings Stage 1: Choosing Video Format Settings It’s important to match the video format, aspect ratio, and field dominance to those of your source media file. See Video Format Tab for a more detailed description of each of these settings. Note: The easiest way to make sure you are matching the source media file is to activate the Automatic buttons. See About the Automatic Settings for more information. To open the MPEG-2 Encoder pane and choose Video Format settings 1 Open the Settings tab, then choose MPEG-2 from the Add Preset (+) pop-up menu button. 210 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesThe MPEG-2 Encoder pane opens in the Inspector window with the default Video Format tab displayed. Manually configure these settings if you do not intend to match the source media file. Select the Automatic buttons to have the encoder match the source media file. Choose the type of MPEG-2 stream to create. 2 Choose the setting from the Stream Usage pop-up menu that matches how you intend to use the encoded video. This ensures that the MPEG-2 encoding options are restricted to those that are supported by your intended usage. The options include: • Generic • SD DVD • Blu-ray 3 Choose a format from the Video Format pop-up menu or select its Automatic button: • NTSC (default) • PAL • 720p • HD 1440x1080 • HD 1920x1080 • 640x480 • 640x360 • 640x352 • 640x384 • 640x320 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 2114 Choose an aspect ratio from the Aspect Ratio pop-up menu or select its Automatic button. You must determine whether the intended shape of your source video is 4:3 (normal) or 16:9 (widescreen) before you can choose your aspect ratio. 5 Choose a field dominance setting based on your source media type from the Field Dominance pop-up menu. For example, for DV choose Bottom First. Or choose the Field Dominance Automatic button to let Compressor determine the correct setting. 6 If you want to use the timecode from your source video, leave the “Choose start timecode” checkbox unselected. Otherwise, select this checkbox and enter a new timecode. 7 If you have selected the “Choose start timecode” checkbox, and if your video format is NTSC, select the “drop frame” checkbox if you want to use drop frame (rather than non-drop frame) timecode. See Video Format Tab for more information. Stage 2: Choosing Quality Settings In the Quality tab, you set the MPEG-2 encoding attributes that have the greatest influence on the resulting quality of your MPEG-2 video output file: encoding mode, average and maximum bit rate, and type of motion estimation. To open the Quality tab and choose the Quality settings 1 Click the Quality button in the MPEG-2 Encoder pane to open the Quality tab. Choose a Motion Estimation setting. Choose a mode that fits your time and quality requirements. Choose bit rates that fit your file size and quality requirements. 2 Make a selection from the Mode pop-up menu. For best image quality, choose “One pass VBR Best” or “Two pass VBR Best.” For faster encoding, with excellent image quality, choose “One pass VBR” or “Two pass VBR.” For HD sources, choose either “One pass VBR Best” or “Two pass VBR Best.” With two-pass modes, the source media file is examined on the first pass and transcoded on the second pass, with bit rates tailored to the video content. Alternatively, one-pass modes transcode the material more quickly, but allocate bits less optimally than do the corresponding two-pass modes. Note: If you are using two-pass VBR with distributed processing enabled, you may want to deselect the Allow Job Segmenting checkbox in the Encoder pane. See Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding for more information. 212 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files3 Choose an average bit rate using the Average Bit Rate slider or field or click the Automatic button. Choose an appropriate bit rate based on the content and length of your source video and the intended size (in bytes) of your output file. In DVD authoring, the entire video must fit on the DVD disc—the lower the bit rate, the more data you can store. However, the higher the bit rate, the better the image quality will be. As you change the Average Bit Rate value (with the slider or the field), the bit-rate calculator at the bottom of the Quality tab dynamically shows the maximum number of minutes of video on a DVD-5. The calculator assumes 1.5 Mbps for audio (two-channel AIFF). See the table below for some average bit rates and corresponding footage times for a 4.7 GB DVD. 4 If available, use the Maximum Bit Rate slider or field to set a maximum bit rate. Because SD DVD players support peak bit rates of up to 10.08 Mbps for video plus audio, you should set the maximum video bit rate between 8.0 and 8.5 Mbps if you are using a 1.5 Mbps (two-channel AIFF) audio track. Note: For best results, make sure the maximum bit rate is at least 1 Mbps higher than the average setting. Larger differences can produce better results. 5 Choose one of the following settings from the Motion Estimation pop-up menu: • Good: The fastest motion estimation setting—sufficient when there is relatively low motion between frames • Better: A good general-purpose motion estimation setting—provides very good results even in the presence of complex interlaced motion • Best: The highest quality setting to handle the most demanding and complex motion for interlaced sources—somewhat slower than the Better mode See Quality Tab for more information. The following table shows some average bit rates and corresponding footage times for a 4.7 GB DVD: Average bit rate Approximate duration for 4.7 GB DVD 1 3.5 Mbps 121 minutes 5.0 Mbps 94 minutes 6.0 Mbps 82 minutes 7.5 Mbps 68 minutes 8.0 Mbps 65 minutes 1 For a DVD clip with video, audio, and subpictures: assumes 1.5 Mbps for audio (two-channel AIFF). Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 213Note: When “One pass VBR or “One pass VBR Best” is chosen for very short clips (less than a minute or two in length), the resulting MPEG-2 output file size may not accurately reflect the average bit rate you specified. If the MPEG-2 output media file is larger than you want, you can try transcoding it again at a lower average bit rate. Stage 3: Choosing GOP Settings Select a suitable GOP structure and size and decide whether you want the GOPs to be open or closed. Note: These settings are not adjustable if you chose an HD video format in the Video Format tab. To open the GOP tab and choose GOP settings 1 Click the GOP button in the MPEG-2 Encoder pane to open the GOP tab. Choose a GOP structure to control how many B-frames are used. Choose open or closed GOPs. Choose a GOP size. 2 Choose a GOP structure from the GOP Structure pop-up menu. For the majority of MPEG-2 encoding jobs for DVD authoring, choose the IBBP GOP structure. 3 Choose a GOP size from the GOP Size pop-up menu. For the majority of MPEG-2 encoding jobs for DVD authoring, choose GOP size 15 for NTSC and GOP size 12 for PAL and 24p. The options available in this menu are determined by the GOP structure you choose and by whether or not the GOP is open or closed. 4 Decide whether you want the GOP pattern to be open or closed and click the appropriate button. 214 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesWorking with MPEG-2 I-Frames The Compressor Preview window offers additional MPEG-2 transcoding flexibility by allowing you to manually insert I-frames into your output MPEG-2 file at any frame location, regardless of your chosen GOP pattern and size. These are known as forced I-frames, and may be useful for improving the quality of the MPEG-2 file in the vicinity of the scene change. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types for more information on I-frames. In addition, adding I-frames to your clip allows you to create chapter markers that DVD authoring applications can understand and use. See Working with Markers and Poster Frames and Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip for more information. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types, Things to Consider When Choosing a GOP Setting, and GOP Tab for more information about GOPs. Stage 4: Choosing Extras Settings You can control the inclusion or exclusion of specific MPEG-2 authoring information in the Extras tab. To open the Extras tab and choose Extras settings 1 Click the Extras button in the MPEG-2 Encoder pane to open the Extras tab. 2 Select the “Add DVD Studio Pro metadata” checkbox if you want Compressor to parse specific MPEG-2 authoring information rather than parse the information later in DVD Studio Pro. Important: Selecting this checkbox may make your MPEG-2 files incompatible with any DVD authoring tools other than DVD Studio Pro 2 (or later). 3 Select the “Include chapter markers only” checkbox if you want to exclude automatic compression markers from the stream but still retain the chapter markers. 4 Select the Multiplexed MPEG-1/layer 2 Audio checkbox only if you need to create transport or program streams. See About Elementary, Transport, and Program Streams for more information. See Extras Tab for more information about settings in the Extras tab. Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output Files 215Example MPEG-2 Settings The following MPEG-2 settings can be used for most general MPEG-2 encoding situations. Open the MPEG-2 Encoder pane and click the appropriate buttons to access these tabs. Note: Be aware that many of the settings shown in this example are not suitable for all video input formats, nor for all encoding situations. Some alternative settings are shown in parentheses where appropriate. See the sections at the beginning of this chapter for details on how and when to use other settings. Video Format Tab • Video Format: NTSC (PAL, 720p, HD 1440x1080, HD 1920x1080, or one of the 640 width options) • Aspect Ratio: 4:3 (16:9 for anamorphic or HD widescreen) • Field Dominance: Automatic (not available for 720p) Quality Tab • Mode: “One pass VBR Best” (other one-pass and two-pass settings) • Average Bit Rate: 5 Mbps (2 to 9 Mbps) for standard DVD or 18 Mbps for HD video formats (range varies) Note: Your choice of bit rate may be influenced by several factors, including the complexity of your source video, the format and number of your audio streams, and the total duration of all video clips to fit on your DVD. • Maximum Bit Rate: 8.0 Mbps for standard DVD or 27 Mbps for HD video formats • Motion Estimation: Best GOP Tab • GOP Structure: IBBP • GOP Size: 15 (12 for PAL and 50i, 50p, and 24p HD formats) • GOP Type: Open (Closed) 216 Chapter 18 Creating MPEG-2 Output FilesCompressor provides the tools you need to create exceptional MPEG-4 transcoded files. MPEG-4 Part 2 (known as MPEG-4 video in QuickTime 6) plays an important role in the evolution of standards for the Internet and wireless multimedia industries, where it has been widely adopted. Use MPEG-4 Part 2 anywhere you want to be compatible with MPEG-4 Part 2 devices or players, such as the millions of smartphones and digital still cameras that capture and play back MPEG-4 Part 2 video. H.264, also known as MPEG-4 Part 10, is a newer technology than MPEG-4 Part 2, providing up to four times the frame size of video encoded with the MPEG-4 Part 2 codec at a given data rate. But, just as MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 are still used in the industry today, MPEG-4 Part 2 will continue to be used. Note: MPEG-4 Part 2 is both a QuickTime codec (MPEG-4 Video) and an output format. This chapter discusses MPEG-4 Part 2 as an output format. This chapter covers the following: • About MPEG-4 Part 2 (p. 217) • About the MPEG-4 Part 2 Encoder Pane (p. 218) • Using Default MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings (p. 222) • Customizing MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings (p. 223) • Audio Podcasting Workflow (p. 225) • Adding Additional Settings and Presets (p. 228) About MPEG-4 Part 2 MPEG-4 Part 2 offers the following advantages. • Standards compliance: Output is with MPEG-4 Part 2 devices and other standards-based (ISMA) players, such as mobile phones. 217 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 19• High-quality video: A versatile transcoder that can be set to a target data rate and—using one-pass variable bit rate (VBR)—can maximize the highest-quality output or speed for the fastest possible transcode. • Advanced Audio Coding (AAC): MPEG-4 audio accommodates a wide variety of source audio, and brings true variable bit rate (VBR) audio transcoding to QuickTime. It uses the Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) codec, which provides more clarity than MP3 audio at the same bit rate with smaller file sizes, or files of the same size at higher quality. You can also include podcasting information, such as chapter and podcast markers with artwork and URLs, as well as a variety of text annotations. • Hinting for streaming: Hinting refers to how a video stream is divided into streamable pieces. To create streaming video, the streaming server needs some hints about what data to send out and when. These hints consist of defining a maximum packet size and maximum packet duration. A hint track contains information needed to stream your output file. A hint track is created for every streamable media track in the output file (video and audio), and the streaming server uses the hint track to turn the media into real-time streams. About the MPEG-4 Part 2 Encoder Pane The MPEG-4 Part 2 Encoder pane allows you to select a variety of streaming types and options. MPEG-4 Encoder Pane General Settings The MPEG-4 Part 2 pane contains the following items: • File Extension field: Displays the MPEG-4 Part 2 file extension (.mp4) as soon as the MPEG-4 output format is selected from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. 218 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files• Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. Since the MPEG-4 Part 2 format uses single-pass VBR, you can leave this checkbox selected in all cases for added speed gains with distributed processing. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Video, Audio, and Streaming buttons: These buttons open the Video, Audio, and Streaming panes, described next. • Enhanced Podcast (m4a file): Select this checkbox to ensure that podcasting annotations and metadata are written to the output media file. This is available for audio files only. To make this option available, deselect the Video Enabled checkbox at the top of the Video pane. • Fit marker images within: Use this to specify the width and height of the podcast marker images when creating an audio podcast. You can also click the Automatic button to have Compressor enter the values. This option is only available when the Video Enabled checkbox at the top of the Video pane is deselected. See Stage 5: Creating and Configuring Markers for the Output Media File for more information. Video Pane The Video pane allows you to make settings for the quality (ISMA profile), frames per second (fps) rate, key frame interval, and bit rate of your MPEG-4 Part 2 output file. Either enter a number in the Bit Rate field or use the slider to set the bit rate. The pane contains the following controls. • Video Enabled checkbox: Make sure that this checkbox is selected if you want the MPEG-4 Part 2 output format video settings to be applied. • Video compression: Choose the MPEG-4 compression format to use. • MPEG-4 basic: Ensures playback on all MPEG-4 Part 2 devices. • MPEG-4 improved: Gives better output quality, but this setting is not compatible with older MPEG-4 Part 2 devices. • H.264 main profile: Similar to the H.264 baseline profile but with support for standard-definition video requirements. • H.264 baseline profile: Primarily for videoconferencing and mobile applications. Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 219• Frame Rate (fps) pop-up menu and field: Choose or enter a number to set the overall frame rate of your output media file, or click the Automatic button to have Compressor choose the frame rate. • Key Frame Interval field: Enter a value to designate how often (number of frames) you want key frames created in your output media file, or click the Automatic button to have Compressor choose the key frame interval rate (the displayed value is 0 with Automatic on; the actual value is determined during the encoding process). • Multi-pass: Select this for higher-quality results but at the expense of longer encoding times. This is only available when you choose an H.264 option from the “Video compression” pop-up menu. • Bit Rate slider and field: Move the slider to set the overall video bit rate for your output media file, or enter a specific number in the accompanying field. Audio Pane You use the Audio pane to set the audio track quality, sample rate, quality, and bit rate of the MPEG-4 output file. Sample Rate pop-up menu Bit Rate slider Use the following buttons and slider to make more detailed adjustments. • Audio Enabled checkbox: Make sure that this checkbox is selected if you want the MPEG-4 Part 2 output format audio settings to be applied. • Channels buttons: Choose the audio channel for your output media file to be either mono or stereo. • Mono: Choose this button for mono output. • Stereo: Choose this button for stereo output. • Sample Rate pop-up menu: Choose from one of the following sample rates: 8, 11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, or 48 kHz. You can also choose Recommended to have Compressor choose a sample rate that is suitable for the Channels and Bit Rate settings. Note: If you choose Recommended, the sample rate is not determined until the transcode actually starts. • Quality pop-up menu: Choose one of the following for the audio quality of your output media file: • Low: This allows for fast transcoding, but it is at the expense of output file quality. 220 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files• Medium: The audio quality is better than Low, but this takes longer to transcode. • High: This is the best audio quality setting available. Use this setting when the audio quality is important for the output media file and you don’t mind how long it takes to transcode. • Bit Rate slider and field: Move the slider to set the overall audio bit rate for your output media file between the range of 16 kbps (2 KB/sec.) and 320 kbps (40 KB/sec.), or enter a specific number in the accompanying field. Streaming Pane You use the Streaming pane to set hints for your output file, as well as set the maximum packet size and packet duration limits of the MPEG-4 Part 2 output file. You can also set your output media file to work with an older version of QuickTime Streaming Server (version 4.1 or earlier). The Streaming pane contains the following controls. • Streaming hints enabled checkbox: Make sure that this checkbox is selected if you want the MPEG-4 Part 2 output format streaming settings to be applied. • QuickTime Streaming Server Compatibility (pre 4.1) checkbox: Select this checkbox if you want your output media file to work with an older QuickTime Streaming Server (version 4.1 or earlier). You don’t need to select this checkbox if you are using a newer version of QuickTime, because any streaming compatibility issues are automatically resolved. • Packet Maximum Size field: Enter a number to specify the largest file size allowable (in bytes) for a streaming packet in your output media file. The packet size you choose should be no larger than the largest packet used on any network between the streaming server and the viewer. • Packet Maximum Duration field: Enter a number to specify the longest duration allowable (in milliseconds) for a streaming packet in your output media file. The duration affects MPEG-4 Part 2 audio only. It limits the maximum amount of audio (in milliseconds) in any packet, which limits the audio dropout created by the loss of a packet. Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 221Using Default MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings If you don’t need to customize the video and audio settings of your MPEG-4 Part 2 file, you can use the “quick-and-easy” method to transcode your source media files. This consists of accepting the default MPEG-4 Part 2 output format settings. Default Video Pane Settings These are the default video settings for MPEG-4 Part 2 output media files. • Video Enabled: Selected • Video compression: H.264 baseline profile • Frame Rate: 29.97 fps • Key Frame Interval: 30 frames • Bit Rate: 1000 kbps Either enter a number in the Bit Rate field or use the slider to set the bit rate. See Video Pane for more information. Default Audio Pane Settings These are the default audio settings for MPEG-4 Part 2 output media files. • Audio Enabled: Selected • Channels: Stereo • Sample Rate: 44.100 kHz • Quality: High • Bit Rate: 128 kbps Sample Rate pop-up menu Bit Rate slider See Audio Pane for more information. 222 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output FilesDefault Streaming Pane Settings These are the default streaming settings for MPEG-4 Part 2 output media files. • Streaming hints enabled: Selected • Packet Maximum Size: 1,450 bytes • Packet Maximum Duration: 100 milliseconds See Streaming Pane for more information. If these settings are acceptable to you, there is nothing further that you need to do, and you can begin transcoding source media files immediately. Customizing MPEG-4 Part 2 Settings If you want to customize your MPEG-4 Part 2 file format settings, you need to perform a more detailed transcoding workflow than the one described above. • Stage 1: Customizing MPEG-4 Video Settings • Stage 2: Customizing MPEG-4 Audio Settings • Stage 3: Editing MPEG-4 Streaming Settings Stage 1: Customizing MPEG-4 Video Settings You adjust MPEG-4 video settings in the MPEG-4 Encoder pane. To open the MPEG-4 Encoder pane and adjust the MPEG-4 video settings 1 In the Inspector window, click the Encoder pane and choose MPEG-4 from the File Format pop-up menu. Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 223The MPEG-4 Encoder pane opens, displaying mp4 in the File Extension field, and the default Video pane. 2 Adjust the MPEG-4 video settings using the available controls. Note: Make sure the Video Enabled checkbox is selected. See Video Pane for details about MPEG-4 Part 2 video settings. If you don’t want to edit any other attributes, your MPEG-4 setting can be assigned to any source media file in the usual way. See Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings for more information. Otherwise, go to the next stage to edit MPEG-4 audio settings. Stage 2: Customizing MPEG-4 Audio Settings You adjust the MPEG-4 audio settings in the Audio pane. To open the Audio pane and adjust the MPEG-4 audio settings 1 Click the Audio button to open the Audio pane. Sample Rate pop-up menu Bit Rate slider 2 Adjust the MPEG-4 audio settings using the available controls. Note: Make sure that the Audio Enabled checkbox is selected. See Audio Pane for details about MPEG-4 Part 2 audio settings. 224 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output FilesIf you don’t want to edit any other attributes, your MPEG-4 setting can be assigned to any source media file in the usual way. See Preparing Compressor for Transcoding with Custom Settings for more information. Otherwise, go to the next stage to edit streaming settings. Stage 3: Editing MPEG-4 Streaming Settings You edit MPEG-4 streaming settings in the Streaming pane. To open the Streaming pane and edit the streaming settings 1 Click the Streaming button to open the Streaming pane. 2 Select the “QuickTime Streaming Server Compatibility (pre v4.1)” checkbox if your intended distribution method is via a QuickTime Streaming Server earlier than version 4.1. 3 Enter new numbers into the Size and Duration fields for Packet Maximum, and make sure that the “Streaming hints enabled” checkbox is selected. 4 See Streaming Pane for details about MPEG-4 Part 2 streaming settings. Audio Podcasting Workflow Compressor makes it easy to create an enhanced audio podcast based on the MPEG-4 output format. An enhanced audio podcast includes podcasting information such as chapter and podcast markers with artwork and URLs, as well as a variety of text annotations. Follow the instructions below to create an audio podcast. • Stage 1: Configuring the MPEG-4 Output for Audio-Only Output • Stage 2: Including Podcasting Information • Stage 3: Applying the Setting to a Source Media File’s Target • Stage 4: Entering Annotations for the Output Media File • Stage 5: Creating and Configuring Markers for the Output Media File • Stage 6: Submitting the Job and Verifying the Output Media File Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 225Stage 1: Configuring the MPEG-4 Output for Audio-Only Output Follow the steps below to configure MPEG-4 settings for audio-only output (such as podcasts). To open the MPEG-4 Encoder pane and configure it for audio-only output media files 1 In the Inspector window, click the Encoder pane and choose MPEG-4 from the File Format pop-up menu. 2 Click the Video button to open the Video pane. 3 Deselect the Video Enabled checkbox. 4 Click the Audio button to open the Audio pane. 5 Select the Audio Enabled checkbox. This configures the MPEG-4 output to be an audio-only (.m4a) file. You can also configure the other settings in the Audio pane as needed. Stage 2: Including Podcasting Information Follow the steps below to include podcasting information. To configure the MPEG-4 output to include podcasting information 1 Select the “Enhanced Podcast (m4a file)” checkbox near the bottom of the Inspector window. Deselect this checkbox to activate the “Allow Podcasting information” checkbox. Select this checkbox to include podcasting information in the output media file. 226 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output FilesThis checkbox is available only when you have deselected Video Enabled in the Video pane. Selecting this checkbox ensures that any annotations you add, as well as any chapter and podcast markers with their artwork and URLs, are embedded with the output media file. 2 Save the setting so that you can apply it to a source media file’s target. Stage 3: Applying the Setting to a Source Media File’s Target You must apply the setting to a source media file’s target to be able to configure the podcasting information that this setting allows you to add to the output media file. See Assigning Settings to Source Media Files for more information. Stage 4: Entering Annotations for the Output Media File You have the option of adding annotations (such as producer credits, keywords, and copyright information). To open the Additional Information tab and enter annotations 1 Click a non-target area of the job created by the source media file. The Inspector window shows the A/V Attributes, Additional Information, and Job Action tabs. 2 Click the Additional Information tab. 3 The Additional Information tab is where you can add annotations, such as a title and artist, to the output media file. Choose items from this pop-up menu to include them as annotations in the output media file. 4 Choose an item from the Add Annotation pop-up menu to add it to the output media file. Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output Files 227The item appears in the Annotation column. 5 Double-click the item’s Value column to type in the text annotation. 6 Repeat this for each annotation item you want to add to the output media file. See Using the Inspector with Source Media Files for more information. While you have the job selected, you can optionally use the Job Action tab to have the output media file automatically added to a playlist in the iTunes library. For more information, see Adding Actions and About Job Actions. Stage 5: Creating and Configuring Markers for the Output Media File You can use the Preview window to add and configure chapter and podcast markers for the output media file. You can manually add the markers or import a chapter marker list. Each chapter and podcast marker can be named, have a URL added to it, and have a still image added as its artwork. To control the size of the marker images, you can also enter values in the “Fit marker images within” setting near the bottom of the MPEG-4 Inspector window. When played, the artwork displays along with the URL (which the viewer can click to open a web browser to show). See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for details on adding and configuring markers in the Preview window. Stage 6: Submitting the Job and Verifying the Output Media File Once you have added the annotations and markers to the job, you can submit it to create the output media file. After the encoding process finishes, you can open the output media file in QuickTime Player to verify that the markers, URLs, and artwork appear as intended. Adding Additional Settings and Presets Although the output format setting is the most important component of the Compressor workflow, you can also add other settings and presets, such as filters, cropping, frame sizing, actions, and destinations. For further instructions on how to add these settings, see the following: • Adding Filters to a Setting • Working with Frame Controls • Adding Geometry Settings • Adding Actions • Creating and Changing Destinations 228 Chapter 19 Creating MPEG-4 Output FilesYou can use Compressor to output a variety of additional formats using the QuickTime component plug-in feature. This chapter discusses how to take advantage of the QuickTime component plug-in feature, which opens up a wide variety of additional file formats that Compressor can output from your source media files. This chapter covers the following: • Creating QuickTime Export Component Output Files (p. 229) • Installing QuickTime Export Component Plug-ins (p. 230) • About the iPod Plug-in (p. 230) • About the QuickTime Export Components Encoder Pane (p. 231) • Configuring Export Components Settings (p. 231) Creating QuickTime Export Component Output Files Compressor and QuickTime can be extended to support additional codec options and third-party formats. This section focuses on the QuickTime component plug-in feature, which allows you to export exotic file formats that can play on third-party devices and operating systems, such as mobile phones. Unlike standard QuickTime movies, these exported files cannot be played back with QuickTime Player or other QuickTime-based applications. (For information on the native QuickTime movie file format, see Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files.) In the past, creating these kinds of files required multiple steps and multiple operating systems: exporting the file, moving it to a computer on another platform, and then encoding using another software application. The QuickTime Export Components feature allows you to control the third-party encoding engine without having to open another application. This streamlines your workflow and saves you the time and hassle of working with multiple operating systems and software packages. 229 Creating QuickTime Export Component Files 20Installing QuickTime Export Component Plug-ins With no additional third-party software, Compressor currently supports transcoding to 3G, AVI, and iPod. The export component feature in Compressor was developed to make it possible to add additional export plug-ins in the future. You would simply install the third-party software and then choose the corresponding output file format from the Encoder Type pop-up menu in the QuickTime Export Components Encoder pane of the Inspector window. To find out more about the currently available plug-ins and updates µ Go to the Compressor support website at http://www.apple.com/support/compressor. About the iPod Plug-in The QuickTime Export Components output format includes an iPod encoder type. This encoder creates an output file suitable for playing on an iPod, using an H.264 encoder for the video and an AAC encoder for the audio. All settings (frame size, frame rate, and so on) are automatically set. Drawbacks of using this plug-in (as opposed to using the H.264 for Apple Devices output format) include not being able to take advantage of distributed processing, include chapter markers, or use the Frame Controls pane. See Creating H.264 for Apple Devices Output Files for more information on creating iPod output media files. 230 Chapter 20 Creating QuickTime Export Component FilesAbout the QuickTime Export Components Encoder Pane The following options appear when you choose the QuickTime Export Components output format from the File Format pop-up menu in the Encoder pane of the Inspector window: File Extension field Choose QuickTime Export Components. Click to see the options for the encoder plug-in. Choose an encoder plug-in. • File Extension: This field indicates the file extension for the output format selected from the Encoder Type menu. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. • Encoder Type: Use this pop-up menu to choose from the available export component output formats (plug-ins). • Options: Click this button (if active) to open the Settings window for the output file format selected in the Encoder Type pop-up menu. Configuring Export Components Settings When you choose QuickTime Export Components as your output format, you can only create settings for export plug-ins that are already installed. To create QuickTime Export Components settings 1 In the Settings tab, do one of the following: • Make sure that the correct setting is selected. • Create a new setting by choosing QuickTime Export Components from the “Create a new setting” (+) pop-up menu. 2 Choose an output file format from the Encoder Type pop-up menu. Chapter 20 Creating QuickTime Export Component Files 2313 Click the Options button (if active) in the Encoder pane. The Settings window for that particular output file format opens. Configure settings for the QuickTime export component. Important: Use the third-party export module user interface to explicitly enter the width, height, and frame rate for the output file. Do not leave the width, height, and frame rate fields in the third-party user interface at their default (“current”) values. 4 Click OK to save your settings and close this dialog. Note: The Compressor Frame Controls feature is not available when using the QuickTime Export Component Output feature. 232 Chapter 20 Creating QuickTime Export Component FilesCompressor provides the tools you need to create QuickTime media files. QuickTime is cross-platform multimedia technology and allows Mac OS applications to capture and play back video, audio, and still-image files. QuickTime supports a wide variety of codecs and can also be extended to accommodate additional codec options and third-party codecs. See Creating QuickTime Export Component Output Filesfor more information about additional QuickTime export options. This chapter covers the following: • Creating QuickTime Output Files (p. 233) • About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane (p. 234) • QuickTime Transcoding Workflow (p. 240) • Understanding Codecs (p. 244) • QuickTime Video Codecs (p. 244) • QuickTime Audio Codecs (p. 245) Creating QuickTime Output Files QuickTime is an open standard with many built-in codecs and is both a multimedia and streaming media architecture. It is widely used for both authoring and delivery. For example, many video editing and compositing applications use QuickTime as their base format. QuickTime contains a wide range of video and audio codecs suitable for everything from streaming video to DVD. The QuickTime architecture can also handle file formats other than QuickTime movies, such as AVI files and 3G streams. For more information on creating those kinds of formats, see Creating QuickTime Export Component Files. 233 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 21QuickTime Media Files for the Web You can play your output media files over the web with QuickTime, once they are compressed to a data rate appropriate for the bandwidth you expect the users to have. You can do this by making your output media files either QuickTime Fast Start movies (pre-buffered download) or QuickTime Streaming movies. Compressor allows you to choose different streaming options via the Streaming pop-up menu in the QuickTime Encoder pane. See the Streaming pop-up menu item for more information about streaming QuickTime media files over the web. About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane The following options appear when you choose QuickTime Movie from the File Format pop-up menu: Summary table File Extension field Options button (dimmed unless Hinted Streaming is selected) Streaming pop-up menu Clean aperture selection QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane Basic Settings Use these basic options to control the more specific QuickTime movie settings, below. • File Extension field: This field displays the QuickTime file extension (.mov) automatically after the QuickTime output format is chosen from the File Format pop-up menu or the (+) pop-up menu in the Settings tab. • Allow Job Segmenting: This checkbox allows you to turn off job segmenting. It is relevant only if you are using Compressor with distributed processing and with multi-pass encoding. For more information, see Job Segmenting and Two-Pass or Multi-Pass Encoding. 234 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files• Video Settings and Audio Settings: These buttons open the QuickTime Compression Settings and Sound Settings dialogs. Use these dialogs to select suitable codecs and change other video or audio compression settings. See About the Sound Settings Dialog and About the Compression Settings Dialog for more information on these dialogs. • Enabled/Disabled/Pass-through: Use these pop-up menus to enable or disable Video and Audio settings. Enabled means the video or audio track will be included in the output movie. Disabled means the video or audio track will be excluded from the output movie. Pass-through (audio only) means Compressor will copy the audio into the output movie without modifying it. An example of this might involve HD (high definition) files with multitrack audio that you want to convert to SD (standard definition) files without disturbing the audio tracks. Note: If you export a sequence from Final Cut Pro to Compressor (File > Export > Using Compressor) and apply a setting with “Pass-through” selected, the audio portion of the setting will change to a PCM setting with the sequence’s setting and channel count, but with only a single track created on output. If you require audio passthrough for a Final Cut Pro sequence, export a QuickTime movie (File > Export > QuickTime Movie) and then import the movie into Compressor. Important: If a setting has “Pass-through” selected, the Filter pane audio filters are not available. Additionally, the Frame Controls pane retiming controls will not correct the audio, potentially causing synchronization errors with the video. • Streaming: Choose a QuickTime streaming option from this pop-up menu. • None: If you choose this setting (the default), your output media file will not stream over the Internet. • Fast Start: This option allows your output media file to be viewed even before it is fully downloaded from its server. • Fast Start-Compressed Header: This setting achieves the same results as Fast Start (allowing your output media file to be viewed before it is fully downloaded from the server), but the output media files are smaller. • Hinted Streaming: This setting allows hint tracks to be added to the output media file so that it can be used with a QuickTime Streaming Server. • Options button: This button remains dimmed unless Hinted Streaming is chosen from the Streaming pop-up menu. Clicking this button opens the QuickTime Hint Exporter Settings dialog, which allows you to choose extra hinting settings for your stream. • Add clean aperture information checkbox: This checkbox (selected by default) allows you to choose whether to add information that defines clean picture edges to the output file. Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 235Note: This checkbox does not affect the actual pixels in the output file—it only controls whether information is added to the file that a player can use to hide the edges of the picture. • If the checkbox is selected: Information is added to the output file that defines how many pixels to hide to ensure that no undesirable artifacts appear along the edges. When the output file is played using QuickTime Player, this setting can result in the pixel aspect ratio being slightly altered. • If the checkbox is not selected: No clean aperture information is added to the output file. This was the standard behavior in Compressor 3.0.5 and earlier. • Summary table: Displays full details for this setting. QuickTime Video and Audio Settings The QuickTime Video and Audio Settings buttons appear in the Encoder pane if you selected QuickTime Movie as the output file format. (The Audio Settings button also appears if you choose AIFF from the File Format pop-up menu.) You use these buttons to open the Compression Settings and Sound Settings dialogs, where you can modify whichever video or audio codec you want to add to the selected setting in the Settings tab. By default, both the Video and Audio Settings buttons are enabled, but you can disable one or the other by deselecting the appropriate checkbox. Video Codec Settings The QuickTime Video Settings button provides access to the currently installed QuickTime video codecs. For information on how to customize video codec settings, see Stage 2: Adding a QuickTime Video Codec. All codecs are compatible with QuickTime, but if you intend to play back the output file using QuickTime Player, the following delivery codecs are recommended: • H.264 • Photo-JPEG Audio Codec Settings The QuickTime Audio Settings button provides access to the currently installed QuickTime audio codecs. For information on how to customize audio codec settings, see Stage 3: Adding a QuickTime Audio Codec. 236 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output FilesAll codecs are compatible with QuickTime, but if you intend to play back the output media file using QuickTime Player, the following delivery codecs are recommended: • AAC • IMA 4:1 See QuickTime Audio Codecs for more information about audio codecs. Chapter and Podcast Markers for QuickTime Output Chapter markers created in Final Cut Pro are passed through (transferred) to other output files that can be recognized by QuickTime Player, iTunes (.m4v files), and Final Cut Pro. For information about adding chapter and podcast markers, see Working with Markers and Poster Frames. About the Compression Settings Dialog You use the Compression Settings dialog to change your video codec settings for the QuickTime output format. To open the Compression Settings dialog, click the Video Settings button in the QuickTime Encoder pane. If a particular setting can’t be changed, it remains dimmed. Some video codecs—such as Photo-JPEG—allow you to make additional settings. If this is the case, the Options button becomes available. Click it to make additional settings. Choose a frame rate from this pop-up menu. Click the Options button for more configuration settings. Select a compression type from this pop-up menu. The Compression Settings dialog contains the following items, depending on which codec you choose in the Compression Type pop-up menu. Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 237Compression Selection The compression selection, located at the top of the window, defines which settings are active in the rest of the window. • Compression Type: Use this pop-up menu to choose the video codec you want to add to your preset. Motion Area The Motion area settings are only active for some codecs. • Frame Rate: With this pop-up menu, you can reduce the frame rate of your original file to reduce the size of the compressed file. Higher frame rates make for smoother motion but require more bandwidth. You use the Frame Rate pop-up menu to choose a different frame rate, but for best results you should change it to a number that the original file can be easily divided by. For example, if your original file had a frame rate of 30 fps, you should use a frame rate of 10 fps or 15 fps. Choosing a frame rate of something like 24 fps would result in uneven motion and even dropped frames, because 30 is not evenly divisible by 24. Choose from the following settings: 8, 10, 12, 15, 23.98, 24, 25, 29.97, 30, 59.94, 60 fps, or choose Custom to enter a number manually. • Key Frames: If your selected codec allows it, use the Key Frames Every field to enter the number of frames you want between your key frames. Codecs based on the temporal compression method use key frames. These act as a reference frame for the next sequence of frames, so that any data redundancy between the key frame and the ensuing frames can be removed. In between key frames are the less detailed delta frames. You need to insert key frames throughout your media file because content changes. Some video codecs allow you to insert a key frame every certain number of frames, while other video codecs use natural key frames by scanning the whole file to detect where the major similarities and differences occur and inserting the key frames accordingly. If there’s a lot of motion in your media file, you need key frames more often than you do with something more static, such as a talking head sequence. Data Rate Area The Data Rate area is only active for some codecs. • Data Rate: Use this field to set the number of kilobytes per second (KB/sec.) required to deliver your media file. This setting is useful if you have a specific bit rate (such as a DSL connection) or amount of space (on a DVD or CD-ROM). You should choose a data rate that is appropriate for your delivery medium and set it as high as possible within your data limitations. When you set a data rate, you override other codec quality settings because the codec compresses the file as much as it needs to based on its data rate limit. Remember that the data rate is only for the video track of a media file. If your media file also contains audio, you must allow some space for that too. 238 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output FilesCompressor Area The Compressor area changes based on the codec chosen with the Compression Type pop-up menu. • Options button: This button remains dimmed unless the codec you selected from the Compression type pop-up menu offers options. It is recommended that you contact the manufacturers of these codecs directly for more information about the additional options they offer. Preview Area The Preview area is not used. About the Sound Settings Dialog You use the Sound Settings dialog to change your audio compression settings for either the QuickTime or AIFF output format. To open this dialog, click the Audio Settings button in the QuickTime Movie or AIFF Encoder pane. If a particular audio setting cannot be changed, it remains dimmed. Most audio codecs allow you to make additional settings. If this is the case, various buttons and controls become available. Click them to make additional settings. Format pop-up menu Rate field and pop-up menu Show Advanced Settings checkbox The Sound Settings dialog contains the following items, with various choices for each, depending on the audio codec you choose in the Format pop-up menu. • Format: Choose the audio codec you want to add to your setting. • Channels: Choose the type of channel output, such as mono, stereo, or some type of multichannel output, depending on the codec. • Rate: Choose the sample rate you want to use for your media file. The higher the sample rate, the higher the audio quality, but the larger the file. Downloading a larger file takes longer and requires more bandwidth. Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 239• Show Advanced Settings: This checkbox remains dimmed unless the codec you selected from the Format pop-up menu offers options. It is recommended that you contact the manufacturers of these codecs directly for more information about the additional options they offer. QuickTime Audio Sample Sizes and Rates If you have the disk space and bandwidth, it is best to leave your audio uncompressed. Uncompressed audio normally uses 8-bit (phone quality) or 16-bit (CD quality) samples. Compressor supports up to 64 bits per sample floating point and a maximum sample rate of 192 kHz. Choosing an Audio Codec AAC is a good general-purpose audio delivery codec and it is compatible with a wide variety of playback devices. For QuickTime movies playing on slower computers, IMA 4:1 is a better choice because it is less computer intensive, thus allowing the computer to focus on the more challenging video stream. See QuickTime Audio Codecs for more information about audio codecs. QuickTime Transcoding Workflow The following sections outline the transcoding process required to create QuickTime output media files. • Stage 1: Opening the QuickTime Encoder Pane • Stage 2: Adding a QuickTime Video Codec • Stage 3: Adding a QuickTime Audio Codec Stage 1: Opening the QuickTime Encoder Pane There are many QuickTime video and audio codecs that you can choose from in Compressor. You access all codecs via the Compression Settings and Sound Settings dialogs, opened from the QuickTime Encoder pane by clicking the Video Settings and Audio Settings buttons. To confirm or create a QuickTime Movie setting 1 In the Settings tab, do one of the following: • Make sure that the correct setting is selected. • Create a new setting by choosing QuickTime Movie from the “Create a new setting” (+) pop-up menu. 2 Open the Encoder pane in the Inspector window. 240 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output FilesThe default QuickTime Encoder pane appears, containing the Video and Audio Settings buttons, Enable pop-up menus, the Streaming pop-up menu, the Options button (dimmed), and the Summary table. See About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane for more information. Note: Make sure that the Enable pop-up menus next to the Settings buttons are set to Enabled if you want those settings included in the transcoding. Stage 2: Adding a QuickTime Video Codec To add a QuickTime video codec to your setting, you need to open the Compression Settings dialog and choose a video codec from the Compression Type pop-up menu. Note: If you don’t intend to use any video settings, choose Disabled from the pop-up menu. To open the QuickTime Encoder pane and apply a video codec 1 Click the Video Settings button in the QuickTime Encoder pane. Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 241The Compression Settings dialog opens. Choose a video codec from the Compression Type pop-up menu. 2 Choose a video codec from the Compression Type pop-up menu and either accept its defaults or customize the other settings (in the Motion, Data Rate, and Compressor areas). See any of the following for more information about video codecs: • Video Codec Settings • About the Compression Settings Dialog • QuickTime Video Codecs Note: You can see the current contents of your setting by viewing the Summary table. 3 Click OK to save changes and close this dialog. Stage 3: Adding a QuickTime Audio Codec If you want to add an audio codec to your setting, you need to open the Sound Settings dialog and choose your audio codec settings from there. Note: If you don’t intend to use any audio settings, choose Disabled from the pop-up menu. To open the QuickTime Encoder pane and apply an audio codec 1 Click the Audio Settings button in the QuickTime Encoder pane. 242 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output FilesThe Sound Settings dialog opens. Choose an audio codec from the Format pop-up menu. 2 Choose an audio codec from the Format pop-up menu and either accept its defaults or customize the other audio codec settings (Format, Channels, Rate, and Options, if available). See any of the following for more information about audio codecs: • Audio Codec Settings • About the Sound Settings Dialog • QuickTime Audio Codecs Note: You can see full details of the current contents of your setting by viewing the Summary table. 3 Click OK to save your settings and close this dialog. Adding Additional Settings and Presets Although the output format setting is the most important component of the Compressor workflow, you can also add other settings and presets, such as filters, cropping, frame sizing, actions, and destinations. For further instructions on how to add these settings, see the following: • Adding Filters to a Setting • Working with Frame Controls • Adding Geometry Settings • Adding Actions • Creating and Changing Destinations Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 243Understanding Codecs Codec stands for compressor (CO)/decompressor (DEC) pairs. You use different codecs for different playback methods (such as the web or DVD). Once you know the playback method of your target audience, you can pick a suitable codec. To decide which codec is right for your needs, you must choose the necessary level of compression to meet your data rate limits and the level of quality you want. The following sections discuss issues to be aware of when selecting a video or audio codec. QuickTime Video Codecs Each codec offers advantages and disadvantages. Some are more appropriate for storing certain types of media; others introduce more artifacts. Some compress slowly and decompress quickly, while others compress and decompress at the same speed. Some codecs can compress a file to 1/100 of its original size, while others decrease the file size very little. Some codecs are available only on specific operating system platforms, some require a particular processor, and some require a minimum version of QuickTime for playback. When choosing a codec you should consider the following: • Minimum system requirements of your target audience • Source material • Quality of the compressed media file • Size of the compressed media file • Compression/decompression time for the media file • If the media file will be streamed Compressor comes equipped with the standard video codecs that QuickTime offers and the additional codec options that come with QuickTime Pro. Unless you know that people in your target audience have a particular codec installed on their computers, you should use one of the standard QuickTime codecs to ensure universal conformity. Note: See the relevant QuickTime documentation for more information about choosing video codecs and how to get the best out of the video codec settings. Video codecs can be divided into the following two types: • Lossless codecs: Lossless codecs completely preserve the data they compress and are usually used to transfer footage from one editing suite to another. Lossless codecs can require high data rates and high-end computers with specialized hardware. Examples of lossless codecs are the Animation, 8-bit, and 10-bit uncompressed 4:2:2 codecs. 244 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files• Lossy codecs: In comparison to lossless codecs, lossy codecs return only an approximation of the data and are usually used to deliver finalized video to an end user. The level of approximation is determined by the quality of the codec. Typically there is a tradeoff between the output quality of the codec and its achievable level of compression. With some codecs, a compression ratio of at least 5:1 can be reached without visible degradation. An example of a lossy codec is the Photo-JPEG codec. Low-quality lossy compression introduces unnatural visual artifacts that may become noticeable to the human eye. Using a lossy codec, you should compress your media file only once, because compressing a file multiple times adds more artifacts. QuickTime Audio Codecs If you have the disk space and bandwidth, the best thing you can do is leave your audio uncompressed. Uncompressed audio normally uses 8-bit (phone quality) or 16-bit (CD quality) samples. (Compressor supports up to 64 bits per sample floating point and a maximum sample rate of 192 kHz.) If you have disk space and bandwidth limitations, you must compress your audio. However, audio takes up less disk space than video, so it doesn’t need to be compressed as much as video. The two most important components of audio codecs are sample rates and size. The sample rate sets the sound quality, and sample size sets the dynamic range of the sound. QuickTime audio codecs allow you to set both the sample rate and size of your source media file. Sound Sample Rates Digitized sound consists of sound samples captured at different frequency rates. The more sound samples per second, the higher the sound quality. For example, audio CDs use a 44.1 kHz sample rate, DVDs sample at 48 kHz, and telephone networks sample voices at 8 kHz. The sample rate you choose depends on the nature of the sound. Music requires a higher sample rate than voice, because music contains a wider range of frequencies. Spoken voice has a more limited range of frequencies, so you can choose a lower sample rate and still maintain acceptable audio quality. In most cases, you should choose the highest sample rate available. Reducing the sample rate can shrink a media file by as much as 5:1. The audio quality will be affected, but not as much as it would be if you used 8-bit sampling. The following table shows common sample rates and the audio device quality to expect at each rate: Sample rate Audio device quality 48 kHz DAT/DV/DVD 44 kHz CD 22 kHz FM radio 8 kHz Telephone Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output Files 245Sound Sample Size The sound sample size determines the dynamic range of the sound. 8-bit sound provides for 256 possible values, whereas 16-bit sound allows for more than 65,000 possible values. Choose 16-bit sound for music that has both soft and loud sections, such as orchestral music. For spoken voice or music that has a more or less constant volume level, choosing 8-bit sound can still yield good results. If you need to shrink your media file, you can reduce the sample size from 16 bits to 8 bits. This cuts the file size in half but also degrades the audio quality. 246 Chapter 21 Creating QuickTime Movie Output FilesCompressor comes with a variety of filters (such as color correction and noise removal filters) that you can use to adjust the details of your transcoding projects. This chapter covers the following: • Working with Filters (p. 247) • About the Filters Pane (p. 249) • Video Filters Tab (p. 250) • Audio Filters Tab (p. 257) • Color Tab (p. 259) • Adding Filters to a Setting (p. 260) Working with Filters You can treat your source media file with a variety of filters before you transcode it to help improve the output quality of your video and audio. The best way to assign these filter settings is to look at, and listen to, your source media file and choose the most suitable one based on its content. 247 Adding Filters to a Setting 22Previewing Filters You can preview a clip containing your current filter settings by clicking the target in the Batch window to open it in the Preview window. The Preview screen is split into original and transcoded versions of your media file so that you can see or hear the effects of your filter settings before processing the batch (as long as the checkbox for that particular filter is selected). Adjustments you make can be viewed in the Preview window. This can be helpful when you are applying multiple filters since it can be difficult to anticipate how the filters will interact with each other. Important: The order of the filters in the filter list defines the order in which they are applied to the video or audio. Try changing the order of the filters if you are seeing unexpected results in the Preview window. Once you are reasonably happy with your settings, it’s a good idea to scan through the whole movie to ensure that your changes are not too extreme for some scenes. Note: Depending on your system, the source media file type, and the number of filters applied, the Preview window showing the filter settings may update at a lower frame rate than the source frame rate. See Using the Preview Window for more information. 248 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingColor Spaces Compressor supports the following color spaces: YUV (R408), 2VUY, RGBA, ARGB, and YUV (v210). Some filters require a color space conversion and some filters can handle various color spaces. For each media file, Compressor chooses the most suitable color space to provide the best output and performance results based on the color space of three attributes: the source media format, the output file format, and chosen filters. Optionally, you can use the Output Color Space pop-up menu (in the Color tab) to manually adjust the color space for the output media file. For more information about how you can adjust color spaces, see Color Tab. About the Filters Pane The Filters pane contains three tabs: one for video filters, one for audio filters, and one for color space adjustment of output media files. The Filters pane contains all the filters available in Compressor. Filter controls Choose video, audio, or color filters Filters list Use the following features in the Filters pane of the Inspector to select and adjust filters that you want to assign to your settings. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 249Note: Once you make any adjustment to a filter, its checkbox is automatically selected. If you decide that you no longer want to use that filter, be sure to deselect that particular filter’s checkbox before transcoding. • Filters list: Select the checkbox next to the filters you want to add to your presets. Filter settings you select appear in the Summary table in the Summary pane. You can reorder filters by dragging them up or down in the Filters list. Because these filters are processed one by one during transcoding—starting with the first entry in the list—it is important that your filters are organized correctly. For example, it is sensible to place your text overlay filter last, so that the text color you selected doesn’t get modified by some other filter. • Filter controls: The controls available depend on the filter selected in the Filters list. The slider allows you to make large numerical changes to your setting, while the arrow control lets you make single incremental number changes. The setting number appears in the field located between the slider and arrow control. Video Filters Tab Compressor includes the following video filters. BlackWhite Restore Restores nearly black colors to pure black and nearly white colors to pure white without affecting colors in the rest of the image. Use this filter to better compress the solid black and white areas (the luminance) in the image, such as backgrounds. The two sliders allow you to separately set values between 0 and 100 for black and white. See Color Spaces for information on how color spaces relate to this filter. • Black: Sets values between 0 and 100 for black. • White: Sets values between 0 and 100 for white. 250 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingBrightness and Contrast Alters the overall color and luminance values of your output media file to a brighter or darker level. Some QuickTime codecs darken your video file, so you can use this filter to compensate for that. Choose any number between –100 and 100, but avoid the extreme settings as they give a very washed-out quality. • Brightness: Adjusts brightness to any number between –100 and 100. • Contrast: Adjusts contrast to any number between –100 and 100. Color Correct Highlights, Midtones, or Shadows Depending on which of these you choose, this corrects white balance inaccuracies and creates color effects on the bright, midtone, or dark areas of your clip. Adjust red, green, and blue values independently between –100 and 100. • Red: Adjusts red value between –100 and 100. • Green: Adjusts green value between –100 and 100. • Blue: Adjusts blue value between –100 and 100. Deinterlacing Removes the effects of interlacing. For deinterlacing, the Frame Controls feature is recommended over this Deinterlacing filter (a legacy filter) as it will always provide much higher quality. See Working with Frame Controls for more information. For general information about deinterlacing, see About Deinterlacing. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 251The following (legacy) deinterlacing methods are available in the Algorithm pop-up menu. • Algorithm: Choose from one of four deinterlacing methods. • Blur: Blends the odd and even fields together. This setting gives more importance to temporal data and preserves motion better, but because individual frames consist of a composite of both frames, they don’t look good when you pause playback. • Even: Keeps the even fields and ignores the odd fields, avoiding motion blur. • Odd: Keeps the odd fields and ignores the even fields, avoiding motion blur. • Sharp: Looks at both fields to make all edges sharper. This setting gives more importance to spatial data. Fade In/Out Adds a dissolve from and to a matte color at the beginning and end of the clip. • Fade In Duration: Sets the duration of the fade. • Fade Out Duration: Sets the duration of the fade. • Fade In Opacity: Sets the opacity of the clip’s video at the first frame. A value of 0.0 sets the clip video to be completely covered by the matte color. A value of 0.5 sets the clip to be 50 percent covered by the matte color. • Fade Out Opacity: Sets the opacity of the clip’s video at the last frame. A value of 0.0 sets the clip video to be completely covered by the matte color. A value of 0.5 sets the clip to be 50 percent covered by the matte color. • Fade Color: Sets the matte color. When clicked, the color picker appears where you can choose the color to fade to and from. (The Fade In and Fade Out colors must be the same.) 252 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingGamma Correction Controls the overall brightness of an image as displayed on a monitor by changing the gamma amount of the media file. This filter can be used to remove detail from an underexposed clip or reduce an overexposed clip’s saturation to an acceptable level without washing out the image too much. Computers using different operating systems have different monitor settings. For cross-platform viewing, correcting the gamma will improve the image for all platforms. • Gamma: Sets a gamma setting between 0.1 and 4.0. Letterbox Scales and positions the image in the frame within horizontal letterbox bars. • Type: This pop-up menu allows you to choose the type of letterboxing to use. Scale vertically compresses the video to fit within the letterbox bars. Matte crops off the video where the letterbox bars are placed. • Position: This pop-up menu allows you to choose the position of the video. Center places letterbox bars above and below the video, keeping the video centered. Bottom positions the video at the bottom of the screen with a single letterbox bar above it. Top positions the video at the top of the screen with a single letterbox bar below it. • Output: This pop-up menu allows you to choose the specific aspect ratio to use for the letterbox. Each setting is followed by a value that shows the ratio of the width to the height for that setting. For example, the Academy setting shows its aspect ratio as 1.85:1, indicating that the image’s width is 1.85 times the size of its height. The Manual setting enables the Manual slider, which you can use to manually set the letterbox aspect ratio. • Manual slider: Used when Manual is selected in the Output pop-up menu. Allows you to manually set the letterbox aspect ratio. The Manual slider has no effect when Manual is not selected in the Output pop-up menu. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 253• Background color well: Sets the letterbox color. Click this box to choose a background color from the color picker. Noise Removal Reduces random flecks of noise from the image. Some codecs introduce noise into the video file, which can be softened with the Noise Removal filter. You can improve image quality and spatially compress your material more efficiently by reducing its fine detail. The noise reduction filter allows you to blur areas of low contrast while leaving high-contrast edges sharp. This is known as adaptive noise reduction. The results are imperceptible to the human eye but improve the final compression of the source media. It is especially important to use this filter with live video. • Apply To: This pop-up menu allows you to choose which channels you want to filter the noise from. The default is All Channels, which filters out noise from all channels including the alpha channel. The other option is Chroma Channels, which filters out noise only from the two chroma channels—U and V—in the AYUV color space (or R408 in Final Cut Pro terminology). • Iterations: This pop-up menu smooths out image noise. Choose how many times (between 1 and 4) you want the selected algorithm applied to the source media file. The modified image is used each time as a starting point for the algorithm. The more iterations used, the fuzzier the image becomes. • Algorithm: Select one of the following algorithms from the Algorithm pop-up menu: Average (each pixel’s color is modified by taking an average color of pixels around it, including its own color value); Replace (each pixel’s color is modified by taking an average of pixels around it, while ignoring its own color value); and Merge (each pixel’s color is modified by taking a weighted average of surrounding pixels and itself; the pixel’s own color value is given greater weight). 254 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingSharpen Edge Enhances the image contrast around object edges. Some codecs blur the video image, so this filter can counteract the softening effect of noise removal or blurred source material and increase the perception of sharpness in the image. When used to an extreme, the output media file can look grainy. Choose any number between 0 and 100. • Amount: Sets a sharpen setting between 0.0 and 100.0. Text Overlay Superimposes text onto the image. This is a useful tool for stamping other relevant text information onto your output media file. Use the following controls to position text, select color and font, and set its opacity. • Position: Positions text in the image clip. Choose from 1 of 13 positions such as Center, Lower Left, Lower Left - Title Safe, and so on. • Alpha: This slider sets the text opacity. Choose between 0 and 1. A value of 0 makes the text completely transparent, while a value of 1 makes it completely opaque. • Overlay Text: Type your text here. • Text Color: Click this box to choose a text color from the color picker. • Select Font: Click this button to open a font palette for selecting font, style, and size. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 255Timecode Generator Superimposes the clip’s timecode text onto the image. You can also add a label to the timecode text. • Position: Positions timecode text in the image clip. Choose from 1 of 13 positions such as Center, Lower Left, Lower Left - Title Safe, and so on. • Alpha: This slider sets the timecode text opacity. Choose between 0 and 1. A value of 0 makes the text completely transparent, while a value of 1 makes it completely opaque. • Label: Type any text that you want to appear to the left of the timecode number here. • Start Timecode at 00:00:00:00 checkbox: Select this checkbox to have the timecode start at 00:00:00:00. When this is not selected, the clip’s timecode is used. • Text Color: Click this box to choose a timecode text color from the color picker. • Select Font: Click this button to open a font palette for selecting font, style, and size. Watermark Superimposes a watermark onto the image. This is a useful tool for stamping a suitable logo onto your output media file. The watermark filter can apply either still images or movies as watermarks on your output media file. Use the following pop-up menus, fields, and sliders to position and size the watermark and set its opacity. • Position pop-up menu: This pop-up menu positions the watermark image in the image clip. Choose from one of 13 positions such as Center, Lower Left, Lower Left - Title Safe, and so on. • Scale By: This slider sets the size of the watermark image size. 256 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting• Alpha: This slider sets the watermark image opacity. Choose between 0 and 1. A value of 0 makes the watermark image completely transparent, while a value of 1 makes it completely opaque. • Repeat checkbox: Used when you choose a clip as the watermark, this checkbox allows you to have the watermark clip loop its playback. If you don’t select this checkbox, the watermark clip plays until its end and then disappears. • Choose button: Click this button to open the file selection dialog and select a stored watermark movie or still image. Audio Filters Tab Compressor includes the following audio filters. Important: The audio filters are not available when audio is set to “Pass-through” in QuickTime settings. See About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane for more information. Dynamic Range Allows you to dynamically control a clip’s audio levels by enhancing the quieter parts and lowering the louder parts. This is also referred to as audio level compression. • Soften Above: Audio above this level is reduced to the level set by the Master Gain. • Noise Threshold: Sets the level of what is considered noise. Audio at this level and above is dynamically boosted to the level set by the Master Gain. Audio below this level is left as is. • Master Gain: Sets the average level of the dynamically compressed audio. Peak Limiter Sets the level of the loudest audio allowed in the clip. • Gain (dB): Sets the level above which louder peaks are reduced. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 257Apple: AUGraphicEQ Allows you to use the Apple AUGraphicEQ to shape a wide variety of frequencies throughout the audible frequency range. You have the choice of a 31-band or a 10-band version. • Options button: Opens the Apple: AUGraphicEQ interface. • Apple: AUGraphicEQ: You can use a pop-up menu in the equalizer’s interface to choose to use the 31-band or 10-band version of the equalizer. You can use the slider to adjust the level for each band to any number between –20 dB and 20 dB, or select a band and enter a number in the dB field. You can drag the pointer to select multiple bands. You can also hold down the Control key and drag across the bands, effectively “drawing” an equalization curve. Click the Flatten EQ button to set all bands to a 0.0 dB value. Fade In/Out Adds a mix from and to a silence (or a gain level you set) at the beginning and end of the clip. 258 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingNote: When using the Fade In/Out and Dynamic Range filters at the same time, be sure to have the Dynamic Range filter ahead of the Fade In/Out filter in the filter list. • Fade In Duration: Sets the duration of the mix from the gain value to the clip’s normal audio level at the start of the clip. • Fade Out Duration: Sets the duration of the mix from the clip’s normal audio level to the gain value at the end of the clip. • Fade In Gain: Sets the level that the mix starts with. A value of –100.0 is silence while 0.0 leaves the audio as it is. • Fade Out Gain: Sets the level that the mix ends with. A value of –100.0 is silence while 0.0 leaves the audio as it is. Color Tab You can use the Output Color Space pop-up menu to manually adjust the color space for the output media file. The Color tab includes the following controls. • Output Color Space pop-up menu: Choose from the following options to affect the color space in the output media file. • Default for Encoder: Uses the standard color space for the target format. • Preserve source: Maintains the color space of the source media file. • SD (601): Uses the standard color space for SD media files. • HD (709): Uses the standard color space for HD media files. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 259Adding Filters to a Setting You use the Filters pane in the Inspector window to add filters to your settings. To add filters to a setting 1 Open the Settings tab. 2 Select the setting in the Settings tab that you want to modify. (Or select a setting already applied to a source media file in the Batch window. This way, you can open the Preview window and see the effects of your filter adjustments.) 3 Click the Filters pane in the Inspector. 4 Make adjustments to any filters that you want added to the setting. Note: A checkmark appears automatically as soon as you make adjustments to any filter. Any changes you make to a filter’s settings apply to the currently selected filter. The filter is automatically selected if you make any adjustments to it. 5 Drag the filters up or down within the Filters list to set the order in which you want them applied to the source media file during transcoding. Drag filters up or down to set the order in which you want them to be applied to the source media file. 260 Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a SettingBecause these filters are processed one by one during transcoding—starting with the first item in the list—it is important that your filters be organized in the order you want them. For example, it is sensible to place your text overlay filter last, so that the text color you selected doesn’t get modified by some other filter. If you move a filter, be sure to select the checkbox so that Compressor knows to apply the filter to that setting. As an additional reminder, once you select the moved filter and then try to select another setting, the Save dialog appears, requiring you to save or revert the changes to that setting. By default, all selected filters are displayed first in the list. Note: You can see setting details in the Summary pane of the Inspector window. See About the Filters Pane for more details. Chapter 22 Adding Filters to a Setting 261Frame controls use advanced image analysis for retiming, resizing, and other sophisticated video effects. Through frame controls, Compressor offers high-quality transcoding from many different source formats to many different target formats using advanced image analysis. This chapter covers the following: • About the Frame Controls Pane (p. 263) • Adding Frame Controls to a Setting (p. 268) • About Deinterlacing (p. 269) • About Reverse Telecine (p. 270) • Using the Retiming Controls (p. 273) About the Frame Controls Pane Using frame controls, you can do any of the following at levels of quality that were previously available only through expensive hardware solutions: • Convert video files between international television standards such as PAL to NTSC, or NTSC to PAL. • Downconvert high definition (HD) video sources to standard definition (SD), or upconvert SD to HD. • Convert a progressive stream to an interlaced one, or interlaced to progressive. • Make high-quality frame rate adjustments, including high-quality slow-motion effects. • Automatically remove telecine pull-down (reverse telecine). The Advanced Format Conversions settings group in the Settings tab has particular relevance to working with frame controls. 263 Working with Frame Controls 23Important: Frame Controls settings cannot be previewed in the Preview window. To preview Frame Controls settings, do a test transcode of a small section of your source media file. (See Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window for more information.) Use the following features in the Frame Controls pane of the Inspector to select and adjust frame controls attributes that you want to assign to your settings. Resizing controls Retiming controls Frame Controls pop-up menu Automatic button Frame Controls Area Use this pop-up menu to enable or disable the Frame Controls feature. Use the corresponding Automatic button to enable or disable automatic mode. Frame Controls Automatic button • Frame Controls pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to enable or disable the Frame Controls pane. • Off: The default setting for most Apple presets. Choose Off if your Compressor project does not involve changes to the frame size, frame rate, or field dominance. • On: Allows you to manually adjust all the attributes in the Frame Controls pane. • Automatic button: When this button is selected, Compressor analyzes the transcoding job (the source media file and the applied setting), and then automatically determines the appropriate Frame Controls attributes. For more information, see About the Automatic Settings. In Automatic mode, Frame Controls technology is engaged in the following two types of transcodes only: • Transcoding from high definition (HD) sources to standard definition (SD) MPEG-2 output files 264 Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls• Transcoding from interlaced sources to H.264 for Apple Devices (progressive) output files Resizing Controls Area Use the controls in this area to choose the algorithm with which frames are resized. • Resize Filter: Use this pop-up menu to choose from the following resizing options. This decision is a trade-off between faster processing time and higher output quality in projects that involve a change in resolution. • Fast (Nearest pixel): This option provides the fastest processing time. • Better (Linear filter): This option provides a medium trade-off between processing time and output quality. • Best (Statistical prediction): This option provides highest output quality, but takes longer. • Output Fields: Use this pop-up menu to choose the output scanning method (either the field dominance or a conversion to progressive scanning). • Same as source: No change to the scanning method. • Progressive: Scanning method where each frame is complete (not divided into fields). Use this setting in place of the Compressor Deinterlacing filter (a legacy filter in the Filters pane) as it will always provide much higher quality. • Top first: Interlaced field dominance (field order), also known as field two, the upper field, or the odd field. • Bottom first: Interlaced field dominance (field order), also known asfield one, the lower field, or the even field. • Deinterlace: Use this pop-up menu to choose from different techniques for deinterlacing. This decision is a trade-off between faster processing and higher-quality deinterlacing of motion areas within the frame. In all cases, each higher-quality deinterlacing option yields the same or better results than the next lower quality option. However, if downward resizing is also applied to the frame, improvements in quality may not be noticeable. Under these circumstances, Fast or Better will likely provide sufficiently high quality, depending on the amount of downward resizing. Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 265For general information about deinterlacing, see About Deinterlacing. Important: Using all Best settings may result in unexpectedly long processing times. If you are reducing the frame size in addition to deinterlacing the frame, Fast or Better will likely provide sufficiently high quality, depending on the amount of downward resizing. Note: While the Deinterlace pop-up menu is always active, Compressor only deinterlaces jobs that need it. (For example, if the source is interlaced and the Output Fields pop-up menu is set to Progressive, Compressor will deinterlace. If the source media file is progressive, Compressor will not deinterlace.) • Fast (Line averaging): This option averages adjacent lines in a frame. • Better (Motion adaptive): This option offers good-quality deinterlacing for areas of the image that are in motion. • Best (Motion compensated): This option offers higher-quality deinterlacing for areas of the image that are in motion. • Reverse Telecine: This option removes the extra fields added during the telecine process to convert the film’s 24 fps to NTSC’s 29.97 fps. Selecting this item disables all other items in the Frame Controls pane. See About Reverse Telecine for more information on 3:2 pull-down and using the Reverse Telecine feature. • Adaptive Details: Select this checkbox to use advanced image analysis to distinguish between noise and edge areas. • Anti-alias: Use this slider to set a softness level from 0 to 100. This parameter improves the quality of conversions when you’re scaling media up. For example, when transcoding standard definition video to high definition, Anti-alias smooths out jagged edges that might appear in the image. 266 Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls• Details Level: Use this slider to set a level (from 0 to 100) to preserve sharp edges. This is a sharpening control that lets you add detail back to an image being enlarged. Unlike other sharpening operations, the Details Level setting is able to distinguish between noise and feature details, and generally doesn’t increase unwanted grain. Increasing this parameter may introduce jagged edges, however, which can be eliminated by increasing the Anti-alias level. Note: Adaptive Details, “Anti-alias,” and Details Level pertain only to frame resizing (scaling), not deinterlacing. Retiming Controls Area Use the controls in this area to choose the algorithm with which frame rates are adjusted. Note: When you use the retiming controls to change the video speed, Compressor will also adjust the audio portion of the output media file so that it stays in sync with the video. The retiming controls will not affect the audio pitch. See Using the Retiming Controls for more information about using these options. • Rate Conversion: Use this pop-up menu to choose from the following techniques for retiming frames (changing the frame rate). This decision is a trade-off between faster processing time and higher output quality. In many cases, the Better setting will provide sufficiently high-quality conversion at a substantial savings in processing time over the Best setting. Important: Using all Best settings may result in unexpectedly long processing times. The Better setting for rate conversion will provide sufficiently high-quality conversion at a substantial savings in processing time over the Best setting. • Fast (Nearest frame): No frame blending is applied; Compressor simply uses a copy of the nearest available frame to fill the new in-between frames. • Good (Frame blending): Averages neighboring frames together to create new in-between frames. • Better (Motion compensated): Uses optical flow to interpolate frames, with good-quality results. • Best (High quality motion compensated): Uses optical flow to interpolate frames, with higher-quality results; this option is particularly useful for transcodes that involve increases in frame rates (for example, 23.98 fps to 59.94 fps). Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 267• Set Duration to: Use this to choose one of three methods to convert the clip’s duration to a new duration. Selection pop-up menu • Percent of source: Use this to enter a percentage value to modify the clip’s speed or choose a specific situation from the pop-up menu. For more information about the options in this radio button, see Entering a Percentage. • Total duration: Use this to choose a duration for the clip. For more information about the options in this radio button, see Entering a Duration. • So source frames play at [frame rate] fps: Use this when the source media file’s frame rate does not match the Encoder pane frame rate (shown as the frame rate for this item). For more information about the options in this radio button, see Forcing Frames to Play at the Encoder Pane’s Frame Rate Setting. Adding Frame Controls to a Setting You use the Frame Controls pane in the Inspector window to add frame resizing and retiming adjustments to your settings. To add automatic Frame Controls adjustments to a setting 1 Open the Settings tab. 2 Select the setting in the Settings tab that you want to modify. (Or select a setting already applied to a source media file in the Batch window.) 3 Click the Frame Controls tab in the Inspector window. 4 Click the Automatic button next to the Frame Controls pop-up menu. Compressor analyzes the transcoding job (the source media file and the applied setting) and then automatically determines the appropriate Frame Controls attributes. In Automatic mode, Frame Controls technology is engaged in the following two types of transcodes only: • Transcoding from high definition (HD) sources to standard definition (SD) MPEG-2 output files • Transcoding from interlaced sources to H.264 for Apple Devices (progressive) output files To add custom Frame Controls adjustments to a setting 1 Open the Settings tab. 268 Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls2 Select the setting in the Settings tab that you want to modify. (Or select a setting already applied to a source media file in the Batch window.) 3 Click the Frame Controls tab in the Inspector window. 4 Choose On from the Frame Controls pop-up menu. Choosing On allows you to manually adjust all the attributes in the Frame Controls pane. Note: If the Automatic button is active, you will first need to click it to turn it off. 5 Make changes to any of the controls in the Frame Controls pane. (See About the Frame Controls Pane for details on each of the controls.) 6 Click Save to save the changes. About Deinterlacing You can use the Frame Controls feature in Compressor to deinterlace your video media. NTSC and PAL video is interlaced. This means that each frame of video consists of two fields (1/60 of a second apart), one with the odd broadcast lines and one with the even lines of the image. The differences between these two fields create the impression of motion. Our eyes combine these two images into one whole frame of smooth, realistic motion at 30 fps in standard definition television, and because of the high field-refresh speeds (1/60 of a second), the interlacing is invisible. Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 269Because interlacing creates two fields for each frame, areas with fast movement within the field become separated into alternating jagged lines. You can view your source media one frame at a time and check for horizontal stripes along the leading and trailing edges of moving objects. If you find these, you need to deinterlace your source media to convert it to a frame-based format. Interlacing creates a “comb” effect that should be removed. If your source media file needs to be converted to a frame-based format, you must deinterlace it to remove the effects of interlacing. Interlacing on computer displays can cause high-motion parts of your video to look fuzzy, so this is especially important if you’re outputting a QuickTime movie for desktop or web playback. You can remove the upper (odd) or lower (even) field from an interlaced video file, although smooth motion may be compromised within the clip. This filter can also be used to eliminate flickering caused by interlacing in still frames that have thin vertical lines, such as title pages with small text. The remaining fields are interpolated to create a whole image, resulting in an overall softening of the image. About Reverse Telecine The Deinterlace pop-up menu includes a setting for reversing the telecine. 270 Chapter 23 Working with Frame ControlsAbout Reverse Telecine The most common approach to distributing film’s 24 fps among NTSC video’s 29.97 fps is to perform a 3:2 pull-down (also known as a 2:3:2:3 pull-down). If you alternate recording two fields of one film frame and then three fields of the next, the 24 frames in 1 second of film end up filling the 30 frames in 1 second of video. A A B B B C C D D D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A B C D A A B B B C C D D D Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 3:2 Pull-Down One second Before (23.98 fps) After (29.97 fps) As shown above, the 3:2 pattern (actually a 2:3:2:3 pattern since frame A is recorded to two fields followed by frame B recorded to three fields) repeats after four film frames. Virtually all high-end commercials, movies, and non-live television shows use this process prior to being broadcast. For editing and effects purposes, it is often desirable to remove the extra fields and restore the video to its original 23.98 fps rate. An additional benefit of restoring the original 23.98 fps rate is that it is easier to convert this to the PAL 25 fps rate. Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 271The lower frame rate also has the advantage of requiring fewer frames per second of video, leading to smaller file sizes. The reverse telecine feature makes it easy to do this. A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D A A B B C C D D Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 Field 1 Field 2 D Field 2 B Field 1 Before (29.97 fps) After (23.98 fps) One second 3:2 Pull-Down Removal About the Cadence When film is telecined to NTSC video, it has a constant cadence. This means that the 3:2 pattern is consistent and uninterrupted. It is relatively easy to remove the telecine from a constant cadence clip since you only have to determine the pattern once. If you take these telecined clips and edit them as NTSC video, the result will be a final video file that has a broken cadence with an inconsistent 3:2 pattern. It is much more difficult to remove the telecine from this clip since you have to constantly verify the cadence to make sure you don’t inadvertently choose incorrect fields when creating the 23.98 fps video. The Reverse Telecine feature included with Compressor automatically detects broken cadences and adjusts its processing as needed. Other Reverse Telecine Issues There are a few other issues to be aware of when you use the Reverse Telecine feature. All Other Frame Controls Settings Are Disabled Since the goal of the Reverse Telecine feature is progressive 23.98 fps video, all the other options of the Frame Controls pane are disabled when Reverse Telecine is selected. 272 Chapter 23 Working with Frame ControlsAbout Reverse Telecine and Segmented Encoding Because of the unpredictable nature of the processing when reversing the telecine, segmented encoding does not work as efficiently as it does when reverse telecine is not being used. About Pausing the Transcode Process If you pause the transcode process, the transcode must start from the beginning when you restart it. Creating PAL Video During the Reverse Telecine Process It is a common practice to convert 23.98 fps or 24 fps video to PAL’s 25 fps rate by speeding up the playback by 4 percent. If you are starting with NTSC 29.97 fps video from a telecine, you can convert it to PAL video using two jobs. • First job: Apply a setting to the job that performs the reverse telecine process and results in an NTSC frame size at 23.98 fps. Note: You could apply a setting that also converts the video to PAL; however, the format conversion will not be done using Frame Controls and may not be of suitable quality. • Second job: Create the second job by having the first job selected and choosing Job > New Job With Target Output. This creates a job that is chained to the output of the first job. You can now apply a setting that sets the output format to PAL and use the Frame Controls feature to ensure a high-quality output file. See About Adding and Copying Jobs for more information about chaining jobs. Using the Retiming Controls The retiming controls have two common uses. • Converting video from one frame rate to another: This typically involves converting NTSC to PAL frame rates or PAL to NTSC frame rates. This function uses only the setting of the Rate Conversion pop-up menu and is automatically configured when necessary. • Converting video to a new speed: This can be a matter of playing the existing frames at a different rate or, in the case of slow-motion effects, it can require generating intermediate frames. In all cases, if the source media file contains audio, the audio also has its speed changed, with the audio pitch corrected so that it sounds the same as the original, just at a different speed. This ensures that you will maintain sync between the video and audio. If you preview a setting that uses retiming controls, the video will play at its new frame rate or speed, but it will not have been processed by Frame Controls and will be of a lower quality than the actual transcoded output file will be. The audio is pitch corrected when the setting is previewed. Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 273Important: If you are using retiming controls on a setting using the QuickTime Movie output format and choose “Pass-through” for the audio setting, the audio does not have its speed changed and will not maintain sync with the video. See About the QuickTime Movie Encoder Pane for more information. Converting Video to a New Speed The retiming controls give you three options for determining the playback speed. You can determine the playback speed of the output media file by: • Entering a percentage • Entering a duration • Forcing the frames to play at the Encoder pane’s Frame Rate setting Entering a Percentage You have two options when using the percentage method to determine the clip’s duration: • Entering a percentage value • Choosing a preset value The presets that you choose from are intended to be used for specific situations. • 24 @ 25: Use this setting when you have 24 fps video that you want to convert to 25 fps for PAL distribution. • 23.98 @ 24: Use this setting when you have 23.98 fps video and want to convert it to 24 fps. • 23.98 @ 25: Use this setting when you have 23.98 fps video and want to convert it to 25 fps for PAL distribution. • 30 @ 29.97: Use this setting when you have 30 fps video and want to convert it to 29.97 fps. • 29.97 @ 30: Use this setting when you have 29.97 fps video and want to convert it to 30 fps. 274 Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls• 24 @ 23.98: Use this setting when you have 24 fps video and want to convert it to 23.98 fps for NTSC DVD distribution. With all these options, no intermediate video frames are required—the existing frames are just set to play back faster or slower. Entering a Duration The duration field shows the clip’s current duration. As you change the duration, the percentage value changes to reflect that change. This option is most useful when you have a source media file whose duration is a bit longer or shorter than it needs to be, and you’d rather change its playback speed than add or remove video frames. With this method, intermediate video frames are created as needed. Forcing Frames to Play at the Encoder Pane’s Frame Rate Setting This option is used when your source media file uses a frame rate different from the Encoder pane’s Frame Rate setting. Chapter 23 Working with Frame Controls 275You can make advanced adjustments to your settings with the Geometry pane of the Inspector window. This chapter covers the following: • Working with Cropping, Scaling, and Padding (p. 277) • About the Geometry Pane (p. 279) • Making Geometry Adjustments to a Setting (p. 283) Working with Cropping, Scaling, and Padding The Geometry pane provides three different methods you can use to affect the output image. Cropping When you crop an image, you are removing video content. Often that content is unnecessary image area (such as the overscan area, which is necessary for television, but not for computers) to make what’s left seem bigger in the same frame size. Cropping also includes a “Letterbox area of source” setting that detects image edges and automatically enters crop values to match them. This is especially useful if you want to crop out the letterbox area of a source media file. When you adjust the crop settings, one of two things happens to the output video file’s frame size: • The frame size remains the same if you have chosen anything other than the 100% of source, 50% of source, and 25% of source settings in the Frame Size pop-up menu of the “Dimensions (encoded pixels)” section of the Geometry pane. This means that the source video image is scaled larger to fill the output video file’s frame size, which results in larger pixels and overall image degradation. • The frame size reduces by the crop amounts if you have chosen the 100% of source, 50% of source, or 25% of source settings in the Frame Size pop-up menu of the “Dimensions (encoded pixels)” section of the Geometry pane. This can result in nonstandard frame sizes. 277 Adding Geometry Settings 24The cropping settings are in the Source Inset (Cropping) section of the Geometry pane. Scaling Scaling provides a way to alter the output video file’s frame size without removing any of the source image. Most often, scaling involves shrinking your output media image size to save storage space or reduce the bit rate. Compressor offers four basic methods for scaling the image size of an output media file. • Choose a percentage of the source size: Three settings scale the source image based on a percentage (100% of source, 50% of source, and 25% of source). In addition to the source image frame size, crop values will affect the actual frame size of the output video. • Choose a maximum frame size: Six settings scale the source image to maintain the original aspect ratio and to be as large as possible without going over the selected frame size. • Choose a specific frame size: There are several standard frame size settings you can choose from, such as 720x486, 720x576, and so on. When you choose any of these, the output video file’s frame size will match this setting. • Enter a custom value: You can enter a custom frame size. Additionally, you can have the custom frame size constrained to a common aspect ratio such as 4:3 or 16:9. When you enter a custom frame size, the output video file’s frame size will match this setting. You are also able to define the output image’s pixel aspect ratio by choosing from a pop-up menu with the common settings. Note: The scaling settings are only active when using the MPEG-4, QuickTime Movie, and Image Sequence output encoding formats. The scaling settings are in the “Dimensions (encoded pixels)” section of the Geometry pane. Padding Padding provides a method to scale the image to a smaller size while retaining the output image’s frame size by filling the padded areas with black. Unlike cropping, padding does not remove any of the source image—the image is reduced by scaling by the padding amounts. Padding is useful when the source image frame size is smaller than the output image frame size and you want to prevent the source image from being scaled to the output image size. By adding the correct amount of padding, the source image will remain the same size in the output image, with black filling the rest of the image frame. Padding is automatically applied when the source video image is uncompressed NTSC 720 x 486 and the output image is 720 x 480. 278 Chapter 24 Adding Geometry SettingsThere are also several common padding settings you can choose from, such as 16 x 9 and Panavision. These make it easy to have Compressor automatically enter padding values to ensure the source image retains its original aspect ratio. The padding settings are in the Output Image Inset (Padding) section of the Geometry pane. About the Geometry Pane You use the Geometry pane to choose cropping and sizing settings, output media file sizes, and the aspect ratio (the ratio between image frame width and height). Cropping Scaling Padding Source Inset (Cropping) Settings You can use the “Crop to” pop-up menu to apply a center crop or enter cropping settings in the fields described below. • “Crop to” pop-up menu: Choose from the following options for manual cropping or automatic center cropping. The actual numeric crop values are determined once a target setting is applied to a job. Chapter 24 Adding Geometry Settings 279Note: If you want to transcode a normal size standard definition (SD) source media file (720 x 486) using an MPEG-2 NTSC setting, your output media file will be automatically cropped (two pixels from the top and four from the bottom) to achieve the MPEG-2 required dimensions of 720 x 480, unless you already specified cropping attributes. This crop attribute is only temporary and is not saved in the setting. You can see the automatic crop in the usual way, by double-clicking the setting in the job to open the Preview window. See About the MPEG-2 Encoder Pane for more information about the Video Format pop-up menu. • Custom: Choose this option to manually enter values in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom cropping fields, or to adjust these values by dragging the red frame bars in the Preview window. For more information, see Making Geometry Adjustments to a Setting. • 4:3 (1.33:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 4:3. • 16:9 (1.78:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 16:9. • Panavision (2.35:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 2.35:1. • Europe Standard (1.66:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 1.66:1. • UK Standard (1.75:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 1.75:1. • Academy (1.85:1): Applies an automatic center crop with an aspect ratio of 1.85:1. • Letterbox area of source: This option allows Compressor to detect whether the source media file has been letterboxed, and if it has, to enter crop values to remove the letterbox. • Left, Right, Top, and Bottom: The four cropping fields (Left, Top, Right, and Bottom) allow you to crop the frame of your source media file in pixel increments. Most broadcast video files have overscan areas. If the output file will be shown exclusively on a computer screen rather than on a television screen, you can safely remove some edging from your file without affecting the picture area. The numbers give the distance (in pixels) between the edge of the original frame and the resulting cropped frame. All fields default to 0. Note: The regular (action safe) overscan area is the outer 5 percent of the image on all four sides. Cut in an additional 5 percent and you have the more conservative title safe area. So you can safely crop anywhere between 5 and 10 percent of your outer frame area and still preserve the essential material. 280 Chapter 24 Adding Geometry SettingsDimensions (Encoded Pixels) Settings The settings in the Dimensions section are only active when using the MPEG- 4, QuickTime Movie, and Image Sequence output encoding formats. For other formats, the settings are dimmed but show the settings that will be used when the batch is submitted. • Frame Size Width and Height fields: These text fields and associated pop-up menus allow you to customize the frame size and aspect ratio of your output media file. Enter a value in either the Width or the Height field or choose an option from the associated pop-up menu. • Frame Size pop-up menu: The relevant output size dimensions are automatically entered in the Width and Height fields based on the choices you make in the pop-up menus. • 100% of source: Defines an output dimension identical to the dimension of the source media. (This option makes leaves the dimension unchanged.) • 50% of source: Scales the output dimension to exactly 50% of the source media dimension. • 25% of source: Scales the output dimension to exactly 25% of the source media dimension. • Up to 1920x1080: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 1920 x 1080 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • Up to 1280x720: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 1280 x 720 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • Up to 960x540: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 960 x 540 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • Up to 854x480: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 854 x 480 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • Up to 428x240: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 428 x 240 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • Up to 214x120: Scales the output dimensions to not exceed a 214 x 120 frame size while maintaining the original aspect ratio. • 320x240: Defines an output dimension of exactly 320 x 240. • 640x480: Defines an output dimension of exactly 640 x 480. • 720x480: Defines an output dimension of exactly 720 x 480. • 720x486: Defines an output dimension of exactly 720 x 486. • 720x576: Defines an output dimension of exactly 720 x 576. Chapter 24 Adding Geometry Settings 281• 1280x720: Defines an output dimension of exactly 1280 x 720. • 1920x1080: Defines an output dimension of exactly 1920 x 1080. • Custom: This is a manually created setting. Enter whichever dimensions suit your needs in the Width and Height fields. This setting has no constraint on the aspect ratio. • Custom (4:3): This manual setting is constrained to the 4:3 aspect ratio. Enter a value in either the Width or the Height field, and the other value is entered automatically. • Custom (16:9): This manual setting is constrained to the 16:9 aspect ratio. Enter a value in either the Width or the Height field, and the other value is entered automatically. • Custom (1.85:1): This manual setting is constrained to the 1.85:1 aspect ratio. Enter a value in either the Width or the Height field, and the other value is entered automatically. • Custom (2.35:1): This manual setting is constrained to the 2.35:1 aspect ratio. Enter a value in either the Width or the Height field, and the other value is entered automatically. • Pixel Aspect field: You can choose Custom from the Pixel Aspect pop-up menu and enter any value in this field. The pixel aspect ratio refers to the shape of the pixels in a digital image. This is especially important when using some filters. For example, if the graphic you use for the Watermark filter uses a circle and you want to be sure it still looks like a circle when finished (as opposed to an oval), you must choose the pixel aspect setting that matches your output format. • Pixel Aspect pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to set the pixel aspect ratio of the output media file. This forces the pixel aspect ratios to conform to specific formats. Options include the following. • Custom: Choose this option to manually enter values in the Pixel Aspect field. • Default for size: The pixel aspect ratio is set to the commonly assumed value for the setting’s width and height. For example, the default for 720 x 480 or 720 x 486 is NTSC CCIR 601/DV NTSC. • Square: Use this when the output is to be displayed on computers. • NTSC CCIR 601/DV: Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 4:3 using 720 x 480 pixels. • NTSC CCIR 601/DV (16:9): Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 16:9 using 720 x 480 pixels. • PAL CCIR 601: Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 4:3 using 720 x 576 pixels. • PAL CCIR 601 (16:9): Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 16:9 using 720 x 576 pixels. • HD (960x720): Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 16:9 using 1280 x 720 pixels. • HD (1280x1080): Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 16:9 using 1920 x 1080 pixels. • HD (1440x1080): Forces the pixel aspect ratio to 16:9 using 1440 x 1080 pixels. 282 Chapter 24 Adding Geometry SettingsOutput Image Inset (Padding) Settings Use the following settings to apply and adjust padding. • Padding pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose one of the following options. • Custom: Allows you to manually enter values in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom fields. • Preserve source aspect ratio: Pads the image so that the original aspect ratio is maintained. • 4x3 1.33:1: Uses a 4 x 3 aspect ratio. • 16x9 1.78:1: Uses a 16 x 9 aspect ratio. • 4x3 1.33:1: Uses a 4 x 3 aspect ratio. • Panavision 2.35:1: Uses a 2.35:1 aspect ratio. • Europe Standard 1.66:1: Uses a 1.66:1 aspect ratio. • UK Standard 1.75:1: Uses a 1.75:1 aspect ratio. • Academy 1.85:1: Uses a 1.85:1 aspect ratio. • Left, Right, Top, and Bottom fields: Use these fields to add pixels of image “padding” around the sides of a frame. This is the opposite of cropping. In cases where the frame size of the output media file differs from that of the source media file, you may wish to pad an image rather than scale it. Making Geometry Adjustments to a Setting You use the Geometry pane in the Inspector window to crop, scale, and change the frame aspect ratio in a setting. To add cropping, frame sizing, and aspect ratio settings to your setting 1 Open the Settings tab. Chapter 24 Adding Geometry Settings 2832 Select the setting in the Settings tab that you want to modify. (Or select a setting already applied to a source media file in the Batch window.) 3 Click the Geometry tab in the Inspector. 4 Enter your source inset (cropping) settings, choose output size dimensions from the Frame Size pop-up menu, and choose padding settings from the output image inset section. You can see all changes you make to your setting by viewing the Summary table in the Summary pane. 284 Chapter 24 Adding Geometry SettingsNote: There are two ways to adjust frame size. You can either enter numbers in the cropping fields or drag the red frame bars in the Preview window. Using the latter method, the resulting numbers dynamically appear in the cropping fields so that you can see a numerical representation of your frame cropping. Hold down the Shift key to constrain the crop to either the source aspect ratio, the source height, or the source width. Drag the red frame bars (by the handles) to adjust the output file frame size. If you select a batch’s target, any resizing in the Preview window is reflected in the Geometry pane. You can also directly enter numbers into these cropping fields. See About the Geometry Pane or Previewing a Clip for more details. Chapter 24 Adding Geometry Settings 285You can create automatic post-transcoding actions and apply them to jobs and settings (and thereby also individual targets). Post-transcoding actions simplify and accelerate your day-to-day workflow and make it easy to share your work with others. You can quickly create and deliver output media files for the iPhone, iPad, iPod, Apple TV, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, the web, and YouTube without having to open any additional applications. You can also automatically send emails giving notice of when individual output media files are completed. And you can trigger Automator workflows for individual jobs and trigger AppleScript documents for individual targets. This chapter covers the following: • Working with Post-Transcoding Actions (p. 287) • Adding Setting Actions (p. 287) • Adding Job Actions (p. 289) Working with Post-Transcoding Actions Compressor supports both job actions and setting actions. Job actions apply to entire jobs. Job actions are often associated with batch templates. (For more information about batch templates, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method.) Setting actions apply to individual settings (and thereby, also individual targets). You can save settings that have setting actions applied as custom settings for future use. Adding Setting Actions Compressor can send an email to one recipient per applied preset setting, giving notice of when a transcode is complete. You can also choose a default destination for this setting. 287 Adding Actions 25About the Actions Pane You can use the Actions pane in the Inspector to set options related to transcode completion notification emails and default destinations. The Actions pane contains the following items. • Email Notification to: If you want to be notified when a particular transcoding job has been completed, select this checkbox and enter the appropriate email address in the text field. (You can enter only one email address.) This is useful if you are transcoding an especially large source media file that may take many hours to complete. Rather than continuously checking to see if the transcoding is finished, you just wait until you receive an email. Note: To enable this email feature, you must first enter an email address and outgoing mail server in Compressor preferences. (Choose Compressor > Preferences.) • Default Destination pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to assign a destination to the particular setting. (This is in contrast to setting a default destination for all settings in Compressor preferences.) For information about setting a default destination for all settings in Compressor preferences, see Setting Compressor Preferences. How to Add Setting Actions You use the Actions pane in the Inspector window to set post-transcoding options for your output media file, such as sending an email. To add an email notification to your setting 1 Select a custom setting in the Settings tab, or open a batch with a job that has a setting applied to it. Apple settings cannot be modified. You can copy an Apple setting and modify the copy, however. 2 Click the Actions tab in the Inspector. 288 Chapter 25 Adding Actions3 Select the “Email Notification to” checkbox and enter the relevant email address in the accompanying field. Note: To enable this email feature, you must first enter an email address and outgoing mail server in Compressor preferences. (Choose Compressor > Preferences. You may need to close and reopen Compressor for any email preference changes to function.) 4 Optionally, you can click Save or Save As to save this email configuration to this setting. To choose a default destination for this setting 1 Select a custom setting in the Settings tab, or open a batch with a job that has a setting applied to it. Apple settings cannot be modified. You can copy an Apple setting and modify the copy, however. 2 Click the Actions tab in the Inspector. 3 Choose a destination from the Default Destination pop-up menu. The pop-up menu lists the Apple destinations and any custom destinations you have created. 4 Optionally, you can click Save or Save As to save this default destination to this setting. See About the Actions Pane for more details. Adding Job Actions You can use job actions to automate your transcoding workflow. For example, you can automatically upload output media files to web streaming sites such as YouTube, burn DVDs and Blu-ray discs, trigger Automator workflows, transfer output media files to iTunes, open output media files in other applications, and create web reference movies. Job actions are integral to the functioning of batch templates. For more information about batch templates, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method. About the Job Actions Tab You apply and adjust job actions with the Job Action tab in the Inspector window. To use the Job Action tab, you must first select a job in the Batch window. To open the Job Action tab 1 Add a source media file to the Batch window so that there is at least one job present in the Batch window. 2 Select a job in the Batch window. The Inspector window opens with the A/V Attributes tab selected. If the Inspector window is not open, click the Inspector button or choose Window > Show Inspector to open it. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 2893 Click the Job Action tab to open it. The Job Action tab consists of a single “When job completes” pop-up menu. The list below details the purpose of each option in this pop-up menu. For a detailed description of the user interface for each option, see About Job Actions. • “When job completes” pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to select and apply a post-transcoding action for a job selected in the Batch window. • Do Nothing: Choose this option to disable the Job Action tab. • Add to iTunes Library: Compressor will add the output media file to an iTunes playlist. • Create DVD: Compressor will create a standard definition DVD using MPEG-2 (.m2v) video and Dolby Digital Professional (.ac3) audio and automatically burn it to a disc. • Create Blu-ray Disc: Compressor will create and automatically burn a Blu-ray disc or an AVCHD disc using video and audio that is compatible with Blu-ray. • Create Web Reference Movie: Compressor will create a reference movie that enables a web browser and a server to automatically select the right movie for any device or connection speed, without requiring the viewer to make a choice. • Open with Application: Compressor will open the output media file with a specific application. • Prepare for HTTP Live streaming: Compressor will create a set of video files suitable for use on an HTTP live streaming server. • Run Automator Workflow: This option opens a dialog for you to locate and select an Automator script that Compressor will execute automatically on completion of the transcoding job. • Publish to YouTube: Compressor will create a video file suitable for viewing on YouTube and upload it to a YouTube account. 290 Chapter 25 Adding Actions• Publish to Facebook: Compressor will create a video file suitable for viewing on Facebook and upload it to a Facebook account. • Publish to Vimeo: Compressor will create a video file suitable for viewing on Vimeo and upload it to a Vimeo account. • Publish to CNN iReport: Compressor will create a video file suitable for viewing on CNN iReport and upload it to a CNN iReport account. • Send Email: Compressor will send an email using the information you enter. About Job Actions This section describes the user interface for each job action. Add to iTunes Library Use this form to automatically add output media files to iTunes. • Playlist pop-up menu: Use the Playlist pop-up menu to add the output media file to a particular playlist in your iTunes library. Note: The first time you use this feature, this pop-up menu will be empty. To populate this menu with playlists from your iTunes library, choose Refresh from the Playlist pop-up menu. • Title: Enter the text you want to appear as the title of the file in your iTunes library. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 291Create DVD Use this form to enter information and settings for the DVD you want to burn. • Output Device pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose the device to format to. The pop-up menu displays a list of your system’s suitable output devices, including optical drives and the computer’s hard disk. Choose Hard Drive to create a disk image (.img) file that you can burn to DVD media at a later time using the Disk Utility application (available in the Utilities folder). Other settings may change depending on the device you choose. Important: If a progress indicator appears next to the output device you selected, wait a moment for the list of available devices to update. This can happen when you eject or insert a disc or when you turn an optical drive on or off. • Eject button: Depending on your optical media drive type, click this button to eject optical media from the drive or open the drive’s media tray. • Layers pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to specify the type of disc you are making. • Automatic: Use this to have the type of disc you insert to be automatically detected. You must insert the disc before clicking Burn for Automatic to work. Additionally, Automatic always creates a single-layer disk image when Hard Drive is selected as the output device. • Single-layer: Use this to identify the disc as a single-layer disc. You can use this to force a dual-layer disc to be treated as a single-layer disc. • Dual-layer: Use this to identify the disc as a dual-layer disc. You can use this to force the disk image to be formatted for a dual-layer disc when you choose Hard Drive as your output device. Selecting “Dual-layer” when using a single-layer disc may result in an error while burning the disc, depending on the project’s length. • Disc Template pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose a menu template for the DVD. 292 Chapter 25 Adding Actions• Title field: Use this field to enter a name for the program on the DVD. • When Disc Loads pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose what happens when the disc loads in the player. • Show Menu: Choose this option to show the menu. • Play Movie: Choose this option to play the movie. • Use Chapter Marker Text as Subtitles checkbox: Select this checkbox to have marker text appear as subtitles. This is particularly useful for creating DVD dailies. This allows you to line up a series of clips or scenes and identify each item with a marker text-subtitle. • Background pop-up menu: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select a still image to use as the menu’s background. • Main Menu and Chapter Menu preview: Use the Main Menu and Chapter Menu buttons to display previews of the menus included with the selected template. Create Blu-ray Disc Use this form to enter information and settings for the Blu-ray disc you want to burn. Additionally, you can burn an AVCHD disc based on settings in this form. An AVCHD disc can be thought of as a simpler HD disc that is burned to red laser media. The resulting disc plays in Blu-ray Disc players that are compatible with the AVCHD format. This means that you can burn a disc that contains HD video content and some basic menu features using a standard DVD burner and play that disc in compatible Blu-ray Disc players. See About the H.264 for Blu-ray Disc Encoder Pane for information on creating H.264 streams suitable for Blu-ray discs and AVCHD discs. Important: You cannot play any disc containing Blu-ray content on a Mac computer. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 293You choose whether to burn a Blu-ray disc or an AVCHD disc by your choice in the Output Device pop-up menu. The setting descriptions below identify which items do not apply to AVCHD discs. • Output Device pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose the device to format to. The pop-up menu displays a list of your system’s suitable output devices, including optical drives and the computer’s hard disk. Each device also includes the words Blu-ray or AVCHD to indicate which type of disc it creates. Choose Hard Drive to create a disk image (.img) file that you can burn to Blu-ray disc media at a later time using the Disk Utility application (available in the Utilities folder). Other settings may change depending on the device you choose. Important: If a progress indicator appears next to the output device you selected, wait a moment for the list of available devices to update. This can happen when you eject or insert a disc or when you turn an optical drive on or off. Note: If you choose a standard DVD burner, the disc is formatted as an AVCHD disc. All other devices format the disc as a Blu-ray disc. • Eject button: Depending on your optical media drive type, click this button to eject optical media from the drive or open the drive’s media tray. • Layers pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to specify the type of disc you are making. • Automatic: Use this to have the type of disc you insert to be automatically detected. You must insert the disc before clicking Burn for Automatic to work. Additionally, Automatic always creates a single-layer disk image when Hard Drive is selected as the output device. • Single-layer: Use this to identify the disc as a single-layer disc. You can use this to force a dual-layer disc to be treated as a single-layer disc. 294 Chapter 25 Adding Actions• Dual-layer: Use this to identify the disc as a dual-layer disc. You can use this to force the disk image to be formatted for a dual-layer disc when you choose Hard Drive as your output device. Selecting “Dual-layer” when using a single-layer disc may result in an error while burning the disc, depending on the project’s length. • Disc Template pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose a menu template for the Blu-ray disc. • Title field: Use this field to enter a name for the program on the Blu-ray disc. • When Disc Loads pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose what happens when the disc loads in the player. • Show Menu: Choose this option to show the menu. • Play Movie: Choose this option to play the movie. • Use Chapter Marker Text as Subtitles checkbox: Select this checkbox to have marker text appear as subtitles. This is particularly useful for creating Blu-ray disc dailies. This allows you to line up a series of clips or scenes and identify each item with a marker text-subtitle. Note: Subtitles are not supported on AVCHD discs. • Include Loop Movie Button checkbox: Select this checkbox to add a Loop Movie button to the menu. This option is not available on all disc templates. • Background button: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select a background graphic. • Logo Graphic button: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select a logo graphic. • Title Graphic button: Opens a dialog for you to locate and select a title graphic. • Main Menu and Chapter Menu preview: Use the Main Menu and Chapter Menu buttons to display previews of the menus included with the selected template. Note: Blu-ray and AVCHD menus are best suited for display at 1080i or 1080p resolutions. Users should ensure that their player and display are set accordingly. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 295Create Web Reference Movie Use this form to create a reference movie that enables a web browser and a server to automatically select the right movie for any device or connection speed, without requiring the viewer to make a choice. • Web reference movie destination field and button: Use this field and the associated Choose button to define a destination folder for the output web reference movie. Click the button to open a dialog for locating and selecting the folder. • Create Read Me file with sample HTML checkbox: Use this checkbox to control whether Compressor creates a text document containing complete instructions and sample HTML for embedding the web reference movie in a web site. • Create Poster Image checkbox: Use this checkbox to control whether Compressor creates a thumbnail image for embedding the web reference movie in a web site. 296 Chapter 25 Adding ActionsOpen with Application Use this form to specify an application to open the output media file. • Open With pop-up menu: Use this menu to either confirm or select the application that will open the output media file. Prepare for HTTP Live streaming Use this form to create a set of files you can use to stream audio and video to iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac, using an ordinary web server. Designed for mobility, HTTP live streaming can dynamically adjust movie playback quality to match the available speed of wired or wireless networks. HTTP live streaming is great for delivering streaming media to your iOS-based application or HTML5-based website. For detailed information on implementing HTTP live streaming, see the Apple Developer HTTP live streaming website. • Choose button: Click Choose to open a dialog for locating a destination for the HTTP live streaming assets. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 297• Segment Duration number field: Enter a value (in seconds) to define the segment lengths for the media. This value defines how the video streams are split into chunks. This segmentation defines when the web server can switch between the various video formats while streaming to a device with varying network connection speeds. A smaller value allows the server to respond more quickly to changing connection speeds. • Create Read Me file with sample HTML checkbox: Select this to include a file with basic HTTP live streaming usage information. Run Automator Workflow Use this form to choose an Automator script to run. • Choose Automator Workflow: Click Choose to open a dialog for locating and selecting an Automator script that Compressor will execute automatically on completion of the transcoding job. Publish to YouTube Use this form to enter information about movies you want to publish to a YouTube account on the web. 298 Chapter 25 Adding ActionsNote: To upload multiple YouTube output media files in one batch, create a separate job for each output media file. Important: You must complete all fields for successful uploading. • Username: Use this field to enter a YouTube username. • Password: Use this field to enter a YouTube password. • Title: Use this field to enter the name of the movie you are publishing. • Description: Use this field to enter a description of the movie you are publishing. • Tags: Use this field to enter keywords that describe your movie. These are search terms that your intended audience might use to find your movie on YouTube. For more information, see YouTube help. • Category pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to select a YouTube category for your movie. On YouTube, a movie can belong to one of several categories (topic areas). • Make this movie private checkbox: Select this checkbox to control viewing access to the movie you are publishing. When you make a video private on YouTube, you have the option of sharing it with a select number of people from any of the contact lists you create for your account. See YouTube help for more information. Publish to Facebook Use this form to enter information about movies you want to publish to a Facebook account on the web. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 299Note: To upload multiple Facebook output media files in one batch, create a separate job for each output media file. Important: You must complete all fields for successful uploading. • Email: Use this field to enter the email address for a Facebook account. • Password: Use this field to enter a Facebook password. • Title: Use this field to enter the name of the movie you are publishing. • Description: Use this field to enter a description of the movie you are publishing. • Privacy pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose who can view the movie. The choices are Only Me, Friends, Friends of Friends, and Public. Publish to Vimeo Use this form to enter information about movies you want to publish to a Vimeo account on the web. 300 Chapter 25 Adding ActionsNote: To upload multiple Vimeo output media files in one batch, create a separate job for each output media file. Important: You must complete all fields for successful uploading. • Email: Use this field to enter the email address for a Vimeo account. • Password: Use this field to enter a Vimeo password. • Title: Use this field to enter the name of the movie you are publishing. • Description: Use this field to enter a description of the movie you are publishing. • Tags: Use this field to enter keywords that describe your movie. These are search terms that your intended audience might use to find your movie on Vimeo. For more information, see Vimeo help. • Viewable by pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to choose who can view the movie. The choices are Anyone, My contacts, and Nobody else. Publish to CNN iReport Use this form to enter information about movies you want to publish to a CNN iReport account on the web. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 301Note: To upload multiple CNN iReport output media files in one batch, create a separate job for each output media file. Important: You must complete all fields for successful uploading. • Email: Use this field to enter the email address for a CNN iReport account. • Password: Use this field to enter a CNN iReport password. • Subject: Use this field to enter the name of the movie you are publishing. • Body: Use this field to enter a description of the movie you are publishing. 302 Chapter 25 Adding ActionsSend Email Use this form to enter information for an email that is composed when the job completes. This email contains the actual output file and opens in Mail so that you can further edit the email’s contents and other settings. Once you are done editing the email, you can click Send. • Send To: Enter the email address to where you want the email to be sent. You can enter multiple email addresses, separated by a comma. • Send From: Enter the email address you want the email to be sent from. • Subject: Use this field to enter the email’s subject. • Body: Use this field to enter the email’s text. Chapter 25 Adding Actions 303The Preview window has two main roles. You can use it to play your source media file in its original format, or you can preview your source media file with whichever settings have been assigned to it. This chapter covers the following: • About the Preview Window (p. 305) • Previewing a Clip (p. 311) • Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window (p. 316) • Working with Markers and Poster Frames (p. 317) • About the Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts (p. 324) About the Preview Window When you use the Preview window to compare the original version of the clip with the version that will be output, you can make and view real-time changes. This comparison lets you check the effects of settings on your file before spending time and resources transcoding it. Do this to check the quality of the output media file. Scaled, cropped, and filtered version of the clip Original version of the clip 305 Using the Preview Window 26You can also use the Preview window to enlarge the Preview screen size, manually add I-frames (MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 only), and designate a portion of your media file for transcoding using the In and Out markers. The Preview window allows you to play batch items before submitting them for transcoding and allows you to compare versions of your clip to ensure that the quality of the output media file is acceptable. In and Out controls Preview scale selection Source/Setting selection Preview screen area Batch Item selection controls Timeline controls Marker pop-up menu Source/Output information Transport controls The Preview window contains the following items. • Preview scale selection: Adjusts the Preview screen size. The three settings are 100%, 75%, and 50%, but you can also drag the Preview window handle to any size you like. • Source/Setting selection: Use these buttons to preview the selected batch item using either the source’s aspect and size or the setting’s aspect and size. The Source View button also provides a cropping boundary that you can use to define one or more edges to be cropped. The Setting View button shows the cropped version of the media scaled to its aspect and size setting. • Source/Output information: The clip’s frame size and frame rate are shown in the lower-left corner of the Preview window. The clip’s duration (from the In point to the Out point) is shown in the lower-right corner. With the Source View button selected, the frame size and frame rate represent the source media clip. With the Output View button selected, the frame size and frame rate represent the setting for this batch item. Note: To see the total duration of the clip (without In and Out points), select the source file in the Batch window and open the Inspector window (choose Window > Show Inspector). 306 Chapter 26 Using the Preview WindowBatch Item Selection Control Area You can use the batch item selection area to choose specific items from the Batch window to show in the Preview window. Batch Item selection buttons Batch Item pop-up menu • Batch Item selection buttons: Use these buttons to click backward or forward through the list of source media files and clips with settings available for previewing. As you click through the list, the selected batch item appears in the Batch Item pop-up menu. • Batch Item pop-up menu: Choose the source media file you want to preview from this pop-up menu, with or without its assigned settings. In and Out Controls Once you have selected the batch item, the In and Out controls can be used to see and adjust the In and Out point timecode information. Sets In point to current playhead position. Sets Out point to current playhead position. In point timecode Out point timecode • In and Out timecode fields: The exact locations of the In and Out points are displayed here using the standard timecode format of hh:mm:ss:ff. You can manually edit these fields by selecting the field and entering new values. If a new value is entered, the timeline’s relevant In or Out point moves to the specified point in the current batch item. Note: If your source media file has a timecode track with a specific timecode, the Start and End timecode of the clip will appear in both the In and Out timecode fields. For everything else, the timecode will start with 00:00:00:00. • In and Out Point buttons: Drag the In point (right-pointing arrow) or Out point (left-pointing arrow) buttons in the timeline to set a new In or Out point. You can also use the Set In and Set Out buttons (next to the timecode fields) to set In and Out points. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 307Preview Screen Area The Preview screen area displays the currently selected batch item. Cropping boundary Cropping handle for the lower-right corner Split screen slider Cropping dimensions (also seen in Source Inset fields in the Geometry pane) The Preview screen also contains the following items. • Split screen slider: Drag the split screen slider any distance across the top of the Preview screen to get a comparison view between the source media file (left side) and output media file (right side). In addition to the location of the slider at the top, the screen division is indicated by a vertical white line bisecting the image. • Cropping boundary: The cropping boundary is only available in Source view. Use the handles to drag the red boundary edges and corners in the direction you want to crop your output media file. Use the center handle to drag the entire frame in any direction while still maintaining its dimensions. The new values (for left, top, right, and bottom) appear dynamically in the Preview screen as you crop the frame. If you also have the Inspector window open with the batch’s target selected, you can see the same values changing in the cropping fields of the Geometry pane. Select the Output view to show the results of the crop boundary settings. Timeline Controls The timeline controls provide information about the clip, including any markers it has and the current In and Out point settings. You can also use the timeline to position the playhead to a specific frame and set the In and Out points. Playhead timecode Playhead Marker In point Out point • Playhead timecode: Shows the timecode of the playhead’s position in the timeline using the standard timecode format of hh:mm:ss:ff. You can enter a new value to precisely position the playhead along the timeline. 308 Chapter 26 Using the Preview WindowNote: If your source media file has a timecode track with a specific timecode, the timecode of the clip will appear in the playback timecode field. For everything else, the timecode will start with 00:00:00:00. • In and Out points: Use these if you want to transcode only a section of your source media file, rather than the whole thing. Drag the points to indicate the Start and End points within the source media file that you want to transcode. The In and Out timecode fields at the bottom of the Preview window update as you drag these points. (You can also click the Set In Point or Set Out Point buttons to set the points to wherever the playhead is currently positioned.) Important: In and Out points are not preserved after a transcode has been completed, so if you want to resubmit a batch from the History table, you need to reapply these points to your clip. In and Out points are assigned to the source media file rather than the setting, so whatever In and Out points you create will be the same for all other settings related to that source media file in the current batch. • Playhead: Gives you a visual indication of where the displayed frame is located within the clip. You can drag the playhead to navigate quickly to a specific location within the clip. • Marker: Gives you a visual indication of where a marker has been placed in the clip. The color of the marker indicates its type: • Blue: Compression markers (These are compression markers that you add manually.) • Purple: Chapter markers (These are named markers that are intended to be navigational chapter stops or visual artwork in the output media file.) • Red: Podcast markers (These are named markers that are intended to be navigational chapter stops or visual artwork in the output media file.) • Green: Edit/cut markers (These are compression markers that are added automatically at edit points in the Final Cut Pro sequence.) • Gray bar with center dot: Poster frame (This bar indicates the frame chosen as the poster frame for this file.) See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for more information. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 309Transport Controls These move the playhead backward or forward to the exact position of the next marker or In and Out point, making it easy to navigate quickly between existing markers. You can also use these buttons to quickly move the playhead to the start or end of the clip. Move to previous marker Play/Pause Fast Backward Move to next marker Fast Forward Playback Loop button • Play/Pause button: Starts or stops playback of the clip. If you stop playback, the playhead remains at its current position. To return to the start of the clip, you need to drag the playhead back to the beginning or click the “move to previous marker” control. • Move to previous marker and Move to next marker buttons: Moves the playhead to the previous or next marker, the In or Out points, or to the start or end of the clip if no more markers are present. • Fast Backward and Fast Forward buttons: Allow you to play your clip in either direction at twice the normal speed. If clicked while playing, clicking one of these buttons a second time returns playback to normal speed. • Playback Loop button: Click to play the media in a continuous loop. Marker Pop-Up Menu Use the Marker pop-up menu to manage the clip’s markers. While you can use markers with all settings, they actually affect only the output file when the setting uses the MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4 when configured for podcasting, H.264 for Apple Devices, or QuickTime Movie output file format. See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for more information. Choose items from the Marker pop-up menu to add, remove, show, hide, and edit markers and poster frames. • Import Chapter List: Opens a file import dialog that allows you to import a file containing a list of chapter marker times for the source media file. See Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip for more information. 310 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window• Add/Remove marker: Actual state depends on whether or not the playhead is positioned on a marker. • When the playhead is not positioned on a marker: Choosing “Add marker” places a new marker on the timeline at the playhead’s current position. • When the playhead is positioned on a marker: Choosing “Remove marker” deletes the current marker. • Edit: Available only when the playhead is positioned on a marker. Choosing Edit opens a dialog for configuring the marker. The dialog allows you to set the marker type and assign a URL and an image to it. See Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip for more information. • Show Chapter/Podcast Markers: Controls whether chapter and podcast markers (those with names) are shown in the timeline. A checkmark indicates they are shown. • Show Compression Markers: Controls whether compression markers (those without names) are shown in the timeline. A checkmark indicates they are shown. • Show Edit/Cut Markers: Controls whether markers automatically placed at each edit point by another application, such as Final Cut Pro, are shown in the timeline. A checkmark indicates they are shown. • Set poster frame: Choose this item to make the current frame the poster frame. A poster frame is a still image that represents a video or audio media file or a podcast chapter in applications such as iTunes and the Finder. By default, the first frame in a video file is the poster frame. • Clear poster frame: Deletes the poster frame marker. • Go to poster frame: Moves the playhead to the poster frame. Previewing a Clip You can preview either the original source media file or the file with a setting applied to it. Source media files appear in the list as their filenames. Any settings that have been applied to the source media file are listed immediately below the file’s name and are indented to make it easier to identify them. Whether you choose to view the original source media file or the source media file with a setting determines which options you see in the Preview window. Important: Settings you make in the Encoder pane and the Frame Controls pane cannot be previewed. Only the settings made in the Filters pane and Geometry pane can be previewed. See Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window for an alternative method of previewing Encoder pane and Frame Controls pane settings. To preview a source media file 1 Open the Preview window. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 311Note: You can open your file into the Preview window in one step by double-clicking the source media file in its job in the Batch window. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose a source media file from the Batch Item pop-up menu (identified by its filename). A setting applied to the source media file “Nancy at table CU 5.” The checkmark indicates that this is currently being viewed in the Preview window. The original source media file “Nancy at table CU 5.” Selects the default color bars image. • Click the Batch Item selection buttons until the source media file appears in the pop-up menu. • Select the source media file in its job in the Batch window. Only the Source View button is active (and the Output View button is dimmed). This is because you selected a regular source media file, so you can only see the unadulterated clip—without the split screen divider or cropping bars. 3 Choose a Preview screen size from the Preview Scale pop-up menu, or drag the Preview window handle to a size you like. This does not affect the display frame size of the actual output media file. That can only be set from the Geometry pane in the Inspector window. 4 Click the Play button to preview the selected source media file. Source media files with markers already added, such as files from Final Cut Pro, will show the markers in the timeline. You can manage the markers if needed. See Working with Markers and Poster Frames for more information. To preview a clip with an assigned setting 1 Open the Preview window. Note: You can open the clip into the Preview window in one step, by double-clicking the target (that contains the setting) of a job in Batch window. 312 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window2 Do one of the following: • Choose a setting from the Batch Item pop-up menu (the indented setting names, not the source filenames). • Click the Batch Item selection buttons until the clip with a setting appears in the pop-up menu. • Select the clip’s setting in its job in the Batch window. Both Source and Setting (Output) View buttons are active so you can switch between these two views. Because you selected a setting, you can use the split screen slider and cropping boundary in the Preview window. 3 Click the Setting view button in the upper-right corner of the Preview window. 4 Choose a Preview screen size from the Preview Scale pop-up menu, or drag the Preview window handle to a size you like. This does not affect the display frame size of the actual output media file. That can only be set from the Geometry pane in the Inspector window. Note: When you adjust the frame size of a setting (in the Geometry pane) while you are viewing it in the Preview window, the frame size may not resize accordingly. If this occurs, select Sample Movie or a different target from the Batch Item pop-up menu and then select this target again. It will display the correct frame size. 5 Drag the split screen slider left or right across the top of the screen to move the split screen divider over more or less of the transcoded portion of the clip. 6 Use the cropping boundary to adjust the display frame size of your output media file. Cropping boundary and handles Split screen slider Split screen divider Cropping dimensions (also seen in Source Inset fields in the Geometry pane) Source and Setting View buttons Batch Item pop-up menu 7 Check the results of your cropping by clicking the Source and Setting View buttons. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 313Note: The more you reduce the clip image by cropping it, the larger the scale factor of the output image will be (as the framing geometry conforms to the settings of the output size ratio rather than to the source file settings). This effect is similar to zooming in on an image, which results in larger pixels and overall image degradation. So make sure that you don’t crop in so far that the image is enlarged past its original size relative to the original size of the frame. Source and Setting View buttons 8 Select the filter that you want to adjust and make changes as necessary. Note: The filter you select must have a checkmark next to it in the Filters list. Otherwise, the filter won’t be applied to the setting. Selected filter settings are displayed in the Preview window. Setting selection 314 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window9 If you want to make the display frame size of your output media file different from that of your source media file, open the Geometry pane in the Inspector window and choose a preexisting value from the Frame Size pop-up menu or enter different output size values in the relevant fields. Note: MPEG-2 is limited to preestablished display frame sizes based on MPEG-2 specifications. In this instance, all output size items are unavailable. Cropping dimensions (also displayed in the Inspector window when you drag cropping bars) 10 Click the Play button in the Preview window to view the clip. See About the Preview Window for more information about these settings. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 315Playing Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) Files in the Preview Window You can use the Preview window to play back Dolby Digital Professional (AC-3) files. Compressor includes a Dolby Digital decoder so that when you add an AC-3 source media file to a batch and play it, you are able to hear it using your computer’s current speakers. This includes everything from the built-in stereo speakers, which play a mixed-down version of the AC-3 file if it contains more than two channels, to a set of external surround speakers connected to a USB or FireWire output. Important: Since Compressor is decoding the Dolby Digital audio file, you cannot use your computer’s optical output to preview Dolby Digital audio. This feature is important if you are using the Dolby Digital Professional encoder since you cannot preview the encoder’s settings in real time in the Preview window. Instead, you can add the encoded AC-3 files to a batch and play them to verify that the encoder’s settings produced good results. See Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window for information on creating a short test clip for this purpose. Transcoding a Portion of the Clip with the Preview Window Although Geometry (cropping and scaling) and Filters adjustments are displayed instantly in the Preview window, Encoding pane and Frame Controls pane settings are not. To preview Encoder pane and Frame Controls pane settings, do a test transcode of a small section of your source media file. You can use the Preview window to set In and Out points to transcode only a portion of your media file rather than transcoding the whole thing. To designate a portion of your media file for transcoding 1 Open the Preview window. 2 Choose a clip from the Batch Item pop-up menu or click the Batch Item selection buttons until the clip appears in the pop-up menu. 3 Do one of the following: • Drag the In point to the appropriate location. 316 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window• Drag the playhead to where you want transcoding to begin and click the Set In Point button. Playhead Out point In point Set In Point button Set Out Point button 4 Do one of the following: • Drag the Out point to the appropriate location. • Drag the playhead to where you want transcoding to end and click the Set Out Point button. The only segment of the media file that will be transcoded is between the two points that you set. The rest of the clip will not be transcoded. Important: When you use the In and Out points to specify a segment of the source media file to transcode, they apply to all targets assigned to the file’s job. You can add a source media file multiple times to a batch, creating multiple jobs, and set the In and Out points differently in each job. Working with Markers and Poster Frames Compressor can import and create several different kinds of markers. In addition, Compressor can import entire lists of chapter markers. Compressor also supports setting a poster frame for a clip. Output File Formats That Support Markers Not all output file formats support markers. Following is a list of those that do support them. • MPEG-2 • MPEG-4 when configured for podcasting (audio-only with the Enhanced Podcast checkbox selected) Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 317• QuickTime Movies • H.264 for Apple Devices You can set and configure markers for other output file formats, but they will not be included in the encoded output file. Types of Markers Compressor can import and create the following types of markers. • Chapter markers: Chapter markers allow easy access to index points throughout a DVD, QuickTime movie, or video podcast. QuickTime Player can interpret any text track containing time stamps as a chapter track. Chapter markers can also have artwork and a URL assigned to them that appear when playing a podcast. These markers appear as purple in the Preview window timeline and are the type created when you manually add markers using Compressor. • Podcast markers: Like chapter markers, podcast markers can have artwork and a URL assigned to them. Podcast markers cannot be used to access frames within the clip, though, and they do not appear as chapter markers in QuickTime. You can use podcast markers to provide a slideshow (with URLs) for users to view when playing audio podcasts. These markers appear as red in the Preview window timeline. • Compression markers: Compression markers are also known as manual compression markers. These are markers you can add in the Compressor Preview window to indicate when Compressor should generate an MPEG I-frame during compression. See Understanding GOPs and Frame Types for more information on I-frames. These markers appear as blue in the Preview window timeline. • Edit/Cut markers: Edit/Cut markers are also known as automatic compression markers. These markers are intended to be at each cut or transition point in a sequence. During transcoding, Compressor uses Edit/Cut markers to generate MPEG I-frames at these points, improving compression quality. These markers appear as green in the Preview window timeline. Manually Adding and Removing Markers The Preview window includes comprehensive marker support, including the ability to manage markers already added to the source media file, manually add or remove markers, and import chapter marker lists. When you add a marker to a clip, it appears as a chapter marker by default. You can then change the marker to a compression or podcast marker if you wish (see Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip). To add a chapter marker to your clip 1 Open the Preview window. 318 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window2 Choose the Show Chapter/Podcast Markers item from the Marker pop-up menu, so that there is a checkmark by it. 3 Choose a clip from the Batch Item pop-up menu or click the Batch Item selection button until the clip you want appears in the pop-up menu. 4 Do one of the following to determine where the marker is to be placed: • Drag the playhead where you want to add a marker. • Enter a timecode value in the playhead timecode field. 5 Do one of the following to add a marker: • Click the Marker button and choose “Add marker” from the pop-up menu. • Press M. A purple chapter marker appears in the timeline. A purple marker appears under the playhead after the marker is added. 6 Choose Edit from the Marker pop-up menu (or press Command-E). A dialog for editing the marker appears. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 3197 Enter a name for the chapter marker in the Name field. For chapter markers, this name appears in the output media file where it can be seen with QuickTime Player and in playback devices. 8 If you want to assign an image to the chapter marker, choose one of the following from the Image pop-up menu: • None: No image is associated with the marker. • Frame in source: By default, the frame displayed is the frame on which the marker is placed. To use a different frame as the image, enter a different timecode value. • From File: Drag an image to the image well. You can also click Choose to open a file-selection dialog and select a still-image file to assign to the marker. 9 Click OK to close the dialog. You can convert a chapter marker to a compression or podcast marker by choosing Edit from the Marker pop-up menu. To remove a marker from your clip 1 Click either the “Move to Previous Marker” or “Move to Next Marker” control to move the playhead to the marker you want to remove. 2 Do one of the following to remove the marker: • Click the Marker button and choose “Remove marker” from the pop-up menu. • Press M. The marker disappears. To import a chapter marker list 1 Open the Preview window. 2 Choose a clip from the Batch Item pop-up menu or click the Batch Item selection button until the clip you want appears in the pop-up menu. 320 Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window3 Choose Import Chapter List from the Marker pop-up menu. A file selection dialog opens so that you can locate and select the chapter marker file for that source media file. 4 Select the chapter marker file and click Open. The markers are imported and added to the Preview window timeline. Note: While all markers imported by using a chapter marker list are configured as chapter markers, you can use the marker edit dialog to change them to podcast or compression markers. Additionally, you can add URLs and artwork to them as needed. Important: The timecode values in the list must be based on the source media file’s timecode. Adding Compression or Podcast Markers to a Clip To manually add a compression or podcast marker to a clip, you first add a chapter marker (as described in the previous section) and then you edit the marker. Note: A podcast can have both chapter and podcast markers. The only difference is that the viewer can navigate directly to a chapter marker but cannot navigate to a podcast marker. For more information, see Types of Markers. To manually add a compression or podcast marker to a clip 1 Choose the Show Chapter/Podcast Markers and Show Compression Markers items from the Marker pop-up menu, so that there is a checkmark by them. 2 Do one of the following to determine where the marker is to be placed: • Drag the playhead where you want to add a marker. • Enter a timecode value in the playhead timecode field. 3 Do one of the following to add a marker: • Click the Marker button and choose “Add marker” from the pop-up menu. • Press M. A purple chapter marker appears in the timeline. 4 Choose Edit from the Marker pop-up menu (or press Command-E). Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 321A dialog for editing the marker appears. 5 Choose Compression or Podcast from the Type pop-up menu. 6 Enter a name for the marker in the Name field. For podcast markers, this name does not appear to the viewer. 7 Optionally, enter a URL in the URL field. This URL applies only to podcasts. The marker’s name appears over the artwork where the viewer can click it to open a web browser to the URL’s website. 8 If you want to assign an image to the chapter marker, choose one of the following from the Image pop-up menu: • None: No image is associated with the marker. • Frame in source: By default, the frame displayed is the frame on which the marker is placed. To use a different frame as the image, enter a different timecode value. • From File: Drag an image to the image well. You can also click Choose to open a file-selection dialog and select a still-image file to assign to the marker. 9 Click OK to close the dialog. The marker in the timeline changes to blue if it’s a compression marker, or red if it’s a podcast marker. You can use the Previous Marker and Next Marker buttons to select other markers in the timeline to edit. You also have the option of importing a chapter marker list. These lists can use either the QuickTime TeXML format (an XML-based format for constructing 3GPP-compliant timed text tracks in a QuickTime movie file) or a plain text chapter list file. See Creating Plain Text Chapter Marker Lists for information. 322 Chapter 26 Using the Preview WindowCreating Plain Text Chapter Marker Lists You can create a list of timecode points that Compressor can import to create markers. The timecode values need to match the timecode of the track’s video clip. The list of timecode values must be a plain text file; you can create it with TextEdit (as long as you save the file as plain text). If you create the list with a more advanced word-processing application, be sure to save the file as a plain ASCII text file with no formatting. The file must follow these rules. • Each marker must be on a new line that starts with a timecode value in the 00:00:00:00 format. These values identify the marker positions. • After the timecode value, you can include a name for the marker. You can use a comma, space, or tab character to separate the timecode value from the marker name. • Any lines that do not begin with a timecode value are ignored. This makes it easy for you to add comments to the list. • The timecode values do not have to be listed in chronological order. Setting the Poster Frame You can use Compressor to set the poster frame for a movie. This is the frame that appears in iTunes to represent the movie. If you do not set the poster frame, iTunes uses the frame ten seconds from the movie’s first frame. To set the poster frame 1 Position the Preview window’s timeline to the frame you want to be the poster frame. 2 Choose “Set poster frame” from the Marker pop-up menu. A vertical line with a center dot appears in the timeline. To move the playhead to the poster frame µ Choose “Go to poster frame” from the Marker pop-up menu. Note: This setting is not available if the poster frame has not been set. To remove the poster frame setting µ Choose “Clear poster frame” from the Marker pop-up menu. Note: This setting is not available if the poster frame has not been set. Chapter 26 Using the Preview Window 323About the Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts For a complete list of Preview window keyboard shortcuts, see Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts in the Keyboard Shortcuts chapter. 324 Chapter 26 Using the Preview WindowCompressor allows you to choose where to save your transcoded files. Without a selected destination, the output file is saved to the same folder as the source media file. This may be satisfactory for your needs, but if there are various remote uploading servers, or if you just want a specific type of output file to end up in a specific location, you must assign that destination. If you have a volume open on your desktop, it is treated the same as a local destination and allows you to save output media files directly, without the extra steps needed for remote destinations, such as specifying the host name and entering the user name and password. When you use the remote option for your destination, you can save to any folder under the User directory of that remote computer. Once you have created all your necessary destinations, you won’t have to open the Destinations tab again because you can select all destinations directly from the Batch window once they have been created. Additionally, when creating custom settings, you can assign a default destination that’s automatically used. For details, see Adding Setting Actions. This chapter covers the following: • About the Destinations Tab (p. 326) • Using the Inspector with Destinations (p. 327) • Creating a Destination (p. 327) • Warning Triangles (p. 329) • Deleting and Duplicating a Destination (p. 330) 325 Creating and Changing Destinations 27About the Destinations Tab You use the Destinations tab together with the Inspector window to create, modify, or remove your destination settings and add file identifiers to your output media filename. Custom destinations Default destinations Duplicate button Add and Remove buttons Default filename identifiers Filename Template pop-up menu Sample filename line The Destinations tab contains the following items. • Destinations list: This lists destination names and pathnames. There are four default destinations in the Apple folder: Cluster Storage is a cluster’s scratch storage location; Desktop is the user’s Desktop folder; Source is the same folder from which the source media file originated; and User's Movies Folder is the Movies folder in the user's home folder. Note: Cluster Storage applies only to installations of Compressor that have distributed processing enabled. • Add (+): To create a destination, click this button. A file selection dialog appears in which you can select a destination folder. • Duplicate button: Makes a copy of the selected destination, placing it in the Custom folder. Using this option allows you to create a new destination from a preexisting destination, which you can then adjust according to your needs, rather than creating a new destination from scratch. • Delete (–): Removes a selected custom destination from the Destinations tab immediately. You are not asked for confirmation, so be sure you want to remove the destination before clicking this button. Note: You cannot remove the destinations from the Apple folder. 326 Chapter 27 Creating and Changing DestinationsUsing the Inspector with Destinations When you double-click or select a destination in the Destinations tab, the Inspector window opens. It contains the following items: • Name: Use this field to modify the name of the destination preset. • Output Filename Template: Use this pop-up menu to add file identifiers to your output media file. You can manually edit this field. Selecting any of the following file identifiers adds it to your output media filename. • Date: Date the file was transcoded in the YYYY-MM-DD format • Setting Name: Name of the setting used for the transcoding job • Source Media Name: Source media filename without its extension • Source Media Extension: Extension of the source media file • Sample From Defined Template: Displays a sample of what the output filename will look like with any file identifiers you have added. You cannot edit the Sample line, but it changes dynamically based on the file identifiers you add or delete. • Path: Displays the path to the destination folder. Creating a Destination You use the Destinations tab with the Inspector window to create and assign a destination and to add file identifiers to your output file. Chapter 27 Creating and Changing Destinations 327You can create the following destinations. • Local: Any directory on your own computer • Open Volume: Any shared volume open on your desktop Note: By default, the output media file destination is the same folder from which the source media files originated. You can change the default destination to any other Destination preset. Choose Compressor > Preferences and use the Default Destination pop-menu to choose from the list of Destination presets. To create a destination 1 Open the Destinations tab. 2 Click the Add (+) button. The Destination Selection dialog appears. 3 Navigate to your chosen destination folder or open mounted volume, then click Open. A new destination with the folder’s name appears in the Custom folder of the Destinations tab along with the path to the folder you just assigned. 4 Double-click the new destination in the Destinations tab. The Inspector window opens, showing relevant information for the new destination. 5 Do either of the following in the Inspector: • Modify the name of the new destination in the Name field. • Modify the pathname of the new destination by clicking Choose to open the destination selection dialog and navigating to a new folder. 6 Add file identifiers to your output filename using the pop-up menu in the Output Filename Template field. Filename Template pop-up menu You can also manually edit this field by doing any of the following: • Drag the file identifiers to rearrange their order. • Click on either side of the file identifiers to type additional text. • Use the Delete key on your keyboard to remove any of the file identifiers. 328 Chapter 27 Creating and Changing DestinationsThe Sample From Defined Template field in the Inspector window shows a sample of the output filename with its chosen file identifiers. The default file identifier combination is Source Media Name-Setting Name. Note: Avoid customizing your filename templates with anything beginning with a period (.). The resulting file will only be visible via the command line and not visible using the Mac OS X Finder. See About the Destinations Tab for more details about these settings. To change the default destination 1 Choose Compressor > Preferences. 2 Use the Default Destination pop-up menu to choose from the list of existing destination presets. The destination you choose appears as the default destination when you import a new source file in the Batch window. Warning Triangles When there is a problem with your destination, a yellow warning triangle appears. You must resolve this problem before you can successfully transcode. Warning triangles appear in the Destinations tab if the destination isn’t reachable or writable, and in the Batch window if: • There is already an identical file at that destination. • You have two destinations with the same name. • The destination isn’t reachable or writable. The warning appears at whatever level the problem originated (preset, job, or batch) and propagates upward, so that if the problem occurs at the preset level, you see warning triangles next to the preset and job. Chapter 27 Creating and Changing Destinations 329If you hold the pointer over the warning triangle for a few seconds, a tooltip displays information about the nature of the problem. As soon as you resolve the problem, the warning triangle disappears and you can continue to transcode. Click the warning symbol to see an explanation about why it is there. Deleting and Duplicating a Destination You can manage destinations by deleting those you no longer need and creating new ones based on existing destinations. To delete a destination 1 Open the Destinations tab. 2 In the Destinations tab, select the destination you want to remove, then click the Remove (–) button, or press Delete. Important: There is no confirmation step in this process, so you need to be sure you want to remove the destination before clicking the button. Remove button To duplicate a destination 1 Open the Destinations tab. 330 Chapter 27 Creating and Changing Destinations2 In the Destinations tab, select the destination you want to copy, then click the Duplicate button. Duplicate button A new entry appears in the Destinations tab with _copy appended to its name. This destination is identical in all other ways. Rename the duplicate destination as appropriate. The duplicated destination Chapter 27 Creating and Changing Destinations 331Compressor allows you to save one or more settings or groups of settings into a Droplet. A Droplet is a standalone preset created by Compressor, packaged into a drag-and-drop application and saved as an icon. When you drag source media files to a Droplet icon, they are automatically submitted for transcoding using the specified embedded settings. The transcoding process begins, whether or not Compressor is open. Drag selected source media files to a Droplet to transcode them. You can drag any number of media files onto a Droplet. You can double-click a Droplet to open it and see the settings it contains. Note: Compressor must already be installed on any computer on which you intend to use Droplets. This chapter covers the following: • Creating Droplets (p. 334) • About the Droplet Window (p. 336) • Checking Droplet Settings (p. 338) • Using a Droplet to Transcode Source Media Files (p. 340) • Using Droplets to Create Jobs and Settings in Compressor (p. 342) • Droplet Tips (p. 343) 333 Using Droplets 28Creating Droplets Droplets are easy to create, and once created, allow you to quickly and easily submit source media files for transcoding. Compressor offers two methods for creating Droplets, each with its own advantages. In the Settings tab, you can use the “Save Selection as Droplet” button. And, in the File menu, you can choose the Create Droplet item. Creating a Droplet from the Settings Tab If you are already working in the Settings tab and you have identified an existing setting from which you want to create a Droplet, the “Save Selection as Droplet” button is a handy tool for creating the Droplet. To create a Droplet using the “Save Selection as Droplet” button in the Settings tab 1 Open the Settings tab. 2 Select one or more settings or setting groups that you want to save as a Droplet. • Click the “Save Selection as Droplet” button. “Save Selection as Droplet” button • Control-click the settings you selected and choose Save as Droplet from the shortcut menu. The Save dialog appears. Note: You can Shift-click or Command-click to add multiple settings and/or setting groups to a Droplet. In this situation, every source media file is transcoded by every setting in the Droplet. For example, if you submitted two source media files to a Droplet containing three settings, Compressor creates six different output media files. 3 In the Save dialog, enter a name for the Droplet in the Save As field and use the Where pop-up menu to navigate to the Droplet location. You can save your Droplet anywhere on your computer, but it’s most convenient to save it on your desktop, so you can conveniently drag source media files to it. 4 Use the “Choose Destination for Droplet results” pop-up menu to choose a destination folder for the output media files that the Droplet will create. 334 Chapter 28 Using DropletsYou can only select destinations that have already been created using the Destinations tab. If no custom destinations have been created, only four default Apple destinations appear in the Choose Destination pop-up menu. See Creating a Destination for more information about destinations. 5 Click Save. Your newly created Droplet appears as an icon at whatever location you selected. You are now ready to use it for transcoding. Creating a Droplet from the File Menu No matter where you are working in the Compressor application, you can always use the Create Droplet item in the File menu. To create a Droplet using the Create Droplet command in the File menu 1 Choose File > Create Droplet. The Droplet Settings Selection and Save dialog appears. 2 Select one or more settings or setting groups that you want to save as a Droplet. You can Shift-click or Command-click to add multiple settings and/or setting groups to a Droplet. In this situation, every source media file is transcoded by every setting in the Droplet. For example, if you submitted two source media files to a Droplet containing three settings, Compressor creates six different output media files. 3 Enter a name for the Droplet in the Save As field and use the Where pop-up menu to navigate to the Droplet location. You can save your Droplet anywhere on your computer, but it’s most convenient to save it on your desktop, so you can conveniently drag source media files to it. 4 Use the “Destination for files created by the droplet” pop-up menu to choose a destination folder for the output media files that the Droplet will create. Chapter 28 Using Droplets 335You can only select destinations that have already been created using the Destinations tab. If no custom destinations have been created, only four default Apple destinations appear in the Choose Destination pop-up menu. See Creating a Destination for more information about destinations. 5 Click Save. Your newly created Droplet appears as an icon at whatever location you selected. You are now ready to use it for transcoding. Drag selected source media files to a Droplet to transcode them. About the Droplet Window You can open any Droplet to view its full details as well as add, remove, and modify settings and source media files. You can also modify the filenames for the output media files using the Filename Template and change the destination folder for the output media files that the Droplet will create. 336 Chapter 28 Using DropletsSee About the Destinations Tab for more information on using file identifiers. Destination pop-up field “Show window on startup” checkbox Submit button Source files table Individual jobs Jobs table Job Type Filename Template Action checkbox (only present for some job types) Job type identifier Show Info button Add Output and Remove Output buttons The Droplet window contains the following items. • Destination: This field displays the destination for the output media file. You can modify this by clicking it and choosing a destination defined in Compressor, or by clicking the Choose button to open the Destination Location dialog and choosing a folder. • Source Files: Contains a list of all the jobs in the batch about to be submitted. If the “Show window on startup” checkbox is selected, the Droplet window opens after you drag your source media files to the Droplet icon, and all the source media files appear in the Source Files table. You can drag one or more source media files into this table, and they will all be transcoded together when you submit the batch, just like a normal batch submission from the Batch window. • Job Type pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to select the type of output media file. The choices are: Apple TV, Blu-ray, DVD, iPhone, iPod, YouTube, and Other. The Other option opens a dialog in which you can choose from a list of existing Compressor settings. For a complete description of each these job types, see Quick and Easy Compressor Workflow: Batch Template Method and About Job Actions. Chapter 28 Using Droplets 337• Jobs table: Each job in this table represents a separate media file that will be generated from each item in the Source files list. • Filename Template: Compressor automatically enters a filename in this field for the output media file. The first part of the filename is based on the source file name. Compressor also automatically appends an output type identifier (such as “iPod” or “YouTube”) at the end of the filename. You can manually edit any portion of the filename by double-clicking it. • Job type identifier: Compressor automatically appends an output type identifier (such as “iPod” or “YouTube”) at the end of each filename. You can manually edit any output type identifier by double-clicking it. • Add/Remove Output buttons: Click Add Output to create additional outputs. To remove a particular output, click its Remove Output button. • Show Info button: Click this button to display extensive details about the current setting and the output media file. If you are transcoding multiple source files, you can view information about each individual media file. • Action checkbox: Select this checkbox to activate any post-transcoding actions (beyond simply creating the output media file). For more information, see Adding Job Actions. • Show window on startup checkbox: When this checkbox is selected, the Droplet window opens when you drag source media files to the Droplet icon, before the batch is submitted. This allows you to verify the settings contained within the Droplet. If the checkbox is not selected, the batch is submitted as soon as the batch is dragged to the Droplet icon (as long as there are no errors), and the Droplet window doesn’t open. • Submit: Click this button to open the submit dialog and submit the batch. For more information about submitting, see Using a Droplet to Transcode Source Media Files and Submitting a Batch. You only need to do this if the “Show window on startup” checkbox is selected; if this checkbox is not selected, the batch is submitted automatically. Checking Droplet Settings This section describes several ways to check and adjust Droplet settings. “Show window on startup” Checkbox The “Show window on startup” checkbox at the bottom of the Droplet window determines whether or not a Droplet window opens when a batch is dragged to a Droplet icon. If it is selected, the Droplet window opens when you drag a batch to the Droplet icon, and you can view the Droplet settings. 338 Chapter 28 Using DropletsIf this checkbox is not selected, double-click the Droplet icon to open its window and see the settings. “Show window on startup” button Show Details button See About the Droplet Window for more information about Droplet settings. Show/Hide Details Button Use this button to open or close the action drawer for any particular job. You can use the action drawer to apply and adjust job actions. For more information about post-transcoding actions, see Adding Job Actions. Show/Hide Details button DVD Action drawer Chapter 28 Using Droplets 339Info Button Click the Info button on any job to get detailed information about the resulting output media file. “Show info for” pop-up menu Note: If you are transcoding multiple source files, you can use the “Show info for” pop-up menu in the Info dialog to choose which particular source media file will have its details displayed. Using a Droplet to Transcode Source Media Files Once you have created a Droplet, you can transcode source media files by dragging them to the Droplet icon. To transcode source media files using a Droplet 1 Drag your selected source media files over the Droplet icon. The “Show window on startup” checkbox at the bottom of the Droplet window determines what happens next. • If the “Show window on startup” checkbox is not selected: The Droplet begins transcoding the source media files immediately. 340 Chapter 28 Using Droplets• If the “Show window on startup” checkbox is selected: The Droplet window opens with the source media files displayed in the Droplet Source Files table. Proceed to step 2 to submit your batch. If the Droplet window opens, you can view its full details as well as add, remove, and modify settings and source media files. You can also modify the filenames for the output media files using the Filename field and change the destination folder for the output media files that the Droplet will create. 2 When you’re satisfied with the settings, click Submit. The submit dialog appears. For detailed information about the submit dialog, see Submitting a Batch. 3 Enter a name for the batch in the Name field. This is useful for identifying the batch in Share Monitor. 4 Use the Cluster pop-up menu to choose which computer or cluster will process the batch. The default Cluster setting is This Computer, which means Compressor will not involve any other computers in completing the batch. You can choose from any other available clusters that appear in this list. See Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing for more details on setting up an Apple Qmaster distributed processing network. 5 Select the This Computer Plus checkbox to create an ad hoc cluster including This Computer and any available service nodes. See About This Computer Plus and Unmanaged Services for more information. 6 Use the Priority pop-up menu to choose a priority level for the batch. 7 Click Submit or press Enter to submit the batch for processing. Each source media file is processed according to the existing setting or group of settings contained within the Droplet. 8 Open Share Monitor if you want to view the processing status of your source media files. See the Share Monitor User Manual for more information. Chapter 28 Using Droplets 341If a Droplet window is open, you can drag your source media files directly to the Source Files table and submit them for transcoding. To transcode source media files using an open Droplet 1 Double-click the Droplet icon to open it. 2 Using the Finder, locate the source media files and drag them into the Droplet’s Source Files table. 3 Modify your Droplet settings as necessary, then click Submit. Each source media file is processed according to the existing setting or group of settings contained within the Droplet. For example, if you submitted two source media files to a Droplet containing three settings, Compressor would create six different output media files. 4 Open Share Monitor if you want to view the processing status of your source media files. Using Droplets to Create Jobs and Settings in Compressor You can drag Droplets from the Finder to the Batch window in Compressor to either create a complete job/target based on the Droplet or apply targets (settings and destinations) to existing jobs in the Batch window. To create new jobs using Droplets µ Drag a Droplet to an empty space in the Batch window. A new job appears with one or more target rows populated from the Droplet’s properties, including settings and destinations. To create new targets using Droplets µ Drag a Droplet to an empty space on a job tile in the Batch window. One or more new target rows appear on the job, populated from the Droplet’s properties, including settings and destinations. 342 Chapter 28 Using DropletsDroplet Tips Here are some additional tips on using Droplets to transcode source media files. Droplets and Compressor Processing Services If you drag files to a Droplet icon without first opening the application or opening a Droplet, Compressor may display an alert message (“This computer is unavailable”), indicating that Compressor processing services have not yet started up in the background. Click Submit at the bottom of the Droplet window. Compressor processing services will start up and transcode the files. Droplets and Large Numbers of Source Media Files If you submit a large number of source media files (such as 200 or more) using a Droplet, there may be a delay of about 1 minute between the “Getting ready for processing” alert message and the dialog reporting that the job is being submitted. You can avoid this reporting delay by reducing the number of source files you submit at one time with a Droplet. Chapter 28 Using Droplets 343Transcoding or processing a series of large files on one desktop computer is processor intensive and time-consuming. You can increase speed and productivity by distributing processing across multiple computers. This chapter covers the following: • Distributed Processing Basics (p. 345) • Basic Components of the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System (p. 347) • Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus (p. 354) • Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters (p. 356) • The Interfaces in the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System (p. 359) • Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor (p. 366) • General Information About Clusters (p. 370) • Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator (p. 381) • Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake (p. 384) Distributed Processing Basics Distributed processing accelerates processing by distributing the work to multiple computers that have been chosen to provide more processing power. You can submit batches of processing jobs to the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system, which allocates those jobs to other computers in the most efficient way (described in more detail in How the Apple Qmaster System Distributes Batches). 345 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 29Computers that submit batches to the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system are called clients. A job is a processing task such as a Compressor preset-source pair, or a Shake file, or other files or commands that use UNIX commands to specify settings such as rendering instructions and file locations and destinations. Batch of processing jobs Client computer Jobs are submitted. Destination folder Files are placed at specified destination. Processed files Apple Qmaster cluster Processing is performed by cluster. Network A batch is one or more jobs submitted for processing at one time. The procedure is analogous to printing multipage documents from a word processing program; the files are spooled and processed in the background. Although a batch can include just one job, you will typically want to submit several jobs at once for processing. Similarly, several people can use the same Apple Qmaster system at the same time, with several client computers sending batches in the same time frame. Batches are managed and distributed by the computer that is designated as the Apple Qmaster cluster controller, which is described in the next section. There are three approaches you can take toward setting up a distributed processing system: • Use This Computer Plus: Using This Computer Plus is the easiest approach you can take to create a distributed processing system. You simply install Compressor, configured as a service node, on any computers you want to perform processing duties. For more information, see Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus. • Create a QuickCluster: Creating a QuickCluster allows you to configure a single computer to be a cluster by choosing the number of instances it supports, based on the number of cores available. For more information, see Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters. • Manually create a cluster: Large installations can manually create managed clusters for use by their clients. For more information, see Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator. 346 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingImportant: When using distributed processing (This Computer Plus, QuickClusters, and managed clusters), you may be asked to authenticate yourself. This is because Apple Qmaster must share a folder, using NFS sharing, with links to the media files so that the processing computers can access the media files. This makes this folder available to any computer that knows its IP address. When using distributed processing with confidential media, make sure the computers are protected by a firewall. For more information about the various components that make up a distributed processing system, see Basic Components of the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System. Basic Components of the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System Although the Apple Qmaster software includes a few different applications (see The Interfaces in the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System), as a whole it is part of a networked system that includes the following basic components. Note: Within a distributed processing system, the Compressor, QuickTime, and Mac OS versions must all be identical. • Client(s): The computer or computers that use Compressor or Apple Qmaster to submit jobs for distributed processing. Applications that can use Apple Qmaster services for processing include Compressor, Shake, Autodesk Maya, and many UNIX command-line programs. Computers with Final Cut Pro and Motion can also be clients. • An Apple Qmaster cluster: An Apple Qmaster cluster contains: • Service nodes: The computers that perform the processing of batches submitted via Compressor or Apple Qmaster. A batch can include one or more jobs. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 347• Cluster controller: The software, enabled on a computer by means of the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor, that divides up batches, determines which service nodes to send work to, and generally tracks and directs the processes. Cluster controller manages the distribution of client’s jobs across the cluster Service node processes jobs Cluster (can contain multiple service nodes, but only one cluster controller) Client computer from which users send jobs to the cluster Service node processes jobs Service node processes jobs Service node processes jobs The client computer, the service nodes, and the cluster controller are often on separate (but network-connected) computers, for the most rapid processing potential. However, the cluster controller could be on a client computer or a service node. See Using One Computer to Serve Two Distributed Processing Rolesfor more information on this scenario. Following is a closer look at the part each component plays in the Apple Qmaster system. Clients Batches are submitted for distributed processing from the client computers. A client computer can be any computer that has Compressor installed and is on the same network (subnet) as the cluster controller. Multiple client computers can be on the same subnet, using the same cluster to do the processing for various applications. You use Compressor or the Apple Qmaster application to submit batches to be processed for a client. See The Basic Transcoding Workflow and the Apple Qmaster User Manual for details on using these applications. 348 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingClusters When a client sends batches to the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system, all the processing and subsequent moving of any output files is performed by a group of Apple Qmaster–configured computers called a cluster. You can create one or more clusters of service nodes, with one cluster controller included in each cluster. Each computer in the cluster is connected to the other computers in the cluster through a network connection. Cluster controller Service node Service node Service node Example of a cluster Note: This illustration provides only one simple example of a cluster. Other possibilities are described in Examples of a Distributed Processing Network. Service Nodes The service nodes are where the processing work is done. When you assign a group of service nodes to a cluster, they function as one very powerful computer because all their resources are shared. If one service node is overloaded or otherwise inaccessible, another service node is used. You make a computer available as a service node by configuring it in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window, accessible from Compressor by choosing Share This Computer from the Apple Qmaster menu. The Minimum You Need to Know The following are the basic rules for setting up a distributed processing network: • A cluster must contain one (and only one) computer acting as the cluster controller, and at least one computer acting as the service node. (These two can be the same computer, as shown in Using One Computer to Serve Two Distributed Processing Roles.) • The client computers and the computers in any cluster that supports them must be on the same network. • The network must support the Apple networking technology built in to Mac OS X. • All the computers in a cluster need read-and-write access to any computers (or storage devices) that will be specified as output destinations for files. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 349Examples of a Distributed Processing Network A very small distributed processing setup could include as few as two computers: • One computer connected to the client and configured to act as both the service node and the cluster controller • One client computer Client Service node with cluster controller enabled Minimum setup for distributed processing Though simple, this setup is useful in a small-scale environment because it allows the client computer to offload a lot of processing work. Using One Computer to Serve Two Distributed Processing Roles To maximize your resources, you may want to consider using some computers for more than one distributed processing function. • Service node and cluster controller: In a small setup, one of the service nodes in a cluster can also act as the cluster controller so that it performs both functions. However, in a cluster of many service nodes, the processing load required for the cluster controller could be so high that it would not be efficient to use one computer as both a service node and a cluster controller. • Client computer and cluster controller or service node: You could also set up a client computer to act as a cluster controller or service node in a cluster, but again, keep in mind that the more available processing power a computer has, the faster it can manage or process jobs. 350 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingThe following setup is for an environment that uses desktop computers. It is called “part-time” processing because each computer acts as someone’s workstation, but at the same time is also part of the distributed processing cluster. The bulk of the processing jobs can be submitted with Compressor or Apple Qmaster at the end of the day, so that the computers are busy processing a large queue of distributed processing batches after everyone has gone home. (See About Advanced Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window and Scheduling Service Availability in the Work Schedule Dialog for information on scheduling service node availability.) Network FireWire drive FireWire drive FireWire drive FireWire drive FireWire drive Each computer acts as both a client that submits jobs for processing and a service node that performs the processing. All source and output files are stored on the FireWire drives. In the sample setup shown above, five computers act as both the clients (user workstations from which users submit jobs for distributed processing) and cluster computers (which do the processing). Each computer has an additional volume, such as a FireWire drive, that is used for media before and after it is rendered, and for the associated files. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 351For more powerful rendering, a network might include a number of client computers on a LAN, connected to a cluster using a high-speed switch. A rack of servers plus a shared storage device, acting as the cluster, would be an extremely strong rendering engine. The service nodes would each have a local copy of the relevant client application software so that they could process the rendering jobs. Client Client Client Client Example of a network setup for distributed rendering High-speed switches (chained together) Rack of servers containing cluster controller and service nodes, plus rack-mounted shared storage device LAN How the Apple Qmaster System Distributes Batches The Apple Qmaster cluster controller determines the most efficient use of the cluster resources. It makes this determination based on the availability of each service node and the number of separable parts (described next) of the batch. Because Apple Qmaster subdivides individual batches across different service nodes, the work is shared and completed more quickly. And, because this method uses all the service nodes as much as possible, you avoid under-utilizing your resources. 352 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingBatches can be distributed to a cluster by the cluster controller in one or both of the following ways. (Apple Qmaster determines which way is the most efficient for specific batches, depending on the circumstances.) • The batch is subdivided into data segments: For example, for a render batch, the cluster controller could divide the frames into groups (segments). Each segment would be processed in parallel on the service nodes in the cluster. • The batch is subdivided into tasks: For example, for a render batch, the cluster controller could subdivide the rendering work into different processing tasks. Different tasks would be run on different service nodes. Rather than actually moving segments, Apple Qmaster tells the service nodes which segments to read via the network, where to find them, and what to do with them. Below is an example of how one batch could be processed in an Apple Qmaster system. Batch submitted by Compressor or Apple Qmaster (job request for frames 1–30) Cluster controller divides and distributes job to available service nodes Service node 1 Service node 2 Service node 3 Instructions specifying locations of source files and frames 11–20 Instructions specifying locations of source files and frames 21–30 Instructions specifying locations of source files and frames 01–10 Processed file (frames 1-30) placed in specified destination In distributing batches, Apple Qmaster uses the technology built in to Mac OS X to locate services in a cluster on the same IP subnet and to dynamically share and receive information. Because the computers can continually transmit their current processing availability status, Apple Qmaster can distribute (load-balance) the workload evenly across the cluster. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 353Other Possible Components of a Distributed Processing Network A distributed processing network can consist of as few as one or two computers, whereas a high-volume network may include many computers, an Xserve system and Xserve cluster nodes in a rack, and high-speed networking infrastructures. You can scale up a distributed processing system as your workload demands by adding features and devices to the network that supports it. There are many ways to expand the capacity of a distributed processing network. You could include any of the following. • High-speed switch and cables: A 100Base-T or Gigabit Ethernet switch and compatible cables to allow your data to move over the LAN at maximum speed. • Multiple clients: Multiple client computers can use the services of the same cluster. And, you can have multiple client applications on the same client computer, using the same cluster. • Multiple clusters: Depending on how extensive your network is and how many clients it needs to serve, you may want to divide up available computers and create more than one cluster to serve various clients. (Users select the cluster they want to send a batch to when they submit the batch.) • Multiple service nodes: In general, more service nodes mean more processing power. In deciding how many service nodes to have in a cluster, consider the ratio of data movement time to computing time. If the processing demand is greater than the network demand required to move job segments throughout the cluster, as is the case with rendering, more service nodes are a good idea. If the computing load, per job, is closer to the network load, having a smaller number of service nodes per cluster may be more efficient. If you are using the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system with applications other than Shake or Compressor, consult the application’s user manual on how to optimize the number of service nodes. • Storage device: A storage device, such as a remote disk or group of disk arrays, can be used as cluster scratch storage, which is a place for short-term storage of temporary data generated by the cluster controller, clients, and service nodes. (You set the scratch storage location in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor. See About Advanced Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window and Using Cluster Storage for more information.) Alternatively, a storage device can be used as a final destination for the files after they are processed. For more information, see Examples of a Distributed Processing Network. Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus Using This Computer Plus in Compressor gives you an easy way to take advantage of the distributed processing capabilities offered by Apple Qmaster without requiring a lot of knowledge about how clusters are configured, how to set up file sharing, and so on. 354 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingUsing This Computer Plus is a two-step process: • Creating Apple Qmaster service nodes in Compressor on your networked computers • Selecting This Computer Plus when you submit a Compressor batch for processing These two steps let you harness the processing power of any number of computers on your network without any additional effort or knowledge on your part. Note: Within a distributed processing system, the Compressor, QuickTime, and Mac OS versions must all be identical. • Stage 1: Creating Service Nodes • Stage 2: Submitting Compressor Batches for Processing Stage 1: Creating Service Nodes Once you have installed Compressor on a computer you want to use as a service node, you need to configure its Apple Qmaster Sharing window. To configure a computer as a service node 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. The Apple Qmaster Sharing pane appears. 2 Select “Share this computer” and “as Services only.” 3 Select Compressor in the Services area. Make sure “Require these services to only be used in managed clusters” is not selected. 4 Click OK. This computer is now available for Compressor to use as an unmanaged service node. Additionally, Final Cut Pro and Motion can use it when you select This Computer Plus in any of their Share menu options. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 355Stage 2: Submitting Compressor Batches for Processing When you submit a Compressor batch for processing, a dialog appears that allows you to name the batch and select the computers to process the batch. At this point, you can harness the processing power of all the computers you set up as service nodes in stage 1 to complete the batch. To process the batch using This Computer Plus 1 Leave the Cluster pop-up menu set to the default selection (This Computer). 2 Select the This Computer Plus checkbox. Compressor and Apple Qmaster coordinate the distribution of the processing tasks between the available computers and deposit the resulting output files at the location(s) you designated in Compressor. Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters QuickClusters offer a simple and automated way to create and configure clusters, as well as an alternative to creating and configuring clusters manually with Apple Qadministrator. QuickClusters with enabled unmanaged support automatically configure themselves and use any available unmanaged services on the same local network (subnet). QuickClusters listen for unmanaged service advertisements and may mark or remember any of them for later use. The Apple Qmaster distributed processing system has default settings that allow you to use distributed processing immediately. • Stage 1: Installing the Software • Stage 2: Configuring a QuickCluster • Stage 3: Adding Service Nodes to a Cluster • Stage 4: Creating and Submitting a Batch 356 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingStage 1: Installing the Software Install Compressor on the computers you want to include in your distributed processing network. To install the software 1 Install Compressor for use as a client on at least one computer in your network. In order to submit jobs and batches to the distributed processing system, you need to use client (submission) software (Compressor or Apple Qmaster). 2 Install Compressor on each computer you want to use for distributed processing. (All computers must be on the same subnet.) Note: Within a distributed processing system, the Compressor, QuickTime, and Mac OS versions must all be identical. Stage 2: Configuring a QuickCluster Use the Apple Qmaster Sharing window to configure the cluster controller and service node computers. To configure the cluster controller and service node computers 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. The Apple Qmaster Sharing pane appears. 2 Select the “Share this computer” checkbox. All other settings in this window should be correct by default: • The “as QuickCluster with services” option should be selected. • Rendering should not be selected. • Compressor should be selected. • “Require these services to only be used in managed clusters” should not be selected. • A default name for this QuickCluster appears in the “Identify this QuickCluster as” text area. • “Include unmanaged services from other computers” should be selected. • “Require password” should not be selected. For more information about these settings, see About Basic Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window. 3 Click OK. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 357This creates a QuickCluster with this computer as its controller and one instance of processing services. For information about multiple service instances, see Using Virtual Clusters to Make the Most of Multicore Computers. Stage 3: Adding Service Nodes to a Cluster Do the following on each computer that you would like to make an unmanaged service node on your cluster. To add a service node to a cluster 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. The Apple Qmaster Sharing pane appears. 2 Select “Share this computer” and “as Services only.” All other settings in this window should be correct by default: • Rendering and Compressor should both be selected. • “Require these services to only be used in managed clusters” should not be selected. • All other settings are disabled. For more information about these settings, see About Basic Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window. 3 Click OK. This creates a service node that will automatically process jobs submitted to the QuickCluster you set up in Stage 2: Configuring a QuickCluster. Stage 4: Creating and Submitting a Batch In the Compressor Batch window or in the Apple Qmaster window, create a batch with one or more jobs. See Finalizing Jobs and Submitting Batches or the Apple Qmaster User Manual for details. To submit the batch 1 Do one of the following: • If you are using Compressor: In the Compressor Batch window, click Submit, and in the resulting dialog, use the Cluster pop-up menu to choose the cluster you created in stage 2. • If you are using Apple Qmaster: In the Apple Qmaster window, choose the cluster you created in stage 2 from the Submit To pop-up menu. 2 Click Submit. 358 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingThe distributed processing system processes the batch. The Interfaces in the Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing System The Apple Qmaster system is a suite of applications that work together to provide maximum power and flexibility for distributed processing. The elements of the system can be combined in a variety of ways to suit your needs. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 359In general, you use the Apple Qmaster Sharing window in Compressor to configure service nodes and cluster controllers and to create service nodes for This Computer Plus clusters and QuickClusters, which provide what most users need. System administrators use Apple Qadministrator for advanced cluster creation and control. Client users use Compressor or Apple Qmaster to submit batches of jobs for processing. Finally, Share Monitor can be used by both administrators and client users to monitor and manage batches. Apple Qadministrator Share Monitor QuickCluster Users: Administrators and client users Use to: Monitor batches that have been sent to clusters Compressor Users: Administrators Use to: Create service nodes and cluster controllers Users: Administrators Use to: Assemble clusters of service nodes and cluster controllers Compressor or Apple Qmaster Users: Client users Use to: Submit jobs to clusters for processing Note: It is possible to create a simple (personal) distributed processing system and skip Apple Qadministrator altogether. See Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus and Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClustersfor more information. See Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor for information on all of its settings. 360 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingApple Qadministrator Use the Apple Qadministrator application to manually create and modify Apple Qmaster clusters. Apple Qadministrator can be used on any computer that is on the same network as the cluster you want to administer. With the administrator password (if one was created), you can also use Apple Qadministrator to see and modify existing clusters on the network. Note: Most users will not need to use Apple Qadministrator to create or manage their clusters, instead using This Computer Plus and QuickClusters. Use Apple Qadministrator to assemble clusters: Drag available service nodes to assign them to a cluster. For details about using Apple Qadministrator, see the Apple Qadministrator User Manual. To open Apple Qadministrator µ In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Administer Clusters. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 361The Apple Qadministrator window appears. If a password was created for the currently selected cluster, you will not be able to see or modify the cluster until you click the Lock button and then enter the password in the dialog that appears. 362 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingCompressor and Apple Qmaster as Client Interfaces Client computer users use either Compressor or Apple Qmaster to submit batches for processing. Batch Batch Batch Batch Use Apple Qmaster to submit a batch to a cluster: Cluster A Cluster B Network Use Compressor to submit a batch to a cluster: Using Compressor Use the Cluster pop-up menu in the Compressor Batch window to choose a cluster for any given batch. For more information on submitting batches with Compressor, see Submitting a Batch. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 363Using Apple Qmaster The Apple Qmaster application is the application that you use to submit distributed processing jobs from digital visual effects software packages such as Shake, Autodesk Maya, and any UNIX command-line program. You can use any of the following workflows in Apple Qmaster: • For Shake processing batches, you can drag Shake files into the Apple Qmaster window. A default script for submitting the jobs is automatically created. In Apple Qmaster, you can then specify certain details, such as which cluster to use, and make adjustments to certain settings. • For Maya batches, there is also a special interface within Apple Qmaster for submitting and customizing Maya jobs. • You can use the Generic Render command in Apple Qmaster for the distributed processing of projects from other frame-based rendering applications (such as After Effects and LightWave). For complete information about the Apple Qmaster application, see the Apple Qmaster User Manual. To open Apple Qmaster µ In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Create Rendering Jobs. The Apple Qmaster window appears. 364 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingShare Monitor As an administrator, you can use Share Monitor to track the progress of all the batch activity for all the clusters on your network. You can see how close to completion each job is, along with other details, and you can cancel, pause, and resume batches as well. If you are a client user, you can use Share Monitor to view and manage your own batches. Cluster Use Share Monitor to see information about batches that have been sent to specified clusters: Status of batches Status of batches Cluster Network For complete information about Share Monitor, see the Share Monitor User Manual. To open Share Monitor Do one of the following: µ Submit a batch with Compressor or Apple Qmaster. The Share Monitor window opens automatically depending on your preference setting. µ Configure and submit a Share menu option from Final Cut Pro or Motion. Share Monitor opens in the Dock where you can select it to open it. µ Click the Share Monitor button in the Apple Qmaster window or in the Compressor Batch window. µ In Apple Qadministrator, choose Cluster > Show Share Monitor. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 365Share Monitor opens. Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor Use the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor to activate, create, or make changes to Apple Qmaster cluster-controlling and processing services (including passwords and scratch storage locations). Use the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor to configure service nodes and cluster controllers: Service node Cluster controller For details about using the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor, see Options in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor. Also see the Apple Qmaster User Manual for more information, including information about creating an extended node cluster that uses nodes without Apple Qmaster installed. To open the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor 1 Open Compressor. 366 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing2 Choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. The Apple Qmaster Sharing window appears. After you configure the Setup and Advanced panes, click OK to apply the settings. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. About Basic Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window You can use the Setup pane within the Apple Qmaster Sharing window to configure your distributed processing system. Sharing Settings • Share this computer: Select this checkbox to share this computer using one of the three options below. Deselect this option to not share this computer. • as QuickCluster with services: Select this option to create an “instant” cluster with unmanaged services. See Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters for more information. • as Services and cluster controller: Select this option to define this computer as a cluster controller when building a cluster in Apple Qadministrator. See Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator for more information. • as Services only: Select this option to make this computer a service node only. Service nodes perform the processing of batches. They can be included in This Computer Plus clusters, QuickClusters, or in managed clusters. See Managed vs. Unmanaged Services for more information. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 367Services Settings • Rendering: Use this checkbox to enable or disable the Rendering service. Click its Options button to open a dialog in which you can adjust the number of instances of a processing service. For more information, see Using Virtual Clusters to Make the Most of Multicore Computers. • Compressor: Use this checkbox to enable or disable the Compressor service. Click its Options button to open a dialog in which you can adjust the number of instances of a processing service. For more information, see Using Virtual Clusters to Make the Most of Multicore Computers. • Require these services to only be used in managed clusters: Use this checkbox to make the shared service unmanaged (the default) or managed. For more information, see Managed vs. Unmanaged Services. QuickCluster Settings • Identify this QuickCluster as: Use this field to change the name of a QuickCluster. For more information about QuickClusters, see Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters. • Include unmanaged services from other computers: Select this checkbox to have this QuickCluster automatically use the available unmanaged computers on your network for distributed processing. For more information on this option, see Managed vs. Unmanaged Services. Security Settings • Require password: If you want to control who is able to include a specific service node or cluster controller in a cluster, select this checkbox and enter a password in the dialog that opens. For more information, see Setting a Service Password for Including a Computer in a Cluster. 368 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingAbout Advanced Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window You can use the Advanced pane within the Apple Qmaster Sharing window to further configure your distributed processing system. Advanced Service Settings Use these features to schedule service restarts and service availability. • Restart all services every 24 hours: Selecting the “Restart all services every 24 hours” checkbox ensures a robust distributed processing system. Refreshing the services periodically prevents increased virtual memory sizes and memory leaks in third-party software. • Set schedule for unmanaged services: If you enabled unmanaged services, you can open a calendar interface and schedule the availability of these services to the distributed processing system. For information on using the calendar interface, see Scheduling Service Availability. Shared Cluster Storage Use these features to configure scratch storage for this computer’s cluster controller. For more information on cluster storage, see Using Cluster Storage. • Delete files older than N days: Enter the number of days temporary process files may remain on the cluster’s scratch location before they are automatically deleted. If you anticipate a transcoding session that will last up to seven days or longer, you must adjust this value. • Storage location: Shows the temporary cluster storage location. Click Set to choose a local folder directory to change the scratch location for the cluster’s temporary process files. See Using Cluster Storage for more information. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 369Network Use these features to configure network settings. • Allow discovery via Bonjour: By default, this checkbox is selected to have the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system use the Bonjour networking technology. You can deselect the “Allow discovery via Bonjour” checkbox for enhanced security. This will prevent detection of your computer over a Bonjour network. This feature requires Mac OS X v10.4 or later. • Use network interfaces: Restrict distributed processing activity to a particular network interface card by choosing it from this pop-up menu. If you do this on a service node computer, use a different computer to submit Compressor jobs and batches. • Enable Port Range: You can define which ports Apple Qmaster uses for service advertisements with the Enable Port Range checkbox and text fields. For more information, see Defining Ports for Service Advertisements. Extras Use these features to configure additional settings. • Log service activity to file: If this checkbox is selected, an activity log is created and updated regularly with information about the Apple Qmaster actions on this computer. Logs are stored in /Library/Application Support/Apple Qmaster/Logs. To turn this feature off, deselect the checkbox. Note: You can also access this log information using the Log button in Apple Qadministrator or by clicking Show Log in the Share Monitor Show Info window. • Maximum Active Targets: By default, a cluster can process up to 40 targets at one time. To change the maximum number of targets processed at the same time between two or more jobs, enter a number from 1 to 999. • Identify this computer to Qadministrator as: By default, a computer is identified on the network by its computer name (as it is entered in the Sharing pane of System Preferences). You can change this name to something more meaningful if you like, since it is the name used to identify this computer in the Apple Qadministrator application. If you are setting up a managed cluster controller, this is the name that will appear in the Apple Qadministrator Controller pop-up menu. General Information About Clusters Once your network is set up and you have installed the necessary components, you are ready to create distributed processing clusters. 370 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingThere are three approaches you can take to creating a cluster: • Use This Computer Plus: Using This Computer Plus to create a cluster is the easiest approach you can take to create a distributed processing system. You simply install Compressor, configured as a service node, on any computers you want to perform processing duties. For more information, see Getting Started Quickly Using This Computer Plus. • Create a QuickCluster: Creating a QuickCluster allows you to quickly configure a distributed processing system with a separate computer as the cluster controller (This Computer Plus clusters use the same computer you submit the batch from as the cluster controller). This is particularly useful when you have multiple clients submitting to the cluster. For more information, see Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters. • Manually create a cluster: Large installations can manually create clusters for use by their clients. For more information, see Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator. If you have questions about any concepts and terms used here, see Distributed Processing Basics. Note: If you are an Apple Qmaster user and you want to create a cluster that includes computers that do not have Apple Qmaster installed, see the Apple Qmaster User Manual for instructions. Options in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window of Compressor Following are optional settings you may want to use. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. For a complete list of the options and settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor, see About Basic Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window and About Advanced Settings in the Apple Qmaster Sharing Window. Setting the Name By default, a computer is identified on the network by its computer name (as it is entered in the Sharing pane in System Preferences). You can change this name to something more meaningful if you like, since it is the name used to identify this computer in the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system. If you are setting up a QuickCluster, this is the name that will appear in the Compressor Cluster pop-up menu or the Apple Qmaster Submit To pop-up menu. If you are setting up a managed cluster controller, this is the name that will appear in the Apple Qadministrator Controller pop-up menu. To enter a name for a QuickCluster µ Enter the new name for the cluster in the “Identify this QuickCluster as” field. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 371To enter a name for a cluster controller for use with Apple Qadministrator 1 Click Advanced to open the Advanced pane. 2 Enter the new name in the “Identify this computer to Apple Qadministrator as” field. Unmanaged Services You can enable unmanaged services for a QuickCluster. For more information, see Managed vs. Unmanaged Services. Setting the Password To add a password requirement, select the “Require password” checkbox. • If you are setting up a QuickCluster: Other users will be required to enter this password before being allowed to submit requests to this computer. • If you are setting up a cluster to use with Apple Qadministrator: An administrator will be required to enter this password before being allowed to add this computer to a cluster. For more information, see Setting a Service Password for Including a Computer in a Cluster. (If you configure the computer as both a cluster controller and a service node, this password is used for both.) Setting Cluster Storage You can change the default scratch storage location for processing that occurs on this computer in the Advanced pane. For more information, see Using Cluster Storage. Managed vs. Unmanaged Services You have flexibility in how you build clusters for distributed processing with Compressor or Apple Qmaster. When you configure processing services, you can choose to make them either managed services or unmanaged services (the default). Managed Services Managed services can be assigned to serve one particular cluster controller. Once assigned, managed services remain exclusively dedicated to that cluster until they are removed with the Apple Qadministrator application. QuickClusters cannot use managed services from other nodes, except in the case of extended node clusters. For more information, see the Apple Qadministrator User Manual. See the Apple Qmaster User Manual for more information on extended node clusters. 372 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingUnmanaged Services Unmanaged services automatically assign themselves to the first available This Computer Plus cluster or QuickCluster with enabled unmanaged service support. QuickClusters listen for unmanaged service advertisements and may mark or remember any of them for later use. An unmanaged service remains dedicated to its This Computer Plus cluster or QuickCluster only long enough to finish the current job. Once the current job is complete, an unmanaged service is once again a “free agent” and advertises its availability to all This Computer Plus clusters and QuickClusters. Note: Managed clusters (those created with Apple Qadministrator) can also use unmanaged services. When unmanaged service support is enabled on a managed cluster, the cluster automatically adds any available unmanaged services in addition to its managed services (that were explicitly added using Apple Qadministrator). Enabling Unmanaged Services on QuickClusters Follow these steps to enable unmanaged services on QuickClusters. To enable unmanaged services on QuickClusters 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Select the “Share this computer” checkbox and the “as QuickCluster with services” button to create a QuickCluster. 3 Select “Include unmanaged services from other computers.” 4 Click OK. For more information on creating QuickClusters, see Getting Started Quickly Using QuickClusters. Enabling Unmanaged Services on Managed Clusters Follow these steps to enable unmanaged services on managed clusters. To enable unmanaged services on managed clusters 1 In Apple Qadministrator, select a cluster in the Cluster list, or click the Add (+) button to add a new cluster. 2 Select “Allow use of unmanaged services.” For more information on creating managed clusters, see Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 373Managing Processing Services Follow the instructions below to manage the processing services on a computer in a cluster. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. To set managed processing services 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Do one of the following: • Select the “Require these services to only be used in managed clusters” checkbox to use this computer only in managed clusters. • Deselect the “Require these services to only be used in managed clusters” checkbox to use this computer in unmanaged as well as managed clusters. 3 Click OK. To turn off processing services 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 In the Services section, do one of the following: • To turn off Compressor services: Deselect the Compressor checkbox. • To turn off Apple Qmaster services: Deselect the Rendering checkbox. 3 Click OK. Turning Cluster Controller Services On or Off Use the Services area in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor to turn the cluster controller on or off on a specific computer. To turn on cluster controller services 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer to open the Apple Qmaster Sharing window. 2 Select the “Share this computer” checkbox, then select one of the following buttons: • as QuickCluster with services: Select this option to create an “instant” cluster with unmanaged services. • as Services and cluster controller: Select this option to build a cluster in Apple Qadministrator. (See Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator for more information.) Also see Managed vs. Unmanaged Services for more information. 3 In the Services area, select the Rendering and/or Compressor checkbox. 4 Click OK. 374 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingThe cluster is enabled, making this computer a cluster controller. To turn off cluster controller services 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer to open the Apple Qmaster Sharing window. 2 Deselect the “Share this computer” checkbox and click OK. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. Optionally, you can turn off the controller and just make the node a service node. To do this, select “as Services only” in the “Share this computer” section. Using Virtual Clusters to Make the Most of Multicore Computers You can adjust the number of instances of a processing service, essentially creating virtual clusters on individual computers. For processor-intensive work, having multiple instances may increase speed and efficiency, depending on the processing application. Too many instances, however, may actually decrease speed and efficiency. A general rule you can use when choosing the number of instances is to allow two GB of memory for each instance. If you have a computer with eight GB of memory that offers eight instances in the pop-up menu, choosing four instances should provide good results. This number can vary widely though, depending on whether this computer is also being used for other duties. Note: By default, the Apple Qmaster system creates one Rendering service instance for each processor. Rendering services are for Shake (with Apple Qmaster), Autodesk Maya, and other UNIX command-line programs, as opposed to Compressor services, which are solely for Compressor distributed processing. Consult the documentation that came with the application to see if using each processor individually is ideal. To change the number of instances of processing services on a computer 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Select Compressor or Rendering in the Services section, then click its Options button. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 3753 In the dialog that appears, choose the number of instances from the pop-up menu and click OK. Choose the number of instances from the pop-up menu. 4 Click OK in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window. Note: The Service Options dialog is also used to add extended nodes to a cluster, as described in the Apple Qmaster User Manual. Setting a Service Password for Including a Computer in a Cluster If you want to control who is able to include a specific service node or cluster controller in a cluster, you can create a password called a service password for the computer. Note: A service password can be stored in a user’s keychain. To set or change a service password 1 On the computer designated as the service node or cluster controller, open Compressor and choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Do one of the following: • To require a password: Select Require Password. • To change an existing password: Click Change Password. The password dialog opens. 3 Enter and verify a password, then click OK. 376 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing4 Click OK in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window to apply this change. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. Scheduling Service Availability If you enabled unmanaged services, you can open a calendar interface and schedule the availability of these services to the distributed processing system. The calendar interface of the work schedule dialog contains several useful features. You can use the following controls to constrain the availability of unmanaged services for each day of the week: • On/Off pop-up menu: Use this pop-up menu to turn services on or off for a particular day of the week. • On: This setting indicates that the services are available for all 24 hours of that particular day. (This is the default setting for all seven days of the week.) • Off: Makes the service unavailable on that day of the week. • On Between: Allows you to enter the period of time the service will be available. • Off Between: Allows you to enter the period of time the service will not be available. • Start time field: Enter a start time. • End time field: Enter an end time. Scheduling Service Availability in the Work Schedule Dialog Follow the steps below to schedule the availability of unmanaged services. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 377To schedule service availability 1 In the Advanced Service Settings area of the Advanced pane within the Apple Qmaster preferences pane, click Set. The work schedule dialog appears. 2 To constrain the availability of the services, choose one of the options from the pop-up menu next to a particular day of the week. See Scheduling Service Availability for details. 3 Enter any constraining time periods in the appropriate start time and end time fields. Note: You must enter valid days and times. The time cannot overlap into the next day in one entry. There must be two entries when the range ends after 12 a.m. For more information, see Setting Availability from Sunday Night to Monday Morning. 4 Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog. 5 Click OK to apply the changes to this computer. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. Setting Availability from Sunday Night to Monday Morning You must enter valid days and times. The time cannot overlap into the next day in one entry. There must be two entries when the range ends after 12 a.m. For example, to set the service availability from 6 p.m. on Sunday to 8 a.m. on Monday, follow the steps below. To provide service availability from Sunday night to Monday morning µ Make both of the following entries: • Sunday: On between 6:00 PM and 12:00 AM • Monday: On between 12:00 AM and 8:00 AM Using Cluster Storage By default, the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system saves temporary process files in the /Library/Application Support/Apple Qmaster/Storage directory on the cluster controller. You can also choose any other location on a local disk for this scratch storage. Computers in the cluster will access this location as needed. Adjusting Cluster Storage Settings Follow the steps below to change scratch storage settings for a cluster. To change cluster storage settings 1 On the cluster controller, open Compressor and choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Click Advanced to open the Advanced pane. 378 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing3 Configure the following optional settings: • To change the cluster storage location: Click the “Storage location” Set button, then navigate to the folder in the dialog and click Choose. Note: If you are using the default This Computer setting in the Cluster pop-up menu in the Compressor Batch window and you choose Cluster Storage as the destination, the output file will be copied to the Source location. • To change how often cluster storage files are deleted: Enter a new number in the “Delete files older than N Days” field. Click Set to open a dialog for choosing a new storage folder. Enter a new number to change how often cluster storage files are deleted. 4 Click OK to apply the changes. Important: If you are making changes to existing settings and this computer is already providing processing services, clicking OK immediately resets this computer’s services. If this computer is also the cluster controller, any current jobs are terminated. Cluster Storage Capacity If you are processing large source media files that exceed the available storage space on the startup disk, you may run out of storage space on that disk. There are a number of things you can do to address this. • Change the cluster storage location to a disk with more free space. For more information, see Adjusting Cluster Storage Settings. • Configure cluster storage settings to delete files more frequently. For more information, see Adjusting Cluster Storage Settings. • Compressor users can set Cluster Options preferences (choose Compressor > Preferences) to “Never copy source to cluster.” For more information, see Setting Compressor Preferences. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 379Cleaning Up Cluster Storage If you are using cluster storage and an error occurs, partial files may be left on the designated cluster storage location. Check the designated cluster storage location to make sure no partial media files are left there. If you find partial media files, delete them and submit the job again. QuickTime Reference Movies If you submit a reference movie for distributed processing, the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system will automatically copy the appropriate media files to the processing cluster. For the best performance, you can avoid this file transfer step by making sure that the media files specified in the reference movie are available to each node of the Apple Qmaster cluster. Defining Ports for Service Advertisements You can define which ports Apple Qmaster uses for service advertisements with the Enable Port Range checkbox and text fields in the Network section of the Advanced pane within the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor. To define ports for Apple Qmaster service advertisements 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Share This Computer. 2 Click Advanced to open the Advanced pane. 3 Select Enable Port Range. 4 In the From field, enter any integer value between 50,000 and 65,535 to set the start of the range. 5 In the “Number of ports” field, enter the size of the range, such as 1000. Recovery and Failure Notification Features The Apple Qmaster distributed processing system has a number of built-in features designed to attempt recovery if there is a problem, and to notify you when the system attempts a recovery. Recovery Features The recovery actions described next occur automatically if failures occur in the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system. There is no need for you, as the administrator, to enable or configure these features. If a Service Stops Unexpectedly If either the cluster controller service or the processing enabled on a service node stops unexpectedly, the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system restarts the service. To avoid the risk of endless stopping and restarting, the system restarts the failed service a maximum of four times. The first two times, it restarts the service right away. If the service stops abruptly a third or fourth time, the system restarts the service only if it had been running for at least 10 seconds before it stopped. 380 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingIf a Batch Is Interrupted When a service stops suddenly while in the middle of processing an Apple Qmaster batch, the cluster controller resubmits the interrupted batch in a way that prevents the reprocessing of any batch segments that were complete before the service stopped. The cluster controller delays resuming the batch for about a minute from the time it loses contact with the service. If a Batch Fails When the service is running, but one batch fails to process, a service exception occurs. When this happens, the cluster controller resubmits the batch immediately. The cluster controller resubmits the batch a maximum of two times. If the job fails on the third submission, the distributed processing system stops resubmitting the job. In Share Monitor, the job’s status is set to Failed. Failure Notification There are two different ways that the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system can provide information about a problem. Email Notification When a processing service stops unexpectedly, Apple Qmaster sends a notification email to the address that was entered in the Apple Qadministrator Cluster Preferences dialog for that cluster. If no address was entered there, the email is sent to the address in the Internet settings of the computer on which the cluster controller is enabled. Note: Apple Qmaster does not currently support SMTP servers that require authentication. Log Files for Individual Jobs or Batches If a particular job or batch fails, a log file is generated that describes this failure. You can find the name and location of this log file through Share Monitor by selecting the batch or job, clicking the Show Info icon, then clicking the Show Log button. Notification and Log Labels The following table lists the service labels used in the email notifications and logs. Processing service type Notification label Local Compressor service servicecontroller:com.apple.stomp.transcoder Distributed Compressor service servicecontroller:com.apple.stomp.transcoderx Distributed Apple Qmaster servicecontroller:com.apple.qmaster.executor service Creating Clusters with Apple Qadministrator Once you configure managed service nodes or cluster controllers, they are visible in Apple Qadministrator, which you use to create and modify Apple Qmaster clusters. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 381There are two basic steps to creating a managed cluster with Apple Qadministrator. First, you create a new cluster and choose the cluster controller. Then, you add service nodes to the cluster. • Stage 1: Creating a New Cluster • Stage 2: Assigning Service Nodes Stage 1: Creating a New Cluster Use the following steps to create a cluster with Apple Qadministrator. For more information, see the Apple Qadministrator User Manual. To create a new cluster 1 In Compressor, choose Apple Qmaster > Administer Clusters to open Apple Qadministrator, then do the following: a Click the Add (+) button. b Select Untitled Cluster and rename it. ... then rename the Untitled Cluster. Click the Add button... 2 From the Controller pop-up menu, choose a cluster controller from those available on the network. Use this pop-up menu to choose a cluster controller. Note: If a password was created for the cluster controller in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window, a password authentication dialog appears. 382 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing3 Optionally, create cluster passwords by clicking the Security tab and selecting and entering the passwords you want. • Administrator Password: If you create this password, administrators will need to know it in order to modify this cluster and to view this cluster’s batches in Share Monitor. • User Password: If you create this password, users will need to know it in order to submit batches to this cluster and to view those batches in Share Monitor. Stage 2: Assigning Service Nodes Use the following steps to assign service nodes to a cluster. To add a service node to a cluster 1 If the Qmaster Service Browser is not already displayed, click the disclosure triangle to see it. Click this disclosure triangle to see available nodes. 2 Add service nodes to the new cluster by dragging them from the Qmaster Service Browser list at the bottom of the window to the cluster’s service nodes list. If there is a closed lock icon next to a computer name, click the lock and enter the password that was assigned to it in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor. Otherwise, you won’t be able to drag that service node to the cluster. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 383Service nodes that are already assigned to another cluster are not shown. Drag nodes to this list from the Service Browser list. Clicking this disclosure triangle displays each instance of the services set in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window for this node. Note: The computer names you see at the top level of the Name columns may appear in one of three formats, depending on your configuration: the computer name (for example, Lemur node), the Apple networking name (for example, Lemur-node.local), or the network address for the computer (for example, 02030b-dhcp45.company.com). 3 When you have finished adding service nodes, click Apply. Your cluster is now ready to process batches. Note: Although Apple Qadministrator currently allows you to create a cluster with unmanaged services, valid clusters require at least one managed service for the cluster to be viewable in Apple Qmaster, Compressor, and Share Monitor. Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake If you cannot consolidate all of the necessary source files (Shake scripts, media files, and so on) on a single-cluster storage volume, follow the instructions below. • Stage 1: Turning Off the Shake UNC Setting • Stage 2: Turning On Personal File Sharing • Stage 3: Mounting the Media Storage Volumes • Stage 4: Submitting Processing Jobs in the Sample Part-Time Distributed Processing Setup 384 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing• Stage 5: Specifying Media File and Script Locations Stage 1: Turning Off the Shake UNC Setting To make sharing and volume mounting work smoothly in this setup, you need to turn off the Shake UNC setting on each computer. The UNC setting uses the entire file pathname, with the network address, in a convention that starts with //ComputerName/DriveName/path. You don’t want Shake to use this filenaming convention because it conflicts with the file sharing and volume mounting used in this setup. Note: All the media volumes should have the same name. In the three steps below, you make this change in a Shake startup .h file. As described in the Shake documentation, the startup .h files, located in the startup directory, are used to customize Shake settings (similar to setting preferences). To turn off the UNC setting, do the following on each of the computers 1 Log in as the user who will use Shake on the computer. 2 Double-click the Terminal icon in /Applications/Utilities/ to open a Terminal window. 3 Enter these two command lines in the Terminal window, pressing Return after each command line: mkdir -p ~/nreal/include/startup/ echo 'script.uncFileNames = 0;' > ~/nreal/include/startup/UNC_off.h Stage 2: Turning On Personal File Sharing On each computer, turn on Personal File Sharing. This allows the computers to share the media volumes. To turn on Personal File Sharing 1 Open System Preferences. 2 Click Sharing. 3 Select the File Sharing checkbox. Stage 3: Mounting the Media Storage Volumes Follow the instructions below so that all the computers in the cluster are mounting all the media volumes in the cluster. To mount the media storage volumes 1 On each computer, log in as the administrator. (The first user account you create when you set up Mac OS X is an administrator account.) 2 On each computer in the group, use the Connect to Server command in the Finder’s Go menu to mount each media volume. 3 Enter another computer’s name in the Connect to Server dialog. Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing 3854 Choose the associated media volume as the volume you want to mount. 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 until all the computers are mounting all the media volumes in the cluster. Stage 4: Submitting Processing Jobs in the Sample Part-Time Distributed Processing Setup After you finish Stage 3: Mounting the Media Storage Volumes, each one of these computers can be used to submit jobs for distributed processing. Because of the way access has been configured in Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake, all file pathnames are conveniently consistent and simple for the purposes of specifying them in Compressor, in Shake scripts, and in Apple Qmaster, assuming that: • Users place the source media on a mounted media volume (one of the FireWire drives). • Users place the Shake scripts on a mounted media volume. • All folders and files on the shared media volumes have read-and-write access enabled for everyone (for Owner, Group, and Others). You can configure this access setting by selecting the folder or file and choosing File > Get Info. These three assumptions are important because they ensure that all the computers have read-and-write access to all the source files and output destinations. Stage 5: Specifying Media File and Script Locations The following additional configuration guidelines apply to anyone using Shake (or any other UNIX-based rendering applications): • Specifying the Media File Locations in Shake Scripts: As you follow the steps in Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake, all the Shake render scripts should specify their source media (File In) locations and output (File Out) destinations as /Volumes/MediaDiskName/ (for example, /Volumes/Media3/). • Specifying Shake Script Locations in Apple Qmaster: As you follow the steps in Setting Up for Part-Time Distributed Processing with Shake, all the Shake script locations should be specified in Apple Qmaster as /Volumes/MediaDiskName/ScriptFilename (for example, /Volumes/Media3/Script.shk). 386 Chapter 29 Apple Qmaster and Distributed ProcessingCompressor keyboard shortcuts can maximize your efficiency with Compressor. This appendix covers the following: • General Compressor Keyboard Shortcuts (p. 387) • Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts (p. 388) General Compressor Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcut Function Brings the History window to the front. 1 Brings the Preview window to the front. 2 Brings the Settings tab to the front. 3 Brings the Destinations tab to the front. 4 Closes the current window. shift W Show/hide the Batch window’s toolbar. option T Revert to the original window layout. shift control U Opens the Preferences window. , Creates a new batch. The Batch Template Chooser appears unless it has been disabled. N Creates a new batch with the Batch Template Chooser appearing, even if it has been disabled. shift N Saves the current batch. S Saves the current batch as a new batch. shift S 387 Keyboard Shortcuts A AppendixKeyboard shortcut Function Opens a saved batch. O Closes the current batch tab. W Saves the current batch as a new template. option S Imports a source asset to create a new job in the batch. I Opens dialog to replace the source of the current job. shift I Creates a new surround sound group job in the batch. control I Creates a new image sequence job in the batch. option I Submits a batch from an open Droplet. return Removes a selected item from the Batch, Preview, or Destinations window. delete Navigates up list items in the Batch, Destinations, Settings, and Filters lists. Navigates down list items in the Batch, Destinations, Settings, and Filters lists. Navigates through text fields in all panes. tab Opens the Mount Cluster Storage dialog. shift M Opens Compressor Help. shift ? Preview Window Keyboard Shortcuts Keyboard shortcut Function Starts fast reverse motion. J Starts fast forward motion. L Moves the clip backward frame by frame. Moves the clip forward frame by frame. Starts or stops clip playback. space Adds or removes a marker. M 388 Appendix A Keyboard ShortcutsKeyboard shortcut Function When the playhead is positioned on a marker, opens the Edit Marker dialog. E Sets an In point for the clip. I Sets an Out point for the clip. O Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 389If you are having trouble working with Compressor, look here for answers to your questions. This appendix covers the following: • Resources for Solving Problems (p. 391) • Solutions to Common Problems (p. 391) • Contacting AppleCare Support (p. 393) Resources for Solving Problems If you run into problems while working with Compressor, there are several resources you can use to find a solution. • This appendix: This appendix includes information about some of the most frequent issues users encounter. • Release Notes: The Release Notes document, available from the Help menu, provides up-to-date information that didn’t make it into the manual. Be sure to consult this document as soon as you install or upgrade Compressor. • AppleCare Knowledge Base: AppleCare Support maintains a database of common support issues that is updated and expanded to include new issues as they arise. This is an excellent, free resource for Compressor users. To access the AppleCare Knowledge Base, go to the AppleCare support page at http://www.apple.com/support. • AppleCare Support: There are a variety of support options available to Compressor customers. For more information, see the Apple service and support guide that was included with your Compressor package. Solutions to Common Problems The following tips address some common issues. 391 Solving Problems B AppendixQuickTime Reference Movies If you submit a reference movie for distributed processing, the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system will automatically copy the appropriate media files to the processing cluster. For the best performance, you can avoid this file transfer step by making sure that the media files specified in the reference movie are available to each node of the Apple Qmaster cluster. For more information, see How the Apple Qmaster System Distributes Batches. Cluster Settings for Extended Transcoding Sessions If you anticipate a transcoding session that will last up to seven days or longer, you must make an adjustment in the Advanced section of the Apple Qmaster preferences pane. By default, temporary process files may remain on a cluster’s scratch location for seven days before they are automatically deleted. You can increase this value (the number of days) in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor. Cleaning Up Cluster Storage If you are using cluster storage and an error occurs, partial files may be left on the designated cluster storage location. Check the designated cluster storage location to make sure no partial media files are left there. If you find partial media files, delete them and submit the job again. Using Apple Qmaster with an NFS Server By default, Apple Qmaster uses /etc/exports to define its Cluster Storage export. This can cause a conflict if you defined an NFS export in your local NetInfo database. When you enable a controller using Apple Qmaster 2 or later, Apple Qmaster uses /etc/exports, not entries defined in your NetInfo database. To work around this issue, either move the exports to /etc/exports, or move the controller to a computer that doesn’t export anything. Apple Qmaster Distributed Processing and Xsan Here are some tips on using the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system with Xsan. Restarting Apple Qmaster and Xsan Using previous versions of Apple Qmaster distributed processing on an Xsan may cause mounting problems when restarting an Apple Qmaster distributed processing cluster controller. Restart Apple Qmaster and Xsan computers in the following order 1 Turn off the cluster controller by deselecting “Share this computer” and clicking OK in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window, opened by choosing Share This Computer from the Apple Qmaster menu in Compressor. 2 Restart the Apple Qmaster cluster controller computer. 3 Wait for the Xsan volume to mount on the desktop. 392 Appendix B Solving Problems4 Select “Share this computer,” select either “as QuickCluster with services” or “as Services and cluster controller,” then click OK in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window to restart the controller. Xsan Compatibility Xsan 1.3 is not compatible with Compressor and the Apple Qmaster distributed processing system when Xsan media drives are used for cluster (scratch) storage. To use Xsan with Apple Qmaster 2.3, update to Xsan 1.4. To download and install Xsan 1.4 µ Go to http://www.apple.com/support/xsan. Compressor Command-Line Usage Requires Login Although it is possible to use the command line to run an Apple Qmaster distributed processing network, each Compressor service node (each computer providing Compressor distributed processing services) must be logged in (with a Mac OS X user name and password) for full functionality. Contacting AppleCare Support Information about the support options available from Apple can be found at the AppleCare Support site at http://www.apple.com/support/compressor. Whatever your issue, it’s a good idea to have the following information immediately available when you contact Apple for support. The more of this information you have to give to the support agents, the faster they will be able to address your issue. • Detailed notes of the exact steps taken up to the point where the issue occurred. It’s important to provide step-by-step instructions to support advisors so they can understand and reproduce what you’re experiencing. Be sure to include the exact text of any alert messages you see. • The version of Mac OS X you have installed. This information can be viewed by choosing About This Mac from the Apple menu. • The version of Compressor you have installed, including updates if applicable. The version number can be viewed by choosing Compressor > About Compressor. • The model of computer you are using. • The amount of RAM installed in your computer, and how much is available to Compressor. You can find out how much RAM is installed by choosing About This Mac from the Apple menu. • The format and specifications of any media files (video, audio, or photo) that you are working with, if applicable. • What other third-party hardware is connected to or installed in the computer, and who the manufacturers are. Include hard disks, graphics cards, and so on. Appendix B Solving Problems 393• Any third-party plug-ins or other software installed along with Compressor. • Have your computer serial number available when contacting support; the support advisor will need your computer serial number to view your system profile. This information can be viewed by choosing About This Mac from the Apple menu and clicking More Info. Choose Send to Apple from the File menu in System Profiler to make this information available to Apple. AppleCare Support can be reached online at http://www.apple.com/support/compressor. There is also an item in the Help menu that will take you directly to the AppleCare website. To go to the AppleCare website from within Compressor µ Choose Help > Service and Support. 394 Appendix B Solving ProblemsIf you are accustomed to doing your work from Terminal shells, and you need or prefer to run Compressor from the command line with minimal use of application interfaces, this appendix is for you. This appendix covers the following: • Shell Commands for Submitting Compressor Jobs (p. 395) Shell Commands for Submitting Compressor Jobs You can run the Compressor application from the command line using the Compressor command, with a number of command-line options for submitting jobs. In the command-line descriptions below, angle brackets < > indicate a mandatory argument in a command, and brackets [ ] indicate an optional argument. Synopsis Below is a synopsis of the command for submitting a job to a cluster. The Compressor command is located in /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/. Compressor [-clustername ][-clusterid ] [-batchfilepath ] [-batchname ] [-priority ] [-jobpath ] [-settingpath ] [-destinationpath ] [-info ] [-timeout ] [-help] [-show] In this example, -jobpath, -settingpath, and -destinationpath, in that order, can be repeated as many times as the number of jobs you want to submit. Note: Not all the options are necessary. For example, you can specify the cluster either by its -clustername or by its -clusterid. You do not need to specify both. If both are specified, only -clusterid is used. Additionally, if you specify -batchfilepath, then -jobpath, -settingpath, and -destinationpath are not necessary because the previously saved batch file already contains information about the job, settings, and destination. Example of -batchfilepath: 395 Using the Command Line C AppendixCompressor -clustername "This Computer" -batchfilepath "/Volumes/Hermione/SavedCompressorBatches/FreeChampagne.compressor" Once the job is submitted successfully, this command displays the batch ID (identifier) and job ID (identifier) in the shell, and you can monitor the progress of a batch in Share Monitor. Command Options This table provides information about each of the command options for submitting jobs. Submission command option Description Use to specify the name of the cluster to which you want to send the job. Using the cluster name, Compressor looks for the cluster on the network in order to use it. -clustername User password for the cluster specified by -clusterid or -clustername. -password Use to specify a name for the batch so that you can easily recognize it in Share Monitor. -batchname Optionally, you can use -clusterid to enter the cluster ID (IP address) and port number instead of using -clustername. (When you enter the cluster ID and port number, less time is required to find the cluster on the network.) Enclose the IP address and port as follows: "tcp://:" Also, if your cluster requires a password, you must supply a password that is set for QuickClusters in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window in Compressor, or for manually created clusters, in Apple Qadministrator. The format is -clusterid [username:password]@:. The username is not checked, so it can be any username, but the password must be valid. You can also use -password with -clusterid as follows: -clusterid @: -password Use Compressor -show to see a cluster’s ip address and port number (clusterid). -clusterid -priority Specifies the priority level for a job. -jobpath Specifies the location of the source file. -settingpath Specifies the location of the settings for the job. -destinationpath Specifies the destination file URL for the job. -info Gives detailed information for a batch or a job. Use to specify the number of seconds before Compressor can quit when looking for a cluster. The default value is 30. A value of 0 puts no limit on the time out and allows Compressor to browse the network for as long as it needs to find the cluster. -timeout 396 Appendix C Using the Command LineSubmission command option Description Shows the ID information for the cluster specified with -clustername or -clusterid, or for all clusters if no cluster is specified. -show Displays information regarding the required parameters for the Compressor command. -help Example of Compressor Commands Following are examples of code for submitting common Compressor commands. Cluster Names and IDs on a Local Network The following command lists all of the cluster names and IDs on the local network. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -show -timeout 10 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located (the quotation marks are used because of the space in “Final Cut Pro”). • Shows all cluster names and IDs found. • Sets the command to time out after ten seconds. Submit a Job with No Password The following submits a job to a cluster identified by a name that does not have a password. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -clustername MyCluster -batchname "My First Batch" -jobpath ~/Movies/MySource.mov -settingpath ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting -destinationpath ~/Movies/MyOutput.mp4 -timeout 5 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located. • Sends this job to the cluster named MyCluster. • Assigns the batch name My First Batch (the quotation marks are used because of the spaces). • Finds the MySource.mov file for the job at ~/Movies/MySource.mov. • Uses the MPEG-4 setting at ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting (the “\” character is used in this case to retain the space in “Application Support”). • Writes the output file, named MyOutput.mp4, to the ~/Movies folder. • Sets the command to time out after five seconds of looking for the cluster. Appendix C Using the Command Line 397Submit a Job with a Password The following submits a job to a cluster identified by a name that does have a password. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -clustername MyCluster -password testpassword -batchname "My First Batch" -jobpath ~/Movies/MySource.mov -settingpath ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting -destinationpath ~/Movies/MyOutput.mp4 -timeout 5 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located. • Sends this job to the cluster named MyCluster. • Submits the password “testpassword.” • Assigns the batch name My First Batch. • Finds the MySource.mov file for the job at ~/Movies/MySource.mov. • Uses the MPEG-4 setting at ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting. • Writes the output file, named MyOutput.mp4, to the ~/Movies folder. • Sets the command to time out after five seconds of looking for the cluster. Submit a Job Using a Cluster ID and No Password The following submits a job to a cluster identified by an IP address that does not have a password. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -clusterid "tcp://192.168.1.148:62995" -batchname "My First Batch" -jobpath ~/Movies/MySource.mov -settingpath ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting -destinationpath ~/Movies/MyOutput.mp4 -timeout 5 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located. • Sends this job to the cluster with the IP address of tcp://192.168.1.148 at port 62995. • Assigns the batch name My First Batch. • Finds the MySource.mov file for the job at ~/Movies/MySource.mov. • Uses the MPEG-4 setting at ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting. • Writes the output file, named MyOutput.mp4, to the ~/Movies folder. • Sets the command to time out after five seconds of looking for the cluster. 398 Appendix C Using the Command LineSubmit a Job Using a Cluster ID and an Inline Password The following submits a job to a cluster identified by an IP address, with a user name and an inline password. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -clusterid "tcp://username:testpassword@192.168.1.148:62995" -batchname "My First Batch" -jobpath ~/Movies/MySource.mov -settingpath ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting -destinationpath ~/Movies/MyOutput.mp4 -timeout 5 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located. • Sends this job as “username” with the pasword “testpassword” to the cluster with the IP address of tcp://192.168.1.148 at port 62995. • Assigns the batch name My First Batch. • Finds the MySource.mov file for the job at ~/Movies/MySource.mov. • Uses the MPEG-4 setting at ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting. • Writes the output file, named MyOutput.mp4, to the ~/Movies folder. • Sets the command to time out after five seconds of looking for the cluster. Submit a Job Using a Cluster ID and a Password The following submits a job to a cluster identified by an IP address using a password, but does not specify a user name. /Applications/Compressor.app/Contents/MacOS/Compressor -clusterid "tcp://192.168.1.148:62995" -password testpassword -batchname "My First Batch" -jobpath ~/Movies/MySource.mov -settingpath ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting -destinationpath ~/Movies/MyOutput.mp4 -timeout 5 This command has the following elements: • Identifies where Compressor is located. • Sends this job to the cluster with the IP address of tcp://192.168.1.148 at port 62995 with the pasword “testpassword.” • Assigns the batch name My First Batch. • Finds the MySource.mov file for the job at ~/Movies/MySource.mov. • Uses the MPEG-4 setting at ~/Library/Application\ Support/Compressor/Settings/MPEG-4.setting. • Writes the output file, named MyOutput.mp4, to the ~/Movies folder. • Sets the command to time out after five seconds of looking for the cluster. Appendix C Using the Command Line 399 Share Monitor 4 User ManualCopyright © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement. The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of Compressor, Final Cut Pro, or Motion software may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes, such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services. The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Shift-Option-K) for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Note: Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates to its system software, applications, and Internet sites, images shown in this manual may be slightly different from what you see on your screen. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, the Apple logo, Final Cut, and Final Cut Pro are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products.Preface 5 Welcome to Share Monitor 5 About Share Monitor 5 About the Share Monitor Documentation 6 Additional Resources Chapter 1 7 Using Share Monitor 8 About the Share Monitor Main Window 11 About the Info Window 11 Viewing or Changing the Status of a Submitted Batch 13 Share Monitor and Distributed Processing 14 Share Monitor Preferences 3 ContentsShare Monitor is an easy-to-use application for viewing or adjusting the status of batches and jobs processed by Compressor, Apple Qmaster, Final Cut Pro, and Motion. This preface covers the following: • About Share Monitor (p. 5) • About the Share Monitor Documentation (p. 5) • Additional Resources (p. 6) About Share Monitor You use Share Monitor to monitor the transcoding progress of batches and jobs. You can pause, resume, cancel, and get the status for any submitted batch or any individual job, target, or target segment. You can also use Share Monitor to view detailed history for recently completed batches and jobs. Important: Share Monitor 4 is designed to work closely with Final Cut Pro X and later and Motion 5 and later. All mentions of Final Cut Pro and Motion in this document refer to these versions. About the Share Monitor Documentation The Share Monitor User Manual (this document) describes the Share Monitor application only. For information about Compressor and how to create a complete network for Apple Qmaster processing, see the Compressor User Manual, available in Compressor Help. • Share Monitor User Manual: This brief document describes how to use Share Monitor to monitor the transcoding progress of batches and jobs. • Compressor User Manual: This is a comprehensive document that describes the Compressor interface, commands, and menus and gives step-by-step instructions for using Compressor and accomplishing specific tasks. It also explains how to set up and maintain a distributed processing network for use with Compressor or digital visual effects software packages. It is written for users of all levels of experience. 5 Welcome to Share Monitor Preface• Final Cut Pro Help: This document describes how to share your projects and use Share Monitor to view the progress. • Motion Help: This document describes how to share your projects and use Share Monitor to view the progress. Additional Resources There are a variety of Apple websites that you can visit to find additional information. Compressor Website For general information and updates, as well as the latest news on Compressor, go to: • http://www.apple.com/finalcutpro/compressor Apple Service and Support Websites For software updates and answers to the most frequently asked questions for all Apple products, go to the general Apple Support webpage. You’ll also have access to product specifications, reference documentation, and Apple and third-party product technical articles. • http://www.apple.com/support For software updates, documentation, discussion forums, and answers to the most frequently asked questions for Compressor, go to: • http://www.apple.com/support/compressor 6 Preface Welcome to Share MonitorJust as Printer Setup Utility allows you to view print jobs submitted to a printer, Share Monitor lets you view the status of batches submitted for processing. For example, Share Monitor displays each batch’s name, details of where it originated, the percentage of completion, and the estimated time before completion. Batches not yet running appear as pending. Each batch, job, target, and target segment includes status information and a progress bar, as well as buttons you can use to pause, resume, cancel, and get the status of a transcode that is currently in progress. Note: The most popular use of Share Monitor is viewing the progress of the Compressor transcoding batches and Final Cut Pro or Motion sharing operations. By default, Share Monitor does not automatically open when you submit a Compressor batch. To have Share Monitor open automatically, in Compressor preferences, select “Automatically launch Share Monitor.” See the Compressor User Manual for more information. Share Monitor appears in the Dock when you start a share operation from either Final Cut Pro or Motion. This chapter covers the following: • About the Share Monitor Main Window (p. 8) • About the Info Window (p. 11) • Viewing or Changing the Status of a Submitted Batch (p. 11) • Share Monitor and Distributed Processing (p. 13) • Share Monitor Preferences (p. 14) 7 Using Share Monitor 1About the Share Monitor Main Window Most of the Share Monitor controls are available in the Share Monitor main window. Toolbar buttons User buttons Status buttons Batch display Cluster list The Share Monitor main window includes the following sections: General Interface For details about the toolbar buttons and the batch display, see the next sections. • Batch display: Provides a hierarchical display of batch, job, target, and segment information for current and completed batches. Also includes controls to pause, resume, cancel, and get status for any individual batch, job, target, or segment. • Toolbar: Use the toolbar to adjust the display of items you are monitoring. See Toolbar Buttons for details. • Cluster list: Displays a list of computers available for processing batches, including “This Computer” (the one using Share Monitor) and all enabled Apple Qmaster processing clusters on your network. Select any cluster in the list to monitor its activity. • User buttons: Click the Me button to display batches you submitted. Click All to display all batches for the selected cluster. (For information about permissions and password protection, see the “Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing” chapter in the Compressor User Manual. • Status buttons: Click the Active button to display batches that the selected cluster is currently processing. Click Completed to display batches that the selected cluster has already completed. Click All to display all batches for the selected cluster. 8 Chapter 1 Using Share MonitorToolbar Buttons Share Monitor contains a toolbar with the following buttons that let you adjust the display of batch status information. Note: If the toolbar isn’t visible when you open Share Monitor, click the button in the upper-right corner of the Batch window to open it. • Refresh: Click Refresh to update the status of a selected cluster immediately, rather than wait for the next update event. • Expand All: Reveals all job, target, and segment information for every batch. • Collapse All: Displays batch-level information only. • Sort Order: Switches the batch list between descending and ascending order. Batch Display Batches, jobs, targets, and segments are displayed in hierarchical (nested) views. Each view in the batch view hierarchy contains a disclosure triangle. Click the disclosure triangles to reveal the next level of the hierarchy. For example, click the disclosure triangle in a batch view to reveal the jobs contained within the batch, and click the disclosure triangle in a job view to reveal the targets contained within the job. Chapter 1 Using Share Monitor 9Note: Completed tasks appear in the same view area. Job view Batch view Target view Segment views • Batch view: Displays the batch name, the number of jobs and targets contained within the batch, the date and time on which the batch was submitted, the name of the user who submitted the batch, and the status. • Job view: Displays the name, the number of targets and segments contained within the job, the input file type (displayed as an icon), and the status. • Target view: Displays the type (displayed as an icon), the name, the number of segments that the target has been broken down into, and the status. • Segment view: When a batch is being processed using a cluster, this displays a description (a time-based or frame-based description of the portion of the target being processed), the machine name (service node that the segment is being processed on), the status, and the machine type (displayed as an icon). Segment information is available only while a batch is being processed. 10 Chapter 1 Using Share MonitorAbout the Info Window To get detailed information about any submitted batch, job, target, or segment, click its Show Info button to open a window showing information for that item. The window displays the full text of status messages on any batch, job, target, or segment, such as Name, Submission Time, Owner, Time Elapsed, Time Remaining, Percent Complete, and Status. Click the Show Log button to display text information on any batch, job, target, or segment in a Console window. This information is useful for troubleshooting distributed processing issues, and it can be saved to a file and processed with XML tools and UNIX scripts. The following table lists the service labels used in logs and email notifications. Processing Notification Local Compressor service servicecontroller:com.apple.stomp.transcoder Distributed Compressor service servicecontroller:com.apple.stomp.transcoderx Distributed Apple Qmaster servicecontroller:com.apple.qmaster.executor service Viewing or Changing the Status of a Submitted Batch You open Share Monitor to see the status of a submitted batch and all the jobs contained within it. To open Share Monitor from Compressor Do one of the following: µ Click Share Monitor in the Batch window. µ Select the “Automatically launch Share Monitor” preference to have Share Monitor open each time you submit a batch. To open Share Monitor from Apple Qmaster µ Click Share Monitor in the toolbar. Chapter 1 Using Share Monitor 11Share Monitor also opens automatically each time you submit a batch. To open Share Monitor from Apple Qadministrator µ Choose Cluster > Show Share Monitor. To open Share Monitor from Final Cut Pro Do one of the following: µ Double-click Share Monitor in the Dock. Share Monitor appears in the Dock when you submit a Share menu option, such as sharing a project to Apple Devices. µ Open the Background Tasks window (choose Window > Background Tasks or press Command-9) and click the Open button next to the Sharing item. To open Share Monitor from Motion Do one of the following: µ Choose Share > Show Share Monitor. µ Double-click Share Monitor in the Dock. Share Monitor appears in the Dock when you submit a Share menu option, such as sharing a project to Apple Devices. To use Share Monitor to view the status of your batch 1 Open Share Monitor. 2 Do any of the following to view the batch processing details and take any necessary action. • To reveal information about the component parts of a batch, job, or target: Click the disclosure triangle next to the item name. • To pause a job, batch, or target: Click the corresponding Pause/Resume button. • To restart the processing for an item: Click the corresponding Pause/Resume button. • To cancel a job, batch, or target: Click its Cancel button. Click the disclosure triangle next to an item to reveal more information. Pause/Resume Show Info Cancel When the progress bar reaches 100 percent, your media file has been successfully transcoded and saved in the designated destination folder. Completed batch and job items are marked “Successful” and remain in the batch display. Unsuccessful batch and job items are marked “Failed” and remain in the batch display. 12 Chapter 1 Using Share Monitor3 Click the Show Info button for any item in the batch display to view information about that item. 4 Open the destination folder to view the newly transcoded output media file. Share Monitor and Distributed Processing If you have set up an Apple Qmaster distributed processing system to process Compressor, Apple Qmaster, Final Cut Pro, and Motion jobs, Share Monitor will offer some additional features. For example, both administrators and client users can use Share Monitor to monitor the processing of submitted jobs. Administrators can stop or cancel any batch, as long as they have the administrator password for the cluster that is processing the batch, and users can stop or cancel their own batches. Share Monitor and Passwords There are different kinds of passwords that may affect how you use Share Monitor. For more information, see the “Apple Qmaster and Distributed Processing” chapter in the Compressor User Manual. Administrator Password If you create this password, administrators will need to know it in order to modify the selected cluster and to view the selected cluster’s batches in Share Monitor. To create an administrator password, click the Security tab in Apple Qadministrator. User Password If you create this password, users will need to know it in order to submit batches to the selected cluster and to view those batches in Share Monitor. To create a user password, click the Security tab in Apple Qadministrator. Service Node Password If you are setting up a QuickCluster, other users will be required to enter this password before being allowed to submit remote requests to the computer. If you are setting up a cluster to use with Apple Qadministrator, an administrator will be required to enter this password before being allowed to add the computer to a cluster. To create a service node password, select the “Require password” checkbox in the Apple Qmaster Sharing window of Compressor. Viewing or Changing Batch Status for Distributed Processing Depending on how you open Share Monitor, the application may have slightly different views, with different levels of control. Chapter 1 Using Share Monitor 13To view or change batch status 1 Open Share Monitor in one of the following ways. • Administrators who want to see or modify the status of batches: Choose Cluster > Show Share Monitor when Apple Qadministrator is open. • Users who want to see the status of batches and modify the status of their own batches: Use the Share Monitor window that opens when you open it from Compressor, Apple Qmaster, Final Cut Pro, or Motion. For more information, see Viewing or Changing the Status of a Submitted Batch. 2 Choose the cluster whose activity you want to view from the Cluster list. 3 View the batch processing details and take any necessary action. Note: Client users cannot modify other users’ batches. When they select a batch or job submitted by another user, the Cancel and Pause/Resume buttons are not available. For more details, see Setting Share Monitor Preferences and Viewing or Changing the Status of a Submitted Batch. Share Monitor Preferences You can use the Share Monitor Preferences window to configure several aspects of Share Monitor. Most of the information displayed in Share Monitor can be shown or hidden using settings in Share Monitor preferences. About the Share Monitor Preferences Window The Share Monitor Preferences window includes the following view options and network options: 14 Chapter 1 Using Share MonitorView Options • Show Jobs: Select this checkbox to show job views (and target and segment views) in the Share Monitor batch display. • Show Targets: Select this checkbox to show target views (and segment views) in the Share Monitor batch display. • Show Segments: Select this checkbox to show segment views in the Share Monitor batch display. • Update status every # seconds field: Enter the number of seconds between updates from processing computers to control how often Share Monitor information is updated. The Status Interval setting in Apple Qadministrator cluster preferences takes precedence over the update frequency setting in Share Monitor preferences. Share Monitor can provide new status information only as often as it receives it from the cluster controller, as set in the Status Interval field of the Apple Qadministrator Cluster Preferences window. For more information, see “Setting Preferences” in the Apple Qadministrator User Manual. Network Options • Monitor non-Bonjour hosts table: This table displays information about remote host computers. • Add/Remove button: Use the button to add or remove information about remote host computers. Remote Computer Address Dialog This dialog is displayed when you click the Add/Remove button in the main Preferences window. Use this dialog to enter IP addresses or ranges for manually selected computers. • Host/Host IP address range buttons: These buttons control whether this dialog is in IP address mode (in which you enter a specific address) or IP address range mode (in which you enter a range of addresses). • Host: Use this mode to enter a host name and IP address for a specific remote computer. • Host IP address range: Use this mode to enter a name and set of range numbers (Range From, Range To) for a range of remote IP addresses. Setting Share Monitor Preferences Use the Share Monitor Preferences window to configure several aspects of Share Monitor. To set Share Monitor preferences µ Choose Share Monitor > Preferences, or press Command-Comma (,). The Share Monitor Preferences window opens. Any changes you make to the Share Monitor preference settings take effect only when you click OK. If you make changes but decide not to use them, click Cancel. Chapter 1 Using Share Monitor 15 Finder Dock USB 3 SD USB 3 MagSafe 2 ???????? Thunderbolt ?????? ?????? ??? ?????? ????????? MacBook Air ????????? ????????? ??????? ??? ?????????? ? ?????? ? ???????????. ?????????? ????????? ????????? ??????? ?????, ????? ?????????? ????????? ? ???? Wi-Fi, ???????? ????????? ? ??????? Mac ??? ?? ? Windows ? ??????? ??????? ?????? ???????????? Mac. ?? ????? ?????? ????? ? ??????? ? ??????? Apple ID, ??? ???????? ??? ????????? ????????? ?? App Store, ??????? ??????? ? iTunes Store ? ????????-???????? Apple, ???????? ?????? ? iCloud ? ?????? ??????????? ? ??????? FaceTime. ???? ? ??? ??? Apple ID, ?????? ??????? ??? — ??? ?????? ? ?????????. ????? Multi-Touch ?????? ???????? ?? ????? MacBook Air ????? ???? ????????? ? ??????? ?????? ?? ????????. ???? ????????? ???????? ?????. ?????????? ? ??????????? ???????? ????? ?? ??????? ????? Mac ?? ??????? ? ??????? ??????? ???, ??? ??? ??????????. ????????????? ????? ?????? Dock — ??????? ????? ??? ?????????? ???????? ????? ???????????? ????????. ? ?? ??????? ????? ????? ????? ??????? «????????? ?????????», ????? ????????? ??????? ???? ? ?????? ????????? ?????????? Mac. ??????? ?????? Finder, ????? ???????? ?????? ?? ???? ????? ?????? ? ??????. ?????? ???? ? ??????? ????? ?????? ???????? ????? ???????? ?????????? ? ????? Mac. ????? ????????? ????????? ????????????? ??????????? ? ???? ????????, ??????? ?????? Wi-Fi. ??? Mac ????????????? ???????????? ? ????, ??????? ???? ??????? ?? ????? ?????????. ??????! ??????? Multi-Touch ?????? ??????? MagSafe 2 ??????? ??????? ?????? ??????? ??????????? ???? ?????? ??????? ??????? ??????? ? ????? ????? ??????????? ????????. ? ???? ???????? ??????? ??????? ??? ???????? ??????? ????, ?????? ????????? ???????????. ??????? ??????? (??????? ?????? ??????? ????) ????????? ??????????? ????? ????????, ????? ??????? ???? ????????? ??????. ? ???? ???????? ??????? ??????? ??? ???????? ??????? ????, ????????? ????? ???????? ????? ????? ???????????. ????????? ??????????? ???????? ????? ?? ????????, ????? ?????????? ???-????????, ????????? ? ?????? ?????. ??????? ??????? ??????? ?????? ? ????? ????? ????????. ? ???? ???????? ??????? ??????? ??? ???????? ??????? ????, ?????? ????????? ???????????. ????????? ????? ???????? ??? ????????? ? ????? ??????????? ????????? ????? ???????? ?? ??????????? ???????? — ?????, ???? ??? ? ???????. ???????????????? ??????????????? ?????? ????????? ???????? ????? ????????, ????? ?????? ????????? ????? ???-????????. ????????? ???????? ????????? ? ??????????? ??????? ???????????? ??? ?????????? ??????? ?????????? ? ???-??????? ? ??????? ?????????, ????? ? ??????? ??????? ? ???????????? ?????? ?? ????????. ???????????? ????? ?????????????? ??????????? ???????? ????? ????????, ????? ??????? ?? ????? ????????????? ????????? ? ??????. ???????? Launchpad ??????? ?????? ?????? ?? ????????, ????? ??????????? ???? ????????? ? Launchpad. ??????? ????? ????????? ???????????, ????????? ?? ???????? ??????? ? ???????????? ?????? ?? ??? ?????? ??????? ???????. ?????? Mission Control ???????? ????? ????? ???????? ?? ????????, ????? ??????? ??? ????, ???????? ?? ????? ???. ????????? ? ???? Apple ???????? «????????? ?????????» ? ??????? «???????», ????? ?????? ????????? ? ??????. iCloud ???? ??????????, ??????, ?????? ? ?????? ????????? ???????? ? ?????? iCloud, ??????? ????????????? ???????? ?? ?? ???????????? ???? ?? iPad, iPhone, iPod touch ? ???? ?? ?? ? Windows. ??? ???? ?????????? ?????????? ? ???-??????? ??? ????????? ?? ????????????? ?? ?????. ??????? ????? ?? ???????????? ????? ?? ????? ??????????, ??? ????????????? ??????????? ?? ??? ????????? ???? ??????????. ? ????????? ?????????? ????????? ????????? ?????? ????? ?????????????, ??? ?? ?? ?? ??????????. ????? ???????? ????????? iCloud, ???????? ???? Apple, ???????? «????????? ?????????» ? ??????? iCloud. ????? ??????? ? ???????, ?????? ???? Apple ID, ? ???????? ??????? iCloud, ??????? ?? ?????? ????????????. ?????? ?????????? ?????? ??? ?????????? ? ????????????? ??????????, ???????????? ? ??????????? ??????? ????????? ? ????????? ????????????, ??????? ?????????? ? ??????????? ?? ????????. ????????? ???????? ????????? ??????????, ??????????? ???????????????? ?????? ? ?????? ?????? ? ???????? MacBook Air ????? ?? ???????? http://www.apple.com/ru/macbookair/. ??????? ?????? ?? ?????? ???? ???????, ? ????? ?????????? ? ?????????? ?? ?????????? ????????? ?? ?????? ????? ? ?????????? ??????. ??????? ?????? Finder, ????? ??????? «???????» ? ?????? ???? ? ???????? «?????????? ?????». ??????? Mac OS X ???? ? ?????? Mac ???????? ?????????, ??????? Mac OS X ??????? ???????? flash-?????????? ??????????, ???????????? ??????????? ??????????? ? ?????? ?? ????????? ????? Time Machine, ? ????? ??????? ?????? ?? flash-?????????? ? ???????? ?????????? ??????? OS X Lion ? ????????? Apple. ?? ????? ?????? ??????????????? Safari ??? ????????? ????????????? ???????. ???? ? ?????? ?????????? Mac ?????????? ?????????, ????????????? ??????????? ????????? «??????? Mac OS X». ?? ????? ?????? ??????? ?? ???????. ??? ????? ????????????? ?????????, ????????? ???????? ??????? Command+R. ????????? ?????????? MacBook Air, ?? ????????? ????? ?? ??????????? ????????? ? ??????? 90 ???? ? ??????? ???????? ?? ?????? ??????????? ??????????? ? ????? ?? ????????? ????????? Apple ??? ? ??????????????? Apple ?????????? ?????. ??? ????????? ??????????? ????????? ?? MacBook Air ???????? ???????? www.apple.com/ru/ support/macbookair. ??? ????????? ?? ???????? 495 5809557. www.apple.com/support/country ?? ?? ???? ???????? ?????????????? ??? ?????. TM ? © Apple Inc., 2012 ?. ??? ????? ????????. Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX. RS034-6355-A ??????? ?????? ???? «???????» ?????? ???? ????????? ????????? ??????? ??????????? ?? ?????? ?????? ???????? ?????? ?????????? ????? ????? — ?????????, ????????? ??????????? ?????, ??????????, ??????????? ? ?????? — ?? ????? Mac ? ??????? ?????????? Mac ??? ?? ? Windows ????? ??????. ??? ?????? ????????? ?????? Mac ??????????? ????????? ??????? ???????? ??????. ??? ????? ???? ????????? ??????????? ?? ??????. ?????????? ????? MacBook Air. ?? ????? ?????????????????? ??? ??? ???????? ???????????. ?????? FaceTime HD ????????? ??????????? ? ???? Wi-FiLaunchpad Mission Control Mail iTunes iCal FaceTime iPhoto iMovie Mac App Store *????? ????????? ?????????? ?????????? ? ?????????? FaceTime. ???????? ?? ?? ???? ????????. ??????? ?????? ????????? ? Dock, ? ?? ??????? ????? ? ?????? ????????????? ???-????????, ????????? ????? Multi-Touch. ????? ???????? ?????????? ????????? ?? ???????? ????? ? ????. ?????????? ????? ????????, ????? ?????????? ? ?????????? ??? ???-??????? Safari Top Sites ??????? ????? ????? ?????????? ??????. ?????? ???????? ???? ??? ?????? ???????? ????? ????????????? ??? ??????? ?????? ??????????? ????? ? ????????? Mail. ????? ????????? ????????? ??? ????????? ??????????? ????? ????? ????????????? ?? ???????? ????? ? ???????? ?????????. ????? ????? ?????? ????? ??, ??? ?????, ????? ?????? ??????? ??????. Mail ????????? ????????? ??????????? ?????? ?? ??????? ????????? ????? — ?? ?????????? ?? ??????? ? ???? ??? ??????????? ? ?????????. ??? ????????? ???????????? ??????????? ?????????? ??????????? ????? — ??????? POP3 ? IMAP — ? ???????? ? ???????????? ???????? ????????? ????????. ?????? ????????? ????????, ????? ????????? ??????? ????????. ????????? ??????? ??????? ?????? ???????? ?????? ????????. ????????? ? ??????????? ??????? ????? ???????? ??????? ??????????? ?? ??????. ?????????? ????? ??????????? ?????, ????? ??? Gmail, Yahoo! Mail ? AOL Mail. ?? ????? ?????? ???????????? Mail ? ?????????? ??????? ??????? ??????????? ????? me.com, ??????? ??????????????? ??????? iCloud. ??? ?????? ??????? Mail ????????? ????????? ??????? ?????? ?????? ? ??????????. ?????? Launchpad ??????? ?????? Launchpad ?? ?????? Dock. ????? ???????????? ????????? ?? ??????, ???????????? ???? ????????? ?????? ??????. Launchpad — ????? ???????? ???? ???????? ?? ????? Mac. ?????? ??????? ?????? Launchpad ?? ?????? Dock. ?????? ???????? ???? ?? ???? ????? ??????????? ??????? ?? ???????? ???? ????????. ???????????? ????????? ? ??????? ??? ??? ???????, ??????????? ?? ?? ?????? ??? ???????? ?? ?????? Mac. ???? ????????? ????????? ?? App Store ??? Mac, ?? ?????? ????????????? ??????????? ? Launchpad. ? Mission Control ????? ? ?????? ???????? ?????? ??????? ??? ?????????? ?? Mac ?????????. ??????? ?????? Mission Control ?? ?????? Dock — ??????? ???????? ????? ??????????, ? ??????????? ??? ???????? ????, ??????????????? ?? ??????????, ??? ????????????? ????????? ? Dashboard, ??? ????????? ????-?????????, ??????? ?????????? «?????????». ????? ???????? ????? ??????? ? ?????? ???? ??? ?????????. Mission Control — ??? ????????? ????? ?????????? ????????: ????? ??????? ????? ??? ? ??????? ? ?????? ????? ?? ?????????? ????? ????? ????????. ?????? Mission Control ??????? ?????? Mission Control ?? ?????? Dock. ?????????? ???????? Spaces ??? ?????????? ??????? Spaces ??????? ?????? «+» ?????? ? ??????? ????. Dashboard ??? ???????? ??????? ?????? ???? ????????? ?????????? ? ????? ??????? ????. ?????? ??? ?????? ??????? ?????? ? ???????????? ?????, ????? ????????? ?????? ?? ????????, ??????? ?????? ????????? ?????. App Store ??? Mac — ????? ??????? ?????? ??? ?????? ? ???????? ????? ?? ????? ???????? ??? Mac: ?? ??? ? ???????? ??? ??????? ? ?????????? ????? ?? ??????? ???????? ? ??????? ???????. ????? ????????? ???????????? ? Launchpad, ?????????? ????????? ???? ???? ????????. ?? ?????? ?????????? ????????? ?? ??? ???? ?????????? Mac ? ???? ????????? ????????????? ????????? ????????. App Store ??? Mac ??????? ? ?????? ??????????, ??????? ? ??? ?????? ????? ????? ????????? ?????? ????????. ????? ??????? App Store ??? Mac, ??????? ??? ?????? ?? ?????? Dock. ? ??????? iTunes ?? ??????? ????????????? ? ?????????????? ?? ????? Mac ????????? ?????? ? ???????????? ? ???????? ???????. ????? ????, ?? ??????? ??????????? ? iTunes Store ????? ???????????, ??????, ????????????, ????? ? ?????? ?????????. iTunes ????? ????????????? ?????? ? App Store ??? iPad, iPhone ? iPod touch. iTunes Store ????? ? ???????????? ????? ??????, ?????? ? ?????? ?????????. ????? Genius iTunes ????? ????????? ????? ?? ????? ??????????? ????????? ? ???????????? ?????, ??????? ??????? ?????????? ???? ? ??????. ????????? ?????????? ?????? ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????? ?????????. ? ??????? iCal ?? ????? ?????????? ? ??????? ????????. ?? ?????? ????????? ????????? ????????? — ??? ????, ?????, ??????. ????? ?????????? ? ????? ???? ??? ?????????, ? ????? — ?????? ??, ??????? ??? ????? ??????. ??????????? ? ??????????? ???????????, ????????? ?????????? ?????????? ?? ????? ???????? ?????, ? ????? ?????????????? ??????. ? ??????? iCloud ????? ????????????? ????????? ?????????? ? ?????????? ?? ???? ????? ???????????, ? ????? ?????????? ????????? ????????? ?????? ????????????? iCloud. ?????????? ?????????? ?????, ???????? ? ?????????. ???? ? iPhoto ????? ??????????? ?????????? ?? ?????, ??????? ?? ??? ???????????. ??????? ??????? ?????? ????? ???????, ????? ??????????? ??????????. iPhoto — ?????? ?????? ?????????????, ?????????????, ????????????? ? ??????????? ??????????, ??????? ???????? ?? ????? Mac. ?? ?????? ??????????? ???? ????????? ?????????? ?? ????????????? ?? ??? ?????, ????? ?????? ??? ????????. ????? ????????? ?????????? ?? ??????????? ????? ??? ?????????? ?? ? ???? Facebook, ?????? ???????? ?????????? ? ??????? ?????? «???????» ? ?????? ?????? ???? ??????. ??? ??????? «???????», ????? ??????? ?? ??????? ??????? ???????????, ????????? ??? ????????. ??????? ??????? ? ???? ???? ???????????? ??? ??????????????? ???????????, ??????? ?? ?????? ????? ???????? ? ??? ??????. ??????? ???????? ?????? ?????????? ????????? ?????? ? ??????, ????? ??????? ??????????? ?????. iMovie ?????????? ??? ???? ??????????? ? ????????? ? ???????? ??? ??????????? ??????????? ??????????????, ???? ? ??????????? ???????, ????? ?? ????? ?????? ?????????? ?? ? ????? ?????????. ?? ?????? ??????? ?? ??? ??????????? ?????? ??? ???? ???????? ????????????? ?????? ????? ? ????????? ???????. iMovie ????????? ????????????? ???????????, ?????? ?????? ????????????????? ????????? ?????????????, ???????? ?? iPad, iPhone ? iPod touch, ? ????? ??????? FaceTime ?? Mac. ????????? FaceTime ??? Mac ?? ?????? ???????? ????? ? ???? ? ?????????????? iPad, iPhone, iPod touch ? Mac. *????? ????????? FaceTime, ??? ????? ???? ??????? Apple ID ? ????? ??????????? ?????. ??? ?????????? ??????????? ???????? ???????? ? ?????? ????????? ?? ???????? ?????. ????????? ??? ???????? ??????? ????? ???????? ????? ???????????? ???????? ? ?????? ????????? ?????????. ????? ????????? ????????? ???????? ?????????? ?????? ??????????? ????????? — ????, ??????, ????? ??? ???. ????????????? ????? ??????? ?????? ?????????????? ??????, ????? ??????? ? ????????????? ????? ?????????. ????? ????????? ?????? ???????? ? ??????? ?????????? ??? ????????????? ???????? ???????????? ?????????????. ?????????? ??????? ??????? ??????, ????? ??????? ???????. ????? ????? ???????? ?????????????? ?????? ???????? ? ?????????? ?? ????? ? Launchpad. Let’s get started When you start your MacBook Pro for the first time, Setup Assistant launches to get you going. Follow a few simple steps to connect to your Wi-Fi network, transfer your stuff from another Mac or a PC, create a user account for your Mac, and log in with your Apple ID. Your Apple ID lets you download apps from the App Store, shop the iTunes Store and the Apple Online Store, access iCloud, and communicate using FaceTime. If you don’t have an Apple ID, creating one is easy and free. Multi-Touch gestures Many functions on your MacBook Pro can be performed using simple gestures on the trackpad. Here are some of the most popular Multi-Touch gestures for the Mac. Get to know your desktop Welcome to your new home base. The desktop contains the Dock, where icons of your frequently used apps appear. To customize your desktop and other settings on your Mac, click the System Preferences icon in the Dock. To access your files and folders, click the Finder icon. To check the status of your wireless Internet connection, click the Wi-Fi status icon in the menu bar. Your Mac automatically connects to the network you chose during setup. Hello. Multi-Touch trackpad MagSafe power connector Power adapter AC power cord Power button Click Press down anywhere on the trackpad to click. Or, with Tap to Click enabled, simply tap the surface. Secondary click (right click) Click with two fingers to open shortcut menus. Or, with Tap to Click enabled, tap two fingers anywhere. Swipe to navigate Swipe with two fingers to flip through web pages, documents, and more. Double click Press down two times anywhere on the trackpad. Or, with Tap to Click enabled, double-tap the surface. Two-finger scroll Brush two fingers along the trackpad to scroll in any direction—up, down, or sideways. Smart zoom Double-tap the trackpad with two fingers to quickly magnify a web page. Pinch to zoom Zoom in and out of photos and web pages more precisely by pinching your thumb and finger. Switch between full-screen apps Swipe with three fingers to move from one full-screen app to another. View Launchpad Pinch with four fingers to view all your apps in Launchpad. Rotate Turn your thumb and finger clockwise or counterclockwise to rotate an image. View Mission Control Swipe up with three fingers to see every open window on your Mac. Learn more Choose System Preferences from the Apple menu and click Trackpad to learn more about gestures. iCloud iCloud stores your music, photos, mail, and more and wirelessly pushes them to your Mac, iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and even your PC. All without docking or syncing. So when you buy a song on one device, it’s automatically downloaded to all your others. And with Photo Stream, your latest photos appear everywhere you want to see them. To customize your iCloud settings, open the Apple menu, select System Preferences, then click iCloud. Sign in with your Apple ID and choose the iCloud features you want to enable or disable. Important Read this document and the safety information in the Important Product Information Guide carefully before you first use your computer. Learn more You can find more information, watch demos, and learn even more about MacBook Pro features at www.apple.com/macbookpro. Help You can often find answers to your questions, as well as instructions and troubleshooting information, in Help Center. Click the Finder icon, click Help in the menu bar, and choose Help Center. Mac OS X Utilities If you have a problem with your Mac, Mac OS X Utilities can help you repair your computer’s drive, restore your software and data from a Time Machine backup, or erase your hard drive and reinstall OS X Lion and Apple applications. You can also use Safari to get online help. If your Mac detects a problem, it opens Mac OS X Utilities automatically. Or you can open it manually by restarting your computer while holding down the Command and R keys. Support Your MacBook Pro comes with 90 days of technical support and one year of hardware repair warranty coverage at an Apple Retail Store or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Visit www.apple.com/support/macbookpro for technical support on MacBook Pro. Or call 1-800-275-2273. In Canada, call 1-800-263-3394. Not all features are available in all areas. TM and © 2012 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX. 034-6352-B AC plug Help menu Menu bar Finder Dock System Preferences Quick Start Guide Let’s get moving It’s easy to move files like documents, email, photos, music, and movies to your new Mac from another Mac or a PC. The first time you start your new Mac, it will walk you through the transfer process. All you have to do is follow the onscreen instructions. Welcome to your new MacBook Pro. We’d like to show you around. Battery indicator lights Audio in/out FireWire 800 Thunderbolt SDXC slot MagSafe power FaceTime HD camera Security slot Gigabit USB 3 SuperDrive Ethernet Wi-Fi status Click the icon in the Dock to open Safari, and surf the web using Multi-Touch gestures. Scroll up or down with two fingers on the trackpad. Swipe with two fingers on the trackpad to go back and Safari web browser Mail Top Sites Get a quick overview of the sites you visit most often. One-stop email View all your accounts in Mail for one-click access. Conversation view See all the email messages from a conversation thread. Search Quickly narrow search results to find exactly what you want. Mail lets you manage all your email accounts from a single, ad-free inbox, even when you’re not connected to the Internet. It works with most email standards— including POP3 and IMAP—and forth between pages. Double-tap with two fingers to magnify a page, then double-tap again to return to the original size. Or pinch to zoom in and out. popular email services such as Gmail, Yahoo! Mail, and AOL Mail. The first time you open Mail, Setup Assistant will help you get started. You can also manage your mail from iCloud. Launchpad Open Launchpad Click the Launchpad icon in the Dock. Folders Group apps in folders by dragging one app on top of another. Launchpad is the home for all the apps on your Mac. Just click the Launchpad icon in the Dock. Your open windows are replaced by a full-screen display of all your apps. Arrange apps any way you want, group them together in folders, or delete them from your Mac. When you download an app from the Mac App Store, it automatically appears in Launchpad. Mission Control Mission Control gives you a bird’s-eye view of everything running on your Mac. Click the Mission Control icon in the Dock, and your desktop zooms out to display all the open windows in every application, all your full-screen apps, and Dashboard, the home of mini-apps called widgets. Click anything to zoom in on it. Think of Mission Control as the hub of your system—view everything and go anywhere with just a click. Open Mission Control Click the Mission Control icon in the Dock. Add desktop spaces Click the + button to the right of the top row to add a new space. Dashboard Located at the top left for easy access. Reading List Click the glasses icon to save pages to read later. Mac App Store The Mac App Store is the best way to find and download thousands of apps for your Mac, from games and social networking to productivity apps and more. New apps install in one step to Launchpad. You can install apps on every Mac authorized for your personal use and even download them again. The Mac App Store lets you know when app updates are available, so you always have the latest versions. Open the Mac App Store by clicking its icon in the Dock. iTunes iTunes organizes and plays your digital music and video on your Mac. The iTunes Store lets you buy new music, movies, TV shows, books, and more. iTunes is also where you’ll find the App Store for iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch. iTunes Store Discover and buy new music, movies, and more. Genius Mixes Let iTunes search your music library and group songs that go great together. iCal Multiple calendars Access all your calendars from one place. Keep track of your busy schedule with iCal. You can create separate calendars—one for home, another for school, a third for work. See all your calendars in a single window or choose to see only the calendars you want. Create and send invitations using contact information from your Address Book, then see who has responded. Use iCloud to update calendars on all your devices automatically or share calendars with other iCloud users. iPhoto Create Create books, cards, and calendars. Faces iPhoto can even organize your photos based on who’s in them. Events Double-click any Event to browse photos. iPhoto is the best way to organize, browse, edit, and share your photos on your Mac. You can organize your photo library by Faces, Places, and Events. To send photos by email or publish them to Facebook, just select the photo and click Share in the bottom right of your screen. Or click Create to turn your favorite shots into photo books, calendars, and cards. iMovie Event browser Your imported videos appear here so you can access all your clips. Project browser Simply drop your selection in a project to create a great movie. iMovie puts all your video clips in one place so you can quickly turn them into great-looking movies or even Hollywood-style movie trailers in just a few clicks. It has all the editing tools, themes, and special effects you need to turn your photos and videos into something amazing. And iMovie lets you import video from most popular digital video cameras, your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, or the FaceTime camera on your Mac. FaceTime FaceTime for Mac lets you talk face to face with anyone on an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac—from your Mac.* To set up FaceTime on your Mac, all you need is your Apple ID and email address. To start a video call, click an entry in your Address Book contacts list. Favorites Add your frequent contacts to Favorites for easy access. *Requires FaceTime-enabled device for both caller and recipient. Not available in all areas. Calendar view Select the view you prefer—day, week, month, or year. Full-screen view Click the full-screen button to go full screen. Always up to date Updates to your purchased apps appear automatically. Add an event Double-click to create a new event. Discover new apps Browse thousands of apps and download them straight to Launchpad. iWork Guide de l’utilisateur des formules et des fonctionsKApple Inc. © 2009 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Ce manuel est soumis aux lois sur le droit d’auteur et ne peut être copié, totalement ou partiellement, sans le consentement écrit d’Apple. Vos droits concernant le logiciel sont régis par le contrat de licence qui l’accompagne. Le logo Apple est une marque d’Apple Inc., déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. L’utilisation à des fins commerciales du logo Apple via le clavier (Option + Maj + K) sans l’accord écrit préalable d’Apple peut constituer une contrefaçon de marque commerciale et un acte de concurrence déloyale contraires aux lois en vigueur dans les états et au niveau fédéral. Tous les efforts ont été déployés afin de garantir l’exactitude des informations de ce manuel. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs d’impression ou de rédaction. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, le logo Apple, iWork, Keynote, Mac, Mac OS, Numbers et Pages sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Adobe et Acrobat sont des marques ou des marques déposées d’Adobe Systems Incorporated, aux États-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. Les autres noms de sociétés et de produits mentionnés dans ce document sont des marques de leurs propriétaires respectifs. La mention de produits tiers est indiquée à titre informatif exclusivement et ne constitue ni une approbation, ni une recommandation. Apple n’assume aucune responsabilité quant aux performances ou à l’utilisation de ces produits. F019-1588 08/200913 Préface : Bienvenue dans les formules et les fonctions d’iWork 15 Chapitre 1 : Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 15 Éléments des formules 17 Calculs instantanés dans Numbers 18 Utilisation de formules rapides prédéfinies 19 Création de formules personnalisées 20 Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de l’éditeur de formules 21 Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de la barre des formules 22 Ajout de fonctions à des formules 25 Gestion des erreurs et des avertissements dans les formules 25 Suppression de formules 26 Référencement de cellules dans des formules 28 Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules 29 Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules 30 Utilisation d’opérateurs dans les formules 30 Opérateurs arithmétiques 31 Opérateurs de comparaison 31 Opérateur de chaîne et jokers 32 Copie ou déplacement de formules et de leurs valeurs calculées 33 Affichage de toute les formules d’une feuille de calcul 33 Recherche et remplacement d’éléments de formule 35 Chapitre 2 : Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 35 Introduction aux fonctions 36 Informations sur les fonctions 36 Les éléments de syntaxe et les termes utilisés dans la définition des fonctions 38 Types de valeur 44 Liste des catégories de fonctions 44 Collage d’exemples de l’aide 46 Chapitre 3 : Fonctions date et heure 46 Liste des fonctions date et heure 48 ANNÉE 3 Table des matières4 Table des matières 49 AUJOURDHUI 50 DATE 50 DATEDIF 52 DATEVAL 53 EDATE 54 FIN.MOIS 55 FRACTION.ANNEE 56 HEURE 57 JOUR 57 JOURS360 58 JOURSEM 59 MAINTENANT 60 MINUTE 60 MOIS 61 NB.JOURS.OUVRES 62 NOMDUMOIS 63 NOMJOUR 64 NO.SEMAINE 64 SECONDE 65 SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE 66 TEMPS 67 TEMPSVAL 68 Chapitre 4 : Fonctions de durée 68 Liste des fonctions de durée 69 DUREE 70 DUREE.SUPPRESSION 70 DURHEURES 71 DURJOURS 72 DURMILLISECONDES 73 DURMINUTES 73 DURSECONDES 74 DURSEMAINES 76 Chapitre 5 : Fonctions d’ingénierie 76 Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie 77 BASE10 78 BASEN 79 BESSELJ 80 BESSELY 81 BINDEC 81 BINHEX 82 BINOCTTable des matières 5 83 CONVERT 84 Unités de conversion prises en charge 84 Poids et masse 85 Distance 85 Durée 85 Vitesse 86 Pression 86 Force 86 Énergie 86 Puissance 87 Magnétisme 87 Température 87 Volume liquide 87 Préfixes métriques 88 DECBIN 89 DECHEX 90 DECOCT 91 DELTA 91 ERF 92 ERFC 93 HEXBIN 94 HEXDEC 94 HEXOCT 95 OCTBIN 96 OCTDEC 97 OCTHEX 98 SUP.SEUIL 100 Chapitre 6 : Fonctions financières 100 Liste des fonctions financières 104 AMORLIN 105 CUMUL.INTER 107 CUMUL.PRINCPER 109 DB 111 DDB 112 DUREE.M.OBLIGATION 114 DUREE.OBLIGATION 115 INTERET.ACC 117 INTERET.ACC.MAT 119 INTPER 120 ISPMT 122 NB.COUPONS 123 NB.JOURS.COUPON6 Table des matières 124 NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV 125 NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV 127 NPM 129 PRINCPER 130 PRIX.TITRE 132 PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE 133 RENDEMENT.SIMPLE 135 RENDEMENT.TITRE 136 RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE 138 SYD 139 TAUX 141 TAUX.EFFECTIF 142 TAUX.ESCOMPTE 143 TAUX.INTERET 144 TAUX.NOMINAL 145 TRI 147 TRIM 149 VA 151 VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT 152 VALEUR.NOMINALE 154 VAN 155 VC 157 VDB 159 VPM 161 Chapitre 7 : Fonctions logiques et d’information 161 Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information 162 ESTERREUR 163 EST.IMPAIR 163 EST.PAIR 164 ESTVIDE 165 ET 166 FAUX 167 NON 168 OU 169 SI 170 SI.ERREUR 171 VRAI 173 Chapitre 8 : Fonctions numériques 173 Liste des fonctions numériques 176 ABS 176 ALEATable des matières 7 177 ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES 178 ARRONDI 179 ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE 180 ARRONDI.INF 181 ARRONDI.SUP 182 COMBIN 183 ENT 184 EXP 185 FACT 186 FACTDOUBLE 187 IMPAIR 188 LN 188 LOG 189 LOG10 190 MOD 191 MULTINOMIALE 192 PAIR 193 PGCD 193 PI 194 PLAFOND 195 PLANCHER 196 PPCM 197 PRODUIT 198 PUISSANCE 198 QUOTIENT 199 RACINE 200 RACINE.PI 200 ROMAIN 202 SIGNE 202 SOMME 203 SOMME.CARRES 204 SOMMEPROD 205 SOMME.SI 206 SOMME.SIS 208 SOMME.X2MY2 208 SOMME.X2PY2 209 SOMME.XMY2 210 TRONQUE 212 Chapitre 9 : Fonctions de référencement 212 Liste des fonctions de référencement 213 ADRESSE 215 CHOISIR8 Table des matières 215 COLONNE 216 COLONNES 217 DECALER 218 EQUIV 220 INDEX 222 INDIRECT 223 LIEN_HYPERTEXTE 224 LIGNE 224 LIGNES 225 RECHERCHE 226 RECHERCHEH 228 RECHERCHEV 230 TRANSPOSE 231 ZONES 232 Chapitre 10 : Fonctions statistiques 232 Liste des fonctions statistiques 237 AVERAGEA 239 BETA.INVERSE 239 CENTILE 241 CENTREE.REDUITE 241 COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION 243 COVARIANCE 244 CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE 245 DROITEREG 247 Statistiques supplémentaires 248 ECART.MOYEN 249 ECARTYPE 251 ECARTYPEP 252 FRÉQUENCE 254 GRANDE.VALEUR 255 INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE 256 INVERSE.LOI.F 256 KHIDEUX.INVERSE 257 LNGAMMA 258 LOI.BETA 259 LOI.BINOMIALE 260 LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG 261 LOI.EXPONENTIELLE 261 LOI.F 262 LOI.GAMMA 263 LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE 264 LOI.KHIDEUXTable des matières 9 264 LOI.LOGNORMALE 265 LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE 266 LOI.NORMALE 267 LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE 268 LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD 268 LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE 269 LOI.POISSON 270 LOI.STUDENT 271 LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE 271 MAX 272 MAXA 273 MEDIANE 274 MIN 275 MINA 276 MODE 276 MOYENNE 277 MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE 278 MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE 279 MOYENNE.SI 281 MOYENNE.SIS 283 NB 284 NB.SI 285 NB.SIS 287 NBVAL 289 NB.VIDE 290 ORDONNEE.ORIGINE 291 PENTE 292 PERMUTATION 293 PETITE.VALEUR 294 PREVISION 295 PROBABILITE 297 QUARTILE 298 RANG 299 RANG.POURCENTAGE 300 SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS 301 STDEVA 303 STDEVPA 305 TEST.KHIDEUX 306 TEST.STUDENT 307 VAR 309 VARA 311 VAR.P 312 VARPA10 Table des matières 314 ZTEST 316 Chapitre 11 : Fonctions de texte 316 Liste des fonctions de texte 318 CAR 319 CHERCHE 320 CNUM 321 CODE 322 CONCATENER 323 CTXT 324 DEVISE 325 DROITE 325 EPURAGE 326 EXACT 327 GAUCHE 328 MAJUSCULE 328 MINUSCULE 329 NBCAR 330 NOMPROPRE 331 REMPLACER 331 REPT 332 STXT 333 SUBSTITUE 334 SUPPRESPACE 335 T 335 TROUVE 337 Chapitre 12 : Fonctions trigonométriques 337 Liste des fonctions trigonométriques 338 ACOS 339 ACOSH 339 ASIN 340 ASINH 341 ATAN 342 ATAN2 343 ATANH 343 COS 344 COSH 345 DEGRES 346 RADIANS 347 SIN 348 SINH 348 TANTable des matières 11 349 TANH 351 Chapitre 13 : Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 351 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires inclus 352 Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières 361 Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire 362 Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers 363 Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers 365 Choix d’une fonction pour résoudre des questions courantes d’ordre financier 367 Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt 369 En savoir plus sur les arrondis 372 Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information 373 Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules 374 Interception de division par zéro 375 Usage de conditions et de jokers 377 Exemple de résultats d’une étude13 iWork comporte plus de 250 fonctions permettant de simplifier les calculs statistiques, financiers, d’ingénierie et autres. Le navigateur des fonctions intégré permet de vous familiariser rapidement avec les fonctions et d’apprendre comment les ajouter à une formule. Pour commencer, tapez simplement le signe égal dans une cellule de tableau vide pour ouvrir l’éditeur de formules. Choisissez ensuite Insérer > Fonction > Afficher le navigateur des fonctions. Le présent guide de l’utilisateur contient des instructions détaillées destinées à vous aider à écrire des formules et à utiliser des fonctions. D’autres ressources viennent en outre compléter ce manuel. Préface Bienvenue dans les formules et les fonctions d’iWork14 Préface Bienvenue dans les formules et les fonctions d’iWork Aide à l’écran L’aide à l’écran contient toutes les informations qui figurent dans ce manuel dans un format facilitant la recherche, toujours disponible sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez ouvrir l’aide sur les formules et fonctions d’iWork à partir du menu Aide de toute application iWork. Lorsque Numbers, Pages ou Keynote est ouvert, choisissez Aide > Aide sur les formules et fonctions d’iWork. Site web d’iWork Consultez les dernières actualités et informations concernant iWork à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/iwork. Site web d’assistance Vous trouverez des informations détaillées sur la résolution de problèmes à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/iwork. Bulles d’aide Les applications iWork disposent de bulles d’aide, de courtes descriptions, pour la plupart des éléments qui apparaissent à l’écran. Pour afficher une bulle d’aide, maintenez le pointeur sur un élément pendant quelques secondes. Guides d’initiation vidéo en ligne Les guides d’initiation vidéo en ligne que vous pouvez visionner à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/iwork/tutorials expliquent comment réaliser certaines tâches dans Keynote, Numbers et Pages. La première fois que vous ouvrez une application iWork, un message reprenant un lien vers ces guides d’initiation sur le web apparaît. Vous pouvez visionner ces guides d’initiation vidéo à tout moment en choisissant, dans Keynote, Numbers et Pages, les menus Aide > Guides d’initiation vidéo.15 Le présent chapitre explique comment réaliser des calculs dans des cellules de tableau à l’aide de formules. Éléments des formules Une formule réalise un calcul et affiche le résultat dans la cellule où vous avez placé la formule. Les cellules contenant des formules sont appelées cellules de formule. Par exemple, dans la dernière cellule d’une colonne, vous pouvez insérer une formule qui additionne les nombres des cellules situées au-dessus. En cas de modification de l’une des valeurs des cellules situées au-dessus de la cellule de formule, la somme affichée dans cette dernière est automatiquement actualisée. Une formule réalise des calculs d’après les valeurs que vous indiquez. Ces valeurs peuvent correspondre à des nombres ou du texte (des constantes) que vous tapez dans la formule. Il peut aussi s’agir de valeurs qui figurent dans des cellules de tableau que vous identifiez dans la formule à l’aide de références à des cellules. Les formules utilisent des opérateurs et des fonctions pour réaliser les calculs sur les valeurs que vous indiquez :  Les opérateurs sont des symboles qui permettent de réaliser des opérations arithmétiques, de comparaison ou sur des chaînes. Dans les formules, les symboles servent à indiquer l’opération à réaliser. Par exemple, le symbole + additionne des valeurs, tandis que le symbole = compare deux valeurs pour déterminer si elles sont égales. =A2 + 16 : formule qui utilise un opérateur pour additionner deux valeurs. = : précède toujours une formule. A2 : référence à une cellule. A2 fait référence à la seconde cellule de la première colonne. + : opérateur arithmétique qui additionne la valeur qui le précède et celle qui le suit. 16 : constante numérique. 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux Tandis que les fonctions sont des opérations nommées et prédéfinies, telles que SOMME et MOYENNE. Pour utiliser une fonction, vous devez taper son nom puis les arguments dont la fonction a besoin entre parenthèses. Les arguments indiquent les valeurs que la fonction doit utiliser pour réaliser l’opération. =SOMME(A2:A10) : formule qui utilise la fonction SOMME pour additionner les valeurs d’une plage de cellules (neuf cellules de la première colonne). A2:A10 : référence aux valeurs des cellules A2 à A10. Pour savoir comment Aller à Afficher instantanément la somme, la moyenne, la valeur minimale, la valeur maximale et le compte des valeurs appartenant à une sélection de cellules et, facultativement, enregistrer la formule utilisée pour obtenir ces valeurs dans Numbers « Calculs instantanés dans Numbers » (page 17) Ajouter rapidement une formule permettant d’afficher la somme, la moyenne, la valeur minimale, la valeur maximale, le compte ou le produit des valeurs d’une sélection de cellules « Utilisation de formules rapides prédéfinies » (page 18) Utiliser des outils et des techniques pour créer et modifier des formules dans Numbers « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de l’éditeur de formules » (page 20) « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de la barre des formules » (page 21) « Ajout de fonctions à des formules » (page 22) « Suppression de formules » (page 25) Utiliser des outils et des techniques pour créer et modifier des formules dans Pages et Keynote « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de l’éditeur de formules » (page 20) Utiliser des centaines de fonctions iWork et consulter les exemples illustrant l’usage des fonctions dans le domaine financier, l’ingénierie, les statistiques et dans d’autres domaines Aide > Aide sur les formules et fonctions d’iWork Aide > Guide de l’utilisateur des formules et fonctions d’iWork Ajouter des références de cellules de différents types à une formule dans Numbers « Référencement de cellules dans des formules » (page 26) « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » (page 28) « Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules » (page 29) 16 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 17 Pour savoir comment Aller à Utiliser des opérateurs dans des formules « Opérateurs arithmétiques » (page 30) « Opérateurs de comparaison » (page 31) « Opérateur de chaîne et jokers » (page 32) Copier ou déplacer des formules ou la valeur qu’elles calculent entre les cellules d’un tableau « Copie ou déplacement de formules et de leurs valeurs calculées » (page 32) Rechercher des formules et des éléments de formule dans Numbers « Affichage de toute les formules d’une feuille de calcul » (page 33) « Recherche et remplacement d’éléments de formule » (page 34) Calculs instantanés dans Numbers Les résultats des calculs les plus courants utilisant la valeur d’au moins deux cellules sélectionnées s’affichent dans la partie inférieure gauche de la fenêtre de Numbers. Pour réaliser des calculs instantanés : 1 Sélectionnez au moins deux cellules du tableau. Elles ne doivent pas nécessairement être adjacentes. Le résultat des calculs des valeurs de ces cellules s’affiche instantanément dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre. Les résultats apparaissant en bas à gauche s’appuient sur les valeurs des deux cellules sélectionnées. Somme : affiche la somme des valeurs numériques d’une sélection de cellules. moy : affiche la moyenne des valeurs numériques d’une sélection de cellules. min : affiche la plus petite valeur numérique d’une sélection de cellules. max : affiche la plus grande valeur numérique d’une sélection de cellules. Compte : affiche le nombre de valeurs numériques ou de valeurs temporelles (date/ heure) d’une sélection de cellules. Les cellules vides et celles qui contiennent des valeurs de types non répertoriés cidessus ne sont pas utilisées pour les calculs. 2 Pour réaliser une autre série de calculs instantanés, sélectionnez d’autres cellules.Si un calcul particulier s’avère très utile et que vous souhaitez l’intégrer dans un tableau, vous pouvez l’ajouter comme formule dans une cellule vide du tableau. Il suffit de faire glisser vers une cellule vide la somme, la moyenne ou tout autre élément se trouvant dans la partie inférieure gauche de la fenêtre. La cellule ne doit pas nécessairement se trouver dans le même tableau que les cellules utilisées dans les calculs. Utilisation de formules rapides prédéfinies Un moyen simple de réaliser un calcul de base de valeurs, situées dans un intervalle de cellules adjacentes dans un tableau, consiste à sélectionner les cellules puis à créer une formule rapide. Vous pouvez procéder simplement dans Numbers par le biais du menu local Fonction accessible dans la barre d’outils. Dans Keynote et Pages, ouvrez l’inspecteur Tableau, cliquez sur la sous-fenêtre Format, puis choisissez une formule dans le menu local Fonction. Somme : calcule la somme des valeurs numériques des cellules sélectionnées. Moyenne : calcule la moyenne des valeurs numériques des cellules sélectionnées. Minimum : détermine la plus petite valeur numérique des cellules sélectionnées. Maximum : détermine la plus grande valeur numérique des cellules sélectionnées. Compte : détermine le nombre de valeurs numériques ou de valeurs temporelles (date/heure) d’une sélection de cellules. Produit : multiplie toutes les valeurs numériques des cellules sélectionnées. Vous pouvez également choisir Insertion > Fonction et utiliser le sous-menu qui apparaît. Les cellules vides et celles qui contiennent des types de valeurs non répertoriés sont ignorées. Voici quelques méthodes permettant d’ajouter une formule rapide : m Utilisation de valeurs sélectionnées dans une colonne ou une rangée et sélection des cellules Dans Numbers, cliquez sur Fonction dans la barre d’outils et choisissez un calcul dans le menu local. Dans Keynote ou Pages, choisissez Insertion > Fonction et utilisez le sous-menu qui apparaît. 18 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 19 Si les cellules se trouvent dans la même colonne, le résultat se voit placé dans la première cellule vide située sous les cellules sélectionnées. Si aucune cellule n’est vide, un rang où le résultat doit apparaître est ajouté. Vous pouvez cliquer sur la cellule pour afficher la formule. Si les cellules se trouvent dans la même rangée, le résultat se voit placé dans la première cellule vide située à droite des cellules sélectionnées. Si aucune cellule n’est vide, une colonne où le résultat doit apparaître est ajoutée. Vous pouvez cliquer sur la cellule pour afficher la formule. m Pour utiliser toutes les valeurs issues des cellules du corps d’une colonne, cliquez tout d’abord sur la cellule d’en-tête ou sur l’onglet de référence de la colonne. Dans Numbers, cliquez ensuite sur Fonction dans la barre d’outils et choisissez un calcul dans le menu local. Dans Keynote ou Pages, choisissez Insertion > Fonction et utilisez le sous-menu qui apparaît. Le résultat se voit alors placé dans un rang de bas de tableau. Si le rang de bas de tableau n’existe pas, un est alors ajouté. Vous pouvez cliquer sur la cellule pour afficher la formule. m Pour utiliser toutes les valeurs d’un rang, cliquez tout d’abord sur la cellule d’en-tête ou sur l’onglet de référence de ce rang. Dans Numbers, cliquez ensuite sur Fonction dans la barre d’outils et choisissez un calcul dans le menu local. Dans Keynote ou Pages, choisissez Insertion > Fonction et utilisez le sous-menu qui apparaît. Le résultat se voit alors placé dans une nouvelle colonne. Vous pouvez cliquer sur la cellule pour afficher la formule. Création de formules personnalisées Bien qu’il soit possible d’utiliser plusieurs techniques rapides pour ajouter des formules permettant d’effectuer des calculs simples (voir « Calculs instantanés dans Numbers » à la page 17 et « Utilisation de formules rapides prédéfinies » à la page 18), les outils consacrés aux formules vous procurent plus de contrôle pour insérer vos formules. Pour savoir comment Aller à Utiliser l’éditeur de formules pour manipuler une formule « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de l’éditeur de formules » (page 20) Utiliser la barre de formules redimensionnable pour manipuler des formules dans Numbers « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de la barre des formules » (page 21) Utiliser le navigateur des fonctions pour ajouter rapidement des fonctions à des formules lors de l’utilisation de l’éditeur de formules ou de la barre des formules « Ajout de fonctions à des formules » (page 22) Détecter une formule erronée « Gestion des erreurs et des avertissements dans les formules » (page 25)Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de l’éditeur de formules Vous pouvez également faire appel à l’éditeur de formules pour modifier une formule directement depuis la barre des formules (reportez-vous à la rubrique « Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de la barre des formules » à la page 21). L’éditeur de formules possède un champ de texte contenant votre formule. Au fur et à mesure que vous ajoutez des références à des cellules, des opérateurs, des fonctions ou des constantes à une formule, ces éléments apparaissent de la manière suivante dans l’éditeur de formules. Toutes les formules doivent commencer par le signe égal. Fonction Somme. Références aux cellules d’après leur nom. Référence à une plage de trois cellules. Opérateur de soustraction. Voici plusieurs manières d’utiliser l’éditeur de formules : m Pour ouvrir l’éditeur de formules, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Sélectionnez une cellule du tableau, puis saisissez le signe égal (=).  Dans Numbers, double-cliquez sur une cellule contenant une formule. Dans Keynote et Pages, sélectionnez le tableau, puis double-cliquez sur une cellule contenant une formule.  Dans Numbers uniquement, sélectionnez une cellule d’un tableau, cliquez sur Fonction dans la barre d’outils, puis choisissez Éditeur de formules dans le menu local.  Uniquement proposé dans Numbers, sélectionnez une cellule, puis choisissez Insérer > Fonction > Éditeur de formules. Dans Keynote et Pages, activez l’inspecteur des tableaux, choisissez la sous-fenêtre Format, puis sélectionnez Éditeur de formules dans le menu local Fonction.  Sélectionnez une cellule contenant une formule et appuyez sur Option + Retour. L’éditeur de formules s’ouvre en avant-plan de la cellule sélectionnée, mais vous pouvez le déplacer. m Pour déplacer l’éditeur de formules, maintenez le pointeur au-dessus du côté gauche de l’éditeur de formules jusqu’à ce qu’une main soit représentée, puis faites-le glisser l’éditeur. m Pour élaborer votre formule, procédez comme suit :  Pour ajouter un opérateur ou une constante au champ, placez le point d’insertion et tapez. Vous pouvez utiliser les touches fléchées pour déplacer le point d’insertion dans le champ de texte. Pour découvrir quels sont les opérateurs que vous pouvez utiliser, consultez la rubrique « Utilisation d’opérateurs dans les formules » à la page 30. 20 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 21 Remarque : Lorsque votre formule ne comprenant pas d’opérateur en nécessite un, l’opérateur + est inséré automatiquement. Sélectionnez-le et tapez-en un autre au besoin.  Pour ajouter des références de cellule au champ de texte, placez le point d’insertion, puis suivez les instructions données à la rubrique « Référencement de cellules dans des formules » à la page 26.  Pour ajouter des fonctions au champ de texte, placez le point d’insertion, puis suivez les instructions données à la rubrique « Ajout de fonctions à des formules » à la page 22. m Pour supprimer un élément du champ, sélectionnez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. m Pour accepter les modifications, appuyez sur Retour, appuyez sur Entrée ou cliquez sur le bouton Accepter de l’éditeur de formules. Vous pouvez aussi cliquer à l’extérieur du tableau. Pour fermer l’éditeur de formules sans confirmer les modifications effectuées, appuyez sur la touche Échap ou cliquez sur le bouton Annuler dans l’éditeur de formules. Ajouter et modifier des formules à l’aide de la barre des formules Dans Numbers, la barre des formules située sous la barre des formats vous permet de créer et de modifier des formules pour la cellule sélectionnée. Les références de cellule, les opérateurs, les fonctions et les constantes que vous ajoutez à une formule apparaissent comme suit. Référence à une Opérateur de soustraction. plage de trois cellules. Références aux cellules Fonction Somme. d’après leur nom. Toutes les formules doivent commencer par le signe égal. Voici plusieurs manières d’utiliser la barre des formules : m Pour ajouter ou modifier une formule, sélectionnez la cellule et ajoutez ou modifiez des éléments de la formule à partir de la barre des formules. m Pour ajouter des éléments à votre formule, procédez comme suit :  Pour ajouter un opérateur ou une constante, placez le point d’insertion dans la barre des formules et tapez. Vous pouvez utiliser les touches fléchées pour déplacer le point d’insertion. Pour découvrir quels sont les opérateurs que vous pouvez utiliser, consultez la rubrique « Utilisation d’opérateurs dans les formules » à la page 30. Lorsque votre formule ne comprenant pas d’opérateur en nécessite un, l’opérateur + est inséré automatiquement. Sélectionnez-le et tapez-en un autre au besoin. Pour ajouter des références de cellule à la formule, placez le point d’insertion, puis suivez les instructions données à la rubrique « Référencement de cellules dans des formules » à la page 26.  Pour ajouter des fonctions à la formule, placez le point d’insertion, puis suivez les instructions données à la rubrique « Ajout de fonctions à des formules » à la page 22. m Pour augmenter ou réduire la taille d’affichage des éléments dans la barre des formules, choisissez une option dans le menu local Taille du texte des formules situé au-dessus de la barre des formules. Pour augmenter ou réduire la hauteur de la barre des formules, faites glisser verticalement le contrôle de redimensionnement complètement à droite de la barre des formules, ou double-cliquez sur ce contrôle pour qu’il adapte automatiquement ses dimensions à la formule. m Pour supprimer un élément de la formule, sélectionnez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. m Pour enregistrer les modifications, appuyez sur Retour, appuyez sur Entrée ou cliquez sur le bouton Accepter situé au-dessus de la barre des formules. Vous pouvez aussi cliquer à l’extérieur de la barre des formules. Pour ne pas enregistrer les modifications, cliquez sur le bouton Annuler situé audessus de la barre des formules. Ajout de fonctions à des formules Une fonction est une opération prédéfinie qui porte un nom (comme SOMME et MOYENNE) qui permet de réaliser un calcul. Une fonction peut constituer soit l’un des éléments d’une formule, soit le seul élément d’une formule. Il existe plusieurs catégories de fonctions, allant des fonctions financières permettant de calculer des taux d’intérêt, des valeurs pour l’investissement et autres données, aux fonctions statistiques qui calculent des moyennes, des probabilités, des écartstypes, etc. Pour en savoir plus sur toutes les catégories de fonctions d’iWork et pour consulter de nombreux exemples illustrant leur utilisation, choisissez Aide > Aide sur les formules et fonctions d’iWork ou Aide > Guide de l’utilisateur des formules et fonctions d’iWork.« Introduction aux fonctions » : 22 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 23 Bien que vous puissiez taper une fonction dans le champ de texte de l’éditeur de formules ou dans la barre des formules (dans Numbers uniquement), le navigateur des fonctions constitue un moyen plus pratique d’ajouter une fonction à une formule. Sélectionnez une fonction pour consulter les informations qui s’y rapportent. Recherchez une fonction. Insérez la fonction sélectionnée. Sélectionnez une catégorie pour retrouver les fonctions qui en font partie. Sous-fenêtre de gauche : répertorie les catégories de fonctions. Sélectionnez une catégorie pour connaître les fonctions qu’elle regroupe. La plupart des catégories représentent des familles de fonctions connexes. La catégorie Tous reprend toutes les fonctions par ordre alphabétique. La catégorie Récent affiche la liste des dix dernières fonctions insérées à l’aide du navigateur des fonctions. Sous-fenêtre de droite : affiche les différentes fonctions. Sélectionnez une fonction pour afficher des informations sur cette dernière et, le cas échéant, pour l’ajouter à une formule. Sous-fenêtre du bas : affiche des informations détaillées sur la fonction sélectionnée. Pour ajouter une fonction à l’aide du navigateur des fonctions : 1 Dans l’éditeur de formules ou la barre de formules (disponible dans Numbers seulement), placez le point d’insertion à l’endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter la fonction. Remarque : Lorsque votre formule ne comprenant pas d’opérateur avant ou après une fonction en nécessite un, l’opérateur + est inséré automatiquement. Sélectionnez-le et tapez-en un autre au besoin. 2 Dans Pages ou Keynote, choisissez Insérer > Fonction > Afficher le navigateur des fonctions, pour ouvrir le navigateur des fonctions. Dans Numbers, ouvrez le navigateur des fonctions en effectuant l’une des opérations suivantes :  Cliquez sur le bouton Navigateur des fonctions dans la barre des formules.  Cliquez sur le bouton Fonction sur la barre d’outils, puis choisissez Afficher le navigateur des fonctions.  Sélectionnez Insérer > Fonction > Afficher le navigateur des fonctions.  Choisissez Présentation > Afficher le navigateur des fonctions. 3 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fonctions. 4 Indiquez la fonction de votre choix en double-cliquant dessus ou en la sélectionnant puis en cliquant sur Insérer une fonction. 5 Dans l’éditeur de formules ou la barre des formules (disponible dans Numbers uniquement), remplacez chaque paramètre fictif de la fonction insérée par une valeur. Aide relative à l’argument « émission » qui s’affiche lorsque le pointeur de la souris est placé sur le paramètre fictif. Les paramètres fictifs correspondant aux arguments facultatifs sont en gris clair. Cliquez ici pour retrouver la liste des valeurs possibles. Pour afficher une brève description de la valeur d’un argument : Maintenez le pointeur sur le paramètre fictif de l’argument. Vous pouvez aussi faire référence à des informations sur l’argument dans la fenêtre Navigateur des fonctions. Pour indiquer la valeur devant remplacer le paramètre fictif d’un argument : Cliquez sur l’argument fictif, puis saisissez une constante ou insérez une référence de cellule (pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la rubrique « Référencement de cellules dans des formules » à la page 26). Si l’endroit réservé à l’argument est affiché en gris clair, la saisie d’une valeur est facultative. Pour indiquer la valeur remplaçant le paramètre fictif d’un argument doté d’un triangle d’affichage : Cliquez sur le triangle d’affichage, puis choisissez une valeur dans le menu local. Pour consulter les informations sur une valeur du menu local, maintenez le pointeur sur la valeur. Pour accéder à l’aide sur la fonction, sélectionnez Aide Fonction. 24 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 25 Gestion des erreurs et des avertissements dans les formules Lorsque la formule d’une cellule de tableau est incomplète, qu’elle reprend des références des cellules non valides ou contient toute autre erreur, ou lorsqu’une opération d’importation génère une erreur de condition dans une cellule, Number ou Pages affiche une icône dans la cellule. Un triangle bleu dans la partie supérieure gauche d’une cellule affiche des alertes. Un triangle rouge au milieu d’une cellule indique une erreur provoquée par une formule. Pour afficher les messages des avertissements et des erreurs : m Cliquez sur l’icône. Un message récapitule chaque erreur et chaque avertissement associés à la cellule. Pour que Numbers génère un avertissement lorsqu’une cellule référencée dans une formule est vide, cliquez sur Numbers > Préférences, puis sélectionnez « Afficher les avertissements lorsque les formules réfèrent à des cellules vides » dans la sous-fenêtre Général. Cette option n’est pas proposée ni dans Keynote, ni dans Pages. Suppression de formules Si vous souhaitez ne plus utiliser de formule associée à une cellule, vous pouvez la supprimer rapidement. Pour supprimer une formule d’une cellule : 1 Sélectionnez la cellule. 2 Appuyez ensuite sur la touche Suppr. Dans Numbers, si vous voulez passer en revue les formules d’une feuille de calcul et choisir celles à supprimer, sélectionnez Présentation > Afficher la liste des formules.Référencement de cellules dans des formules Tous les tableaux possèdent des onglets de référence. Ceux-ci correspondent au numéro des rangs et à l’en-tête des colonnes. Dans Numbers, ils sont visibles à tout moment lorsque le tableau est actif, par exemple, quand une cellule du tableau est sélectionnée. Dans Keynote et Pages, les onglets de référence apparaissent seulement lorsque la formule d’une cellule est sélectionnée. Dans Numbers, les onglets de référence ressemblent à ce qui suit : Un onglet de référence se représente sous forme d’une zone grise située au-dessus de chaque colonne ou à gauche de chaque rangée, contenant respectivement la lettre de la colonne (par exemple, « A ») ou le numéro de la rangée (par exemple, « 3 »). L’apparence des onglets de référence dans Keynote et Pages est semblable à celle dans Numbers. Vous pouvez faire appel aux références à des cellules pour identifier dont vous voulez utiliser les valeurs dans des formules. Dans Numbers, les cellules peuvent se trouver dans le même tableau que la cellule de la formule, dans un autre tableau situé sur la même feuille ou sur une autre feuille. Les références de cellule présentent des formats différents selon que le tableau de la cellule possède des en-têtes, selon que vous faites référence à une seule cellule ou à un intervalle de cellules, etc. Voici un résumé des formats que vous pouvez utiliser pour les références de cellule. Pour faire référence à Utilisez le format Exemple Une cellule du tableau qui contient la formule La lettre de l’onglet de référence suivie par le numéro de l’onglet de référence de la cellule C55 fait référence au 55 ème rang de la troisième colonne. Une cellule pourvu d’un entête de rang et d’un en-tête de colonne Le nom de la colonne suivi du nom du rang Produits 2006 fait référence à une cellule dont l’en-tête de rang contient Produits et dont l’en-tête de colonne contient 2006. Une cellule pourvue de plusieurs en-têtes de rang ou de colonne Le nom de l’en-tête dont vous voulez faire référence aux colonnes ou aux rangs Si 2006 correspond à un en-tête qui court sur deux colonnes (Produits et Charges), 2006 fait référence à toutes les cellules des colonnes Produits et Charges. 26 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 27 Pour faire référence à Utilisez le format Exemple Un intervalle de cellules Un signe deux-points (:) entre la première et la dernière cellule de l’intervalle en utilisant la notation des onglets de référence pour identifier les cellules B2:B5 fait référence à quatre cellules de la seconde colonne. Toutes les cellules d’un rang Le nom du rang, ou numéro-durang:numéro-du-rang 1:1 fait référence à toutes les cellules du premier rang. Toutes les cellules d’une colonne La lettre ou le nom de la colonne C fait référence à toutes les cellules de la troisième colonne. Toutes les cellules d’un intervalle de rangs Un signe deux-points (:) entre le numéro ou le nom des premier et dernier rangs de l’intervalle 2:6 fait référence à toutes les cellules de cinq rangs. Toutes les cellules d’un intervalle de colonnes Un signe deux-points (:) entre la lettre ou le nom des première et dernière colonnes de l’intervalle B:C fait référence à toutes les cellules des seconde et troisième colonnes. Dans Numbers, une cellule située dans un autre tableau de la même feuille Si le nom de la cellule est unique dans la feuille de calcul, seul le nom est requis ; dans le cas contraire, le nom du tableau suivi de deux symboles deuxpoints (::) puis de l’identifiant de la cellule doivent être précisés Tableau 2::B5 fait référence à la cellule B5 du tableau intitulé Tableau 2. Tableau 2::Inscriptions 2006 fait référence à une cellule par son nom. Dans Numbers, une cellule située dans un tableau qui se trouve dans une autre feuille Si le nom de la cellule est unique dans la feuille de calcul, seul le nom est requis ; dans le cas contraire, le nom de la feuille suivi de deux symboles deux-points (::), puis du nom du tableau, de deux symboles deux-points supplémentaires et enfin de l’identifiant de la cellule doivent être précisés Feuille 2::Tableau 2::Droit d’inscription 2006 fait référence à une cellule située dans un tableau intitulé Tableau 2 qui se trouve dans la feuille portant le nom de Feuille 2. Dans Numbers, vous pouvez ignorer le nom d’un tableau ou d’une feuille si les cellules référencées ont des noms uniques dans la feuille de calcul. Dans Numbers, en faisant référence à une cellule dans un en-tête couvrant plusieurs rangs ou plusieurs colonnes, le comportement suivant s’applique :  Le nom dans la cellule d’en-tête la plus proche de la cellule qui y fait référence est utilisé. Par exemple, si un tableau possède deux rangs d’en-tête, que B1 contient « Chien » et B2 contient « Chat », lorsque vous enregistrez une formule utilisant « Chien », « Chat » est enregistré à la place de « Chien ».  Toutefois, si « Chat » apparaît dans une autre cellule d’en-tête de la feuille de calcul, c’est « Chien » qui est retenu.Pour savoir comment insérer des références de cellule dans une formule, reportez-vous à la rubrique suivante « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules ». Pour en savoir plus sur la différence entre références de cellule absolues et relatives, éléments importants si vous souhaitez copier ou déplacer des formules, consultez la rubrique « Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules » à la page 29. Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules Vous pouvez saisir manuellement des références de cellule dans une formule ou les insérer à l’aide de la souris ou de raccourcis clavier. Il existe plusieurs manières d’insérer des références à des cellules : m Pour utiliser un raccourci clavier pour saisir la référence à une cellule, placez le point d’insertion dans l’éditeur de formules ou la barre des formules (Numbers uniquement) et effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes :  Pour faire référence à une seule cellule, appuyez sur la touche Option et les touches fléchées simultanément pour sélectionner la cellule.  Pour faire référence à un intervalle de cellules, appuyez sur les touches Maj + Option et maintenez-les enfoncées après avoir sélectionné la première cellule de l’intervalle jusqu’à ce que la dernière cellule de l’intervalle soit atteinte.  Pour faire référence dans Numbers à des cellules situées dans un autre tableau d’une feuille quelconque, sélectionnez le tableau en appuyant sur les touches Option + Commande + Pg suiv pour descendre dans les tableaux ou sur Option + Commande + Pg préc pour monter. Le tableau voulu sélectionné, maintenez toujours la touche Option enfoncée, relâchez seulement la touche Commande, puis utilisez les touches fléchées pour sélectionner la cellule ou l’intervalle de cellules voulu (dans le cas d’un intervalle, l’utilisez Maj + Option).  Pour indiquer des attributs absolus et relatifs pour la référence à une cellule après l’avoir insérée, cliquez sur cette dernière et appuyez sur Commande + K pour passer d’option à l’autre. Consultez la rubrique « Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules » à la page 29 pour en savoir plus. m Pour utiliser la souris pour saisir la référence à une cellule, placez le point d’insertion dans l’éditeur de formules ou la barre des formules (Numbers uniquement) et effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes dans le même tableau que la cellule de formule ou, dans Numbers uniquement, dans un tableau d’une feuille quelconque :  Pour faire référence à une seule cellule, cliquez sur la cellule.  Pour faire référence à toutes les cellules d’une colonne ou d’un rang, cliquez sur l’onglet de référence de la colonne ou du rang.  Pour faire référence à un intervalle de cellules, cliquez sur une cellule de l’intervalle, puis faites glisser le curseur pour délimiter l’intervalle des cellules. 28 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 29  Pour spécifier des attributs absolus et relatifs d'une référence de cellule, cliquez sur le triangle d'affichage de la référence saisie et sélectionnez une option dans le menu local. Consultez la rubrique « Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules » à la page 29 pour en savoir plus. Dans Numbers, la référence insérée utilise des noms plutôt que la notation par onglets de référence sauf si la case « Utiliser les noms des cellules d’en-tête comme références » est décochée dans la sous-fenêtre Général des préférences de Numbers. Dans Keynote et Pages, la référence insérée utilise des noms plutôt que la notation par onglets de référence si les cellules référencées possèdent des en-têtes. m Pour taper la référence à une cellule, placez le point d’insertion dans l’éditeur de formules ou la barre des formules (Numbers uniquement), puis saisissez la référence en suivant l’un des formats cités dans « Référencement de cellules dans des formules » à la page 26. Lorsque vous tapez la référence d’une cellule contenant le nom d’une cellule d’entête (technique commune à toutes les applications), le nom d’un tableau (Numbers uniquement) ou d’une feuille (Numbers uniquement), et ce à partir du troisième caractère, une liste de suggestions apparaît si les caractères que vous avez tapés correspondent à un ou plusieurs des noms qui figurent dans votre feuille de calcul. Vous pouvez sélectionner une suggestion de la liste ou continuer à taper au clavier. Pour désactiver la suggestion de noms dans Numbers, choisissez Numbers > Préférences, puis décochez la case « Utiliser les noms des cellules d’en-tête comme références » dans la sous-fenêtre Général. Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules Utilisez des formes absolues et relatives de référence de cellule pour indiquer la cellule vers laquelle la référence doit renvoyer si vous copiez ou déplacez sa formule. Si une référence est relative (A1) : Elle ne change pas lorsque sa formule est déplacée. Par contre, si la formule est coupée ou copiée, puis collée, la référence de cellule change afin de conserver la même position relative par rapport à la cellule contenant la formule. Par exemple, si une formule contient A1 dans la cellule C4 et que vous copiez la formule et la collez en C5, la référence à la cellule dans C5 devient A2. Si les composants de rang et de colonne d’une référence sont absolus ($A$1) : La référence à la cellule ne change pas lorsque la formule est copiée. Utilisez le signe dollar ($) pour rendre un composant de rang ou de colonne absolu. Par exemple, si une formule contenant $A$1 se trouve dans C4 et si vous copiez la formule et la collez dans la cellule C5 ou dans D5, la référence indiquée dans C5 ou D5 reste $A$1. Si le composant de rang d’une référence est absolu (A$1) : Le composant de colonne est relatif et peut changer pour conserver sa position par rapport à la cellule de la formule. Par exemple, si une formule contenant A$1 se trouve dans C4 et si vous copiez la formule et la collez dans D5, la référence change en B$1.Si le composant de colonne d’une référence est absolu ($A1) : Le composant de rang est relatif et peut changer pour conserver sa position par rapport à la cellule de la formule. Par exemple, si une formule contenant $A1 se trouve dans C4 et si vous copiez la formule et la collez dans la cellule C5 ou dans D5, la référence indiquée dans C5 ou D5 devient $A2. Voici plusieurs manières d’indiquer que des composants de référence sont absolus : m Tapez la référence à la cellule à l’aide d’une des conventions décrites ci-avant. m Cliquez sur le triangle d’affichage de la référence à une cellule, puis choisissez une option dans le menu local. m Sélectionnez la référence à une cellule et appuyez sur Commande + K pour passer d’une option à l’autre. Utilisation d’opérateurs dans les formules Faites appel aux formules pour réaliser des opérations arithmétiques et pour comparer des valeurs.  Les opérateurs arithmétiques effectuent des opérations arithmétiques, telles que l’addition ou la soustraction, et donnent des résultats numériques. Consultez la rubrique « Opérateurs arithmétiques » à la page 30 pour en savoir plus.  Les opérateurs de comparaison comparent deux valeurs et donnent uniquement la valeur VRAI ou FAUX. Reportez-vous à la rubrique « Opérateurs de comparaison » à la page 31 pour en savoir plus. Opérateurs arithmétiques Vous pouvez utiliser des opérateurs arithmétiques pour effectuer des calculs arithmétiques dans des formules. Si vous voulez Utilisez l’opérateur arithmétique Par exemple, si A2 contient 20 et B2 contient 2, la formule Additionner deux valeurs + (signe plus) A2 + B2 donne 22. Soustraire deux valeurs – (signe moins) A2 – B2 donne 18. Multiplier deux valeurs * (astérisque) A2 * B2 donne 40. Diviser une valeur par une autre / (barre oblique) A2 / B2 donne 10. Élever une valeur à une puissance donnée ^ (accent circonflexe) A2 ^ B2 donne 400. Calculer un pourcentage % (signe pourcentage) A2% donne 0,2 formaté pour l’affichage en 20 %. L’utilisation d’une chaîne avec un opérateur arithmétique donne une erreur. Par exemple, 3 + "bonjour" n’est pas une opération arithmétique correcte. 30 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 31 Opérateurs de comparaison Vous pouvez faire appel aux opérateurs de comparaison entre deux valeurs dans des formules. Les opérations de comparaison ne renvoient que la valeur VRAI ou FAUX. Ils permettent également d’élaborer des conditions s’illustrant dans certaines fonctions. Voir « condition » dans le tableau « Les éléments de syntaxe et les termes utilisés dans la définition des fonctions » à la page 36 Si vous voulez déterminer si Utilisez l’opérateur de comparaison Par exemple, si A2 contient 20 et B2 contient 2, la formule Deux valeurs sont égales = A2 = B2 donne FAUX. Deux valeurs sont différentes <> A2 <> B2 donne VRAI. La première valeur est plus grande que la seconde > A2 > B2 donne VRAI. La première valeur est plus petite que la seconde < A2 < B2 donne FAUX. La première valeur est plus grande ou égale à la seconde valeur >= A2 >= B2 donne VRAI. La première valeur est plus petite ou égale à la seconde valeur <= A2 <= B2 donne FAUX. Les chaînes sont considérées comme supérieures aux nombres. Ainsi, "bonjour" > 5 donne VRAI. VRAI et FAUX peuvent être comparés mutuellement mais ne peuvent pas être comparés avec des nombres ou des chaînes. VRAI > FAUX et FAUX < VRAI, car VRAI est interprété comme 1 et FAUX est interprété comme 0. VRAI = 1 donne FAUX, et VRAI = "DuTexte" donne FAUX. Les opérations de comparaison sont principalement utilisées dans des fonctions telles que SI qui permettent de comparer deux valeurs, puis d’effectuer d’autres opérations selon que la comparaison renvoie le résultat VRAI ou FAUX. Pour en savoir plus sur ce sujet, choisissez Aide > « Aide sur les formules et fonctions d’iWork » ou Aide > « Guide de l’utilisateur des formules et fonctions d’iWork ».Opérateur de chaîne et jokers L’opérateur de chaîne s’illustre dans les formules ; les jokers s’utilisent pour leur part dans les conditions. Si vous voulez Utilisez cet opérateur de chaîne ou ce joker Par exemple Concaténez les chaînes ou le contenu de cellules & "abc"&"def" renvoie « abcdef » "abc"&A1 renvoie « abc2 » si la cellule A1 contient 2. A1&A2 renvoie « 12 » si la cellule A1 contient 1 et la cellule A2 contient 2. Remplacement d’un seul caractère ? “ea?” se substitue à n’importe quelle chaîne commençant par « ea » et contenant exactement un caractère de plus. Remplacement d’un nombre quelconque de caractères * "*ed" correspond à une chaîne d’une longueur quelconque et terminant par « ed ». Indication d’un caractère servant de joker ~ "~?" représente le point d’interrogation en tant que tel plutôt qu’un caractère quelconque de substitution. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation de jokers dans des conditions, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389. Copie ou déplacement de formules et de leurs valeurs calculées Les techniques ci-dessous permettent de copier et de déplacer des cellules associées à une formule : m Pour copier la valeur calculée d’une cellule de formule sans copier la formule ellemême, sélectionnez la cellule, choisissez Édition > Copier, sélectionnez la cellule destinataire de la valeur, puis choisissez Édition > Coller les valeurs. m Pour copier ou déplacer une formule dans une cellule ou une cellule faisant l’objet d’une référence dans une formule, suivez les instructions reprises dans la rubrique « Copie et déplacement de cellules » dans l’Aide Numbers ou dans le Guide de l’utilisateur de Numbers. 32 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableauxChapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux 33 Dans Numbers, si le tableau est volumineux et si vous voulez déplacer la formule sur une cellule non visible à l’écran, sélectionnez la cellule, choisissez Édition > Signaler pour être déplacé, sélectionnez la nouvelle cellule, puis Édition > Déplacer. Par exemple, si la formule =A1 se trouve dans la cellule D1 et que vous souhaitez déplacer cette formule dans la cellule X1, sélectionnez D1, cliquez sur Édition > Signaler pour être déplacé, puis sélectionnez X1 et cliquez sur Édition > Déplacer. La formule =A1 s’affiche désormais dans la cellule X1. Si vous copiez ou déplacez une cellule de formule : Modifiez si nécessaire les références de cellule en vous référant aux instructions de la rubrique « Distinction entre références absolues et relatives à des cellules » à la page 29. Si vous déplacez une cellule à laquelle une formule fait référence : La référence dans la formule s’actualise alors automatiquement. Par exemple, si une référence à A1 se trouve dans une formule et si vous déplacez A1 sur D95, la référence dans la formule reste D95. Affichage de toute les formules d’une feuille de calcul Dans Numbers, pour accéder à la liste de toutes les formules d’une feuille de calcul, choisissez Présentation > Afficher la liste des formules, ou cliquez sur le bouton de la liste des formules situé dans la barre d’outils. Emplacement : identifie la feuille et le tableau dans lesquels la formule se trouve. Résultats : affiche la valeur calculée par la formule. Formule : affiche la formule. Voici plusieurs manières d’utiliser la fenêtre de la liste des formules : m Pour identifier la cellule contenant une formule, cliquez sur cette dernière. Le tableau s’affiche au-dessus de la fenêtre de la liste des formules, où la cellule de la formule y est sélectionnée. m Pour modifier la formule, double-cliquez dessus. m Pour changer la taille de la fenêtre de la liste des formules, faites glisser verticalement la poignée de sélection située dans le coin supérieur droit. m Pour rechercher des formules qui contiennent un élément en particulier, tapez l’élément dans le champ de recherche et appuyez sur Retour.Recherche et remplacement d’éléments de formule Dans Numbers, la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer vous permet de faire une recherche parmi toutes les formules d’une feuille de calcul afin de retrouver certains éléments et de les modifier si vous le souhaitez. Voici plusieurs manières d’ouvrir la fenêtre Rechercher et remplacer : m Choisissez Édition > Rechercher > Afficher Rechercher, puis cliquez sur Rechercher et remplacer. m Choisissez Présentation > Afficher la liste des formules, puis cliquez sur Rechercher et remplacer. Rechercher : tapez l’élément de formule (référence à une cellule, opérateur, fonction, etc.) à rechercher. Dans : choisissez « formules uniquement » dans ce menu local. Respecter la casse : cochez cette case pour ne rechercher que les éléments dont les lettres majuscules et minuscules correspondent exactement à ce qui est indiqué dans le champ Rechercher. Mots entiers : cochez cette case pour ne rechercher que les éléments dont l’intégralité du contenu correspond à ce qui est indiqué dans le champ Rechercher. Remplacer : le cas échéant, tapez par quoi vous voulez remplacer ce qui est précisé dans le champ Rechercher. Répéter la recherche (en boucle) : cochez cette case pour rechercher ce qui est indiqué dans le champ Rechercher même après que la recherche ait été effectuée dans l’ensemble de la feuille de calcul. Suivant ou Précédent : cliquez sur le bouton pour rechercher l’occurrence précédente ou suivante de ce qui est précisé dans le champ Rechercher. Une fois l’élément trouvé, l’éditeur de formules s’ouvre et affiche la formule contenant l’occurrence de l’élément. Tout remplacer : cliquez pour remplacer toutes les occurrences de ce qui se trouve dans le champ Rechercher par ce qui est indiqué dans le champ Remplacer. Remplacer : cliquez pour remplacer l’occurrence active de ce qui se trouve dans le champ Rechercher par ce qui est indiqué dans le champ Remplacer. Remplacer et rechercher : cliquez pour remplacer l’occurrence active de ce qui se trouve dans le champ Rechercher et pour rechercher la suivante. 34 Chapitre 1 Utilisation de formules dans des tableaux35 Le présent chapitre constitue une introduction aux fonctions proposées dans iWork. Introduction aux fonctions Une fonction est une opération nommée que vous pouvez inclure dans une formule pour effectuer un calcul dans une cellule de tableau. iWork contient des fonctions permettant de réaliser des opérations mathématiques ou financières, d’extraire des valeurs en s’appuyant sur une recherche, de manipuler des chaînes de texte ou d’obtenir la date et l’heure. Chaque fonction possède un nom suivi d’arguments entre parenthèses. Les arguments permettent de fournir les valeurs dont a besoin la fonction pour effectuer le traitement. Par exemple, la formule suivante contient la fonction SOMME avec un argument unique (un intervalle de cellules) qui ajoute les valeurs de la colonne A, de la ligne 2 à la ligne 10 : =SOMME(A2:A10) Le nombre et les types d’arguments diffèrent pour chaque fonction. Le nombre d’arguments et leur description sont indiqués dans la description de la fonction sousjacente, organisés en liste alphabétique dans la rubrique « Liste des catégories de fonctions » à la page 44. Les descriptions contiennent aussi des informations et des exemples complémentaires pour chacune des fonctions. 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkInformations sur les fonctions Pour en savoir plus sur Allez à La syntaxe utilisée dans la définition des fonctions « Les éléments de syntaxe et les termes utilisés dans la définition des fonctions » à la page 36 Les types d’arguments utilisés par les fonctions « Types de valeur » à la page 39 Les catégories de fonctions, par exemple les fonctions de durée et statistiques « Liste des catégories de fonctions » à la page 44. Les fonctions sont triées par ordre alphabétique dans chaque catégorie. Les arguments communs à plusieurs fonctions financières « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires « Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires inclus » à la page 365 Les éléments de syntaxe et les termes utilisés dans la définition des fonctions Les fonctions sont décrites à l’aide d’éléments de syntaxe et de termes spécifiques. Terme ou symbole Signification texte en majuscules Le nom des fonctions est représenté en lettres majuscules. Le nom d’une fonction peut toutefois être saisi en associant des lettres majuscules et minuscules. parenthèses Les arguments des fonctions sont écrits entre parenthèses. Ces dernières sont obligatoires, bien que, dans quelques cas, iWork puisse insérer automatiquement la parenthèse fermante finale. texte en italique Le texte en italique indique que vous devez remplacer le nom de l’argument par la valeur que la fonction doit utiliser pour calculer le résultat. Les arguments possèdent un type de valeur, par exemple « nombre », « date/heure » ou « chaîne ». Les types sont décrits dans « Types de valeur » à la page 39. 36 Chapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkChapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 37 Terme ou symbole Signification virgules et points-virgules La syntaxe des fonctions utilise le point-virgule pour séparer les arguments. Si vos préférences Langue et texte (Mac OS X 10.6 ou ultérieur) ou les préférences International (versions antérieures de Max OS X) sont configurées de façon à utiliser la virgule comme séparateur décimal, séparez les arguments à l’aide d’un point-virgule plutôt que la virgule. points de suspension (…) Un argument suivi de points de suspension peut être répété autant de fois que nécessaire. Les éventuelles limitations sont décrites dans la définition de l’argument. tableau Un tableau (ne pas confondre avec le tableau d’un tableur, tel que Numbers) est une séquence de valeurs utilisées ou renvoyées par une fonction. constante de tableau Une constante de tableau est un ensemble de valeurs entourées d’accolades ({}). Elle doit être tapée directement dans la fonction. Par exemple, {1; 2; 5; 7} ou {"12/31/2008"; "15/3/2009"; "20/8/2010"}. fonction de tableau Un nombre réduit de fonctions sont appelées « fonctions de tableau » parce qu’elles renvoient un tableau de valeurs et non une seule valeur. Ces fonctions servent généralement à fournir des valeurs à une autre fonction. expression booléenne Une expression booléenne est une expression qui a pour résultat la valeur booléenne VRAI ou FAUX.Terme ou symbole Signification constante Une constante constitue une valeur précisée directement dans la formule qui ne contient aucun appel et aucune référence à une fonction. Par exemple, dans la formule =CONCATENER("chat"; "s"), « chat » et « s » représentent des constantes. argument modal Un argument modal est un argument pouvant adopter une valeur parmi celles indiquées. Généralement, les arguments modaux apportent des informations sur le type de calcul que la fonction doit réaliser ou sur le type de données que la fonction doit renvoyer. Si un argument modal possède une valeur par défaut, celle-ci est indiquée dans la description de l’argument. condition Une condition est une expression pouvant comprendre des opérateurs de comparaison, des constantes, l’opérateur de chaîne et commercial ainsi que des références. Le contenu d’une condition doit être présenté de sorte que le résultat de sa comparaison à une autre valeur génère la valeur booléenne VRAI ou FAUX. Vous trouverez d’autres informations et des exemples dans « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389. 38 Chapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkChapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 39 Types de valeur Un argument de fonction possède un type qui indique le type d’information que l’argument peut contenir. Les fonctions renvoient aussi une valeur d’un type donné. Type de valeur Description quelconque Si un argument est spécifié sous la forme « quelconque », il peut correspondre à une valeur booléenne, une date/heure, une durée, un nombre ou une chaîne. booléenne Une valeur booléenne correspond à la valeur VRAI (1) ou FAUX (0) logique ou une référence à une cellule contenant ou ayant pour résultat la valeur VRAI ou FAUX logique. Elle est généralement le résultat de l’évaluation d’une expression booléenne, mais une valeur booléenne peut être indiquée directement comme argument d’une fonction ou comme contenu d’une cellule. On utilise souvent les valeurs booléennes pour déterminer quelle expression doit être renvoyée par la fonction SI. collection Un argument indiqué sous la forme d’une collection peut correspondre à une référence à un seul intervalle de cellules, à une constante de tableau ou à un tableau renvoyé par une fonction de tableau. Un argument spécifié sous la forme d’une collection possède un attribut supplémentaire définissant le type de valeurs qu’il peut contenir.Type de valeur Description date/heure Il s’agit d’une valeur de date/heure ou d’une référence à une cellule contenant une valeur de date/heure dans un des formats pris en charge par iWork. Si vous tapez dans la fonction une valeur correspondant à une valeur de date/heure, vous devez l’indiquer entre guillemets. Vous pouvez n’afficher qu’une date ou une heure dans une cellule, mais toutes les valeurs de date/heure contiennent une date et une heure. Bien qu’il soit généralement possible de taper directement des dates sous forme de chaînes (par exemple, « 31/12/2010 »), la fonction DATE permet de s’assurer que la date est interprétée correctement indépendamment du format des dates choisi dans les Préférences Système (recherchez « format de date » dans la fenêtre des Préférences Système). 40 Chapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkChapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 41 Type de valeur Description durée Une durée est une période de temps ou une référence à une cellule contenant une période de temps. Les valeurs de durée peuvent être exprimées en semaines (sem. ou semaines), en jours (j ou jours), en heures (h ou heures), en minutes (m ou minutes), en secondes (s ou secondes) ou en millisecondes (ms ou millisecondes). Une durée peut être saisie dans deux formats différents. Le premier format consiste en un nombre suivi d’une période de temps (comme h pour heures) éventuellement suivie d’un espace et est répété pour d’autres périodes de temps. Pour préciser une période de temps, vous pouvez soit utiliser l’abréviation, comme « h », soit le nom complet, comme « heures ». Par exemple, 12h 5j 3m représente une durée de 12 heures, 5 jours et 3 minutes. Les périodes de temps ne doivent pas être saisies dans l’ordre et les espaces ne sont pas obligatoires. 5j 5h est équivalent à 5h5j. Si elle est tapée directement dans une formule, la chaîne doit être entourée de guillemets, comme dans « 12h 5j 3m ». Une durée peut aussi être saisie sous la forme d’une série de nombres séparés par des deuxpoints. Si vous utilisez ce format, vous devez préciser l’argument des secondes et ce dernier doit se terminer par une virgule suivie des millisecondes, lesquelles peuvent être égales à 0, si la valeur de durée risque d’être prise pour une valeur de date/heure. Par exemple, 12:15:30,0 représente une durée de 12 heures, 15 minutes et 30 secondes, alors que 12:15:30 représente l’heure 12:15:30. 5:00,0 représente une durée d’exactement 5 minutes. Si vous le tapez directement dans une fonction, la chaîne doit être entourée de guillemets, par exemple « 12:15:30,0 » ou « 5:00,0 ». Si la cellule est formatée pour afficher une durée sous un format en particulier, les unités s’affichent comme prévu et il n’est pas nécessaire d’indiquer les millisecondes. liste Une liste constitue une séquence de valeurs d’un autre type, séparées par des points-virgules. Par exemple, =CHOISIR(3; "1er"; "deuxième"; 7; "dernier"). Dans certains cas, la liste est délimitée par des parenthèses supplémentaires. Par exemple, =ZONES((B1:B5; C10:C12)).Type de valeur Description modale Une valeur modale est une simple valeur, souvent un nombre, représentant un mode donné pour un argument modal. Le terme « argument modal » est défini dans la rubrique « Les éléments de syntaxe et les termes utilisés dans la définition des fonctions » à la page 36. nombre Un nombre est une valeur numérique, une expression numérique ou une référence à une cellule contenant une expression numérique. Si les valeurs acceptables d’un nombre sont limitées (par exemple, si le nombre doit être plus grand que 0), cela est inclus dans la description des arguments. valeur d’intervalle Une valeur d’intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules (il peut s’agir d’une seule cellule). Une valeur d’intervalle possède un attribut supplémentaire définissant le type de valeurs que l’intervalle doit contenir. Cet attribut figure dans la description des arguments. 42 Chapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkChapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 43 Type de valeur Description référence Il s’agit de la référence à une seule cellule ou à un intervalle de cellules. Si l’intervalle contient plus d’une cellule, les cellules de début et de fin sont séparées par un seul deux-points. Par exemple, =NB(A3:D7) À moins que le nom de la cellule soit unique entre tous les tableaux, la référence doit mentionner le nom du tableau si elle se rapporte à une cellule d’un autre tableau. Par exemple, =Tableau 2::B2. Notez que le nom du tableau et la référence de cellule sont séparés par un double signe deux-points (::). Si le tableau se trouve sur une autre feuille, il convient de préciser également le nom de cette dernière, sauf si le nom de la cellule est unique entre les tableaux de toutes les feuilles. Par exemple, =SOMME(Feuille 2::Tableau 1::C2:G2). Le nom de la feuille, le nom du tableau et la référence de la cellule sont séparés par un double deux-points. Certaines fonctions qui acceptent les intervalles peuvent agir sur des intervalles qui couvrent plusieurs tableaux. Imaginons que vous avez ouvert un fichier qui possède une feuille contenant trois tableaux (Tableau 1, Tableau 2, Tableau 3). Imaginons encore que la cellule C2 de chaque tableau contienne le nombre 1. La formule couvrant plusieurs tableaux =SOMME(Tableau 1:Tableau 2 :: C2) additionne la cellule C2 dans tous les tableaux entre Tableau 1 et Tableau 2. Le résultat correspond donc à 2. Si vous faites glisser Tableau 3 entre Tableau 1 et Tableau 2 dans la barre latérale, la fonction renverra 3, puisqu’elle additionne maintenant la cellule C2 des trois tableaux (Tableau 3 se trouve entre Tableau 1 et Tableau 2). chaîne Une chaîne se réfère à toute valeur alphanumérique ou à une référence à une cellule contenant un ou plusieurs caractères. Les caractères peuvent correspondre à n’importe quel caractère imprimable, y compris les nombres. Si vous tapez dans la formule une valeur correspondant à une chaîne, vous devez l’indiquer entre guillemets. Si la valeur de chaîne est limitée (par exemple, si la chaîne doit représenter une date), la description des arguments mentionne cette limite.Liste des catégories de fonctions Il existe plusieurs catégories de fonctions. Par exemple, certaines fonctions réalisent des calculs sur des valeurs de date/heure, des fonctions logiques donnent un résultat booléen (VRAI ou FAUX), tandis que d’autres fonctions réalisent des calculs financiers. Chacune des catégories de fonctions est décrite dans un chapitre séparé. « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 Collage d’exemples de l’aide De nombreux exemples de l’aide peuvent être collés directement dans un tableau ou dans un document Numbers vierge. Deux groupes d’exemples peuvent être copiés depuis l’aide et collés dans un tableau. Le premier correspond à des exemples simples inclus dans l’aide. Tous ces exemples commencent par le signe égal (=). Dans l’aide relative à la fonction HEURE, deux exemples de ce type vous sont proposés. Pour utiliser l’un de ces exemples, sélectionnez le texte commençant par le signe égal jusqu’à la fin de l’exemple. 44 Chapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWorkChapitre 2 Vue d’ensemble des fonctions d’iWork 45 Une fois que ce texte est mis en surbrillance, vous pouvez le copier, puis le coller dans n’importe quelle cellule d’un tableau. Une autre méthode consiste à faire glisser la sélection de l’exemple et à le déposer dans n’importe quelle cellule d’un tableau. Le second type d’exemples représente des tableaux à copier, intégrés à l’aide. Voici le tableau illustrant la fonction INTERET.ACC. Pour réutiliser un tableau, sélectionnez toutes les cellules du tableau, y compris le premier rang. Lorsque le texte est en surbrillance, vous pouvez le copier puis le coller dans n’importe quelle cellule d’un tableau ou sur un document Numbers vierge. Faire glisser un élément reste impossible pour ce deuxième type d’exemples.46 Les fonctions de date d’et heure sont prévues pour simplifier vos manipulation de dates et d’heures et vous aident à résoudre certains problèmes se rapportant à ce type de ressources. Elles vous permettent, par exemple, de trouver le nombre de jours ouvrés entre deux dates ou de savoir le jour de la semaine pour une date donnée. Liste des fonctions date et heure iWork intégre ces fonctions de date et heure pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « ANNÉE » (page 48) La fonction ANNÉE renvoie l’année pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « AUJOURDHUI » (page 49) La fonction AUJOURDHUI renvoie la date système actuelle. L’heure est définie à 12 h 00. « DATE » (page 50) La fonction DATE combine des valeurs distinctes correspondant à l’année, au mois et au jour et renvoie une valeur de date/heure. Bien qu’il soit généralement possible de taper directement des dates sous forme de chaînes (par exemple, « 31/12/2010 »), la fonction DATE permet de s’assurer que la date est interprétée correctement indépendamment du format des dates indiqué dans les Préférences Système (recherchez « format de date » dans la fenêtre des Préférences Système). 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 47 Fonction Description « DATEDIF » (page 51) La fonction DATEDIF renvoie le nombre de jours, de mois ou d’années entre deux dates. « DATEVAL » (page 53) La fonction DATEVAL convertit une chaîne de texte correspondant à une date et renvoie une valeur de date/heure. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableurs plus anciens. « EDATE » (page 54) La fonction EDATE renvoie une date antérieure ou postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs mois à une date donnée. « FIN.MOIS » (page 54) La fonction FIN.MOIS renvoie une date qui est le dernier jour du mois antérieur ou postérieur d’un ou de plusieurs mois à une date donnée. « FRACTION.ANNEE » (page 55) La fonction FRACTION.ANNEE trouve la fraction d’une année représentée par le nombre de jours entiers entre deux dates. « HEURE » (page 56) La fonction HEURE renvoie l’heure pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « JOUR » (page 57) La fonction JOUR renvoie le jour du mois pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « JOURS360 » (page 58) La fonction JOURS360 renvoie le nombre de jours entre deux dates sur la base de douze mois de 30 jours et d’une année de 360 jours. « JOURSEM » (page 59) La fonction JOURSEM renvoie un numéro qui est le jour de la semaine pour une date donnée. « MAINTENANT » (page 60) La fonction MAINTENANT renvoie la valeur de date/heure actuelle telle qu’elle est indiquée par l’horloge système. « MINUTE » (page 60) La fonction MINUTE renvoie les minutes pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « MOIS » (page 61) La fonction MOIS renvoie le mois pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « NB.JOURS.OUVRES » (page 62) La fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES renvoie le nombre de jours ouvrés entre deux dates. Les jours ouvrés excluent les week-ends et les dates indiquées de façon explicite. « NOMDUMOIS » (page 63) La fonction NOMDUMOIS renvoie le nom du mois à partir d’un numéro. Le mois 1 correspond à janvier. « NOMJOUR » (page 63) La fonction NOMJOUR renvoie le nom du jour de la semaine à partir d’une valeur de date/heure ou d’un numéro. Le jour 1 est dimanche.Fonction Description « NO.SEMAINE » (page 65) La fonction NO.SEMAINE renvoie le numéro de la semaine dans l’année pour une date donnée. « SECONDE » (page 66) La fonction SECONDE renvoie les secondes pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. « SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE » (page 66) La fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE renvoie la date qui correspond au nombre donné de jours ouvrés avant ou après une date donnée. Les jours ouvrés excluent les week-ends et toutes les autres dates prévues en tant que telles. « TEMPS » (page 67) La fonction TEMPS convertit des valeurs distinctes correspondant à des heures, des minutes et des secondes en une valeur de date/heure. « TEMPSVAL » (page 68) La fonction TEMPSVAL renvoie l’heure, sous la forme d’une fraction décimale d’une journée de 24 heures, d’après une valeur de date/heure donnée ou à partir d’une chaîne de texte. ANNÉE La fonction ANNÉE renvoie l’année pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. ANNÉE(date)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemples =ANNÉE("6 avril 2008") renvoie 2008. =ANNÉE(MAINTENANT()) renvoie 2009 si le calcul est effectué le 4 juin 2009. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « HEURE » à la page 56 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « MOIS » à la page 61 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 48 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 49 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 AUJOURDHUI La fonction AUJOURDHUI renvoie la date système actuelle. L’heure est définie à 12 h 00. AUJOURDHUI() Remarques d’usage  La fonction AUJOURDHUI ne comprend aucun argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =AUJOURDHUI().  La date affichée est mise à jour chaque fois que vous ouvrez ou modifiez votre fichier.  Vous pouvez vous servir de la fonction MAINTENANT pour obtenir la date et l’heure actuelles et pour mettre en forme la cellule de sorte qu’elle affiche ces deux valeurs. Exemple =AUJOURDHUI() renvoie 6 avril 2008 lorsque le calcul est effectué le 6 avril 2008. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MAINTENANT » à la page 60 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44DATE La fonction DATE combine des valeurs distinctes correspondant à l’année, au mois et au jour et renvoie une valeur de date/heure. Bien qu’il soit généralement possible de taper directement des dates sous forme de chaînes (par exemple, « 31/12/2010 »), la fonction DATE permet de s’assurer que la date est interprétée correctement indépendamment du format des dates indiqué dans les Préférences Système (recherchez « format de date » dans la fenêtre des Préférences Système). DATE(année; mois; jour)  année : année à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. année correspond à un nombre. La valeur n’est pas convertie. Si vous indiquez 10, c’est l’année 10 qui est utilisée, et non pas l’année 1910 ou 2010.  mois : mois à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. mois correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 12.  jour : jour à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. jour correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et le nombre de jours dans le mois. Exemples Si A1 contient 2014, A2 contient 11 et A3 contient 10 : =DATE(A1; A2; A3) renvoie « 10 nov. 2014 » en s’adaptant au format de la cellule. =DATE(A1; A3; A2) renvoie « 11 oct. 2014 ». =DATE(2012; 2; 14) renvoie « 14 fév. 2012 ». Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DUREE » à la page 71 « TEMPS » à la page 67 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 50 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 51 DATEDIF La fonction DATEDIF renvoie le nombre de jours, de mois ou d’années entre deux dates. DATEDIF(date-début; date-fin; méthode-calc)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  date de fin : date de fin de la période à calculer. date-fin correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  méthode-calc : indique comment exprimer la différence temporelle et comment gérer les dates pour des années ou des mois différents. "J" : compte les jours entre les dates de début et de fin. "M" : compte les mois entre les dates de début et de fin. "A" : compte les années entre les dates de début et de fin. "MJ" : compte les jours entre les dates de début et de fin en ignorant les mois et les années. Le mois de date-fin est considéré comme étant le mois de date-début. Si la date de début est postérieure à la date de fin, le compte commence à la date de fin comme si celle-ci appartenait au mois précédent. L’année de la date-fin sert à vérifier s’il s’agit d’une année bissextile. "AM" : compte le nombre de mois entiers entre les dates de début et de fin en ignorant l’année. Si le mois/jour de début est antérieur au mois/jour de fin, les dates sont traitées comme s’ils appartenaient à la même année. Si le mois/jour de début est postérieur au mois/jour de fin, les dates sont traitées comme s’ils appartenaient à des années consécutives. "AJ" : compte le nombre de jours entre les dates de début et de fin en ignorant l’année. Si le mois/jour de début est antérieur au mois/jour de fin, les dates sont traitées comme s’ils appartenaient à la même année. Si le mois/jour de début est postérieur au mois/jour de fin, les dates sont traitées comme s’ils appartenaient à des années consécutives.Exemples Si A1 contient la valeur de date/heure 6/4/88 et A2 contient la valeur de date/heure 30/10/06 : =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "J") renvoie 6781, le nombre de jours entre le 6 avril 1988 et le 30 octobre 2006. =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "M") renvoie 222, le nombre de mois entiers entre le 6 avril 1988 et le 30 octobre 2006. =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "A") renvoie 18, le nombre d’années entières entre le 6 avril 1988 et le 30 octobre 2006. =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "MJ") renvoie 24, le nombre de jours entre le sixième jour d’un mois et le trentième jour du même mois. =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "AM") renvoie 6, le nombre de mois entre avril et le mois d’octobre suivant de n’importe quelle année. =DATEDIF(A1; A2; "AJ") renvoie 207, le nombre de jours entre le 6 avril et le 31 octobre suivant de n’importe quelle année. =DATEDIF("6/4/1988"; MAINTENANT(); "A") & " années, " & DATEDIF("6/4/1988"; MAINTENANT(); "AM") & " mois et " & DATEDIF(A1; MAINTENANT(); "AJ") & " jours" renvoie l’âge d’une personne née le 6 avril 1988. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOURS360 » à la page 58 « NB.JOURS.OUVRES » à la page 62 « MAINTENANT » à la page 60 « FRACTION.ANNEE » à la page 55 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 52 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 53 DATEVAL La fonction DATEVAL convertit une chaîne de texte correspondant à une date et renvoie une valeur de date/heure. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableurs plus anciens. DATEVAL(date-texte)  date-texte : chaîne de caractères de la date à convertir. date-texte est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Ce doit être une date indiquée entre guillemets ou une valeur de date/heure. Si date-texte n’est pas une date valide, une erreur est renvoyée. Exemples Si la cellule B1 contient la valeur de date/heure 2 août 1979 06 h 30’ 00’’ et que la cellule C1 contient la chaîne 16/10/2008 : =DATEVAL(B1) renvoie le 2 août 1979, laquelle date est considérée comme une valeur de date si elle fait l’objet d’une référence dans d’autres formules. La valeur renvoyée est mise en forme en fonction du format de la cellule active. Une cellule adoptant le format Automatique utilise le format de date indiqué dans les Préférences Système (recherchez « format de date » dans la fenêtre des Préférences Système). =DATEVAL(C1) renvoie « 16 oct. 2008 ». =DATEVAL(29/12/1974) renvoie « 29 déc. 1979 ». Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATE » à la page 50 « TEMPS » à la page 67 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44EDATE La fonction EDATE renvoie une date antérieure ou postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs mois à une date donnée. EDATE(date-début; décalage-mois)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  décalage-mois : nombre de mois avant ou après la date de début. décalage-mois correspond à un nombre. Une valeur de décalage-mois négative permet d’indiquer le nombre de mois avant la date de début ; à l’inverse une valeur de décalage-mois positive permet d’indiquer les mois après la date de début. Exemples =EDATE("15/1/2000"; 1) renvoie 15/2/2000, la même date mais un mois plus tard. =EDATE("15/1/2000"; –24) renvoie 15/1/1998, la même date, 24 mois plus tôt. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FIN.MOIS » à la page 54 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 FIN.MOIS La fonction FIN.MOIS renvoie une date qui est le dernier jour du mois un certain nombre de mois avant ou après une date donnée. FIN.MOIS(date-début; décalage-mois)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  décalage-mois : nombre de mois avant ou après la date de début. décalage-mois correspond à un nombre. Une valeur de décalage-mois négative permet d’indiquer le nombre de mois avant la date de début ; à l’inverse une valeur de décalage-mois positive permet d’indiquer les mois après la date de début. 54 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 55 Exemples =FIN.MOIS("15/5/2010"; 5) renvoie « 31 oct. 2010 », c’est-à-dire le dernier jour du mois postérieur de cinq mois à mai 2010. =FIN.MOIS("15/5/2010"; –5) renvoie « 31 déc. 2009 », c’est-à-dire le dernier jour du mois antérieur de cinq mois à mai 2010. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « EDATE » à la page 54 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 FRACTION.ANNEE La fonction FRACTION.ANNEE trouve la fraction d’une année représentée par le nombre de jours entiers entre deux dates. FRACTION.ANNEE(date-début; date-fin; base-journalière)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  date de fin : date de fin de la période à calculer. date-fin correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360).Exemples =FRACTION.ANNEE("15/12/2009"; "30/6/2010"; 0) renvoie 0,541666667. =FRACTION.ANNEE("15/12/2009"; "30/6/2010"; 1) renvoie 0,539726027. =FRACTION.ANNEE("15/12/2009"; "30/6/2010"; 2) renvoie 0,547222222. =FRACTION.ANNEE("15/12/2009"; "30/6/2010"; 3) renvoie 0,539726027. =FRACTION.ANNEE("15/12/2009"; "30/6/2010"; 4) renvoie 0,541666667. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATEDIF » à la page 51 « JOURS360 » à la page 58 « NB.JOURS.OUVRES » à la page 62 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 HEURE La fonction HEURE renvoie l’heure pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. HEURE(instant)  instant : heure à utiliser dans la fonction. instant correspond à une valeur de date/ heure. La partie correspondant à la date est ignorée par cette fonction. Remarques d’usage  L’heure renvoyée est au format 24 heures (0 correspond à minuit, 23 correspond à 11 h 00 du soir). Exemples =HEURE(MAINTENANT()) renvoie l’heure actuelle du jour. =HEURE("6/4/88 11 h 59’ 22") renvoie 11. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 56 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 57 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « MOIS » à la page 61 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « ANNÉE » à la page 48 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 JOUR La fonction JOUR renvoie le jour du mois pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. JOUR(date)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemples =JOUR("6/4/88 23 h 59’ 22’’) renvoie 6. =JOUR("12/5/2009") renvoie 12. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NOMJOUR » à la page 63 « HEURE » à la page 56 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « MOIS » à la page 61 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « ANNÉE » à la page 48 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15« Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 JOURS360 La fonction JOURS360 renvoie le nombre de jours entre deux dates sur la base de douze mois de 30 jours et d’une année de 360 jours. JOURS360(date-début; date-fin; utiliser-méthode-européenne)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  date de fin : date de fin de la période à calculer. date-fin correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  utiliser-méthode-européenne : valeur facultative indiquant si la méthode NASD ou la méthode européenne doit être utilisée pour les dates tombant le 31 d’un mois. méthode NASD (0, FAUX ou omis): méthode NASD utilisée pour les dates qui tombent le 31 d’un mois. méthode DEVISE (1 ou VRAI): méthode européenne utilisée pour les dates qui tombent le 31 d’un mois. Exemples =JOURS360("20/12/2008"; "3/31/2009") renvoie 101d. =JOURS360("27/2/2008"; "31/3/2009"; 0) renvoie 394d. =JOURS360("27/2/2008"; "31/3/2009"; 1) renvoie 393d lorsque la méthode de calcul européenne est utilisée. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATEDIF » à la page 51 « NB.JOURS.OUVRES » à la page 62 « FRACTION.ANNEE » à la page 55 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 58 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 59 JOURSEM La fonction JOURSEM renvoie un numéro qui est le jour de la semaine pour une date donnée. JOURSEM(date; premier-jour)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction.  premier-jour : valeur facultative qui précise le mode de numérotation des jours. Dimanche correspond au jour numéro 1 (1 ou omis): dimanche est le premier jour (jour 1) de la semaine et samedi est le septième jour. Lundi correspond au jour numéro 1 (2): lundi est le premier jour (jour 1) de la semaine et dimanche est le septième jour. Lundi correspond au jour numéro 0 (3): lundi est le premier jour (jour 0) de la semaine et dimanche est le sixième jour. Exemples =JOURSEM("6 avr. 1988"; 1) renvoie 4 (mercredi correspondant au quatrième jour si vous considérez que la semaine commence le dimanche). =JOURSEM("6 avr. 1988") renvoie la même valeur que dans l’exemple précédent (car le système de numérotation démarrant à 1 est utilisé si aucun argument numérotation n’est indiqué). =JOURSEM("6 avr. 1988"; 2) renvoie 3 (mercredi correspondant au troisième jour si vous considérez que la semaine commence le lundi). =JOURSEM("6 avr. 1988"; 3) renvoie 2 (mercredi considéré le jour 2 si lundi sert de base commençant à 0). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NOMJOUR » à la page 63 « NOMDUMOIS » à la page 63 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44MAINTENANT La fonction MAINTENANT renvoie la valeur de date/heure actuelle telle qu’elle est indiquée par l’horloge système. MAINTENANT() Remarques d’usage  La fonction MAINTENANT ne comprend aucun argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =MAINTENANT(). Exemple =MAINTENANT() renvoie « 4 oct. 2008 10 h 47 » si votre fichier est mis à jour le 4 octobre 2008 à 10 h 47. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « AUJOURDHUI » à la page 49 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MINUTE La fonction MINUTE renvoie les minutes pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. MINUTE(instant)  instant : heure à utiliser dans la fonction. instant correspond à une valeur de date/ heure. La partie correspondant à la date est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemple =MINUTE("6/4/88 11 h 59’ 22") renvoie 59. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « HEURE » à la page 56 60 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 61 « MOIS » à la page 61 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « ANNÉE » à la page 48 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MOIS La fonction MOIS renvoie le mois pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. MOIS(date)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemple =MOIS("6 avril 1988 11 h 59’ 22") renvoie 4. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « HEURE » à la page 56 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « NOMDUMOIS » à la page 63 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « ANNÉE » à la page 48 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28« Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.JOURS.OUVRES La fonction NB.JOURS.OUVRES renvoie le nombre de jours ouvrés entre deux dates. Les jours ouvrés excluent les week-ends et les dates indiquées de façon explicite. NB.JOURS.OUVRES(date-début; date-fin; dates-exclues)  date de début : date de début de la période à calculer. date-début correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  date de fin : date de fin de la période à calculer. date-fin correspond à une valeur de date/heure.  dates-exclues : collection facultative de dates devant être exclues du calcul. datesexclues correspond à une collection comprenant des valeurs de date/heure. Exemple =NB.JOURS.OUVRES("01/11/2009"; "30/11/2009"; {"11/11/2009"; "26/11/2009"}) renvoie 19d, c’est-à-dire le nombre de jours ouvrés en novembre 2009 qui exclut les week-ends et les deux jours chômés précisés. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATEDIF » à la page 51 « JOURS360 » à la page 58 « SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE » à la page 66 « FRACTION.ANNEE » à la page 55 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 62 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 63 NOMDUMOIS La fonction NOMDUMOIS renvoie le nom du mois à partir d’un numéro. Le mois 1 correspond à janvier. NOMDUMOIS(mois-nbre)  mois-nbre : mois désiré. mois-nbre correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 12. Si la valeur de mois-nbre contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Exemples =NOMDUMOIS(9) renvoie « septembre ». =NOMDUMOIS(6) renvoie « juin ». Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NOMJOUR » à la page 63 « MOIS » à la page 61 « JOURSEM » à la page 59 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NOMJOUR La fonction NOMJOUR renvoie le nom du jour de la semaine à partir d’une valeur de date/heure ou d’un numéro. Le jour 1 est dimanche. NOMJOUR(nbre-jour)  nbre-jour : jour souhaité de la semaine. nbre-jour correspond à une valeur de date/ heure ou à un chiffre compris entre 1 et 7. Si la valeur de nbre-jour contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.Exemples Si B1 contient la valeur de date/heure 2 août 1979 06 h 30’ 00’’, que C1 contient la chaîne 16/10/2008 et que D1 contient 6 : =NOMJOUR(B1) renvoie « jeudi ». =NOMJOUR(C1) renvoie « jeudi ». =NOMJOUR(D1) renvoie « vendredi ». =NOMJOUR("29/12/1974") renvoie « dimanche ». Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « NOMDUMOIS » à la page 63 « JOURSEM » à la page 59 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 64 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 65 NO.SEMAINE La fonction NO.SEMAINE renvoie le numéro de la semaine dans l’année pour une date donnée. NO.SEMAINE(date; premier-jour)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction.  premier-jour : valeur facultative indiquant si les semaines doivent commencer le dimanche ou le lundi. Dimanche correspond au jour numéro 1 (1 ou omis): dimanche est le premier jour (jour 1) de la semaine et samedi est le septième jour. Lundi correspond au jour numéro 1 (2): lundi est le premier jour (jour 1) de la semaine et dimanche est le septième jour. Exemple =NO.SEMAINE("12/7/2009"; 1) renvoie 29. =NO.SEMAINE("12/7/2009"; 2) renvoie 28. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « HEURE » à la page 56 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « MOIS » à la page 61 « SECONDE » à la page 66 « ANNÉE » à la page 48 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44SECONDE La fonction SECONDE renvoie les secondes pour une valeur de date/heure donnée. SECONDE(instant)  instant : heure à utiliser dans la fonction. instant correspond à une valeur de date/ heure. La partie correspondant à la date est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemple =SECONDE("6/4/88 11 h 59’ 22") renvoie 22. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « JOUR » à la page 57 « HEURE » à la page 56 « MINUTE » à la page 60 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE La fonction SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE renvoie la date qui correspond au nombre donné de jours ouvrés avant ou après une date donnée. Les jours ouvrés excluent les week-ends et toutes les autres dates prévues en tant que telles. SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE(date; jours-ouvrés; dates-exclues)  date : date à utiliser dans la fonction. date correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La partie correspondant à l’heure est ignorée par cette fonction.  jours-ouvrés : nombre de jours ouvrés avant ou après la date donnée. jours-ouvrés correspond à un nombre. Elle est positive si la date souhaitée est postérieure à la valeur de date et négative si la date souhaitée est antérieure à la valeur de date.  dates-exclues : collection facultative de dates devant être exclues du calcul. datesexclues correspond à une collection comprenant des valeurs de date/heure. 66 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heureChapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 67 Exemple =SERIE.JOUR.OUVRE("01/11/2009"; 20; {"11/11/2009"; "26/11/2009"}) renvoie « 1 déc. 2009 », c’est-à-dire le jour ouvré qui vient 20 jours ouvré après le 01/11/2009 si l’on ne compte pas les week-ends et les deux jours chômés précisés. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB.JOURS.OUVRES » à la page 62 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TEMPS La fonction TEMPS convertit des valeurs distinctes correspondant à des heures, des minutes et des secondes en une valeur de date/heure. TEMPS(heures; minutes; secondes)  heures : nombre d’heures à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. heures correspond à un nombre. Si la valeur d’heures contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.  minutes : nombre de minutes à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. minutes correspond à un nombre. Si la valeur de minutes contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.  secondes : nombre de secondes à inclure dans la valeur renvoyée. secondes correspond à un nombre. Si la valeur de secondes contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Remarques d’usage  Vous pouvez indiquer des valeurs d’heure, de minute et de seconde respectivement supérieures à 24, 60 et 60. Si la somme des heures, des minutes et des secondes est une valeur supérieure à 24 heures, des tranches de 24 heures lui sont soustraites autant de fois que nécessaire jusqu’à ce que la valeur soit inférieure à 24 heures.68 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure Exemples =TEMPS(12; 0; 0) renvoie 00 h 00. =TEMPS(16; 45; 30) renvoie 16 h 45. =TEMPS(0; 900; 0) renvoie 15 h 00. =TEMPS(60; 0; 0) renvoie 00 h 00. =TEMPS(4,25; 0; 0) renvoie 4 h 00. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATE » à la page 50 « DATEVAL » à la page 53 « DUREE » à la page 71 « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TEMPSVAL La fonction TEMPSVAL renvoie l’heure, sous la forme d’une fraction décimale d’une journée de 24 heures, à partir d’une valeur de date/heure donnée ou à partir d’une chaîne de texte. TEMPSVAL(instant)  instant : heure à utiliser dans la fonction. instant correspond à une valeur de date/ heure. La partie correspondant à la date est ignorée par cette fonction. Exemples =TEMPSVAL("6/4/88 12 h 00") renvoie 0,5 (midi représente en effet la moitié de la journée). =TEMPSVAL("12 h 00’ 59") renvoie 0,5007 (arrondi à quatre décimales après la virgule). =TEMPSVAL("21 h 00") renvoie 0,875 (21 heures ou 9 h 00 du soir, divisé par 24). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions date et heure » à la page 46« Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Chapitre 3 Fonctions date et heure 6970 Les fonctions de durée vous permettent de convertir différentes périodes dans le temps, comme des heures, des jours et des semaines. Liste des fonctions de durée Ces fonctions de manipulation de durées ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « DUREE » (page 71) La fonction DUREE associe différentes valeurs représentant des semaines, des jours, des heures, des minutes, des secondes et des millisecondes, et renvoie une durée. « DUREE.SUPPRESSION » (page 72) La fonction DUREE.SUPPRESSION évalue une valeur donnée et renvoie soit le nombre de jours représentés, s’il s’agit d’une durée, soit la valeur donnée. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableurs plus anciens. « DURHEURES » (page 73) La fonction DURHEURES exprime une durée en heures. « DURJOURS » (page 74) La fonction DURJOURS exprime une durée en jours. « DURMILLISECONDES » (page 74) La fonction DURMILLISECONDES exprime une durée en millisecondes. « DURMINUTES » (page 75) La fonction DURMINUTES exprime une durée en minutes. « DURSECONDES » (page 76) La fonction DURSECONDES exprime une durée en secondes. « DURSEMAINES » (page 77) La fonction DURSEMAINES exprime une durée en semaines. 4 Fonctions de duréeChapitre 4 Fonctions de durée 71 DUREE La fonction DUREE combine plusieurs valeurs pour des semaines, des jours, des heures, des minutes, des secondes et des millisecondes et renvoie une durée. DUREE(semaines; jours; heures; minutes; secondes; millisecondes)  semaines : valeur représentant le nombre de semaines. semaines correspond à un nombre.  jours : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de jours. jours correspond à un nombre.  heures : valeur facultative représentant le nombre d’heures. heures correspond à un nombre.  minutes : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de minutes. minutes correspond à un nombre.  secondes : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de secondes. secondes correspond à un nombre.  millisecondes : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de millisecondes. millisecondes correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Un argument égal à 0 peut être omis, mais la virgule doit être insérée si d’autres valeurs sont indiquées. Par exemple, DUREE(; ;12; 3) renvoie une durée de 12 h 3 m (12 heures et 3 minutes).  Les valeurs négatives sont autorisées. Par exemple, DUREE(0; 2; –24) renvoie une durée de 1 jour (2 jours moins 24 heures). Exemples =DUREE(1) donne 1sem (1 semaine). =DUREE(;;1) donne 1h (1 heure). =DUREE(1;5) donne 1sem 3j 12h (1 semaine, 3 jours, 12 heures ou 1,5 semaines). =DUREE(3; 2; 7; 10; 15,3505) donne 3sem 2j 7h 10m 15s 350ms (3 semaines, 2 jours, 7 heures, 10 minutes, 15 secondes, 350 millisecondes). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DATE » à la page 50 « TEMPS » à la page 67 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15« Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DUREE.SUPPRESSION La fonction DUREE.SUPPRESSION évalue une valeur donnée et renvoie soit le nombre de jours représentés, s’il s’agit d’une durée, soit la valeur donnée. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableurs plus anciens. DUREE.SUPPRESSION(valeur-quelconque)  valeur-quelconque : valeur quelconque. valeur-quelconque peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Si valeur-quelconque est une durée, le résultat est identique à DURJOURS. À défaut, valeur-quelconque est renvoyé tel quel.  Cette fonction peut être automatiquement insérée si un document Numbers ’08 est mis à niveau ou si un document Excel ou Appleworks est importé. Elle est supprimée si le fichier est enregistré sous le format Numbers ‘08 ou Excel. Exemples =DUREE.SUPPRESSION("1sem") donne 7, l’équivalent d’une semaine en jours. =DUREE.SUPPRESSION(12) donne 12, car, comme il ne s’agissait pas d’une durée, elle est renvoyée telle quelle. =DUREE.SUPPRESSION ("abc") donne « abc ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 72 Chapitre 4 Fonctions de duréeChapitre 4 Fonctions de durée 73 DURHEURES La fonction DURHEURES convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre d’heures. DURHEURES(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURHEURES("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne 410,1666681. =DURHEURES("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne 1693,001528. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DURJOURS » à la page 74 « DURMILLISECONDES » à la page 74 « DURMINUTES » à la page 75 « DURSECONDES » à la page 76 « DURSEMAINES » à la page 77 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44DURJOURS La fonction DURJOURS convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre de jours. DURJOURS(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURJOURS("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne 17,09027784. =DURJOURS("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne 70,5417302. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DURHEURES » à la page 73 « DURMILLISECONDES » à la page 74 « DURMINUTES » à la page 75 « DURSECONDES » à la page 76 « DURSEMAINES » à la page 77 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DURMILLISECONDES La fonction DURMILLISECONDES convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre de millisecondes. DURMILLISECONDES(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURMILLISECONDES("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne « 1 476 600 005 ». =DURMILLISECONDES("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne « 6 094 805 500 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 74 Chapitre 4 Fonctions de duréeChapitre 4 Fonctions de durée 75 « DURJOURS » à la page 74 « DURHEURES » à la page 73 « DURMINUTES » à la page 75 « DURSECONDES » à la page 76 « DURSEMAINES » à la page 77 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DURMINUTES La fonction DURMINUTES convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre de minutes. DURMINUTES(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURMINUTES("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne « 24 610,0000833333 ». =DURMINUTES("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne « 101 580,091666667 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DURJOURS » à la page 74 « DURHEURES » à la page 73 « DURMILLISECONDES » à la page 74 « DURSECONDES » à la page 76 « DURSEMAINES » à la page 77 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15« Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DURSECONDES La fonction DURSECONDES convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre de secondes. DURSECONDES(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURSECONDES("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne « 1 476 600,005 ». =DURSECONDES("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne « 6 094 805,5 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DURJOURS » à la page 74 « DURHEURES » à la page 73 « DURMILLISECONDES » à la page 74 « DURMINUTES » à la page 75 « DURSEMAINES » à la page 77 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 76 Chapitre 4 Fonctions de duréeChapitre 4 Fonctions de durée 77 DURSEMAINES La fonction DURSEMAINES convertit une valeur de durée en un nombre de semaines. DURSEMAINES(durée)  durée : période temporelle à convertir. durée correspond à une valeur de durée. Exemples =DURSEMAINES("2sem 3j 2h 10m 0s 5ms") donne 2,44146826223545. =DURSEMAINES("10:0:13:00:05,500") donne 10,0773900462963. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DURJOURS » à la page 74 « DURHEURES » à la page 73 « DURMILLISECONDES » à la page 74 « DURMINUTES » à la page 75 « DURSECONDES » à la page 76 « Liste des fonctions de durée » à la page 70 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 4478 Les fonctions d’ingénierie vous aident à calculer certaines valeurs d’ingénierie courantes et à effectuer des conversions entre différentes bases numériques. Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie Ces fonctions d’ingénierie ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « BASE10 » (page 79) La fonction BASE10 convertit un nombre de la base indiquée en un nombre en base 10. « BASEN » (page 80) La fonction BASEN convertit un nombre en base 10 en un nombre correspondant dans la base indiquée. « BESSELJ » (page 81) La fonction BESSELJ renvoie la fonction de Bessel d’ordre entier J n (x). « BESSELY » (page 82) La fonction BESSELY renvoie la fonction de Bessel d’ordre entier Y n (x). « BINDEC » (page 83) La fonction BINDEC convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre décimal correspondant. « BINHEX » (page 84) La fonction BINHEX convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. « BINOCT » (page 85) La fonction BINOCT convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre octal correspondant. « CONVERT » (page 86) La fonction CONVERT convertit un nombre d’un système de mesure en une valeur correspondante dans un autre système de mesure. « DECBIN » (page 90) La fonction DECBIN convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre binaire correspondant. 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 79 Fonction Description « DECHEX » (page 91) La fonction DECHEX convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. « DECOCT » (page 92) La fonction DECOCT convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre octal correspondant. « DELTA » (page 93) La fonction DELTA détermine si deux valeurs sont exactement égales. « ERF » (page 94) La fonction ERF renvoie la fonction d’erreur intégrée entre deux valeurs. « ERFC » (page 94) La fonction ERFC renvoie la fonction ERF complémentaire intégrée entre une limite inférieure donnée et l’infini. « HEXBIN » (page 95) La fonction HEXBIN convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre binaire correspondant. « HEXDEC » (page 96) La fonction HEXDEC convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre décimal correspondant. « HEXOCT » (page 97) La fonction HEXOCT convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre octal correspondant. « OCTBIN » (page 98) La fonction OCTBIN convertit un nombre octal en un nombre binaire correspondant. « OCTDEC » (page 99) La fonction OCTDEC convertit un nombre octal en un nombre décimal correspondant. « OCTHEX » (page 100) La fonction OCTHEX convertit un nombre octal en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. « SUP.SEUIL » (page 101) La fonction SUP.SEUIL détermine si une valeur est supérieure ou exactement égale à une autre valeur. BASE10 La fonction BASE10 convertit un nombre de la base indiquée en un nombre correspondant en base 10. BASE10(convertir-chaîne; base)  convertir-chaîne : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. convertir-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit comprendre que des nombres et des lettres valides dans la base du nombre qui est converti.  base : base actuelle du nombre à convertir. base correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 36.Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction renvoie une valeur numérique. Elle peut être utilisée sans problème dans une formule contenant d’autres valeurs numériques. Certains autres tableurs renvoient une valeur de chaîne de caractères. Exemples =BASE10("3f"; 16) renvoie 63. =BASE10(1000100; 2) renvoie 68. =BASETONUM("7279"; 8) génère une erreur puisque le chiffre « 9 » n’est pas valide en base 8. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINDEC » à la page 83 « HEXDEC » à la page 96 « BASEN » à la page 80 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 BASEN La fonction BASEN convertit un nombre en base 10 en un nombre correspondant dans la base indiquée. BASEN(chaîne-décimale; base; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-décimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-décimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres.  base : base du nombre converti. base correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 36.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. 80 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 81 Exemples =BASEN(16; 16) renvoie 10. =BASEN(100; 32; 4) renvoie 0034. =BASEN(100; 2) renvoie « 1 100 100 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BASE10 » à la page 79 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « DECHEX » à la page 91 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 BESSELJ La fonction BESSELJ renvoie la fonction de Bessel d’ordre entier J n (x). BESSELJ(valeur-x-quelconque; valeur-n)  valeur-x-quelconque : valeur x à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. valeur-x-quelconque correspond à un nombre.  valeur-n : ordre de la fonction. valeur-n correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Si la valeur de valeur-n contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Exemples =BESSELJ(25; 3) renvoie 0,108343081061509. =BESSELJ(25; 3,9) renvoie également 0,108343081061509 puisque toute fraction décimale de valeur-n est ignorée. =BESSELJ(–25; 3) renvoie « – 0,108343081061509 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BESSELY » à la page 82« Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 BESSELY La fonction BESSELY renvoie la fonction de Bessel d’ordre entier Y n (x). BESSELY(valeur-pos-x; valeur-n)  valeur-pos-x : valeur x positive à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. valeur-pos-x correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  valeur-n : ordre de la fonction. valeur-n correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Si la valeur de valeur-n contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Remarques d’usage  Cette forme de la fonction de Bessel est aussi appelée fonction de Neumann. Exemples =BESSELY(25; 3) renvoie 0,117924850396893. =BESSELY(25; 3,9) renvoie également 0,117924850396893 puisque toute fraction décimale de valeur-n est ignorée. =BESSELY(–25; 3) génère une erreur puisque les valeurs négatives ou égales à zéro ne sont pas autorisées. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BESSELJ » à la page 81 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 82 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 83 BINDEC La fonction BINDEC convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre décimal correspondant. BINDEC(chaîne-binaire; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-binaire : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-binaire est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 et 1.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Exemples =BINDEC("1001") renvoie 9. =BINDEC("100111"; 3) renvoie 039. =BINDEC(101101) renvoie 45. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINHEX » à la page 84 « BINOCT » à la page 85 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « HEXDEC » à la page 96 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44BINHEX La fonction BINHEX convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. BINHEX(chaîne-binaire; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-binaire : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-binaire est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 et 1.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 8 chiffres. Exemples =BINHEX("100101") renvoie 25. =BINHEX("100111"; 3) renvoie 027. =BINHEX(101101) renvoie 2D. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINDEC » à la page 83 « BINOCT » à la page 85 « DECHEX » à la page 91 « HEXBIN » à la page 95 « OCTHEX » à la page 100 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 84 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 85 BINOCT La fonction BINOCT convertit un nombre binaire en un nombre octal correspondant. BINOCT(chaîne-binaire; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-binaire : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-binaire est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 et 1.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 11 chiffres. Exemples =BINOCT("10011") renvoie 23. =BINOCT("100111"; 3) renvoie 047. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINHEX » à la page 84 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « HEXOCT » à la page 97 « OCTBIN » à la page 98 « BINDEC » à la page 83 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44CONVERT La fonction CONVERT convertit un nombre d’un système de mesure en une valeur correspondante dans un autre système de mesure. CONVERT(convertir-nbre; unité-initiale; unité-finale)  convertir-nbre : nombre à convertir. convertir-nbre correspond à un nombre.  unité-initiale : unité actuelle du nombre à convertir. unité-initiale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle doit correspondre à l’une des constantes mentionnées.  unité-finale : unité du nombre converti. unité-finale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle doit correspondre à l’une des constantes mentionnées. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs possibles d’unité-initiale et d’unité-finale sont indiquées dans les tableaux qui suivent les exemples (« Unités de conversion prises en charge » à la page 87). Ces tableaux sont organisés en catégories. Si la valeur est saisie dans une cellule référencée, au lieu d’être tapée directement dans la fonction, les guillemets qui apparaissent dans les tableaux ne sont pas requis. La casse est importante. Elle doit être scrupuleusement respectée. Exemples =CONVERT(9; "lbm"; "kg") renvoie 4,08233133 (9 livres équivalent à environ 4,08 kilogrammes). =CONVERT (26,2; "mi"; "m") renvoie 42164,8128 (26,2 miles équivalent à environ 42 164,8 mètres). =CONVERT(1; "tsp"; "ml") renvoie 4,92892159375 (1 cuillère à café équivaut à environ 4,9 millilitres). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 86 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 87 Unités de conversion prises en charge Poids et masse Mesure Constante Gramme « g » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Slug « sg » Livre (unité de masse du système avoirdupois) « lbm » U (unité de masse atomique) « u » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Once (unité de masse du système avoirdupois) « ozm » Distance Mesure Constante Mètre « m » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Mile terrestre « mi » Mille nautique « Nmi » Pouce « in » Pied « ft » Yard « yd » Angström « ang » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Pica (1/6 po, Postscript Pica) « Pica » Durée Mesure Constante Année « yr » Semaine « wk » Jour « day » Heure « hr » Minute « mn » Seconde « sec » (can be used with metric prefixes)Vitesse Mesure Constante Miles par heure « mi/h » Miles par minute « mi/mn » Mètres par heure « m/h » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Mètres par minute « m/mn » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Mètres par seconde « m/s » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Pieds par minute « ft/mn » Pieds par seconde « ft/s » Nœud « kt » Pression Mesure Constante Pascal « Pa » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Atmosphère « atm » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Millimètres de mercure « mmHg » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Force Mesure Constante Newton « N » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Dyne « dyn » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Livre « lbf » Énergie Mesure Constante Joule « J » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Erg « e » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Calorie thermodynamique « c » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Calorie IT « cal » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Électronvolt « eV » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Cheval-heure « HPh » 88 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 89 Mesure Constante Watt-heure « Wh » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Livre-pied « flb » BTU (Unité thermique britannique) « BTU » Puissance Mesure Constante Cheval « HP » Watt « W » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Magnétisme Mesure Constante Tesla « T » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Gauss « ga » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Température Mesure Constante Degrés Celsius « C » Degrés Fahrenheit « F » Kelvins « K » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques) Volume liquide Mesure Constante Cuillère à café « tsp » Cuillère à soupe « tbs » Once liquide « oz » Tasse « cup » Pinte américaine « pt » Pinte britannique « uk_pt » Quart « qt » Gallon « gal » Litre « l » (utilisable avec des préfixes métriques)Préfixes métriques Mesure Constante Facteur Exa « E » 1E+18 Péta « P » 1E+15 Téra « T » 1E+12 Giga « G » 1E+09 Méga « M » 1E+06 Kilo « k » 1E+03 Hecto « h » 1E+02 Déca « e » 1E+01 déci « d » 1E-01 centi « c » 1E-02 milli « m » 1E-03 micro « u » ou « µ » 1E-06 nano « n » 1E-09 pico « p » 1E–12 femto « f » 1E–15 atto « a » 1E–18 Remarques d’usage  Ces préfixes ne peuvent être utilisés qu’avec les constantes métriques g, u, m, ang, sec, m/h, m/mn, m/s, Pa, atm, mmHg, N, dyn, J, e, c, cal, eV, Wh, W, T, ga, K et l. DECBIN La fonction DECBIN convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre binaire correspondant. DECBIN(chaîne-décimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-décimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-décimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. 90 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 91 Exemples =DECBIN(100) renvoie 01100100. =DECBIN("1001"; 12) renvoie 001111101001. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINDEC » à la page 83 « DECHEX » à la page 91 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « HEXBIN » à la page 95 « OCTBIN » à la page 98 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DECHEX La fonction DECHEX convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. DECHEX(chaîne-décimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-décimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-décimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Exemples =DECHEX(100) renvoie 64. =DECHEX("1001"; 4) renvoie 03E9.Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINHEX » à la page 84 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « HEXDEC » à la page 96 « OCTHEX » à la page 100 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DECOCT La fonction DECOCT convertit un nombre décimal en un nombre octal correspondant. DECOCT(chaîne-décimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-décimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-décimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Exemples =DECOCT(100) renvoie 144. =DECOCT("1001"; 4) renvoie 1751. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINOCT » à la page 85 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « DECHEX » à la page 91 92 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 93 « HEXOCT » à la page 97 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DELTA La fonction DELTA détermine si deux valeurs sont exactement égales. Cette fonction s’appuie sur une égalité exacte. À titre de comparaison, l’opérateur = s’appuie sur une égalité de chaîne. DELTA(comparer-de; comparer-à)  comparer-de : valeur numérique. comparer-de correspond à un nombre.  comparer-à : valeur numérique. comparer-à correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  DELTA renvoie 1 (VRAI) si la valeur comparer-de est exactement égale à la valeur comparer-à ; sinon, la fonction renvoie 0 (FAUX). Exemples =DELTA(5; 5) renvoie 1 (VRAI). =DELTA(5; –5) renvoie 0 (FAUX). =DELTA(5; 5000) renvoie 1 (VRAI). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SUP.SEUIL » à la page 101 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44ERF La fonction ERF renvoie la fonction d’erreur intégrée entre deux valeurs. ERF(inférieur; supérieur)  inférieur : limite inférieure. inférieur correspond à un nombre.  supérieur : argument facultatif représentant la limite supérieure. supérieur correspond à un nombre. Si supérieur est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 0. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction est aussi appelée la fonction d’erreur de Gauss. Exemples =ERF(0; 1) renvoie 0,842700792949715. =ERF(–1; 1) renvoie 1,68540158589943. =ERF(1; 8) renvoie 0,157299207050285. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ERFC » à la page 94 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ERFC La fonction ERFC renvoie la fonction ERF complémentaire intégrée entre une limite inférieure donnée et l’infini. ERFC(inférieur)  inférieur : limite inférieure. inférieur correspond à un nombre. Exemples =ERFC(-1) renvoie 1,84270079294971. =ERFC(1) renvoie 0,157299207050285. =ERFC(12) renvoie 1,3562611692059E–64. 94 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 95 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ERF » à la page 94 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 HEXBIN La fonction HEXBIN convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre binaire correspondant. HEXBIN(chaîne-hexadécimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-hexadécimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaînehexadécimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres et des lettres se limitant à A à F.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 32 chiffres. Exemples =HEXBIN("F"; 8) renvoie « 00 001 111 ». =HEXBIN("3F") renvoie « 0 111 111 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINHEX » à la page 84 « HEXDEC » à la page 96 « HEXOCT » à la page 97« OCTBIN » à la page 98 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 HEXDEC La fonction HEXDEC convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre décimal correspondant. HEXDEC(chaîne-hexadécimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-hexadécimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaînehexadécimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres et des lettres se limitant à A à F.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Exemples =HEXDEC("F"; 3) renvoie 015. =HEXDEC("3F") renvoie 63. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINDEC » à la page 83 « DECHEX » à la page 91 « HEXBIN » à la page 95 « HEXOCT » à la page 97 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 96 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 97 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 HEXOCT La fonction HEXOCT convertit un nombre hexadécimal en un nombre octal correspondant. HEXOCT(chaîne-hexadécimale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-hexadécimale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaînehexadécimale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que des chiffres et des lettres se limitant à A à F.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 11 chiffres. Exemples =HEXOCT("F"; 3) renvoie 017. =HEXOCT("4E") renvoie 116. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINOCT » à la page 85 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « HEXBIN » à la page 95 « HEXDEC » à la page 96 « OCTHEX » à la page 100 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 OCTBIN La fonction OCTBIN convertit un nombre octal en un nombre binaire correspondant. OCTBIN(chaîne-octale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-octale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-octale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 à 7.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 32 chiffres. Exemples =OCTBIN(127; 8) renvoie 01 010 111. =OCTBIN(15) renvoie 01 101. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINOCT » à la page 85 « DECBIN » à la page 90 « HEXBIN » à la page 95 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « OCTHEX » à la page 100 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 98 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 99 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 OCTDEC La fonction OCTDEC convertit un nombre octal en un nombre décimal correspondant. OCTDEC(chaîne-octale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-octale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-octale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 à 7.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Exemples =OCTDEC(127; 4) renvoie 0087. =OCTDEC(15) renvoie 13. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINDEC » à la page 83 « DECOCT » à la page 92 « OCTBIN » à la page 98 « OCTHEX » à la page 100 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44OCTHEX La fonction OCTHEX convertit un nombre octal en un nombre hexadécimal correspondant. OCTHEX(chaîne-octale; longueur-conversion)  chaîne-octale : chaîne représentant le nombre à convertir. chaîne-octale est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit contenir que les chiffres 0 à 7.  longueur-conversion : valeur facultative représentant la longueur minimale du nombre renvoyé. longueur-conversion correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 32. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 1. Si elle est incluse, au besoin, des zéros sont ajoutés en tête de la valeur de convertir-chaîne de sorte que sa longueur atteigne au moins celle indiquée par longueur-conversion. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction s’appuie sur la notation de complément de deux, sur 32 bits. Par conséquent, les nombres négatifs se limitent toujours à 8 chiffres. Exemples =OCTHEX(127; 4) renvoie 0057. =OCTHEX(15) renvoie 0D. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BINHEX » à la page 84 « DECHEX » à la page 91 « HEXOCT » à la page 97 « OCTBIN » à la page 98 « OCTDEC » à la page 99 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 100 Chapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierieChapitre 5 Fonctions d’ingénierie 101 SUP.SEUIL La fonction SUP.SEUIL détermine si une valeur est supérieure ou exactement égale à une autre valeur. Cette fonction s’appuie sur une égalité exacte. À titre de comparaison, l’opérateur = s’appuie sur une égalité de chaîne. SUP.SEUIL(nbre-à-comparer; écart-nombre)  nbre-à-comparer : nombre à comparer. nbre-à-comparer correspond à un nombre.  écart-nombre : valeur du pas. écart-nombre correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  SUP.SEUIL renvoie 1 (VRAI) si la valeur nbre-à-comparer est supérieure ou égale à la valeur écart-nombre ; sinon, la fonction renvoie 0 (FAUX). Exemples =SUP.SEUIL(–4, –5) renvoie 1 (VRAI) puisque – 4 est supérieur à – 5. =SUP.SEUIL(4, 5) renvoie 0 (FAUX) puisque 4 est inférieur à 5. =SUP.SEUIL(5; 4) renvoie 1 (VRAI) puisque 5 est supérieur à 4. =GESTEP(20; 20) renvoie 1 (VRAI) puisque 20 est exactement égal à 20. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DELTA » à la page 93 « Liste des fonctions d’ingénierie » à la page 78 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44102 L’aide sur les fonctions financières vous aide à travailler avec des flux de trésorerie, des actifs amortissables, des annuités et des investissements en résolvant des problèmes comme le calcul de l’amortissement annuel d’un actif, les intérêts gagnés sur un investissement et le prix du marché courant d’une obligation. Liste des fonctions financières Ces fonctions financières ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « AMORLIN » (page 106) La fonction AMORLIN renvoie le montant de l’amortissement d’un actif par période en faisant appel à la méthode de l’amortissement linéaire. « CUMUL.INTER » (page 107) La fonction CUMUL.INTER renvoie les intérêts totaux inclus dans des paiements de rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt dans un intervalle de temps donné en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. « CUMUL.PRINCPER » (page 109) La fonction CUMUL.PRINCPER renvoie le principal total inclus dans des paiements de rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt dans un intervalle de temps donné en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 103 Fonction Description « DB » (page 111) La fonction DB renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif pour une période indiquée à l’aide de la méthode de l’amortissement dégressif à taux constant. « DDB » (page 113) La fonction DDB renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif en s’appuyant sur le taux d’amortissement indiqué. « DUREE.M.OBLIGATION » (page 115) La fonction DUREE.M.OBLIGATION calcule la moyenne pondérée modifiée de la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie pour une valeur nominale de 100 €. « DUREE.OBLIGATION » (page 116) La fonction DUREE.OBLIGATION calcule la moyenne pondérée de la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie pour une valeur nominale de 100 €. « INTERET.ACC » (page 118) La fonction INTERET.ACC calcule les intérêts courus totaux ajoutés au prix d’achat d’un titre et payés au vendeur lorsque le titre verse des intérêts périodiques. « INTERET.ACC.MAT » (page 120) La fonction INTERET.ACC.MAT calcule les intérêts courus totaux ajoutés au prix d’achat d’un titre et payés au vendeur lorsque le titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. « INTPER » (page 121) La fonction INTPER renvoie la part des intérêts de paiement d’une rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. « ISPMT » (page 123) La fonction ISPMT renvoie la part des intérêts de paiement d’une rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. « NB.COUPONS » (page 124) La fonction NB.COUPONS renvoie le nombre de coupons restant à payer entre la date de règlement et l’échéance.Fonction Description « NB.JOURS.COUPON » (page 125) La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON renvoie le nombre de jours dans la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu. « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » (page 126) La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC renvoie le nombre de jours entre le début de la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu et la date de règlement. « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » (page 128) La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV renvoie le nombre de jours entre la date de règlement et la fin de la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu. « NPM » (page 129) La fonction NPM renvoie le nombre de périodes de paiement pour un prêt ou une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. « PRINCPER » (page 131) La fonction PRINCPER renvoie la part du principal du paiement d’une rente ou du remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. « PRIX.TITRE » (page 133) La fonction PRIX.TITRE renvoie le prix d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (nominale). « PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE » (page 134) La fonction PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE renvoie le prix d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (nominale). « RENDEMENT.SIMPLE » (page 136) La fonction RENDEMENT.SIMPLE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport à son prix de remboursement et qui ne verse pas d’intérêts. « RENDEMENT.TITRE » (page 137) La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques réguliers. « RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE » (page 139) La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. 104 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 105 Fonction Description « SYD » (page 140) La fonction SYD renvoie le montant de l’amortissement d’un actif sur une période indiquée en s’appuyant sur la méthode de l’amortissement proportionnel à l’ordre numérique inversé des années. « TAUX » (page 141) La fonction TAUX renvoie le taux d’intérêt d’un investissement, d’un prêt ou d’une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. « TAUX.EFFECTIF » (page 144) La fonction TAUX.EFFECTIF renvoie le taux d’intérêt effectif annuel à partir du taux d’intérêt annuel nominal en s’appuyant sur le nombre de périodes par année de calcul de l’intérêt composé. « TAUX.ESCOMPTE » (page 145) La fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE renvoie le taux d’escompte annuel d’un titre qui ne paie pas d’intérêts et qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport à son prix de remboursement. « TAUX.INTERET » (page 146) La fonction TAUX.INTERET renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. « TAUX.NOMINAL » (page 147) La fonction TAUX.NOMINAL renvoie le taux d’intérêt nominal annuel à partir du taux d’intérêt annuel effectif en s’appuyant sur le nombre de périodes par année de calcul de l’intérêt composé. « TRI » (page 148) La fonction TRI renvoie le taux de rendement interne d’un investissement qui s’appuie sur une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers mais réalisés à intervalles réguliers. « TRIM » (page 150) La fonction TRIM renvoie le taux de rendement interne modifié pour un investissement qui est basé sur une série de flux de trésorerie potentiellement irréguliers réalisés à des intervalles réguliers. Le taux gagné sur les flux de trésorerie positifs et le taux payé pour financer les flux de trésorerie négatifs peuvent différer. « VA » (page 152) La fonction VA renvoie la valeur actualisée d’un investissement ou d’une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe.Fonction Description « VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT » (page 154) La fonction VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT renvoie le prix d’un titre qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport au prix de remboursement et qui ne verse pas d’intérêts par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (valeur nominale). « VALEUR.NOMINALE » (page 156) La fonction VALEUR.NOMINALE renvoie la valeur à l’échéance d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. « VAN » (page 157) La fonction VAN renvoie la valeur actualisée nette pour un investissement qui s’appuie sur une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers mais réalisés à intervalles réguliers. « VC » (page 159) La fonction VC renvoie la valeur future d’un investissement en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. « VDB » (page 161) La fonction VDB renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif sur un intervalle de temps choisi en s’appuyant sur un taux d’amortissement indiqué. « VPM » (page 163) La fonction VPM renvoie le paiement périodique pour un prêt ou une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. AMORLIN La fonction AMORLIN renvoie le montant de l’amortissement d’un actif par période en faisant appel à la méthode de l’amortissement linéaire. AMORLIN(montant; amortissement comptable; vie)  coût : coût initial de l’actif. montant correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  récupération : valeur de récupération de l’actif. amortissement comptable correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  vie : nombre de périodes d’amortissement de l’actif. vie correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Une partie décimale (fraction) de vie est autorisée (par exemple, une durée d’amortissement de 5,5 années). 106 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 107 Exemple =AMORLIN(10000; 1000; 6) renvoie 1 500 €, l’amortissement par année en euros d’un actif qui a coûté à l’origine 10 000 € et qui présente une valeur résiduelle estimée de 1 000 € après 6 années. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DB » à la page 111 « DDB » à la page 113 « SYD » à la page 140 « VDB » à la page 161 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CUMUL.INTER La fonction CUMUL.INTER renvoie les intérêts totaux inclus dans des paiements de rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt dans un intervalle de temps donné en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. CUMUL.INTER(taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; valeur-actualisée; période-initiale; périodefinale; échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif). période-initiale : période de départ à inclure dans le calcul. période-initiale correspond à un nombre.  période-finale : période de fin à inclure dans le calcul. période-finale correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et à période-initiale.  échéance : indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. fin (0): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Remarques d’usage  Si règlement est antérieur à premier, la fonction renvoie les intérêts courus depuis émission. Si règlement est postérieur à premier, la fonction renvoie les intérêts courus depuis la date de paiement du coupon immédiatement antérieure à règlement.  Utilisez INTERET.ACC.MAT pour un titre qui ne paie des intérêts qu’à l’échéance. Exemples En général, le montant des intérêts payés sur un prêt est plus élevé dans les premières années que dans les dernières années. Cet exemple montre à quel point les premières années peuvent être plus élevées. Imaginons un prêt hypothécaire avec un prêt initial de 550 000 €, un taux d’intérêt de 6 % et une échéance à 30 ans. La fonction CUMUL.INTER peut être utilisée pour déterminer les intérêts pour n’importe quelle période. Dans le tableau qui suit, CUMIPMT a été utilisé pour déterminer les intérêts payés la première année (paiements 1à 12) et la dernière année (paiements 349 à 360) du terme du prêt. La fonction renvoie respectivement les valeurs 32 816,27 € et 1 256,58 €. Le montant des intérêts payés la première année est plus de 26 fois supérieur au montant des intérêts payés la dernière année. tauxpériodique nbre-périodes valeuractualisée période-initiale période-finale échéance =CUMUL.INTER (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) =0,06/12 360 =550000 1 12 0 =CUMUL.INTER (B2; C2; D2; E3; F3; G2) 349 360 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CUMUL.PRINCPER » à la page 109 « INTPER » à la page 121 « VPM » à la page 163 « PRINCPER » à la page 131 108 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 109 « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CUMUL.PRINCPER La fonction CUMUL.PRINCPER renvoie le principal total inclus dans des paiements de rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt dans un intervalle de temps donné en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. CUMUL.PRINCPER(taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; valeur-actualisée; période-initiale; période-finale; échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  période-initiale : période de départ à inclure dans le calcul. période-initiale correspond à un nombre.  période-finale : période de fin à inclure dans le calcul. période-finale correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et à période-initiale.  échéance : indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. fin (0): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période.Exemples En général, le montant de la réduction de principal sur un prêt est plus élevé dans les dernières années que dans les premières années. Cet exemple montre à quel point les dernières années peuvent être plus élevées. Imaginons un prêt hypothécaire avec un prêt initial de 550 000 €, un taux d’intérêt de 6 % et une échéance à 30 ans. La fonction CUMUL.PRINCPER peut être utilisée pour déterminer les intérêts pour n’importe quelle période. Dans le tableau qui suit, CUMUL.PRINCPER a été utilisé pour déterminer le principal remboursé la première année (paiements 1à 12) et la dernière année (paiements 349 à 360) du terme du prêt. La fonction renvoie respectivement les valeurs 6 754,06 € et 38 313,75 €. Le montant de principal payé la première année ne représente que 18 % du montant de principal payé la dernière année. tauxpériodique nbre-périodes valeuractualisée période-initiale période-finale échéance =CUMUL. PRINCPER (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) =0,06/12 360 =550000 1 12 0 =CUMUL. PRINCPER (B2; C2; D2; E3; F3; G2) 349 360 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CUMUL.INTER » à la page 107 « INTPER » à la page 121 « VPM » à la page 163 « PRINCPER » à la page 131 « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 110 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 111 DB La fonction DB renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif pour une période indiquée à l’aide de la méthode de l’amortissement dégressif à taux constant. DB(montant; amortissement comptable; vie; période-amort; première-année-mois)  coût : coût initial de l’actif. montant correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  récupération : valeur de récupération de l’actif. amortissement comptable correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  vie : nombre de périodes d’amortissement de l’actif. vie correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Une partie décimale (fraction) de vie est autorisée (par exemple, une durée d’amortissement de 5,5 années).  période-amort : période sur laquelle vous cherchez à calculer l’amortissement. période-amort correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de période-amort est ignorée.  mois de la première année : argument facultatif représentant le nombre de mois de la première année d’amortissement. première-année-mois correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 12. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de première-annéemois est ignorée. Exemple 1 Construction d’un plan d’amortissement Imaginons que vous venez d’acquérir un actif d’une valeur de 1 000 €, une valeur résiduelle de 100 € et une durée de vie utile estimée à 4 ans. L’actif peut s’amortir sur 12 mois au cours de la première année. Avec la fonction DB, vous pouvez construire un tableau d’amortissement indiquant l’amortissement pour chaque année. montant amortissement comptable vie période-amort première-annéemois 1 000 100 4 12 Première année (renvoie 438 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E3; F2) 1 Deuxième année (renvoie 246,16 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E4; F2) 2 Troisième année (renvoie 138,74 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E5; F2) 3 Quatrième année (renvoie 77,75 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E6; F2) 4 Exemple 2 Amortissement pour la première année partielle Prenons les mêmes faits que dans l’exemple 1, mais imaginons que l’actif soit amorti pendant mois de 12 mois la première année. montant amortissement comptable vie période-amort première-annéemois 1 000 100 4 1 Amortir pendant 9 mois (renvoie 328,50 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E2; F3) 9 Amortir pendant 6 mois (renvoie 219 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E2; F4) 3 Amortir pendant 3 mois (renvoie 109,50 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E2; F5) 6 Amortir pendant 1 mois (renvoie 36,50 €) =DB(B2; C2; D2; E2; F6) 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DDB » à la page 113 « AMORLIN » à la page 106 « SYD » à la page 140 « VDB » à la page 161 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 112 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 113 DDB La fonction DDB renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif en s’appuyant sur le taux d’amortissement indiqué. DDB(montant; amortissement comptable; vie; période-amort; facteur-amort)  coût : coût initial de l’actif. montant correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  récupération : valeur de récupération de l’actif. amortissement comptable correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  vie : nombre de périodes d’amortissement de l’actif. vie correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Une partie décimale (fraction) de vie est autorisée (par exemple, une durée d’amortissement de 5,5 années).  période-amort : période sur laquelle vous cherchez à calculer l’amortissement. période-amort correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de période-amort est ignorée.  facteur-amort : nombre facultatif qui détermine le taux d’amortissement. facteuramort correspond à un nombre. En cas d’omission, cette valeur est considérée comme étant égale à 2 (200 % pour un amortissement décroissant à taux double). Plus le nombre est élevé, plus l’amortissement est rapide. Par exemple, si vous voulez obtenir un taux d’amortissement d’une fois et demie l’amortissement linéaire, utilisez 1,5 ou 150 %. Exemples Imaginons que vous venez d’acquérir un actif d’une valeur de 1 000 €, une valeur résiduelle de 100 € et une durée de vie utile estimée à 4 ans. Avec la fonction DDB, vous pouvez déterminer l’amortissement pour différentes périodes et différents taux d’amortissement. montant amortissement comptable vie période-amort facteur-amort 1 000 100 4 Première année, amortissement décroissant à taux double (renvoie 500 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E3; F3) 1 2 Deuxième année, amortissement décroissant à taux double (renvoie 250 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E4; F4) 2 2 montant amortissement comptable vie période-amort facteur-amort Troisième année, amortissement décroissant à taux double (renvoie 125 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E5; F5) 3 2 Quatrième année, amortissement décroissant à taux double (renvoie 25 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E6; F6) 4 2 Première année, amortissement linéaire (renvoie 250 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E7; F7) 1 1 Première année, amortissement décroissant à taux triple (renvoie 750 €) =DDB(B2; C2; D2; E8; F8) 3 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DB » à la page 111 « AMORLIN » à la page 106 « SYD » à la page 140 « VDB » à la page 161 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 114 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 115 DUREE.M.OBLIGATION La fonction DUREE.M.OBLIGATION calcule la moyenne pondérée modifiée de la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie pour une valeur nominale de 100 €. DUREE.M.OBLIGATION(règlement; échéance; taux-annuel; rendement-annuel; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  rendement-annuel : rendement annuel du titre. rendement-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction renvoie une valeur connue sous le nom de « durée Macauley ».Exemple Supposons que vous étudiez la pertinence d’un investissement dans un titre. Le règlement final de l’investissement doit se faire le 2 avril 2010 et l’échéance tombe le 31 décembre 2015. Le taux du coupon est de 5 %, ce qui donne un rendement d’approximativement 5,284 % (le rendement se calcule par la fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE). Le bon verse un intérêt tous les trimestres, en s’appuyant sur le nombre de jours effectifs. =DUREE.M.OBLIGATION("2/4/2010"; "31/12/2015"; 0,05; 0,05284; 4; 1) renvoie la valeur approximative de 4,9554, à savoir la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie futurs (la durée du bon), selon la durée de Macauley. Les flux de trésorerie sont constitués du prix payé, des intérêts perçus et du principal perçu à l’échéance. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DUREE.OBLIGATION » à la page 116 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DUREE.OBLIGATION La fonction DUREE.OBLIGATION calcule la moyenne pondérée de la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie pour une valeur nominale de 100 €. DUREE.OBLIGATION(règlement; échéance; taux-annuel; rendement-annuel; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  rendement-annuel : rendement annuel du titre. rendement-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %). 116 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 117  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction renvoie une valeur connue sous le nom de « durée Macauley ». Exemple Supposons que vous étudiez la pertinence d’un investissement dans un titre. Le règlement final de l’investissement doit se faire le 2 avril 2010 et l’échéance tombe le 31 décembre 2015. Le taux du coupon est de 5 %, ce qui donne un rendement d’approximativement 5,284 % (le rendement se calcule par la fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE). Le bon verse un intérêt tous les trimestres, en s’appuyant sur le nombre de jours effectifs. =DUREE.OBLIGATION("2/4/2010"; "31/12/2015"; 0,05; 0,05284; 4; 1) renvoie la valeur approximative de 5,0208, à savoir la valeur actualisée des flux de trésorerie futurs (la durée du bon), selon la durée de Macauley. Les flux de trésorerie sont constitués du prix payé, des intérêts perçus et du principal perçu à l’échéance. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DUREE.M.OBLIGATION » à la page 115 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44INTERET.ACC La fonction INTERET.ACC calcule les intérêts courus totaux ajoutés au prix d’achat d’un titre et payés au vendeur lorsque le titre verse des intérêts périodiques. INTERET.ACC(émission; premier; règlement; taux-annuel; valeur-nominale; fréquence; base-journalière)  émission : date à laquelle le titre a été émis à l’origine. émission correspond à une valeur de date/heure, la plus ancienne des dates précisées.  premier ordre : date du premier paiement des intérêts. premier correspond à une valeur de date/heure et doit être postérieure à émission.  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  prix : valeur faciale (valeur nominale) ou valeur à l’échéance du titre. valeurnominale correspond à un nombre. En cas d’omission (point-virgule sans autre valeur indiquée), la valeur de 1 000 est attribuée par défaut à valeur-nominale.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Remarques d’usage  Si règlement est antérieur à premier, la fonction renvoie les intérêts courus depuis émission. Si règlement est postérieur à premier, la fonction renvoie les intérêts courus depuis la date de paiement du coupon immédiatement antérieure à règlement.  Utilisez INTERET.ACC.MAT pour un titre qui ne paie des intérêts qu’à l’échéance. 118 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 119 Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. La date de règlement est considérée comme étant antérieure à la date du premier coupon. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction INTERET.ACC pour déterminer le montant des intérêts courus qui sont à ajouter au prix d’achat/vente. La fonction donne 38,06 €, ce qui représente les intérêts courus entre la date d’émission et la date de règlement. émission premier règlement taux-annuel valeurnominale fréquence basejournalière =INTERET. ACC (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2; H2) 14/12/2008 01/07/2009 01/05/2009 0,10 1 000 2 0 Exemple 2 Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. La date de règlement est considérée comme étant ultérieure à la date du premier coupon. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction INTERET.ACC pour déterminer le montant des intérêts courus qui sont à ajouter au prix d’achat/vente. La fonction donne approximativement 20,56 €, ce qui représente les intérêts courus entre la date de paiement du coupon immédiatement antérieure et la date de règlement. émission premier règlement taux-annuel valeurnominale fréquence basejournalière =INTERET. ACC (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2; H2) 14/12/2008 01/07/2009 15/09/2009 0,10 1 000 2 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INTERET.ACC.MAT » à la page 120 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44INTERET.ACC.MAT La fonction INTERET.ACC.MAT calcule les intérêts courus totaux ajoutés au prix d’achat d’un titre et payés au vendeur lorsque le titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. INTERET.ACC.MAT(émission; règlement; taux-annuel; valeur-nominale; base-journalière)  émission : date à laquelle le titre a été émis à l’origine. émission correspond à une valeur de date/heure, la plus ancienne des dates précisées.  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  prix : valeur faciale (valeur nominale) ou valeur à l’échéance du titre. valeurnominale correspond à un nombre. En cas d’omission (point-virgule sans autre valeur indiquée), la valeur de 1 000 est attribuée par défaut à valeur-nominale.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Remarques d’usage  Utilisez INTERET.ACC pour un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques. Exemple Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Ce titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction INTERET.ACC.MAT pour déterminer le montant des intérêts courus qui sont à ajouter au prix d’achat/vente. La fonction donne approximativement 138,06 €, ce qui représente les intérêts courus entre la date d’émission et la date de règlement. émission règlement taux-annuel valeur-nominale base-journalière =INTERET.ACC. MAT(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 14/12/2007 01/05/2009 0,10 1 000 0 120 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 121 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INTERET.ACC » à la page 118 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 INTPER La fonction INTPER renvoie la part des intérêts de paiement d’une rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. INTPER(taux-périodique, période, nbre-périodes, valeur-actualisée, valeur-future, échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  période : période de paiement pour laquelle vous souhaitez calculer le montant du principal ou des intérêts. période correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif). En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 0. échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Exemple Dans cet exemple, INTPER sert déterminer la part des intérêts du premier paiement de la troisième année du terme du prêt (paiement 25) d’après les informations sur le prêt présentées. La fonction donne approximativement – 922,41 €, ce qui représente la part des intérêts du remboursement du prêt 25. tauxpériodique période nbre-périodes valeuractualisée valeur-future échéance =INTPER(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) =0,06/12 25 =10*12 200000 –100000 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CUMUL.INTER » à la page 107 « CUMUL.PRINCPER » à la page 109 « VPM » à la page 163 « PRINCPER » à la page 131 « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 122 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 123 ISPMT La fonction ISPMT renvoie la part des intérêts de paiement d’une rente ou de remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. ISPMT(taux-annuel; période; nbre-périodes; valeur-actualisée)  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  période : période de paiement pour laquelle vous souhaitez calculer le montant du principal ou des intérêts. période correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif). Remarques d’usage  La fonction INTPER présente des fonctionnalités supplémentaires et reste à utiliser à la place d’ISPMT. Exemple Dans cet exemple, ISPMT sert déterminer la part des intérêts du premier paiement de la troisième année du terme du prêt (paiement 25) d’après les informations sur le prêt présentées. La fonction donne approximativement – 791,67 €, ce qui représente la part des intérêts du remboursement du prêt 25. taux-périodique période nbre-périodes valeur-actualisée =ISPMT(B2; C2; D2; E2) =0,06/12 25 =10*12 200000 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INTPER » à la page 121 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.COUPONS La fonction NB.COUPONS renvoie le nombre de coupons restant à payer entre la date de règlement et l’échéance. NB.COUPONS(règlement; échéance; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction NB.COUPONS pour déterminer le nombre de coupons pouvant être perçus entre la date de règlement et l’échéance du titre. La fonction renvoie 23 car 23 dates de paiement de coupon trimestrielles marquent la période allant du 2 avril 2010 et le 31 décembre 2015, la première date correspondant au 30 juin 2010. 124 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 125 règlement échéance fréquence base-journalière =NB.COUPONS(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 4/2/2010 12/31/2015 4 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.JOURS.COUPON La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON renvoie le nombre de jours dans la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu. NB.JOURS.COUPON(règlement; échéance; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année.30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON pour déterminer le nombre de jours que compte la période de coupon de la date de règlement. La fonction renvoie 91 car 91 jours séparent le début et la fin de la période de paiement du coupon, commençant et se terminant respectivement le 1er avril 2010 et le 30 juin 2010. règlement échéance fréquence base-journalière =NB.JOURS. COUPON(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 4/2/2010 12/31/2015 4 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » à la page 126 « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » à la page 128 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC renvoie le nombre de jours entre le début de la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu et la date de règlement. NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV(règlement; échéance; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année 126 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 127 annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.PREC pour déterminer le nombre de jours jusqu’à la date de paiement du dernier coupon jusqu’à la date de règlement. Il s’agit dans ce cas du nombre de jours intervenant dans le calcul des intérêts courus censé s’ajouter au prix d’achat de l’obligation. La fonction renvoie 2 car 2 jours séparent la date de paiement du dernier coupon, à savoir le 31 mars 2010, et la date de règlement du 2 avril 2010. règlement échéance fréquence base-journalière =NB.JOURS.COUPON. PREC(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 4/2/2010 12/31/2015 4 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB.JOURS.COUPON » à la page 125 « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » à la page 128 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV La fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV renvoie le nombre de jours entre la date de règlement et la fin de la période de coupon dans laquelle le règlement a lieu. NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV(règlement; échéance; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Imaginons que vous envisagiez l’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV pour déterminer le nombre de jours jusqu’à la date de paiement du coupon suivant. Il s’agit du nombre de jours jusqu’au premier paiement de coupon à recevoir. La fonction renvoie 89 car 89 jours séparent la date de règlement, à savoir le 2 avril 2010, et la date de paiement du coupon suivant. règlement échéance fréquence base-journalière =NB.JOURS.COUPON. SUIV(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 4/2/2010 12/31/2015 4 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB.JOURS.COUPON » à la page 125 128 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 129 « NB.JOURS.COUPON.SUIV » à la page 126 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NPM La fonction NPM renvoie le nombre de périodes de paiement pour un prêt ou une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. NPM(taux-périodique; paiement; valeur-actualisée; valeur-future; échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  versement : montant payé ou perçu à chaque période. paiement correspond à un nombre. À chaque période, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement mensuel (négatif) ou d’un paiement périodique perçu sur une annuité (positif).  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de la rente indiqué sous la forme d’un nombre négatif. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif). échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous planifiez une épargne destinée à financer les études supérieures de votre fille lorsqu’elle atteindra l’âge. Vous disposez de 50 000 € à placer sur un compte d’épargne et pouvez verser 200 € sur ce compte à la fin de chaque mois. Ce compte d’épargne devrait être rémunéré à un taux d’intérêt annuel de 4,5 % et rapporter des intérêts mensuels. Vous estimez qu’il sera nécessaire d’avoir économisé 150 000 € quand votre fille ira à l’université. Avec la fonction NPM, vous pouvez déterminer le nombre de périodes dont vous avez besoin pour les paiements de 200 €. S’appuyant sur ce nos suppositions de départ, il devrait s’agir approximativement de 181 périodes, soit 15 ans et 1 mois. taux-périodique paiement valeur-actualisée valeur-future échéance =NPM(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) =0,045/12 –200 –50000 150000 1 Exemple 2 Imaginons que vous prévoyez de racheter la maison de vacances de votre oncle. Vous disposez de 30 000 € que vous pouvez utiliser comme acompte immédiat et vous pouvez faire face à des mensualités de 1 500 €. Votre oncle vous dit qu’il veut bien vous prêter la différence entre le prix de vente de sa maison de vacances, de 200 000 €, et votre acompte (soit 170 000 €) au taux annuel de 7 %. Avec la fonction NPM, vous pouvez déterminer le nombre de mois nécessaires pour rembourser le prêt de votre oncle. S’appuyant sur ce nos suppositions de départ, il devrait s’agir approximativement de 184 mois, soit 15 ans et 4 mois. taux-périodique paiement valeur-actualisée valeur-future échéance =NPM(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) =0,07/12 –1500 170000 0 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VC » à la page 159 « VPM » à la page 163 « VA » à la page 152 130 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 131 « TAUX » à la page 141 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PRINCPER La fonction PRINCPER renvoie la part du principal du paiement d’une rente ou du remboursement d’un prêt en s’appuyant sur des paiements périodiques fixes et sur un taux d’intérêt fixe. PRINCPER(taux-périodique, période, nbre-périodes, valeur-actualisée, valeur-future, échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  période : période de paiement pour laquelle vous souhaitez calculer le montant du principal ou des intérêts. période correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif). En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 0. échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Exemple Dans cet exemple, PRINCPER sert déterminer la part du principal du premier paiement de la troisième année du terme du prêt (paiement 25) d’après les informations sur le prêt présentées. La fonction donne approximativement – 687,80 €, ce qui représente la part du principal du paiement 25. tauxpériodique période nbre-périodes valeuractualisée valeur-future échéance =PRINCPER(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) =0,06/12 25 =10*12 200000 –100000 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CUMUL.INTER » à la page 107 « CUMUL.PRINCPER » à la page 109 « INTPER » à la page 121 « VPM » à la page 163 « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 132 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 133 PRIX.TITRE La fonction PRIX.TITRE renvoie le prix d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (nominale). PRIX.TITRE(règlement; échéance; taux-annuel; rendement-annuel; remboursement; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  rendement-annuel : rendement annuel du titre. rendement-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360).Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction PRIX.TITRE sert à déterminer le prix d’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Le titre verse des intérêts périodiques. La fonction renvoie la valeur 106,50 € ce qui représente le prix par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. règlement échéance taux-annuel rendementannuel remboursement fréquence basejournalière =PRIX.TITRE (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2; H2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 0,065 0,0525 100 2 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT » à la page 154 « PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 134 « RENDEMENT.TITRE » à la page 137 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE La fonction PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE renvoie le prix d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (nominale). PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE(règlement; échéance; émission; taux-annuel; rendement-annuel; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement. 134 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 135  émission : date à laquelle le titre a été émis à l’origine. émission correspond à une valeur de date/heure, la plus ancienne des dates précisées.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  rendement-annuel : rendement annuel du titre. rendement-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE sert à déterminer le prix d’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Ce titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. La fonction renvoie la valeur 99,002 € ce qui représente le prix par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. règlement échéance émission taux-annuel rendementannuel basejournalière =PRIX.TITRE. ECHEANCE (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 14/12/2008 0,065 0.06565 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PRIX.TITRE » à la page 133 « VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT » à la page 154 « RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 139 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102« Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RENDEMENT.SIMPLE La fonction RENDEMENT.SIMPLE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport à son prix de remboursement et qui ne verse pas d’intérêts. RENDEMENT.SIMPLE(règlement; échéance; prix; remboursement; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  prix : coût du titre par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. prix correspond à un nombre.  remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction RENDEMENT.SIMPLE sert à déterminer le rendement annuel effectif du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Le titre ne rapporte aucun intérêt et est vendu avec un escompte. La fonction renvoie la valeur approximative de 8,37 %, ce qui représente le rendement annuel à un prix approximatif 65,98 € par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. 136 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 137 règlement échéance prix remboursement base-journalière =RENDEMENT. SIMPLE(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 65,98 100 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT » à la page 154 « RENDEMENT.TITRE » à la page 137 « RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 139 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RENDEMENT.TITRE La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui verse des intérêts périodiques réguliers. RENDEMENT.TITRE(règlement; échéance; taux-annuel; prix; remboursement; fréquence; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  prix : coût du titre par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. prix correspond à un nombre. remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  fréquence : nombre de règlements de coupons par année annuel (1): un paiement par an. semestriel (2): deux paiements par an. trimestriel (4): quatre paiements par an.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE sert à déterminer le rendement annuel du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Le titre verse des intérêts périodiques. La fonction renvoie la valeur approximative de 5,25 %. règlement échéance taux-annuel prix remboursement fréquence basejournalière =RENDEMENT. TITRE(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2; H2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 0,065 106,50 100 2 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PRIX.TITRE » à la page 133 « RENDEMENT.SIMPLE » à la page 136 « RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 139 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 138 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 139 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE La fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE(règlement; échéance; émission; taux-annuel; prix; basejournalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  émission : date à laquelle le titre a été émis à l’origine. émission correspond à une valeur de date/heure, la plus ancienne des dates précisées.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  prix : coût du titre par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. prix correspond à un nombre.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction RENDEMENT.TITRE.ECHEANCE sert à déterminer le rendement annuel effectif du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Ce titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. La fonction renvoie la valeur approximative de 6,565 %.règlement échéance émission taux-annuel prix basejournalière =RENDEMENT. TITRE. ECHEANCE (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 14/12/2008 0,065 99,002 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 134 « RENDEMENT.TITRE » à la page 137 « RENDEMENT.SIMPLE » à la page 136 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SYD La fonction SYD renvoie le montant de l’amortissement d’un actif sur une période indiquée en s’appuyant sur la méthode de l’amortissement proportionnel à l’ordre numérique inversé des années. SYD(montant; amortissement comptable; vie; période-amort)  coût : coût initial de l’actif. montant correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  récupération : valeur de récupération de l’actif. amortissement comptable correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  vie : nombre de périodes d’amortissement de l’actif. vie correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Une partie décimale (fraction) de vie est autorisée (par exemple, une durée d’amortissement de 5,5 années).  période-amort : période sur laquelle vous cherchez à calculer l’amortissement. période-amort correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de période-amort est ignorée. 140 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 141 Exemples =SYD(10000; 1000; 9; 1) renvoie 1 800 €, le montant de l’amortissement de la première année pour un actif ayant un coût initial de 10 000 € et un valeur de récupération de 1 000 € après une vie de 9 années. =SYD(10000; 1000; 9; 2) renvoie 1 600 €, le montant de l’amortissement pour la seconde année. =SYD(10000; 1000; 9; 8) renvoie 400 €, le montant de l’amortissement pour la huitième année. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DB » à la page 111 « DDB » à la page 113 « AMORLIN » à la page 106 « VDB » à la page 161 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TAUX La fonction TAUX renvoie le taux d’intérêt d’un investissement, d’un prêt ou d’une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. TAUX(nbre-périodes; paiement; valeur-actualisée; valeur-future; échéance; estimation)  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  versement : montant payé ou perçu à chaque période. paiement correspond à un nombre. À chaque période, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement mensuel (négatif) ou d’un paiement périodique perçu sur une annuité (positif). valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif).  échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période.  estimation : argument facultatif indiquant l’estimation initiale du taux de rendement. estimation correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %). En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est de 10 %. Si la valeur par défaut ne donne pas de solution, essayez d’abord une valeur positive plus grande. Si cela ne donne rien, essayez une valeur négative inférieure. La valeur minimum autorisée est – 1. 142 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 143 Exemple Imaginons que vous planifiez une épargne destinée à financer les études supérieures de votre fille lorsqu’elle atteindra l’âge. Elle vient d’avoir 3 ans et vous partez de l’hypothèse qu’elle entrerait à l’université dans 15 ans. Vous estimez qu’il sera nécessaire d’avoir économisé 150 000 € sur un compte d’épargne au début de son cursus d’enseignement supérieur. Vous disposez de 50 000 € et versez 200 € sur le compte à la fin de chaque mois. Pendant les 15 prochaines années, ce compte d’épargne devrait être rémunéré à un taux d’intérêt annuel de 4,5 % et rapporter des intérêts mensuels. Avec la fonction TAUX, vous pouvez déterminer le taux de rémunération nécessaire du compte d’épargne afin que son montant atteigne 150 000 € au moment où votre fille est censée entrer à l’université. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, le taux renvoyé par la fonction est d’approximativement 0,377 % et correspond à un taux mensuel car nbre-périodes est mensuel, soit 4,52 % l’an. nbre-périodes paiement valeuractualisée valeur-future échéance estimation =TAUX(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2; G2) =15*12 –200 –50000 150000 1 =0,1/12 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VC » à la page 159 « TRI » à la page 148 « NPM » à la page 129 « VPM » à la page 163 « VA » à la page 152 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44TAUX.EFFECTIF La fonction TAUX.EFFECTIF renvoie le taux d’intérêt effectif annuel à partir du taux d’intérêt annuel nominal en s’appuyant sur le nombre de périodes par année de calcul de l’intérêt composé. TAUX.EFFECTIF(taux-nominal; nbre-périodes-année)  taux-nominal : taux d’intérêt nominal d’un titre. taux-nominal correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes-année : nombre de périodes par année d’intégration des intérêts. nbre-périodes-année correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Exemples =TAUX.EFFECTIF(0,05; 365) renvoie approximativement 5,13 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif si le taux de 5 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation quotidienne. =TAUX.EFFECTIF(0,05; 12) renvoie approximativement 5,12 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif si le taux de 5 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation mensuelle. =TAUX.EFFECTIF(0,05; 4) renvoie approximativement 5,09 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif si le taux de 5 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation trimestrielle. =TAUX.EFFECTIF(0,05; 2) renvoie approximativement 5,06 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif si le taux de 5 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation semestrielle. =TAUX.EFFECTIF(0,05; 1) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif si le taux de 5 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation annuelle. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TAUX.NOMINAL » à la page 147 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 144 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 145 TAUX.ESCOMPTE La fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE renvoie le taux d’escompte annuel d’un titre qui ne paie pas d’intérêts et qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport à son prix de remboursement. TAUX.ESCOMPTE(règlement; échéance; prix; remboursement; base-journalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  prix : coût du titre par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. prix correspond à un nombre.  remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction TAUX.ESCOMPTE sert à déterminer le taux d’escompte annuel du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. La fonction donné 5,25 %, le taux d’escompte annuel. règlement échéance prix remboursement base-journalière =TAUX. ESCOMPTE(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 67.64 100 0Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT » à la page 154 « RENDEMENT.SIMPLE » à la page 136 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TAUX.INTERET La fonction TAUX.INTERET renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. TAUX.INTERET(règlement; échéance; montant-investissements; remboursement; basejournalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  montant-investissements : montant investi dans le titre. montant-investissements correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 146 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 147 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction TAUX.INTERET sert à déterminer le taux d’intérêt annuel effectif du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Ce titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. La fonction renvoie la valeur approximative de 10,85 %. règlement échéance montantinvestissements valeur-nominale base-journalière =TAUX.INTERET(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 990.02 1651.83 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VALEUR.NOMINALE » à la page 156 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TAUX.NOMINAL La fonction TAUX.NOMINAL renvoie le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal à partir du taux d’intérêt effectif annuel en s’appuyant sur le nombre de périodes par année de calcul de l’intérêt composé. TAUX.NOMINAL(taux-int-effectif; nbre-périodes-année)  taux-int-effectif : taux d’intérêt effectif d’un titre. taux-int-effectif correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes-année : nombre de périodes par année d’intégration des intérêts. nbre-périodes-année correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.Exemples =TAUX.NOMINAL(0,0513; 365) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal si le taux effectif de 5,13 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation quotidienne. =TAUX.NOMINAL(0,0512; 12) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal si le taux effectif de 5,12 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation mensuelle. =TAUX.NOMINAL(0,0509; 4) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal si le taux effectif de 5,09 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation trimestrielle. =TAUX.NOMINAL(0,0506; 2) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal si le taux effectif de 5,06 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation semestrielle. =TAUX.NOMINAL(0,0500; 1) renvoie approximativement 5,00 %, le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal si le taux effectif de 5,00 % s’appuie sur une capitalisation annuelle. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TAUX.EFFECTIF » à la page 144 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TRI La fonction TRI renvoie le taux de rendement interne d’un investissement qui s’appuie sur une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers (paiements d’un montant non obligatoirement constant) réalisés à intervalles réguliers. TRI(flux-intervalle; estimation)  intervalle des mouvements : collection comprenant les valeurs de flux de trésorerie. flux-intervalle correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Un produit (un encaissement) doit être indiqué sous la forme d’un nombre positif, tandis qu’une dépense (un décaissement), un nombre négatif. La collection doit contenir au moins une valeur positive et une valeur négative. Les flux de trésorerie doivent être indiqués dans l’ordre chronologique et avec les mêmes intervalles dans le temps (par exemple, tous les mois). Si une période n’a pas de flux de trésorerie, utilisez 0 pour cette période. 148 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 149  estimation : argument facultatif indiquant l’estimation initiale du taux de rendement. estimation correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %). En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est de 10 %. Si la valeur par défaut ne donne pas de solution, essayez d’abord une valeur positive plus grande. Si cela ne donne rien, essayez une valeur négative inférieure. La valeur minimum autorisée est – 1. Remarques d’usage  Si les flux de trésorerie périodiques sont identiques, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction VAN. Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous planifiez une épargne destinée à financer les études supérieures de votre fille lorsqu’elle atteindra l’âge. Elle vient d’avoir 13 ans et vous partez de l’hypothèse qu’elle entrerait à l’université dans 5 ans. Vous disposez de 75 000 € à placer sur un compte d’épargne le jour même et vous comptez y ajouter le bonus que vous octroie votre employeur à la fin de chaque année. Comme votre bonus devrait augmenter chaque année, vous espérez pouvoir économiser respectivement 5 000 €, 7 000 €, 8 000 €, 9 000 € et 10 000 € à la fin de chacune des 5 années à venir. Vous estimez qu’il sera nécessaire d’avoir économisé 150 000 € pour les études de votre fille quand elle atteindra l’âge d’entrée à l’université. Avec la fonction TRI, vous pouvez déterminer le taux à appliquer sur les sommes investies pour disposer à terme d’un capital de 150 000 €. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, le taux correspond à 5,70 %. Versement initial Année 1 Année 2 Année 3 Année 4 Année 5 Montant nécessaire =TRI(B2:H2) –75000 –5000 –7000 –8000 –9000 – 10 000 150000 Exemple 2 Imaginons que vous ayez l’occasion d’investir dans une société. L’investissement initial nécessaire est de 50 000 €. Comme la société développe toujours son produit, 25 000 € et 10 000 € supplémentaires doivent être investis respectivement à la fin de la première et de la seconde années. La troisième année, la société s’autofinance, mais sans rémunérer les investisseurs. Les quatrième et cinquième années, les investisseurs perçoivent respectivement 10 000 € et 30 000 €. À la fin de la sixième année, la société est vendue et les investisseurs doivent recevoir 100 000 €. Avec la fonction TRI, vous pouvez déterminer le taux de rendement attendu sur cet investissement. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, le taux correspond à 10,24 %. Versement initial Année 1 Année 2 Année 3 Année 4 Année 5 Produit des ventes =TRI(B2:H2) –50000 – 25 000 – 10 000 0 10 000 30 000 100 000Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TRIM » à la page 150 « VAN » à la page 157 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TRIM La fonction TRIM renvoie le taux de rendement interne d’un investissement qui s’appuie sur une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers (paiements d’un montant non obligatoirement constant) réalisés à intervalles réguliers. Le taux gagné sur les flux de trésorerie positifs et le taux payé pour financer les flux de trésorerie négatifs peuvent différer. TRIM(flux-intervalle, taux-finance, taux-réinvestissement)  intervalle des mouvements : collection comprenant les valeurs de flux de trésorerie. flux-intervalle correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Un produit (un encaissement) doit être indiqué sous la forme d’un nombre positif, tandis qu’une dépense (un décaissement), un nombre négatif. La collection doit contenir au moins une valeur positive et une valeur négative. Les flux de trésorerie doivent être indiqués dans l’ordre chronologique et avec les mêmes intervalles dans le temps (par exemple, tous les mois). Si une période n’a pas de flux de trésorerie, utilisez 0 pour cette période.  taux de financement : taux d’intérêt payé sur les flux de trésorerie négatifs (sorties). taux-finance correspond à un nombre, doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %) et représente le taux auquel les sommes investies (les flux de trésorerie négatifs) peuvent être financées. Par exemple, il est possible d’utiliser le coût du financement d’une société. 150 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 151  taux-réinvestissement : taux auquel les flux de trésorerie positifs (entrées) peuvent être réinvestis. taux-réinvestissement correspond à un nombre, doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %) et représente le taux auquel les sommes perçues (les flux de trésorerie positifs) peuvent être réinvesties. Par exemple, il est possible d’utiliser le taux d’investissement à court terme d’une société. Remarques d’usage  Les flux de trésorerie doivent être répartis équitablement dans le temps. Si aucun flux de trésorerie n’est apporté pendant une période de temps donnée, utilisez 0. Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous ayez l’occasion d’investir dans une société. L’investissement initial nécessaire est de 50 000 €. Comme la société développe toujours son produit, 25 000 € et 10 000 € supplémentaires doivent être investis respectivement à la fin de la première et de la seconde années. La troisième année, la société s’autofinance, mais sans rémunérer les investisseurs. Les quatrième et cinquième années, les investisseurs perçoivent respectivement 10 000 € et 30 000 €. À la fin de la sixième année, la société est vendue et les investisseurs doivent recevoir 100 000 €. Supposons que vous puissiez emprunter au taux de 9,00 % (taux-finance) et puissiez obtenir 4,25 % sur des économies à court terme (taux-réinvestissement) Avec la fonction TRI, vous pouvez déterminer le taux de rendement attendu sur cet investissement. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, le taux correspond approximativement à 9,75 %. Versement initial Année 1 Année 2 Année 3 Année 4 Année 5 Produit des ventes =TRIM (B2:H2; 0,09; 0,0425) –50000 – 25 000 – 10 000 0 10 000 30 000 100 000 Exemple 2 Prenons les mêmes informations que dans l’exemple 1, mais plutôt que de mettre les flux de trésorerie dans des cellules distinctes, précisons les flux de trésorerie sous la forme d’une constante de tableau. La fonction TRIM se présente alors comme suit. =TRIM({–50000; –25000; –10000; 0; 10000; 30000; 100000}; 0,09; 0,0425) renvoie approximativement 9,75 %. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TRI » à la page 148 « VAN » à la page 157 « VA » à la page 152 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375« Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VA La fonction VA renvoie la valeur actualisée d’un investissement ou d’une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. VA(taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; paiement; valeur-future; échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  versement : montant payé ou perçu à chaque période. paiement correspond à un nombre. À chaque période, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement mensuel (négatif) ou d’un paiement périodique perçu sur une annuité (positif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif).  échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. 152 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 153 Remarques d’usage  taux-périodique doit être indiqué en s’appuyant sur la même durée que nbrepériodes. Par exemple, si nbre-périodes représente des mois et le taux d’intérêt annuel est de 8 %, taux-périodique doit être spécifié sous la forme de 0,00667 ou 0.667 % (0,08 divisé par 12).  Si paiement est indiqué sans valeur d’investissement, de valeur au comptant ou de solde restant dû, le paramètre valeur-future peut être omis.  Si paiement est omis, vous devez indiquer valeur-future. Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous planifiez une épargne destinée à financer les études supérieures de votre fille lorsqu’elle atteindra l’âge. Elle vient d’avoir 3 ans et vous partez de l’hypothèse qu’elle entrerait à l’université dans 15 ans. Vous estimez qu’il sera nécessaire d’avoir économisé 150 000 € sur un compte d’épargne au début de son cursus d’enseignement supérieur. Vous êtes en mesure de verser 200 € sur le compte à la fin de chaque mois. Pendant les 15 prochaines années, ce compte d’épargne devrait être rémunéré à un taux d’intérêt annuel de 4,5 % et rapporter des intérêts mensuels. Avec la fonction VA, vous pouvez déterminer le montant à déposer sur ce compte d’épargne afin que le montant de l’épargne atteigne 150 000 € au moment où votre fille est censée entrer à l’université. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, la fonction renvoie « – 50 227,88 € », correspondant au montant qu’il convient de déposer aujourd’hui sur le compte (la fonction renvoie un nombre négatif parce que le dépôt sur le compte d’épargne constitue un décaissement). taux-périodique nbre-périodes paiement valeur-future échéance =VA(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) =0,045/12 =15*12 –200 150000 1 Exemple 2 Dans cet exemple, vous avez l’occasion de réaliser un investissement. Il s’agit d’investir dans un titre escompté net, ne nécessitant aucun apport supplémentaire et ne bénéficiant d’aucun versement jusqu’à l’échéance du titre. Ce titre escompté arrive à échéance au bout de 14 années et son prix de remboursement est de 100 000 €. Une autre option consiste à laisser cette somme sur votre compte d’épargne, où ce dernier vous assure un rendement annuel de 5,25 %. La fonction VA vous permet de déterminer le montant maximal à verser pour le titre escompté, en partant du principe que vous cherchez à obtenir un taux d’intérêt au moins égal à celui de votre compte de placement sur le marché monétaire. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, il s’agit de – 48 852,92 € (la fonction renvoie un montant négatif parce qu’il s’agit d’un décaissement). taux-périodique nbre-périodes paiement valeur-future échéance =VA(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 0,0525 14 0 100 000 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VC » à la page 159« TRI » à la page 148 « NPM » à la page 129 « VPM » à la page 163 « TAUX » à la page 141 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT La fonction VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT renvoie le prix d’un titre qui est vendu avec un escompte par rapport au prix de remboursement et qui ne verse pas d’intérêts par tranche de 100 € de valeur de remboursement (valeur nominale). VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT(règlement; échéance; rendement-annuel; remboursement; basejournalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  rendement-annuel : rendement annuel du titre. rendement-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  remboursement : prix de remboursement par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. remboursement correspond à un nombre positif. remboursement est le montant qui sera perçu par tranche de 100 € de la valeur nominale. Il s’agit souvent de 100, ce qui signifie que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale.  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. 154 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 155 réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction VALEUR.ENCAISSEMENT sert à déterminer le prix d’achat du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Le titre ne rapporte aucun intérêt et est vendu avec un escompte. La fonction renvoie la valeur approximative de 65,98 € ce qui représente le prix par tranche de 100 € de valeur nominale. règlement échéance escompte remboursement base-journalière =VALEUR. ENCAISSEMENT (B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 0.0552 100 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PRIX.TITRE » à la page 133 « PRIX.TITRE.ECHEANCE » à la page 134 « RENDEMENT.SIMPLE » à la page 136 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44VALEUR.NOMINALE La fonction VALEUR.NOMINALE renvoie la valeur à l’échéance d’un titre qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. VALEUR.NOMINALE(règlement; échéance; montant-investissements; taux-annuel; basejournalière)  règlement : date de règlement de la transaction. règlement correspond à une valeur de date/heure. La date de règlement de la transaction est généralement postérieure d’un ou de plusieurs jours à la date de la transaction.  échéance : date à laquelle le titre arrive à échéance. échéance correspond à une valeur de date/heure. Elle doit être postérieure à règlement.  montant-investissements : montant investi dans le titre. montant-investissements correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  taux-annuel : taux de coupon annuel ou taux d’intérêt annuel du titre. taux-annuel correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  base-journalière : argument facultatif indiquant le nombre de jours par mois et de jours par année servant aux calculs. 30/360 (0 ou omis): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode NASD pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois. réels/réels (1): jours naturels pour chaque mois, jours naturels pour chaque année. réels/360 (2): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 360 jours par année. réels/365 (3): jours naturels pour chaque mois, 365 jours par année. 30E/360 (4): 30 jours pour chaque mois, 360 jours pour chaque année, méthode européenne pour les dates tombant le 31 du mois (format européen 30/360). Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction VALEUR.NOMINALE sert à déterminer le montant reçu à l’échéance du titre fictif décrit par les valeurs indiquées. Ce titre ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance. La fonction donne 1 651,83 €, le montant se composant du principal et des intérêts à percevoir à l’échéance. règlement échéance montantinvestissements taux-annuel base-journalière =VALEUR. NOMINALE(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 01/05/2009 30/06/2015 990.02 0,065 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TAUX.INTERET » à la page 146 156 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 157 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VAN La fonction VAN renvoie la valeur actualisée nette pour un investissement qui s’appuie sur une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers mais réalisés à intervalles réguliers. VAN(taux-actualisation-périodique; flux-trésorerie; flux-trésorerie;…)  taux-actualisation-périodique : taux d’escompte par période. taux-actualisationpériodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %). tauxactualisation-périodique correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  mouvement : flux de trésorerie. flux-trésorerie correspond à un nombre. Une valeur positive représente une rentrée (un encaissement). Une valeur négative représente une dépense (un décaissement). Les flux de trésorerie doivent être répartis équitablement dans le temps.  flux-trésorerie;… : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs flux de trésorerie supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  taux-actualisation-périodique doit être indiqué en s’appuyant sur la même périodicité que pour les flux de trésorerie. Par exemple, si les flux de trésorerie sont mensuels et le taux d’escompte annuel souhaité est de 8 %, taux-actualisationpériodique doit être indiqué sous la forme de 0,00667 ou 0,667 % (0,08 divisé par 12).  Si les flux de trésorerie sont irréguliers, utilisez la fonction TRI.Exemple Imaginons que vous ayez l’occasion d’investir dans une société. Comme la société développe toujours son produit, 25 000 € et 10 000 € supplémentaires doivent être investis respectivement à la fin de la première et de la seconde années. La troisième année, la société s’autofinance, mais sans rémunérer les investisseurs. Les quatrième et cinquième années, les investisseurs perçoivent respectivement 10 000 € et 30 000 €. À la fin de la sixième année, la société est vendue et les investisseurs doivent recevoir 100 000 €. Pour investir, vous vous souhaitez un rendement annuel d’au moins 10 %. Avec la fonction VAN, vous pouvez déterminer le montant maximum que vous devez investir initialement. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, la valeur actualisée nette correspond à 50 913,43 €. C’est pourquoi, si l’investissement initial nécessaire est égal à ce montant ou moins, cet investissement répond à votre objectif de 10 %. tauxpériodique Année 1 Année 2 Année 3 Année 4 Année 5 Produit des ventes =VAN(B2; C2:H2) 0,10 – 25 000 – 10 000 0 10 000 30 000 100 000 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TRI » à la page 148 « VA » à la page 152 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 158 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 159 VC La fonction VC renvoie la valeur future d’un investissement en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. VC(taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; paiement; valeur-actualisée; échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  versement : montant payé ou perçu à chaque période. paiement correspond à un nombre. À chaque période, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement mensuel (négatif) ou d’un paiement périodique perçu sur une annuité (positif).  valeur-actualisée : argument facultatif précisant la valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de la rente. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Remarques d’usage  Si paiement est indiqué et qu’investissement initial n’est apporté, le paramètre valeur-actualisée peut être omis.Exemple 1 Imaginons que vous planifiez une épargne destinée à financer les études supérieures de votre fille lorsqu’elle atteindra l’âge. Elle vient d’avoir 3 ans et vous partez de l’hypothèse qu’elle entrerait à l’université dans 15 ans. Vous disposez de 50 000 € à placer sur un compte d’épargne et pouvez verser 200 € sur ce compte à la fin de chaque mois. Pendant les 15 prochaines années, ce compte d’épargne devrait être rémunéré à un taux d’intérêt annuel de 4,5 % et rapporter des intérêts mensuels. À l’aide de la fonction VC, vous pouvez déterminer la valeur attendue du compte d’épargne au moment où votre fille entrera à l’université. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, il s’agit de 149,553.00 €. taux-périodique nbre-périodes paiement valeur-actualisée échéance =VC(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) =0,045/12 =15*12 –200 –50000 1 Exemple 2 Partons du principe que vous avez l’occasion de réaliser un investissement. Vous devez investir 50 000 € nets dans un titre escompté. Ce titre escompté arrive à échéance au bout de 14 années et son prix de remboursement est de 100 000 €. Une autre option consiste à laisser cette somme sur votre compte d’épargne, où ce dernier vous assure un rendement annuel de 5,25 %. Une des manières d’évaluer le bien-fondé de ce placement consiste à estimer combien ces 50 000 € devraient valoir à la fin de la période d’investissement et de comparer ce résultat au prix de remboursement du titre. Avec la fonction VC, vous pouvez déterminer la valeur future attendue du compte de placement sur le marché. En s’appuyant sur nos suppositions, il s’agit de 102 348,03 €. Si nos suppositions se vérifient, il est par conséquent plus intéressant de garder l’argent sur le compte de placement sur le marché monétaire car sa valeur au bout de 14 ans (à savoir, 102 348,03 €) est supérieure à celle du remboursement du titre (soit 100 000 €). taux-périodique nbre-périodes paiement valeur-actualisée échéance =VC(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) 0,0525 14 0 –50000 1 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NPM » à la page 129 « VAN » à la page 157 « VPM » à la page 163 « VA » à la page 152 « TAUX » à la page 141 160 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 161 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VDB La fonction VDB (de l’anglais « Variable Declining Balance », pour Amortissement dégressif à taux variable) renvoie le montant d’amortissement d’un actif sur un intervalle de temps choisi en s’appuyant sur un taux d’amortissement indiqué. VDB(montant; amortissement comptable; vie; période-initiale; période-finale; facteuramort; pas-de-bascule)  coût : coût initial de l’actif. montant correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  récupération : valeur de récupération de l’actif. amortissement comptable correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  vie : nombre de périodes d’amortissement de l’actif. vie correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Une partie décimale (fraction) de vie est autorisée (par exemple, une durée d’amortissement de 5,5 années).  période-initiale : période de départ à inclure dans le calcul. période-initiale correspond à un nombre.  période-finale : période de fin à inclure dans le calcul. période-finale correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et à période-initiale.  facteur-amort : nombre facultatif qui détermine le taux d’amortissement. facteuramort correspond à un nombre. En cas d’omission, cette valeur est considérée comme étant égale à 2 (200 % pour un amortissement décroissant à taux double). Plus le nombre est élevé, plus l’amortissement est rapide. Par exemple, si vous voulez obtenir un taux d’amortissement d’une fois et demie l’amortissement linéaire, utilisez 1,5 ou 150 %.  non-échange : valeur facultative indiquant si l’amortissement doit passer à la méthode linéaire. basculer (0, FAUX ou omis): basculer vers la méthode d’amortissement linéaire l’année ou l’amortissement linéaire est supérieur à l’amortissement dégressif. pas de bascule (1 ou VRAI): ne pas basculer vers la méthode de l’amortissement linéaire.Remarques d’usage  période-initiale doit être indiqué comme la période antérieure à la première période que vous voulez inclure dans le calcul. Si vous voulez inclure la première période, utilisez 0 pour période-initiale.  Si vous voulez un amortissement qui n’inclut que la première période, indiquez la valeur 1 pour période-finale. Exemples Imaginons que vous venez d’acheter un actif ayant un coût de 11 000,00 €, une valeur de récupération de 1 000,00 € et une durée de vie utile estimée de 5 ans. Vous comptez amortir l’actif selon la méthode de l’amortissement dégressif de 1,5 (150 %). =VDB(11000; 1000; 5; 0; 1; 1,5; 0) renvoie 3 300 €, l’amortissement pour la première année. =VDB(11000; 1000; 5; 4; 5; 1,5; 0) renvoie 1 386,50 €, l’amortissement pour la cinquième (et dernière) année, en utilisant l’amortissement linéaire lorsque ce dernier est supérieur à l’amortissement dégressif. =VDB(11000; 1000; 5; 4; 5; 1,5; 1) renvoie 792,33 €, l’amortissement pour la cinquième (et dernière) année, en utilisant tout le temps l’amortissement dégressif (pas-de-bascule est VRAI). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DB » à la page 111 « DDB » à la page 113 « AMORLIN » à la page 106 « SYD » à la page 140 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 162 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financièresChapitre 6 Fonctions financières 163 VPM La fonction VPM renvoie le paiement périodique pour un prêt ou une annuité en s’appuyant sur une série de flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (paiements d’un montant constant et tous les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et d’un taux d’intérêt fixe. VPM(taux-périodique, nbre-périodes, valeur-actualisée, valeur-future, échéance)  taux-périodique : taux d’intérêt par période. taux-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %).  nbre-périodes : nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  valeur-actualisée : valeur de l’investissement initial ou le montant du prêt ou de l’annuité. valeur-actualisée correspond à un nombre. Au moment 0, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un montant emprunté (positif) ou du règlement de départ fait sur un contrat à annuités (négatif).  valeur capitalisée : argument facultatif représentant la valeur de l’investissement ou la valeur résiduelle de la rente (montant positif), ou du solde restant dû d’un prêt (montant négatif) à l’issue du dernier paiement. valeur-future correspond à un nombre. À la fin de la période d’investissement, un montant perçu est un montant positif et un montant investi est un montant négatif. Il peut s’agir par exemple d’un remboursement gonflé sur un prêt (négatif) ou de la valeur résiduelle d’un contrat à annuités (positif). En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut correspond à 0.  échéance : argument facultatif qui indique si les paiements sont dus au début ou à la fin de chaque période. Pour la plupart des crédits hypothécaires et autres prêts, le premier paiement doit être effectué à la fin de la première période (0), ce qui est la valeur par défaut. Par contre, la plupart des paiements dans le cadre d’un créditbail ou d’une location et certains autres types de paiements sont dus au début de la période (1). fin (0 ou omis): paiements dus à la fin de chaque période. début (1): paiements dus au début de chaque période. Exemple Dans cet exemple, VPM permet de déterminer le paiement fixe en s’appuyant sur les modalités indiqués pour un prêt. La fonction renvoie la valeur – 1 610,21 €, ce qui représente le paiement fixe que vous devez effectuer (négative parce qu’il s’agit d’un décaissement) pour ce prêt.164 Chapitre 6 Fonctions financières taux-périodique nbre-périodes valeur-actualisée valeur-future échéance =VPM(B2; C2; D2; E2; F2) =0,06/12 =10*12 200000 –100000 0 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VC » à la page 159 « INTPER » à la page 121 « NPM » à la page 129 « PRINCPER » à la page 131 « VA » à la page 152 « TAUX » à la page 141 « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44165 Les fonctions logiques et d’information vous aident à évaluer le contenu de cellules et à déterminer comment évaluer des contenus de cellule ou des résultats de formule et comment travailler avec ces derniers. Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information iWork intégre ces fonctions logiques et d’information pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « ESTERREUR » (page 166) La fonction ESTERREUR renvoie VRAI si une expression donnée donne une erreur et FAUX dans le cas contraire. « EST.IMPAIR » (page 167) La fonction EST.IMPAIR renvoie VRAI si la valeur est impaire (présente un reste en cas de division par 2). Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. « EST.PAIR » (page 168) La fonction EST.PAIR renvoie VRAI si la valeur est paire (n’a pas de reste en cas de division par 2). Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. « ESTVIDE » (page 168) La fonction ESTVIDE renvoie VRAI si la cellule indiquée est vide et FAUX dans le cas contraire. « ET » (page 169) La fonction ET renvoie VRAI si tous les arguments sont vrais et FAUX dans le cas contraire. « FAUX » (page 171) La fonction FAUX renvoie la valeur booléenne FAUX. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationFonction Description « NON » (page 172) La fonction NON renvoie l’opposé de la valeur booléenne d’une expression indiquée. « OU » (page 173) La fonction OU renvoie VRAI si l’un des arguments est vrai. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. « SI » (page ###) La fonction SI renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI ou FAUX selon que l’expression indiquée est vraie ou fausse. « SI.ERREUR » (page 176) La fonction SI.ERREUR renvoie la valeur que vous précisez si une valeur donnée donne une erreur. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie la valeur donnée. « VRAI » (page 177) La fonction VRAI renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. ESTERREUR La fonction ESTERREUR renvoie VRAI si une expression donnée donne une erreur et FAUX dans le cas contraire. ESTERREUR(expression-quelconque)  expression-quelconque : expression à évaluer. expression-quelconque peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Il est souvent préférable d’utiliser la fonction SI.ERREUR. La fonction SI.ERREUR a toutes les fonctionnalités d’ESTERREUR, mais permet également de piéger l’erreur, pas seulement de l’identifier. Exemples Si B1 correspond à un nombre et D1 renvoie la valeur 0, alors : =SI(ESTERREUR(B1/D1); 0; B1/D1) renvoie 0 car la division par zéro donne une erreur. =SI.ERREUR(B1/D1; 0) est équivalent à l’exemple précédent, mais ne nécessite qu’une seule fonction. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SI.ERREUR » à la page 176 « ESTVIDE » à la page 168 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 166 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 167 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 EST.IMPAIR La fonction EST.IMPAIR renvoie VRAI si le nombre en question est impair (présente un reste en cas de division par 2). Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. EST.IMPAIR(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Si nbre correspond à du texte, la fonction génère une erreur. Si nbre est la valeur booléenne VRAI (valeur 1), la fonction renvoie VRAI. Si nbre est la valeur booléenne FAUX(valeur 0), la fonction renvoie FAUX. Exemples =EST.IMPAIR(3) renvoie VRAI. =EST.IMPAIR(3,75) renvoie VRAI. =EST.IMPAIR(2) renvoie FAUX. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « EST.PAIR » à la page 168 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44EST.PAIR La fonction EST.PAIR renvoie VRAI si le nombre en question est pair (n’a pas de reste en cas de division par 2). Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. EST.PAIR(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Si nbre correspond à du texte, la fonction génère une erreur. Si nbre est la valeur booléenne VRAI (valeur 1), la fonction renvoie FAUX. Si nbre est la valeur booléenne FAUX (valeur 0), la fonction renvoie VRAI. Exemples =EST.PAIR(2) renvoie VRAI. =EST.PAIR(2,75) renvoie VRAI. =EST.PAIR(3) renvoie FAUX. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « EST.IMPAIR » à la page 167 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ESTVIDE La fonction ESTVIDE renvoie VRAI si la cellule spécifiée est vide, et FAUX dans le cas contraire. ESTVIDE(cellule)  cellule : référence à une seule cellule de tableau. cellule est une valeur de référence à une seule cellule pouvant contenir n’importe quelle valeur ou être vide. Remarques d’usage  Si la cellule est entièrement vide, la fonction renvoie VRAI, dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. Si la cellule contient un espace ou un caractère non imprimable, la fonction renvoie FAUX, même si la cellule semble être vide. 168 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 169 Exemples Si la cellule de tableau A1 est vide et la cellule B2 contient 100 : =ISBLANK(A1) renvoie VRAI. =ESTVIDE(B2) renvoie FAUX. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SI.ERREUR » à la page 176 « ESTERREUR » à la page 166 « Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules » à la page 387 « Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information » à la page 386 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ET La fonction ET renvoie VRAI si tous les arguments sont vrais et FAUX dans le cas contraire. ET(expression-test; expression-test; …)  expression-test : expression quelconque. expression-test accepte tout type de donnée pour autant que l’expression du résultat corresponde à une valeur booléenne. Si l’expression renvoie un nombre, la valeur 0 est interprétée comme la valeur FAUX, alors que toute autre valeur est interprétée comme VRAI.  expression-test;… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs expressions. Remarques d’usage  La fonction ET est équivalente à l’opérateur de conjonction logique utilisé dans les mathématiques ou en logique. Elle évalue d’abord chaque expression-test. Si toutes les expressions en question sont vraies, la fonction ET renvoie VRAI. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX.Exemples =ET(VRAI; VRAI) renvoie VRAI parce que les deux arguments sont vrais. =ET(1; 0; 1; 1) renvoie FAUX car l’un des arguments correspond au chiffre 0, ce qui est considéré comme faux. =ET(A5>60; A5<=100) renvoie VRAI si la cellule A5 contient un nombre et 61 et 100. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. Les deux fonctions SI suivantes renvoient la même valeur : =SI(B2>60; SI(B2<=100; VRAI, FAUX); FAUX) =SI(ET(B2>60; B2<=100); VRAI; FAUX) Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SI » à la page ### « NON » à la page 172 « OU » à la page 173 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules » à la page 387 « Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information » à la page 386 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 170 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 171 FAUX La fonction FAUX renvoie la valeur booléenne FAUX. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. FAUX() Remarques d’usage  La fonction FAUX n’a pas d’argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =FAUX().  Au lieu d’utiliser la fonction FAUX, vous pouvez indiquer la valeur booléenne FAUX (en majuscules ou en minuscules) dans une cellule ou comme argument de fonction. Exemples =FAUX() renvoie la valeur booléenne FAUX. =ET(1; FAUX()) renvoie la valeur booléenne FAUX. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « VRAI » à la page 177 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44NON La fonction NON renvoie l’opposé de la valeur booléenne d’une expression indiquée. NON(expression-quelconque)  expression-quelconque : expression à évaluer. expression-quelconque accepte tout type de donnée pour autant que l’expression du résultat corresponde à une valeur booléenne. Si l’expression renvoie un nombre, la valeur 0 est interprétée comme la valeur FAUX, alors que toute autre valeur est interprétée comme VRAI. Exemples =NON(0) renvoie VRAI car 0 est interprété comme FAUX. =OU(A9; NON(A9)) renvoie toujours VRAI car A9 ou son opposé est toujours vrai. =NON(OU(FAUX; FAUX)) renvoie VRAI car aucun des arguments du OU logique n’est vrai. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ET » à la page 169 « SI » à la page ### « OU » à la page 173 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 172 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 173 OU La fonction OU renvoie VRAI si l’un des arguments est vrai. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. OU(expression-quelconque; expression-quelconque; …)  expression-quelconque : expression à évaluer. expression-quelconque accepte tout type de donnée pour autant que l’expression du résultat corresponde à une valeur booléenne. Si l’expression renvoie un nombre, la valeur 0 est interprétée comme la valeur FAUX, alors que toute autre valeur est interprétée comme VRAI.  expression-quelconque; … : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs expressions à évaluer. Remarques d’usage  La fonction OU est équivalente à la disjonction logique ou à la disjonction inclusive utilisée dans les mathématiques ou en logique. Elle évalue d’abord chaque expression. Si l’une des expressions en question est vraie, la fonction OU renvoie VRAI. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX.  Si une expression est numérique, la valeur 0 est interprétée comme FAUX, alors que toute valeur différente de zéro est interprétée comme VRAI.  OU est souvent utilisée avec la fonction SI lorsque plus d’une condition doivent être considérées. Exemples =OU(A1+A2<100; B1+B2<100) renvoie FAUX si les sommes des cellules indiquées sont plus grandes ou égales à 100 et VRAI si au moins une des sommes est plus petite que 100. =OU(5; 0; 6) renvoie VRAI car au moins un argument est différent de zéro. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ET » à la page 169 « SI » à la page ### « NON » à la page 172 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules » à la page 387 « Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information » à la page 386 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SI La fonction SI renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI ou FAUX selon que l’expression indiquée est vraie ou fausse. SI(expression-si; si-vrai; si-faux)  expression-si : expression logique. expression-si accepte tout type de donnée pour autant que l’expression du résultat corresponde à une valeur booléenne. Si l’expression renvoie un nombre, la valeur 0 est interprétée comme la valeur FAUX, alors que toute autre valeur est interprétée comme VRAI.  si-vrai : valeur renvoyée si l’expression est avérée. si-vrai peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. En cas d’omission (une virgule sans valeur), SI renvoie 0.  si faux : argument facultatif représentant la valeur renvoyée si l’expression correspond à FAUX. si-faux peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. En cas d’omission (une virgule sans valeur), SI renvoie 0. En cas d’omission complète (aucune virgule après si-faux) et si expression-si donne FAUX, SI renvoie FAUX. Remarques d’usage  Si la valeur booléenne d’expression-si est VRAI, la fonction renvoie l’expression si-vrai, dans le cas contraire elle renvoie l’expression si-faux.  Tant si-vrai que si-faux peuvent contenir des fonctions SI supplémentaires (imbriquées). 174 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 175 Exemples =SI(A5>=0; "Non négatif"; "Négatif") renvoie le texte « Non négatif » si la cellule A5 contient un nombre plus grand ou égal à zéro ou une valeur non numérique. Si la cellule A5 contient une valeur plus petite que 0, la fonction renvoie « Négatif ». =SI(SI.ERREUR(OU(EST.PAIR(B4+B5); EST.IMPAIR(B4+B5); FAUX); ); "Tous des nombres"; "Pas tous des nombres") renvoie le texte « Tous des nombres » si les cellules B4 et B5 contiennent des nombres, le texte « Pas tous des nombres » dans le cas contraire. Pour les besoins du résultat, un test détermine si la somme des deux cellules est paire ou impaire. Si la cellule n’est pas un nombre, les fonctions EST. PAIR et EST.IMPAIR renvoient une erreur et la fonction SI.ERREUR renvoie FAUX, dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie VRAI car soit EST.PAIR soit EST.IMPAIR donne VRAI. Donc, si B4 ou B5 n’est ni un nombre ni une valeur booléenne, l’expression SI renverra l’expression si-faux, c’est-à-dire « Pas tous des nombres ». À défaut, elle reverra l’expression si-vrai, c’est-à-dire « Tous des nombres ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ET » à la page 169 « NON » à la page 172 « OU » à la page 173 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Interception de division par zéro » à la page 388 « Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules » à la page 387 « Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information » à la page 386 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44SI.ERREUR La fonction SI.ERREUR renvoie la valeur que vous indiquez si une valeur donnée donne une erreur. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie la valeur donnée. SI.ERREUR(expression-quelconque; erreur-si)  expression-quelconque : expression à évaluer. expression-quelconque peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  erreur-si : valeur renvoyée si expression-quelconque entraîne une erreur. si-erreur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Utilisez SI.ERREUR pour gérer les erreurs dans une formule. Par exemple, si la cellule D1 a pour valeur 0, qui est pourtant une valeur valide, la formule =B1/D1 génère une erreur (division par zéro). Cette erreur peut être évitée en utilisant une formule comme =SI.ERREUR(B1/D1; 0) qui renvoie le résultat de la division si D1 est différent de zéro, mais 0 dans le cas contraire. Exemples Si B1 correspond à un nombre et D1 renvoie la valeur 0, alors : =SI.ERREUR(B1/D1; 0) renvoie 0 car la division par zéro donne une erreur. =SI(ESTERREUR(B1/D1); 0; B1/D1) est équivalent à l’exemple SI.ERREUR ci-avant, mais nécessite l’utilisation de SI et de ESTERREUR. =SI(SI.ERREUR(OU(EST.PAIR(B4+B5); EST.IMPAIR(B4+B5); FAUX); ); "Tous des nombres"; "Pas tous des nombres") renvoie le texte « Tous des nombres » si les cellules B4 et B5 contiennent des nombres, le texte « Pas tous des nombres » dans le cas contraire. Pour les besoins du résultat, un test détermine si la somme des deux cellules est paire ou impaire. Si la cellule n’est pas un nombre, les fonctions EST. PAIR et EST.IMPAIR renvoient une erreur et la fonction SI.ERREUR renvoie FAUX, dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie VRAI car soit EST.PAIR soit EST.IMPAIR donne VRAI. Donc, si B4 ou B5 n’est ni un nombre ni une valeur booléenne, l’expression SI renverra l’expression si-faux, c’est-à-dire « Pas tous des nombres ». À défaut, elle reverra l’expression si-vrai, c’est-à-dire « Tous des nombres ». 176 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’informationChapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information 177 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ESTVIDE » à la page 168 « ESTERREUR » à la page 166 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VRAI La fonction VRAI renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. VRAI() Remarques d’usage  La fonction VRAI n’a pas d’argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =VRAI().  Au lieu d’utiliser la fonction VRAI, vous pouvez indiquer la valeur booléenne VRAI en tapant simplement VRAI (ou vrai) dans une cellule ou comme argument de fonction. Exemples =VRAI() renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI. =ET(1; VRAI()) renvoie la valeur booléenne VRAI. =ET(1; VRAI) fonctionne exactement comme dans l’exemple précédent.178 Chapitre 7 Fonctions logiques et d’information Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FAUX » à la page 171 « Liste des fonctions logiques et d’information » à la page 165 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44179 Les fonctions numériques vous aident à calculer des valeurs mathématiques souvent utilisées. Liste des fonctions numériques Ces fonctions de manipulation de nombres ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « ABS » (page 182) La fonction ABS renvoie la valeur absolue d’un nombre ou d’une durée. « ALEA » (page 183) La fonction ALEA renvoie un nombre aléatoire plus grand ou égal à 0 et plus petit que 1. « ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES » (page 183) La fonction ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES renvoie un entier aléatoire pris dans l’intervalle indiqué. « ARRONDI » (page 184) La fonction ARRONDI renvoie un nombre arrondi au nombre de chiffres indiqué. « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » (page 185) La fonction ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple supérieur d’un facteur donné. « ARRONDI.INF » (page 186) La fonction ARRONDI.INF renvoie un nombre arrondi vers le bas (en se rapprochant de zéro) au nombre de chiffres indiqué. 8 Fonctions numériquesFonction Description « ARRONDI.SUP » (page 187) La fonction ARRONDI.SUP renvoie un nombre arrondi vers le haut (en s’éloignant de zéro) au nombre de chiffres indiqué. « COMBIN » (page 189) La fonction COMBIN renvoie le nombre de manières qu’il y a de combiner un nombre d’éléments pour former des groupes d’une taille donnée sans tenir compte de l’ordre dans les groupes. « ENT » (page 190) La fonction ENT renvoie le nombre entier inférieur ou égal le plus proche du nombre. « EXP » (page 191) La fonction EXP renvoie e (la base des logarithmes népériens) élevé à la puissance spécifiée. « FACT » (page 192) La fonction FACT renvoie la factorielle d’un nombre. « FACTDOUBLE » (page 192) La fonction FACTDOUBLE renvoie la factorielle double d’un nombre. « IMPAIR » (page 193) La fonction IMPAIR arrondit un nombre au nombre impair supérieur. « LN » (page 194) La fonction LN renvoie le logarithme népérien d’un nombre, la puissance à laquelle e doit être élevé pour donner le nombre. « LOG » (page 195) La fonction LOG renvoie le logarithme d’un nombre en s’appuyant sur la base indiquée. « LOG10 » (page 196) La fonction LOG10 renvoie le logarithme en base 10 d’un nombre. « MOD » (page 197) La fonction MOD renvoie le reste d’une division. « MULTINOMIALE » (page 198) La fonction MULTINOMIALE renvoie la forme la plus proche du coefficient multinomial des nombres précisés. « PAIR » (page 199) La fonction PAIR arrondit un nombre au nombre pair supérieur. « PGCD » (page 200) La fonction PGCD renvoie le plus grand commun dénominateur (PGCD) des nombres indiqués. « PI » (page 200) La fonction PI renvoie la valeur approximative de p (pi), le rapport entre la circonférence d’un cercle et son diamètre. « PLAFOND » (page 201) La fonction PLAFOND arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple supérieur du facteur donné. 180 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 181 Fonction Description « PLANCHER » (page 202) La fonction PLANCHER arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple inférieur du facteur donné. « PPCM » (page 203) La fonction PPCM renvoie le plus petit commun multiple (PPCM) des nombres indiqués. « PRODUIT » (page 204) La fonction PRODUIT renvoie le produit d’un ou plusieurs nombres. « PUISSANCE » (page 205) La fonction PUISSANCE renvoie un nombre élevé à une puissance. « QUOTIENT » (page 206) La fonction QUOTIENT renvoie le quotient entier de deux nombres. « RACINE » (page 207) La fonction RACINE renvoie la racine carrée d’un nombre. « RACINE.PI » (page 207) La fonction RACINE.PI renvoie la racine carrée d’un nombre multiplié par p (pi). « ROMAIN » (page 208) La fonction ROMAIN convertit un nombre en chiffres romains. « SIGNE » (page 209) La fonction SIGNE renvoie 1 si le nombre en question est positif, – 1 s’il est négatif et 0 s’il est nul. « SOMME » (page 209) La fonction SOMME renvoie la somme d’une collection de nombres. « SOMME.CARRES » (page 211) La fonction SOMME.CARRES renvoie la somme des carrés d’une collection de nombres. « SOMMEPROD » (page 212) La fonction SOMMEPROD renvoie la somme des produits des nombres correspondants dans un ou plusieurs intervalles. « SOMME.SI » (page 213) La fonction SOMME.SI renvoie la somme d’une collection de nombres, y compris seuls les nombres qui répondent à la condition indiquée. « SOMME.SIS » (page 215) La fonction SOMME.SIS renvoie la somme des cellules d’une collection dans laquelle les valeurs testées répondent aux conditions données. « SOMME.X2MY2 » (page 217) La fonction SOMME.X2MY2 renvoie la somme de la différence des carrés des valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections.Fonction Description « SOMME.X2PY2 » (page 218) La fonction SOMME.X2PY2 renvoie la somme des carrés des valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections. « SOMME.XMY2 » (page 219) La fonction SOMME.XMY2 renvoie la somme des carrés des différences entre les valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections. « TRONQUE » (page 220) La fonction TRONQUE scinde un nombre au chiffre indiqué. ABS La fonction ABS renvoie la valeur absolue d’un nombre ou d’une durée. ABS(nbre-dur)  nbre-dur : nombre ou valeur de durée. nbre-dur correspond à un nombre ou à une durée. Remarques d’usage  Le résultat renvoyé par ABS est soit un nombre positif soit 0. Exemples =ABS(A1) renvoie 5, si la cellule A1 contient 5. =ABS(8–5) renvoie 3. =ABS(5–8) renvoie 3. =ABS(0) renvoie 0. =ABS(A1) renvoie 0, si la cellule A1 est vide. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 182 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 183 ALEA La fonction ALEA renvoie un nombre aléatoire plus grand ou égal à 0 et plus petit que 1. ALEA() Remarques d’usage  La fonction ALEA n’a pas d’argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =ALEA().  Chaque fois que vous modifiez une valeur dans le tableau, un nouveau nombre plus grand ou égal à 0 et plus petit que 1 est généré. Exemple =ALEA() renvoie, par exemple, 0,217538648284972, 0,6137690856, 0,0296026556752622 et 0,4684193600 dans le cas de quatre nouveaux calculs. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES » à la page 183 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES La fonction ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES renvoie un entier aléatoire pris dans l’intervalle indiqué. ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES(inférieur; supérieur)  inférieur : limite inférieure. inférieur correspond à un nombre.  supérieur : limite supérieure. supérieur correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Chaque fois que vous modifiez une valeur dans le tableau, un nouveau nombre aléatoire compris entre les limites inférieure et supérieure est généré. Exemple =ALEA.ENTRE.BORNES(1; 10) renvoie, par exemple, 8, 6, 2, 3 et 5 dans le cas de cinq nouveaux calculs.Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ALEA » à la page 183 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ARRONDI La fonction ARRONDI renvoie un nombre arrondi au nombre de chiffres indiqué. ARRONDI(nbre-à-arrondir; décimales)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  décimales : nombre de décimales à conserver après la virgule. décimales correspond à un nombre. Un nombre positif représente le nombre de décimales (chiffres après la virgule) à droite. Un nombre négatif représente le nombre de chiffres à gauche de la virgule décimale à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Exemples =ARRONDI(1,49; 0) renvoie 1. =ARRONDI(1,50; 0) renvoie 2. =ARRONDI(1,23456; 3) renvoie 1,235. =ARRONDI(1111,222; –2) renvoie 1100. =ARRONDI(–2,2; 0) renvoie « – 2 ». =ARRONDI(–2,8; 0) renvoie « – 3 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 184 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE La fonction ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple supérieur d’un facteur donné. ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(nbre-à-arrondir; facteur)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  facteur : nombre à utiliser pour déterminer le multiple le plus proche. facteur correspond à un nombre. La valeur doit présenter le même signe que nbre-à- arrondir. Exemples =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(2; 3) renvoie 3. =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(4; 3) renvoie 3. =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(4,4999; 3) renvoie 3. =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(4,5; 3) renvoie 6. =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(–4,5; 3) génère une erreur. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202« ENT » à la page 190 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ARRONDI.INF La fonction ARRONDI.INF renvoie un nombre arrondi vers le bas (en se rapprochant de zéro) au nombre de chiffres indiqué. ARRONDI.INF(nbre-à-arrondir; décimales)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  décimales : nombre de décimales à conserver après la virgule. décimales correspond à un nombre. Un nombre positif représente le nombre de décimales (chiffres après la virgule) à droite. Un nombre négatif représente le nombre de chiffres à gauche de la virgule décimale à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Exemples =ARRONDI.INF(1,49; 0) renvoie 1. =ARRONDI.INF(1,50; 0) renvoie 1. =ARRONDI.INF(1,23456; 3) renvoie 1,234. =ARRONDI.INF(1111,222; –2) renvoie 1100. =ARRONDI.INF(–2,2; 0) renvoie « – 2 ». =ARRONDI.INF(–2,8; 0) renvoie « – 2 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 186 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 187 « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ARRONDI.SUP La fonction ARRONDI.SUP renvoie un nombre arrondi vers le haut (en s’éloignant de zéro) au nombre de chiffres indiqué. ARRONDI.SUP(nbre-à-arrondir; décimales)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  décimales : nombre de décimales à conserver après la virgule. décimales correspond à un nombre. Un nombre positif représente le nombre de décimales (chiffres après la virgule) à droite. Un nombre négatif représente le nombre de chiffres à gauche de la virgule décimale à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre).Exemples =ARRONDI.SUP(1,49; 0) renvoie 2. =ARRONDI.SUP(1,50; 0) renvoie 2. =ARRONDI.SUP(1,23456; 3) renvoie 1,235. =ARRONDI.SUP(1111,222; –2) renvoie 1200. =ARRONDI.SUP(–2,2; 0) renvoie « – 3 ». =ARRONDI.SUP(–2,8; 0) renvoie « – 3 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 188 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 189 COMBIN La fonction COMBIN renvoie le nombre de manières qu’il y a de combiner un nombre d’éléments pour former des groupes d’une taille donnée sans tenir compte de l’ordre dans les groupes. COMBIN(total-éléments; taille-groupe)  total-éléments : nombre d’éléments. total-éléments correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Si total-éléments présente une partie décimale (fraction), celleci est ignorée.  taille-groupe : nombre d’éléments combinés dans chaque groupe. taille-groupe correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Si taille-groupe présente une partie décimale (fraction), celle-ci est ignorée. Remarques d’usage  Les combinaisons se distinguent des permutations. L’ordre des éléments d’un groupe est ignoré pour les combinaisons mais il est pris en compte pour les permutations. Par exemple, (1; 2; 3) et (3; 2; 1) constituent la même combinaison mais deux permutations uniques. Si vous voulez le nombre de permutations plutôt que le nombre de combinaisons, utilisez la fonction PERMUT. Exemples =COMBIN(3; 2) renvoie 3, le nombre de groupes uniques que l’on peut former en commençant par 3 éléments et en les groupant par 2. =COMBIN(3,2; 2,3) renvoie 3. La partie décimale des nombres est omise. =COMBIN(5; 2) et =COMBIN(5; 3) renvoient tous deux 10. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PERMUTATION » à la page 306 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44ENT La fonction ENT renvoie le nombre entier, inférieur ou égal, le plus proche du nombre. ENT(nbre-à-arrondir)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre. Exemples =ENT(1,49) renvoie 1. =ENT(1,50) renvoie 1. =ENT(1,23456) renvoie 1. =ENT(1111,222) renvoie 1 111. =ENT(–2,2) renvoie « – 3 ». =ENT(–2,8) renvoie « – 3 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 190 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 191 EXP La fonction EXP renvoie e (la base des logarithmes népériens) élevé à la puissance indiquée. EXP(exposant)  exposant : puissance à laquelle vous souhaitez élever e. exposant correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  EXP et LN sont mathématiquement parlant l’inverse l’un de l’autre, à la différence où LN est défini mais où, de par l’arrondi en virgule flottante, EXP(LN(x)) peut ne pas donner exactement x. Exemple =EXP(1) renvoie 2,71828182845905, une approximation de e. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LN » à la page 194 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44FACT La fonction FACT renvoie la factorielle d’un nombre. FACT(fact-nbre)  fact-nbre : valeur numérique. fact-nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de fact-nbre est ignorée. Exemples =FACT(5) renvoie 120, c’est-à-dire 1 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5. =FACT(0) renvoie 1. =FACT(4,5) renvoie 24. La fraction est ignorée et la factorielle de 4 est calculée. =FACT(–1) génère une erreur car le nombre ne peut pas être négatif. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FACTDOUBLE » à la page 192 « MULTINOMIALE » à la page 198 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 FACTDOUBLE La fonction FACTDOUBLE renvoie la factorielle double d’un nombre. FACTDOUBLE(fact-nbre)  fact-nbre : valeur numérique. fact-nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à – 1. Les valeurs de l’intervalle – 1 à 1 renvoient 1. Toute partie décimale (fraction) de fact-nbre est ignorée. Remarques d’usage  Pour un entier pair, la factorielle double est le produit de tous les entiers pairs plus petits ou égaux à l’entier donné et plus grands ou égaux à 2. Pour un entier impair, la factorielle double est le produit de tous les entiers impairs plus petits ou égaux à l’entier donné et plus grands ou égaux à 1. 192 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 193 Exemples =FACTDOUBLE(4) renvoie 8, le produit de 2 et 4. =FACTDOUBLE(4,7) renvoie 8, le produit de 2 et 4. La partie décimale est ignorée. =FACTDOUBLE (10) renvoie 3 840, le produit de 2, 4, 6, 8 et 10. =FACTDOUBLE(1) renvoie 1 car tous les nombres entre – 1 et 1 renvoient 1. =FACTDOUBLE(–1) renvoie 1 car tous les nombres entre – 1 et 1 renvoient 1. =FACTDOUBLE (7) renvoie 105, le produit de 1, 3, 5 et 7. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FACT » à la page 192 « MULTINOMIALE » à la page 198 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 IMPAIR La fonction IMPAIR arrondit un nombre au nombre impair supérieur. IMPAIR(nbre-à-arrondir)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Pour arrondir à un nombre pair, utilisez la fonction PAIR. Exemples =IMPAIR(1) renvoie 1. =IMPAIR(2) renvoie 3. =IMPAIR(2,5) renvoie 3. =IMPAIR(–2,5) renvoie « – 3 ». =IMPAIR(0) renvoie 1. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’« PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LN La fonction LN renvoie le logarithme népérien d’un nombre, la puissance à laquelle e doit être élevé pour donner le nombre. LN(nbre-pos)  nbre-pos : nombre positif. nbre-pos correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  EXP et LN sont mathématiquement parlant l’inverse l’un de l’autre, à la différence où LN est défini mais où, de par l’arrondi en virgule flottante, =LN(EXP(x)) peut ne pas donner exactement x. Exemple =LN(2,71828) renvoie approximativement 1, la puissance à laquelle il faut élever e pour donner 2,71828. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 194 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 195 « EXP » à la page 191 « LOG » à la page 195 « LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE » à la page 278 « LOI.LOGNORMALE » à la page 277 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOG La fonction LOG renvoie le logarithme d’un nombre en s’appuyant sur la base indiquée. LOG(nbre-pos; base)  nbre-pos : nombre positif. nbre-pos correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  base : valeur facultative représentant la base du logarithme. base correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Si base est égal à 1, cela revient à effectuer une division par zéro et la fonction génère une erreur. Si base est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 10. Exemples =LOG(8; 2) renvoie 3. =LOG(100; 10) et LOG(100) renvoient tous deux 2. =LOG(5,0625; 1,5) renvoie 4. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOG10 » à la page 196 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28« Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOG10 La fonction LOG10 renvoie le logarithme en base 10 d’un nombre. LOG10(nbre-pos)  nbre-pos : nombre positif. nbre-pos correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  Pour trouver le logarithme dans une base autre que la base 10, utilisez la fonction LOG. Exemples =LOG10(1) renvoie 0. =LOG10(10) renvoie 1. =LOG10(100) renvoie 2. =LOG10(1000) renvoie 3. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LN » à la page 194 « LOG » à la page 195 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 196 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 197 MOD La fonction MOD renvoie le reste d’une division. MOD(dividende; diviseur)  dividende : nombre à diviser par un autre nombre. dividende correspond à un nombre.  diviseur : nombre servant à diviser un autre nombre. diviseur correspond à un nombre. Si « diviseur » est égal à 0, cela revient à effectuer une division par zéro et la fonction génère une erreur. Remarques d’usage  Le signe du résultat est identique à celui du diviseur.  Lors du calcul de MOD(a; b), la fonction renvoie un nombre r tel que a = bk + r, où r est compris entre 0 et b, et k est un entier.  MOD(a; b) équivaut à a-b*ENT(a/b). Exemples =MOD(6; 3) renvoie 0. =MOD(7; 3) renvoie 1. =MOD(8; 3) renvoie 2. =MOD(–8; 3) renvoie 1. =MOD(4,5; 2) renvoie 0,5. =MOD(7; 0,75) renvoie 0,25. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « QUOTIENT » à la page 206 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44MULTINOMIALE La fonction MULTINOMIALE renvoie le coefficient multinomial des nombres précisés. Pour ce faire, la fonction détermine le rapport de la factorielle de la somme des nombres en question sur le produit des factorielles des nombres en question. MULTINOMIALE(nbre-non-nég; nbre-non-nég; …)  nbre-non-nég : valeur numérique. nbre-non-nég correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  nbre-non-nég; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Exemples =MULTINOMIALE(2) renvoie 1. La factorielle de 2 est égale à 2. Le produit de 1 et 2 est égal à 2. Le rapport de 2:2 est égal à 1. =MULTINOMIALE(1; 2; 3) renvoie 60. La factorielle de la somme de 1, 2 et 3 est égale à 720. Le produit des factorielles de 1, 2 et 3 est égal à 12. Le rapport de 720:12 est égal à 60. =MULTINOMIALE(4; 5; 6) renvoie 630630. La factorielle de la somme de 4, 5 et 6 est égale à 1,30767E+12 Le produit des factorielles de 4, 5 et 6 est égal à « 2 073 600 ». Le rapport de 1,30767E+12:2073600 est égal à « 630 630 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FACT » à la page 192 « FACTDOUBLE » à la page 192 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 198 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 199 PAIR La fonction PAIR arrondit un nombre au nombre pair supérieur. PAIR(nbre-à-arrondir)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  Pour arrondir à un nombre impair, utilisez la fonction IMPAIR. Exemples =PAIR(1) renvoie 2. =PAIR(2) renvoie 2. =PAIR(2,5) renvoie 4. =PAIR(–2,5) renvoie « – 4 ». =PAIR(0) renvoie 0. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44PGCD La fonction PGCD renvoie le plus grand commun dénominateur (PGCD) des nombres indiqués. PGCD(valeur-num; valeur-nbre; …)  valeur-num : valeur numérique. valeur-num correspond à un nombre. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.  valeur-nbre; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Remarques d’usage  Parfois appelé le plus grand facteur commun, le plus grand commun dénominateur est le plus grand entier qui divise chacun des nombres sans reste. Exemples =PGCD(8; 10) renvoie 2. =PGCD(99; 102; 105) renvoie 3. =PGCD(34; 51) renvoie 17. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PPCM » à la page 203 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PI La fonction PI renvoie la valeur approximative de p (pi), le rapport entre la circonférence d’un cercle et son diamètre. PI() Remarques d’usage  La fonction PI n’a pas d’argument. Toutefois, vous devez inclure les parenthèses : =PI().  PI a une précision de l’ordre de 15 chiffres après la virgule. 200 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 201 Exemples =PI() renvoie 3,14159265358979. =SIN(PI()/2) renvoie 1, le sinus de p/2 radians ou 90 degrés. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COS » à la page 358 « SIN » à la page 361 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PLAFOND La fonction PLAFOND arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple supérieur du facteur donné. PLAFOND(nbre-à-arrondir; facteur-multiple)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  facteur-multiple : nombre servant à déterminer le multiple le plus proche. facteurmultiple correspond à un nombre de même signe que nbre-à-arrondir. Exemples =PLAFOND(0,25; 1) renvoie 1. =PLAFOND(1,25; 1) renvoie 2. =PLAFOND(–1,25; –1) renvoie « – 2 ». =PLAFOND(5; 2) renvoie 6. =PLAFOND(73; 10) renvoie 80. =PLAFOND(7; 2.5) renvoie 7,5. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PAIR » à la page 199« PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PLANCHER La fonction PLANCHER arrondit un nombre au plus petit multiple inférieur du facteur donné. PLANCHER(nbre-à-arrondir; facteur)  nbre-à-arrondir : nombre à arrondir. nbre-à-arrondir correspond à un nombre.  facteur : nombre à utiliser pour déterminer le multiple le plus proche. facteur correspond à un nombre. La valeur doit présenter le même signe que nbre-à- arrondir. Exemples =PLANCHER(0,25; 1) renvoie 0. =PLANCHER(1,25; 1) renvoie 1. =PLANCHER(5; 2) renvoie 4. =PLANCHER(73; 10) renvoie 70. =PLANCHER(–0,25; –1) renvoie 0. =PLANCHER(9; 2,5) renvoie 7.5. 202 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 203 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « TRONQUE » à la page 220 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PPCM La fonction PPCM renvoie le plus petit commun multiple (PPCM) des nombres indiqués. PPCM(valeur-num; valeur-nbre; …)  valeur-num : valeur numérique. valeur-num correspond à un nombre.  valeur-nbre; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Remarques d’usage  Le plus petit commun multiple est le plus petit entier qui est multiple des nombres indiqués.Exemples =LCM(2; 3) renvoie 6. =PPCM(34; 68) renvoie 68. =PPCM(30; 40; 60) renvoie 120. =PPCM(30,25; 40,333; 60,5) renvoie 120 (les parties fractionnelles sont ignorées). =PPCM(2; –3) affiche une erreur (les nombres négatifs ne sont pas autorisés). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PGCD » à la page 200 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PRODUIT La fonction PRODUIT renvoie le produit d’un ou de plusieurs nombres. PRODUIT(valeur-num; valeur-nbre; …)  valeur-num : valeur numérique. valeur-num correspond à un nombre.  valeur-nbre; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Remarques d’usage  Les cellules vides entre les valeurs sont ignorées et n’affectent pas le résultat. Exemples =PRODUIT(2; 4) renvoie 8. =PRODUIT(0,5; 5; 4; 5) renvoie 50. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SOMME » à la page 209 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 204 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 205 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PUISSANCE La fonction PUISSANCE renvoie un nombre élevé à une puissance. PUISSANCE(nombre; exposant)  nombre : valeur numérique. nombre correspond à un nombre.  exposant : puissance à laquelle vous souhaitez élever le nombre indiqué. exposant correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  La fonction PUISSANCE donne le même résultat que l’opérateur ^ : =PUISSANCE(x; y) renvoie le même résultat que =x^y. Exemples =PUISSANCE(2; 3) renvoie 8. =PUISSANCE(2; 10) renvoie 1024. =PUISSANCE(0,5; 3) renvoie 0,125. =PUISSANCE(100; 0,5) renvoie 10. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44QUOTIENT La fonction QUOTIENT renvoie le quotient entier de deux nombres. QUOTIENT(dividende; diviseur)  dividende : nombre à diviser par un autre nombre. dividende correspond à un nombre.  diviseur : nombre servant à diviser un autre nombre. diviseur correspond à un nombre. Si « diviseur » est égal à 0, cela revient à effectuer une division par zéro et la fonction génère une erreur. Remarques d’usage  Si le dividende ou le diviseur est négatif, mais pas les deux, le résultat est alors également négatif. Si le signe du dividende et du diviseur est identique pour les deux, le résultat est alors toujours positif.  Seule la partie entière du quotient est renvoyée. La partie fractionnelle (ou reste) est ignoré. Exemples =QUOTIENT(5; 2) renvoie 2. =QUOTIENT(5,99; 2) renvoie 2. =QUOTIENT(–5; 2) renvoie « –2 ». =QUOTIENT(6; 2) renvoie 3. =QUOTIENT(5; 6) renvoie 0. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOD » à la page 197 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 206 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 207 RACINE La fonction RACINE renvoie la racine carrée d’un nombre. RACINE(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nombre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =RACINE(16) renvoie 4. =RACINE(12,25) renvoie 3,5, la racine carrée de 12,25. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RACINE.PI La fonction RACINE.PI renvoie la racine carrée d’un nombre après l’avoir multiplié par p (pi). RACINE.PI(nombre-non-nég)  nombre-non-nég : nombre non négatif. nbre-non-nég correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Exemples =RACINE.PI(5) renvoie 3,96332729760601. =RACINE.PI(8) renvoie 5,013256549262. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28« Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ROMAIN La fonction ROMAIN convertit un nombre en chiffres romains. ROMAIN(nbre-arabe; style-romain)  nbre-arabe : nombre arabe à convertir. nbre-arabe correspond à un nombre compris entre 0 et 3999.  style-romain : valeur facultative qui détermine avec quelle rigueur les règles classiques de formation des chiffres romains doivent être appliquées. strict (0, VRAI ou omis): utiliser les règles classiques les plus strictes. Quand un chiffre précède un autre supérieur pour indiquer qu’il y a soustraction, le premier chiffre doit correspondre à une puissance de 10 et peut précéder un nombre qui n’excède pas 10 fois sa taille. Par exemple, 999 est représenté par CMXCIX, et non par LMVLIV. relâcher d’un degré (1): relâcher les règles classiques strictes d’un degré. Quand un nombre plus petit précède un nombre plus grand, il n’est pas nécessaire que le nombre plus petit soit une puissance de 10 et la règle de taille relative est étendue d’un chiffre. Par exemple, 999 peut être représenté par LMVLIV, et non par XMIX. relâcher de deux degrés (2): relâcher les règles classiques strictes de deux degrés. Quand un nombre plus petit précède un plus grand, la règle de taille relative est étendue de deux chiffres. Par exemple, 999 peut être représenté par XMIX, et non par VMIV. relâcher de trois degrés (3): relâcher les règles classiques strictes de trois degrés. Quand un nombre précède un autre, la règle de taille relative est étendue de trois chiffres. Par exemple, 999 peut être représenté par VMIV, et non par IM. relâcher de quatre degrés (4 ou FAUX): relâcher les règles classiques strictes de quatre degrés. Quand un nombre plus petit précède un plus grand, la règle de taille relative est étendue de quatre chiffres. Par exemple, 999 peut être représenté par IM. Exemples =ROMAIN(12) renvoie XII. =ROMAIN(999) renvoie CMXCIX. =ROMAIN(999; 1) renvoie LMVLIV. =ROMAIN(999; 2) renvoie XMIX. =ROMAIN(999; 3) renvoie VMIV. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 208 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 209 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SIGNE La fonction SIGNE renvoie 1 si le numéro d’argument est positif, – 1 s’il est négatif et 0 s’il est nul. SIGNE(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nombre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =SIGNE(2) renvoie 1. =SIGNE(0) renvoie 0. =SIGNE(–2) renvoie « – 1 ». =SIGNE(A4) renvoie – 1, si la cellule A4 contient – 2. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SOMME La fonction SOMME renvoie la somme d’une collection de nombres. SOMME(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée. nbre-date-dur…: vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  Il existe toutefois un cas selon lequel toutes les valeurs ne doivent pas nécessairement être du même type. Si une seule valeur de date/heure est indiquée, toutes les valeurs numériques sont considérées comme étant des nombres de jours et toutes les valeurs numériques et de durée sont ajoutées à la valeur de date/heure.  Les valeurs de date/heure ne pouvant pas être additionnées (comme expliqué ciavant), une seule valeur de date/heure est donc autorisée.  Les valeurs peuvent se trouver dans des cellules distinctes, dans des intervalles de cellules ou dans les arguments de la fonction. Exemples =SOMME(A1:A4) additionne les nombres de quatre cellules. =SOMME(A1:D4) additionne les nombres qui se trouvent dans un tableau carré de seize cellules. =SOMME(A1:A4; 100) additionne les nombres de quatre cellules plus 100. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PRODUIT » à la page 204 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 210 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 211 SOMME.CARRES La fonction SOMME.CARRES renvoie la somme des carrés d’une collection de nombres. SOMME.CARRES(valeur-num; valeur-nbre; …)  valeur-num : valeur numérique. valeur-num correspond à un nombre.  valeur-nbre; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Remarques d’usage  Les nombres peuvent se trouver dans des cellules distinctes, dans des intervalles de cellules ou dans les arguments de la fonction. Exemples =SOMME.CARRES(3; 4) renvoie 25. =SOMME.CARRES(A1:A4) additionne les carrés de la liste de quatre nombres. =SOMME.CARRES(A1:D4) additionne les carrés des 16 nombres qui figurent dans un tableau carré de cellules. =SOMME.CARRES(A1:A4; 100) additionne les carrés des nombres qui figurent dans quatre cellules plus 100. =RACINE(SOMME.CARRES(3; 4)) renvoie 5, en utilisant le théorème de Pythagore pour calculer la longueur de l’hypoténuse d’un triangle dont les côtés mesurent 3 et 4 unités. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44SOMMEPROD La fonction SOMMEPROD renvoie la somme des produits des nombres correspondants dans un intervalle ou plus. SOMMEPROD(intervalle; intervalle;…)  intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type. Si des valeurs de chaîne ou booléennes figurent dans intervalle, elles sont ignorées.  intervalle;… : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs intervalles de cellules. Les intervalles doivent tous avoir les mêmes dimensions. Remarques d’usage  La fonction SOMMEPROD multiplie les nombres correspondants dans chaque intervalle, puis additionne chacun des produits. Si un seul intervalle est indiqué, SOMMEPROD renvoie la somme de l’intervalle. Exemples =SOMMEPROD(3; 4) renvoie 12. =SOMMEPROD({1; 2}; {3; 4}) = 3 + 8 = 11. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 212 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 213 SOMME.SI La fonction SOMME.SI renvoie la somme d’une collection de nombres, en ne comptant que les nombres qui répondent à la condition indiquée. SOMME.SI(valeurs-test; condition; valeurs-somme)  valeurs-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. valeurs-test correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans valeurs-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX).  valeurs-somme : collection facultative contenant les nombres à additionner. valeurs-somme correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Elle doit avoir les mêmes dimensions que valeurs-test. Remarques d’usage  Si valeurs-somme est omis, la valeur par défaut valeurs-test est utilisée.  Bien que valeurs-test puisse contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type, toutes ces valeurs doivent généralement correspondre au même type.  Si valeurs-somme est omis, valeurs-test ne doit contenir que des nombres ou des durées. Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =SOMME.SI(A1:A8; "<5") renvoie 10. =SOMME.SI(A1:A8; "<5"; B1:B8) renvoie 100. =SOMME.SI(D1:F3; "=c"; D5:F7) renvoie 27. =SOMME.SI(B1:D1; 1) ou SOMME.SI(B1:D1; SOMME(1)) totalisent tous deux toutes les occurrences de 1 dans l’intervalle. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE.SI » à la page 292« MOYENNE.SIS » à la page 294 « NB.SI » à la page 297 « NB.SIS » à la page 299 « SOMME.SIS » à la page 215 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 214 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 215 SOMME.SIS La fonction SOMME.SIS renvoie la somme des cellules d’une collection dans laquelle les valeurs testées répondent aux conditions données. SOMME.SIS(valeurs-somme; valeurs-test; condition; valeurs-test;… ; condition;…)  valeurs-somme : collection comprenant les valeurs à additionner. valeurs-somme correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées.  valeurs-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. valeurs-test correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans valeurs-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX).  valeurs-test;… : vous pouvez également ajouter une ou plusieurs collections contenant des valeurs à évaluer. Chaque collection de valeurs-test doit être immédiatement suivie d’une expression de condition. Cette succession valeurs-test, condition peut être répétée autant de fois que nécessaire.  condition;… : expression logique VRAI ou FAUX, si la collection facultative de valeurs-test est précisée. une condition doit obligatoirement être placée après chaque argument valeurs-test ; par conséquent, cette fonction présente toujours un nombre impair d’arguments. Remarques d’usage  Pour chaque paire de valeurs de test et de condition, la cellule ou valeur correspondante (même position dans l’intervalle ou le tableau) est comparée à la condition. Si toutes les conditions sont remplies, la cellule ou sa valeur correspondante dans valeurs-somme est intégrée au calcul de la somme.  Tous les tableaux doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.Exemples Le tableau qui suit montre un extrait d’un journal des livraisons d’une certaine marchandise. Chaque chargement est pesé, noté 1 ou 2 et la date de la livraison est indiquée. =SOMME.SIS(A2:A13; B2:B13; "=1"; C2:C13; ">=13/12/2010"; C2:C13; "<=17/12/2010") renvoie 23, le nombre de tonnes de la marchandise livrées au cours de la semaine du 17 décembre et notées « 1 ». =SOMME.SIS(A2:A13; B2:B13; "=2"; C2:C13; ">=13/12/2010"; C2:C13; "<=17/12/2010") renvoie 34, le nombre de tonnes de la marchandise livrées au cours de la même semaine et notées « 2 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE.SI » à la page 292 « MOYENNE.SIS » à la page 294 « NB.SI » à la page 297 « NB.SIS » à la page 299 « SOMME.SI » à la page 213 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 216 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériquesChapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 217 SOMME.X2MY2 La fonction SOMME.X2MY2 renvoie la somme de la différence des carrés des valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections. SOMME.X2MY2(valeurs-collec-1; valeurs-collec-2)  valeurs-collec-1 : première collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-1 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  valeurs-collec-2 : seconde collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-2 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Exemple Prenons le tableau suivant : =SOMME.X2MY2(A1:A6;B1:B6) renvoie « – 158 », la somme des différences des carrés des valeurs de la colonne A et les carrés des valeurs de la colonne B. La formule pour la première de ces différences est A1 2 – B1 2 . Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44218 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériques SOMME.X2PY2 La fonction SOMME.X2PY2 renvoie la somme des carrés des valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections. SOMME.X2PY2(valeurs-collec-1; valeurs-collec-2)  valeurs-collec-1 : première collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-1 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  valeurs-collec-2 : seconde collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-2 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Exemple Prenons le tableau suivant : =SOMME.X2PY2(A1:A6;B1:B6) renvoie 640, la somme des carrés des valeurs de la colonne A et des carrés des valeurs de la colonne B. La formule pour la première de ces sommes est A1 2 + B1 2 . Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44SOMME.XMY2 La fonction SOMME.XMY2 renvoie la somme des carrés des différences entre les valeurs correspondantes dans deux collections. SOMME.XMY2(valeurs-collec-1; valeurs-collec-2)  valeurs-collec-1 : première collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-1 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  valeurs-collec-2 : seconde collection de valeurs. valeurs-collec-2 correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Exemple Prenons le tableau suivant : =SOMME.XMY2(A1:A6;B1:B6) renvoie 196, la somme des carrés des valeurs de la colonne A et des carrés des valeurs de la colonne B. La formule pour la première de ces sommes est (A1 – B1) 2 . Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 219220 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériques TRONQUE La fonction TRONQUE scinde un nombre au chiffre indiqué. TRONQUE(nombre; décimales)  nombre : valeur numérique. nombre correspond à un nombre.  décimales : valeur facultative indiquant le nombre de décimales à conserver par rapport à la virgule décimale. décimales correspond à un nombre. Un nombre positif représente le nombre de décimales (chiffres après la virgule) à droite. Un nombre négatif représente le nombre de chiffres à gauche de la virgule décimale à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Remarques d’usage  Si le paramètre décimales est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 0. Exemples =TRONQUE(1,49; 0) renvoie 1. =TRONQUE(1,50; 0) renvoie 1. =TRONQUE(1,23456; 3) renvoie 1,234. =TRONQUE(1111,222; –2) renvoie 1100. =TRONQUE(–2,2; 0) renvoie « – 2 ». =TRONQUE(–2,8; 0) renvoie « – 2 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PLAFOND » à la page 201 « PAIR » à la page 199 « PLANCHER » à la page 202 « ENT » à la page 190 « ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE » à la page 185 « IMPAIR » à la page 193 « ARRONDI » à la page 184 « ARRONDI.INF » à la page 186 « ARRONDI.SUP » à la page 187 « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 « Liste des fonctions numériques » à la page 179« Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Chapitre 8 Fonctions numériques 221222 Les fonctions de référencement vous aident à rechercher des données dans des tableaux et à extraire des données de cellules. Liste des fonctions de référencement Ces fonctions de référencement ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « ADRESSE » (page 224) La fonction ADRESSE élabore une chaîne d’adresse dans une cellule d’après les différents identifiants de rangs, de colonnes et de tableaux. « CHOISIR » (page 225) La fonction CHOISIR renvoie une valeur provenant d’une collection d’après la valeur d’index indiquée. « COLONNE » (page 226) La fonction COLONNE renvoie le numéro de la colonne contenant la cellule indiquée. « COLONNES » (page 226) La fonction COLONNES renvoie le nombre de colonnes qui se trouvent dans l’intervalle de cellules indiquée. « DECALER » (page 227) La fonction DECALER renvoie l’intervalle de cellules qui se trouve aux nombres de rangs et de colonnes spécifiés de la cellule de base indiquée. « EQUIV » (page 229) La fonction EQUIV renvoie la position d’une valeur dans un intervalle. 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 223 Fonction Description « INDEX » (page 231) La fonction INDEX renvoie la valeur de la cellule située à l’intersection du rang et de la colonne indiquées dans un intervalle de cellules. « INDIRECT » (page 233) La fonction INDIRECT renvoie le contenu d’une cellule ou d’un intervalle référencé par une adresse indiquée sous la forme d’une chaîne. « LIEN_HYPERTEXTE » (page 234) La fonction LIEN_HYPERTEXTE crée un lien cliquable qui ouvre une page web ou un nouveau message électronique. « LIGNE » (page 235) La fonction LIGNE renvoie le numéro du rang contenant la cellule indiquée. « LIGNES » (page 236) La fonction LIGNES renvoie le nombre de rangs qui se trouvent dans l’intervalle de cellules indiquée. « RECHERCHE » (page 236) La fonction RECHERCHE détermine une correspondance à une valeur donnée dans un intervalle, puis renvoie la valeur dans la cellule se trouvant à une position relative identique dans un second intervalle. « RECHERCHEH » (page 238) La fonction RECHERCHEH renvoie une valeur provenant d’un intervalle de rangs en s’appuyant sur la rangée supérieure de valeurs pour déterminer la colonne et sur le numéro de rang pour indiquer la ligne. « RECHERCHEV » (page 240) La fonction RECHERCHEV renvoie une valeur provenant d’un intervalle de colonnes en s’appuyant sur la colonne de valeurs le plus à gauche pour déterminer le rang et sur le numéro de colonne pour indiquer la colonne. « TRANSPOSE » (page 242) La fonction de transposition transforme un intervalle vertical de cellules sous forme d’intervalle horizontal de cellules et vice versa. « ZONES » (page 243) La fonction ZONES renvoie le nombre d’intervalles auxquels la fonction fait référence.ADRESSE La fonction ADRESSE élabore une chaîne d’adresse dans une cellule d’après les différents identifiants de rangs, de colonnes et de tableaux. ADRESSE(rang; colonne; type-adresse; style-adresse; tableau)  rangée : numéro de rangée de l’adresse. rang correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 65 535.  colonne : numéro de colonne de l’adresse. colonne correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et 256.  type-adresse : valeur facultative indiquant si les numéros de rang et de colonne sont relatifs ou absolus. toutes absolues (1 ou omis): références de rang et de colonne absolues. rang absolu, colonne relative (2): références de rang absolues et références de colonne relatives. rang relatif, colonne absolue (3): références de rang relatives et références de colonne absolues. toutes relatives (4): références de rang et de colonne relatives.  style-adresse : valeur facultative représentant le nom de l’adresse. A1 (VRAI, 1 ou omis): le format de l’adresse doit utiliser des lettres pour les colonnes et des nombres pour les rangs. R1C1 (FAUX): le format de l’adresse n’est pas pris en charge, ce qui génère une erreur.  table: valeur facultative représentant le nom du tableau. table est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Si le tableau se trouve sur une autre feuille, vous devez également inclure le nom de cette dernière. En cas d’omission, tableau est considéré comme étant le tableau actif sur la feuille en cours (c’est-à-dire le tableau dans lequel la fonction d’adresse se trouve). Remarques d’usage  Le style d’adresse R1C1 n’est pas pris en charge et cet argument modal n’est fourni qu’à des fins de compatibilité avec d’autres tableurs. Exemples =ADRESSE(3; 5) crée l’adresse $E$3. =ADRESSE(3; 5; 2) crée l’adresse E$3. =ADRESSE(3; 5; 3) crée l’adresse $E3. =ADRESSE(3; 5; 4) crée l’adresse E3. =ADRESSE(3; 3; ;; "Feuille 2 :: Tableau 1") crée l’adresse « Feuille 2 :: Tableau 1 :: $C$3 ». 224 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 225 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CHOISIR La fonction CHOISIR renvoie une valeur provenant d’une collection d’après la valeur d’index indiquée. CHOISIR(index; valeur; valeur;…)  index : index de la valeur à renvoyer. index correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Exemples =CHOISIR(4; "lundi"; "mardi"; "mercredi"; "jeudi"; "vendredi"; "samedi"; "dimanche") renvoie « jeudi », la quatrième valeur de la liste. =CHOISIR(3; "1er"; "second"; 7; "dernier") renvoie 7, la troisième valeur de la liste. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44COLONNE La fonction COLONNE renvoie le numéro de la colonne contenant la cellule indiquée. COLONNE(cellule)  cellule : référence facultative à une cellule donnée dans un tableau. cellule est une valeur de référence à une seule cellule pouvant contenir n’importe quelle valeur ou être vide. Si cellule est omis, comme dans =COLONNE(), la fonction renvoie le numéro de colonne de la cellule qui contient la formule. Exemples =COLONNE(B7) renvoie 2, le numéro de colonne absolu de la colonne B. =COLONNE() renvoie le numéro de colonne de la cellule qui contient la fonction. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INDEX » à la page 231 « LIGNE » à la page 235 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 COLONNES La fonction COLONNES renvoie le nombre de colonnes qui se trouvent dans l’intervalle de cellules indiquée. COLONNES(intervalle)  intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Si vous sélectionnez un rang de tableau entier pour l’argument intervalle, COLONNES renvoie le nombre total de colonnes du rang et ce nombre est mis à jour si vous redimensionnez le tableau. 226 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 227 Exemples =COLONNES(B3:D10) renvoie 3, le nombre de colonnes de l’intervalle (colonnes B, C et D). =COLONNES(5:5) renvoie le nombre total de colonnes dans le rang 5. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LIGNES » à la page 236 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DECALER La fonction DECALER renvoie l’intervalle de cellules qui se trouve aux nombres de rangs et de colonnes indiqués de la cellule de base spécifiée. DECALER(base; décalage-rang; décalage-colonne; rangs; colonnes)  base : adresse de la cellule à partir de laquelle les décalages sont mesurés. base correspond à une référence.  décalage-rangée : nombre de rangées à partir de la cellule de base jusqu’à la cellule cible. décalage-rang correspond à un nombre. 0 signifie que la cellule cible se trouve sur le même rang que la cellule de base. Un nombre négatif signifie que la cible se trouve dans un rang situé au-dessus de la base.  décalage-colonne : nombre de colonnes à partir de la cellule de base jusqu’à la cellule cible. décalage-colonne correspond à un nombre. 0 signifie que la cellule cible se trouve sur la même colonne que la cellule de base. Un nombre négatif signifie que la cible se trouve dans une colonne située à gauche de la base.  rangées : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de rangs à renvoyer en partant de l’origine décalée.rangs correspond à un nombre.  colonnes : valeur facultative représentant le nombre de colonnes à renvoyer en partant de l’origine décalée.colonnes correspond à un nombre.Remarques d’usage  DECALER peut renvoyer un tableau pouvant être utilisé par une autre fonction. Par exemple, imaginons que vous avez saisi dans A1, A2 et A3, la cellule de base, le nombre de rangs et le nombre de colonnes, respectivement, que vous voulez additionner. La somme peut se calculer par =SOMME(DECALER(INDIRECT(A1); 0; 0; A2; A3)). Exemples =DECALER(A1; 5; 5) renvoie la valeur de la cellule F6, la cellule située cinq colonnes à droite et cinq rangs au-dessous de la cellule A1. =DECALER(G33; 0; –1) renvoie la valeur de la cellule à gauche de G33, la valeur dans F33. =SOMME(DECALER(A7; 2; 3; 5; 5)) renvoie la somme des valeurs des cellules D9 à H13, les cinq rangs et cinq colonnes situés en commençant deux rangs à droite et trois colonnes au-dessous de la cellule A7. Supposons que vous ayez saisi 1 dans la cellule D7, 2 dans la cellule D8, 3 dans la cellule D9, 4 dans la cellule E7, 5 dans la cellule E8 et 6 dans la cellule E9. =DECALER(D7; 0; 0; 3; 1) dans la cellule B6 génère une erreur car 3 rangs et 1 colonne renvoyés (soit l’intervalle D7:D9) ne présente aucune intersection avec B6 (en d’autres termes, ils ne présentent pas une seule intersection). =DECALER(D7; 0; 0; 3; 1) dans la cellule D4 génère une erreur car 3 rangs et 1 colonne renvoyés (soit l’intervalle D7:D9) ne présente pas une seule intersection avec B6 (plus précisément, ils en présentent trois). =DECALER(D7; 0; 0; 3; 1) dans la cellule B8 renvoie 2 car 3 rangs et 1 colonne renvoyés (soit l’intervalle D7:D9) présente une seule intersection avec B8 (la cellule D8 contient en effet la valeur 2). =DECALER(D7:D9; 0; 1; 3; 1) dans la cellule B7 renvoie 4 car 3 rangs et 1 colonne renvoyés (soit l’intervalle E7:E9) présente une seule intersection avec B7 (la cellule E7 contient en effet la valeur 4). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COLONNE » à la page 226 « LIGNE » à la page 235 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 228 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 229 EQUIV La fonction EQUIV renvoie la position d’une valeur dans un intervalle. EQUIV(rechercher; rechercher-où; méthode-correspondance)  rechercher : valeur à retrouver. rechercher peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  rechercher-où : collection comprenant les valeurs à rechercher. rechercher-où correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  méthode-correspondance : valeur facultative représentant le mode de mise en correspondance des valeurs. rechercher la valeur la plus élevée (1 ou omis): recherche la cellule contenant la plus grande valeur inférieure ou égale à rechercher. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. rechercher la valeur (0): recherche la première cellule contenant une valeur satifaisant le critère rechercher. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. rechercher la valeur la plus basse (–1): recherche la cellule contenant la plus petite valeur supérieure ou égale à rechercher. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. Remarques d’usage  EQUIV ne fonctionne que sur un intervalle faisant partie d’un seul rang ou colonne. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser cette fonction pour effectuer une recherche dans un ensemble à deux dimensions.  La numérotation des cellules commence à 1 pour la cellule supérieure ou la cellule gauche dans l’intervalle vertical et l’intervalle horizontal, respectivement. Les recherches sont toujours effectuées du haut vers le bas et de gauche à droite.  Lors de la recherche de texte, la casse n’est pas différenciée.Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =EQUIV(40; A1:A5) renvoie 4. =EQUIV(40; E1:E5) renvoie 1. =EQUIV(35; E1:E5; 1) renvoie 3 (30 est la plus grande valeur plus petite ou égale à 35). =EQUIV(35; E1:E5; –1) renvoie 1 (40 est la plus petite valeur plus grande ou égale à 35). =EQUIV(35; E1:E5; 0) affiche une erreur (il n’y a pas de correspondance exacte). =EQUIV("lorem"; C1:C5) renvoie 1 (« lorem » apparaît dans la première cellule de l’intervalle). =EQUIV("*x"; C1:C5; 0) renvoie 3 (« lorex », se terminant par un x, apparaît dans la troisième cellule de l’intervalle). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « RECHERCHE » à la page 236 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 230 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 231 INDEX La fonction INDEX renvoie la valeur de la cellule située à l’intersection du rang et de la colonne indiqués dans un intervalle de cellules ou un tableau. INDEX(intervalle; index-rang; index-colonne; index-zone)  intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle peut contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type. intervalle est soit un seul intervalle soit plusieurs intervalles séparées par des points-virgules et entourés d’un jeu de parenthèses supplémentaire. Par exemple, INDEX((B1:B5; C10:C12)).  index-rang : numéro de rang de la valeur à renvoyer. index-rang correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de rangs dans intervalle.  index-colonne : valeur facultative représentant le numéro de colonne de la valeur à renvoyer. index-colonne correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de colonnes dans intervalle.  index-zone : valeur facultative représentant le numéro de zone de la valeur à renvoyer. index-zone correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de zones dans intervalle. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est 1. Remarques d’usage  INDEX peut renvoyer la valeur à l’intersection indiquée d’un intervalle de valeurs à deux dimensions. Par exemple, imaginons que les cellules B2:E7 contiennent les valeurs. =INDEX(B2:D7; 2, 3) renvoie la valeur qui se trouve à l’intersection du second rang et de la troisième colonne (la valeur de la cellule D3).  Il est possible de préciser plus d’un intervalle en entourant les intervalles de parenthèses supplémentaires. Par exemple, =INDEX((B2:D5;B7:D10); 2; 3; 2) renvoie la valeur qui se trouve à l’intersection de la seconde colonne et du troisième rang de la seconde zone (la valeur de la cellule D8).  INDEX peut renvoyer un tableau à un rang ou à une colonne pour une autre fonction. Dans cette forme, soit index-rang soit index-colonne est obligatoire, mais l’autre argument peut être omis. Par exemple =SOMME(INDEX(B2:D5; ; 3)) renvoie la somme des valeurs de la troisième colonne (cellules D2 à D5). De même, =MOYENNE(INDEX(B2:D5; 2)) renvoie la moyenne des valeurs du second rang (cellules B3 à D3).  INDEX peut renvoyer (ou « lire ») la valeur d’un tableau renvoyé par une fonction de tableau (une fonction qui renvoie un tableau de valeurs plutôt qu’une seule valeur). La fonction FRÉQUENCE renvoie un tableau de valeurs s’appuyant sur des intervalles précisés. =INDEX(FRÉQUENCE($A$1:$F$5; $B$8:$E$8);, 1) renvoie la première valeur du tableau indiquée par la fonction FRÉQUENCE. De même =INDEX(FRÉQUENCE($A$1:$F$5; $B$8:$E$8); 5) renvoie la cinquième valeur du tableau. L’emplacement dans l’intervalle ou le tableau est spécifié en indiquant le nombre de rangs vers le bas et le nombre de colonnes vers la droite par rapport à la cellule située dans le coin supérieur gauche de l’intervalle ou du tableau.  Sauf quand INDEX est spécifié comme illustré dans la troisième case ci-dessus, indexrang ne peut pas être omis. Si index-colonne est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 1. Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =INDEX(B2:D5;2;3) renvoie 22, la valeur du second rang et de la troisième colonne (cellule D3). =INDEX((B2:D5;B7:D10); 2; 3; 2) renvoie « f », la valeur du second rang et de la troisième colonne de la seconde zone (cellule D8). =SOMME(INDEX(B2:D5; ; 3)) renvoie 90, la somme des valeurs de la troisième colonne (cellules D2 à D5). =MOYENNE(INDEX(B2:D5;2)) renvoie 12, la moyenne des valeurs du second rang (cellules B3 à D3). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COLONNE » à la page 226 « INDIRECT » à la page 233 « DECALER » à la page 227 « LIGNE » à la page 235 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 232 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 233 INDIRECT La fonction INDIRECT renvoie le contenu d’une cellule ou d’un intervalle référencé par une adresse indiquée sous la forme d’une chaîne. INDIRECT(chaîne-adresse; style-adresse)  chaîne-adresse : chaîne représentant une adresse de cellule. nouvelle-adresse est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  style-adresse : valeur facultative représentant le nom de l’adresse. A1 (VRAI, 1 ou omis): le format de l’adresse doit utiliser des lettres pour les colonnes et des nombres pour les rangs. R1C1 (FAUX): le format de l’adresse n’est pas pris en charge, ce qui génère une erreur. Remarques d’usage  L’adresse en question peut être une référence d’intervalle, comme « A1:C5 », plutôt que la référence à une seule cellule. Si la fonction INDIRECT est utilisée de cette manière, elle renvoie un tableau pouvant être utilisé comme argument d’une autre fonction ou directement lu à l’aide de la fonction INDEX. Par exemple, =SOMME(INDIRECT(A1:C5; 1)) renvoie la somme des valeurs des cellules référencées par l’adresse des cellules A1 à C5.  Le style d’adresse R1C1 n’est pas pris en charge et cet argument modal n’est fourni qu’à des fins de compatibilité avec d’autres tableurs. Exemple Si la cellule A1 contient 99 et la cellule A20 contient A1 : =INDIRECT(A20) renvoie 99, le contenu de la cellule A1. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INDEX » à la page 231 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44LIEN_HYPERTEXTE La fonction LIEN_HYPERTEXTE crée un lien cliquable qui ouvre une page web ou un nouveau message électronique. LIEN_HYPERTEXTE(url; texte-lien)  url : adresse URL standard. url est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne qui doit contenir une chaîne d’adresse de site web dont le format est valide.  texte-lien : valeur facultative qui indique le texte qui apparaît comme lien cliquable dans la cellule. texte-lien est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. En cas d’omission, url est repris pour texte-lien. Exemples =LIEN_HYPERTEXTE("http://www.apple.com/fr/"; "Apple") crée un lien avec le texte Apple qui ouvre le navigateur web par défaut et accède au site web d’Apple. =LIEN_HYPERTEXTE("mailto:jdupont@exemple.com?subject=Demande de devis"; "Demander un devis") crée un lien avec le texte Demander un devis qui ouvre l’application de courrier électronique par défaut et adresse un nouveau message à jdupont@exemple.com avec comme sujet Demande de devis. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 234 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 235 LIGNE La fonction LIGNE renvoie le numéro du rang contenant la cellule indiquée. LIGNE(cellule)  cellule : référence facultative à une cellule donnée dans un tableau. cellule est une valeur de référence à une seule cellule pouvant contenir n’importe quelle valeur ou être vide. Si cellule est omis, comme dans =LIGNE(), la fonction renvoie le numéro de rang de la cellule qui contient la formule. Exemples =LIGNE(B7) renvoie 7, le numéro de rang 7. =LIGNE() renvoie le numéro de rang absolu de la cellule qui contient la fonction. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COLONNE » à la page 226 « INDEX » à la page 231 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44LIGNES La fonction LIGNES renvoie le nombre de rangs qui se trouvent dans l’intervalle de cellules indiquée. LIGNES(intervalle)  intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Si vous sélectionnez une colonne de tableau entière pour l’argument intervalle, LIGNES renvoie le nombre total de rangs de la colonne et ce nombre est mis à jour si vous redimensionnez le tableau. Exemples =LIGNES(A11:D20) renvoie 10, le nombre de rangs de 11 à 20. =LIGNES(D:D) renvoie le nombre total de rangs dans la colonne D. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COLONNES » à la page 226 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RECHERCHE La fonction RECHERCHE recherche une occurrence d’une valeur donnée dans un intervalle, puis renvoie la valeur dans la cellule se trouvant à une position relative identique dans un second intervalle. RECHERCHE(rechercher; rechercher-où; valeurs-résultats)  rechercher : valeur à retrouver. rechercher peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  rechercher-où : collection comprenant les valeurs à rechercher. rechercher-où correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur. 236 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 237  valeurs-résultats : collection facultative comprenant la valeur à renvoyer au terme de la recherche. valeurs-résultats correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur. Remarques d’usage  rechercher-où et valeurs-résultats sont généralement indiqués sous la forme de colonnes ou de rangs multiples, mais pas les deux (une seule dimension). Toutefois, à des fins de compatibilité avec d’autres tableurs, rechercher-où peut se référer à des colonnes et de rangs multiples (deux dimensions) et le paramètre valeurs-résultats peut être omis.  Si rechercher-où s’étend sur deux dimensions et valeurs-résultats est indiqué, c’est celui du rang supérieur ou de la colonne la plus à gauche qui contient le plus de cellules qui fait l’objet de la recherche et la valeur correspondante de valeursrésultats est celle renvoyée.  Si rechercher-où s’étend sur deux dimensions et valeurs-résultats est omis, c’est la valeur correspondante du dernier rang (si le nombre de colonnes de l’intervalle est plus grand) ou de la dernière colonne (si le nombre de rangs de l’intervalle est plus grand) qui est renvoyée. Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =RECHERCHE("C"; A1:F1; A2:F2) renvoie 30. =RECHERCHE(40; A2:F2; A1:F1) renvoie D. =RECHERCHE("B"; A1:C1; D2:F2) renvoie 50. =RECHERCHE("D"; A1:F2) renvoie 40, c’est-à-dire la valeur du dernier rang correspondant à « D ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « RECHERCHEH » à la page 238 « EQUIV » à la page 229 « RECHERCHEV » à la page 240 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15« Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RECHERCHEH La fonction RECHERCHEH renvoie une valeur provenant d’un intervalle de rangs en s’appuyant sur la rangée supérieure de valeurs pour déterminer la colonne et sur le numéro de rang pour indiquer la ligne. RECHERCHEH(rechercher; rangs-intervalle; rang-à-renvoyer; correspondance-proche)  rechercher : valeur à retrouver. rechercher peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  rangs-intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type.  rang-à-renvoyer : numéro du rang dont il faut renvoyer la valeur. rang-à-renvoyer correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de rangs constituant l’intervalle indiqué.  correspondance-proche : valeur facultative qui indique si une correspondance exacte est exigée. correspondance-proche : (VRAI, 1 ou omis): s’il n’y a pas de correspondance exacte, sélectionne la colonne incluant la plus grande valeur présente sur le rang supérieur, mais laquelle valeur restant inférieure à la valeur recherchée. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. correspondance exacte (FAUX ou 0): s’il n’y a pas de correspondance exacte, génère une erreur. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. Remarques d’usage  RECHERCHEH compare une valeur recherchée aux valeurs du rang supérieur d’un intervalle indiqué. À moins qu’une correspondance exacte ne soit exigée, la colonne incluant la plus grande valeur présente sur le rang supérieur, mais laquelle valeur restant inférieure à la valeur recherchée, est sélectionnée. Ensuite, la valeur du rang indiqué dans cette colonne est renvoyée par la fonction. Si une correspondance exacte est exigée et si aucune des valeurs du rang supérieur ne correspond à la valeur recherchée, la fonction génère une erreur. 238 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 239 Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =RECHERCHEH(20; A1:E4; 2) renvoie « E ». =RECHERCHEH(39; A1:E4; 2) renvoie « E ». =RECHERCHEH("M"; A2:E4; 2) renvoie « dolor ». =RECHERCHEH("C"; A2:E3; 2) renvoie « lorem ». =RECHERCHEH("blandit"; A3:E4; 2) renvoie « 5 ». =RECHERCHEH("C"; A2:E4; 3; VRAI) renvoie « 1 ». =RECHERCHEH("C"; A2:E4; 3; FAUX) génère une erreur car la valeur n’a pas été trouvée (il n’y a en effet pas de correspondance exacte). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « RECHERCHE » à la page 236 « EQUIV » à la page 229 « RECHERCHEV » à la page 240 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44RECHERCHEV La fonction RECHERCHEV renvoie une valeur provenant d’un intervalle de colonnes en s’appuyant sur la colonne de valeurs le plus à gauche pour déterminer le rang et sur le numéro de colonne pour indiquer la colonne. RECHERCHEV(rechercher; intervalle-colonnes; rechercher; correspondance-proche)  rechercher : valeur à retrouver. rechercher peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  intervalle-colonnes : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type.  renvoyer-colonne : nombre représentant le numéro de colonne relatif de la cellule dont la valeur doit être renvoyée. renvoyer-colonne correspond à un nombre. La colonne le plus à gauche dans l’intervalle est la colonne 1.  correspondance-proche : valeur facultative qui indique si une correspondance exacte est exigée. correspondance-proche : (VRAI, 1 ou omis): s’il n’y a pas de correspondance exacte, sélectionne la colonne incluant la plus grande valeur présente sur le rang supérieur, mais laquelle valeur restant inférieure à la valeur recherchée. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. correspondance exacte (FAUX ou 0): s’il n’y a pas de correspondance exacte, génère une erreur. Les jokers ne sont pas utilisés dans rechercher. Remarques d’usage  RECHERCHEV compare une valeur recherchée aux valeurs de la colonne le plus à gauche d’un intervalle indiqué. À moins qu’une correspondance exacte ne soit exigée, le rang contenant la plus grande valeur de colonne le plus à gauche qui est plus petite que la valeur recherchée est sélectionné. Ensuite, la valeur de la colonne indiquée dans ce rang est renvoyée par la fonction. Si une correspondance exacte est exigée et si aucune des valeurs de la colonne le plus à gauche ne correspond à la valeur recherchée, la fonction génère une erreur. 240 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencementChapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 241 Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =RECHERCHEV(20; B2:E6; 2) renvoie E. =RECHERCHEV(21; B2:E6; 2) renvoie E. =RECHERCHEV("M"; C2:E6; 2) renvoie dolor. =RECHERCHEV("blandit"; D2:E6; 2) renvoie 5. =RECHERCHEV(21; B2:E6; 2; FAUX) génère une erreur car aucune valeur, dans la colonne de gauche, ne correspond exactement à 21. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « RECHERCHEH » à la page 238 « RECHERCHE » à la page 236 « EQUIV » à la page 229 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44242 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement TRANSPOSE La fonction de transposition transforme un intervalle vertical de cellules sous forme d’intervalle horizontal de cellules et vice versa. TRANSPOSE(intervalle-tableau)  intervalle-tableau : collection comprenant les valeurs à transposer. intervalletableau correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur. Remarques d’usage  TRANSPOSE renvoie un tableau contenant les valeurs transposées. Ce tableau contient un nombre de rangs égal au nombre de colonnes de l’intervalle original et un nombre de colonnes égal au nombre de rangs de l’intervalle original. Les valeurs de ce tableau peuvent être déterminées (« lues ») à l’aide de la fonction INDEX. Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : Rang/Colonne A B C D E 1 5 15 10 9 7 2 11 96 29 11 23 3 37 56 23 1 12 =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 1; 1) renvoie 5, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 1 et de la colonne 1 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 1 et la colonne A du tableau d’origine). =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 1; 2) renvoie 11, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 1 et de la colonne 2 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 2 et la colonne A de l’intervalle d’origine). =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 1; 3) renvoie 37, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 1 et de la colonne 3 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 3 et la colonne A de l’intervalle d’origine). =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 2; 1) renvoie 15, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 2 et de la colonne 1 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 1 et la colonne 2 de l’intervalle d’origine). =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 3; 2) renvoie 29, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 3 et de la colonne 2 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 2 et la colonne C de l’intervalle d’origine). =INDEX(TRANSPOSE($A$1:$E$3); 4; 3) renvoie 1, à savoir la valeur à l’intersection du rang 4 et de la colonne 3 de l’intervalle transposé (auparavant, le rang 3 et la colonne D de l’intervalle d’origine).Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ZONES La fonction ZONES renvoie le nombre d’intervalles auxquels la fonction fait référence. ZONES(zones)  zones : zones à compter. zones est une valeur exprimée sous forme de liste. Il s’agit soit d’un seul intervalle soit de plusieurs intervalles séparés par des points-virgules et entourés par un jeu de parenthèses supplémentaire. Par exemple, ZONES((B1:B5; C10:C12)). Exemples =ZONES(A1:F8) renvoie 1. =ZONES(C2:C8; B6:E6) renvoie 1. =ZONES((A1:F8; A10:F18)) renvoie 2. =ZONES((A1:C1; A3:C3; A5:C5)) renvoie 3. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de référencement » à la page 222 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Chapitre 9 Fonctions de référencement 243244 Les fonctions statistiques vous aident à manipuler et à analyser des collections de données à l’aide de diverses mesures et techniques statistiques. Liste des fonctions statistiques Ces fonctions statistiques ont été intégrées à iWork que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « AVERAGEA » (page 250) La fonction AVERAGEA renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. « BETA.INVERSE » (page 251) La fonction BETA.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la probabilité donnée de la fonction de répartition de la distribution bêta. « CENTILE » (page 252) La fonction CENTILE renvoie la valeur d’une collection, qui correspond à un centile en particulier. « CENTREE.REDUITE » (page 253) La fonction CENTREE.REDUITE renvoie une valeur normalisée à partir d’une distribution caractérisée par une moyenne donnée et un écart-type. « COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION » (page 254) La fonction COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION renvoie le coefficient de corrélation entre deux collections à l’aide de l’analyse de régression linéaire. « COVARIANCE » (page 255) La fonction COVARIANCE renvoie la covariance de deux collections. 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 245 Fonction Description « CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE » (page 256) La fonction CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE renvoie la plus petite valeur pour laquelle la distribution binomiale cumulée est supérieure ou égale à une valeur donnée. « DROITEREG » (page 257) La fonction DROITEREG renvoie un tableau des statistiques pour la droite de régression des données indiquées en faisant appel à la méthode des moindres carrés. « ECART.MOYEN » (page 260) La fonction ECART.MOYEN renvoie la moyenne des écarts d’une collection de nombres par rapport à leur moyenne (arithmétique). « ECARTYPE » (page 261) La fonction ECARTYPE renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en fonction de leur variance empirique (non biaisée). « ECARTYPEP » (page 263) La fonction ECARTYPEP renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en fonction de la variance théorique (vraie). « FRÉQUENCE » (page 264) La fonction FRÉQUENCE renvoie un tableau indiquant la fréquence d’apparition de valeurs de données dans une plage de valeurs d’intervalle. « GRANDE.VALEUR » (page 266) La fonction GRANDE.VALEUR renvoie la énième plus grande valeur de la collection. La plus grande valeur est classée en numéro 1. « INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE » (page 267) La fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE renvoie une valeur permettant de créer un intervalle de confiance statistique pour un échantillon de population dont l’écart-type est connu. « INVERSE.LOI.F » (page 268) La fonction INVERSE.LOI.F renvoie l’inverse de la distribution de probabilité F. « KHIDEUX.INVERSE » (page 269) La fonction KHIDEUX.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la probabilité unilatérale de la distribution khi-deux. « LNGAMMA » (page 270) La fonction LNGAMMA renvoie le logarithme népérien de la fonction gamma, G(x). « LOI.BETA » (page 270) La fonction LOI.BETA renvoie la probabilité de la fonction de répartition de la distribution bêta.Fonction Description « LOI.BINOMIALE » (page 271) La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE renvoie la probabilité de la distribution binomiale de chaque terme sous la forme indiquée. « LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG » (page 272) La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG renvoie la distribution binomiale négative. « LOI.EXPONENTIELLE » (page 273) La fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE renvoie la distribution exponentielle sous la forme indiquée. « LOI.F » (page 274) La fonction LOI.F renvoie la distribution de probabilité F. « LOI.GAMMA » (page 275) La fonction LOI.GAMMA renvoie la distribution gamma sous la forme indiquée. « LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE » (page 276) La fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE renvoie la distribution gamma cumulée inverse. « LOI.KHIDEUX » (page 276) La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX renvoie la probabilité unilatérale de la distribution khi-deux. « LOI.LOGNORMALE » (page 277) La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE renvoie la distribution log-normale. « LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE » (page 278) La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la fonction de distribution lognormale cumulée de x. « LOI.NORMALE » (page 279) La fonction LOI.NORMALE renvoie la distribution normale sous la forme de fonction indiquée. « LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE » (page 280) La fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la distribution normale cumulée. « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD » (page 280) La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD renvoie la distribution normale standard. « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE » (page 281) La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la distribution normale standard cumulée. « LOI.POISSON » (page 282) La fonction LOI.POISSON renvoie la probabilité d’apparition d’un nombre particulier d’événements, en s’appuyant sur la loi de distribution de Poisson. « LOI.STUDENT » (page 283) La fonction LOI.STUDENT renvoie la probabilité à partir de la distribution T de Student. « LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE » (page 283) La fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE renvoie la valeur T (qui est une fonction de la probabilité et des degrés de liberté) à partir de la distribution T de Student. 246 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 247 Fonction Description « MAX » (page 284) La fonction MAX renvoie le plus grand nombre d’une collection. « MAXA » (page 285) La fonction MAXA renvoie le plus grand nombre d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes. « MEDIANE » (page 286) La fonction MEDIANE renvoie la valeur médiane d’une collection de nombres. La valeur médiane est la valeur à laquelle la moitié des nombres de la collection sont inférieurs et l’autre moitié, supérieurs. « MIN » (page 287) La fonction MIN renvoie le plus petit nombre d’une collection. « MINA » (page 287) La fonction MINA renvoie le plus petit nombre d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes. « MODE » (page 288) La fonction MODE renvoie la valeur qui apparaît le plus souvent dans une collection de nombres. « MOYENNE » (page 289) La fonction MOYENNE renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) d’une collection de nombres. « MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE » (page 290) La fonction MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE renvoie la moyenne géométrique. « MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE » (page 291) La fonction MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE renvoie la moyenne harmonique. « MOYENNE.SI » (page 292) La fonction MOYENNE.SI renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) des cellules d’un intervalle qui remplissent une condition donnée. « MOYENNE.SIS » (page 294) La fonction MOYENNE.SIS renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) des cellules d’une collection qui remplissent toutes les conditions données. « NB » (page 296) La fonction NB renvoie le nombre de ses arguments qui contiennent des nombres, des expressions numériques ou des dates. « NB.SI » (page 297) La fonction NB.SI renvoie le nombre de cellules d’un intervalle qui remplissent une condition donnée.Fonction Description « NB.SIS » (page 299) La fonction NB.SIS renvoie le nombre de cellules d’un ou plusieurs intervalles qui remplissent des conditions données (une condition par intervalle). « NBVAL » (page 301) La fonction NBVAL renvoie le nombre de ses arguments qui ne sont pas vides. « NB.VIDE » (page 302) La fonction NB.VIDE renvoie le nombre de cellules d’un intervalle qui ne sont pas vides. « ORDONNEE.ORIGINE » (page 303) La fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE renvoie l’ordonnée à l’origine de la droite de régression correspondant à la collection en faisant appel à l’analyse de régression linéaire. « PENTE » (page 304) La fonction PENTE renvoie la pente de la droite de régression correspondant à la collection en faisant appel à l’analyse de régression linéaire. « PERMUTATION » (page 306) La fonction PERMUTATION renvoie le nombre de permutations pour un nombre donné d’objets pouvant être sélectionnés parmi un nombre total d’objets. « PETITE.VALEUR » (page 307) La fonction PETITE.VALEUR renvoie la énième plus petite valeur d’un intervalle. La plus faible valeur est classée en numéro 1. « PREVISION » (page 308) La fonction PREVISION renvoie la valeur y prévisionnelle pour une valeur x donnée en s’appuyant sur des valeurs empiriques, par le biais de l’analyse de régression linéaire. « PROBABILITE » (page 309) La fonction PROBABILITE renvoie la probabilité d’un intervalle de valeurs si la probabilité de chaque valeur est connue. « QUARTILE » (page 311) La fonction QUARTILE renvoie la valeur correspondant au quartile indiqué d’une collection donnée. « RANG » (page 312) La fonction RANG renvoie le rang d’un nombre dans un intervalle de nombres. 248 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 249 Fonction Description « RANG.POURCENTAGE » (page 314) La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE renvoie le rang d’une valeur dans une collection sous la forme d’un pourcentage de la collection. « SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS » (page 315) La fonction SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS renvoie la somme des carrés des écarts d’une collection de nombres par rapport à leur moyenne (arithmétique). « STDEVA » (page 315) La fonction STDEVA renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à- dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes, en fonction de la variance empirique (non biaisée). « STDEVPA » (page 317) La fonction STDEVPA renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à- dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes, en fonction de la variance théorique (vraie). « TEST.KHIDEUX » (page 319) La fonction TEST.KHIDEUX renvoie la valeur à partir de la distribution khi-deux pour la valeur donnée. « TEST.STUDENT » (page 320) La fonction TEST.STUDENT renvoie la probabilité associée à un test T de Student selon la fonction de distribution T. « VAR » (page 321) La fonction VAR renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs. « VARA » (page 323) La fonction VARA renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. « VAR.P » (page 325) La fonction VAR.P renvoie la variance théorique (vraie), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs. « VARPA » (page 326) La fonction VARPA renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. « ZTEST » (page 328) La fonction ZTEST renvoie la probabilité unilatérale du test Z.AVERAGEA La fonction AVERAGEA renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. AVERAGEA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs de chaîne qui apparaissent dans les cellules référencées se voient attribuer la valeur 0. La valeur 0 est attribuée aux valeurs booléennes FAUX et la valeur 1 est attribuée aux valeurs booléennes VRAI.  Les références utilisées comme arguments pour cette fonction peuvent être des références à une seule cellule ou à un intervalle de cellules.  Dans le cas d’un ensemble qui ne comprend que des nombres, AVERAGEA renvoie le même résultat que la fonction MOYENNE qui, elle, ignore les cellules qui ne contiennent pas de nombres. Exemples =AVERAGEA(A1:A4) renvoie 2,5 si les cellules A1 à A4 contiennent 4, a, 6, b. Les valeurs texte sont comptées en tant que zéro dans la somme de 10 et incluses dans le compte de valeurs (4). Faites la comparaison avec =MOYENNE(A1:A4) qui ignore totalement les valeurs texte, auquel cas la somme est 10, le nombre d’arguments 2 et la moyenne 5. =AVERAGEA(A1:A4) renvoie 4 si les cellules A1 à A4 contiennent 5, a, VRAI, 10. La valeur texte compte zéro et VRAI compte 1 pour une somme de 16 et un compte de 4. =AVERAGEA(A1:A4) renvoie 0,25 si les cellules A1 à A4 contiennent FAUX, FAUX, FAUX, VRAI. Chaque FAUX compte zéro et VRAI compte 1 pour une somme de 1 et un compte de 4. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « MOYENNE.SI » à la page 292 « MOYENNE.SIS » à la page 294 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 250 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 251 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 BETA.INVERSE La fonction BETA.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la probabilité donnée de la fonction de répartition de la distribution bêta. BETA.INVERSE(probabilité; alpha; bêta; x-inf; x-sup)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1.  alpha : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. alpha correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  bêta : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. bêta correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  x-inf : limite inférieure facultative pour la probabilité ou la valeur x indiquée. x-inf correspond à un nombre inférieur ou égal à la probabilité ou à la valeur x même indiquée. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est 0.  x-sup : limite supérieure facultative pour la probabilité ou la valeur x indiquée. x-sup correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à la probabilité ou à la valeur x même indiquée. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est 1. Exemples =BETA.INVERSE(0,5; 1; 2; 0,3; 2) renvoie 0,797918471982869. =BETA.INVERSE(0,99; 1; 2; 0; 1) renvoie 0,9. =BETA.INVERSE(0,1; 2; 2; 0; 2) renvoie 0,391600211318183. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.BETA » à la page 270 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44CENTILE La fonction CENTILE renvoie la valeur d’une collection, qui correspond à un centile en particulier. CENTILE(nbre-date-dur-collec; valeur-centile)  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  valeur-centile : centile à rechercher, entre 0 et 1. valeur-centile correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,25), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 25 %). Le paramètre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0 et inférieur ou égal à 1. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs de même taille incluses dans le tableau sont classées au même rang, mais elles ont chacune une incidence sur le résultat. Exemples Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes cumulées aux examens du trimestre actuel de vos 20 élèves (sur un total de 100 points possibles). (Les données ont été organisées de cette manière pour les besoins de l’exemple, mais il y a tout lieu de penser qu’elles seraient, au départ, réparties entre 20 rangées distinctes.) =CENTILE(A1:E4; 0,90) renvoie 92, c’est-à-dire la note cumulée minimale nécessaire pour faire partie des meilleurs 10% de la classe (90 e centile). =CENTILE(A1:E4; 2/3) renvoie 85, c’est-à-dire la note cumulée minimale nécessaire pour faire partie du tiers de la classe qui a obtenu les meilleurs notes (2/3, soit environ le 67 e centile). =CENTILE(A1:E4; 0,50) renvoie 83, c’est-à-dire la note cumulée minimale nécessaire pour faire partie de la moitié de la classe qui a obtenu les meilleurs notes (50 e centile). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FRÉQUENCE » à la page 264 « RANG.POURCENTAGE » à la page 314 « QUARTILE » à la page 311 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 252 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 253 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CENTREE.REDUITE La fonction CENTREE.REDUITE renvoie une valeur normalisée à partir d’une distribution caractérisée par une moyenne donnée et un écart-type. CENTREE.REDUITE(nbre; moyenne; écart-type)  nbre : nombre à évaluer. nbre correspond à un nombre.  moyenne : moyenne de la distribution. moyenne correspond à un nombre qui représente la fréquence moyenne (moyenne arithmétique) connue à laquelle des événements se produisent.  écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Exemple =CENTREE.REDUITE(6; 15; 2,1) renvoie – 4,28571428571429. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.NORMALE » à la page 279 « LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE » à la page 280 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD » à la page 280 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE » à la page 281 « ZTEST » à la page 328 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION La fonction COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION renvoie le coefficient de corrélation entre deux collections à l’aide de l’analyse de régression linéaire. COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION(valeurs-y; valeurs-x)  valeurs y : collection comprenant les valeurs y (dépendantes). valeurs-y correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  valeurs x : collection comprenant les valeurs x (indépendantes). valeurs-x correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type. Remarques d’usage  valeurs-y et valeur-x doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.  Si ces collections comprennent du texte ou des valeurs booléennes, ceux-ci sont ignorés. Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION sert à déterminer l’étroitesse de la relation entre le prix du fioul (colonne A) et la température réglée sur le thermostat du logement d’un propriétaire. =COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION(A2:A11; B2:B11) renvoie environ - 0,9076, ce qui indique une corrélation étroite (à mesure que les prix montent, le thermostat est baissé). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COVARIANCE » à la page 255 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 254 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 255 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 COVARIANCE La fonction COVARIANCE renvoie la covariance de deux collections. COVARIANCE(valeurs-échantillon-1; valeurs-échantillon-2)  valeurs-échantillon-1 : collection comprenant la première collection de valeurs empiriques. valeurs-échantillon-1 correspond à une collection qui comprend des valeurs numériques.  valeurs-échantillon-2 : collection comprenant la seconde collection de valeurs empiriques. valeurs-échantillon-2 correspond à une collection qui comprend des valeurs numériques. Remarques d’usage  Les deux tableaux doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.  Si ces tableaux contiennent du texte ou des valeurs booléennes, ceux-ci sont ignorés.  Si les deux collections sont identiques, la covariance est égale à la variance théorique. Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction COVARIANCE sert à déterminer l’étroitesse de la relation entre le prix du fioul (colonne A) et la température réglée sur le thermostat du logement d’un propriétaire. =COVARIANCE(A2:A11; B2:B11) renvoie environ – 1,6202, ce qui indique une corrélation étroite (à mesure que les prix montent, le thermostat est baissé).Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION » à la page 254 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE La fonction CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE renvoie la plus petite valeur pour laquelle la distribution binomiale cumulée est supérieure ou égale à une valeur donnée. CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE(essais; prob-succès; alpha)  essais : nombre total d’essais ou tests. essais correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  prob-succès : probabilité de succès pour chaque essai ou test. prob-succès correspond à un nombre compris entre 0 et 1 inclus.  alpha : probabilité que la valeur réelle de la population se trouve en dehors de l’intervalle. alpha correspond à un nombre inférieur ou égal à 1. La valeur alpha est obtenue en soustrayant l’intervalle de confiance à 1. Exemple =CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE(97; 0,05; 0,05) renvoie 2 sur 97 essais, chaque essai ayant une probabilité de succès de 5 % et un intervalle de confiance de 95 % (valeur alpha de 5 %). =CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE(97; 0,25; 0,1) renvoie 19 sur 97 essais, chaque essai ayant une probabilité de succès de 25 % et un intervalle de confiance de 90 % (valeur alpha de 10 %). =CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE(97; 0,25; 0,05) renvoie 17 sur 97 essais, chaque essai ayant une probabilité de succès de 25 % et un intervalle de confiance de 95 % (valeur alpha de 5 %). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 271 « LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG » à la page 272 « PERMUTATION » à la page 306 256 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 257 « PROBABILITE » à la page 309 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DROITEREG La fonction DROITEREG renvoie un tableau des statistiques pour la droite de régression des données indiquées en faisant appel à la méthode des moindres carrés. DROITEREG(valeurs-y-connues; valeurs x connues; ordonnée-origine; statistiques-plus)  valeurs-y-connues : collection comprenant les valeurs y connues. valeurs-y-connues correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. S’il n’y a qu’une seule collection de valeurs x connues, valeurs-y-connues peut adopter n’importe quelle taille. Si plusieurs collections de valeurs x connues sont présentes, valeurs-y-connues peut correspondre soit à une colonne, soit à une rangée comprenant les valeurs, mais pas les deux à la fois.  valeurs-x-connues : collection facultative comportant les valeurs x connues. valeursx-connues correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. En cas d’omission, la fonction suppose que cette collection est l’ensemble {1; 2; 3…} de la même taille que valeurs-y-connues. Si une seule collection de valeurs x connues est présente et si la collection valeurs-x-connues est indiquée, cette dernière doit être de la même taille que valeurs-y-connues. Si plusieurs collections de valeurs x connues sont présentes, chaque rangée/colonne de valeurs-x-connues est considérée comme une collection et la taille de chaque rangée/colonne doit être identique à celle de valeurs-y-connues.  ordonnée-origine : valeur facultative déterminant le mode de calcul de l’ordonnée à l’origine (constante b). normalement (1, VRAI ou omis): valeur de l’ordonnée à l’origine (constante b) devant être calculée normalement. forcer la valeur à 0 (0 ou FAUX): valeur de l’ordonnée à l’origine (constante b) devant être forcée à zéro.  statistiques-plus : valeur facultative indiquant si des informations statistiques supplémentaires doivent être renvoyées. aucune statistique supplémentaire (0, FAUX ou omis): ne pas renvoyer de statistiques de régression supplémentaires dans le tableau renvoyé.statistiques supplémentaires (1 ou VRAI): renvoyer des statistiques de régression supplémentaires dans le tableau renvoyé. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs renvoyées par la fonction sont présentées dans un tableau. Pour lire les valeurs du tableau, on peut se servir de la fonction INDEX. Vous pouvez insérer la fonction DROITEREG dans la fonction INDEX : =INDEX(DROITEREG(valeurs-y-connues; valeurs x connues; ordonnée-origine; statistiques-plus); y; x) où y et x sont les index de colonne et de rangée de la valeur souhaitée. Si aucune statistique supplémentaire n’est renvoyée (autrement dit, si la valeur de statistiques-plus est FAUX), le tableau renvoyé ne contient qu’une seule rangée. Il contient un nombre de colonnes égal au nombre de collections valeurs x connues plus 1. Il indique aussi les pentes des droites (une valeur pour chaque rangée/ colonne de valeurs x), qui apparaissent en ordre inverse (la première valeur correspond à la dernière rangée/colonne de valeurs x), et la valeur de la constante b, c’est-à-dire l’ordonnée à l’origine. Si des statistiques supplémentaires sont retournées (autrement dit, si la valeur de statistiques-plus est VRAI), le tableau contient cinq rangées. Pour en savoir plus sur le contenu du tableau, consultez « Statistiques supplémentaires » à la page 259. Exemples Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes de 30 élèves qui ont récemment passé un examen à votre charge. Supposons par ailleurs que cet examen soit noté sur 100 points, qu’il en faille 65 pour le réussir, que suivant le nombre de points obtenus les élèves se voient attribuer une note sous la forme d’une lettre (allant de A à F, chaque lettre englobant une tranche de points obtenus) et que le nombre minimal de points pour obtenir chaque note soit indiqué dans le tableau. Pour simplifier l’élaboration des formules, la note « F » est représentée par un 1 et la note « A » correspond à 5. =INDEX(DROITEREG(A2:A6; C2:C6; 1; 0); 1) renvoie 0,752707581227437, qui est la pente de la droite de régression. =INDEX(DROITEREG(A2:A6; C2:C6; 1; 0); 2) renvoie 0,0342960288808646, soit b, l’ordonnée à l’origine. 258 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 259 Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Statistiques supplémentaires Cette section traite des statistiques supplémentaires qui peuvent être renvoyées par la fonction DROITEREG. La fonction DROITEREG peut inclure des informations statistiques supplémentaires dans le tableau retourné par la fonction. Pour les besoins de l’explication, prenons cinq ensembles (ou collections) de valeurs x connues, en plus des valeurs y connues. Supposons par ailleurs que les valeurs x connues soient réparties entre cinq rangées ou entre cinq colonnes de tableau. Le tableau renvoyé par la fonction DROITEREG suivant ces hypothèses doit alors avoir la forme suivante (le nombre qui apparaît immédiatement après un x indique l’ensemble de valeurs x auquel se rapporte l’élément) : Rang/Colonne 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 pente x5 pente x4 pente x3 pente x2 pente x1 b (ordonnée à l’origine) 2 err-std x1 err-std x2 err-std x3 err-std x4 err-std x5 err-std b 3 coef-dét err-std y 4 F-stat degrés-liberté 5 sc-rég sc-résiduel Définitions des arguments pente x : pente de la droite liée à cette collection de valeurs x connues. Les valeurs sont renvoyées en ordre inverse, c’est-à-dire que cinq ensembles de valeurs x connues sont présents, la valeur du cinquième ensemble apparaît en premier dans le tableau renvoyé. b : ordonnée à l’origine pour les valeurs x connues.err-std x : erreur standard pour le coefficient associé à cet ensemble de valeurs x connues. Les valeurs sont renvoyées dans l’ordre, c’est-à-dire que cinq ensembles de valeurs x connues sont présents, la valeur du premier ensemble est renvoyé en premier dans le tableau. Cette présentation est donc le contraire de celle qui s’applique lorsque les valeurs de pente sont renvoyées. err-std b : erreur standard associée à la valeur de l’ordonnée origine (b). coef-dét : coefficient de détermination. Cette statistique compare la valeur y estimée et la valeur y réelle. Si le coefficient de détermination correspond à 1, aucune différence entre ces deux valeurs n’est constatée. C’est ce que l’on appelle une corrélation parfaite. Si le coefficient de détermination est 0, cela signifie qu’il n’existe aucune corrélation et que l’équation de régression donnée ne permet pas de prédire la valeur y. err-std y : erreur standard associée à l’estimation de la valeur y. F-stat : valeur F observée. La valeur F observée peut contribuer à déterminer si la relation observée entre la variable dépendante et la variable indépendante est le fruit du hasard. degrés-liberté : degrés de liberté. Servez-vous de la statistique « degrés de liberté » pour déterminer le niveau de confiance. sc-rég : somme de régression des carrés. sc-résiduel : somme résiduelle des carrés. Remarques d’usage  Peu importe que les valeurs x connues et les valeurs y connues se trouvent dans des rangées ou dans des colonnes. Dans les deux cas, le tableau renvoyé est ordonné par rangées comme on peut le voir dans l’exemple.  Cet exemple repose sur l’hypothèse selon laquelle cinq ensembles de valeurs x connues sont présents. S’il en existe plus de cinq ou moins, le nombre de colonnes du tableau renvoyé s’en voit alors modifié (il est en effet toujours égal au nombre des ensembles de valeurs x connues plus 1), mais le nombre de colonnes reste le même.  Si les arguments de la fonction DROITEREG ne spécifient pas que des statistiques supplémentaires doivent être renvoyées, le tableau renvoyé ne contient que la première rangée. ECART.MOYEN La fonction MOYENNE renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) d’une collection de nombres. ECART.MOYEN(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée. 260 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 261  nbre-date-dur : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  ECART.MOYEN divise la somme des nombres par le nombre de nombres pour obtenir la moyenne. Les différences (valeurs absolues) entre la moyenne et chaque nombre sont ajoutées, puis la somme obtenue est divisée par le nombre des nombres.  Si nbre-date-dur comprend des valeurs de date/heure, la fonction renvoie une durée. Exemples =ECART.MOYEN(2; 2; 2; 4; 4; 4) renvoie 1. =ECART.MOYEN(2; 2; 2; 2; 3; 3; 3; 3; 4; 4; 4; 4) renvoie 0,6666667. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ECARTYPE La fonction ECARTYPE renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en fonction de leur variance empirique (non biaisée). ECARTYPE(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur : valeurs supplémentaires (au moins deux valeurs). Toutes les valeurs nbre-date-dur doivent être du même type. Remarques d’usage  L’utilisation de la fonction ECARTYPE est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante. Si les valeurs que vous analysez correspondent à l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population, servez-vous de la fonction ECARTYPEP. Si vous souhaitez inclure des valeurs texte ou des valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, utilisez la fonction STDEVA.  L’écart-type est la racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VAR. Exemple Supposons que vous ayez fait passer cinq examens à un groupe d’élèves. Vous avez choisi de façon arbitraire cinq élèves pour représenter l’ensemble de ce groupe (remarquez que ceci n’est qu’un exemple et que cette manière de procéder ne serait probablement pas valide sur le plan statistique). Vous pouvez vous servir de la fonction ECARTYPE avec les données de l’échantillon pour déterminer l’examen pour lequel la dispersion des notes a été la plus importante. Les résultats renvoyés par les fonctions ECARTYPE sont environ 22,8035, 24,5357, 9,5026, 8,0747 et 3,3466. Ainsi, la dispersion a été la plus importante pour l’examen numéro 2, qui est suivi de près par l’examen numéro 1. Pour les trois autres examens, la dispersion a été faible. Examen 1 Examen 2 Examen 3 Examen 4 Examen 5 Élève 1 75 82 90 78 84 Élève 2 100 90 95 88 90 Élève 3 40 80 78 90 85 Élève 4 80 35 95 98 92 Élève 5 90 98 75 97 88 =ECARTYPE(B2:B6) =ECARTYPE(C2:C6) =ECARTYPE(D2:D6) =ECARTYPE(E2:E6) =ECARTYPE(F2:F6) Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321 « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 262 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 263 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ECARTYPEP La fonction ECARTYPEP renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en fonction de la variance théorique (vraie). ECARTYPEP(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  L’utilisation de la fonction ECARTYPEP est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées représentent l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population. Si les valeurs que vous analysez ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante, servez-vous de la fonction ECARTYPE.  Si vous souhaitez inclure des valeurs texte ou des valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, utilisez la fonction STDEVPA.  L’écart-type est la racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VAR.P. Exemple Supposons que vous ayez fait passer cinq examens à un groupe d’élèves. Votre classe est très réduite et représente la population totale de vos élèves. Vous pouvez vous servir de la fonction ECARTYPEP avec les données de cette population pour déterminer l’examen pour lequel la dispersion des notes a été la plus importante. Les résultats renvoyés par les fonctions ECARTYPEP sont environ 20,3961, 21,9454, 8,49994, 7,2222 et 2,9933. Ainsi, la dispersion a été la plus importante pour l’examen numéro 2, qui est suivi de près par l’examen numéro 1. Pour les trois autres examens, la dispersion a été faible. Examen 1 Examen 2 Examen 3 Examen 4 Examen 5 Élève 1 75 82 90 78 84 Élève 2 100 90 95 88 90 Élève 3 40 80 78 90 85 Élève 4 80 35 95 98 92 Élève 5 75 82 90 78 84 =ECARTYPEP(B2:B6) =ECARTYPEP(C2:C6) =ECARTYPEP(D2:D6) =ECARTYPEP(E2:E6) =ECARTYPEP(F2:F6)Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321 « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 FRÉQUENCE La fonction FRÉQUENCE renvoie un tableau indiquant la fréquence d’apparition de valeurs de données dans une plage de valeurs d’intervalle. FRÉQUENCE(données-valeurs; intervalle-valeurs)  données-valeurs : collection comprenant les valeurs à évaluer. données-valeurs correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres ou des valeurs de date/ heure. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  intervalle-valeurs : collection comprenant les valeurs de l’intervalle. intervallevaleurs correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres ou des valeurs de date/heure. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type que celles qui se trouvent dans la collection données-valeurs. 264 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 265 Remarques d’usage  FRÉQUENCE détermine le nombre de valeurs de la collection données-valeurs qui tombent dans chaque intervalle. Le tableau d’intervalles est plus facile à comprendre s’il est organisé en ordre ascendant. La première fréquence est le nombre des valeurs qui sont inférieures ou égales à la plus petite valeur d’intervalle. Toutes les autres valeurs de fréquence, excepté la dernière, indiquent le nombre des valeurs qui sont supérieures à la valeur d’intervalle immédiatement inférieure et inférieures ou égales à la valeur d’intervalle actuelle. La valeur de fréquence finale correspond au nombre des valeurs de données qui sont supérieures à la valeur d’intervalle la plus grande.  Les valeurs renvoyées par la fonction sont présentées dans un tableau. Pour lire les valeurs du tableau, on peut se servir de la fonction INDEX. Vous pouvez insérer la fonction FRÉQUENCE dans la fonction INDEX : =INDEX(FRÉQUENCE(données-valeurs; intervalle-valeurs); x) où x est l’intervalle souhaité. N’oubliez pas que le résultat indique un intervalle de plus qu’il n’y a de collections intervalle-valeurs. Exemple Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes de 30 élèves qui ont récemment passé un examen à votre charge. Supposons par ailleurs que cet examen soit noté sur 100 points, qu’il en faille 65 pour le réussir, que suivant le nombre de points obtenus les élèves se voient attribuer une note sous la forme d’une lettre (allant de A à F, chaque lettre englobant une tranche de points obtenus), et que le nombre minimal de points pour obtenir chaque note soit indiqué dans le tableau. Pour simplifier l’élaboration des formules, la note « F » est représentée par un 1 et la note « A » correspond à 5. =INDEX(FRÉQUENCE($A$1:$F$5; $B$8:$E$8); B9) renvoie 5, c’est-à-dire le nombre d’élèves qui ont obtenu un « F » (65 points obtenus ou moins). Vous pouvez saisir cette formule dans la cellule B10, puis l’étendre aux cellules de la rangée jusqu’à la cellule F10. Les valeurs obtenues qui sont renvoyées par la fonction pour les notes allant de « D » à « A » sont respectivement 3, 8, 8 et 6. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « INDEX » à la page 231 « CENTILE » à la page 252 « RANG.POURCENTAGE » à la page 314 « QUARTILE » à la page 311 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 GRANDE.VALEUR La fonction GRANDE.VALEUR renvoie la énième plus grande valeur de la collection. La plus grande valeur est classée en numéro 1. GRANDE.VALEUR(nbre-date-dur-collec; classement)  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  classement : nombre représentant le classement par taille de la valeur à récupérer. classement correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et le nombre des valeurs composant la collection. Remarques d’usage  Si la valeur du classement est 1, la fonction renvoie le nombre le plus grand de la collection. Si la valeur du classement est 2, c’est le deuxième nombre le plus grand qui est renvoyé, et ainsi de suite. Les valeurs de même taille incluses dans le tableau sont classées au même rang, mais elles ont chacune une incidence sur le résultat. 266 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 267 Exemples Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes cumulées aux examens du trimestre actuel de vos 20 élèves (sur un total de 100 points possibles). (Les données ont été organisées de cette manière pour les besoins de l’exemple, mais il y a tout lieu de penser qu’elles seraient, au départ, réparties entre 20 rangées distinctes.) =GRANDE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 1) renvoie 100, c’est-à dire la plus haute note cumulée aux examens (cellule B2). =GRANDE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 2) renvoie 92, c’est-à dire la deuxième plus haute note cumulée aux examens (cellule B2 ou cellule C2). =GRANDE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 3) renvoie 92, c’est-à dire là aussi la troisième plus haute note cumulée aux examens, puisqu’elle apparaît deux fois (cellules B2 et C2). =GRANDE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 6) renvoie 86, la sixième plus haute note cumulée aux examens (l’ordre étant 100, 92, 92, 91, 90 et enfin 86). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « RANG » à la page 312 « PETITE.VALEUR » à la page 307 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE La fonction INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE renvoie une valeur permettant de créer un intervalle de confiance statistique pour un échantillon de population dont l’écart-type est connu. INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(alpha; écart-type; taille-échantillon)  alpha : probabilité que la valeur réelle de la population se trouve en dehors de l’intervalle. alpha correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. La valeur alpha est obtenue en soustrayant l’intervalle de confiance à 1. écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  taille-échantillon : taille de l’échantillon. taille-échantillon correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  Elle suppose que les valeurs sont réparties normalement dans l’échantillon. Exemples =INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(0,05; 1; 10) renvoie 0,62. Si la moyenne des valeurs de l’échantillon est 100, alors, la moyenne de la population tombe dans la plage 99,38–100,62 avec une confiance de 95 %. =INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(0,1; 1; 10) renvoie 0,52. Si la moyenne des valeurs de l’échantillon est 100, alors, la moyenne de la population tombe dans la plage 99,48–100,52 avec une confiance de 90 %. =INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(0,05; 1; 20) renvoie 0,44. =INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(0,05; 1; 30) renvoie 0,36. =INTERVALLE.CONFIANCE(0,05; 1; 40) renvoie 0,31. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 INVERSE.LOI.F La fonction INVERSE.LOI.F renvoie l’inverse de la distribution de probabilité F. INVERSE.LOI.F(prob; numérateur-d-l; dénominateur-d-l)  prob : probabilité associée à la distribution. prob correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur ou égal à 1.  numérateur-d-l : degrés de liberté à inclure en tant que numérateur. numérateurd-l correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.  dénominateur-d-l : degrés de liberté à inclure en tant que dénominateur. dénominateur-d-l correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. 268 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 269 Exemples =INVERSE.LOI.F(0,77; 1; 2) renvoie 0,111709428782599. =INVERSE.LOI.F(0,77; 1; 1) renvoie 0,142784612191674. =INVERSE.LOI.F(0,77; 2; 1) renvoie 0,34331253162422. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.F » à la page 274 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 KHIDEUX.INVERSE La fonction KHIDEUX.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la probabilité unilatérale de la distribution khi-deux. KHIDEUX.INVERSE(probabilité; degrés-liberté)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1.  degrés-liberté : degrés de liberté. degrés-liberté correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Exemples =KHIDEUX.INVERSE(0,5; 2) renvoie 1,38629436111989. =KHIDEUX.INVERSE(0,1; 10) renvoie 15,9871791721053. =KHIDEUX.INVERSE(0,5; 1) renvoie 0,454936423119572. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.KHIDEUX » à la page 276 « TEST.KHIDEUX » à la page 319 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LNGAMMA La fonction LNGAMMA renvoie le logarithme népérien de la fonction gamma, G(x). LNGAMMA(valeur-pos-x)  valeur-pos-x : valeur x positive à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. valeur-pos-x correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Exemples =LNGAMMA(0,92) renvoie 0,051658003497744. =LNGAMMA(0,29) renvoie 1,13144836880416. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.GAMMA » à la page 275 « LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE » à la page 276 « LN » à la page 194 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.BETA La fonction LOI.BETA renvoie la probabilité de la fonction de répartition de la distribution bêta. LOI.BETA(valeur-x; alpha; bêta; x-min; x-sup)  valeur-x : valeur x à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. valeur-x correspond à un nombre compris entre 0 et 1.  alpha : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. alpha correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. 270 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 271  bêta : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. bêta correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  x-inf : limite inférieure facultative pour la probabilité ou la valeur x indiquée. x-inf correspond à un nombre inférieur ou égal à la probabilité ou à la valeur x même indiquée. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est 0.  x-sup : limite supérieure facultative pour la probabilité ou la valeur x indiquée. x-sup correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à la probabilité ou à la valeur x même indiquée. En l’absence de valeur explicite, la valeur par défaut est 1. Exemples =LOI.BETA(0,5; 1; 2; 0,3; 2) renvoie 0,221453287197232. =LOI.BETA(1; 1; 2; 0; 1) renvoie 1. =LOI.BETA(0,1; 2; 2; 0; 2) renvoie 0,00725. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « BETA.INVERSE » à la page 251 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.BINOMIALE La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE renvoie la probabilité de la distribution binomiale de chaque terme sous la forme indiquée. LOI.BINOMIALE(nbre-succès; essais; prob-succès; type-forme)  nbre-succès : nombre total d’essais ou de tests probants. nbre-succès correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et essais inclus.  essais : nombre total d’essais ou tests. essais correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  prob-succès : probabilité de succès pour chaque essai ou test. prob-succès correspond à un nombre compris entre 0 et 1 inclus.  type-forme : valeur indiquant quelle forme de la fonction exponentielle fournir.forme de répartition (VRAI ou 1): renvoie la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de répartition (si le nombre indiqué ou un nombre inférieur de succès ou d’événements se produisent). forme de probabilité de masse (FAUX ou 0): renvoie la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de probabilité de masse (si le nombre de succès ou d’événements qui se produisent est exactement égal au nombre indiqué). Remarques d’usage  La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE convient aux problèmes impliquant un nombre fixe d’essais indépendants qui ont une probabilité de succès constante et pour lesquels le résultat ne peut être qu’un succès ou un échec. Exemples =LOI.BINOMIALE(3; 98; 0,04; 1) renvoie 0,445507210083272 (forme de la fonction de répartition). =LOI.BINOMIALE(3; 98; 0,04; 0) renvoie 0,201402522366024 (forme de probabilité de masse). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 256 « LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG » à la page 272 « PERMUTATION » à la page 306 « PROBABILITE » à la page 309 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG renvoie la distribution binomiale négative. LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG(nbre-échecs; nbre-succès; prob-succès)  nbre-échecs : nombre d’échecs. nbre-échecs correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  nbre-succès : nombre total d’essais ou de tests probants. nbre-succès correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. 272 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 273  prob-succès : probabilité de succès pour chaque essai ou test. prob-succès correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1. Remarques d’usage  La fonction LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG renvoie la probabilité qu’un nombre indiqué d’échecs, nbre-échecs, se produise avant que le nombre spécifié de succès, nbresuccès ne soit atteint. La probabilité constante d’un succès est prob-succès. Exemple =LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG(3; 68; 0,95) renvoie 0,20913174716192. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 271 « CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 256 « PERMUTATION » à la page 306 « PROBABILITE » à la page 309 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.EXPONENTIELLE La fonction LOI.EXPONENTIELLE renvoie la distribution exponentielle sous la forme indiquée. LOI.EXPONENTIELLE(non-nég-valeur-x; lambda; type-forme)  non-nég-valeur-x : valeur à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. non-négvaleur-x correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  lambda : valeur du paramètre. lambda correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  type-forme : valeur indiquant quelle forme de la fonction exponentielle fournir. forme de répartition (VRAI ou 1): renvoie la valeur sous forme de fonction de répartition. forme de densité de probabilité (FAUX ou 0): renvoyer la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de densité de probabilité.Exemples =LOI.EXPONENTIELLE(4; 2; 1) renvoie 0,999664537372097 (sous forme de fonction de répartition). =LOI.EXPONENTIELLE(4; 2; 0) renvoie 0,000670925255805024 (sous forme de densité de probabilité). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.LOGNORMALE » à la page 277 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.F La fonction LOI.F renvoie la distribution de probabilité F. LOI.F(non-nég-valeur-x; numérateur-d-l; dénominateur-d-l)  non-nég-valeur-x : valeur à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. non-négvaleur-x correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  numérateur-d-l : degrés de liberté à inclure en tant que numérateur. numérateurd-l correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée.  dénominateur-d-l : degrés de liberté à inclure en tant que dénominateur. dénominateur-d-l correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Remarques d’usage  La distribution F est aussi appelée distribution F de Snedecor ou distribution de Fisher-Snedecor. Exemples =LOI.F(0,77; 1; 2) renvoie 0,472763488223567. =LOI.F(0,77; 1; 1) renvoie 0,541479597634413. =LOI.F(0,77; 2; 1) renvoie 0,627455805138159. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 274 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 275 « INVERSE.LOI.F » à la page 268 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.GAMMA La fonction LOI.GAMMA renvoie la distribution gamma sous la forme indiquée. LOI.GAMMA(non-nég-valeur-x; alpha; bêta; type-forme)  non-nég-valeur-x : valeur à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. non-négvaleur-x correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  alpha : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. alpha correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  bêta : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. bêta correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  type-forme : valeur indiquant quelle forme de la fonction exponentielle fournir. forme de répartition (VRAI ou 1): renvoie la valeur sous forme de fonction de répartition. forme de densité de probabilité (FAUX ou 0): renvoyer la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de densité de probabilité. Exemples =LOI.GAMMA(0,8; 1; 2; 1) renvoie 0,329679953964361 (forme de la fonction de répartition). =LOI.GAMMA(0,8; 1; 2; 0) renvoie 0,33516002301782 (forme de densité de probabilité). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE » à la page 276 « LNGAMMA » à la page 270 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15« Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE La fonction LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE renvoie la distribution gamma cumulée inverse. LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE(probabilité; alpha; bêta)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1.  alpha : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. alpha correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  bêta : l’un des paramètres de forme de la distribution. bêta correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Exemples =LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE(0,8; 1; 2) renvoie 3,2188758248682. =LOI.GAMMA.INVERSE(0,8; 2; 1) renvoie 2,99430834700212. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.GAMMA » à la page 275 « LNGAMMA » à la page 270 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.KHIDEUX La fonction LOI.KHIDEUX renvoie la probabilité unilatérale de la distribution khi-deux. LOI.KHIDEUX(non-nég-valeur-x; degrés-liberté)  non-nég-valeur-x : valeur à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. non-négvaleur-x correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  degrés-liberté : degrés de liberté. degrés-liberté correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. 276 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 277 Exemples =LOI.KHIDEUX(5; 2) renvoie 0,0820849986238988. =LOI.KHIDEUX(10; 10) renvoie 0,440493285065212. =LOI.KHIDEUX(5; 1) renvoie 0,0253473186774683. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « KHIDEUX.INVERSE » à la page 269 « TEST.KHIDEUX » à la page 319 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.LOGNORMALE La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE renvoie la distribution log-normale. LOI.LOGNORMALE(valeur-pos-x; moyenne; écart-type)  valeur-pos-x : valeur x positive à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. valeur-pos-x correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  moyenne : moyenne du logarithme népérien, c’est-à-dire, ln (x) . moyenne correspond à un nombre égal à la moyenne (arithmétique) de ln (x) , le logarithme népérien de x.  écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Exemple =LOI.LOGNORMALE(0,78; 1,7; 2,2) renvoie 0,187899237956868. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LN » à la page 194 « LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE » à la page 278 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244« Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la fonction de distribution log-normale cumulée de x. LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE(probabilité; moyenne; écart-type)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1.  moyenne : moyenne du logarithme népérien, c’est-à-dire, ln (x) . moyenne correspond à un nombre égal à la moyenne (arithmétique) de ln (x) , le logarithme népérien de x.  écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  La fonction LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE est appropriée si la distribution du logarithme de x est normale. Exemple =LOI.LOGNORMALE.INVERSE(0,78; 1,7; 2,2) renvoie 29,9289150377259. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LN » à la page 194 « LOI.LOGNORMALE » à la page 277 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 278 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 279 LOI.NORMALE La fonction LOI.NORMALE renvoie la distribution normale sous la forme de fonction indiquée. LOI.NORMALE(nbre; moyenne; écart-type; type-forme)  nbre : nombre à évaluer. nbre correspond à un nombre.  moyenne : moyenne de la distribution. moyenne correspond à un nombre qui représente la fréquence moyenne (moyenne arithmétique) connue à laquelle des événements se produisent.  écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  type-forme : valeur indiquant quelle forme de la fonction exponentielle fournir. forme de répartition (VRAI ou 1): renvoie la valeur sous forme de fonction de répartition. forme de densité de probabilité (FAUX ou 0): renvoyer la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de densité de probabilité. Remarques d’usage  Si moyenne est 0, écart-type 1 et type-forme VRAI, la fonction LOI.NORMALE renvoie une valeur identique à la distribution normale standard cumulée renvoyée par la fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD. Exemples =LOI.NORMALE(22; 15; 2,5; 1) renvoie 0,997444869669572, c’est-à-dire la forme de la fonction de répartition. =LOI.NORMALE(22; 15; 2,5; 0) renvoie 0,00316618063319199, c’est-à-dire la forme de densité de probabilité. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE » à la page 280 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD » à la page 280 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE La fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la distribution normale cumulée. LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE(probabilité, moyenne, écart-type)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1.  moyenne : moyenne de la distribution. moyenne correspond à un nombre qui représente la fréquence moyenne (moyenne arithmétique) connue à laquelle des événements se produisent.  écart-type : écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  Si moyenne est 0 et écart-type 1, la fonction LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE renvoie une valeur identique à l’inverse de la distribution normale standard cumulée renvoyée par la fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE. Exemple =LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE(0,89; 15; 2,5) renvoie 18,0663203000915. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.NORMALE » à la page 279 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE » à la page 281 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD renvoie la distribution normale standard. LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. 280 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 281 Remarques d’usage  Pour une distribution normale standard, la moyenne (arithmétique) correspond à 0 et l’écart-type 1. Exemple =LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD(4,3) renvoie 0,999991460094529. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.NORMALE » à la page 279 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE » à la page 281 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE La fonction LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE renvoie l’inverse de la distribution normale standard cumulée. LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE(probabilité)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1. Remarques d’usage  Pour une distribution normale standard, la moyenne (arithmétique) correspond à 0 et l’écart-type 1. Exemple =LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD.INVERSE(0,89) renvoie 1,22652812003661. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.NORMALE.INVERSE » à la page 280 « LOI.NORMALE.STANDARD » à la page 280« Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.POISSON La fonction LOI.POISSON renvoie la probabilité d’apparition d’un nombre particulier d’événements, en s’appuyant sur la loi de répartition de Poisson. LOI.POISSON(événements; moyenne; type-forme)  événements : nombre d’événements pour lequel vous souhaitez calculer la probabilité. événements correspond à un nombre.  moyenne : moyenne de la distribution. moyenne correspond à un nombre qui représente la fréquence moyenne (moyenne arithmétique) connue à laquelle des événements se produisent.  type-forme : valeur indiquant quelle forme de la fonction exponentielle fournir. forme de répartition (VRAI ou 1): renvoie la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de répartition (si le nombre indiqué ou un nombre inférieur de succès ou d’événements se produisent). forme de probabilité de masse (FAUX ou 0): renvoie la valeur sous la forme de la fonction de probabilité de masse (si le nombre de succès ou d’événements qui se produisent est exactement égal au nombre indiqué). Exemple Pour une moyenne de 10 et un taux des arrivées de 8 : =LOI.POISSON(8; 10; FAUX) renvoie 0,112599. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.EXPONENTIELLE » à la page 273 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 282 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 283 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.STUDENT La fonction LOI.STUDENT renvoie la probabilité à partir de la distribution T de Student. LOI.STUDENT(non-nég-valeur-x; degrés-liberté; queues)  non-nég-valeur-x : valeur à laquelle vous cherchez à évaluer la fonction. non-négvaleur-x correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  degrés-liberté : degrés de liberté. degrés-liberté correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1.  queues : nombre de queues à renvoyer. une queue (1): renvoie la valeur pour une distribution unilatérale. deux queues (2): renvoie la valeur pour une distribution bilatérale. Exemples =LOI.STUDENT(4; 2; 1) renvoie 0,0285954792089682 pour la distribution unilatérale. =LOI.STUDENT(4; 2; 2) renvoie 0,0571909584179364 pour la distribution bilatérale. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE » à la page 283 « TEST.STUDENT » à la page 320 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE La fonction LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE renvoie la valeur T (qui est une fonction de la probabilité et des degrés de liberté) à partir de la distribution T de Student. LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE(probabilité; degrés-liberté)  probabilité : probabilité associée à la distribution. probabilité correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0 et inférieur à 1. degrés-liberté : degrés de liberté. degrés-liberté correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Exemple =LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE(0,88; 2) renvoie 0,170940864689457. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.STUDENT » à la page 283 « TEST.STUDENT » à la page 320 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MAX La fonction MAX renvoie le plus grand nombre d’une collection. MAX(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  Si l’argument valeur n’est ni une date ni un nombre, il n’est pas pris en compte dans le résultat.  Pour déterminer la plus grande de toutes les valeurs d’une collection, quel que soit leur type, servez-vous de la fonction MAXA. Exemples =MAX(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) renvoie 6. =MAX(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) renvoie 5. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GRANDE.VALEUR » à la page 266 284 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 285 « MAXA » à la page 285 « MIN » à la page 287 « PETITE.VALEUR » à la page 307 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MAXA La fonction MAXA renvoie le plus grand nombre d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes. MAXA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs texte et la valeur logique FAUX se voient attribuer la valeur 0 et la valeur logique VRAI se voit attribuer la valeur 1.  Pour déterminer la plus grande des valeurs d’une collection qui ne comprend que des nombres ou des dates, servez-vous de la fonction MAX. Exemples =MAXA(1; 2; 3; 4) renvoie 4. =MAXA(A1:C1), si les cellules A1 à C1 contiennent « –1 », « –10 » et « bonjour », renvoie 0. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MAX » à la page 284 « MINA » à la page 287 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244« Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MEDIANE La fonction MEDIANE renvoie la valeur médiane d’une collection de nombres. La valeur médiane est la valeur à laquelle la moitié des nombres de l’ensemble (ou « collection ») sont inférieurs et l’autre moitié, supérieurs. MEDIANE(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  Si la série comporte un nombre pair de valeurs, la fonction MEDIANE renvoie la moyenne des deux valeurs du milieu. Exemples =MEDIANE(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) renvoie 3. =MEDIANE(1; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6) renvoie 3,5. =MEDIANE(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) renvoie 5. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « MODE » à la page 288 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 286 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 287 MIN La fonction MIN renvoie le plus petit nombre d’une collection. MIN(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  Si l’argument valeur n’est ni une date ni un nombre, il n’est pas pris en compte dans le résultat.  Pour déterminer la plus petite de toutes les valeurs d’une collection, quel que soit leur type, servez-vous de la fonction MINA. Exemples =MIN(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) renvoie 5. =MIN(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) renvoie 1. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GRANDE.VALEUR » à la page 266 « MAX » à la page 284 « MINA » à la page 287 « PETITE.VALEUR » à la page 307 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MINA La fonction MINA renvoie le plus petit nombre d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes. MINA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs texte et la valeur logique FAUX se voient attribuer la valeur 0 et la valeur logique VRAI se voit attribuer la valeur 1.  Pour déterminer la plus petite des valeurs d’une collection qui ne comprend que des nombres ou des dates, servez-vous de la fonction MIN. Exemples =MINA(1; 2; 3; 4) renvoie 1. =MINA(A1:C1), si les cellules A1 à C1 contiennent « –1 », « –10 » et « bonjour », renvoie « – 10 ». =MINA(A1:C1), si les cellules A1 à C1 contiennent « 1 », « 10 » et « bonjour », renvoie 0. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MAXA » à la page 285 « MIN » à la page 287 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MODE La fonction MODE renvoie la valeur qui apparaît le plus souvent dans une collection de nombres. MODE(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. 288 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 289 Remarques d’usage  Si plusieurs nombres ont la même fréquence maximale d’apparition dans les arguments, la fonction MODE renvoie le premier de ces nombres.  Si aucune valeur n’apparaît plusieurs fois, la fonction génère une erreur. Exemples =MODE(5; 5; 5; 5; 6) renvoie 5. =MODE(1; 2; 3; 4; 5) génère une erreur. =MODE(2; 2; 4; 6; 6) renvoie 2. =MODE(6; 6; 4; 2; 2) renvoie 6. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « MEDIANE » à la page 286 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MOYENNE La fonction MOYENNE renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) d’une collection de nombres. MOYENNE(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  MOYENNE divise la somme des valeurs numériques par le nombre de valeurs numériques . Les chaînes ou les valeurs booléennes qui se trouvent dans la cellule référencée sont ignorées. Si vous souhaitez inclure une chaîne et des valeurs booléennes dans la moyenne, servez-vous de la fonction AVERAGEA.  Les références utilisées comme arguments pour cette fonction peuvent être des références à une seule cellule ou à un intervalle de cellules. Exemples =MOYENNE(4; 4; 4; 6; 6; 6) renvoie 5. =MOYENNE(2; 2; 2; 2; 3; 3; 3; 3; 4; 4; 4; 4) renvoie 3. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « AVERAGEA » à la page 250 « MOYENNE.SI » à la page 292 « MOYENNE.SIS » à la page 294 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE La fonction MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE renvoie la moyenne géométrique. MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE(nbre-pos; nbre-pos…)  nbre-pos : nombre positif. nbre-pos correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  nbre-pos… : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres positifs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE multiplie les arguments pour parvenir à un produit, puis prend la racine de ce produit qui est égale au nombre d’arguments. Exemple =MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE(5; 7; 3; 2; 6; 22) renvoie 5,50130264578853. 290 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 291 Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE » à la page 291 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE La fonction MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE renvoie la moyenne harmonique. MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE(nbre-pos; nbre-pos…)  nbre-pos : nombre positif. nbre-pos correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0.  nbre-pos… : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres positifs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  La moyenne harmonique est l’inverse de la moyenne arithmétique des inverses. Exemple =MOYENNE.HARMONIQUE(5; 7; 3; 2; 6; 22) renvoie 4,32179607109448. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « MOYENNE.GEOMETRIQUE » à la page 290 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44MOYENNE.SI La fonction MOYENNE.SI renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) des cellules d’un intervalle qui remplissent une condition donnée. MOYENNE.SI(valeurs-test; condition; moyenne-valeurs)  valeurs-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. valeurs-test correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans valeurs-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX).  moyenne-valeurs : collection facultative comprenant les valeurs dont on souhaite établir la moyenne. moyenne-valeurs est une référence à un seul intervalle de cellules ou à un tableau, qui ne peut contenir que des nombres, des expressions numériques ou des valeurs booléennes. Remarques d’usage  Chaque valeur est comparée à la condition. Si la valeur satisfait au test conditionnel, la valeur correspondante dans moyenne-valeurs est prise en compte dans la moyenne.  moyenne-valeurs et valeurs-test (si cet argument est indiqué) doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.  En cas d’omission de moyenne-valeurs, valeurs-test est utilisée à sa place.  Si moyenne-valeurs est omise ou identique à valeurs-test, valeurs-test ne peut comprendre que des nombres, des expressions numériques ou des valeurs booléennes. 292 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 293 Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =MOYENNE.SI(A2:A13; "<40"; D2:D13) renvoie environ « 57 429 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes qui ont moins de 40 ans. =MOYENNE.SI(B2:B13; "=F"; D2:D13) renvoie « 62 200 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes de sexe féminin (celui-ci étant indiqué par un « F » dans la colonne B). =MOYENNE.SI(C2:C13; "C"; D2:D13) renvoie « 55 800 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes célibataires (indiqué par un « C » dans la colonne C). =MOYENNE.SI(A2:A13; ">=40"; D2:D13) renvoie « 75 200 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes qui ont 40 ans ou plus. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « AVERAGEA » à la page 250 « MOYENNE.SIS » à la page 294 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44MOYENNE.SIS La fonction MOYENNE.SIS renvoie la moyenne (arithmétique) des cellules d’un intervalle donné lorsqu’un ou plusieurs intervalles remplissent une ou plusieurs conditions qui y sont liées. MOYENNE.SIS(moyenne-valeurs; valeurs-test; condition; valeurs-test…; condition… )  moyenne-valeurs : collection comprenant les valeurs dont on souhaite établir la moyenne.. moyenne-valeurs est une référence à un seul intervalle de cellules ou à un tableau, qui ne peut contenir que des nombres, des expressions numériques ou des valeurs booléennes.  valeurs-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. valeurs-test correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans valeurs-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX).  valeurs-test;… : vous pouvez également ajouter une ou plusieurs collections contenant des valeurs à évaluer. Chaque collection de valeurs-test doit être immédiatement suivie d’une expression de condition. Cette succession valeurs-test, condition peut être répétée autant de fois que nécessaire.  condition;… : expression logique VRAI ou FAUX, si la collection facultative de valeurs-test est précisée. une condition doit obligatoirement être placée après chaque argument valeurs-test ; par conséquent, cette fonction présente toujours un nombre impair d’arguments. Remarques d’usage  Pour chacune des paires formées par valeurs-test et condition, la valeur correspondante (même position à l’intérieur de l’intervalle ou du tableau) est comparée au test conditionnel. Si tous les tests conditionnels sont satisfaits, la valeur correspondante dans moyenne-valeurs est prise en compte dans la moyenne.  Les collections moyenne-valeurs et toutes celles de valeurs-test doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions. 294 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 295 Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =MOYENNE.SIS (D2:D13;A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M") renvoie « 56 000 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes de sexe masculin (indiqué par un « M » dans la colonne B) qui ont moins de 40 ans. =MOYENNE.SIS(D2:D13;A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M";C2:C13;"=C") renvoie « 57 000 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes de sexe masculin célibataires (indiqué par un « C » dans la colonne C) qui ont moins de 40 ans. =MOYENNE.SIS(D2:D13;A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M";C2:C13;"=M") renvoie « 55 000 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes de sexe masculin mariées (indiqué par un « M » dans la colonne C) qui ont moins de 40 ans. =MOYENNE.SIS(D2:D13;A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=F") renvoie environ « 59 333 », c’est-à-dire le revenu moyen des personnes de sexe féminin (indiqué par un « F » dans la colonne B) qui ont moins de 40 ans. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MOYENNE » à la page 289 « AVERAGEA » à la page 250 « MOYENNE.SI » à la page 292 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44NB La fonction NB renvoie le nombre de ses arguments qui contiennent des nombres, des expressions numériques ou des dates. NB(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  Pour compter toute cellule contenant n’importe quel type de valeur (c’est-à-dire compter toute cellule non vide), utilisez la fonction NBVAL. Exemples Le tableau de cet exemple sert à illustrer toutes les variations de la fonction NB. Les informations qu’il contient ne sont pas significatives, mais elles illustrent le type d’arguments que chaque variation de NB inclut dans le résultat de la fonction. =NB(A1:E1) renvoie 5 puisque tous les arguments correspondent à des valeurs numériques. =NB(A2:E2) renvoie 0 puisqu’aucun des arguments ne correspond à un nombre. =NB(A3:E3) renvoie 3 puisque les deux dernières cellules ne correspondent pas à des valeurs numériques. =NB(A4:E4) renvoie 0 puisque les arguments sont des valeurs logiques VRAI ou FAUX qui ne sont pas comptées en tant que valeurs numériques. =NB(A5:E5) renvoie 2 puisque trois cellules sont vides. =NB(2; 3; A5:E5; SOMME(A1:E1); "A"; "b") renvoie 5 puisque les arguments 2 et 3 correspondent à des nombres, que deux nombres se trouvent dans l’intervalle A5:E5, que la fonction SOMME renvoie le nombre 1 et que les deux derniers arguments correspondent à du texte et non à des valeurs numériques (cinq arguments numériques en tout). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NBVAL » à la page 301 « NB.VIDE » à la page 302 « NB.SI » à la page 297 « NB.SIS » à la page 299 296 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 297 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.SI La fonction NB.SI renvoie le nombre de cellules d’un intervalle qui remplissent une condition donnée. NB.SI(tableau-test; condition)  tableau-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. tableau-test est une collection qui peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans tableau-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX). Remarques d’usage  Chaque valeur tableau-test est comparée à la condition. Si elle satisfait au test conditionnel, la valeur est prise en compte pour la détermination du nombre renvoyé par la fonction.Exemples Le tableau de cet exemple sert à illustrer toutes les variations de la fonction NB, dont NB.SI. Les informations qu’il contient ne sont pas significatives, mais elles illustrent le type d’arguments que chaque variation de NB inclut dans le résultat de la fonction. =NB.SI(A1:E1; ">0") renvoie 5 puisque toutes les cellules de l’intervalle ont une valeur supérieure à zéro. =NB.SI(A3:E3; ">=100") renvoie 3 puisque les trois nombres ont tous une valeur supérieure à 100 et que les deux valeurs texte sont ignorées pour la comparaison. =NB.SI(A1:E5; "=amet") renvoie 2 puisque la chaîne de test « amet » apparaît deux fois dans l’intervalle. =NB.SI(A1:E5; "=*t") renvoie 4 puisque quatre chaînes se terminent par la lettre « t » dans l’intervalle. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB » à la page 296 « NBVAL » à la page 301 « NB.VIDE » à la page 302 « NB.SIS » à la page 299 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 298 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 299 NB.SIS La fonction NB.SIS renvoie le nombre de cellules d’un ou plusieurs intervalles qui remplissent des conditions données (une condition par intervalle). NB.SIS(valeurs-test; condition; valeurs-test…; condition…)  valeurs-test : collection comprenant les valeurs à tester. valeurs-test correspond à une collection pouvant contenir tout type de valeur.  condition : expression qui entraîne un résultat logique VRAI ou FAUX. condition est une expression pouvant englober tout type de valeur pour autant que le résultat de la comparaison de condition et d’une valeur incluse dans valeurs-test puisse correspondre à une valeur booléenne (VRAI ou FAUX).  valeurs-test;… : vous pouvez également ajouter une ou plusieurs collections contenant des valeurs à évaluer. Chaque collection de valeurs-test doit être immédiatement suivie d’une expression de condition. Cette succession valeurs-test, condition peut être répétée autant de fois que nécessaire.  condition;… : expression logique VRAI ou FAUX, si la collection facultative de valeurs-test est précisée. une condition doit obligatoirement être placée après chaque argument valeurs-test ; par conséquent, cette fonction présente toujours un nombre impair d’arguments. Remarques d’usage  Chaque valeur de valeurs-test est comparée à la condition correspondante. Si les valeurs correspondantes de chaque collection satisfont aux tests conditionnels correspondants, le nombre est augmenté de 1.Exemples Prenons le tableau suivant : =NB.SIS(A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M") renvoie 4, c’est-à-dire le nombre de personnes de sexe masculin (celui-ci étant indiqué par un « M » dans la colonne B) qui ont moins de 40 ans. =NB.SIS(A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M";C2:C13;"=C") renvoie 2, c’est-à-dire le nombre de personnes de sexe masculin qui sont célibataires (indiqué par un « C » dans la colonne C) et qui ont moins de 40 ans. =NB.SIS(A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=M";C2:C13;"=M") renvoie 2, c’est-à-dire le nombre de personnes de sexe masculin qui sont mariées (indiqué par un « M » dans la colonne C) et qui ont moins de 40 ans. =NB.SIS(A2:A13;"<40";B2:B13;"=F") renvoie 3, c’est-à-dire le nombre de personnes de sexe féminin (indiqué par un « F » dans la colonne B) qui ont moins de 40 ans. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB » à la page 296 « NBVAL » à la page 301 « NB.VIDE » à la page 302 « NB.SI » à la page 297 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 300 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 301 NBVAL La fonction NBVAL renvoie le nombre des arguments non vides de la fonction. NBVAL(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  Pour compter uniquement les cellules ou les arguments comportant des nombres ou des dates, utilisez la fonction NB. Exemples Le tableau de cet exemple sert à illustrer toutes les variations de la fonction NB, dont NBVAL. Les informations qu’il contient ne sont pas significatives, mais elles illustrent le type d’arguments que chaque variation de NB inclut dans le résultat de la fonction. =NBVAL(A1:E1) renvoie 5 puisque toutes les cellules contiennent un argument (ces arguments sont tous des valeurs numériques). =NBVAL(A2:E2) renvoie 5 puisque toutes les cellules contiennent un argument (ces arguments correspondent tous à du texte). =NBVAL(A3:E3) renvoie 5 puisque toutes les cellules contiennent un argument (ces arguments correspondant tous à un mélange de textes et des nombres). =NBVAL(A4:E4) renvoie 5 puisque toutes les cellules contiennent un argument (VRAI ou FAUX). =NBVAL(A5:E5) renvoie 2 puisque trois cellules sont vides. =NBVAL(2; 3; A5:E5; SOMME(A1:E1); "A"; "b") renvoie 7 puisque les arguments 2 et 3 correspondent à des nombres, que deux cellules non vides se trouvent dans l’intervalle A5:E5, que la fonction SOMME renvoie le nombre 1 et que « A » et « b » correspondent à des expressions texte (soit sept arguments en tout). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB » à la page 296 « NB.VIDE » à la page 302 « NB.SI » à la page 297 « NB.SIS » à la page 299« Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NB.VIDE La fonction NB.VIDE renvoie le nombre de cellules non vides d’un intervalle. NB.VIDE(intervalle)  intervalle : intervalle incluant les cellules. intervalle correspond à la référence à un seul intervalle de cellules pouvant contenir des valeurs de n’importe quel type. Exemples Le tableau de cet exemple sert à illustrer toutes les variations de la fonction NB, dont NB.VIDE. Les informations qu’il contient ne sont pas significatives, mais elles illustrent le type d’arguments que chaque variation de NB inclut dans le résultat de la fonction. =NB.VIDE(A1:E1) renvoie 0 puisqu’aucune cellule vide ne se trouve dans l’intervalle. =NB.VIDE(A2:E2) renvoie 0 puisqu’aucune cellule vide ne se trouve dans l’intervalle. =NB.VIDE(A5:E5) renvoie 3 puisque trois cellules vides se trouvent dans l’intervalle. =NB.VIDE(A6:E6) renvoie 5 puisqu’il n’y a que des cellules vides dans l’intervalle. =NB.VIDE(A1:E6) renvoie 8 puisque huit cellules vides se trouvent dans l’intervalle. =NB.VIDE(A1:E1; A5:E5) génère une erreur puisque la fonction NB.VIDE n’accepte qu’un seul intervalle comme argument. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NB » à la page 296 « NBVAL » à la page 301 « NB.SI » à la page 297 302 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 303 « NB.SIS » à la page 299 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ORDONNEE.ORIGINE La fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE renvoie l’ordonnée à l’origine de la droite de régression correspondant à la collection en faisant appel à l’analyse de régression linéaire. ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(valeurs-y; nombres-x)  valeurs y : collection comprenant les valeurs y (dépendantes). valeurs-y correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  nombres-x : collection comprenant les valeurs x (indépendantes). nombres-x correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Remarques d’usage  Les deux tableaux doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.  Pour trouver la pente de la droite de régression, utilisez la fonction PENTE.Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE sert à déterminer l’ordonnée à l’origine de la droite de régression pour la température (variable dépendante) qu’un propriétaire règle sur le thermostat de son logement en fonction du prix du fioul (variable indépendante). =ORDONNEE.ORIGINE(B2:B11; A2:A11) renvoie environ 78, c’est-à-dire une valeur supérieure à la valeur hypothétique la plus élevée puisque la pente de la droite de régression est descendante (à mesure que les prix montent, le thermostat est baissé). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « PENTE » à la page 304 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PENTE La fonction PENTE renvoie la pente de la droite de régression correspondant à la collection en faisant appel à l’analyse de régression linéaire. PENTE(valeurs-y; valeurs-x)  valeurs y : collection comprenant les valeurs y (dépendantes). valeurs-y correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  valeurs x : collection comprenant les valeurs x (indépendantes). valeurs-x correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type. 304 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 305 Remarques d’usage  Les deux collections doivent avoir la même taille. Dans le cas contraire, la fonction génère une erreur.  Si, par exemple, vous disposez de données sur les différentes vitesses de conduite d’un véhicule et sur l’efficacité du carburant pour chaque vitesse, l’efficacité du carburant correspond à la variable dépendante, et la vitesse correspond à la variable indépendante.  Pour trouver l’ordonnée d’origine y de la droite de régression, utilisez la fonction ORDONNEE.ORIGINE. Exemple Dans cet exemple, la fonction PENTE sert à déterminer la pente de la droite de régression pour la température (variable dépendante) qu’un propriétaire règle sur le thermostat de son logement en fonction du prix du fioul (variable indépendante). =PENTE(B2:B11; A2:A11) renvoie environ – 3,2337, ce qui indique que la pente de la droite de régression descend (à mesure que les prix montent, le thermostat est baissé). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ORDONNEE.ORIGINE » à la page 303 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44PERMUTATION La fonction PERMUTATION renvoie le nombre de permutations pour un nombre donné d’objets pouvant être sélectionnés parmi un nombre total d’objets. PERMUTATION(nbre-objets; nbre-éléments)  nbre-objets : nombre d’objets. nbre-objets correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0.  nbre-éléments : nombre d’objets à sélectionner parmi tous les objets pour chaque permutation. nbre-éléments correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Exemples =PERMUTATION(25; 5) renvoie 6 375 600. =PERMUTATION(10; 3) renvoie 720. =PERMUTATION(5; 2) renvoie 20. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 271 « CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 256 « LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG » à la page 272 « PROBABILITE » à la page 309 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 306 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 307 PETITE.VALEUR La fonction PETITE.VALEUR renvoie la énième plus petite valeur d’un intervalle. La plus faible valeur est classée en numéro 1. PETITE.VALEUR(nbre-date-dur-collec; classement)  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  classement : nombre représentant le classement par taille de la valeur à récupérer. classement correspond à un nombre compris entre 1 et le nombre des valeurs composant la collection. Remarques d’usage  Un classement de 1 renvoie le plus petit nombre de la collection, un classement de 2 renvoie le deuxième plus petit nombre de la collection, et ainsi de suite. Les valeurs de même taille à l’intérieur de la collection sont classées au même rang, mais elles ont chacune une incidence sur le résultat. Exemples Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes cumulées aux examens du trimestre actuel de vos 20 élèves (sur un total de 100 points possibles). (Les données ont été organisées de cette manière pour les besoins de l’exemple, mais il y a tout lieu de penser qu’elles seraient, au départ, réparties entre 20 rangées distinctes.) =PETITE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 1) renvoie 30, c’est-à-dire la note cumulée la plus basse (cellule A1). =PETITE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 2) renvoie 51, c’est-à-dire la deuxième note cumulée la plus basse (cellule E1). =PETITE.VALEUR(A1:E4; 6) renvoie 75, c’est-à-dire la sixième note cumulée la plus basse (l’ordre est 30, 51, 68, 70, 75 puis à nouveau 75, de sorte que 75 est à la fois la cinquième et la sixième note cumulée la plus basse). Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GRANDE.VALEUR » à la page 266 « RANG » à la page 312 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PREVISION La fonction PREVISION renvoie la valeur y prévisionnelle pour une valeur x donnée en s’appuyant sur des valeurs empiriques, par le biais de l’analyse de régression linéaire. PREVISION(nbre-date-dur-x; valeurs-y; valeur-x)  nbre-date-dur-x : valeur x pour laquelle la fonction doit renvoyer une valeur y prévue. nbre-date-dur-x correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  valeurs y : collection comprenant les valeurs y (dépendantes). valeurs-y correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  valeurs x : collection comprenant les valeurs x (indépendantes). valeurs-x correspond à une collection qui peut comprendre des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type. Remarques d’usage  Tous les arguments doivent être du même type.  Les deux tableaux doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions.  Si, par exemple, vous disposez de données sur les différentes vitesses de conduite d’un véhicule et sur l’efficacité du carburant pour chaque vitesse, l’efficacité du carburant correspond à la variable (y) dépendante, et la vitesse correspond à la variable (x) indépendante.  Les fonctions PENTE et ORDONNÉE.ORIGINE permettent de trouver l’équation utilisée pour le calcul des valeurs de prévision. Exemple Prenons le tableau suivant : =PREVISION(9; A3:F3; A2:F2) renvoie 19. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ 308 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 309 « COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION » à la page 254 « COVARIANCE » à la page 255 « ORDONNEE.ORIGINE » à la page 303 « PENTE » à la page 304 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 PROBABILITE La fonction PROBABILITE renvoie la probabilité d’un intervalle de valeurs si la probabilité de chaque valeur est connue. PROBABILITE(nbre-collec; probabilité-valeurs; inférieur; supérieur)  nbre-collec : collection de nombres. nbre-collec correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  probabilité-valeurs : collection comprenant les valeurs de probabilité. valeursprobabilité correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. La somme des probabilités doit donner 1 au maximum. Toutes les valeurs qui sont des chaînes de caractères sont ignorées.  inférieur : limite inférieure. inférieur correspond à un nombre.  supérieur : limite supérieure facultative. supérieur correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à la valeur d’inférieur. Remarques d’usage  La fonction PROBABILITE établit la somme des probabilités associées à toutes les valeurs de la collection qui sont supérieures ou égales à la valeur indiquée pour la limite inférieure et inférieures ou égales à la valeur spécifiée pour la limite supérieure. Si l’argument supérieur est omis, la fonction PROBABILITE renvoie la probabilité du seul nombre égal à la limite inférieure indiquée.  Les deux tableaux doivent présenter les mêmes dimensions. Si un tableau contient du texte, ce dernier est ignoré.Exemples Supposons que vous deviez penser à un nombre compris entre 1 et 10 et qu’une autre personne doive le deviner. La plupart des gens seraient prêts à affirmer que la probabilité que vous pensiez à un nombre donné est de 0,1 (10 %), soit la valeur répertoriée dans la colonne C, puisque dix choix sont possibles. Toutefois, des études ont montré que les gens ne choisissent pas les nombres au hasard. Supposons qu’une étude ait montré que certaines personnes comme vous ont davantage de possibilités de choisir certains nombres plutôt que d’autres. Ces probabilités révisées figurent dans la colonne E. =PROBABILITE(A1:A10; C1:C10; 4; 6) renvoie 0,30, c’est-à-dire la probabilité que la valeur soit 4, 5 ou 6, si on suppose que les choix sont complètement aléatoires. =PROBABILITE(A1:A10; E1:E10; 7) renvoie 0,28, c’est-à-dire la probabilité que la valeur soit 4, 5 ou 6, si on se fie à l’étude qui montre que les nombres ne sont pas choisis au hasard. =PROBABILITE(A1:A10; E1:E10; 4; 6) renvoie 0,20, c’est-à-dire la probabilité que la valeur soit 7, si on se fie à l’étude qui montre que les nombres ne sont pas choisis au hasard. =PROBABILITE(A1:A10; C1:C10; 6; 10) renvoie 0,50, c’est-à-dire la probabilité que la valeur soit supérieure à 5 (de 6 à 10), si on suppose que les choix sont complètement aléatoires. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 271 « CRITERE.LOI.BINOMIALE » à la page 256 « LOI.BINOMIALE.NEG » à la page 272 « PERMUTATION » à la page 306 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 310 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 311 QUARTILE La fonction QUARTILE renvoie la valeur correspondant au quartile indiqué d’une collection donnée. QUARTILE(nbre-collec; quartile-nbre)  nbre-collec : collection de nombres. nbre-collec correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  quartile-nbre : indique le quartile souhaité. plus petit (0): renvoie la valeur la plus petite. premier (1): renvoie le premier quartile (25 e centile). seconde (2): renvoie le deuxième quartile (50 e centile). troisième (3): renvoie le troisième quartile (75 e centile). plus grande valeur (4): renvoie la valeur la plus grande. Remarques d’usage  Les fonctions MIN, MEDIANE et MAX renvoient la même valeur que la fonction QUARTILE lorsque quartile-nbre est égal à 0, 2 et 4, respectivement. Exemples =QUARTILE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 0) renvoie 2, c’est-à-dire la plus petite valeur. =QUARTILE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 1) renvoie 5, c’est-à-dire le 25 e centile ou premier quartile. =QUARTILE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 2) renvoie 7, c’est-à-dire le 50 e centile ou deuxième quartile. =QUARTILE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 3) renvoie 9, c’est-à-dire le 75 e centile ou troisième quartile. =QUARTILE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 0) renvoie 14, c’est-à-dire la plus grande valeur value. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FRÉQUENCE » à la page 264 « MAX » à la page 284 « MEDIANE » à la page 286 « MIN » à la page 287 « CENTILE » à la page 252 « RANG.POURCENTAGE » à la page 314 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39« Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RANG La fonction RANG renvoie le rang d’un nombre dans un intervalle de nombres. RANG(nbre-date-dur; nbre-date-dur-collec; plus-grande-valeur-supérieure)  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  plus-grande-valeur-supérieure : valeur facultative indiquant si le rang 1 est attribué à la valeur la plus petite de la collection ou à la plus grande. plus grande valeur inférieure (0, FAUX ou omis): attribue le rang 1 à la plus grande valeur de la collection. plus grande valeur supérieure (1 ou VRAI): attribue le rang 1 à la plus petite valeur de la collection. Remarques d’usage  Les valeurs identiques à l’intérieur de la collection se voient attribuer le même rang, mais elles ont chacune une incidence sur le résultat.  Si la valeur indiquée ne correspond à aucune des valeurs de la collection, la fonction génère une erreur. 312 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 313 Exemples Supposons que le tableau suivant contienne les notes cumulées aux examens du trimestre actuel de vos 20 élèves (sur un total de 100 points possibles). (Les données ont été organisées de cette manière pour les besoins de l’exemple, mais il y a tout lieu de penser qu’elles seraient, au départ, réparties entre 20 rangées distinctes.) =RANG(30; A1:E4; 1) renvoie 1 puisque 30 correspond à la note cumulée la plus basse et que nous avons choisi d’attribuer le rang numéro 1 à la plus petite valeur. =RANG(92; A1:E4; 0) renvoie 2 puisque 92 est la deuxième note cumulée la plus haute et que nous avons choisi d’attribuer le rang numéro 1 à la plus grande valeur. =RANG(91; A1:E4; 1) renvoie 4 puisque deux élèves ont obtenu ex-æquo la deuxième meilleure note. L’ordre est 100, 92, 92 et 91 et les rangs, 1, 2, 2 et 4. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GRANDE.VALEUR » à la page 266 « PETITE.VALEUR » à la page 307 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44RANG.POURCENTAGE La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE renvoie le rang d’une valeur dans une collection sous la forme d’un pourcentage de la collection. RANG.POURCENTAGE(nbre-date-dur-collec; nbre-date-dur; significatif)  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.  significatif : valeur facultative indiquant le nombre de chiffres après la virgule. significatif correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. En cas d’omission, la valeur 3 est utilisée par défaut (x,xxx %). Remarques d’usage  La fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE peut être utilisée pour évaluer le rang d’une valeur au sein de la collection par rapport aux autres valeurs. Elle est calculée en déterminant la position d’un nombre indiqué dans la collection. Par exemple, si une collection donnée contient dix valeurs inférieures à un nombre indiqué et dix valeurs qui lui sont supérieures, la fonction RANG.POURCENTAGE de ce nombre est 50%. Exemple =RANG.POURCENTAGE({5; 6; 9; 3; 7; 11; 8; 2; 14}; 10) renvoie 0,813, puisque sept valeurs s’avèrent plus petites que 10 et seulement deux sont plus grandes. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « FRÉQUENCE » à la page 264 « CENTILE » à la page 252 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 314 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 315 SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS La fonction SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS renvoie la somme des carrés des écarts d’une collection de nombres par rapport à leur moyenne (arithmétique). SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS(valeur-nbre; valeur-nbre; …)  valeur-nbre : valeur numérique. valeur-nbre correspond à un nombre.  valeur-nbre; … : vous pouvez ajouter un ou plusieurs nombres. Remarques d’usage  SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS divise la somme des nombres par le nombre de nombres pour obtenir la moyenne (arithmétique). Les différences (valeurs absolues) entre la moyenne et chaque nombre sont élevées au carré puis ajoutées, et la fonction renvoie la somme totale. Exemple =SOMME.CARRES.ECARTS(1; 7; 19; 8; 3; 9) renvoie 196,833333333333. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 STDEVA La fonction STDEVA renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes, en fonction de la variance empirique (non biaisée). STDEVA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée.  valeur… : valeurs supplémentaires (au moins deux valeurs). Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée.Remarques d’usage  L’utilisation de la fonction STDEVA est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante. Si les valeurs que vous analysez correspondent à l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population, servez-vous de la fonction STDEVPA.  La fonction STDEVA attribue une valeur de 0 à toute valeur texte, une valeur de 0 à la valeur booléenne FAUX et une valeur de 1 à la valeur booléenne VRAI, et elle en tient compte dans le calcul. Les cellules vides sont ignorées. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure de valeurs texte ou de valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, servez-vous de la fonction ECARTYPE.  L’écart-type est la racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VARA. Exemple Supposons que vous ayez installé un capteur de température à Cupertino en Californie. Ce capteur enregistre la température maximale et la température minimale de chaque journée. Par ailleurs, vous avez noté tous les jours au cours desquels vous avez allumé la climatisation de votre appartement. Les données correspondant aux premiers jours figurent dans le tableau ci-dessous et sont utilisées comme échantillon de la population formée par les températures extrêmes (remarquez que ceci n’est qu’un exemple et que cette façon de procéder ne serait pas valide sur le plan statistique). =STDEVA(B2:B13) renvoie 24,8271, c’est-à-dire la dispersion, telle qu’elle est mesurée par la fonction STDEVA, de l’échantillon de températures quotidiennes les plus hautes. Elle dépasse de 15 degrés l’intervalle réel des températures les plus hautes parce que la température « non disponible » se voit attribuer une valeur de zéro. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321 316 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 317 « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 STDEVPA La fonction STDEVPA renvoie l’écart-type, c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs pouvant comprendre du texte et des valeurs booléennes, en fonction de la variance théorique (vraie). STDEVPA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  L’utilisation de la fonction STDEVPA est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées représentent l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population. Si les valeurs que vous analysez ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante, servez-vous de la fonction STDEVA.  La fonction STDEVPA attribue une valeur de 0 à toute valeur texte, une valeur de 0 à la valeur booléenne FAUX et une valeur de 1 à la valeur booléenne VRAI, et elle en tient compte dans le calcul. Les cellules vides sont ignorées. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure de valeurs texte ou de valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, servez-vous de la fonction ECARTYPEP.  L’écart-type est la racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VARPA.Exemple Supposons que vous ayez installé un capteur de température à Cupertino en Californie. Ce capteur enregistre la température maximale et la température minimale de chaque journée. Par ailleurs, vous avez noté tous les jours au cours desquels vous avez allumé la climatisation de votre appartement. Le capteur a cessé de fonctionner après quelques jours, de sorte que le tableau ci-dessous contient la population des températures les plus hautes et les plus basses. =STDEVPA(B2:B13) renvoie 23,7702, c’est-à-dire la dispersion, telle qu’elle est mesurée par la fonction STDEVPA, de l’échantillon de températures quotidiennes les plus hautes. Elle dépasse de 15 degrés l’intervalle réel des températures les plus hautes parce que la température « non disponible » se voit attribuer une valeur de zéro. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « VAR » à la page 321 « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 318 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 319 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TEST.KHIDEUX La fonction TEST.KHIDEUX renvoie la valeur à partir de la distribution khi-deux pour la valeur donnée. TEST.KHIDEUX(valeurs-réelles; valeurs-attendues)  valeurs-réelles : collection comprenant les valeurs déterminées. valeurs-réelles correspond à une collection incluant des nombres.  valeurs-attendues : collection comprenant les valeurs attendues. valeurs-attendues correspond à une collection incluant des nombres. Remarques d’usage  Les degrés de liberté correspondant à la valeur renvoyée sont le nombre de rangs de valeurs-réelles moins 1.  Chaque valeur attendue est calculée en multipliant la somme du rang par la somme de la colonne, puis en divisant le résultat obtenu par le total général. Exemple Prenons le tableau suivant : =TEST.KHIDEUX(A2:B6;A9:B13) renvoie 5,91020074984668E–236. Chaque valeur attendue est calculée en multipliant la somme du rang par la somme de la colonne, puis en divisant le résultat obtenu par le total général. La formule pour la première valeur attendue (cellule A9) est =SOMME(A$2:B$2)*SOMME($A2:$A6)/SOMME($A$2:$B$6). Il est possible d’étendre cette formule à la cellule B9, puis A9:B9 à A13:B13 pour compléter les valeurs attendues. La formule ainsi obtenue pour la valeur attendue finale (cellule B13) est =SOMME(B$2:C$2)*SOMME($A6:$A11)/ SOMME($A$2:$B$6).Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.KHIDEUX » à la page 276 « KHIDEUX.INVERSE » à la page 269 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TEST.STUDENT La fonction TEST.STUDENT renvoie la probabilité associée à un test T de Student selon la fonction de distribution T. TEST.STUDENT(valeurs-échantillon-1; valeurs-échantillon-2; queues; type-test)  valeurs-échantillon-1 : collection comprenant la première collection de valeurs empiriques. valeurs-échantillon-1 correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres.  valeurs-échantillon-2 : collection comprenant la seconde collection de valeurs empiriques. valeurs-échantillon-2 correspond à une collection qui comprend des valeurs numériques.  queues : nombre de queues à renvoyer. une queue (1): renvoie la valeur pour une distribution unilatérale. deux queues (2): renvoie la valeur pour une distribution bilatérale.  type-test : type de test T de Student à effectuer. apparié (1): effectue un test apparié. deux échantillons de variance égale (2): effectue un test sur deux échantillons de variance égale (homoscédastique). deux échantillons de variance différente (3): effectue un test sur deux échantillons de variance différente (hétéroscédastique). 320 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 321 Exemples =TEST.STUDENT({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; {87; 65; 45; 95; 88; 79}; 1; 1) renvoie 0,418946725989974 pour le test unilatéral apparié. =TEST.STUDENT({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; {87; 65; 45; 95; 88; 79}; 2; 1) renvoie 0,837893451979947 pour le test bilatéral apparié. =TEST.STUDENT({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; {87; 65; 45; 95; 88; 79}; 1; 2) renvoie 0,440983897602811 pour le test unilatéral sur deux échantillons de variance égale. =TEST.STUDENT({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; {87; 65; 45; 95; 88; 79}; 2; 2) renvoie 0,881967795205622 pour le test bilatéral sur deux échantillons de variance égale. =TEST.STUDENT({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; {87; 65; 45; 95; 88; 79}; 1; 3) renvoie 0,441031763311189 pour le test unilatéral sur deux échantillons de variance différente. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « LOI.STUDENT » à la page 283 « LOI.STUDENT.INVERSE » à la page 283 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VAR La fonction VAR renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs. VAR(nbre-date; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date : valeur quelconque. nbre-date correspond à un nombre ou à une valeur de date/heure.  nbre-date-dur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date-dur sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  La fonction VAR trouve la variance empirique (non biaisée) en divisant la somme des carrés des écarts des points de données par le nombre des valeurs moins 1. L’utilisation de la fonction VAR est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante. Si les valeurs que vous analysez correspondent à l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population, servez-vous de la fonction VAR.P.  Si vous souhaitez inclure des valeurs texte ou des valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, utilisez la fonction VARA.  La racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VAR est renvoyée par la fonction ECARTYPE. Exemples Supposons que vous ayez fait passer cinq examens à un groupe d’élèves. Vous avez choisi de façon arbitraire cinq élèves pour représenter l’ensemble de ce groupe (remarquez que ceci n’est qu’un exemple et que cette manière de procéder ne serait probablement pas valide sur le plan statistique). Vous pouvez vous servir de la fonction VAR avec les données de l’échantillon pour déterminer l’examen pour lequel la dispersion des notes a été la plus importante. Les résultats renvoyés par les fonctions VAR sont environ 520,00, 602,00, 90,30, 65,20 et 11,20. Ainsi, la dispersion a été la plus importante pour l’examen numéro 2, qui est suivi de près par l’examen numéro 1. Pour les trois autres examens, la dispersion a été faible. Examen 1 Examen 2 Examen 3 Examen 4 Examen 5 Élève 1 75 82 90 78 84 Élève 2 100 90 95 88 90 Élève 3 40 80 78 90 85 Élève 4 80 35 95 98 92 Élève 5 75 82 90 78 84 =VAR(B2:B6) =VAR(C2:C6) =VAR(D2:D6) =VAR(E2:E6) =VAR(F2:F6) Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 322 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 323 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VARA La fonction VARA renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. VARA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  La fonction VARA trouve la variance empirique (non biaisée) en divisant la somme des carrés des écarts des points de données par le nombre des valeurs moins 1.  L’utilisation de la fonction VARA est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante. Si les valeurs que vous analysez correspondent à l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population, servez-vous de la fonction VARPA.  La fonction VARA attribue une valeur de 0 à toute valeur texte, une valeur de 0 à la valeur booléenne FAUX et une valeur de 1 à la valeur booléenne VRAI, et elle en tient compte dans le calcul. Les cellules vides sont ignorées. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure de valeurs texte ou de valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, servez-vous de la fonction VAR.  La racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VARA est renvoyée par la fonction STDEVA.Exemple Supposons que vous ayez installé un capteur de température à Cupertino en Californie. Ce capteur enregistre la température maximale et la température minimale de chaque journée. Par ailleurs, vous avez noté tous les jours au cours desquels vous avez allumé la climatisation de votre appartement. Les données correspondant aux premiers jours figurent dans le tableau ci-dessous et sont utilisées comme échantillon de la population formée par les températures extrêmes (remarquez que ceci n’est qu’un exemple et que cette façon de procéder ne serait pas valide sur le plan statistique). =VARA(B2:B13) renvoie 616,3864, c’est-à-dire la dispersion, telle qu’elle est mesurée par la fonction VARA, de l’échantillon de températures quotidiennes les plus hautes. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 324 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 325 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VAR.P La fonction VAR.P renvoie la variance théorique (vraie), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs. VAR.P(nbre-date; nbre-date-dur…)  nbre-date : valeur quelconque. nbre-date correspond à un nombre ou à une valeur de date/heure.  nbre-date-dur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Si plusieurs valeurs nbre-date sont précisées, elles doivent toutes être du même type. Remarques d’usage  La fonction VAR.P trouve la variance théorique, aussi appelée variance vraie, (par opposition à la variance empirique, aussi appelée variance non biaisée) en divisant la somme des carrés des écarts des points de données par le nombre des valeurs.  L’utilisation de la fonction VAR.P est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées représentent l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population. Si les valeurs que vous analysez ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante, servez-vous de la fonction VAR.  Si vous souhaitez inclure des valeurs texte ou des valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, utilisez la fonction VARPA.  La racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VAR.P est renvoyée par la fonction ECARTYPEP. Exemple Supposons que vous ayez fait passer cinq examens à un groupe d’élèves. Votre classe est très réduite et représente la population totale de vos élèves. Vous pouvez vous servir de la fonction VAR.P avec les données de cette population pour déterminer l’examen pour lequel la dispersion des notes a été la plus importante. Les résultats renvoyés par les fonctions VAR.P sont environ 416,00, 481;60, 72;24, 52,16 et 8;96. Ainsi, la dispersion a été la plus importante pour l’examen numéro 2, qui est suivi de près par l’examen numéro 1. Pour les trois autres examens, la dispersion a été faible. Examen 1 Examen 2 Examen 3 Examen 4 Examen 5 Élève 1 75 82 90 78 84 Élève 2 100 90 95 88 90 Élève 3 40 80 78 90 85 Élève 4 80 35 95 98 92 Élève 5 75 82 90 78 84 =VAR.P(B2:B6) =VAR.P(C2:C6) =VAR.P(D2:D6) =VAR.P(E2:E6) =VAR.P(F2:F6)Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321 « VARA » à la page 323 « VARPA » à la page 326 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 VARPA La fonction VARPA renvoie la variance empirique (non biaisée), c’est-à-dire une mesure de la dispersion, d’une collection de valeurs en incluant les valeurs texte et les valeurs booléennes. VARPA(valeur; valeur…)  valeur : valeur quelconque. valeur peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type.  valeur… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs valeurs supplémentaires. Toutes les valeurs numériques doivent être du même type. Vous ne pouvez pas mélanger des nombres, des dates et des valeurs de durée. Remarques d’usage  La fonction VARPA trouve la variance théorique, aussi appelée variance vraie, (par opposition à la variance empirique, aussi appelée variance non biaisée) en divisant la somme des carrés des écarts des points de données. 326 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiquesChapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 327  L’utilisation de la fonction VARPA est appropriée lorsque les valeurs indiquées représentent l’intégralité de la collection ou de la population. Si les valeurs que vous analysez ne représentent qu’un échantillon d’une population plus importante, servez-vous de la fonction VARA.  La fonction VARPA attribue une valeur de 0 à toute valeur texte, une valeur de 0 à la valeur booléenne FAUX et une valeur de 1 à la valeur booléenne VRAI, et elle en tient compte dans le calcul. Les cellules vides sont ignorées. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure de valeurs texte ou de valeurs booléennes dans le calcul, servez-vous de la fonction VAR.  La racine carrée de la variance renvoyée par la fonction VARPA est renvoyée par la fonction STDEVPA. Exemple Supposons que vous ayez installé un capteur de température à Cupertino en Californie. Ce capteur enregistre la température maximale et la température minimale de chaque journée. Par ailleurs, vous avez noté tous les jours au cours desquels vous avez allumé la climatisation de votre appartement. Le capteur a cessé de fonctionner après quelques jours, de sorte que le tableau ci-dessous contient la population des températures les plus hautes et les plus basses. =VARPA(B2:B13) renvoie 565,0208, c’est-à-dire la dispersion, telle qu’elle est mesurée par la fonction VARPA, de l’échantillon de températures quotidiennes les plus hautes. Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ECARTYPE » à la page 261 « STDEVA » à la page 315 « ECARTYPEP » à la page 263 « STDEVPA » à la page 317 « VAR » à la page 321328 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques « VARA » à la page 323 « VAR.P » à la page 325 « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ZTEST La fonction ZTEST renvoie la probabilité unilatérale du test Z. ZTEST(nbre-date-dur-collec; nbre-date-dur; écart-type)  nbre-date-dur-collec : collection de valeurs. nbre-date-dur-collec correspond à une collection qui comprend des nombres, des valeurs de date/heure ou des durées. Toutes les valeurs doivent être du même type.  nbre-date-dur : valeur quelconque. nbre-date-dur correspond à un nombre, une valeur de date/heure ou une durée.nbre-date-dur correspond à la valeur à tester.  écart-type : valeur facultative relative à l’écart-type de la population. écart-type correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Remarques d’usage  Le test Z est un test statistique qui permet de déterminer si la différence entre une moyenne empirique et la moyenne théorique est suffisamment importante pour être significative sur le plan statistique. Le test Z est principalement utilisé avec les tests normalisés.  Si l’argument écart-type est omis, l’écart-type supposé de l’échantillon est utilisé. Exemple =ZTEST({57; 75; 66; 98; 92; 80}; 70; 9) renvoie 0,0147281928162857.Rubriques associées : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CENTREE.REDUITE » à la page 253 « Liste des fonctions statistiques » à la page 244 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 Chapitre 10 Fonctions statistiques 329330 Les fonctions de texte permettent d’utiliser des chaînes de caractères. Liste des fonctions de texte Ces fonctions de manipulation de texte ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « CAR » (page 332) La fonction CAR renvoie le caractère qui correspond à un code de caractère Unicode décimal. « CHERCHE » (page 333) La fonction CHERCHE renvoie la position de départ d’une chaîne à l’intérieur d’une autre sans tenir compte de la casse et en autorisant les jokers. « CNUM » (page 334) La fonction CNUM renvoie une valeur numérique même si l’argument se présente sous la forme de texte. « CODE » (page 335) La fonction CODE renvoie le code numérique Unicode décimal du premier caractère d’une chaîne indiquée. « CONCATENER » (page 336) La fonction CONCATENER réunit (l’on dit qu’elle « concatène ») des chaînes. « CTXT » (page 337) La fonction CTXT arrondit un nombre conformément au nombre indiqué de chiffres après la virgule, puis renvoie le résultat sous forme de chaîne. 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 331 Fonction Description « DEVISE » (page 338) La fonction DEVISE renvoie une chaîne qui a la forme d’une somme en euros à partir d’un nombre donné. « DROITE » (page 339) La fonction DROITE renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre indiqué de caractères à partir de l’extrémité droite d’une chaîne donnée. « EPURAGE » (page 340) La fonction EPURAGE supprime du texte la plupart des caractères non imprimables les plus courants (codes caractères Unicode allant de 0 à 31). « EXACT » (page 341) La fonction EXACT renvoie VRAI si les chaînes d’arguments sont identiques du point de vue de leur casse et de leur contenu. « GAUCHE » (page 341) La fonction GAUCHE renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre indiqué de caractères à partir de l’extrémité gauche d’une chaîne donnée. « MAJUSCULE » (page 342) La fonction MAJUSCULE renvoie une chaîne qui est entièrement en majuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. « MINUSCULE » (page 343) La fonction MINUSCULE renvoie une chaîne qui est entièrement en minuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. « NBCAR » (page 343) La fonction NBCAR renvoie le nombre de caractères d’une chaîne. « NOMPROPRE » (page 344) La fonction NOMPROPRE renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle la première lettre de chaque mot est en majuscules et tous les autres caractères en minuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. « REMPLACER » (page 345) La fonction REMPLACER renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle un nombre indiqué de caractères dans une chaîne donnée a été remplacé par une nouvelle chaîne. « REPT » (page 346) La fonction REPT renvoie une chaîne qui contient une chaîne donnée répétée un nombre indiqué de fois. « STXT » (page 346) La fonction STXT renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre donné de caractères d’une chaîne à partir d’une position indiquée.Fonction Description « SUBSTITUE » (page 347) La fonction SUBSTITUE renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle les caractères indiqués d’une chaîne donnée ont été remplacés par une autre chaîne. « SUPPRESPACE » (page 348) La fonction SUPPRESPACE renvoie une chaîne donnée dont les espaces supplémentaires ont été supprimés. « T » (page 349) La fonction T renvoie le texte qui se trouve dans une cellule. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. « TROUVE » (page 349) La fonction RECHERCHER renvoie la position de départ d’une chaîne à l’intérieur d’une autre. CAR La fonction CAR renvoie le caractère qui correspond à un code de caractère Unicode décimal. CAR(code-du-nombre)  code-du-nombre : nombre pour lequel vous souhaitez renvoyer le caractère Unicode correspondant. code-du-nombre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 32, inférieur ou égal à 65 535 et différent de 127. Si elle contient une fraction décimale, celle-ci est ignorée. Remarquez que le caractère 32 est le caractère correspondant à l’espace. Remarques d’usage  Les codes numériques Unicode ne sont pas tous associés à un caractère imprimable.  La fenêtre Caractères spéciaux, accessible depuis le menu Édition, vous permet d’afficher des jeux de caractères complets et les codes qui correspondent à ces derniers.  La fonction CODE renvoie le code numérique correspondant à un caractère indiqué. Exemples =CAR(98,6) renvoie « b » qui est représenté par le code 98. La fraction décimale du nombre est ignorée. =CODE("b") renvoie 98. 332 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 333 Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CODE » à la page 335 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CHERCHE La fonction CHERCHE renvoie la position de départ d’une chaîne à l’intérieur d’une autre sans tenir compte de la casse et en autorisant les jokers. CHERCHE(rechercher-chaîne; chaîne-source; position-départ)  rechercher-chaîne : chaîne à retrouver. rechercher-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  position-départ : argument facultatif représentant la position, dans la chaîne indiquée, à laquelle l’action doit commencer. position-départ correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de caractères présents dans la valeur chaîne-source. Remarques d’usage  Les jokers sont autorisés dans rechercher-chaîne. Vous pouvez utiliser un astérisque (*) dans rechercher-chaîne pour indiquer que ce caractère peut correspondre à plusieurs caractères ou bien vous pouvez vous servir d’un point d’interrogation (?) pour indiquer que ce caractère peut correspondre à un seul caractère quelconque de la chaîne-source, au moment de la recherche.  Indiquer position-départ permet de commencer la recherche de la chaîne à rechercher ( rechercher-chaîne) à l’intérieur plutôt qu’au début de la chaîne-source. Cela s’avère particulièrement utile si la chaîne-source peut contenir plusieurs fois la chaîne à rechercher et que vous souhaitez déterminer la position de départ d’une occurrence autre que la première. Si le paramètre position-départ est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 1.  Pour que la recherche tienne compte de la casse, utilisez la fonction RECHERCHER.Exemples =CHERCHE("ra"; "abracadabra") renvoie 3 ; la première occurrence de la chaîne « ra » commence au troisième caractère de « abracadabra ». =CHERCHE("ra"; "abracadabra"; 5) renvoie 10, c’est-à-dire la position de la première occurrence de la chaîne « ra » à partir de la position 5. =CHERCHE("*placement"; "Remplacement") renvoie 1 puisque l’astérisque au début de la chaîne à rechercher correspond à tous les caractères qui précèdent « placement ». =CHERCHE("*placement"; "joker") génère une erreur puisque la chaîne « placement » n’existe pas. =CHERCHE("?placement"; "Remplacement") renvoie 3 puisque le point d’interrogation correspond uniquement au caractère qui se trouve juste avant « placement ». =CHERCHE("p*t"; "Remplacement") renvoie 4 puisque l’astérisque correspond à tous les caractères qui se trouvent entre « p » et « t ». =CHERCHE("~?"; "Remplacement ? Non.") renvoie 14 puisque le tilde signifie que le caractère qui le suit (le point d’interrogation dans le cas présent) doit être interprété littéralement, c’est-à-dire non pas comme un joker, et le point d’interrogation étant le 14 e caractère. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « EXACT » à la page 341 « TROUVE » à la page 349 « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CNUM La fonction CNUM renvoie une valeur numérique même si l’argument se présente sous la forme de texte. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. CNUM(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. 334 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 335 Remarques d’usage  Vous n’aurez jamais à utiliser la fonction CNUM dans un nouveau tableau puisque les nombres qui apparaissent dans du texte sont automatiquement convertis.  Seul le texte formaté est converti. Par exemple, si vous saisissez la chaîne « 100,001 € » dans une cellule, le format par défaut affiche uniquement deux chiffres (100,00 €). Si elle utilise cette cellule comme référence, la fonction CNUM renvoie 100, c’est-à-dire la valeur du texte formaté, et non pas 100,001.  S’il n’est pas possible de renvoyer l’argument sous la forme d’une valeur numérique (parce qu’il ne contient aucun nombre), la fonction génère une erreur. Exemples =CNUM("22") renvoie le nombre 22. =CNUM(DROITE("L’année 1953"; 2)) renvoie le nombre 53. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CODE La fonction CODE renvoie le code numérique Unicode décimal du premier caractère d’une chaîne indiquée. CODE(code-de-chaîne)  code-de-chaîne : chaîne de caractères pour laquelle il faut renvoyer la valeur Unicode. code-de-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Seul le premier caractère est utilisé. Remarques d’usage  La fenêtre Caractères spéciaux, accessible depuis le menu Édition, vous permet d’afficher des jeux de caractères complets et les codes qui correspondent à ces derniers.  Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction CAR pour faire l’inverse de la fonction CODE, c’est-à- dire convertir un code numérique en caractère texte.Exemples =CODE("A") renvoie 65, c’est-à-dire le code de caractère pour la lettre « A » majuscule. =CODE("abc") renvoie 97, qui correspond à la lettre « a » minuscule. =CAR(97) renvoie « a ». =CODE(A3) renvoie 102, qui correspond à la lettre « f » minuscule. =CODE("???") renvoie « 19 977 », c’est-à-dire la valeur Unicode décimale du premier caractère . Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CAR » à la page 332 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CONCATENER La fonction CONCATENER réunit (concatène) des chaînes. CONCATENER(chaîne; chaîne…)  chaîne : chaîne quelconque. chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  chaîne… : vous pouvez ajouter une ou plusieurs chaînes supplémentaires. Remarques d’usage  Pour concaténer des chaînes, vous pouvez aussi vous servir de l’opérateur de chaîne & à la place de la fonction CONCATENER. Exemples Si la cellule A1 contient Lorem et que la cellule B1 contient Ipsum, =CONCATENER(B1; " "; A1) renvoie « Ipsum Lorem ». =CONCATENER("a"; "b"; "c") renvoie « abc ». ="a"&"b"&"c" renvoie « abc ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 336 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 337 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 CTXT La fonction CTXT arrondit un nombre conformément au nombre indiqué de chiffres après la virgule, puis renvoie le résultat sous forme de chaîne. CTXT(nbre; chiffres; aucune-virgule)  nbre : nombre à utiliser. nbre correspond à un nombre.  chiffres : argument facultatif représentant le nombre de chiffres après, ou avant, la virgule auquel il faut arrondir. décimales correspond à un nombre. Au moment du calcul, les nombres à mi-unités sont arrondis à l’unité supérieure. Ainsi, si 0,5 doit être arrondi à l’entier, le résultat donne 1. De même, si le nombre 10,005 doit être arrondi au centième le plus proche, le résultat 10,01 est renvoyé. Un nombre négatif indique qu’il faut arrondir à gauche de la virgule (par exemple, arrondir aux centaines ou aux milliers).  aucune-virgule : argument facultatif indiquant si des séparateurs de positions doivent être utilisés à gauche de la virgule dans le nombre obtenu. utilise des virgules (FAUX, 0 ou omis): inclut des séparateurs de positions dans le résultat. aucune-virgule (VRAI ou 1): n’inclut pas de séparateurs de positions dans le résultat. Exemples =CTXT(6789,123; 2) renvoie « 6 789,12 ». =CTXT(6789,123; 1; 1) renvoie « 6789,1 ». =CTXT(6789,123; –2) renvoie « 6 800 ». =CTXT(12,4; 0) renvoie « 12 ». =CTXT(12,5; 0) renvoie « 13 ». =CTXT(4; –1) renvoie « 0 ». =CTXT(5; –1) renvoie « 10 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « DEVISE » à la page 338« Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DEVISE La fonction DEVISE renvoie une chaîne qui a la forme d’une somme en euros à partir d’un nombre donné. DEVISE(nbre; chiffres)  nbre : nombre à utiliser. nbre correspond à un nombre.  chiffres : argument facultatif représentant le nombre de chiffres après, ou avant, la virgule auquel il faut arrondir. décimales correspond à un nombre. Lorsqu’on arrondit au nombre indiqué de chiffres avant ou après la virgule, les règles standard de l’arithmétique s’appliquent, à savoir : si le chiffre supprimé le plus important est 5 ou un chiffre plus élevé, le résultat doit être arrondi au chiffre supérieur. Un nombre négatif indique qu’il faut arrondir à gauche de la virgule (par exemple, arrondir aux centaines ou aux milliers). Exemples =DEVISE(2323;124) renvoie « 2 323,12 € ». =DEVISE(2323;125) renvoie « 2 323,13 € ». =DEVISE(99,554; 0) renvoie « 100 € ». =DEVISE(12; 3) renvoie « 12 000 € ». =DEVISE(–12; 3) renvoie « (12 000 €) », les parenthèses indiquant qu’il s’agit d’une somme négative . =DEVISE(123; –1) renvoie « 120 € ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « CTXT » à la page 337 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 338 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 339 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DROITE La fonction DROITE renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre indiqué de caractères à partir de l’extrémité droite d’une chaîne donnée. DROITE(chaîne-source; longueur-chaîne)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  longueur-chaîne : argument facultatif représentant la longueur voulue de la chaîne renvoyée. longueur-chaîne correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Remarques d’usage  Si la valeur longueur-chaîne est supérieure ou égale à la longueur de chaîne-source, la chaîne renvoyée est égale à chaîne-source. Exemples =DROITE("un deux trois"; 2) renvoie « is ». =DROITE("abc") renvoie « c ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GAUCHE » à la page 341 « STXT » à la page 346 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44EPURAGE La fonction EPURAGE supprime du texte la plupart des caractères non imprimables les plus courants (codes caractères Unicode allant de 0 à 31). EPURAGE(texte)  texte : texte duquel vous souhaitez supprimer des caractères qui ne s’impriment pas. texte peut correspondre à une valeur de n’importe quel type. Remarques d’usage  Elle peut être utile si vous collez du texte à partir d’une autre application contenant des points d’interrogation, espaces, carrés et autres caractères indésirables ou inattendus.  Il existe certains caractères non imprimables moins courants qui ne peuvent être supprimés à l’aide de la fonction EPURAGE (il s’agit des codes caractère 127, 129, 141, 143, 144 et 157). Pour les supprimer, vous pour utiliser la fonction SUBSTITUE afin de les remplacer par un code compris entre 0 et 31 avant d’exécuter la fonction EPURAGE.  Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction SUPPRESPACE pour supprimer les espaces en trop dans du texte. Exemple Imaginons que vous copiez ce que vous pensez être le texte « a b c d e f » dans une autre application et que vous le colliez dans la cellule A1, mais que le texte qui apparaît à l’écran correspond à « a b c ? ?d e f ». Vous pouvez tenter d’utiliser la fonction EPURAGE pour supprimer les caractères non voulus : =EPURAGE(A1) renvoie « a b c d e f ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SUBSTITUE » à la page 347 « SUPPRESPACE » à la page 348 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 340 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 341 EXACT La fonction EXACT renvoie VRAI si les chaînes d’arguments sont identiques du point de vue de leur casse et de leur contenu. EXACT(chaîne-1; chaîne-2)  chaîne-1 : première chaîne. chaîne-1 est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  chaîne-2 : seconde chaîne. chaîne-2 est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Exemples =EXACT("toledo"; "toledo") renvoie VRAI puisque tous les caractères et les majuscules sont identiques. =EXACT("Toledo"; "toledo") renvoie FAUX puisque les majuscules des deux chaînes ne sont pas identiques. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « TROUVE » à la page 349 « CHERCHE » à la page 333 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 GAUCHE La fonction GAUCHE renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre indiqué de caractères à partir de l’extrémité gauche d’une chaîne donnée. GAUCHE(chaîne-source; longueur-chaîne)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  longueur-chaîne : argument facultatif représentant la longueur voulue de la chaîne renvoyée. longueur-chaîne correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Remarques d’usage  Si la valeur longueur-chaîne est supérieure ou égale à la longueur de chaîne-source, la chaîne renvoyée est égale à chaîne-source.Exemples =GAUCHE("trois quatre cinq"; 2) renvoie « tr ». =GAUCHE("abc") renvoie « a ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « STXT » à la page 346 « DROITE » à la page 339 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MAJUSCULE La fonction MAJUSCULE renvoie une chaîne qui est entièrement en majuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. MAJUSCULE(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Exemples =MAJUSCULE("a b c") renvoie « A B C ». =MAJUSCULE("Premier") renvoie « PREMIER ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MINUSCULE » à la page 343 « NOMPROPRE » à la page 344 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 342 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 343 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 MINUSCULE La fonction MINUSCULE renvoie une chaîne qui est entièrement en minuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. MINUSCULE(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Exemples =MINUSCULE("MAJUSCULE") renvoie « majuscule ». =MINUSCULE("Minuscule") renvoie « minuscule ». =MINUSCULE("MIXtE") renvoie « mixte ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « NOMPROPRE » à la page 344 « MAJUSCULE » à la page 342 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NBCAR La fonction NBCAR renvoie le nombre de caractères d’une chaîne. NBCAR(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Remarques d’usage  L’opération inclut tous les espaces, nombres et caractères.Exemples =NBCAR("12345") renvoie 5. =NBCAR(" abc def ") renvoie 9, la somme des six lettres plus les espaces avant, après et séparant les caractères indiqués. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 NOMPROPRE La fonction NOMPROPRE renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle la première lettre de chaque mot est en majuscules et tous les autres caractères en minuscules, quelle que soit la casse des caractères de la chaîne indiquée. NOMPROPRE(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Remarques d’usage  Tout caractère venant juste après un caractère non alphabétique, excepté l’apostrophe (’), est traité comme la première lettre d’un mot. Par exemple, tout caractère figurant après un trait d’union est converti en majuscules. Exemples =NOMPROPRE("lorem ipsum") renvoie « Lorem Ipsum ». =NOMPROPRE("lorem’s ip-sum") renvoie « Lorem’s Ip-Sum ». =NOMPROPRE("1a23 b456") renvoie « 1A23 B456 ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « MINUSCULE » à la page 343 « MAJUSCULE » à la page 342 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 344 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 345 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 REMPLACER La fonction REMPLACER renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle un nombre indiqué de caractères dans une chaîne donnée a été remplacé par une nouvelle chaîne. REMPLACER(chaîne-source; position-départ; remplacer-longeur; nouvelle-chaîne)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  position-départ : position dans la chaîne indiquée à laquelle l’action doit commencer. position-départ correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si l’argument position-départ est supérieur au nombre de caractères de chaîne-source, nouvelle-chaîne est ajouté à la fin de chaîne-source.  remplacer-longeur : nombre de caractères à remplacer. remplacer-longeur correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Si la valeur remplacer-longeur est supérieure ou égale à la longueur de chaîne-source, la chaîne renvoyée est égale à nouvelle-chaîne.  nouvelle-chaîne : texte qui se substitue à la partie à remplacer de la chaîne donnée. nouvelle-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit pas obligatoirement être de la même longueur que le texte remplacé. Exemple =REMPLACER("formulaires de candidat reçus"; 16; 8; "François") renvoie « formulaires de François reçus ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « SUBSTITUE » à la page 347 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44REPT La fonction REPT renvoie une chaîne qui contient une chaîne donnée répétée un nombre indiqué de fois. REPT(chaîne-source; répétition-nbre)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  répétition-nbre : nombre de répétitions de la chaîne donnée. répétition-nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 0. Exemples =REPT("*"; 5) renvoie « ***** ». =REPT("ah"; 3) renvoie « ahahah ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 STXT La fonction STXT renvoie une chaîne qui comprend un nombre donné de caractères d’une chaîne à partir d’une position indiquée. STXT(chaîne-source; position-départ; longueur-chaîne)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  position-départ : position dans la chaîne indiquée à laquelle l’action doit commencer. position-départ correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de caractères présents dans la valeur chaîne-source.  longueur-chaîne : longueur de la chaîne de caractères renvoyée. longueur-chaîne correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Remarques d’usage  Si la valeur longueur-chaîne est supérieure ou égale à la longueur de chaîne-source, la chaîne renvoyée est égale à chaîne-source, à partir de position-départ. 346 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 347 Exemples =STXT("lorem ipsum dolor sit amet"; 7; 5) renvoie « ipsum ». =STXT("1234567890"; 4; 3) renvoie « 456 ». =STXT("raccourcir"; 5; 20) renvoie « ourcir ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « GAUCHE » à la page 341 « DROITE » à la page 339 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SUBSTITUE La fonction SUBSTITUE renvoie une chaîne dans laquelle les caractères indiqués d’une chaîne donnée ont été remplacés par une autre chaîne. SUBSTITUE(chaîne-source; chaîne-existante; nouvelle-chaîne; occurrence)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  chaîne-existante : chaîne à remplacer à l’intérieur de la chaîne indiquée. chaîneexistante est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  nouvelle-chaîne : texte qui se substitue à la partie à remplacer de la chaîne donnée. nouvelle-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Elle ne doit pas obligatoirement être de la même longueur que le texte remplacé.  occurrence : valeur facultative indiquant l’occurrence à remplacer. occurrence correspond à un nombre facultatif, supérieur ou égal à 1. Si cette valeur est supérieure au nombre de fois où la chaîne-existante apparaît dans la chaîne-source, aucun remplacement n’a lieu. Si elle est omise, toutes les occurrences de la chaîneexistante à l’intérieur de la chaîne-source sont alors remplacées par la nouvelle-chaîne. Remarques d’usage  Vous pouvez remplacer des caractères individuels, des mots entiers ou des chaînes de caractères à l’intérieur de mots.Exemples =SUBSTITUE("a b c d e f"; "b"; "B") renvoie « a B c d e f ». =SUBSTITUE("a a b b b c"; "a"; "A"; 2) renvoie « a A b b b c ». =SUBSTITUE("a a b b b c"; "b"; "B") renvoie « a a B B B c ». =SUBSTITUE("aaabbccc"; "bc"; "BC"; 2) renvoie « aaabbccc ». Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « REMPLACER » à la page 345 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SUPPRESPACE La fonction SUPPRESPACE renvoie une chaîne donnée dont les espaces supplémentaires ont été supprimés. SUPPRESPACE(chaîne-source)  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. Remarques d’usage  Elle supprime tous les espaces avant le premier caractère, tous les espaces après le dernier caractère et tous les espaces en double entre les caractères pour ne conserver que des espaces simples entre les mots. Exemple =SUPPRESPACE(" espaces espaces espaces ") renvoie “espaces espaces espaces” (les espaces de début et de fin ont été supprimés). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 348 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texteChapitre 11 Fonctions de texte 349 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 T La fonction T renvoie le texte qui se trouve dans une cellule. Cette fonction a été incluse afin d’assurer la compatibilité avec les tableaux importés d’autres tableurs. T(cellule)  cellule : référence à une seule cellule de tableau. cellule est une valeur de référence à une seule cellule pouvant contenir n’importe quelle valeur ou être vide. Remarques d’usage  Si la cellule ne contient aucune chaîne de caractères, T renvoie une chaîne vide. Exemples Si la cellule A1 contient « texte » alors que la cellule B1 est vide : =T(A1) renvoie « texte » =T(B1) ne renvoie rien. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 TROUVE La fonction TROUVE renvoie la position de départ d’une chaîne à l’intérieur d’une autre. TROUVE(rechercher-chaîne; chaîne-source; position-départ)  rechercher-chaîne : chaîne à retrouver. rechercher-chaîne est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne.  chaîne-source : chaîne quelconque. chaîne-source est une valeur exprimée sous forme de chaîne. position-départ : argument facultatif représentant la position, dans la chaîne indiquée, à laquelle l’action doit commencer. position-départ correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1 et inférieur ou égal au nombre de caractères présents dans la valeur chaîne-source. Remarques  La casse est différenciée et les espaces sont comptés lors de la recherche. Les jokers ne sont pas autorisés. Pour utiliser des jokers ou ignorer la casse dans votre recherche, servez-vous de la fonction CHERCHE.  Indiquer position-départ permet de commencer la recherche de la chaîne à rechercher ( rechercher-chaîne) à l’intérieur plutôt qu’au début de la chaîne-source. Cela s’avère particulièrement utile si la chaîne-source peut contenir plusieurs fois la chaîne à rechercher et que vous souhaitez déterminer la position de départ d’une occurrence autre que la première. Si le paramètre position-départ est omis, la valeur supposée par défaut correspond à 1. Exemples =TROUVE("e"; "bien sûr que oui") renvoie 3 (« e » est le troisième caractère de la chaîne « bien sûr que oui »). =TROUVE("e"; "bien sûr que oui"; 8) renvoie 12 (le « e » de « que » est le premier « e » trouvé à partir du caractère 8, qui est le « r » de « sûr »). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « EXACT » à la page 341 « CHERCHE » à la page 333 « Liste des fonctions de texte » à la page 330 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 350 Chapitre 11 Fonctions de texte351 Les fonctions trigonométriques vous aident à travailler avec des angles et leurs composants. Liste des fonctions trigonométriques Ces fonctions trigonométriques ont été intégrées à iWork pour que vous puissiez les utiliser dans des tableaux. Fonction Description « ACOS » (page 352) La fonction ACOS renvoie le cosinus inverse (l’arccosinus) d’un nombre. « ACOSH » (page 353) La fonction ACOSH renvoie le cosinus hyperbolique inverse (l’arc-cosinus hyperbolique) d’un nombre. « ASIN » (page 354) La fonction ASIN renvoie l’arc-sinus (le sinus inversé) d’un nombre. « ASINH » (page 355) La fonction ASINH renvoie le sinus hyperbolique inverse d’un nombre. « ATAN » (page 355) La fonction ATAN renvoie la tangente inverse (l’arc-tangente) d’un nombre. « ATAN2 » (page 356) La fonction ATAN2 renvoie l’angle, par rapport à l’axe des x positifs, de la ligne passant par l’origine et le point indiqué. « ATANH » (page 357) La fonction ATANH renvoie la tangente hyperbolique inverse d’un nombre. « COS » (page 358) La fonction COS renvoie le cosinus d’un angle exprimé en radians. « COSH » (page 359) La fonction COSH renvoie le cosinus hyperbolique d’un nombre. 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesFonction Description « DEGRES » (page 359) La fonction DEGRES renvoie le nombre de degrés dans un angle exprimé en radians. « RADIANS » (page 360) La fonction RADIANS renvoie le nombre de radians dans un angle exprimé en degrés. « SIN » (page 361) La fonction SIN renvoie le sinus d’un angle exprimé en radians. « SINH » (page 362) La fonction SINH renvoie le sinus hyperbolique d’un nombre. « TAN » (page 363) La fonction TAN renvoie la tangente d’un angle exprimé en radians. « TANH » (page 364) La fonction TANH renvoie la tangente hyperbolique d’un nombre. ACOS La fonction ACOS renvoie le cosinus inverse (l’arc-cosinus) d’un nombre. ACOS(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre compris entre – 1 et 1. Remarques d’usage  La fonction ACOS nécessite une valeur de cosinus et renvoie l’angle correspondant. L’angle résultant est une valeur en radians comprise entre 0 et p (pi). Pour voir l’angle résultant en degrés plutôt qu’en radians, enveloppez cette fonction dans la fonction DEGRES comme ceci =DEGRES(ACOS(nbre)). Exemples =ACOS(RACINE(2)/2) renvoie 0,785398163397448, qui est approximativement égal à p/4. =ACOS(0,54030230586814) renvoie 1. =DEGRES(ACOS(,5)) renvoie 60, la mesure en degrés d’un angle ayant un cosinus de 0,5. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ACOSH » à la page 353 « COS » à la page 358 « COSH » à la page 359 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 352 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 353 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ACOSH La fonction ACOSH renvoie le cosinus hyperbolique inverse (l’arc-cosinus hyperbolique) d’un nombre. ACOSH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Exemples =ACOSH(10,0676619957778) renvoie 3. =ACOSH(COSH(5)) renvoie 5. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ACOS » à la page 352 « COS » à la page 358 « COSH » à la page 359 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44ASIN La fonction ASIN renvoie l’arc-cosinus (cosinus inversé) d’un nombre. ASIN(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur ou égal à 1. Remarques d’usage  La fonction ASIN nécessite un sinus et renvoie l’angle correspondant. Le résultat est exprimé en radians, dans la plage de – pi/2 à + pi/2. Pour voir l’angle résultant en degrés plutôt qu’en radians, enveloppez cette fonction dans la fonction DEGRES comme ceci =DEGRES(ASIN(nbre)). Exemples =ASIN(0,841470985) renvoie 1, la mesure en radians (approximativement 57,3 degrés) de l’angle ayant un sinus de 0,8411470984807897. =DEGRES(ASIN(0,5)) renvoie 30, la mesure en degrés de l’angle ayant un sinus de 0,5. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ASINH » à la page 355 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « SIN » à la page 361 « SINH » à la page 362 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 354 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 355 ASINH La fonction ASINH renvoie le sinus hyperbolique inverse d’un nombre. ASINH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =ASINH(27,2899171971277) renvoie 4. =ASINH(SINH(1)) renvoie 1. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ASIN » à la page 354 « SIN » à la page 361 « SINH » à la page 362 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ATAN La fonction ATAN renvoie la tangente inverse (l’arc-tangente) d’un nombre. ATAN(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  La fonction ATAN nécessite une tangente et renvoie l’angle correspondant, exprimé en radians dans la plage de -pi/2 à +pi/2. Pour voir l’angle résultant en degrés plutôt qu’en radians, enveloppez cette fonction dans la fonction DEGRES comme ceci =DEGRES(ATAN(nbre)). Exemples =ATAN(1) renvoie la mesure d’angle 0,785398163 radians (45 degrés), qui a une tangente de 1. =DEGRES(ATAN(1)) renvoie 45.Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « ATANH » à la page 357 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « TAN » à la page 363 « TANH » à la page 364 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ATAN2 La fonction ATAN2 renvoie l’angle, par rapport à l’axe des x positifs, de la ligne passant par l’origine et le point indiqué. ATAN2(point-x; point-y)  point-x : coordonnée x du point passant par la ligne. point-x correspond à un nombre.  point-y : coordonnée y du point passant par la ligne. point-y correspond à un nombre. Remarques d’usage  L’angle représente une valeur exprimée en radians comprise entre – pi et + pi. Pour voir l’angle résultant en degrés plutôt qu’en radians, enveloppez cette fonction dans la fonction DEGRES comme ceci =DEGRES(ATAN2(point-x; point-y)). Exemples =ATAN2(1; 1) renvoie 0,78539816 radians (45 degrés), l’angle du segment de ligne de l’origine au point (1, 1). =DEGRES(ATAN2(5; 5)) renvoie 45. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ATAN » à la page 355 356 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 357 « ATANH » à la page 357 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « TAN » à la page 363 « TANH » à la page 364 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 ATANH La fonction ATANH renvoie la tangente hyperbolique inverse d’un nombre. ATANH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre supérieur à – 1 et inférieur à 1. Exemples =ATANH(0,995054753686731) renvoie 3. =ATANH(TANH(2)) renvoie 2. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ATAN » à la page 355 « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « TAN » à la page 363 « TANH » à la page 364 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44COS La fonction COS renvoie le cosinus d’un angle exprimé en radians. COS(radian-angle)  radian-angle : angle exprimé en radians. radian-angle correspond à un nombre. Bien qu’il puisse s’agir de n’importe quelle valeur, cette valeur se situe généralement dans la plage de – p à + p. Remarques d’usage  Pour renvoyer un angle en degrés, utilisez la fonction DEGRES (pour convertir les radians en degrés) avec cette fonction, comme ceci =DEGRES(COS(radian-angle)). Exemples =COS(1) renvoie 0,540302306, le cosinus d’1 radian (approximativement 57,3 degrés). =COS(RADIANS(60)) renvoie 0,5, le cosinus de 60 degrés. =COS(PI()/3) renvoie 0,5, p/3 radians (60 degrés). =COS(PI()) renvoie – 1, le cosinus de p radians (180 degrés). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ACOS » à la page 352 « ACOSH » à la page 353 « COSH » à la page 359 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « SIN » à la page 361 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 358 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 359 COSH La fonction COSH renvoie le cosinus hyperbolique d’un nombre. COSH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =COSH(0) renvoie 1. =COSH(1) renvoie 1,543. =COSH(5) renvoie 74,21. =COSH(10) renvoie 11 013,233. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ACOS » à la page 352 « ACOSH » à la page 353 « COS » à la page 358 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 DEGRES La fonction DEGRES renvoie le nombre de degrés dans un angle exprimé en radians. DEGRES(radian-angle)  radian-angle : angle exprimé en radians. radian-angle correspond à un nombre. Bien qu’il puisse s’agir de n’importe quelle valeur, cette valeur se situe généralement dans la plage de – 2 p à + 2 p. Exemples =DEGRES(PI()) renvoie 180 (p radians = 180 degrés). =DEGRES(1) renvoie 57,2957795130823, qui est approximativement le nombre de degrés par radian. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’« ACOS » à la page 352 « ASIN » à la page 354 « ATAN » à la page 355 « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « COS » à la page 358 « SIN » à la page 361 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 RADIANS La fonction RADIANS renvoie le nombre de radians dans un angle exprimé en degrés. RADIANS(degré-angle)  degré-angle : angle exprimé en degrés. degré-angle correspond à un nombre. Bien qu’il puisse s’agir de n’importe quelle valeur, cette valeur se situe généralement dans la plage de – 360 à + 360. Remarques d’usage  Cette fonction est pratique si vous voulez utiliser un angle exprimé en degrés avec l’une des fonctions géométriques standard car ces dernières attendent un angle exprimé en radians. Enveloppez l’argument, exprimé en degrés, dans cette fonction, comme ceci, par exemple, =COS(RADIANS(degré-angle). Exemples =RADIANS(90) renvoie 1,5708 (90 degrés est approximativement égal à 1,5708 radians). =RADIANS(57,2957795130823) renvoie 1 (1 radian est approximativement égal à 57,296 degrés). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ACOS » à la page 352 360 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 361 « ASIN » à la page 354 « ATAN » à la page 355 « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « COS » à la page 358 « SIN » à la page 361 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SIN La fonction SIN renvoie le sinus d’un angle exprimé en radians. SIN(radian-angle)  radian-angle : angle exprimé en radians. radian-angle correspond à un nombre. Bien qu’il puisse s’agir de n’importe quelle valeur, cette valeur se situe généralement dans la plage de – p à + p. Remarques d’usage  Pour renvoyer un angle en degrés, utilisez la fonction DEGRES (pour convertir les radians en degrés) avec cette fonction, comme ceci =DEGRES(SIN(radian-angle)). Exemples =SIN(1) renvoie 0,841470985, le sinus de 1 radian (approximativement 57,3 degrés). =SIN(RADIANS(30)) renvoie 0,5, le sinus de 30 degrés. =SIN(PI()/2) renvoie 1, le sinus de p/2 radians (90 degrés). Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ASIN » à la page 354 « ASINH » à la page 355 « COS » à la page 358« DEGRES » à la page 359 « SINH » à la page 362 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 SINH La fonction SINH renvoie le sinus hyperbolique d’un nombre. SINH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =SINH(0) renvoie 0. =SINH(1) renvoie 1,175. =SINH(5) renvoie 74,203. =SINH(10) renvoie 11 013,233. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ASIN » à la page 354 « ASINH » à la page 355 « SIN » à la page 361 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 362 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriquesChapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques 363 TAN La fonction TAN renvoie la tangente d’un angle exprimé en radians. TAN(radian-angle)  radian-angle : angle exprimé en radians. radian-angle correspond à un nombre. Bien qu’il puisse s’agir de n’importe quelle valeur, cette valeur se situe généralement dans la plage de –pi à +pi. Remarques d’usage  La tangente est le rapport entre le sinus et le cosinus.  Pour renvoyer un angle en degrés, utilisez la fonction DEGRES (pour convertir les radians en degrés) avec cette fonction, comme ceci =DEGRES(TAN(radian-angle)). Exemples =TAN(1) renvoie 1,557407725, la tangente de 1 radian (approximativement 57,3 degrés). =TAN(RADIANS(45)) renvoie 1, la tangente d’un angle de 45 degrés. =TAN(3*PI()/4) renvoie –1. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ATAN » à la page 355 « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « ATANH » à la page 357 « COS » à la page 358 « DEGRES » à la page 359 « SIN » à la page 361 « TANH » à la page 364 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44TANH La fonction TANH renvoie la tangente hyperbolique d’un nombre. TANH(nbre)  nbre : valeur numérique. nbre correspond à un nombre. Exemples =TANH(0) renvoie 0. =TANH(1) renvoie 0,762. =TANH(5) renvoie 0,999909. =TANH(10) renvoie 0,999999996. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « ATAN » à la page 355 « ATAN2 » à la page 356 « ATANH » à la page 357 « TAN » à la page 363 « Liste des fonctions trigonométriques » à la page 351 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 « Collage d’exemples de l’aide » à la page 44 364 Chapitre 12 Fonctions trigonométriques365 Exemples détaillés et rubriques complémentaires illustrant l’utilisation de certaines fonctions parmi les plus complexes. Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires inclus Le tableau suivant vous indique où retrouver les exemples détaillés et des rubriques complémentaires illustrant certaines fonctions parmi les plus complexes en s’appuyant sur des exemples concrets. Si vous désirez consulter un exemple ou en savoir plus sur Consultez cette rubrique Les définitions et les détails des arguments s’illustrant dans les fonctions financières « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 Les fonctions sur les valeurs temporelles monétaires (VTM) « Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire » à la page 375 Les fonctions VTM s’articulant autour de flux de trésorerie périodiques fixés et de taux d’intérêt fixés « Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers » à la page 376 Les fonctions VTM pouvant calculer des valeurs relatives à des flux de trésorerie irréguliers (périodiques variables) « Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers » à la page 377 La fonction pouvant être la plus utile pour répondre à des doutes sur le plan financier courant « Choix d’une fonction pour résoudre des questions courantes d’ordre financier » à la page 379 L’utilisation de fonctions financières pour créer un tableau d’amortissement d’un prêt « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesSi vous désirez consulter un exemple ou en savoir plus sur Consultez cette rubrique Les différentes fonctions pour arrondir des nombres « En savoir plus sur les arrondis » à la page 383 L’association de fonctions logiques et manipulant des informations pour élaborer une formule plus puissante « Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information » à la page 386 Mécanisme des conditions et usage de jokers avec les conditions « Usage de conditions et de jokers » à la page 389 L’utilisation de fonctions statistiques pour analyser les résultats d’une étude « Exemple de résultats d’une étude » à la page 391 Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières De nombreux arguments sont communs entre les fonctions financières apparentées. Cette rubrique fournit des informations concernant ces arguments. Les arguments de date (tels que l’émission, l’échéance et le règlement) ne sont pas inclus. Ceux ne s’illustrant que dans une seule fonction financière ne sont également pas inclus. 366 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 367 taux-annuel Les bons et autres titres de créance à taux fixe et générant des intérêts, présentent un coupon fixé ou un taux d’intérêt annuel servant à déterminer les versements des intérêts périodiques. taux-annuel sert à représenter le taux d’intérêt annuel, qu’il soit appelé taux d’intérêt nominal ou taux d’intérêt annuel. taux-intérêt-nominal est indiqué en tant que nombre décimal représentant le taux d’intérêt nominal annuel. Dans certaines fonctions, taux-intérêt-nominal peut adopter la valeur 0 (si le titre ne verse aucun intérêt périodique), mais taux-intérêt-nominal ne peut pas être négatif. Supposons que vous possédez un titre dont la valeur nominale est de 1 000 000 € et qu’il vous rapporte un intérêt annuel de 4,5 % de sa valeur nominale. taux-intérêt-nominal correspond alors à 0,045. La fréquence de versement n’importe pas. rendement-annuel Les bons et autres titres de créance à l’escompte et générant des d’intérêts présentent un rendement calculé sur le taux d’intérêt du coupon et sur le cours du bon. rendement-annuel est indiqué en tant que nombre décimal représentant le rendement annuel du titre, généralement fixé en pourcentage. rendement-annuel doit être supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous étudiez la possibilité d’acheter un bon donné. Lorsque le cours d’un bon descend, son rendement augmente. À l’inverse, lorsque son cours monte, son rendement décroît. Votre courtier vérifie l’état du cours et vous informe que le bon qui vous intéresse présente d’après son cours un taux d’intérêt nominal de 3,25 % et un rendement annuel de 4,5 % (le bon se négocie à un prix réduit). La valeur de l’argument rendement-annuel correspond alors à 0,045. flux-trésorerie Les annuités, les prêts et les investissements présentent des flux de trésorerie. Un des flux de trésorerie constitue la somme de départ versée ou reçue, le cas échéant. D’autres flux de trésorerie correspondent aux autres encaissements ou paiements réalisés à un moment donné. L’argument flux-de-trésorerie est indiqué sous forme de nombre, adoptant généralement le format d’une devise. Les montants perçus s’expriment sous forme de nombres positifs, alors que les montants payés, de nombres négatifs. Supposons que vous envisagiez d’acquérir une maison en ville, la louer pour un certain temps, puis la revendre. Le versement de départ pour l’achat (lequel peut consister en un acompte et au paiement des frais), les remboursements du prêt, les frais de réparation et de maintenance, la publication des annonces et autres frais associés, constituent des paiements (c’est-à-dire des flux de trésorerie négatifs). Le montant des locations perçus des occupants, les crédits de taxes et d’impôts variés et le montant perçu au moment de la revente, constituent des encaissements (c’est-à-dire des flux de trésorerie positifs). montant Le coût de départ de l’actif à amortir correspond habituellement au prix d’achat, taxes, livraison et mise en service comprises. Il se peut que certains crédits d’impôt puissent venir en déduction de ce montant. L’argument montant est indiqué sous forme de nombre, généralement formaté en tant que devise. montant doit être supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez une nouvelle photocopieuse numérique pour votre office. Le prix d’achat de la photocopieuse s’élève à 2 625 €, taxes comprises. Le vendeur vous facture 100 € pour la livrer et la mettre en service. La photocopieuse est prévue de fonctionner pour une période de 4 ans, à l’issue de laquelle sa valeur résiduelle est estimée à 400 €. Le paramètre montant correspond alors à 2 725 €.échéance Voir rubrique abordée sur échéance. La seule différence réside dans le fait que les fonctions utilisant échéance nécessitent l’indication de l’argument et ne considèrent aucune valeur par défaut s’il n’est pas renseigné. base-journalière Plusieurs usages permettent de compter le nombre de jours dans un mois et dans une année servant de base au calcul d’un intérêt sur un prêt ou un investissement. L’argument base-journalière sert à indiquer le mode de décompte des jours pour un investissement ou un prêt donné. base-journalière est souvent influencé par les usages sur le marché auquel l’investissement ou le prêt se rapporte et le type de ce dernier. En outre, base-journalière peut être indiqué dans des documents faisant référence à un prêt. base-journalière correspond à un argument modal. Il s’exprime sous la forme du chiffre 0, 1, 2, 3 ou 4.  La valeur 0 indique que, pour les besoins du calcul de l’intérêt, chaque mois complet compte 30 jours et que chaque année pleine compte 360 jours, en s’appuyant sur la méthode NASD pour les mois comptant un 31 e jour. Cette méthode est communément appelée convention 30/360. 0 (selon la convention 30/360) constitue la valeur par défaut. Selon la méthode NASD, si la date de départ (par exemple, la date de règlement) tombe le 31, elle est alors considérée comme si elle tombait le 30. Si la date en question tombe le dernier jour de février, elle n’est alors pas ajustée puisque le mois de février compte moins de 30 jours. Si la date de fin (par exemple, l’échéance) tombe le 31 et que la date de départ est antérieure au 30 du même mois, cette première est alors vue comme le premier jour du mois suivant. Dans le cas contraire, elle est considérée comme étant le 30 du même mois, entraînant une base de calcul de 0 jour.  La valeur 1 indique que le nombre de jours réels sert de base à chaque mois complet et chaque année. Cette méthode est généralement connue sous le nom de convention réels/réels.  La valeur 2 stipule que le nombre de jours réels sert de base à chaque mois complet mais que chaque année compte 360 jours. Cette méthode est communément appelée convention réels/360.  La valeur 3 spécifie que le nombre de jours réels sert de base à chaque mois complet et que chaque année compte 365 jours. Cette méthode est généralement connue sous le nom de convention réels/365.  Enfin, la valeur 4 indique que chaque mois complet compte 30 jours et que chaque année pleine compte 360 jours, en s’appuyant sur la méthode européenne pour les mois comptant un 31 e jour. Cette méthode est communément appelée convention 30E/360. Dans le cadre de la méthode européenne, le 31 du mois est toujours vu comme étant le 30 du mois en question. Février compte toujours 30 jours de sorte que si le dernier jour de février tombe vraiment le 28, il est néanmoins pris en compte comme le 30 du mois. Supposons que vous cherchiez à déterminer l’intérêt d’un bon émis par une société américaine. La plupart des bons de ce type s’appuient sur la méthode des 30/360 pour calculer les intérêts, de sorte que l’argument base-journalière correspond à la valeur 0, à savoir la valeur par défaut. Supposons à présent que vous vouliez calculer l’intérêt d’un bon du trésor américain. Ces bons versent généralement un intérêt d’après le nombre de jours naturels de chaque mois et de chaque année ; l’argument base-journalière prend alors la valeur de 1. facteur-amort Pour certaines formules, vous pouvez indiquer le taux d’amortissement accéléré (en plus de l’amortissement linéaire). Le paramètre facteur-amort est alors utilisé pour préciser le taux annuel voulu d’amortissement. facteur-amort s’exprime sous forme de nombre décimal ou de pourcentage (à l’aide du signe pourcentage). Supposons que vous achetiez un nouvel ordinateur. Votre fiscaliste vous apprend qu’il est possible de l’amortir selon le mode de calcul accéléré. Vous décidez par conséquent de faire appel au taux d’amortissement de 150 % en amortissement linéaire ; l’argument facteur-amort équivaut donc à 1,5. 368 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 369 période-amort Certaines fonctions renvoient le montant de l’amortissement sur une période précise. C’est l’argument période-amort qui permet d’indiquer cette période. période-amort s’exprime sous forme de nombre représentant la période d’amortissement voulue en s’appuyant sur la même périodicité (par exemple, mensuelle, trimestrielle ou annuelle) pour l’argument vie. Supposons que vous achetiez une nouvelle photocopieuse numérique pour votre office. Le prix d’achat de la photocopieuse s’élève à 2 625 €, taxes comprises. Le vendeur vous facture 100 € pour la livrer et la mettre en service. La photocopieuse est prévue de fonctionner pour une période de 4 ans, à l’issue de laquelle sa valeur résiduelle est estimée à 400 €. Si vous cherchez à déterminer l’amortissement relatif à la troisième année, vous devez indiquer la valeur 3 pour l’argument périodeamort. taux-int-effectif Les annuités et les investissements présentent un taux d’intérêt effectif, lequel se calcule à partir du taux nominal (fixe ou coupon) et le nombre de paiements des intérêts par an. taux-int-effectif s’exprime sous forme de nombre décimal supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous possédiez un titre dont la valeur nominale est de 1,000,000 € et qu’il vous rapporte un intérêt annuel de 4,5 % de sa valeur nominale, tous les trimestres, soit un taux effectif d’environ 4,58 %. L’argument taux-int-effectif correspond alors à 0,0458. Voir aussi la description de taux-nominal et de nbre-périodes-année. pér-fin Certaines fonctions renvoient le principal ou l’intérêt pour une série de paiements donnée. C’est dans ce cas l’argument pér-fin qui permet d’indiquer le dernier versement à inclure à la valeur renvoyée. Voir aussi la rubrique traitant de pér-début. pér-fin s’exprime sous forme de nombre supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200 000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixés à 1 070,45 € et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100 000 €. Si vous cherchez à connaître le montant total des intérêts versés la troisième année, vous devez indiquer la valeur 25 pour pér-début et 36 pour pér-fin. estimation Il est nécessaire d’indiquer une estimation du résultat attendu dans le cas de certaines fonctions financières. Pour cela, l’argument estimation s’exprime sous forme de nombre décimal. Par exemple, 13 % s’indique sous la forme 0,13. Si une perte est prévue, estimation peut prendre une valeur négative. Au cas où estimation est omis, la valeur par défaut correspond à 0,10. Si vous n’êtes pas en mesure d’évaluer le résultat attendu et que la valeur par défaut n’entraîne pas de résultat probant, retentez avec une estimation positive supérieure. Si cela ne donne toujours rien, réessayez avec une estimation négative inférieure.fréquence Un investissement peut verser parfois un intérêt périodique. L’argument fréquence permet dans ce cas d’indiquer la périodicité du paiement de l’intérêt. fréquence correspond au nombre 1, 2 ou 4.  La valeur 1 indique que l’investissement verse un intérêt annuel.  La valeur 2 indique que l’investissement verse un intérêt semestriel.  Enfin, la valeur 4 indique que l’investissement verse un intérêt trimestriel. Si vous évaluez un bon d’une entreprise privée et qui verse un intérêt trimestriel, vous devez indiquer la valeur 4 pour l’argument fréquence. Si vous évaluez un bon du Trésor et qui verse un intérêt semestriel, l’argument fréquence doit alors correspondre à 2. valeur-future Une valeur capitalisée constitue un flux de trésorerie versé à la fin de la période d’investissement ou du prêt ou correspondant au montant résiduel à l’issue du dernier versement. L’argument valeur-future est indiqué sous forme de nombre, adoptant généralement le format d’une devise. valeur-future correspondant à un flux de trésorerie, les sommes perçues s’expriment sous forme de nombres positifs et celles payées, des nombres négatifs. Supposons que vous envisagiez d’acquérir une maison en ville, la louer pour un certain temps, puis la revendre. Le prix de vente estimé constitue une valeur-future positive. Dans le cas d’une location à bail d’un véhicule, prévoyant l’option de l’acquérir à un prix indiqué au terme du bail, le montant du paiement correspond à une valeur-future négative. Enfin, en ce qui concerne un prêt sur 10 ans à la fin duquel un versement résiduel reste dû, ce paiement résiduel correspond également à une valeurfuture négative. montant-investissements Le montant de départ investi dans un bon s’exprime à l’aide d’montant-investissements. L’argument montant-investissements est indiqué sous forme de nombre, généralement formaté en tant que devise. montant-investissements doit être supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez un bon d’un montant de 800 €. La valeur d’montant-investissements correspond alors à 800 €. 370 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 371 vie Les ressources s’amortissent sur une période donnée, connue sous le nom de « durée d’amortissement » ou de « durée de vie utile attendue ». Dans un but purement comptable, la durée de vie utile attendue d’un actif est généralement celle utilisée pour l’amortissement, alors que, pour d’autres fins (telles que le calcul d’un crédit d’impôt), la durée d’amortissement peut être dictée par des règles ou des pratiques. vie s’exprime sous forme de nombre supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez une nouvelle photocopieuse numérique pour votre office. Le prix d’achat de la photocopieuse s’élève à 2 625 €, taxes comprises. Le vendeur vous facture 100 € pour la livrer et la mettre en service. La photocopieuse est prévue de fonctionner pour une période de 4 ans, à l’issue de laquelle sa valeur résiduelle est estimée à 400 €. Le paramètre vie correspond alors à 4. taux-nominal Les annuités et les investissements présentent un taux d’intérêt, lequel se calcule à partir du taux nominal effectif et le nombre de périodes par an pour le calcul de l’intérêt composé. taux-nominal s’exprime sous forme de nombre décimal supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous possédiez un titre dont la valeur nominale est de 1,000,000 € et qu’il vous rapporte un intérêt annuel de 4,5 % de sa valeur nominale, tous les trimestres, soit un taux effectif d’environ 4,58 %. La valeur de l’argument taux-nominal correspond alors à 0,045. Voir aussi la description de taux-int-effectif et de nbre-périodes-année. nbre-périodes Le nombre de période (à savoir, l’argument nbre-périodes) correspond aux périodes totales pour un flux de trésorerie répétitif ou la durée d’un prêt ou de la période d’investissement. nbre-périodes s’exprime sous forme de nombre en s’appuyant sur la même périodicité (par exemple, mensuelle, trimestrielle ou annuelle) que celle des arguments associés utilisés par la fonction. Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200 000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixes et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100 000 €. nbre-périodes revient alors à 120 (soit 12 paiements mensuels sur 10 ans). Si vous investissez à présent vos économies dans un certificat de dépôt dont le terme est à 5 ans et dont les intérêts sont composés tous les trimestres, indiquez la valeur 20 pour l’argument nbre-périodes (en d’autres termes, 4 périodes trimestrielles composées pendant 5 ans).nbre-périodes-année Le calcul des taux d’intérêt effectif et nominal dépend du nombre de périodes composées par an. L’argument nbre-périodes-année permet d’indiquer ce nombre de périodes. nbre-périodes-année correspond à un nombre supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous ayez acheté un certificat de dépôt, versant un intérêt composé trimestriel tous les ans. Si vous cherchez à déterminer le taux d’intérêt effectif, vous devez indiquer la valeur 4 pour l’argument nbre-périodes-année. Voir aussi la description de taux-int-effectif et de taux-nominal. valeur-nominale La valeur nominale d’un titre constitue habituellement sa valeur faciale ou à échéance. L’argument valeur-nominale est indiqué sous forme de nombre, adoptant généralement le format d’une devise. valeur-nominale correspond souvent à un nombre tel que 100, 1 000 ou 1 000 000. Supposons que vous étudiez la possibilité d’acheter un bon d’une entreprise privée. La brochure du bon mentionne que chaque bon émis présente une valeur faciale à l’échéance de 1 000 €. Ce sont ces 1 000 € qui correspondent donc à la valeur nominale du bon. paiement Un paiement constitue un flux de trésorerie périodique fixe, perçu ou payé, sur la durée d’un investissement ou d’un prêt. L’argument paiement est indiqué sous forme de nombre, adoptant généralement le format d’une devise. paiement correspondant à un flux de trésorerie, les sommes perçues s’expriment sous forme de nombres positifs et celles payées, des nombres négatifs. paiement comprend souvent les éléments appelés principal et intérêt, mais n’inclut généralement pas d’autres montants. Supposons que vous envisagiez d’acquérir une maison en ville, la louer pour un certain temps, puis la revendre. Le montant du paiement mensuel d’une hypothèque correspond à un paiement négatif. Le montant d’une rente versée chaque mois correspond également à un paiement mais de valeur positive. période Certaines fonctions renvoient la valeur d’un principal ou d’un intérêt sur une période précise. C’est l’argument période qui permet d’indiquer la période voulue. période s’exprime sous forme de nombre supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200 000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixés à 1 070,45 € et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100 000 €. Si vous désirez connaître le montant de l’intérêt du premier paiement la troisième année, vous devez passer la valeur 25 à l’argument période, les versements s’effectuant tous les mois. 372 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 373 taux-actualisation-périodique Le taux d’escompte constitue le taux d’intérêt représentant le rendement recherché pour déterminer la valeur (ou l’escompte) d’une série de flux de trésorerie. taux-actualisation-périodique correspond à un nombre et doit être saisi soit sous la forme d’un nombre décimal (par exemple 0,08), soit d’un pourcentage (par exemple, 8 %). Il doit être indiqué en s’appuyant sur la même périodicité que pour les flux de trésorerie. Par exemple, si les flux de trésorerie sont mensuels et le taux d’escompte annuel souhaité est de 8 %, taux-actualisationpériodique doit être indiqué sous la forme de 0,00667 ou 0,667 % (0,08 divisé par 12). Supposons que vous étudiez la possibilité d’acquérir une activité commerciale. Dans le cadre de votre évaluation, vous cherchez à déterminer les flux de trésorerie attendus tous les mois par l’activité commerciale ainsi que le prix d’achat demandé et le prix de revente futur estimé. Vous décidez, en comparant l’étude à d’autres options d’opportunités d’investissement et de prises de risques, que vous n’investirez que si le rendement annuel des flux de trésorerie nets s’élève au moins à 18 %. Vous devez dans ce cas informer l’argument taux-actualisation-périodique par la valeur 0,015 (c’est-à-dire 0,18/12, puisque les flux de trésorerie sont mensuels). taux-périodique Dans certains cas, en étudiant une série de flux de trésorerie, un investissement ou un prêt, il peut s’avérer nécessaire de connaître le taux d’intérêt de chaque période. Ce taux correspond au tauxpériodique. taux-périodique s’exprime sous forme de nombre décimal en s’appuyant sur la même périodicité (par exemple, mensuelle, trimestrielle ou annuelle) que d’autres arguments (nbre-périodes ou paiement). Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200 000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixes et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100 000 €. taux-périodique revient alors à 0,005 (soit le taux annuel divisé par 12 paiements mensuels). Si vous investissez à présent vos économies dans un certificat de dépôt dont le terme est à 5 ans, dont le taux d’intérêt annuel nominal est de 4,5 % et dont les intérêts sont composés tous les trimestres, indiquez la valeur 0,0125 pour l’argument tauxpériodique (en d’autres termes le taux annuel divisé par 4 périodes trimestrielles composées). valeur-actualisée Une valeur actualisée constitue un flux de trésorerie perçu ou payé en début de période d’investissement ou de prêt. L’argument valeur-actualisée est indiqué sous forme de nombre, adoptant généralement le format d’une devise. valeur-actualisée correspondant à un flux de trésorerie, les sommes perçues s’expriment sous forme de nombres positifs et celles payées, des nombres négatifs. Supposons que vous envisagiez d’acquérir une maison en ville, la louer pour un certain temps, puis la revendre. Le versement de départ pour l’achat (lequel peut consister en un acompte et en l’acquittement de frais) constitue une valeur-actualisée de valeur négative. Le montant principal de départ d’un prêt hypothécaire sur une maison représente également une valeur-actualisée mais cette fois positive.prix Le prix d’achat constitue le montant réglé pour acquérir un bon ou tout autre titre productif d’intérêts ou titre de créance. Le prix d’achat n’inclut pas les intérêts courus achetés avec le titre. L’argument prix s’exprime sous forme de nombre représentant le montant payé pour 100 € de valeur nominale (prix d’achat/valeur nominale x 100). prix doit être supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous possédiez un titre possédant une valeur nominale de 1 000 000 €. Si vous versez 965 000 € au moment de l’achat du titre, à l’exception des intérêts courus le cas échéant, vous devez indiquer la valeur 96,50 pour l’argument prix (c’est-à-dire 965 000 €/1 000 000 € x 100). remboursement Les bons et autres titres de créance productifs d’intérêts présentent généralement un prix de remboursement fixé. Ce prix correspond au montant à recevoir à l’échéance du titre de créance. L’argument remboursement s’exprime sous forme de nombre représentant le montant à recevoir pour 100 € de valeur nominale (prix de remboursement/valeur nominale x 100). Souvent, remboursement correspond à 100, c’est-à-dire que le prix de remboursement du titre est égal à sa valeur nominale. valeur doit être supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous possédiez un titre présentant une valeur nominale de 1 000 000 € et pour lequel vous devez recevoir 1 000 000 € à l’échéance. remboursement doit donc prendre la valeur 100 (à savoir, 1 000 000 €/1 000 000 x 100) car la valeur nominale et le prix de remboursement sont identiques, lequel cas s’avère courant. Supposons en outre que l’émetteur de ce titre propose de vous rembourser le titre avant qu’il arrive à échéance et vous offre 1 025 000 € en cas de remboursement anticipé d’un an. vous devez alors indiquer la valeur 102,50 à l’argument remboursement (c’est-à-dire 1 025 000 €/1 000 000 € x 100). amortissement comptable Les actifs possèdent souvent une valeur résiduelle à la fin de leur durée d’amortissement ou de leur durée de vie utile attendue. C’est la valeur de l’amortissement comptable. L’argument amortissement comptable est indiqué sous forme de nombre, généralement formaté en tant que devise. amortissement comptable peut avoir une valeur nulle, mais jamais négative. Supposons que vous achetiez une nouvelle photocopieuse numérique pour votre office. Le prix d’achat de la photocopieuse s’élève à 2 625 €, taxes comprises. Le vendeur vous facture 100 € pour la livrer et la mettre en service. La photocopieuse est prévue de fonctionner pour une période de 4 ans, à l’issue de laquelle sa valeur résiduelle est estimée à 400 €. Le paramètre amortissement comptable correspond alors à 400 €. 374 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 375 pér-début Certaines fonctions renvoient le principal ou l’intérêt pour une série de paiements donnée. C’est dans ce cas l’argument pér-début qui permet d’indiquer le premier versement à inclure à la valeur renvoyée. Voir aussi la rubrique traitant de pér-fin. pér-début s’exprime sous forme de nombre supérieur à 0. Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200 000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixés à 1 070,45 € et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100 000 €. Si vous cherchez à connaître le montant total des intérêts versés la troisième année, vous devez indiquer la valeur 25 pour pér-début et 36 pour pér-fin. échéance Les paiements peuvent être planifiés pour tous se réaliser en début ou en fin de période. C’est l’argument échéance qui indique le moment du versement au cours de la période. échéance correspond à un argument modal. Il peut prendre la valeur numérique 0 ou 1.  La valeur 0 précise que le règlement est considéré comme étant effectué en fin de chaque période. 0 constitue d’ailleurs la valeur par défaut.  La valeur 1 indique pour sa part que le règlement est considéré comme étant réalisé en début de période. Supposons que vous achetiez une maison. L’hypothécaire vous propose un prêt sur 10 ans dont le solde de départ est de 200,000 €, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 6,0 %, des versements mensuels fixes et un solde à refinancer à l’échéance de 100,000 €. échéance revient alors à 0 (soit la valeur par défaut) puisque les règlements sont effectués à la fin de chaque mois. Si vous possédez un appartement que vous louez et que le loyer est versé le premier de chaque mois, la valeur d’échéance correspond alors à 1, indiquant ainsi un paiement en début de période mensuelle. Choix de la valeur temporelle à utiliser pour une fonction monétaire Cette rubrique compile des informations complémentaires concernant les fonctions utilisées pour résoudre les problèmes de valeurs temporelles monétaires. Les problèmes de valeurs temporelles monétaires, ou de VTM, impliquent des flux de trésorerie en plus de la durée et des taux d’intérêt. Cette rubrique contient plusieurs parties. « Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers » à la page 376 aborde les fonctions VTM utilisées en association avec des flux de trésorerie réguliers, des durées et des taux d’intérêt fixes. « Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers » à la page 377 concerne les fonctions VTM faisant appel à des flux de trésorerie irréguliers ou des intervalles de temps non linéaires, ou encore les deux.« Choix d’une fonction pour résoudre des questions courantes d’ordre financier » à la page 379 traite d’un certain nombre de problèmes de VTM courants (tels que le choix de la fonction à utiliser pour le calcul d’un intérêt sur un compte d’épargne) ainsi que les fonctions en œuvre pour résoudre le problème. Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers Les fonctions principales en œuvre avec des flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers (tels que les paiements d’un montant fixe et les flux de trésorerie à intervalles constants) et les taux d’intérêt fixes sont interconnectés. Fonction et objectif Arguments utilisés par la fonction La fonction « VC » (page 159) vous permet de déterminer la valeur capitalisée (c’est-à-dire la valeur d’un élément dans le futur) qu’une série de flux de trésorerie aura, en prenant en compte certains autres facteurs tels que le taux d’intérêt. La fonction résout la valeur de l’argument valeurfuture. taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; paiement; valeuractualisée; échéance La fonction « NPM » (page 129) est prévue pour calculer le nombre de périodes nécessaires pour rembourser un prêt ou pour recevoir une annuité, en tenant compte d’autres facteurs tels que le taux d’intérêt. La fonction résout la valeur de l’argument nbre-périodes. taux-périodique; paiement; valeur-actualisée; valeur-future; échéance La fonction « VPM » (page 163) sert à déterminer le montant nécessaire pour le paiement d’un prêt ou le versement d’une annuité, en tenant compte d’autres facteurs tels que le taux d’intérêt. La fonction résout la valeur de l’argument paiement. taux-périodique, nbre-périodes, valeur-actualisée, valeur-future, échéance La fonction « VA » (page 152) vous permet de déterminer la valeur actualisée (c’est-à-dire la valeur actuelle) qu’une série de flux de trésorerie représente, en prenant en compte certains autres facteurs tels que le taux d’intérêt. La fonction résout la valeur de l’argument valeur-actualisée. taux-périodique; nbre-périodes; paiement; valeurfuture; échéance La fonction « TAUX » (page 141) sert à déterminer le taux d’intérêt périodique d’un prêt ou d’une annuité, en s’appuyant sur d’autres facteurs tels que le nombre de périodes composant le prêt ou l’annuité. La fonction résout la valeur de l’argument taux-périodique. nbre-périodes; paiement; valeur-actualisée; valeurfuture; échéance; estimation 376 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 377 Tel qu’il est illustré dans le présent tableau, ces fonctions VTM résolvent chacune, et renvoient la valeur de, l’un des cinq principaux arguments lorsque le problème à résoudre implique des flux de trésorerie périodiques réguliers et des taux d’intérêt fixes. En outre, les fonctions « INTPER » (page 121) et « PRINCPER » (page 131) permettent de résoudre les composants des intérêts et principal relatifs au paiement d’un prêt donné ou d’une annuité indiquée, et les fonctions « CUMUL. INTER » (page 107) et « CUMUL.PRINCPER » (page 109) servent à déterminer l’intérêt et le principal d’une série de paiements consécutifs pour un prêt ou une annuité. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers » à la page 377 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers Certains problèmes de VTM font état de flux de trésorerie périodiques irréguliers, où ces flux se constatent régulièrement mais dont le montant varie. D’autres problèmes impliquent néanmoins des flux de trésorerie irréguliers dans leur fréquence.Fonction et objectif Arguments utilisés par la fonction La fonction « TRI » (page 148) permet de déterminer un taux périodique de sorte que la valeur actualisée nette d’une série de flux de trésorerie potentiellement irréguliers, réalisés à des intervalles de temps réguliers, est égale à 0. Cet élément de calcul est communément appelé le taux de retour interne (TRI). Le TRI résout la valeur de l’argument taux-périodique. flux-intervalle; estimation flux-intervalle correspond à un ensemble indiqué de flux de trésorerie pouvant inclure implicitement un paiement, une valeur-actualisée et une valeur-future. La fonction « TRIM » (page 150) permet de déterminer un taux périodique de sorte que la valeur actualisée nette d’une série de flux de trésorerie potentiellement irréguliers, réalisés à des intervalles de temps réguliers, est égale à 0. TRIM diffère de TRI dans le sens qu’elle autorise des flux de trésorerie positifs et négatifs à s’escompter à un taux différent. Cet élément de calcul est communément appelé le taux de retour interne modifié (TRIM). TRIM résout la valeur de l’argument taux-périodique. flux-intervalle, taux-finance, taux-réinvestissement flux-intervalle correspond à un ensemble indiqué de flux de trésorerie pouvant inclure implicitement un paiement, une valeur-actualisée et une valeur-future. taux-finance et taux-réinvestissement sont des cas spécifiques à taux-périodique. La fonction « VAN » permet de déterminer la valeur actualisée d’une série de flux de trésorerie pouvant être irréguliers mais réalisés à intervalles réguliers. Celle-ci est communément appelée la valeur actualisée nette. VAN résout la valeur de l’argument valeur-actualisée. taux-périodique; flux-trésorerie; flux-trésorerie;… flux-trésorerie, flux-trésorerie… correspond à une série donnée d’une ou de plusieurs flux de trésorerie pouvant inclure implicitement un paiement, une valeur-actualisée et une valeurfuture. Rubriques connexes : Pour connaître les fonctions connexes et pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous à l’ « Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers » à la page 376 « Arguments communs utilisés dans les fonctions financières » à la page 366 « Liste des fonctions financières » à la page 102 « Types de valeur » à la page 39 « Éléments des formules » à la page 15 « Utilisation du clavier et de la souris pour créer et modifier des formules » à la page 28 378 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 379 Choix d’une fonction pour résoudre des questions courantes d’ordre financier Cette rubrique décrit certaines des questions courantes qu’il peut être intéressant de se poser. Elle répertorie en outre les différentes fonctions financières qui peuvent s’avérer utiles. Voici donc les questions d’ordre financier que vous pouvez vous poser et les fonctions prévues pour y répondre. Des usages plus complexes des fonctions financières sont décrits dans les rubriques « Flux de trésorerie et durées réguliers » à la page 376, « Flux de trésorerie et durées irréguliers » à la page 377 et « Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt » à la page 381. Si vous voulez savoir Cette fonction peut vous être utile Épargne Le taux d’intérêt effectif d’un investissement ou d’un compte d’épargne versant un intérêt régulièrement « TAUX.EFFECTIF » (page 144) Combien un CD peut valoir à l’échéance « VC » (page 159). Notez que le paiement prend la valeur 0. Le taux d’intérêt nominal d’un CD où l’émetteur aura indiqué le « taux effectif » « TAUX.NOMINAL » (page 147) Combien d’années sont nécessaires pour économiser un montant donné, en connaissant les dépôts mensuels effectués sur un compte d’épargne « NPM » (page 129). Notez que la valeur-actualisée correspond alors au montant déposé au début et qu’elle peut être 0. Quel montant est nécessaire chaque mois pour atteindre un objectif d’épargne à l’issue d’un nombre d’années donné « VPM » (page 163). Notez que la valeur-actualisée correspond alors au montant déposé au début et qu’elle peut être 0. Prêts L’intérêt payé sur un prêt pendant la troisième année « CUMUL.INTER » (page 107) Le principal payé sur un prêt pendant la troisième année « CUMUL.PRINCPER » (page 109) L’intérêt inclus dans le 36 e remboursement d’un prêt « INTPER » (page 121) Le principal inclus dans le 36 e remboursement « PRINCPER » (page 131) Investissement sur des bons Si vous voulez savoir Cette fonction peut vous être utile Le montant de l’intérêt à ajouter au prix d’achat d’un bon « INTERET.ACC » (page 118) ou « INTERET.ACC. MAT » (page 120) Le nombre de coupons payés entre l’achat d’un bon et son échéance « NB.COUPONS » (page 124) Le taux d’escompte annuel d’un bon vendu avec un escompte par rapport à son prix de remboursement et qui ne verse aucun intérêt (souvent connu sous le nom de « bon à coupon zéro » « TAUX.ESCOMPTE » (page 145) Le taux d’intérêt effectif annuel d’un bon qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à échéance (pas de paiement périodique, mais le bon présente bel et bien un taux d’intérêt nominal) « TAUX.INTERET » (page 146) Le prix d’achat attendu d’un bon versant un intérêt périodique, un bon vendu à un prix réduit et qui ne verse aucun intérêt ou un bon qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance « PRIX.TITRE » (page 133), « VALEUR. ENCAISSEMENT » (page 154) et « PRIX.TITRE. ECHEANCE » (page 134) Le montant reçu sur un bon qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à échéance (aucun paiement périodique mais présentant bel et bien un taux d’intérêt nominal), intérêts compris « VALEUR.NOMINALE » (page 156) Le taux d’intérêt effectif annuel d’un bon versant un intérêt périodique, un bon vendu à un prix réduit et qui ne verse aucun intérêt ou un bon qui ne verse d’intérêts qu’à l’échéance « RENDEMENT.TITRE » (page 137), « RENDEMENT. SIMPLE » (page 136) et « RENDEMENT.TITRE. ECHEANCE » (page 139) Amortissement Le montant d’amortissement périodique d’un actif en faisant appel à la méthode du solde dégressif linéaire « DB » (page 111) L’amortissement périodique d’un actif à l’aide de la méthode du solde dégressif, telle que celle du « double solde dégressif » « DDB » (page 113) L’amortissement périodique d’un actif par le biais de la méthode linéaire « AMORLIN » (page 106) Le montant d’amortissement périodique d’un actif en s’appuyant sur la méthode de l’amortissement proportionnel à l’ordre numérique inversé des années « SYD » (page 140) L’amortissement total sur une période donnée pour un actif amorti à l’aide de la méthode du solde dégressif « VDB » (page 161) 380 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 381 Exemple de tableau d’amortissement pour un prêt L’exemple présent utilise les fonctions INTPER, PRINCPER et VPM pour établir un tableau d’amortissement d’un prêt. Les informations renvoyées par INTPER, PRINCPER et VPM s’apparentent. Elles sont illustrées dans l’exemple.Élaboration du tableau d’amortissement Supposons que vous cherchiez à établir un tableau d’amortissement retraçant toutes les périodes d’un prêt dont le montant principal de départ est de 50 000 €, sa durée de 2 ans, un taux d’intérêt annuel de 7 % et un solde dû à la fin du terme de 30 000 €. La première partie de votre tableau d’amortissement (dont les formules sont reprises ici) peut se présenter comme suit : Explications du contenu des cellules La cellule B6 utilise la fonction VPM pour calculer le montant de chaque paiement mensuel. Notez que son résultat correspond alors au total de l’intérêt et du principal pour chaque mois (par exemple, C9 + D9) tel qu’illustré pour la cellule F9. Les cellules C9 et D9 s’appuient sur INTPER et PRINCPER pour calculer la part de chaque paiement mensuel correspondant respectivement à l’intérêt et au principal. Notez qu’INTPER revient à soustraire PRINCPER de VPM et que, à l’inverse, PRINCPER revient à soustraire INTPER de VPM. 382 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 383 Tableau d’amortissement rempli Pour achever l’élaboration du tableau, il suffit de sélectionner les cellules A10:A11 et d’étendre la sélection à A32 pour inclure les 24 périodes constituant la simulation du prêt. Sélectionnez C9:F9 puis étendez la sélection à C32:F32 pour terminer l’établissement des formules. Voici le tableau complet reprenant l’intégralité de l’amortissement avec les formules indiquées dans le tableau précédent. Commentaires finaux Notez que les valeurs renvoyées par INTPER (en colonne C) et de PRINCPER (en colonne D) s’ajoute tous les mois au VPM calculé dans la cellule B6 (tel qu’indiqué dans la colonne F). Il est également important de noter que le principal final résiduel, repris dans la cellule E32, correspond à 30 000 €, tel qu’il est indiqué par l’argument résiduel de la cellule B4. En savoir plus sur les arrondis iWork prend en charge de nombreuses fonctions différentes servant à arrondir les nombres. Cette rubrique compare ces fonctions.Pour Utilisez cette fonction Commentaires Arrondir un nombre en s’éloignant de zéro, au multiple le plus proche « PLAFOND » (page 201) L’arrondi s’effectue par pas, par exemple l’arrondi à un multiple de 10 le plus proche. Ces arrondis se font en « s’éloignant » de zéro, c’est- à-dire que =PLAFOND(0,4; 1) donne 1 et =PLAFOND(–0,4; –1) renvoie – 1. Arrondir un nombre en s’éloignant de zéro, au nombre pair le plus proche « PAIR » (page 199) L’arrondi correspond au nombre le plus proche, de sorte que le résultat est divisible par deux sans obtenir de reste. L’arrondi se fait en « s’éloignant » de zéro, de sorte que =PAIR(0,4) renvoie 2 et =PAIR(–0,4) renvoie – 2. Arrondir un nombre vers zéro, au multiple le plus proche « PLANCHER » (page 202) L’arrondi s’effectue par pas, par exemple l’arrondi à un multiple de 10 le plus proche. L’arrondi se fait vers zéro, c’est-à-dire que =PLANCHER(0,4; 1) donne 0 et =PLANCHER(–0,4; –1) renvoie 0. Arrondir un nombre à l’entier inférieur ou égal le plus proche « ENT » (page 190) L’arrondi se calcule au nombre entier inférieur ou égal le plus proche. Par conséquent, =INT(0,4) renvoie 0 et =INT(–0,4) renvoie – 1. Arrondir un nombre au multiple le plus proche « ARRONDI. AU.MULTIPLE » (page 185) L’arrondi correspond au multiple le plus proche . PLAFOND, laquelle arrondit au multiple le plus proche. Par conséquent, =ARRONDI.AU.MULTIPLE(4, 3) renvoie 3, 4 étant plus proche de 3 que du multiple de 3 suivant, à savoir 6. =PLAFOND(4, 3) renvoie 6, c’est- à-dire le multiple de 3 le plus proche en arrondissant. Arrondir un nombre en s’éloignant de zéro, au nombre impair le plus proche « IMPAIR » (page 193) L’arrondi correspond au nombre le plus proche, de sorte que le résultat n’est pas divisible par deux sans obtenir de reste. L’arrondi se fait en « s’éloignant » de zéro, de sorte que =IMPAIR(1,4) renvoie 3 et =IMPAIR(–1,4) renvoie – 3. 384 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 385 Pour Utilisez cette fonction Commentaires Arrondir un nombre au nombre de décimales indiqué « ARRONDI » (page 184) Un nombre positif représente le nombre de chiffres à droite du séparateur décimal (c’est-à- dire le nombre de décimales) à inclure dans le nombre arrondi. Un nombre négatif indique le nombre de chiffres à gauche du séparateur décimal à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Le nombre est arrondi d’après ce schéma. Ainsi, =ARRONDI(1125; –2) renvoie « 1 100 » et =ARRONDI(1155; –2) renvoie « 1 200 ». Le calcul de l’arrondi se fait en « s’éloignant » de zéro, c’est-à- dire que =ARRONDI(–1125; –2) renvoie « – 1 100 » et =ARRONDI(–1155; –2) renvoie « – 1 200 ». Arrondir un nombre vers zéro au nombre de décimales indiqué « ARRONDI.INF » (page 186) Un nombre positif représente le nombre de chiffres à droite du séparateur décimal (c’est-à- dire le nombre de décimales) à inclure dans le nombre arrondi. Un nombre négatif indique le nombre de chiffres à gauche du séparateur décimal à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Le nombre est arrondi d’après ce schéma. Ainsi, =ARRONDI(–1125; –2) renvoie « 1 100 » et =ARRONDI(–1155; –2) renvoie « 1 100 ». Dans le même ordre d’esprit, =ARRONDI(–1125; –2) renvoie « –1 100 » et =ARRONDI(–1155; –2) renvoie également « –1 100 ».Pour Utilisez cette fonction Commentaires Arrondir un nombre en s’éloignant de zéro au nombre de décimales indiqué « ARRONDI.SUP » (page 187) Un nombre positif représente le nombre de chiffres à droite du séparateur décimal (c’est-à- dire le nombre de décimales) à inclure dans le nombre arrondi. Un nombre négatif indique le nombre de chiffres à gauche du séparateur décimal à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Le nombre est arrondi d’après ce schéma. Ainsi, =ARRONDI(1125; –2) renvoie « 1 200 » et =ARRONDI(–1155; –2) renvoie « 1 200 ». Dans le même ordre d’esprit, =ARRONDI(–1125; –2) renvoie « – 1 200 » et =ARRONDI(–1155; –2) renvoie également « – 1 200 ». Tronquer un nombre au nombre de décimales indiqué « TRONQUE » (page 220) Un nombre positif représente le nombre de chiffres à droite du séparateur décimal (c’est-à- dire le nombre de décimales) à inclure dans le nombre. Un nombre négatif indique le nombre de chiffres à gauche du séparateur décimal à remplacer par des zéros (le nombre de zéro à la fin du nombre). Les chiffres en trop sont retirés du nombre de départ. Ainsi, =TRONQUE(1125; –2) renvoie « 1 100 » et =TRONQUE(1155; –2) renvoie également « 1 100 ». Association de fonctions logiques et de fonctions d’information Les fonctions logiques et les fonctions d’information sont souvent utilisées ensemble dans une formule. Bien que les fonctions logiques sont utilisées seules, cela reste rare pour une fonction d’information. Cette rubrique inclut des exemples plus complexes pour illustrer l’utilisation de plusieurs fonctions logiques et d’information dans une même formule, lesquels cas peuvent s’avérer très efficaces. 386 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 387 Ajout de commentaires d’après le contenu de cellules L’exemple présent s’appuie sur les fonctions SI, ET, OU et ESTVIDE pour ajouter des commentaires à un tableau d’après le contenu de cellules. La fonction SI s’avère puissante, particulièrement lorsqu’elle est associée à d’autres fonctions logiques telles que OU et ET. Supposons que vous soyez un professeur de lycée et que l’un des assistants gradués vous ait rendu un tableau contenant le nom des étudiants et leurs résultats au dernier examen. Vous cherchez à identifier rapidement les cas suivants :  L’étudiant a la moyenne, mais est invité à un cours particulier de maintien (notes entre 61 et 75).  L’évaluation est impossible (par exemple, une note négative à l’examen, supérieure à 100 ou pas de note).  L’élève a échoué à l’examen (note de 60 ou inférieure). En scindant les notes en parties, les fonctions ci-dessous déterminent chacun des éléments que vous voulez connaître. Une fois réunis, vous êtes en mesure de parcourir rapidement le tableau et consulter les renseignements voulus. Dans le cadre des expressions ci-dessous, partons du principe que le nom du premier étudiant se trouve en cellule A2, et que la première note se situe dans la cellule B2. Expression 1 =ET(B2>60; B2<=75) évalue l’éventualité d’une note faible. Si la note se situe entre 61 et 75, la fonction ET renvoie VRAI, c’est-à-dire que l’étudiant doit venir au cours particulier de soutien. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX. Expression 2 =OU(ESTVIDE(B2); B2<0; B2>100) évalue si les données ne sont pas valides. La première expression dans la fonction OU, « NONVIDE(B2) », donne la valeur VRAI si aucune note n’est indiquée. Le deuxième argument renvoie VRAI si la note est négative. Quant à la troisième expression, elle renvoie VRAI si la note dépasse 100. OU renvoie ainsi VRAI si n’importe laquelle des conditions évaluées correspond à VRAI, indiquant que les données ne sont pas valides d’une façon ou d’une autre. La fonction OU renvoie FAUX si aucune des conditions n’est VRAIE ; les données sont donc valides. Expression 3 =B2<=60 évalue si la note n’atteint pas la moyenne. Cette expression renvoie VRAI si la note se trouve à 60 ou en-dessous, une note entraînant le recalage de l’étudiant. Dans le cas contraire, elle renvoie FAUX.Association au sein d’une fonction SI =SI(ET(B2>60; B2<=75); "Cours de soutien"; SI(OU(ESTVIDE(B2); B2<0; B2>100); "Données non valides"; SI(B2<=60; "Examen échoué"; ""))) Si l’expression de test (identique à l’expression 1 citée ci-dessus) dans la première fonction SI renvoie la valeur VRAI, la fonction globale renvoie « Cours de soutien ». Dans le cas contraire, elle passe à l’argument FAUX, à savoir la deuxième fonction SI. Si l’expression de test (identique à l’expression 2 ci-dessus) de la seconde fonction SI renvoie la valeur VRAI, la fonction globale renvoie « Données non valides ». Dans le cas contraire, elle passe à l’argument FAUX, à savoir la troisième fonction SI. Enfin, si l’expression de test (identique à l’expression 3) de la troisième fonction SI renvoie la valeur VRAI, la fonction globale renvoie « Examen échoué ». Dans le cas contraire, l’expression renvoie une valeur vide (""). Le résultat peut ressembler au tableau suivant. Interception de division par zéro Il n’est pas toujours possible d’élaborer un tableau de sorte à éviter une opération de division par zéro. Cependant, si le cas se présente, le résultat renvoie alors une valeur d’erreur dans la cellule, ce qui s’avère généralement peu désirable. L’exemple suivant propose trois méthodes pour éviter ce type d’erreur. Exemples Supposons que les cellules D2 et E2 contiennent chacune un nombre. E2 peut éventuellement contenir 0. Vous pouvez chercher à diviser D2 par E2, mais voulez éviter une erreur de division par zéro. Chacune des trois méthodes suivantes renvoient 0 si la cellule E2 est égale à zéro ; dans le cas contraire, chacune d’entre elles renvoie le résultat de D2/E2. =SI(E2=0; 0; D2/E2) fonctionne en testant directement la cellule E2 pour savoir si elle correspond à 0. =SI.ERREUR(D2/E2; 0) permet de renvoyer 0 si une erreur survient. Une division par zéro constitue une erreur. =SI(SI.ERREUR(D2/E2); 0; D2/E2) sert à effectuer un test logique sur l’opération D2/E2 pour savoir si le résultat renvoie VRAI. 388 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 389 Usage de conditions et de jokers Certaines fonctions, telles que SOMME, s’appliquent à des intervalles entiers. D’autres fonctions, telles que SOMME.SI, ne s’appliquent qu’à des cellules de l’intervalle répondant à une condition. Il peut s’avérer judicieux d’additionner, entre autres, tous les nombres inférieurs à 5 de la colonne B. Pour ce faire, utilisez par exemple =SOMME. SI(B; "<5"). Le second argument de SOMME.SI correspond à une condition car elle dicte à la fonction s’il convient d’ignorer des cellules ne répondant pas aux critères indiqués. Il existe deux types de fonctions qui acceptent des conditions. Le premier type englobe les fonctions dont le nom se termine par .SI ou .SIS (sauf la fonction SI qui ne reçoit pas de condition mais une expression à évaluer par la valeur VRAI ou FAUX). Ces fonctions peuvent réaliser des comparaisons de nombres au sein de leurs conditions, par exemple « >5 », « <=7 » ou « <>2 ». Elles acceptent également des jokers dans leurs conditions. Par exemple, pour compter le nombre de cellules de la colonne B, commençant par la lettre « a », vous pouvez utiliser =SOMME.SI(B; "a*"). Le second groupe de fonctions acceptent les conditions, telles que RECHERCHEH, mais ne peuvent pas évaluer les conditions incluant les nombres. Ces fonctions autorisent parfois l’usage de jokers. Fonction Autorise les comparaisons de nombres Accepte les jokers MOYENNE.SI Oui Oui MOYENNE.SIS Oui Oui NB.SI Oui Oui NB.SIS Oui Oui SOMME.SI Oui Oui SOMME.SIS Oui Oui RECHERCHEH Non Si la correspondance exacte est précisée EQUIV Non Si la correspondance exacte est précisée RECHERCHEV Non Si la correspondance exacte est précisée Des exemples de conditions, avec ou sans joker, sont illustrés dans la présente rubrique.Expression Exemple ">4" désigne toute valeur correspondant à tout nombre supérieur à 4. =NB.SI(B2:E7; “>4") renvoie le nombre de valeurs, issues des cellules incluses dans l’intervalle B2:E7, supérieures à 4. ">7" désigne toute valeur correspondant à tout nombre supérieur ou égal à 7. =SOMME.SI(B; ">=7") additionne les cellules de la colonne B et qui contiennent une valeur supérieure ou égale à 7. "<=5" en association avec ">=15" se rapporte à l’équivalence à tout nombre inférieur ou égal à 5 ou supérieur ou égal à 15. Les nombres de 6 à 14 inclus ne sont alors pas pris en compte. =SOMME.SI(A3:B12; "<=5")+SOMME.SI(A3:B12; ">=15") additionne les cellules incluses dans l’intervalle A3:B12 contenant une valeur inférieure ou égale à 5 ou supérieure ou égale à 15. "*it" désigne toute valeur se terminant par « it ». L’astérisque (*) correspond à n’importe quelle séquence de caractères. =NB.SI(B2:E7; "*it") renvoie le nombre de valeurs, issues des cellules incluses dans l’intervalle B2:E7, terminant par « it » telles que « bit » ou « cockpit ». Elle ne renvoie pas de valeur telle que « termite ». "~*" se rapporte à l’astérisque en tant que tel (*). Le caractère tilde (~) indique à l’application de prendre le caractère suivant dans sa forme littérale plutôt que de l’utiliser en tant que joker. =NB.SI(E; "~*") renvoie le nombre de valeurs, issues des cellules de la colonne E, et qui contiennent le caractère astérisque. B2 & ", " & E2 renvoie le contenu des cellules B2 et E2 séparé par une virgule et un espace. =B2&", "&E2 renvoie « Dernier, Premier » si B2 contient « Dernier » et si E2 reprend « Premier ». « ?ip » signifie toute valeur commençant par un seul caractère suivi de « ip ». =NB.SI(B2:E7; "?ip") renvoie le nombre de valeurs, issues des cellules incluses dans l’intervalle B2:E7, commençant par un caractère suivi de « ip » telles que « bip » ou « VIP ». Elle ne renvoie pas de valeur telle que « VOIP » ou « fripe ». "~?" se rapporte au point d’interrogation en tant que tel (?). Le caractère tilde (~) indique à l’application de prendre le caractère suivant dans sa forme littérale plutôt que de l’utiliser en tant que joker. =CHERCHE("~?"; B2) renvoie 19 si la cellule B2 contient « Quelle question poser ? Celle-ci, tout simplement. », puisque le point d’interrogation correspond au 23 e caractère dans la chaîne. "*in?" revient à indiquer toute valeur commençant par n’importe quel nombre de caractères suivis de « in » puis un seul caractère final. =NB.SI(B2:E7; "*in?") renvoie le nombre de valeurs, issues des cellules incluses dans l’intervalle B2:E7, commençant par n’importe quel nombre de caractères (y compris aucun) suivis de « in » puis d’un seul caractère final. Cela peut correspondre à des mots tels que « usine », « opina » ou « peint ». En seraient exclus des mots tels que « teinte » (ayant deux caractères après « in ») ou « loin » (ne possédant aucun caractère après « in »). 390 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 391 Exemple de résultats d’une étude Cet exemple compile les illustrations utilisées dans les fonctions statistiques. Il s’appuie sur une étude fictive. Cette étude est courte (seulement cinq questions) et prévoit un nombre très limité de sondés (10). Chaque question peut être répondue d’après une échelle de 1 à 5 (pouvant se présenter sous la forme de réponses allant de « jamais » à « toujours ») ou peuvent être laissées sans réponse. Chaque copie se voit attribuée un numéro avant leur envoi par courrier. Le tableau suivant reprend les résultats. Les questions dont la réponse n’est pas prévue à l’avance (incorrecte) ou non répondues sont indiquées d’une cellule vide dans le tableau. Pour illustrer des fonctions précises, supposons que le numéro de contrôle de l’étude inclut un préfixe alphabétique allant de A à E au lieu de 1 à 5. Le tableau ressemble alors à ce qui suit : À l’aide du présent tableau de données et de quelques unes des fonctions statistiques proposées dans iWork, vous pouvez rassembler des informations relatives aux résultats de l’étude. Gardez simplement à l’esprit que l’exemple reste volontairement réduit et les résultats peuvent paraître évidents. Cependant, si vous disposez de 50 sondés, 100 ou plus encore, et de plus de questions, les résultats peuvent alors ne plus être aussi évidents.Fonction et arguments Description du résultat =COEFFICIENT.CORRELATION(B2:B11; C2:C11) Détermine la corrélation de la question 1 et de la question 2 à l’aide de l’analyse par régression linéaire. La corrélation constitue une mesure du degré de changement simultané de deux variables (dans notre cas, les réponses aux questions de l’étude). Plus précisément, cela revient à se poser la question suivante : si un sondé répond à la question 1 dont la valeur est supérieure (ou inférieure) à la moyenne de cette question, le sondé répond-il aussi à la question 2 avec une valeur supérieure (ou inférieure) à la moyenne de la question 2 ? Dans le cas présent, les réponses ne sont pas particulièrement corrélées (–0,1732) =NB(A2:A11) ou =NBVAL(A2:A11) Détermine le nombre total de questionnaires renvoyés (10). Notez que si l’identifiant de contrôle de l’étude ne correspond pas à un nombre, vous devez faire appel à NBVAL plutôt qu’à NB. =NB(B2:B11) ou =NBVAL(B2:B11) Détermine le nombre total de réponses à la première question (9). En étendant cette formule sur la rangée, vous pouvez déterminer le nombre total de réponses à chaque question. Dans la mesure où toutes les données sont des nombres, NBVAL renvoie les mêmes résultats. Cependant, si l’étude utilise des réponses de A à E plutôt que de 1 à 5, vous devez faire appel à NBVAL pour additionner les résultats. 392 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentairesChapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires 393 Fonction et arguments Description du résultat =NB.VIDE(B2:B11) Détermine le nombre de cellules vides, représentant des réponses non valides ou aucune réponse du tout. Si vous étendez cette formule à toute la rangée, vous pouvez remarquer que la question 3 (colonne D) présente 3 réponses non valides ou sans réponse. Cela peut vous obliger à regarder de plus près la question dans l’étude pour savoir si sa formulation s’avère controversée ou imprécise, si d’autres questions ne dépassent pas 1 seule réponse incorrecte ou aucune réponse. =NB.SI(B2:B11; "=5") Détermine le nombre de sondés ayant attribué un 5 à une question donnée (dans notre cas, la question 1). Si vous étendez cette formule à toute la rangée, vous pouvez remarquer que seules les questions 3 et 4 ont vu un nombre quelconque de sondés leur attribuer un 5. En cas d’utilisation des notes de A à E pour la plage de données, vous devez alors utiliser =NB.SI(B2:B11; "=E") =COVARIANCE(B2:B11; C2:C11) Détermine la covariance des questions 1 et 2. La covariance constitue une mesure du degré de changement simultané de deux variables (dans notre cas, les réponses aux questions de l’étude). Plus précisément, cela revient à se poser la question suivante : si un sondé répond à la question 1 dont la valeur est supérieure (ou inférieure) à la moyenne de cette question, le sondé répond-il aussi à la question 2 avec une valeur supérieure (ou inférieure) à la moyenne de la question 2 ? Remarque : COVARIANCE ne fonctionne pas si le tableau fait appel à une échelle de A à E, puisqu’elle impose l’usage d’arguments exprimés sous forme de nombres.Fonction et arguments Description du résultat =ECARTYPE(B2:B11) ou =ECARTYPEP(B2:B11) Détermine l’écart-type, à savoir une mesure de dispersion, des réponses à la question 1. Si vous étendez cette formule à toute la rangée, vous pouvez remarquer que les réponses à la question 3 présentent l’écart-type le plus élevé. Si les résultats représentent les réponses de l’intégralité de la population étudiée, par opposition à un simple échantillon représentatif, la fonction ECARTYPEP est alors à utiliser plutôt qu’ECARTYPE. Notez qu’ECARTYPE correspond à la racine carrée de VAR. =VAR(B2:B11) ou =VARP(B2:B11) Détermine la variance, à savoir une mesure de dispersion, des réponses à la question 1. Si vous étendez cette formule à toute la rangée, vous pouvez remarquer que les réponses à la question 5 présentent la variance la plus faible. Si les résultats représentent les réponses de l’intégralité de la population étudiée, par opposition à un simple échantillon représentatif, la fonction VAR.P est alors à utiliser plutôt que VAR. Notez que VAR correspond au carré de ECARTYPE. 394 Chapitre 13 Exemples et rubriques supplémentaires iPod shuffle Guide de l’utilisateur2 Table des matières 3 Premiers contacts 4 Configuration requise 6 Quatre étapes pour écouter de la musique sur votre iPod shuffle 9 Transfert et lecture de votre musique 9 Utilisation d’iTunes pour organiser votre musique sur votre ordinateur 10 Transfert de musique vers l’iPod shuffle 15 Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle 18 Recharge de la batterie 20 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 23 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle 25 Astuces et dépannage 29 En savoir plus, service et assistance 31 Sécurité et entretien3 1 Premiers contacts Apple vous félicite pour l’acquisition de votre iPod shuffle. Lisez cette rubrique afin de vous familiariser rapidement avec l’iPod shuffle. L’iPod shuffle fonctionne avec votre ordinateur. Importez des morceaux à partir de votre collection de musique sur CD ou de l’iTunes Music Store (disponible dans certains pays uniquement) vers votre ordinateur, puis connectez l’iPod shuffle pour transférer des morceaux choisis à écouter partout où vous allez.4 Premiers contacts Configuration requise Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle avec un Macintosh, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • Un Macintosh avec port USB intégré. Pour recharger l’iPod shuffle, connectez-le à un port USB à forte alimentation. Pour optimiser la rapidité des transferts, connectez-le à un port USB 2.0. • Mac OS X 10.2.8, Mac OS X 10.3.4 ou ultérieur. Pour utiliser des ports USB à faible alimentation, vous devez disposer de Mac OS X 10.3.6 ou ultérieur. • iTunes 4.7.1 ou ultérieur (iTunes étant disponible sur le CD de l’iPod). Pour vérifier que vous disposez de la dernière version d’iTunes, allez à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes. • Le logiciel de l’iPod (inclus sur le CD de l’iPod). Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle avec un PC sous Windows, vous devez disposer des éléments suivants : • Un PC sous Windows avec un port USB intégré ou une carte USB. Pour recharger l’iPod shuffle, connectez-le à un port USB à forte alimentation. Pour effectuer des transferts rapides, connectez-le à un port USB 2.0. • Windows 2000 avec le Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur ; Windows XP Édition Familiale ou Professionnel avec le Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur • iTunes 4.7.1 ou ultérieur (iTunes étant disponible sur le CD de l’iPod). Pour vérifier que vous disposez de la dernière version d’iTunes, allez à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/itunes. • Le logiciel de l’iPod (inclus sur le CD de l’iPod).Premiers contacts 5 Important : si l’iPod shuffle ne s’adapte pas aux ports USB de votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser un socle iPod shuffle Dock ou un câble d’extension USB. Ces accessoires sont disponibles sur www.apple.com/francestore. Votre iPod shuffle comprend les éléments suivants : iPod shuffle Capuchon USB Cordon Écouteurs Apple Earphones6 Premiers contacts Quatre étapes pour écouter de la musique sur votre iPod shuffle Pour configurer l’iPod shuffle, installez le logiciel se trouvant sur le CD de l’iPod et importez des morceaux à partir de votre collection de musique sur CD ou de l’iTunes Music Store (disponible dans certains pays uniquement). Transférez ensuite les morceaux vers l’iPod shuffle pour les écouter partout où vous allez. Étape 1 : Installation du logiciel Insérez le CD de l’iPod dans votre ordinateur, puis installez iTunes et le logiciel de l’iPod. Étape 2 : Importation de musique sur votre ordinateur Terminez cette étape si vous n’avez pas encore transféré de la musique sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez soit importer de la musique provenant de vos CD audio, soit (si vous disposez d’une connexion à Internet) acheter de la musique en ligne et la télécharger sur votre ordinateur via la boutique iTunes Music Store. Vous pouvez faire votre choix parmi un million de morceaux et écouter un extrait de 30 secondes de n’importe quelle chanson. Pour importer la musique de vos CD audio dans votre ordinateur : 1 Insérez un CD dans votre ordinateur. iTunes s’ouvre automatiquement et le CD est sélectionné dans la liste Source d’iTunes. 2 Désélectionnez les morceaux que vous ne souhaitez pas transférer puis cliquez sur Importer. 3 Répétez l’opération pour tout autre CD avec des morceaux que vous voulez importer. Pour acheter de la musique en ligne : 1 Ouvrez iTunes, puis cliquez sur Music Store dans la liste Source.Premiers contacts 7 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Compte puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour créer un compte ou saisir les informations de votre compte Apple ou AOL (America Online) ; cette option est disponible dans certains pays uniquement. Étape 3 : Connectez l’iPod shuffle pour recharger la batterie et transférer de la musique Retirez le cache USB de l’iPod shuffle et connectez l’iPod shuffle à un port USB à forte alimentation sur votre ordinateur. Pour optimiser la rapidité des transferts, connectez l’iPod shuffle à un port USB 2.0. Important : si l’iPod shuffle ne s’adapte pas aux ports USB de votre ordinateur, vous pouvez utiliser un socle iPod shuffle Dock ou un câble d’extension USB, disponibles sur www.apple.com/francestore. Insérez l’iPod shuffle dans un port USB 2.0 à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur8 Premiers contacts Pour recharger la batterie de l’iPod shuffle : Lorsque l’iPod shuffle est connecté à un port USB à forte alimentation sur votre ordinateur, la batterie se recharge. Le voyant d’état de la batterie, au dos de l’iPod shuffle (voir la page 15), s’allume en jaune lorsque la batterie se recharge et en vert lorsqu’elle est complètement rechargée. Si le voyant ne s’allume pas, connectez l’iPod shuffle à un autre port USB. La première fois que vous connectez l’iPod shuffle, laissez-le branché pendant environ une heure afin de charger complètement la batterie. Pour transférer des morceaux sur l’iPod shuffle : Lorsque vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur, iTunes s’ouvre automatiquement et transfère les morceaux sélectionnés vers l’iPod shuffle. Au terme du transfert des morceaux, un message d’iTunes apparaît indiquant que l’iPod est à jour et que la déconnexion est autorisée. Étape 4 : Écoute de morceaux Une fois que vous avez rechargé la batterie de l’iPod shuffle et transféré des morceaux, vous pouvez écouter votre musique. Déconnectez l’iPod shuffle de votre ordinateur et réglez le bouton (au dos de l’iPod shuffle) pour écouter les morceaux dans l’ordre ( ) ou bien dans un ordre aléatoire (¡). Connectez ensuite les écouteurs Apple Earphones, appuyez sur le bouton Lire de l’iPod shuffle et profitez de votre musique !9 1 Transfert et lecture de votre musique Lisez cette rubrique pour en savoir plus sur le transfert de musique vers l’iPod shuffle et la lecture de vos morceaux. Une fois que vous possédez de la musique sur votre ordinateur (voir la page 6), vous pouvez connecter l’iPod shuffle et configurer iTunes pour transférer de la musique vers l’iPod shuffle comme vous le souhaitez. Puis, chaque fois que vous connectez l’iPod shuffle, iTunes transfère de la musique en fonction des réglages que vous avez effectués. Utilisation d’iTunes pour organiser votre musique sur votre ordinateur En utilisant iTunes, vous pouvez rechercher, lire et organiser la musique qui se trouve sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez organiser votre musique par listes de morceaux, appelées listes de lecture. Vous pouvez configurer iTunes pour transférer de la musique à partir d’une de ces listes de lecture vers l’iPod shuffle.10 Transfert et lecture de votre musique Pour créer une liste de lecture dans iTunes : n Dans iTunes, cliquez sur le bouton plus Ajouter (+) et attribuez un nom à la liste de lecture, puis faites glisser les morceaux depuis la bibliothèque ou une autre liste de lecture vers la nouvelle liste de lecture. Remarque : iTunes dispose de nombreuses autres fonctionnalités. Vous pouvez créer des CD pouvant être lus par des lecteurs de CD standard (si votre ordinateur dispose d’un graveur de CD), créer des listes de lecture actualisées de manière dynamique, appelées Listes de lecture intelligentes, écouter la radio via Internet, coter des morceaux selon vos préférences et bien plus encore. Ce manuel contient des informationssur le transfert de musique vers l’iPod shuffle via iTunes. Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation des fonctionnalités d’iTunes, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes et Music Store. Transfert de musique vers l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez connecter l’iPod shuffle à n’importe quel port USB de votre ordinateur afin de transférer des morceaux provenant d’iTunes. Pour effectuer des transferts encore plus rapides, connectez l’ iPod shuffle à un port USB 2.0. Vous pouvez transférer des morceaux automatiquement ou manuellement.Transfert et lecture de votre musique 11 Pour transférer des morceaux automatiquement vers l’iPod shuffle : n Retirez simplement le cache USB et connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. iTunes s’ouvre et transfère de la musique vers l’iPod shuffle en fonction des réglages que vous avez effectués dans iTunes (voir la page 12). n Si l’iPod shuffle est déjà connecté et si vous avez modifié les réglages, cliquez sur Remplissage auto pour sélectionner et transférer les nouveaux morceaux suivant les nouveaux réglages. Remarque : avec les versions de Mac OS X antérieures à Mac OS X 10.3.6, un port USB à forte alimentation est nécessaire. Pour transférer manuellement des morceaux vers l’iPod shuffle : n Connectez l’iPod shuffle et faites-y glisser les morceaux dans la liste Source. Pour supprimer manuellement des morceaux de l’iPod shuffle : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle et sélectionnez-le dans la liste Source. 2 Choisissez un morceau et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. du clavier. Pour configurer iTunes de telle sorte que l’iPod shuffle soit maintenu dans la liste Source lorsqu’il n’est pas connecté : Vous pouvez configurer iTunes de manière à maintenir l’iPod shuffle dans la liste Source même lorsqu’il est déconnecté. Vous avez également la possiblité de modifier les réglages ou d’ajouter et de supprimer des morceaux dans la liste de l’iPod shuffle. Si vous connectez à nouveau l’iPod shuffle, les morceaux sont transférés suivant vos modifications. 1 Dans iTunes, selectionnez iPod shuffle dans la liste Source puis cliquez sur le bouton Options.12 Transfert et lecture de votre musique 2 Sélectionnez l’option “Conserver cet iPod dans la liste Source.” Configuration d’iTunes pour transférer de la musique vers l’iPod shuffle Vous pouvez configurer iTunes pour transférer des morceaux choisis dans toute votre bibliothèque musicale ou dans une liste de lecture d’iTunes en particulier. Vous pouvez configurer l’application pour choisir des morceaux dans l’ordre ou de manière aléatoire. Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur et sélectionnez iPod shuffle dans la liste Source d’iTunes. Suivez ensuite les instructions ci-dessous. Pour sélectionner la source à partir de laquelle iTunes transfère des morceaux vers l’iPod shuffle : n Sélectionnez une liste de lecture dans le menu local “Remplissage auto depuis”. Pour transférer des morceaux à partir de votre bibliothèque tout entière, sélectionnez Bibliothèque. Pour configurer iTunes pour sélectionner des morceaux au hasard à partir de la source sélectionnée : n Choisissez “Sélectionner les morceaux de manière aléatoire.” Si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée, iTunes transférera les morceaux dans l’ordre où ils apparaissent dans la liste de lecture sélectionnée ou dans la Bibliothèque. Bouton OptionsTransfert et lecture de votre musique 13 Pour configurer iTunes de sorte à sélectionner plus souvent les morceaux les mieux cotés pour le transfert : n Sélectionnez “Choisir plus souvent les morceaux les mieux classés.” Pour configurer iTunes de sorte à laisser des morceaux déjà sélectionnés sur l’iPod shuffle lorsque vous cliquez sur Remplissage auto : n Désélectionnez l’option “Remplacer tous les morceaux lors du remplissage auto.” En cliquant sur Remplissage auto, les morceaux que vous avez déjà sélectionnés ne sont pas effacés et iTunes sélectionne de nouveaux morceaux pour remplir l’espace disponible sur l’iPod shuffle. Conversion de morceaux pour économiser de l’espace sur l’iPod shuffle Les morceaux encodés n’utilisant pas le format AAC peuvent occuper plus d’espace. Vous pouvez configurer iTunes pour convertir les morceaux à débit supérieur lors de leur transfert, afin qu’ils occupent moins d’espace sur l’iPod shuffle. Pour configurer iTunes afin de convertir au format AAC à 128 kbps les morceaux à débit supérieur lors de leur transfert : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, sélectionnez iPod shuffle dans la liste Source et cliquez sur le bouton Options. Bouton Options14 Transfert et lecture de votre musique 3 Sélectionnez “Convertir en AAC de 128 kbps les morceaux à débit supérieur”. Remarque : en sélectionnant cette option, les morceaux encodés aux formats AIFF ou Apple Lossless sont convertis à 128 kbps lors de leur transfert vers l’iPod shuffle (les fichiers des morceaux dans iTunes ne sont pas affectés). Dans le cas contraire, iPod shuffle ne lit pas les morceaux dans ces formats d’encodage. Formats de fichiers audio pris en charge par l’iPod shuffle • AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P) (jusqu’à 320 Kb/s) • MP3 (jusqu’à 320 Kb/s) • MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR) • WAV • AA (texte lu audible.com, formats 2, 3 et 4) Un morceau encodé au format AAC ou MP3 possède la même qualité qu’un CD tout en occupant deux fois moins d’espace qu’un morceau encodé au format AIFF ou WAV. Quand vous importez de la musique depuis un CD à l’aide d’iTunes, elle est convertie par défaut au format AAC. Si vous utilisez iTunes pour Windows, vous pouvez convertir les fichiers WMA non protégés au format AAC ou MP3. Cela peut être utile si vous disposez d’une bibliothèque de musique encodée au format WMA. Pour plus d’informations, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes et Music Store. L’iPod shuffle ne prend pas en charge les fichiers audio AIFF, Apple Lossless, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2, WMA ni le format 1 d’audible.com. Transfert et lecture de votre musique 15 Utilisation des commandes de l’iPod shuffle Utilisez les commandes de l’iPod shuffle pour lire et interrompre des morceaux mais aussi modifier le volume. Utilisez le bouton situé au dos de l’iPod shuffle pour configurer l’iPod shuffle afin de lire les morceaux dans l’ordre ou dans le désordre. Réglage du volume (+) Voyant d’état Port pour les écouteurs Bouton Lecture/Pause Précédent/Rembobiner Réglage du volume (-) Suivant/Avance rapide Position Éteint Lecture dans l'ordre Lecture aléatoire Voyant/bouton d’état de la batterie Connecteur USB16 Transfert et lecture de votre musique Commandes de l’iPod shuffle Configurer l’iPod shuffle pour lire les morceaux dans l’ordre Réglez le bouton pour lire les morceaux dans l’ordre(/). ConfigureriPod shuffle pour mélanger les morceaux Réglez le bouton pour mélanger (¡). Aller au début de la liste de lecture Appuyez trios fois rapidement sur les boutons Lecture/Pause (’). Éteindre l’iPod shuffle Réglez le bouton sur Off. Lire ou interrompre un morceau Appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). Lorsque l'iPod shuffle est mis sur pause, le voyant d'état est vert et clignote pendant une minute. Réglage du volume Appuyez sur le bouton (?) pour augmenter le volume ou (D) pour le baisser. Saut au morceau suivant Appuyez sur le bouton Suivant/Avance rapide (‘).Transfert et lecture de votre musique 17 Réécouter le morceau ou lire le morceau précédent Appuyez une fois sur le bouton Précédent/ Rembobiner (]) pour réécouter un morceau. Appuyez deux fois dessus pour lire le morceau précédent. Avance rapide ou rembobiner Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou Précédent/Rembobiner (]). Désactivation des boutons de l’iPod shuffle (Pour ne pas les utiliser accidentellement) Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pendant 3 secondes environ. Le voyant d'état est orange et clignote trois fois. Maintenez à nouveau le bouton Lecture/Pause enfoncé pour activer les boutons. Vérification du niveau de la batterie Appuyez sur le bouton d’état de la batterie. Voir page 19. Commandes de l’iPod shuffle18 1 Recharge de la batterie Lisez cette rubrique pour en savoir plus sur la recharge de la batterie de l’iPod shuffle. L’iPod shuffle possède une batterie rechargeable, interne et que vous ne pouvez pas remplacer vous-même. Pour recharger la batterie de l’iPod shuffle : Retirez le cache USB et connectez l’iPod shuffle à un port USB à forte alimentation sur votre ordinateur. Le voyant d’état de la batterie qui se trouve sur le dos de l’iPod shuffle s’allume. Il faut environ 2 heures pour recharger la batterie de l’iPod shuffle à 80 % et 4 heures pour la recharger complètement. Lorsque la batterie se recharge, son voyant d’état de l’iPod shuffle s’allume en jaune. Une fois la batterie complètement rechargée, le voyant devient vert jusqu’à ce que vous déconnectiez l’iPod shuffle. Si le voyant d'état ne s'allume pas, essayez d’utiliser un autre port USB de votre ordinateur. Remarque : si l'iPod shuffle est utilisé en tant que disque (voir page 20), le voyant d'état clignote de couleur jaune de façon continue.Recharge de la batterie 19 Remarque : les batteries rechargeables ont un nombre limité de cycles de recharge. La durée de vie de la batterie et le nombre de cycles de recharge varient en fonction de l’utilisation et des réglages de l’iPod. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/batteries. Pour vérifier l’état de la batterie : Appuyez sur le bouton d’état de la batterie, au dos de l’iPod shuffle. Le voyant d’état de la batterie indique le niveau de la recharge. Si le voyant d'état de la batterie et vert lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d'état de la batterie, l'iPod shuffle est suffisamment rechargé. Si le voyant est jaune, l'iPod shuffle est faiblement rechargé ; s'il est rouge, l'iPod shuffle est pratiquement déchargé et vous devez le recharger rapidement. Si aucun voyant ne s'allume, la batterie est complètement déchargée : rechargez l'iPod shuffle pour pouvoir l'utiliser. Bouton d’état de la batterie Voyant d’état de la batterie20 1 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle Lisez cette rubrique pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle comme disque dur externe. Vous pouvez stocker des données sur l’iPod shuffle, et connecter celui-ci à un autre ordinateur pour transférer ces données. Pour utiliser l’iPod shuffle comme disque dur : 1 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur. 2 Dans iTunes, selectionnez iPod shuffle dans la liste Source puis cliquez sur le bouton Options. 3 Sélectionnez Activer l’utilisation du disque. 4 Si vous souhaitez réserver une certaine quantité d’espace au stockage de vos fichiers, utilisez le curseur d’allocation de stockage. Bouton OptionsStockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle 21 Remarque : pour faire de la place aux morceaux, vous devez supprimer des fichiers de l’iPod shuffle. Lorsque vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle comme disque dur, le voyant d'état sur la face avant de l'iPod est orange et clignote de façon continue et l’icône du disque dur de l’iPod shuffle apparaît sur le bureau si vous utilisez un Mac, ou bien la lettre de lecteur suivante disponible dans l’Explorateur Windows si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows. Faites glisser des fichiers à partir de et en direction de l’iPod shuffle afin de les copier. Éjection de l’iPod shuffle Important : si le voyant d'état de l'ipod shuffle est orange et clignote, éjectez l'iPod shuffle avant de le déconnecter de l'ordinateur. Si vous n’éjectez pas l’iPod shuffle avant de le déconnecter, vous risquez d’endommager les fichiers qui s’y trouvent. Pour éjecter l’iPod shuffle : n Cliquez sur le bouton d’éjection (C) à côté de l’iPod shuffle dans la liste Source d’iTunes. Si vous utilisez un Mac, vous pouvez également éjecter l’iPod shuffle en faisant glisser son icône sur le bureau jusque dans la Corbeille. Si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows, vous pouvez éjecter l’iPod shuffle en cliquant sur l’icône Supprimer le périphérique en toute sécurité de la barre des tâches Windows puis en le sélectionnant. Prévention de l’ouverture automatique d’iTunes Si vous utilisez l’iPod shuffle principalement comme disque dur, il est recommandé d’empêcher l’ouverture automatique d’iTunes lorsque vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur.22 Stockage de fichiers sur l’iPod shuffle Pour empêcher iTunes de s’ouvrir automatiquement quand vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur : 1 Dans iTunes, selectionnez iPod shuffle dans la liste Source puis cliquez sur le bouton Options. 2 Désélectionnez l’option “Ouvrir iTunes à la connexion de cet iPod”.23 1 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle L’iPod shuffle est accompagné d’un certain nombre d’accessoires mais bien d’autres sont disponibles sur www.apple.com/francestore. Écouteurs Apple Earphones L’iPod shuffle est livré avec une paire d’écouteurs de grande qualité. Pour utiliser ces écouteurs : n Branchez-les écouteurs sur le port correspondant, puis placez-les dans vos oreilles comme illustré. Le cordon des écouteurs est réglable24 Accessoires de l’iPod shuffle Cordon de l’iPod shuffle Retirez le cache USB de l’iPod shuffle, puis attachez fermement l’iPod shuffle au cordon. Pour détacher l’iPod shuffle, retirez simplement le cordon. Accessoires disponibles Vous pouvez acheter des accessoires de l’iPod shuffle sur www.apple.com/francestore. Parmi les accessoires disponibles, citons : • Le socle iPod shuffle Dock • Le brassard de l’iPod shuffle • L’adaptateur secteur USB iPod Power Adapter • Des accessoires supplémentaires comme par exemple haut-parleurs, casques d’écoute, adaptateurs stéréo pour votre voiture et bien d’autres encore Avertissement : faites attention lorsque vous transportez l’iPod shuffle avec le cordon. Certaines activités peuvent comporter un risque de blessure, surtout si le cordon se coince quelque part (par exemple si vous courez, si vous faites du vélo ou bien si vous travaillez avec des machines). Enclenchez l’iPod shuffle au cordon.25 1 Astuces et dépannage La plupart des problèmes de l’iPod shuffle peuvent être rapidement résolus en suivant les conseils de ce chapitre. Votre iPod shuffle ne s’allume pas ou ne répond plus • Si le voyant d'état est orange et clignote lorsque vous appuyez sur un bouton, cela signifie que les boutons de l'iPod shuffle sont désactivés. Maintenez le bouton Lecture/Pause enfoncé pendant environ trois secondes, jusqu'à ce que le voyant d'état vert clignote. • Si vous n'obtenez aucun résultat, connectez l'iPod shuffle à un port USB à forte alimentation sur votre ordinateur. Votre iPod shuffle a peut-être besoin d'être rechargé. • Éteignez l'iPod shuffle, patientez cinq secondes puis rallumez-le. • Si le problème persiste, il se peut que vous deviez restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle. Consultez “Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle” à la page 27. Votre iPod shuffle ne lit plus la musique • Assurez-vous que les écouteurs sont correctement connectés. • Assurez-vous que le volume est correctement réglé. 26 Astuces et dépannage • Si le problème persiste, appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause. Votre iPod shuffle est peut-être en mode pause. Rien ne se produit si vous connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur • Connectez l’iPod shuffle à un port USB à forte alimentation de votre ordinateur. Il a peut-être besoin d’être rechargé. Remarque : avec les versions de Mac OS X antérieures à Mac OS X 10.3.6, vous ne pouvez utiliser l’iPod shuffle qu’avec un port USB à forte alimentation. • Assurez-vous que l’iPod shuffle est bien connecté à votre ordinateur. Assurez-vous que le connecteur est orienté correctement. Il ne peut être inséré que dans un sens. • Éteignez l’iPod shuffle, patientez cinq secondes puis rallumez-le. • Assurez-vous que vous avez installé le logiciel situé sur le CD de l’iPod. • Assurez-vous que vous disposez de l’ordinateur et du logiciel requis. Consultez “Configuration requise” à la page 4. • Si le problème persiste, il se peut que vous deviez restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle. Consultez la rubrique “Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle” ci-dessous. Si l’iPod shuffle s’adapte pas au port USB • Vous pouvez le connecter à l’aide d’un socle iPod shuffle Dock ou d’un câble d’extension USB, disponibles sur www.apple.com/francestore. Si le transfert des morceaux est lent • Connectez l’iPod shuffle à un port USB 2.0 de votre ordinateur pour réaliser des transferts plus rapides. Une connexion USB 2.0 permet de transférer des morceaux et des données beaucoup vite qu’une connexion USB 1.1.Astuces et dépannage 27 Mise à jour et restauration du logiciel de l’iPod shuffle Apple met régulièrement à jour le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle pour améliorer ses performances ou lui ajouter des fonctionnalités. Il vous est recommandé de mettre à jour votre iPod shuffle pour utiliser le logiciel le plus récent. Vous pouvez soit mettre à jour, soit restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle • Si vous choisissez de mettre à jour, le logiciel sera mis à jour, mais vos réglages et morceaux seront conservés. • Si vous choisissez de restaurer, tous les morceaux et données seront effacés de votre iPod shuffle. Tous les réglages d’origine de l’iPod shuffle seront rétablis. Pour mettre à jour ou restaurer l’iPod shuffle avec le logiciel le plus récent : 1 Allez à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod et téléchargez la dernière mise à jour de l’iPod. La mise à jour comprend le logiciel le plus récent pour tous les modèles d’iPod. 2 Double-cliquez sur le fichier d’installation du logiciel et suivez les instructions à l’écran pour installer la mise à jour de l’iPod shuffle. 3 Connectez l’iPod shuffle à votre ordinateur et ouvrez iTunes. L’application de mise à jour de l’iPod s’ouvre. Si vous utilisez un PC sous Windows et que l’application de mise à jour de l’iPod ne s’ouvre pas automatiquement, vous pouvez la lancer en sélectionnant Démarrer > Programmes > iPod. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour mettre à jour ou restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle. Si vous utilisez l’application de mise à jour de l’iPod et qu’elle ne détecte pas que l’iPod shuffle est connecté à votre ordinateur, réinitialisez l’iPod shuffle.28 Astuces et dépannage Si vous souhaitez restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle et que vous ne disposez pas d’une connexion à Internet, vous pouvez utiliser l’application de mise à jour de l’iPod installée sur votre ordinateur en même temps que le logiciel à partir du CD de l’iPod. Pour restaurer le logiciel de l’iPod shuffle à l’aide du programme de mise à jour de l’iPod fourni sur le CD de l’iPod : • Si vous possédez un Mac, vous pouvez trouver le programme de mise à jour de l’iPod dans Applications/Utilitaires/Logiciel iPod. • Si vous possédez un PC sous Windows, vous pouvez le trouver en sélectionnant Démarrer > Programmes > iPod.29 1 En savoir plus, service et assistance Vous trouverez plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’iPod shuffle dans l’aide à l’écran et sur le Web. Aide à l’écran Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation d’iTunes, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes et Music Store. Ressources en ligne Pour obtenir les toutes dernières informations sur l’iPod shuffle, consultez le site Web www.apple.com/fr/ipod. Pour consulter l’initiation en ligne de l’iPod shuffle, les informations sur les services et l’assistance concernant l’iPod shuffle, ainsi que les téléchargements de logiciels Apple les plus récents, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod. Pour enregistrer l’iPod shuffle, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/register.30 En savoir plus, service et assistance Obtention du service assuré par garantie Si, malgré tout, le périphérique continue à ne pas fonctionner, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support pour en savoir sur la manière d'obtenir un service dans le cadre de la garantie. Emplacement du numéro de série de votre iPod shuffle Le numéro de série est imprimé au dos de votre iPod shuffle, à côté du connecteur USB.31 1 Sécurité et entretien Lisez cette rubrique pour en savoir plus sur la sécurité d’utilisation et l’entretien de l’iPod shuffle. Nettoyage Respectez les règles générales suivantes lorsque vous nettoyez l’extérieur de votre iPod shuffle et ses composants : • Assurez-vous que votre iPod shuffle est débranché. • Utilisez un chiffon doux, humide et non pelucheux. Évitez toute pénétration d’humidité dans les orifices de l’appareil. • N’utilisez ni vaporisateur aérosol, ni dissolvant, ni alcool, ni abrasif. À propos de la manipulation Une manipulation ou un rangement inappropriés peuvent endommager votre iPod shuffle. Veillez à ne pas faire tomber votre iPod shuffle lorsque vous l’utilisez ou le transportez. Remettez le cache USB sur l’iPod shuffle lorsque celui-ci n’est pas connecté à votre ordinateur.32 Sécurité et entretien Instructions de sécurité importantes Lorsque vous installez et utilisez votre iPod shuffle, ne perdez pas de vue les points suivants : • Respectez toutes les instructions et les avertissements concernant votre iPod shuffle. • Conservez ces instructions à portée de main pour que vous ou d’autres personnes puissiez vous y reporter. Connecteurs et Ports N’essayez jamais de brancher un connecteur dans un port. Si le connecteur et le port ne s’assemblent pas avec une relative facilité, c’est probablement parce qu’ils ne sont pas compatibles. Assurez-vous que le connecteur est compatible avec le port et que vous l’avez positionné correctement par rapport à ce dernier. Avertissement : les appareils électriques peuvent s’avérer dangereux s’ils ne sont pas utilisés correctement. L’utilisation de ce produit ou de produits analogues doit toujours être supervisée par un adulte. Ne laissez jamais les enfants accéder à la partie interne de tout produit électrique ni manipuler aucun câble.Sécurité et entretien 33 N’utilisez jamais les écouteurs au volant Important : l’utilisation des écouteurs n’est pas recommandée lorsque vous conduisez et constitue d’ailleurs une infraction au code de la route dans certains endroits. Soyez prudent et attentif au volant. Cessez d’utiliser votre iPod shuffle si vous vous rendez compte que cela vous distrait ou vous dérange lorsque vous conduisez un véhicule ou lorsque vous réalisez quelque autre activité nécessitant toute votre attention. À propos des températures d’utilisation et de stockage • Utilisez votre iPod shuffle dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre 0 et 35 ºC. • Rangez votre iPod shuffle dans un endroit où la température est toujours comprise entre -20º et 45 ºC. Ne laissez pas l’iPod shuffle dans votre voiture car la température dans les voitures en stationnement peut dépasser cette fourchette. • L’autonomie de l’iPod shuffle peut diminuer temporairement dans des conditions de basses températures. Avertissement : vous risquez une perte d’audition irréparable si vous écoutez de la musique à très haut volume avec un casque ou des écouteurs. Vous pouvez vous habituer petit à petit à un volume de son plus élevé qui peut vous paraître normal mais entraîner une détérioration de votre audition. Pour vous éviter ce risque, réglez le volume de votre iPod shuffle à un niveau raisonnable. Si vous entendez un sifflement, diminuez le volume ou pensez à interrompre régulièrement l’utilisation de votre iPod shuffle.34 Sécurité et entretien Éviter les endroits humides • Gardez votre iPod shuffle à l’écart de toute source de liquide telle que boissons, lavabos, baignoires, cabines de douche, pluie, etc. S’il vous arrive de renverser un liquide sur votre iPod, il se peut que vous deviez le renvoyer à Apple pour une réparation. Reportez-vous à la section “En savoir plus, service et assistance” à la page 29. N’effectuez aucune réparation vous-même Pour toute réparation, reportez-vous à la section “En savoir plus, service et assistance” à la page 29. Avertissement : pour réduire les risques d’électrocution ou d’accident, n’utilisez pas votre iPod shuffle dans l’eau, près de l’eau ou dans des endroits humides. Avertissement : n’essayez pas d’ouvrir votre iPod shuffle, de le démonter ou de retirer la batterie. Vous courez le risque de recevoir une décharge électrique et d’annuler la garantie limitée. L’appareil ne contient pas de pièces qui puissent être réparées par l’utilisateur.35 Communications Regulation Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the computer in to an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/ television technician for additional suggestions.36 Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Computer, Inc. Product Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A, Cupertino, CA 95014-2084, 408-974-2000. Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. VCCI Class B Statement Caractéristiques électriques 5 V C.C. 1 A maximum Batterie Votre iPod shuffle renferme une batterie. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec celle-ci, assurezvous d’actualiser l’iPod shuffle avec le logiciel le plus récent. Si les problèmes persistent, vous trouverez plus d’informations sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod. Débarrassezvous de l’iPod shuffle en respectant les lois et les directives environnementales locales.37 Taïwan : Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Communauté Européenne Conforme aux directives européennes 72/23/ EEC et 89/336/EEC. Apple et l’environnement Chez Apple, nous sommes conscients de la responsabilité qui nous incombe de réduire les impacts écologiques de nos activités et de nos produits. Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/environment/summary.html. © 2005 Apple Computer, Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, le logo Apple, iPod, iTunes, Mac, Macintosh et Mac OS sont des marques d’Apple Computer, Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Finder est une marque d’Apple Computer, Inc. Apple Store et iTunes Music Store sont des marques de service d’Apple Computer, Inc., déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.www.apple.com/fr/ipod www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod F019-0342-A MacBook Guide de l’utilisateur Contient des informations sur la configuration, l’extension et le dépannage de votre MacBook F3626M42.book Page 1 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMK Apple Computer, Inc © 2006 Apple Computer, Inc. Tous droits réservés. En application des lois et conventions en vigueur, aucune reproduction totale ni partielle du manuel n’est autorisée, sauf consentement écrit préalable d’Apple. Tout a été mis en œuvre pour que les informations pré- sentées dans ce manuel soient exactes. Apple n’est pas responsable des erreurs de reproduction ou d’impression. Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014-2084 408-996-1010 www.apple.com Apple, le logo Apple, AirPort, AppleTalk, Final Cut, FireWire, iCal, iDVD, iLife, iMac, iMovie, iPhoto, iPod, iTunes, Mac, le logo Mac, Mac OS, Macintosh et QuickTime sont des marques d’Apple Computer, Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. AirPort Express, Exposé, FileVault, Finder, le logo FireWire, iSight, MacBook, Guide des Produits Macintosh, MagSafe, Safari, Spotlight, SuperDrive et Tiger sont des marques d’Apple Computer Inc. AppleCare, Apple Store et iTunes Music Store sont des marques de service d’Apple Computer, Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. .Mac est une marque de service d’Apple Computer, Inc. ENERGY STAR® est une marque déposée aux États-Unis. Intel et Intel Core sont des marques d’Intel Corp. aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. La marque et les logos Bluetooth® sont la propriété de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et sont utilisés sous licence par Apple Computer, Inc. Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Les produits commercialisés par des entreprises tierces ne sont mentionnés que pour information, sans aucune intention de préconisation ni de recommandation. Apple décline toute responsabilité quant à l’utilisation et au fonctionnement de ces produits. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories. «Dolby», «Pro Logic» et le logo double-D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories. Travaux confidentiels inédits. © 1992–1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. Tous droits réservés. F3626M42.book Page 2 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMLe produit décrit dans le présent manuel intègre des technologies de protection de droits d’auteur ellesmêmes protégées par divers brevets américains ainsi que d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle appartenant à Macrovision Corporation et à d’autres détenteurs. L’utilisation de ces technologies de protection des droits d’auteurs doit être autorisée par Macrovision Corporation et est destinée à un cadre privé ou de visualisation restreinte, sauf consentement de Macrovision Corporation. Tout démontage ou ingénierie inverse est interdit. Réclamations concernant l’appareillage aux États-Unis. Brevets nos 4 631 603, 4 577 216, 4 819 098 et 4 907 093 sous licence à des fins de visualisation limitée uniquement. Publié simultanément aux États-Unis et au Canada. F3626M42.book Page 3 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMF3626M42.book Page 4 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM5 Table des matières 9 Chapitre 1 : Premiers contacts 10 Configuration de votre MacBook 18 Composants de base de votre MacBook 20 Fonctionnalités du clavier de votre MacBook 22 Composants supplémentaires de votre MacBook 24 Extinction ou suspension d’activité de votre MacBook 26 Étalonnage de la batterie 27 Informations supplémentaires 28 Obtention de réponses grâce à l’Aide Mac 29 Chapitre 2 : Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 30 Réglage de l’écran 32 Utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur 34 Utilisation du trackpad 35 Utilisation du clavier 36 Utilisation d’une souris 37 Utilisation de la télécommande Apple Remote et de Front Row 43 Utilisation de la caméra vidéo iSight intégrée F3626M42.book Page 5 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM6 Table des matières 48 À propos de Mac OS X 49 Personnalisation du bureau et réglage des préférences 50 Utilisation des applications 51 Lorsqu’une application ne répond plus 51 Maintien à jour de vos logiciels 52 Connexion à une imprimante 53 Lecture d’un CD et connexion d’un casque d’écoute 54 Connexion d’un appareil photo ou de tout autre périphérique FireWire ou USB 54 Transfert de fichiers depuis ou vers un autre ordinateur 57 Chapitre 3 : Utilisation de votre MacBook 58 Utilisation de périphériques USB (Universal Serial Bus) 62 Connexion via FireWire 66 Fonctionnement de l’accès sans fil à Internet via AirPort 67 Utilisation de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth 69 Connexion via Ethernet 71 Gestion de la vidéo externe 75 Connexion de haut-parleurs et autres périphériques audio 76 Utilisation du lecteur optique 81 Technologie Sudden Motion Sensor 81 Utilisation de la batterie 87 Protection de votre MacBook F3626M42.book Page 6 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMTable des matières 7 89 Chapitre 4 : Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 90 Installation de mémoire supplémentaire 97 Reconnaissance de la nouvelle mémoire par votre MacBook 99 Chapitre 5 : Dépannage 100 Problèmes vous empêchant d’utiliser votre ordinateur 103 Autres problèmes 106 Réinstallation des logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur 108 Utilisation d’Apple Hardware Test 109 Localisation du numéro de série de votre produit 111 Annexe A : Caractéristiques 113 Annexe B : Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien 113 Consignes générales de sécurité 115 Configuration de votre MacBook et de l’adaptateur secteur 116 Utilisation de votre MacBook 118 Comment éviter les problèmes auditifs 120 Ergonomie 122 À propos d’Apple et de l’environnement 123 Annexe C : Connexion à Internet 125 Regroupement des informations nécessaires 127 Saisie de vos informations F3626M42.book Page 7 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM8 Table des matières 129 Dépannage de votre connexion 133 Annexe D : Les dix questions principales 139 Communications Regulation Information F3626M42.book Page 8 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM9 1 1 Premiers contacts Votre MacBook comprend les composants suivants : Important : lisez attentivement toutes les instructions d’installation (et les consignes de sécurité de l’annexe B, «Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien», à la page 113) avant de brancher votre ordinateur sur une prise secteur. Câble secteur Télécommande Apple Remote Fiche secteur Adaptateur secteur MagSafe de 60 W MENU F3626M42.book Page 9 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM10 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Configuration de votre MacBook Votre MacBook est conçu pour être configuré rapidement et utilisé immédiatement. Les pages suivantes contiennent des informations qui vous guident tout au long du processus de configuration, notamment :  branchement de l’adaptateur secteur Apple MagSafe de 60 W ;  connexion des câbles ;  mise sous tension de votre MacBook ;  configuration d’un compte d’utilisateur et d’autres paramètres via Assistant réglages. Étape 1 : branchez l’adaptateur secteur Apple MagSafe de 60 W Si l’adaptateur secteur est entouré d’un film protecteur, retirez ce dernier avant de configurer votre MacBook. m Branchez la fiche secteur de votre adaptateur sur une prise secteur. Branchez ensuite la fiche de l’adaptateur secteur sur le port d’adaptateur secteur du MacBook. Lorsque vous rapprochez la fiche du port, vous ressentirez la force d’un aimant attirant la fiche de l’adaptateur secteur. Fiche secteur F3626M42.book Page 10 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 11 Pour étendre la portée de votre adaptateur, vous pouvez y connecter le câble d’alimentation secteur. Tirez d’abord sur la fiche secteur pour la retirer de l’adaptateur, puis connectez-y le câble d’alimentation secteur inclus. Branchez l’autre extrémité sur une prise secteur. Une illustration de cette opération se trouve à la page 33. Étape 2 : connectez vos câbles Pour obtenir une connexion Internet, connectez votre MacBook à un modem DSL, un modem câble, un modem externe ou un réseau Ethernet. Si vous vous connectez à un réseau sans fil tel qu’AirPort Extreme, vous n’avez pas besoin de câbles. Pour obtenir des informations sur les types de connexions, consultez l’annexe C, «Connexion à Internet», à la page 123. Avertissement : assurez-vous que la fiche secteur est complètement insérée dans l’adaptateur et que les broches de votre fiche secteur sont complètement déployées avant de brancher l’adaptateur sur la prise secteur. ¯ Câble secteur Fiche secteur Fiche de l’adaptateur Port de l’adaptateur secteur secteur F3626M42.book Page 11 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM12 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Remarque : pour une connexion par ligne téléphonique, vous aurez besoin du modem USB externe d’Apple, disponible sur l’Apple Store en ligne à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore ou auprès des revendeurs agréés Apple. Branchez le modem USB d’Apple dans un port USB du MacBook, puis connectez un câble téléphonique (non inclus) entre le modem et une prise téléphonique. Pour se connecter à un modem DSL ou câble ou à un réseau Ethernet : m Connectez le câble à votre modem DSL ou modem câble comme indiqué dans les instructions du modem ou bien connectez le câble Ethernet à un concentrateur ou une prise Ethernet. Branchez ensuite l’autre extrémité du câble au port Ethernet de l’ordinateur. Remarque : si vous souhaitez utiliser AirPort pour vous connecter sans fil, les réseaux sans fil disponibles sont détectés lorsque vous allumez votre ordinateur. Si nécessaire, choisissez «Activer AirPort» dans le menu d’état AirPort (Z) de la barre des menus, puis choisissez votre réseau. G Câble Ethernet Port Ethernet Gigabit (10/100/1000Base-T) F3626M42.book Page 12 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 13 Étape 3 : allumez votre MacBook 1 Pour allumer votre MacBook, appuyez rapidement (jusqu’à une seconde) sur le bouton d’alimentation (®). Votre ordinateur émet un signal sonore lorsque vous l’allumez. Après avoir entendu ce signal, n’appuyez pas sur le bouton d’alimentation, car vous risqueriez d’éteindre l’ordinateur. Sa mise en route prend quelques instants. Après le démarrage, Assistant réglages s’ouvre automatiquement. ® Bouton d’alimentation Lampe témoin de suspension d’activité F3626M42.book Page 13 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM14 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts 2 Le trackpad de votre MacBook permet de sélectionner et de déplacer des éléments à l’écran de la même façon que la souris d’un ordinateur de bureau.  Pour déplacer le pointeur à l’écran, glissez votre index sur le trackpad. Important : n’utilisez qu’un seul doigt sur le trackpad pour déplacer le pointeur. Le trackpad vous permet de faire défiler en déplaçant deux doigts. Cette fonction est activée par défaut. Pour toute information supplémentaire, consultez la section «Utilisation du trackpad» à la page 34.  Utilisez le bouton du trackpad pour sélectionner un élément, cliquer ou faire un double-clic. Trackpad Bouton du trackpad F3626M42.book Page 14 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 15 Étape 4 : configurez votre MacBook à l’aide d’Assistant réglages La première fois que vous démarrez votre ordinateur, Assistant réglages se met en route. Il vous aide à saisir les informations concernant la configuration Internet et le courrier électronique et à configurer un compte d’utilisateur sur votre ordinateur. Si vous possédez déjà un ordinateur Macintosh, l’Assistant réglages peut vous aider à transférer automatiquement les fichiers, les applications et d’autres informations depuis votre ancien ordinateur vers votre nouveau MacBook. Problèmes de mise sous tension de l’ordinateur Rien ne se produit lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®).  La batterie est peut-être déchargée. Assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est fermement connecté à l’ordinateur et relié à une prise secteur. La prise de l’adaptateur secteur doit s’éclairer lorsque que vous la branchez sur l’ordinateur.  Si l’ordinateur ne démarre toujours pas, consultez la section «Problèmes vous empê- chant d’utiliser votre ordinateur» à la page 100. Un point d’interrogation clignotant sur une icône de disque ou de dossier apparaît à l’écran. Cette icône signifie généralement que l’ordinateur ne parvient pas à localiser le logiciel système sur le disque dur interne ou sur tout disque externe relié à l’ordinateur. Déconnectez tous les périphériques externes puis essayez de redémarrer. Maintenez enfoncé le bouton d’alimentation (®) de 8 à 10 secondes jusqu’à l’arrêt de l’ordinateur. Appuyez ensuite de nouveau sur le bouton d’alimentation. Si le problème persiste, vous devrez peut-être réinstaller le logiciel système. Voir «Réinstallation des logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur» à la page 106. F3626M42.book Page 15 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM16 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Pour transférer des informations, vérifiez les éléments suivants :  Votre autre ordinateur Mac dispose d’un port FireWire intégré et prend en charge le mode disque cible FireWire.  Votre autre ordinateur Mac fonctionne sous Mac OS X version 10.1 ou ultérieure.  Vous disposez d’un câble FireWire standard 6 broches vers 6 broches. Assistant réglages vous guide tout au long du processus de transfert d’informations ; il vous suffit de suivre les instructions à l’écran. Le transfert des informations vers votre MacBook n’a aucune conséquence sur les informations qui se trouvent sur l’autre Mac (si vous avez partitionné le disque dur du nouveau MacBook, toutes les informations présentes sur l’autre Mac seront transférées vers une seule partition). Assistant réglages vous permet de transférer :  les comptes d’utilisateur, y compris les préférences et le courrier électronique ;  les réglages de réseau, pour que votre nouveau MacBook soit automatiquement configuré avec les mêmes réglages de réseau que votre autre Mac ;  les fichiers et dossiers qui se trouvent sur votre disque dur et sur vos partitions. Cela vous permet d’accéder facilement aux fichiers et dossiers que vous utilisiez sur votre autre Mac ;  le dossier Applications, pour que la plupart des applications que vous utilisiez sur votre autre Mac soient installées sur votre nouveau MacBook (vous devrez peut-être réinstaller certaines applications transférées). Important : veillez à ne pas écraser des versions plus récentes d’applications déjà installées sur votre MacBook lors du transfert de ces applications. F3626M42.book Page 16 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 17 Si vous ne comptez pas conserver ou utiliser votre autre Mac, il est préférable de lui retirer son autorisation de lecture de musique, de clips vidéo ou de livres audio achetés sur le magasin de musique en ligne iTunes Music Store. Le retrait d’autorisation d’accès à un ordinateur empêche toute autre personne de lire la musique, les clips vidéo et les livres audio que vous avez achetés et permet de libérer une autre autorisation (un compte iTunes vous permet d’autoriser jusqu’à cinq ordinateurs seulement). Pour plus d’informations sur le retrait d’autorisation, ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes et Music Store. Si vous n’utilisez pas l’Assistant réglages pour transférer vos informations lors du démarrage initial de votre MacBook, vous pouvez le faire ultérieurement. Allez dans le dossier Applications, ouvrez le dossier Utilitaires, puis double-cliquez sur Assistant migration. Remarque : si vous avez utilisé Assistant réglages pour transférer vos informations à partir de votre autre Macintosh et que vous souhaitez utiliser l’Assistant migration pour transférer à nouveau des informations, assurez-vous que FileVault est désactivé sur l’autre Macintosh. Pour désactiver FileVault, ouvrez la fenêtre Sécurité des Préférences Système et cliquez sur Désactiver FileVault. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Assistant réglages peut également vous aider à configurer la connexion à Internet de votre ordinateur. Pour les particuliers, l’accès à Internet requiert généralement l’ouverture d’un compte auprès d’un fournisseur d’accès à Internet (éventuellement payant). Si vous disposez déjà d’un compte Internet, consultez l’annexe C, «Connexion à Internet», à la page 123 pour savoir quelles sont les informations à saisir. Félicitations, votre ordinateur est prêt ! F3626M42.book Page 17 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM18 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Composants de base de votre MacBook ®? ® Bouton d’alimentation Lampe témoin de la caméra Caméra iSight Microphone Haut-parleurs stéréo Lampe témoin de suspension d’activité Récepteur à infrarouge Trackpad Bouton du trackpad Lecteur optique à chargement par fente F3626M42.book Page 18 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 19 Microphone Permet de capturer des sons directement avec ce microphone intégré (situé à gauche de la caméra iSight). Caméra iSight intégrée et lampe témoin de la caméra Participez à une vidéoconférence avec d’autres via l’application iChat AV incluse. La lampe témoin de la caméra brille lorsque la caméra capture et affiche des données vidéo. Haut-parleurs stéréo intégrés (3) Permettent d’écouter de la musique, des films, des jeux et d’autres types de données multimédia. Trackpad Permet de déplacer le pointeur sur l’écran du MacBook en utilisant un doigt ; inclut également une fonction de défilement en utilisant deux doigts sur le trackpad. Lampe témoin de suspension d’activité Une lumière blanche clignote lorsque le MacBook est en suspension d’activité. Récepteur à infrarouge intégré Utilisez votre télécommande Apple Remote et le récepteur infrarouge intégré pour contrôler votre MacBook à distance. Lecteur de disque optique à chargement par fente Votre disque optique peut lire des disques CD et DVD et écrire sur des CD. Si vous disposez d’un lecteur SuperDrive, vous pouvez également écrire sur des disques DVD. Consultez «Utilisation du lecteur optique» à la page 76 pour obtenir plus de détails. ® Bouton d’alimentation Permet d’allumer ou d’éteindre votre MacBook ou d’en suspendre l’activité. F3626M42.book Page 19 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM20 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Fonctionnalités du clavier de votre MacBook esc num F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 lock — i C - Touche de fonction (Fn) Touches de réglage du volume Touches de réglage de la luminosité Touche de verrouillage numérique Touche d’éjection de disques Touche Silence Touches de fonction standard Touche de bascule du mode vidéo F3626M42.book Page 20 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 21 Touche de fonction (Fn) Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour activer les actions personnalisées affectées aux touches de fonction (F1 à F12). Pour apprendre comment personnaliser les touches de fonction, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, puis recherchez «touches de fonction». Touches de réglage de la luminosité Permettent d’augmenter ( ) ou de diminuer ( ) la luminosité de l’écran de votre MacBook. — Commande Silence Permet de désactiver le son provenant des haut-parleurs intégrés et du port de sortie casque. - Touches de réglage du volume Permettent d’augmenter (-) ou de diminuer (–) le volume du son provenant des haut-parleurs intégrés et du port de sortie casque. Touche de verrouillage numérique Permet d’activer et de désactiver le pavé numérique intégré au clavier du MacBook. Lorsque le pavé numérique est activé, une lumière verte brille sur la touche de verouillage numérique. i Touche de bascule du mode vidéo Permet de passer du mode double-écran (affichage de votre bureau sur l’écran intégré et sur un écran externe) au mode de recopie vidéo (affichage des mêmes informations sur les deux écrans) et vice versa. F11, F12 Par défaut, la touche F11 ouvre Exposé et la touche F12 ouvre Dashboard. C Touche d’éjection de disque Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour éjecter un disque. Il est également possible d’éjecter un disque en faisant glisser son icône dans la Corbeille. F3626M42.book Page 21 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM22 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Composants supplémentaires de votre MacBook ¯ Port Ethernet Gigabit (10/100/ 1000 Base-T) G Logement de sécurité Port de sortie casque/audio numérique optique f Port d’entrée de ligne audio/ audio numérique optique , Port Mini-DVI £ Port FireWire 400 H Ports USB 2.0 Port d d’adaptateur secteur MagSafe F3626M42.book Page 22 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 23 ¯ Port de l’adaptateur secteur Apple MagSafe Branchez-y l’adaptateur secteur Apple MagSafe 60 W fourni pour recharger la batterie de votre MacBook. G Port Ethernet Gigabit (10/100/1000Base-T) Permet de se connecter soit à un réseau Ethernet haute vitesse, soit à un autre ordinateur et de transférer des fichiers. La fonction de détection automatique du port Ethernet détecte d’autres périphériques Ethernet sans avoir besoin de câble croisé Ethernet pour établir la connexion. £ Port Mini-DVI (sortie vidéo) Permet de se connecter à un affichage externe ou à un appareil de projection utilisant un connecteur DVI, VGA, composite ou S-Vidéo. Selon le type de périphérique externe auquel vous connectez votre ordinateur, utilisez un adaptateur Mini-DVI vers DVI, Mini-DVI vers VGA ou Mini-DVI vers Vidéo, tous vendus séparément à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore. H Port FireWire 400 Permettent de connecter des périphériques à haute vitesse tels que des caméras vidéo numériques et des périphériques de stockage externes. d Deux ports haute vitesse USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) Permettent de connecter des périphériques supplémentaires à votre MacBook, notamment imprimantes, unités de stockage externes, appareils photo numériques, modems, claviers ou manettes de jeu. , Port d’entrée de ligne audio/audio numérique optique Permet de connecter un micro ou un appareil audio numérique à votre MacBook. f Port de sortie casque/audio numérique optique Il permet de connecter des haut-parleurs externes, un casque ou des appareils audio numériques. Logement de sécurité Permet de protéger votre MacBook contre le vol en l’attachant à l’aide d’un câble de sécurité (vendu séparément). F3626M42.book Page 23 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM24 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Pour des informations supplémentaires sur ces fonctionnalités, consultez le chapitre 3, «Utilisation de votre MacBook», à la page 57. Extinction ou suspension d’activité de votre MacBook Une fois que vous avez fini d’utiliser votre MacBook, vous pouvez suspendre son activité ou l’éteindre. Suspension de l’activité de votre MacBook Suspendez l’activité de votre MacBook si vous ne comptez vous en éloigner que quelques instants. Vous pourrez ensuite le réactiver sans avoir à le redémarrer. Pour suspendre l’activité de votre ordinateur, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Rabattez l’écran.  Choisissez Pomme (?) > Suspendre l’activité, dans la barre des menus.  Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et cliquez sur Suspendre l’activité dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît.  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système, cliquez sur Économiseur d’énergie et définissez un délai pour la minuterie de mise en veille. F3626M42.book Page 24 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 25  Maintenez enfoncé le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) de la télécommande Apple Remote pendant 3 secondes. Pour réactiver l’ordinateur :  Si l’écran est fermé, il suffit de l’ouvrir pour réactiver votre MacBook.  Si l’écran est déjà ouvert, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®), sur l’une des touches du clavier ou sur un bouton de la télécommande Apple Remote. Extinction de votre MacBook Si vous ne comptez pas utiliser votre MacBook pendant un jour ou deux, il est préférable de l’éteindre. La lampe témoin de suspension d’activité reste allumée quelques instants au moment de l’extinction. Pour éteindre votre ordinateur, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Choisissez Pomme (?) > Éteindre, dans la barre des menus.  Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et cliquez sur Éteindre dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît. Si vous comptez ranger votre MacBook pour une durée prolongée, consultez la section «Rangement de votre MacBook» à la page 117 afin d’obtenir des informations sur les mesures à prendre pour éviter que votre batterie ne se décharge complètement. Avertissement : patientez quelques secondes jusqu’à ce que la lampe témoin de suspension d’activité clignote (signalant que l’activité de l’ordinateur est suspendue et que le disque dur a cessé de tourner) avant de déplacer votre MacBook. Tout déplacement de votre ordinateur lorsque le disque dur est en train de tourner risque d’endommager ce dernier et d’entraîner une perte de données ou l’impossibilité de démarrer à partir du disque dur. F3626M42.book Page 25 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM26 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Étalonnage de la batterie Pour obtenir une autonomie optimale de votre batterie, effectuez son étalonnage durant la première semaine d’utilisation de votre MacBook et répétez régulièrement cette procédure afin que votre batterie fonctionne à pleine capacité. Pour étalonner votre batterie : 1 Branchez votre adaptateur secteur et chargez complètement la batterie de votre MacBook jusqu’à ce que le témoin lumineux de l’adaptateur passe au vert et que l’icône de la batterie dans la barre des menus indique que la batterie est complètement chargée. 2 Laissez la batterie complètement rechargée pendant deux heures ou plus. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur durant cette période à condition de brancher l’adaptateur secteur. 3 Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur en gardant le MacBook allumé et commencez à l’utiliser avec la batterie. Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur durant cette période. Lorsque votre batterie est presque déchargée, un message d’avertissement apparaît à l’écran. 4 Gardez votre ordinateur allumé jusqu’à ce qu’il suspende son activité. Enregistrez votre travail et fermez toutes les applications lorsque la batterie est presque déchargée et avant que le système ne suspende son activité. 5 Éteignez l’ordinateur ou mettez-le en mode de suspension d’activité pendant cinq heures ou plus. 6 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur jusqu’à ce que la batterie soit complètement rechargée. Important : recommencez la procédure d’étalonnage environ tous les deux mois afin de maintenir votre batterie dans un état optimal. Si vous n’utilisez pas fréquemment votre MacBook, il est préférable d’étalonner à nouveau la batterie au moins une fois par mois. F3626M42.book Page 26 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 1 Premiers contacts 27 Si vous avez acheté des batteries supplémentaires, appliquez-leur également la procédure d’étalonnage. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Utilisation de la batterie» à la page 81. Informations supplémentaires Pour en savoir plus sur votre MacBook, consultez les ressources suivantes :  Consultez le chapitre 2, «Familiarisation avec votre MacBook», à la page 29, pour découvrir les notions importantes élémentaires.  Si vous n’êtes pas familiarisé avec Mac OS X, lisez le fascicule Bienvenue sur Tiger livré avec votre ordinateur et ouvrez l’Aide Mac pour y explorer les informations disponibles. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Obtention de réponses grâce à l’Aide Mac» à la page 28.  Si un problème vous empêche d’utiliser votre ordinateur, consultez le chapitre 5, «Dépannage», à la page 99.  Consultez les questions les plus fréquemment posées dans «Les dix questions principales» à la page 133 .  Pour plus d’information sur l’assistance, les groupes de discussion et les dernières nouveautés logicielles Apple à télécharger, visitez le site www.apple.com/fr/support.  Si vous ne trouvez pas de réponse à votre problème, consultez le Guide de service et support AppleCare qui accompagne votre ordinateur pour savoir comment joindre Apple. F3626M42.book Page 27 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM28 Chapitre 1 Premiers contacts Obtention de réponses grâce à l’Aide Mac La plupart des informations sur l’utilisation de votre Macintosh sont disponibles directement sur votre ordinateur, dans l’Aide Mac. Pour faire apparaître l’Aide Mac : 1 Cliquez sur l’icône Finder dans le Dock (barre d’icônes située au bas de l’écran). 2 Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac (cliquez sur le menu Aide dans la barre des menus puis sélectionnez Aide Mac). 3 Cliquez dans le champ Rechercher, tapez votre question et appuyez sur la touche Retour du clavier. Champ Rechercher F3626M42.book Page 28 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM29 2 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Ce chapitre présente des notions élémentaires importantes concernant votre MacBook. Lorsque vous cessez d’utiliser votre MacBook, patientez quelques instants avant de transporter l’ordinateur afin de laisser le temps au disque dur ou à tout disque optique situé dans votre lecteur (CD ou DVD) d’arrêter de tourner. Évitez de bousculer ou de heurter votre MacBook pendant que des disques sont en train de tourner. Remarque : votre MacBook utilise la technologie Sudden Motion Sensor qui contribue à protéger le disque dur en cas de chute ou de vibrations subies par l’ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, consultez la section «Technologie Sudden Motion Sensor» à la page 81. Lorsque vous utilisez votre MacBook ou que vous rechargez sa batterie, il est normal de constater une augmentation de la température de la partie inférieure du boîtier. En cas d’utilisation prolongée, placez votre MacBook sur une surface plane et stable. Le dessous du boîtier est légèrement surélevé pour permettre la circulation d’air et assurer ainsi à l’équipement une température de fonctionnement normale. F3626M42.book Page 29 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM30 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Vous entendrez parfois de petits bruits émis par le système au démarrage ou lorsque le lecteur de disque dur et le lecteur optique sont utilisés. De même, il arrive qu’après une certaine période de fonctionnement du MacBook, un petit ventilateur se mette en marche pour refroidir le système, ce qui peut produire un léger bruit. Ce genre de sons, qu’émet le système, font partie du fonctionnement normal de votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir plus de consignes de sécurité sur la manipulation et l’utilisation de votre MacBook dans différents lieux, veuillez consulter l’annexe B, «Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien», à la page 113. Le reste du présent chapitre comprend des sections concernant l’utilisation des composants de votre MacBook, notamment l’affichage, l’adaptateur secteur, le trackpad, le clavier, la caméra iSight intégrée et la télécommande Apple Remote. Vous trouverez également des informations sur Mac OS X, l’Aide Mac, les applications et la connexion de périphériques. Réglage de l’écran Après avoir commencé à travailler sur votre nouvel MacBook, réglez si nécessaire la luminosité de l’écran pour un meilleur confort visuel. Utilisez les touches F1 et F2 portant l’icône de luminosité (¤) pour régler la luminosité de l’écran. Pour régler les préférences de votre écran dans le but d’optimiser la durée de vie de la batterie : 1 Ouvrez Préférences Système puis cliquez sur Économiseur d’énergie. 2 Dans le menu local «Réglages de», choisissez Batterie puis cliquez sur Options. F3626M42.book Page 30 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 31 3 Décochez la case «Réduire la luminosité de l’écran lors de l’utilisation de cette source d’énergie» si vous ne souhaitez pas que votre écran s’assombrisse pour réduire la consommation de la batterie. Lorsque cette fonction est activée, votre écran s’assombrit légèrement lorsque vous passez de l’utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur à celle de la batterie. Lorsque vous branchez à nouveau l’adaptateur secteur, votre écran revient à son niveau précédent de luminosité. Décochez la case «Réduire automatiquement la luminosité de l’écran avant sa mise en veille» si vous ne souhaitez pas que l’écran s’assombrisse avant que le MacBook ne suspende son activité. Modification de la taille des images à l’écran Votre MacBook est équipé d’un écran large de 13,3 pouces doté d’une résolution par défaut de 1280 x 800. Vous pouvez modifier la taille des images affichées en réglant la résolution de l’écran. Vous pouvez choisir une résolution inférieure dans la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système. Lorsque vous diminuez la résolution, les éléments apparaissent plus grands à l’écran et sont par conséquent plus faciles à visualiser. Les résolutions réduites ne sont cependant pas toujours aussi nettes que la résolution d’écran par défaut. Lorsque vous employez certaines résolutions, deux bandes noires apparaissent des deux côtés de l’écran. Si vous souhaitez supprimer ces bandes, vous pouvez choisir une version «étirée» de la résolution, afin que l’image couvre l’ensemble de l’écran et les bandes. Pour changer la résolution de votre écran : m Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus. Ouvrez la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système. F3626M42.book Page 31 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM32 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Pour changer la résolution de votre écran via le menu d’état Moniteurs de la barre des menus, cliquez sur l’option «Ouvrir Moniteurs dans la barre des menus». Utilisation de l’adaptateur secteur Le branchement de l’adaptateur secteur alimente le MacBook et recharge sa batterie. Important : pour des performances optimales, n’utilisez que l’adaptateur secteur livré avec votre ordinateur ou procurez-vous un adaptateur secteur MagSafe Apple de 60 W supplémentaire. La première fois que vous connectez l’adaptateur secteur à votre ordinateur, une lampe témoin placée sur la fiche de l’adaptateur s’illumine. Une lumière orange indique que la batterie est alimentée. Une lumière verte indique que la batterie n’est pas alimentée, ce qui peut signifier que la batterie est complètement rechargée, n’est pas installée ou présente un problème. Si vous ne voyez pas de lampe témoin, votre fiche n’est probablement pas branchée correctement. Si des débris sont présents, enlevez-les. Vous pouvez contrôler le niveau de la batterie soit à l’aide du menu d’état Batterie de la barre des menus, soit en vérifiant les lampes témoins de niveau de la batterie situés sur la partie inférieure de la batterie (voir la page 81). Avertissement : le port d’adaptateur secteur du MacBook contient un aimant qui peut effacer les données d’une carte de crédit, d’un iPod ou d’autres périphériques. Pour préserver vos données, maintenez-les, ainsi que les autres supports magnétiques, à distance du port d’adaptateur secteur. F3626M42.book Page 32 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 33 Pour rallonger le câble de l’adaptateur secteur, tirez d’abord sur la fiche secteur pour la retirer de l’adaptateur. Connectez le câble secteur inclus à l’adaptateur, en vous assurant qu’il est fermement connecté. Branchez l’autre extrémité sur une prise secteur. Le câble d’alimentation secteur fournit une connexion avec mise à la terre. Utilisez le câble d’alimentation secteur et connectez-le à une prise secteur de terre chaque fois que cela est possible. Utilisez uniquement le câble d’alimentation secteur fourni avec votre adaptateur secteur. Veillez à ce que le connecteur soit fermement engagé dans le port de l’adaptateur secteur de l’ordinateur afin de garantir l’arrivée de courant à l’ordinateur. Si le câble est correctement branché, une lampe témoin s’allume à l’extrémité du câble branché sur votre MacBook . Lorsque vous déconnectez l’adaptateur secteur d’une prise de courant ou de l’ordinateur, débranchez la prise et non le câble. Pour obtenir des consignes de sécurité concernant l’utilisation de votre adaptateur secteur, consultez la section «Configuration de votre MacBook et de l’adaptateur secteur» à la page 115. Câble secteur Fiche secteur F3626M42.book Page 33 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM34 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Utilisation du trackpad La distance de déplacement du pointeur à l’écran dépend de la vitesse à laquelle vous déplacez votre doigt sur le trackpad. Pour déplacer le pointeur sur une courte distance à l’écran, faites glisser l’index lentement sur le trackpad ; plus le déplacement du doigt est rapide, plus la distance parcourue par le pointeur à l’écran est grande. Vous pouvez également régler la vitesse de déplacement dans la fenêtre Clavier et souris des Préférences Système. Vous pouvez faire défiler verticalement ou horizontalement une fenêtre munie de barres de défilement en déplaçant deux doigts sur le trackpad. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver cette option dans la fenêtre Clavier et souris des Préférences Système. Conseils d’utilisation du trackpad Pour optimiser votre utilisation du trackpad :  N’utilisez qu’un seul doigt, sauf si la fonction de défilement est activée et que vous souhaitez l’utiliser.  N’utilisez pas de stylo ou tout autre objet.  Veillez à ce que votre doigt et le trackpad soient secs. Si l’humidité ou la condensation provoque une accumulation de buée sur le trackpad, essuyez-le avec un chiffon propre avant de l’utiliser.  N’utilisez jamais de produit nettoyant sur le trackpad. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation du trackpad, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, en haut de l’écran. F3626M42.book Page 34 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 35 En plus d’utiliser le bouton du trackpad, vous pouvez utiliser votre doigt pour cliquer ou double-cliquer directement sur le trackpad. Les options du trackpad peuvent être activées via la fenêtre Clavier et souris des Préférences Système. Remarque : s’il vous arrive souvent que le pointeur bouge lorsque vous tapez parce que vous effleurez le trackpad par inadvertance, sélectionnez l’option «Ignorer les utilisations accidentelles du trackpad» dans la fenêtre Clavier et souris des Préférences Système. Utilisation du clavier Votre MacBook est équipé d’un pavé numérique intégré au sein des touches normales du clavier. Les touches utilisées par le pavé numérique sont pourvues d’une indication secondaire. Touche de verrouillage numérique Pavé numérique F3626M42.book Page 35 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM36 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Pour utiliser le pavé numérique, appuyez sur la touche de verrouillage numérique. Lorsque le pavé numérique est actif, l’indicateur de la touche de verrouillage numérique brille. Lorsque vous avez fini de l’utiliser, appuyez à nouveau sur la touche de verrouillage numérique pour le désactiver. Important : si votre clavier ne semble pas fonctionner correctement, vérifiez la touche de verrouillage numérique. Lorsque le pavé numérique est activé, les autres touches et raccourcis clavier correspondant à des commandes de menu (comme x + Q pour quitter l’application en cours) sont désactivées. Vous pouvez utiliser votre clavier ou la télécommande Apple Remote pour contrôler l’application Front Row. (Voir «Utilisation du clavier pour contrôler Front Row» à la page 42.) Si vous souhaitez utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour travailler de manière plus efficace, ouvrez l’Aide Mac et recherchez «raccourcis de clavier». Vous y trouverez une liste complète de raccourcis clavier pour un grand nombre de procédures et d’applications courantes. Utilisation d’une souris Si vous disposez d’une souris Apple dotée d’un connecteur USB, insérez celui-ci dans le port USB 2.0 pour l’utiliser immédiatement. Si vous possédez une souris Apple Wireless Mouse, consultez la section «Utilisation de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth» à la page 67 pour obtenir des informations sur son utilisation. Vous pouvez vous procurer une souris sans fil ou USB sur l’Apple Store en ligne à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore ou chez un revendeur agréé Apple. F3626M42.book Page 36 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 37 Utilisation de la télécommande Apple Remote et de Front Row Votre télécommande Apple Remote fonctionne avec l’interface de Front Row et le récepteur infrarouge intégré, situé en bas et à droit de la face avant de votre MacBook. Utilisez la télécommande Apple Remote pour ouvrir Front Row et interagir à distance avec entre autres iTunes, iPhoto, iMovie et Lecteur DVD. Utilisez votre télécommande Apple Remote pour :  ouvrir Front Row et parcourir les menus Musique, Photos, Clips vidéo et DVD ;  régler le volume d’un morceau, lire ou mettre en pause un morceau ou passer à la piste suivante ou précédente dans iTunes ;  visualiser un diaporama à partir d’un album photo dans iPhoto ;  lire des séquences dans votre dossier Séquences ou regarder des bandes-annonces QuickTime en ligne ;  lire un disque DVD dans votre lecteur optique avec Lecteur DVD ;  parcourir les présentations Keynote ;  suspendre l’activité de votre MacBook ou le réactiver. Pour utiliser votre télécommande Apple Remote avec Front Row, dirigez-la vers l’avant du MacBook et :  appuyez sur le bouton Menu (») pour ouvrir ou fermer Front Row ou pour revenir au menu précédent lorsque vous explorez Front Row ;  appuyez sur le bouton Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou sur le bouton Précédent/ Retour rapide (]) pour passer d’une application à l’autre dans Front Row ;  appuyez sur les boutons Augmenter le volume/Élément de menu précédent (?) et Baisser le volume/Élément de menu suivant (D) pour vous déplacer parmi les options d’un menu ou régler le volume ; F3626M42.book Page 37 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM38 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook  appuyez sur le bouton Sélection/Lecture/Pause (’) pour sélectionner un élément de menu ou pour lire ou mettre en pause un morceau, un diaporama ou un DVD ;  appuyez sur le bouton Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) ou sur le bouton Précédent/Retour rapide (]) pour explorer votre contenu multimédia (maintenez les boutons enfoncés pour accélérer le défilement) ;  maintenez le bouton Sélection/Lecture/Pause (’) enfoncé pendant 3 secondes pour suspendre l’activité de votre MacBook. Bouton Suivant/Avance rapide Bouton Sélection/Lecture/Pause Compartiment de la pile Bouton Augmenter le volume/Élément de menu précédent Fenêtre infrarouge Bouton Baisser le volume/ Élément de menu suivant Bouton Précédent/ Retour rapide Bouton Menu F3626M42.book Page 38 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 39 Utilisation de la télécommande Apple Remote avec Keynote Si Keynote est installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez contrôler vos présentations avec la télécommande Apple Remote. Une fois Keynote ouvert, appuyez sur le bouton Sélection/Lecture/Pause (’) pour lancer une présentation. Ensuite, selon l’endroit de l’application où vous souhaitez travailler (dans une présentation ou dans le classeur de diapositives), dirigez la télécommande Apple Remote vers votre MacBook et appuyez sur ses boutons pour contrôler Keynote suivant les indications du tableau suivant. Appuyez sur le bouton... dans une présentation dans le classeur de diapositives ’ (Sélection/Lecture/Pause) pour interrompre/reprendre la présentation pour passer à la diapositive sélectionnée » (Menu) pour lancer le classeur de diapositives pour quitter le classeur de diapositives » et maintenez-le enfoncé pour quitter l’application pour quitter la présentation ] (Précédent/Retour rapide) pour passer à la diapositive précédente pour sélectionner la diapositive précédente ] et maintenez-le enfoncé pour passer à la première diapositive ‘ (Suivant/avance rapide) pour passer à la diapositive suivante pour sélectionner la diapositive suivante ‘ et maintenez-le enfoncé pour passer à la dernière diapositive ? (Augmenter le volume/ Élément de menu précédent) pour augmenter le volume pour augmenter le volume D (Baisser le volume/ Élément de menu suivant) pour baisser le volume pour baisser le volume F3626M42.book Page 39 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM40 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Jumelage de votre télécommande Apple Remote Si vous possédez dans une pièce plusieurs ordinateurs ou autres appareils dotés de récepteurs à infrarouge intégrés (par exemple, plusieurs MacBook ou iMac dans un bureau personnel ou un laboratoire), vous avez la possibilité de «jumeler» votre télé- commande Apple Remote avec un ordinateur ou un appareil précis. Le jumelage permet de configurer l’ordinateur ou l’appareil récepteur de façon à ce qu’il ne soit contrôlé que par une télécommande Apple Remote spécifique. Pour jumeler votre télécommande Apple Remote avec votre MacBook : 1 Mettez la télécommande Apple Remote à 8 à 10 centimètres du récepteur infrarouge de votre MacBook. 2 Maintenez simultanément enfoncés les boutons Menu (») et Suivant/Avance rapide (‘) de votre télécommande Apple Remote pendant 5 secondes. Lorsque vous avez correctement jumelé votre télécommande Apple Remote avec votre MacBook, le symbole d’un maillon de chaîne ( ) apparaît à l’écran. Pour annuler le jumelage de la télécommande Apple Remote et du MacBook : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus. 2 Cliquez sur Sécurité puis sur Désactiver le jumelage. F3626M42.book Page 40 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 41 Remplacement de la batterie La télécommande Apple Remote inclut une pile non rechargeable. Si nécessaire, remplacez la pile par une pile CR 2032. N’essayez pas de recharger la pile. Pour remettre la pile en place : 1 Ouvrez le logement de la pile en appuyant sur le bouton (illustré ci-dessus) avec un petit objet, tel que l’extrémité d’un trombone. 2 Ôtez le compartiment de la pile et retirez-la. 3 Insérez la nouvelle pile, son côté positif (+) tourné vers le haut. 4 Refermez le logement de la pile. Appuyez sur ce bouton à l’aide d’un petit objet arrondi pour éjecter partiellement le logement de la pile. Face positive (+) vers le haut. Tirez afin de libérer le logement de la pile. MENU F3626M42.book Page 41 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM42 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Désactivation de la réception infrarouge Vous pouvez utiliser les préférences Sécurité pour activer ou désactiver la réception infrarouge sur votre MacBook. Pour désactiver la réception infrarouge :  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus et cliquez sur Sécurité.  Cochez la case «Désactiver le récepteur à infrarouge de la télécommande». Utilisation du clavier pour contrôler Front Row Vous pouvez utiliser votre clavier au lieu de la télécommande Apple Remote pour contrôler Front Row. Les touches suivantes correspondent aux boutons de la télécommande Apple Remote : Équivalent clavier Bouton de la télécommande Apple Remote Commande (x) - Échap Ouvrir menu (») Échap Quitter menu (») Espace ou Retour Sélection/Lecture/Pause (’) Flèche vers le haut (Ò) Augmenter le volume/Élément de menu précédent (?) Flèche vers la bas (¬) Baisser le volume/Élément de menu suivant (D) Flèche vers la droite (°) Suivant/avance rapide (‘) Flèche vers la gauche (k) Précédent/Retour rapide (]) F3626M42.book Page 42 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 43 En savoir plus sur la télécommande Apple Remote L’Aide Mac fournit des informations supplémentaires sur la télécommande Apple Remote. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, puis recherchez «Apple Remote». Utilisation de la caméra vidéo iSight intégrée À l’aide de la caméra iSight intégrée, vous pouvez prendre des photos avec Photo Booth ou participer à des conférences vidéo avec d’autres utilisateurs d’iChat AV. Prise de photos avec Photo Booth Utilisez Photo Booth pour prendre des photos et ajouter des effets visuels amusants tels que sépia, noir et blanc, éclat, crayon de couleur et plus encore. Caméra iSight Lampe témoin de la caméra Microphone F3626M42.book Page 43 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM44 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Pour prendre une photo avec Photo Booth : 1 Cliquez sur l’icône de Photo Booth dans le Dock pour ouvrir Photo Booth, puis allumez la caméra iSight intégrée. La lampe témoin située à côté de la caméra brille lorsque celle-ci est allumée. 2 Vous pouvez sélectionner un effet à appliquer à votre photo. 3 Cliquez sur l’icône de caméra sous l’image pour prendre une photo. Enregistrez l’image comme photo de contact iChat, envoyez-la par courrier électronique à vos amis ou enregistrez-la dans votre photothèque iPhoto. Pour utiliser une photo comme photo de contact ou de compte : 1 Ouvrez Photo Booth et prenez une photo. 2 Sélectionnez la photo que vous souhaitez utiliser comme photo de contact ou photo de compte. 3 Cliquez sur l’icône de photo de contact ou de compte pour automatiquement mettre à jour votre photo. Pour plus d’informations sur Photo Booth, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, puis sélectionnez Centre d’aide > Aide Photo Booth. Utilisation de votre caméra iSight avec iMovie HD Vous pouvez capturer de la vidéo en direct de votre caméra iSight, directement dans iMovie HD. Pour capturer de la vidéo en direct : 1 Ouvrez iMovie HD en cliquant sur son icône dans le Dock. F3626M42.book Page 44 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 45 2 Cliquez sur l’option de changement de mode pour régler iMovie HD sur le mode caméra intégrée. 3 Cliquez sur l’icône de caméra à gauche de l’option de changement de mode puis choisissez iSight intégrée dans le menu local. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton «Enregistrer avec iSight» dans le moniteur iMovie pour commencer à enregistrer. La vidéo que vous voyez dans le moniteur iMovie est enregistrée comme clip dans le panneau des clips iMovie. 5 Cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton «Enregistrer avec iSight» pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Vous pouvez enregistrer de la vidéo tant que votre MacBook possède suffisamment d’espace libre. L’Aide Mac fournit des informations supplémentaires sur iMovie HD. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre de menus, puis choisissez Centre d’aide > Aide iMovie HD. Vidéoconférences avec iChat AV Lorsque vous ouvrez iChat AV, la lampe témoin de la caméra s’allume. Cliquez sur l’icône vidéo d’un contact pour participer avec lui à une vidéoconférence iChat AV, en temps réel avec animation vidéo intégrale. Votre MacBook est également doté d’un micro intégré, ce qui vous permet de profiter à la fois du son et de l’image durant vos vidéoconférences iChat AV. Option de changement de mode F3626M42.book Page 45 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM46 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Pour utiliser la caméra iSight intégrée en vue de lancer une vidéoconférence, vous avez besoin des éléments suivants :  un compte .Mac, America Online (AOL) ou AOL Instant Messenger (AIM) (requis pour iChat AV) ;  une connexion à Internet à haut débit via câble modem ou DSL ou un réseau local (LAN). Veuillez notez que les vidéoconférences ne sont pas possibles sous une connexion à Internet par ligne commutée. Pour débuter une vidéoconférence : 1 Ouvrez iChat AV. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton représentant une caméra situé à côté d’un contact dans votre liste de contacts. Pour en savoir plus sur l’ajout de contacts à votre liste, choisissez Aide > Aide iChat AV. Lorsque vous cliquez sur un bouton représentant une caméra dans la liste des contacts, la lampe témoin de la caméra brille pour indiquer que vous affichez de la vidéo. Cela enverra également une invitation à votre contact et vous permettra de voir de quoi vous avez l’air à la caméra. Lorsqu’un contact accepte votre invitation, vous pouvez le voir apparaître sur votre écran, ainsi que vous-même. F3626M42.book Page 46 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 47 Vidéoconférence avec plusieurs contacts Il est possible de réaliser des vidéoconférences en compagnie de deux, et jusqu’à trois, contacts à la fois. Un des contacts accueille la vidéoconférence et les autres y participent. Pour débuter une vidéoconférence avec plusieurs contacts : 1 Ouvrez iChat AV. 2 Maintenez enfoncée la touche Commande tout en sélectionnant les contacts que vous souhaitez inviter. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton représentant une caméra situé au bas de votre liste de contacts. Extinction de la caméra iSight Pour éteindre la caméra iSight, fermez la fenêtre active iChat. La lampe témoin de la caméra s’éteint, ce qui indique que la caméra iSight est éteinte et que l’enregistrement a été interrompu. Utilisation de votre photo en tant qu’image de contact Vous avez la possibilité de vous prendre en photo à l’aide de la caméra iSight et d’utiliser cette photo comme image de contact. Elle apparaîtra dans la liste de contacts des autres utilisateurs, si vous en faites partie. Pour définir votre image de contact : 1 Ouvrez iChat AV. 2 Choisissez Contacts > Changer ma photo. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton représentant une caméra. F3626M42.book Page 47 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM48 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook À propos de Mac OS X Votre ordinateur est doté de Mac OS X version 10.4 Tiger qui comprend entre autres Spotlight (un moteur de recherche qui répertorie automatiquement l’ensemble de vos fichiers), Dashboard (qui vous permet de garder à portée de mains des «widgets», ou mini-applications, très pratiques) et Exposé (qui dispose et affiche de manière élégante toutes les fenêtres des applications ouvertes). Lorsque vous serez prêt à en apprendre davantage sur Mac OS X et les applications iLife maintes fois primées qui accompagnent votre ordinateur, consultez le livret Bienvenue sur Tiger fourni avec votre MacBook ou consultez les informations dans l’Aide Mac. En cas de problèmes lors de l’utilisation de Mac OS X, consultez le chapitre 5, «Dépannage», ou l’Aide Mac. Pour obtenir des informations sur les applications qui sont compatibles avec Mac OS X ou pour en savoir plus sur Mac OS X en général, consultez le site web d’Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/macosx. F3626M42.book Page 48 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 49 Personnalisation du bureau et réglage des préférences Grâce aux Préférences Système, vous pouvez donner à votre bureau l’apparence souhaitée sans perdre de temps. Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus. N’hésitez pas à expérimenter avec les réglages apparaissant dans les fenêtres suivantes :  Apparence : sélectionnez cette fenêtre de préférences pour changer entre autres la couleur des boutons, menus et fenêtres, ainsi que celle de mise en surbrillance.  Dashboard et Exposé : sélectionnez cette fenêtre des Préférences pour définir les coins d’écran actifs et les raccourcis de Dashboard, de votre bureau, des fenêtres de l’application ainsi que de toutes les fenêtres. F3626M42.book Page 49 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM50 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook  Bureau et économiseur d’écran : sélectionnez cette fenêtre de préférences pour changer la couleur et le motif du bureau ou pour le remplacer par la photo ou l’image de votre choix. Vous pouvez également choisir un effet d’écran accrocheur qui apparaîtra lorsque l’ordinateur reste inactif.  Dock : sélectionnez cette fenêtre de préférences pour modifier la taille, l’emplacement et le comportement de votre Dock (c’est-à-dire, la barre d’icônes au bas de votre écran). Tout en vous familiarisant avec votre ordinateur, découvrez progressivement les autres Préférences Système. Préférences Système constitue le poste de commande qui vous permet d’effectuer la plupart des réglages de votre MacBook. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez l’Aide Mac et recherchez «Préférences Système» ou la fenêtre de préférences spécifique que vous souhaitez modifier. Remarque : Apple publiant régulièrement de nouvelles versions et mises à jour de son logiciel système, ses applications et ses sites Internet, il est possible que les illustrations figurant dans ce manuel diffèrent légèrement de celles qui apparaissent sur votre écran. Utilisation des applications Votre MacBook est accompagné d’applications logicielles vous permettant d’envoyer des messages électroniques, de naviguer sur Internet et de bavarder en ligne. Il inclut également la suite d’applications iLife, utile par exemple pour l’organisation de votre musique et de vos photos numériques, la création de séquences et de sites web. Pour en savoir plus sur ces applications, consultez le livret Bienvenue sur Tiger fourni avec votre ordinateur. F3626M42.book Page 50 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 51 Lorsqu’une application ne répond plus Il peut arriver, très rarement, qu’une application se «fige» à l’écran. Mac OS X permet de quitter une application figée sans redémarrer votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez ainsi enregistrer le travail effectué dans d’autres applications ouvertes. Pour forcer une application à se fermer : 1 Appuyez sur les touches Commande (x) + Option + Échap ou choisissez Pomme (?) > Forcer à quitter dans la barre des menus. La boîte de dialogue Forcer à quitter des applications apparaît. L’application est sélectionnée. 2 Dans la zone de confirmation, cliquez sur Forcer à quitter. L’application se ferme, en laissant toutes les autres applications ouvertes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez également redémarrer le Finder à partir de cette zone de dialogue. Si vous rencontrez d’autres difficultés avec une application, consultez le chapitre 5, «Dépannage», à la page 99. Maintien à jour de vos logiciels Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet pour télécharger et installer automatiquement les dernières versions de logiciels, gestionnaires et autres améliorations fournies par Apple. Chaque fois que vous vous connectez à Internet, «Mise à jour de logiciels» consulte les serveurs Internet d’Apple pour rechercher les mises à jour disponibles pour votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez configurer votre Mac pour qu’il recherche régulièrement dans les serveurs Apple des mises à jour de logiciels, puis les télécharge et les installe. F3626M42.book Page 51 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM52 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Pour rechercher des logiciels mis à jour : 1 Ouvrez les Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur l’icône «Mise à jour de logiciels» et suivez les instructions à l’écran.  Pour plus d’informations, recherchez «Mise à jour de logiciels» dans l’Aide Mac.  Pour obtenir les toutes dernières informations concernant Mac OS X, accédez au site web Mac OS X à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/macosx. Connexion à une imprimante Suivez les instructions fournies avec votre imprimante pour installer les logiciels requis et connecter l’imprimante. Mac OS X intègre la plupart des gestionnaires d’imprimantes. Vous pouvez connecter la plupart des imprimantes au moyen d’un câble USB ; d’autres peuvent requérir une connexion en réseau, par exemple via Ethernet. Si vous possédez une borne d’accès AirPort Express ou AirPort Extreme, vous pouvez connecter une imprimante USB à la borne d’accès (plutôt qu’à l’ordinateur) pour effectuer des tâches d’impression sans fil. Pour en savoir plus sur les ports USB, consultez la section «Utilisation de périphériques USB (Universal Serial Bus)» à la page 58. Pour en savoir plus sur les connexions réseau ou sans fil, consultez la section «Fonctionnement de l’accès sans fil à Internet via AirPort» à la page 66 et «Connexion via Ethernet» à la page 69. Lorsque vous connectez une imprimante USB, elle est normalement automatiquement détectée par votre ordinateur qui l’ajoute alors à la liste des imprimantes disponibles. Il se peut que vous ayez besoin du nom réseau ou de l’adresse des imprimantes connectées à un réseau pour pouvoir imprimer. Utilisez la fenêtre Imprimantes et fax des Préférences Système pour sélectionner votre imprimante. F3626M42.book Page 52 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 53 Remarque : si votre imprimante ne fonctionne pas, il sera peut-être nécessaire de consulter le site web de son fabricant pour obtenir le logiciel de gestionnaire d’imprimante compatible à installer. Pour configurer une imprimante : 1 Ouvrez Préférences Système et cliquez sur l’icône Imprimantes et fax. 2 Cliquez sur Impression puis sur le bouton Ajouter (+) pour ajouter une imprimante. 3 Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Utilisez les boutons Ajouter (+) et Supprimer (–) pour choisir les imprimantes que vous souhaitez voir apparaître dans la liste des imprimantes. Contrôle de l’impression Après avoir envoyé un document à une imprimante, vous pouvez contrôler l’impression, interrompre votre tâche d’impression ou la placer temporairement en attente. Cliquez sur l’icône Imprimante dans le Dock pour ouvrir la fenêtre Imprimante. Pour plus d’informations, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac et recherchez «impression». Lecture d’un CD et connexion d’un casque d’écoute Vous pouvez utiliser iTunes, un juke-box numérique et magasin facile à utiliser, d’où vous pouvez télécharger de la musique, des clips vidéos, des podcasts et des livres audio et écouter votre musique iTunes et des CD tout en utilisant votre ordinateur. Insérez un CD de musique dans votre lecteur optique et iTunes apparaîtra automatiquement à l’écran. Vous pouvez écouter de la musique soit via les haut-parleurs internes du MacBook, soit en branchant un casque d’écoute sur le port de sortie casque de votre MacBook. Pour en savoir plus sur iTunes : m Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes et Music Store. F3626M42.book Page 53 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM54 Chapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook Connexion d’un appareil photo ou de tout autre périphérique FireWire ou USB Vous pouvez connecter un iPod, un appareil photo numérique, une caméra vidéo, un scanneur ou tout autre appareil doté d’un connecteur FireWire ou USB à votre MacBook. Suivez les instructions d’installation fournies avec votre appareil. Pour obtenir des informations sur FireWire, consultez la section «Connexion via FireWire» à la page 62. Pour obtenir des informations sur les connexions USB, consultez la section «Utilisation de périphériques USB (Universal Serial Bus)» à la page 58. Transfert de fichiers depuis ou vers un autre ordinateur Si vous souhaitez transférer des fichiers ou des documents depuis ou vers un autre ordinateur, vous pouvez procéder de différentes manières.  Vous pouvez facilement transférer tous vos fichiers à l’aide d’Assistant migration et d’un câble FireWire (vendu séparément).  Vous pouvez également vous connecter à un autre Mac à l’aide d’un câble FireWire et démarrer votre MacBook en mode disque cible FireWire. Votre MacBook apparaît alors en tant que disque dur sur l’autre ordinateur et vous pouvez y faire glisser des fichiers. Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de FireWire pour transférer des fichiers, consultez la section «Connexion de votre MacBook à un autre ordinateur via FireWire» à la page 64.  Si vous possédez un lecteur de disque dur externe, un iPod, un lecteur flash ou tout autre périphérique de stockage de données qui se connecte via un câble USB ou FireWire, vous pouvez l’utiliser pour transférer des fichiers.  Si vous disposez d’un compte de messagerie, vous pouvez envoyer vos fichiers par courrier électronique vers un autre ordinateur. F3626M42.book Page 54 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 2 Familiarisation avec votre MacBook 55  Si vous souscrivez un compte .Mac (payant) auprès d’Apple, vous pouvez l’utiliser pour transférer des fichiers. Avec un compte .Mac, vous obtenez un iDisk qui vous fournit un espace Internet pour la sauvegarde et le stockage de fichiers, afin que d’autres ordinateurs puissent accéder aux fichiers que vous y transférez.  À l’aide d’un lecteur optique enregistrable, vous pouvez enregistrer des fichiers pour les transférer sur CD ou DVD.  Si vous connectez votre ordinateur à un réseau via Ethernet, vous pouvez échanger des fichiers avec d’autres ordinateurs du réseau. Vous pouvez accéder à un serveur ou à un autre ordinateur en cliquant sur Réseau dans la barre latérale du Finder ou en choisissant Aller > «Se connecter au serveur» dans la barre des menus du Finder.  Vous pouvez créer un petit réseau Ethernet en connectant un câble Ethernet depuis votre MacBook jusqu’au port Ethernet d’un autre ordinateur. Après vous être connecté à l’autre ordinateur, vous pouvez transférer des fichiers directement d’un ordinateur à l’autre. Pour plus d’informations, ouvrez l’Aide Mac et recherchez «Connexion de deux ordinateurs».  Vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau sans fil AirPort Extreme pour transférer des fichiers. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Fonctionnement de l’accès sans fil à Internet via AirPort» à la page 66.  Si vous avez accès à des appareils qui communiquent via la technologie sans fil Bluetooth®, vous pouvez transférer des fichiers vers d’autres appareils équipés de cette technologie. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Utilisation de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth» à la page 67. Pour obtenir des informations générales sur le transfert de fichiers et de documents, ouvrez l’Aide Mac et recherchez «transfert» ou le type de connexion dont vous avez besoin. F3626M42.book Page 55 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMF3626M42.book Page 56 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM57 3 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Votre MacBook comporte de nombreuses fonctions et capacités de connexion intégrées. En voici la liste :  des ports USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) pour la connexion d’appareils, notamment iPod, imprimantes ou scanneurs (voir «Utilisation de périphériques USB (Universal Serial Bus)» à la page 58) ;  un port FireWire 400 pour connecter des périphériques à haute vitesse, tels que caméras vidéo numériques et disques durs externes (voir «Connexion via FireWire» à la page 62) ;  la connectivité sans fil Bluetooth, la capacité réseau sans fil AirPort Extreme et la capacité réseau Ethernet Gigabit. (voir «Fonctionnement de l’accès sans fil à Internet via AirPort» à la page 66 et «Connexion via Ethernet» à la page 69) ;  un port d’entrée de ligne audio/audio numérique optique et un port de sortie casque/ audio numérique optique pour connecter un casque, des haut-parleurs et des appareils audio numériques (voir «Connexion de haut-parleurs et autres périphériques audio» à la page 75) ; F3626M42.book Page 57 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM58 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook  un port vidéo mini-DVI pour connecter votre MacBook à un moniteur externe via un adaptateur Mini-DVI vers DVI ou Mini-DVI vers VGA : utilisez un adaptateur Mini-DVI vers Vidéo pour connecter tout appareil vidéo nécessitant une connexion composite ou S-Vidéo ; tous les adaptateurs sont vendus séparément (voir «Gestion de la vidéo externe» à la page 71) ;  un lecteur optique à chargement par fente pour la lecture de CD et de DVD et pour la gravure de CD ; si vous disposez d’un lecteur SuperDrive, vous pouvez également graver des DVD (voir «Utilisation du lecteur optique» à la page 76) ;  la technologie Sudden Motion Sensor qui contribue à protéger le disque dur en cas de chute ou de vibrations subies par votre MacBook (voir «Technologie Sudden Motion Sensor» à la page 81) ;  une batterie MacBook dont vous pouvez facilement consulter l’état de charge (voir «Utilisation de la batterie» à la page 81) ;  un logement de sécurité pour éviter que votre MacBook ne disparaisse (voir «Protection de votre MacBook» à la page 87). Utilisation de périphériques USB (Universal Serial Bus) Votre MacBook est livré avec deux ports USB 2.0 (d), ou ports USB haute vitesse, à utiliser pour connecter de nombreux périphériques externes, notamment iPod, imprimantes, scanneurs, appareils photo numériques, manettes de jeu, claviers ou lecteurs de disquette. Ces ports USB 2.0 sont compatibles avec les anciens modèles de périphériques USB. Vous pouvez, dans la plupart des cas connecter et déconnecter un périphérique USB pendant que l’ordinateur est allumé. Vous pouvez utiliser les périphériques dès leur branchement. Il n’est pas nécessaire de redémarrer ni de reconfigurer votre ordinateur. F3626M42.book Page 58 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 59 Pour utiliser un périphérique USB avec votre ordinateur, connectez-le. Votre ordinateur détecte automatiquement tout nouveau périphérique connecté et ouvre le logiciel adéquat. Remarque : si vous avez connecté un périphérique USB et que votre MacBook ne trouve pas le gestionnaire approprié, vous pouvez installer le gestionnaire fourni avec le périphérique ou consulter le site web du fabricant du périphérique afin de trouver et installer le gestionnaire approprié. Périphériques USB et énergie de la batterie Vous pouvez utiliser des périphériques USB, tels qu’une manette de jeu ou un clavier, qui sont alimentés via le port USB de votre MacBook plutôt que via un adaptateur secteur distinct. Ce type de périphérique USB peut toutefois provoquer un déchargement plus rapide de la batterie du MacBook. Si vous comptez connecter le périphérique pendant une longue période, il est recommandé de brancher le MacBook à son adaptateur secteur. F3626M42.book Page 59 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM60 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Utilisation simultanée de plusieurs périphériques USB Vous pouvez vous procurer un concentrateur USB pour connecter plusieurs périphériques USB à votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter le concentrateur à un port USB disponible de votre ordinateur pour disposer de ports USB supplémentaires (en général quatre ou sept). Les concentrateurs haute vitesse prennent en charge les périphériques USB 2.0 haute vitesse, ainsi que les périphériques compatibles USB 1.1. Les concentrateurs USB 1.1 ne permettent pas aux périphériques USB haute vitesse de fonctionner à leur vitesse maximale. La plupart des concentrateurs USB disposent d’un adaptateur secteur et doivent être branchés sur une prise secteur. Remarque : si vous utilisez une chaîne de périphériques et de concentrateurs USB, certains d’entre eux risquent de ne pas fonctionner s’ils sont connectés via une combinaison de concentrateurs USB 2.0 haute vitesse et de concentrateurs USB 1.1 à vitesse normale ou faible. Il se peut, par exemple, qu’aucun disque dur externe USB ne s’affiche sur votre bureau. Pour éviter ce problème, ne connectez pas ensemble des périphériques USB pré- sentant des vitesses différentes. Connectez directement votre concentrateur à haut débit à votre ordinateur, puis connectez-y des périphériques à haut débit. Connectez directement un concentrateur à vitesse normale ou faible à votre ordinateur, puis connectez-y des périphériques de vitesse similaire. F3626M42.book Page 60 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 61 Pour en savoir plus à propos de la technologie USB L’Aide Mac contient des informations supplémentaires sur la technologie USB. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus et recherchez «USB». Vous trouverez d’autres informations sur le site web USB d’Apple, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/usb. Pour obtenir des informations sur les périphériques USB disponibles pour votre ordinateur, consultez le Guide des Produits Macintosh à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/guide. Concentrateur USB F3626M42.book Page 61 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM62 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Connexion via FireWire Votre ordinateur est équipé d’un port FireWire 400 (H). La technologie FireWire vous permet de connecter et de déconnecter aisément des périphériques haute vitesse, tels que des caméras haute définition HDV ou numériques DV et des disques durs, sans redémarrer votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez connecter un périphérique FireWire standard à 6 broches directement au port FireWire 400 (H). Le port fournit en alimentation les périphériques connectés (ces derniers n’ont donc pas besoin de prise d’alimentation séparée). F3626M42.book Page 62 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 63 La technologie FireWire vous permet notamment de :  connecter une caméra HDV ou DV pour capturer, transférer et faire des montages vidéo de grande qualité directement sur votre ordinateur au moyen de logiciels de montage vidéo tels qu’iMovie HD, Final Cut Express ou Final Cut Studio (vendus séparément) ;  connecter un disque dur FireWire externe et l’utiliser pour sauvegarder des données ou transférer des fichiers ;  démarrer à partir d’un disque dur externe FireWire : connectez un disque dur FireWire externe (doté de Mac OS X version 10.4.6 ou ultérieure), ouvrez la fenêtre Démarrage des Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur l’icône de disque dur FireWire et redémarrez votre ordinateur) ;  transférer des fichiers entre votre MacBook et un autre ordinateur FireWire via le mode disque cible FireWire : pour toute information supplémentaire, consultez la section «Connexion de votre MacBook à un autre ordinateur via FireWire» à la page 64. Utilisation de périphériques FireWire Pour utiliser un périphérique FireWire avec votre ordinateur, connectez-le à l’ordinateur et installez tout logiciel fourni avec le périphérique en question. Votre ordinateur détecte automatiquement les nouveaux périphériques connectés. Remarque : si vous avez connecté un périphérique FireWire et que votre MacBook ne trouve pas le gestionnaire approprié, vous pouvez installer le gestionnaire fourni avec le périphérique ou consulter le site web du fabricant du périphérique afin de trouver et installer le gestionnaire approprié. F3626M42.book Page 63 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM64 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Périphériques FireWire et énergie de la batterie Vous pouvez utiliser des périphériques FireWire (comme certains disques durs externes) alimentés par la connexion FireWire du MacBook plutôt que par un adaptateur secteur séparé. Ce type de périphérique FireWire peut toutefois provoquer un déchargement plus rapide de la batterie du MacBook. Si vous comptez connecter un périphérique pendant une longue période, il est recommandé de brancher le MacBook sur son adaptateur secteur. Remarque : le port FireWire (H) est conçu pour prendre en charge l’alimentation des périphériques FireWire (7 watts maximum). Il est possible de connecter plusieurs périphériques entre eux, puis de connecter cette chaîne de périphériques au port FireWire de votre ordinateur, à condition que seul l’un d’eux soit alimenté directement par l’ordinateur. Les autres périphériques de la chaîne doivent alors être alimentés par des adaptateurs secteur distincts. La connexion de plusieurs périphériques FireWire alimentés par le port peut poser des problèmes. En cas de problème, éteignez l’ordinateur, déconnectez les périphériques FireWire, puis redémarrez l’ordinateur. Connexion de votre MacBook à un autre ordinateur via FireWire Si vous souhaitez transférer des fichiers de votre MacBook à un autre ordinateur Macintosh équipé de la technologie FireWire ou que vous êtes confronté à un problème qui empêche le démarrage de votre ordinateur, utilisez le mode disque cible FireWire pour vous connecter à l’autre ordinateur. Lorsque vous démarrez votre ordinateur en mode disque cible FireWire, l’autre ordinateur peut accéder à votre MacBook comme s’il s’agissait d’un disque dur externe. Remarque : lorsque vous utilisez le mode disque cible FireWire, il est conseillé de connecter l’adaptateur secteur à votre MacBook. F3626M42.book Page 64 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 65 Pour connecter votre MacBook avec un autre ordinateur en mode disque cible FireWire : 1 Assurez-vous que votre MacBook est éteint. 2 Utilisez un câble FireWire pour connecter votre MacBook à un autre ordinateur équipé de FireWire. 3 Démarrez votre MacBook, puis maintenez immédiatement la touche T enfoncée. L’écran de votre MacBook affiche alors le logo FireWire. L’écran de l’autre ordinateur affiche l’icône du disque dur interne de votre MacBook. Vous pouvez maintenant glisser-déposer des fichiers entre les deux ordinateurs. 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé de transférer les fichiers, faites glissez l’icône du disque dur du MacBook dans la corbeille (icône d’éjection). 5 Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) de votre MacBook pour l’éteindre, puis débranchez le câble FireWire. Pour en savoir plus à propos de FireWire L’Aide Mac fournit des informations supplémentaires sur FireWire. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus du Finder et cherchez «FireWire». Vous trouverez d’autres informations sur le site web FireWire d’Apple, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/firewire. F3626M42.book Page 65 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM66 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Fonctionnement de l’accès sans fil à Internet via AirPort Grâce à la technologie AirPort Extreme, votre MacBook établit une connexion sans fil à une borne d’accès AirPort Express ou AirPort Extreme ou à tout produit compatible 802.11b ou 802.11g, qui est connecté à Internet via une ligne téléphonique, un modem DSL ou câble ou un réseau local (LAN). Pour en savoir plus sur AirPort Extreme Pour acheter une borne d’accès AirPort Extreme ou AirPort Express, accédez à l’Apple Store en ligne, à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore ou adressez-vous à votre revendeur agréé Apple. Connexion à Internet AirPort Express Prise secteur Modem câble ou DSL F3626M42.book Page 66 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 67 Des informations complémentaires sur AirPort Extreme et AirPort Express sont disponibles dans l’Aide AirPort. Sélectionnez Aide > Aide Mac, puis Centre d’aide > Aide AirPort. Des informations supplémentaires sont disponibles sur le site AirPort d’Apple aux pages www.apple.com/fr/airportexpress et www.apple.com/fr/airportextreme. Utilisation de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth La technologie sans fil Bluetooth est intégrée à votre MacBook. Elle vous permet d’établir des connexions sans fil de faible portée entre ordinateurs de bureau ou portables, assistants personnels (PDA), téléphones portables, téléphones appareils photo, imprimantes, appareils photo numériques et périphériques sans fil tels que le clavier Apple Wireless Keyboard ou la souris Apple Wireless Mouse (disponibles sur l’Apple Store en ligne à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore). La technologie sans fil Bluetooth permet d’éliminer les câbles reliant normalement les périphériques. Les périphériques équipés de la technologie Bluetooth peuvent se connecter l’un à l’autre sans besoin de liaison physique, dans la mesure où ils sont séparés d’une distance égale ou inférieure à 10 mètres. Grâce à la technologie sans fil Bluetooth, vous pouvez :  utiliser votre MacBook pour communiquer avec un téléphone portable compatible Bluetooth : votre téléphone peut servir de modem pour vous connecter à un fournisseur d’accès sans fil, à un débit égal ou inférieur à 56 kilobits par seconde (kbps), suffisant pour vous connecter à Internet ; F3626M42.book Page 67 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM68 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook  synchroniser votre ordinateur avec votre organiseur de poche équipé de la technologie Bluetooth : à l’aide d’iSync, vous pouvez exécuter une opération HotSync sans fil ou transmettre votre carte de visite ou encore des événements de calendrier directement sur le PDA d’un collègue ;  échanger des fichiers entre ordinateurs et périphériques équipés de la technologie Bluetooth, même entre Mac et PC ;  utiliser une imprimante, un clavier, une souris ou un casque d’écoute sans fil Bluetooth. Configuration d’un périphérique Bluetooth Avant de pouvoir utiliser un périphérique Bluetooth avec votre MacBook, vous devez configurer le périphérique de manière à ce qu’il puisse fonctionner avec votre ordinateur. Une fois que vous avez configuré le périphérique, celui-ci est jumelé avec votre ordinateur et apparaît dans la fenêtre Périphériques des Préférences Bluetooth. Le jumelage du périphérique avec votre ordinateur ne doit être effectué qu’une seule fois. Il demeure activé aussi longtemps que vous ne le supprimer pas de manière explicite. Pour configurer un périphérique Bluetooth : 1 Choisissez Configurer l’appareil Bluetooth dans le menu d’état Bluetooth (?). 2 Suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour le type de périphérique que vous souhaitez configurer. Si le menu d’état Bluetooth (?) n’apparaît pas dans la barre des menus, ouvrez Préférences Système et cliquez sur Bluetooth. Cliquez sur Réglages, puis sélectionnez «Afficher l’état Bluetooth dans la barre des menus». Pour supprimer un jumelage avec un autre périphérique : 1 Ouvrez Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Bluetooth. F3626M42.book Page 68 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 69 2 Cliquez sur Périphériques et choisissez le périphérique dans la liste. 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour en savoir plus sur la technologie sans fil Bluetooth Pour plus d’informations sur Bluetooth, ouvrez l’application Échange de fichiers Bluetooth (dans le dossier Utilitaires du dossier Applications) et sélectionnez Aide > Aide Bluetooth. Vous trouverez d’autres informations sur le site web Bluetooth d’Apple, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/bluetooth. Connexion via Ethernet Votre ordinateur est fourni avec des capacités de mise en réseau Ethernet Gigabit (G) intégrées, qui permettent de vous connecter à un réseau, à un modem DSL ou à un modem câble. F3626M42.book Page 69 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM70 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook La connexion à un réseau permet d’accéder à d’autres ordinateurs et potentiellement à des imprimantes réseau, des modems, le courrier électronique et Internet. Vous pouvez utiliser Ethernet pour partager des fichiers entre deux ordinateurs ou établir un petit réseau. Le port Ethernet de votre MacBook détecte automatiquement les autres périphériques Ethernet. Pour établir des connexions à d’autres périphériques Ethernet, il est inutile d’utiliser un câble croisé Ethernet. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation d’Ethernet Des informations supplémentaires, y compris sur la configuration d’un réseau Ethernet et le transfert de fichiers via Ethernet, sont disponibles dans l’Aide Mac. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis recherchez «Ethernet» ou «réseau». Pour obtenir des informations sur les produits de mise en réseau que vous pouvez utiliser avec votre MacBook, consultez le Guide des produits Macintosh à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/guide/. F3626M42.book Page 70 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 71 Gestion de la vidéo externe Votre ordinateur est équipé d’un port de moniteur externe (mini DVI) permettant une connexion directe à un écran ou à un projecteur muni d’un port DVI ou VGA. Utilisez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers DVI d’Apple (vendu séparément) pour connecter votre MacBook à un moniteur ou projecteur DVI. Utilisez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers VGA d’Apple (vendu séparément) pour connecter votre MacBook à un moniteur ou projecteur VGA. Vous pouvez également afficher des images sur un téléviseur, enregistrer des images numériques sur un magnétoscope ou lire des DVD sur votre téléviseur à l’aide d’un adaptateur Mini-DVI vers Vidéo d’Apple à utiliser avec des connecteurs composite ou S-Vidéo. Vous pouvez vous procurer les adaptateurs chez un revendeur agréé Apple, dans un magasin Apple Store ou sur l’Apple Store en ligne à l’adresse www.apple.com/francestore. F3626M42.book Page 71 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM72 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Lorsqu’un moniteur externe ou un téléviseur est connecté, vous pouvez soit faire en sorte que la même image s’affiche sur l’écran intégré et le moniteur externe (c’est ce que l’on appelle la recopie vidéo), soit utiliser le moniteur externe pour étendre la taille du bureau Mac OS (on parle dans ce cas de mode double-écran ou de bureau étendu). Par défaut, votre MacBook démarre en mode double-écran. Appuyez sur la touche F7 (i) pour alterner entre les modes double-écran et recopie vidéo. Si vous souhaitez que le son soit émis par un écran externe (un projecteur ou un téléviseur, par exemple), vous devez relier le port de sortie casque (f) de l’ordinateur à ce périphérique via un câble audio (non inclus). Remarque : en raison des limites d’affichage de la plupart des téléviseurs, les images apparaissent avec une qualité inférieure à celle de l’écran intégré ou du moniteur externe. Connexion d’un écran externe ou d’un projecteur Pour connecter à votre ordinateur un écran externe ou un projecteur via un connecteur DVI ou VGA : 1 Allumez l’écran externe ou le projecteur. 2 Vérifiez que le câble de l’écran est bien relié au projecteur ou à l’écran externe. 3 Connectez le câble de l’écran à votre MacBook à l’aide de l’adaptateur adéquat (adaptateur Mini-DVI vers DVI ou Mini-DVI vers VGA d’Apple). Votre MacBook détecte automatiquement l’écran externe ou le projecteur. 4 Réglez la résolution d’un écran externe via la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système ou l’icône Moniteurs de la barre de menus. Remarque : votre MacBook gère les résolutions de moniteurs externes jusqu’à 1920 x 1200 (moniteurs DVI d’Apple) ou 1600 x 1200 (moniteurs VGA). F3626M42.book Page 72 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 73 Utilisation de votre MacBook écran rabattu Vous pouvez utiliser votre MacBook en gardant l’écran rabattu si l’ordinateur est connecté à un moniteur, un clavier et une souris externes. Important : pour utiliser votre MacBook écran rabattu, branchez-le sur une prise secteur. Pour utiliser votre ordinateur écran rabattu avec un moniteur externe connecté : 1 Connectez un clavier et une souris USB à votre MacBook. 2 Connectez l’adaptateur secteur à votre MacBook et à une prise secteur. Vérifiez que la lampe de l’adaptateur secteur est allumée. 3 Rabattez l’écran du MacBook afin d’en suspendre l’activité. 4 Connectez votre MacBook à un écran externe en suivant les étapes décrites dans la section précédente. 5 Attendez quelques secondes, puis appuyez sur n’importe quelle touche du clavier externe pour réactiver le MacBook. F3626M42.book Page 73 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM74 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Connexion d’un téléviseur, d’un magnétoscope ou de tout autre appareil vidéo Pour connecter un téléviseur ou tout autre appareil vidéo nécessitant une connexion composite ou S-Vidéo : 1 Connectez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers vidéo d’Apple (vendu séparément) au port Mini-DVI de votre MacBook. 2 Connectez le périphérique à l’adaptateur. 3 Si vous souhaitez que le son de votre MacBook soit restitué sur le périphérique, connectez le port de sortie casque (f) de votre MacBook aux ports d’entrée audio du périphérique via un câble mini-jack vers RCA (non inclus). 4 Allumez l’appareil. 5 Pour détecter le téléviseur ou tout autre périphérique externe, maintenez la touche Commande (x) enfoncée et appuyez sur la touche F2. Vous pouvez également ouvrir la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système et cliquez sur le bouton Détecter les moniteurs. 6 Pour régler l’apparence de l’image affichée à l’écran, ouvrez la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation d’un moniteur externe ou d’un téléviseur Vous pourrez trouver des informations supplémentaires sur la configuration et l’utilisation d’un moniteur externe dans l’Aide Mac. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, puis recherchez «moniteur externe». F3626M42.book Page 74 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 75 Connexion de haut-parleurs et autres périphériques audio Votre MacBook est équipé de trois haut-parleurs intégrés, d’un microphone intégré, d’un port d’entrée ligne audio/audio numérique optique et d’un port de sortie casque/ audio numérique optique (f). Vous pouvez connecter des haut-parleurs externes, des écouteurs et d’autres périphériques de sortie audio au port de sortie casque (f). Ce port de sortie constitue également une prise mini-phono stéréo S/PDIF de 3,5 mm. Les haut-parleurs intégrés n’émettent aucun son lorsque des périphériques sont branchés sur l’ordinateur. Pour que le son soit émis de ces haut-parleurs, débranchez le casque ou les haut-parleurs externes éventuellement connectés à l’ordinateur. Vous pouvez enregistrer des sons sur votre disque dur à l’aide du micro intégré situé à côté de la caméra iSight intégrée. Vous avez également la possibilité de connecter des micros externes ou tout autre appareil audio sur le port d’entrée de ligne audio. Le port d’entrée de ligne audio constitue également une prise mini-phono stéréo S/PDIF de 3,5 mm. Étant donné que cette prise ne permet pas d’alimenter les périphériques connectés, ces derniers doivent être auto-alimentés. Si vous disposez d’un adaptateur Toslink prise vers mini-jack, vous pouvez utiliser un câble Toslink pour connecter un lecteur Digital Audio Tape (DAT) ou des instruments numériques afin d’enregistrer et de mixer votre propre musique. Pour les applications capables d’enregistrement audio, telles qu’iMovie HD, utilisez la fenêtre Son des Préférences Système pour sélectionner le périphérique d’entrée audio à utiliser (y compris des micros connectés via USB). F3626M42.book Page 75 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM76 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Les commandes de volume de votre clavier vous permettent de régler facilement le volume de sortie. Vous pouvez également régler le volume d’entrée et de sortie dans la fenêtre Son des Préférences Système. Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation ou le dépannage du son de votre ordinateur, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis effectuez une recherche à l’aide du mot son. Utilisation du lecteur optique Votre MacBook comprend un lecteur optique, Combo ou SuperDrive. Avec votre lecteur optique, vous pouvez :  installer ou utiliser des logiciels à partir de CD et de DVD ;  lire de la musique et des fichiers multimédia à partir de CD ;  écrire des fichiers musicaux, des documents et d’autres fichiers numériques sur CD-R ou CD-RW ;  lire des films DVD ainsi que la plupart des disques DVD. Si vous disposez d’un lecteur SuperDrive, vous pouvez également enregistrer des données sur des disques DVD±R ou DVD±RW vierges. Important : le lecteur optique de votre MacBook gère les disques standard circulaires de 12 cm de diamètre. Les disques de forme irrégulière et les disques de moins de 12 cm ne peuvent pas être lus. Les disques de ce type risquent de se bloquer dans le lecteur. F3626M42.book Page 76 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 77 Insertion d’un CD ou DVD Pour installer ou utiliser des logiciels à partir d’un CD ou d’un DVD : 1 L’ordinateur étant allumé, introduisez le disque (étiquette vers le haut) dans la fente du lecteur jusqu’à ce que le lecteur le saisisse. Il se peut qu’il faille insérer le disque presque entièrement avant que cela ne se produise. Cela est normal. 2 Dès que son icône apparaît sur le bureau, le disque peut être utilisé. Éjection d’un disque Pour éjecter un disque, procédez comme suit :  Glissez l’icône du disque dans la Corbeille (icône d’éjection).  Maintenez enfoncée la touche d’éjection de disque (C) du clavier jusqu’à ce que le disque soit éjecté. Attendez que le disque soit complètement éjecté avant de le retirer ou de le réinsérer. ®? F3626M42.book Page 77 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM78 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Si vous ne parvenez pas à éjecter le disque, fermez toutes les applications susceptibles d’utiliser le disque et réessayez. Si cela ne donne pas de résultats, redémarrez l’ordinateur tout en maintenant le bouton du trackpad enfoncé. Lecture de DVD Pour lire un disque vidéo DVD sur votre MacBook, insérez le DVD. Lecteur DVD s’ouvre automatiquement. Vous pouvez constater que Lecteur DVD offre des commandes simples d’utilisation pour lancer, interrompre et visionner les DVD. Si vous avez connecté votre MacBook à un téléviseur afin de pouvoir regarder le DVD sur l’écran du téléviseur, sélectionnez 720 x 480 NTSC (aux États-Unis) ou 720 x 576 PAL (en Europe et dans d’autres régions) dans la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système. Il est très facile de connecter votre MacBook à une chaîne stéréo. Utilisez un câble mini-jack vers RCA (non inclus) pour relier le port de sortie casque (f) de votre MacBook aux ports d’entrée audio de votre chaîne stéréo. Enregistrement de disques CD-R ou CD-RW Votre MacBook peut enregistrer des données sur des disques CD-R ou CD-RW. Si vous disposez d’un lecteur SuperDrive, vous pouvez également enregistrer vos propres films numériques sur des disques DVD±R ou DVD±RW enregistrables vierges. Vous pouvez également enregistrer d’autres types de données numériques, telles que des sauvegardes de fichiers, sur un DVD enregistrable. F3626M42.book Page 78 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 79 Pour enregistrer des données sur des disques CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R ou DVD+RW : 1 Insérez un disque CD ou DVD (SuperDrive seulement) enregistrable vierge dans le lecteur optique. 2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, attribuez un nom au disque et sélectionnez le format que vous souhaitez utiliser. 3 Double-cliquez sur l’icône du disque qui apparaît sur votre bureau, puis faites-y glisser des fichiers et des dossiers. 4 Cliquez sur l’icône Graver le disque située à côté du nom du disque dans la barre latérale du Finder. Vous pouvez également enregistrer de la musique sur des disques CD ou DVD directement à partir de votre bibliothèque iTunes. Pour enregistrer de la musique depuis votre bibliothèque iTunes : 1 Cliquez sur l’icône iTunes dans le Dock. 2 Sélectionnez la liste de lecture ou les morceaux à enregistrer. 3 Insérez un disque CD ou DVD (SuperDrive seulement) vierge. 4 En haut de la fenêtre iTunes, cliquez sur l’option Graver le CD. Important : si votre batterie se décharge lors de la gravure d’un CD, il se peut que la gravure échoue et que le CD devienne inutilisable. Pour éviter cela, utilisez toujours votre adaptateur secteur lorsque vous gravez un CD. F3626M42.book Page 79 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM80 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Si vous disposez d’un lecteur SuperDrive, vous pouvez enregistrer vos films numériques sur des disques DVD enregistrables vierges. Vous pouvez également enregistrer d’autres types de données numériques. Vous pouvez, par exemple, sauvegarder des fichiers sur des DVD enregistrables. Les applications telles qu’iDVD vous permettent de créer vos propres projets multimédias numériques, de les graver sur des disques DVD enregistrables vierges, puis de les lire sur la plupart des lecteurs DVD standard. Pour graver un projet iDVD sur un disque vierge DVD±R ou DVD±RW : 1 Ouvrez iDVD puis votre projet iDVD. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Graver. 3 À l’invite, insérez un disque DVD enregistrable vierge dans le lecteur. 4 Cliquez de nouveau sur le bouton Graver. Pour en savoir plus, ouvrez iDVD puis choisissez Aide > Aide iDVD. Important : si votre batterie se décharge lors de la gravure d’un DVD, il se peut que la gravure échoue et que le DVD devienne inutilisable. Pour éviter cela, utilisez toujours votre adaptateur secteur lorsque vous gravez un DVD. Pour en savoir plus Pour obtenir davantage d’informations sur Lecteur DVD et iTunes, consultez les sources suivantes :  Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de l’application Lecteur DVD, choisissez Aide > Aide Lecteur DVD au sein de Lecteur DVD.  Pour obtenir des informations sur la manière d’utiliser iTunes afin d’enregistrer des fichiers de musique sur disque CD ou DVD, choisissez Aide > «Aide iTunes et Music Store» dans l’application iTunes. F3626M42.book Page 80 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 81 Technologie Sudden Motion Sensor Votre MacBook utilise la technologie Sudden Motion Sensor qui contribue à protéger le disque dur contre tout dommage en cas de chute ou de vibrations subies par l’ordinateur. En règle générale, la protection Sudden Motion Sensor ne modifie en rien les performances du disque dur au cours du fonctionnement normal du MacBook. Il peut arriver que des vibrations anormalement fortes activent le capteur Sudden Motion Sensor pendant que votre MacBook est en cours d’écriture ou de lecture intense (comme lors de la lecture ou de l’enregistrement vidéo ou audio). Si vous constatez des pertes d’images ou d’éléments sonores, assurez-vous que votre MacBook se trouve dans un environnement stable protégé contre les vibrations et les mouvements brusques. Utilisation de la batterie Lorsque l’adaptateur secteur externe n’est pas connecté, votre ordinateur est alimenté par sa batterie. L’autonomie de votre MacBook varie en fonction des applications utilisées et des périphériques externes connectés. La désactivation de fonctions telles qu’AirPort Extreme ou Bluetooth contribue à économiser l’énergie de votre batterie. Pour plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de la batterie, lisez la section «Conseils pour économiser la batterie» à la page 85. Pour connaître le niveau de charge de votre batterie, vous pouvez observer les lampes témoins de niveau de charge dont elle est dotée. Appuyez sur le bouton situé en regard des témoin lumineux afin que ces derniers brillent brièvement pour indiquer le niveau de charge de la batterie. Vous pouvez vérifier le niveau de charge, que la batterie soit ou non insérée dans votre MacBook. F3626M42.book Page 81 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM82 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Si votre batterie faiblit pendant que vous travaillez, branchez l’adaptateur secteur et laissez la batterie se recharger. Pour remplacer une batterie presque déchargée par une batterie chargée lorsque votre ordinateur n’est pas connecté à un adaptateur secteur, éteignez l’ordinateur. Important : si un seul témoin est allumé, le niveau restant est très faible. Si aucun témoin n’est allumé, c’est que la batterie est complètement vide et que l’ordinateur ne pourra démarrer sans l’adaptateur secteur. Branchez l’adaptateur secteur et laissez la batterie se recharger ou remplacez la batterie à plat par une batterie complètement rechargée (voir «retrait de la batterie» à la page 90). Batterie Témoins LED de la batterie Bouton ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 82 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 83 Si l’icône de la batterie (dans la barre des menus du Finder) est réglée pour afficher le pourcentage de charge, vous constaterez parfois que la batterie n’indique pas un niveau de charge de 100 pour cent alors que l’adaptateur secteur est branché. Cela est tout à fait normal : le niveau de la batterie est maximisé lorsque le chargement n’est pas continu, et cette fonction est désactivée lorsque la capacité de charge de la batterie est située entre 95 et 100 pour cent. Dès que le niveau de la batterie passe en dessous de 95 pour cent, elle est automatiquement rechargée jusqu’à 100 pour cent. Retrait et remise en place de la batterie Pour obtenir des instructions sur le retrait et la remise en place de la batterie, consultez les sections «retrait de la batterie» à la page 90 et «remplacement de la batterie» à la page 96. Remarque : jetez vos batteries usagées en respectant les lois et les consignes environnementales locales. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Informations sur l’enlèvement de la batterie» à la page 142. F3626M42.book Page 83 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM84 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook Recharge d’une batterie Lorsque l’adaptateur secteur est connecté à votre ordinateur, la batterie se recharge, que l’ordinateur soit éteint, allumé ou en mode de suspension d’activité. La recharge sera toutefois plus rapide si l’ordinateur est éteint ou en mode de suspension d’activité. Lorsque l’ordinateur est allumé, vous pouvez contrôler le niveau de charge de la batterie au moyen de l’icône d’état Batterie dans la barre des menus. Le niveau affiché dépend de la quantité d’énergie restant dans la batterie, mais aussi des applications et des périphériques en cours d’utilisation, ainsi que des réglages de votre système (luminosité de l’écran, réglages d’Économiseur d’énergie, etc.). Pour disposer de plus d’énergie, fermez des applications, déconnectez les périphériques non utilisés et réglez Économiseur d’énergie (voir section suivante). F3626M42.book Page 84 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 85 Conseils pour économiser la batterie L’autonomie assurée par la batterie de votre MacBook avant qu’il soit nécessaire de la recharger dépend des applications et des périphériques utilisés, ainsi que des mesures prises pour économiser l’énergie. Pour économiser l’énergie de la batterie, procédez comme suit :  Déconnectez les périphériques USB ou FireWire alimentés par bus lorsqu’ils ne sont pas utilisés.  Quittez les applications ouvertes non utilisées.  Désactivez AirPort et Bluetooth quand vous ne les utilisez pas : utilisez les icônes d’état AirPort et Bluetooth dans la barre des menus. Si ces icônes n’apparaissent pas dans la barre des menus, vous pouvez les activer dans les fenêtres Réseau et Bluetooth des Préférences Système.  Éjectez les CD ou DVD non utilisés.  Réduisez la luminosité de l’écran à l’aide des boutons de réglage de luminosité situés sur le clavier du MacBook.  Réglez le disque dur afin qu’il réduise sa vitesse de rotation après un bref délai. Dans la fenêtre Économiseur d’énergie des Préférences Système, sélectionnez l’option «Suspendre l’activité du/des disque(s) dur(s) chaque fois que possible».  Réglez votre MacBook afin qu’il suspende son activité après un maximum de cinq minutes. F3626M42.book Page 85 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM86 Chapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook  Votre MacBook est préréglé pour réduire automatiquement sa vitesse de traitement durant les périodes de faible activité, lorsqu’il est alimenté via la batterie, afin d’économiser de l’énergie. Vous pouvez déterminez cela via l’option Normal du menu local Optimisation des réglages (situé dans la fenêtre Économiseur d’énergie des Préférences Système). Pendant les périodes de grande activité, votre ordinateur passera automatiquement à une vitesse de traitement plus élevée. Pour prolonger au maximum la durée de vie de la batterie, choisissez «Meilleure autonomie de la batterie» dans le menu local Optimisation des réglages. Cette option risque toutefois de diminuer les performances de votre ordinateur. Pour régler votre ordinateur afin qu’il utilise sa vitesse de traitement maximale en permanence, choisissez Meilleures performances. Informations supplémentaires concernant la batterie de votre MacBook De plus amples informations sont disponibles dans l’Aide Mac. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis effectuez une recherche sur le terme «batterie». Vous trouverez également des informations sur la manière de prolonger la durée de vie de votre batterie sur le site www.apple.com/fr/batteries/notebooks.html. F3626M42.book Page 86 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 3 Utilisation de votre MacBook 87 Protection de votre MacBook Vous pouvez vous procurer un câble de sécurité pour protéger votre MacBook. Ce câble vous permet d’attacher votre ordinateur à un bureau ou une table. Pour en savoir plus sur les options de sécurité L’Aide Mac contient des informations supplémentaires concernant les fonctions de sécurité logicielles de votre MacBook, y compris les mots de passe pour plusieurs utilisateurs et le chiffrement de fichiers. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis effectuez une recherche sur les termes «sécurité» ou «utilisateurs multiples». Dispositif de verrouillage avec câble de sécurité Logement de sécurité F3626M42.book Page 87 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMF3626M42.book Page 88 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM89 4 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook Ce chapitre fournit des informations et des instructions pour installer de la mémoire supplémentaire et pour retirer et remettre en place la batterie de votre MacBook. Votre ordinateur est doté de deux logements de mémoire auxquels vous pouvez accéder en retirant sa batterie. Votre MacBook est fourni avec un minimum de 512 mégaoctets (Mo) de mémoire DDR2 (Double Data Rate) 667 MHz SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory). Les deux logements de mémoire peuvent accueillir un module SDRAM conforme aux spécifications suivantes :  format DDR2 SO-DIMM (Double Data Rate Small Outline Dual Inline Memory Module) ;  taille inférieure à 3,8 cm ;  256 Mo, 512 Mo ou 1 Go ; Avertissement : Apple vous recommande de confier l’installation de mémoire à un technicien agréé Apple. Consultez les informations sur l’assistance technique fournies avec l’ordinateur pour savoir comment joindre la société Apple. Tout dommage causé à votre matériel en tentant d’installer vous-même de la mémoire n’est pas couvert par la garantie limitée de votre ordinateur. F3626M42.book Page 89 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM90 Chapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook  200 broches ;  mémoire RAM de type PC2-5300 DDR2 667 MHz. Pour optimiser les performances, installez des modules mémoire de même type dans chaque logement. La quantité maximale de mémoire que vous pouvez installer sur votre MacBook est de 2 Go, en insérant une barrette DIMM de 1 Go dans chaque logement. Installation de mémoire supplémentaire Pour installer de la mémoire, il faut enlever et remettre en place la batterie. La procédure suivante inclut des instructions sur l’ajout de mémoire et la remise en place de la batterie. Étape 1 : retrait de la batterie 1 Éteignez votre MacBook. Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur, le câble Ethernet et tous les autres câbles connectés au MacBook afin d’éviter toute détérioration. F3626M42.book Page 90 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 91 2 Retournez le MacBook et repérez l’emplacement du verrou de la batterie. Utilisez une pièce de monnaie pour faire tourner le verrou d’un quart de tour vers la droite afin de débloquer la batterie, puis retirez cette dernière avec précaution. Avertissement : les composants internes de votre MacBook risquent d’être chauds. Si vous venez d’utiliser votre MacBook, attendez 10 minutes après l’extinction, afin de laisser aux composants internes le temps de se refroidir. ¥ Á ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 91 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM92 Chapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook Étape 2 : installation de mémoire 1 Desserrez les trois vis imperdables maintenant le support en L, tirez sur la barre la plus longue pour retirer le support et écartez celui-ci. Les leviers situés dans les logements de mémoire se soulèvent automatiquement lorsque vous retirez le support. 2 Touchez la surface métallique de l’intérieur de l’ordinateur afin de décharger toute électricité statique que vous pouvez avoir emmagasinée. Desserrez les trois vis Tirez sur cette barre ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 92 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 93 3 Pour retirer un module de mémoire installé dans un logement, placez le levier correspondant complètement vers la gauche jusqu’à ce que le bord du module de mémoire se soulève. Retirez le module de mémoire. Répétez l’opération avec l’autre module de mémoire. Leviers ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 93 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM94 Chapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 4 Insérez les nouveaux modules de mémoire dans les logements : a Commencez par insérer le bord doré, avec l’encoche sur le côté gauche. b Poussez fermement avec deux doigts sur les modules de mémoire pour les mettre en place. Vous devriez entendre un clic lorsque la mémoire s’enclenche. c Si les leviers ne reviennent pas en position fermée, déplacez-les vers la droite pour les fermer. Encoches ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 94 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 95 5 Replacez le support en L en insérant d’abord le bras le plus court, puis resserrez les vis. Insérez Resserrez les trois vis d’abord ce bras ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 95 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM96 Chapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook Étape 3 : remplacement de la batterie 1 Placez le bord droit de la batterie dans son compartiment. Appuyez doucement sur le bord gauche de la batterie jusqu’à ce que le loquet soit bloqué. 2 Reconnectez l’adaptateur secteur et tout autre câble connecté auparavant à l’ordinateur. ¥ Á ¥ Á F3626M42.book Page 96 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 4 Ajout de mémoire à votre MacBook 97 Reconnaissance de la nouvelle mémoire par votre MacBook Après avoir ajouté de la mémoire dans votre MacBook, vérifiez si elle est reconnue. Pour vérifier la mémoire de votre ordinateur : 1 Démarrez votre MacBook. 2 Lorsque le bureau Mac OS s’affiche, choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > À propos de ce Mac. Pour plus de détails sur la mémoire installée sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez Informations Système en cliquant sur Plus d’infos puis sur Mémoire. Si votre ordinateur ne reconnaît pas la mémoire ou qu’il ne démarre pas correctement, éteignez-le et relisez les instructions afin de vous assurer que la mémoire est correctement installée et compatible avec votre MacBook. Si les problèmes persistent, retirez la mémoire et consultez les informations d’assistance technique fournies avec la mémoire ou contactez le fournisseur de la mémoire. Mémoire totale installée sur votre MacBook F3626M42.book Page 97 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMF3626M42.book Page 98 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM99 5 5 Dépannage Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre MacBook, commencez par rechercher ici des solutions et des conseils. Il existe généralement une solution simple et rapide aux problèmes que vous pourriez rencontrer au cours de l’utilisation de votre MacBook. Réfléchissez aux conditions qui ont entraîné l’apparition de ce problème. Ce récapitulatif de la totalité des opérations effectuées avant que le problème ne survienne permet de restreindre les causes possible et de trouver la solution. Notez les choses suivantes :  les applications que vous étiez en train d’utiliser quand le problème est apparu ; les problèmes qui n’apparaissent qu’avec une application spécifique peuvent indiquer que cette application n’est pas compatible avec la version de Mac OS installée sur votre ordinateur ;  les logiciels que vous avez installés récemment, notamment ceux qui ont ajouté des éléments à votre Dossier Système ;  tout composant matériel installé (mémoire supplémentaire ou périphérique, par exemple). F3626M42.book Page 99 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM100 Chapitre 5 Dépannage Vous trouverez des informations supplémentaires concernant le dépannage dans l’Aide Mac et sur le site web de service et d’assistance Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support. Problèmes vous empêchant d’utiliser votre ordinateur Si l’ordinateur ne répond plus ou que le pointeur se fige  Appuyez sur Commande (x) + Option + Échap pour forcer la fermeture d’une application figée. Sélectionnez l’application que vous souhaitez quitter dans le zone de dialogue qui apparaît, puis cliquez sur Forcer à quitter. Enregistrez ensuite votre travail dans les applications ouvertes, puis redémarrez l’ordinateur afin de vous assurer que le problème est entièrement réglé.  Si vous ne parvenez pas à forcer la fermeture d’une application, maintenez enfoncé le bouton d’alimentation (®) durant quelques secondes pour éteindre l’ordinateur.  Si l’ordinateur ne répond toujours pas, essayez de le redémarrer en appuyant simultanément sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et les touches Commande (x) et Contrôle. Si le problème survient fréquemment, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus en haut de l’écran. Recherchez le mot «bloquer» pour obtenir de l’aide en cas de blocage de l’ordinateur ou s’il ne répond pas. Si le problème ne survient que lorsque vous utilisez une application particulière, vérifiez auprès de son éditeur si elle est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Si vous savez qu’une application est compatible, vous devrez peut-être réinstaller le logiciel système de votre ordinateur. F3626M42.book Page 100 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 5 Dépannage 101 Si l’ordinateur se bloque au démarrage, un point d’interrogation clignotant apparaît ou l’écran est éteint et la lampe témoin de suspension d’activité reste allumée (pas en mode de suspension d’activité)  Patientez quelques secondes. Si l’ordinateur ne démarre pas après un court instant, éteignez-le en maintenant le bouton d’alimentation (®) enfoncé pendant 5 secondes environ, jusqu’à ce qu’il s’éteigne complètement. Maintenez ensuite la touche Option enfoncée puis appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) pour démarrer votre ordinateur. Lorsque votre ordinateur démarre, cliquez sur l’icône du disque dur, puis sur la flèche droite. Une fois que l’ordinateur a démarré, ouvrez Préférences Système et cliquez sur Démarrage. Sélectionnez un dossier Système Mac OS X.  Si cela ne donne pas de résultats, essayez d’utiliser Utilitaire de disque pour réparer le disque. Insérez le disque 1 d’installation de Mac OS X dans votre ordinateur. Redé- marrez ensuite votre ordinateur en maintenant la touche C enfoncée lors du démarrage. Choisissez Installation > Ouvrir Utilitaire de disque. Lorsque Utilitaire de disque s’ouvre, suivez les instructions dans la fenêtre S.O.S pour tenter de le réparer. Si Utilitaire de disque ne résout pas le problème, vous devrez peut-être réinstaller le logiciel système de votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir des instructions, consultez la section «Réinstallation des logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur» à la page 106. Si l’ordinateur ne s’allume ou ne démarre pas  Assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est connecté à l’ordinateur et branché sur une prise secteur en état de marche. Veillez à utiliser l’adaptateur secteur fourni avec votre ordinateur. Si l’adaptateur secteur ne recharge plus l’ordinateur et que la lampe témoin de l’adaptateur secteur ne s’allume pas lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, essayez de le débrancher puis de le brancher à nouveau afin de le réinitialiser. F3626M42.book Page 101 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM102 Chapitre 5 Dépannage  Vérifiez si votre batterie à besoin d’être rechargée. Appuyez sur le petit bouton situé sur la batterie. Vous devriez voir apparaître un à quatre voyants indiquant le niveau de charge de la batterie. Si une seule lampe témoin de niveau de la batterie clignote, branchez l’adaptateur secteur pour charger la batterie jusqu’à ce qu’au moins une lampe témoin reste allumée en permanence.  Si vous avez suivi les deux premiers conseils sans succès, rétablissez les réglages par défaut de l’ordinateur en débranchant l’adaptateur secteur, en retirant la batterie et en maintenant le bouton d’alimentation (®) enfoncé pendant au moins 5 secondes.  Si vous avez récemment ajouté de la mémoire, assurez-vous qu’elle est correctement installée et compatible avec votre ordinateur. Vérifiez si son retrait permet à l’ordinateur de démarrer (voir «installation de mémoire» à la page 92).  Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et maintenez immédiatement les touches Commande (x), Option, P et R enfoncées jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez une deuxième fois le signal sonore de démarrage.  Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à démarrer votre MacBook, consultez les informations sur service après-vente fournies avec votre MacBook pour savoir comment contacter Apple. Si l’écran devient soudainement noir ou que votre système se bloque Essayez de redémarrer votre ordinateur. 1 Débranchez tout périphérique connecté à votre MacBook excepté l’adaptateur secteur. 2 Maintenez les touches Commande (x) et Contrôle enfoncées, puis appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) pour redémarrer le système. 3 Le niveau de charge de la batterie doit atteindre au moins 10 pour cent avant la connexion d’un périphérique et la reprise du travail. F3626M42.book Page 102 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 5 Dépannage 103 Pour vérifier le niveau de charge de la batterie, observez le menu d’état Batterie dans la barre des menus. Votre écran pourrait également s’assombrir si les fonctions d’économie d’énergie sont réglées pour l’utilisation de la batterie. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Réglage de l’écran» à la page 30. Autres problèmes Si vous avez oublié votre mot de passe Vous pouvez réinitialiser votre mot de passe d’administrateur et les mots de passe de tous les autres comptes. 1 Insérez le CD «Mac OS X Install Disc 1». Ensuite, redémarrez votre ordinateur et maintenez la touche C enfoncée pendant le démarrage. 2 Choisissez Installation > Réinitialiser le mot de passe dans la barre des menus. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. En cas de problème avec une application  Pour les problèmes liés aux logiciels provenant d’éditeurs tiers, contactez l’éditeur concerné. Les éditeurs de logiciels fournissent souvent des mises à jour logicielles sur leurs sites web.  Vous pouvez configurer votre MacBook pour qu’il cherche et installe automatiquement les dernières mises à jour Apple via la fenêtre Mise à jour de logiciels des Préférences Système. Pour plus d’informations, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis recherchez «mise à jour de logiciels». Remarque : les applications Classic (ou Mac OS 9) ne sont pas compatibles avec votre ordinateur et ne s’ouvriront pas. F3626M42.book Page 103 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM104 Chapitre 5 Dépannage En cas de problèmes avec les communications sans fil AirPort Extreme  Vérifiez que l’ordinateur ou le réseau auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter est activé et dispose d’un point d’accès sans fil.  Assurez-vous que vous êtes bien dans la zone de couverture de l’antenne de l’autre ordinateur ou du point d’accès du réseau en vérifiant le menu d’état AirPort (Z) dans la barre des menus. Jusqu’à quatre barres de mesure apparaissent pour indiquer la puissance du signal. Des appareils électroniques ou des structures métalliques se trouvant à proximité peuvent interférer avec les communications sans fil et réduire la portée de votre antenne. Vous pouvez éventuellement améliorer la réception en tournant et en réorientant l’ordinateur.  Assurez-vous que le logiciel est correctement configuré conformément aux instructions incluses avec votre borne d’accès ou point d‘accès.  Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’Aide AirPort (choisissez Aide > Aide Mac, puis Bibliothèque > Aide AirPort dans la barre des menus), ainsi que les instructions fournies avec votre appareil sans fil. Si le disque dur de votre ordinateur n’enregistre pas les données correctement  Il peut arriver, dans certains cas très rares, qu’en raison de vibrations anormalement fortes subies par le disque dur, le capteur Sudden Motion Sensor s’active et provoque des pertes d’images ou des portions de son ou de données non enregistrées lorsque le disque est en train d’enregistrer de manière intensive. Si cela se produit, assurez-vous que votre MacBook est dans un environnement stable sans vibrations ni mouvements brusques.  Si les vibrations ne sont pas la source du problème, ouvrez Utilitaire de disque (dans /Applications/Utilitaires) pour vérifier le lecteur. F3626M42.book Page 104 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 5 Dépannage 105 En cas de problème à l’éjection d’un disque m Fermez toutes les applications susceptibles d’utiliser le disque et essayez à nouveau. Si cela ne donne pas de résultats, redémarrez l’ordinateur tout en maintenant le bouton du trackpad enfoncé. Si vous suspectez un problème matériel  Vous pouvez utiliser l’application «Apple Hardware Test» pour déterminer s’il existe un problème dû à l’un des composants de votre ordinateur, tels que la mémoire ou le processeur. Pour plus d’informations sur Apple Hardware Test, consultez la section «Utilisation d’Apple Hardware Test» à la page 108. En cas de problèmes de connexion à Internet  Assurez-vous que votre ligne téléphonique ou que votre câble réseau est connecté et qu’il fonctionne correctement.  Si vous utilisez une connexion à Internet par ligne commutée, veillez à ce que votre câble téléphonique soit bien branché sur le modem USB d’Apple (vendu séparément) et non au port Ethernet (G) de l’ordinateur.  Ouvrez la fenêtre Réseau des Préférences Système et vérifiez auprès de votre Fournisseur d’Accès Internet (FAI) ou de votre administrateur réseau les informations qui y sont saisies. En cas de problèmes de fonctionnement de votre ordinateur ou de Mac OS  Si les réponses à vos questions ne figurent pas dans ce manuel, choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus et recherchez des instructions et des informations sur le dépannage.  Pour obtenir les dernières informations de dépannage et des mises à jour de logiciels, consultez le site web d’assistance Apple, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support. F3626M42.book Page 105 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM106 Chapitre 5 Dépannage Réinstallation des logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur Les disques d’installation de logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur permettent de réinstaller Mac OS X et les applications livrées avec votre ordinateur. Important : Apple vous recommande de sauvegarder les données de votre disque dur avant de procéder à la restauration du logiciel. Apple décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Installation de Mac OS X et des applications Pour installer Mac OS X et les applications qui accompagnent votre ordinateur : 1 Sauvegardez vos fichiers essentiels. Nous vous conseillons de sauvegarder vos fichiers essentiels avant d’installer Mac OS X et d’autres applications car l’option Effacer et installer efface votre disque de destination. 2 Assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement branché. 3 Insérez le disque 1 d’installation de Mac OS X livré avec votre ordinateur. 4 Double-cliquez sur «Install Mac OS X and Bundled Software». 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. 6 Après avoir sélectionné le disque de destination pour l’installation, suivez les instructions à l’écran. Il se peut que votre ordinateur redémarre et vous invite à insérer le disque d’installation Mac OS X suivant. Remarque : pour rétablir les réglages d’origine de Mac OS X sur votre ordinateur, cliquez sur Options dans la fenêtre Sélectionner une destination du programme d’installation, puis choisissez Effacer et installer. F3626M42.book Page 106 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 5 Dépannage 107 Après avoir sélectionné le disque de destination de l’installation, continuez à suivre les instructions à l’écran pour effectuer une installation de base de Mac OS X. Pour personnaliser l’installation des applications, cliquez sur Personnaliser, cliquez sur le triangle en regard de l’application et sélectionnez la version que vous souhaitez installer. Installation des applications Pour installer uniquement les applications fournies avec votre ordinateur, veuillez procéder comme suit. Mac OS X doit déjà être installé sur votre ordinateur. 1 Sauvegardez vos fichiers essentiels. 2 Assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est correctement branché. 3 Insérez le disque 1 d’installation de Mac OS X livré avec votre ordinateur. 4 Double-cliquez sur «Install Bundled Software Only». 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. 6 Après avoir sélectionné le disque de destination pour l’installation, suivez les instructions à l’écran. Il se peut que votre ordinateur redémarre et vous invite à insérer le disque d’installation Mac OS X suivant. Remarque : pour installer iCal, iChat AV, iSync, Safari et les applications iLife, suivez les instructions exposées dans «Installation de Mac OS X et des applications» à la page 106. Il est possible que vous deviez insérer le disque 2 d’installation de Mac OS X, selon les applications que vous souhaitez installer. F3626M42.book Page 107 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM108 Chapitre 5 Dépannage Utilisation d’Apple Hardware Test Apple Hardware Test vous aide à déterminer s’il existe un problème matériel sur votre ordinateur. Pour utiliser Apple Hardware Test : 1 Déconnectez tous les périphériques externes de votre ordinateur, sauf l’adaptateur secteur. Si un câble Ethernet est connecté, déconnectez-le. 2 Insérez le disque 1 d’installation de Mac OS X livré avec votre ordinateur. 3 Redémarrez ensuite votre ordinateur en maintenant la touche D enfoncée lors du démarrage. 4 Lorsque l’écran principal d’Apple Hardware Test s’affiche, suivez les instructions à l’écran. 5 En cas de détection d’un problème, Apple Hardware Test affiche un code d’erreur. Notez le code d’erreur avant d’entreprendre les démarches d’assistance. Si Apple Hardware Test ne détecte pas de panne matérielle, il est probable que le problème soit lié aux logiciels. Pour en savoir plus sur Apple Hardware Test, consultez le fichier «À propos d’AHT» sur le disque «Mac OS X Install Disc 1». F3626M42.book Page 108 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMChapitre 5 Dépannage 109 Localisation du numéro de série de votre produit Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes pour trouver le numéro de série de votre ordinateur :  Choisissez Apple (?) > À propos de ce Mac puis cliquez sur le numéro de version au-dessous des mots «Mac OS X». Cliquez pour afficher l’un après l’autre la version de Mac OS X, le numéro de sous-version et le numéro de série.  Ouvrez Informations Système (dans /Applications/Utilitaires/), et cliquez sur Matériel. Vous pouvez également ouvrir Informations Système en cliquant sur le bouton Plus d’infos dans la zone de dialogue À propos de ce Mac.  Retirez la batterie. Le numéro de série de votre MacBook se trouve dans la baie de la batterie. Pour en savoir plus sur l’extraction de la batterie, consultez la section «retrait de la batterie» à la page 90 . F3626M42.book Page 109 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMF3626M42.book Page 110 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM111 A Annexe A Caractéristiques Vous pouvez utiliser Informations Système pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur votre MacBook. Vous y trouverez entre autres la quantité de mémoire vive, la taille du disque dur, les périphériques connectés et le numéro de série du produit. Pour accéder au contenu des Informations Système, sélectionnez le menu Pomme (?) > À propos de ce Mac dans la barre des menus, puis cliquez sur Plus d’infos ou ouvrez Informations Système, situé dans /Applications/Utilitaires. Dans la fenêtre qui s’ouvre, cliquez sur les triangles pour afficher ou cacher le contenu des différentes catégories. F3626M42.book Page 111 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM112 Annexe A Caractéristiques Conditions de fonctionnement  Température de fonctionnement : 10° C à 35° C  Altitude : 3 048 m maximum  Humidité relative : de 0 % à 90 % sans condensation Adaptateur secteur  Entrée : 100 à 240 Volts (V), 50/60 Hertz (Hz)  Sortie : 16,5 V à 3,65 A Batterie  Sortie : 10,8 V  Capacité : 55 Wh Des informations supplémentaires sont disponibles sur le site d’Apple aux pages www.apple.com/fr/macbook et www.apple.com/fr/support. F3626M42.book Page 112 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM113 B Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien Veuillez lire attentivement les consignes de sécurité et d’entretien suivantes concernant votre MacBook. Les produits Apple sont conçus et évalués selon les standards de sécurité les plus récents de l’équipement des technologies de l’information. Cependant, pour assurer une utilisation sûre, il est important de suivre les consignes de sécurité indiquées sur le produit et dans la documentation. Consignes générales de sécurité Lisez et suivez toutes les consignes indiquées sur le produit et dans ce manuel avant d’utiliser votre MacBook. Gardez ces instructions dans un endroit facile d’accès pour vous et pour les utilisateurs éventuels.  Installez votre MacBook sur un plan de travail stable.  Évitez de placer votre ordinateur à proximité d’un évier, d’un lavabo, d’une baignoire ou d’une douche, par exemple.  Protégez votre ordinateur de l’humidité et des intempéries (neige, pluie, brouillard par exemple). F3626M42.book Page 113 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM114 Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien  Pour votre propre sécurité et celle de votre matériel, veillez à toujours prendre les précautions ci-après. Débranchez le cordon d’alimentation (en tirant sur la prise plutôt que sur le cordon), retirez la batterie et débranchez tous les autres câbles si l’un des cas suivants se présente :  Vous souhaitez installer de la mémoire.  Vous voulez retirer un ou plusieurs composants.  La prise ou le câble d’alimentation est endommagé.  Un liquide a été renversé dans le boîtier.  Votre ordinateur est exposé à la pluie ou à une humidité excessive.  Votre ordinateur a subi une chute ou le boîtier a été endommagé de quelque autre façon.  Vous pensez que votre ordinateur a besoin d’être inspecté ou réparé.  Vous souhaitez nettoyer le boîtier (pour ce faire, suivez à la lettre les instructions fournies plus bas).  Le port d’adaptateur secteur du MacBook contient un aimant. Ne mettez pas des matériaux ou des appareils à sensibilité magnétique à 25 mm ou moins de ce port.  N’introduisez jamais d’objets d’aucune sorte dans les ouvertures de ventilation de le MacBook.  La batterie du MacBook peut présenter un risque d’incendie ou de brûlure en cas de mauvais traitement. Ne la désassemblez pas, ne la chauffez pas au-delà de 100 º C et ne l’incinérez pas. Ne remplacez la batterie que par une batterie certifiée par Apple pour ce produit. L’utilisation de toute autre batterie peut présenter un risque d’incendie ou d’explosion. Éliminez rapidement les batteries usagées conformément aux directives d’environnement locales en vigueur. F3626M42.book Page 114 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien 115 Configuration de votre MacBook et de l’adaptateur secteur Assurez-vous que la fiche ou le câble d’alimentation CA est complètement inséré dans l’adaptateur secteur avant de brancher l’adaptateur sur la prise secteur. Pour un fonctionnement optimal, veillez à connecter l’adaptateur via le câble d’alimentation CA et à utiliser une prise secteur de terre. Utilisez uniquement l’adaptateur secteur fourni avec votre MacBook. Les adaptateurs destinés à d’autres appareils électroniques (y compris à d’autres modèles de MacBook Pro et d’ordinateurs portables) peuvent sembler similaires, mais risquent d’avoir une incidence négative sur les performances de votre ordinateur, voire de l’endommager. L’adaptateur secteur peut chauffer pendant l’utilisation normale de votre MacBook. Faites toujours en sorte que l’adaptateur soit correctement ventilé et soyez prudent lorsque vous le manipulez pendant ou immédiatement après l’avoir utilisé. Si possible, placez l’adaptateur secteur sur une surface plane et dure pour dissiper la chaleur. Ne forcez jamais l’insertion d’un connecteur dans un port. Vérifiez la présence d’obstructions sur le port. Si le connecteur ne se raccorde pas facilement au port, c’est qu’ils sont probablement incompatibles. Assurez-vous que le connecteur correspond bien au port et que vous l’avez correctement positionné par rapport à ce dernier. La présence de débris dans le port d’adaptateur secteur peut empêcher l’adaptateur secteur de se brancher correctement. Nettoyez doucement les débris avec une tige de coton ouaté. F3626M42.book Page 115 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM116 Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien Utilisation de votre MacBook Lorsque vous utilisez votre MacBook ou que vous rechargez la batterie, il est normal que la température du dessous du boîtier s’élève. En cas d’utilisation prolongée, placez votre MacBook sur une surface plane et stable. Ne laissez pas la partie inférieure de votre MacBook au contact de vos genoux ou de toute autre surface de votre corps de manière prolongée. Un contact étendu avec votre corps pourrait provoquer des douleurs et éventuellement des brûlures. Cette partie du boîtier du MacBook sert de surface de refroidissement et permet d’évacuer la chaleur de l’ordinateur vers l’extérieur. Le dessous du boîtier est légèrement suré- levé pour permettre la circulation d’air et assurer ainsi à l’équipement une température de fonctionnement normale. De plus, l’ordinateur dégage de l’air chaud des logements à l’arrière du boîtier. Avertissement : ne posez pas votre MacBook allumé sur un oreiller ou toute autre surface dans laquelle il pourrait s’enfoncer, car cela pourrait bloquer les conduites d’aération, en particulier les conduites arrière, et entraîner une surchauffe de l’ordinateur. Évitez également de placer des objets sur le clavier lors de l’utilisation avec écran rabattu. Cela risque de provoquer une succession d’arrêts et de mises en marche de votre ordinateur, entraînant une surchauffe et la décharge de la batterie. N’allumez jamais l’ordinateur tant que tous ses composants internes ou externes ne sont pas en place. L’utilisation de l’ordinateur lorsque son boîtier est ouvert ou que certains composants ont été démontés peut s’avérer dangereuse et risque de l’endommager. F3626M42.book Page 116 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien 117 Transport de votre MacBook Si vous transportez votre MacBook dans un sac ou dans un attaché-case, assurez-vous que ce dernier ne contient pas d’objets non attachés (tels que des trombones ou des pièces de monnaie) qui pourraient pénétrer accidentellement dans l’ordinateur par une ouverture telle que la fente du lecteur optique ou se coincer à l’intérieur d’un port. Maintenez également à l’écart du port de l’adaptateur secteur tout objet magnétiquement sensible. Rangement de votre MacBook Si vous décidez de ranger votre MacBook pendant une période de temps prolongée, placez-le dans un endroit frais (idéalement à 22 ° C) et prenez l’une des mesures suivantes afin de préserver la durée de vie de la batterie :  Déchargez la batterie à 50 pour cent avant de ranger votre MacBook.  Avant de ranger votre ordinateur pour une période de temps supérieure à cinq mois, déchargez la batterie jusqu’à environ 50 pour cent, puis retirez-la du MacBook. Si vous décidez de ranger votre ordinateur pour une période prolongée, pensez à recharger la batterie de 50 pour cent tous les six mois environ. Nettoyage de votre MacBook Respectez les consignes suivantes lors du nettoyage de votre ordinateur et de ses accessoires :  Éteignez votre MacBook, débranchez l’adaptateur secteur et retirez la batterie.  Pour nettoyer le boîtier de l’ordinateur, utilisez un chiffon doux, humide et non pelucheux. Évitez les infiltrations d’humidité par quelque ouverture que ce soit. Ne vaporisez jamais de liquide directement sur l’ordinateur.  N’utilisez ni aérosols, ni dissolvants, ni abrasifs qui pourraient endommager le fini. F3626M42.book Page 117 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM118 Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien Nettoyage de l’écran de votre MacBook Pour nettoyer l’écran de votre MacBook, procédez comme suit :  Éteignez votre MacBook, débranchez l’adaptateur secteur et retirez la batterie.  Humidifiez, à l’eau seulement, un chiffon propre, doux et non pelucheux et essuyez l’écran. Ne vaporisez jamais de liquide directement sur l’écran. Comment éviter les problèmes auditifs Informations se rapportant au laser Avertissement : l’utilisation d’écouteurs ou d’un casque d’écoute à un niveau de volume trop élevé peut provoquer une perte d’acuité auditive permanente. L’oreille peut s’adapter petit à petit à des volumes sonores de plus en plus élevés qui peuvent sembler normaux, mais qui risquent à la longue d’endommager votre système auditif. En cas de sifflements ou de perte d’acuité auditive, arrêtez d’utiliser le casque ou les écouteurs et consultez un médecin. Plus le volume est élevé, plus votre audition risque d’être affectée rapidement. Pour protéger votre système auditif, les spécialistes conseillent de prendre les mesures suivantes :  Limitez la durée d’utilisation à volume élevé de vos écouteurs ou de votre casque d’écoute.  Évitez d’augmenter le volume afin de bloquer les bruits environnants.  Baissez le volume si vous ne parvenez pas à entendre une personne qui parle à côté de vous. Avertissement : l’exécution de réglages ou d’opérations qui ne sont pas spécifiés dans la manuel de votre équipement risque de vous exposer à des rayonnements dangereux. F3626M42.book Page 118 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien 119 N’essayez pas de démonter le boîtier qui contient le laser. Le faisceau laser utilisé dans ce produit est nocif pour les yeux. L’utilisation d’instruments optiques, tels que les loupes grossissantes, avec ce produit augmente les risques potentiels pour vos yeux. Afin d’assurer votre sécurité, cet équipement ne doit être réparé que par un fournisseur de services agréé Apple. Votre ordinateur est classé comme produit laser de Catégorie 1 à cause de son lecteur optique. L’étiquette de Catégorie 1, située dans un emplacement accessible à l’utilisateur, indique que le lecteur obéit aux exigences minimales de sécurité. Une étiquette de mise en garde destinée au réparateur est située dans un emplacement qui lui est accessible. Les étiquettes placées sur votre produit peuvent être légèrement différentes de celles qui sont affichées ici. Avertissement relatif aux activités à haut risque Cet ordinateur n’est pas conçu pour être utilisé dans des installations nucléaires, pour la navigation ou la communication aérienne, pour le contrôle du trafic aérien, ni dans aucune autre situation où une panne du système informatique pourrait entraîner la mort, des blessures ou de graves dommages écologiques. Étiquette «Catégorie 1» Étiquette de mise en garde destinée au réparateur F3626M42.book Page 119 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM120 Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien Ergonomie Voici quelques conseils sur la mise en place d’un environnement de travail sain. Clavier et trackpad Lorsque vous tapez au clavier ou que vous vous servez du trackpad, vos épaules doivent être détendues. Le bras et l’avant-bras doivent former un angle droit, la main étant placée dans le prolongement du poignet. Vous devez avoir les mains et les doigts détendus lorsque vous tapez au clavier ou que vous utilisez le trackpad. Évitez de replier les pouces à l’intérieur des paumes. Position à éviter Position recommandée F3626M42.book Page 120 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien 121 Modifiez fréquemment la position de vos mains pour éviter la fatigue. Après un travail continu et intensif sur ordinateur, certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir des douleurs aux mains, aux poignets ou aux bras. Si ces douleurs persistent, consultez un spécialiste. Siège Optez pour un siège de bureau réglable et offrant un dossier et une assise confortables. Réglez la hauteur du siège de telle sorte que vos cuisses reposent à l’horizontale et vos pieds à plat sur le sol. Le dossier du siège doit soutenir votre région lombaire, c’est-à-dire la partie inférieure de votre dos. Suivez les instructions du fabricant de sorte que le réglage du dossier soit parfaitement adapté à votre morphologie. Au besoin, relevez le siège de manière à ce que vos avant-bras et vos mains soient placés correctement par rapport au clavier. Si, dans ce cas, vos pieds ne reposent plus à plat sur le sol, utilisez un repose-pied inclinable et réglable en hauteur. Si vous disposez d’un bureau modulaire, vous pouvez abaisser le niveau du plan de travail pour éviter l’emploi d’un repose-pied. Une troisième solution consiste à utiliser un bureau dont le clavier est situé plus bas que le plan de travail. Position à éviter Position recommandée F3626M42.book Page 121 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM122 Annexe B Consignes de sécurité, d’utilisation et d’entretien Souris externe Si vous utilisez une souris externe, veillez à ce qu’elle se trouve à hauteur du clavier. Ménagez un espace suffisant pour la manipuler avec aisance. Écran intégré Orientez l’écran de manière à réduire le plus possible les reflets de l’éclairage électrique et de la lumière du jour. Ne forcez pas l’écran si vous rencontrez une résistance. L’angle d’ouverture maximal de l’écran ne peut dépasser 130 degrés. Réglez la luminosité et le contraste de l’écran chaque fois que vous déplacez l’ordinateur ou que l’éclairage ambiant change. Pour en savoir plus Accédez au site web www.apple.com/about/ergonomics. À propos d’Apple et de l’environnement Apple Computer, Inc. reconnaît sa responsabilité en matière de réduction de l’impact de ses produits et de ses activités sur l’environnement. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la page www.apple.com/environment/summary.html. F3626M42.book Page 122 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM123 C Annexe C Connexion à Internet Votre ordinateur vous permet de naviguer sur le Web, d’échanger du courrier électronique avec vos amis et votre famille ou de dialoguer en temps réel via Internet. Utilisez ces informations pour vous aider à vous connecter à Internet. Lors du premier démarrage de Mac OS X, Assistant réglages vous aide à saisir vos informations concernant la configuration Internet. Si vous n’avez pas utiliser Assistant réglages pour configurer votre connexion à Internet, vous pouvez utiliser Assistant réglages de Réseau plus tard (consultez «Utilisation d’Assistant réglages de réseau pour se connecter» à la page 127 ). Si vous choisissez de ne pas utiliser Assistant réglages de réseau, vous pouvez utiliser les informations figurant dans cette annexe pour configurer votre connexion manuellement. Il existe quatre types de connexion à Internet :  connexion via un modem câble ou DSL à haut débit : l’ordinateur est relié via un câble Ethernet à un modem spécial fourni par un FAI ;  connexion sans fil : l’ordinateur est connecté sans fil via une borne d’accès AirPort Extreme, AirPort Express ou un autre point d’accès 802.11ou 802.11 ; F3626M42.book Page 123 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM124 Annexe C Connexion à Internet  réseau local (LAN) : l’ordinateur est connecté à un réseau local via un câble Ethernet. C’est le type de connexion habituellement utilisé dans les entreprises.  connexion par ligne téléphonique : l’ordinateur est connecté à un modem externe branché sur une prise téléphonique murale via un câble téléphonique. Avant de vous connecter à Internet : 1 Ouvrez un compte auprès d’un fournisseur d’accès à Internet (FAI). 2 Procurez-vous les informations concernant la connexion auprès de votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet ou de votre administrateur réseau. Consultez la section suivante «Regroupement des informations nécessaires», pour savoir quelles sont les informations dont vous avez besoin pour chaque type de connexion. Vous pouvez écrire ces informations directement sur les pages suivantes, puis les saisir dans Assistant réglages. Si un autre ordinateur se trouvant au même emplacement est déjà connecté à Internet, vous pouvez probablement utiliser ses réglages. Pour accéder aux réglages sur un ordinateur Mac OS X :  Ouvrez la fenêtre Réseau des Préférences Système.  Dans le menu local Afficher, sélectionnez votre mode de connexion.  Copiez les informations concernant votre connexion. Pour accéder aux réglages d’un ordinateur Windows : Les informations d’un PC Windows concernant la connexion se trouvent à deux endroits.  Pour rechercher l’adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau, ouvrez le tableau de bord «Connexions Réseau et Internet».  Pour accéder aux informations relatives aux comptes d’utilisateurs, ouvrez le tableau de bord Comptes d’utilisateurs. F3626M42.book Page 124 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe C Connexion à Internet 125 3 Si vous utilisez un modem externe, tel que le modem USB d’Apple (vendu séparément), branchez-le dans un port USB de votre MacBook, puis utilisez un câble téléphonique (non inclus) pour connecter le modem à une prise téléphonique murale. Si vous disposez d’un modem DSL ou câble, connectez-le à votre ordinateur en suivant les instructions incluses. 4 Allumez votre ordinateur et saisissez les informations dans Assistant réglages pour configurer votre connexion à Internet. Remarque : si vous avez déjà démarré votre ordinateur sans utiliser Assistant réglages pour configurer votre connexion à Internet, consultez «Utilisation d’Assistant réglages de réseau pour se connecter» à la page 127 . Regroupement des informations nécessaires Vous pouvez noter sur ces pages les informations obtenues auprès de votre FAI, de votre administrateur réseau ou récupérées sur un autre ordinateur, puis les saisir dans Assistant réglages de réseau. Pour configurer une connexion téléphonique classique, procurez-vous les informations suivantes :  nom du fournisseur d’accès ;  nom d’utilisateur ou de compte ;  mot de passe ;  numéro de téléphone du FAI ;  autre numéro de téléphone ;  préfixe pour obtenir la ligne externe. F3626M42.book Page 125 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM126 Annexe C Connexion à Internet Pour configurer un modem DSL, un modem câble, un réseau local (LAN) ou une connexion AirPort Extreme sans fil, choisissez votre méthode de connexion (en cas de doute, adressez-vous à votre administrateur système ou à votre FAI) :  manuellement ;  utilisation de DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, protocole de configuration dynamique d’hôte) avec une adresse manuelle ;  via DHCP ;  via BootP ;  PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol, protocole point à point). En cas de doute sur la méthode à utiliser, l’option «Via DHCP» peut s’avérer un bon choix car le réseau fournit automatiquement la plupart des informations requises. Si vous sélectionnez «Manuellement» ou «Via DHCP avec une adresse manuelle», rassemblez les informations suivantes :  adresse IP ;  masque de sous-réseau ;  adresse du routeur. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez «Utilisation de DHCP avec une adresse manuelle», vous n’avez pas besoin d’un masque de sous-réseau ou d’une adresse de routeur. Si vous sélectionnez «Via DHCP», rassemblez les informations facultatives suivantes (demandez à votre FAI si c’est nécessaire) :  numéro de client DHCP ;  serveurs DNS. F3626M42.book Page 126 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe C Connexion à Internet 127 Si vous sélectionnez «PPPoE» (pour les connexions via PPP sur Ethernet ), rassemblez les informations suivantes :  fournisseur d’accès ;  nom de compte ;  mot de passe ;  nom de service PPPoE. Les informations ci-dessous sont facultatives. Demandez à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet ou à votre administrateur système si elles sont requises.  serveurs DNS ;  nom de domaine ;  serveur proxy. Saisie de vos informations Après vous être procuré les informations spécifiques concernant la configuration auprès de votre FAI ou de votre administrateur réseau, vous pouvez utiliser Assistant réglages de réseau pour vous connecter ou pour saisir les informations manuellement. Utilisation d’Assistant réglages de réseau pour se connecter Si vous n’avez pas utilisé l’Assistant réglages pour configurer vos réglages Internet au premier démarrage de votre MacBook, vous pouvez utiliser l’Assistant réglages de réseau à tout moment pour configurer votre connexion à Internet ou pour modifier vos réglages. F3626M42.book Page 127 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM128 Annexe C Connexion à Internet Pour utiliser Assistant réglages de réseau : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur Réseau puis cliquez sur «Assistant». 3 Cliquez sur Assistant pour lancer Assistant réglages de réseau. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour plus d’informations sur la configuration d’une connexion à Internet, consultez l’Aide Mac. Choisissez Aide > Aide Mac puis recherchez «connexion à Internet». Saisie manuelle de vos informations Pour saisir vos informations manuellement : 1 Ouvrez Préférences Système > Réseau. 2 Faites votre sélection dans le menu local Afficher et réglez les options selon le type de connexion souhaité :  connexion par modem câble, modem DSL ou LAN en utilisant l’une de ces configurations :  manuellement : dans le cas d’une configuration manuelle, votre FAI ou administrateur réseau vous indique une adresse IP statique et d’autres informations que vous devez saisir dans les Préférences réseau ;  utilisation du protocole DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) : avec une configuration DHCP, le serveur DHCP saisit automatiquement les informations à votre place ;  utilisation du protocole PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) : si vous utilisez un modem DSL et que vous avez besoin d’un nom d’utilisateur et d’un mot de passe pour vous connecter à Internet, contactez votre FAI pour savoir si vous devez vous connecter via PPPoE ; F3626M42.book Page 128 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe C Connexion à Internet 129  modem téléphonique externe avec connexion PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) : saisissez le nom et le mot de passe de votre compte, votre numéro de téléphone et les autres informations requises ;  connexion sans fil AirPort Extreme : vous pouvez configurer votre réseau AirPort Extreme et votre connexion Internet via Assistant réglages AirPort, situé dans le dossier /Applications/Utilitaires. 3 Cliquez sur «Assistant» pour obtenir une assistance supplémentaire. Dépannage de votre connexion En cas de problèmes avec votre connexion à Internet, vous pouvez essayer les méthodes de cette section pour votre type de connexion ou vous pouvez utiliser Diagnostic réseau. Pour utiliser Diagnostic réseau : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur Réseau puis cliquez sur «Assistant». 3 Cliquez sur Diagnostic pour lancer Diagnostic réseau. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si Diagnostic réseau n’est pas en mesure de résoudre le problème, celui-ci se situe peut-être au niveau du fournisseur d’accès à Internet auquel vous essayez de vous connecter, du périphérique externe utilisé pour la connexion au fournisseur d’accès à Internet ou du serveur auquel vous essayez d’accéder. Vous pouvez également essayer les méthodes suivantes. F3626M42.book Page 129 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM130 Annexe C Connexion à Internet Connexions à Internet par modem câble, modem DSL ou réseau local (LAN) Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à Internet à l’aide de votre modem câble ou DSL ou via votre réseau local (LAN), suivez les instructions ci-après. Important : les instructions relatives aux modems ne concernent pas les utilisateurs de réseau LAN. Contrairement aux utilisateurs de modems câble et de modems DSL, les utilisateurs de réseau LAN peuvent disposer de concentrateurs, commutateurs, routeurs et autres dispositifs de connexion. Ils doivent faire appel à leur administrateur réseau plutôt qu’à un FAI. Vérifiez les câbles et les sources d’alimentation Assurez-vous que tous les câbles du modem sont correctement branchés, y compris le câble d’alimentation du modem, le câble reliant le modem à l’ordinateur et le câble raccordant le modem à la prise murale. Vérifiez les câbles et l’alimentation des routeurs et des concentrateurs Ethernet. Éteignez puis rallumez le modem et réinitialisez les composants matériels du modem. Éteignez votre modem DSL ou votre modem câble pendant quelques minutes, puis rallumez-le. Certains fournisseurs d’accès à Internet conseillent de débrancher le câble d’alimentation du modem. Si votre modem dispose d’un bouton de réinitialisation, vous pouvez l’actionner avant ou après avoir éteint puis rallumé le modem. F3626M42.book Page 130 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe C Connexion à Internet 131 Connexions PPPoE Si vous n’arrivez pas à vous connecter à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet via PPPoE, commencez par vérifier les câbles et l’alimentation, puis éteignez le modem et rallumez-le et réinitialisez le matériel modem. Vérifiez ensuite vos réglages dans la fenêtre Réseau des Préférences Système. Pour vérifier les réglages des Préférences Système : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus. 2 Cliquez sur Réseau. 3 Dans le menu local Afficher, sélectionnez Configurations de ports réseau. 4 Sélectionnez Ethernet intégré, puis faites glisser cette configuration en haut de la liste des configurations de ports. 5 Dans le menu local Afficher, sélectionnez Ethernet intégré. 6 Cliquez sur PPPoE. 7 Sélectionnez Se connecter via PPPoE. 8 Vérifiez le champ Nom de compte pour vous assurer d’avoir tapé les informations correctes fournies par votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet. 9 Si vous avez choisi d’enregistrer votre mot de passe, saisissez-le à nouveau afin d’être sûr qu’il est correct. 10 Cliquez sur TCP/IP. Assurez-vous d’avoir saisi dans cette fenêtre les informations correctes fournies par votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet. 11 Cliquez sur Appliquer. F3626M42.book Page 131 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM132 Annexe C Connexion à Internet Connexions au réseau Si vous disposez de plusieurs ordinateurs tentant de partager une connexion à Internet, assurez-vous que votre réseau est correctement configuré. Vous devez savoir si votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet fournit une adresse IP ou plusieurs (une pour chaque ordinateur). Si une seule adresse IP est utilisée, vous devez disposer d’un routeur capable de partager la connexion (on parle alors de conversion d’adresse réseau (NAT) ou de masquage d’adresses IP). Pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, consultez la documentation fournie avec votre routeur ou contactez la personne qui a configuré votre réseau. La borne d’accès AirPort Extreme peut être utilisée pour que plusieurs ordinateurs partagent une adresse IP. Pour obtenir plus d’informations sur l’utilisation de la borne d’accès AirPort Extreme, consultez l’aide à l’écran ou le site web AirPort, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/airportextreme. Si ces instructions s’avèrent insuffisantes pour résoudre les problèmes rencontrés, contactez votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet. F3626M42.book Page 132 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM133 D Annexe D Les dix questions principales Une question ? Les dix questions les plus fréquemment posées par les nouveaux utilisateurs du MacBook sont les suivantes : Ma connexion Internet ne semble pas fonctionner. Comment la configurer ? Il y a différents types de connexions Internet. Vous pouvez, par exemple, vous connecter via un modem, une connexion DSL, une connexion sans fil AirPort ou un réseau Ethernet. Vous devez saisir sous Mac OS X des informations spécifiques sur votre type de connexion, votre fournisseur d’accès Internet ou votre réseau. La première étape de configuration de votre connexion consiste à regrouper les informations requises pour votre type de connexion. Pour connaître les informations requises et savoir comment configurer votre type de connexion, consultez l’annexe C, «Connexion à Internet», à la page 123 . Votre ordinateur dispose également de l’application Assistant réglages pour vous aider à configurer votre connexion Internet. Ouvrez Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Réseau. Cliquez sur le bouton d’assistance pour ouvrir Assistant réglages de réseau. F3626M42.book Page 133 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM134 Annexe D Les dix questions principales Comment configurer mon imprimante ? Est-elle compatible avec mon MacBook ? Commencez par connecter votre imprimante et installer tous les logiciels en suivant les instructions incluses avec l’imprimante. Ensuite, ouvrez les Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur l’icône Imprimantes et fax. Utilisez la fenêtre Imprimantes et fax pour configurer votre MacBook de façon qu’il puisse utiliser l’imprimante. Vous trouverez de plus amples informations sur la configuration des imprimantes dans l’Aide Mac (choisissez Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus, puis recherchez «imprimante»). Consultez également «Connexion à une imprimante» à la page 52. Si votre imprimante ne fonctionne pas comme prévu, consultez le site web du fabricant pour obtenir les gestionnaires d’imprimante mis à jour. La dernière version du logiciel d’imprimante est souvent disponible en téléchargement. Si vous envoyez une tâche à votre imprimante et que celle-ci n’imprime pas, cliquez sur l’icône de l’imprimante dans le Dock pour vérifier si l’impression est interrompue ou si la tâche est en pause. (Si aucune icône n’apparaît dans le Dock, ouvrez Configuration d’imprimante dans le dossier /Applications/Utilitaires et double-cliquez sur le nom de l’imprimante.) Si la fenêtre de l’imprimante annonce «Tâche suspendue», cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer tâches. Si «Pause» apparaît à côté du nom de la tâche, reprenez l’impression en sélectionnant le nom de la tâche, puis en cliquant sur Reprendre. Si l’impression d’une tâche a été interrompue à la suite d’une erreur technique, effacez la tâche défectueuse en la sélectionnant et en cliquant sur Effacer. Essayer ensuite d’imprimer à nouveau la tâche. F3626M42.book Page 134 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe D Les dix questions principales 135 Comment fonctionne l’interface Mac OS X ? Les utilisateurs qui découvrent Mac OS X se demandent souvent comment exécuter certaines tâches. L’ Aide Mac constitue la meilleure source d’informations sur Mac OS X. Elle comprend des explications préliminaires destinées aux nouveaux utilisateurs, aux utilisateurs Windows s’initiant à Mac OS X, ainsi qu’aux utilisateurs ayant effectué une mise à niveau de Mac OS 9. Ouvrez l’Aide Mac en choisissant Aide > Aide Mac dans la barre des menus du Finder, en haut de votre écran. Explorez les informations destinées aux nouveaux utilisateurs Mac OS X. La plupart des tâches élémentaires recherchées par l’utilisateur impliquent le Finder, essayez donc de rechercher «Finder» également. Comment prolonger la longévité de la batterie de mon MacBook ? N’oubliez pas d’étalonner votre batterie lors de la première utilisation (voir «Étalonnage de la batterie» à la page 26). Vous pouvez économiser l’énergie de la batterie en utilisant les options de la fenêtre des préférences Économiseur d’énergie pour spécifier quand l’ordinateur doit suspendre son activité et quand l’écran doit s’éteindre. Ouvrez Préférences Système et cliquez sur l’icône Économiseur d’énergie. Choisissez les réglages les mieux adaptés à votre mode d’utilisation. L’utilisation de périphériques, tels que les disques durs, qui tirent leur énergie de votre ordinateur, peut aussi contribuer à diminuer l’autonomie de votre batterie. Vous pouvez économiser l’énergie de la batterie en déconnectant ces appareils. Vous pouvez également vous procurer une batterie supplémentaire et la brancher sur votre ordinateur lorsque la batterie est faible. Pour obtenir plus d’informations sur les moyens d’économiser l’énergie de la batterie, consultez la section «Conseils pour économiser la batterie» à la page 85. F3626M42.book Page 135 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM136 Annexe D Les dix questions principales J’ai inséré un disque dans le lecteur optique, mais rien ne se passe. Comment savoir si le disque est compatible avec mon lecteur optique ? Appuyez sur la touche d’éjection de disque (C) pour éjecter le disque. Les lecteurs optiques à chargement par fente Apple ne prennent en charge que des disques circulaires de 12 cm. Les disques non standard et les disques n’ayant pas une forme circulaire ne fonctionnent pas avec le lecteur optique. Pour plus d’informations sur les disques non standard, accédez au site d’assistance et de service Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support, puis recherchez «disques non standard». Comment connecter un moniteur externe, un téléviseur ou un projecteur à mon MacBook ? 1 Allumez l’écran externe ou le projecteur. 2 Vérifiez que le câble de l’écran est bien relié au projecteur ou à l’écran externe. 3 Connectez le câble du moniteur à votre MacBook à l’aide du câble adéquat. a Si vous connectez un périphérique externe via une connexion DVI, utilisez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers DVI d’Apple (vendu séparément). b Si vous connectez un périphérique externe via une connexion VGA, utilisez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers VGA d’Apple (vendu séparément). c Si vous connectez un périphérique externe via une connexion S-vidéo, utilisez l’adaptateur Mini-DVI vers Vidéo Apple (vendu séparément). Votre MacBook détecte automatiquement le moniteur externe, le téléviseur ou le projecteur. Avertissement : l’insertion d’un disque non standard peut endommager le lecteur. F3626M42.book Page 136 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PMAnnexe D Les dix questions principales 137 4 Réglez la résolution de l’écran externe via la fenêtre Moniteurs des Préférences Système ou le menu d’état Moniteurs de la barre de menus. Pour obtenir plus d’informations sur la connexion d’écrans et autres périphériques, consultez «Gestion de la vidéo externe» à la page 71. J’ai oublié mon mot de passe. Comment le réinitialiser ? Pour réinitialiser votre mot de passe, démarrez à partir du disque d’installation de logiciels fourni avec votre ordinateur. Une fois le programme d’installation ouvert, sélectionnez Installation > «Réinitialiser le mot de passe» dans la barre des menus. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. J’entends un ventilateur se déclencher et la température de mon MacBook semble augmenter. Est-ce normal ? Votre MacBook est conçu pour fonctionner dans le cadre de limites thermiques sûres. Le ventilateur se déclenche et fonctionne pour maintenir le MacBook à des températures normales lorsqu’il est en activité. La partie inférieure de votre MacBook peut s’échauffer car elle sert à évacuer la chaleur du boîtier. Il s’agit d’un comportement tout à fait normal. Pour plus d’informations, consultez la section «Utilisation de votre MacBook» à la page 116. F3626M42.book Page 137 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM138 Annexe D Les dix questions principales Une application ou Mac OS X semble ne pas fonctionner correctement. Dois-je réinstaller Mac OS X ? Le processus de dépannage d’un problème demande que vous répondiez à plusieurs questions, notamment si le problème survient toujours avec une application spécifique, s’il est lié au système d’exploitation ou s’il est dû à un matériel défectueux. Avant de réinstaller, consultez la section «Dépannage» à la page 99 pour vous aider à analyser le problème. Apple fournit également de nombreuses explications et des conseils techniques de résolution de problèmes sur le site d’assistance et de service Apple, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support. Si vous constatez qu’une réinstallation de Mac OS X s’impose, vous trouverez toutes les instructions nécessaires dans la section «Réinstallation des logiciels fournis avec votre ordinateur» à la page 106. J’ai installé une application sur mon MacBook, mais elle ne semble pas fonctionner. Où trouver de l’aide ? Vérifiez la documentation fournie avec l’application pour savoir comment obtenir de l’assistance. Les fabricants sont souvent conscients des problèmes courants susceptibles de survenir avec leurs applications et fournissent des solutions et des mises à jours à usage immédiat. Si votre application n’est pas un produit Apple, contactez directement l’éditeur concerné afin d’obtenir une assistance adaptée. F3626M42.book Page 138 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM139 Communications Regulation Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. L’utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit étre prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:  Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.  Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.  Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.  Plug the computer in to an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. F3626M42.book Page 139 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM140 Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Computer, Inc. Product Compliance, 1 Infinite Loop M/S 26-A, Cupertino, CA 95014-2084, 408-974-2000. Wireless Radio Use This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range to reduce the potential for harmful interference to cochannel Mobile Satellite systems. Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy The radiated output power of the AirPort Extreme technology is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it is advised to use the wireless equipment in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. FCC Bluetooth Wireless Compliance The antenna used with this transmitter must not be collocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant. Bluetooth Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Bluetooth Europe–EU Declaration of Conformity This wireless device complies with the specifications EN 300 328, EN 301-489, and EN 60950 following the provisions of the R&TTE Directive. Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC, Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz). This equipment meets the following conformance standards: EN300 328, EN301 893, EN301 489-17, EN60950 Par la présente Apple Computer, Inc. déclare que l’appareil 802.11a/b/g Mini-PCIe card est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE. Complies with European Directives 72/23/EEC, 89/336/EEC, 1999/5/EC See http://www.apple.com/euro/compliance F3626M42.book Page 140 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM141 Korea Statements Singapore Wireless Certification Taiwan Wireless Statements Taiwan Class B Statement VCCI Class B Statement Informations sur les modems USB externes Si vous connectez votre MacBook à une ligne téléphonique par le biais d’un modem USB externe, veuillez vous reporter aux informations fournies par l’agence de télécommunications mentionnées dans la documentation livrée avec votre modem. ENERGY STAR® Compliance As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Apple has determined that standard configurations of this product meet the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. The ENERGY STAR® program is a partnership with office product equipment manufacturers to promote energyefficiency. Reducing energy consumption of office products saves money and reduces pollution by eliminating wasted energy. F3626M42.book Page 141 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM142 Informations sur l’élimination et le recyclage La lampe du rétro-éclairage interne à ce produit contient du mercure. Elle doit être recyclée ou traitée conformément à la législation locale, nationale et fédérale. Pour vous informer sur le programme de recyclage d’Apple, rendez-vous sur le site www.apple.com/environment/summary.html Informations sur l’enlèvement de la batterie Disposez des batteries conformément aux directives d’environnement locales en vigueur. Deutschland: Das Gerät enthält Batterien. Diese gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können verbrauchte Batterien beim Handel oder bei den Kommunen unentgeltlich abgeben. Um Kurzschlüsse zu vermeiden, kleben Sie die Pole der Batterien vorsorglich mit einem Klebestreifen ab. Nederlands:Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Taïwan: Union européenne—instructions concernant l’élimination des déchets : Le symbole ci-dessus signifie que vous devez vous débarrasser de votre produit sans le mélanger avec les ordures ménagères, selon les normes et la législation de votre pays. Lorsque ce produit n’est plus utilisable, portez-le dans un centre de traitement des déchets agréé par les autorités locales. Certains centres acceptent les produits gratuitement. Le traitement et le recyclage séparé de votre produit lors de son élimination aideront à préserver les ressources naturelles et à protéger l’environnement et la santé des êtres humains. F3626M42.book Page 142 Wednesday, April 5, 2006 2:17 PM File Name: Job Number: Description: F034-4989-A_N82REV_inbox_sm_alt_v3.indd PKG-09-0194 N82REV In-box alternate template Trim: Version: Live: Bleed: Scale: Fonts: 630mm x 116mm flat n/a n/a 1:1 (output at 100%) Myriad Set NOTES: •keylines/fold marks do NOT print •built at 100% •cyan type: 100% Cyan •red rings: 100% Magenta and 100% Yellow •black type: 100K •art: 4/c; hires 3 Inks: 4/0 CMYK Studio Designer: Buddy Check (QC): Graphic Designer: GD Editor: Writer: Dan Talbert Leslie Brugal Yoo Lee Teri Thomas Project Manager: Traffic Manager: Production Manager: Creative Director: Caelan Stack Dan Cohen Kay Maston Jamie Roberts Project Manager: Product Manager: Marcom Editor: Legal: Evelyn Seto Teri Thomas Printout Scale: 100% Apple Computer 1 In?nite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 phone: 408 974-1361 Date: 4/10/9 Marcom Date Initials OK ’s Date Initials OK ’s Date Initials OK ’s Apple Con?dential Deux doigts d’astuces Démarrage Bienvenue dans l’univers iPhone. Ce guide de démarrage rapide vous présente comment con?gurer votre iPhone et utiliser ses fonctionnalités principales. Une fois prêt à pro?ter de votre iPhone, vous pouvez obtenir plus d’informations à son sujet en visitant la page web www.apple.com/fr/iphone. À vos marques, configurez, partez ! 1. Téléchargement d’iTunes. Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/itunes/download et téléchargez la dernière version d’iTunes à installer sur votre Mac ou PC. 2. Connexion à votre ordinateur. Connectez votre iPhone au port USB de votre ordinateur. 3. Synchronisation. Lorsque l’iPhone est connecté, iTunes s’ouvre et vous guide dans l’installation. Sélectionnez les contacts, les calendriers, la musique, les vidéos et les photos que vous souhaitez synchroniser, puis cliquez sur Appliquer dans l’angle droit inférieur. Si vous n’avez jamais utilisé iTunes ou que vous souhaitez vous informer sur la synchronisation, vous pouvez consulter un guide d’initiation rapide disponible sur www.apple.com/fr/itunes/tutorials. Effectuer un appel. Pour effectuer un appel, touchez un numéro de téléphone dans Contacts, Favoris, une adresse électronique, un message écrit ou tapotez sur n’importe quelle zone de l’iPhone. Ou touchez le bouton du clavier numérique pour marquer un numéro manuellement. Pour répondre à un appel alors que vous utilisez les écouteurs de l’iPhone, appuyez une fois sur le bouton central. Appuyez à nouveau dessus pour mettre ?n à l’appel. Agrandir pour modifier le texte. Touchez le texte que vous voulez modi?er. Pour replacer le point d’insertion, touchez le mot et maintenez votre doigt dessus pour afficher la loupe. Faites glisser votre doigt pour déplacer le point d’insertion puis modi?ez ce dernier en utilisant le clavier. Envoi de messages. Touchez l’icône Messages. Écrivez un nom ou un numéro de téléphone dans le champ À ou sélectionnez une personne dans vos contacts. Écrivez votre message puis tapotez sur Envoyer. Pour envoyer des photos, touchez le bouton Appareil photo. Pour effacer ou réexpédier l’ensemble ou une partie d’un message, touchez Modi?er. Pour supprimer une conversation entière dans votre liste de messages, tapotez dessus avec votre doigt puis touchez Supprimer. Configuration d’un compte de messagerie. Pour con?gurer un compte de messagerie directement depuis votre iPhone, touchez Ajouter un compte dans les réglages de messagerie. Puis, tapotez sur le type de compte que vous souhaitez ou touchez Autre pour procéder à la con?guration de la plupart des comptes POP3 ou IMAP. Les réglages de compte de messagerie peuvent aussi être synchronisés avec votre Mac ou PC par le biais d’iTunes. Bouton Marche/Veille. Pour allumer l’iPhone, appuyez fermement sur le bouton Marche/Veille. Pour éteindre ou redémarrer l’iPhone, maintenez le bouton Marche/Veille enfoncé, puis faites glisser pour con?rmer. Pour mettre l’iPhone en mode veille, appuyez une fois sur le bouton Marche/Veille. Cela a pour effet d’éteindre l’écran tout en permettant à l’iPhone de recevoir des appels. Pour mettre en silence un appel entrant, appuyez une fois. Pour renvoyer un appel vers la messagerie vocale, appuyez deux fois. Accueil. Lorsque vous utilisez une application, appuyez sur le bouton principal pour fermer celle-ci et revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton principal pour revenir à votre écran d’accueil principal. Durant un appel, vous pouvez accéder à votre courrier électronique, votre calendrier ou aux autres applications et même naviguer sur le web, dans la mesure où vous êtes connecté via Wi-Fi ou 3G. Double-cliquez sur le bouton principal chaque fois que vous voulez accéder à vos Favoris. Double-cliquez sur le mode veille pour afficher les contrôles de l’iPod. Clavier intelligent. L’iPhone corrige et suggère des mots automatiquement au fur et à mesure que vous écrivez. Donc, si vous saisissez une lettre erronée, continuez à écrire. Pour accepter le mot suggéré, touchez la barre d’espace. Touchez le « x » pour refuser le mot suggéré. Le clavier apprend les mots que vous écrivez. Il insère également les apostrophes dans les contractions à votre place. Pour activer le clavier numérique et celui des symboles, tapotez la touche « .?123 ». Touchez deux fois la barre d’espace pour ajouter un point. Couper, copier et coller. Lors de la saisie, tapotez deux fois sur un mot pour le sélectionner. Faites glisser les points de capture pour sélectionner plus ou moins de texte, puis tapotez sur couper, copier ou coller. Pour copier un texte depuis des pages web, courriers électroniques ou messages de texte, touchez et maintenez votre doigt sur le texte sélectionné. Pour annuler une modi?cation, remuez l’iPhone puis tapotez sur le bouton Annuler. Sonnerie/ Silencieux Volume Augmenter/ Diminuer Marche/ Veille Suspendre/ Réactiver Barre d’état Accueil 182321 Apple C_xx034-4989 04.10.09 HW 1 DIE INDESIGN CS3 181988_C1_F034-4989_N82Rev_inbox_sm_alt.indd 1 5/12/09 10:45:22 AMFile Name: Job Number: Description: F034-4989-A_N82REV_inbox_sm_alt_v3.indd PKG-09-0194 N82REV In-box alternate template Trim: Version: Live: Bleed: Scale: Fonts: 630mm x 116mm flat n/a n/a 1:1 (output at 100%) Myriad Set NOTES: •keylines/fold marks do NOT print •built at 100% •cyan type: 100% Cyan •red rings: 100% Magenta and 100% Yellow •black type: 100K •art: 4/c; hires 3 Inks: 4/0 CMYK Studio Designer: Buddy Check (QC): Graphic Designer: GD Editor: Writer: Dan Talbert Leslie Brugal Yoo Lee Teri Thomas Project Manager: Traffic Manager: Production Manager: Creative Director: Caelan Stack Dan Cohen Kay Maston Jamie Roberts Project Manager: Product Manager: Marcom Editor: Legal: Evelyn Seto Teri Thomas Printout Scale: 100% Apple Computer 1 In?nite Loop Cupertino, CA 95014 phone: 408 974-1361 Date: 4/10/9 Marcom Date Initials OK ’s Date Initials OK ’s Date Initials OK ’s Apple Con?dential Google, le logo Google et Google Maps sont des marques de Google Inc. Lovers in Japan de Coldplay est disponible sur iTunes. Tele Atlas® Map data © 2009. Tous droits réservés. Google, le logo Google et Google Maps sont des marques de Google Inc. Tele Atlas® Map data © 2009. Tous droits réservés. L’App Store est disponible dans certains pays. *La messagerie vocale visuelle et les MMS peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans toutes les régions. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre fournisseur de service sans ?l. Certaines fonctionnalités peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans toutes les régions. © 2009 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Apple, Cover Flow, iPod, iTunes, Mac et Safari sont des marques d’Apple Inc. déposées aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. iPhone et Spotlight sont des marques déposées d’Apple Inc. App Store est une marque de service d’Apple Inc. Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés mentionnés ici peuvent être des marques de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Conçu par Apple en Californie. Printed in China. F034-4989-A Voir une page web de plus près. Tapotez deux fois sur un élément d’une page web (image ou texte) pour l’agrandir. Tapotez à nouveau deux fois pour revenir à la taille normale. Touchez le bouton Multi-page pour feuilleter plusieurs pages web ou en ouvrir une nouvelle. Faites pivoter l’iPhone pour visualiser la page web au format grand écran. Rechercher un lieu. Effectuer des recherches dans les environs. Pour situer où vous vous trouvez sur une carte, touchez le bouton Localisation. Un cercle bleu ou un point apparaît, signalant votre position à cet instant. Recherchez des lieux précis dans les alentours en écrivant des mots comme « Starbucks » ou « pizza » dans le champ de recherche. Tapotez deux fois pour activer le zoom. Tapotez une fois avec deux doigts pour désactiver le zoom. Contrôles de vidéo et de morceaux. Touchez l’écran pour afficher les contrôles à l’écran. Touchez-le à nouveau pour les masquer. Le fait de tapoter deux fois sur une vidéo permet de passer d’un affichage grand écran à un affichage plein écran. Lors de l’écoute de morceaux de musique avec les écouteurs sans ?l, appuyez sur le bouton central une fois pour mettre en pause ou en lecture, et appuyez rapidement deux fois pour passer au morceau suivant. Perfectionner ses connaissances. Vous pouvez regarder des démonstrations et perfectionner vos connaissances sur les fonctionnalités de l’iPhone en vous rendant sur la page web www.apple.com/fr/iphone. Pour lire le Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone sur votre iPhone, rendez-vous sur help.apple.com/iphone ou dans les signets de Safari. Pour obtenir des versions téléchargeables du Guide de l’utilisateur de l’iPhone et du Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit, visitez www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone. Obtenir de l’assistance. Contactez votre fournisseur de service sans ?l pour obtenir une assistance sur les services liés au réseau, y compris la messagerie vocale visuelle et la facturation.* Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone pour obtenir une assistance technique sur l’iPhone et iTunes. Parcours de votre musique dans Cover Flow. Faites pivoter votre iPhone pour faire dé?ler vos pochettes d'albums dans Cover Flow. Tapotez sur n’importe quel album pour visualiser sa liste de pistes, puis touchez-en une pour l’écouter. Tapotez à l’extérieur de la liste de pistes pour revenir à la pochette de l’album. Recherche avec Spotlight. Pour utiliser la recherche Spotlight, allez à l’écran d’accueil et appuyez sur le bouton Accueil ou passez le doigt sur l’écran de gauche à droite. Écrivez ce que vous voulez rechercher (un nom, un mot clé, une chanson, un artiste ou le titre d’un ?lm). L’iPhone vous propose des suggestions au fur et à mesure que vous écrivez pour accélerer encore plus votre recherche. Pour lancer des recherches depuis une application comme Mail, Contacts ou iPod, touchez la barre d’état. Obtenir des itinéraires. Dans Plans, tapotez sur Itinéraires puis saisissez les points de départ et d’arrivée. Vous pouvez utiliser votre lieu actuel, saisir une adresse ou en sélectionner une depuis vos contacts ou des emplacements placés dans les signets. Touchez Itinéraire pour afficher les itinéraires de conduite. Touchez le bouton Marche pour obtenir les itinéraires à pied, ou Bus pour afficher les itinéraires et horaires des bus. L’iPhone peut suivre et afficher votre progression le long de n’importe quel itinéraire que vous suivez. Voir des photos. Chargez vos photos favorites dans l’iPhone depuis votre ordinateur en utilisant iTunes, ou utilisez l’appareil photo intégré pour prendre des photos. Passez le doigt sur l’écran vers la droite ou la gauche pour vous déplacer entre les images. Tapotez deux fois pour activer le zoom. Tapotez une fois pour afficher les contrôles à l’écran. Tapotez sur le bouton Action pour envoyer une photo dans un MMS ou un courrier électronique, pour l'utiliser comme fond d’écran ou pour l’assigner à un contact. Accéder à l’App Store. Tapotez sur l’icône App Store pour naviguer sans ?l parmi des dizaines de milliers d’applications pouvant être regroupées sous les catégories jeux, travail, voyage, réseaux sociaux, etc. Parcourez-les par Sélection, Genres ou Top 25, ou lancez une recherche par nom. Pour acheter et télécharger une application directement sur votre iPhone, touchez Acheter. Beaucoup d’applications sont gratuites. 182321 Apple D_xx034-4989 04.10.09 HW 1 DIE INDESIGN CS3 181988_D1_F034-4989_N82Rev_inbox_sm_alt.indd 1 5/6/09 3:25:48 PM iPad Manual do Usuário Para o Software iOS 4.39 Capítulo 1: Visão Geral 9 Visão Geral do 10 Botões 12 Bandeja do cartão Micro-SIM 12 Tela de Início 17 Tela Multi-Touch 18 Teclado da Tela 24 Capítulo 2: Introdução 24 Requisitos 24 Como Configurar o iPad 25 Como Sincronizar com o iTunes 30 Como Conectar-se à Internet 32 Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário 34 Como desconectar o iPad de seu computador 34 Como visualizar o Manual do Usuário do iPad 34 Bateria 36 Utilização e Limpeza do iPad 38 Capítulo 3: Noções básicas 38 Como Utilizar os Apps 42 Impressão 45 Como fazer uma busca 46 Como usar os dispositivos Bluetooth 47 Compartilhamento de Arquivos 48 Como usar o AirPlay 48 Recursos de segurança 50 Capítulo 4: Safari 50 Sobre o Safari 50 Como Visualizar Páginas Web 54 Como Buscar na Web 54 Favoritos 55 Web Clips 2 ConteúdoConteúdo 3 56 Capítulo 5: Mail 56 Sobre o Mail 56 Como Configurar Contas de E-mail 57 Como Enviar um e-mail 58 Como Verificar e Ler E-mails 62 Como Buscar E-mails 62 Para imprimir mensagens e anexos 63 Como Organizar os E-mails 64 Capítulo 6: Câmera 64 Sobre a Câmera 65 Como tirar fotos e gravar vídeos 66 Como visualizar e compartilhar fotos e vídeos 66 Como recortar vídeos 67 Para carregar fotos e vídeos em seu computador 68 Capítulo 7: FaceTime 68 Sobre o FaceTime 69 Como iniciar a sessão 70 Como realizar uma videoconferência do FaceTime 70 Enquanto você está falando 71 Capítulo 8: Photo Booth 71 Sobre o Photo Booth 71 Como selecionar um efeito 72 Como tirar uma foto 73 Como visualizar e compartilhar fotos 73 Como carregar fotos para o seu computador 74 Capítulo 9: Fotos 74 Sobre as fotos 74 Como sincronizar fotos e vídeos com o seu computador 75 Como importar fotos e vídeos do iPhone ou de uma câmera digital 76 Como visualizar fotos e vídeos 78 Compartilhamento de Fotos 80 Como Atribuir uma Foto a um Contato 81 Como imprimir fotos 81 Fotos de Imagem de Fundo e da Tela de Bloqueio 81 Utilização de Porta-Retrato 83 Capítulo 10: Vídeos 83 Sobre Vídeos 84 Como Reproduzir Vídeos 85 Como Controlar a Reprodução do Vídeo4 Conteúdo 86 Sincronização de Vídeos 86 Como Assistir a Filmes Alugados 87 Como Assistir Vídeos em uma TV 87 Como apagar vídeos do iPad 88 Capítulo 11: YouTube 88 Como Buscar e Visualizar Vídeos 89 Como Controlar a Reprodução do Vídeo 91 Como gerenciar os vídeos 91 Como Assistir o YouTube em uma TV 92 Capítulo 12: Calendário 92 Sobre o Calendário 92 Como Sincronizar Calendários 93 Como adicionar, editar e apagar eventos do calendário 93 Como Visualizar seus Calendários 95 Como buscar nos calendários 95 Como Assinar Calendários 96 Como Responder a Convites de Reuniões 97 Como importar arquivos do Calendário a partir do Mail 97 Alertas 98 Capítulo 13: Contatos 98 Sobre os Contatos 99 Como Sincronizar e Adicionar Contatos 99 Como Buscar Contatos 100 Como gerenciar contatos 100 Como Utilizar as Informações de um Contato 101 Contatos Unificados 102 Capítulo 14: Notas 102 Como Escrever e Ler Notas 103 Como buscar notas 103 Como Enviar Notas por E-Mail 103 Para sincronizar as notas 104 Capítulo 15: Mapas 104 Sobre os Mapas 105 Como Buscar e Visualizar Localizações 110 Como Obter Itinerários 111 Como Mostrar as Condições de Tráfego 111 Como Buscar e Contatar Empresas 113 Como Compartilhar Informações de LocalizaçãoConteúdo 5 114 Capítulo 16: iPod 114 Como adicionar música e mais ao iPad 114 Reprodução de Música e Outros Áudios 119 Utilização de Listas 121 Compartilhamento Familiar 122 Transferência de Conteúdo 123 Capítulo 17: iTunes Store 123 Sobre a iTunes Store 123 Transferência de Conteúdo 124 Como buscar músicas, vídeos e muito mais 124 Como Seguir Artistas e Amigos 126 Como comprar música ou audiolivros 127 Como comprar e alugar vídeos 127 Como Ouvir ou Assistir Podcasts 128 Como verificar o estado de uma transferência 128 Sincronização de Conteúdo 129 Como verificar as informações do ID da Apple 129 Como Verificar suas Compras 130 Capítulo 18: App Store 130 Sobre a App Store 130 Como Navegar e Buscar 131 Como Obter Mais Informações 131 Como comprar aplicativos 132 Como Utilizar os Apps 133 Como Atualizar Apps 133 Como escrever opiniões 134 Como Apagar Apps 134 Como Sincronizar Compras 135 Capítulo 19: iBooks 135 Sobre o iBooks 136 Como Sincronizar Livros e PDFs 137 Como Utilizar a iBookstore 137 Como Ler Livros 138 Como ler PDFs 139 Como Alterar a Aparência de um Livro 139 Como sincronizar livros e PDFs 140 Como Procurar a Definição de uma Palavra 140 Como fazer para que o livro seja lido 140 Como imprimir ou enviar um PDF por e-mail 140 Para organizar a estante de livros6 Conteúdo 142 Capítulo 20: Game Center 142 Sobre o Game Center 142 Como configurar o Game Center 144 Jogos 147 Amigos 148 Seu estado e as informações da conta 149 Controles Parentais 150 Capítulo 21: Acessibilidade 150 Recursos de Acesso Universal 151 VoiceOver 162 Zoom 163 Texto Grande 163 Branco sobre Preto 164 Áudio Mono 164 Falar texto automático 164 Clique Triplo em Início 164 Legendas Ocultas e Outros Recursos Úteis 166 Capítulo 22: Ajustes 166 Sobre os Ajustes 166 Modo Avião 167 VPN 167 Wi-Fi 168 Notificações 169 Serviços de Localização 169 Operadora 170 Dados do Celular 170 Brilho e Imagem de Fundo 170 Porta-retrato 171 Geral 179 Mail, Contatos, Calendários 183 Safari 184 iPod 185 Vídeo 186 Fotos 186 FaceTime 186 Notas 187 Loja 188 Apêndice A: O iPad na Empresa 188 O iPad no Trabalho 188 Utilização de Perfis de ConfiguraçãoConteúdo 7 189 Como Configurar Contas do Microsoft Exchange 189 Acesso VPN 190 Contas LDAP e CardDAV 191 Apêndice B: Teclados Internacionais 191 Como adicionar teclados 191 Como alternar teclados 192 Chinês 194 Japonês 194 Coreano 195 Vietnamita 195 Como criar dicionários 196 Apêndice C: Dicas e Solução de Problemas 196 Dicas e Solução de Problemas 198 iTunes e Sincronização 198 Backup do iPad 199 Como atualizar e restaurar o software do iPad 201 Safari, Mail e Contatos 203 Som, Música e Vídeo 205 FaceTime 205 iTunes Store e App Store 206 Como reiniciar e redefinir o iPad 206 Se o iPad não responder mesmo depois de ser reiniciado 207 Informações Sobre Segurança, Serviços e Softwares 207 Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem 208 A Apple e o meio ambiente 9 Leia este capítulo para obter informações sobre os recursos do iPad, sobre como usar os controles e outros temas. Visão Geral do Tela Multi-Touch Barra de estado Início Câmera frontal Ícones de  aplicativos Alto-falante Bandeja Micro-SIM (em alguns modelos) Microfone Tomada do fone  de ouvido Botões  de volume Interruptor  Lateral Repouso/ Despertar Conector Dock Câmera posterior 1 Visão Geral Acessórios Adaptador de alimentação Cabo de Conector Dock a USB USB de 10 W Item O que você pode fazer com ele Adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W Use o adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W para ligar o iPad à corrente elétrica e carregar a bateria. Cabo de Conector Dock a USB Use este cabo para conectar o iPad ao seu computador para sincronizar, ou ao adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W para carregá-lo. Use o cabo com o Dock opcional do iPad ou conecte-o diretamente ao iPad. Botões Alguns botões simples facilitam a ativação e desativação do iPad e o ajuste do volume. Botão Repousar/Despertar Você pode bloquear o iPad colocando-o no modo de repouso quando não o estiver usando. Quando você bloqueia o iPad, não acontece nada ao tocar a tela, mas a música continua tocando e você pode usar os botões de volume. Botão Repousar/ Despertar Bloquear a tela do iPad Pressione o botão Repousar/Despertar. Para desbloquear o iPad Pressione o botão Início ou o botão Repousar/ Despertar e depois arraste o controle deslizante. Para desligar o iPad Mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/ Despertar por alguns segundos até que o controle deslizante vermelho apareça, depois arraste o controle. Ligar o iPad Mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/ Despertar até que o logotipo da Apple apareça. 10 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 11 Se você não tocar na tela por um minuto, o iPad se bloqueia automaticamente. Para alterar este ajuste, consulte “Bloqueio Automático” na página 173. Se você deseja utilizar uma senha para desbloquear o iPad, consulte “Bloqueio por Código” na página 173. Você pode usar o Smart Cover do iPad, disponível separadamente, para desbloquear automaticamente o iPad 2 quando abrir a capa e bloquear o iPad 2 quando fechá-la. Consulte “Bloqueio/Desbloqueio da capa do iPad” na página 174. Botões de Volume Use os botões de volume para ajustar o volume de áudio das músicas e de outras mí- dias, e dos avisos e efeitos sonoros. Botões de volume Interruptor Lateral Para aumentar o volume Pressione o botão Aumentar Volume. Para definir um limite de volume para música e outras mídias, escolha iPod > Limite de Volume. Para diminuir o volume Pressione o botão Diminuir Volume. Para silenciar o som Mantenha pressionado o botão Diminuir Volume para silenciar o áudio ou a reprodução de vídeo. Suprimir notificações e efeitos sonoros Deslize o interruptor lateral para baixo para silenciar as notificações e efeitos sonoros. Este interruptor não silencia o áudio ou a reprodução de vídeo. Consulte “Sons” na página 171. Você também pode usar o interruptor lateral para bloquear a rotação da tela. Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Usar Interruptor Lateral… e, em seguida, toque em Bloquear Rotação. Consulte “Interruptor Lateral” na página 176. ADVERTÊNCIA: Para obter informações importantes sobre como evitar a perda de audição, consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. Bandeja do cartão Micro-SIM O cartão micro-SIM em alguns modelos do iPad Wi-Fi + 3G é usado para dados de celular. Também é conhecido como um SIM 3FF (third form factor). Se o seu cartão micro-SIM não tiver sido pré-instalado ou se você mudar de provedor de dados de celular, talvez tenha que instalar ou substituir o cartão micro-SIM. Ferramenta de ejeção do SIM Cartão Micro-SIM Bandeja SIM Para abrir a bandeja do SIM: 1 Introduza a ponta da ferramenta de ejeção do SIM no orifício da bandeja do SIM. Pressione com firmeza, empurrando para dentro até que a bandeja salte para fora. Se você não tiver uma ferramenta de ejeção do SIM, use a ponta de um clipe de papel. 2 Puxe a bandeja do SIM para instalar ou substituir o cartão micro-SIM. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Como conectar-se a uma Rede de Dados de Celular ” na página 31. Tela de Início Pressione o botão Início a qualquer momento para ir para a tela Início, que contém os aplicativos do seu iPad. Toque em qualquer ícone para abrir o aplicativo. Ícones de Estado Os ícones da barra de estado situada na parte superior da tela fornecem informações sobre o iPad: 12 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 13 Ícone de estado O que significa Modo Avião Mostra que o modo avião está ativado—você não pode acessar a Internet, ou utilizar dispositivos Bluetooth®. Os recursos que não utilizam uma conexão sem fio estão disponíveis. Consulte “Modo Avião” na página 166. 3G Mostra que a rede 3G da sua operadora (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G) está disponível e que você pode conectar-se à Internet via 3G. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. EDGE Mostra que a rede EDGE da sua operadora (em alguns modelos do iPad Wi-Fi + 3G) está disponível e que você pode conectar-se à Internet via EDGE. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. GPRS Mostra que a rede GPRS da sua operadora (em alguns modelos do iPad Wi-Fi + 3G) está disponível e que você pode conectar-se à Internet via GPRS. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Wi-Fi Mostra que o iPad possui uma conexão à Internet Wi-Fi. Quanto mais barras, melhor a conexão. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Atividade Mostra a rede e outras atividades. Talvez alguns aplicativos de outros fabricantes também utilizem este ícone para indicar um processo ativo. VPN Mostra que você está conectado a uma rede usando VPN. Consulte “VPN” na página 167. Cadeado Mostra que o iPad está bloqueado. Consulte “Botão Repousar/Despertar” na página 10. Bloqueio de orientação da tela Mostra que a orientação da tela está bloqueada. Consulte “Visualização na Vertical ou Horizontal” na página 16. Reproduzir Mostra que uma música, audiolivro ou podcast está sendo reproduzido. Consulte “Reprodução de Músicas” na página 115. Bluetooth Ícone branco: o Bluetooth está ativado e há um dispositivo, como um headset ou um teclado, conectado. Ícone cinza: o Bluetooth está ativado, mas nenhum dispositivo está conectado. Sem ícone: o Bluetooth está desativado. Bateria Mostra o nível da bateria ou o estado da carga. Consulte “Como Carregar a Bateria” na página 35.Aplicativos do iPad Os seguintes aplicativos estão incluídos no iPad: Safari Navegue por sites na Internet. Gire o iPad de lado para visualizar em formato panorâ- mico. Toque duas vezes para ampliar ou reduzir—o Safari ajusta automaticamente a coluna da página web na tela. Abra várias páginas. Sincronize favoritos com o Safari ou com o Microsoft Internet Explorer em seu computador. Adicione web clipes do Safari à tela Início para acesso rápido aos sites favoritos. Salve imagens de sites na sua Fototeca. Imprima as páginas web usando o AirPrint. Consulte Capítulo 4,“Safari,” na página 50. Mail Envie e receba o correio usando vários dos serviços de e-mails mais populares, Microsoft Exchange ou serviços de correio POP3 e IMAP padrão da indústria. Envie e salve fotos. Visualize arquivos PDF e outros anexos, ou abra-os em outros aplicativos. Imprima mensagens e anexos usando o AirPrint. Consulte Capítulo 5,“Mail,” na página 56. Fotos Organize as suas fotos e vídeos favoritos em álbuns. Assista uma apresentação de slides. Amplie para obter uma visão mais de perto. Compartilhe fotos e vídeos usando o correio ou o MobileMe (vendido separadamente), ou imprima fotos usando o AirPrint. Consulte Capítulo 9,“Fotos,” na página 74. iPod Sincronize com a biblioteca do seu iTunes e ouça suas músicas, audiolivros e podcasts no iPad. Crie e gerencie listas ou use o Genius para criar listas para você. Escute Seleções do Genius a partir de músicas da sua biblioteca. Use o Compartilhamento Familiar para reproduzir música do seu computador. Transmita a sua música ou vídeos sem fio para um Apple TV ou sistema de áudio compatível usando o AirPlay. Consulte Capítulo 16,“iPod,” na página 114. Calendário Mantenha o seu calendário atual no iPad ou sincronize-o com o seu Mac OS X ou calendário do Windows. Inscreva-se em calendários de terceiros. Sincronize pela Internet com os servidores do Microsoft Exchange ou CalDAV. Consulte Capítulo 12,“Calendário,” na página 92. Contatos Organize a sua agenda e mantenha-a atualizada no iPad, ou sincronize-a com o seu Mac OS X ou agenda do Windows. Sincronize sem fio com o MobileMe (vendido separadamente), Contatos do Google, Yahoo! Agenda e Microsoft Exchange. Consulte Capítulo 13,“Contatos,” na página 98. Notas Faça notas breves—lembretes, lista de compras, ideias brilhantes. Envie-as por e-mail. Sincronize as notas com o Mail, com o Microsoft Outlook ou com o Outlook Express. Consulte Capítulo 14,“Notas,” na página 102. Mapas Consulte uma visualização clássica, de satélite, de terreno ou híbrida de locais ao redor do mundo. Amplie para dar uma olhada mais de perto ou verifique o Google Street View. Encontre a sua localização atual. Obtenha itinerários detalhados para dirigir, itinerários para ir a pé, informações sobre transporte público e veja as condições atuais de tráfego nas autoestradas. Para buscar empresas na área: Consulte Capítulo 15,“Mapas,” na página 104. 14 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 15 Vídeos Reproduza filmes, programas de TV, podcasts e vídeos da biblioteca do seu iTunes ou da sua coleção de filme. Compre ou alugue filmes no iPad usando a iTunes Store. Transfira podcasts de vídeo. Consulte Capítulo 10,“Vídeos,” na página 83. YouTube Reproduza vídeos da coleção on-line do YouTube. Procure qualquer vídeo ou navegue pelos vídeos mais visualizados, mais recentemente atualizados e melhor classificados. Configure e inicie a sessão na sua conta do YouTube e depois classifique vídeos, sincronize seus favoritos, mostre assinaturas e muito mais. Consulte Capítulo 11,“YouTube,” na página 88. iTunes Busque músicas, audiolivros, programas de TV, vídeos de música e filmes na iTunes Store. Explore, visualize, compre e transfira novos lançamentos, itens mais vendidos e muito mais. Compre ou alugue filmes e programas de TV para assistir no iPad. Transfira podcasts. Leia opiniões ou escreva suas próprias opiniões sobre seus itens favoritos da loja. Consulte Capítulo 17,“iTunes Store,” na página 123. App Store Busque na App Store aplicativos para comprar ou transferir. Leia ou escreva suas pró- prias opiniões sobre seus aplicativos favoritos. Transfira e instale o aplicativo na sua tela de Início. Consulte Capítulo 18,“App Store,” na página 130. Game Center Descubra novos jogos e compartilhe suas experiências com eles com seus amigos. Convide um amigo ou comece uma partida com outro oponente. Consulte os rankings do jogador nos quadros de classificação. Ganhe pontos extras para cada proeza do jogo. Consulte Capítulo 20,“Game Center,” na página 142. FaceTime Realize videoconferências para outros usuários do FaceTime através de Wi-Fi. Use a câmera frontal para conversar cara a cara ou a câmera posterior para compartilhar o que você está vendo. Consulte Capítulo 7,“FaceTime,” na página 68. Câmera Tire fotos e grave vídeos. Veja-os no iPad, envie-os por e-mail ou carregue-os no seu computador, ou Internet. Toque para definir a exposição. Recorte e salve videoclipes. Envie vídeos diretamente ao YouTube ou MobileMe. Consulte Capítulo 6,“Câmera,” na página 64. Photo Booth Use a câmera frontal ou posterior para tirar uma instantânea. Adicione um efeito especial, como um giro ou estiramento, antes de tirar uma instantânea. As instantâneas são salvas em um álbum no aplicativo de Fotos. Consulte Capítulo 8,“Photo Booth,” na página 71. Ajustes Personalize os ajustes do iPad em um lugar prático — rede, correio, web, música, vídeo, fotos e outros. Configure a moldura, contas de correio, contatos e calendários. Gerencie a sua conta de dados celular (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G). Defina um bloqueio automático e um código de segurança. Consulte Capítulo 22,“Ajustes,” na página 166. Adicionalmente, você pode obter os seguintes aplicativos da App Store no iPad:iBooks Transfira o aplicativo iBooks gratuito da App Store. Toque no botão da loja e navegue por milhares de livros ePub e PDF—muitos deles grátis. Imprima PDFs usando o AirPrint. Use favoritos e destaques para salvar o seu lugar e anotar suas passagens favoritas. Consulte Capítulo 19,“iBooks,” na página 135. Pages Use os gestos Multi-Touch para criar e compartilhar documentos no iPad. Crie cartas, folhetos, brochuras, relatórios e muito mais. Inicie um documento no iPad e termine-o no seu computador. Você pode comprar o aplicativo Pages na App Store. Numbers Crie planilhas com tabelas, gráficos, fotos e texto. Com poucos toques, você pode organizar dados, executar cálculos e gerenciar listas. O Numbers oferece modelos ou você pode escolher o modelo em branco para criar uma planilha única. Você pode comprar o aplicativo Numbers na App Store. Keynote Escolha os temas do Keynote para criar uma apresentação. Adicione fotos e vídeos do aplicativo Photos; organize dados com tabelas e gráficos; e quando a sua apresentação estiver pronta, use a visualização em tela cheia para reproduzi-la no iPad. Importe as apresentações do Keynote que você criar no seu computador. Você pode comprar o aplicativo Keynote na App Store. Nota: A funcionalidade e disponibilidade dos aplicativos pode variar dependendo de onde você comprou e vai utilizar o iPad. Visualização na Vertical ou Horizontal Você pode visualizar os aplicativos integrados ao iPad tanto na orientação vertical como na horizontal. Gire o iPad e a tela gira também, ajustando-se automaticamente para se encaixar na nova orientação. Talvez você prefira a orientação paisagem para visualizar as páginas da web no Safari, por exemplo, ou ao digitar texto. As páginas da web são automaticamente dimensionadas para a tela maior, deixando o texto e as imagens maiores. O teclado na tela também se torna maior, o que pode ajudar a aumentar sua velocidade e precisão de digitação. Bloqueie a orientação da tela se desejar impedir que ela gire. Para bloquear a tela do na orientação vertical ou horizontal: Clique duas vezes no botão Início para visualizar a barra de estado do multi-tarefas e, em seguida, passe o dedo da esquerda para a direita. Toque no para bloquear a orientação da tela. 16 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 17 Você também pode configurar o Interruptor Lateral para bloquear a orientação da tela em vez de silenciar os efeitos sonoros e notificações. Vá para Ajustes > Geral. Tela Multi-Touch Os controles da tela Multi-Touch mudam dinamicamente dependendo da tarefa que você está executando. Para controlar o iPad, use os seus dedos executar o toque, toque-duplo e deslizar. Como ajustar o brilho Para ajustar o brilho da tela, clique duas vezes no botão Início para visualizar a barra de estado de multi-tarefas. Passe o dedo da esquerda para a direita e, em seguida, arraste o controle de brilho. Brilho Você pode usar a opção Brilho Automático para ajustar automaticamente o brilho da tela. Nos Ajustes, escolha Brilho e Imagem de Fundo e, sem seguida, ative ou desative a opção Brilho Automático. Consulte “Brilho e Imagem de Fundo” na página 170. Como usar listas Algumas listas possuem um índice na parte lateral, o qual ajuda você a navegar rapidamente. ÍndicePara buscar itens em uma lista indexada: Toque em uma letra para ir para os itens que começam por essa letra. Arraste o seu dedo ao longo do índice para rolar rapidamente pela lista. Para escolher um item: Toque em um item da lista. Dependendo da lista, ao tocar em um item você pode realizar coisas diferentes—por exemplo, pode abrir uma nova lista, reproduzir uma música, abrir uma mensagem de e-mail ou mostrar a informação de contato de alguém para que você possa ligar para aquela pessoa. Para retornar para uma lista anterior: Toque no botão Voltar no canto superior esquerdo. Como Ampliar ou Reduzir Ao visualizar fotos, páginas web, e-mail ou mapas, você pode usar o zoom para ampliar ou reduzir. Toque a tela com dois dedos e separe-os ou aproxime-os. Para fotos e páginas web, você pode realizar um toque duplo (tocar duas vezes rapidamente) para ampliar e depois dar novamente um toque duplo para reduzir. Para mapas, realize um toque duplo para ampliar e toque uma vez com dois dedos para reduzir. O zoom também é um recurso de acessibilidade que permite ampliar a tela de qualquer aplicativo que você estiver utilizando e o ajuda a ver o que há nessa tela. Consulte “Zoom” na página 162. Teclado da Tela O teclado na tela aparece automaticamente sempre que você precise digitar. Use o teclado para digitar textos, como informações de contato, e-mail e endereços da web. O teclado corrige erros de digitação, antecipa o que você está digitando e aprende a medida em que você o usa. 18 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 19 Você também pode usar um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard para digitar. Quando você utiliza um teclado externo, o teclado na tela não aparece. Consulte “Como Utilizar um Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard” na página 20. Como Digitar Dependendo do app que você estiver usando, o teclado inteligente pode sugerir automaticamente correções enquanto você digita para ajudá-lo a evitar palavras com erro de digitação. Para digitar texto: 1 Toque em um campo de texto, como em uma nota ou um novo contato, para mostrar o teclado. 2 Toque nas teclas do teclado. Se tocar na tecla errada, você pode deslizar seu dedo para a tecla certa. A letra não é digitada até que você retire o dedo da tecla. Para usar a tecla Retroceder para apagar o caractere anterior Toque na . Digitar rapidamente um ponto final e espaço Toque duas vezes na barra de espaço. Você pode ativar ou desativar esse recurso em Configurações > Geral > Teclado. Digitar em letras maiúsculas Toque na tecla Maiúsculas antes de tocar uma letra. Ou toque e mantenha a tecla Maiúsculas pressionada e deslize para uma letra.Ativar o comando fixar maiúsculas Toque duas vezes na tecla Maiúsculas . A tecla Maiúsculas fica azul e todas as letras que digitar ficarão em letras maiúsculas. Toque a tecla Maiúsculas para desativar o comando fixar maiúsculas. Você pode ativar ou desativar esse recurso em Configurações > Geral > Teclado. Mostrar números, sinais de pontuação ou símbolos Toque na tecla de Números . Toque na tecla Symbol para visualizar pontuação e símbolos adicionais. Para usar um teclado internacional Mantenha o toque sobre a tecla Próximo Teclado para exibir um menu de idiomas e depois toque no idioma. Consulte Apêndice B,“Teclados Internacionais,” na página 191. Você pode adicionar ou remover teclados internacionais em Ajustes > Geral > Teclado. Digite letras ou símbolos que não estão no teclado Toque e mantenha pressionada a letra ou símbolo relacionado, depois deslize para escolher uma variação. Para ocultar o teclado na tela Toque na tecla Teclado para ocultar o teclado na tela. Como Utilizar um Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard Para facilitar a digitação, você pode utilizar o Apple Wireless Keyboard com o iPad. O teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard conecta-se através do Bluetooth e, para isso, você deverá emparelhar o teclado com o iPad. Consulte “Como Emparelhar Dispositivos Bluetooth” na página 46. Uma vez que o teclado esteja emparelhado com o iPad, ele se conecta sempre que o teclado estiver no raio de alcance (até 10 metros). Você poderá saber que o teclado está conectado se o teclado da tela não aparecer quando você tocar em um campo de texto. Para alternar o idioma ao utilizar um teclado de hardware:Mantenha pressionada a tecla Comando e, em seguida, toque na barra de espaços para exibir uma lista de idiomas disponíveis. Toque na barra de espaço novamente para selecionar um idioma diferente. Para desconectar um teclado sem fio do iPad: Mantenha pressionado o botão de for- ça do teclado até que a luz verde se apague. O iPad desconecta o teclado quando ele estiver fora de alcance. Para desemparelhar um teclado sem fio do iPad: Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Bluetooth, toque ao lado do nome do dispositivo e, em seguida, toque em "Esquecer este Dispositivo". 20 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 21 É possível aplicar leiautes diferentes a um teclado sem fio. Consulte Apêndice B,“Teclados Internacionais,” na página 191 e “Leiautes de Teclado” na página 23. Dicionário Para vários idiomas, o iPad possui dicionários que podem ajudá-lo a digitar. O dicionário adequado é ativado automaticamente quando você seleciona um teclado compatível. Para ver uma lista de idiomas compatíveis, nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Internacional > Teclados. O iPad usa o dicionário ativo para sugerir correções ou para completar a palavra que você está digitando. Você não precisa interromper a digitação para aceitar a palavra sugerida. Para aceitar ou rejeitar as sugestões do dicionário: m Para rejeitar a palavra sugerida, termine a digitação da palavra como desejar e depois toque na sugestão para descartá-la antes de digitar qualquer outra coisa. Cada vez que você rejeitar uma sugestão para a mesma palavra, o iPad fica mais propenso a aceitar a sua palavra. m Para usar a palavra sugerida, digite um espaço, um sinal de pontuação ou a tecla retorno. Para redefinir sugestões do dicionário: Nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Dicionário do Teclado. Isso redefine todas as sugestões que você tenha feito ao dicionário. Para ativar ou desativar a Correção Automática: Nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Teclado e depois ative ou desative a opção Correção Automática. Normalmente, a Correção Automática está ativada.Para ativar ou desativar o recurso “Falar texto automático”: Nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade e depois ative ou desative a opção Falar Texto Automático. A opção Falar Texto Automático fala as sugestões de texto. Nota: Se você estiver digitando caracteres em Chinês ou Japonês, toque em uma das alternativas que o dicionário sugere. Como Editar—Cortar, Copiar e Colar A tela Multi-Touch facilita a alteração do texto digitado. Uma lente de aumento na tela ajuda a posicionar o ponto de inserção exatamente onde você necessita. Os pontos de captura do texto selecionado permitem selecionar rapidamente mais ou menos textos. Também é possível cortar, copiar e colar textos e fotos com aplicativos, ou em múltiplos aplicativos. Para posicionar o ponto de inserção: Toque e mantenha o dedo na tela para fazer a lente de aumento aparecer e então arraste para posicionar o ponto de inserção. Para selecionar texto: Toque no ponto de inserção para exibir os botões de seleção. Toque em Selecionar para selecionar a palavra adjacente ou toque em Selecionar Tudo para selecionar o texto inteiro. Você também pode tocar duas vezes em uma palavra para selecioná-la. Em documentos somente para leitura tais como páginas web, mantenha o toque sobre a palavra para selecioná-la. Arraste os pontos de seleção para selecionar mais ou menos texto. Para cortar ou copiar texto: Selecione o texto e toque em Cortar ou Copiar. Para colar texto: Toque no ponto de inserção depois toque em Colar para inserir o último texto que você cortou ou copiou. Ou, selecione o texto, depois toque em Colar para substituir o texto. Para desfazer a última edição: Agite o iPad ou toque em Desfazer no teclado. 22 Capítulo 1 Visão GeralCapítulo 1 Visão Geral 23 Leiautes de Teclado Você pode utilizar os Ajustes para definir os leiautes do teclado de software da tela e para quaisquer teclados de hardware. Os leiautes disponíveis dependem do idioma do teclado. Para selecionar um leiaute de teclado: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Teclado > Teclados Internacionais e, em seguida, selecione um teclado. Para cada idioma é possível fazer seleções separadas tanto para os teclados de software na tela quanto para os teclados de hardware externos. O leiaute do teclado do software determina o leiaute do teclado da tela do iPad . O leiaute do teclado do hardware determina o leiaute de um Teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard conectado ao iPad.24 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador e use o iTunes para configurar, registrar e sincronizar conteúdo. Requisitos · ADVERTÊNCIA: Para evitar danos, leia todas as instruções de funcionamento deste manual e as informações de segurança do iPad Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad antes de usar o iPad. Para usar o iPad, você precisa de:  Um Mac ou PC com uma porta USB 2.0 e um dos seguintes sistemas operacionais:  Mac OS X versão 10.5.8 ou posterior  Windows 7, Windows Vista, ou Windows XP Home ou Profissional com Service Pack 3 ou posterior  iTunes 10.2 ou posterior, disponível no site www.itunes.com/br/download/  Um ID Apple  Acesso de Internet de banda larga Como Configurar o iPad Antes de poder usar o iPad, você deve usar o iTunes para configurá-lo. Você também pode registrar o iPad e criar um ID Apple (não disponível em alguns países) se ainda não tiver um. Para configurar o iPad: 1 Transfira e instale a última versão do iTunes do site www.itunes.com/br/download/. 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 25 2 Conecte o iPad à uma porta USB 2.0 do seu Mac ou PC usando o cabo que acompanha o iPad. 3 Siga as instruções do iTunes na tela para registrar o iPad e sincronizar o iPad com mú- sica, vídeo e outros conteúdos da biblioteca do seu iTunes, e com os contatos, calendá- rios e favoritos no seu computador. Na tela Como Configurar Seu iPad, selecione “Sincronizar automaticamente contatos, calendários e favoritos” para sincronizar estes itens automaticamente quando conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Como Sincronizar com o iTunes Use o iTunes para sincronizar sua música, vídeos, aplicativos transferidos e outros conteúdos da sua biblioteca do iTunes do seu computador. Você também pode sincronizar os seus contatos, calendários e favoritos do navegador. O iTunes permite que você escolha as informações e conteúdo que você deseja sincronizar com o iPad. Por padrão, o iTunes sincroniza-se automaticamente sempre que você conecta o iPad ao seu computador. Quando você sincroniza, você também pode transferir informações criadas ou compradas no seu iPad para o seu computador. Como configurar a sincronização Você pode configurar o iTunes para sincronizar o seguinte:  Música  Filmes  Programas de TV  Jogos e aplicativos transferidos da App Store  Vídeos musicais  Podcasts  Livros e audiolivros  Coleções do iTunes U  Fotos e vídeos (na pasta ou app de fotos do seu computador)  Contatos—nomes, números de telefone, endereços, endereços de e-mail e mais Calendários—compromissos e eventos  Notas  Ajustes da conta de e-mail  Favoritos de página web Você pode configurar os ajustes de sincronização sempre que conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Sincronize suas músicas, audiolivros, podcasts, coleções do iTunes U, vídeos, livros e aplicativos da sua biblioteca do iTunes. Se você ainda não tem conteúdo no iTunes, vá para a iTunes Store (disponível em alguns países) para pré-visualizar e transferir conte- údo para o iTunes. Você também pode adicionar as músicas dos seus CDs à sua biblioteca do iTunes. Para saber mais sobre o iTunes e a iTunes Store, abra o iTunes e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iTunes. Os contatos, calendários, notas e páginas web favoritas são sincronizados com aplicativos no seu computador. Novas entradas ou modificações que você fizer no iPad serão sincronizadas em seu computador e vice-versa. O iTunes também permite que você sincronize fotos e vídeos de um aplicativo ou de uma pasta. Os ajustes das contas de e-mail são sincronizados apenas em uma direção, do app de e-mail do seu computador para o iPad. Isso permite personalizar suas contas de e-mail no iPad sem afetar os ajustes de contas de e-mail do seu computador. Nota: Você pode também configurar contas de e-mail diretamente no iPad. Consulte “Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário” na página 32. As compras da iTunes Store e da App Store que você faz com o iPad são sincronizadas com a biblioteca do iTunes no seu computador quando você conecta. Você também pode comprar ou transferir conteúdo e aplicativos da iTunes Store para o seu computador e depois sincronizá-los no iPad. 26 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 27 Também é possível ajustar o iPad para sincronizar uma parte do que está em seu computador. Por exemplo, talvez você queira sincronizar somente algumas listas musicais ou somente podcasts de vídeo que não foram vistos ainda. Importante: Você deve iniciar a sessão com sua própria conta de usuário em seu computador antes de conectar o iPad. Para configurar a sincronização do iTunes: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador e abra o iTunes (se ele não abrir automaticamente). 2 No iTunes, selecione iPad na barra lateral. 3 Configure os ajustes de sincronização em cada um dos painéis de ajuste. Consulte a seguinte seção para obter uma descrição de cada painel. 4 Clique em Aplicar no canto inferior direito da tela. Por padrão, a opção “Abrir o iTunes quando este iPad estiver conectado" está selecionada. Painéis de ajuste do iPad no iTunes As seguintes seções fornecem uma visão geral de cada um dos painéis de ajuste do iPad. Para obter mais informações, abra o iTunes e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iTunes. Painel Resumo Selecione “Abrir iTunes quando este iPad é conectado” para que o iTunes seja aberto e sincronize o iPad automaticamente sempre que for conectado ao seu computador. Desmarque esta opção se deseja sincronizar somente ao clicar no botão Sincronizar do iTunes. Para obter mais informações sobre como evitar a sincronização automática, consulte “Como Impedir a Sincronização Automática” na página 30.Selecione “Sincronizar somente músicas e vídeos selecionados” se deseja que o iTunes ignore os itens desmarcados da sua biblioteca do iTunes ao sincronizar. Selecione “Gerenciar músicas e vídeos manualmente” para desativar a sincronização automática dos painéis de ajustes Música e Vídeo. Selecione “Criptografar backup do iPad>" se quiser criptografar as informações armazenadas em seu computador quando o iTunes fizer um backup. Backups criptografados são mostrados com um ícone de cadeado , e requerem uma senha para restaurar as informações do iPad. Consulte “Como atualizar e restaurar o software do iPad” na página 199. Para ativar os recursos de acessibilidade, clique em Configurar Acesso Universal Para obter mais informações, consulte “Recursos de Acesso Universal” na página 150. Painel Informações O painel Informações permite configurar os ajustes de sincronização para seus contatos, calendários, contas de e-mail e navegador.  Contatos Você pode sincronizar contatos com aplicativos como a Agenda do Mac OS X, o "Yahoo! Listas de Endereços" e Contatos do Google em um Mac, ou com a Agenda do Yahoo! Agenda, os Contatos do Google, o Catálogo de Endereços do Windows (Microsoft Outlook Express), o Catálogo de Endereços do Windows Vista ou do Microsoft Outlook 2003, 2007 ou 2010 em um PC. (No Mac, você pode sincronizar contatos com vários aplicativos. Em um PC, você pode sincronizar contatos somente com um aplicativo de cada vez.) Se você sincronizar com Agenda do Yahoo! você só precisa clicar em Configurar para digitar a sua nova informação de início de sessão quando alterar o seu Identificador ou senha do Yahoo! após configurar a sincronização.  Calendários Você pode sincronizar os calendários de aplicativos como o iCal no Mac ou do Microsoft Outlook 2003, 2007 ou 2010 no PC. (No Mac, você pode sincronizar calendários com vários aplicativos. No PC, você pode sincronizar os calendários com apenas um aplicativo de cada vez.)  Contas do Mail Você pode sincronizar os ajustes das contas de e-mail do Mail em um Mac e do Microsoft Outlook 2003, 2007, 2010 ou do Microsoft Outlook Express em um PC. Os ajustes das contas são transferidos somente do seu computador para o iPad. As alterações realizadas em uma conta de e-mail no iPad não afetam a conta no seu computador. Nota: A senha da sua conta de e-mail do Yahoo! não é salva no seu computador, por isso não pode ser sincronizada e deve ser digitada no iPad. Em Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, toque em sua conta Yahoo! e digite a senha. 28 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 29  Outra Sincronize favoritos do Safari em um Mac, ou do Safari ou Microsoft Internet Explorer em um PC. Sincronize notas do aplicativo Notas do iPad com notas do Mail em um Mac ou com o Microsoft Outlook 2003 ou 2007 em um PC.  Avançado Selecione uma ou mais destas opções se deseja substituir as informações do iPad pelas informações do seu computador durante a próxima sincronização. Painel Apps Utilize o Painel Apps para sincronizar aplicativos da App Store, organizar aplicativos na tela Início do iPad ou copiar documentos entre o iPad e seu computador. Selecione "Sincronizar automaticamente novos aplicativos" para sincronizar novos aplicativos para o iPad que foram transferidos ou sincronizados de outro dispositivo. Se você apagar um app do iPad, poderá reinstalá-lo a partir do painel Apps, se ele tiver sido previamente sincronizado. Você pode criar documentos no iPad e, em seguida, copiá-los no seu computador. Você também pode copiar documentos do seu computador para o iPad e utilizá-los com aplicativos compatíveis com o compartilhamento de arquivos. Os aplicativos compatíveis com o compartilhamento de arquivo são mostrados na lista Aplicativos de Compartilhamento de Arquivos Para obter mais informações sobre o compartilhamento de arquivos, consulte “Compartilhamento de Arquivos” na página 47. Painéis Música, Filmes, Programas de TV, Podcasts e iTunes U Utilize estes painéis para especificar a mídia que deseja sincronizar. Você pode sincronizar todas as coleções de músicas, filmes, programas de TV, podcasts, iTunes U ou então selecionar o conteúdo que deseja no iPad. Para assistir a filmes alugados na sua biblioteca do iTunes no iPad, transfira-os para o iPad usando o painel Filmes do iTunes. Painel Livros Você pode sincronizar livros transferidos da iBookstore, e muitos livros ePub grátis de outras fontes. Você também pode sincronizar audiolivros e se o livro tiver mais de uma parte, sincronizar somente a parte que desejar. Painel Fotos Você pode sincronizar fotos e vídeos com o iPhoto 6.0.6 ou superior, ou com o Aperture 3.0.2 ou superior no Mac; ou com o Adobe Photoshop Elements 8.0 ou posterior em um PC. Você também pode sincronizar fotos e vídeos em qualquer pasta do seu computador que contenha imagens ou vídeos.Como Impedir a Sincronização Automática Você pode impedir que o iPad sincronize automaticamente quando conectar o iPad a um computador diferente. Para evitar a sincronização automática para todos os iPad s: No iTunes escolha iTunes > Preferências (em um Mac) ou Editar > Preferências (em um PC), clique em Dispositivos e selecione “Impedir que iPods, iPhones e iPad sincronizem automaticamente”. Se esta opção estiver selecionada, o iPad não sincroniza automaticamente, mesmo se a opção “Abrir o iTunes quando este iPad é conectado” estiver selecionada no painel Resumo. Para evitar a sincronização automática uma vez, sem alterar os ajustes: Abra o iTunes, conecte o iPad ao seu computador, mantenha pressionadas as teclas ComandoOpção (em um Mac) ou Maiúsculas-Controle (em um PC) até que iPad apareça na barra lateral. Para sincronizar manualmente: No iTunes, selecione iPad na barra lateral e clique em Sincronizar no canto inferior direito da janela. Ou, se você alterou algum ajuste de sincronização, clique em Aplicar. Como Conectar-se à Internet O iPad pode unir-se à AirPort e outras redes Wi-Fi em casa, no trabalho ou em pontos de acesso Wi-Fi pelo mundo. Ao unir-se a uma rede Wi-Fi que está conectada à Internet, o iPad se conecta à Internet automaticamente sempre que você usar o Mail, Safari, YouTube, a App Store ou a iTunes Store. o iPad se conecta à Internet usando uma rede Wi-Fi. O iPad Wi-Fi + 3G também pode se conectar à Internet usando uma rede de dados celular. O serviço de dados é vendido separadamente. Como conectar-se a uma Rede Wi-Fi Use os ajustes Wi-Fi para ativar a Wi-Fi e conectar a redes Wi-Fi. Para ativar a Wi-Fi: Escolha Ajustes > Wi-Fi e ative a opção Wi-Fi. Para conectar-se a uma rede Wi-Fi: Escolha Ajustes > Wi-Fi, espere um momento enquanto o iPad detecta as redes que estão no raio de alcance e depois selecione uma rede (talvez o acesso a algumas redes Wi-Fi não seja gratuito). Se necessário, digite uma senha e toque em Conectar (as redes que requerem uma senha aparecem com um ícone de cadeado). Uma vez que você tenha se conectado a uma rede Wi-Fi, o iPad se conecta a ela automaticamente sempre que a rede estiver no raio de alcance. Se houver mais de uma rede usada anteriormente dentro do raio de alcance, o iPad se conecta à última utilizada. 30 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 31 Quando o iPad se conecta a uma rede Wi-Fi, o ícone Wi-Fi situado na barra de estado mostra a intensidade do sinal. Quanto mais barras você vir, melhor a conexão. Para obter mais informações sobre como ajustar as configurações Wi-Fi, consulte “WiFi” na página 167. Como conectar-se a uma Rede de Dados de Celular Antes de que você possa unir-se a uma rede de dados celular no iPad Wi-Fi + 3G, você deve inscrever-se em um plano de dados celular com um provedor de serviços do iPad na sua área. Com alguns provedores, você pode escolher um plano de dados, controlar o uso de seus dados e alterar ou cancelar o seu plano no iPad. Em alguns modelos, 3G, EDGE e GPRS permitem conectividade à Internet através da rede celular disponível mediante o serviço sem fio da sua operadora. Verifique a cobertura da rede da operadora na sua área para ver a disponibilidade. Se o iPad estiver conectado à Internet usando uma rede de dados celular, você vê o ícone de estado do 3G ( ), EDGE ( ) ou GPRS ( ) na barra de estado. Para ativar o Roaming de Dados: Se você estiver fora da rede da sua operadora, talvez você possa usar uma rede de dados de celular de outra operadora. Em Ajustes, escolha Dados de Celular e ative o Roaming de Dados. Importante: Podem ser aplicadas taxas sobre o Roaming. Para evitar taxas de roaming de dados, certifique-se de que o Roaming de Dados esteja desativado. Para monitorar o uso da sua rede de dados celular: Em Ajustes, escolha Dados de Celular > Ver Conta. Para configurar um plano de dados de celular no iPad: Na tela de Início do iPad, toque em Ajustes e escolha Dados de Celular. Toque em Visualizar Conta e depois siga as instruções na tela. Os ajustes de dados de celular podem variar dependendo da operadora. O iPad está desbloqueado, então você pode escolher sua operadora preferida. Os ajustes de dados de celular variam dependendo da operadora. Se o seu iPad Wi-Fi + 3G não veio fornecido com um cartão micro-SIM, entre em contato com o seu provedor para configurar uma conta e obter um cartão micro-SIM compatível. Nem todos os provedores fornecem planos de dados 3G. Acesso à Internet em um Avião O modo avião no iPad Wi-Fi + 3G desativa os transmissores de rádio do iPad para cumprir com as normas das empresas aéreas. Em algumas regiões - quando permitido pelo piloto da aeronave e pelas leis e normas aplicáveis - você pode ativar a Wi-Fi enquanto o modo avião está ativado, para:  Enviar e receber e-mail  Navegar na Internet Sincronizar seus contatos e calendários com a tecnologia over the air  Transmitir vídeos do YouTube em tempo real  Comprar músicas e aplicativos Para obter mais informações, consulte “Modo Avião” na página 166. Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário O iPad funciona com MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange e com muitos dos e-mails, contatos e servidores de serviço calendários mais conhecidos baseados em Internet. Se você ainda não tem uma conta de e-mail, pode obter uma conta gratuita on-line no site br.yahoo.com/, www.google.com.br/ ou www.aol.com. Para experimentar um período de teste grátis do MobileMe, vá para www.apple.com/br/mobileme. Para obter mais informações sobre como configurar uma conta Microsoft Exchange em um ambiente empresarial, consulte “Como Configurar Contas do Microsoft Exchange” na página 189. Como Configurar Contas MobileMe Para usar o MobileMe no iPad, você pode configurar uma conta gratuita do MobileMe ou uma assinatura paga do MobileMe. Uma conta gratuita do MobileMe permite que você use o Buscar Meu iPad; um recurso que o ajuda a localizar o iPad caso for perdido ou roubado, e proteger as informações nele contidas (não disponível em todos os países ou regiões). Consulte “Recursos de segurança” na página 48. Uma conta gratuita do MobileMe está disponível para qualquer cliente que possua um iPad com o iOS 4.2 ou posterior. Se você já criou um ID da Apple para a App Store ou para o Game Center, pode usar o mesmo ID da Apple para configurar a sua conta do MobileMe. Crie uma nova conta se você ainda não tiver uma. Para configurar uma conta gratuita do MobileMe: 1 Em Ajustes, toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”. 2 Toque em Adicionar Conta e, em seguida, toque MobileMe. 3 Insira o seu ID e senha da Apple ou toque em Criar ID Apple Gratuito. 4 Siga as instruções da tela. Verifique o seu endereço de e-mail, se necessário. 5 Certifique-se de que Buscar Meu iPad está ativado. Para configurar uma Assinatura paga do MobileMe: 1 Em Ajustes, toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”. 2 Toque em Adicionar Conta e, em seguida, toque MobileMe. 32 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 33 3 Insira o seu ID Apple e senha, ou escolha criar uma nova conta. 4 Ative os serviços que deseja usar no iPad. Uma assinatura paga do MobileMe permite que você use Buscar Meu iPad, mais os seguintes recursos:  Conta do Mail em me.com  Sincronização over-the-air para os contatos, calendários, favoritos e notas  Galeria do MobileMe para o compartilhamento de fotos e vídeos  O MobileMe iDisk para armazenamento e compartilhamento de arquivos Você pode experimentar esses recursos com uma avaliação grátis de 60 dias em www. apple.com/br/mobileme. Os serviços que ativar são sincronizados automaticamente através da tecnologia over the air, sem ter que conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. Você pode definir múltiplas contas MobileMe; no entanto, apenas uma conta MobileMe poderá ser utilizada de cada vez para o Buscar Meu iPad e para contatos de sincronização, calendários, favoritos e notas. Para usar Galeria, iDisk e Buscar Meu iPad em iPad, transfira os aplicativos gratuitos Galeria do MobileMe, MobileMe iDisk e Buscar Meu iPhone a partir da App Store. Como Configurar Contas do Google, Yahoo! e AOL Para diversas contas conhecidas (Google, Yahoo!, AOL), o iPad digita a maioria dos ajustes para você. Ao configurar a conta, você pode escolher quais serviços de conta deseja utilizar com o iPad. Os serviços ativados são sincronizados automaticamente com o sistema over the air. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. Para configurar uma conta: 1 Em Ajustes, toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”. 2 Toque em Adicionar Conta e, em seguida, toque Google, Yahoo! ou AOL 3 Digite seu nome, endereço de e-mail, senha e uma descrição. 4 Toque nos itens que deseja utilizar no iPad. Os itens disponíveis dependem do servidor. Como Configurar Outras Contas Selecione Outras Contas para configurar outras contas para e-mail (como POP), contatos (como LDAP ou CardDAV), ou calendários (como CalDAV). Contate seu servidor ou administrador de sistema para obter os ajustes de conta que necessita. Para configurar uma conta: 1 Em Ajustes, toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”.2 Toque em Adicionar Conta e, em seguida, toque em Outras. 3 Selecione o tipo de conta que deseja adicionar (Mail, Contatos ou Calendários). 4 Digite as informações da sua conta e toque em Salvar. Como desconectar o iPad de seu computador A menos que o iPad esteja sincronizando com o computador, você pode desconectá- lo a qualquer momento. Quando o iPad está sincronizando com seu computador, a tela de Início do iPad mostra a mensagem “Sincronização em andamento.” Se você desconectar o iPad antes de finalizar a sincronização, alguns dados podem não ser transferidos. Quando o iPad terminar a sincronização, o iTunes mostra “A sincronização do iPad está concluída”. Para cancelar uma sincronização: Arraste o controle deslizante do iPad. Como visualizar o Manual do Usuário do iPad O Manual do Usuário do iPad pode ser visto iPad no Safari, ou através da instalação do aplicativo gratuito iBooks e de sua transferência a partir da iBookstore. Para visualizar o Manual do Usuário no Safari: No Safari, toque no , em seguida toque no favorito Manual do Usuário do iPad. Ou vá para http://help.apple.com/br/ipad. Para adicionar um ícone para o manual do usuário na tela Início: Toque no e toque em “Adicionar à Tela Início.” Visualize o Manual do Usuário no iBooks 1 Se você não tiver instalado o iBooks, abra a App Store, procure por “iBooks” e, em seguida, toque nele na lista de resultados. Toque em Grátis e, em seguida, toque em Instalar. 2 Abra o iBooks e toque em Loja. 3 Procure pelo “iPad Manual do Usuário” e toque no manual do usuário na lista de resultados. 4 Toque em Grátis e, em seguida, toque em Obter Livro. Para obter mais informações sobre o iBooks, consulte Capítulo 19,“iBooks,” na página 135. Bateria O iPad possui uma bateria interna recarregável. A bateria do não pode ser acessada pelo usuário e deve ser substituída por um Fornecedor de Serviço Autorizado Apple. Para obter mais informações sobre as baterias do iPad, visite o site www.apple.com/br/ batteries/ipad.html. 34 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 35 Como Carregar a Bateria ADVERTÊNCIA: Para obter informações de segurança importantes sobre o carregamento do iPad, consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. O ícone da bateria no canto superior direito da barra de estado mostra o nível de bateria ou o estado do carregamento. Carregando Carregado Para carregar a bateria: A melhor maneira de carregar a bateria do iPad é conectar o iPad a uma tomada elétrica usando o Cabo Conector Dock para USB e o adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W. Quando você conecta o iPad a uma porta USB 2.0 em um Mac com o Cabo Conector Dock para USB, o iPad pode carregar lentamente enquanto sincroniza. Importante: A bateria do iPad pode gastar em lugar de carregar se o iPad for conectado a um PC, a um computador desligado ou em modo Repouso ou Espera, a um hub USB, ou à porta USB em um teclado. Se o seu Mac ou PC não fornecerem energia suficiente para carregar o seu iPad, uma mensagem Não está carregando aparecerá na barra de estado. Para carregar o iPad, desconecte-o do seu computador e conecte-o em uma tomada usando o Cabo Conector Dock para USB e o Adaptador de Alimentação USB de 10W.Importante: Se a carga da bateria do iPad estiver muito baixa, ele pode exibir uma das seguintes imagens, indicando que o iPad precisa ser carregado por pelo menos dez minutos antes de você poder usá-lo. Se a carga da bateria do iPad estiver extremamente baixa, a tela poderá ficar em branco por até dois minutos antes que uma das imagens indicando pouca bateria apareça. ou Como Maximizar a Autonomia da Bateria O iPad usa uma bateria de lítio-íon. Para obter informações sobre como maximizar a vida útil da bateria do seu iPad, visite o site www.apple.com/br/batteries/ipad.html. Como Trocar a Bateria As baterias recarregáveis possuem um número limitado de ciclos de carregamento e talvez necessitem ser trocadas com o passar do tempo. A bateria do iPad não pode ser substituída pelo usuário; ela só pode ser substituída por um Fornecedor de Serviço Autorizado Apple (AASP). Os AASPs também reciclam as baterias do iPad de acordo com leis e normas locais. Para obter mais informações, visite www.apple.com/br/ batteries/replacements.html. Utilização e Limpeza do iPad Manipule o seu iPad com cuidado para conservar seu aspecto. Se estiver preocupado com arranhões ou desgaste da tela, você pode usar um estojo ou uma capa, vendidos separadamente. Como usar o iPad confortavelmente É importante encontrar uma postura confortável para usar o iPad e fazer intervalos frequentes. Use o seu colo, uma mesa, um estojo ou o acessório dock para sustentar o iPad durante o uso. 36 Capítulo 2 IntroduçãoCapítulo 2 Introdução 37 Como limpar o iPad Para limpar o iPad, desconecte todos os cabos e desligue o iPad (mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/Despertar e depois deslize o controle da tela). Use um pano macio, levemente umedecido e sem fiapos. Evite que entre umidade nas aberturas. Não utilize limpadores de vidro, produtos de limpeza caseiros, aerossóis, solventes, álcool, amônia ou abrasivos para limpar o iPad. A tela do iPad possui um revestimento oleofó- bico; limpe a tela simplesmente com um pano macio que não solte fiapos para remover o óleo deixado pelas suas mãos. A capacidade deste revestimento de repelir óleo diminui com o uso ao longo do tempo; esfregar a tela com material abrasivo diminuirá ainda mais o seu efeito e poderá arranhar sua tela. Para obter mais informações sobre como utilizar o iPad, consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto do iPad em support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ ipad.38 Leia este capítulo para informar-se como usar os aplicativos no iPad, e para buscar, imprimir, compartilhar arquivos e mais. Como Utilizar os Apps A tela de alta resolução Multi-Touch e os simples gestos dos seus dedos facilitam a utilização dos aplicativos do iPad. Abra um aplicativo tocando no seu ícone. Você pode alternar entre aplicativos, reorganizar aplicativos e organizá-los em pastas. Como Abrir e Alternar Apps Para abrir um app: Toque no seu ícone na tela de Início. Para voltar à tela Início:Pressione o botão Início . O multi-tarefas permite que certos aplicativos sejam executados no fundo, para que você possa alternar rapidamente entre os aplicativos que estiver usando. Para visualizar os aplicativos utilizados mais recentemente:Clique duas vezes no botão Início. Os aplicativos usados mais recentemente aparecem na lista de "recentes" na parte inferior da tela. Passe o dedo para a esquerda para ver mais aplicativos. 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 39 Para remover um aplicativo da lista de aplicativos recentes:Toque e mantenha pressionado o ícone do aplicativo até que ele comece a tremular; em seguida, toque em . O aplicativo será adicionado à lista de recentes novamente da próxima vez que for aberto. Para bloquear a orientação da tela ou usar os controles do iPod: Clique duas vezes do botão Início e, em seguida, passe o dedo na parte inferior da tela da esquerda para a direita. O bloqueio de orientação da tela, o controle de brilho e os controles do iPod aparecem. Bloqueio de orientação de tela Controles iPod Brilho Para apagar um aplicativo da tela de Início: Toque e mantenha o ícone até que ele fique trêmulo e um apareça. Toque em para apagar o aplicativo. Importante: Apagar um aplicativo do iPad também apaga os documentos e os dados criados pelo aplicativo. Rolagem Arraste para cima ou para baixo para rolar. Você também pode rolar para as laterais nos aplicativos como o Safari, Fotos e Mapas. Arrastando o seu dedo para rolar não irá selecionar ou ativar nada na tela.Passe o dedo para rolar rapidamente. Você pode esperar até que a rolagem pare ou tocar em qualquer lugar da tela para para-la imediatamente. Tocar a tela para parar a rolagem não irá selecionar ou ativar nada na tela. Para rapidamente rolar para o início de uma lista, página web ou mensagem de e-mail, toque na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. Como reorganizar os ícones dos aplicativos Você pode personalizar o leiaute dos ícones dos aplicativos na tela de Início— incluindo os ícones no Dock junto aos botões da tela. Se desejar, organize-os em várias telas de Início. Para reorganizar os ícones: 1 Mantenha o toque qualquer ícone até que ele comece a tremular. 2 Organize os ícones, arrastando-os. 3 Pressione o botão Início para salvar sua ordenação. Você também pode organizar os ícones dos aplicativos na tela Início, assim como a ordem das telas, quando conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Selecione iPad na barra lateral do iTunes e depois clique na aba Apps. 40 Capítulo 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 41 Para criar telas de Início adicionais: Enquanto você organiza os ícones, arraste um ícone para o canto direito da tela até que apareça uma nova tela. Você pode retornar à tela anterior e arrastar mais ícones para a nova tela. Você pode ter até onze telas. O pontos acima do Dock mostram o número de telas que você possui e indica qual tela você está visualizando. Para ir para uma tela de Início diferente: Passe o dedo para a direita ou esquerda, ou toque à esquerda ou à direita da linha de pontos. Para ir para a primeira tela de Início: Pressione o botão Início . Redefina a sua tela de Início para o leiaute original: Escolha Ajustes > Geral > Redefinir e depois toque em Redefinir Leiaute de Tela de Início. Como Organizar com Pastas As pastas permitem organizar os ícones na tela Início. Você pode colocar até 20 ícones em uma pasta. O iPad nomeia automaticamente uma pasta quando ela é criada, com base nos ícones que você usou para criá-la. Entretanto, você pode alterar o nome. Reorganize as pastas arrastando-as na tela de Início ou movendo-as para uma nova tela de Início ou para o Dock. Para criar uma pasta:Toque e mantenha pressionado um ícone até que os ícones da tela Início comecem a tremular e, em seguida, arraste o ícone para dentro de outro ícone. O iPad cria uma nova pasta incluindo os dois ícones e mostra o nome da pasta. Você pode tocar no campo do nome para digitar um nome diferente. Você pode também criar pastas do iPad usando o iTunes. Para criar uma pasta usando o iTunes:Com o iPad conectado ao seu computador, selecione o ícone do iPad na lista Dispositivos do iTunes. Clique em Aplicativos na parte superior da tela e, na tela Início próxima a parte superior da janela, arraste um aplicativo sobre outro.Adicionar um ícone à uma pasta Enquanto ordena ícones, arraste o ícone para dentro de uma pasta. Remover um ícone de uma pasta Enquanto ordena ícones, toque para abrir a pasta e, em seguida, arraste o ícone para fora da pasta. Abrir uma pasta Toque em uma pasta. Você pode tocar no ícone de um app para abrir o app. Fechar uma pasta Toque fora da pasta ou pressione o botão Início. Apagar uma pasta Remova todos os ícones da pasta. A pasta é apagada automaticamente quando vazia. Renomear uma pasta Enquanto ordena ícones, toque para abrir a pasta e, em seguida, toque no nome da parte superior e utilize o teclado para digitar um novo nome. Pressione o botão Início para salvar suas alterações. Ao terminar a organização da sua tela de Início, pressione o botão Início para salvar suas alterações. Vários aplicativos, como o Mail e a App Store, exibem um indicador no seu ícone da tela de Início com um número (para indicar os itens recebidos) ou um ponto de exclamação (para indicar um problema). Se o aplicativo estiver em uma pasta, o símbolo também aparece na pasta. Um indicador numerado mostra o número total de itens não atendidos, como mensagens de e-mail recebidas e aplicativos atualizados para transferir. Um símbolo de alerta indica um problema com o aplicativo. Impressão O AirPrint permite que você imprima sem fio para impressoras com compatibilidade para AirPrint. Você pode imprimir a partir dos seguintes aplicativos do iPad:  Mail—mensagens de e-mail e anexos visíveis  Fotos—fotos  Safari—páginas web, arquivos PDF e anexos visíveis  iBooks—arquivos PDF Outros aplicativos disponíveis da App Store também podem ser compatíveis com o AirPrint. 42 Capítulo 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 43 As impressoras compatíveis com o AirPrint não necessitam um software de impressão; elas apenas precisam estar conectadas à mesma rede Wi-Fi que o iPad. Se você não tem certeza de que sua impressora é compatível com o AirPrint, consulte sua documentação. Para obter informações adicionais, visite o site support.apple.com/kb/ HT4356?viewlocale=pt_BR. Como imprimir um documento O AirPrint usa a sua rede Wi-Fi para enviar trabalhos de impressão sem fio para a sua impressora. O iPad deve estar conectado à mesma rede sem fio que a impressora AirPrint. Para imprimir um documento: 1 Toque no ou no (dependendo do aplicativo que estiver usando) e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. 2 Toque em Selecionar Impressora para selecionar uma impressora. 3 Defina as opções da impressora como a quantidade de cópias e saída frente e verso (se for compatível com a impressora). Alguns aplicativos também permitem que você defina um intervalo de páginas a serem impressas. 4 Toque em Imprimir.Se você clicar duas vezes no botão de Início durante a impressão de um documento, o aplicativo Impressão aparece como o aplicativo mais recente. Um símbolo com o ícone mostra quantos documentos estão prontos para impressão, incluindo o documento sendo impresso no momento. Para obter o estado de um trabalho de impressão: Clique duas vezes no botão de Início, toque no ícone Impressão e, em seguida, selecione um trabalho de impressão. Para cancelar um trabalho de impressão: Clique duas vezes no botão de Início, toque no ícone Impressão, selecione o trabalho de impressão e, em seguida, toque em Cancelar Impressão. 44 Capítulo 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 45 Como fazer uma busca Você pode fazer buscas em muitos aplicativos integrados do iPad incluindo o Mail, o Calendário, o iPod, o Vídeo, o Notas e os Contatos. Faça buscas em um aplicativo individual ou em todos os aplicativos de uma só vez utilizando o Spotlight. Para abrir o Spotlight: Na página principal da tela de Início, passe o dedo para a direita ou pressione no botão de Início. Na página do Spotlight, você pode pressionar o botão Início para voltar à página principal da tela Início. Como buscar no iPad: Na página do Spotlight, digite o texto no campo de busca. Os resultados da busca aparecem automaticamente à medida que você digita. Toque em Buscar para que o teclado desapareça e você possa ver mais resultados. Toque em um item na lista de resultados para abri-lo. Os ícones à esquerda dos resultados da busca permitem saber de qual app os resultados vieram. No topo da lista, o iPad mostra os seus resultados mais relevantes baseado em buscas anteriores. Na parte inferior da lista, os resultados de pesquisa também incluem op- ções de busca na web ou na Wikipedia. App O que está sendo buscado Contatos Nome, sobrenome e nomes de empresas Mail Campos Para, De e Assunto de todas as contas (o texto das mensagens não é buscado) Calendário Títulos de eventos, convidados e locaisApp O que está sendo buscado iPod Música (nomes de músicas, artistas e álbuns) e os títulos de podcasts e audiolivros Notas Texto das notas O Spotlight também busca os nomes de aplicativos integrados e instalados no iPad. Se você tiver muitos aplicativos, você pode usar o Spotlight para localizá-los e abri-los. Para abrir um aplicativo do Spotlight: Digite o nome do aplicativo e depois toque para abri-lo. Você pode escolher em quais aplicativos é realizada a busca e a ordem na qual eles são buscados. Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Busca do Spotlight. Como usar os dispositivos Bluetooth Você pode usar o iPad com o teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard e com outros dispositivos Bluetooth, como fones de ouvido Bluetooth. Para os perfis compatíveis Bluetooth, consulte o site support.apple.com/kb/HT3647?viewlocale=pt_BR. Como Emparelhar Dispositivos Bluetooth Primeiro você deve emparelhar os dispositivos Bluethooth (como o teclado ou os fones de ouvido) com o iPad, antes de poder usá-los. Como emparelhar um dispositivo Bluetooth com o iPad: 1 Siga as instruções fornecidas com o dispositivo para torná-lo visível. 2 Nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Bluetooth e ative a opção Bluetooth. 3 Selecione o dispositivo e, caso solicitado, digite o código de acesso ou o número PIN. Consulte as instruções sobre o código de acesso ou PIN que acompanham o dispositivo. Nota: Antes de emparelhar um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard, pressione o botão de alimentação para ligar o teclado. Você apenas pode emparelhar um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard de cada vez com o iPad. Para emparelhar um teclado diferente, primeiro você deve desemparelhar o atual. Depois de emparelhar seu teclado com o iPad, o nome do produto e um ícone Bluetooth aparecem na tela. Depois de emparelhar seus fones de ouvido com o iPad, o nome do produto e um ícone de áudio Bluetooth aparecem na tela quando você estiver visualizando os controles de reprodução de áudio ou vídeo. Toque no para mudar para uma saída de áudio diferente, como o alto-falante interno. Para usar o teclado na tela novamente, desative o Bluetooth (Ajustes > Geral > Bluetooth), ou pressione a tecla Ejetar no teclado Bluetooth. 46 Capítulo 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 47 Estado do Bluetooth O ícone do Bluetooth aparece na barra de estado do iPad, que está situada na parte superior da tela:  (branco): O Bluetooth está ativado e o dispositivo está conectado ao iPad.  (cinza): O Bluetooth está ativado mas não há nenhum dispositivo conectado. Se você emparelhou um dispositivo com o iPad, talvez ele esteja fora do raio de alcance ou desligado.  Nenhum ícone Bluetooth: O Bluetooth está desativado. Como Desemparelhar um Dispositivo do iPad Se você emparelhar o iPad com um dispositivo Bluetooth e depois quiser usar outro dispositivo do mesmo tipo no lugar, você deve desemparelhar o primeiro dispositivo. Para desemparelhar um dispositivo Bluetooth: 1 Nos Ajustes, escolha Geral > Bluetooth e depois ative a opção Bluetooth. 2 Escolha o dispositivo, depois toque em “Esquecer este Dispositivo”. Compartilhamento de Arquivos O Compartilhamento de Arquivos permite transferir arquivos entre o iPad e o seu computador. É possível compartilhar arquivos criados com um aplicativo compatível salvo no formato compatível. Os aplicativos compatíveis com o compartilhamento de arquivos aparecem na lista Apps de Compartilhamento de Arquivos no iTunes. Para cada app, a lista exibe os documentos que estão no iPad. Consulte a documentação do aplicativo para saber como ele compartilha os arquivos; nem todos os aplicativos são compatíveis com este recurso. Para transferir um arquivo do iPad ao seu computador: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 No iTunes, selecione o iPad na lista Dispositivos e clique em Aplicativos, na parte superior da tela. 3 Na seção Compartilhamento de Arquivos, selecione um aplicativo da lista à esquerda. 4 À direita, selecione o arquivo que deseja transferir e, em seguida, clique em "Salvar para" e selecione um destino do seu computador. Para transferir um arquivo do seu computador ao iPad: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 No iTunes, selecione o iPad na lista Dispositivos e clique em Aplicativos, na parte superior da tela. 3 Na seção Compartilhamento de Arquivos, clique em Adicionar.4 Selecione um arquivo e, em seguida, clique em Selecionar (Mac) ou OK (PC). O arquivo é transferido para seu dispositivo e pode ser aberto utilizando um aplicativo compatível com o tipo de arquivo. Para transferir mais de um arquivo, selecione cada arquivo adicional. Para apagar um arquivo do iPad: Selecione o arquivo na lista Arquivos e, em seguida, toque em Apagar. Como usar o AirPlay Você pode transmitir música, fotos e vídeo sem fio para a sua HDTV e alto-falantes usando o AirPlay e o Apple TV. Você também pode usar o AirPlay para transmitir áudio para uma estação base Airport Express ou AirPort Extreme. Outros receptores compatíveis com o AirPlay estão disponíveis através de terceiros, consulte a Apple Store para obter mais detalhes. Para iniciar a transmissão para um dispositivo compatível com o AirPlay: 1 Certifique-se de que o iPad e o dispositivo (como um Apple TV) estão conectados à mesma rede Wi-Fi. 2 Inicie o vídeo, apresentação de slides ou música e, em seguida toque no e escolha o dispositivo AirPlay que deseja usar. Alguns dispositivos podem solicitar um código de acesso. Uma vez que a transmissão é iniciada, você pode sair do aplicativo. Para parar a transmissão para um dispositivo compatível com o AirPlay: 1 Abra o aplicativo (como Vídeos) a partir do qual está transmitindo. 2 Toque em e escolha iPad da lista. Para solução de problemas, consulte “Sem vídeo ou som ao utilizar o AirPlay” na página 204. Recursos de segurança Os recursos de segurança ajudam a proteger as informações do iPad, impedindo que sejam acessadas por outras pessoas. Códigos de acesso e Proteção de Dados Por segurança, você pode configurar um código que precisará ser digitado sempre que você ativar ou interromper o repouso do iPad. Para definir um código: Escolha Ajustes > Geral > Bloqueio por Código > Ativar Código. Insira um código de 4 dígitos e, em seguida, insira-o novamente para comprová-lo. O iPad solicitará que você insira o código para desbloqueá-lo ou para exibir os ajustes de bloqueio do código. 48 Capítulo 3 Noções básicasCapítulo 3 Noções básicas 49 A configuração de um código ativa a proteção de dados, a qual utiliza o código de acesso como chave para criptografar mensagens de e-mail e seus anexos armazenados no iPad. (Talvez a proteção de dados também possa ser utilizada por alguns aplicativos disponíveis na App Store). Um aviso na parte inferior da tela Bloqueio por Código, em Ajustes, mostra quando a proteção de dados está ativada. Para aumentar a segurança, desative o Código Simples (um número de quatro dígitos) e utilize um código mais complexo que contenha uma combinação de números, letras, pontuação e caracteres especiais. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Bloqueio por Código” na página 173. Buscar Meu iPad Buscar Meu iPad ajuda a localizar um iPad perdido ou mal posicionado usando um outro iPhone, iPad ou iPod touch com o aplicativo gratuito Buscar Meu iPhone, ou um Mac ou PC com um navegador da web. O recurso Buscar Meu iPad inclui:  Buscar:Localiza seu iPad em um mapa em tela cheia do seu computador  Exibir uma Mensagem ou Reproduzir um Som:Permite que você especifique uma mensagem a ser exibida ou um som a ser reproduzido no seu iPad  Bloqueio de Código Remoto:Permite bloquear remotamente seu iPad e criar um código de acesso de 4 dígitos, se você não tiver definido um anteriormente  Limpeza Remota:Elimina todas as informações e mídia no seu iPad e restaura-o iPad para os seus ajustes originais de fábrica Para usar o recurso Buscar Meu iPad: Ative Buscar Meu iPad nos seus ajustes de conta MobileMe. Consulte “Como Configurar Contas MobileMe” na página 32. Localize o seu iPad perdido: Transfira e use o aplicativo Buscar Meu iPhone a partir da App Store em um dispositivo iOS diferente, ou inscreva-se ao www.me.com em um navegador web em um Mac ou PC. Nota: O recurso Buscar Meu iPad requer uma conta do MobileMe. O MobileMe é um serviço on-line que fornece Buscar Meu iPad gratuitamente para clientes de 4ª geração do iPad, iPhone e iPod touch. O MobileMe fornece recursos adicionais com uma assinatura paga. O MobileMe pode não estar disponível em todos os países ou regiões. Para obter mais informações, visite o site www.apple.com/br/mobileme.50 Sobre o Safari Use o Safari no iPad para navegar pela web e visitar os seus sites favoritos. Use o AirPrint para imprimir as páginas web e PDFs. Abra múltiplas páginas e adicione web clips à tela de Início para acesso rápido. Crie favoritos no iPad e sincronize-os com seu computador. Para usar o Safari, o iPad deve ter uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Como Visualizar Páginas Web Você pode visualizar páginas web na vertical ou na horizontal. Gire o iPad e a página web girará, ajustando-se automaticamente para ajustar-se à página. 4 SafariCapítulo 4 Safari 51 Como Abrir Páginas Web Para abrir uma página web: Toque no campo de endereço (na barra de título) para que apareça o teclado na tela, digite o endereço web e depois toque em Ir. Se o campo de endereço não estiver visível, toque na barra de estado situada na parte superior da tela para rolar rapidamente para o campo de endereço. À medida que você digita, aparecem os endereços web que começam com aquela letra. São as suas páginas favoritas ou as que você abriu recentemente. Toque em um endereço para ir para aquela página. Continue digitando se deseja inserir um endere- ço web que não está na lista. Para apagar o texto no campo de endereço: Toque no campo endereço e, em seguida, toque em . Como Realizar o Zoom e a Rolagem Para ampliar e reduzir: Toque duas vezes em uma coluna de uma página web para ampliá-la. Toque duas vezes novamente para reduzi-la.. Você pode também separar ou juntar os dedos para ampliar ou reduzir. Para rolar por uma página web Arraste para cima, para baixo ou para os lados. Ao rolar, você pode tocar e arrastar em qualquer lugar da página sem ativar nenhum link. Para rolar dentro de um quadro em uma página web Use dois dedos para rolar dentro de um quadro de uma página web. Use um dedo para rolar a página web inteira. Para rolar rapidamente para o topo de uma página web Toque na barra de estado na parte superior da tela do iPad. Como Navegar por Páginas Web Os links de uma página web normalmente o levam a um lugar diferente na web. Para seguir um link em uma página web: Toque no link.Links no iPad também podem exibir uma localização nos Mapas ou criar uma mensagem do Mail com endereço predefinido. Para voltar ao Safari após um link abrir outro aplicativo, clique duas vezes no botão Início e toque em Safari. Para ver o endereço de destino de um link Mantenha pressionado o link. O endereço aparece em uma janela próxima ao seu dedo. Você pode abrir o link na página ativa, em uma nova página ou copiar o endereço. Para interromper o carregamento de uma pá- gina web Toque . Para recarregar uma página web Toque no . Para ir para a página anterior ou seguinte Toque na ou na parte superior da tela. Como colocar uma página nos favoritos Toque no e, em seguida, toque em Favorito. Como adicionar um clipe de uma página web à tela Início Toque no e toque em “Adicionar à Tela Início.” Para retornar a uma página visualizada recentemente Toque no e toque em Histórico. Para limpar a lista do histórico, toque em Limpar. Como enviar um endereço de página web em um e-mail Toque no e toque em “Enviar Link por e-mail". Como salvar uma imagem ou foto na sua Fototeca Mantenha pressionada a imagem e, em seguida, toque em Salvar Imagem. Como Abrir Várias Páginas Você pode abrir até nove páginas ao mesmo tempo. Alguns links abrem automaticamente uma nova página ao invés de substituir a página atual. Para abrir uma nova página: Toque no e toque em Nova Página. Para ir para uma página diferente:Toque no e, em seguida, toque na página que deseja visualizar. Para fechar uma página: Toque no e toque no . 52 Capítulo 4 SafariCapítulo 4 Safari 53 Como Digitar Texto e Preencher Formulários Algumas páginas web possuem campos de texto e formulários para preencher. Você pode configurar o Safari para que memorize nomes e senhas de sites que visitar e para preencher campos de texto automaticamente com as informações dos Contatos. Como fazer o teclado aparecer Toque dentro de um campo de texto. Para mover para outro campo de texto Toque em outro campo de texto ou nos botões Próximo ou Anterior acima do teclado na tela. Para enviar um formulário Depois de preencher o formulário, toque em Ir ou Buscar. A maioria das páginas também possuem um link que você pode tocar para enviar o formulário. Para fechar o teclado sem enviar o formulário Toque na tecla Teclado para ocultar o teclado na tela. Para ativar o Preenchimento Automático para ajudá-lo a preencher formulários da web: Em Ajustes, escolha Safari > Preenchimento Automático e, em seguida, siga um destes procedimentos:  Para utilizar as informações dos contatos, ative Dados de Contato; em seguida, escolha Meus Dados e selecione o contato que deseja utilizar. O Safari utiliza as informações dos Contatos para preencher os campos de contato nos formulários da web.  Para utilizar as informações dos nomes e senhas, ative Nomes e Senhas. Quando esse recurso está ativado, o Safari se lembra dos nomes e senhas dos sites que você visitou e automaticamente preenche as informações quando você visita o site novamente.  Para remover todas as informações do Preenchimento Automático, toque em Limpar Tudo. Como imprimir páginas web e arquivos PDF Use o AirPrint para imprimir as páginas web e PDFs do Safari. Para imprimir uma página web ou PDF: Toque em na parte superior da tela e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Toque em Selecionar Impressora para selecionar uma impressora e definir as opções da impressora. Em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Para obter mais informações sobre impressão a partir do iPad, consulte “Impressão” na página 42.Como Buscar na Web Insira palavras ou frases no campo de busca para pesquisar pela web e página web atual. Conforme você digita, aparecem buscas recentes e sugeridas. Para buscar na web: 1 Toque no campo de busca (do lado direito da barra de título). 2 Digite uma palavra ou frase que descreva o que você está procurando, depois toque em Buscar. 3 Toque em um link da lista de resultados da busca para abrir uma página web. Para obter dicas sobre como buscar na Internet efetivamente, visite o site www.google. com/help/features.html ou help.yahoo.com/us/yahoo/search/basics. Para procurar uma palavra ou frase na página web atual: No final da lista de resultados, toque na entrada embaixo de Nesta Página para localizar a primeira ocorrência de uma palavra ou frase. Para localizar ocorrências subsequentes, toque em Seguinte na parte inferior da tela. Por padrão, o Safari realiza buscas utilizando o Google. Para alterar o padrão para um mecanismo de pesquisa diferente, em Ajustes, escolha Safari > Motor de Busca e escolha um motor de busca. Favoritos Você pode marcar uma página web que deseja ver mais tarde como favorita. Como marcar uma página web como favorito: Abra a página e toque em . Depois toque em Adicionar Favorito. Quando você salva um favorito, pode editar o seu título. Por padrão, os favoritos são salvos na parte superior dos Favoritos. Toque em Favoritos para escolher uma pasta diferente. Se você usa o Safari em um Mac, ou o Safari ou o Microsoft Internet Explorer em um PC, você pode sincronizar os favoritos com o navegador do seu computador. Para sincronizar os favoritos com o seu computador: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 No iTunes, selecione iPad na barra lateral. 3 Clique na aba de Informações, selecione “Sincronizar favoritos do Safari" em Outros e depois clique em Aplicar. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. Para sincronizar os favoritos com o MobileMe: Nos Ajustes do iPad, selecione Favoritos em sua conta do MobileMe. Consulte “Como Configurar Contas MobileMe” na página 32. 54 Capítulo 4 SafariCapítulo 4 Safari 55 Para abrir uma página web guardada como favorito: Toque no ; depois, escolha um favorito ou toque em uma pasta para ver os favoritos dentro dela. Para editar um favorito ou uma pasta de favoritos:Toque no , escolha a pasta que possui o favorito ou a pasta que deseja editar e toque em Editar. Em seguida, realize uma das seguintes ações:  Para criar uma nova pasta, toque em Nova Pasta.  Para apagar um favorito ou pasta, toque no e, em seguida, toque em Apagar.  Para reposicionar um favorito ou pasta, arraste .  Para editar o nome ou endereço, ou para colocá-lo em uma pasta diferente, toque no favorito ou na pasta. Quando acabar, pressione OK. Web Clips Adicione web clips à tela de Início para obter acesso rápido as suas páginas web marcadas como favoritas. Os web clips aparecem como ícones na tela de Início, e você pode organizá-los junto com os outros ícones de aplicativos. Consulte “Como reorganizar os ícones dos aplicativos” na página 40. Para adicionar um clip da web: Abra a página web e toque em . Em seguida, toque em “Adicionar à Tela Início”. Ao abrir um web clip, o Safari amplia e rola automaticamente para a área da página web que foi exibida quando você salvou o web clip. A área exibida é também usada para criar o ícone do web clip na sua tela de Início, a menos que a página web tenha o seu próprio ícone personalizado. Quando você adiciona um web clip, você pode editar o nome dele. Se o nome for muito longo (mais de 10 caracteres), ele pode aparecer abreviado na tela de Início. Os web clips não são sincronizados pelo MobileMe ou iTunes, mas são copiados como backup pelo iTunes. Para apagar um clip da web: 1 Mantenha pressionado qualquer ícone na tela de Início até que os ícones comecem a tremular. 2 Toque no no canto do web clip que deseja apagar. 3 Toque em Apagar; depois, pressione o botão Início para salvar sua ordenação.56 Sobre o Mail Leia este capítulo para aprender como usar o Mail para ler suas mensagens de e-mail e compor novas mensagens. Você pode visualizar as mensagens de todas as suas contas de e-mail de uma vez, e o Mail exibe os encadeamentos de mensagens para que seja fácil seguir uma conversa. Você pode enviar ou receber fotos e gráficos integrados e visualizar PDFs e outros anexos. Use o AirPrint para imprimir mensagens e seus anexos. O Mail funciona com o MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange e com muitos dos serviços de correio mais populares, incluindo o Yahoo! Mail, o e-mail do Google e AOL—assim como com outros serviços de e-mail padrão POP3 e IMAPs. Para enviar ou receber mensagens no Mail, o iPad deve possuir uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Como Configurar Contas de E-mail Você pode configurar contas de e-mail no iPad de uma das seguintes formas:  Configure suma conta diretamente no iPad. Consulte “Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário” na página 32.  No iTunes, utilize os painéis de ajustes do iPad para sincronizar ajustes de contas de e-mail a partir do seu computador. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. 5 MailCapítulo 5 Mail 57 Como Enviar um e-mail Você pode enviar uma mensagem de e-mail a qualquer pessoa que possua um endereço de e-mail. Para escrever e enviar uma mensagem: 1 Toque no na parte superior da tela. 2 Digite um nome ou um endereço de e-mail no campo Para ou toque no para adicionar um nome dos seus contatos. À medida em que você digita um endereço de e-mail, os endereços de e-mail coincidentes da sua lista de contatos vão aparecendo. Toque em um endereço para adicioná-lo. Para adicionar mais nomes, toque no . Nota: Se você estiver redigindo uma mensagem da sua conta Microsoft Exchange e possuir acesso à lista GAL (Global Address List) da sua empresa, os endereços coincidentes dos contatos do iPad aparecerão primeiro e depois aparecerão os endereços GAL coincidentes. 3 Toque em Cc/Cco/De se você deseja enviar a mensagem com cópia ou com cópia oculta a outras pessoas, ou se deseja alterar a conta a partir da qual você envia a mensagem. Se tiver mais de uma conta de e-mail, você pode tocar no campo De para alterar a conta de onde a está enviando. 4 Digite um assunto e depois digite sua mensagem. Você pode tocar em Retornar para mover-se do campo Título para o corpo da mensagem. 5 Toque em Enviar. Como enviar uma foto em uma mensagem de e-mail Em Fotos, escolha uma foto, toque em , depois toque em Enviar Foto por E-mail. Para enviar várias fotos na mesma mensagem, toque em quando estiver visualizando miniaturas em um álbum. Você também pode copiar e colar fotos. A foto é enviada usando a sua conta de e-mail padrão. Para alterar a conta de envio padrão, consulte “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” na página 179. Como salvar um rascunho de uma mensagem para completá-la mais tarde Toque em Cancelar e depois toque em Salvar. A mensagem é salva na caixa Rascunhos. Para abrir rapidamente o rascunho salvo mais recentemente, toque e mantenha o . Para responder uma mensagem Abra uma mensagem e toque em . Toque em Responder para responder somente ao remetente ou em Responder a Todos para responder ao remetente e a todos os destinatários. Digite a sua resposta e depois toque em Enviar. As imagens ou arquivos anexos da mensagem original não são incluídos na resposta.Para encaminhar uma mensagem Abra uma mensagem e toque em e, em seguida, toque em Encaminhar. Adicione um ou mais endereços de e-mail, digite a sua mensagem e depois toque em Enviar. Ao encaminhar uma mensagem, você pode incluir as imagens ou arquivos anexos da mensagem original. Para compartilhar informações de contatos Nos Contatos, escolha um contato, depois toque em Compartilhar. Adicione um ou mais endere- ços de e-mail, digite a sua mensagem e depois toque em Enviar. Como Verificar e Ler E-mails O ícone do Mail mostra o número total de mensagens que ainda não foram lidas em todas as suas caixas de entrada. Você pode ter outras mensagens não lidas em outras caixas de correio. Quantidade de mensagens não lidas nas suas caixas de entrada Para verificar se há novas mensagens: Escolha uma caixa de correio, toque em Caixa de Entrada ou em . Na tela de cada conta, você pode ver o número de mensagens não lidas em cada caixa de correio. Toque em uma caixa de correio para ver as mensagens. As mensagens não lidas possuem um ponto azul ao lado delas. Se você tiver mais de uma conta de correio, toque em Caixas de Correio para alternar entre contas. Para visualizar todas as suas mensagens em uma caixa de entrada unificada, toque em Todas as Caixas de Correio. Quantidade de mensagens não lidas Mensagens não lidas 58 Capítulo 5 MailCapítulo 5 Mail 59 As mensagens relacionadas são agrupadas em um encadeamento. Somente a primeira mensagem é exibida na caixa de entrada e a quantidade de mensagens relacionadas é indicada. Para visualizar o encadeamento, toque-o. Para desativar o encadeamento de mensagens, vá para Ajustes > “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e desative “Organizar Por Encadeamento”. Ao abrir uma caixa de correio, o Mail carrega a quantidade de mensagens especificadas nas configurações do Mail, caso as mensagens ainda não tenham sido carregadas automaticamente. Consulte “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” na página 179. Para carregar mensagens adicionais: Role para o final da lista de mensagens e toque em Carregar Mais Mensagens. Para ler uma mensagem: Toque em uma caixa de correio e depois toque em uma mensagem. Dentro de uma mensagem, toque na ou para ver a próxima mensagem ou a mensagem anterior.Girar o iPad entre as orientações vertical e horizontal permite que você enfoque em uma única mensagem, ou veja todas as mensagens para que possa rapidamente verificar e visualizar aquelas que lhe interessam mais. Como ampliar uma parte de uma mensagem Toque duas vezes na área para ampliá-la. Toque duas vezes novamente para reduzi-la. Como redimensionar qualquer coluna de texto para que se ajuste à tela Toque duas vezes no texto. Para redimensionar uma mensagem Toque a mensagem com dois dedos e separe-os ou aproxime-os para ampliar ou reduzir. Como abrir um link Toque no link. Os textos dos links normalmente aparecem sublinhados em azul. Muitas imagens também são links. Um link pode levá-lo uma página web, abrir um mapa, ou abrir uma mensagem de e-mail com o campo de endereço já preenchido. Os links de web e mapas abrem o Safari ou o Mapas no iPad. Para voltar ao Mail, pressione o botão Início e pressione Mail. Para ver o endereço de destino de um link Mantenha pressionado o link. Você pode abrir o link no Safari ou copiar o endereço do link para a área de transferência. O iPad mostra os anexos de imagem nos formatos usados mais frequentemente (JPEG, GIF e TIFF) alinhados com o texto das mensagens de e-mail. O iPad pode reproduzir vários anexos de áudio, como MP3, AAC, WAV e AIFF. Você pode transferir e visualizar arquivos (como PDF, páginas web, textos, arquivos do Pages, Keynote, Numbers e documentos do Microsoft Word, Excel e PowerPoint) que estejam anexos às mensagens que receber. Para abrir um arquivo anexo: Toque no anexo para transferi-lo para o iPad e, em seguida, abra-o. Se o iPad não for compatível com o formato de uma arquivo em anexo, você pode ver o nome do arquivo, mas não pode abri-lo. 60 Capítulo 5 MailCapítulo 5 Mail 61 Para abrir um arquivo anexo com um aplicativo diferente: Toque e mantenha pressionado o anexo e, em seguida, escolha um aplicativo. Se você não tiver nenhum aplicativo que possa abrir o anexo, você pode vê-lo, desde que seja um tipo de arquivo que compatível com o iPad. Para obter uma lista de formatos de documento compatíveis, consulte “Se os anexos do e-mail não abrirem” na página 202. Para salvar uma foto anexa no seu álbum Fotos Salvas: Toque na foto e depois toque em Salvar Imagem. Como ver todos os destinatários de uma mensagem Toque em Detalhes na parte superior da tela. Pressione o nome ou o endereço de e-mail para ver as informações de contato do destinatário. Toque no endereço de e-mail para contatar a pessoa. Toque em Ocultar para ocultar os destinatários. Para adicionar um destinatário de e-mail a sua lista de contatos Toque na mensagem e toque em Detalhes para ver os destinatários. Depois toque em um nome ou endereço de e-mail e toque em Criar Novo Contato ou "Adicionar a Contato”. Para marcar uma mensagem como não lida Abra a mensagem e toque em “Marcar como Não Lida” próximo à linha do título. Um ponto azul aparecerá ao lado da mensagem na lista de caixas de correio até que você a abra novamente. Para abrir um convite de uma reunião: Toque no convite. Você pode obter as informações de contato do organizador e dos convidados, definir um alerta, adicionar notas ao evento e adicionar comentários que serão incluídos na sua resposta e enviados por e-mail ao organizador. Você pode aceitar, aceitar provisoriamente ou recusar o convite. Consulte “Como Responder a Convites de Reuniões” na página 96. Para salvar uma foto anexada no Fotos: Toque na foto e depois toque em Salvar Imagem. Como Buscar E-mails Você pode buscar nos campos Para, De e Assunto das mensagens de e-mail. O Mail busca as mensagens transferidas na caixa de correio aberta no momento. Para o MobileMe, Exchange e algumas contas de e-mail IMAP, você pode também buscar mensagens do servidor. Para buscar mensagens de e-mail: Abra uma caixa de correio, role até o topo e digite o texto no campo Buscar. Toque em De, Para, Assunto ou Tudo (De, Para e Assunto) para escolher os campos nos quais deseja buscar. (Toque na barra de estado para rolar rapidamente para o topo da lista e revelar o campo de busca.) Os resultados da busca nas mensagens já transferidas para o iPad aparecem automaticamente conforme você digita. Toque em Buscar para que o teclado desapareça e você possa ver mais resultados. Para apagar ou mover mensagens encontradas: Após concluir a pesquisa, toque em Editar e, em seguida, selecione as mensagens que deseja apagar ou mover. Uma marca aparece ao lado de cada mensagem selecionada. Para apagar as mensagens, toque em Apagar. Para mover as mensagens, toque em Mover e, em seguida, toque em uma pasta de destino. Para buscar mensagens no servidor: Toque em “Continuar Busca no Servidor” no final dos resultados da busca. Nota: Os resultados de pesquisa de mensagens nos servidores podem variar porque alguns servidores procuram somente palavras completas. Para imprimir mensagens e anexos Você pode usar o AirPrint para imprimir as mensagens de e-mail e anexos que o iPad pode visualizar. Para imprimir Receber uma mensagem de e-mail:Toque no e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Selecione as opções de impressão que deseja e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Para imprimir uma imagem sem o restante da mensagem de e-mail, salve a imagem (toque na imagem e toque em Salvar Imagem) e, em seguida, abra Fotos e imprima a imagem do seu álbum Fotos Salvas. Para imprimir um anexo: Toque no anexo para visualizá-lo e, em seguida, toque em e toque em Imprimir. Selecione as opções que deseja e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. 62 Capítulo 5 MailCapítulo 5 Mail 63 Para obter mais informações sobre a utilização de impressoras AirPrinter, consulte “Impressão” na página 42. Como Organizar os E-mails Você pode apagar mensagens uma de cada vez ou selecionar um grupo para apagar todas de uma vez. Você também pode mover mensagens de uma caixa de correio ou pasta para outra. Para apagar uma mensagem: Abra a mensagem e toque em . Ou, passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita sobre o título da mensagem na lista de mensagens e depois toque em Apagar. Para apagar várias mensagens: Ao visualizar uma lista de mensagens, toque em Editar, selecione as mensagens que você deseja apagar e depois toque em Apagar. Você também pode pesquisar as mensagens e escolher aquelas que deseja apagar. Consulte “Como Buscar E-mails” na página 62. Para mover uma mensagem para outra caixa de correio ou pasta: Ao visualizar uma mensagem, toque no e depois escolha uma caixa de correio ou pasta. Para mover várias mensagens: Quando visualizar uma lista de mensagens, pressione Editar, selecione as mensagens que deseja mover, toque em Mover e selecione uma caixa de correio ou pasta. Você também pode pesquisar as mensagens e escolher aquelas que deseja mover. Consulte “Como Buscar E-mails” na página 62.64 Sobre a Câmera Com o iPad, você tem uma ótima câmera fotográfica e uma câmera de vídeo para levar a qualquer lugar. O iPad possui uma câmera posterior que tira fotos e realiza vídeos de alta definição. Além disso, possui uma câmera frontal que permite que você faça liga- ções de vídeo do FaceTime e que você realize fotos e vídeos próprios. Use a tela para controlar a câmera posterior e para ver a foto ou o vídeo que está realizando. Você pode tocar em qualquer lugar da tela para selecionar um objeto ou área especifica, e ajustar automaticamente a exposição baseada naquela parte da imagem. O recurso de autofoco (máximo de 10 cm) e um zoom digital de 5x permitem tirar ótimos close-ups. Se você possui uma conexão de Internet e os serviços de localização estão ativados, as fotos e vídeos são etiquetados com dados de localização. Você pode usar os dados de localização com alguns aplicativos e sites de compartilhamento de fotos para controlar e publicar onde você tirou as fotos. Por exemplo, o aplicativo Fotos organiza fotos de acordo com lugares. Nota: Se os serviços de localização estiverem desativados quando abrir a Câmera pela primeira vez, talvez seja solicitado que você ative estes serviços. Se você não quiser incluir os dados da localização em suas fotos e vídeos, poderá utilizar a Câmera sem ativar os serviços de localização. Consulte “Serviços de Localização” na página 169. 6 CâmeraCapítulo 6 Câmera 65 Como tirar fotos e gravar vídeos Tirar fotos e gravar vídeos com o iPad é tão fácil como apontar e tocar. Certifique-se de que o botão Câmera/Vídeo esteja ajustado para . Para tirar uma foto: Direcione o iPad e toque . Ao tirar uma foto ou iniciar uma gravação de vídeo, o iPad emite um som de obturador. Você pode usar os botões de volume para controlar o volume do som do obturador. O som não será emitido se você ajustar o botão Interruptor Lateral para silencioso. Consulte “Botões” na página 10. Nota: Em algumas regiões, os efeitos de som da Câmera são reproduzidos, mesmo se o botão Interruptor Lateral estiver ajustado para o modo silencioso. Para gravar um vídeo: Deslize o interruptor Câmera/Vídeo para , depois toque em para iniciar a gravação. O botão de gravação pisca enquanto você grava. Toque em novamente para parar a gravação. Para alterar a área de foco e ajustar a exposição: Toque no local onde deseja definir a exposição. A câmera ajusta a exposição para a área selecionada da imagem. Para ampliar e reduzir: Toque na tela e, em seguida, arraste o controle deslizante da parte inferior da tela para ampliar ou reduzir (câmera principal, somente no modo câmera). Para alternar entre as câmeras frontal e posterior:Toque em no canto superior direito da tela. Para rever uma foto ou vídeo que você acabou de fazer: Toque na miniatura de sua última foto, no canto inferior esquerdo da tela. Utilize as flechas esquerda e direita na parte inferior da tela para rever outras fotos e vídeos no Rolo da Câmera, ou apenas passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita. Toque OK para voltar ao modo câmera ou vídeo. Se você não estiver visualizando os controles, toque na tela para exibi-los.Para apagar uma foto ou vídeo: Toque em . Se não estiver visualizando o , toque na tela para exibir os controles. Para tirar uma foto: Pressione e solte rapidamente os botões Repousar/Despertar e o botão Início. A tela pisca quando uma captura de tela é tirada e a captura de tela é adicionada ao álbum Rolo da Câmera. Como visualizar e compartilhar fotos e vídeos As fotos e vídeos criados com a câmera são salvos no álbum Rolo da Câmera do iPad. Você pode visualizar o álbum Rolo da Câmera tanto em Câmera como em Fotos. Para visualizar fotos e vídeos do álbum Rolo da Câmera: Na Câmera, toque na imagem em miniatura do canto inferior esquerdo da tela. Em Fotos, toque no álbum Rolo da Câmera. Toque no botão esquerdo ou direito ou passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para navegar pelas fotos e vídeos. Ao visualizar uma foto ou vídeo no álbum Rolo da Câmera, toque na tela para exibir os controles. Para obter mais informações sobre visualização e compartilhamento de fotos e vídeos, consulte:  “Como visualizar fotos e vídeos” na página 76  “Compartilhamento de Fotos” na página 78 Como recortar vídeos É possível recortar os fotogramas do começo e fim de um vídeo que acabou de gravar ou de qualquer outro vídeo no álbum Rolo de Câmera. Você pode substituir o vídeo original ou salvar a versão recortada como um novo videoclipe. Para recortar um vídeo: 1 Enquanto visualiza um vídeo, toque na tela para exibir os controles. 2 Arraste as duas extremidades do visualizador de fotogramas que fica na parte superior do vídeo e toque em Recortar. 3 Toque em Recortar Original ou em "Salvar como Novo Clipe”. Importante: Se selecionou Recortar Original, os fotogramas recortados são apagados permanentemente do vídeo original. Se selecionou "Salvar como Novo Clipe", um novo videoclipe recortado é salvo no álbum Rolo da Câmera e o vídeo original fica inalterado. 66 Capítulo 6 CâmeraCapítulo 6 Câmera 67 Para carregar fotos e vídeos em seu computador Você pode carregar as fotos e vídeos criados com sua câmera para os aplicativos de fotos de seu computador, como o iPhoto em um Mac. Para carregar fotos e vídeos em seu computador:Conecte o iPad ao seu computador.  Mac: Selecione as fotos e vídeos desejados e clique no botão Importar ou Transferir do iPhoto ou em outro aplicativo de foto compatível do seu computador.  PC: Siga as instruções fornecidas com seu aplicativo de foto. Se apagar as fotos e os vídeos do iPad quando transferi-los para o seu computador, eles serão removidos do álbum Rolo de Câmera. Você pode utilizar o painel de ajustes Fotos do iTunes para sincronizar fotos e vídeos (os vídeos apenas podem ser sincronizados com Macs) com o aplicativo Fotos do iPad. 68 Sobre o FaceTime O FaceTime permite que você faça videoconferências através de Wi-Fi. Use a câmera frontal para conversar cara a cara ou a câmera posterior para compartilhar o que você está vendo ao redor. Para usar o FaceTime, você precisa de um iPad 2 e uma conexão Wi-Fi com a Internet. A pessoa para a qual você ligar também deve ter um dispositivo ou computador que funcione com o FaceTime. Para obter mais informações, consulte “FaceTime” na página 186. Nota: Talvez o FaceTime não esteja disponível em todos os países ou regiões. 7 FaceTimeCapítulo 7 FaceTime 69 Como iniciar a sessão Para usar o FaceTime, você necessita um ID da Apple. Se você possui uma conta da iTunes Store, da MobileMe ou outra conta da Apple, você pode usar esse ID da Apple com o FaceTime. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple, poderá criar um quando abrir o FaceTime. Você não precisa iniciar ou finalizar a sessão cada vez que utilizar o FaceTime. Uma vez que iniciar a sessão, você pode iniciar uma videoconferência do FaceTime imediatamente. Para iniciar a sessão no FaceTime: 1 Abra o FaceTime, digite o seu ID e senha da Apple e depois toque em Iniciar a Sessão. Caso você ainda não tenha uma conta da Apple, você pode tocar em Criar Nova Conta e configurar uma nesse momento. 2 Na tela FaceTime, digite o e-mail que outras pessoas utilizarão para ligar para você no FaceTime e toque em Seguinte. Se é a primeira vez que você usou este e-mail para o FaceTime, talvez você tenha que verificar se recebeu novos e-mails nesta conta e responder a mensagem de confirmação da Apple. (Se você já adicionou a conta ao Mail no seu iPad, a verificação é automática.) Agora você pode escolher um contato para iniciar uma ligação do FaceTime e outras pessoas podem ligar para você utilizando o e-mail que você forneceu. Caso utilize mais de um e-mail, você pode adicionar outros, como descrito abaixo. Para criar uma nova conta: 1 Abra o FaceTime e digite Criar Nova Conta. 2 Siga as instruções da tela. O e-mail que você digitar será o ID da Apple da nova conta. 3 Na tela FaceTime, digite o e-mail que você deseja que as pessoas utilizem para conectar com você. Este endereço não necessita ser o mesmo que você digitou para o ID da Apple, mas deve ser um e-mail que funcione. 4 Responda o e-mail de confirmação enviado da Apple ao e-mail que você digitou no passo anterior. Caso possua mais de um endereço de e-mail, você pode permitir que as pessoas liguem para você usando qualquer um deles. Para adicionar e-mails:Escolha Ajustes > FaceTime e depois clique em Adic. Outro E-mail. Para finalizar a sessão:Normalmente não é necessário finalizar a sessão do FaceTime— basta apenas iniciar a sessão uma vez e abrir o FaceTime posteriormente, sem receber nenhuma solicitação de início de sessão novamente. Você não pode receber ligações do FaceTime quando a sessão não está iniciada. Mas, se precisar finalizar a sessão, escolha Ajustes > FaceTime e, em seguida, toque em Conta. Para desativar o FaceTime: Se você não desejar receber ligações do FaceTime, escolha Ajustes > FaceTime e desative o FaceTime. Como realizar uma videoconferência do FaceTime Para realizar uma ligação do FaceTime, escolha o aplicativo FaceTime e, em seguida, alguém dos seus contatos, favoritos ou da lista de ligações recentes. Para ligar para um contato:Toque em Contatos, escolha um nome e, em seguida, toque no endereço de e-mail ou número de telefone usado com o FaceTime. Para adicionar um contato: Toque em Contatos, toque em e depois digite o nome da pessoa e seu e-mail ou número de telefone. Para um contato fora da sua região, certifique-se de inserir o número completo, incluindo o código do país e o código de área—por exemplo, +1 (408) 555-1234 nos Estados Unidos. Para reiniciar uma ligação recente:Toque em Recentes e escolha o nome ou número. Para ligar para um favorito:Toque em Favoritos e, em seguida, toque em um nome ou número da lista. Enquanto você está falando Enquanto você está falando com alguém no FaceTime, você pode alternar entre as câ- meras, mudar a orientação da câmera, silenciar o microfone, mover sua tela imagem a imagem, abrir outro aplicativo e finalmente, finalizar a sua ligação. Para alternar entre as câmeras frontal e posterior:Toque em . Para alterar a orientação da câmera:Gire o iPad. A imagem que seu amigo vê se altera para coincidir com a tela. Para evitar a rotação da tela quando você mover a câmera, ative o bloqueio de orienta- ção. Consulte “Visualização na Vertical ou Horizontal” na página 16. Para silenciar o microfone:Toque em . Seu amigo poderá apenas vê-lo e você poderá ver e ouvir seu amigo. Para mover sua tela imagem a imagem:Arraste a janela pequena para qualquer canto. Para usar outros aplicativos durante uma ligação: Pressione o botão Início , depois toque no ícone de um aplicativo. Você ainda poderá falar com o seu amigo, mas vocês não estarão visíveis. Para retornar ao vídeo, toque na barra verde da parte superior da tela. Para finalizar a ligação: Toque em . 70 Capítulo 7 FaceTime71 Sobre o Photo Booth É fácil tirar uma foto usando o Photo Booth. Torne a sua foto mais interessante aplicando um efeito ao tirá-la. O Photo Booth funciona com ambas as câmeras frontal e posterior. Como selecionar um efeito Antes de tirar uma foto, você pode selecionar um efeito a ser aplicado na imagem. Para selecionar um efeito:Toque no e, em seguida, toque no efeito que deseja usar. 8 Photo BoothPara distorcer uma imagem: Se você selecionar um efeito de distorção, arraste o seu dedo pela tela para alterar a distorção. Você também pode juntar, passar ou girar os dedos na imagem para alterar a distorção. Como tirar uma foto Para tirar uma foto no Photo Booth, simplesmente direcione o iPad e toque. Para tirar uma foto: Direcione o iPad e toque . Quando você tira uma foto, o iPad reproduz o som de um obturador. Você pode utilizar os botões de volume da lateral do iPad para controlar o volume do som do obturador. O som não será emitido se você ajustar o botão Interruptor Lateral para silencioso. Consulte “Botões” na página 10. Nota: Em algumas regiões, os efeitos de som são reproduzidos mesmo se o botão Interruptor Lateral estiver ajustado para o modo silencioso. Para alternar entre as câmeras frontal e posterior: Toque no na parte inferior da tela. Para rever a foto que acabou de tirar: Toque na miniatura da sua última captura. Passe os dedos para a esquerda ou para a direita para visualizar mais miniaturas. Se você não estiver visualizando os controles, toque na tela para exibi-los. Para apagar uma foto: Selecione uma miniatura e, em seguida, toque no . Para gerenciar fotos:Toque na miniatura da foto—você pode selecionar mais que uma. Toque no e, em seguida, toque em E-mail, Copiar ou Apagar. 72 Capítulo 8 Photo BoothCapítulo 8 Photo Booth 73 Como visualizar e compartilhar fotos As fotos tiradas com o Photo Booth são salvas no álbum Rolo da Câmera no iPad. Você pode visualizar o álbum Rolo da Câmera no aplicativos Fotos. Para visualizar fotos no álbum Rolo da Câmera: Em Fotos, toque no álbum Rolo da Câmera. Para navegar pelas fotos, toque no botão esquerdo ou direito, ou passe os dedos para a esquerda ou para a direita. Você pode usar o Mail para enviar um foto do Photo Booth em uma mensagem de e-mail. Para enviar uma foto: Toque em uma miniatura para selecionar a foto ou toque novamente para selecionar mais de uma foto. Toque no e, em seguida toque no botão E-mail na parte inferior da tela. O Mail é aberto e cria ma nova mensagem com a foto anexada. Como carregar fotos para o seu computador Carregue as fotos tiradas com o Photo Booth para os aplicativos de fotos de seu computador, como o iPhoto em um Mac. Para carregar as fotos para o seu computador: Conecte o iPad ao seu computador.  Mac: Selecione as fotos que deseja carregar e clique no botão Importar ou Transferir no iPhoto ou em outro aplicativo de fotos compatível do seu computador.  PC: Siga as instruções fornecidas com seu aplicativo de foto. Se você apagar as fotos do iPad quando transferi-las para o seu computador, elas serão removidas do álbum Rolo de Câmera. Você pode usar o painel de ajustes de Fotos no iTunes para sincronizar fotos para o aplicativo Fotos em iPad.74 Sobre as fotos O iPad permite que você carregue fotos e vídeo com você para que possa usufruí-los onde estiver. Você pode compartilhá-los facilmente com amigos e familiares, diretamente no iPad ou em um HDTV usando o AirPlay e o Apple TV. Você pode até imprimir fotos do iPad usando o AirPrint. Se o seu iPad possuir uma câmera, você poderá visualizar fotos e vídeos à medida que os vai criando. Você pode sincronizar fotos e vídeos no seu computador, importá-las de uma câmera digital ou do iPhone, ou salvá-las de um e-mail ou da web. Use-os em aplicativos, envie-os em mensagens de e-mail ou transfira-os para a sua Galeria do MobileMe. Você pode usar o iPad como porta-retrato que exibe uma apresentação de slides animada das suas fotos. Como sincronizar fotos e vídeos com o seu computador O iPad é compatível com formatos de foto padrão como JPEG, TIFF, GIF e PNG. Use o iTunes para sincronizar fotos para iPad. Ao sincronizar fotos para o iPad, o iTunes automaticamente cria um tamanho otimizado para o iPad, se necessário. Consulte “Como configurar a sincronização” na página 25. O iPad é compatível com os formatos de vídeo H.264 e MPEG-4, com áudio AAC. Você usa o iTunes para sincronizar vídeos gravados com uma câmera digital, iPhone ou iPod touch (4ª geração) para iPad. 9 FotosCapítulo 9 Fotos 75 Como importar fotos e vídeos do iPhone ou de uma câmera digital Com o Kit de Conexão de Câmera para iPad (vendido separadamente), você pode importar fotos e vídeos diretamente de uma câmera digital ou iPhone, ou de um cartão de memória SD. Para importar fotos: 1 Insira o Leitor de Cartão SD ou o Conector de Câmera, incluídos com o Kit de Conexão de Câmera para iPad, no conector de dock do iPad.  Para conectar uma câmera ou iPhone, use o cabo USB que acompanha a câmera ou o iPhone, e conecte-o à porta USB do Conector da Câmera. Se estiver usando o iPhone, certifique-se de que esteja ligado e desbloqueado. Para conectar uma câ- mera, certifique-se de que a câmera esteja ligada e no modo de transferência. Para obter ajuda, consulte a documentação que acompanha a câmera.  Para usar um cartão de memória SD, insira-o no slot do Leitor de Cartões SD. Não force o cartão no slot; ele se encaixa somente de uma maneira. Para obter mais informações sobre os conectores, consulte a documentação do Kit de Conexão de Câmera para iPad. 2 Desbloqueie o iPad. 3 O aplicativo Fotos se abre e exibe as fotos e vídeos que estão disponíveis para importação. 4 Selecione as fotos e vídeos que deseja importar.  Para importar todos itens, toque em Importar Tudo.  Para importar somente alguns itens, toque naqueles que deseja incluir (deve aparecer um sinal em cada uma deles), depois toque em Importar e selecione Importar Selecionado. 5 Depois que as fotos foram importadas, você pode escolher manter ou apagar as fotos e vídeos do cartão, da câmera ou do iPhone. 6 Desconecte o Leitor de Cartão SD ou o Conector de Câmera. Para visualizar as fotos, procure no álbum Última Importação. Um novo Evento contém todas as fotos que foram selecionadas para importar. Para transferir as fotos do iPad para o seu computador, conecte o iPad ao seu computador e importe as imagens com um aplicativo de fotos como o iPhoto ou o Adobe Elements.Como visualizar fotos e vídeos O aplicativo Fotos permite que você visualize fotos sincronizadas do aplicativo de fotos do seu computador, importadas de uma câmera digital ou iPhone, ou salvas de uma mensagem de e-mail ou página web. O aplicativo Fotos organiza coleções por Álbuns, Eventos, Faces e Lugares. O Lugares usa as informações de local codificadas nas fotos, mas pode ser que nem todas as fotos tenham essas informações—é necessário uma câmera compatível com "geotagging". Os Eventos e Rostos devem primeiro ser configurados no iPhoto ou no Aperture em um Mac, depois sincronizados para o iPad. Para visualizar fotos: 1 No Fotos, toque em Álbuns de Fotos, Eventos, Rostos ou Lugares. Para abrir uma coleção, toque nela. Ou toque a coleção com dois dedos e afaste-os para obter uma pré-visualização das fotos, depois tire os dedos para abri-la. As fotos são ordenadas pela data de criação. 76 Capítulo 9 FotosCapítulo 9 Fotos 77 Quando você está visualizando Lugares, toque em um pino no mapa para exibir a localização, depois toque com dois dedos e afaste-os para ampliar e mostrar todas as fotos tiradas nesta localização. 2 Toque em uma miniatura para visualizar a foto em tela cheia. Você também pode unir ou afastar os dedos para ampliar ou reduzir a foto. Para mostrar ou ocultar os controles: Toque na foto para mostrar os controles. Toque novamente para ocultar os controles. Para visualizar uma foto na orientação horizontal: Vire o iPad de lado. A foto ou o vídeo são redimensionados automaticamente para se ajustar à tela.Para ampliar uma parte de uma foto: Toque duas vezes onde desejar para ampliar. Toque novamente duas vezes para reduzir. Você também pode separar ou aproximar dois dedos para ampliar ou reduzir. Para girar uma foto: Arraste a foto. Para ver a foto anterior ou a próxima foto: Passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita Ou toque na tela para mostrar a miniatura na parte inferior e depois toque ou arraste para visualizar uma foto diferente. Para apagar uma foto: Você pode apagar fotos do álbum Fotos Salvas, que contém fotos salvas de e-mails ou da web. Para fotos sincronizadas do seu computador, você necessita apagar a foto do álbum no seu computador e depois sincronizar o iPad novamente. Para girar uma foto: Toque no . Para girá-la mais, toque novamente. Para visualizar as fotos ou vídeos em um televisor usando o AirPlay e o Apple TV: Certifique-se de que o iPad está na mesma rede sem fio que o Apple TV e, em seguida, toque no e escolha o Apple TV da lista. Quando você passa os dedos pelas fotos no seu iPad, o vídeo no televisor é atualizado enquanto você pausa. Consulte o “Como usar o AirPlay” na página 48 para obter mais informações. Compartilhamento de Fotos Você pode compartilhar suas fotos como apresentação de slides, completar com música e transições. Com o AirPlay e o Apple TV, você pode transmitir sem fio as suas fotos para um televisor. Você pode enviar fotos e vídeos em mensagens de e-mail, e adicionar fotos a sua Galeria MobileMe. Você também pode copiar e colar fotos, salvar fotos de e-mails nas Fotos e salvar imagens de páginas web em um álbum. 78 Capítulo 9 FotosCapítulo 9 Fotos 79 Apresentação de Slides Você pode criar e visualizar uma apresentação de slides que mostre suas fotos com transições e música. Você pode visualizar uma apresentação de slides no iPad, ou transmiti-la sem fio para um Apple TV. Você também pode usar o iPad para visualizar uma apresentação de slides em um exibidor externo, como um projetor. Para visualizar uma apresentação de slides: 1 Toque em um álbum para abri-lo. Você pode selecionar um álbum que contém fotos, vídeos, ou ambos. Se o seu iPad possuir uma câmera, as fotos ou vídeos criados aparecerão no álbum Rolo da Câmera. 2 Toque no botão apresentação de slides e, na lista que aparecer, selecione as opções da apresentação. Você pode:  Selecionar uma música da sua biblioteca de música durante uma apresentação de slides.  Selecionar um efeito de transição que seja reproduzido entre uma foto e outra. Para definir por quanto tempo cada foto deve ser exibida, abra Geral > Ajustes > Fotos. Você também pode definir se a apresentação de slides deve ser repetida, ou deve ocorrer seguindo uma sequência aleatória. As transições disponíveis são determinadas pela forma que você visualiza a apresentação de slides. Se você estiver conectado a um Apple TV, escolha uma das transi- ções disponíveis. Se você conectar o iPad a uma TV ou projetor usando um cabo de vídeo, escolha a transição Dissolver. Para obter informações sobre a conexão a um monitor externo, consulte Capítulo 10,“Vídeos,” na página 83. 3 Toque em Iniciar Apresentação de Slides. Para parar a apresentação de slides, toque na tela. Se você estiver usando o AirPlay para transmitir fotos para um Apple TV, toque no e selecione o Apple TV da lista. Consulte o “Como usar o AirPlay” na página 48 para obter mais informações. Como enviar uma foto ou vídeo em uma mensagem de e-mail Para enviar uma foto ou vídeo: Toque em uma foto ou vídeo e toque no , depois toque em Enviar Foto por E-mail. Se você não vir , toque na tela para mostrar os controles. Para enviar várias fotos ou vídeos: Toque em um álbum e depois toque no . Toque em cada foto ou vídeo que deseja enviar (aparece uma marca em cada miniatura), depois toque em E-mail. Se o botão E-mail não estiver disponível, selecione menos itens. Para copiar uma foto ou vídeo: 1 Toque em . 2 Toque para selecionar a foto ou vídeo que você deseja copiar.3 Toque em Copiar. Para colar uma foto ou vídeo: Toque para colocar o ponto de inserção onde você deseja colar a foto ou o vídeo; em seguida, toque no ponto de inserção e em Colar. Como adicionar uma foto ou vídeo a uma Galeria do MobileMe Se você é um assinante do MobileMe, você pode adicionar fotos e vídeos do seu iPad para a sua Galeria MobileMe. Você também pode adicionar itens para as Galerias MobileMe de outras pessoas se eles permitirem contribuições por e-mail. Antes de poder adicionar fotos a uma galeria de sua conta MobileMe, você precisa:  Configure a sua conta MobileMe no iPad Se você não possui uma conta MobileMe, vá ao site www.apple.com/br/mobileme/setup/ipad.html.  Publique uma galeria MobileMe e permita a adição de fotos via e-mail ou iPad Para adicionar uma foto ou vídeo à sua galeria: Escolha uma foto ou vídeo e toque em ; em seguida, toque em “Enviar ao MobileMe”. Digite um título e uma descrição, se desejar; selecione o álbum ao qual adicionar a foto e em seguida, toque em Publicar. Se você não vir , toque na tela para mostrar os controles. O iPad diz a você quando a foto foi publicada e dá opções para visualizá-los no MobileMe ou para enviar um link a um amigo por e-mail. Para adicionar uma foto à galeria de outra pessoa: Escolha uma foto e toque em e, em seguida, toque em Enviar Foto por E-mail. Digite o endereço de e-mail do álbum e clique em Enviar. Como Salvar Fotos de Mensagens de E-mail ou Páginas Web Para salvar uma foto de uma mensagem de e-mail no seu álbum Fotos Salvas: Toque na foto e depois toque em Salvar Imagem. Se a foto não tiver sido transferida, toque no ícone transferência primeiro. Para salvar uma foto de uma página web no seu álbum Fotos Salvas: Toque na foto e mantenha-a pressionada; depois, toque em Salvar a Imagem. Para copiar fotos do álbum Fotos Salvas para seu computador: Conecte o iPad à porta USB do seu computador e depois use um aplicativo de foto, como o iPhoto em um Mac, para copiar as imagens. Como Atribuir uma Foto a um Contato Você pode atribuir uma foto a um contato. Para atribuir uma foto a um contato: 1 Escolha uma foto no iPad, em seguida toque em . 2 Toque em “Atribuir a Contato” e depois escolha um contato. 80 Capítulo 9 FotosCapítulo 9 Fotos 81 3 Arraste a foto para girá-la e una ou afaste os dedos na foto para ampliá-la ou reduzi-la, até que fique do jeito que deseja. 4 Toque em Definir Foto. Nos Contatos, você pode atribuir uma foto a um contato tocando em Editar e depois tocando no ícone da foto. Como imprimir fotos Você pode usar o AirPrint para imprimir fotos do iPad. Para imprimir uma foto: Toque no e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Toque em Selecionar Impressora para selecionar uma impressora e defina as opções de impressão, como a quantidade de cópias e, em seguida toque em Imprimir. Se a sua impressora tiver uma bandeja para papel de foto, pode ser que ela alterne automaticamente para essa bandeja quando você imprime uma foto. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Impressão” na página 42. Fotos de Imagem de Fundo e da Tela de Bloqueio Você pode mostrar uma foto como imagem de fundo da tela de Bloqueio e da tela de Início. Você pode escolher de várias fotos de imagem de fundo incluídas com o iPad, ou pode usar uma foto sua. Para definir uma foto como imagem de fundo: 1 Escolha qualquer foto e toque em , depois, toque em Imagem de Fundo 2 Arraste para girar a foto ou una ou afaste os dedos na foto para ampliá-la ou reduzi-la, até que fique do jeito que deseja. Uma foto que tem pelo menos 1024 x 1024 pixels preenche a tela quando o iPad é girado. 3 Toque em Definir Imagem de Fundo. Depois toque para usar a imagem como imagem de fundo da tela Início, da tela Bloqueio, ou ambas. Para escolher entre várias fotos de imagem de fundo incluídas com o iPad, vá para Ajustes > Brilho e Imagem de Fundo. Utilização de Porta-Retrato Quando o iPad está bloqueado, você pode exibir um álbum de fotos. Esta é uma excelente maneira de aproveitar o iPad enquanto o carrega em um Dock para iPad. Para alterar os ajustes de Porta-Retrato, vá para Ajustes > Porta-Retrato e depois ajuste qualquer uma das seguintes opções:  A transição selecionada é reproduzida entre fotos. A duração da apresentação de slides não pode ser alterada. O Porta-Retrato pode ampliar a imagem para focar nos rostos que estão nas imagens. Ele também pode selecionar aleatoriamente um dos rostos como o centro do foco, se houver mais de um rosto. O Porta-Retrato usa as informações de identifica- ção de rostos em fotos importadas do iPhoto ou do Aperture em um Mac. Ampliar os rostos não é uma opção com a transição Origami.  O Porta-Retrato pode exibir todas as fotos, ou apenas aquelas em uma categoria do Álbum, Rostos ou Evento. Selecione uma opção, depois refine sua seleção na lista que aparece. As seleções de Rostos, Álbuns e Eventos são as mesmas que as do aplicativo Fotos. Para iniciar ou parar o Porta-Retrato: 1 Pressione o botão Repousar/Despertar para bloquear o iPad. 2 Na tela de Bloqueio, toque no . 3 Toque na tela para parar a apresentação de slides, depois toque no para retornar à tela de Bloqueio ou deslize o controle para desbloquear o iPad. Para desativar o recurso Moldura, vá para Ajustes > Geral > Bloqueio por Código. 82 Capítulo 9 Fotos83 Sobre Vídeos Você pode usar o iPad para visualizar filmes, vídeos musicais, podcasts de vídeo e, se houver disponibilidade na sua área, programas de TV. O iPad também suporta recursos especiais tais como capítulos, legendas, áudio alternado e legendas ocultas. Você pode alugar ou comprar vídeos da iTunes Store e você pode usar um cabo de adaptador de vídeo para assistir vídeos em uma TV ou projetor. Se você tiver um Apple TV, você pode usar o AirPlay para assistir vídeos em um televisor. 10 VídeosComo Reproduzir Vídeos Para reproduzir um vídeo: Toque em Vídeos e depois toque em uma categoria de vídeos, tal como Filmes. Toque no vídeo que deseja visualizar. Se o vídeo possui capítulos, toque no título de um capítulo ou simplesmente toque no . Para exibir os controles de reprodução: Enquanto um vídeo está sendo reproduzido, toque na tela para mostrar os controles. Toque novamente para ocultá-los. 84 Capítulo 10 VídeosCapítulo 10 Vídeos 85 Como Controlar a Reprodução do Vídeo Gire o iPad para reproduzir vídeos em formato panorâmico e aproveitar ao máximo a tela. Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão para saltar para qualquer ponto do vídeo. Para ajustar a velocidade da progressão de rápido a lento, deslize o dedo para baixo à medida que arrasta o cursor de reprodução ao longo da barra de progressão. Pausar um vídeo Toque no ou pressione o botão central (ou botão equivalente) em um headset compatível. Retomar reprodução Toque no ou pressione o botão central (ou botão equivalente) em um headset compatível. Aumentar ou diminuir o volume Arraste o controle de volume ou use os botões de volume do iPad ou os botões em um headset compatível. Reiniciar um vídeo Arraste o cursor de reprodução da barra de progressão totalmente para a esquerda, ou toque em se o vídeo não contiver capítulos. Passar para o próximo capítulo (se disponível) Toque no ou pressione duas vezes rapidamente o botão central (ou botão equivalente) em um headset compatível. Voltar ao capítulo anterior (se disponível) Toque no ou pressione três vezes rapidamente o botão central (ou botão equivalente) em um headset compatível. Começar a reproduzir a partir de um capítulo específico (se disponível) Toque em e depois escolha um capítulo da lista. Avançar ou retroceder Toque e mantenha o toque ou no .Saltar para qualquer ponto de um vídeo Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão. Deslize seu dedo para baixo para ajustar a velocidade de progressão de rápido para lento. Interromper a visualização de um vídeo antes que a reprodução termine Toque em OK ou pressione o botão Início . Como redimensionar um vídeo para preencher ou ajustar à tela Toque no para que o vídeo preencha a tela ou toque no para que ele se ajuste à tela. Você também pode tocar duas vezes no vídeo para alternar visualizações. Quando você redimensiona um vídeo para que ele preencha a tela, talvez as laterais ou a parte superior sejam recortadas. Quando você redimensiona o vídeo para que ele se ajuste à tela, talvez você veja barras negras nas laterais ou acima e abaixo do vídeo. Reproduzir um vídeo no Apple TV usando AirPlay Toque em e escolha um Apple TV. Consulte “Como Assistir Vídeos em uma TV” na página 87. Como selecionar um idioma de áudio diferente (se disponível) Toque no e, em seguida, selecione um idioma da lista de Áudio. Mostrar ou ocultar as legendas (se disponível) Toque no e, em seguida selecione um idioma, ou Desative a partir da lista Legendas. Como mostrar ou ocultar legendas ocultas (se disponível) Toque no para mostrar ou ocultar as legendas, se houver. Sincronização de Vídeos Use o iTunes para sincronizar vídeos para o iPad. Com o iPad conectado ao seu computador, use os painéis Filmes, Programas de TV, Podcasts e iTunes U para selecionar quais vídeos sincronizar. Como Assistir a Filmes Alugados Você pode alugar filmes em formato de definição padrão ou alta definição na iTunes Store e assisti-los no iPad. Também é possível transferir filmes alugados ao iPad ou transferi-los do iTunes de seu computador para o iPad. (Os filmes alugados não estão disponíveis em todas as regiões.) Os filmes devem ter sido completamente transferidos antes de que você possa assistilos. Você pode fazer uma pausa na transferência e continuar mais tarde. Os filmes alugados vencem após um certo número de dias e, uma vez que você comece a assisti-lo, terá um tempo limitado para terminar de assistir. Os filmes são automaticamente apagados quando expiram. Antes de alugar um filme, verifique na iTunes Store o prazo do vencimento. 86 Capítulo 10 VídeosCapítulo 10 Vídeos 87 Para ver um filme alugado: Escolha Vídeos, toque na categoria Filmes e depois toque no filme que deseja assistir. Selecione um capítulo ou simplesmente toque no . Para transferir filmes alugados para o iPad: Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. Em seguida, selecione iPad na barra lateral do iTunes, clique em Filmes, e selecione os filmes alugados que você deseja transferir. O seu computador deve estar conectado à Internet. Filmes alugados no iPad não podem ser transferidos a um computador. Como Assistir Vídeos em uma TV Para assistir vídeos em uma TV, você pode conectar o iPad usando o AirPlay e o Apple TV, ou usar um cabo para conectar o iPad diretamente a seu televisor ou receptor AV. Para obter informações sobre como conectar o iPad com um televisor ou projetor, consulte “Vídeo” na página 185. Para conectar usando o AirPlay: Inicie a reprodução de vídeo e, em seguida, toque em e escolha o seu Apple TV da lista de dispositivos AirPlay. Consulte o “Como usar o AirPlay” na página 48 para obter mais informações. Enquanto o vídeo está sendo reproduzido, você pode sair do Vídeo e usar outros aplicativos. Para retornar a reprodução para o iPad: Abra Vídeos e, em seguida toque em e escolha o seu iPad da lista. Como apagar vídeos do iPad Para economizar espaço, você pode apagar vídeos do iPad. Para apagar um vídeo: Na lista de vídeos , mantenha o toque em um filme até aparecer o botão apagar e depois toque no . Toque em Cancelar ou Início quando terminar de apagar vídeos. Quando você apaga um vídeo (que não sejam filmes alugados) do iPad, ele não é eliminado da sua biblioteca do iTunes no seu computador e você pode sincronizar o vídeo de volta para o iPad mais tarde. Se você não quiser sincronizar o vídeo de volta para o iPad, ajuste o iTunes para que ele não sincronize o vídeo. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. Importante: Se você apagar um filme alugado do iPad, ele será apagado permanentemente e não poderá ser transferido de volta para o seu computador.88 Como Buscar e Visualizar Vídeos O YouTube apresenta vídeos curtos enviados por pessoas do mundo inteiro. Você pode assistir os últimos e mais populares vídeos, buscar por vídeos pelos temas de interesse, marcar seus favoritos e rapidamente acessar vídeos que você transferiu para o YouTube do seu computador. Para usar certos recursos no iPad, é preciso iniciar sessão em uma conta do YouTube quando solicitado. Para obter mais informações sobre os requisitos e sobre como obter uma conta do YouTube, visite o site www.youtube.com. Nota: O YouTube não está disponível em todos os idiomas e localizações. Para usar o YouTube, o iPad deve ter uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Para navegar pelos vídeos: Toque em um botão na barra de ferramentas para selecionar uma categoria.  Em Destaque: Vídeos revisados e destacados pela equipe do YouTube.  Melhores: Vídeos melhor avaliados pelos usuários do YouTube. Você pode classificar vídeos no iPad se possuir uma conta no YouTube.  Mais Vistos: Vídeos mais vistos pelos usuários do YouTube. Toque em Tudo para ver Todos para os vídeos mais vistos de todos os tempos ou em Hoje ou Esta Semana para os vídeos mais vistos do dia ou da semana.  Favoritos: Vídeos que você adicionou aos Favoritos. Quando você inicia sessão com uma conta do YouTube, aparece os favoritos da conta.  Mais Recentes: Vídeos enviados recentemente ao YouTube.  Assinaturas: Vídeos de contas do YouTube que você assina. Para usar este recurso, é preciso iniciar sessão em uma conta do YouTube. 11 YouTubeCapítulo 11 YouTube 89  Listas: Vídeos que você adiciona às listas. Para usar este recurso, é preciso iniciar sessão em uma conta do YouTube.  Meus Vídeos: Vídeos que você transferiu para o YouTube. Para usar este recurso, é preciso iniciar sessão em uma conta do YouTube.  Histórico: Vídeos que você viu recentemente. Para buscar um vídeo: 1 Toque no campo de busca do YouTube. 2 Digite uma palavra ou frase e depois toque em Buscar. O YouTube mostra os resultados baseado na busca de títulos de vídeo, descrições, etiquetas e nomes de usuário. Cada resultado de busca mostra o título, a classificação, o número de visualizações, o comprimento e o nome da conta de onde o vídeo foi colocado. Para reproduzir um vídeo: Toque no vídeo. O vídeo começa a ser transferido para o iPad e aparece uma barra de progresso. Quando tiver sido transferida uma parte suficiente do vídeo, ele começa a ser reproduzido. Você também pode tocar no para iniciar o vídeo. Como Controlar a Reprodução do Vídeo Gire o iPad para orientação horizontal para visualizar o vídeo no seu tamanho máximo. Quando um vídeo está sendo reproduzido, os controles desaparecem para não ficarem na frente do vídeo. Para mostrar ou ocultar os controles de vídeo: Toque na tela.Reproduzir ou Colocar um Vídeo em Pausa Toque no ou no . Você também pode pressionar o botão central (ou botão equivalente) em um headset compatível. Ajustar o volume Arraste o controle de volume ou use os botões de volume do iPad ou os botões de volume de um headset compatível. Reiniciar um vídeo Toque em . Para passar para o próximo vídeo ou para o vídeo anterior de uma lista Toque em duas vezes para saltar para o vídeo anterior. Toque no para saltar para o próximo vídeo. Avançar ou retroceder Toque e mantenha o toque ou no . Saltar para qualquer ponto de um vídeo Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão. Para parar de assistir um vídeo Toque em OK ou pressione o botão Início . Alternar entre os modos padrão e tela cheia Toque duas vezes no vídeo. Você também pode tocar no para que o vídeo preencha a tela ou tocar no para que ele se ajuste à tela. Para adicionar um vídeo aos Favoritos Comece a reproduzir um vídeo e toque no . Enviar um link do vídeo por e-mail Comece a reproduzir um vídeo e toque no . Reproduzir um vídeo no Apple TV usando AirPlay Toque em e escolha um Apple TV. Para obter informações, consulte “Como usar o AirPlay” na página 48. Para visualizar informação sobre um vídeo Toque em para sair do modo tela cheia e visualizar vídeos, comentários e outros controles relacionados. 90 Capítulo 11 YouTubeCapítulo 11 YouTube 91 Como gerenciar os vídeos Quando estiver assistindo um vídeo em tela cheia, toque para mostrar o controlador e depois toque no para ver vídeos relacionados e opções para gerenciar vídeos. Para classificar ou adicionar um comentário a um vídeo Toque no vídeo para exibir a barra de ferramentas e depois toque em Classificar e selecione uma classificação.. Você deve ter iniciado sessão em uma conta do YouTube. Para ver mais vídeos deste usuário do YouTube Na barra lateral, toque em “Mais De”. Você deve ter iniciado sessão em uma conta do YouTube. Para ver vídeos similares a este Na barra lateral, toque em “Relacionado(a)”. Para assinar vídeos deste usuário do YouTube Na tela Mais Informações, toque em Mais Vídeos; em seguida, toque em “Assinar ” no final da lista de vídeos. Você deve ter iniciado sessão em uma conta do YouTube. Para adicionar um vídeo aos Favoritos ou a uma lista Toque em Adicionar e depois selecione Favoritos ou uma lista. Para enviar um link de um vídeo por e-mail Toque em Compartilhar. Para marcar um vídeo Toque no filme para exibir a barra de ferramentas e depois toque no . Como Assistir o YouTube em uma TV Se você tiver um Apple TV, você pode usar o AirPlay para assistir vídeos do YouTube em um televisor. Consulte “Como Controlar a Reprodução do Vídeo” na página 89. Você pode conectar o iPad diretamente a sua TV ou a um projetor e assistir o YouTube na tela grande. Para obter mais informações sobre como usar o iPad com uma TV ou projetor, consulte “Vídeo” na página 185.92 Sobre o Calendário O iPad facilita seguir uma agenda de horários. Você pode visualizar calendários individualmente ou vários calendários ao mesmo tempo. Você pode visualizar seus eventos por dia, semana ou mês, ou em uma lista. Você também pode buscar eventos por título, convidados ou localização. Também é possível sincronizar o iPad com os calendários do seu computador. Você pode também criar, editar ou cancelar eventos no iPad e sincronizá-los com o seu computador. Também é possível assinar calendários do Google, Yahoo! ou iCal. Também é possível assinar calendários iCalendar (.ics) somente para leitura ou importar arquivos .ics do e-mail. Se possuir uma conta Microsoft Exchange ou uma conta CaIDAV compatível, você poderá receber e responder aos convites de reuniões de outras pessoas e convidar pessoas para eventos que agendou. Como Sincronizar Calendários Você pode sincronizar seus calendários das seguintes formas:  No iTunes, use o painel Ajustes do iPad para sincronizar com o iCal ou Microsoft Entourage no Mac, ou com Microsoft Outlook em um PC ao conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25.  Nos Ajustes do iPad, ative a opção Calendários na sua conta MobileMe, Google, Yahoo! ou Microsoft Exchange para sincronizar sem fios as informações de seu calendário. Se a sua empresa ou organização for compatível com ele, você também pode configurar uma conta CalDAV. Consulte “Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário” na página 32. Para sincronizar os calendários com o método over the air, o iPad deve estar conectado à Internet. 12 CalendárioCapítulo 12 Calendário 93 Como adicionar, editar e apagar eventos do calendário Você pode criar e editar eventos do calendário diretamente no iPad. Se você possui uma conta Microsoft Exchange com os calendários ativados ou uma conta CaIDAV compatível, poderá convidar outras pessoas para o seu evento ou reunião. Para adicionar um evento: Toque no e digite uma informação de evento e, em seguida, toque em OK. Você pode digitar o seguinte:  Título  Local  Hora de início e finalização (ou ativar Dia inteiro se for um evento que dura o dia inteiro)  Repetições—nenhuma, ou a cada dia, a cada semana, a cada duas semanas, a cada mês ou a cada ano  Hora do Alerta—de cinco minutos até dois dias antes do evento Quando você define um alerta, aparece a opção para definir um segundo alerta. Quando ocorre um alerta, o iPad exibe uma mensagem. Para ajustar o iPad para reproduzir um som, consulte “Alertas” na página 97. Importante: Quando você viaja, o iPad pode não alertar você na hora local correta. Para ajustar a hora correta manualmente, consulte “Data e Hora” na página 176. Para obter informações sobre como ajustar o fuso horário do calendário, consulte “Como Visualizar seus Calendários” na página 93.  Notas Se você tiver mais de um calendário, você pode selecionar em qual calendário adicionar o evento. Calendários apenas para leitura não aparecem na lista. Como editar um evento Toque em o evento e depois em Editar. Como apagar um evento Toque no evento, toque em Editar, depois role para baixo e toque em Apagar Evento. Como Visualizar seus Calendários Você pode visualizar um único calendário, calendários selecionados, ou todos os calendários de uma vez. Isso facilita o gerenciamento dos calendários de trabalho e da família ao mesmo tempo. Para visualizar um calendário diferente: Toque em Calendários e, em seguida, selecione os calendários que deseja visualizar. Para visualizar os aniversários dos seus contatos, como definido em Contatos, selecione o calendários de Aniversários.Você pode visualizar calendários em uma lista, ou por dia, semana ou mês. Os eventos de todos os calendários selecionados aparecem no iPad. Para alternar visualizações: Toque em Lista, Dia, Semana ou Mês.  Visualização em lista: Todos os seus compromissos e eventos aparecem em uma lista navegável, próxima ao dia selecionado. Para visualizar outro dia, toque em ou ou selecione um dia no controle de tempo abaixo do calendário.  Visualização por Dia: Role para cima e para baixo para ver os eventos daquele dia. Toque em ou para ver os eventos do dia anterior ou do próximo dia, ou selecionar um dia no controle de tempo abaixo do calendário.  Visualização por semana: Role para cima ou para baixo para ver os eventos da semana. Toque em ou para ver a semana anterior ou próxima, ou selecionar uma semana no controle de tempo abaixo do calendário. 94 Capítulo 12 CalendárioCapítulo 12 Calendário 95  Visualização mensal: Toque num dia para visualizar seus eventos. Toque em ou para ver o mês anterior ou próximo, ou selecionar um mês no controle de tempo abaixo do calendário. Para ver os detalhes de um evento: Toque no evento. Para ver os eventos ajustados para um fuso horário: Em Ajustes, vá para “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”. Em Calendários, toque em Gestão Fuso Horário. Ative a Gestão Fuso Horário e selecione uma cidade principal para o fuso horário que deseja usar. Quando a Gestão Fuso Horário está desativada, o iPad Wi-Fi + 3G exibe os eventos no fuso horário da sua localização atual, conforme determinada pela hora da rede celular. Como buscar nos calendários Em seus calendários, você pode buscar por títulos, convidados, notas e localizações dos eventos. O Calendário busca apenas o calendário ou calendários que você está visualizando no momento. Para buscar eventos: Digite texto no campo de busca. Os resultados da busca aparecem à medida que você digita. Toque em um resultado para visualizar o evento. Toque no calendário para fechar a lista dos resultados da busca. Como Assinar Calendários Você pode assinar calendários que utilizem formato iCalendar (.ics). Muitos serviços com base no calendário, incluindo Yahoo!, Google e iCal no Mac, são compatíveis com as inscrições de calendários. Os calendários assinados são somente para leitura. Você pode ler os eventos dos calendários assinados no iPad, mas não pode editá-los nem criar novos eventos. Para assinar um calendário CalDAV ou .ics: 1 Em Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e toque em Adicionar Conta. 2 Selecione Outros e, em seguida, selecione Adicionar Calendário Assinado. 3 Digite as informações da conta e toque em Próximo para verificar a inscrição. 4 Toque em Salvar. A Apple fornece links a vários calendários iCal gratuitos—para feriados nacionais ou eventos esportivos, por exemplo—os quais talvez você queira assinar. Você também pode assinar um calendário iCal (ou outro calendário .ics) publicado na web tocando em um link do calendário que você tenha recebido por uma mensagem de e-mail no iPad. Como Responder a Convites de Reuniões Se você possui uma conta do Microsoft Exchange no iPad com os calendários ativados, ou uma conta CalDAV compatível, ou um calendário MobileMe, você pode receber e responder aos convites de reuniões de pessoas da sua empresa. Quando você recebe um convite, a reunião aparece no seu calendário com uma linha pontilhada ao seu redor. O ícone no canto inferior direito da tela mostra a quantidade de novos convites que você possui. Para receber e responder aos convites de reuniões, o iPad deve possuir uma conexão à Internet. Para responder a um convite do Calendário: 1 Toque em um convite de reunião do calendário, ou toque em para exibir a tela Evento e toque em convite.  Toque em "Convite de” para obter as informações de contato do organizador da reunião. Toque no endereço de e-mail para enviar uma mensagem ao organizador.  Toque em Convidados para ver quem foi convidado para a reunião. Toque em um nome para ver as informações de contato dos participantes. Toque em um endereço de e-mail para enviar uma mensagem ao participante.  Toque em Alerta para que o iPad reproduza um alerta sonoro antes da reunião.  Toque em Adicionar Comentários para adicionar comentários para o organizador da reunião. Seus comentários também aparecerão na tela Informações da reunião As notas são criadas pelo organizador da reunião. 2 Toque em Aceitar, Talvez ou Recusar. Quando você toca nas opções aceitar, talvez ou recusar o convite, um e-mail de resposta que inclui todos os comentários que você adicionou é enviado ao organizador. Você pode alterar sua resposta depois, a não ser que recusar o convite. Toque em Adicionar Comentários para alterar ou adicionar comentários. 96 Capítulo 12 CalendárioCapítulo 12 Calendário 97 Como importar arquivos do Calendário a partir do Mail Você pode adicionar eventos a um calendário importando um arquivo de calendário de uma mensagem de e-mail. Você pode importar qualquer arquivo de calendário .ics padrão. Para importar eventos de um arquivo de calendário: No Mail, abra a mensagem e toque no arquivo de calendário. Quando a lista de eventos aparece, toque em Adicionar Tudo, escolha o calendário ao qual deseja adicionar os eventos e toque em OK. Alertas Para definir alertas de calendário: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Sons, depois ative a opção Alertas de Calendário. Se a opção Alertas de Calendário estiver desativada quando ocorrer um evento, o iPad exibe uma mensagem mas não emite som. Para emitir os alertas de convites: Nos Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”. Abaixo de Calendários, toque em Alerta de Novo Convite para ativá-lo.98 Sobre os Contatos O iPad permite que você acesse e edite facilmente suas listas de contato das suas contas pessoais, empresariais e organizacionais. Você pode buscar por todos os seus grupos, e as informações dos Contatos são automaticamente acessadas para que o endereçamento de e-mails seja rápido e fácil. Você pode adicionar contatos diretamente no iPad ou sincronizar contatos a partir dos aplicativos do seu computador. Se você tiver uma conta MobileMe ou Microsoft Exchange com Contatos ativada, ou uma conta CardDAV compatível, você pode sincronizar seus contatos sem conectar o iPad ao seu computador. 13 ContatosCapítulo 13 Contatos 99 Como Sincronizar e Adicionar Contatos Você pode adicionar contatos ao iPad das seguintes formas:  Digite contatos no iPad  No iTunes, sincronize contatos do Google ou Yahoo! ou sincronize com aplicativos do seu computador (consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25)  Configure uma conta do MobileMe ou do Microsoft Exchange no iPad com os Contatos ativados (consulte “Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário” na página 32)  Instale um perfil que configure uma conta Exchange com os Contatos ativados (consulte “Como Configurar Contas do Microsoft Exchange” na página 189)  Configure uma conta LDAP ou CardDAV no iPad para acessar diretórios do trabalho ou da escola (consulte “Contas LDAP e CardDAV” na página 190) Como Buscar Contatos Você pode buscar nomes, sobrenomes e nomes de empresas nos seus contatos do iPad. Se você possui uma conta Microsoft Exchange no iPad, talvez também consiga buscar os contatos na lista GAL (Global Address List) da sua empresa. Se tiver uma conta LDAP no iPad, poderá buscar contatos no servidor LDAP de sua organização. Se possuir uma conta CardDAV, você pode buscar contatos sincronizados ao iPad ou contatos que permitem buscas em um servidor CardDAV disponível. Quando você digita as informações de busca, os contatos com as informações coincidentes aparecem à medida que digita. Para buscar contatos: Em Contatos, toque no campo de busca no topo da tela e insira um nome, sobrenome ou nome de empresa. Para rolar rapidamente até o topo da lista, toque na barra de estado. Para buscar em uma GAL: Toque em Grupos, toque no nome do servidor Exchange, depois digite um nome, um sobrenome ou um nome de empresa. Você não pode editar contatos GAL ou salvá-los no iPad. Para buscar em um servidor LDAP: Toque em Grupos, toque no nome do servidor LDAP e digite um nome, um sobrenome ou um nome de empresa. Você não pode editar contatos LDAP ou salvá-los no iPad. Buscar um servidor CardDAV:Toque em Grupos, toque no grupo CardDAV que permite buscas na parte inferior da lista e, em seguida, digite sua busca. Você não pode editar contatos CardDAV que permitem buscas a partir do servidor, mas pode editar contatos CardDAV sincronizados no iPad.Como gerenciar contatos Você pode editar os seus contatos e marcar aqueles que você usa frequentemente com o FaceTime como favorito Para adicionar um contato ao iPad: Toque Contatos e, em seguida, toque em . Apagar um contato Em Contatos, escolha um contato, depois toque em Editar. Role para baixo e toque em Apagar Contato. Adicionar um contato nos Favoritos do FaceTime Nos Contatos, escolha um contato, depois toque em Favoritos. Editar os Favoritos do FaceTime No FaceTime, toque em Favoritos e, em seguida, toque em Editar. Para apagar um item, toque o . Editar informações de contato Em Contatos, escolha um contato, depois toque em Editar. Para adicionar um item, toque o . Para apagar um item, toque o . Para atribuir uma foto a um contato: 1 Toque em Contatos e depois escolha um contato. 2 Toque em Editar e toque em Adicionar Foto, ou toque na foto existente. 3 Toque em um álbum, depois toque e uma foto.. 4 Arraste e redimensione a foto. 5 Toque em Escolher. Como Utilizar as Informações de um Contato Você pode utilizar as informações da tela Informações de um contato para:  Criar uma mensagem de e-mail no Mail, endereçada ao contato  Abrir a página Inicial do contato no Safari  Buscar a localização do endereço do contato nos Mapas e obter instruções  Compartilhar as informações do contato com outras pessoas  Ligar para um contato usando o FaceTime Para usar a tela de informações de um contato: Toque em Contatos e escolha um contato, em seguida toque em um item. Para realizar uma videoconferência do FaceTime: Toque em Contatos e escolha um contato e, em seguida, toque em FaceTime e escolha um endereço de e-mail ou nú- mero de telefone a ser usado para a ligação. Se não estiver conseguindo ver o botão FaceTime, ative o FaceTime em Ajustes > FaceTime. 100 Capítulo 13 ContatosCapítulo 13 Contatos 101 Contatos Unificados Ao sincronizar contatos com várias contas, talvez você tenha entradas para a mesma pessoa em mais de uma conta. Para impedir que os contatos redundantes apareçam na lista Todos os Contatos, você pode vincular os contatos que possuem os mesmos nomes e sobrenomes (mas não um prefixo, sufixo ou segundo nome diferente) e exibi-los como um único contato unificado. Ao visualizar um contato unificado, o título Informação Unificada aparece na parte inferior da entrada do contato. Os contatos unificados somente aparecem quando você visualiza a lista Todos os Contatos. Para vincular contatos: Encontre o primeiro contato que você deseja vincular e, em seguida, toque em Editar. Toque em e selecione o outro contato e, em seguida, toque em Vincular. Quando um contato estiver vinculado, toque no ícone da silhueta para visualizar, adicionar ou apagar entradas vinculadas. Os contatos vinculados não são combinados. A menos que você edite um contato unificado, o contato em cada conta de origem permanecerá separado. Se você alterar as informações em um contato unificado, as alterações são copiadas para cada conta de origem onde já existem informações. Se você adicionar informações a um contato unificado, as informações são adicionadas ao contato em cada conta de origem.102 Como Escrever e Ler Notas Com a sua tela ampla e o teclado na tela, o iPad torna fácil realizar notas. Você pode visualizar notas na vertical ou na horizontal. Na vertical, toque em Notas para visualizar uma lista das suas notas. Na horizontal, a lista de notas aparece na esquerda, e a nota atual é circundada em vermelho. As notas são listadas pela última data modificada, com a nota mais recente no topo. A lista mostra as primeiras palavras de cada nota. Toque em uma nota na lista para visualizá-la ou editá-la. Para adicionar uma nota: Toque no , digite a nota, depois toque em OK. Para ler uma nota: Toque na nota. Toque na ou na para ver a nota seguinte ou o anterior. Para editar uma nota: Toque em qualquer lugar da nota para que apareça o teclado. Edite a nota, depois toque em OK. 14 NotasCapítulo 14 Notas 103 Para apagar uma nota: Toque na nota, depois toque no . Para alterar a fonte usada para exibir as notas: Nos Ajustes, escolha Notas e selecione uma fonte da lista. Como buscar notas Você pode buscar pelo texto das notas para encontrar uma nota em particular. Como buscar notas: Digite texto no campo de busca que aparece na parte superior da lista de notas. (Na vertical, toque em Notas para exibir a lista das notas.) Os resultados da busca aparecem automaticamente à medida que você digita. Toque no botão do teclado para que o teclado desapareça e você possa ver mais resultados. Para visualizar uma nota, toque nela na lista de resultados da busca. Como Enviar Notas por E-Mail Para enviar uma nota por e-mail: Toque na nota e, em seguida toque no . Para enviar uma nota por e-mail, o iPad deve estar configurado para e-mail. Consulte “Como Configurar Contas de E-mail” na página 56. Para sincronizar as notas Você pode ajustar o iTunes para sincronizar automaticamente as suas notas com alguns aplicativos de e-mail. Consulte “Como configurar a sincronização” na página 25. Você também pode sincronizar as notas com o método over the air, quando o iPad possuir uma conexão com a Internet. Vá para Ajustes > Notas e, em seguida, selecione a conta de correio padrão para sincronização das notas. As novas notas criadas no iPad serão armazenadas na conta que você selecionar. Para visualizar as notas armazenadas em uma conta específica, abra Notas e toque em Contas.104 Sobre os Mapas O Mapas fornecem visualizações clássicas, de satélite, do terreno e híbridas de localiza- ções em vários países. Busque uma localização, depois obtenha orientações para dirigir, caminhar ou sobre o transporte público, assim como informações sobre o tráfego. ADVERTÊNCIA: Para obter informações importantes sobre a segurança na direção e navegação, consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. Para usar o Mapas, o iPad deve ter uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectarse à Internet” na página 30. Importante: Mapas, endereços e aplicativos baseados na localização fornecidos pela Apple dependem de serviços de dados fornecidos por terceiros. Estes serviços de dados estão sujeitos a alterações e talvez não estejam disponíveis em todas as áreas geográficas, resultados nos mapas, direções, ou informações baseadas em localização que talvez não estejam disponíveis, sejam imprecisas ou incompletas. Compare as informações fornecidas no iPad com as redondezas e consulte a sinalização viária para solucionar qualquer discrepância. Para fornecer a sua localização, são coletados dados que não identificam você pessoalmente. Se você não quiser que estes dados sejam coletados, não utilize o recurso. O fato de não utilizar esse recurso não afetará a funcionalidade do seu iPad que não seja baseada em localização. Se os serviços de localização estiverem desativados quando abrir os Mapas pela primeira vez, será solicitado a você que ative estes serviços. Você pode utilizar os Mapas sem a necessidade de ativar os serviços de localização. Consulte “Serviços de Localização” na página 169. 15 MapasCapítulo 15 Mapas 105 Como Buscar e Visualizar Localizações Você pode fazer buscas por localizações, buscar sua localização atual, colocar um alfinete para marcar uma localização e obter diferentes visualizações de mapas, incluindo as do Google Street. Como buscar Localizações Você pode buscar localizações de várias maneiras—por endereço, cruzamento, área, ponto de referência, favoritos, contato ou código postal. Como encontrar uma localização e ver um mapa: 1 Toque no campo de busca para que o teclado apareça. 2 Digite um endereço ou outra informação de busca. 3 Toque em Buscar. Um alfinete marca a localização. Toque para obter informações sobre a localização, obter itinerários, adicionar a localização dos seus favoritos ou lista de contatos, ou enviar um link por e-mail para o Google Maps. Uma localização pode incluir lugares de interesse adicionados pelos usuários do Google My Maps (“Conteúdo criado pelo usuário”), e links patrocinados que aparecem como ícones especiais (por exemplo, ).Para ampliar Toque o mapa com dois dedos. Ou toque duas vezes na parte que deseja ampliar. Toque novamente duas vezes para ampliar ainda mais. Para reduzir Toque a tela com dois dedos e separe-os no mapa. Ou toque no mapa com dois dedos. Toque com dois dedos novamente para reduzir ainda mais. Para girar ou rolar Arraste para cima, para baixo, para a esquerda ou para a direita para visualizar uma parte diferente do mapa. Para ver a localização de uma entrada da sua lista de Contatos: Toque no na parte superior da tela e escolha um contato. O contato deve incluir pelo menos um endereço. Se o contato tiver mais de um endereço, escolha aquele que deseja localizar. Você também pode tocar no endereço nos Contatos para encontrar uma localização. Como Encontrar sua Localização Atual Um toque rápido busca a sua localização atual. A bússola digital na tela mostra a dire- ção para a qual você está orientado. Para buscar a sua localização atual: Toque no na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. Um marcador azul mostra a sua localização atual. Se o Mapas não puder determinar a sua localização exata, um círculo azul aparecerá ao redor do marcador. O tamanho do círculo depende da precisão em que sua localização pode ser determinada: quanto menor for o círculo, maior a precisão. Se você arrastar o mapa, depois toque no novamente, o iPad centraliza o mapa de volta a sua localização atual. Para usar a bússola digital: Toque no uma segunda vez. O é alterado para e uma pequena bússola digital aparece na tela. Use a bússola digital para buscar a direção para a qual você está orientado. Nota: Você deve calibrar a bússola da primeira vez que for utilizar e depois talvez tenha que calibrá-la de vez em quando. Para calibrar a bússola: Quando aparece o símbolo de calibragem mova o iPad formando o número oito no ar. Talvez seja solicitado que você se afaste de uma fonte de interferência. Para saber qual é a sua direção: Mantenha o iPad na posição horizontal. A bússola gira para apontar o norte. Para retornar à visualização do mapa: Toque no para voltar à visualização do mapa. 106 Capítulo 15 MapasCapítulo 15 Mapas 107 Para determinar a sua localização, o iPad utiliza os Serviços de Localização. Os Serviços de Localização usam informações disponíveis de redes Wi-Fi locais se o recurso Wi-Fi estiver ativado. Este recurso não está disponível em todas as áreas. A sua localização atual não pode ser encontrada se os Serviços de Localização estiverem desativados, então talvez seja pedido que você o ative. Consulte “Serviços de Localização” na página 169. Quando não estiver usando os Serviços de Localização, você pode desativá-los para conversar a bateria. Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Serviços de Localização. Para obter mais informações sobre sua localização atual: Toque no marcador azul e, em seguida, toque em . O iPad exibe o endereço de sua localização atual, se disponível. Você pode utilizar esta informação para:  Para obter itinerários a partir de e para esta localização  Adicionar a localização aos contatos  Para enviar o endereço por e-mail  Marcar a localização como favorito  Para ver uma visualização de rua (quando disponível) Como Marcar uma Localização com um Alfinete O alfinete permite que você marque uma localização manualmente. Para colocar um alfinete:Mantenha pressionada qualquer localização no mapa. Ou, você pode arrastar ou tocar no canto inferior direito da tela, depois tocar em Alfinete. Um alfinete é colocado no mapa. Mantenha o toque sobre o alfinete, depois arraste-o a qualquer localização que escolher.Como Guardar as Localizações nos Favoritos Você pode colocar em favoritos qualquer localização que deseja encontrar de novo posteriormente. Para guardar uma localização nos favoritos: Busque uma localização, toque no alfinete, toque no próximo ao nome ou descrição, depois toque em “Adicionar aos Favoritos.” Para ver uma localização favorita ou vista recentemente: Toque no na parte superior da tela, depois toque em Favoritos ou Recentes. Para limpar a lista de recentes: Toque em Limpar. Para organizar ou apagar um favorito: Toque em Editar. 108 Capítulo 15 MapasCapítulo 15 Mapas 109 Visualizações de Mapas Você pode escolher uma visualização clássica, de satélite, de terreno ou híbrida. Você também pode ver uma localização na visualização rua, se disponível. Para alterar a visualização: Toque ou arraste o canto superior direito da tela, depois toque em Clássico, Satélite, Híbrido ou Terreno. Para ver a visualização de uma rua: Toque em um alfinete fixado, depois toque no . Você pode passar o dedo para cima ou para baixo, para a esquerda ou para a direita para girar através da visualização panorâmica 360°. O mapa em miniatura no canto inferior direito mostra sua visualização atual. Toque em uma seta para deslocar-se pela rua. A visualização de ruas não está disponível em todas as áreas. Para retornar à visualização do mapa, toque na miniatura. Toque para retornar à visualização do mapaComo Obter Itinerários Você pode obter itinerários passo-a-passo para dirigir, caminhar ou de transporte público. Para obter itinerários: 1 Toque em Itinerários. 2 Toque nos campos na parte superior da tela para digitar sua localização inicial e de destino. Normalmente, o iPad começa com sua localização atual (se disponível). Se um endereço estiver na sua lista de contatos, toque no , escolha o contato e toque em Instruções Até Aqui e Instruções a Partir Daqui. Toque no para reverter o itinerário. 3 Selecione os itinerários para dirigir carro ( ), transporte público ( ) ou para ir a pé ( ) na parte inferior da tela. As opções de viagem disponíveis dependem do itinerário. 4 Proceda de uma das seguintes maneiras:  Para visualizar o itinerário um passo de cada vez, toque em Início e depois toque na para ver o próximo trecho da viagem. Toque em para voltar.  Para visualizar todo o itinerário em uma listatoque em Iniciar e depois toque no . Toque em qualquer item da lista para ver um mapa mostrando aquele trecho da viagem. Toque em Visão Geral da Rota para voltar à tela de visão geral. Também é possível obter itinerários buscando uma localização no mapa, tocando no alfinete que aponta para ela, tocando o e, em seguida, tocando em Itinerários até aqui ou Itinerários a partir daqui. Para reverter o itinerário: Toque no para alternar o ponto inicial e o ponto final. Para ver os itinerários visualizados recentemente:Toque no no campo de busca, depois toque em Recentes. Para ver itinerários para dirigir ou caminhar: Toque no ou . Se você estiver dirigindo ou caminhando, a distância aproximada e o tempo da viagem aparecem na tela. Se houver dados disponíveis sobre o tráfego, o tempo da viagem se ajusta apropriadamente. Para ver itinerários do transporte público: Toque no .  Toque no para definir a hora de saída ou chegada e escolha uma programação para a viagem.  Toque em Iniciar, depois toque no para ver a tela Visão Geral da Rota. Desta tela, você vê o tempo estimado de chegada, o preço total, informações sobre cada trecho da viagem, e o modo de transporte—incluindo onde você precisa caminhar. 110 Capítulo 15 MapasCapítulo 15 Mapas 111 Como Mostrar as Condições de Tráfego Quando disponível, é possível exibir as condições de tráfico das ruas principais e estradas no mapa. Para mostrar ou ocultar as condições de tráfego: Toque ou arraste a esquina inferior direita da tela, depois ative ou desative Tráfego. Verde= limite de  velocidade anunciado Amarelo = mais  lento que o limite  de velocidade  anunciado Vermelho =  pare e siga As ruas e rodovias possuem um código de cor de acordo ao fluxo ou tráfego: Se uma rua ou rodovia estiver cinza, as informações do tráfego não estão disponíveis. Se você não conseguir ver as condições de tráfego, reduza para ver as rodovias principais. As condições de tráfego não estão disponíveis em todas as áreas. Como Buscar e Contatar Empresas Para buscar empresas em uma área: 1 Busque uma localização—por exemplo, uma cidade ou uma rua—ou role até uma localização no mapa. 2 Digite o tipo de negócio no campo de Busca e toque em Buscar no teclado. Aparecem alfinetes para coincidir com as localizações na área. Por exemplo, se você localizar a sua cidade e depois digitar “filmes” e tocar em Buscar, os alfinetes marcam os cinemas da sua cidade. Toque no alfinete que marca uma empresa para ver o seu nome ou descrição. Para buscar uma empresa sem buscar antes a localização: Digite algo como:  restaurantes rio de janeiro rj  apple inc nova iorquePara contatar uma empresa ou obter endereços: Toque no alfinete que marca uma empresa e, em seguida, toque no ao lado do nome. De lá, você pode fazer o seguinte:  Toque em Instruções até Aqui ou Instruções a Partir Daqui para encontrar itinerários.  Toque em Página Inicial para visitar o site, ou E-mail para enviar um e-mail.  Toque em “Adicionar Contatos“, depois toque em “Criar Novo Contato“, ou toque em “Adicionar a Contato”.  Como compartilhar a localização do negócio por e-mail.  Toque no para ver a visualização da rua. Para ver uma lista de empresas encontradas na busca: Toque no no campo de busca. Escolha um negócio na lista de Resultados para ver sua localização. Toque no alfinete que marca uma empresa e, em seguida, toque no ao lado do nome para ver suas informações. 112 Capítulo 15 MapasCapítulo 15 Mapas 113 Como Compartilhar Informações de Localização Você pode adicionar uma localização aos seus contatos. Você também pode enviar links a uma localização por e-mail. Para adicionar uma localização à sua lista de contatos: Encontre uma localização, toque no alfinete que aponta para ela, toque no próximo ao nome ou descrição, toque em “Adicionar a Contatos” e, em seguida, pressione “Criar Novo Contato” ou “Adicionar a Contato ”. Para enviar o link de uma localização no mapa por e-mail Busque uma localiza- ção, toque no alfinete fixado nela, toque no e depois toque em Compartilhar Localização. 114 Como adicionar música e mais ao iPad Navegue pela sua coleção musical por música, artista, álbum, gênero ou compositor. Escute suas músicas, audiolivros e podcasts. Crie e gerencie listas ou use o Genius para criar listas para você. Transmita a sua música, podcasts ou audiolivros sem fio para um Apple TV usando o AirPlay. Existem duas maneiras de obter música, vídeos e outro conteúdo para o iPad:  Para transferir o conteúdo sincronizando-o do iTunes para o seu computador. Você pode sincronizar toda a sua música ou pode selecionar músicas, podcasts e coleções iTunes U específicas. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25.  Utilize a iTunes Store no iPad para comprar e transferir músicas, álbuns, programas de TV, filmes, videoclipes e audiolivros. Você também pode transmitir e transferir podcasts de áudio e vídeo, assim como conteúdo do iTunes U. Depois de escutar um podcast ou de assistir um programa de TV, você pode tocar em um link para obter mais episódios da iTunes Store. Consulte Capítulo 17,“iTunes Store,” na página 123. Reprodução de Música e Outros Áudios Escute áudio usando o alto-falante integrado. Você também pode conectar fones de ouvido cabeados na porta para fones de ouvido ou emparelhar fones de ouvido sem fio Bluetooth. O som não sai pelo alto-falante quando você conecta os fones de ouvido. ADVERTÊNCIA: Para obter informações importantes sobre como evitar perda de audição, consulte o Guia de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad em support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. 16 iPodCapítulo 16 iPod 115 Reprodução de Músicas Para navegar por sua coleção: Toque em Música, Podcasts, Audiolivros, iTunes U ou Adquirido. Na parte inferior da tela, toque em Músicas, Artistas, Álbuns, Gêneros ou Compositores para navegar. Para navegar por listas do Genius ou pela Seleção do Genius: Toque em Genius ou Seleção do Genius. Se o Genius não aparecer, talvez você precise ativar o Genius no iTunes e depois sincronizar o iPad. Consulte “Como Criar Listas Genius” na página 120. Para reproduzir uma música: Toque em uma música. Controle da Reprodução de Músicas Ao reproduzir uma música, a tela Reproduzindo Agora aparece. Pausar uma música Toque no . Retomar reprodução Toque no . Aumentar ou diminuir o volume Arraste o controle deslizante de volume da tela ou use os botões de volume do iPad. Reiniciar uma música ou capítulo de um audiolivro ou podcast Toque em . Passar para a música ou capítulo seguinte de um audiolivro ou podcast Toque no . Passar para a música ou capítulo anterior de um audiolivro ou podcast Toque em duas vezes. Avançar ou retroceder Mantenha o toque sobre o ou ; quanto mais tempo você manter o controle, mais rápido a música será retrocedida ou avançada. Como visualizar as capas no tamanho normal Toque na capa quando estiver reproduzindo uma música. Você pode exibir os controles de reprodução quando estiver ouvindo música e usando um outro aplicativo—ou mesmo quando o iPad estiver bloqueado. Para exibir os controles de reprodução de áudio a partir de outro app ou a partir da tela de bloqueio: Clique duas vezes do botão Início e, em seguida, passe o dedo na parte inferior da tela, da esquerda para a direita. Após usar os controles, toque em iPod para ira para a biblioteca do iPod ou clique no botão Início para retornar ao aplicativo que você estava usando. Se o iPad estiver bloqueado, os controles aparecerão na parte superior da tela e desaparecerão depois que você terminar de utilizá-los. Controles de música adicionais Na tela reproduzindo Agora, toque na capa do álbum para ver os controles. Os controles de repetição e aleatório aparecem na barra de progressão. Você pode ver o tempo decorrido, o tempo restante e o número da música. Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão para saltar para qualquer ponto da música. Você pode ajustar a velocidade da progressão de alta velocidade para exploração detalhada, deslizando o dedo para baixo à medida que arrasta o cursor de reprodução ao longo da barra de progressão. Quanto mais você desliza o dedo para baixo, mais lenta fica a progressão. Repetir Cursor de reprodução Barra de progressão Aleatório 116 Capítulo 16 iPodCapítulo 16 iPod 117 Ajustar o iPad para repetir músicas Toque no . Toque no novamente para definir o iPad para repetir apenas a música atual. = iPad está definido para repetir todas as mú- sicas do álbum ou lista atual. = iPad está definido para repetir a música atual uma e outra vez. = iPad não está definido para repetir músicas. Saltar para qualquer ponto de uma música Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão. Deslize o dedo para baixo para ajustar a velocidade da progressão. Quanto mais você desliza o dedo para baixo, mais lenta fica a progressão. Ajustar o iPad para reproduzir músicas aleatoriamente Toque no para reproduzir as músicas de forma aleatória. Toque no novamente para definir o iPad para reproduzir músicas ordenadamente. = iPad está definido para tocar músicas aleatoriamente. = iPad está definido para tocar músicas ordenadamente. Misturar as faixas aleatoriamente em qualquer lista, álbum ou outra lista de músicas Na tela Reproduzindo Agora, toque na capa do álbum para mostrar os controles da música na tela. Toque no na parte inferior da tela, em seguida toque em Aleatório na parte superior da lista de músicas. Esteja o iPad ajustado ou não para reproduzir aleatoriamente, se você tocar em Aleatório no alto de uma lista de músicas, o iPad reproduzirá as músicas dessa lista em ordem aleatória. Reproduza música em um sistema de som AirPlay ou Apple TV Toque em e escolha um sistema de som. Se não aparecer ou se você não vir o sistema AirPlay que está procurando, certifique-se de que ele está na mesma rede sem fio Alterne do AirPlay de volta para o iPad Toque em e escolha iPad da lista.Controles de Podcast e Audiolivros Na tela reproduzindo Agora, toque na capa do podcast ou do audiolivro para ver os controles. O controle de e-mail e o controle da velocidade de reprodução aparecem junto com a barra de progressão. Você pode ver o tempo decorrido, o tempo restante, o número do episódio ou do capítulo. A barra de progressão permite a você saltar para qualquer ponto no podcast ou audiolivro. E-mail Cursor de reprodução Velocidade de reprodução Para enviar um link do podcast por e e-mail: Toque no . Para passar para qualquer ponto: Arraste o cursor de reprodução pela barra de progressão. Ajuste a velocidade da progressão de alta velocidade para exploração detalhada, deslizando o dedo para baixo à medida que arrasta o cursor de reprodução ao longo da barra de exploração. Quanto mais você desliza o dedo para baixo, mais lenta fica a progressão. Para alterar a velocidade da reprodução: Toque no para alterar a velocidade.  = Reproduzir em velocidade normal  = Reproduzir em dupla velocidade  = Reproduzir com metade da velocidade Lista de Faixas Repetição de 30 segundos O controle de repetição de 30 segundos e o controle com a lista das faixas aparecem na parte inferior da tela. Para reproduzir novamente os últimos 30 segundos: Toque no . Veja outros podcasts em série ou capítulos em um audiolivro: Toque no . Toque na miniatura do podcast ou do audiolivro para voltar à tela Reproduzindo Agora. Como Visualizar Todas as Faixas de um Álbum Para visualizar todas as faixas do álbum que contém a música atual: Na tela Reproduzindo Agora toque no . Toque em uma faixa para reproduzi-la. Toque na miniatura do álbum para voltar à tela Reproduzindo Agora. 118 Capítulo 16 iPodCapítulo 16 iPod 119 Na visualização da lista de faixas, você pode atribuir classificações às músicas. Você pode utilizar classificações para criar listas inteligentes no iTunes que se atualizam de forma dinâmica para incluir, por exemplo, suas músicas melhor classificadas. Para classificar uma música: Arraste sua miniatura através da barra de classificação (os cinco pontos debaixo do cursor de reprodução) para atribuir à música de zero à cinco estrelas. Como buscar músicas Você pode buscar por títulos, artistas, álbuns, compositores de músicas, podcasts e outro conteúdo que tiver sincronizado com o iPad. Para buscar música, podcasts, audiolivros ou outro conteúdo na sua biblioteca: Digite o texto no campo de busca da parte superior de uma lista de músicas, lista, lista de artistas ou outra visualização de conteúdo do seu iPod. (Toque na barra de estado para rolar rapidamente para o topo de uma lista e revelar o campo de busca.) Os resultados da busca aparecem automaticamente à medida que você digita. Toque em Buscar para que o teclado desapareça e você possa ver mais resultados. Você também pode utilizar o Spotlight para buscar uma música. Consulte “Busca do Spotlight” na página 173. Utilização de Listas Uma lista é uma compilação personalizada de músicas. Você pode desejar criar uma lista com um ritmo ou ocasião específica ou organizar sua biblioteca musical. Você pode usar três tipo de listas no iPad—listas padrão, listas Genius e Seleção do Genius. Como criar listas Você pode criar listas das músicas, podcasts e audiolivros que estão na sua biblioteca do iPod. Para criar uma lista padrão: 1 Toque no iPod, em seguida toque no na parte inferior da tela. 2 Digite um nome para a lista e depois toque em Salvar. 3 Toque no ao lado das suas seleções, em seguida toque em OK quando terminar de selecionar. Você também pode tocar em Fontes para navegar por seleções. 4 Quando acabar, pressione OK. Você também pode criar listas de outras categorias na biblioteca do seu iPod, tais como podcasts ou audiolivros. Quando você cria uma lista no iPad, a lista também é salva na biblioteca do iTunes no seu computador na próxima vez que você sincronizar.Para editar uma lista: Toque na lista de reprodução, toque em Editar e faça o seguinte:  Para mover uma seleção mais para cima ou para baixo da lista, arraste o ao lado da seleção.  Para apagar uma seleção, toque no ao lado da seleção e, em seguida, toque em Apagar. Apagar uma música de uma lista não a apaga do iPad.  Para adicionar mais músicas, toque em Adicionar Músicas, toque no ao lado da seleção e depois toque em OK. Para limpar uma lista: Toque na lista, toque em Editar e, em seguida, toque no . Como Criar Listas Genius O Genius busca as músicas da sua biblioteca do iTunes que combinam bem entre si. Uma lista Genius é uma coleção de músicas selecionadas que combinam com uma música que você escolher da sua biblioteca. Você pode criar listas Genius no iTunes e sincronizá-las com o iPad. Você também pode criar e salvar listas Genius no iPad. Para utilizar o Genius no iPad, primeiro ative o Genius no iTunes, depois sincronize o iPad com o iTunes. O Genius é um serviço gratuito, mas requer um ID Apple. Como criar uma lista Genius no iPad: 1 Toque no ; depois, toque em Nova. 2 Toque em uma música da lista. O Genius cria uma listas de músicas similares. Você também pode criar uma lista Genius de músicas que combinam perfeitamente com a música que está sendo reproduzida. Na tela Reproduzindo Agora, toque na capa do álbum para exibir os controles adicionais e toque no . 120 Capítulo 16 iPodCapítulo 16 iPod 121 Para salvar uma lista Genius: Na lista, toque em Salvar. A lista é salva no Genius com o título da música que você escolheu. Você pode criar e salvar quantas listas Genius desejar. Se você salvar uma lista Genius criada no iPad, ela será sincronizada no iTunes na próxima vez que você conectar. Para atualizar uma lista Genius: Na lista, toque em Atualizar. Atualizar uma listas Genius cria uma lista Genius de músicas diferentes que combinam com a música que você escolheu. Você pode atualizar qualquer lista Genius, mesmo se ela foi criada no iTunes e sincronizada com o iPad, ou criada no iPad. Para criar uma lista Genius a partir de uma música nova: Na lista, toque em Nova e depois escolha uma nova música. Para apagar uma lista Genius salva: Toque a lista Genius e, em seguida, toque em Apagar. Quando uma lista Genius é sincronizada no iTunes, talvez você não possa apagá-la diretamente no iPad. Você pode usar o iTunes para editar o nome da lista, interromper a sincronização ou apagar a lista. Reprodução de Seleção do Genius O Genius automaticamente busca na biblioteca do seu iPad e encontra músicas da sua biblioteca daquele gênero ou formato. As Seleções Genius são recriadas cada vez que você as ouve para que sejam sempre novas e originais. A Seleção do Genius cria diferentes seleções dependendo da variedade de música que você possui na sua biblioteca do iPad. Por exemplo, você pode ter Seleções do Genius que destacam músicas Clássicas, Jazz ou Rock Alternativo. Para explorar as Seleções Genius: No lado esquerda da janela do iPod (abaixo do Genius), toque em Seleção do Genius. Para reproduzir uma Seleção Genius: Toque na seleção. Compartilhamento Familiar O Compartilhamento Familiar permite que você reproduza músicas, filmes e programas de TV no iPad a partir da biblioteca do iTunes no seu Mac ou PC. Nota: Manuais, álbuns, LPs e outros conteúdos de bônus não podem ser compartilhados. O iPad e o seu computador devem estar na mesma rede Wi-Fi. O iTunes deve estar aberto no seu computador, com o Compartilhamento Familiar ativado e com a sessão iniciada na mesma conta da Apple que o Compartilhamento Familiar do iPad. Para ativar o Compartilhamento Familiar no iTunes: No seu computador, abra o iTunes e escolha Avançado > Ativar Compartilhamento Familiar. Digite seu ID e senha da Apple, depois clique em Criar Compartilhamento Familiar.Para reproduzir música ou vídeo no iPad a partir da sua biblioteca do iTunes: 1 Em Ajustes, escolha iPod e, em seguida, em Compartilhamento Familiar, insira o mesmo ID e senha da Apple usados ao ativar o Compartilhamento Familiar no iTunes. 2 No iPod, toque em Mais e, em seguida, toque em Compartilhado e escolha a sua biblioteca do iTunes. As guias Listas, Artistas, Músicas e outras no iPod agora mostram o conteúdo da sua biblioteca do iTunes, em vez do conteúdo do seu iPad. Para retornar ao conteúdo do seu iPad: No iPod, toque em Mais e, em seguida, toque em Compartilhado e escolha iPad no topo da lista. Transferência de Conteúdo Você pode transferir as compras feitas no iPad para um computador que esteja autorizado a reproduzir o conteúdo do seu ID Apple. Para autorizar o computador, abra o iTunes no computador e escolha Loja > Autorizar Este Computador. Para transferir o conteúdo comprado: Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. O iTunes perguntará que você deseja transferir o conteúdo comprado. 122 Capítulo 16 iPod123 Sobre a iTunes Store Use a iTunes Store para adicionar conteúdo ao seu iPad. Você pode navegar e comprar música e programas de TV, comprar e alugar filmes ou transferir e reproduzir podcasts ou coleções do iTunes U. Muitos filmes e programas de TV estão disponíveis tanto em definição padrão como alta definição. Para acessar a iTunes Store, o iPad deve possuir conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Nota: A iTunes Store não está disponível em todas as regiões e o conteúdo da iTunes Store pode variar, dependendo da região. Transferência de Conteúdo Você pode transferir compras realizadas no iPad a um computador autorizado a reproduzir conteúdo do seu ID da Apple. Para autorizar um computador: Abra o iTunes no computador, depois escolha Loja > Computador Autorizado. Para transferir o conteúdo comprado: Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. O iTunes verifica se você deseja transferir o conteúdo comprado. 17 iTunes StoreComo buscar músicas, vídeos e muito mais Para explorar o conteúdo: Na parte superior da tela, navegue por Gêneros, Destaques, Paradas de Sucesso ou Genius. Na parte inferior da tela, toque em Música, Filmes, Programas de TV, Podcasts, Audiolivros, iTunes U ou Transferências. Para buscar conteúdo: Toque no campo de busca na parte superior da tela, depois use o teclado na tela para digitar uma ou mais palavras. Toque em Buscar do teclado. Os resultados da busca são agrupados por categoria, como Filmes, Álbuns ou Podcasts. Toque em um item para ver mais informações. Você pode ler opiniões, escrever sua própria opinião ou enviar por e-mail um link sobre o item a um amigo. Dependendo do item, você também pode comprá-lo, transferi-lo ou alugá-lo. Como Seguir Artistas e Amigos Utilize o iTunes Ping para se conectar com fãs de música do mundo inteiro. Siga seus artistas favoritos para descobrir sobre novos lançamentos, shows e tours agendados. Sinta-se nos bastidores dos shows vendo suas fotos e vídeos e sabendo mais sobre suas influências musicais. Leia os comentários de seus amigos sobre as músicas que eles estão ouvindo, veja o que eles estão comprando e fique por dentro dos shows que eles pretendem assistir. Expresse seus gostos musicais e publique comentários para os seus próprios seguidores. Para criar e explorar as conexões musicais, é preciso criar um perfil. Para criar seu perfil do iTunes Ping:Abra o aplicativo iTunes em seu Mac ou PC, clique em Ping e siga as instruções da tela. 124 Capítulo 17 iTunes StoreCapítulo 17 iTunes Store 125 Para explorar o iTunes Ping no seu iPad: Abra o aplicativo iTunes, toque em Ping (toque em Mais, primeiro, se Ping não estiver visível) e, em seguida:  Toque em Activity para ver as últimas novidades das pessoas que você segue. As atualizações incluem compras, comentários, gostos e publicações.  Toque em People para ver quem você está seguindo e quem está seguindo você e para buscar artistas ou amigos.  Toque em My Profile para ver as informações do seu perfil. Para seguir um artista: Toque em Follow na página do perfil do artista.  Por busca: Toque em People, insira o nome do artista no campo de busca na parte superior da página e, em seguida, toque em Search. Toque no nome do artista na lista de resultados e, em seguida, toque em Follow.  Durante a busca: Toque em Profile na parte inferior de qualquer página de álbum e, em seguida, toque em Follow. Para seguir um amigo:Escolha seu grupo inicial de amigos quando você configurar seu perfil usando o iTunes no seu Mac ou PC. Depois disso, você pode seguir amigos usando o Ping no iPad.  Por busca: Toque em People, insira o nome do seu amigo no campo de busca e, em seguida toque em Search. Toque no nome do seu amigo na lista de coincidências e, em seguida, toque em Follow.  Durante a exploração do Ping: Toque o nome de uma pessoa e, em seguida, toque em Follow. Quando você segue uma pessoa, ela não segue você automaticamente. Em seu perfil, você pode optar por aprovar ou recusar pedidos de seguimento quando eles chegarem ou simplesmente aceitar todos os novos seguidores sem aprovação. Para compartilhar seus pensamentos: Conforme você navega pelos álbuns e músicas, toque em Post para comentar uma obra musical ou toque em Like, para dizer que você gosta. Seus amigos verão seus pensamentos no documento Activity do iTunes Ping. Para compartilhar planos para assistir a shows: Toque em Concerts em sua página de perfil para ver os futuros shows dos artistas que você segue e para ver quais dos seus amigos irão a um show. Toque em Tickets para comprar o seu tíquete ou toque em I’m Going para que outras pessoas saibam que você vai também. (Não está disponível em todos os países ou regiões.)Como comprar música ou audiolivros Quando você encontrar uma música, um álbum ou um audiolivro que gostar na iTunes Store, poderá comprá-los e transferi-los para o iPad. Você também pode pré-visualizá- los para certificar-se que são o que você deseja. Para realizar compras ou escrever opiniões, você necessitará um ID da Apple. O iPad obtém seus ajustes de conta do iTunes quando você sincronizar. Se você não tiver um ID Apple ou se quiser fazer compras com um ID da Apple diferente, abra Ajustes > Store. Você não precisa de um ID da Apple para reproduzir ou transferir podcasts ou aulas do iTunes U. Para pré-visualizar uma música: Toque no número na coluna e depois toque no . Para pré-visualizar um audiolivro:Toque no item. Para comprar e transferir uma música, álbum ou audiolivro: 1 Toque no preço e depois toque em Comprar. 2 Inicie sessão usando o seu ID da Apple conforme solicitado e toque em OK. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple, toque em Criar Novo ID da Apple para configurar um. As compras são cobradas no seu ID da Apple. Se você fizer outras compras no prazo de quinze minutos, não precisará digitar sua senha novamente. Um aviso aparece no caso de você já haver comprado uma ou mais músicas do álbum. Toque em Comprar se deseja adquirir o álbum completo incluindo as músicas que já comprou ou toque em Cancelar se deseja adquirir as músicas restantes individualmente. Uma vez que o item tenha sido comprado, ele começa a ser transferido. Consulte “Como verificar o estado de uma transferência” na página 128. As músicas compradas são adicionadas à lista Adquirido no iPad (iPod > Adquirido). Se você apagar a lista Adquirido, o iTunes criará uma nova lista quando você adquirir um item da iTunes Store. Você pode usar cartões de presente, vales-presente ou outros códigos promocionais da iTunes Store para comprar. Quando você iniciar a sessão na sua conta, seu crédito restante aparece com as informações da sua conta na parte inferior da maioria das telas da iTunes Store. Para digitar um código de resgate: Toque em Música, role até a parte inferior da tela, toque em Resgatar e siga as instruções na tela. 126 Capítulo 17 iTunes StoreCapítulo 17 iTunes Store 127 Como comprar e alugar vídeos Se você encontrar um filme, um programa de TV ou um videoclipe que gostar na iTunes Store, poderá adquiri-lo e transferi-lo para o iPad. Você pode adquirir filmes e programas de TV em formato padrão (480p) ou em alta definição (720p). Se você comprar uma versão em alta definição, você também recebe a versão com a definição padrão. Para pré-visualizar um vídeo: Toque em Pré-visualizar. Para comprar ou alugar um vídeo: 1 Toque em Comprar ou Alugar. 2 Inicie sessão usando o seu ID da Apple conforme solicitado e toque em OK. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple, toque em Criar Novo ID da Apple para configurar um. Sua compra é cobrada no seu ID da Apple. Para compras adicionais feitas nos quinze minutos seguintes, você não terá que digitar sua senha novamente. Uma vez que o item tenha sido comprado, ele começa a ser transferido. Os filmes alugados só começam a ser reproduzidos quando a transferência é totalmente concluída. Consulte “Como verificar o estado de uma transferência” na página 128. Os vídeos comprados são adicionadas à lista de reprodução Adquiridos no iPad (iPod > Adquiridos). Se você apagar a lista Adquirido, o iTunes criará uma nova lista na pró- xima vez que você adquirir um item da iTunes Store. Os vídeos comprados também aparecem no aplicativo Vídeo. Você pode usar cartões de presente, vales-presente ou outros códigos promocionais da iTunes Store para comprar. Quando você iniciar a sessão usando seu ID da Apple, seu crédito de loja restante aparece com as informações da sua conta na parte inferior da maioria das telas da iTunes Store. Para digitar um código de resgate: Toque em Música, depois toque em Resgatar na parte inferior da tela e siga as instruções. Como Ouvir ou Assistir Podcasts você pode ouvir podcasts de áudio ou assistir podcasts de vídeo no iPad. Você também pode transferir podcasts para o iPad, e sincronizá-los com a biblioteca do iTunes no seu computador quando se conectar. Toque em Podcasts na parte inferior da tela da iTunes Store. Navegue por Destaques ou Paradas de Sucesso. Para ver uma lista de episódios, toque em um podcast. O ícone indica os podcasts de vídeo. Para ouvir um podcast: Toque no título do podcast. Para transferir um podcast: Toque no botão Grátis e depois toque em Obter Episódio. Os podcasts baixados aparecem na lista de podcasts no iPod.Para ouvir ou assistir um podcast transferido: No iPod, toque em Podcasts e depois toque em podcast. Os podcasts de vídeo também aparecem no aplicativo Vídeo. Obtenha mais episódios do podcast que você transferiu: Na lista de podcasts do iPod, toque no podcast e depois toque em Obter Mais Episódios. Para apagar um podcast: Na lista Podcasts do iPod, passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita sobre o podcast e toque em Apagar. Como verificar o estado de uma transferência Você pode verificar a tela Transferências para ver o estado das transferências programadas e em andamento, inclusive o estado das compras que você tenha reservado. Para ver o estado dos itens que estão sendo transferidos: Toque em Transferências. Para pausar uma transferência, toque o . Se uma transferência for pausada ou interrompida, o iPad começará a transferir novamente na próxima vez que se conectar à Internet. Ou, se você abrir o iTunes no seu computador, ele concluirá a transferência na sua biblioteca do iTunes (se o seu computador possuir uma conexão à Internet e você tiver iniciado a sessão utilizando o mesmo ID da Apple). Para ver o estado dos itens reservados: Toque em Transferências. Os itens reservados aparecem em uma lista até a data de lançamento do item. Toque no item para ver as informações da data de lançamento. Uma vez que o item estiver disponível para transferência, um ícone de transferência aparecerá ao lado da transferência. Para transferir um item reservado: Toque no item e, em seguida, toque no . Os itens reservados não são transferidos automaticamente quando são lançados. Volte à tela Transferências para iniciar a transferência. Alguns álbuns incluem bônus, que podem ser transferidos para a biblioteca do iTunes do seu computador. Nem todo o conteúdo de bônus pode ser transferido diretamente para o iPad. Para transferir conteúdo de bônus: Inicie a sessão usando o seu ID da Apple. No iTunes, escolha Loja > “Verificar Transferências Disponíveis” e, em seguida, clique em Verificar. Sincronização de Conteúdo O iTunes sincroniza automaticamente tudo que você transfere ou compra no iPad com a biblioteca do seu iTunes quando você conecta o iPad ao computador. Isso permite acessar as transferências do seu computador e fornece um backup caso você apague algum conteúdo adquirido do iPad. 128 Capítulo 17 iTunes StoreCapítulo 17 iTunes Store 129 O conteúdo adquirido é sincronizado com a lista “Adquirido em ”. O iTunes cria a lista se ela não existir. O iTunes também sincroniza as suas aquisições na lista Adquirido que ele utiliza para as aquisições feitas no seu computador, caso essa lista exista e esteja configurada para sincronizar com o iPad. Os podcasts transferidos são sincronizados com a lista de podcasts da sua biblioteca do iTunes. Como verificar as informações do ID da Apple Para visualizar as informações da iTunes Store do seu ID da Apple no iPad, role até a parte inferior da tela e toque em Iniciar Sessão. Se já houver iniciado a sessão, toque em Conta. Ou vá para Ajustes > Loja e toque em Ver ID da Apple. Você deve iniciar a sessão para visualizar as informações da sua conta. Como Verificar suas Compras Você pode usar o iTunes em seu computador para verificar se todas as músicas, vídeos, aplicativos e outros itens comprados na iTunes Store ou App Store estão na biblioteca do iTunes. Talvez você queira realizar esta verificação se uma transferência tiver sido interrompida. Para verificar suas compras: 1 Certifique-se que seu computador possui uma conexão à Internet. 2 No iTunes, escolha Loja > Buscar Transferências Disponíveis. 3 Digite seu ID e senha da Apple, depois clique em Verificar. As compras que ainda não estão no seu computador são transferidas. A lista Adquirido exibe as suas compras. Entretanto, como você pode adicionar ou remover itens dessa lista, talvez ela não mostre todos os itens com precisão. Para ver todas as suas compras, inicie a sessão em sua conta, escolha Loja > Visualizar Minha Conta e depois clique em Histórico de Compras.130 Sobre a App Store Use a App Store para adicionar aplicativos ao iPad. Navegue, compre e descarregue aplicativos especialmente desenhados para o iPad, ou para o iPhone e o iPod touch. Os aplicativos que você transfere e instala da App Store no iPad são guardados como backup na sua biblioteca do iTunes da próxima vez que você sincronizar. Quando você sincroniza, também pode instalar no iPad os aplicativos que comprou através no iTunes no seu computador. O iPad funciona com a maioria dos aplicativos do iPhone e iPod touch, portanto se você já tiver aplicativos para o seu iPhone ou iPod touch, pode sincronizá-los para o iPad a partir do seu Mac ou PC. Use-os no seu tamanho original ou toque no canto inferior direito da tela para ampliá-los. Nota: A App Store e alguns aplicativos não estão disponíveis em todas as regiões. A disponibilidade e o preço dos aplicativos estão sujeitos à mudanças. Para usar a App Store, o iPad deve possuir conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Você também precisa de um ID da Apple (não disponível em alguns países) para transferir os aplicativos. O iPad obtém os seus ajustes do ID da Apple a partir do iTunes. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple ou se quiser fazer compras usando um ID da Apple diferente, abra Ajustes > Loja. Consulte “Loja” na página 187. Como Navegar e Buscar Navegue pelos destaques para ver os aplicativos novos, incríveis ou recomendados ou navegue pelas Paradas de Sucesso para ver os aplicativos mais populares. Se estiver buscando um aplicativo específico, use Buscar. Para explorar os aplicativos: Toque em Destaques, Paradas de Sucesso ou Categorias na parte inferior da tela. 18 App StoreCapítulo 18 App Store 131 Para navegar usando o Genius: Toque em Genius para ver uma lista de aplicativos recomendados com base em sua coleção atual de aplicativos. Para ativar o Genius, siga as instruções da tela. O Genius é um serviço gratuito, mas requer um ID da Apple. Como buscar aplicativos: Toque no campo de busca situado na parte superior da tela e digite uma ou mais palavras. Selecione na lista de sugestões ou toque em Buscar no teclado. Como Obter Mais Informações Toque em qualquer aplicativo de uma lista para ver a tela Informações, que mostra o preço do aplicativo, capturas de tela e classificações. Para enviar um link à página de informações do aplicativo, via e-mail: Toque em “Avisar um Amigo“ situado na parte superior da tela. Como comunicar um problema: Toque em “Comunicar Problema” na parte inferior da tela Informações. Selecione um problema da lista ou digite seus comentários, depois pressione Comunicar. Para visualizar as capturas de tela: Role para baixo até as capturas de tela e então passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para ver outras capturas de tela. Para obter classificações e ler opiniões: Role para baixo até “Classificações e Opiniões de Clientes.” Como comprar aplicativos Quando encontrar um app que deseja na App Store, você pode adquiri-lo e transferi-lo para o iPad. Se este aplicativo estiver livre, você pode transferi-lo sem carregar.Uma vez transferido o aplicativo, ele é imediatamente instalado no iPad. Para adquirir e transferir um app: 1 Toque no preço e depois toque em Comprar App (ou toque em Grátis e depois toque em Instalar App). 2 Inicie sessão usando o seu ID da Apple conforme solicitado e toque em OK. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple, toque em Criar Novo ID da Apple para configurar um. As compras são cobradas no seu ID da Apple. Se você fizer outras compras no prazo de quinze minutos, não precisará digitar sua senha novamente. Você pode usar cartões de presente, vales-presente ou outros códigos promocionais da iTunes Store para comprar. Quando você iniciar a sessão usando o seu ID da Apple, seu crédito restante aparece com as informações da sua conta na parte inferior da maioria das telas da App Store. Para digitar um código de resgate: Toque em Destaques ou Paradas de Sucesso, role até a parte inferior da tela, toque em Resgatar, e depois siga as instruções na tela. Para ver o estado dos aplicativos transferidos: Depois que começar a transferir um aplicativo, o ícone do aplicativo aparecerá na tela Início com um indicador de progresso. Se uma transferência for interrompida, o iPad começará a transferir novamente na próxima vez que se conectar à Internet. Ou, se abrir o iTunes no seu computador, ele terminará a transferência na sua biblioteca do iTunes (se o seu computador estiver conectado à Internet e você tiver iniciado a sessão usando o mesmo ID da Apple). Como Utilizar os Apps Os aplicativos desenhados para o iPad funcionam em qualquer orientação - vertical ou horizontal. Quando você usa um aplicativo na orientação horizontal, ele preenche a tela. No iPad, você pode usar aplicativos desenhados para iPhone ou iPod touch no tamanho original ou ampliá-los. Para ampliar um aplicativo: Toque no no canto inferior direito. Retornar um aplicativo ao seu tamanho original: Toque no no canto inferior direito. 132 Capítulo 18 App StoreCapítulo 18 App Store 133 Alguns aplicativos permitem que você faça compras dentro do aplicativo. Você pode restringir as compras feitas de dentro do app nos Ajustes. Consulte “Restrições” na página 174. Alguns aplicativos utilizam notificações push para alertá-lo sobre novas informações, mesmo quando o aplicativo não está sendo executado. Dependendo do aplicativo, as notificações diferem, mas podem incluir alertas de texto ou de som, ou um número no ícone do aplicativo na tela Início. Como Atualizar Apps A App Store verifica atualizações para os aplicativos que você instalar. O ícone da App Store mostra o número total de atualizações de aplicativos disponíveis. Se houver uma atualização disponível quando você acessar a App Store, a tela de Atualizações aparece imediatamente. As atualizações de aplicativos são transferidas e instaladas quando você decide atualizá-los. Nota: Atualizações de aplicativos são novas versões, que você pode comprar ou transferir. Para atualizar um app: 1 Na parte inferior da tela, toque em Atualizações. 2 Toque em um app para ver mais informações sobre a atualização. 3 Toque em Atualizar. Para atualizar todos os aplicativos: Na parte inferior da tela, toque em Atualizações e, em seguida, toque em Atualizar Tudo. Se você tentar atualizar um aplicativo comprado com um ID da Apple diferente, será solicitado tal ID da Apple e a senha. Como escrever opiniões Você pode escrever e enviar opiniões sobre os aplicativos no iPad. Para escrever uma opinião: 1 Na tela Informações, role para baixo até “Classificações e Opiniões de Clientes.” 2 Toque em “Escrever uma Opinião.” 3 Defina a classificação (1–5 estrelas), digite um título para a opinião e adicione comentários opcionalmente. 4 Toque em Enviar. Antes de enviar uma revisão, você deve haver iniciado a sessão com o seu ID da Apple e ter comprado, ou transferido, o aplicativo. Como Apagar Apps Você pode apagar aplicativos do iPad que instalou da App Store. Você não pode apagar os aplicativos integrados do iPad. Quando você sincroniza, o iTunes faz automaticamente o backup de quaisquer aplicativos que você transfira para o iPad. Se você apagar um aplicativo do iPad, é possível reinstalá-lo se ele foi previamente sincronizado. Importante: Se você apaga um aplicativo, os documentos associados ao aplicativo são apagados do iPad, a menos que você reinstale o aplicativo e restaure seus dados de um backup usando o iTunes. Para apagar um app da App Store: 1 Mantenha o toque sobre qualquer ícone de aplicativo da tela Início até que os ícones comecem a tremular. 2 Toque no canto do aplicativo que deseja apagar. 3 Toque em Apagar. Pressione o botão Início para cancelar. Quando você apaga um aplicativo, seus dados já não ficam acessíveis, mas não são apagados do iPad. Para obter informações sobre como eliminar todo o conteúdo e ajustes, consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178. Como Sincronizar Compras Quando você conectar o iPad ao seu computador, o iTunes automaticamente sincroniza os aplicativos que você transferiu ou comprou no iPad para sua biblioteca do iTunes. Esta ação permite acessar as transferências de aplicativos no seu computador e fornece um backup, caso você apague aplicativos do iPad. Será realizado o backup dos aplicativos transferidos na próxima vez que você sincronizar com iTunes. Em outras palavras, o backup é realizado somente nos dados dos aplicativos, quando você sincroniza com o iTunes. Os aplicativos são sincronizados para a lista Apps na sua biblioteca do iTunes. 134 Capítulo 18 App Store135 Sobre o iBooks O iBooks é uma ótima maneira de ler e comprar livros. Faça a transferência grátis do aplicativo iBooks da App Store e adquira de clássicos a best-sellers da loja iBookstore integrada. Depois de ter transferido um livro, ele é mostrado na sua prateleira de livros. Adicione livros ePub e PDFs a sua estante de livros utilizando o iTunes. Depois, toque em um livro para começar a ler. O iBooks guarda a sua localização, assim você pode retomar facilmente a leitura do ponto onde parou. A ampla gama de opções de visualização torna fácil a leitura dos livros. 19 iBooksO iBooks e a iBookstore não estão disponíveis em todos os idiomas e todas as localizações. Disponível no iBookstore. A disponibilidade do título está sujeita a alterações. Para transferir o aplicativo iBooks e utilizar a iBookstore, você precisa de uma conexão à Internet e de uma conta da Apple. Se você não tiver uma conta ID ou se quiser fazer compras usando um ID Apple diferente, abra Ajustes > Loja. Como Sincronizar Livros e PDFs Você pode transferir ou comprar a partir da iBookstore. Você também pode adicionar livros ePub DRM-free e PDFs na sua biblioteca do iTunes. Existem vários sites que oferecem livros nos formatos ePub e PDF. Utilize o iTunes para sincronizar seus livros e PDFs entre o iPad e o seu computador. Quando o iPad estiver conectado ao seu computador, o painel Livros permite selecionar quais itens sincronizar. Para sincronizar um livro ePub ou um PDF no iPad: Transfira o livro ou o PDF usando o seu computador. Em seguida, no iTunes, escolha Arquivo > Adicionar à Biblioteca e selecione o arquivo. Conecte o iPad ao seu computador, selecione o livro ou PDF no painel Livros do iTunes e, em seguida, sincronize o iPad. Se um PDF não aparecer no painel Livros, você necessitará alterar seu tipo no iTunes. Busque na sua biblioteca do iTunes para encontrar o arquivo PDF, selecione-o e, em seguida, escolha Arquivo > Obter Informações. Na seção Opções da janela de informa- ções do arquivo, selecione Livro do menu local Tipo de Mídia e, em seguida, clique em OK. 136 Capítulo 19 iBooksCapítulo 19 iBooks 137 Como Utilizar a iBookstore No aplicativo iBooks, toque em Loja para abrir a iBookstore. A partir dela, você pode navegar pelos livros em destaque ou pelos livros mais vendidos e buscar livros por autor ou assunto. Quando encontrar um livro que goste, pode comprá-lo e transferi-lo. Nota: Talvez alguns recursos da iBookstore não estejam disponíveis em todas as localizações. Para obter mais informações: Na iBookstore, você pode ler um resumo do livro, ler ou escrever uma opinião e transferir uma amostra do livro antes de comprá-lo. Para comprar um livro: Busque um livro que deseja, toque no preço e, em seguida, toque em Comprar Agora. Inicie sessão usando o seu ID Apple e toque em OK. Talvez alguns livros tenham a transferência gratuita. A compra será cobrada na sua conta da Apple. Se fizer compras adicionais nos quinze minutos seguintes, você não terá que digitar sua senha novamente. Se já comprou um livro e deseja transferi-lo novamente, toque em Compras na iBookstore e busque o livro na lista. Em seguida toque Retransferir. Os livros que você comprar serão sincronizados na sua biblioteca do iTunes da próxima vez que sincronizar o iPad com o seu computador. Esta ação proporciona um backup, caso você apague o livro do iPad. Como Ler Livros Ler um livro é fácil. Vá para a estante e toque no libro que deseja ler. Se você não vir o livro que está procurando, toque em Coleções para visualizar outros grupos de livros.Para virar a página: Toque próximo da margem direita ou esquerda de uma página, ou passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita. Para alterar a direção da passagem da página quando você toca a margem esquerda, abra Ajustes > iBooks. Para ir para uma página específica: Toque próximo ao centro da página atual para exibir os controles. Arraste o controle de navegação da página da parte inferior da tela para a página desejada e solte-o. Para ir para o índice: Toque próximo do centro da página atual para mostrar controles e, em seguida, toque em . Toque em uma entrada para saltar para aquela localização, ou toque Retomar para retornar à página atual. Para adicionar ou remover um favorito: Toque na fita para definir um favorito. Você pode ter vários favoritos. Para remover um favorito, toque nele. Você não necessita adicionar um favorito ao fechar um livro, o iBooks lembra onde você parou e volta para essa posição quando você abrir o livro novamente. Para adicionar, remover ou editar um texto destacado: Toque e mantenha pressionada qualquer palavra até que ela seja selecionada. Utilize os pontos de captura para ajustar a seleção, depois toque em Destacar. Para remover um texto destacado, toque no texto e, em seguida, toque em Remover Destaque. Para alterar a cor de um texto destacado, toque no texto destacado e, em seguida, toque em Cores e selecione uma cor no menu. Para adicionar, visualizar ou remover uma nota: Toque e mantenha pressionada qualquer palavra até que ela seja selecionada. Utilize os pontos de captura para ajustar a seleção, depois toque em Nota. Digite o texto e, em seguida, toque no botão OK. Para visualizar uma nota, toque no indicador da margem próxima ao seu texto destacado. Para remover uma nota, toque no texto destacado e, em seguida, escolha em Apagar Nota. Para alterar a cor de uma nota, toque no texto destacado e, em seguida, toque em Cores e selecione uma cor no menu. Para ver todos os seus favoritos, textos destacados e notas: Para ver os favoritos, textos destacados e as notas que adicionou, toque em , depois toque em Favoritos. Para visualizar uma nota, toque no seu indicador. Para aumentar uma imagem: Toque duas vezes em uma imagem. Para ler um livro quando estiver deitado, use o bloqueio de rotação de tela para impedir que o iPad gire a tela quando você inclinar o iPad. Para obter informações, consulte “Visualização na Vertical ou Horizontal” na página 16. Como ler PDFs Você pode utilizar o iBooks para ler PDFs. Vá para a estante de livros e toque em Coleções, selecione uma coleção e, em seguida, toque no PDF que deseja ler. Para virar a página: Passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita 138 Capítulo 19 iBooksCapítulo 19 iBooks 139 Para aumentar uma página: Separe dois dedos para ampliar uma página e, em seguida, role para ver a parte que deseja. Para ir para uma página específica: Toque próximo ao centro da página atual para exibir os controles. Em seguida, nos controles de navegação na parte inferior da página, arraste até que apareça o número de página desejado ou toque em uma miniatura para saltar para aquela página. Para adicionar ou remover um favorito: Para adicionar um favorito, toque na fita. Você pode ter vários favoritos. Para remover um favorito, toque nele. Você não necessita definir um favorito ao fechar um PDF, o iBooks lembra onde você parou e volta para essa posição quando você abrir o PDF novamente. Para ir para o índice: Toque próximo do centro da página atual para mostrar controles e, em seguida, toque em . Toque em uma entrada para saltar para aquela localização, ou toque em Retomar para retornar para a página atual. Se o autor não definiu um índice, em vez disso, você pode tocar em um ícone de página. Como Alterar a Aparência de um Livro Para alterar a aparência de um livro acesse os controles tocando próximo do centro de uma página. Para alterar o tamanho do tipo ou fonte: Toque em e, em seguida, na lista que aparece, toque em ou em para reduzir ou aumentar o tamanho do tipo. Para alterar a fonte, toque em Fontes e, em seguida, selecione uma fonte da lista. A alteração da fonte e tamanho da letra também altera a formatação do texto. Para alterar o brilho: Toque no , depois ajuste o brilho. Para alterar a cor da página e da letra: Toque no , e ative a opção Sépia para alterar a cor da página e da letra. Esse ajuste é aplicável a todos os livros. Você pode alterar a forma que o iBooks justifica o texto dos parágrafos em Ajustes > iBooks. Como sincronizar livros e PDFs É possível buscar por título e autor de um livro para localizá-lo rapidamente na estante. Também é possível buscar o conteúdo de um livro para encontrar todas as referências para uma palavra ou frase na qual está interessado. Também é possível enviar uma busca para Wikipédia ou Google para encontrar outros recursos relacionados. Para buscar um livro: Vá para a estante de livros. Toque na barra de estado para rolar para o topo da tela, depois toque na lupa. Digite uma palavra que aparece no título de um livro, ou o nome do autor e toque em Buscar. Os livros coincidentes são exibidos na estante.Para buscar em um livro: Abra um livro e toque próximo ao centro da página para exibir os controles. Toque na lupa e, em seguida, digite uma frase de busca e toque em Buscar. Toque em um resultado da busca para ir para aquela página do livro. Para enviar sua busca ao Google ou Wikipédia, toque em Buscar no Google ou Buscar na Wikipédia. O Safari é aberto e exibe o resultado. Para buscar rapidamente uma palavra em um livro, mantenha pressionada a palavra e, em seguida, toque em Buscar. Como Procurar a Definição de uma Palavra É possível procurar a definição de uma palavra utilizando o dicionário. Para procurar uma palavra: Selecione uma palavra do livro e, em seguida, toque em Dicionário no menu que aparece. Talvez os dicionários não estejam disponíveis em todos os idiomas. Como fazer para que o livro seja lido Se você tem uma deficiência visual, pode utilizar o VoiceOver para ler um livro em voz alta. Consulte “VoiceOver” na página 151. Talvez alguns livros não sejam compatíveis com o VoiceOver. Como imprimir ou enviar um PDF por e-mail Você pode usar o iBooks para enviar uma cópia de um PDF via e-mail ou imprimir todo ou uma porção do PDF em uma impressora compatível. Para enviar uma PDF por e-mail: Abra o PDF, em seguida toque em e escolha Enviar por E-mail. Uma mensagem é exibida com o PDF anexado. Toque Enviar quando houver terminado de escrever e colocado o endereço em sua mensagem. Para imprimir um PDF: Abra o PDF, em seguida toque em e escolha Imprimir. Selecione uma impressora e o intervalo de página e a quantidade de cópias e, em seguida, toque em Imprimir. Para obter mais informações sobre impressoras compatíveis, consulte “Impressão” na página 42. Você somente pode imprimir ou enviar os PDFs por e-mail. Essas opções não estão disponíveis para os livros ePub. Para organizar a estante de livros Utilize a estante de livros para navegar por seus livros e PDFs. Você também pode organizar os itens em coleções. Para ordenar a estante: Vá para a estante de livros e toque em e, em seguida, selecione um método de classificação a partir das opções na parte inferior da tela. 140 Capítulo 19 iBooksCapítulo 19 iBooks 141 Para reordenar itens: Toque e mantenha pressionado um livro ou PDF e, em seguida, arraste-o para um novo local da estante. Para apagar um item da estante: Vá a sua estante de livros e toque em Editar. Toque em cada livro ou PDF que você deseja apagar para que uma marca de seleção apareça e, em seguida, toque em Apagar. Quando terminar de apagar, toque em OK. Se você apagar um livro que comprou, poderá transferi-lo novamente a partir das Compras na iBookstore. Se você tiver sincronizado o seu dispositivo com o seu computador, o livro também permanecerá na sua biblioteca do iTunes. Para criar, renomear ou apagar uma coleção: Toque em Coleções para exibir a lista de coleções. Toque em Novo para adicionar uma nova coleção. Para apagar um teclado, toque em Editar e, em seguida, toque em e toque em Apagar. Você não pode editar ou remover as coleções de Livros e PDFs integrados. Para editar o nome de uma coleção, toque no seu nome. Quando acabar, pressione OK. Mova um livro ou PDF para uma coleção: Vá a sua estante de livros e toque em Editar. Toque em cada livro ou PDF que você deseja mover para que uma marca de seleção apareça e, em seguida, toque em Mover e selecione uma coleção. Um item pode estar somente em uma coleção por vez. Quando você adiciona um livro ou PDF à sua estante de livros, ele é colocado na coleção de Livros ou PDF. A partir daí, você pode movê-lo para uma coleção diferente. Talvez você deseje criar coleções para o trabalho ou para a escola, ou para leitura de referência ou lazer. Para visualizar uma coleção: Toque em Coleções e, em seguida, toque em um item na lista que aparece.142 Sobre o Game Center No Game Center, você pode descobrir novos jogos e compartilhar suas experiências com eles com seus amigos no mundo todo. Convide seus amigos para jogar ou use a autosseleção para encontrar outros oponentes do mesmo nível. Veja os placares para saber quem são os melhores jogadores. Ganhe pontos atingindo metas específicas em um jogo. Nota: Talvez o Game Center não esteja disponível em todos os países ou regiões, e os jogos disponíveis podem variar de acordo com esses países ou regiões. Para usar o Game Center, é preciso ter uma conexão com a Internet e um ID Apple. Se você já tiver uma conta da loja iTunes Store, uma conta MobileMe ou outra conta da Apple, poderá usar esse ID Apple com o Game Center. Se ainda não tiver um ID Apple, poderá criar um no Game Center, conforme descrito abaixo. Como configurar o Game Center Quando você abre o Game Center pela primeira vez, aparece uma mensagem perguntando se você deseja permitir notificações push. Essas notificações incluem alertas, sons e indicadores de ícones que permitem saber sobre os eventos do Game Center, mesmo se você não estiver usando o Game Center. Você pode, por exemplo, receber um alerta dizendo que um amigo convidou você para jogar um jogo. Para permitir notificações: Toque em OK. Se você tocar em Não Permitir, você não receberá notificações do Game Center. Você poderá ativar as notificações mais tarde, se quiser, e poderá especificar quais tipos de notificações deseja receber. 20 Game CenterCapítulo 20 Game Center 143 Para ativar ou desativar as notificações: Em Ajustes, escolha Notificações. Desativar Notificações desativa as notificações de todos os aplicativos. Você também pode silenciar as notificações usando o Interruptor Lateral (consulte “Interruptor Lateral” na página 176). Especifique quais notificações você deseja receber para o Game Center: Em Ajustes, escolha Notificações > Game Center; depois, configure os ajustes dos Sons, Alertas e Indicadores. Se o Game Center não estiver aparecendo, ative as notificações. Para ajustar as informações do Game Center para o seu ID Apple: 1 Digite seu ID e senha da Apple e, em seguida, toque em Iniciar Sessão. Talvez seja solicitado que você forneça informações adicionais. Se você não tiver um ID Apple, poderá criar um tocando em Criar Nova Conta. 2 Toque em Concordar para aceitar os Termos e Condições do Game Center. 3 Digite um apelido—o nome que as outras pessoas verão e que pelo qual você será conhecido. 4 Para configurar seus ajustes no Game Center:  Para permitir que outros usuários convidem você para jogar um jogo, deixe a opção Permitir Convites para Jogos ativada. Caso não queira deixá-la ativada, toque nela para desativá-la.  Para permitir que outros usuários localizem você por seu endereço de e-mail, deixe a opção Localizar-me por E-mail ativada. Caso não queira deixá-la ativada, toque nela para desativá-la.  Verifique o e-mail de sua conta. Caso não queira digitar o endereço que utiliza para iniciar a sessão no ID Apple, você poderá digitar um endereço diferente. Para confirmar esse endereço e provar que ele é seu, será preciso responder ao e-mail enviado para esse endereço.  Para adicionar outros endereços de e-mail que as pessoas possam utilizar para entrar em contato com você no Game Center, toque em Adicionar Outro E-mail. 5 Toque em Seguinte quando sua conta for configurada. Para alterar os ajustes do Game Center para o seu Apple ID: 1 Toque em Eu e, em seguida, toque no símbolo da sua conta. 2 Toque em Ver Conta. 3 Faça suas alterações e toque em OK. Para iniciar a sessão usando um Apple ID diferente: 1 Toque em Eu e, em seguida, toque no símbolo da conta. 2 Toque em Finalizar Sessão. 3 Digite seu novo ID e senha da Apple e, em seguida, toque em Iniciar Sessão.Jogos Como comprar e transferir jogos Os jogos para o Game Center estão disponíveis na loja App Store. Se você ainda não inseriu as informações de seu cartão de crédito em seu ID Apple, uma mensagem aparecerá, pedindo que você insira essas informações antes de poder comprar e transferir jogos. Para comprar e transferir jogos:Toque em Jogos; depois, toque em Buscar Jogos do Game Center. A seção do Game Center da loja App Store mostra os jogos que funcionam com o Game Center. Você pode navegar essa seção e comprar e transferir jogos a partir dela. Consulte Capítulo 18,“App Store,” na página 130. Se quiser adquirir um jogo que um amigo seu tem, toque no nome do jogo na tela de informações de seu amigo para ir direto para esse jogo na loja App Store. Como jogar A tela Jogos mostra os jogos que você transferiu da loja App Store. Para cada um dos jogos, são exibidos o seu número de proezas e a sua classificação entre todos os jogadores do jogo. Para obter informações sobre um jogo: Toque em Jogos, depois toque em um jogo. Se disponível, você pode exibir os placares do jogo, ver as suas proezas do jogo e descobrir quem jogou o jogo recentemente. Para jogar um jogo:Toque em Jogos, escolha um jogo e toque em Jogar. Dependendo do jogo, a tela inicial pode fornecer instruções ou outras informações e poderá também mostrar quadros de classificações e proezas e opções para ajustar o jogo ou definir se ele será um jogo de um ou de vários jogadores. Para jogar com outros jogadores, você pode convidar um amigo ou usar a autosseleção para que o Game Center encontre outros jogadores para você. Para obter mais informações sobre como fazer amigos no Game Center, consulte “Amigos” na página 147. Para jogos de vários jogadores, você pode também enviar um convite para o jogo a partir da tela Amigos. Para convidar um amigo para um jogo de vários jogadores a partir da tela Amigos: 1 Toque em Amigos na parte inferior da tela. 2 Escolha um amigo. 3 Escolha um jogo e toque em Jogar. Se o jogo permitir ou precisar de jogadores adicionais, você pode escolher quais jogadores deseja convidar. Em seguida, toque em Seguinte. 4 Digite e envie o seu convite, depois espere que as pessoas aceitem. 144 Capítulo 20 Game CenterCapítulo 20 Game Center 145 5 Inicie a partida. Se o amigo não estiver disponível ou não responder ao seu convite, você pode tocar em Autosseleção para que o Game Center procure um outro jogador para você, ou pode tocar em Convidar para tentar convidar um outro amigo. Talvez outros jogadores convidem você para jogar o jogo. Para responder a um convite para jogar um jogo: Toque em Aceitar ou Recusar no alerta que aparece. Em Restrições, você pode desativar os jogos de vários jogadores. Consulte “Restrições” na página 174. Você pode impedir que outros jogadores convidem você para jogar jogos desativando a opção Permitir Convites para Jogos nos ajustes do Game Center. Consulte “Seu estado e as informações da conta” na página 148. Para retornar ao Game Center:Pressione o botão de Início e toque em Game Center na tela de Início. Você também pode pressionar o botão de Início duas vezes rapidamente e escolher o Game Center em seus aplicativos recentes. Placares Alguns jogos fornecem um ou mais placares para mostrar a ordem de classificação dos jogadores, com suas pontuações, tempos ou outras pontuações do sucesso do jogador. Para ver o placar de um jogo: Toque em Jogos, escolha o jogo e toque em Placar. Também é possível visualizar os placares de dentro do jogo. Se um jogo tiver variações (como Fácil, Normal e Difícil), a tela Categorias permite escolher o placar do jogo em geral ou para uma das variações.O placar mostra a classificação de seus amigos e de todos os jogadores. Você poderá visualizar as estatísticas do placar de um período de tempo específico, como hoje, esta semana ou sempre. Gire o iPad para ver o placar na horizontal. Para começar a jogar um jogo do placar: Toque em Jogar no canto superior direito. Proezas Alguns jogos recompensam você com pontos de bônus para certas proezas. Veja as proezas possíveis de um jogo: Toque em Jogos, escolha um jogo e toque em Proezas. Para cada proeza, o Game Center mostra quantos pontos de bônus são concedidos e se você concluiu a proeza. O total de pontos concedidos para as suas proezas aparecem na parte superior. Você pode obter pontos de bônus para uma proeza específica apenas uma vez. Você pode também visualizar as proezas de dentro do jogo. Jogos Recentes Alguns jogos permitem ver quais de seus amigos jogaram o jogo recentemente. Para ver quem jogou um jogo recentemente: Toque em Jogos, toque em um jogo e escolha Jogos Recentes. Para obter informações sobre um jogador:Toque no nome do jogador na lista. 146 Capítulo 20 Game CenterCapítulo 20 Game Center 147 Amigos O Game Center coloca você em contato com jogadores do mundo inteiro. Você adiciona amigos ao Game Center fazendo uma solicitação ou aceitando uma solicitação de outro jogador. Como adicionar um amigo ao Game Center: 1 Toque em Amigos ou em Pedidos. 2 Toque em e digite o endereço de e-mail de um amigo ou o apelido no Game Center. Os endereços e nomes correspondentes de seus contatos aparecem conforme você digita. Toque em um contato para incluir essa pessoa em seu pedido. Toque em para navegar pelos seus contatos. Para adicionar vários amigos de uma vez, digite mais contatos. 3 Digite uma mensagem para o seu pedido e toque em Enviar. Para poder se tornar um amigo, a pessoa precisa aceitar o seu pedido. Outros jogadores poderão enviar-lhe um pedido. Se você receber um alerta, você pode aceitar o pedido ou fechá-lo e responder ao pedido mais tarde, a partir da tela Pedido. Um símbolo no botão Pedidos exibe o número de pedidos de amigos pendentes. Para atender um pedido de amizade: Toque em Pedidos, toque no nome da pessoa que está fazendo o pedido e, em seguida, toque em Aceitar, Ignorar ou Comunicar Problema. Quando um jogador aceita o pedido de outro jogador, um se torna amigo do outro. Os nomes dos amigos aparecem na tela Amigos. Para obter informações sobre um amigo: Toque no nome do amigo. Para buscar um amigo:Toque na barra de estado para rolar para o topo da tela, depois toque no campo de busca e comece a digitar. Os amigos que corresponderem à sua busca aparecerão conforme você digitar. A página de informações de um amigo mostra quantos amigos (incluindo você) a pessoa possui, o número de jogos diferentes que ele jogou e quantas proezas ele concluiu. A tela de informações também pode mostrar:  Os jogos que vocês jogaram juntos  Os jogos que vocês têm em comum  Outros jogos que seu amigo tem Você pode tocar em um jogo em qualquer uma das listas para ver sua posição e a posição de seu amigo no placar geral e suas respectivas proezas para o jogo. Para convidar um amigo para jogar um jogo: Toque em Amigos, toque no nome do amigo, toque em um jogo e, finalmente, toque em Jogar. Consulte “Como jogar” na página 144.Para remover um amigo:Toque em Amigos, toque em um nome, toque em Desfazer Amizade e toque em Remover. Se um jogador for agressivo ou estiver exibindo comportamento inadequado, você pode comunicar o problema. Para comunicar um problema com um amigo: Toque em Amigos, toque no nome do amigo, e, em seguida, toque em "Comunicar Problema". Descreva o problema e toque em Comunicar para enviar a comunicação. Se você desativar a opção Jogos em Grupo nos Ajustes, não poderá enviar ou receber convites para jogar jogos. Consulte “Restrições” na página 174. Seu estado e as informações da conta A tela Eu resume as informações sobre seus amigos, seus jogos e suas proezas. O campo de texto do centro da tela permite digitar sua mensagem de estado atual. O seu estado aparece com o seu apelido nas telas Amigos dos outros jogadores. Para alterar o seu estado:Toque no campo de estado para inserir ou atualizar o seu estado. Para visualizar as informações da sua conta: Toque no banner da conta e toque em Ver Conta. Você pode alterar ou atualizar os seguintes ajustes:  Apelido  Permitir convites para jogos  Localizar-me por E-mail  O seu endereço postal do Game Center  Endereços de e-mail adicionais Quando acabar, pressione OK. Você também pode iniciar e finalizar a sessão em uma conta diferente ou criar uma nova conta. Para finalizar a sessão:Toque no banner da conta e toque em Finalizar. Para iniciar sessão em uma conta diferente: Digite seu nome de usuário e senha e, em seguida, toque em Iniciar Sessão. Para criar uma nova conta: Toque em Criar Nova Conta e siga as instruções na tela. 148 Capítulo 20 Game CenterCapítulo 20 Game Center 149 Controles Parentais Você pode usar os controles parentais para gerenciar a forma que a sua família adiciona amigos e participar de jogos em grupo no Game Center. Para configurar os controles parentais do Game Center: Escolha Ajustes > Geral > Restrições, depois toque em Ativar Restrições. Insira um código de quatro dígitos e, em seguida, reinsira o código. Você pode ativar as restrições nos seguintes ajustes:  Jogos em Grupo  Como adicionar amigos Para obter mais informações, consulte “Restrições” na página 174.150 Além dos inúmeros recursos que tornam o iPad fácil de usar por qualquer pessoa, o iPad inclui recursos de acesso universal. Recursos de Acesso Universal Os recursos de acesso universal tornam o iPad fácil de usar por pessoas com deficiência visual, deficiência auditiva ou surdez, ou deficiência física ou de aprendizagem. Os recursos de acessibilidade do iPad incluem:  Suporte para reprodução de conteúdo com legendas ocultas  Leitor de tela do VoiceOver  Ampliação de zoom  Branco sobre Preto  Texto Grande  Áudio Mono  Falar texto automático  Suporte para terminais braile Os recursos Zoom, Branco sobre Preto e Áudio Mono funcionam com todos os aplicativos. O Texto Grande funciona com o Mail e Notas. O VoiceOver funciona com os aplicativos integrados do iPad e com alguns aplicativos de outros fabricantes que você pode transferir da App Store. A legenda oculta funciona com vídeos e podcasts que sejam compatíveis. Para obter mais informações sobre os recursos de acessibilidade do iPad, visite o site www.apple.com/br/accessibility/ipad. É possível ativar ou desativar os recursos de acessibilidade no ajuste Acessibilidade do iPad. Também é possível ativar alguns recursos de acessibilidade no iTunes ao conectar o iPad ao seu computador. Para ativar ou desativar os recursos de acessibilidade no iTunes: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 No iTunes, selecione iPad na barra lateral. 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 151 3 No painel Resumo, clique em Configurar Acesso Universal na seção Opções. 4 Selecione os recursos de acessibilidade que deseja utilizar e clique em OK. Os recursos selecionados ficam disponíveis imediatamente no iPad quando você clica em OK. VoiceOver O VoiceOver descreve, em voz alta, o que aparece na tela. Assim, você pode utilizar o iPad sem ter que vê-lo. O VoiceOver descreve cada elemento da tela conforme você os seleciona. Quando você seleciona um elemento, ele é envolto por um retângulo preto (para beneficiar as pessoas que podem enxergar a tela) e o VoiceOver diz o nome do item ou o descreve. O retângulo preto é referido como "cursor" do VoiceOver. Toque na tela ou arraste seus dedos para ouvir diferentes itens na tela. Para interagir com itens da tela, tais como botões e links, utilize os gestos descritos em “Gestos do VoiceOver” na página 154. Quando você seleciona texto, o VoiceOver lê o texto. Se você ativa a opção Falar Dicas, o VoiceOver pode lhe dizer o nome do item. Quando você seleciona um controle (tal como um botão ou um interruptor), o VoiceOver fornece instruções a você — por exemplo, “toque duas vezes para abrir”. Quando você vai para uma tela nova, o VoiceOver reproduz um som e automaticamente seleciona e fala o primeiro elemento que está na tela (normalmente, o item do canto superior esquerdo). O VoiceOver também permite que você saiba quando o visor muda para a orientação horizontal ou vertical e quando a tela está bloqueada ou desbloqueada. Nota: O VoiceOver utiliza o idioma especificado em Internacional (nos Ajustes), que pode ser influenciado pelo ajuste da região. O VoiceOver está disponível em diversos idiomas, mas não em todos.Como Configurar o VoiceOver O VoiceOver altera os gestos que você usa para controlar o iPad. Depois que ativar o VoiceOver, você deve utilizar os gestos do VoiceOver para utilizar o iPad—até mesmo para desativar o VoiceOver a fim de retomar o funcionamento padrão. Para ativar ou desativar o VoiceOver no iPad: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e depois toque no controle Ativar/Desativar do VoiceOver. Para ativar ou desativar o VoiceOver no iTunes: Selecione iPad na barra lateral do iTunes. Na seção Opções do painel Resumo, clique em Configurar Acesso Universal. Selecione VoiceOver e depois clique em OK. Você também pode definir Início Triplo Clique para ativar ou desativar o VoiceOver. Consulte “Clique Triplo em Início” na página 164. Nota: Não é possível utilizar o VoiceOver e o Zoom de Tela Cheia ao mesmo tempo. Ajustes VoiceOver É possível ajustar o VoiceOver para fornecer dicas faladas, aumentar ou diminuir a velocidade da fala ou dar feedback da digitação. Para ativar ou desativar as dicas faladas: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e depois toque no controle Ativar/Desativar do recurso Falar Dicas. As dicas faladas são ativadas por padrão. Para definir a velocidade da fala do VoiceOver: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e depois ajuste o controle deslizante Velocidade da Fala. Você pode escolher o tipo de fala obtida ao digitar. É possível ajustar o VoiceOver para falar caracteres, palavras, ambos, ou nada. Se você escolher ouvir tanto caracteres como palavras, o VoiceOver pronunciará cada caractere à medida que você o digitar e depois pronunciará a palavra inteira quando você digitar um espaço ou pontuação. Para selecionar a fala da digitação: Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Falar Digitação. Você pode escolher Caracteres, Palavras, Caracteres e Palavras, ou Nada para teclados de software e para um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard. 152 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 153 Para utilizar fonética Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e, em seguida, toque no interruptor Usar Fonética para ativá-lo. Utilize este recurso quando digitar ou ler caractere por caractere para ajudar a esclarecer quais caracteres foram falados. Quando a opção Usar Fonética está ativada, o VoiceOver primeiro fala o caractere e, em seguida, fala uma palavra que começa com o caractere. Por exemplo, se você digitar o caractere "f", o VoiceOver fala "f" e, em seguida, "foxtrot". Alteração de Tom Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e, em seguida, toque no interruptor Alteração de Tom para ativá-lo. O VoiceOver utiliza um tom mais alto ao digitar uma letra e um tom mais baixo para ao apagar uma letra. O VoiceOver também utiliza um tom mais alto quando fala o primeiro item de um grupo (como uma lista ou tabela) e um tom mais baixo quando fala o último item de um grupo. Por padrão, o VoiceOver utiliza o idioma definido para o iPad. É possível definir um idioma diferente para o VoiceOver. Para alterar o idioma falado pelo VoiceOver: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral, > Internacional> Idioma, selecione um idioma e toque em OK. Alguns idiomas podem ser influenciados pelo ajuste da região. Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Internacional > Formato da Região e depois selecione o formato. Para definir as opções do rotor para navegação web:Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Rotor Web. Toque para selecionar ou desmarcar opções. Para alterar a posição de um item da lista, toque em ao lado do item e, em seguida, arraste para cima ou para baixo. Para selecionar os idiomas disponíveis no rotor Idioma:Em Ajustes, selecione Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Rotor de Idioma e toque para selecionar o idioma ou idiomas que deseja que apareça no rotor de Idioma. Para alterar a posição de um idioma da lista, toque em ao lado do item e arraste para cima ou para baixo. O rotor Idioma sempre está disponível quando você tiver selecionado mais de um idioma.Gestos do VoiceOver Quando o VoiceOver é ativado, ele altera os gestos que você usa para controlar o iPad de forma que você possa ouvir as descrições sem ativar os botões. Estes gestos do VoiceOver permitem que você se mova pela tela e controle os elementos individuais que selecionar. Alguns gestos do VoiceOver usam dois, três ou quatro dedos para tocar ou passar o dedo. Para obter os melhores resultados usando mais de um dedo, relaxe e permita que seus dedos toquem a tela com algum espaço entre eles. Há várias maneiras de introduzir gestos do VoiceOver. Por exemplo, você pode tocar com dois dedos usando tanto os dois dedos da mesma mão como um dedo de cada mão. Também pode utilizar os polegares. Tente utilizar técnicas diferentes para descobrir o que funciona melhor para você. Se os seus gestos não funcionarem, tente usar movimentos mais rápidos, especialmente para os gestos de toque duplo e de passar o dedo. Para passar o dedo, tente roçar a tela rapidamente com o seu dedo ou dedos. Para praticar os gestos: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Praticar Gestos e depois toque no botão Praticar Gestos do VoiceOver. Pratique os gestos descritos nos “Ajustes VoiceOver,” abaixo. Quando acabar de praticar, pressione OK. Realize os gestos de passar um único dedo rapidamente para distingui-los dos gestos de arrastar. Veja abaixo um resumo dos gestos do VoiceOver: Navegação e Leitura  Tocar: Fala o item.  Passar o dedo para a direita ou para a esquerda: Seleciona o item seguinte ou anterior.  Passar o dedo para cima ou para baixo: o efeito varia dependendo do ajuste Controle do Rotor. Consulte “Como Usar o VoiceOver” na página 157.  Tocar com dois dedos: Para de falar o item atual.  Passar dois dedos para cima: lê tudo a partir do tipo da tela.  Passar dois dedos para baixo: lê tudo a partir da posição atual.  Passar três dedos para cima ou para baixo: Rola uma página de cada vez.  Passar três dedos para a direita ou esquerda: vai para a página seguinte ou anterior (por exemplo, na tela de Início ou no Safari).  Tocar com três dedos: Fala o estado da rolagem (qual página ou linhas estão visíveis).  Passar quatro dedos par cima ou para baixo: vai para o primeiro ou último elemento de uma página.  Passar quatro dedos para a direita ou para a esquerda: vai para a próxima seção ou a seção anterior (por exemplo, em uma página web). 154 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 155 Selecionar e Ativar  Dois toques: Ativa o item selecionado.  Tocar um item com um dedo, tocar a tela com outro dedo (“toque-dividido”): Ativar item.  Tocar duas vezes e segurar (1 segundo) + gesto padrão: Usa um gesto padrão. O gesto de tocar duas vezes e segurar faz com que o iPad interprete o gesto subsequente como um gesto padrão. Você pode, por exemplo, dar um toque duplo e segurar; então, sem levantar o dedo, pode arrastá-lo para deslizar um controle. Tocando duas vezes e mantendo o seu dedo na tela, você pode utilizar os gestos padrão quando o VoiceOver estiver ativado. Uma série de tons indica que os gestos normais estão em vigor. Eles ficam efetivos até você levantar o dedo, então são retomados os gestos do VoiceOver.  Toque duplo com dois dedos: Reprodução ou pausa no iPod, YouTube ou Fotos. Inicia ou para o cronômetro.  Toque duplo com três dedos: Silencia ou ativa o som do VoiceOver.  Toque triplo com três dedos: Ativa ou desativa a tela. Controle do Rotor O rotor é um controle virtual que age como um mostrador físico quando o VoiceOver é ativado. Use o rotor para alterar os ajustes do VoiceOver e para acessar outros comandos e recursos. Para usar o rotor: Gire dois dedos na tela do iPad para “ativar” o seletor para escolher itens do rotor. Passe o dedo para cima e para baixo para usar o item selecionado. O efeito do rotor dependerá do que você está fazendo. Por exemplo, se você estiver lendo texto em um e-mail, poderá utilizar o rotor para alternar entre ouvir o texto falado palavra por palavra, caractere por caractere ou linha por linha quando passar o dedo para cima ou para baixo. Ao navegar por uma página da web, utilize o rotor para escolher se deseja ouvir o texto palavra por palavra ou caractere por caractere, ouvir apenas os cabeçalhos, ouvir apenas os links (todos eles, os links visitados ou os links ainda não visitados), ouvir elementos de formulários ou ouvir descrições de imagens. Você pode utilizar o ajuste do rotor para ouvir todo o texto ou para pular de um elemento para outro de um certo tipo, como cabeçalhos ou links. Leitura de texto Selecione e escute o texto por:  Caractere  Palavra  LinhaNavegação de uma página web Selecione e escute o texto por:  Caractere  Palavra  Linha  Cabeçalho  Link  Link visitado  Link não visitado  Link na página  Controle de Forma  Tabela  Linha (ao navegar em uma tabela)  Lista  Ponto de referência  Imagem  Texto estático Ampliação ou redução Digitação de texto Mova o ponto de inserção e escute o texto por:  Caractere  Palavra  Linha Selecione a função editar Selecione o idioma Utilização de controle Selecione e escute os valores por:  Caractere  Palavra  Linha Ajuste o valor do objeto de controle 156 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 157 Como Usar o VoiceOver Para desbloquear o iPad: Selecione o botão Desbloquear e toque duas vezes na tela. Para selecionar itens na tela: Arraste o dedo pela tela. O VoiceOver identifica cada elemento que você toca. Você pode também mover sistematicamente de um elemento para o outro passando um dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita. Os elementos são selecionados da esquerda para a direita, de cima para baixo. Passar o dedo para a direita vai para o elemento seguinte e passar o dedo para a esquerda volta para o elemento anterior. Para “tocar” um item selecionado quando o VoiceOver está ativado: Toque duas vezes em qualquer lugar da tela. Para falar o texto de um elemento, caractere por caractere, palavra por palavra ou linha por linha: Com o elemento selecionado, passe um dedo para cima ou para baixo. Passe um dedo para baixo para ler o caractere seguinte ou passe o dedo para cima para ler o caractere anterior. Gire o controle do rotor para ler palavra por palavra ou linha por linha. Para ajustar um controle deslizante: Com um dedo, arraste para cima para aumentar o ajuste ou arraste para baixo para diminuí-lo. O VoiceOver fala o ajuste conforme você o ajusta. Para rolar em uma lista ou área da tela: Passe três dedos para cima ou para baixo. Passe os dedos para baixo para descer uma página ou passe os dedos para cima para subir uma página. Se estiver passando por uma lista, o VoiceOver pronunciará o intervalo de itens exibidos (por exemplo, “mostrando linhas 5 a 10”). Rolar continuamente por uma lista: Toque duas vezes e mantenha o elemento pressionado. Quando escutar uma série de sons, você pode mover o seu dedo para cima ou para baixo para rolar a lista. A rolagem contínua se interromperá quando você levantar o dedo. Usar um índice: Algumas listas possuem um índice alfabético do lado direito. O índice não pode ser selecionado passando o dedo entre os elementos; você deve tocar no índice para selecioná-lo. Com o índice selecionado, passe o dedo para cima ou para baixo para mover-se pelo índice. Você também pode tocar duas vezes e, em seguida, deslizar o seu dedo para cima ou para baixo. Para reordenar a tela Início: Na tela Início, selecione o ícone que deseja mover. Toque duas vezes, segure e depois arraste o ícone. O VoiceOver fala a posição da linha e da coluna enquanto você arrasta o ícone. Solte o ícone quando ele estiver na localização desejada. Você pode arrastar ícones adicionais. Arraste um item para a extremidade esquerda ou direita da tela para movê-lo para outra página da tela Início. Quando você terminar de reordenar os ícones, pressione o botão Início . Você pode ativar a fala, parar de falar um item, desativar a tela ou fazer com que o VoiceOver fale a tela inteira.Silenciar o VoiceOver Toque duas vezes com três dedos. Toque duas vezes novamente com três dedos para reativar a fala. Para silenciar apenas os sons do VoiceOver, coloque o Interruptor Lateral na posição de silêncio. Parar de falar um item Toque uma vez com dois dedos. Toque com os dois dedos novamente para retomar a fala. A função de fala automática é retomada quando você selecionar outro item. Desativar a tela enquanto você utiliza o VoiceOver Toque três vezes com três dedos. Repita para ativar a tela novamente. Falar a tela inteira desde a parte superior Passe dois dedos para cima. Para falar do item atual até a parte de baixo da tela Passe dois dedos para baixo. É possível ouvir informações do estado do iPad tocando na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. As informações incluem a hora, a vida útil da bateria, a intensidade do sinal Wi-Fi e outros. Digitação e edição de texto Quando você seleciona um campo de texto com o VoiceOver, você pode usar o teclado da tela para digitar o texto. Você pode usar os recursos de edição do iPad para cortar, copiar ou colar no campo de texto. Nota: O Safari não é compatível com a cópia de conteúdo de páginas web. Os recursos de edição funcionam somente em campos de texto editáveis. Para digitar texto: 1 Utilize o VoiceOver para selecionar um campo de texto editável e depois toque duas vezes para exibir o ponto de inserção e fazer aparecer o teclado da tela. Se o campo já possui texto, o ponto de inserção está colocado no começo ou no final do texto. Toque duas vezes novamente para colocar o ponto de inserção na extremidade oposta. O VoiceOver fala a posição do ponto de inserção. O ponto de inserção e o teclado da tela podem aparecer automaticamente quando você selecionar um campo de texto. O VoiceOver avisa quando estiver no modo de edição—baseado no ajuste do rotor. 2 Para digitar, realize uma das seguintes ações:  “Tipo toque” arrastando seu dedo até a tecla selecionada e levantando seu dedo para digitar o caractere.  “Tipo padrão” passando o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para selecionar uma tecla no teclado e tocando duas vezes para digitar o caractere. 158 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 159  Digite um caractere arrastando seu dedo pelo teclado para selecionar uma tecla e, enquanto mantém a tecla pressionada com um dedo, toque a tela com o outro dedo. O VoiceOver fala a tecla quando ela for selecionada e novamente quando ela for digitada. Para digitar um caractere acentuado:Toque duas vezes e mantenha a tecla pressionada até ouvir um som indicando que os caracteres alternativos apareceram; em seguida, arraste para a esquerda ou para a direita para selecionar e ouvir as opções. Solte o dedo para inserir a seleção atual. Para mover o ponto de inserção: Passe o dedo para cima ou para baixo para mover o ponto de inserção para frente ou para trás no texto. O VoiceOver emite um som quando o ponto de inserção se move e fala o caractere sobre o qual o ponto de inserção passou. Use o rotor para escolher se você deseja mover o ponto de inserção por caractere, palavra ou linha. Para selecionar texto: Use o rotor para selecionar a edição. Passe o dedo para cima ou para baixo para escolher entre as funções Selecionar e Selecionar Tudo e, em seguida, toque duas vezes. Se você escolher Selecionar, a palavra que estiver mais próxima ao ponto de inserção será selecionada quando você tocar duas vezes. Se você escolher Selecionar Tudo, todo o texto será selecionado. Separe ou junte os dedos para aumentar ou diminuir a seleção. Para cortar, copiar ou colar:Certifique-se de que o rotor esteja ajustado em edição. Com o texto selecionado, passe o dedo para cima ou para baixo para escolher Cortar, Copiar ou Colar e, em seguida, toque duas vezes. Para desfazer: Agite o iPad, passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para escolher a ação de desfazer e, em seguida, toque duas vezes. Para alterar o tom: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e depois toque no botão Alteração de Tom. Em seguida, quando apagar uma letra, será falado com um tom mais baixo. Para falar teclas foneticamente: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver e depois toque no botão Usar Fonética. Em seguida, quando colocar uma tecla em pausa, o VoiceOver falará a letra daquela tecla foneticamente (por exemplo, alfa para a, bravo para b, carlos para c, e assim por diante). Como controlar o VoiceOver usando um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard Você pode controlar o VoiceOver usando um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard emparelhado com o iPad. Consulte “Como usar os dispositivos Bluetooth” na página 46. Os comandos de teclado do VoiceOver permitem navegar na tela, selecionar itens, ler conteúdo da tela, ajustar o rotor e realizar outras ações do VoiceOver. Todos os comandos de teclado (exceto um) incluem Controle + Opção, abreviado na tabela abaixo como “VO”. A Ajuda do VoiceOver fala as teclas ou os comandos do teclado conforme você os digita. Você pode usar a Ajuda VoiceOver para aprender o leiaute do teclado e as ações associadas com as combinações de tecla. Comandos de teclado do VoiceOver VO = Controle-Opção Ler tudo, começando da posição atual VO–A Ler a partir do início VO–B Mover para a barra de estado VO–M Pressionar o botão Início VO–H Selecionar o item seguinte ou anterior VO–Seta à direita ou VO–Seta à esquerda Tocar em um item VO–barra de espaço Tocar duas vezes com dois dedos VO–”-” Selecionar o item de rotor seguinte ou anterior VO–Seta para cima ou VO–Seta para baixo Selecionar o item de rotor de fala seguinte ou anterior VO–Comando–Seta à esquerda ou VO–Seta à direita Ajustar o item de rotor de fala VO–Comando–Seta Acima ou VO–Seta Abaixo Desativar ou reativar som do VoiceOver VO–S Ativar ou desativar a cortina de tela VO–Maiúsculas-S Ativar a Ajuda do VoiceOver VO–K Voltar à tela anterior ou desativar a Ajuda do VoiceOver Escape Nav Rápida Ative a Navegação Rápida para controlar o VoiceOver com as teclas de seta. A Navegação Rápida está desativada por padrão. 160 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 161 Ativar ou desativar a Navegação Rápida Seta à esquerda–Seta à direita Selecionar o item seguinte ou anterior Seta à direita ou seta à esquerda Selecionar o item seguinte ou anterior especificado pelo ajuste do rotor Seta para cima ou seta para baixo Selecionar o primeiro ou o último item Controle–Seta para cima ou Controle–Seta para baixo "Tocar" em um item Seta para cima–Seta para baixo Rolar para cima, para baixo, para a esquerda ou para a direita Opção–Seta para cima, Opção–Seta para baixo, Opção–Seta à esquerda ou Opção–Seta à direita Alterar o rotor Seta para cima–Seta à esquerda ou Seta para cima–Seta à direita Utilização dos Mapas Use o VoiceOver para ampliar ou reduzir, selecionar alfinetes e obter informações sobre localizações. Para ampliar e reduzir: Use o rotor para escolher o modo de zoom e, em seguida, passe o dedo para cima ou para baixo para ampliar ou reduzir. Para selecionar um alfinete: Toque em um alfinete, passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para mover de um item a outro. Para obter informações sobre uma localização: Com um alfinete selecionado, toque duas vezes para exibir a sinalização de informação. Passe o dedo para a esquerda ou para a direita para selecionar a sinalização e, em seguida, toque duas vezes para exibir a página de informações. Como utilizar um Terminal Braile com o VoiceOver Configuração de um Terminal Braile Você pode utilizar um terminal em braile Bluetooth atualizável para ler a saída do VoiceOver em braile. Além disso, os terminais em braile com teclas de entrada e outros controles podem ser utilizados para controlar o iPad quando o VoiceOver estiver ativado. O iPad funciona com muitos terminais em braile sem fio mais populares Para obter uma lista dos terminais em braile compatíveis, acesse o site www.apple.com/br/ accessibility/voiceover/devicesupport.html. Para configurar um terminal em braile: 1 Ative o terminal em braile. 2 No iPad, ative o Bluetooth. Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Bluetooth, em seguida, toque no botão Bluetooth. 3 Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Braile, em seguida, escolha o terminal em braile.Para ativar ou desativar o braile abreviado:Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Braile, em seguida, toque para ativar o Braile Abreviado. Seleção de um Idioma O terminal em braile utiliza o idioma definido para o Controle por Voz. Por padrão, esse é o idioma definido para o iPad em Ajustes > Internacional > Idioma. Você pode usar o ajuste de idioma do VoiceOver para ajustar um idioma diferente para o VoiceOver e para os terminais em braile. Para definir o idioma do VoiceOver: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Internacional > Controle por Voz e selecione o idioma. Se alterar o idioma do iPad, talvez você necessite redefinir o idioma do VoiceOver e do terminal em braile. Controle do VoiceOver com seu Terminal em Braile É possível definir a célula mais à esquerda e mais à direita do seu terminal em braile para fornecer o estado do sistema e outras informações:  O Histórico de Avisos contém um mensagem não lida  A mensagem do Histórico de Avisos atual não foi lida  A fala do VoiceOver está silenciada  A bateria do iPad está baixa (carga inferior a 20%)  O iPad está em orientação horizontal  A exibição de tela está desativada  A linha atual contém texto adicional à esquerda  A linha atual contém texto adicional à direita Para ajustar a célula mais à esquerda e mais à direita para exibir as informações de estado:Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > VoiceOver > Braile, Célula de Estado, em seguida, toque em Esquerda ou Direita. Para ver uma descrição expandida da célula de estado:No seu terminal em braile, pressione o botão do roteador da célula de estado. Zoom O recurso de acessibilidade Zoom permite aumentar toda a tela para ajudá-lo a ver o que há na tela. Para ativar ou desativar o zoom: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > Zoom e depois toque no controle Ativar/Desativar o Zoom. Ou, use o Clique triplo em Início, (consulte “Clique Triplo em Início” na página 164). Para ampliar e reduzir: Toque duas vezes na tela com três dedos. Por padrão, a tela é ampliada em 200 por cento. Se você alterar a ampliação manualmente (utilizando o gesto de tocar e arrastar descrito abaixo), o iPad retorna automaticamente à ampliação que estava quando você ampliou tocando duas vezes com três dedos. 162 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 163 Para aumentar a ampliação: Usando três dedos, toque e arraste para cima para aumentar a ampliação e para baixo para diminuir. O gesto de tocar e arrastar é semelhante a um toque duplo, exceto pelo fato de que você não levanta os dedos no segundo toque; em vez disso, você arrasta os dedos na tela. Para mover-se pela tela: Quando estiver ampliado, arraste a tela usando três dedos. Mantenha um dedo pressionado perto da borda da tela para obter uma imagem panorâmica da tela. Mova o dedo mais perto da borda para deslocar-se mais rapidamente. Quando você abre uma nova janela, o Zoom sempre vai para o centro da parte superior da tela. Ao usar o Zoom com em teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard (consulte “Como controlar o VoiceOver usando um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard” na página 160), a imagem da tela segue o ponto de inserção, mantendo-o no centro a exibição. Texto Grande O Texto Grande permite aumentar o tamanho do texto no Mail e Notas. Você pode escolher textos de 20, 24, 32, 40, 48 ou 56 pontos. Para definir o tamanho do texto:Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > toque em Texto Grande, em seguida, toque no tamanho do texto desejado. Branco sobre Preto Utilize a função Branco sobre Preto para inverter as cores da tela do iPad, o que pode facilitar a leitura. Quando a função Branco sobre Preto estiver ativada, a tela fica semelhante a um negativo de foto. Para inverter as cores da tela: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade e toque em “Branco sobre Preto”.Áudio Mono O recurso de Áudio Mono combina o som dos canais esquerdo e direito em um sinal mono reproduzido dos dois lados. Isso permite que usuários com deficiências auditivas em um ouvido possam ouvir o sinal de som inteiro com o outro ouvido. Para ativar ou desativar o Áudio Mono: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade e depois toque no botão Áudio Mono. Falar texto automático O recurso “Falar texto automático” pronuncia as correções e as sugestões de texto que o iPad faz quando você está digitando. Para ativar ou desativar o recurso “Falar texto automático”: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade e depois toque no botão “Falar texto automático”. O recurso “Falar texto automático” também funciona com o VoiceOver ou o Zoom. Clique Triplo em Início O Clique Triplo em Início é uma forma fácil de ativar ou desativar alguns recursos de acessibilidade, pressionando rapidamente o botão Início três vezes. Você pode ajustar o Clique Triplo em Início para ativar ou desativar o VoiceOver, ativar ou desativar Branco sobre Preto ou perguntar se gostaria de clicar três vezes no botão Início para:  Ativar ou desativar o VoiceOver  Ativar ou desativar o Branco sobre Preto  Ativar ou desativar o Zoom Normalmente, o Clique Triplo em Início está desativado. Para definir a função do Clique Triplo em Início: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Acessibilidade > Clique Triplo em Início e depois escolha a função desejada. Legendas Ocultas e Outros Recursos Úteis Muitos recursos padrão disponíveis no iPad além disso, ajudam a que ele seja acessível para todos os usuários, incluindo aqueles com deficiência. Teclados com Formato Panorâmico Todos os aplicativos integrados ao iPad mostram um teclado maior na tela quando você gira o iPad para o modo horizontal. Você também pode digitar usando um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard. Tamanho Mínimo de Fonte das Mensagens do Mail Ajuste o tamanho mínimo de fonte para o texto das mensagens do Mail para Grande, Extra Grande ou Gigante para aumentar a legibilidade. Consulte “Mail” na página ###. 164 Capítulo 21 AcessibilidadeCapítulo 21 Acessibilidade 165 Acesso Universal no Mac OS X Utilize as recursos do Acesso Universal no Mac OS X quando usar o iTunes para sincronizar informações e conteúdos da biblioteca do seu iTunes para o iPad. No Finder, escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Mac, depois busque “acesso universal”. Para obter mais informações sobre os recursos de acessibilidade do iPad e do Mac OS X, visite o site www.apple.com/br/accessibility. Legendas Ocultas Você pode ativar as legendas ocultas dos vídeos nos ajustes de Vídeo. Consulte “Vídeo” na página 185.166 Sobre os Ajustes Os ajustes permitem personalizar os aplicativos do iPad ajustar data e hora, configurar a sua conexão de rede e digitar outras preferências para o iPad. Modo Avião O modo Avião desativa os recursos sem fio do iPad para cumprir com as normas das companhias aéreas. Para ativar ou desativar o modo Avião: Toque em Ajustes e ative ou desative o modo avião. Quando o modo avião estiver ativo, um pequeno aparecerá na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. Não são emitidos sinais Wi-Fi e Bluetooth e a recepção GPS é desativada, desativando também muitos recursos do iPad. Você não poderá:  Enviar ou receber e-mail  Navegar na Internet  Sincronizar contatos, calendários ou favoritos  Transmitir vídeos do YouTube em tempo real  Obter informes meteorológicos  Obter localizações de mapas  Usar as lojas iTunes Store, iBookstore ou App Store  Usar o Game Center Se for permitido pelo operador da aeronave e pelas leis e regulamentos aplicáveis, você pode continuar a usar o iPad para:  Ouvir música ou assistir a vídeos  Verificar o seu calendário 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 167  Visualizar fotos  Tomar notas  Ler mensagens de e-mail armazenadas no iPad Se for permitido pelo operador da aeronave e pelas leis e regulamentos aplicáveis, você pode reativar a Wi-Fi, para:  Enviar e receber e-mail  Navegar na Internet  Sincronizar contatos, calendários e favoritos  Transmitir vídeos do YouTube em tempo real  Usar as lojas iTunes Store, iBookstore ou App Store  Usar o Game Center Talvez você também possa ativar o Bluetooth para utilizar os dispositivos Bluetooth com o iPad. VPN Este ajuste aparece quando você configura uma VPN (Rede Virtual Privada). Consulte “Acesso VPN” na página 189. Para ativar ou desativar VPN: Toque em VPN para ativá-la ou desativá-la. Para configurar uma VPN: Escolha Geral > Rede > VPN. Wi-Fi Os ajustes Wi-Fi determinam se o iPad usa redes Wi-Fi locais para conectar-se à Internet. Se nenhuma rede Wi-Fi estiver disponível, ou se você tiver desativado o Wi-Fi, o iPad se conecta à Internet pela sua rede de dados celular (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G). Para ativar ou desativar a Wi-Fi: Escolha Wi-Fi e depois ative ou desative a opção Wi-Fi. Para conectar-se a uma rede Wi-Fi: Escolha Wi-Fi, espere um momento enquanto o iPad detecta as redes no raio de alcance, depois selecione uma rede. Se for necessário, digite uma senha e toque em Conectar. (As redes que requerem uma senha aparecem com um ícone de cadeado .) Uma vez que você tenha se conectado a uma rede Wi-Fi, o iPad se conecta a ela automaticamente sempre que a rede estiver no raio de alcance. Se houver mais de uma rede usada anteriormente dentro do raio de alcance, o iPad se conecta a mais recentemente utilizada.Quando o iPad se conecta a uma rede Wi-Fi, o ícone Wi-Fi situado na barra de estado na parte superior da tela mostra a intensidade do sinal. Quanto mais barras você vir, mais forte o sinal. Para ajustar o iPad para perguntar se você deseja conectar-se a uma nova rede: Escolha Wi-Fi e depois ative ou desative “Solicitar Conexão”. Quando você tentar acessar a Internet utilizando o Safari ou o Mail, por exemplo, e você não estiver no raio de alcance de uma rede Wi-Fi que tenha utilizado anteriormente, esta opção diz ao iPad para buscar uma outra rede. O iPad mostra uma lista com todas as redes Wi-Fi disponíveis entre as quais você pode escolher. As redes que requerem uma senha aparecem com um ícone de cadeado . Se a opção “Solicitar Conexão” estiver desativada e uma rede Wi-Fi ou de dados celular previamente usadas não estiverem disponíveis, você deve conectar-se manualmente a uma rede para conectar-se à Internet. Para esquecer uma rede de forma que o iPad não se conecte a ela automaticamente: Escolha Wi-Fi e depois toque no ao lado de uma rede a qual você tenha se conectado antes. Depois pressione “Esquecer esta Rede”. Para conectar-se a uma rede Wi-Fi fechada: Para conectar-se a uma rede Wi-Fi que não é mostrada na lista de redes, escolha Wi-Fi > Outra e digite o nome da rede. Se a rede pedir uma senha, toque em Segurança, toque no tipo de segurança que a rede usa e digite a senha. Para conectar-se a uma rede fechada, você precisa saber o nome da rede, a senha e o tipo de segurança. Algumas redes Wi-Fi podem pedir que você forneça informações adicionais, tais como um ID do cliente ou o endereço IP estático. Pergunte ao administrador da sua rede quais ajustes usar. Para configurar os ajustes para conectar-se a uma rede Wi-Fi: Escolha Wi-Fi e depois toque no ao lado de uma rede. Notificações Este ajuste aparecerá quando você abrir um aplicativo, como o Game Center, que utilize o serviço de Notificações Push da Apple. As notificações push o alertam sobre novas informações, mesmo quando o aplicativo não está sendo executado. Dependendo do aplicativo, as notificações diferem, mas podem incluir alertas de texto ou de som e um identificador numerado no ícone do aplicativo na tela Início. Você poderá desativar as notificações se não quiser ser avisado ou se quiser conservar a bateria. Consulte “Interruptor Lateral” na página 176. Para ativar ou desativar todas as notificações: Toque em Notificações e ative-as ou desative-as. 168 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 169 Para ativar ou desativar sons, alertas ou avisos de um aplicativo: Toque em Notificações, escolha um aplicativo na lista e, em seguida, escolha os tipos de notifica- ções que deseja ativar ou desativar. Serviços de Localização Os Serviços de Localização permitem que aplicativos como o Mapas obtenham e usem dados baseando-se na sua localização. Os Serviços de Localização não conectam os dados que coletam com as suas informações de identificação pessoais. Se você estiver com o Wi-Fi ligado, a sua localização aproximada é determinada utilizando as informações disponíveis das redes Wi-Fi locais. O iPad Wi-Fi + 3G também usa as redes de celular e GPS para determinar a sua localização. Quando um aplicativo está utilizando serviços de localização, o aparece na barra de estado. Cada aplicativo que utiliza os serviços de localização aparece na tela de ajustes dos Serviços de Localização, mostrando se esses serviços estão ativados ou não para esse aplicativo. O aparece para cada aplicativo que tenha solicitado a sua localização dentro das últimas 24 horas. Se não desejar utilizar este recurso, você pode desativar os serviços de localização para alguns ou todos os aplicativos. Se você desativar os serviços de localização, aparecerá uma mensagem perguntando se você deseja ativá-lo novamente, na próxima vez que um aplicativo tentar utilizar o recurso. Para ativar ou desativar os serviços de localização para todos os aplicativos:Escolha Geral > Serviços de Localização e ative ou desative os serviços de localização. Para ativar ou desativar os serviços de localização para alguns aplicativos:Escolha Geral > Serviços de Localização, escolha um aplicativo e, em seguida, ative ou desative os serviços de localização para esse aplicativo. Para conservar a vida útil da bateria, desative os serviços de localização quando não os estiver utilizando. Operadora Este ajuste aparece no iPad Wi-Fi + 3G quando você está fora da rede da sua operadora e há redes de dados de outras operadoras disponíveis para as conexões à Internet de rede celular. Para selecionar uma operadora: Escolha Operadora e selecione a rede que deseja utilizar.Dados do Celular Use os ajustes de dados do celular (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G) para ativar ou desativar o Roaming de Dados, visualizar ou alterar as informações da sua conta, ou adicionar um PIN (Número de Identificação Pessoal) para bloquear o cartão micro-SIM. Para ativar ou desativar a rede de dados de celular: Escolha Dados do Celular e depois ative ou desative os dados do celular. Para ativar ou desativar o Roaming de Dados: Escolha Dados do Sistema de Itinerário e depois ative ou desativa os dados do sistema de itinerário. Para visualizar as informações da sua conta: Toque em Ver Conta para ver ou alterar as informações da sua conta. Para adicionar um PIN do SIM (em alguns modelos): Toque em PIN do SIM e adicione um PIN para bloquear seu cartão micro-SIM. Brilho e Imagem de Fundo Use o ajuste Brilho para configurar o brilho da tela a um nível confortável. Use o ajuste Imagem de Fundo para personalizar o seu iPad. Para ajustar o brilho da tela: Escolha Brilho e depois arraste o controle deslizante. Para definir se o iPad deve ajustar o brilho da tela automaticamente: Escolha Brilho e depois ative ou desative a opção Brilho Automático. Se o Brilho Automático está ativado, o iPad ajusta o brilho da tela para as condições de luz atuais usando o sensor de luz ambiente integrado. Para ajustar o brilho da tela manualmente, consulte o “Como ajustar o brilho” na página 17. Uma imagem de fundo é exibida na tela Bloqueio e na tela Início. Você pode escolher uma das imagens que acompanham o iPad, uma imagem salva no iPad ou uma foto da sua Biblioteca de Fotos. Uma imagem que tem pelo menos 1024 x 1024 pixels preenche a tela quando o iPad é girado. Para definir uma imagem de fundo: Escolha Imagem de Fundo, selecione uma imagem e depois faça o seguinte:  Para usar a imagem como fundo da tela Bloqueio, toque em Definir Tela Bloqueio.  Para usar a imagem como fundo da tela Início, toque em Definir Tela Início.  Para usar a imagem como fundo de ambas telas Bloqueio e Início, toque em Definir Ambas. Porta-retrato O modo Moldura transforma o iPad em uma moldura animada. Escolha quais transi- ções e fotos exibir. Escolha se deseja ampliar os rostos e se deseja misturar as fotos. Para ativar o Porta-Retrato: Toque no na tela Bloqueio. 170 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 171 Geral O ajuste Geral inclui ajustes de data e hora, segurança, rede e outros ajustes que afetam mais de um aplicativo. Aqui é também onde você pode encontrar informações sobre o seu iPad ou redefinir o iPad ao seu estado original. Sobre Escolha Geral > Sobre para obter informações sobre o iPad, incluindo:  Número de músicas, vídeos, fotos e aplicativos  Capacidade de armazenamento total  Espaço disponível  Versão do software  Modelo e números de série  Número de dados de celular (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G) e endereços Wi-Fi e Bluetooth  Versão do firmware do modem do transmissor celular iPad Wi-Fi + 3G  Números IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) e ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card Identifier, ou Smart Card) (iPad Wi-Fi + 3G)  Informações Legais e Regulamentares Uso Para mostrar a porcentagem de uso da bateria: Ative a Porcentagem de Bateria para exibir a porcentagem de carregamento da bateria próximo ao ícone de bateria no canto superior direito. Para visualizar dados da rede de Celular: No iPad Wi-Fi + 3G, veja a quantidade de dados enviados e recebidos pela rede de dados celular. Para redefinir as suas estatísticas de uso: Toque em Redefinir estatísticas para limpar dados e estatísticas acumuladas. Sons Para ajustar o volume do toque e do aviso: Escolha Geral > Sons e arraste o controle deslizante. Se a opção “Ajustar com Botões” estiver ativada, use os botões de volume na lateral do iPad. Os botões de volume não alteram o volume do toque e do aviso se uma música ou vídeo estiver sendo reproduzido. Para usar os botões de volume para ajustar o volume do toque ou do aviso: Escolha Geral > Sons e, em seguida, toque em “Ajustar com Botões”. Para definir o toque: Escolha Geral > Sons > Toque e, em seguida, escolha um toque. Para definir os sons de aviso e de efeitos: Escolha Geral > Sons e depois ative ou desative os itens. Quando “Ajustar com Botões” está ativado, o iPad reproduz sons para alertas e efeitos que estão ativados.Você pode ajustar o iPad para reproduzir um som sempre que você:  Obtenha uma nova mensagem de e-mail  Enviar uma mensagem de e-mail  Tiver um evento do Calendário configurado para alertar você  Bloquear a tela do iPad  Digitar utilizando o teclado na tela Rede Use os ajustes Rede para configurar uma conexão VPN (rede virtual privada) ou para acessar os ajustes Wi-Fi. Para adicionar uma nova configuração VPN: Escolha Geral > Rede > VPN > Adicionar Configuração. Redes VPNs utilizadas dentro de empresas permitem a comunicação de informação privada de forma segura via uma rede não privada. Talvez você precise configurar a rede VPN, por exemplo, para acessar o seu e-mail do trabalho no iPad. O iPad pode conectar-se à redes VPNs que usam os protocolos L2TP, PPTP, IPSec Cisco. VPN funciona tanto com conexões Wi-Fi como com rede de dados de celular (iPad WiFi + 3G). Pergunte ao administrador da sua rede quais ajustes utilizar. Na maioria dos casos, se você tem uma rede VPN configurada no seu computador, você pode usar os mesmos ajustes de VPN para o iPad. Uma vez digitados os ajustes da VPN, um botão VPN aparece no menu de Ajustes que você pode usar para ativar ou desativar a VPN. A VPN também pode ser automaticamente configurada por um perfil de configuração. Consulte “Utilização de Perfis de Configuração” na página 188. Para alterar uma configuração VPN: Escolha Geral > Rede > VPN e toque na configuração que deseja atualizar. Para ativar ou desativar VPN: Toque em Ajustes e depois ative ou desative a opção VPN. Quando VPN está ativada, você vê o na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. Para apagar uma configuração VPN: Escolha Geral > Rede > VPN, toque na seta azul à direita do nome da configuração, e pressione Apagar VPN na parte inferior da tela de configuração. Bluetooth O iPad pode conectar sem fio a um teclado Apple Wireless Keyboard para digitação sem fio ou para fones de ouvido Bluetooth para escuta sem fio. Consulte “Como usar os dispositivos Bluetooth” na página 46. 172 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 173 Para ativar ou desativar o Bluetooth:Escolha Geral > Bluetooth e ative ou desative o Bluetooth. Quando o Bluetooth está ativado, você vê o ícone Bluetooth na barra de estado na parte superior da tela. Busca do Spotlight Você pode especificar as áreas de conteúdo que deseja buscar no iPad usando o Spotlight. Defina as áreas de conteúdo de busca do Spotlight: Escolha Geral > Busca do Spotlight e toque em um item para selecioná-lo ou anular sua seleção. Para definir a ordem do resultado da busca: Escolha Geral > Busca do Spotlight, toque em ao lado de um item e arraste-o para cima ou para baixo para reorganizar a ordem da busca. Bloqueio Automático Defina Bloqueio Automático para exibir e impedir uma operação não intencionada do seu iPad. Para ajustar durante quanto tempo o iPad permanecerá ativo antes de que seja bloqueado: Escolha Geral> Bloqueio Automático e escolha um tempo. Bloqueio por Código Inicialmente, o iPad não pede que você digite um código para desbloqueá-lo. Por segurança, você pode criar um código. Para definir um código: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código > Ativar Código. Digite um código de 4 dígitos e, em seguida, digite o código novamente para verificá-lo. O iPad então pede que você digite o código de acesso para desbloqueá-lo ou para exibir os ajustes de bloqueio do código de acesso. Para definir o tempo antes de que o código seja pedido: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código e digite seu código. Toque em Requer Código e selecione quanto tempo o iPad pode ficar ocioso antes que você precise digitar um código para desbloqueá-lo. Desative o código de acesso.Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código > Desativar Código e digite seu código. Para alterar o código: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código, digite seu código e toque em Alterar Código. Digite o código novamente; em seguida, digite e redigite seu novo código. Se você esquecer o seu código, deverá restaurar o software do iPad. Consulte “Como Remover um Backup” na página 199. Para ativar ou desativar um Código Simples:Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código e ative ou desative um Código Simples. Um código simples é um número de quatro dígitos. Para aumentar a segurança, desative o Código Simples e utilize um código mais longo com uma combinação de números, letras, pontuação e caracteres especiais.Para ativar ou desativar a Moldura: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código e ative ou desative a Moldura. Quando a Moldura está ativada, o iPad exibe as suas fotos a partir da tela bloqueada. Consulte “Porta-retrato” na página 170. Para apagar todos os dados após digitar o código incorretamente dez vezes: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio por Código, digite seu código e toque em Eliminar Dados para ativar esse recurso. Após digitar o código incorretamente dez vezes, seus ajustes serão redefinidos para os valores padrão, todas suas informações e mídia serão apagadas, e o código criptografado é removido. Bloqueio/Desbloqueio da capa do iPad Você pode bloquear ou desbloquear automaticamente o iPad 2 ao usá-lo com o Smart Cover do iPad (disponível separadamente). Para usar a capa para bloquear ou desbloquear o iPad: Escolha Geral > Bloqueio/ Desbloqueio da capa do iPad e, em seguida, toque em Ativar. O iPad se bloqueia e entra no modo de repouso automaticamente quando você fecha a capa e depois se desperta e se desbloqueia quando você abre a capa. Se você houver definido um código de acesso, deve inseri-lo quando abrir a capa para despertar o iPad. Restrições No iPad, você pode definir restrições para o uso de certos aplicativos e para o conteú- do do iPod. Por exemplo, os pais podem restringir o acesso a conteúdos explícitos ou desativar o acesso ao YouTube. Para ativar as restrições: 1 Escolha Geral > Restrições, depois toque em Ativar Restrições. 2 Digite um código de quatro dígitos. 3 Digite o código novamente. Para desativar as restrições: Escolha Geral > Restrições e depois digite o código de acesso. Toque em Desativar Restrições, depois digite novamente o código. Se você esquecer o seu código, você deve restaurar o software do iPad usando o iTunes. Consulte “Como Remover um Backup” na página 199. Para configurar restrições de aplicativos: Defina as restrições que deseja tocando para ativar ou desativar os controles individuais. Inicialmente, todos os controles estão ativados (sem restrições). Toque em um item para desativá-lo e restringir seu uso. 174 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 175 Safari O Safari é desativado e o seu ícone é removido da tela de Início. Você não poderá utilizar o Safari para navegar na web ou acessar web clips. Apps de outras marcas poderão permitir a navegação na web mesmo se o Safari estiver desativado. YouTube O YouTube é desativado e o seu ícone é removido da tela de Início. Câmera O aplicativo Câmera é desativado e o seu ícone é removido da tela de Início. Você não pode tirar fotos ou criar vídeos com o iPad. FaceTime Fazer ou receber videoconferências do FaceTime. iTunes A iTunes Store é desativada e seu ícone é removido da tela de Início. Você não pode pré-visualizar, comprar ou transferir conteúdo. Ping O Ping está desativado. Você não pode seguir artistas ou outras pessoas. Como instalar aplicativos A instalação de aplicativos é desativada e o ícone da App Store é removido da tela de Início. Como Apagar Apps O apagamento de aplicativos do iPad é desativado. O não aparece nos ícones do aplicativo quando você está personalizando a tela de Início. Local Os ajustes dos Serviços de Localização não podem ser alterados. Contas Os ajustes dos Serviços de Localização não podem ser alterados. Para restringir compras dentro dos aplicativos: Desative a opção “Compras em Aplic.”. Quando ativado, este recurso permite comprar conteúdo adicional ou recursos dentro de aplicativos transferidos da App Store.Para ajustar as restrições de conteúdo: Toque em Classificações Para e selecione um país na lista. Você pode ajustar as restrições utilizando o sistema de classificação daquele país para as seguintes categorias de conteúdo:  Música e Podcasts  Filmes  Programas de TV  Apps Nos Estados Unidos, por exemplo, para permitir apenas filmes com classificação PG ou inferior, toque em Filmes e selecione PG na lista. Nota: Nem todos os países têm sistemas de classificação. Para restringir jogos com vários jogadores: Ative a opção Jogos em Grupo. Quando a opção Jogos em Grupo está desativada, você não pode convidar para uma partida, ou enviar ou receber convites para jogar ou adicionar amigos no Game Center. Para restringir a adição de amigos: Desative Adicionar Amigos. Quando a opção Adicionar Amigos está desativada, você não pode fazer ou receber solicitações de amigos no Game Center. Você pode continuar jogando com os amigos existentes se a opção Jogos em Grupo está ativada. Interruptor Lateral Você pode usar o Interruptor Lateral para bloquear a orientação da tela ou para silenciar as notificações e efeitos sonoros. Para bloquear a tela do na orientação vertical ou horizontal: Escolha Geral > Usar Interruptor Lateral… e, em seguida, toque em Bloquear Rotação. Para silenciar as notificações e outros efeitos sonoros: Escolha Geral > Usar Interruptor Lateral… e, em seguida, toque em Silenciar. O Interruptor Lateral não silencia a reprodução de áudio ou de vídeo. Data e Hora Estes ajustes se aplicam à hora mostrada na barra de estado na parte superior da tela, relógios internacionais e calendários. Para definir se o iPad deve mostrar o padrão 12h ou 24h: Escolha Geral > Data e Hora e ative ou desative a opção Relógio de 24 horas (Talvez o Relógio de 24 horas não esteja disponível em todos os países ou regiões). Para definir se o iPad deve atualizar a data e a hora automaticamente: Escolha Geral > Data e Hora e ative ou desative a opção Ajustar Automaticamente. 176 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 177 Para definir a data e a hora manualmente: Escolha Geral > Data e Hora e desative a opção Ajustar Automaticamente. Toque em Fuso Horário e digite o nome de uma cidade principal que esteja no seu fuso horário. Toque no botão “Data e Hora”, depois toque em “Ajustar Data e Hora” e ajuste a data e a hora. Teclado Para ativar ou desativar as maiúsculas automáticas: Escolha Geral > Teclado e ative ou desative a opção Maiúsculas Automáticas. Normalmente, o iPad automaticamente coloca em maiúsculas a primeira letra das palavras depois de pontos finais ou do caractere retorno. Para ativar ou desativar a Correção Automática: Escolha Geral > Teclado e ative ou desative a opção Correção Automática. Normalmente, se o teclado normal do idioma que você selecionou tiver um dicioná- rio, o iPad automaticamente sugerirá correções ou completará palavras à medida que você digitar. Para verificar a ortografia ao digitar: Escolha Geral > Teclado e ative ou desative a op- ção Verificar Ortografia. Para ativar Fixar Maiúsculas: Escolha Geral > Teclado e ative ou desative a opção Ativar Fixar Maiúsculas. Se a fixação de maiúsculas estiver ativada e você tocar duas vezes na tecla Maiúsculas no teclado, todas as letras que digitar ficarão em maiúsculas. A tecla Maiúsculas fica azul quando a opção Fixar Maiúsculas está ativada. Para ativar ou desativar o atalho “.”:Escolha Geral > Teclado e ative ou desative o atalho “.” Ativar ou desativar o atalho. O atalho “.” permite tocar duas vezes na barra de espaço para digitar um ponto final seguido de um espaço quando você está digitando. Está ativado inicialmente. Para adicionar teclados Internacionais:Escolha Geral > Teclados > Teclados Internacionais > Adicionar Novo Teclado e toque nos teclados que deseja adicionar. Para alterar um leiaute de teclado:Escolha Geral > Teclados > Teclados Internacionais e selecione um teclado. Para alguns idiomas, você pode alterar o leiaute de teclado da tela e o leiaute do teclado do hardware externo. Internacional Use os ajustes em Internacional para definir o idioma do iPad, para adicionar teclados para diferentes idiomas e para definir os formatos de data, hora e número de telefone para sua região. Você também pode escolher um formato de calendário. Para definir o idioma do iPad:Escolha Geral > Internacional > Idioma, escolha o idioma que deseja utilizar e toque em OK. Para ativar ou desativar teclados internacionais: Escolha Geral > Internacional > Teclados e adicione os teclados que deseja usar.Se houver mais de um teclado ativado, mantenha pressionado o teclado para ver um menu de teclados. Consulte Apêndice B,“Teclados Internacionais,” na página 191. Para definir os formatos de data, hora e número de telefone: Escolha Geral > Internacional > Formato da Região e escolha a sua região. O Formato da Região também determina o idioma usado nos dias e meses que aparecem nos aplicativos integrados do iPad. Para definir um formato do calendário:Escolha Geral > Internacional > Calendário e selecione o formato de calendário que deseja usar; por exemplo Gregoriano, Japonês ou Budista. Acessibilidade Para ativar os recursos de acessibilidade, vá para os ajustes de Acessibilidade e escolha os recursos desejados. Consulte Capítulo 21,“Acessibilidade,” na página 150. Como redefinir o iPad Para redefinir todas os ajustes: Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Todos os Ajustes. Insira o se código de acesso se você o tiver. Todos os seus ajustes são redefinidos. As informações (como seus contatos e calendários) e as mídias (como suas músicas e ví- deos) não são apagadas. Para excluir todo o conteúdo e ajustes:Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Apagar Todo o Conteúdo e Ajustes. Insira o se código de acesso se você o tiver. Isto redefine todos os ajustes do iPad para os valores originais e apaga todas as suas informações e mídia. Para redefinir os ajustes de rede: Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Ajustes da Rede. Insira o se código de acesso se você o tiver. Quando você redefine os ajustes de rede, sua lista de redes usadas anteriormente e os ajustes da VPN não instalados por um perfil de configuração são removidos. A rede Wi-Fi é desativada e ativada novamente, desconectando você de qualquer rede. Os ajustes Wi-Fi e “Solicitar Conexão” permanecem ativados. Para remover os ajustes da VPN instalados por um perfil de configuração, escolha Ajustes > Geral > Perfil; em seguida, selecione o perfil e toque em Remover. Para redefinir o dicionário do teclado: Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Dicionário do Teclado. Insira o se código de acesso se você o tiver. Você adiciona palavras ao dicionário do teclado ao rejeitar palavras que o iPad sugere enquanto você digita. Toque em uma palavra para rejeitar a correção e adicionar a palavra ao dicionário do teclado. A redefinição do dicionário do teclado apaga todas as palavras que você adicionou. Para redefinir o leiaute da tela de Início: Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Leiaute da Tela de Início para redefinir a sua tela de Início para os padrões originais. 178 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 179 Para redefinir os avisos de localização: Escolha Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Avisos de Localização e insira o seu código de acesso se tiver. Os Avisos de Localização são solicitações feitas por um aplicativo (como o Mapas) para usar os Serviços de Localização com aquele aplicativo. O iPad para de apresentar os avisos para um aplicativo na segunda vez que você toca em OK. Toque em Redefinir Avisos de Localização para reativar os avisos. Mail, Contatos, Calendários Use os ajustes Mail, Contatos e Calendários para configurar e personalizar contas para o iPad:  Microsoft Exchange  MobileMe  E-mail do Google  Yahoo! Mail  AOL  Outros sistemas de correio POP e IMAP  Contas LDAP para Contatos  Contas CalDAV ou iCalendar (.ics) para Calendários Contas A seção Contas permite configurar contas no iPad. Os ajustes específicos que aparecem dependem do tipo de conta que está configurando. Seu provedor de acesso ou administrador de sistema deve fornecer a informação que você necessita digitar. Para obter mais informações, consulte:  “Como adicionar Mail, Contatos e Contas do Calendário” na página 32  “Como Sincronizar e Adicionar Contatos” na página 99  “Como Assinar Calendários ” na página 95 Para alterar os ajustes de uma conta:Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, escolha uma conta, depois faça as alterações desejadas. As alterações que você faz aos ajustes de uma conta no iPadnão são sincronizadas com seu computador; portanto, você pode configurar suas contas para que funcionem com o iPad sem afetar os ajustes da conta no seu computador. Para parar de usar uma conta: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” escolha uma conta, depois desative Conta. Se uma conta está desativada, o iPad não exibe a conta e não envia ou verifica e-mail, nem sincroniza outras informações com aquela conta até que você a ative novamente.Para definir ajustes avançados: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” escolha uma conta, toque em Avançado e depois proceda da seguinte maneira:  Para definir se rascunhos e mensagens apagadas são armazenados no iPad ou remotamente no seu servidor de e-mail (somente contas IMAP), toque nas caixas de correio Rascunhos ou Apagadas. Se você armazenar mensagens no iPad, poderá vê-las mesmo quando o iPad não estiver conectado à Internet.  Para configurar SSL e os ajustes de senha, toque em Avançado. Peça ao administrador da sua rede ou ao seu provedor de acesso à Internet os ajustes corretos. Para apagar uma conta do iPad: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, escolha uma conta, depois role para baixo e toque em Apagar Conta. Apagar uma conta significa que não poderá mais acessar a conta no seu iPad. Todos os e-mails e as informações dos contatos, calendários e favoritos sincronizadas com a conta são removidas do iPad. Entretanto, excluir uma conta não remove a conta ou a informação associada do seu computador. Obter Novos Dados Este ajuste permite ativar ou desativar a tecnologia Push para o MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo! Mail e qualquer outra conta push no iPad. As contas push entregam as novas informações automaticamente ao iPad quando essas novas informações aparecem no servidor (podem ocorrer atrasos). Para obter ou sincronizar os dados do push, o iPad deve ter uma conexão à Internet. Desative o Push para suspender a entrega de e-mails e outras informações, ou para conservar a vida útil da bateria. Quando o Push estiver desativado, e com contas não compatíveis com o push, o iPad pode ainda verificar o servidor para ver se há novas informações disponíveis. Utilize o ajuste Obter Novos Dados para determinar a frequência de solicitação dos dados. Para manter uma melhor autonomia da bateria, não obtenha os dados com muita frequência. Para ativar o Push: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Obter Novos Dados e pressione para ativar o Push. Para definir a frequência de obtenção de dados: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Obter Novos Dados e escolha a frequência com a qual você deseja obter os dados. Para conservar a autonomia da bateria, obtenha dados com menos frequência. Ajustar o Push para desativado ou ajustar a opção Obter para Manualmente na tela Obter Novos Dados substitui os ajustes específicos de uma conta. Nota: Quando o Push está desativado, a opção Buscar Meu iPad não funciona. 180 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 181 Mail Os ajustes do Mail, exceto quanto descrito, aplicam-se a todas as contas configuradas no iPad. Para ligar ou desligar sons de alerta para novos e-mails ou e-mails enviados, use Geral > Ajustes de Sons. Para definir o número de mensagens exibidas no iPad: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Mostrar, depois escolha um ajuste. Escolha ver as 25, 50, 75, 100 ou 200 mensagens mais recentes. Para transferir mensagens adicionais quanto estiver no Mail, role até o final da sua caixa de entrada e toque em Carregar Mais Mensagens. Nota: Para as contas de Microsoft Exchange, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e escolha a conta do Exchange. Pressione "Sincronizar Mail" e escolha o número de dias de e-mail que deseja sincronizar com o servidor. Para definir quantas linhas de cada mensagem são pré-visualizadas na lista de mensagens: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Pré-visualizar, depois escolha um ajuste. Você pode optar por ver até cinco linhas de cada mensagem. Desta forma, você pode examinar uma lista de mensagens em uma caixa de correio e ter uma ideia do que trata cada mensagem. Para definir um tamanho mínimo de fonte das mensagens: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Tamanho de Fonte, depois escolha Pequena, Média, Grande, Extra Grande ou Gigante. Para definir se o iPad mostra as etiquetas Para e Cc nas listas de mensagens: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, depois ative ou desative a opção Mostrar Para/Cc. Se a opção Mostrar Para/Cc estiver ativada, o ou o Cc próximos a cada mensagem em uma lista indicam se a mensagem foi enviada diretamente para você ou se você recebeu uma cópia. Para definir se o iPad confirma que você deseja apagar uma mensagem: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, depois nos ajustes do Mail, ative ou desative Perguntar Antes de Apagar. Para definir se o iPad carregará automaticamente as imagens remotas: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e ative ou desative a opção Carregar Imagens. Se a opção Carregar Imagens estiver desativada, você poderá carregar as imagens manualmente ao ler uma mensagem. Para definir se o iPad envia uma cópia de cada mensagem enviada: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”; depois, ative ou desative a opção Cco para Mim. Para adicionar uma assinatura às suas mensagens: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Assinatura; depois, digite uma assinatura.Você pode ajustar o iPad para adicionar uma assinatura—a sua citação favorita, ou o seu nome, cargo, e número de telefone, por exemplo—no final da cada mensagem que enviar. Para definir a conta de e-mail padrão: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Conta Padrão, depois escolha uma conta. Este ajuste determina a partir de qual das suas contas uma mensagem é enviada quando você cria uma mensagem de outro aplicativo do iPad — por exemplo, enviando uma foto de Fotos ou tocar em um endereço de e-mail de um empresa em Mapas. Para enviar a mensagem de uma conta diferente, toque no campo De em uma mensagem e escolha a conta. Contatos Para definir como os contatos são ordenados: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” depois em Contatos toque em Tipo de Ordenação e proceda da seguinte maneira:  Para ordenar pelo nome, primeiro, toque em Primeiro, Último.  Para ordenar pelo sobrenome, primeiro, toque em Último, Primeiro. Para definir como os contatos são exibidos: Escolha "Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” depois sob Contatos toque em Ordenar por e proceda da seguinte maneira:  Para mostrar o nome primeiro, toque em Nome, Sobrenome.  Para mostrar o sobrenome primeiro, toque em Sobrenome, Nome. Calendários Para definir se haverá um aviso sonoro ao receber convites de reuniões: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” e em Calendários toque em “Novos Convites” para ativar. Para definir quanto tempo no passado mostrar seus eventos de calendário no iPad: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Sincronizar, depois escolha um período de tempo. Para ativar a gestão de fuso horário do Calendário: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” > Gestão Fuso Horário, depois ative Gestão Fuso Horário. Selecione um fuso horário para os calendários tocando em Fuso Horário e digitando o nome de uma cidade conhecida. Quando a Gestão Fuso Horário está ativada, o Calendário exibe a data e hora dos eventos no fuso horário da cidade selecionada. Quando a Gestão Fuso Horário está desativada, o Calendário exibe os eventos na zona horária da sua localização atual, conforme determinada pela hora da rede. Importante: Se você está viajando, o iPad pode não exibir eventos ou reproduzir alertas na hora local correta. Para ajustar a hora correta manualmente, consulte “Data e Hora” na página 176. Para definir um aviso sonoro ao receber um convite para uma reunião: Escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” e em Calendários toque em “Novos Convites” para ativar. 182 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 183 Safari Os ajustes do Safari permitem selecionar o seu buscador na Internet, definir opções de segurança e, para desenvolvedores, ativar o depurador. Geral Para realizar buscas na Internet, você pode definir o motor de busca como Google, Yahoo! ou Bing. Para selecionar um buscador: Escolha Safari > Buscador e selecione o buscador que deseja utilizar. Você pode configurar o Safari para preencher automaticamente formulários da web utilizando informações de contato, nomes e senhas que tenha inserido anteriormente, ou ambos. Para ativar o Preenchimento Automático: Escolha Safari > Preenchimento Automático e siga um destes procedimentos:  Para utilizar as informações dos contatos, ative Dados de Contato; em seguida, escolha Meus Dados e selecione o contato que deseja utilizar. Quando este recurso está ativado, o Safari utiliza as informações dos Contatos para preencher os campos de contato nos formulários da web.  Para usar as informações dos nomes e senhas, ative Nomes e Senhas. Quando esse recurso está ativado, o Safari se lembra dos nomes e senhas dos sites que você visitou e automaticamente preenche as informações quando você visita o site novamente.  Para remover todas as informações do Preenchimento Automático, toque em Limpar Tudo. Segurança Por padrão, o Safari está ajustado para mostrar recursos da web tais como alguns filmes, animações e aplicativos web. Talvez você queira alterar os ajustes de segurança para ajudar a proteger o iPad de possíveis riscos de segurança na Internet. Para alterar os ajustes de segurança: Escolha Safari, depois proceda da seguinte maneira:  Para definir se você deseja ser avisado quando estiver visitando sites potencialmente fraudulentos, ative ou desative a opção Aviso de Fraude. O aviso de fraude o protege de sites da Internet potencialmente fraudulentos. Quando você visita um site suspeito, o Safari lhe avisa sobre a sua natureza duvidosa e não carrega a página.  Para ativar ou desativar o JavaScript, ative ou desative a opção JavaScript.O JavaScript permite que programadores web controlem elementos na página—por exemplo, uma página que usa JavaScript pode exibir a data e a hora atuais ou fazer com que uma página proveniente de um link apareça em uma nova página.  Para bloquear ou permitir pop-ups, ative ou desative a opção Bloquear Pop-ups. O bloqueio de pop-ups para somente os pop-ups que aparecem quando você fecha uma página ou abre uma página digitando seu endereço. Ele não bloqueia os popups que se abrem quando você toca em um link.  Para definir se o Safari aceita cookies, toque em Aceitar Cookies e escolha Nunca, “Dos Visitados”, ou Sempre. Um cookie é um segmento de informação que um site coloca no iPad para que ele possa lembrar de você quando você o visitar novamente. Desta forma, as páginas web podem ser personalizadas para você baseado na informação que você possa ter fornecido. Algumas páginas web não funcionam corretamente a menos que o iPad aceite cookies.  Para limpar o histórico de páginas web visitadas, toque em Limpar Histórico.  Para limpar todos os cookies do Safari, toque em Limpar Cookies.  Para limpar o cache do navegador, toque em Limpar Cache. O cache do navegador armazena o conteúdo das páginas de forma que as páginas sejam abertas mais rapidamente da próxima vez que as visitar. Se uma página que você abriu não estiver mostrando conteúdo novo, limpar o cache pode ajudar. Desenvolvedores O console de depuração pode ajudar a resolver erros de páginas web. Se estiver ativado, o console aparece quando ocorre um erro de página web. Para ativar ou desativar o console de depuração: Escolha Safari > Desenvolvedor, e ative ou desative o Console de Depuração. iPod Use os Ajustes do iPod para configurar a reprodução de áudio no aplicativo iPod no iPad. Para ajustar o iTunes para reproduzir músicas no mesmo nível de som: No iTunes, escolha iTunes > Preferências se estiver utilizando um Mac, ou Editar > Preferências se estiver utilizando um PC. Em seguida, clique em Reprodução e selecione Verificação de Som. Para ajustar o iPad para usar os ajustes de volume do iTunes (Verificação de Som): Escolha iPod e ative ou desative a opção Verificação de Som. Use EQ para personalizar o som: Escolha iPod, toque em EQ e escolha um ajuste de equalizador. 184 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 185 Para definir um limite de volume: Escolha iPod, toque em Limite do Volume e arraste o controle para ajustar o volume máximo. Toque em Bloquear Limite de Volume para atribuir um código para evitar que os ajustes sejam alterados. Para obter letras de músicas e informações sobre podcasts: Escolha iPod e ative ou desative a opção Letra/Inf. de Podcast. Para compartilhar a sua biblioteca do iTunes: Insira o seu ID e senha da Apple e, em seguida, use o Compartilhamento Familiar para importar os itens de até cinco bibliotecas do iTunes em outros computadores na sua rede local. ADVERTÊNCIA: Para obter informações importantes sobre como evitar a perda de audição, consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. Vídeo Os ajustes de vídeo se aplicam ao conteúdo de vídeo, incluindo filmes e programas de TV alugados. Você pode definir onde retomar a reprodução dos vídeos que já come- çou a assistir, ativar ou desativar as legendas e configurar o iPad para reproduzir vídeos na sua TV. Para definir onde retomar a reprodução: Escolha Vídeo > Iniciar Reprodução, depois selecione se deseja que os vídeos que já começou a assistir sejam retomados do começo ou de onde você parou. Para ativar ou desativar as legendas ocultas: Escolha Vídeo e ative ou desative a op- ção Legenda Oculta. Para ativar ou desativar o formato panorâmico: Escolha Vídeo e ative ou desative a opção Formato Panorâmico. Se o vídeo que você está reproduzindo estiver no formato panorâmico, ativar esta opção preserva as proporções panorâmicas. Para ajustar o sinal de TV para NTSC ou PAL: Escolha Vídeo > Sinal de TV e selecione NTSC ou PAL. NTSC e PAL são padrões de transmissão usados em diferentes regiões. Se você está nas Américas, provavelmente, o NTSC é a escolha correta. Em qualquer outro lugar, tente o PAL. Se não tiver certeza, verifique a documentação que acompanha sua TV ou projetor. Utilize os ajustes Saída TV para configurar como o iPad reproduz vídeos na sua TV. Para usar um desses para conectar o iPad a um televisor ou projetor:  Adaptador Digital AV da Apple e um cabo HDMI  Cabo AV por componentes da Apple  Cabo AV Composto da Apple  Adaptador VGA da AppleSe você usar o Adaptador AV Digital da Apple ou o Cabo AV por componentes da Apple, os vídeos de alta resolução são exibidos com qualidade HD. Os cabos da Apple estão disponíveis para compra em vários países. Visite o site www.apple.com/br/store. Com o iPad 2, quando o cabo é conectado a um televisor ou projetor, a tela do iPad é automaticamente refletida no monitor externo com até 1080 pixels de resolução, e os vídeos são reproduzidos com uma resolução máxima de 720 pixels. Alguns aplicativos como o Keynote podem usar o monitor externo como um segundo monitor de vídeo. Nos modelos anteriores do iPad, somente alguns aplicativos (incluindo o YouTube, Vídeos e Fotos) usam o monitor externo. Fotos Utilize os ajustes de Fotos para especificar como as apresentações de slides exibem suas fotos. Para definir durante quanto tempo cada slide é apresentado: Escolha Fotos > Mostrar Cada Slide e selecione a duração. Para definir se a apresentação de slides deve ser repetida ou não: Escolha Fotos e ative ou desative a opção Repetir. Para definir se as fotos aparecerão em ordem ou aleatoriamente: Escolha Fotos e ative ou desative a opção Aleatório. FaceTime Use os ajustes do FaceTime para ativar o FaceTime ou alterar o seu endereço. Digite seu ID e senha da Apple para ativar o FaceTime. Se você não tiver um ID da Apple, toque em Criar Novo ID da Apple e siga as instruções na tela. O endereço de e-mail que você especificar quando estiver criando a conta será o seu endereço do FaceTime. Para ativar ou desativar o FaceTime: Quando o FaceTime está desativado, você não pode fazer ou receber ligações do FaceTime. Para especificar endereços adicionais do FaceTime: Para adicionar um endereço de e-mail para que outros possam usá-lo para ligar para você com o FaceTime, toque em Adicionar Outro E-mail. Notas Use os ajustes de Notas para escolher a fonte usada para exibir suas notas. Para escolher uma fonte: Escolha Notas e selecione uma fonte. 186 Capítulo 22 AjustesCapítulo 22 Ajustes 187 Loja Use os ajustes Loja para alterar ou criar um ID da Apple. Por padrão, o ID da Apple que você iniciou a sessão quando sincronizou o iPad com o seu computador aparece nos ajustes Loja. Você pode mudar as contas no iPad para adquirir música ou aplicativos de outra conta. Se não tiver um ID Apple, poderá criar um nos ajustes da Loja. Para criar uma nova conta: Escolha Loja e toque em Criar Nova Conta; em seguida, siga as instruções da tela. Para iniciar sessão em uma conta: Escolha Loja e toque em Iniciar Sessão; em seguida, digite seu ID e senha da Apple. Para visualizar as informações do seu ID da Apple: Escolha Loja, inicie a sessão usando o seu ID da Apple e toque em Ver ID Apple. Para iniciar sessão em uma conta diferente: Escolha Loja e toque em Finalizar Sessão; em seguida, toque em Iniciar Sessão e digite seu nome de usuário e senha.188 O iPad no Trabalho Tendo o suporte para acessar com segurança as redes e diretórios corporativos e o Microsoft Exchange, o iPad está pronto para ir trabalhar. Para obter informações detalhadas sobre como usar o iPad nos negócios vá para www.apple.com/br/ipad/business. Utilização de Perfis de Configuração Se você está em um ambiente empresarial, talvez você possa configurar contas e outros itens no iPad instalando um perfil de configuração. Os perfis de configuração permitem que seu administrador configure o seu iPad para usar os sistemas de informação na sua empresa, escola ou organização. Por exemplo, um perfil de configuração poderia configurar seu iPad para acessar os servidores Microsoft Exchange no trabalho, de forma que o iPad pudesse acessar seu e-mail, calendários e contatos do Exchange. Um simples perfil de configuração pode configurar muitos ajustes diferentes no iPad. Por exemplo, um perfil de configuração pode configurar sua conta Microsoft Exchange, sua conta VPN e certificar o acesso seguro à rede e às informações da sua empresa. Um perfil de configuração também pode ativar o Bloqueio por Código, que requer que você crie e digite um código para usar o iPad. Seu administrador pode distribuir perfis de configuração tanto por e-mail, colocandoos em uma página web segura, como instalando-os diretamente no iPad pra você. O seu administrador pode pedir que você instale um perfil que vincule o seu iPad a um servidor de gerenciamento de dispositivo móvel, o que permite que o seu administrador configure os seus ajustes remotamente. Como Instalar Perfis de Configuração: 1 No iPad, abra uma mensagem de e-mail ou transfira os perfis de configuração do site que o seu administrador fornecer. 2 Para cada perfil de configuração, toque no perfil e, em seguida, toque em Instalar. 3 Digite senhas e outras informações solicitadas. Importante: Talvez seja perguntado a você se o perfil de configuração é confiável. Se tiver dúvidas, pergunte ao seu administrador antes de instalar o perfil de configuração. A Apêndice O iPad na EmpresaApêndice A O iPad na Empresa 189 Você não pode alterar os ajustes de um perfil de configuração. Se deseja alterar os ajustes, você deve primeiro remover o perfil de configuração ou instalar um perfil de configuração novo junto com os novos ajustes. Como remover um perfil: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Perfil e, em seguida, selecione o perfil de configuração e toque em Remover. A remoção de um perfil de configuração apaga os ajustes e outras informações instaladas pelo perfil. Como Configurar Contas do Microsoft Exchange O O Microsoft Exchange fornece informações de e-mail, de contato e de calendário que pode ser automaticamente sincronizada sem fio para o iPad. Você pode configurar uma conta Exchange diretamente no iPad. Para configurar uma conta no iPad: 1 Na tela de Início do iPad, toque em Ajustes. 2 Toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, depois toque em Adicionar Conta. 3 Toque em Microsoft Exchange. 4 Digite as informações da sua conta e toque em Salvar. Seu provedor de serviços ou administrador pode fornecer-lhe as configurações de conta necessárias. Contas do Exchange: Digite o seu endereço de e-mail, domínio (opcional), nome de usuário, senha e uma descrição. O iPad é compatível com o serviço Descoberta Automática da Microsoft, que usa seu nome de usuário e sua senha para determinar o endereço do servidor Exchange. Se o endereço do servidor não poder ser determinado, você será solicitado a fornecê-lo. Assim que conectar-se ao servidor Exchange, você será solicitado a alterar o seu código de acesso para cumprir com os requisitos do servidor. 5 Quando estiver configurando uma conta Microsoft Exchange, toque nos itens que deseja usar no iPad—correio, contatos e calendários. Acesso VPN A VPN (rede privada virtual) fornece acesso seguro via Internet à redes privadas, como redes da sua empresa ou escola. Utilize os ajustes de rede no iPad para configurar e ativar a VPN. Pergunte ao seu administrador quais ajustes deve usar. A VPN também pode ser automaticamente configurada por um perfil de configura- ção. Quando a VPN é configurada por um perfil de configuração, o iPad pode ativar a VPN automaticamente sempre que necessário. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Utilização de Perfis de Configuração” na página 188 ou contate seu administrador.190 Apêndice A O iPad na Empresa Contas LDAP e CardDAV Quando você configura uma conta LDAP, você pode visualizar e buscar contatos no servidor LDAP de sua empresa ou organização. O servidor aparece como um novo grupo de Contatos. Como os contatos LDAP não são transferidos para o iPad, você precisará ter uma conexão à Internet para visualizá-los. Consulte seu administrador para obter os ajustes e os outros requisitos da conta (como VPN). Ao configurar uma conta CardDAV, os contatos da sua conta são sincronizados com o iPad através da tecnologia over the air. Você também pode buscar contatos do servidor CardDAV da sua organização ou empresa. Para configurar uma conta LDAP ou CardDAV: 1 Em Ajustes, toque em “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e toque em Adicionar Conta. 2 Toque em Outros e, em seguida, toque em Adicionar Conta LDAP ou adicionar conta CardDAV. 3 Digite as informações da sua conta LDAP e toque em Seguinte para verificá-la. 4 Toque em Salvar.191 O Teclados Internacionais permitem digitar o texto em vários idiomas diferentes, incluindo idiomas asiáticos e outros idiomas que são escritos da direita para a esquerda. Como adicionar teclados Para digitar texto em idiomas diferentes no iPad, você utiliza teclados diferentes. Por padrão, somente o teclado para o idioma que você definiu está disponível. Para tornar os teclados para outros idiomas disponíveis, use os ajustes de Teclado. Para adicionar um teclado: 1 Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Teclado > Teclados Internacionais. O número antes da flecha indica o número de teclados atualmente ativados. 2 Toque em Adicionar Novo Teclado e, em seguida, selecione um teclado da lista. Repita o processo para adicionar mais teclados. Alguns idiomas possuem diversos teclados disponíveis. Para obter uma lista dos teclados compatíveis com o iPad, visite o site www.apple.com/br/ipad/specs. Para editar sua lista de teclados:Selecione Geral > Teclado > Teclados Internacionais e, em seguida, toque em Editar e execute uma das seguintes ações:  Para apagar um teclado, toque no e, em seguida, toque em Apagar.  Para reordenar a lista, arraste ao lado de um teclado para um novo lugar da lista. Como alternar teclados Para digitar texto em um idioma diferente, alterne os teclados. Para alternar teclados ao digitar:Toque . Ao tocar no símbolo, o nome do teclado ativado mais recentemente aparece rapidamente. Também é possível tocar e manter pressionada para exibir uma lista de teclados disponíveis. Para selecionar um teclado da lista, deslize seu dedo para o nome do teclado e, em seguida, solte. B Apêndice Teclados Internacionais192 Apêndice B Teclados Internacionais Muitos teclados fornecem letras, números e símbolos não visíveis no teclado. Para digitar letras, números ou símbolos que não estão no teclado:Toque e mantenha pressionada a letra, número ou símbolo relacionado, depois deslize o seu dedo para escolher uma variação. Nos teclados em tailandês, por exemplo, você pode escolher os números nativos tocando e mantendo pressionado o número arábico relacionado. Chinês Você pode usar os teclados para digitar em chinês em vários formas diferentes, incluindo Pinyin, Cangjie, Wubi Hua e Zhuyin. Você também pode utilizar o seu dedo para escrever caracteres em chinês na tela. Como digitar em Chinês Pinyin Simplificado ou Tradicional Use o teclado QWERTY para digitar Pinyin para caracteres em chinês. Conforme você digita, aparecem caracteres sugeridos em chinês. Toque em uma sugestão para selecioná-la ou continue digitando em Pinyin para ver mais opções. Se você continuar digitando o Pinyin sem espaços, aparecem sugestões de frases. Como digitar em Chinês Cangjie Use o teclado para construir caracteres chineses a partir das teclas Cangjie componentes. Conforme você digita, aparecem caracteres sugeridos em chinês. Toque um caractere para selecioná-lo ou continue digitando até um total de cinco componentes para ver mais opções de caracteres. Como digitar com Traço de Chinês Simplificado (Wubi Hua) Use o teclado para construir caracteres chineses usando até cinco traços na sequência de escrita correta: da esquerda para a direita, de cima para baixo, de fora para dentro e de dentro para um traço de fechamento [por exemplo, o caractere chinês ? (círculo) deve começar com o traço vertical ?]. Conforme digita, os caracteres chineses sugeridos aparecem (os caracteres mais comumente utilizados aparecem primeiro). Toque em um caractere para selecioná-lo. Se não souber qual é o traço correto, digite um asterisco (*). Para ver mais opções de caracteres, digite outro traço ou role pela lista de caracteres. Toque na tecla ?? correspondente para exibir apenas os caracteres que coincidem exatamente com o que você digitou. Por exemplo, se digitar ?? (um um) e tocar ? ? correspondente, o mais comumente usado ? (dois) aparece como a combinação exata.Apêndice B Teclados Internacionais 193 Como digitar em Chinês Tradicional Zhuyin Utilize o teclado para digitar as letras Zhuyin. Conforme você digita, aparecem caracteres sugeridos em chinês. Toque em uma sugestão para selecioná-la ou continue digitando letras Zhuyin para ver mais opções. Depois de digitar uma letra inicial, o teclado é alterado para mostrar mais letras. Se você continuar digitando em Zhuyin sem espaços, aparecem sugestões de frases. Como digitar escrita manual em chinês simplificado ou tradicional Escreva caracteres em Chinês diretamente na tela com o dedo. Conforme você escreve os traços, o iPad os reconhece e mostra caracteres coincidentes em uma lista, com o mais parecidos em primeiro. Ao escolher um caractere, é provável que caracteres seguintes relacionados apareçam na lista como escolhas adicionais. Você pode obter alguns caracteres complexos escrevendo dois ou mais caracteres componentes. Por exemplo, se você inserir o caractere ? (peixe) e depois inserir o caractere ? (pelo), o caractere ? (nome parcial do Aeroporto Internacional de Hong Kong) aparecerá na lista de caracteres com uma seta ao lado. Toque no caractere para substituir os caracteres inseridos. Com a escrita à mão em chinês simplificado, os caracteres romanos também são reconhecidos. Como converter entre Chinês Simplificado e Tradicional Selecione o caractere ou caracteres que deseja converter e, em seguida, toque em Substituir.194 Apêndice B Teclados Internacionais Como desenhar os caracteres em chinês Quando os formatos manuscritos de chinês tradicional ou simplificado estão ativados, você pode digitar caracteres em chinês com o dedo, conforme mostrado: Touchpad Japonês Você pode digitar em japonês usando o teclado Romaji ou o teclado Fifty Key. Como digitar Romaji japonês Utilize o teclado Romaji para digitar sílabas. Opções alternativas aparecem na parte superior do teclado; toque em uma para digitá-la. Como digitar Fifty Key japonês Use o teclado Fifty Key para introduzir código para sílabas em Japonês. Conforme você vai digitando, aparecem sugestões de sílabas. Toque na sílaba para selecioná-la. Coreano Use o teclado coreano 2-Set para digitar letras Hangul. Para digitar consoantes duplas ou vogais compostas, toque e mantenha pressionada a letra e depois deslize para escolher a letra dupla.Apêndice B Teclados Internacionais 195 Vietnamita Toque e mantenha pressionado um caractere para ver os pontos diacríticos disponíveis e, em seguida, deslize para selecionar o que deseja. Você pode também digitar as seguintes sequências de teclas para inserir caracteres com pontos diacríticos:  aa—â (a circunflexo)  aw—a (a com haCek)  ee—ê (e circunflexo)  oo—ô (o circunflexo)  ow—o (o com gancho)  w—u (u com gancho)  dd—d (d com traço)  as—á (a agudo)  af—à (a craseado)  ar—? (a com ponto de interrogação)  ax—ã (a com til)  aj—? (a com ponto inferior) Como criar dicionários Ao usar certos teclados chineses ou japoneses, você pode criar um dicionários de palavras e pares de entrada. Quando você digita uma palavra do dicionário enquanto usa um teclado compatível, a entrada associada é substituída pela palavra. O dicionário está disponível para os seguintes teclados:  Chinês - Simplificado (Pinyin)  Chinês - Tradicional (Pinyin)  Chinês - Tradicional (Zhuyin)  Japonês (Romaji)  Japonês (T50 Key) Para adicionar uma palavra ao dicionário: Em Ajustes, escolha Geral > Teclado > Editar Dicionários. Toque no , toque no campo Palavra e insira a palavra e, em seguida, toque no campo Yomi, Pinyin ou Zhuyin e insira a entrada. Você pode ter várias entradas para cada palavra, dependendo dos teclados que estiverem ativados. Para apagar uma palavra do dicionário: Toque na palavra na lista Dicionário do Usuário e, em seguida, toque em Apagar Palavra.196 Dicas e Solução de Problemas Site de suporte da Apple para o iPad Abrangentes informações de suporte on-line estão disponíveis no site www.apple. com/br/support/ipad. Você também pode usar a Linha Expressa para obter suporte personalizado (não disponível em todos os países). Consulte expresslane.apple.com/br. Se aparecer a imagem de bateria baixa ou a mensagem “Não está carregando” iPad tem pouca bateria e necessita ser carregado por até dez minutos antes de você poder usá-lo.Para obter informações sobre como carregar o iPad, consulte “Como Carregar a Bateria” na página 35. ou  Ao carregar, certifique-se que esteja usando o adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W que acompanha o seu iPad ou a porta USB em um Mac recente. A forma mais rápida de carregar é usando o adaptador de alimentação. Consulte “Como Carregar a Bateria” na página 35.  Para carregar mais depressa, desligue o iPad.  O iPad pode não carregar se estiver conectado à porta USB de um Mac mais antigo, um PC, um teclado ou um hub USB. Se o seu Mac ou PC não fornecerem energia suficiente para carregar o seu iPad, uma mensagem Não está carregando aparecerá na barra de estado. Para carregar o iPad, desconecte-o do seu computador e conecte-o em uma tomada usando o Cabo Conector Dock para USB e o Adaptador de Alimentação USB de 10W. C Apêndice Dicas e Solução de ProblemasApêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 197 Se o iPad não responde  O iPad pode ter pouca bateria. Conecte o iPad ao adaptador de alimentação USB de 10 W para carregar. Consulte “Como Carregar a Bateria” na página 35.  Mantenha o botão Repouso/Despertar pressionado por alguns segundos até que um controle deslizante vermelho apareça e, em seguida, mantenha o botão Início pressionado até que o aplicativo que você estava usando encerre.  Se isso não funcionar, desligue o iPad e volte a ligá-lo. Mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/Despertar até que o controle deslizante vermelho apareça, depois arraste o controle. Depois mantenha pressionado o botão Repouso/Despertar até que o logotipo da Apple apareça.  Se isso não funcionar, reinicie o iPad. Mantenha pressionados os botões Repouso/ Despertar e Início por pelo menos dez segundos até que apareça o logotipo da Apple.  Se a tela não girar quando você virar o iPad, segure o iPad na posição vertical e certifique-se de que o bloqueio de rotação da tela não esteja ativado. A mensagem “Este acessório não é compatível com o iPad"aparece O acessório conectado talvez não funcione com o iPad. Certifique-se de que o Cabo de Conector Dock a USB está livre de detritos e consulte a documentação fornecida com o acessório. Se a tela Conectar-ao-iTunes aparecer Para usar o iPad, primeiro você precisa configurá-lo no iTunes. Conecte o iPad ao seu computador, abra o iTunes se não abrir automaticamente e depois siga as instruções na tela. Se um aplicativo aparecer muito pequeno Muitos aplicativos para o iPhone e iPod touch podem ser usados com o iPad, mas talvez não utilizem a tela grande. Neste caso, toque no para ampliar o aplicativo. Toque no para retornar ao tamanho original. Consulte a App Store para ver se há uma versão do aplicativo otimizada para iPad ou uma versão universal otimizada para iPhone, iPod touch e iPad. Se o teclado não aparecer na tela Se o iPad estiver emparelhado com um teclado Bluetooth, o teclado na tela não aparece. Para fazer que o teclado na tela apareça, pressione a tecla Ejetar em um teclado Bluetooth. Você também pode fazer que apareça o teclado na tela movendo o teclado Bluetooth para fora do alcance ou desligando-o.198 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas iTunes e Sincronização Se o iPad não aparecer ou a sincronização não funcionar Se o iPad não aparecer no iTunes no seu computador ou não for capaz de sincronizar conteúdo, calendários ou favoritos, tente o seguinte:  Recarregue a bateria se o iPad estiver com pouca força. Consulte “Como Carregar a Bateria” na página 35.  Desconecte outros dispositivos USB do seu computador e conecte o iPad a uma porta USB 2.0 diferente no seu computador (que não seja no teclado ou hub USB).  Desbloqueie o iPad se estiver bloqueado com uma senha.  Reinicie seu computador e reconecte o iPad ao seu computador.  Reinicie o iPad.  Transfira e instale (ou reinstale) a última versão do iTunes de www.apple.com/br/ itunes.  Para contas push, certifique-se de que o iPad possua uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Backup do iPad Backup do O iTunes cria um backup de ajustes, dados de aplicativos e outras informações no iPad quando você:  Sincroniza o iPad com o iTunes no seu computador  Atualiza o iPad usando o iTunes  Restaura o iPad usando o iTunes, se você escolheu fazer backup quando perguntado Você pode restaurar as informações de backup no iPad depois de atualizar ou restaurar o software do iPad ou pode usar um backup para copiar suas informações atuais do iPad para outro iPad. Consulte “Como atualizar e restaurar o software do iPad” na página 199. Os backups não incluem itens sincronizados, tais como músicas e vídeos da sua biblioteca do iTunes ou informações tais como contatos ou calendários do seu computador. Para restaurar itens sincronizados, você deve sincronizar o iPad depois de restaurar as informações de backup. Se o iPad estiver ajustado para sincronizar automaticamente, os itens sincronizados são restaurados imediatamente depois de uma restauração ou atualização de software. Consulte “Como Sincronizar com o iTunes” na página 25. Aplicativos da App Store são incluídos no primeiro backup depois que os aplicativos são transferidos. Os backups subsequentes incluem apenas os dados dos aplicativos. Para maior segurança, você pode ajustar o iTunes para criptografar seus backups.Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 199 Para criptografar backups do iPad: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 No iTunes, selecione iPad na barra lateral. 3 No painel Resumo, selecione “Criptografar backups.” 4 Selecione uma senha e depois clique em Definir Senha. Se o backup for criptografado, você precisará digitar sua senha antes de restaurar sua informação de backup para o iPad. Backups criptografados são exibidos com um ícone de cadeado na lista de backups do painel Dispositivos das preferências do iTunes Como Remover um Backup Você pode remover o backup de um iPad da lista de backups no iTunes. Você pode desejar fazer isto, por exemplo, se um backup foi criado no computador de outra pessoa. Para remover um backup: 1 No iTunes, abra as Preferências do iTunes.  Mac: Escolha iTunes > Preferências.  Windows: Escolha Editar > Preferências. 2 Clique em Dispositivos (o iPad não precisa estar conectado). 3 Selecione o backup que deseja remover e clique em Apagar Backup. 4 Clique em Apagar Backup para confirmar seu desejo de remover o backup selecionado. 5 Clique em OK. Como atualizar e restaurar o software do iPad Sobre a Atualização e Restauração do Software Você pode usar o iTunes para atualizar ou restaurar o software do iPad.  Se você atualizar, o software do iPad será atualizado. Seus aplicativos transferidos, ajustes e dados não são afetados. Nota: Em alguns casos, uma atualização inclui também a restauração do iPad.  Se você restaurar, a última versão do software do iPad é reinstalada, os ajustes são restaurados aos valores padrão e os dados armazenados no iPad são apagados, incluindo aplicativos, músicas, vídeos, contatos, fotos, informações de calendário e quaisquer outros dados. Se você tiver feito o backup do iPad com o iTunes no seu computador, poderá restaurar os dados do backup no final do processo de restauração.200 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas Os dados apagados não estarão mais acessíveis através da interface de usuário do iPad, mas não serão apagados do seu iPad. Para obter informações sobre como eliminar todo o conteúdo e ajustes, consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178. Se você utiliza um headset Bluetooth ou um teclado com o iPad e restaurou os ajustes, você deve emparelhar o dispositivo Bluetooth com o iPad novamente para usá-lo. Para obter mais informações sobre atualização e restauração do software do iPad, visite o site support.apple.com/kb/HT1414. Atualização do iPad Certifique-se de que seu computador possui uma conexão à Internet e de que você instalou a última versão do iTunes do site www.apple.com/br/itunes. Para atualizar o iPad: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 Selecione iPad na barra lateral do iTunes e depois clique na aba Resumo. 3 Clique em “Verificar Atualizações”. O iTunes dirá se há disponível uma nova versão do software do iPad. 4 Clique em Atualizar para instalar a última versão do software. Restauração do iPad Certifique-se de que seu computador possui uma conexão à Internet e de que você instalou a última versão do iTunes do site www.apple.com/br/itunes. Para restaurar o iPad: 1 Conecte o iPad ao seu computador. 2 Selecione iPad na barra lateral do iTunes e depois clique na aba Resumo. 3 Clique em “Verificar Atualizações”. O iTunes dirá se há disponível uma nova versão do software do iPad. 4 Clique em Restaurar. Siga as instruções on-line para completar o processo de restauração. Ao restaurar, é recomendado que você realize o backup do iPad quando for solicitado. Quando o software do iPad foi restaurado, você pode escolher configurar o iPad como um novo iPad ou restaurar sua música vídeo, dados do aplicativo e outros conteúdos de um backup. Depois de restaurar de um backup, os dados anteriores já não estarão acessíveis através da interface de usuário do iPad, mas não serão eliminados do seu iPad. Para obter informações sobre como eliminar todo o conteúdo e ajustes, consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178.Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 201 Como Restaurar de um Backup Você pode restaurar os ajustes, dados de aplicativo e outras informações a partir de um backup, ou usar este recurso para copiar estes itens a outro iPad. Certifique-se de que seu computador possui uma conexão à Internet e de que você instalou a última versão do iTunes de www.apple.com/br/itunes. Importante: Restaurar de um backup não é o mesmo que restaurar o iPad do painel Resumo no iTunes. Restaurar de um backup não restaura completamente o software do iPad. Além disso, a restauração do iPad a partir de um backup restaura todos os dados do backup, incluindo dados de aplicativos. Se você escolher um backup antigo, a restauração poderia substituir os dados de aplicativos por dados não atualizados. Para obter mais informações, consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178. Para restaurar o iPad de um backup: 1 Conecte o iPad ao computador com o qual você normalmente sincroniza 2 No iTunes, mantenha a tecla Controle pressionada e clique em iPad na barra lateral, depois escolha “Restaurar do Backup” no menu que aparece. 3 Escolha o backup que você deseja restaurar no menu local e, em seguida, clique em Restaurar. Se o backup estiver criptografado, você terá de digitar sua senha. Depois de restaurar de um backup, os dados anteriores já não estarão acessíveis através da interface de usuário do iPad, mas não serão eliminados do seu iPad. Para obter informações sobre como eliminar todo o conteúdo e ajustes, consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178. Safari, Mail e Contatos Não é possível enviar e-mails Se o iPad não estiver conseguindo enviar e-mails, tente fazer o seguinte:  Nos Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários” e depois selecione a conta que você está tentando utilizar. Toque em Dados da Conta; em seguida, toque em SMTP sob Servidor de Correio de Saída. Você pode configurar outros servidores SMTP ou selecionar um de outra conta de correio no iPad. Entre em contato com seu provedor de serviços de Internet para obter as informações de configuração.  Em vez de sincronizá-la do iTunes, configure sua conta de e-mail diretamente no iPad. Nos Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários”, toque em Adicionar Conta e digite as informações de sua conta. Se o iPad não conseguir localizar os ajustes do seu provedor de serviços quando você digitar o endereço de e-mail, vá para support.apple.com/kb/HT1277 para obter ajuda na configuração da sua conta.202 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas  Desligue o iPad e volte a ligá-lo. Mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/Despertar por alguns segundos até que apareça um controle deslizante vermelho, depois arraste o controle. Depois mantenha pressionado o botão Repouso/Despertar até que o logotipo da Apple apareça. Para outras informações sobre a resolução de problemas, visite o site www.apple.com/ br/support/ipad. Se você ainda não estiver conseguindo enviar e-mails, pode usar a Linha Expressa (não disponível em todos os países). Vá para expresslane.apple.com/br. Não é possível receber e-mails Se o iPad não puder receber e-mails, tente o seguinte:  Se você usa um ou mais computadores para verificar a mesma conta de e-mail, pode ter sido criado um bloqueio. Para obter mais informações, visite o site support. apple.com/kb/TS2621.  Em vez de sincronizá-la do iTunes, configure sua conta de e-mail diretamente no iPad. Em Ajustes, escolha “Mail, Contatos, Calendários,” toque em Adicionar Conta e depois digite as informações de sua conta. Se o iPad não conseguir localizar os ajustes do seu provedor de serviços quando você digitar o endereço de e-mail, vá para support.apple.com/kb/HT1277 para obter ajuda na configuração da sua conta.  Desligue o iPad e volte a ligá-lo. Mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/Despertar por alguns segundos até que apareça um controle deslizante vermelho, depois arraste o controle. Depois mantenha pressionado o botão Repouso/Despertar até que o logotipo da Apple apareça.  Se o seu iPad Wi-Fi + 3G usa uma rede de dados de celular, desligue o Wi-Fi para que o iPad se conecte à Internet através da rede de dados de celular. Nos Ajustes, escolha Wi-Fi e desative a opção Wi-Fi. Para outras informações sobre a resolução de problemas, visite o site www.apple.com/ br/support/ipad. Se você ainda não estiver conseguindo enviar e-mails, pode usar a Linha Expressa (não disponível em todos os países). Vá para expresslane.apple.com/br. Se os anexos do e-mail não abrirem O iPad pode não ser compatível com o tipo de arquivo anexado. O iPad é compatível com os seguintes tipos de anexos de e-mail: .doc Microsoft Word .docx Microsoft Word (XML) .htm página web .html página web .ics Item Calendário .key KeynoteApêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 203 .numbers Numbers .pages Pages .pdf Pré-Visualização, Adobe Acrobat .ppt Microsoft PowerPoint .pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML) .rtf Formato RTF .txt texto .vcf informações de contato .xls Microsoft Excel .xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML) Som, Música e Vídeo Não Há Nenhum Som  Certifique-se de que o alto-falante do iPad não esteja coberto.  Certifique-se de que o Interruptor Lateral não está na posição silêncio. Consulte “Botões de Volume” na página 11.  Se você não estiver usando um fone de ouvido, desconecte-o e, em seguida, conecte-o novamente. Certifique-se de que o conector esteja totalmente encaixado.  Certifique-se que o volume não esteja no mínimo.  A música do iPad pode estar pausada. Se você estiver usando um headset com botão de reprodução, tente pressionar o botão para retomar a reprodução. Ou, na tela Início, toque em iPod e depois toque no .  Verifique se há um limite de volume definido. Na tela de Início, escolha Ajustes > iPod > Limite de Volume. Para obter mais informações, consulte “iPod” na página 184.  Se você estiver usando a porta de saída de linha no Dock opcional do iPad, certifique-se de ligar o aparelho de som ou alto-falantes externos e de que estejam conectados e funcionando apropriadamente. Use os controles do volume do aparelho de som ou alto-falantes externos, não os do iPad.  Se você estiver usando um aplicativo que funciona com o AirPlay, verifique se o dispositivo AirPlay para o qual você está enviando o som está ligado e o volume ativado. Se você quiser ouvir som através do alto-falante do iPad, toque em e selecione-o da lista. Se músicas, vídeos ou outros itens não puderem ser reproduzidos A música, vídeo, audiolivro ou podcast podem estar codificados em um formato não compatível com o iPad. Para obter informações sobre os formatos de arquivo de áudio e vídeo compatíveis com o iPad, visite o site www.apple.com/br/ipad/specs.204 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas Se uma música ou vídeo na biblioteca do seu iTunes não é compatível com o iPad, talvez você possa convertê-la a um formato compatível com o iPad. Por exemplo, você pode usar o iTunes para Windows para converter arquivos WMA não protegidos para um formato compatível com o iPad. Para obter mais informações, abra o iTunes e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iTunes. Sem vídeo ou som ao utilizar o AirPlay Para enviar vídeo ou áudio para um dispositivo AirPlay como um Apple TV, o iPad e o dispositivo AirPlay devem estar conectados à mesma rede sem fio. Se você não vir o botão , significa que o iPad não está conectado à mesma rede Wi-Fi que o dispositivo AirPlay, ou que o aplicativo que você está usando não é compatível com o AirPlay.  Quando som ou vídeo está sendo enviado para um dispositivo AirPlay, o iPad não exibe o vídeo ou a reproduz o áudio. Para direcionar o conteúdo para iPad e desconectar o iPad do dispositivo AirPlay, toque no e selecione o seu iPad da lista.  Alguns aplicativos reproduzem áudio somente através do AirPlay. Se o vídeo não estiver funcionando, certifique-se de que o aplicativo que você está usando é compatível com ambos, áudio e vídeo.  Se o Apple TV foi configurado para necessitar um código, você deve inseri-lo no iPad quando solicitado, para poder usar o AirPlay.  Certifique-se de que os alto-falantes no dispositivo AirPlay estão ligados e ativados. Se você estiver usando um Apple TV, certifique-se de que a origem de entrada da TV está definida para Apple TV. Certifique-se de que o controle de volume no iPad está ativado.  Quando o iPad está transmitindo com o AirPlay, ele deve permanecer conectado à rede Wi-Fi. Se você retirar o iPad do intervalo, a reprodução é interrompida.  Dependendo da velocidade da sua rede, pode levar 30 segundos ou mais para que a reprodução seja iniciada durante a utilização do AirPlay. Para obter informações sobre o AirPlay, visite o site support.apple.com/kb/ HT4437?viewlocale=pt_BR. Sem imagem no televisor ou no projetor conectado ao iPad Quando você conecta o iPad a um televisor ou projetor, o monitor anexado reflete automaticamente a tela do iPad. Alguns aplicativos podem ser compatíveis com o uso do monitor anexado como um monitor secundário. Verifique os ajustes e a documentação do aplicativo.  Abra Ajustes > Vídeo e certifique-se de que os ajustes estejam corretos para sua TV ou projetor. Para visualizar vídeos HD em alta resolução, você deve usar um cabo de vídeo por componentes ou o Adaptador AV Digital da Apple.  Certifique-se que o cabo de vídeo esteja firmemente conectado em ambas extremidades e que seja um cabo compatível. Se o iPad estiver conectado a uma caixa de alternagem A/V ou receptor, tente conectá-lo diretamente ao televisor ou projetor.Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 205  Certifique-se de que o seu televisor possui a entrada de vídeo correta selecionada, como HDMI ou componente de vídeo.  Se não aparecer vídeo, pressione o botão Início e desconecte e reconecte o cabo e tente novamente. FaceTime Se não for possível fazer ou receber ligações do FaceTime Para usar o FaceTime, você deve ativá-lo com o seu ID da Apple. Consulte Capítulo 7,“FaceTime,” na página 68.  Certifique-se de que a pessoa que está ligando para você está usando um endere- ço de e-mail associado ao FaceTime. Normalmente este é o seu ID da Apple, mas você pode adicionar outros endereços também. Consulte “Para iniciar a sessão no FaceTime:” na página 69.  Para usar o FaceTime, o iPad deve estar conectado à Internet via Wi-Fi.  Quando você fizer uma ligação do FaceTime, dê tempo suficiente para que a conexão seja estabelecida, o que pode resultar em vários toques. Como melhorar a qualidade do FaceTime Para obter os melhores resultados com o FaceTime, experimente estas dicas:  Se o vídeo parecer de má qualidade ou lento, certifique-se de que tanto você como a pessoa para qual você está ligando estejam conectados à rede Wi-Fi mais rápida disponível.  Se a sua imagem estiver granulada, significa que a câmera necessita de mais luz. Se a imagem de entrada estiver granulada, peça ao interlocutor para ajustar a ilumina- ção dele.  A sua imagem não caberá na tela inteira se você mantiver o iPad na orientação horizontal. A pessoa com a qual você está conversando talvez necessite girar o seu dispositivo para enviar a você uma imagem maior. iTunes Store e App Store As lojas iTunes ou App Store não estão Disponíveis Para usar a iTunes Store ou a App Store, o iPad deve possuir uma conexão à Internet. Consulte “Como Conectar-se à Internet” na página 30. Para comprar conteúdo da iTunes Store ou da App Store, você precisa de um ID Apple. Você pode configurar um ID Apple no iPad. A partir da tela de Início, escolha Ajustes > Loja > Criar Novo ID Apple. Consulte “Loja” na página 187. 206 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas Você também pode configurar uma conta no seu computador abrindo o iTunes e selecionando Loja > Criar Conta. Nota: A iTunes Store e a App Store não estão disponíveis em alguns países. Como reiniciar e redefinir o iPad Se algo não estiver funcionando bem, tente reiniciar o iPad, forçando o encerramento de um aplicativo ou redefinindo-o iPad. Para reiniciar o iPad: Mantenha o botão Repousar/Despertar pressionado até que o controle deslizante vermelho apareça. Deslize o seu dedo pelo controle para desligar o iPad. Para ligar novamente o iPad mantenha pressionado o botão Repousar/Despertar até que o logotipo da Apple apareça. Para forçar o encerramento de um aplicativo: Mantenha o botão Repouso/Despertar que fica na parte superior do iPad pressionado por alguns segundos até que um controle deslizante vermelho apareça e, em seguida, mantenha o botão Início pressionado até que o aplicativo encerre. Se você não conseguir desligar o iPad ou se o problema persistir, talvez seja necessário redefinir o iPad. A redefinição só deve ser feita se desligar e ligar novamente o iPad não tenha solucionado o problema. Para redefinir o iPad:Mantenha o botão Repousar/Despertar e Início pressionados ao mesmo tempo por 10 segundos, no mínimo, até que o logotipo Apple apareça. Se o iPad não responder mesmo depois de ser reiniciado  Redefina os ajustes do iPad. Na tela de Início, escolha Ajustes > Geral > Redefinir > Redefinir Todos os Ajustes. Todas as suas configurações são redefinidas, mas não é apagado nenhum dado ou mídia.  Se isso não funcionar, apague todo o conteúdo do iPad. Consulte “Como redefinir o iPad” na página 178.  Se isso não funcionar, restaure o software do iPad. Consulte “Como Remover um Backup” na página 199.Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas 207 Informações Sobre Segurança, Serviços e Softwares A seguinte tabela descreve onde obter mais informações sobre segurança, software e serviços relacionados ao iPad. Para obter informações sobre Faça o seguinte Como usar o iPad com segurança Consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad no site support.apple.com/pt_BR/ manuals/ipad para obter as últimas informações sobre segurança e normas. iPad Serviço e suporte, dicas, fóruns e transferências de software da Apple Visite o site www.apple.com/br/support/ipad. As últimas informações sobre o iPad Visite o site www.apple.com/br/ipad. Como gerenciar a sua conta ID Apple Vá para appleid.apple.com/pt_BR. Como usar o iTunes Abra o iTunes e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iTunes. Para ver o tutorial on-line do iTunes (disponível apenas em algumas áreas), visite www.apple. com/br/support/itunes. MobileMe Visite o site www.apple.com/br/mobileme. Como usar o iPhoto no Mac OS X Abra o iPhoto e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iPhoto. Como usar a Agenda no Mac OS X Abra a Agenda e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda Agenda. Como usar o iCal no Mac OS X Abra o iCal e escolha Ajuda > Ajuda iCal. Microsoft Outlook, Catálogo de Endereços do Windows, Adobe Photoshop Album e Adobe Photoshop Elements Consulte a documentação que acompanha estes aplicativos. Como obter serviços da garantia Primeiramente siga os conselhos neste manual. Em seguida, visite o site www.apple.com/ br/support/ipad ou consulte o Manual de Informações Importantes do Produto iPad em support.apple.com/pt_BR/manuals/ipad. Como Substituir a Bateria Visite o site www.apple.com/br/batteries/ replacements.html. Como usar o iPad em um ambiente empresarial Visite o site www.apple.com/br/ipad/business. Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem O seu iPad deve ser eliminado de acordo com as leis e normas locais que regem a eliminação de detritos tóxicos. Porque contém uma bateria, o iPad deve ser eliminado separadamente do lixo doméstico. Quando o seu iPad atingir o final do seu ciclo de vida, contate a Apple ou as autoridades locais para obter informações sobre as opções de reciclagem. Para obter informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, visite o site: www.apple.com/br/recycling.208 Apêndice C Dicas e Solução de Problemas A Apple e o meio ambiente Na Apple, reconhecimentos nossa responsabilidade em minimizar os impactos ambientais de nossas operações e produtos. Para obter mais informações, visite o site www.apple.com/br/environment.K Apple Inc. © 2011 Apple Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Apple, o logotipo da Apple, AirPlay, AirPort, AirPort Express, AirPort Extreme, Aperture, Apple TV, FaceTime, Finder, iBooks, iCal, iPhone, iPhoto, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers, Pages, Photo Booth, Safari e Spotlight são marcas comerciais da Apple Inc., registradas nos EUA e em outros países. AirPrint, iPad, Multi-Touch e Shuffle são marcas comerciais da Apple Inc. Apple, Apple Store, iDisk e iTunes Store são marcas de serviço da Apple Inc., registradas nos EUA e em outros países. App Store, iBookstore e MobileMe são marcas de serviço da Apple Inc. Adobe e Photoshop são marcas de fábrica ou marcas registradas da Adobe Systems Incorporated nos EUA e/ ou outros países. A logomarca e os logotipos Bluetooth® são marcas de fábrica registradas de propriedade da Bluetooth SIG, Inc. e qualquer uso dessas marcas pela Apple Inc. é feito sob licença. IOS é uma marca comercial ou registrada da Cisco nos EUA e em outros países e é utilizada sob licença. Ping é uma marca registrada da Karsten Manufacturing Corporation e é usada nos EUA sob licença. © 2011 Google. Map data © 2011 Google, Tele Atlas, INEGI, Transnavicom, ZENRIN, MapLink/Tele Atlas, Europa Technologies. © Google. Map data © 2011 Tele Atlas. © 2011 Google. Map data © 2011 Google. © 2011 Google. Disponível no iTunes. A disponibilidade to título está sujeita a alterações. Airplane! © 1992 Paramount Pictures. Todos os direitos reservados. Back to the Future (De Volta ao Futuro)© 1985 Universal Studios. Todos os direitos reservados. Dear John © 2010 Dear John, LLC. Todos os direitos reservados. Eat Pray Love (Comer Rezar Amar) © 2010 Columbia Pictures Industries, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Iron Man 2 (Homem de Ferro 2), o filme, © 2010 MVL Film Finance LLC. Iron Man, o personagem, TM e © 2010 Marvel Entertainment, LLC e subs. Todos os direitos reservados. The Karate Kid (A Hora da Verdade) © 2010 Columbia Pictures Industries, Inc. Todos os direitos reservados. Salt © 2010 Columbia Pictures Industries, Inc. and Beverly Blvd. LLC. Todos os direitos reservados. Tangled estará disponível no iTunes por volta do dia 29 de março de 2011. Tangled © 2010 Disney. Toy Story 3 © Disney/Pixar. Outras empresas e nomes de produtos mencionados aqui podem ser marcas de fábrica das suas respectivas empresas. A menção de produtos de terceiros é somente para fins informativos e não constitui nem um endosso nem uma recomendação. A Apple não assume nenhuma responsabilidade com respeito ao desempenho ou uso destes produtos. Todos os acordos, contratos ou garantias, se houver algum, acontecem diretamente entre o fornecedor e os potenciais usuários. Foram feitos todos os esforços para garantir que as informações deste manual sejam precisas. A Apple não se responsabiliza pelos erros de impressão ou administrativos. BR019-2019/2011-03-07 Finder Dock MagSafe 2 USB 3 USB 3 Thunderbolt Premiers pas La première fois que vous démarrez votre MacBook Air, Assistant réglages vous aide à vous lancer. Il vous suffit de suivre quelques étapes simples pour vous connecter rapidement à votre réseau Wi-Fi, transférer vos données à partir d’un autre Mac ou d’un PC, et créer un compte utilisateur pour votre Mac. Vous pouvez également vous connecter avec votre identifiant Apple, afin de pouvoir télécharger des apps dans l’App Store, effectuer des achats dans l’iTunes Store et l’Apple Store en ligne, accéder à iCloud et passer des appels vidéo grâce à FaceTime. Si vous ne possédez pas d’identifiant Apple, créez-en un facilement et gratuitement. Gestes Multi-Touch Vous pouvez réaliser un grand nombre d’actions sur votre MacBook Air à l’aide de gestes simples sur le trackpad. Voici quelques-uns des plus utilisés. Le bureau Le bureau est l’endroit où vous pouvez tout trouver et tout faire sur votre Mac. Le Dock, situé en bas de l’écran, est un endroit pratique où garder les apps que vous utilisez le plus. Il vous permet également d’ouvrir les Préférences Système, grâce auxquelles vous pouvez personnaliser votre bureau et d’autres réglages sur votre Mac. Cliquez sur l’icône du Finder pour accéder rapidement à la totalité de vos fichiers et dossiers. La barre des menus, située en haut de l’écran, propose des informations utiles concernant votre Mac. Pour vérifier l’état de votre connexion Internet sans fil, cliquez sur l’icône du Wi-Fi. Votre Mac se connecte automatiquement au réseau choisi pendant la configuration. Bonjour. Trackpad Multi-Touch Connecteur d’alimentation MagSafe 2 Adaptateur secteur Cordon d’alimentation secteur Bouton d’alimentation iCloud iCloud stocke votre musique, vos photos, votre courrier électronique, etc. et les pousse sans fil vers vos Mac, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch et même votre PC. Le tout sans station d’accueil ni synchronisation. Lorsque vous achetez un morceau sur un appareil, il est automatiquement téléchargé sur tous vos autres appareils. Grâce à Flux de photos, vos photos les plus récentes apparaissent partout où vous le souhaitez. Pour personnaliser vos réglages iCloud, ouvrez le menu Pomme, choisissez Préférences Système, et cliquez sur iCloud. Connectez-vous à l’aide de votre identifiant Apple, puis choisissez les fonctionnalités iCloud que vous souhaitez utiliser. Remarque importante Veuillez lire attentivement ce document et les consignes de sécurité du Guide d’informations importantes sur le produit avant d’utiliser votre ordinateur pour la première fois. En savoir plus Obtenez des informations supplémentaires, regardez des vidéos de démonstration et apprenez-en plus sur les fonctionnalités du MacBook Air à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/macbookair. Aide Vous trouverez souvent des réponses à vos questions ainsi que des instructions et des informations concernant le dépannage dans le Centre d’aide. Cliquez sur l’icône du Finder, cliquez sur Aide dans la barre des menus et choisissez Centre d’aide. Utilitaires Mac OS X Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre Mac, Utilitaires Mac OS X peut vous aider à réparer le stockage flash de votre ordinateur, restaurer les logiciels et les données à partir d’une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine, ou effacer votre stockage flash et réinstaller OS X Lion et les applications Apple. Safari peut également vous aider à trouver de l’aide en ligne. Votre Mac ouvre automatiquement Utilitaires Mac OS X s’il détecte un problème. Vous pouvez également l’ouvrir manuellement en redémarrant votre ordinateur en maintenant les touches Commande et R enfoncées. Assistance Votre MacBook Air bénéficie d’une assistance technique de 90 jours et d’un an de couverture pour les réparations de matériel effectuées dans les magasins Apple Store ou les Centres de services agréés Apple. Consultez www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookair pour obtenir une assistance technique pour votre MacBook Air. Ou composez l’un des numéros suivants : France (Metropolitain) : +33 0 805 540 003 ; France (DOM-TOM) : +33 0 825 770 035 ; Belgique : +32 070 700 773 ; Suisse : +41 0848 000 132. www.apple.com/support/country Toutes les fonctions ne sont pas disponibles dans toutes les régions. TM et © 2012 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés. Designed by Apple in California. Printed in XXXX. F034-6354-A Prise secteur Menu Aide Barre des menus Préférences Système Guide de démarrage rapide Ensuite Déplacer des fichiers, tels des documents, courriers électroniques, photos, morceaux et films, d’un autre Mac ou d’un PC vers votre nouveau Mac est très simple. La première fois que vous démarrez votre Mac, celui-ci vous guide étape par étape tout au long du processus. Il vous suffit de suivre les instructions à l’écran. Bienvenue sur votre nouveau MacBook Air. Laissez-nous vous montrer. Caméra FaceTime HD État du Wi-Fi Écouteurs Cliquer Appuyez n’importe où sur le trackpad pour cliquer. Ou alors, si vous activez Toucher pour cliquer, touchez simplement la surface. Clic secondaire (clic droit) Cliquez avec deux doigts pour ouvrir les menus contextuels. Ou alors, si vous activez Toucher pour cliquer, touchez n’importe où avec deux doigts. Balayer pour naviguer Balayez avec deux doigts pour feuilleter des pages web, des documents, etc. Double-clic Appuyez deux fois n’importe où sur le trackpad. Ou alors, si vous activez Toucher pour cliquer, touchez deux fois la surface. Faire défiler avec deux doigts Passez deux doigts pour faire défiler dans n’importe quelle direction : verticalement, horizontalement ou en diagonale. Zoom intelligent Touchez deux fois le trackpad avec deux doigts pour agrandir rapidement une page web. Pincer pour zoomer Effectuez un zoom avant ou arrière sur les photos et les pages web avec plus de précision en pinçant avec le pouce et l’index. Basculer entre des apps en plein écran Balayez avec trois doigts pour vous déplacer entre apps en plein écran. Afficher le Launchpad Pincez avec quatre doigts pour afficher toutes vos apps dans le Launchpad. Faire pivoter Faites tourner le pouce et l’index dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre ou en sens inverse pour faire pivoter une image. Afficher Mission Control Balayez vers le haut avec trois doigts pour afficher toutes les fenêtres ouvertes sur votre Mac. En savoir plus Choisissez Préférences Système dans le menu Pomme et cliquez sur Trackpad pour en savoir plus sur les gestes. Cliquez sur l’icône située dans le Dock, et naviguez rapidement et simplement sur le Web à l’aide des gestes Multi-Touch. Faites défiler verticalement avec deux doigts sur le trackpad. Balayez vers la droite ou la gauche avec deux doigts pour Navigateur web Safari Mail Top Sites Obtenez un aperçu des sites que vous visitez le plus souvent. Messagerie regroupée Consultez tous vos comptes dans Mail, en un clic. Affichage Conversations Affichez tous les messages d’un même échange. Rechercher Affinez rapidement les résultats de recherche pour trouver exactement ce que vous cherchez. Mail vous permet de gérer tous vos comptes de messagerie à partir d’une seule boîte aux lettres, sans publicité, même lorsque vous n’êtes pas connecté à Internet. Mail fonctionne avec la plupart des services de messagerie standards (notamment POP3 et IMAP) les plus passer d’une page à l’autre. Touchez deux fois avec deux doigts pour agrandir une page, puis touchez deux fois à nouveau pour revenir à la taille originale. Vous pouvez également pincer pour agrandir ou réduire. connus, tels que Gmail, Yahoo!, Mail et AOL Mail. Vous pouvez également utiliser Mail avec le compte de messagerie gratuit me.com que vous obtenez avec iCloud. La première fois que vous ouvrez Mail, Assistant réglages se lance pour vous aider. Launchpad Ouvrir le Launchpad Cliquez sur l’icône du Launchpad dans le Dock. Dossiers Regrouper les apps en dossiers en les faisant glisser l’une sur l’autre. Le Launchpad réunit toutes les applications de votre Mac. Cliquez simplement sur l’icône du Launchpad dans le Dock. Les fenêtres ouvertes sont remplacées par une vue en plein écran de toutes vos apps. Arrangez les apps comme vous le souhaitez, regroupez-les en dossiers ou supprimez-les de votre Mac. Lorsque vous téléchargez une app dans le Mac App Store, elle apparaît automatiquement dans le Launchpad. Mission Control Mission Control vous offre une vue d’ensemble de tout ce qui se passe sur votre Mac. Cliquez sur l’icône Mission Control dans le Dock et votre bureau effectue un zoom arrière pour afficher toutes les fenêtres ouvertes dans chaque application, toutes les apps en plein écran et le Dashboard, le lieu des mini-apps appelées widgets. Cliquez n’importe où pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Imaginez Mission Control comme le point central de votre système ; voyez tout et allez partout d’un seul clic. Ouvrir Mission Control Cliquez sur l’icône Mission Control dans le Dock. Ajouter des espaces de bureau Cliquez sur le bouton + à droite de la rangée du haut pour ajouter un nouvel espace. Dashboard Situé en haut à gauche pour un accès facile. Liste de lecture Cliquez sur l’icône de lunettes pour enregistrer des pages à lire plus tard. Mac App Store Le Mac App Store est le meilleur moyen de trouver et de télécharger des milliers d’apps pour le Mac, notamment des jeux et des apps de réseau social et de productivité. Installer une nouvelle app dans le Launchpad ne requiert qu’une seule étape. Vous pouvez installer des apps sur chacun des Mac autorisés pour votre usage personnel et même les télécharger plusieurs fois. Le Mac App Store vous alerte dès qu’une mise à jour est disponible. Ainsi, vous possédez toujours la dernière version. Ouvrez le Mac App Store en cliquant sur son icône dans le Dock. iTunes Avec iTunes, vous pouvez organiser et lire la musique et les vidéos numériques sur votre Mac. Dans l’iTunes Store, vous pouvez également acheter de nouveaux morceaux, films, séries TV, livres, etc. iTunes donne également accès à l’App Store pour iPad, iPhone et iPod touch. iTunes Store Découvrez et achetez de nouveaux morceaux, films, etc. Mix Genius iTunes parcourt votre musique et regroupe les morceaux qui s’accordent. iCal Calendriers multiples Accédez à tous vos calendriers en un seul endroit. Gardez un oeil sur votre agenda grâce à iCal. Créez des calendriers distincts : un pour la maison, un autre pour l’école, un troisième pour le travail. Affichez calendrier par calendrier ou tous dans une seule fenêtre. Créez et envoyez des invitations à l’aide des informations de contact de Carnet d’adresses, puis consultez les réponses. Utilisez iCloud pour mettre vos calendriers à jour automatiquement sur tous vos appareils ou pour les partager avec d’autres utilisateurs iCloud. iPhoto Créer Créez des livres, des cartes et des calendriers. Visages iPhoto peut même organiser vos photos selon les personnes qui y figurent. Événements Cliquez deux fois sur un événement pour en voir les photos. iPhoto est la meilleure façon d’organiser, de parcourir, de modifier et de partager vos photos sur le Mac. Organisez votre bibliothèque par visage, lieu ou événement. Sélectionnez une photo et cliquez sur Partager en bas à droite de l’écran pour l’envoyer par courrier électronique ou pour la publier sur Facebook. Cliquez sur Créer pour transformer vos photos préférées en livres de photos, calendriers et cartes. iMovie Navigateur d’événements Les vidéos importées apparaissent ici pour que vous puissiez accéder à tous vos plans. Navigateur de projets Faites simplement glisser une sélection dans un projet pour créer un grand film. iMovie rassemble tous vos clips vidéo en un seul endroit, et vous fournit tous les outils d’édition, thèmes et effets spéciaux dont vous avez besoin pour en faire quelque chose de vraiment particulier. Vous pouvez les transformer en quelques clics en films dignes d’une récompense ou même en bandesannonces hollywoodiennes. iMovie permet également d’importer des vidéos depuis les caméras numériques les plus répandues, votre iPad, iPhone ou iPod touch, ou la caméra FaceTime de votre Mac. FaceTime FaceTime pour Mac permet de parler face à face sur l’iPad, l’iPhone, l’iPod touch ou le Mac à partir de votre Mac.* La configuration de FaceTime ne requiert qu’un identifiant Apple et une adresse électronique. Pour commencer un appel vidéo, il vous suffit de cliquer sur un nom dans la liste de contacts de Carnet d’adresses. Favoris Ajoutez les contacts fréquents aux Favoris pour un accès facile. *Requiert des appareils prenant en charge FaceTime pour l’appelant et l’interlocuteur. Non disponible dans toutes les régions. Affichage du calendrier Sélectionnez l’affichage que vous préférez : jour, semaine, mois ou année. Affichage Plein écran Cliquez sur le bouton Plein écran pour passer en mode plein écran. Toujours à jour Les mises à jour pour les apps achetées apparaissent automatiquement. Ajouter un événement Cliquez deux fois pour créer un nouvel événement. Découvrir de nouvelles apps Parcourez des milliers d’apps et téléchargez-les directement dans le Launchpad. Nike + iPod User GuideK Apple Inc. © 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved. Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Shuffle is a trademark of Apple Inc. iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. NIKE and the Swoosh Design are trademarks of NIKE, Inc. and its affiliates, and are used under license. The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652, 6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod enabled iPod media player or iPhone. Polar Wearlink is a trademark of Polar, Inc. Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties, if any, take place directly between the vendors and the prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors.3 Contents 4 Your Personal Workout Assistant 5 Quick Start 12 Using Nike + iPod 12 Calibrating Nike + iPod 14 Setting the Unit of Distance 15 Entering Your Weight 15 Locking Your Device During a Workout 15 Getting Spoken Feedback 16 Using a PowerSong 17 Pausing a Workout 18 Receiving Calls During a Workout 18 Changing Music During a Workout 19 Sending Workouts to Nikeplus.com Automatically 20 Reviewing Workouts on Your Device 21 Creating Custom Workout Shortcuts 22 Purchasing Nike+ Workouts 22 Linking a Nike + iPod Compatible Remote or Heart Rate Monitor 24 Working Out with iPod nano (6th Generation) and a Heart Rate Monitor 26 Linking to Another Sensor 27 Putting the Nike + iPod Sensor to Sleep 28 Important Safety Information 29 Learning More, Service, and Support4 Welcome to Nike + iPod Your Personal Workout Assistant Nike + iPod is a workout partner and coach all in one. Select the type of workout you want—open-ended, distance, time, or calorie-burning—choose music to keep you motivated, and then keep track of your progress every step of the way with spoken and onscreen feedback. Upload your workout data to nikeplus.com, where you can set goals and monitor your improvement from workout to workout. Join the world’s largest online running community, participating in challenges with runners from across the globe. Nike + iPod is supported by iPhone (3GS or later), all iPod nano models 1 , and iPod touch (2nd generation or later). iPod nano (all models) iPod touch (2nd generation or later) iPhone 3GS or later 1 For iPod nano (6th generation), the Nike + iPod Sensor is optional and only required for workouts using the Polar Wearlink® + Heart Rate Transmitter for Nike+.5 Quick Start Follow these instructions to get started using Nike + iPod right away. Step 1: Enable Nike + iPod on your device. m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Attach the Nike + iPod receiver to iPod nano. Nike + iPod appears in the main menu. m iPod nano (6th generation): Attach the Nike + iPod receiver to iPod nano. Tap Fitness. Note: iPod nano (6th generation) can optionally track your workouts without using the Nike + iPod receiver and sensor. For more information, see the iPod nano User Guide that came with the device. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod and set it to On. A Nike + iPod icon appears on the Home screen. Note: iPhone 3GS or later and iPod touch have an internal receiver; no external receiver is required. Step 2: Make sure you have the latest iPod and iTunes software. 1 Download and install the latest iTunes software to your computer from www.apple.com/itunes.6 2 Connect the device to your computer, then select it in the iTunes sidebar and click Summary. 3 If iTunes indicates that your device needs an update, click Update and follow the onscreen instructions. Step 3: Insert the Nike + iPod Sensor in your Nike+ ready shoe. m Lift the insole of the left shoe, remove the foam insert from the pocket underneath, and replace it with the sensor, flat side up. Sensor You can leave the sensor in your shoe when you aren’t working out, but if you plan to wear your shoes for a long time without working out, replace the sensor with the foam insert to save battery life. The battery in the sensor is not replaceable or rechargeable, and has a life of over 1000 hours of active use. Battery life varies, depending on use and other factors.7 Step 4: Choose a type of workout. To choose Do this An open-ended workout iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Basic. iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Fitness > Run > Basic. iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod > Basic. A workout with a time goal iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Time. iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Fitness > Run >Time. iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod > Time. A workout with a distance goal iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Distance. iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Fitness > Run > Distance. iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod > Distance. A workout with a calorie-burning goal iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Weight and enter your weight. Then press the Menu button and choose Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Calorie. iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Weight and enter your weight. Choose Fitness > Run > Calorie. iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Weight and enter your weight. Then press the Home button and choose Nike + iPod > Calorie. Note: You need to enter your weight only the first time you start a calorie-burning workout.8 Step 5: Choose music for your workout. To play Do this A Nike+ Workout mix Choose the mix (see page 22). The currently playing song Choose Now Playing. A Genius mix Choose Genius Mixes (iPod nano 6th generation). Songs from a playlist Choose Playlists and then choose a playlist. A podcast Choose Podcasts (iPod nano 6th generation). An audiobook Choose Audiobooks (iPod nano 6th generation). Songs in random order Choose Shuffle Songs. A radio station Choose Radio. (iPod nano 6th generation). No music Choose None. Step 6: Start your workout. You next walk or run a few steps to activate your sensor. When your device detects and links to the sensor, you’re ready to start the workout. m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Center button and begin walking or running. m iPod nano (6th generation): Tap Start Workout and begin walking or running. m iPhone and iPod touch: Tap Play and begin walking or running. Step 7: Monitor your progress. Nike + iPod automatically displays your workout status on the screen, similar to the following illustration. (Depending on your device type, the screen may appear slightly different.)9 iPod nano (6th generation) iPhone3GS or later, and iPod touch Nike + iPod gives you spoken feedback on your progress during your workout (see “Getting Spoken Feedback” on page 15). You can also get feedback whenever you want it. To get spoken feedback manually: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Center button at any time during your workout. m iPod nano (6th generation): Press the Sleep/Wake button at any time during your workout. m iPhone and iPod touch: Press the Home button at any time during your workout. Note: iPhone and iPod touch must be locked to get spoken feedback manually (see “Getting Spoken Feedback” on page 15).10 Step 8: End your workout. You can end your workout at any time. If you continue working out after you reach your time, distance, or calorie goal, your progress continues to be monitored. To end your workout: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Play/Pause button (’) to pause your workout. Then press the Menu button and choose End Workout. m iPod nano (6th generation): Tap the screen to display the Pause button, then tap Pause. Tap End Workout. If the screen is off, press the Sleep/Wake button. Note: To quickly pause or resume your workout on an iPod nano (6th generation), double-click the Sleep/Wake button. m iPhone and iPod touch: Tap End Workout. If iPhone or iPod touch is locked, press the Home button and tap Pause. Then drag the slider and tap End Workout. Step 9: Track your progress at nikeplus.com. At nikeplus.com you can track your progress over time, view a record of all of your past workouts, set and monitor goals, and compare your results with others. You can even compete with other Nike + iPod users in online workout challenges. If you have an iPhone or iPod touch, you can send your workout data wirelessly to the Nike website. If you have an iPod nano, you can send your workout data from your computer to nikeplus.com. It’s recommended that you first create a nikeplus.com account before you upload your workout data. Follow the instructions on the nikeplus.com website to sign up for a free account. 11 To send your workout data wirelessly to nikeplus.com from your iPhone or iPod touch: 1 Make sure your device is connected to the Internet, and then choose Nike + iPod. When you have a workout that hasn’t been synced with your nikeplus.com account, a small red dot appears on the History button. 2 Tap the History button to view your workouts. 3 Tap the “Send to Nike+” button to send your workout data to nikeplus.com. You can do it later if you don’t want to do it now. 4 Enter your email address and nikeplus.com account password and then tap “Login to Nike+.” After you log in, your workouts are sent to your nikeplus.com account. If you don’t have a nikeplus.com account, tap “Join Nike+” and follow the instructions for creating an account. The nikeplus.com website opens with a graph exhibiting your most recent workout. 5 Follow the onscreen instructions for accessing your workouts. To send your iPod nano workout data from your computer to nikeplus.com: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and then connect iPod nano to your computer. 2 Click Send in the dialog that asks if you want to send your workout data to nikeplus.com. You can do it later if you don’t want to do it now. 3 Click Visit in the dialog that asks if you want to go to nikeplus.com. The nikeplus.com website opens with a graph showing your most recent workout. 4 Click Save Your Runs, then click Sign Me Up and follow the onscreen instructions.12 Using Nike + iPod Follow these instructions to get the most out of Nike + iPod. Calibrating Nike + iPod The default calibration for Nike + iPod is accurate for many users. You can improve the accuracy by calibrating Nike + iPod to your natural running and walking style. On iPod nano, you can perform a calibration workout over a known distance, or use your latest workout and enter the distance travelled. On iPhone or iPod touch, you can calibrate using your latest completed workout for which you know the distance traveled. To calibrate Nike + iPod for running and walking using iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): 1 Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Sensor > Calibrate. 2 Choose Run or Walk and enter a distance. For best results, use a distance of at least one mile. The shortest calibration distance you can enter is one quarter of a mile. 3 Press the Center button. 4 Run or walk the set distance at a steady, natural pace. 5 Press the Menu button and choose Done Calibrating. A message lets you know if the calibration was successful. If you want to calibrate for both running and walking, repeat steps 1–5. Note: Even after calibrating, the accuracy of the distance measurements may vary depending on gait, running surface, incline, and temperature.13 You can also calibrate iPod nano using the workout you just finished. This is useful if you’ve traveled a known distance that doesn’t match the summary distance displayed on your device. To calibrate iPod nano (5th generation or earlier) using your latest completed workout: m Choose End Workout, press and hold the Center button, then choose Calibrate. Set the correct distance you walked or ran, then press the Center button. The device senses whether the workout was a walk or run, and correctly uses the new calibration instead of the existing one. To calibrate Nike + iPod for running and walking using iPod nano (6th generation): 1 Choose Settings >Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Sensor > Calibrate. 2 Choose Walk Calibration or Run Calibration, then select a distance and tap Done. For best results, use a distance of at least one mile. The shortest calibration distance you can enter is one quarter of a mile. 3 Choose music to accompany your calibration workout. 4 Run or walk the set distance at a steady, natural pace. 5 Press the Sleep/Wake button if the screen is off, tap the screen to display the Pause button, then tap Stop. A message lets you know if the calibration was successful. If you want to calibrate for both running and walking, repeat steps 1–5. Note: Even after calibrating, the accuracy of the distance measurements may vary depending on gait, running surface, incline, and temperature. Using iPhone or iPod touch, you can calibrate Nike + iPod using the workout you just finished. You can only calibrate workouts that are a distance of a quarter mile or more. 14 To calibrate iPhone or iPod touch using your latest completed workout: m Tap End Workout, then tap Calibrate. Set the correct distance you ran or walked and tap Done. The device updates with the new calibration to override the previous one for a walking or running pace. To reset Nike + iPod calibration to the default setting: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Sensor > Calibrate > Reset Walk (or Reset Run). m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Sensor > Calibrate > Reset Walk (or Reset Run) > Reset. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod, then tap Reset Calibration. Setting the Unit of Distance You can set Nike + iPod to measure your workouts in either miles or kilometers. To set the unit of distance: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings, and set Distances to Miles or Kilometers. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings >Fitness > Distances, then choose Miles or Kilometers. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Distances, then choose Miles or Kilometers.15 Entering Your Weight To enter your weight: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Weight, then enter your weight. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Weight, then enter your weight. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Weight, then enter your weight. For better accuracy in calculating calories burned, update your weight if it changes. Locking Your Device During a Workout You can lock iPhone or iPod touch so that its controls can’t be accidentally activated during a workout. To lock iPhone or iPod touch: m Press the Sleep/Wake button. To unlock, press the Sleep/Wake button or the Home button and drag the slider. Getting Spoken Feedback As you work out, Nike + iPod periodically gives spoken feedback on your status. You can choose a female or male voice, or turn off feedback. To set the voice type or turn spoken feedback off: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings, then set Spoken Feedback to Male, Female, or Off. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Spoken Feedback, then choose Male, Female, or Off. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Spoken Feedback, then choose Male, Female, or Off.16 When spoken feedback is turned off, you can still get spoken feedback manually. To get spoken feedback manually: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Center button at any time during your workout. m iPod nano (6th generation): Press the Sleep/Wake button at any time during your workout. m iPhone and iPod touch: Press the Home button while the device is locked. On iPod nano, spoken feedback is available in some languages besides English. If you set iPod nano to one of these languages and connect it to your computer (which must be connected to the Internet), iTunes prompts you to download feedback in that language.  iPod nano (5th generation or earlier) can have only one non-English version of spoken feedback at a time.  iPhone, iPod touch, and iPod nano (6th generation) automatically support all spoken feedback languages. Using a PowerSong Choose a song that motivates you and make it your PowerSong. You can switch quickly to your PowerSong at any time during your workout. To choose a PowerSong: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > PowerSong, then choose a song. iPod nano (5th generation) can also use a playlist as a PowerSong. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > PowerSong, then choose a song. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > PowerSong, then choose a song.17 To play your PowerSong: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Hold down the Center button during a workout. After a short pause, your PowerSong plays. m iPod nano (6th generation): Press the Sleep/Wake button to wake the screen, then tap the screen to display the PowerSong button and tap PowerSong. When the screen is on, you can also place and hold two fingers on the screen to start the PowerSong. m iPhone and iPod touch: Tap PowerSong on the workout screen. If iPhone or iPod touch is locked, press the Home button, drag the slider to unlock, then tap PowerSong. Pausing a Workout You can pause your workout, temporarily stopping music and data collection, and resume the workout later without losing any data. To pause or resume a workout: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Play/Pause button (’). m iPod nano (6th generation): Tap the screen to display the Pause button. Tap Pause. Tap Resume to resume your workout. If the iPod nano (6th generation) screen is off, press the Sleep/Wake button to wake it. m iPhone and iPod touch: Tap Pause. If iPhone or iPod touch is locked, first press the Home button once. Tap Play to resume your workout.18 Receiving Calls During a Workout You can use iPhone to answer calls during your workout. When you receive a call, your workout is automatically paused when you answer. To answer a call: m Tap Answer, or press the mic button if you’re wearing the stereo headset. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider to unlock it. To silence a call: m Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail. To decline a call: m Tap Decline, or hold down the mic button on the headset for about two seconds and then release it. Two low beeps confirm that the call was declined. You can also press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly to decline a call. This silences the ringer but the music doesn’t resume until the call has gone to voicemail; the workout continues in the background. To resume your workout after a call: m Tap Play. Changing Music During a Workout You can change your music during a workout without losing your workout data. Your workout is paused while the music changes. To change music during a workout: 1 iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Press the Menu button and choose Change Music. Your workout pauses.19 iPod nano (6th generation): Tap the screen to display the Pause button.Tap Pause, then tap Change Music. If the iPod nano (6th generation) screen is off, press the Sleep/Wake button to wake it. iPhone and iPod touch: Tap Pause, then tap Change Music. If the device is locked, first press the Home button and drag the slider to unlock it. 2 iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose new music. Your workout resumes automatically. iPhone, iPod touch, and iPod nano (6th generation): Choose new music. Sending Workouts to Nikeplus.com Automatically You can set iTunes to automatically send your workout data to nikeplus.com over the Internet whenever you connect your iPod nano to your computer. To send workouts to nikeplus.com automatically: 1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet, and then connect iPod nano to your computer. 2 Open iTunes on your computer, click the Nike + iPod tab, then select “Automatically send workout data to nikeplus.com.” 3 Click “Visit nikeplus.com” below the checkbox or, if you’ve already set your workout to be sent automatically, click Visit in the dialog that appears. The nikeplus.com website opens with a graph showing your most recent workout. 4 Click Save Your Runs and log in, or register if you haven’t already done so. See the nikeplus.com website for Nike’s privacy policy and terms and conditions.20 Reviewing Workouts on Your Device iPod nano, iPhone, or iPod touch saves the date, time, duration, distance, pace, and calories burned for up to your last one thousand workouts. To review recent workouts on your device: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > History. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Fitness > History at the bottom of the screen. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod, then tap History at the bottom of the screen. iPod nano (5th generation or earlier) provides daily totals of all your workouts: Nike + iPod workouts, pedometer steps, and cardio workouts using Nike + iPod compatible gym equipment. To view workouts on iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): 1 Choose Daily Totals from the History menu. 2 Choose a date and activity. 3 Rotate iPod nano (5th generation) to landscape orientation to see a graph of that activity. To delete a single workout session: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > History. Choose a workout session, press and hold the Center button, then choose Delete. You cannot delete individual workouts on iPod nano (6th generation). m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod and tap History. Tap Edit, choose a workout session, then tap Delete. On iPhone, iPod touch, and iPod nano (6th generation), you can delete all workout sessions from History by tapping Clear at the top of the History screen.21 Creating Custom Workout Shortcuts Custom workout shortcuts let you easily choose and repeat a workout. iPod nano (4th generation or later) automatically saves your completed workouts as shortcuts. iPhone and iPod touch also let you create custom workout shortcuts. To create a custom workout shortcut on iPhone or iPod touch: 1 Choose Nike + iPod, then tap My Workouts at the bottom of the screen. 2 Tap Plus (+), then choose the type of workout and the workout goal. 3 Choose music, enter a name for the workout, then tap Save. Note: You can create custom workout shortcuts only on iPhone and iPod touch (2nd generation or later). To delete a custom workout shortcut on iPhone or iPod touch: m Choose Nike + iPod, then tap My Workouts. Tap Edit, choose a shortcut, then tap Delete. To choose a custom workout shortcut: m iPod nano (4th and 5th generation): Choose Nike + iPod, then choose a shortcut. Shortcuts are named according to the type of workout and music. They can’t be deleted. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Fitness > Run> , then tap My Workouts. Choose a shortcut. Shortcuts are named according to the type of workout and music. They can’t be deleted. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Nike + iPod, then tap My Workouts. Shortcuts are listed by the name you specified when you created the workout. Your most recent custom workout shortcut appears at the top of the list.22 Purchasing Nike+ Workouts You can purchase and download Nike+ Workouts that feature continuous music mixed with professional coaching. When you purchase a Nike+ Workout, you get a single workout track with music and voiceover, and you also get all the individual songs in the mix. Choose mixes for your level and style of workout. To purchase a Nike+ Workout: 1 Open iTunes and click iTunes Store on the left side of the window, then type “Nike Sport Music” in the iTunes search field. 2 Click the Buy button next to the Nike+ Workout of your choice. 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the purchase. The download begins automatically. 4 Connect the device to your computer and load the workout onto the device. Note: The iTunes Store is available only to people age 13 or older, in the U.S. and many other countries; for a list of countries, go to www.apple.com/itunes/download. Terms apply. You must have Internet access (fees may apply) to use the iTunes Store. Linking a Nike + iPod Compatible Remote or Heart Rate Monitor Nike + iPod compatible devices are sold separately from the Nike + iPod Sport Kit and the Nike + iPod Sensor. You can use a compatible remote to control Nike + iPod wirelessly while you work out. iPod nano (5th generation or later) also supports Nike + iPod compatible heart rate monitors. Note: You must have the iPod + Nike receiver attached to your iPod nano (6th generation) to use a heart rate monitor or remote.23 Before using one of these devices for the first time, you must link it to your iPod nano receiver, iPhone, or iPod touch. To link to a Nike + iPod compatible remote (sold separately): m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Connect your Nike + iPod receiver to iPod nano, choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Remote > Link, then follow the onscreen instructions. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Remote. Turn on the Remote option and tap Link. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions. To link to a Nike + iPod compatible heart rate monitor (sold separately): m iPod nano (5th generation): Connect your Nike + iPod receiver to iPod nano, choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Heart Rate Monitor > Link, then follow the onscreen instructions. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Heart Rate Monitor > Link, then follow the onscreen instructions. To unlink a device: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Remote (or Heart Rate Monitor) > Unlink, then follow the onscreen instructions. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Remote (or Heart Rate Monitor), then tap Unlink. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Remote, then tap Unlink. You can turn the functions of a Nike + iPod compatible remote on or off without unlinking the device.24 To turn remote functionality on or off: m iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Remote, then set Remote to On or Off. m iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Remote, then set Remote to On or Off. m iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Remote, then link or unlink the remote. Working Out with iPod nano (6th Generation) and a Heart Rate Monitor If you have iPod nano (6th generation) and a compatible Nike + iPod heart rate monitor (purchased separately), iPod nano can record and display your heart rate as you work out. You can also specify a range or “zone” of the maximum and minimum heart rates that you want to maintain during a workout and track how well you maintain your heart rate within that zone as you exercise. As you work out, iPod nano displays your current heart rate and an upward- or downward-pointing arrow appears when you need to increase or decrease your activity. You can use a heart rate monitor while doing any of the standard workouts. You can also monitor your heart rate as you participate in activities besides running or walking. For example, you can use iPod nano and a heart rate monitor as you participate in sports activities such as basketball, aerobics, circuit training, golf, hiking, soccer, and more. When your workout is done, you can transfer your heart rate information to your nikeplus.com account, where you can review it. As you set up a workout, you can set a zone of maximum and minimum heart rates that you want to maintain when you select a workout. You must first turn on the zone workout feature.25 To turn zone workouts on or off: m Tap Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit, then tap the On/Off button in Zone Workout. When you turn on zone workouts and select a workout, options appear for setting a heart rate zone. As you work out, heart rate information is recorded and displayed during any of the workout types. iPod nano (6th generation) also provides a heart rate workout. To perform a heart rate workout, you specify the heart rate zone you want to maintain, choose the activity type that you’ll be doing, and then enjoy a good workout. All your heart rate information is recorded automatically. When you do a heart rate workout, you don’t need a sensor in your shoe to record motion. To start a heart rate workout: 1 Tap Fitness > Run > Heart Rate. 2 Set the heart rate zone you want. 3 Choose an activity and tap Done. 4 Choose the workout music you want. 5 Tap Start Workout and begin your workout. 6 When done, press the Sleep/Wake button to wake the screen, tap the screen to display the Pause button, tap Pause.Tap End Workout to finish your heart rate workout. Once you complete a heart rate workout, you can transfer the information to your nikeplus.com account just as you do with your other workouts. 26 Linking to Another Sensor Once your device links to a specific sensor, it’s set to link with that sensor only. If you use a different sensor, you must set the device to link to the other sensor. You may want to do this, for example, if there’s more than one person in your family with a sensor and Nike+ ready shoes. To link to another sensor: 1 iPod nano: Connect the receiver to iPod. 2 Put on the shoes with the new sensor, and make sure there’s no other Nike + iPod Sensor nearby. Walk around to activate the sensor so that your receiver can detect it. 3 Link the sensor to your device:  iPod nano (5th generation or earlier): Choose Nike + iPod > Settings > Sensor > Link, then follow the onscreen instructions. A message indicates iPod is now linked to the new sensor.  iPod nano (6th generation): Choose Settings > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Sensor, tap Link, then tap the screen while walking or running to relink the device to the different sensor.  iPhone and iPod touch: Choose Settings > Nike + iPod > Sensor, tap Link New, then follow the onscreen instructions. Note: If you link to a previously linked sensor, Nike + iPod detects your calibration settings. You don’t need to recalibrate. If you connect an iPod receiver to a different iPod and use it with the same sensor, you don’t need to relink or recalibrate. The receiver stores your settings, your workout history, and your workout shortcuts. You don’t need to relink or recalibrate.27 Putting the Nike + iPod Sensor to Sleep The sensor is awake and on by default. If you want to store the sensor for a long period of time or stop it from transmitting, you can put it to sleep. Important: To comply with applicable government regulations, put the sensor to sleep before taking it on an aircraft. To put the sensor to sleep: m Use a pen or a paper clip to hold down the Sleep/Wake button for three seconds. Sleep/Wake button To wake the sensor: m Use a pen or a paper clip to press the Sleep/Wake button.28 Important Safety Information WARNING: Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in injury or damage. Exercising Before starting any exercise program, you should have a complete physical examination by your physician. Do a warmup or stretching exercise before beginning any workout. Be careful and attentive while exercising. Slow down, if necessary, before adjusting your device while running. Stop exercising immediately if you feel pain, or feel faint, dizzy, exhausted, or short of breath. By exercising, you assume the risks inherent in physical exercise, including any injury that may result from such activity. Do not use the receiver, iPhone, or iPod in or near water or wet locations. Choking hazard The receiver and sensor are potential choking hazards. Keep them away from children under three years of age. Avoid hearing damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones are used at high volume. Set the volume to a safe level. You can adapt over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:  Limit the amount of time you use the earphones at high volume.  Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.  Turn down the volume if you can’t hear people speaking near you. Disassembling the sensor Do not attempt to open the sensor, disassemble it, or remove the battery. No user-serviceable parts are inside.29 Learning More, Service, and Support For Do this Answers to frequently asked questions about Nike + iPod Go to www.apple.com/support/nikeplus. Service and support for the Nike + iPod Sensor and Receiver Go to www.apple.com/support/nikeplus. Service and support for Nike+ ready shoes or the nikeplus.com website Go to www.nikeplus.com. Information about using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. Information about using iPod nano or iPod touch Go to www.apple.com/support/ipod. Information about using iPhone Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone.31 Table des matières 32 Votre assistant personnel d’entraînement 33 Démarrage rapide 41 Utilisation de Nike + iPod 41 Étalonnage de Nike + iPod 44 Réglage des unités de distance 44 Saisie de votre poids 44 Verrouillage de votre dispositif pendant une séance 45 Commentaires vocaux 46 Utilisation d’un morceau PowerSong 47 Suspension d’une séance d’entraînement 48 Réception d’appels pendant une séance d’entraînement 48 Changement de musique durant une séance 49 Envoi automatique des données d’entraînement à Nikeplus.com 50 Visionnage de séances d’entraînement sur votre dispositif 51 Création de raccourcis personnalisés vers des séances d’entraînement 52 Achat de séances d’entraînement Nike+ 53 Jumelage d’une télécommande compatible Nike + iPod ou d’un cardiofréquencemètre 55 Entraînement avec un iPod Nano (6e génération) et un cardiofréquencemètre 57 Jumelage avec un autre capteur 59 Mise en veille du capteur Nike + iPod 60 Informations importantes sur la sécurité 62 Informations supplémentaires, service et assistance32 Bienvenue sur Nike + iPod Votre assistant personnel d’entraînement Nike + iPod est à la fois votre partenaire d’entraînement et votre entraîneur. Sélectionnez le type d’entraînement souhaité (séance ouverte, distance, temps ou dépense calorique), choisissez une musique qui vous motive, puis suivez votre progression grâce aux informations vocales ou affichées à l’écran. Téléchargez les données d’entraînement sur nikeplus.com, afin de définir des objectifs et surveiller votre évolution d’une séance à l’autre. Rejoignez la plus grande communauté de coureurs du monde en participant à des défis avec des coureurs du monde entier. Nike + iPod est pris en charge par l’iPhone (3GS ou ultérieur), tous les modèles d’iPod nano 1 et l’iPod touch (à partir de la 2e génération). iPod nano (tous les modèles) iPod touch (à partir de la 2e génération) iPhone 3GS ou ultérieur 1 Pour l’iPod nano de 6e génération, le capteur Nike + iPod est facultatif. Il est nécessaire uniquement pour les entraînements utilisant Polar Wearlink et le transmetteur de fréquence cardiaque pour Nike+.33 Démarrage rapide Les instructions ci-dessous vous permettront d’utiliser Nike + iPod immédiatement. Étape 1 : Activez Nike + iPod sur votre dispositif. m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : reliez le récepteur Nike + iPod à l’iPod nano. Nike + iPod apparaît dans le menu principal. m iPod nano (6e génération) : reliez le récepteur Nike + iPod à l’iPod nano. Touchez Fitness. Remarque : l’iPod nano (6e génération) peut suivre vos entraînements sans utiliser le capteur et le receveur Nike + iPod. Pour en savoir plus, consultez le Manuel d’utilisateur de l’iPod nano livré avec l’appareil. m iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Réglages > Nike + iPod et réglez sur Activé. Une icône Nike + iPod apparaît dans l’écran d’accueil. Remarque : l’iPhone 3GS ou ultérieur et l’iPod touch possèdent un récepteur interne ; aucun récepteur externe ne doit être branché. Étape 2 : Assurez-vous d’avoir installé les logiciels iPod et iTunes les plus récents. 1 Téléchargez et installez le logiciel iTunes le plus récent depuis www.apple.com/fr/itunes. 2 Connectez le dispositif à votre ordinateur, sélectionnez-le dans la barre latérale d’iTunes, puis cliquez sur Résumé.34 3 Si le logiciel iTunes vous informe que votre dispositif doit être mis à jour, cliquez sur Mettre à jour et suivez les instructions à l’écran. Étape 3 : Insérez le capteur Nike + iPod dans votre chaussure compatible Nike+. m Soulevez la semelle de votre chaussure gauche, enlevez la pièce en mousse de la poche située sous la semelle et remplacez-la par le capteur, côté plat en haut. Capteur Vous pouvez laisser le capteur dans la chaussure lorsque vous ne vous entraînez pas. Il est cependant conseillé de remplacer le capteur par la pièce en mousse pour économiser la charge de la batterie si vous comptez porter longtemps vos chaussures sans vous entraîner. La batterie du capteur ne peut pas être remplacée ou rechargée ; sa durée de vie est d’environ 1000 heures d’utilisation active. Cette durée de vie varie en fonction de l’usage et d’autres facteurs.35 Étape 4 : Choisissez un type de séance d’entraînement. Pour choisir Procédez ainsi : Une séance sans objectif de temps iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Standard. iPod nano (6e génération) : sélectionnez Fitness > Course > Standard. iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Standard. Une séance avec objectif de temps iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Durée. iPod nano (6e génération) : sélectionnez Fitness > Course > Durée. iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Durée. Une séance avec objectif de distance iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Distance. iPod nano (6e génération) : sélectionnez Fitness > Course > Distance. iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Distance. Une séance avec objectif de dépense calorique iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton Menu, puis choisissez Nike + iPod > Calories. iPod nano (6e génération) : sélectionnez Réglages > Fitness > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. Sélectionnez Fitness > Course > Calories. iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton principal, puis choisissez Nike + iPod > Calories. Remarque : vous ne devez saisir votre poids que lorsque vous débutez votre toute première séance de dépense de calories.36 Étape 5 : Choisissez la musique pour votre séance. Pour écouter : Procédez ainsi : Un mix de séance Nike+ Choisissez le mix (voir la page 52). Le morceau en cours de lecture Choisissez En lecture. Un mix Genius Choisissez Mix Genius (iPod nano 6e génération). Des morceaux d’une liste de lecture Choisissez Listes de lecture et sélectionnez une liste de lecture. Un podcast Choisissez Podcasts (iPod nano 6e génération). Un livre audio Choisissez Livres audio (iPod nano 6e génération). Des morceaux dans un ordre aléatoire Choisissez Mix de morceaux. Une station de radio Choisissez Radio iPod nano (6e génération). Aucune musique Choisissez Aucune. Étape 6 : Démarrez votre séance. Vous devez ensuite marcher ou courir un petit peu pour activer votre capteur. Une fois que votre dispositif a détecté votre capteur et établi un lien avec ce dernier, vous êtes prêt à commencer la séance. m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton central et commencez à marcher ou à courir. m iPod nano (6e génération) : appuyez sur Commencer l’entraînement et commencez à marcher ou à courir. m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur Lecture et commencez à marcher ou à courir.37 Étape 7 : Suivez votre progression. Nike + iPod affiche automatiquement l’état de votre séance à l’écran, comme dans l’illustration suivante. (L’aspect de l’écran peut varier en fonction votre type de dispositif.) iPod nano (6e génération) L’iPhone 3GS ou ultérieur et l’iPod touch. Nike + iPod vous fournit des commentaires vocaux sur la progression de votre séance (voir « Commentaires vocaux » à la page 45). Vous pouvez également obtenir ces commentaires à tout moment. Pour obtenir manuellement des informations vocales : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton central à tout moment durant votre entraînement. m iPod nano (6e génération) : appuyez sur le bouton marche/veille à tout moment durant votre entraînement.38 m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur le bouton principal à tout moment durant votre entraînement. Remarque : l’iPhone et l’iPod touch doivent être verrouillés pour obtenir manuellement des commentaires vocaux (voir « Commentaires vocaux » à la page 45). Étape 8 : Terminez votre séance. Vous pouvez arrêter votre séance d’entraînement à tout moment. Si vous continuez à vous entraîner après avoir atteint votre objectif de temps, de distance ou de calories, vos progrès continuent à être suivis. Pour arrêter votre séance d’entraînement : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’) pour mettre votre entraînement en pause. Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton Menu, puis choisissez Arrêter la séance. m iPod nano (6e génération) : touchez l’écran pour afficher le bouton Pause, puis appuyez sur Pause. Appuyez sur Arrêter la séance. Si l’écran est désactivé, appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille. Remarque : pour rapidement interrompre ou reprendre votre séance sur un iPod nano (6e génération), double-cliquez sur le bouton de marche/veille. m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur Arrêter la séance. Si l’iPhone ou l’iPod touch est verrouillé, appuyez sur le bouton principal, puis sur Pause. Faites ensuite glisser le curseur, puis sélectionnez Arrêter la séance.39 Étape 9 : Suivez le détail de votre progression sur nikeplus.com. Sur nikeplus.com, vous pouvez suivre le détail de votre progression avec le temps, afficher les données relatives à toutes vos séances passées, définir des objectifs et les surveiller et comparer vos résultats avec d’autres coureurs. Vous pouvez même vous mesurer à d’autres utilisateurs Nike + iPod en participant à des défis d’entraînement en ligne. Si vous possédez un iPhone ou un iPod touch, vous pouvez transmettre sans fil les données de vos séances au site web de Nike. Si vous possédez un iPod nano, vous pouvez transmettre les données de vos séances de votre ordinateur à nikeplus.com. Nous vous conseillons de créer un compte nikeplus.com avant de transférer vos données d’entraînement. Pour créer un compte gratuit, suivez les instructions disponibles sur le site web nikeplus.com. Pour utiliser votre iPhone ou votre iPod touch afin d’envoyer vos données d’entraînement à nikeplus.com via une connexion sans fil : 1 Assurez-vous que votre appareil est connecté à Internet, puis choisissez Nike + iPod. Si l’une de vos séances n’a pas encore été synchronisée avec votre compte nikeplus.com, un petit point rouge apparaît sur le bouton Historique. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton Historique pour consulter vos séances. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton Envoyer à Nike+ pour envoyer vos données d’entraînement à nikeplus.com. Vous pouvez effectuer cette opération ultérieurement, si vous ne souhaitez pas l’exécuter maintenant. 4 Saisissez votre adresse électronique et le mot de passe de votre compte nikeplus.com, puis appuyez sur Se connecter à Nike +. Une fois que vous êtes connecté, vos données sont envoyées à votre compte nikeplus.com.40 Si vous ne possédez pas de compte nikeplus.com, appuyez sur S’inscrire à Nike+ et suivez les instructions de création de compte. Le site web nikeplus.com s’ouvre sur une représentation graphique reprenant les données de votre entraînement le plus récent. 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour accéder à vos séances. Pour envoyer vos données d’entraînement recueillies sur un iPod nano à nikeplus. com depuis votre ordinateur : 1 Assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est connecté à Internet, puis connectez votre iPod nano à votre ordinateur. 2 Cliquez sur Envoyer dans la zone de dialogue qui vous demande si vous souhaitez envoyer vos données d’entraînement à nikeplus.com. Vous pouvez effectuer cette opération ultérieurement, si vous ne souhaitez pas l’exécuter maintenant. 3 Cliquez sur Aller dans la zone de dialogue qui vous demande si vous souhaitez accéder à nikeplus.com. Le site web nikeplus.com s’ouvre sur une représentation graphique montrant les données de votre entraînement le plus récent. 4 Cliquez sur Mes courses, puis sur S’inscrire et suivez les instructions à l’écran.41 Utilisation de Nike + iPod Suivez ces instructions pour profiter au mieux de Nike + iPod. Étalonnage de Nike + iPod Nike + iPod est suffisamment précis pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Vous pouvez améliorer le niveau de précision en étalonnant Nike + iPod en fonction de votre style naturel de course ou de marche. Avec l’iPod nano, vous pouvez effectuer une séance d’étalonnage sur une distance connue ou utiliser votre dernière séance et saisir la distance parcourue. Avec l’iPhone ou l’iPod touch, vous pouvez procéder à l’étalonnage à l’aide de votre dernière séance complète pour laquelle vous connaissez la distance parcourue. Pour étalonner Nike + iPod pour la course et la marche à l’aide d’un iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : 1 Choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Capteur > Étalonner. 2 Sélectionnez Course ou Marche, puis saisissez une distance. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez une distance d’au moins 1,6 km. La distance d’étalonnage la plus courte que vous pouvez saisir est de 400 mètres. 3 Appuyez sur le bouton central. 4 Courez ou marchez ensuite sur la distance définie à un rythme constant et naturel. 5 Appuyez ensuite sur le bouton Menu, puis choisissez Étalonnage terminé. Un message vous indique si l’étalonnage s’est effectué correctement. Si vous souhaitez effectuer un étalonnage pour la course et pour la marche, répétez les étapes 1–5. Remarque : même après l’étalonnage, la précision de mesure des distances peut varier selon l’allure, la surface de course, la pente et la température.42 Vous pouvez également calibrer l’iPod nano à l’aide de la séance d’entraînement que vous venez de terminer. Cette opération est utile si vous avez parcouru une distance connue qui ne correspond pas à la distance affichée sur votre dispositif. Pour étalonner un iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) au moyen de votre dernière séance complète : m Choisissez Terminer, maintenez le bouton central enfoncé et choisissez Étalonner. Indiquez la distance parcourue, puis appuyez sur le bouton central. Le dispositif détecte le type de séance d’entraînement (marche ou course) et utilise correctement le nouvel étalonnage plutôt que l’ancien. Pour étalonner Nike + iPod pour la course et la marche à l’aide d’un iPod nano (6e génération) : 1 Choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Capteur > Étalonner. 2 Choisissez Étalonnage de la marche ou Étalonnage de la course, sélectionnez une distance, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour de meilleurs résultats, utilisez une distance d’au moins 1,6 km. La distance d’étalonnage la plus courte que vous pouvez saisir est de 400 mètres. 3 Choisissez la musique qui accompagnera votre séance d’étalonnage. 4 Courez ou marchez ensuite sur la distance définie à un rythme constant et naturel. 5 Appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille si l’écran est éteint, puis touchez l’écran pour faire apparaître le bouton Pause et appuyez sur Arrêter. Un message vous indique si l’étalonnage s’est effectué correctement. Si vous souhaitez effectuer un étalonnage pour la course et pour la marche, répétez les étapes 1–5.43 Remarque : même après l’étalonnage, la précision de mesure des distances peut varier selon l’allure, la surface de course, la pente et la température. Vous pouvez également calibrer Nike + iPod au moyen d’un iPhone ou d’un iPod touch en utilisant la séance d’entraînement que vous venez de terminer. Vous pouvez seulement utiliser des séances d’une distance minimum de 400 mètres. Pour étalonner un iPhone ou un iPod touch au moyen de votre dernière séance complète : m Sélectionnez Arrêter la séance, puis Étalonner. Indiquez la distance parcourue, puis appuyez sur OK. L’appareil se met à jour avec le nouvel étalonnage qui remplace l’ancien pour le rythme de course ou de marche. Pour rétablir le réglage par défaut de l’étalonnage Nike + iPod : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Capteur > Réinitialiser la marche (ou Réinitialiser la course). m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Capteur > Étalonner >Réinitialiser la marche (ou Réinitialiser la course). m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez Réinitialiser l’étalonnage. 44 Réglage des unités de distance Vous pouvez configurer Nike + iPod pour que vos séances d’entraînement soient mesurées en milles ou en kilomètres. Pour régler les unités de distance : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages et sélectionnez Kilomètres ou Milles m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Distances, puis sélectionnez Kilomètres ou Miles. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Distances, puis sélectionnez Kilomètres ou Miles. Saisie de votre poids Pour saisir votre poids : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. m iPod nano (6e génération) : sélectionnez Réglages > Fitness > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. m iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Poids, puis entrez votre poids. Pour une plus grande précision de calcul des calories dépensées, actualisez votre poids au fur et à mesure de ses variations. Verrouillage de votre dispositif pendant une séance Vous pouvez verrouiller votre iPhone ou votre iPod touch, afin que ses commandes ne puissent être accidentellement activées durant une séance d’entraînement. Pour verrouiller un iPhone ou un iPod touch : m Appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille.45 Pour déverrouiller l’iPod, appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille ou sur le bouton principal et faites glisser le curseur. Commentaires vocaux Pendant vos séances d’entraînement, Nike + iPod vous donne périodiquement des informations vocales sur vos progrès. Vous pouvez choisir une voix de femme ou d’homme, ou désactiver les informations vocales. Pour régler le type de voix ou désactiver les informations vocales : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages, puis réglez Commentaires vocaux sur Homme, Femme ou Désactivés. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Commentaires vocaux, puis sélectionnez Homme, Femme ou Désactivé. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Commentaires vocaux, puis sélectionnez Homme, Femme ou Désactivé. Vous pouvez toujours obtenir des informations vocales manuellement, même lorsque cette option est désactivée. Pour obtenir manuellement des informations vocales : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton central à tout moment durant votre entraînement. m iPod nano (6e génération) : appuyez sur le bouton marche/veille à tout moment durant votre entraînement. m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur le bouton principal lorsque l’appareil est verrouillé.46 Sur l’iPod nano, les commentaires vocaux sont disponibles dans certaines langues autres que l’anglais. Si vous avez réglé votre iPod nano sur une de ces langues et que vous le branchez sur l’ordinateur (connecté à Internet), iTunes vous invite à télécharger les commentaires vocaux correspondant à cette langue.  L’iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) ne peut disposer que d’une version non anglaise des commentaires vocaux à la fois.  L’iPhone, l’iPod touch et l’iPod nano (6e génération) prennent automatiquement en charge les commentaires vocaux dans toutes les langues. Utilisation d’un morceau PowerSong Choisissez un morceau qui vous motive et faites-en votre PowerSong. Vous pouvez sélectionner très rapidement votre PowerSong, à tout moment de votre séance. Pour choisir un morceau PowerSong : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > PowerSong, puis sélectionnez un morceau. L’iPod nano (5e génération) peut également convertir une liste de lecture en une PowerSong. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > PowerSong, puis sélectionnez un morceau. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > PowerSong, puis sélectionnez un morceau.47 Pour écouter votre morceau PowerSong : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : maintenez le bouton central appuyé durant une séance. Le PowerSong démarre après une courte pause. m iPod nano (6e génération) : appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille si l’écran est éteint, puis touchez l’écran pour faire apparaître le bouton PowerSong et appuyez sur celuici. Si l’écran est activé, vous pouvez aussi maintenir deux doigts appuyés dessus pour lancer le PowerSong. m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur PowerSong sur l’écran de séance. Si votre iPhone ou iPod touch est verrouillé, appuyez sur le bouton central, faites glisser le curseur pour déverrouiller l’appareil, puis appuyez sur PowerSong. Suspension d’une séance d’entraînement Vous pouvez suspendre votre séance d’entraînement à tout moment, ce qui suspend également la lecture de musique et le recueil des données, et la reprendre plus tard sans en perdre les données. Pour suspendre ou reprendre une séance d’entraînement : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton Lecture/Pause (’). m iPod nano (6e génération) : touchez l’écran pour afficher le bouton Pause. Appuyez sur Pause. Touchez Reprendre pour reprendre votre séance. Si l’écran de l’iPod nano (6e génération)est désactivé, appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille pour le réactiver. m iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur Pause. Si l’iPhone ou l’iPod touch est verrouillé, appuyez une seule fois sur le bouton principal. Tapotez sur Lecture pour reprendre votre séance.48 Réception d’appels pendant une séance d’entraînement Vous pouvez utiliser votre iPhone pour répondre à des appels pendant votre séance d’entraînement. Lorsque vous recevez un appel, votre séance est immédiatement suspendue dès vous répondez. Pour répondre à un appel : m Sélectionnez Répondre ou appuyez sur le bouton micro si vous portez le casque. Si l’iPhone est verrouillé, faites glisser le curseur pour le déverrouiller. Pour couper le son d’un appel : m Appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille ou sur le bouton du volume. Vous pouvez toujours répondre à l’appel après avoir coupé le son, jusqu’à ce qu’il soit dirigé sur la messagerie vocale. Pour refuser un appel : m Sélectionnez Refuser ou maintenez le bouton micro du casque enfoncé pendant environ deux secondes. Deux longs signaux sonores confirment que l’appel a été refusé. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur le bouton de marche/veille deux fois rapidement pour refuser un appel. Cela coupe le son de la sonnerie mais la musique ne reprend pas tant que l’appel n’a pas été transféré sur la messagerie vocale ; la séance continue en arrière-plan. Pour suspendre votre séance d’entraînement à l’issue d’un appel : m Sélectionnez Lecture. Changement de musique durant une séance Vous pouvez changer de musique en cours de séance sans pour autant perdre de vos données. Votre séance est suspendue pendant le changement de musique.49 Pour changer de musique durant une séance : 1 iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : appuyez sur le bouton Menu, puis choisissez Musique. Votre séance est suspendue. iPod nano (6e génération) : touchez l’écran pour afficher le bouton Pause, appuyez sur Pause, puis sur Musique. Si l’écran de l’iPod nano (6e génération)est désactivé, appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille pour le réactiver. iPhone et iPod touch : appuyez sur Pause, puis sur Musique. Si l’appareil est verrouillé, appuyez d’abord sur le bouton central, puis faites glisser le curseur pour le déverrouiller. 2 iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez une nouvelle musique. Votre séance reprend automatiquement. iPhone, iPod touch et iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez une nouvelle musique. Envoi automatique des données d’entraînement à Nikeplus.com Vous pouvez configurer iTunes pour transmettre vos données d’entraînement à nikeplus.com à travers Internet, à chaque fois que vous branchez votre iPod nano sur votre ordinateur. Pour envoyer automatiquement des données d’entraînement à nikeplus.com : 1 Assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est connecté à Internet, puis connectez votre iPod nano à votre ordinateur. 2 Ouvrez iTunes sur votre ordinateur, cliquez sur l’onglet Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez « Envoyer automatiquement les données de séance vers nikeplus.com ». 3 Cliquez sur « Visiter nikeplus.com » en dessous de la case ou, si vous avez déjà configuré votre séance pour qu’elle soit envoyée automatiquement, cliquez sur Visiter dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît.50 Le site web nikeplus.com s’ouvre sur une représentation graphique montrant les données de votre entraînement le plus récent. 4 Cliquez sur Mes courses, puis connectez-vous ou inscrivez-vous si vous ne l’avez pas déjà fait. Consultez le site nikeplus.com pour vous informer de la politique de confidentialité et des conditions générales de Nike. Visionnage de séances d’entraînement sur votre dispositif Votre iPod nano, votre iPhone ou votre iPod touch enregistre la date, l’heure, la durée, la distance, le rythme et les calories dépensées des mille dernières séances d’entraînement. Pour consulter les séances d’entraînement récentes sur votre dispositif : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Historique. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Fitness > Historique, au bas de l’écran. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez Historique, dans le bas de l’écran; L·iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieur) fournit des totaux quotidiens de vos séances : séances Nike + iPod, avec podomètre ou séance cardio avec utilisation d’équipement compatible avec Nike + iPod. Pour consulter les séances d’entraînement sur un iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieur) : 1 Choisissez Total quotidien dans le menu Historique. 2 Choisissez une date et une activité. 3 Faites pivoter l’iPod nano (5e génération) en position paysage pour afficher un graphique de l’activité.51 Pour supprimer une seule séance d’entraînement : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Historique. choisissez une session d’entraînement, maintenez le bouton central enfoncé, puis choisissez Supprimer. Il est impossible de supprimer des séances individuelles sur un iPod nano (6e génération). m iPhone et iPod touch : sélectionnez Nike + iPod > Historique. sélectionnez Modifier, choisissez une session d’entraînement, puis sélectionnez Supprimer. Sur l’iPhone, l’iPod touch et l’iPod nano (6e génération), vous pouvez supprimer toutes les séances d’entraînement dans l’historique en appuyant sur Effacer dans le haut de l’écran Historique. Création de raccourcis personnalisés vers des séances d’entraînement Les raccourcis personnalisés vers des séances d’entraînement vous permettent de choisir et de recommencer une séance. L’iPod nano(4e génération ou ultérieure) enregistre automatiquement vos séances terminées sous forme de raccourcis. L’iPhone et l’iPod touch vous permettent aussi de créer des raccourcis personnalisés vers des séances. Pour créer un raccourci personnalisé vers une séance sur un iPhone ou un iPod touch : 1 Choisissez Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez Mes séances dans le bas de l’écran. 2 Sélectionnez Plus (+), puis choisissez le type de séances et l’objectif de la séance. 3 Choisissez la musique, saisissez le nom de la séance, puis sélectionnez Enregistrer. Remarque : il n’est possible de créer des raccourcis personnalisés vers des séances d’entraînement que sur l’iPhone et l’iPod touch (2e génération ou ultérieure).52 Pour supprimer un raccourci personnalisé vers une séance sur un iPhone ou un iPod touch : m Choisissez Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez Mes séances. Sélectionnez Modifier, choisissez un raccourci, puis sélectionnez Supprimer. Pour choisir un raccourci de séance personnalisé : m iPod nano (4e et 5e génération) : choisissez Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez un raccourci. Les raccourcis sont nommés selon le type de séance et de musique. Il n’est pas possible de les supprimer. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Fitness > Course, puis sélectionnez Mes séances. Choisissez un raccourci. Les raccourcis sont nommés selon le type de séance et de musique. Il n’est pas possible de les supprimer. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Nike + iPod, puis sélectionnez Mes séances. Les raccourcis sont classés en fonction du nom que vous avez choisi au moment de leur création. Le raccourci de séance personnalisé le plus récent figure au début de la liste. Achat de séances d’entraînement Nike+ Vous pouvez acheter et télécharger des séances d’entraînement Nike+ contenant de la musique en continu et des conseils d’entraînement professionnels. Lorsque vous achetez une séance d’entraînement Nike+, vous obtenez une seule piste d’entraînement avec de la musique et des commentaires vocaux, ainsi que tous les morceaux de musique qui composent cette piste. Choisissez des morceaux selon votre niveau et votre style d’entraînement.53 Pour acheter une séance d’entraînement Nike+ : 1 Ouvrez iTunes, cliquez sur iTunes Store dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre, puis saisissez « Nike Sport Music » dans le champ de recherche iTunes. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Acheter en regard de la séance d’entraînement Nike+ de votre choix. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer l’achat. Le téléchargement commence immédiatement. 4 Connectez le dispositif à votre ordinateur et chargez la séance sur le dispositif. Remarque : l’iTunes Store n’est disponible que pour les personnes de 13 ans et plus, aux États-Unis et dans beaucoup d’autres pays. Pour obtenir la liste de ces pays, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/itunes/download. L’utilisation du site est soumise à certaines conditions. Vous devez disposer d’un accès à Internet (éventuellement payant) pour utiliser l’iTunes Store. Jumelage d’une télécommande compatible Nike + iPod ou d’un cardiofréquencemètre Les appareils compatibles Nike + iPod sont vendus séparément du kit sportif Nike + iPod et du capteur Nike + iPod. Vous avez la possibilité d’utiliser une télécommande compatible pour contrôler sans fil le système Nike + iPod au cours de votre séance d’entraînement. L’iPod nano (5e génération ou ultérieure) prend également en charge les moniteurs cardiaques compatibles Nike + iPod. Remarque : le récepteur iPod + Nike doit être connecté à votre iPod nano (6e génération) pour utiliser un cardiofréquencemètre ou une télécommande.54 Avant d’utiliser l’un de ces appareils pour la première fois, vous devez le jumeler avec votre récepteur iPod nano, votre iPhone ou votre iPod touch. Pour jumeler une télécommande compatible Nike + iPod (vendue séparément) : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : connectez votre récepteur Nike + iPod à l’iPod nano, choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Télécommande > Jumeler, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Télécommande. Activez l’option Télécommande et appuyez sur Jumeler. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Télécommande, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour jumeler un cardiofréquencemètre compatible Nike+ iPod (vendu séparément) : m iPod nano (5e génération) : connectez votre récepteur Nike + iPod à l’iPod nano, choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Cardiofréquencemètre > Jumeler, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages >Fitness >Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Cardiofréquencemètre > Jumeler, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Pour supprimer le jumelage d’un appareil : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Télécommande (ou Cardiofréquencemètre) > Supprimer, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Télécommande (ou Cardiofréquencemètre), puis appuyez sur Supprimer. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Télécommande, puis appuyez sur Supprimer.55 Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les fonctions d’une télécommande compatible Nike + iPod sans supprimer le jumelage avec l’appareil. Pour activer ou désactiver la fonction télécommande : m iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages > Télécommande, puis activez ou désactivez-la. m iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Télécommande, puis activez ou désactivez-la. m iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Télécommande, puis jumelez ou supprimez le jumelage de la télécommande. Entraînement avec un iPod Nano (6e génération) et un cardiofréquencemètre Si vous disposez d’un iPod nano (6e génération) et d’un cardiofréquencemètre compatible avec Nike + iPod (vendu séparément), l’iPod nano peut enregistrer et afficher votre fréquence cardiaque pendant que vous vous entraînez. Vous pouvez également spécifier une plage ou « zone » de fréquences cardiaques maximales et minimales à respecter durant l’entraînement et contrôler votre capacité à maintenir votre fréquence cardiaque au sein de cette zone pendant que vous vous entraînez. Pendant que vous vous entraînez, l’iPod nano affiche votre fréquence cardiaque actuelle et une flèche pointant vers le haut ou vers le bas apparaît lorsque vous devez augmenter ou diminuer votre activité. L’usage d’un cardiofréquencemètre est possible durant n’importe quelle séance d’entraînement standard.56 Le contrôle de votre fréquence cardiaque peut s’appliquer à d’autres activités que la course ou la marche. Vous pouvez, par exemple, utiliser un iPod nano et un cardiofréquencemètre lorsque vous participez à des activités sportives comme le basket-ball, l’aérobic, l’entraînement en circuit, le golf, la randonnée, le football et bien plus encore. Une fois votre entraînement terminé, vos données de fréquence cardiaque peuvent être transférées sur votre compte nikeplus.com où vous pourrez les consulter. Lorsque vous configurez une séance d’entraînement, vous pouvez déterminer une zone de fréquences cardiaques maximales et minimales à maintenir durant l’activité que vous choisissez. Pour cela, il faut d’abord activer la fonction de séance avec zone. Pour activer ou désactiver les séances avec zone : m Appuyez sur Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit, puis sur le bouton de marche/arrêt dans Séance avec zone. Si vous activez les séances avec zone et que vous sélectionnez un entraînement, des options de définition d’une zone de fréquences cardiaques vous sont proposées. Pendant que vous vous entraînez, les données de fréquence cardiaque sont enregistrées et affichées quel que soit le type d’entraînement choisi. L’iPod nano (6e génération) propose également un entraînement avec contrôle de la fréquence cardiaque. Pour effectuer ce type d’entraînement, vous devez d’abord spécifier la zone de fréquences cardiaques à maintenir, puis choisir un type d’activité. Toutes vos données de fréquence cardiaque sont automatiquement enregistrées. Lorsque vous effectuez un entraînement avec contrôle de la fréquence cardiaque, il n’est pas nécessaire d’équiper votre chaussure d’un capteur de détection de mouvement.57 Pour démarrer un entraînement avec contrôle de la fréquence cardiaque : 1 Appuyez sur Fitness > Course > Fréquence cardiaque. 2 Déterminez la zone de fréquences cardiaques souhaitée. 3 Choisissez une activité et appuyez sur OK. 4 Choisissez la musique d’entraînement souhaitée. 5 Appuyez sur Commencer l’entraînement. 6 Une fois l’entraînement terminé, appuyez sur le bouton de marche/veille pour réactiver l’écran, appuyez sur l’écran pour faire apparaître le bouton Pause et appuyez sur celui-ci, puis sur Terminer pour terminer votre séance d’entraînement. Lorsque vous avez terminé une séance d’entraînement avec contrôle de la fréquence cardiaque, vous pouvez transférer les données enregistrées sur votre compte nikeplus. com comme vous le faites pour tous les autres types d’entraînement. Jumelage avec un autre capteur Une fois que votre dispositif est jumelé avec un capteur particulier, il ne peut fonctionner qu’avec ce dernier. Si vous souhaitez utiliser un autre capteur, vous devez régler le dispositif pour le jumeler avec le nouveau capteur. Cela peut être utile si, par exemple, plusieurs membres de votre famille possèdent un capteur et des chaussures compatibles Nike+. Pour jumeler le récepteur avec un autre capteur : 1 iPod nano : connectez le récepteur à l’iPod. 2 Enfilez les chaussures dotées du nouveau capteur et assurez-vous qu’il n’y a aucun autre capteur Nike + iPod à proximité. Marchez un petit peu pour activer le capteur afin que votre récepteur puisque le détecter.58 3 Jumeler le capteur à votre appareil :  iPod nano (5e génération ou antérieure) : choisissez Nike + iPod > Réglages >Capteur > Jumeler, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Un message indique que l’iPod est maintenant jumelé avec le nouveau capteur.  iPod nano (6e génération) : choisissez Réglages > Fitness > Nike + iPod Sport Kit > Capteur, appuyez sur Jumeler, puis touchez l’écran durant votre marche ou votre course pour rejumeler l’appareil à l’autre capteur.  iPhone et iPod touch : choisissez Réglages > Nike + iPod > Capteur, appuyez sur Autre, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Remarque : si vous jumelez le récepteur avec un capteur ayant déjà été jumelé, Nike + iPod détecte vos réglages d’étalonnage. Il est inutile de l’étalonner à nouveau. Si vous connectez le récepteur d’un iPod à un autre iPod et que vous l’utilisez avec le même capteur, il est inutile de refaire le jumelage ou l’étalonnage. Le récepteur stocke vos réglages, votre historique de séances et vos raccourcis vers vos séances. Il est inutile de rétablir le jumelage ou de l’étalonner à nouveau.59 Mise en veille du capteur Nike + iPod Le capteur est éveillé et activé par défaut. Si vous souhaitez stocker le capteur pendant une période prolongée ou l’empêcher de transmettre, mettez-le en veille. Important : mettez le capteur en veille avant de l’emporter à bord d’un avion, conformément à la réglementation en vigueur. Pour mettre en veille le capteur : m Utilisez un stylo ou un trombone pour maintenir enfoncé le bouton de marche/veille pendant trois secondes. Bouton Marche/Veille Pour réactiver le capteur : m Utilisez un stylo ou un trombone pour appuyer sur le bouton de marche/veille.60 Informations importantes sur la sécurité ATTENTION : le non-respect de ces instructions de sécurité peut provoquer des dommages physiques ou corporels. Exercices Avant de commencer un programme d’exercices, demandez à votre médecin de vous faire passer un examen physique complet. Effectuez des exercices d’échauffement ou d’étirement musculaire avant de commencer votre séance d’entraînement. Soyez prudent et attentif pendant vos exercices physiques. Ralentissez, le cas échéant, avant de régler votre dispositif pendant la course. Arrêtez immédiatement de courir en cas de douleur, de faiblesse, d’étourdissement, d’épuisement ou d’essoufflement. En pratiquant un exercice physique, vous assumez les risques inhérents à ce type d’activités, y compris les blessures qui pourraient en résulter. N’utilisez pas le récepteur ou l’iPhone ou l’iPod dans ou près de l’eau ou dans tout autre lieu humide. Risque d’étouffement Le récepteur et le capteur présentent des risques potentiels d’étouffement. Gardez-les hors de portée des enfants de moins de trois ans.61 Prévention des dommages auditifs L’utilisation des écouteurs à un volume trop élevé peut entraîner une perte d’audition permanente. Réglez le volume sur un niveau raisonnable. Il est possible de s’habituer petit à petit à un volume sonore élevé qui, s’il peut sembler normal, risque néanmoins d’entraîner des troubles auditifs. Si vos oreilles bourdonnent ou si les sons vous semblent étouffés, arrêtez l’écoute et faites vérifier votre audition par un spécialiste. Plus le volume est élevé, plus vous risquez d’abîmer rapidement votre audition. Les spécialistes de l’audition recommandent de prendre les précautions suivantes :  Limitez la durée d’utilisation d’écouteurs à volume sonore élevé.  Évitez d’augmenter le volume pour vous isoler du bruit ambiant.  Diminuez le volume si vous n’entendez plus les personnes qui parlent autour de vous. Démontage du capteur N’essayez jamais d’ouvrir le capteur, de le démonter ni de retirer la batterie. L’appareil ne contient pas de pièces pouvant être réparées par l’utilisateur.62 Informations supplémentaires, service et assistance Pour en savoir plus sur : Procédez ainsi : Les réponses aux questions fréquemment posées sur Nike + iPod Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/nikeplus. Le service et l’assistance pour le capteur et le récepteur Nike + iPod Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/nikeplus. Le service et l’assistance pour les chaussures compatibles Nike+ ou le site web nikeplus.com Rendez-vous sur www.nikeplus.com. L’utilisation d’iTunes Ouvrez iTunes et choisissez Aide > Aide iTunes. L’utilisation de l’iPod nano ou de l’iPod touch Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/ipod. L’utilisation d’iTunes Rendez-vous sur www.apple.com/fr/support/iphone.63 Inhalt 64 Ihr persönlicher Fitnesstrainer 65 Einführung 73 Verwenden von Nike + iPod 73 Kalibrieren von Nike + iPod 76 Festlegen der Maßeinheit für die Strecke 76 Eingeben des Gewichts 76 Sperren Ihres Geräts beim Trainieren 77 Hören von Audio-Feedback 78 Verwenden von PowerSongs 79 Unterbrechen des Trainings 80 Empfangen von Anrufen beim Trainieren 80 Wechseln der Musik beim Trainieren 81 Automatisches Senden von Trainingsdaten an Nikeplus.com 82 Anzeigen von Trainingsdaten auf Ihrem Gerät 83 Erstellen und Auswählen eigener Trainingskurzbefehle 84 Kaufen von Nike+ Trainingsmusik 85 Verbinden einer Nike + iPod-kompatiblen Fernbedienung oder eines Herzfrequenzmonitors 87 Trainieren mit einem iPod nano (6. Generation) und einem Herzfrequenzmonitor 89 Verbinden mit einem anderen Sensor 91 Aktivieren des Ruhezustands für den Nike + iPod-Sensor 92 Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen 94 Weitere Informationen, Service und Support64 Willkommen bei Nike + iPod Ihr persönlicher Fitnesstrainer Nike + iPod ist Trainingspartner und Trainer in einem. Wählen Sie die gewünschte Trainingsart aus – normales Training ohne besonderes Ziel, Training mit Streckenvorgabe, Training mit Zeitvorgabe oder Training mit Kalorienverbrauchsvorgabe – wählen Sie eine Musik zur Motivationsunterstützung aus und verfolgen Sie dann Ihren Trainingsfortschritt mithilfe des audio-visuellen Feedbacks. Senden Sie Ihre Trainingsdaten an nikeplus.com, hier können Sie Ihr persönliches Trainingsziel angeben und Ihren Leistungsfortschritt von Training zu Training überwachen. Sie können auch Mitglied in der weltweit größten Online-Joggergemeinschaft werden und an Wettkämpfen mit anderen Joggern auf dem ganzen Globus teilnehmen. Nike + iPod wird vom iPhone 3GS, iPhone 4, allen iPod nano-Modellen 1 und dem iPod touch (2. Generation oder neuer) unterstützt. iPod nano (alle Modelle) iPod touch (2. Generation oder neuer) iPhone 3GS oder neuer 1 Für den iPod nano (6. Generation) ist der Nike + iPod-Sensor optional und nur für Trainings mit dem Polar Wearlink® + Heart Rate Transmitter for Nike+ erforderlich.65 Einführung Befolgen Sie die nachstehenden Anleitungen, um Nike + iPod sofort zu verwenden. Schritt 1: Aktivieren Sie Nike + iPod auf Ihrem Gerät. m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Schließen Sie den Nike + iPod-Empfänger an den iPod nano an. Nike + iPod wird im Hauptmenü angezeigt. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Schließen Sie den Nike + iPod-Empfänger an den iPod nano an. Tippen Sie auf „Fitness“. Hinweis: Ihr iPod nano (6. Generation) kann Ihre Trainingsdaten optional auch ohne den Nike + iPod-Empfänger und -Sensor aufzeichnen. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im iPod nano-Benutzerhandbuch, das Sie mit dem Gerät erhalten haben. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ und dann „Ein“ aus. Auf dem Home-Bildschirm wird ein Nike + iPod-Symbol angezeigt. Hinweis: Ihr iPhone 3GS (oder neuer) und iPod touch besitzen einen internen Empfänger, daher ist kein externer Empfänger erforderlich. 66 Schritt 2: Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Sie die neuste iPod- und iTunes-Software verwenden. 1 Laden und installieren Sie die neuste iTunes-Software auf Ihrem Computer von der Website www.apple.com/de/itunes. 2 Verbinden Sie Ihr Gerät mit Ihrem Computer, wählen Sie es in der iTunes-Seitenleiste aus und klicken Sie auf „Übersicht“. 3 Wird in iTunes die Meldung angezeigt, dass Ihr Gerät aktualisiert werden muss, klicken Sie auf „Aktualisieren“ und befolgen Sie die Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm. Schritt 3: Legen Sie den Nike + iPod-Sensor in Ihren Nike+ kompatiblen Schuh. m Heben Sie hierfür die Innensohle Ihres linken Schuhs an, entfernen Sie die Schaumstofffüllung aus der Aussparung und legen Sie dort den Sensor mit der flachen Seite nach oben hinein. Sensor67 Sie können den Sensor in Ihrem Schuh lassen, auch wenn Sie nicht trainieren. Wenn Sie jedoch die Schuhe längere Zeit ohne Training tragen, tauschen Sie den Sensor wieder durch die Schaumstofffüllung aus, um die Batterielebensdauer zu verlängern. Die Batterie des Sensors, die eine Lebensdauer von bis zu 1000 aktiven Stunden hat, kann nicht ausgetauscht oder wieder aufgeladen werden. Die Batterielebensdauer variiert abhängig von der Verwendung und anderen Faktoren. Schritt 4: Wählen Sie die gewünschte Trainingsart bzw. Option. Für folgende Funktion Aktion Open-End-Training iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Normal“. iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Normal“. iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Normal“. Training mit Zeitvorgabe iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Zeit“. iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Laufen“ > „Zeit“. iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Zeit“. Training mit Streckenvorgabe iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Strecke“. iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Laufen“ > „Strecke“. iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Strecke“.68 Training mit Vorgabe für Kalorienverbrauch iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. Drücken Sie dann die Taste „Menu“ und wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Kalorien“. iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Laufen“ > „Kalorien“. iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. Drücken Sie dann die Home-Taste und wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Kalorien“. Hinweis:^>Ihr Gewicht müssen Sie nur eingeben, wenn Sie das erste Mal ein Training mit Kalorienverbrauchsvorgabe beginnen. Schritt 5: Wählen Sie Ihre Trainingsmusik. Für Folgendes Wählen Sie Nike+ Trainingsmusik die Trainingsmusik (vgl. Seite 84). Musiktitel, der gerade spielt die Option „Sie hören“. Genius-Mix die Option „Genius-Mixe“ (iPod nano 6. Generation). Titel von einer Wiedergabeliste die Option „Wiedergabelisten“ und dann die gewünschte Liste. Podcast die Option „Podcast“ (iPod nano 6. Generation). Hörbuch die Option „Hörbücher“ (iPod nano 6. Generation). Titel in beliebiger Reihenfolge die Option „Zufällige Titel“. Radiosender die Option „Radio“. iPod nano (6. Generation): Keine Musik die Option „Nichts“.69 Schritt 6: Beginnen Sie Ihr Training. Gehen oder laufen Sie einige Schritte, um den Sensor zu aktivieren. Wenn das Gerät den Sensor erkennt und die Verbindung herstellt, können Sie mit Ihrem Training beginnen. m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie die Mitteltaste und gehen oder laufen Sie. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Tippen Sie auf „Training starten“ und gehen oder laufen Sie. m iPhone und iPod touch: Tippen Sie auf „Start“ und gehen oder laufen Sie. Schritt 7: Beobachten Sie Ihren Trainingsfortschritt. Nike + iPod zeigt Ihnen automatisch den Trainingsstatus auf dem Bildschirm an, der ungefähr wie in der folgenden Abbildung aussieht. (Abhängig von Ihrem Gerätetyp kann der Bildschirm anders aussehen.) iPod nano (6. Generation) iPhone3GS oder neuer und iPod touch70 Während des Trainings erhalten Sie mit Nike + iPod Audio-Feedback zu Ihrem Trainingsfortschritt (vgl. „Hören von Audio-Feedback“ auf Seite 77). Sie können das Feedback jederzeit abrufen. Das Audio-Feedback manuell abrufen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie beim Training zu jeder beliebigen Zeit die Mitteltaste. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Drücken Sie beim Training zu jeder beliebigen Zeit die Standby-Taste. m iPhone und iPod touch: Drücken Sie beim Training zu jeder beliebigen Zeit die Home-Taste. Hinweis: iPhone und iPod touch müssen gesperrt sein, damit Sie das Audio-Feedback manuell abrufen können (vgl. „Hören von Audio-Feedback“ auf Seite 77). Schritt 8: Beenden Sie Ihr Training. Sie können Ihr Training jederzeit beenden. Wenn Sie Ihr Training fortsetzen, nachdem Sie Ihre Zeit-, Strecken- oder Kalorienvorgabe erreicht haben, wird Ihr Trainingsfortschritt weiterhin aufgezeichnet. Training beenden m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie die Taste „Start/Pause“ (’), um Ihr Training zu unterbrechen. Drücken Sie die Taste „Menu“ und wählen Sie „Training Aus“. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „Pause“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf „Pause“. Tippen Sie auf „Training Aus“. Ist der Bildschirm aus, drücken Sie die Standby-Taste. Hinweis: Drücken Sie auf einem iPod nano (6. Generation) zweimal die Standby-Taste, um Ihr Training schnell zu unterbrechen bzw. fortzusetzen.71 m iPhone und iPod touch: Tippen Sie auf „Training Aus“. Sind iPhone oder iPod touch gesperrt, drücken Sie die Home-Taste und tippen Sie auf „Pause“. Schieben Sie den Pfeil mit dem Finger nach rechts und tippen Sie auf „Training Aus“. Schritt 9: Verwalten Sie Ihre Trainingsdaten auf nikeplus.com. Auf nikeplus.com können Sie Ihren Leistungsfortschritt in einem bestimmten Zeitraum überprüfen, Ihre Trainingseinheiten ansehen, Zielvorgaben festlegen bzw. überprüfen und Ihre Ergebnisse mit anderen Benutzern vergleichen. Sie können sogar mit anderen Nike + iPod-Benutzern Online-Wettkämpfe veranstalten. Wenn Sie ein iPhone oder einen iPod touch besitzen, können Sie Ihre Trainingsdaten auch per Funk an die Nike-Website senden. Wenn Sie einen iPod nano besitzen, können Sie Ihre Trainingsdaten von Ihrem Computer aus an die Nike-Website senden. Es empfiehlt sich, vor dem Senden der Trainingsdaten zunächst einen nikeplus.comAccount einzurichten. Befolgen Sie die Anleitungen auf der nikeplus.com-Website, um einen kostenlosen Account einzurichten. Trainingsdaten per Funk von einem iPhone oder iPod touch an nikeplus.com senden 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Gerät mit dem Internet verbunden ist und wählen Sie dann „Nike+iPod“. Wenn eine Trainingseinheit noch nicht mit Ihrem nikeplus.com-Account synchronisiert wurde, wird auf der Taste „Übersicht“ ein kleiner roter Punkt angezeigt. 2 Tippen Sie auf „Übersicht“, um Ihre Trainingseinheiten anzusehen. 3 Tippen Sie auf „An Nike+ senden“, um Ihre Trainingsdaten an nikeplus.com zu senden. Sie können dies auch später nachholen.72 4 Geben Sie Ihre E-Mail-Adresse und das Kennwort für den nikeplus.com-Account ein und tippen Sie auf „Bei Nike + anmelden“. Nach dem Anmelden werden Ihre Trainingsdaten an Ihren nikeplus.com-Account gesendet. Besitzen Sie noch keinen nikeplus.com-Account, tippen Sie auf „Bei Nike+ mitmachen“. Befolgen Sie anschließend die angezeigten Anleitungen zum Erstellen eines Accounts. Die Website „nikeplus.com“ wird geöffnet und Ihre neusten Trainingsdaten werden in einem Diagramm dargestellt. 5 Befolgen Sie die Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm zum Zugriff auf Ihre Trainingsdaten. Ihre iPod nano-Trainingsdaten von Ihrem Computer an nikeplus.com senden 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Computer mit dem Internet verbunden ist, und schließen Sie iPod nano an den Computer an. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Senden“, wenn Sie in einem Dialogfenster gefragt werden, ob Sie die Daten an nikeplus.com senden wollen. Sie können dies auch später nachholen. 3 In einem weiteren Dialogfenster werden Sie gefragt, ob Sie die Verbindung zu nikeplus. com herstellen wollen. Klicken Sie auf „Verbinden“. Die Website „nikeplus.com“ wird geöffnet und Ihre neusten Trainingsdaten werden in einem Diagramm dargestellt. 4 Klicken Sie auf die Option zum Sichern Ihrer Läufe und dann auf „Registrieren“. Befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen.73 Verwenden von Nike + iPod Befolgen Sie die nachstehenden Anleitungen, um möglichst viel Nutzen und Freude mit Nike + iPod zu haben. Kalibrieren von Nike + iPod Die Standardkalibrierung für Nike + iPod ist für die meisten Benutzer ausreichend genau. Sie können die Genauigkeit verbessern, indem Sie Nike + iPod auf Ihr persönliches Gehen und Laufen kalibrieren. Auf einem iPod nano können Sie ein Kalibrierungstraining über eine bestimmte Strecke ausführen oder Ihr letztes Training verwenden und die Strecke eingeben. Auf einem iPhone oder einem iPod touch können Sie für die Kalibrierung Ihr letztes beendetes Training verwenden, dessen Strecke Sie kennen. Nike + iPod fürs Gehen oder Laufen mit einem iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter) kalibrieren 1 Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Sensor“ > „Kalibrieren“. 2 Wählen Sie „Laufen“ oder „Gehen“ und legen Sie eine Strecke fest. Optimale Ergebnisse werden mit einer mindestens 400 m langen Strecke erzielt. Die kürzeste Kalibrierungsdistanz, die Sie eingeben können, sind ca. 100 m. 3 Drücken Sie die Mitteltaste. 4 Laufen oder gehen Sie die gewählte Strecke in einem gleichmäßigen natürlichen Tempo. 5 Drücken Sie die Mitteltaste und wählen Sie „Kalibrieren fertig“. Auf dem Bildschirm sehen Sie, ob die Kalibrierung erfolgreich war. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1-5, wenn Sie die Kalibrierung für Ihr Lauf- und Ihr Gehtempo vornehmen wollen.74 Hinweis: Auch nach dem Kalibrieren kann die Genauigkeit von Streckenmessungen je nach Gangart, Beschaffenheit des Weges, Steigung oder Temperatur unterschiedlich ausfallen. Sie können einen iPod nano mit den Daten Ihrer soeben abgeschlossenen Trainingseinheit kalibrieren. Dies ist nützlich, wenn Sie eine Strecke gelaufen sind, die nicht der auf dem Gerät angezeigten Gesamtstrecke entspricht. Kalibrierung eines iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter) mit den Daten Ihres letzten abgeschlossenen Trainings vornehmen m Wählen Sie „Training Aus“ und drücken Sie die Mitteltaste und halten Sie sie gedrückt. Wählen Sie dann „Kalibrieren“. Geben Sie die korrekte Strecke ein, die Sie gelaufen oder gegangen sind. Drücken Sie dann die Mitteltaste. Das Gerät erkennt, ob die Strecke gelaufen oder gegangen wurde. Es verwendet dann die neue Kalibrierung statt der vorhandenen. Nike + iPod fürs Gehen oder Laufen mit einem iPod nano (6. Generation) kalibrieren 1 Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Sensor“ > „Kalibrieren“. 2 Wählen Sie „Kalibrierung (Gehen)“ oder „Kalibrierung (Laufen)“. Wählen Sie dann die Strecke aus und tippen Sie auf „Fertig“. Optimale Ergebnisse werden mit einer mindestens 400 m langen Strecke erzielt. Die kürzeste Kalibrierungsdistanz, die Sie eingeben können, sind ca. 100 m. 3 Wählen Sie Ihre Trainingsmusik. 4 Laufen oder gehen Sie die gewählte Strecke in einem gleichmäßigen natürlichen Tempo.75 5 Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste, wenn der Bildschirm aus ist. Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „Pause“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf „Stopp“. Auf dem Bildschirm sehen Sie, ob die Kalibrierung erfolgreich war. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1-5, wenn Sie die Kalibrierung für Ihr Lauf- und Ihr Gehtempo vornehmen wollen. Hinweis: Auch nach dem Kalibrieren kann die Genauigkeit von Streckenmessungen je nach Gangart, Beschaffenheit des Weges, Steigung oder Temperatur unterschiedlich ausfallen. Mit einem iPhone oder iPod touch können Sie Nike + iPod mit den Daten Ihrer soeben abgeschlossenen Trainingseinheit kalibrieren. Zum Kalibrieren können Sie nur Trainingseinheiten mit einer Strecke von mindestens 100 m verwenden. Kalibrierung von iPhone oder iPod touch mit den Daten Ihres letzten abgeschlossenen Trainings vornehmen m Tippen Sie auf „Training Aus“ und dann auf „Kalibrieren“. Geben Sie dann die korrekte gelaufene oder gegangene Strecke an. Tippen Sie auf „Fertig“. Das Gerät verwendet die neue Kalibrierung und überschreibt die vorhandene für die Geh- oder Laufgeschwindigkeit. Die Nike + iPod-Kalibrierung auf Standardwerte zurücksetzen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Sensor“ > „Kalibrieren“ > „Gehen zurücksetzen“ (oder „Laufen zurücksetzen“). m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Sensor“ > „Kalibrieren“ > „Gehen zurücksetzen“ (oder „Laufen zurücksetzen“) > „Zurücksetzen“. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ und tippen dann auf „Kalibrierung zurücksetzen“. 76 Festlegen der Maßeinheit für die Strecke Mit Nike + iPod können Sie Ihre Trainingsstrecke in Kilometern oder in Meilen messen. Maßeinheit für die Strecke festlegen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ und für „Strecke“ entweder „Kilometer“ oder „Meilen“. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Strecke“ und dann „Kilometer“ oder „Meilen“. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Strecke“ und dann „Kilometer“ oder „Meilen“. Eingeben des Gewichts Gewicht eingeben m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Gewicht“ und geben Sie Ihr Gewicht ein. Damit der Kalorienverbrauch präzise errechnet werden kann, sollten Sie mit steigender Fitness die Gewichtsangabe aktualisieren. Sperren Ihres Geräts beim Trainieren Sie können das iPhone oder den iPod touch sperren, sodass die Bedienelemente während des Trainings nicht versehentlich aktiviert werden können.77 iPhone oder iPod touch sperren m Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste. Zum Aufheben der Sperre drücken Sie die Standby-Taste bzw. die Home-Taste und schieben den Regler mit dem Finger nach rechts. Hören von Audio-Feedback Während Sie trainieren, hören Sie, wie Nike + iPod Ihnen regelmäßig Audio-Feedback zu Ihrem Trainingsstatus gibt. Sie können zwischen einer Frauen- oder Männerstimme wählen oder das Feedback deaktivieren. Die Stimme für das Audio-Feedback festlegen bzw. das Audio-Feedback deaktivieren m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ und stellen Sie „Audio-Feedback“ auf „Männlich“, „Weiblich“ oder „Aus“. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Audio-Feedback“ und dann „Männlich“, „Weiblich“ oder „Aus“. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Audio-Feedback“ und dann „Männlich“, „Weiblich“ oder „Aus“. Wenn die Option „Audio-Feedback“ ausgeschaltet ist, können Sie das Audio-Feedback weiterhin manuell abrufen. Das Audio-Feedback manuell abrufen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie beim Training zu jeder beliebigen Zeit die Mitteltaste. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Drücken Sie beim Training zu jeder beliebigen Zeit die Standby-Taste.78 m iPhone und iPod touch: Drücken Sie die Home-Taste des gesperrten Geräts. Auf dem iPod nano steht die Funktion „Audio-Feedback“ außer in Englisch auch in einigen anderen Sprachen zur Verfügung. Wenn Sie für Ihren iPod nano eine Sprache festgelegt haben und Sie ihn an Ihren Computer (der mit dem Internet verbunden sein muss) anschließen, werden Sie von iTunes aufgefordert, die Feedback-Funktion in dieser Sprache zu laden.  Auf dem iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter) kann immer nur eine nicht-englische Version für das Audio-Feedback installiert sein.  Auf dem iPhone, iPod touch und iPod nano (6. Generation) werden alle FeedbackSprachen automatisch unterstützt. Verwenden von PowerSongs Sie können einen Musiktitel wählen, der Sie besonders motiviert und diesen als PowerSong festlegen. Sie können jederzeit während Ihres Trainings schnell zu Ihrem PowerSong wechseln. PowerSongs festlegen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „PowerSong“ und dann den gewünschten Titel. Auf einem iPod nano (5. Generation) kann auch eine Wiedergabeliste als PowerSong verwendet werden. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „PowerSong“ und dann den gewünschten Titel. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „PowerSong“ und dann den gewünschten Titel.79 Ihren PowerSong anhören m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie während des Trainings die Mitteltaste. Nach einer kleinen Pause wird der Song gespielt. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste, wenn der Bildschirm aus ist. Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „PowerSong“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf „PowerSong“. Bei aktiver Bildschirmanzeige können Sie auch zwei Finger auf den Bildschirm legen, um den PowerSong zu starten. m iPhone und iPod touch: Tippen Sie im Trainingsbildschirm auf „PowerSong“. Sind iPhone oder iPod touch gesperrt, drücken Sie die Home-Taste, bewegen Sie den Regler mit dem Finger nach rechts, um die Sperre aufzuheben, und tippen Sie dann auf „PowerSong“. Unterbrechen des Trainings Sie können eine Trainingspause einlegen – wobei die Musik und die Datenaufzeichnung ebenfalls pausieren – und das Training dann später fortsetzen, ohne Ihre Trainingsdaten zu verlieren. Training unterbrechen oder fortsetzen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie die Taste „Start/Pause“ (’). m iPod nano (6. Generation): Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „Pause“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf „Pause“. Tippen Sie auf „Fortsetzen“, um das Training fortzusetzen. Wenn der Bildschirm des iPod nano (6. Generation) nicht eingeschaltet ist, drücken Sie die Standby-Taste, um die Anzeige zu aktivieren. m iPhone und iPod touch: Tippen Sie auf „Pause“. Sind iPhone oder iPod touch gesperrt, drücken Sie zuerst einmal auf die Home-Taste. Tippen Sie auf „Start“, um das Training fortzusetzen.80 Empfangen von Anrufen beim Trainieren Mit einem iPhone können Sie auch während des Trainings Anrufe annehmen. Erhalten Sie einen Anruf, wird Ihr Training automatisch gestoppt, sobald Sie den Anruf annehmen. Anrufe annehmen m Tippen Sie auf „Antworten“ oder drücken Sie die Mikrofontaste, wenn Sie das StereoHeadset verwenden. Wenn das iPhone gesperrt ist, schieben Sie den Regler mit dem Finger nach rechts, um die Sperrung aufzuheben. Anrufe stumm schalten m Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste oder eine Lautstärketaste. Auch nach dem Stummschalten können Sie Anrufe annehmen, solange Voicemail noch nicht eingeschaltet ist. Anrufe ablehnen m Tippen Sie auf „Ablehnen“ oder halten Sie die Mikrofontaste am Headset ungefähr 2 Sekunden lang gedrückt und lassen Sie sie dann los. Zwei tiefe Piepstöne bestätigen, dass der Anruf abgelehnt wurde. Drücken Sie die Standby-Taste zweimal schnell, um einen Anruf abzulehnen. Hierdurch wird der Klingelton abgestellt, die Musik wird jedoch erst fortgesetzt, wenn der Anruf an Voicemail übergeben wurde. Das Training wird im Hintergrund weiter aufgezeichnet. Training nach einen Anruf fortsetzen m Tippen Sie auf „Start“. Wechseln der Musik beim Trainieren Sie können Ihre Musik jederzeit beim Trainieren wechseln, ohne Ihre Trainingsdaten zu verlieren. Das Training ist während des Musikwechsels gestoppt.81 Musik beim Trainieren wechseln 1 iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Drücken Sie die Taste „Menu“ und wählen Sie „Musik wechseln“. Ihr Training wird gestoppt. iPod nano (6. Generation): Tippen Sie auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „Pause“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie dann auf „Pause“ und „Musik wechseln“. Wenn der Bildschirm des iPod nano (6. Generation) nicht eingeschaltet ist, drücken Sie die Standby-Taste, um die Anzeige zu aktivieren. iPhone und iPod touch: Tippen Sie dann auf „Pause“ und „Musik wechseln“. Ist das Gerät gesperrt, drücken Sie die Home-Taste, bewegen Sie den Regler mit dem Finger nach rechts, um die Sperre aufzuheben. 2 iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie eine neue Musik. Ihr Training wird automatisch fortgesetzt. iPhone, iPod touch und iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie eine neue Musik. Automatisches Senden von Trainingsdaten an Nikeplus.com Sie können iTunes so konfigurieren, dass Ihre Trainingsdaten automatisch über das Internet an nikeplus.com gesendet werden, wenn Sie Ihren iPod nano an den Computer anschließen. Trainingsdaten automatisch an nikeplus.com senden 1 Stellen Sie sicher, dass Ihr Computer mit dem Internet verbunden ist, und schließen Sie iPod nano an den Computer an. 2 Öffnen Sie iTunes auf dem Computer, klicken Sie auf „Nike + iPod“ und wählen Sie „Trainingsdaten automatisch an nikeplus.com senden“.82 3 Klicken Sie auf „nikeplus.com Webseite öffnen“ unter dem Markierungsfeld. Klicken Sie im angezeigten Dialogfenster auf „Verbinden“, wenn Sie bereits festgelegt haben, dass Ihre Trainingsdaten automatisch gesendet werden. Die Website „nikeplus.com“ wird geöffnet und Ihre neusten Trainingsdaten werden in einem Diagramm dargestellt. 4 Klicken Sie auf die Option zum Sichern Ihrer Läufe und melden Sie sich an oder registrieren Sie sich, falls noch nicht geschehen. Informationen zum Datenschutz bei Nike („Privacy Policy“) sowie die Nike Nutzungsbedingungen („Terms & Conditions“) finden Sie auf der Website nikeplus.com. Anzeigen von Trainingsdaten auf Ihrem Gerät Ihr iPod nano, iPhone oder iPod touch sichert Datum, Uhrzeit, Dauer, Strecke, Tempo und Kalorienverbrauch Ihrer bis zu eintausend letzten Trainingseinheiten. Die letzten Trainingseinheiten auf Ihrem Gerät anzeigen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Übersicht“. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Übersicht“ unten im Bildschirm. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie dann unten im Bildschirm auf „Übersicht“. Der iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter) bietet eine tägliche Übersicht Ihrer Trainingseinheiten: Nike + iPod-Trainingseinheiten, Schrittzähler und Herz-/Kreislauf-Training unter Verwendung von Nike + iPod-kompatiblen Trainingsgeräten. Trainingsübersicht auf einem iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter) anzeigen 1 Wählen Sie „Gesamtwerte“ aus dem Menü „Übersicht“. 2 Wählen Sie ein Datum und eine Aktivität aus.83 3 Drehen Sie den iPod nano (5. Generation) ins Querformat, um das Diagramm dieser Aktivität anzusehen. Eine einzelne Trainingseinheit löschen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Übersicht“. Wählen Sie eine Trainingseinheit aus und drücken und halten Sie die Mitteltaste. Wählen Sie dann „Löschen“. Es ist nicht möglich, einzelne Trainingseinheiten auf dem iPod nano (6. Generation) zu löschen. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie auf „Übersicht“. Tippen Sie auf „Bearbeiten“, wählen Sie eine Trainingseinheit und tippen Sie auf „Löschen“. Auf einem iPhone, iPod touch und iPod nano (6. Generation) können Sie alle Trainingseinheiten aus der Übersicht löschen, indem Sie oben im Bildschirm „Übersicht“ auf „Löschen“ tippen. Erstellen und Auswählen eigener Trainingskurzbefehle Mithilfe eigener Trainingskurzbefehle können Sie Trainingseinheiten schnell und einfach auswählen und wiederholen. Der iPod nano (4. Generation und neuer) sichert alle abgeschlossenen Trainingseinheiten automatisch als Kurzbefehle. Mit einem iPhone und iPod touch können Sie eigene Trainingskurzbefehle erstellen. Eigene Trainingskurzbefehle auf einem iPhone oder iPod touch erstellen 1 Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie dann unten auf dem Bildschirm auf „Meine Trainings“. 2 Tippen Sie auf das Pluszeichen (+) und wählen die Trainingsart und das Trainingsziel aus. 3 Wählen Sie eine Musik aus, geben einen Namen für die Trainingseinheit ein und tippen auf „Sichern“.84 Hinweis: Eigene Trainingskurzbefehle können Sie nur auf einem iPhone und iPod touch (2. Generation oder neuer) erstellen. Eigene Trainingskurzbefehle auf einem iPhone oder iPod touch löschen m Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie auf „Meine Trainings“. Tippen Sie auf „Bearbeiten“, wählen Sie einen Kurzbefehl aus und tippen Sie auf „Löschen“. Eigene Trainingskurzbefehle auswählen m iPod nano (4. und 5. Generation): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und einen Trainingskurzbefehl. Kurzbefehle werden entsprechend der gewählten Trainingsart und Musik benannt. Sie können nicht gelöscht werden. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie auf „Meine Trainings“. Wählen Sie einen Kurzbefehl. Kurzbefehle werden entsprechend der gewählten Trainingsart und Musik benannt. Sie können nicht gelöscht werden. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ und tippen Sie auf „Meine Trainings“. Kurzbefehle werden nach dem Namen aufgelistet, den Sie beim Erstellen der Trainingseinheit gewählt haben. Der zuletzt von Ihnen erstellte Kurzbefehl wird oben in der Liste angezeigt. Kaufen von Nike+ Trainingsmusik Sie können Nike+ Trainingsmusik kaufen und über das Internet laden. Nike+ Titel bieten Musik ohne Unterbrechung, die mit Kommentaren von professionellen Trainern gemischt ist. Wenn Sie eine Nike+ Trainingsmusik kaufen, erhalten Sie zunächst eine Audioaufnahme mit Musik und gesprochenen Kommentaren. Darüber hinaus erhalten Sie auch alle einzelnen Musiktitel, die in der Trainingsmusik enthalten sind. Wählen Sie die Trainingsmusik, die zu Ihrem Trainingsstil und Leistungsniveau passt.85 Nike+ Trainingsmusik kaufen 1 Öffnen Sie iTunes und klicken Sie links im Fenster auf „iTunes Store“. Geben Sie „nike+ sport music“ in das iTunes-Suchfeld ein. 2 Klicken Sie neben der gewünschten Nike+ Trainingsmusik auf „Kaufen“. 3 Befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen, um den Kauf abzuschließen. Die Musik wird automatisch geladen. 4 Verbinden Sie Ihr Gerät mit Ihrem Computer und laden Sie die Trainingsmusik auf das Gerät. Hinweis: In den USA sowie in vielen anderen Ländern müssen Kunden des iTunes Store mindestens 13 Jahre alt sein. Eine Liste dieser Länder finden Sie unter: www.apple.com/de/itunes/download. Bitte beachten Sie die Geschäftsbedingungen. Sie benötigen einen Internetzugang (Gebühren können anfallen), um den iTunes Store verwenden zu können. Verbinden einer Nike + iPod-kompatiblen Fernbedienung oder eines Herzfrequenzmonitors Nike + iPod-kompatible Geräte werden separat vom Nike + iPod-Sport Kit und Nike + iPod-Sensor verkauft. Sie können während Ihres Trainings eine kompatible Fernbedienung verwenden, um Nike + iPod drahtlos zu steuern. Der iPod nano (5. Generation oder neuer) unterstützt zudem Nike + iPod-kompatible Herzfrequenzmonitore. Hinweis: Sie müssen den iPod + Nike-Empfänger an den iPod nano (6. Generation) anschließen, um einen Herzfrequenzmonitor oder eine Fernbedienung verwenden zu können.86 Bevor Sie eines dieser Geräte zum ersten Mal verwenden, müssen Sie den iPod nanoEmpfänger, das iPhone oder den iPod touch mit dem Gerät verbinden. Verbindung zur Nike + kompatiblen Fernbedienung (separat erhältlich) herstellen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Schließen Sie den Nike + iPod-Empfänger an Ihren iPod nano an. Wählen Sie dann „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Fernbedienung“ > „Verbinden“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Fernbedienung“. Aktivieren Sie die Option „Fernbedienung“ und tippen Sie auf „Verbinden“. m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Fernbedienung“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. Verbindung zum Nike + iPod-kompatiblen Herzfrequenzmonitor (separat erhältlich) herstellen m iPod nano (5. Generation): Schließen Sie den Nike + iPod-Empfänger an Ihren iPod nano an. Wählen Sie dann „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Herzfrequenzmonitor“ > „Verbinden“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Herzfrequenzmonitor“ > „Verbinden“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. Verbindung zu einem Gerät trennen m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Fernbedienung“ (oder „Herzfrequenzmonitor“) > „Verbindung trennen“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Fernbedienung“ (oder „Herzfrequenzmonitor“) > „Verbindung trennen“.87 m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Fernbedienung“ und tippen Sie auf „Verbindung trennen“. Sie können die Funktionen einer Nike+ iPod-kompatiblen Fernbedienung deaktivieren, ohne die Verbindung zum Gerät zu trennen. Funktion für die Fernbedienung ein- oder ausschalten m iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Fernbedienung“ und legen Sie für „Fernbedienen“ die Option „Ein“ oder „Aus“ fest. m iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Fernbedienung“ und legen Sie für „Fernbedienen“ die Option „Ein“ oder „Aus“ fest m iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Fernbedienung“ und verbinden oder trennen Sie die Fernbedienung. Trainieren mit einem iPod nano (6. Generation) und einem Herzfrequenzmonitor Wenn Sie einen iPod nano (6. Generation) und einen Nike + iPod-kompatiblen Herzfrequenzmonitor (separat erhältlich) besitzen, kann der iPod nano Ihre Herzfrequenz aufzeichnen und beim Trainieren anzeigen. Sie können auch einen Bereich der maximalen bzw. minimalen Herzfrequenzen festlegen, den Sie während eines Trainings erreichen wollen. Außerdem können Sie festhalten, wie gut sich die Frequenz im angegebenen Bereich gehalten hat. Beim Training zeigt der iPod nano Ihre aktuelle Herzfrequenz an und ein Aufwärts- bzw. Abwärtspfeil zeigt an, ob Sie Ihre Aktivität erhöhen oder verringern müssen. Sie können einen Herzfrequenzmonitor während eines Standardtrainings verwenden.88 Sie können die Herzfrequenz auch bei anderen Aktivitäten außer beim Gehen oder Laufen überwachen. So können Sie zum Beispiel den iPod nano und einen Herzfrequenzmonitor bei anderen Sportarten wie Basketball, Aerobic, Zirkeltraining, Golf, Wandern, Fußball uvm. verwenden. Nach dem Training können Sie Ihre Herzfrequenzen an Ihren nikeplus.com-Account senden und dort prüfen. Beim Einrichten eines Trainings können Sie den Bereich für maximale und minimale Herzfrequenzen festlegen, die Sie beim gewählten Training erreichen wollen. Zunächst müssen Sie die Funktion für den Trainingsbereich aktivieren. Funktion für den Trainingsbereich aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren m Tippen Sie auf „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ und dann für den Trainingsbereich auf „Ein“ oder „Aus“. Wenn Sie diese Funktion aktiviert und ein Training gewählt haben, werden Optionen zum Festlegen eines Herzfrequenzbereichs angezeigt. Beim Training werden die Herzfrequenzen aufgezeichnet und für jeden Trainingstyp angezeigt. Der iPod nano (6. Generation) unterstützt ebenfalls Herzfrequenz-Trainings. Für ein solches Training geben Sie zunächst einen Herzfrequenzbereich an, den Sie einhalten wollen. Anschließend wählen Sie die Art der Aktivität aus, die Sie ausführen möchten, und starten dann das Training. Alle Herzfrequenzinformationen werden automatisch aufgezeichnet. Wenn Sie diese Art Training ausführen, benötigen Sie keinen Sensor in Ihrem Schuh, um die Bewegung aufzuzeichnen.89 Herzfrequenz-Training starten 1 Tippen Sie auf „Fitness“ > „Laufen“ > „Herzfrequenz“. 2 Legen Sie den gewünschten Herzfrequenzbereich fest. 3 Wählen Sie eine Aktivität aus und tippen Sie anschließend auf „Fertig“. 4 Wählen Sie Ihre Trainingsmusik aus. 5 Tippen Sie auf „Training starten“ und beginnen Sie mit Ihrem Training. 6 Drücken Sie nach Ihrem Training die Standby-Taste, um den Bildschirm zu aktivieren. Tippen Sie dann auf den Bildschirm, um die Taste „Pause“ anzuzeigen. Tippen Sie auf „Pause“ und auf „Training beenden“, um Ihr Herzfrequenz-Training abzuschließen. Wenn Sie ein Herzfrequenz-Training abgeschlossen haben, können Sie diese Informationen wie bei anderen Trainings an Ihren nikeplus.com-Account senden. Verbinden mit einem anderen Sensor Nachdem Sie Ihr Gerät mit einem bestimmten Sensor verbunden haben, kann es nur zu diesem einen Sensor eine Verbindung herstellen. Möchten Sie einen anderen Sensor verwenden, müssen Sie das Gerät so einstellen, dass es eine Verbindung zu diesem Sensor herstellt. Dies ist praktisch, wenn es z. B. in Ihrer Familie mehrere Personen mit eigenem Sensor und Nike+ kompatiblen Schuhen gibt. Empfänger mit einem anderen Sensor koppeln: 1 iPod nano Schließen Sie den Empfänger an den iPod an. 2 Ziehen Sie die Schuhe mit dem neuen Sensor an und stellen Sie sicher, dass sich kein anderer Nike + iPod-Sensor in der Nähe befindet. Laufen Sie ein paar Schritte, um den Sensor zu aktivieren, sodass er vom Empfänger erkannt wird.90 3 Verbinden Sie den Sensor wie folgt mit Ihrem Gerät:  iPod nano (5. Generation oder älter): Wählen Sie „Nike+iPod“ > „Einstellungen“ > „Sensor“ > „Verbinden“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. Eine Meldung wird auf Ihrem iPod angezeigt, wenn der neue Sensor verbunden ist.  iPod nano (6. Generation): Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Fitness“ > „Nike+iPod-Sport Kit“ > „Sensor“ und tippen Sie auf „Verbinden“. Durch Tippen auf den Bildschirm können Sie dann beim Gehen oder Laufen das Gerät erneut mit dem anderen Sensor verbinden.  iPhone und iPod touch: Wählen Sie „Einstellungen“ > „Nike+iPod“ > „Sensor“, tippen Sie auf „Neu verbinden“ und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anleitungen. Hinweis: Falls Sie eine Verbindung für einen Sensor herstellen, der schon einmal mit dem Empfänger verbunden war, erkennt Nike + iPod Ihre vorherigen Kalibrierungseinstellungen. Sie müssen den Sensor nicht erneut zu kalibrieren. Wenn Sie einen externen iPod-Empfänger an einen anderen iPod anschließen und ihn mit demselben Sensor verwenden, müssen Sie das Gerät nicht erneut verbinden oder kalibrieren. Der Empfänger speichert Ihre Einstellungen, Trainingsdaten und Trainingskurzbefehle. Sie müssen den Sensor nicht erneut verbinden oder kalibrieren.91 Aktivieren des Ruhezustands für den Nike + iPod-Sensor Der Sensor ist standardmäßig eingeschaltet und in Betrieb. Sie können den Ruhezustand aktivieren, wenn Sie den Sensor für längere Zeit nicht einsetzen möchten oder wenn er keine Signale aussenden soll. Wichtig: Den geltenden gesetzlichen Vorschriften entsprechend müssen Sie den Sensor deaktivieren, bevor Sie damit in einem Flugzeug reisen. Sensor deaktivieren m Drücken Sie mithilfe eines Kugelschreibers oder einer Büroklammer die Taste „Ruhezustand/Betrieb“ und halten Sie diese 3 Sekunden lang gedrückt. Taste „Ruhezustand/Betrieb“ Sensor wieder aktivieren m Drücken Sie mithilfe eines Kugelschreibers oder einer Büroklammer die Taste „Ruhezustand/Betrieb“.92 Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen ACHTUNG: Bei Nichtbeachtung dieser Sicherheitsinformationen kann es zu Verletzungen oder zur Beschädigung von Komponenten kommen. Training Bevor Sie ein Trainingsprogramm beginnen, sollten Sie sich von Ihrem Arzt gründlich untersuchen lassen. Machen Sie vor jedem Trainingsbeginn Aufwärm- und Dehnübungen. Seien Sie beim Sport stets vorsichtig und aufmerksam. Verringern Sie wenn nötig Ihr Tempo, bevor Sie beim Laufen Einstellungen an Ihrem Gerät ändern. Beenden Sie Ihr Training sofort, wenn Sie Schmerzen haben oder sich schwach, schwindelig oder erschöpft fühlen oder wenn Sie außer Atem sind. Wenn Sie Sport treiben, sind Sie für sämtliche Risiken selbst verantwortlich, die mit körperlichen Betätigungen einhergehen, einschließlich evtl. hierdurch verursachter Verletzungen. Verwenden Sie den Empfänger, das iPhone bzw. den iPod nicht im Wasser bzw. in der Nähe von Wasser oder in feuchten Umgebungen. Erstickungsgefahr Empfänger und Sensor sind für Kinder unter drei Jahren nicht geeignet, da solche Kleinteile verschluckt werden und damit eine Erstickungsgefahr darstellen können. Achten Sie darauf, dass Kleinkinder keinen Zugang zu diesen Komponenten haben.93 Vermeiden von Hörschäden Das Verwenden von Ohrhörern mit hoher Lautstärke kann eine dauerhafte Schädigung des Gehörs zur Folge haben. Stellen Sie die Lautstärke nicht zu hoch ein. Sie gewöhnen sich mit der Zeit zwar an höhere Lautstärken, sodass diese für Sie normal erscheinen mögen, Ihre Hörfähigkeit kann dadurch jedoch beeinträchtigt werden. Falls Sie in Ihren Ohren ein Klingeln wahrnehmen oder Gespräche gedämpft hören, sollten Sie die Verwendung einstellen und ggf. einen Ohrenarzt aufsuchen. Je höher Sie die Lautstärke einstellen, desto schneller kann Ihr Gehör geschädigt werden. Experten empfehlen, das Gehör wie folgt zu schützen:  Benutzen Sie Ohrhörer bei hohen Lautstärken nur für eine begrenzte Dauer.  Vermeiden Sie es, die Lautstärke zu erhöhen, um Umgebungsgeräusche zu übertönen.  Reduzieren Sie die Lautstärke, wenn Sie nicht hören können, was Personen in Ihrer Nähe sprechen. Öffnen des Sensors Versuchen Sie nicht, den Sensor zu öffnen, auseinanderzubauen oder die Batterie zu entfernen. Im Sensor befinden sich keine Teile, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden könnten.94 Weitere Informationen, Service und Support Funktion Aktion Antworten auf häufig gestellte Fragen über Nike + iPod Besuchen Sie die Website: www.apple.com/de/support/nikeplus. Service & Support für den Nike + iPod-Sensor und -Empfänger Besuchen Sie die Website: www.apple.com/de/support/nikeplus. Service & Support für Nike+ kompatible Schuhe bzw. die nikeplus.com-Website Besuchen Sie die Website: www.nikeplus.com. Verwenden von iTunes Öffnen Sie iTunes und wählen Sie „Hilfe“ > „iTunes-Hilfe“. Verwenden von iPod nano oder iPod touch Besuchen Sie die Website: www.apple.com/de/support/ipod. Verwenden eines iPhone Besuchen Sie die Website: www.apple.com/de/support/iphone.95 Indice 96 L’assistente personale per le sessioni di allenamento 97 Guida rapida 105 Usare Nike + iPod 105 Calibrare Nike + iPod 107 Impostare l’unità di distanza 108 Inserire il peso 108 Bloccare il dispositivo durante una sessione 108 Ottenere informazioni vocali 110 Usare una PowerSong 111 Mettere in pausa una sessione 111 Ricevere chiamate durante una sessione 112 Cambiare la musica nel corso di una sessione 113 Inviare automaticamente le sessioni a Nikeplus.com 113 Riesaminare le sessioni sul dispositivo 115 Creare abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzate 116 Acquistare sessioni Nike+ 116 Associare un telecomando compatibile con Nike + iPod o un cardiofrequenzimetro 119 Allenarsi con iPod nano (sesta generazione) e un cardiofrequenzimetro 121 Associare un altro sensore 122 Mettere in stop il sensore Nike + iPod 123 Informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza 124 Ulteriori informazioni, servizio e supporto96 Benvenuto in Nike + iPod L’assistente personale per le sessioni di allenamento Nike + iPod è un compagno di sessione e un allenatore, tutto in uno. Seleziona il tipo di sessione desiderato - senza limiti precisi, basato sulla distanza o sul tempo, o per bruciare calorie - scegli la musica giusta che ti da una marcia in più, quindi tieni traccia dei tuoi progressi lungo tutto il percorso grazie alle informazioni vocali e su schermo. Carica i dati della sessione su nikeplus.com, dove puoi impostare i tuoi obiettivi e verificare i tuoi miglioramenti da una sessione all’altra. Entra a far parte della più grande comunità online di runner del mondo e partecipa alle gare con corridori provenienti da ogni angolo del pianeta. Nike + iPod è supportato da iPhone (3GS o versione successiva), tutti i modelli di iPod nano 1 e iPod touch (seconda generazione o versione successiva). iPod nano (tutti i modelli) iPod touch (seconda generazione o successiva) iPhone 3GS o successivo 1 Per iPod nano (sesta generazione), il sensore Nike + iPod è facoltativo e richiesto solo per gli allenamenti con il Cardiofrequenzimetro Wearlink®+ di Polar per Nike+.97 Guida rapida Segui queste istruzioni per iniziare a usare subito Nike + iPod. Passo 1: abilita Nike + iPod sul dispositivo. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): collega il ricevitore Nike + iPod a iPod nano. “Nike + iPod” appare nel menu principale. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): collega il ricevitore Nike + iPod a iPod nano. Tocca Fitness. Nota: opzionalmente, iPod nano (sesta generazione) è in grado di tenere traccia delle tue sessioni anche senza utilizzare il sensore Nike + iPod. Per ulteriori informazioni, consulta il Manuale Utente di iPod nano fornito con il dispositivo. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod e impostalo su Attivo. Nella schermata Inizio compare l’icona Nike + iPod. Nota: iPhone 3GS o versione successiva e iPod touch dispongono di un ricevitore interno; non è necessario collegare un ricevitore esterno. Passo 2: assicurati di disporre del software iPod e iTunes più recente. 1 Scarica l’ultima versione del software iTunes da www.apple.com/it/itunes e installala sul computer.98 2 Collega il dispositivo al computer, quindi selezionalo nella barra laterale di iTunes e fai clic su Riepilogo. 3 Se iTunes comunica che il dispositivo deve essere aggiornato, fai clic su Aggiorna e segui le istruzioni su schermo. Passo 3: inserisci il sensore Nike + iPod nella scarpa Nike+. m Solleva la soletta della scarpa sinistra, togli l’inserto in gomma situato sotto la tasca e sostituiscilo con il sensore, con il lato piatto rivolto verso l’alto. Sensore Quando non ti alleni puoi lasciare il sensore nella scarpa, ma se prevedi di indossare a lungo le scarpe senza allenarti, sostituisci il sensore con l’inserto in gomma per risparmiare la batteria. La batteria del sensore non può essere sostituita, non è ricaricabile e ha una vita utile di oltre 1000 ore. La vita della batteria varia in base all’uso e ad altri fattori.99 Passo 4: scegli un tipo di sessione. Per scegliere Procedi così Sessione senza limiti precisi iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Base. iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Fitness > Corsa > Base. iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Nike + iPod > Base. Sessione con limite di tempo iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Tempo. iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Fitness > Corsa > Tempo. iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Nike + iPod > Tempo. Sessione con limite di distanza iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Distanza. iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Fitness > Corsa > Distanza. iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Nike + iPod > Distanza. Sessione con l’obiettivo di bruciare calorie iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Peso e inserisci il tuo peso. Quindi, premi il pulsante Menu e scegli Nike + iPod > Nike + iPod > Calorie. iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Peso e inserisci il tuo peso. scegli Fitness > Corsa > Calorie. iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Peso e inserisci il tuo peso. Quindi, premi il tasto Home e scegli Nike + iPod > Calorie. Nota: devi inserire il peso solo la prima volta che inizi una sessione per bruciare calorie.100 Passo 5: scegli la musica per la sessione. Per riprodurre Procedi così Un mix per sessione Nike+ Scegli il mix (consulta pagina 116). Il brano in riproduzione Scegli “In riproduzione”. Un mix Genius Scegli “Mix Genius” (iPod nano sesta generazione). I brani di una playlist Scegli Playlist, quindi scegli una playlist. Un podcast Scegli Podcast (iPod nano sesta generazione). Un audiolibro Scegli Audiolibri (iPod nano sesta generazione). Brani in ordine casuale Scegli “Brani casuali”. Una stazione radio Scegli Radio (iPod nano sesta generazione). Senza musica Scegli Nessuno. Passo 6: inizia la sessione. Per attivare il sensore, inizia a correre o a camminare. Quando il dispositivo rileva e associa il sensore, sei pronto per iniziare la sessione. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante centrale e inizia a camminare o a correre. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): tocca “Avvia sessione” e inizia a camminare o a correre. m iPhone e iPod touch: tocca Riproduci e inizia a camminare o a correre.101 Passo 7: controlla i progressi. Nike + iPod mostra automaticamente lo stato della sessione sullo schermo, come nella seguente illustrazione (a seconda del dispositivo, lo schermo potrebbe avere un aspetto leggermente diverso). iPod nano (sesta generazione) iPhone3GS o successivo e iPod touch Nike + iPod fornisce informazioni vocali sui tuoi progressi durante la sessione (consulta “Ottenere informazioni vocali” a pagina 108). Inoltre, puoi ricevere un feedback ogni volta che lo desideri. Per ottenere manualmente informazioni vocali: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante centrale in qualsiasi momento durante la sessione.102 m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante Standby/Riattiva in qualsiasi momento durante la sessione. m iPhone e iPod touch: premi il tasto Home in qualsiasi momento durante la sessione. Nota: iPhone e iPod touch devono essere bloccati per ottenere informazioni vocali manualmente (consulta “Ottenere informazioni vocali” a pagina 108). Passo 8: concludi la sessione. Puoi concludere la sessione in qualsiasi momento. Se continui ad allenarti anche dopo aver raggiunto l’obiettivo di tempo, distanza o calorie, i tuoi progressi continuano a essere monitorati. Per concludere la sessione: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante Riproduci/Pausa (’) per mettere in pausa la sezione. Quindi premi il pulsante Menu e scegli “Termina sessione”. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante Pausa, quindi tocca Pausa. Tocca “Termina sessione”. Se lo schermo non è attivo, premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva. Nota: per mettere in pausa o riprendere velocemente la sessione su iPod nano (sesta generazione), fai doppio clic sul tasto Standby/Riattiva. m iPhone e iPod touch: tocca “Termina sessione”. Se iPhone o iPod touch è bloccato, premi il pulsante Home e tocca Pausa. Quindi trascina il cursore e tocca “Termina sessione”.103 Passo 9: tieni traccia dei tuoi progressi su nikeplus.com. Su nikeplus.com puoi controllare l’andamento dei tuoi progressi, visualizzare un resoconto di tutte le sessioni passate, impostare e monitorare gli obiettivi e confrontare i tuoi risultati con gli altri. Puoi anche gareggiare con altri utenti di Nike + iPod in sfide di allenamento online. Se utilizzi un iPhone o iPod touch, puoi inviare i dati della tua sessione al sito web Nike, in modalità wireless. Se utilizzi un iPod nano, puoi inviare i dati della tua sessione dal computer a nikeplus.com. Prima di inviare i dati delle sessione si consiglia di creare un account nikeplus.com. Segui le istruzioni sul sito web nikeplus.com per accedere con un account gratuito. Per inviare i dati della sessione a nikeplus.com in modalità wireless da iPhone o iPod touch: 1 Assicurati che il dispositivo sia connesso a Internet, quindi scegli “Nike + iPod”. Se una sessione non è stata sincronizzata con il tuo account nikeplus.com, sul pulsante Cronologia appare un puntino rosso. 2 Per visualizzare le tue sessioni, tocca il pulsante Cronologia. 3 Tocca il pulsante “Invia a Nike+” per inviare i dati della tua sessione a nikeplus.com. Se lo desideri, puoi effettuare questa operazione in un secondo momento.104 4 Inserisci il tuo indirizzo e-mail e la password del tuo account nikeplus.com, quindi tocca “Accedi a Nike+”. Dopo il login, le tue sessioni vengono inviate al tuo account nikeplus.com. Se non hai un account nikeplus.com, tocca “Entra a far parte di Nike+” Si apre il sito web nikeplus.com e viene visualizzato un grafico con i dati relativi alla tua sessione più recente. 5 Segui le istruzioni su schermo per accedere alle tue sessioni. Per inviare i dati delle tue sessioni di allenamento con iPod nano dal computer a nikeplus.com: 1 Assicurati che il computer sia connesso a Internet, quindi collega iPod nano al computer. 2 Nella finestra di dialogo che appare per l’invio dei dati della tua sessione a nikeplus. com, fai clic su Invia. Se lo desideri, puoi effettuare questa operazione in un secondo momento. 3 Nella finestra di dialogo che appare per visitare nikeplus.com, fai clic su Visita. Si apre il sito web nikeplus.com e viene visualizzato un grafico con i dati relativi alla tua sessione più recente. 4 Fai clic su “Registra le corse”, quindi fai clic su Iscrivimi e segui le istruzioni su schermo.105 Usare Nike + iPod Segui queste istruzioni per ottenere il massimo da Nike + iPod. Calibrare Nike + iPod La calibrazione di default di Nike + iPod è valida per molti utenti. Puoi ottimizzare il livello di precisione calibrando Nike + iPod per il tuo stile naturale di corsa e camminata. Su iPod nano, puoi eseguire una sessione di calibrazione su una distanza che conosci, o utilizzare la tua ultima sessione e inserire la distanza percorsa. Su iPhone o iPod touch, puoi eseguire la calibrazione servendoti dell’ultima sessione completata, per la quale conosci la distanza percorsa. Per calibrare Nike + iPod per la corsa e la camminata con iPod nano (5a generazione o precedente): 1 Scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Sensore > Calibra. 2 Scegli Corsa o Passo e inserisci una distanza. Per risultati migliori, utilizza una distanza di almeno 1.600 metri. La distanza minima di calibrazione che puoi inserire è di 400 metri. 3 Premi il pulsante centrale. 4 Corri o cammina per la distanza impostata ad un passo costante e naturale. 5 Premi il pulsante Menu e scegli “Calibrazione terminata”. Un messaggio comunica che la calibrazione è riuscita. Per calibrare sia la corsa che la camminata, ripeti i passi 1–5. Nota: anche dopo la calibrazione, la precisione delle misurazioni della distanza può variare in funzione dell’andatura, della superficie su cui si corre, dell’inclinazione e della temperatura.106 Inoltre, puoi calibrare Nike + iPod servendoti della sessione appena conclusa. Questo risulta utile se hai percorso una distanza che conosci e che non corrisponde al riepilogo della distanza mostrata dal dispositivo. Per calibrare iPod nano (5a generazione o precedente) usando l’ultima sessione completata: m Scegli “Termina sessione”, quindi premi il pulsante centrale e scegli Calibra. Imposta la distanza esatta percorsa correndo o camminando e premi il pulsante centrale. Il dispositivo rileva se si è trattato di una sessione di corsa o camminata e usa correttamente la nuova calibrazione invece di quella esistente. Per calibrare Nike + iPod per la corsa e la camminata con iPod nano (sesta generazione): 1 Scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Sensore > Calibra. 2 Scegli “Calibrazione camminata” o “Calibrazione corsa”, quindi seleziona una distanza e tocca Fine. Per risultati migliori, utilizza una distanza di almeno 1.600 metri. La distanza minima di calibrazione che puoi inserire è di 400 metri. 3 Scegli la musica per accompagnare la sessione di calibrazione. 4 Corri o cammina per la distanza impostata ad un passo costante e naturale. 5 Se lo schermo non è attivo, premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva, tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante Pausa, quindi tocca Stop. Un messaggio comunica che la calibrazione è riuscita. Per calibrare sia la corsa che la camminata, ripeti i passi 1–5.107 Nota: anche dopo la calibrazione, la precisione delle misurazioni della distanza può variare in funzione dell’andatura, della superficie su cui si corre, dell’inclinazione e della temperatura. Su iPhone o iPod touch, puoi calibrare Nike + iPod servendoti della sessione appena conclusa. Puoi calibrare solo le sessioni con distanza di 400 metri o superiore. Per calibrare iPhone o iPod touch usando l’ultima sessione completata: m Tocca “Termina sessione”, quindi tocca Calibra. Imposta la distanza esatta percorsa correndo o camminando, quindi tocca Fine. Il dispositivo si aggiorna con la nuova calibrazione e sostituisce la precedente per un passo da camminata o corsa. Per ripristinare le impostazioni di default della calibrazione di Nike + iPod: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Sensore > Calibra > Reimposta passo (o Reimposta corsa). m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Sensore > Calibra > Reimposta camminata (o Reimposta corsa) > Reimposta. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod, quindi tocca “Reimposta calibrazione”. Impostare l’unità di distanza Puoi impostare Nike + iPod in modo che misuri le sessioni in miglia o chilometri. Per impostare l’unità di distanza: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni e imposta Distanze su Miglia o Chilometri.108 m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Distanze, quindi scegli Miglia o Chilometri. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Distanze, quindi scegli Miglia o Chilometri. Inserire il peso Per inserire il tuo peso: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Peso, quindi inserisci il tuo peso. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Peso, quindi inserisci il tuo peso. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Peso, quindi inserisci il tuo peso. Per migliorare la precisione del calcolo delle calorie bruciate, aggiorna il peso se cambia. Bloccare il dispositivo durante una sessione Puoi bloccare iPhone o iPod touch in modo da impedire l’attivazione accidentale dei comandi durante una sessione. Per bloccare iPhone o iPod touch: m Premi il pulsante Pausa/Riattiva. Per sbloccarlo, premi il pulsante Pausa/Riattiva o il pulsante Home e trascina il cursore. Ottenere informazioni vocali Quando ti alleni, Nike + iPod fornisce periodicamente informazioni vocali sul tuo stato. Puoi scegliere una voce femminile o maschile oppure disattivare il feedback.109 Per impostare il tipo di voce o disattivare le informazioni vocali: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni, quindi imposta “Feedback parlato” su Uomo, Donna o No. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Feedback parlato, quindi scegli Uomo, Donna o Disattivato. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Feedback parlato, quindi scegli Uomo, Donna o Disattivato. Quando le informazioni vocali sono disattivate, puoi comunque ottenere le informazioni vocali manualmente. Per ottenere manualmente informazioni vocali: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante centrale in qualsiasi momento durante la sessione. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante Standby/Riattiva in qualsiasi momento durante la sessione. m iPhone e iPod touch: premi il pulsante Home mentre il dispositivo è bloccato. Su iPod nano, il feedback parlato è disponibile in alcune lingue oltre alla lingua inglese. Se imposti iPod nano su una di queste lingue e lo colleghi al computer (che deve essere connesso a Internet) iTunes ti chiede di scaricare le informazioni in quella lingua.  iPod nano (quintaa generazione o precedente) può avere solo una versione del feedback parlato diversa dall’Inglese.  iPhone, iPod touch e iPod nano (sesta generazione) supportano automaticamente il feedback parlato in tutte le lingue.110 Usare una PowerSong Scegli un brano che ti da una marcia in più e convertilo nella tua PowerSong. In qualsiasi momento durante la sessione potrai ascoltare la tua PowerSong. Per scegliere una PowerSong: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > PowerSong, quindi scegli un brano. Con iPod nano (quinta generazione) puoi anche utilizzare una playlist come PowerSong. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > PowerSong, quindi scegli un brano. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > PowerSong, quindi scegli un brano. Per riprodurre il brano PowerSong: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): tieni premuto il pulsante centrale durante una sessione. Il brano PowerSong viene riprodotto dopo una breve pausa. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva per riattivare lo schermo, quindi tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante PowerSong, quindi tocca PowerSong. Quando lo schermo è attivo, puoi anche mettere due dita sullo schermo e tenerle premute per avviare il brano PowerSong. m iPhone e iPod touch: tocca PowerSong nella schermata della sessione. Se iPhone o iPod touch è bloccato, premi il pulsante Home, trascina il cursore per sbloccare, quindi tocca PowerSong.111 Mettere in pausa una sessione Puoi mettere in pausa una sessione, arrestando temporaneamente la musica e la raccolta di dati e riprendere la sessione in un secondo momento senza perdere alcun dato. Per mettere in pausa o riprendere una sessione: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante Riproduci/Pausa (’). m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante Pausa. Tocca Pausa. Tocca Riprendi per riprendere la sessione. Se lo schermo di iPod nano (sesta generazione) non è attivo, premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva per riattivarlo. m iPhone e iPod touch: tocca Pausa. Se iPhone o iPod touch è bloccato, premi il pulsante Home una volta. Tocca Riproduci per riprendere la sessione. Ricevere chiamate durante una sessione Puoi utilizzare iPhone per rispondere alle chiamate durante la sessione. Quando ricevi una chiamata, la sessione viene automaticamente messa in pausa quando rispondi. Per rispondere a una chiamata: m Tocca Rispondi oppure premi il tasto microfono se stai utilizzando la cuffia auricolare stereo. Se iPhone è bloccato, trascina il cursore per sbloccarlo. Per silenziare una chiamata: m Premi il pulsante Pausa/Riattiva o il pulsante del volume. Puoi sempre rispondere a una telefonata dopo averla silenziata, fino a quando non si attiva la segreteria. Per rifiutare a una chiamata: m Tocca Rifiuta oppure tieni premuto il pulsante microfono sulla cuffia auricolare per circa due secondi, quindi rilascialo. Due leggeri bip confermano che la telefonata è stata rifiutata.112 Inoltre, per rifiutare una chiamata, puoi premere il pulsante Pausa/Riattiva due volte. Questo disattiva la suoneria e la musica non riprenderà fino a quando la chiamata non verrà trasferita alla segreteria telefonica; la sessione continua in background. Per ripristinare la sessione dopo una chiamata: m Tocca Riproduci. Cambiare la musica nel corso di una sessione Durante una sessione, puoi cambiare musica senza perdere i dati della sessione. Mentre cambi musica, la sessione viene messa in pausa. Per cambiare la musica nel corso di una sessione: 1 iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): premi il pulsante Menu e scegli “Cambia musica”. La sessione viene messa in pausa. iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante Pausa. Tocca Pausa, quindi tocca “Modifica musica”. Se lo schermo di iPod nano (sesta generazione) non è attivo, premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva per riattivarlo. iPhone e iPod touch: tocca Pausa, quindi tocca “Cambia musica”. Se il dispositivo è bloccato, premi prima il pulsante Home, quindi trascina il cursore per sbloccarlo. 2 iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli una nuova musica. La sessione riprende automaticamente. iPhone iPod touch e iPod nano (sesta generazione): scegli una nuova musica. 113 Inviare automaticamente le sessioni a Nikeplus.com Puoi impostare iTunes per l’invio automatico dei dati relativi alla sessione a nikeplus. com via Internet, quando colleghi iPod nano al computer. Per inviare automaticamente delle sessioni a nikeplus.com: 1 Assicurati che il computer sia connesso a Internet, quindi collega iPod nano al computer. 2 Apri iTunes sul computer, fai clic sul pannello “Nike + iPod”, quindi seleziona “Invia automaticamente i dati della sessione a nikeplus.com”. 3 Fai clic su “Visita nikeplus.com” sotto il riquadro oppure, se hai già impostato l’invio automatico della sessione, fai clic su Visita nella finestra di dialogo che appare. Si apre il sito web nikeplus.com e viene visualizzato un grafico con i dati relativi alla tua sessione più recente. 4 Fai clic su “Registra le corse” ed esegui il login oppure registrati se necessario. Per la Politica di tutela della privacy e i Termini e condizioni di utilizzo Nike, consulta il sito web nikeplus.com. Riesaminare le sessioni sul dispositivo iPod nano, iPhone o iPod touch salvano data, ora, durata, distanza, passo e calorie bruciate delle ultime mille sessioni. Per riesaminare sessioni recenti sul dispositivo: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Cronologia. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Fitness > Cronologia, nella parte inferiore dello schermo.114 m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Nike + iPod, quindi tocca Cronologia nella parte inferiore dello schermo. iPod nano (quinta generazione o precedente) fornisce i totali giornalieri di tutte le tue sessioni: sessioni di Nike + iPod, pedometro contapassi e sessioni cardio utilizzando attrezzature da ginnastica compatibili con Nike + iPod. Per visualizzare le sessioni su iPod nano (quinta generazione o precedente): 1 Scegli “Totali giornalieri” dal menu Cronologia. 2 Scegli una data e un’attività. 3 Ruota iPod nano (5a generazione) in posizione orizzontale per visualizzare una rappresentazione grafica dell’attività. Per eliminare una singola sessione di allenamento: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Cronologia. Scegli una sessione di allenamento, tieni premuto il pulsante centrale, quindi scegli Elimina. Non puoi eliminare singole sessioni su iPod nano (sesta generazione). m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli “Nike + iPod” e tocca Cronologia. Tocca Modifica, scegli una sessione di allenamento, quindi tocca Elimina. Su iPhone, iPod touch e iPod nano (sesta generazione), puoi eliminare tutte le sessioni di allenamento dalla Cronologia, toccando Cancella nella parte superiore della schermata Cronologia.115 Creare abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzate Le abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzate ti consentono di scegliere e ripetere facilmente una sessione. iPod nano (quarta generazione o successiva) salva automaticamente le sessioni completate come abbreviazioni. iPhone e iPod touch ti consentono di creare abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzate. Per creare un’abbreviazione di sessione personalizzata su iPhone o iPod touch: 1 Scegli “Nike + iPod”, quindi tocca “Le mie sessioni” nella parte inferiore della schermata. 2 Tocca Più (+), quindi scegli il tipo di sessione e il relativo obiettivo. 3 Scegli la musica, inserisci un nome per la sessione, quindi tocca Registra. Nota: puoi creare abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzate solo su iPhone e iPod touch (seconda generazione o successiva). Per eliminare un’abbreviazione di sessione personalizzata su iPhone o iPod touch: m Scegli “Nike + iPod”, quindi tocca “Le mie sessioni”. Tocca Modifica, scegli un’abbreviazione, quindi tocca Elimina. Per scegliere un’abbreviazione di sessione personalizzata: m iPod nano (quarta e quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod, quindi scegli un’abbreviazione. Il nome assegnato alle abbreviazioni varia in base al tipo di sessione e musica. Non è possibile eliminarle. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Fitness > Corsa, quindi tocca “Le mie sessioni”. Scegli un’abbreviazione. Il nome assegnato alle abbreviazioni varia in base al tipo di sessione e musica. Non è possibile eliminarle. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli “Nike + iPod”, quindi tocca “Le mie sessioni”. Le abbreviazioni vengono elencate in base al nome specificato al momento della creazione.116 La abbreviazioni di sessione personalizzata più recente compare in alto nell’elenco. Acquistare sessioni Nike+ Puoi acquistare e scaricare sessioni Nike+ contenenti un mix di musica continua e allenamento professionale. Quando acquisti una sessione Nike+, ricevi un’unica traccia di sessione con musica e voce, oltre a tutti i singoli brani presenti nel mix. Scegli mix per il tuo livello e stile di sessione. Per acquistare una sessione Nike+: 1 Apri iTunes e fai clic su “Tunes Store” sul lato sinistro della finestra, quindi digita “Nike Sport Music” nel campo di ricerca di iTunes. 2 Fai clic sul pulsante Acquista accanto alla sessione Nike+ di tua scelta. 3 Segui le istruzioni su schermo per completare l’acquisto. Il download inizia automaticamente. 4 Collega il dispositivo al computer e carica la sessione sul dispositivo. Nota: negli Stati Uniti e in molti altri paesi, iTunes Store non è disponibile per i minori di età inferiore a 13 anni; per un elenco completo dei paesi consulta il sito www.apple.com/it/itunes/download. Soggetto a termini e condizioni. Per usare iTunes Store è necessario disporre di un accesso a Internet (potrebbe non essere gratuito). Associare un telecomando compatibile con Nike + iPod o un cardiofrequenzimetro I dispositivi compatibili con Nike + iPod sono in vendita separatamente dal kit sportivo Nike + iPod e dal sensore Nike + iPod. Puoi usare un telecomando compatibile per gestire Nike + iPod in modalità wireless durante l’allenamento.117 iPod nano (quinta generazione o successiva) supporta anche cardiofrequenzimetri compatibili con Nike + iPod. Nota: per utilizzare un cardiofrequenzimetro o un telecomando, il ricevitore iPod + Nike deve essere collegato a iPod nano (sesta generazione). Prima di usare uno di questi dispositivi per la prima volta, devi associare il ricevitore di iPod nano, iPhone o iPod touch. Per associare un telecomando compatibile con Nike + iPod (in vendita separatamente): m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): collega il ricevitore Nike + iPod a iPod nano, scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Telecomando > Associa, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Telecomando. Attiva le opzioni Telecomando, quindi tocca Associa. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Telecomando, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. Per associare un cardiofrequenzimetro compatibile con Nike + iPod (in vendita separatamente): m iPod nano (quinta generazione): collega il ricevitore Nike + iPod a iPod nano, scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Cardiofrequenzimetro > Associa, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Cardiofrequenzimetro > Associa, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo.118 Per eliminare l’associazione di un dispositivo: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Telecomando (o Cardiofrequenzimetro) > “Elimina associazione”, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Telecomando (o Cardiofrequenzimetro), quindi tocca “Elimina associazione”. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Telecomando, quindi tocca Elimina associazione. Puoi attivare o disattivare le funzioni di un telecomando compatibile con Nike + iPod senza eliminare l’associazione del dispositivo. Per attivare o disattivare la funzionalità telecomando: m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Telecomando, quindi imposta Telecomando su Attivato o Disattivato. m iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Telecomando, quindi imposta Telecomando su Attivato o Disattivato. m iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Telecomando, quindi crea o rimuovi l’associazione con il telecomando.119 Allenarsi con iPod nano (sesta generazione) e un cardiofrequenzimetro Se disponi di iPod nano (sesta generazione) e di un cardiofrequenzimetro Nike + iPod compatibile (acquistato separatamente), iPod nano può registrare e visualizzare la tua frequenza cardiaca mentre ti alleni. Puoi anche specificare un intervallo o “zona” con la frequenza cardiaca minima e massima che desideri mantenere durante una sessione e tracciare quanto riesci a mantenere la tua frequenza cardiaca in quella zona mentre ti alleni. Quando ti alleni, iPod nano visualizza la tua frequenza cardiaca corrente; una freccia rivolta verso l’alto o il basso appare quando devi aumentare o ridurre l’attività. Puoi usare un cardiofrequenzimetro con una qualsiasi delle sessioni standard. Inoltre, puoi monitorare la tua frequenza cardiaca anche se partecipi ad attività diverse dalla corsa o dalla camminata. Ad esempio, puoi usare iPod nano e un cardiofrequenzimetro quando partecipi ad attività sportive come basket, aerobica, circuito, golf, escursionismo, calcio e altro ancora. Quando finisci di allenarti, puoi trasferire le informazioni sulla frequenza cardiaca al tuo account nikeplus.com, per poterle rivedere. Mentre configuri una sessione, puoi impostare una zona con la frequenza cardiaca minima e massima che vuoi mantenere quando selezioni una sessione. Devi prima attivare la funzionalità di allenamento a zona. Per attivare o disattivare gli allenamenti a zona: m Tocca Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod, quindi tocca il pulsante Sì/No in “Zona sessione”. Quando attivi gli allenamenti a zona e selezioni una sessione, appaiono delle opzioni per l’impostazione di una zona di frequenza cardiaca. Mentre ti alleni, le informazioni sulla frequenza cardiaca vengono registrate e visualizzate per qualsiasi tipo di sessione. 120 iPod nano (sesta generazione) fornisce anche una sessione con frequenza cardiaca. Per eseguire una sessione con frequenza cardiaca, specifica la zona di frequenza cardiaca che vuoi mantenere, scegli il tipo di attività che stai per compiere e goditi l’allenamento. Tutte le informazioni sulla frequenza cardiaca vengono registrate automaticamente. Quando esegui una sessione con frequenza cardiaca, non hai bisogno di un sensore nella scarpa per registrare il movimento. Per iniziare una sessione con frequenza cardiaca: 1 Tocca Fitness > Corsa > Frequenza cardiaca. 2 Imposta la zona di frequenza cardiaca che desideri. 3 Scegli un’attività e tocca Fine. 4 Scegli la musica che preferisci per l’allenamento. 5 Tocca “Avvia sessione” e inizia la sessione. 6 Quando hai finito, premi il tasto Standby/Riattiva per riattivare lo schermo, tocca Pausa, tocca lo schermo per visualizzare il pulsante Pausa, tocca Pausa. Tocca “Termina sessione” per terminare la tua sessione con frequenza cardiaca. Quando completi una sessione con frequenza cardiaca, puoi trasferire le informazioni al tuo account nikeplus.com, così come faresti per qualsiasi altra sessione. 121 Associare un altro sensore Una volta che il dispositivo viene associato a un sensore specifico, esso viene impostato per collegarsi solo a quel sensore. Se usi un sensore diverso, devi impostare il dispositivo per associare l’altro sensore. Potresti farlo, ad esempio, se in famiglia c’è più di una persona con un sensore e scarpe Nike+ ready. Per creare un’associazione con un altro sensore: 1 iPod nano: collega il ricevitore a iPod. 2 Mettiti le scarpe con il nuovo sensore assicurandoti che nelle vicinanze non vi sia un altro sensore Nike + iPod. Cammina per attivare il sensore in modo che il ricevitore possa rilevarlo. 3 Associa il sensore al tuo dispositivo:  iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Nike + iPod > Impostazioni > Sensore > Associa, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. Un messaggio indica che iPod è stato associato al nuovo sensore.  iPod nano (solo quinta generazione): scegli Impostazioni > Fitness > Kit Sport Nike + iPod > Sensore, tocca Associa, quindi tocca lo schermo mentre cammini o corri per associare nuovamente il dispositivo con un altro sensore.  iPhone e iPod touch: scegli Impostazioni > Nike + iPod > Sensore, tocca Nuovo, quindi segui le istruzioni su schermo. Nota: se effettui l’associazione con un sensore già associato in precedenza, Nike + iPod rileva le impostazioni di calibrazione. Non è necessario calibrare di nuovo.122 Se colleghi un ricevitore iPod a un altro iPod e lo utilizzi con lo stesso sensore, non dovrai riassociare o ricalibrare. Il ricevitore archivia le impostazioni, la cronologia di sessione e le abbreviazioni di sessione. Non è necessario eseguire nuovamente l’associazione o la calibrazione. Mettere in stop il sensore Nike + iPod Di default, il sensore è pronto e attivo. Se desideri conservare il sensore per un periodo di tempo prolungato o fare in modo che smetta di trasmettere, puoi metterlo in stop. Importante: per il rispetto della normativa vigente, metti il sensore in stop prima di salire su un aereo. Per mettere il sensore in stop: m Usa una penna o una graffetta per tenere premuto il pulsante Standby/Riattiva per tre secondi. Pulsante Pausa/Riattiva Per riattivare il sensore: m Usa una penna o una graffetta per mantenere premuto il pulsante Standby/Riattiva.123 Informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza ATTENZIONE: la mancata osservanza delle norme di sicurezza qui riportate può causare lesioni o danni. Esercizio fisico Prima di iniziare un programma di esercizio fisico, sottoporsi a un esame fisico completo da parte del medico. Prima di iniziare una sessione, praticare un esercizio di riscaldamento o stiramento. Praticare gli esercizi con precauzione e attenzione. Se necessario, rallenta prima di regolare il dispositivo mentre corri. Smettere immediatamente l’allenamento in caso di dolori, senso di debolezza, vertigine, spossatezza o respirazione affannosa. Quando si pratica esercizio fisico, ci si assumono i rischi inerenti a tale attività, comprese eventuali lesioni che possano derivarne. Non usare il ricevitore, iPhone o iPod sotto la pioggia o in prossimità di bacini d’acqua o altri luoghi umidi. Rischio di soffocamento Il ricevitore e il sensore rappresentano un rischio di soffocamento potenziale. Mantenerli fuori della portata dei bambini di età inferiore a tre anni. Evitare danni all’udito L’uso di auricolari a volume elevato può causare danni permanenti all’udito. Impostare il volume su un livello di sicurezza. Con il passare del tempo ci si può abituare a un volume più alto che può sembrare normale e danneggia invece l’udito. Se si sente un ronzio nelle orecchie o le voci giungono attutite, interrompere l’ascolto e farsi controllare l’udito. Più alto è il volume e più immediati i danni all’udito. Gli esperti suggeriscono di proteggere l’udito:  Limitare la quantità di tempo in cui si usano auricolari a volume elevato.  Evitare di aumentare il volume per isolarsi da un ambiente rumoroso.  Abbassa il volume se non senti le persone che parlano nelle vicinanze.124 Smontare il sensore Non tentare di aprire il sensore, disassemblarlo o rimuoverne la batteria. Il sensore non contiene parti sostituibili dall’utente. Ulteriori informazioni, servizio e supporto Per Procedi così Risposte a domande frequenti su Nike + iPod Vai su www.apple.com/it/support/nikeplus. Servizio e supporto per il sensore e il ricevitore Nike + iPod Vai su www.apple.com/it/support/nikeplus. Servizio e supporto per le scarpe Nike+ ready o il sito web nikeplus.com Vai su www.nikeplus.com. Informazioni sull’uso di iTunes Apri iTunes e scegli Aiuto > Aiuto iTunes. Informazioni sull’uso di iPod nano o iPod touch Vai su www.apple.com/it/support/ipod. Informazioni sull’uso di iPhone Visita il sito www.apple.com/it/support/iphone.125 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radiofrequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product was tested for EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded cables and connectors through an Apple Authorized Reseller. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer or reseller for assistance. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance 1 Infinite Loop, MS 26-A Cupertino, CA 95014 Wireless Information FCC Wireless Compliance for the Nike + iPod Sensor. The antenna used with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant. Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil.126 Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B, RSS 200 specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 RSS 210 du Canada. European Wireless EU Declaration of Conformity This wireless device complies with the specifications EN 300 328, EN 301-489, EN 50371, and EN 60950 following the provisions of the R&TTE Directive. European Community Complies with European Directives 72/23/EEC, 89/336/ EEC, and 99/5/EEC. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy The radiated output power of the included devices is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Disposal and Recycling Information The Nike + iPod Sensor contains a battery. Dispose of your Nike + iPod Sensor according to local environmental laws and guidelines. When discarding shoes, remove the Nike + iPod Sensor and dispose of it properly. For information about Apple’s recycling program, go to www.apple.com/recycling. 2011 Türkiye EEE yönetmeligine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Esyalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur.127 Brasil: Informações sobre descarte e reciclagem O símbolo acima indica que este produto e/ou sua bateria não devem ser descartadas no lixo doméstico. Quando decidir descartar este produto e/ou sua bateria, faça-o de acordo com as leis e diretrizes ambientais locais. Para informações sobre o programa de reciclagem da Apple, pontos de coleta e telefone de informações, visite www.apple.com/br/environment. European Union: Disposal Information The symbol above means that according to local laws and regulations your product should be disposed of separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities. Some collection points accept products for free. The separate collection and recycling of your product at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen. Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen. Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd. Taiwan Battery Statement Chinese Battery Statement Apple and the Environment At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental impact of our operations and products. For more information, go to: www.apple.com/environmentwww.apple.com/ipod/nike www.apple.com/support/nikeplus ZM034-6208-A Printed in XXXX Félicitations. Vous et votre MacBook Pro êtes faits l’un pour l’autre.Bienvenue sur votre MacBook Pro. www.apple.com/fr/macbookpro Trackpad Multi-Touch Utilisez ces gestes pour contrôler votre Mac. Centre d’aide gestes facetime Caméra FaceTime HD intégrée Passez des appels vidéos vers les derniers iPad, iPhone, iPod touch ou Mac. Centre d’aide E/S à haut débit Thunderbolt Connectez des appareils et écrans hautes performances. Centre d’aide thunderbolt Pincer pour zoomer Faire pivoter des images Faire défiler vers le haut ou vers le bas Afficher Mission Control Basculer entre les apps plein écran Cliquer n’importe où MacBook?ProMission Control Une vue d’ensemble de tout ce qui tourne sur votre Mac. Centre d’aide mission control OS X Lion www.apple.com/fr/macosx Plein écran Affichez les apps en plein écran d’un simple clic. Centre d’aide plein écran Mac App Store Le meilleur moyen de découvrir et télécharger des apps Mac. Centre d’aide launchpad mac app store Launchpad Bénéficiez d’un accès instantané et simplifié à toutes vos apps. Centre d’aide iPhoto Organisez, modifiez et partagez vos photos. Aide iPhoto photos iMovie Transformez vos vidéos perso en films cultes. Aide iMovie movie GarageBand Créez des morceaux sensationnels en toute simplicité. Aide GarageBand record Mail Regroupez vos messages par conversations. Centre d’aide mail HELLO FROM CUPERTINO, CATable des matières 5 Chapitre 1 : Prêt, feu, configurez ! 9 Contenu de la boîte 9 Configuration du MacBook Pro 17 Extinction ou suspension d’activité de votre MacBook Pro Chapitre 2 : Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 20 Caractéristiques de base de votre MacBook Pro 22 Fonctionnalités du clavier de votre MacBook Pro 24 Ports de votre MacBook Pro 26 Utilisation du trackpad Multi-Touch 30 Utilisation de la batterie du MacBook Pro 31 Comment obtenir des réponses à vos doutes Chapitre 3 : Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 37 Remplacement du disque dur 45 Installation de mémoire supplémentaire Table des matières6 Table des matières Chapitre 4 : À tout problème sa solution 53 Une once de prévention 53 Problèmes vous empêchant d’utiliser votre MacBook Pro 58 Réparation, restauration ou réinstallation de logiciels Mac OS X 63 Utilisation d’Apple Hardware Test 64 Problèmes de connexion à Internet 67 Problèmes de communication Wi-Fi 68 Maintien à jour de vos logiciels 69 Informations, services et assistance 72 Localisation du numéro de série de votre produit Chapitre 5 : Dernières recommandations 74 Informations importantes en matière de sécurité 79 Informations importantes sur la manipulation 82 Ergonomie 84 Apple et l’environnement 85 Regulatory Compliance InformationCentre d’aide Assistant migration www.apple.com/fr/macbookpro Prêt, feu, configurez ! 18 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! Votre MacBook Pro est conçu pour pouvoir être configuré rapidement et utilisé immédiatement. Si vous n’avez jamais utilisé de MacBook Pro ou si vous n’êtes pas familiarisé avec les ordinateurs Mac, vous trouverez dans ce chapitre des instructions qui vous aideront à débuter. Important : lisez attentivement toutes les instructions d’installation (et les consignes de sécurité à partir de la page 74) avant d’utiliser votre ordinateur pour la première fois. Si vous êtes un utilisateur expérimenté, peut-être êtes-vous déjà en mesure d’utiliser votre nouvel ordinateur. Veillez néanmoins à consulter les informations du chapitre 2, « Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien », pour découvrir les nouvelles fonctionnalités de ce MacBook Pro. Vous trouverez la plupart des réponses à vos questions dans le Centre d’aide. Pour obtenir des informations sur l’utilisation du Centre d’aide, consultez la section « Comment obtenir des réponses à vos doutes » à la page 31. Les plus récentes informations concernant votre MacBook Pro sont disponibles sur le site web Assistance Apple à la page www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookpro. Comme Apple publie régulièrement de nouvelles versions et mises à jour de ses logiciels système, il est possible que les images de ce manuel soient légèrement différentes de ce que vous voyez à l’écran.Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! 9 Contenu de la boîte Adaptateur secteur Câble secteur MagSafe de 85 W ® Configuration du MacBook Pro Votre MacBook Pro est conçu pour pouvoir être configuré rapidement et utilisé immédiatement. Les pages suivantes contiennent des informations qui vous guideront tout au long du processus de configuration, notamment des opérations suivantes :  Le branchement de l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W.  Le branchement des câbles et l’accès à un réseau.  Allumage de votre MacBook Pro  La configuration d’un compte d’utilisateur et d’autres paramètres via Assistant réglages.10 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez !  La configuration des préférences et du bureau Mac OS X. Important : Retirez le film protecteur qui entoure l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W avant de configurer le MacBook Pro. Étape 1 : Branchez l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W pour alimenter le MacBook Pro et recharger sa batterie. Assurez-vous que la fiche CA est complètement insérée dans l’adaptateur et que les broches de la fiche sont complètement déployées. Branchez la fiche CA de votre adaptateur sur une prise secteur, puis branchez le connecteur MagSafe sur le port secteur MagSafe. En approchant le connecteur MagSafe du port, vous ressentirez la force d’un aimant l’attirant. Connecteur MagSafe Câble secteur Fiche CA ¯Port secteur MagSafe Pour rallonger le câble de l’adaptateur secteur, remplacez la fiche CA par le câble d’alimentation secteur. Tirez d’abord sur la fiche CA pour la retirer de l’adaptateur, puis branchez le câble d’alimentation secteur inclus sur l’adaptateur, en vous assurant que tout est branché correctement.Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! 11 Lorsque vous déconnectez l’adaptateur secteur d’une prise de courant ou de l’ordinateur, débranchez la prise et non le câble. La première fois que vous branchez l’adaptateur secteur sur le MacBook Pro, la lampe témoin du connecteur MagSafe s’allume. Si la lumière est orange, la batterie est en cours de rechargement. Un voyant lumineux vert indique que la batterie est complètement chargée. Si aucune lumière ne s’allume, assurez-vous que le connecteur est correctement branché et que l’adaptateur secteur est branché sur une prise de courant.12 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! Étape 2 : Connectez-vous à un réseau sans fil ou câblé.  Pour utiliser un réseau sans fil à l’aide de la technologie Wi-Fi 802.11n intégrée, assurez-vous que la borne d’accès sans fil est activée et que vous disposez du nom du réseau. Après avoir allumé votre MacBook Pro, l’Assistant réglages vous guide à travers le processus de connexion. Pour obtenir des conseils de dépannage, consultez la page 67.  Pour utiliser une connexion câblée, reliez votre MacBook Pro et un modem câble, un modem DSL ou un réseau à l’aide d’un câble Ethernet. ® Câble Ethernet Port Ethernet Gigabit (10/100/1000Base-T) GChapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! 13 Étape 3 : Appuyez brièvement sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) pour allumer votre MacBook Pro. Votre ordinateur émet un signal sonore lorsque vous l’allumez. ® ® Bouton d’alimentation Le démarrage du MacBook Pro prend quelques instants. Après le démarrage, Assistant réglages s’ouvre automatiquement. Si votre MacBook Pro ne s’allume pas, consultez la section « Si votre MacBook Pro ne s’allume ou ne démarre pas » à la page 55.14 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! Étape 4 : Configurez votre MacBook Pro à l’aide de l’Assistant réglages. La première fois que vous démarrez votre MacBook Pro, Assistant réglages se lance. Assistant réglages vous aide à définir votre réseau Wi-Fi, à configurer un compte utilisateur et à transférer des informations d’un autre Mac ou PC. Vous pouvez également transférer des informations d’une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine ou d’un autre disque. Si vous effectuez la migration depuis un autre Mac, vous devrez peut-être mettre à jour les logiciels si Mac OS X 10.5.3 ou ultérieur n’est pas installé sur l’autre Mac. Pour effectuer la migration depuis un PC, téléchargez Assistant migration sur www.apple.com/fr/migrate-to-mac, et installez-le sur le PC d’origine. Une fois Assistant réglages lancé sur votre MacBook Pro, vous pouvez, sans quitter cet assistant, passer à l’autre ordinateur si vous devez mettre à jour ses logiciels, puis revenir à votre MacBook Pro pour terminer la configuration. Remarque : Si vous ne passez pas par Assistant réglages pour transférer vos informations lors du premier démarrage de votre MacBook Pro, vous pouvez procéder à cette opération ultérieurement. Ouvrez Assistant migration dans le dossier Utilitaires du Launchpad. Pour obtenir de l’aide sur l’utilisation d’Assistant migration, ouvrez le Centre d’aide et recherchez le terme « Assistant migration ».Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! 15 Pour configurer votre MacBook Pro : 1 Dans Assistant réglages, suivez les instructions à l’écran jusqu’à ce que l’écran « Transférer des données vers ce Mac » s’affiche. 2 Optez pour une configuration de base ou une configuration avec migration, ou transférez les informations d’une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine ou d’un autre disque :  Pour effectuer une configuration de base, sélectionnez « Ne pas transférer maintenant » et cliquez sur Continuer. Suivez les invites restantes pour sélectionner votre réseau câblé ou sans fil, configurez votre compte puis quittez Assistant réglages.  Pour effectuer une configuration avec migration, sélectionnez « À partir d’un autre Mac ou d‘un PC » et cliquez sur Continuer. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour sélectionner le Mac ou le PC depuis lequel effectuer la migration. Votre Mac ou PC doit se trouver sur le même réseau câblé ou sans fil. Suivez les instructions à l’écran.  Pour transférer des informations d’une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine ou d’un autre disque, sélectionnez « À partir d’une sauvegarde Time Machine ou d’un autre disque » et cliquez sur Continuer. Sélectionnez la copie de sauvegarde ou l’autre disque depuis lequel effectuer la migration. Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si vous ne comptez pas conserver ou utiliser votre autre ordinateur, il est préférable de lui retirer son autorisation à lire la musique, les vidéos ou les livres audio achetés dans l’iTunes Store. Le retrait d’autorisation d’accès d’un ordinateur empêche qu’un autre utilisateur lise les morceaux, vidéos et livres audio que vous avez achetés et libère une autre autorisation pour en permettre l’utilisation. Pour en savoir plus sur le retrait de l’autorisation d’accès, choisissez Aide iTunes dans le menu Aide de l’application iTunes.16 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! Étape 5 : Personnalisez le bureau Mac OS X et définissez les préférences. Vous avez la possibilité de personnaliser rapidement l’apparence de votre bureau grâce à Préférences Système, votre centre de commandes renfermant la plupart des réglages de votre MacBook Pro. Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système dans la barre des menus ou cliquez sur l’icône Préférences Système dans le Dock. Barre des menus menu Aide icône de recherche Spotlight icône du Finder Dock Icône de Préférences SystèmeChapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! 17 Important : Dans les préférences Utilisateurs et groupes, vous pouvez définir une option pour réinitialiser votre mot de passe d’ouverture de session en cas d’oubli de ce dernier. Pour obtenir de l’aide sur des préférences système, ouvrez le Centre d’aide et recherchez « préférences système » ou la préférence spécifique qui vous intéresse. Extinction ou suspension d’activité de votre MacBook Pro Lorsque vous avez terminé d’utiliser votre MacBook Pro, suspendez son activité ou éteignez-le. Suspension de l’activité de votre MacBook Pro Suspendez l’activité de votre MacBook Pro si vous ne comptez vous en éloigner que quelques instants. Vous pourrez ensuite le réactiver rapidement sans avoir à le redémarrer. Pour suspendre l’activité de votre MacBook Pro, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Rabattez l’écran.  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Suspendre l’activité dans la barre des menus.  Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et cliquez sur Suspendre l’activité dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît.  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système, cliquez sur Économiseur d’énergie, puis définissez un délai pour la suspension d’activité.18 Chapitre 1 Prêt, feu, configurez ! AVIS : Patientez quelques secondes jusqu’à ce que la lampe témoin de suspension d’activité clignote (signalant que l’activité de l’ordinateur est suspendue et que le disque dur a cessé de tourner) avant de déplacer le MacBook Pro Tout déplacement de votre ordinateur lorsque le disque dur est en train de tourner risque d’endommager ce dernier et d’entraîner une perte de données ou l’impossibilité de démarrer à partir du disque dur. Pour réactiver votre MacBook Pro :  Si l’écran est fermé, il suffit de l’ouvrir pour réactiver votre MacBook Pro.  Si l’écran est déjà ouvert, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) ou sur l’une des touches du clavier. À la réactivation de votre MacBook Pro, vos applications, vos documents et vos réglages sont conservés tels que vous les aviez laissés. Extinction de votre MacBook Pro Si vous ne comptez pas utiliser votre MacBook Pro pendant deux jours ou plus, il est préférable de l’éteindre. Le voyant lumineux de suspension d’activité reste allumé quelques instants au moment de l’extinction. Pour éteindre votre MacBook Pro, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Éteindre dans la barre des menus.  Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et cliquez sur Éteindre dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît. Si vous comptez ranger votre MacBook Pro pour une durée prolongée, consultez la rubrique page 81 pour obtenir des informations sur les mesures à prendre pour éviter que votre batterie ne se décharge complètement.Centre d’aide Mac OS X www.apple.com/fr/macosx Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 220 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Caractéristiques de base de votre MacBook Pro ® ® Bouton d’alimentation Lampe témoin de la caméra Caméra FaceTime HD Haut-parleurs stéréo integrés Lampes témoins de la batterie (côté) Microphone Lampe témoin de suspension d’activité Récepteur à infrarouge Trackpad Lecteur optique à chargement par fente Logement de sécuritéChapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 21 Caméra FaceTime intégrée et lampe témoin de la caméra Utilisez l’application FaceTime incluse pour passer des appels vidéo vers d’autres utilisateurs de FaceTime (sur n’importe quel iPhone 4, nouvel iPod touch ou Mac doté de FaceTime), prendre des photos avec Photo Booth ou capturer de la vidéo avec iMovie. La lampe témoin brille lorsque la caméra FaceTime HD fonctionne. Micro intégré Capturez des sons grâce au micro ou discutez avec des amis sur Internet à l’aide de FaceTime ou d’iChat. Haut-parleurs stéréo intégrés Permettent d’écouter de la musique, des films, des jeux et d’autres types de données multimédias. Batterie intégrée et témoins de la batterie Utilisez la batterie lorsque vous n’êtes pas à proximité d’une prise de courant. Appuyez sur le bouton de la batterie pour activer les lampes témoins du niveau de charge. Trackpad Vous pouvez cliquer ou double-cliquer n’importe où sur le trackpad. Touchez le trackpad avec un ou plusieurs doigts pour déplacer le pointeur ou utiliser les gestes Multi-Touch (décrits à la page 26). Lampe témoin de suspension d’activité Une lumière blanche clignote lorsque le MacBook Pro est en suspension d’activité. Récepteur à infrarouge Associé à une télécommande Apple Remote (vendue séparément), le récepteur à infrarouge vous permet de contrôler, jusqu’à une distance de 9,1 mètres, l’application Keynote sur votre MacBook Pro. Logement de sécurité Ce logement vous permet de protéger votre ordinateur contre le vol en y fixant un cadenas et un câble (disponible séparément). SuperDrive à chargement par fente Ce lecteur optique permet de lire et de graver des CD et DVD de taille standard. ® Bouton d’alimentation Permet d’allumer ou d’éteindre votre MacBook Pro ou d’en suspendre l’activité.22 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Fonctionnalités du clavier de votre MacBook Pro Touches de réglage du volume Touches de réglage de luminosité Touche d’éjection de disque Touche silence Touches multimédias Touches d’éclairage du clavier Touche Mission Control Touche Launchpad ® Touche de fonction (Fn)Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 23 Touche de fonction (Fn) Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour activer les actions personnalisées affectées aux touches de fonction (F1 à F12). Pour apprendre comment personnaliser les touches de fonction, choisissez Aide > Centre d’aide dans la barre des menus, puis recherchez « touches de fonction ». Touches de réglage de luminosité (F1, F2) Permettent d’augmenter ( ) ou de réduire ( ) la luminosité de l’écran. Touche Mission Control (F3) Permet d’ouvrir Mission Control afin d’avoir une vue complète des éléments en cours d’exécution sur votre MacBook Pro, y compris le Dashboard, tous vos espaces et toutes les fenêtres ouvertes. Touche Launchpad (F4) Permet d’ouvrir le Launchpad afin d’afficher instantanément toutes les applications de votre MacBook Pro. Cliquez sur une application pour l’ouvrir. o Touches d’éclairage du clavier (F5, F6) Permettent d’augmenter (o) ou de diminuer (ø) la luminosité de l’éclairage du clavier. ’ Touches multimédias (F7, F8, F9) Retour rapide ( ), lecture ou pause (’) ou avance rapide ( ) d’un morceau de musique, d’un film ou d’un diaporama. — Touche silence (F10) Permet de désactiver le son provenant des haut-parleurs intégrés et du port de sortie audio. - Touches de réglage du volume (F11, F12) Permettent d’augmenter (-) ou de diminuer (–) le volume du son provenant des hautparleurs intégrés ou du port de sortie audio. C Touche d’éjection de disques Maintenez cette touche enfoncée pour éjecter un disque que vous n’utilisez pas. Il est également possible d’éjecter un disque en faisant glisser son icône dans la Corbeille.24 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Ports de votre MacBook Pro ® ¯ Port Ethernet Gigabit (10/100/1000Base-T) G Port de sortie de ligne audio f Port d’entrée de ligne audio , Ports USB 2.0 d Logement ExpressCard/34 Port d’adaptateur secteur MagSafe Port FireWire 800 H Port ThunderboltChapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 25 ¯ Port d’adaptateur secteur MagSafe Connectez-y l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W (inclus) pour recharger la batterie du MacBook Pro. G Port Gigabit Ethernet Connectez-le à un réseau Ethernet haut débit, à un modem câble ou DSL ou encore à un autre ordinateur. Le port Ethernet détecte automatiquement les périphériques Ethernet sans avoir besoin de câble croisé Ethernet. H Port FireWire 800 Connectez-y des périphériques externes tels que des caméras vidéo numériques et des périphériques de stockage. Port Thunderbolt (données, vidéo et audio haut débit) Connectez-y des périphériques compatibles Thunderbolt pour des transferts de données haut débit, ou un moniteur externe utilisant un port Mini DisplayPort. Vous pouvez acheter des adaptateurs pour connecter des moniteurs DVI, HDMI ou VGA. d Trois ports USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) haut débit Grâce à ces ports, vous pouvez brancher entre autres un iPod, un iPhone, un iPad, une souris, un clavier, une imprimante, un disque dur, un appareil photo numérique, une manette de jeu, un modem sur votre MacBook Pro. , Port d’entrée audio Permet de connecter un micro ou un appareil audio numérique à votre MacBook Pro. f Port de sortie audio Permet de connecter des haut-parleurs externes, un casque (y compris iPhone) ou tout autre périphérique audio numérique. Logement ExpressCard/34 Développez les fonctionnalités de votre MacBook Pro grâce aux cartes ExpressCard standard de 34 mm. Pour éjecter une ExpressCard, appuyez doucement dessus pour activer le ressort puis retirez-la du logement.26 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Remarque : Les adaptateurs et les autres accessoires sont vendus séparément sur le site www.apple.com/fr/store ou dans votre Apple Store local. Utilisation du trackpad Multi-Touch Le trackpad vous permet de déplacer le pointeur et de réaliser divers gestes MultiTouch. Contrairement aux trackpads habituels, celui du MacBook Pro fonctionne comme un bouton en vous permettant de cliquer n’importe où sur sa surface. Pour activer les gestes Multi-Touch, visionner des vidéos d’apprentissage des gestes et définir d’autres options pour le trackpad, choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Trackpad. Voici différentes manières d’utiliser le trackpad de votre MacBook Pro :  Le défilement à deux doigts vous permet de défiler rapidement vers le haut, le bas ou latéralement dans la fenêtre active.Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 27  Le clic secondaire ou « clic droit » vous permet d’accéder aux commandes du menu contextuel. • Pour configurer le clic secondaire à deux doigts n’importe où sur le trackpad, sélectionnez « Clic secondaire » dans la sous-fenêtre Pointer et cliquer des préférences Trackpad. • Pour configurer une zone de clic secondaire à un doigt dans le coin inférieur gauche ou droit du trackpad, sélectionnez « Clic secondaire » dans la sous-fenêtre Pointer et cliquer des préférences Trackpad et choisissez une option dans le menu local. zone de clic secondaire Remarque : Vous pouvez également effectuer un clic secondaire en maintenant la touche Contrôle (Ctrl) enfoncée au moment où vous cliquez.28 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Les gestes de trackpad suivants fonctionnent dans certaines applications. Pour effectuer ces gestes, faites glisser légèrement vos doigts sur la surface du trackpad. Pour en savoir plus, reportez-vous aux préférences Trackpad ou choisissez Aide > Centre d’aide, puis lancez une recherche sur le mot « trackpad ».  Le pincement ou l’écartement de deux doigts vous permet d’effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière dans les PDF, les images, les photos, etc.  Le pivotement de deux doigts vous permet de faire pivoter des photos, des pages, etc.Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 29  Le balayage à trois doigts fonctionne dans le Finder et dans toutes les applications. Le balayage à trois doigts vers la gauche ou la droite vous permet de passer d’une application plein écran à une autre. Le balayage à trois doigts vers le haut permet d’ouvrir Mission Control. Vous pouvez aussi configurer ces options pour qu’elles fonctionnent avec quatre doigts.  Le pincement à quatre doigts affiche le Launchpad lorsque vous rapprochez votre pouce et vos trois doigts. Écartez ces mêmes doigts pour retourner sur le bureau. Remarque : Vous pouvez définir d’autres fonctions pour de nombreux gestes. Pour en savoir plus sur les gestes disponibles, choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Trackpad. Cochez les cases pour activer les gestes et consultez les menus locaux pour découvrir les options disponibles pour chaque geste.30 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Utilisation de la batterie du MacBook Pro Lorsque l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe n’est pas branché, le MacBook Pro puise son alimentation de sa batterie intégrée. L’autonomie du MacBook Pro varie en fonction des applications utilisées et des périphériques externes qui sont connectés à votre MacBook Pro. La désactivation de fonctions comme la technologie sans fil Wi-Fi ou Bluetooth ® et la réduction de la luminosité de l’écran peuvent contribuer à économiser la batterie lors des voyages en avion par exemple. De nombreuses Préférences Système sont automatiquement réglées pour optimiser l’autonomie de la batterie. Il est possible de déterminer la charge restante de la batterie en observant les huit lampes témoins du niveau de la batterie, qui se trouvent sur le côté gauche de votre MacBook Pro. Appuyez sur le bouton situé en regard des lampes témoins afin que ces dernières s’allument brièvement pour indiquer la charge restante de la batterie. Important : si un seul témoin est allumé, le niveau restant est très faible. Si aucun témoin ne s’allume, c’est que la batterie est totalement vide et que le MacBook Pro ne peut alors pas démarrer sans que l’adaptateur secteur soit branché sur une prise de courant. Branchez l’adaptateur secteur pour permettre à la batterie de se recharger. Pour en savoir plus sur les lampes témoins de la batterie, consultez la page 57.Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 31 Vous pouvez également vérifier la charge restante de la batterie en observant l’icône d’état ( ) de la batterie qui se trouve dans la barre des menus. Le niveau affiché dépend de la quantité d’énergie restant dans la batterie, mais aussi des applications et des périphériques en cours d’utilisation, ainsi que des réglages actuels de votre système. Pour disposer de plus d’énergie, fermez des applications, déconnectez les périphériques non utilisés et réglez la fonction d’Économiseur d’énergie. Pour en savoir plus sur l’économie de la batterie et obtenir des astuces pour améliorer ses performances, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/batteries/notebooks.html. Recharge de la batterie Lorsque l’adaptateur secteur fourni avec le MacBook Pro est branché, la batterie se recharge, que l’ordinateur soit éteint, allumé ou en suspension d’activité. La recharge est toutefois plus rapide si l’ordinateur est éteint ou en mode de suspension d’activité. La batterie de votre MacBook Pro ne peut être remplacée que par un Centre de Services Agréé Apple ou dans un magasin Apple Store. Comment obtenir des réponses à vos doutes De plus amples informations sur l’utilisation du MacBook Pro sont disponibles dans le Centre d’aide qui s’affiche sur votre ordinateur et sur Internet, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookpro. Pour ouvrir le Centre d’aide : 1 Cliquez sur l’icône du Finder dans le Dock (la barre des icônes située au bord de l’écran).32 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 2 Cliquez sur le menu Aide dans la barre des menus et procédez de l’une des manières suivantes : a Saisissez une question ou un terme dans le champ de recherche, puis sélectionnez une rubrique dans la liste des résultats ou sélectionnez « Afficher tous les résultats » pour voir toutes les rubriques. b Choisissez Centre d’aide pour ouvrir la fenêtre du Centre d’aide, dans laquelle vous parcourir ou rechercher des rubriques. Informations supplémentaires Pour plus de renseignements sur l’utilisation de votre MacBook Pro, consultez les sections suivantes : Pour obtenir des informations sur : Reportez-vous aux sources suivantes : L’installation de mémoire chapitre 3, « Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro » à la page 35. Le dépannage de votre MacBook Pro en cas de problème chapitre 4, « À tout problème sa solution » à la page 51. Le service et l’assistance technique pour votre MacBook Pro « Informations, services et assistance » à la page 69. Vous pouvez également vous rendre sur le site d’assistance Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookpro. L’utilisation de Mac OS X Site web de Mac OS X à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/macosx. Vous pouvez également rechercher « Mac OS X » dans le Centre d’aide. La migration depuis un PC vers un Mac « Pourquoi vous adorerez le Mac » à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/ getamac/whymac.Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien 33 Pour obtenir des informations sur : Reportez-vous aux sources suivantes : L’utilisation des applications iLife Site web d’iLife à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/ilife. Vous pouvez également ouvrir une application iLife, ouvrir l’Aide de cette application, puis saisir une question dans le champ de recherche. La modification des Préférences Système Préférences Système, accessibles en choisissant le menu Pomme (K) > Préférences Système. Vous pouvez également rechercher « préférences système » dans le Centre d’aide. L’utilisation du trackpad Préférences Système et cliquez sur Trackpad. L’utilisation du clavier Recherchez « clavier » dans le Centre d’aide. L’utilisation de la caméra FaceTime HD Recherchez « caméra » dans le Centre d’aide. L’utilisation de la technologie Wi-Fi Recherchez « wi-fi » dans le Centre d’aide. L’utilisation de la technologie sans fil Bluetooth Page web d’assistance Bluetooth à l’adresse www.apple.com/ fr/support/bluetooth. Vous pouvez également ouvrir l’utilitaire Échange de fichiers Bluetooth (dans le dossier Utilitaires du Launchpad) et sélectionner Aide > Aide Bluetooth. L’entretien de la batterie Recherchez « batterie » dans le Centre d’aide. La connexion d’une imprimante Recherchez « impression » dans le Centre d’aide. Les connexions FireWire et USB Recherchez « FireWire » ou « USB » dans le Centre d’aide La connexion à Internet Recherchez « Internet » dans le Centre d’aide. L’utilisation du port Thunderbolt Recherchez « Thunderbolt » dans le Centre d’aide.34 Chapitre 2 Votre MacBook Pro au quotidien Pour obtenir des informations sur : Reportez-vous aux sources suivantes : La connexion d’un moniteur externe Recherchez « port affichage » dans le Centre d’aide. La gravure d’un CD ou DVD Recherchez « graver disque » dans le Centre d’aide. Les caractéristiques Page web des spécifications, à l’adresse support.apple.com/ fr_FR/specs. Vous pouvez également ouvrir Informations système en choisissant le menu Pomme (K) > À propos de ce Mac dans la barre des menus, puis en cliquant sur Plus d’infos. L’actualité Apple Site web d’Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr. Les téléchargements de logiciels Le Mac App Store (disponible dans Mac OS X 10.6.6. ou ultérieur). Les instructions, assistance technique et manuels des produits Apple Site web d’assistance Apple à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/ support.Centre d’aide RAM www.apple.com/fr/store Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 336 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro Ce chapitre fournit des informations et des instructions pour l’installation d’un disque dur plus performant et la mise en place de mémoire supplémentaire dans votre MacBook Pro. AVERTISSEMENT : Apple vous recommande de confier l’ajout de mémoire et la mise en place d’un nouveau disque dur à un technicien agréé Apple. Consultez les informations sur le dépannage et l’assistance qui accompagnent votre ordinateur pour savoir comment contacter Apple. Tout dommage causé à votre matériel en tentant d’installer vous-même de la mémoire ou un disque dur n’est pas couvert par la garantie limitée de votre ordinateur. Vous ne pouvez pas remplacer la batterie de votre MacBook Pro vous-même. Si vous pensez que votre batterie doit être changée, contactez un revendeur Apple ou un Centre de Services Agréé Apple.Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 37 Remplacement du disque dur Vous pouvez remplacer le disque dur de votre MacBook Pro par un modèle plus performant. Vous trouverez le disque dur à côté de la batterie intégrée, une fois l’arrière de votre MacBook Pro ouvert. Le disque dur de remplacement doit être de 2,5 pouces et doté d’un connecteur Serial ATA (SATA). Important : Apple vous recommande de sauvegarder les données de votre disque dur avant de l’enlever et de le remplacer. Apple décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Pour remplacer le disque dur de votre MacBook Pro : 1 Éteignez votre MacBook Pro. Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur, le câble Ethernet, les câbles USB, le verrou de sécurité et tous les autres câbles connectés au MacBook Pro afin d’éviter toute détérioration de ce dernier. AVERTISSEMENT : Les composants internes de votre MacBook Pro risquent d’être chauds. Si vous venez d’utiliser votre MacBook Pro, attendez 10 minutes après l’avoir éteint, afin de laisser aux composants internes le temps de se refroidir. 2 Retournez votre MacBook Pro et retirez les dix (10) vis qui maintiennent le fond du boîtier. Retirez les vis les plus courtes des angles, comme indiqué sur l’illustration. Soulevez ce dernier et placez-le sur le côté.38 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro Important : Comme ces vis sont de longueurs différentes, prenez note de leur longueur et de leur position respective pour pouvoir les replacer correctement. Rangez-les en lieu sûr à portée de main. Petite GrandeChapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 39 Important : Tout retrait de la plaque du socle expose des composants internes sensibles, en particulier à l’électricité statique. 3 Avant de toucher la structure de montage du disque dur, déchargez toute électricité statique de votre corps en touchant une surface métallique située à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.40 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 4 Repérez l’attache qui se trouve au-dessus du disque dur. Utilisez un tournevis cruciforme pour desserrer les deux vis imperdables qui maintiennent l’attache en place. Rangez cette dernière en lieu sûr à portée de main. 5 À l’aide de la languette, inclinez doucement le disque vers le haut. Attache LanguetteChapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 41 6 Tenez le disque dur par les côtés tout en tirant doucement sur le connecteur qui se trouve sur le côté droit du disque afin de le déconnecter. N’écrasez pas le disque entre vos doigts et évitez de toucher les circuits situés sur la face inférieure du disque. Connecteur Le connecteur est relié à un câble et demeure à l’intérieur de la baie de disque dur.42 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro Important : Il y a quatre (4) vis de montage sur les côtés de votre disque dur. Si votre nouveau disque dur n’est pas fourni avec des vis de montage, récupérez les vis de votre ancien disque dur et montez-les sur le nouveau avant de l’installer. Vis de montage 7 Branchez le connecteur sur la partie droite du nouveau disque dur.Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 43 8 Insérez le nouveau disque dur en le tenant incliné et en vous assurant que les vis de montage sont correctement placées. 9 Replacez l’attache et serrez les vis.44 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 10 Remettez le fond du boîtier en place. Remettez à leur place respective et serrez les dix vis que vous avez retirées à l’étape 2 après vous être assuré que les plus courtes étaient dans les angles, comme indiqué sur l’illustration. Petite Grande Pour obtenir des informations sur l’installation de Mac OS X et des applications incluses, consultez la section « Réparation, restauration ou réinstallation de logiciels Mac OS X » à la page 58.Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 45 Installation de mémoire supplémentaire Votre ordinateur est doté de deux logements de mémoire auxquels vous pouvez accéder en retirant le fond du boîtier. Le MacBook Pro est doté d’une mémoire DDR3 (Double Data Rate) SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random-Access Memory) à 1 333 MHz, d’un minimum de quatre gigaoctets (4 Go). Chaque logement de mémoire peut accueillir un module SDRAM conforme aux spécifications suivantes :  Module DDR3 (Double Data Rate Small Outline Dual Inline Memory Module)  30 mm  204 broches  2 Go ou 4 Go  Mémoire RAM de type PC3-10600S DDR3 à 1 333 MHz Vous pouvez ajouter deux modules de mémoire de 4 Go pour un total de 8 Go de mémoire au maximum. Pour des performances optimales, remplissez les deux logements de mémoire en y installant des modules identiques. Pour installer de la mémoire supplémentaire dans votre MacBook Pro : 1 Suivez les étapes 1 et 2 à partir de la page 37 pour retirer la plaque du socle. Important : Tout retrait de la plaque du socle expose des composants internes sensibles, en particulier à l’électricité statique. 2 Avant de toucher la structure de montage de la mémoire, déchargez toute électricité statique de votre corps en touchant une surface métallique située à l’intérieur de l’ordinateur.46 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 3 Repoussez vers l’extérieur les leviers qui se trouvent sur les côtés du module de mémoire, afin de libérer le module du logement de la carte mémoire. La carte mémoire se dégage alors en se soulevant légèrement d’un côté. Avant de la retirer, assurez-vous que les encoches en demi-cercle sont bien visibles. Si ce n’est pas le cas, réessayez en appuyant une nouvelle fois sur les leviers vers l’extérieur. EncochesChapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 47 4 Saisissez le module de mémoire en le tenant par ses encoches, puis retirez-le du logement. 5 Retirez l’autre module de mémoire. Important : Saisissez les modules de mémoire en les tenant par les côtés et en veillant à ne pas toucher les connecteurs dorés. 6 Insérez le nouveau module de mémoire dans le logement : a Alignez l’encoche du bord doré du module sur celle qui se trouve dans le logement de mémoire inférieur. b Inclinez la carte et poussez-la dans le logement. c Utilisez deux doigts pour exercer une pression ferme et uniforme afin de pousser le module de mémoire vers le bas. Vous devez entendre un clic indiquant que la mémoire est correctement insérée. d Répétez l’opération pour installer un module de mémoire supplémentaire dans le logement supérieur. Appuyez sur le module pour vous assurer qu’il est bien de niveau.48 Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro Encoches 7 Suivez les instructions de replacement de la plaque du socle, présentées à l’étape 10 à la page 44.Chapitre 3 Améliorez les performances de votre MacBook Pro 49 Reconnaissance de la nouvelle mémoire par le MacBook Pro Après avoir ajouté de la mémoire à votre MacBook Pro, vérifiez si elle est reconnue. Pour vérifier la mémoire de votre ordinateur : 1 Démarrez votre MacBook Pro. 2 Lorsque le bureau Mac OS X apparaît, choisissez le menu Pomme (?) dans la barre des menus, puis sélectionnez « À propos de ce Mac ». Pour en savoir plus sur la mémoire installée sur votre ordinateur, ouvrez Informations système en cliquant sur Plus d’infos, puis cliquez sur Mémoire. Si le MacBook Pro ne reconnaît pas la mémoire ou ne démarre pas correctement, vérifiez que la mémoire est compatible avec le MacBook Pro et qu’elle est correctement installée.Centre d’aide aide www.apple.com/fr/support À tout problème sa solution 452 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Vous pouvez occasionnellement rencontrer des problèmes en utilisant votre MacBook Pro. Lisez la suite pour obtenir des conseils de dépannage utiles en cas de problème. Vous trouverez des informations supplémentaires concernant le dépannage dans le Centre d’aide et sur le site web d’assistance consacré au MacBook Pro, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookpro. Il existe généralement une solution simple et rapide aux problèmes que vous pouvez rencontrer lors de l’utilisation de votre MacBook Pro. Réfléchissez aux conditions qui ont entraîné l’apparition de ce problème. Ce récapitulatif de la totalité des opérations effectuées avant que le problème ne survienne permet de restreindre les causes possibles et de trouver la solution. Les éléments à noter comprennent :  les applications que vous étiez en train d’utiliser quand le problème est apparu ; les problèmes qui n’apparaissent qu’avec une application spécifique peuvent indiquer que cette application n’est pas compatible avec la version de Mac OS X installée sur votre ordinateur ;  les nouveaux logiciels installés, notamment ceux qui ont ajouté des éléments à votre dossier Système ;  tout nouveau composant matériel installé (mémoire supplémentaire ou périphérique, par exemple).Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 53 Une once de prévention Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre ordinateur ou un logiciel, des copies de sauvegarde à jour permettront d’éviter de perdre des données. Si vous effectuez des copies de sauvegarde Time Machine régulières, vous pouvez restaurer vos logiciels ainsi que l’ensemble de vos données tels qu’ils se trouvaient au moment de la sauvegarde. Même les problèmes les plus graves sont moins sérieux lorsque vous sauvegardez vos informations avec Time Machine. Problèmes vous empêchant d’utiliser votre MacBook Pro Si votre MacBook Pro ne répond plus ou que le pointeur se fige Il peut arriver, très rarement, qu’une application se « bloque » à l’écran. Mac OS X offre un moyen de fermer une application bloquée sans redémarrer votre ordinateur. Pour forcer la fermeture d’une application : 1 Appuyez sur les touches Commande (x) + Option + esc ou choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Forcer à quitter dans la barre des menus. La boîte de dialogue « Forcer à quitter des applications » apparaît. L’application est sélectionnée. 2 Cliquez sur Forcer à quitter. L’application se ferme, en laissant toutes les autres applications ouvertes. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez également redémarrer le Finder à partir de cette zone de dialogue. Redémarrez ensuite l’ordinateur afin de vous assurer que le problème est entièrement réglé.54 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Si le problème survient fréquemment, choisissez Aide > Centre d’aide dans la barre des menus en haut de l’écran. Recherchez le mot « bloquer » pour obtenir de l’aide en cas de blocage ou d’absence de réponse de l’ordinateur. Si le problème ne survient que lorsque vous utilisez une application particulière, vérifiez auprès de son éditeur si elle est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Pour obtenir des informations de contact et une assistance concernant les logiciels fournis avec le MacBook Pro, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/downloads. Si vous savez qu’une application est compatible, vous devrez peut-être réinstaller le logiciel système de votre ordinateur. Consultez la section « Une once de prévention » à la page 53. Si le MacBook Pro se bloque au démarrage, si un point d’interrogation clignotant apparaît ou si l’écran est éteint et que le voyant lumineux de suspension d’activité reste allumé (pas en mode de suspension d’activité) Le point d’interrogation clignotant signifie généralement que l’ordinateur ne parvient pas à localiser le logiciel système sur le disque dur interne ou sur tout disque externe relié à l’ordinateur.  Patientez quelques secondes. Si l’ordinateur ne démarre pas de suite, éteignez-le en maintenant le bouton d’alimentation (®) enfoncé pendant 8 à 10 secondes. Débranchez tous les périphériques, puis tentez de redémarrer l’ordinateur en appuyant sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) tout en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée. Lorsque votre ordinateur démarre, cliquez sur l’icône du disque dur, puis sur la flèche droite. Une fois que l’ordinateur a démarré, ouvrez Préférences Système et cliquez sur Démarrage. Sélectionnez un dossier Système local de Mac OS X.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 55 Si le problème se produit fréquemment, vous devez peut-être réinstaller le logiciel système de votre ordinateur. Consultez la section « Une once de prévention » à la page 53. Si votre MacBook Pro ne s’allume ou ne démarre pas Tentez les opérations suivantes dans l’ordre jusqu’à ce que votre ordinateur s’allume :  Assurez-vous que l’adaptateur secteur est connecté à l’ordinateur et branché sur une prise de courant en état de marche. Veillez à utiliser l’adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W fourni avec le MacBook Pro. Si l’adaptateur secteur ne recharge plus l’ordinateur et que le voyant lumineux du connecteur MagSafe ne s’allume pas lorsque vous branchez le câble d’alimentation, essayez de débrancher le câble puis de le brancher à nouveau afin de le réinitialiser ou essayez à partir d’une autre prise.  Vérifiez si votre batterie a besoin d’être rechargée. Appuyez sur le petit bouton qui se trouve sur le côté gauche de votre ordinateur. Vous devez voir apparaître un à huit témoins lumineux indiquant le niveau de charge de la batterie. Si un seul voyant lumineux est allumé, branchez votre adaptateur secteur pour recharger l’ordinateur. Pour en savoir plus sur les voyants lumineux de la batterie, consultez la page 56.  Si le problème persiste, fermez tous les documents ouverts et quittez toutes les applications. Rétablissez les réglages d’origine de votre ordinateur (tout en préservant vos fichiers) en appuyant pendant cinq secondes simultanément sur la touche Maj, la touche Option (alt) de gauche, la touche Contrôle et le bouton d’alimentation (®), jusqu’au redémarrage de l’ordinateur.  Si vous avez récemment ajouté de la mémoire, assurez-vous qu’elle est correctement installée et qu’elle est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Vérifiez si le retrait de cette mémoire et la remise en place de l’ancienne permettent à l’ordinateur de démarrer (voir page 45).56 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution  Pour réinitialiser la PRAM, appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) et maintenez immédiatement les touches Commande (x), Option, P et R enfoncées jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez une deuxième fois le signal sonore de démarrage.  Si vous ne parvenez toujours pas à démarrer le MacBook Pro, consultez la section « Informations, services et assistance » à la page 69 qui contient les informations nécessaires pour prendre contact avec Apple. Si l’écran devient subitement noir ou que votre MacBook Pro se bloque Essayez de redémarrer votre MacBook Pro. 1 Débranchez tout périphérique connecté à votre MacBook Pro excepté l’adaptateur secteur. 2 Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation (®) pour redémarrer le système. 3 Le niveau de charge de la batterie doit atteindre au moins 10 pour cent avant la connexion d’un périphérique et la reprise du travail. Pour savoir où en est la charge de la batterie, cliquez sur l’icône d’état de la batterie ( ) dans la barre des menus ou jetez un œil aux témoins de la batterie, à gauche de votre MacBook Pro. L’écran pourrait également s’assombrir si les fonctions d’économie d’énergie de la batterie sont en place.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 57 Si vous appuyez sur le bouton de la batterie et que tous les voyants lumineux clignotent cinq fois de suite Votre batterie doit être remplacée. Prenez contact avec un magasin Apple Store ou un Centre de Services Agréé Apple. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton de la batterie et que les voyants lumineux clignotent cinq fois de suite de gauche à droite, puis de droite à gauche Votre batterie n’est pas reconnue. Prenez contact avec un magasin Apple Store ou un Centre de Services Agréé Apple. En cas de problème à l’éjection d’un disque Fermez toutes les applications susceptibles d’utiliser le disque et essayez à nouveau. Si cela ne donne pas de résultats, redémarrez l’ordinateur, puis maintenez immédiatement le trackpad enfoncé.58 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Réparation, restauration ou réinstallation de logiciels Mac OS X Si vous avez un problème avec vos logiciels ou votre matériel Mac, Mac OS X fournit des utilitaires de réparation et de restauration qui peuvent supprimer les problèmes et même restaurer les réglages d’origine de vos logiciels. Vous pouvez accéder à ces utilitaires depuis l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X, même si votre ordinateur ne démarre pas correctement. Utilisez l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X pour :  restaurer vos logiciels et vos données depuis une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine ;  réinstaller Mac OS X et les applications Apple ;Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 59  restaurer les réglages d’origine de votre ordinateur en effaçant son disque et en réinstallant Mac OS X et vos applications Apple ;  réparer le disque de votre ordinateur au moyen d’Utilitaire de disque. Votre ordinateur ouvre automatiquement l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X s’il détecte un problème. Vous pouvez également l’ouvrir manuellement en redémarrant votre ordinateur. Pour ouvrir l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X : m Redémarrez votre ordinateur en maintenant les touches Commande (x) et R enfoncées. La sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X s’affiche. Certains des utilitaires de l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X nécessitent un accès à Internet et à l’Apple Store Mac. Vous devrez peut-être vous assurer que votre ordinateur est connecté à Internet en utilisant votre réseau Ethernet ou Wi-Fi. Pour vous connecter via un réseau Wi-Fi : 1 Choisissez un réseau dans le menu d’état Wi-Fi situé dans le coin supérieur droit de l’écran. 2 Si nécessaire, saisissez le mot de passe du réseau. Pour vous connecter à un réseau fermé, choisissez Se connecter à un autre réseau. Saisissez le nom et le mot de passe du réseau.60 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Réparation d’un disque avec Utilitaire de disque Si vous avez un problème avec votre ordinateur ou si, au démarrage, celui-ci affiche l’application Utilitaires Mac OS X, une réparation du disque de votre ordinateur peut être nécessaire. 1 Sélectionnez Utilitaire de disque dans la sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X et cliquez sur Continuer. 2 Sélectionnez le disque ou la partition dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur l’onglet S.O.S. 3 Cliquez sur Réparer le disque. Si Utilitaire de disque ne peut pas réparer le disque, sauvegardez autant d’informations que possible, puis suivez les instructions de la section « Une once de prévention » à la page 53. Pour obtenir des informations sur Utilitaire de disque et ses options, consultez le Centre d’aide, ou ouvrez Utilitaire de disque (dans le dossier Utilitaires du Launchpad) et choisissez Aide > Aide Utilitaire de disque. Restauration d’informations depuis une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine Si vous avez précédemment créé une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine, utilisez l’utilitaire Restaurer pour restaurer tous les éléments de votre ordinateur à leur état précédent. N’utilisez votre copie de sauvegarde Time Machine que pour restaurer des informations sur l’ordinateur sur lequel la sauvegarde a été effectuée. Si vous souhaitez transférer des informations sur un nouvel ordinateur, utilisez Assistant migration (dans le dossier Utilitaires du Launchpad).Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 61 1 Si votre copie de sauvegarde se trouve sur une Time Capsule, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est connecté à un réseau Ethernet ou Wi-Fi. (Pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi, suivez les instructions présentées à la page 59.) 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X, sélectionnez Restaurer à partir d’une sauvegarde Time Machine, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Sélectionnez le disque qui contient la copie de sauvegarde Time Machine, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran. Réinstallation de Mac OS X et des applications Apple La réinstallation de Mac OS X et des applications Apple peut parfois s’avérer nécessaire. Vous pouvez procéder à cette réinstallation tout en conservant vos fichiers et vos réglages utilisateur. 1 Assurez-vous que votre MacBook Pro est connecté à Internet via un réseau Ethernet ou Wi-Fi. (Pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi, suivez les instructions présentées à la page 59.) 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X, sélectionnez Réinstaller Mac OS X, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Dans la sous-fenêtre dans laquelle vous êtes invité à sélectionner un disque, sélectionnez votre disque Mac OS X actuel (il s’agit bien souvent du seul disque disponible). 4 Pour sélectionner ou désélectionner des logiciels facultatifs, cliquez sur Personnaliser. 5 Cliquez sur Installer. Vous pouvez soit installer Mac OS X sans effacer le disque, afin de conserver vos fichiers et réglages existants,soit effacer d’abord le disque pour supprimer toutes vos données et préparer l’ordinateur en vue de la réinstallation de Mac OS X et des applications Apple.62 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Important : Apple vous recommande de sauvegarder les données du disque avant de procéder à la restauration des logiciels. Apple décline toute responsabilité en cas de perte de données. Restauration des réglages d’origine de votre ordinateur Lorsque vous restaurez les réglages d’origine de votre ordinateur, tous les éléments présents sur ce dernier (vos comptes utilisateur, vos réglages réseau, ainsi que tous vos fichiers et dossiers) sont supprimés. Avant de procéder à une restauration, sauvegardez tous les fichiers que vous souhaitez conserver en les copiant sur un autre disque. Notez les réglages réseau enregistrés dans les préférences Réseau pour pouvoir vous reconnecter plus aisément après la réinstallation de Mac OS X. 1 Assurez-vous que vous êtes connecté à Internet via un réseau Ethernet ou Wi-Fi. (Pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi, suivez les instructions présentées à la page 59.) 2 Dans la sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X, sélectionnez Utilitaire de disque, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Sélectionnez le disque dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Effacer. 4 Sélectionnez « Mac OS étendu (journalisé) » dans le menu local Format, saisissez le nom du disque, puis cliquez sur Effacer. 5 Une fois le disque effacé, choisissez Utilitaire de disque > Quitter Utilitaire de disque. 6 Dans la sous-fenêtre Utilitaires Mac OS X, sélectionnez Réinstaller Mac OS X, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 7 Pour réinstaller Mac OS X et vos applications, suivez les instructions du programme d’installation de Mac OS X.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 63 Une fois Mac OS X et vos applications Apple restaurés, vous pouvez restaurer de façon sélective vos autres données et applications depuis une copie de sauvegarde Time Machine. Utilisation d’Apple Hardware Test Si vous pensez qu’il y a un problème avec les composants matériels du MacBook Pro, vous pouvez utiliser l’application Apple Hardware Test pour savoir si tel est le cas (les composants affectés peuvent être la mémoire ou le processeur, par exemple). Pour utiliser Apple Hardware Test : 1 Déconnectez tous les périphériques externes de votre ordinateur, sauf l’adaptateur secteur. Si un câble Ethernet est connecté, déconnectez-le. 2 Redémarrez ensuite votre ordinateur en maintenant la touche D enfoncée lors du démarrage. 3 Lorsque l’écran de sélection d’Apple Hardware Test s’affiche, choisissez votre langue. 4 Appuyez sur la touche Retour ou cliquez sur la flèche droite. 5 Lorsque l’écran principal d’Apple Hardware Test s’affiche (après 45 secondes environ), suivez les instructions à l’écran. 6 En cas de détection d’un problème, Apple Hardware Test affiche un code d’erreur. Notez le code d’erreur avant d’entreprendre les démarches d’assistance. Si Apple Hardware Test ne détecte pas de panne matérielle, il est probable que le problème soit lié aux logiciels.64 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Problèmes de connexion à Internet Votre MacBook Pro dispose de l’application Assistant réglages de réseau pour vous aider tout au long de la procédure de configuration d’une connexion à Internet. Ouvrez Préférences Système, puis cliquez sur Réseau. Cliquez sur le bouton « Assistant » pour ouvrir Assistant réglages de réseau. En cas de problème avec votre connexion à Internet, vous pouvez essayer les méthodes exposées dans cette rubrique pour votre type de connexion ou vous pouvez utiliser Diagnostic réseau. Pour utiliser Diagnostic réseau : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur Réseau puis cliquez sur « Assistant ». 3 Cliquez sur Diagnostic pour lancer Diagnostic réseau. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si Diagnostic réseau n’est pas en mesure de résoudre le problème, celui-ci se situe peut-être au niveau du fournisseur d’accès à Internet (FAI) auquel vous essayez de vous connecter, du périphérique externe utilisé pour la connexion au FAI ou du serveur auquel vous essayez d’accéder. Vous pouvez également tenter de réaliser les opérations suivantes. Connexions à Internet par modem câble, modem DSL ou réseau local (LAN) Assurez-vous que tous les câbles du modem sont correctement branchés, y compris le câble d’alimentation du modem, le câble reliant le modem à l’ordinateur et le câble raccordant le modem à la prise murale. Vérifiez également les câbles et l’alimentation de vos routeurs et concentrateurs Ethernet.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 65 Éteignez le modem câble ou DSL, puis rallumez-le après quelques minutes. Certains fournisseurs d’accès à Internet conseillent de débrancher le câble d’alimentation du modem. Si votre modem dispose d’un bouton de réinitialisation, vous pouvez l’actionner avant ou après avoir éteint puis rallumé le modem. Important : les instructions relatives aux modems ne concernent pas les utilisateurs de réseau LAN. Contrairement aux utilisateurs de modems câble et DSL, les utilisateurs de réseau LAN peuvent disposer de concentrateurs, commutateurs, routeurs et autres blocs de connexion. Ils doivent prendre contact avec leur administrateur réseau plutôt qu’avec un FAI. Connexions PPPoE Si vous ne parvenez pas à vous connecter à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet via PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet), assurez-vous que les informations que vous avez saisies dans les préférences Réseau sont correctes. Pour vérifier les réglages de vos préférences Réseau : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur Réseau. 3 Cliquez sur Ajouter (+) en bas de la liste des services de connexion réseau et choisissez PPPoE dans le menu local Interface. 4 Choisissez une interface pour le service PPPoE dans le menu local Ethernet. Choisissez Ethernet si vous vous connectez à un réseau câblé ou Wi-Fi si vous vous connectez à un réseau sans fil. 5 Cliquez sur Créer.66 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 6 Saisissez les informations fournies par votre fournisseur d’accès, tel que le nom du compte, le mot de passe et le nom du service PPPoE (si votre fournisseur d’accès le demande). 7 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour activer les réglages. Connexions au réseau Assurez-vous que le câble Ethernet est branché sur le MacBook Pro et sur le réseau. Vérifiez les câbles et l’alimentation de vos routeurs et concentrateurs Ethernet. Si vous disposez de plusieurs ordinateurs tentant de partager une connexion à Internet, assurez-vous que votre réseau est correctement configuré. Vous devez savoir si votre FAI fournit une seule ou plusieurs adresses IP, autrement dit, une pour chaque ordinateur. Si une seule adresse IP est fournie, vous devez disposer d’un routeur capable de partager la connexion ; on parle alors de conversion d’adresse réseau (NAT) ou de masquage d’adresses IP. Pour obtenir des informations sur la configuration, consultez la documentation fournie avec votre routeur ou contactez la personne qui a configuré votre réseau. Il est possible d’utiliser la borne d’accès AirPort pour que plusieurs ordinateurs partagent une adresse IP. Pour obtenir des informations sur l’utilisation d’une borne d’accès AirPort, consultez le Centre d’aide ou le site web d’assistance d’AirPort, à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/airport. Si ces méthodes s’avèrent insuffisantes pour résoudre les problèmes rencontrés, adressez-vous à votre fournisseur d’accès à Internet ou à votre administrateur réseau.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 67 Problèmes de communication Wi-Fi En cas de problèmes avec les communications Wi-Fi :  Vérifiez que l’ordinateur ou le réseau auquel vous souhaitez vous connecter est activé et dispose d’un point d’accès sans fil.  Assurez-vous que le logiciel est correctement configuré conformément aux instructions incluses avec votre borne d’accès ou point d‘accès.  Assurez-vous que votre MacBook Pro se trouve à portée de l’autre ordinateur ou du point d’accès au réseau. Des appareils électroniques ou des structures métalliques se trouvant à proximité peuvent interférer avec les communications sans fil et réduire la portée de votre antenne. Vous pouvez éventuellement améliorer la réception en tournant et en réorientant l’ordinateur.  Vérifiez l’icône d’état Wi-Fi (Z) dans la barre des menus. Jusqu’à quatre barres de mesure apparaissent pour afficher la puissance du signal. Si les barres ne s’affichent pas, tentez de changer de place.  Pour obtenir de l’aide en ligne, choisissez Aide > Centre d’aide et recherchez le terme « wi-fi ». Consultez également les instructions fournies avec votre appareil sans fil.68 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Maintien à jour de vos logiciels Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet pour télécharger et installer automatiquement les dernières versions de logiciels, gestionnaires et autres améliorations fournies par Apple. Chaque fois que vous vous connectez à Internet, Mise à jour de logiciels recherche d’éventuelles mises à jour pour votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez configurer votre MacBook Pro afin qu’il recherche régulièrement les mises à jour disponibles, pour que vous puissiez ensuite télécharger et installer les mises à jour de logiciels. Pour rechercher des logiciels mis à jour : 1 Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > Préférences Système. 2 Cliquez sur l’icône Mise à jour de logiciels et suivez les instructions à l’écran.  Pour en savoir plus, recherchez « Mise à jour de logiciels » dans le Centre d’aide.  Pour obtenir les toutes dernières informations sur Mac OS X, rendez-vous à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/macosx.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 69 Informations, services et assistance Outre le disque dur et la mémoire, votre MacBook Pro ne contient aucune pièce que vous puissiez réparer vous-même. Si vous avez besoin de services de réparation, adressez-vous à Apple ou portez votre MacBook Pro chez un Centre de Services Agréé Apple. Vous trouverez de plus amples informations sur le MacBook Pro en ligne, dans l’aide à l’écran, dans Informations système et via Apple Hardware Test. Ressources en ligne Pour obtenir des informations en ligne sur le service et l’assistance, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/support. Choisissez votre pays dans le menu local. Vous pouvez faire des recherches dans la base de connaissances AppleCare, vérifier si de nouvelles mises à jour de logiciels sont disponibles ou obtenir de l’aide dans les forums de discussion Apple. Les informations les plus récentes concernant les produits sont disponibles à l’adresse www.apple.com/fr/support/macbookpro. Aide à l’écran Vous pouvez chercher des réponses à vos questions ainsi que des instructions et des informations concernant le dépannage dans le Centre d’aide. Choisissez Aide > Centre d’aide. Informations système Pour obtenir des informations sur votre MacBook Pro, servez-vous d’Informations système. Cette application vous fournit la liste des composants matériels et des logiciels installés, le numéro de série et de version du système d’exploitation, la quantité de mémoire installée, etc. Pour ouvrir Informations système, choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > À propos de ce Mac dans la barre des menus, puis cliquez sur Plus d’infos.70 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Service et assistance AppleCare Votre MacBook Pro bénéficie d’une assistance technique de 90 jours et d’un an de couverture pour les réparations de matériel effectuées dans les magasins Apple Store ou les centres de réparations agréés Apple, tels que les Centres de Services Agréé Apple (CSAA). Vous avez la possibilité d’étendre la durée de cette couverture en adhérant à un programme AppleCare Protection Plan. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la page www.apple.com/fr/support/products ou le site web correspondant à votre pays (voir la liste ci-dessous). Si vous avez besoin d’assistance, le personnel d’assistance par téléphone AppleCare peut vous aider à installer et à ouvrir les applications, et propose des services de dépannage élémentaires. Appelez le centre d’assistance le plus proche de chez vous (gratuit pendant les 90 premiers jours). Gardez à portée de main la date d’achat et le numéro de série de votre MacBook Pro lorsque vous appelez. Remarque : La période de 90 jours d’assistance téléphonique gratuite débute à la date d’achat. Des frais téléphoniques peuvent éventuellement s’appliquer.Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution 71 Pays Téléphone Site web Allemagne (49) 01805 009 433 www.apple.com/de/support Autriche (43) 0810 300 427 www.apple.com/at/support Belgique (flamand) (français) (32) 070 700 772 (32) 070 700 773 www.apple.com/benl/support www.apple.com/befr/support France (Metropolitain) (DOM-TOM) (33) 0805 540 003 (33) 0825 77 00 35 www.apple.com/fr/support Luxembourg (352) 800 24550 www.apple.com/lu/support/ Suisse (français) (allemand) (41) 0848 000 132 (41) 0848 000 132 www.apple.com/chfr/support www.apple.com/chde/support Les numéros de téléphone sont susceptibles d’être modifiés. Les tarifs téléphoniques locaux et nationaux peuvent s’appliquer. Une liste complète est disponible sur Internet : www.apple.com/support/contact/phone_contacts.html (en anglais)72 Chapitre 4 À tout problème sa solution Localisation du numéro de série de votre produit Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes pour trouver le numéro de série de votre ordinateur :  Retournez votre MacBook Pro. Le numéro de série est gravé sur le boîtier, près de la charnière. Numéro de série  Choisissez le menu Pomme (?) > À propos de ce Mac. Cliquez sur le numéro de version sous « Mac OS X » pour passer du numéro de version de Mac OS X au numéro de révision, puis au numéro de série.  Ouvrez Informations système, dans le dossier Utilitaires du Launchpad.Centre d’aide ergonomie www.apple.com/fr/environment Dernières recommandations 574 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations Afin d’assurer votre sécurité et de préserver votre matériel, veillez à observer ces consignes concernant le nettoyage et la manipulation de votre MacBook Pro ainsi que l’aménagement d’un espace de travail confortable. Gardez ces instructions dans un endroit facile d’accès pour vous et pour les utilisateurs éventuels. AVIS : La garantie du fabricant pourra être annulée si votre ordinateur a été utilisé ou stocké de manière impropre. Informations importantes en matière de sécurité AVERTISSEMENT : Ne pas suivre ces consignes pourrait déclencher un feu, occasionner des décharges électriques ou entraîner tout type de blessure ou dommage. Batterie intégrée Ne retirez pas la batterie de votre MacBook Pro. La batterie doit être remplacée uniquement par un Centre de Services Agréé Apple Abandonnez toute utilisation de votre MacBook Pro après une chute ou s’il semble avoir été écrasé, plié, déformé ou endommagé. N’exposez pas votre MacBook Pro à des sources extrêmes de chaleur, telles que des radiateurs ou des cheminées, où la température est susceptible d’excéder 100 °C. Manipulation correcte La partie inférieure du MacBook Pro peut chauffer au cours d’une utilisation normale de l’appareil. Le MacBook Pro respecte les limites de température de surfaces accessible à l’utilisateur définies par la norme IEC 6590-1 (International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment),Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations 75 Pour un fonctionnement de l’ordinateur en toute sécurité et une réduction de la possibilité de blessures liées à la chaleur, suivez les directives suivantes :  Installez le MacBook Pro sur un plan de travail stable en veillant à ce que l’air puisse circuler librement sous l’ordinateur et autour de celui-ci.  N’utilisez pas le MacBook Pro en le posant sur un coussin, une couverture ou tout autre objet de structure non solide car cela pourrait empêcher les conduits d’aération de fonctionner correctement.  Évitez également de placer des objets sur le clavier lorsque vous utilisez votre MacBook Pro.  N’introduisez aucun objet dans les ouvertures servant à la ventilation.  S’il est posé sur vos genoux et que la chaleur qu’il dégage vous gêne, posez-le plutôt sur un plan de travail stable. Eau et endroits humides Évitez de placer votre MacBook Pro à proximité de sources de liquide telles que des boissons, un évier, un lavabo, une baignoire ou une douche, par exemple. Protégez votre MacBook Pro de l’humidité et des intempéries (neige, pluie et brouillard par exemple). Adaptateur secteur MagSafe 85 W N’utilisez que l’adaptateur secteur qui accompagne le MacBook Pro ou, au besoin, un adaptateur secteur agréé Apple compatible avec ce produit. Veillez à ce que la fiche ou le câble d’alimentation secteur CA soit totalement enclenché dans l’adaptateur secteur avant de brancher ce dernier sur une prise de courant.76 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations L’adaptateur secteur peut chauffer au cours d’une utilisation normale de l’appareil. L’adaptateur secteur MagSafe respecte les limites de température de surfaces accessible à l’utilisateur définies par la norme IEC 6590-1 (International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment), Pour réduire la possibilité de surchauffe de l’adaptateur secteur et de blessures liées à la chaleur, effectuez l’une des actions suivantes :  Branchez directement l’adaptateur secteur à une prise secteur. Fiche CA Connecteur MagSafe Adaptateur secteur MagSafe  Si vous utilisez le cordon d’alimentation secteur, placez l’adaptateur secteur sur un bureau, une table ou le sol, dans un endroit bien ventilé.Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations 77 Connecteur MagSafe Adaptateur secteur MagSafe Câble secteur Débranchez l’adaptateur secteur et débranchez tous les autres câbles si l’un des cas suivants se présente :  Vous cherchez à ajouter de la mémoire ou à remplacer le disque dur.  Vous souhaitez nettoyer le boîtier (pour ce faire, suivez à la lettre les instructions fournies à la page 81).  La prise ou le câble d’alimentation est endommagé.  Le MacBook Pro ou l’adaptateur secteur est exposé à la pluie ou à une humidité excessive, ou du liquide a été versé dans le boîtier.  Le MacBook Pro ou l’adaptateur secteur a subi une chute, le boîtier a été endommagé ou vous pensez qu’une réparation est nécessaire. Le port secteur MagSafe contient un aimant qui peut effacer les données d’une carte de crédit, d’un iPod ou d’autres appareils. Pour protéger vos données, ne placez pas de matériaux ou d’appareils à sensibilité magnétique (comme ceux cités précédemment ou autres) à moins de 25 mm de ce port.78 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations Si des résidus quelconques se trouvent dans le port secteur MagSafe, enlevez-les doucement à l’aide d’un bâtonnet de coton. Spécifications de l’alimentation MagSafe :  Fréquence : phase unique de 50 à 60 Hz  Tension de secteur : de 100 à 240 V  Tension de sortie : 18,5 V CC, 4,6 A Diminution de l’acuité auditive Vous risquez une perte d’audition irréparable si vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs à un volume sonore élevé. L’oreille peut s’adapter petit à petit à des volumes sonores de plus en plus élevés qui peuvent sembler normaux, mais qui risquent à la longue d’endommager votre système auditif. En cas de sifflements ou de perte d’acuité auditive, arrêtez d’utiliser le casque ou les écouteurs et consultez un médecin. Plus le volume est élevé, plus votre audition risque d’être affectée rapidement. Pour protéger votre système auditif, les spécialistes conseillent de prendre les mesures suivantes :  Limitez la durée d’utilisation à volume élevé de vos écouteurs ou de votre casque d’écoute.  Évitez d’augmenter le volume afin de bloquer les bruits environnants.  Baissez le volume si vous ne parvenez pas à entendre une personne qui parle à côté de vous. Activités à haut risque Cet ordinateur n’est pas conçu pour être utilisé dans des installations nucléaires, pour la navigation ou la communication aérienne, pour le contrôle du trafic aérien, ni dans aucune autre situation où une panne du système informatique pourrait entraîner la mort, des blessures ou de graves dommages écologiques.Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations 79 Informations concernant le laser pour lecteurs optiques AVERTISSEMENT : La mise en place de réglages ou la réalisation d’opérations qui ne sont pas spécifiées dans le manuel de votre appareil risque de vous exposer à des rayonnements dangereux. Le lecteur optique de votre ordinateur contient un laser qui est entièrement sans danger si l’on en fait un usage normal, mais qui peut s’avérer dangereux pour les yeux s’il est démonté. Afin d’assurer votre sécurité, ce dispositif ne doit être réparé que par un Centre de Services Agréé Apple. Informations importantes sur la manipulation AVIS : Ne pas suivre les présentes instructions sur la manipulation peut provoquer des dommages à votre MacBook Pro ou à d’autres objets. Environnement d’utilisation L’utilisation de votre MacBook Pro en dehors de ces plages peut gêner son bon fonctionnement :  Température de fonctionnement : de 10 à 35 °C  Température de stockage : de -20 à 45 °C  Humidité relative : de 5 % à 90 % (sans condensation)  Altitude de fonctionnement : de 0 à 3 048 mètres80 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations Mise sous tension de votre MacBook Pro N’allumez jamais le MacBook Pro tant que tous ses composants internes ou externes ne sont pas en place. L’utilisation de l’ordinateur alors que certains composants manquent peut s’avérer dangereuse et risque de l’endommager. Transport du MacBook Pro Si vous transportez le MacBook Pro dans un sac ou dans un attaché-case, assurez-vous que ce dernier ne contient pas d’objets non attachés (des trombones ou des pièces de monnaie, par exemple) qui pourraient pénétrer accidentellement dans l’ordinateur par une ouverture (comme la fente du lecteur optique) ou se coincer à l’intérieur d’un port. Maintenez également à l’écart du port secteur MagSafe tout objet à sensibilité magnétique. Utilisation des connecteurs et des ports Ne forcez jamais un connecteur à entrer dans un port. Lorsque vous branchez un appareil, assurez-vous que le port ne contient aucun résidu quelconque, que le connecteur correspond bien au port et qu’il est placé de manière à entrer correctement dans le port. Utilisation du lecteur optique Le lecteur SuperDrive du MacBook Pro prend en charge les disques standard de 12 cm. Les disques de forme irrégulière et de moins de 12 cm ne peuvent pas être lus et peuvent rester coincés dans le lecteur. Manipulation des parties en verre Votre MacBook Pro contient des composants en verre, notamment l’écran et le trackpad. Si elles sont abîmées, n’utilisez pas votre MacBook Pro tant qu’il n’a pas été réparé par un Centre de Services Agréé Apple.Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations 81 Stockage du MacBook Pro Si vous décidez de ranger le MacBook Pro pendant une longue période, placez-le dans un endroit frais (idéalement, à 22 °C), et déchargez la batterie jusqu’à 50 pour cent. Avant de ranger votre MacBook Pro pour une période de temps supérieure à cinq mois, déchargez la batterie jusqu’à environ 50 pour cent. Pour conserver les capacités de la batterie, rechargez la batterie jusqu’à 50 pour cent tous les six mois environ. Nettoyage du MacBook Pro Pour nettoyer le boîtier de votre MacBook Pro et de ses composants, éteignez d’abord le MacBook Pro et débranchez l’adaptateur secteur. Puis, pour nettoyer le boîtier de l’ordinateur, utilisez un chiffon doux, humide et non pelucheux. Évitez les infiltrations d’humidité par quelque ouverture que ce soit. Ne vaporisez jamais de liquide directement sur l’ordinateur. N’utilisez ni aérosols, ni dissolvants, ni abrasifs qui pourraient endommager les finitions de l’appareil. Nettoyage de l’écran du MacBook Pro Pour nettoyer l’écran du MacBook Pro, éteignez d’abord le MacBook Pro et débranchez l’adaptateur secteur. Humidifiez ensuite, à l’eau seulement, le chiffon fourni et essuyez l’écran. Ne vaporisez jamais de liquide directement sur l’écran.82 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations Ergonomie Voici quelques conseils pour la mise en place d’un environnement de travail sain. Clavier et trackpad Lorsque vous tapez au clavier ou que vous vous servez du trackpad, vos épaules doivent être détendues. Le bras et l’avant-bras doivent former un angle droit, la main étant placée dans le prolongement du poignet. Position à éviter Position recommandéeChapitre 5 Dernières recommandations 83 Vous devez avoir les mains et les doigts détendus lorsque vous tapez au clavier ou que vous utilisez le trackpad. Évitez de replier les pouces à l’intérieur des paumes. Position à éviter Position recommandée Modifiez fréquemment la position de vos mains pour éviter la fatigue. Après un travail continu et intensif sur ordinateur, certains utilisateurs peuvent ressentir des douleurs aux mains, aux poignets ou aux bras. Si ces douleurs persistent, consultez un spécialiste. Souris externe Si vous utilisez une souris externe, veillez à ce qu’elle se trouve à hauteur du clavier. Ménagez un espace suffisant pour la manipuler avec aisance. Siège Optez pour un siège de bureau réglable et offrant un dossier et une assise confortables. Réglez la hauteur du siège de telle sorte que vos cuisses reposent à l’horizontale et vos pieds à plat sur le sol. Le dossier du siège doit soutenir votre région lombaire, c’est-à- dire la partie inférieure de votre dos. Suivez les instructions du fabricant de sorte que le réglage du dossier soit parfaitement adapté à votre morphologie.84 Chapitre 5 Dernières recommandations Au besoin, relevez le siège de manière à ce que vos avant-bras et vos mains soient placés correctement par rapport au clavier. Si, dans ce cas, vos pieds ne reposent plus à plat sur le sol, utilisez un repose-pied inclinable et réglable en hauteur. Si vous disposez d’un bureau modulaire, vous pouvez abaisser le niveau du plan de travail pour éviter l’emploi d’un repose-pied. Une troisième solution consiste à utiliser un bureau dont le poste de saisie est situé plus bas que le plan de travail. Écran intégré Orientez l’écran de manière à optimiser l’affichage dans votre environnement. Ne forcez pas l’écran si vous rencontrez une résistance. L’angle d’ouverture maximal de l’écran ne peut dépasser 130 degrés. Réglez la luminosité et le contraste de l’écran chaque fois que vous déplacez l’ordinateur ou que l’éclairage ambiant change. Vous trouverez d’autres informations concernant l’ergonomie sur Internet : www.apple.com/about/ergonomics (en anglais) Apple et l’environnement Apple Inc. reconnaît sa responsabilité en matière de réduction de l’impact de ses produits et de ses activités sur l’environnement. Des informations supplémentaires sont disponibles sur Internet : www.apple.com/fr/environment85 Regulatory Compliance Information FCC Compliance Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See instructions if interference to radio or television reception is suspected. L‘utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l’utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu, même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Radio and Television Interference This computer equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radiofrequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices. If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures: • Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops. • Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio. • Move the computer farther away from the television or radio. • Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.) If necessary, consult an Apple Authorized Service Provider or Apple. See the service and support information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. Important: Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Inc. could void the EMC compliance and negate your authority to operate the product. This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables (including Ethernet network cables) between system components. It is important that you use compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets, and other electronic devices. Responsible party (contact for FCC matters only): Apple Inc. Corporate Compliance 1 Infinite Loop, MS 26-A Cupertino, CA 95014 Utilisation de la radio sans fil Cet appareil est restreint à un usage intérieur lorsqu’il fonctionne à des bandes de fréquence de 5,15 à 5,25 GHz. Cet appareil doit être utilisé à l’intérieur. Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy The radiated output power of the Wi-Fi technology is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it is advised to use the wireless equipment in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. FCC Bluetooth Wireless Compliance The antenna used with this transmitter must not be colocated or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter subject to the conditions of the FCC Grant.86 Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil. Bluetooth Industry Canada Statement This Class B device meets all requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada. Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Bluetooth Europe - Déclaration de conformité UE Cet appareil sans fil est conforme à la directive R&TTE. Europe : déclaration de conformité EU ????????? Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? MacBook Pro ? ? ???????????? ??? ???????????? ?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??. Cesky Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento MacBook Pro je ve shode se základními požadavky a dalšími príslušnými ustanoveními smernice 1999/5/ES. Dansk Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr MacBook Pro overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF. Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dass sich das MacBook Pro